IP Help Manual PDF

Interactive
Petrophysics
V3.6 Online Help
Interactive Petrophysics 2010 Senergy Ltd
Senergy Software Ltd.

Ternan House
North Deeside Road
Banchory
Kincardineshire AB31 5YR
Scotland
Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help
Interactive Petrophysics 2010 Senergy Ltd
DISCLAIMER REGARDING THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE

INTERACTIVE PETROPHYSICS V3.6
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT USE OF THIS SOFTWARE
IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK. BY DOWNLOADING/INSTALLING AND/OR USING THIS
SOFTWARE YOU ARE CONSIDERED TO HAVE READ THIS DISCLAIMER AND
AGREED TO ITS TERMS.
THIS SOFTWARE AND THE ACCOMPANYING FILES ARE SUPPLIED "AS IS" AND
WITHOUT WARRANTIES AS TO PERFORMANCE OR MERCHANTABILITY OR ANY
OTHER WARRANTIES WHETHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY
AND PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE IS WITH THE END USER. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE SELLER OR ITS AGENTS OR RESELLERS BE LIABLE FOR
SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.
ANY LIABILITY OF THE SELLER OR ITS AGENTS OR RESELLERS WILL BE
LIMITED EXCLUSIVELY TO PRODUCT REPLACEMENT OR REFUND OF
PURCHASE PRICE.
No part of this product may be reproduced, transmitted or translated by any means graphical, electronic, or mechanical - including photocopying, recording, taping or
storage in an information retrieval system, without the expressed written permission of
Senergy Ltd. Further copies of this document are available from Senergy Ltd on
request.
Although every care has been taken to ensure that the information in this software and
associated documentation is accurate and up to date, software is, by its very nature,
complex and changeable. Senergy Ltd and its agents or resellers therefore cannot be
held responsible for any error or omission in this software and the associated
documentation. The information in this software and the associated documentation is
subject to change without notice.
Contents
Senergy
Table of Contents
Foreword
Section 1 Getting Help for Interactive

Petrophysics v3.6
1 Using
...................................................................................................................................
the Online Help
4
2 Getting
...................................................................................................................................
Program Updates
7
3 Frequently
...................................................................................................................................
Asked Questions
9
Section 2 Database Management
11
1 Starting
...................................................................................................................................
Interactive Petrophysics
16
2 Create
...................................................................................................................................
a New Database
20
3 Open
...................................................................................................................................
an Existing Database
23
4 Create
...................................................................................................................................
a Database Shortcut
26
5 Set
...................................................................................................................................
Default File Location
27
6 Explore
...................................................................................................................................
Database Folder
29
7 Save
...................................................................................................................................
the Current Well
30
8 Save
...................................................................................................................................
All Wells to Database
35
9 Auto
...................................................................................................................................
Save Options
37
10 Printer
...................................................................................................................................
Setup
39
11 Database
...................................................................................................................................
and Well Security
0
Section 3 Well Management
41
1 Date
...................................................................................................................................
Time Wells
42
Create a New
.........................................................................................................................................................
Well using the Date Tim e Reference
42
Define the.........................................................................................................................................................
Date Tim e Form at for the Selected Well
45
Im port Well
.........................................................................................................................................................
Log Data to a Date Tim e Well
48
Import ASCII
..................................................................................................................................................
Data to a Date Time Well
48
Import LAS..................................................................................................................................................
Data to a Date Time Well
53
Interpret Date
.........................................................................................................................................................
Tim e Data
56
Create a Time
..................................................................................................................................................
of Day Log Plot
59
Export Tim.........................................................................................................................................................
e Curves to a Depth Well
61
2 Load
...................................................................................................................................
Wells from Database
67
3 Create
...................................................................................................................................
New Well
71
4 Select
...................................................................................................................................
Well to Display
73
5 Well
...................................................................................................................................
- Save Current Well As...
78
6 Create
...................................................................................................................................
/ Edit Well List
81
7 Close
...................................................................................................................................
Well
84
8 Delete
...................................................................................................................................
Well
86
9 Reset
...................................................................................................................................
Current Well
87
10 Manage
...................................................................................................................................
Well Header Info.
88
11 History
...................................................................................................................................
Module
97
Exam Diff ......................................................................................................................................................... 102
Index
II
Senergy
12 Delete
...................................................................................................................................
Parameter Sets
104
13 Plot
...................................................................................................................................
Range Editor
106
14 Take
...................................................................................................................................
Notes
112
15 Database
...................................................................................................................................
and Well Security
0
Section 4 Curve Management
115
1 Manage
...................................................................................................................................
Curves and Curve Sets
116
Create and
.........................................................................................................................................................
Edit a New Curve Set
117
Add Sets.........................................................................................................................................................
from a Set Dictionary
119
Copy Curves
.........................................................................................................................................................
from an Existing Set
121
Copy Curves
.........................................................................................................................................................
from an Existing Well
123
Delete Curves
......................................................................................................................................................... 128
Edit a Curve
.........................................................................................................................................................
Set
129
Copy/Load
.........................................................................................................................................................
Data into a Curve Set
130
Working w ith
.........................................................................................................................................................
Curve Nam es
0
Using the Set
.........................................................................................................................................................
Manager
0
Curve and
.........................................................................................................................................................
Set Nam es
132
Curve Set
.........................................................................................................................................................
Grouping
134
Curve Listing
.........................................................................................................................................................
/ Curve Edit
137
Curve Statistics
......................................................................................................................................................... 145
Working w ith
.........................................................................................................................................................
Curves in Mutiple Wells
0
2 Manage
...................................................................................................................................
Curve Headers
150
Edit
Edit
Edit
Edit
Edit
Curve
.........................................................................................................................................................
Header General Properties
151
Curve
.........................................................................................................................................................
Header Descriptions
156
Curve
.........................................................................................................................................................
Header Statistics
156
Curve
.........................................................................................................................................................
Header History
158
Curve
.........................................................................................................................................................
Header Display
159
3 Manage
...................................................................................................................................
Zones/Tops
161
Create a .........................................................................................................................................................
New Zone Set
162
Load Zone
.........................................................................................................................................................
Tops from an External File
166
Create a .........................................................................................................................................................
TVDSS Zone Set
168
Copy a Zone
.........................................................................................................................................................
Set
172
Edit a Zone
.........................................................................................................................................................
Set
173
Delete a Zone
.........................................................................................................................................................
Set
176
Edit a Param
.........................................................................................................................................................
eter Set
177
Copy a Set
.........................................................................................................................................................
Type to a Zone Set
179
Link Zones
.........................................................................................................................................................
/ Top Sets
180
Manage Multiple
.........................................................................................................................................................
Well Zones / Top Sets
0
Create a .........................................................................................................................................................
New Zone
186
Set Zone.........................................................................................................................................................
Colours
187
4 Manage
...................................................................................................................................
Text Curves
189
Edit Text .........................................................................................................................................................
Curve Headers
190
Edit / Load
.........................................................................................................................................................
Text Curve Data
190
5 Manage
...................................................................................................................................
Picture/Core Photo Data
196
Edit / Load
.........................................................................................................................................................
Picture Curve Data
197
Edit Picture
.........................................................................................................................................................
Curve Headers
200
Section 5 Load Data from an External

Source
203
1 Load
...................................................................................................................................
External Curve Data
206
ASCII Load
......................................................................................................................................................... 207
Import ASCII..................................................................................................................................................
Data to a Time of Day Well
0
Index
Contents
Senergy
III
LAS / LBS.........................................................................................................................................................
Load
218
Import LAS/LBS
..................................................................................................................................................
Data to a Time of Day Well
0
Load LAS3
.........................................................................................................................................................
Data
224
Load LIS .........................................................................................................................................................
Data
228
Load DLIS
.........................................................................................................................................................
Data
236
Specify Curves
..................................................................................................................................................
to Load
238
Define DLIS
..................................................................................................................................................
File Load Options
242
Load the ..................................................................................................................................................
DLIS Data
244
Display the
..................................................................................................................................................
DLIS Header Information
245
Define DLIS
..................................................................................................................................................
File Global Options
247
Load Multiple
..................................................................................................................................................
DLIS Files
248
Form ation Tester
.........................................................................................................................................................
LIS/DLIS Loader
0
DBASE4 Load
......................................................................................................................................................... 248
LAS Batch
.........................................................................................................................................................
Load
250
2 Load
...................................................................................................................................
Zone Tops from an External File
0
3 Load
...................................................................................................................................
Picture and Text Curve Data
256
Load Picture
.........................................................................................................................................................
Curve Data
0
Load Text Curve
.........................................................................................................................................................
Data
0
4 Using
...................................................................................................................................
the Interval Loader
257
5 Using
...................................................................................................................................
the Capillary Pressure Data Loader
264
6 Using
...................................................................................................................................
the Well Attribute Loader
271
7 Real
...................................................................................................................................
Time Data Link
279
Section 6 Save Data to an External File
291
1 ASCII
...................................................................................................................................
Write
293
2 LAS
...................................................................................................................................
Write
300
3 LIS
...................................................................................................................................
Write
307
4 DLIS
...................................................................................................................................
Write
314
5 DBASE4
...................................................................................................................................
Write
321
6 Save
...................................................................................................................................
Zone Tops
323
Section 7 Working with Curve Data
327
1 Creating
...................................................................................................................................
Interactive Petrophysics Curves
329
Conventional
.........................................................................................................................................................
Curves
330
Array Curves
......................................................................................................................................................... 330
Lithology.........................................................................................................................................................
Curves
334
Point Curves
......................................................................................................................................................... 341
2 Working
...................................................................................................................................
with Interactive Curves
344
Interactive
.........................................................................................................................................................
Curve Edit
345
Interactive
.........................................................................................................................................................
Baseline Shift
349
Interactive
.........................................................................................................................................................
Trend / Square Curve
352
Interactive
.........................................................................................................................................................
Depth Shift
356
Depth Shift
.........................................................................................................................................................
Other Curves
374
Interactive
.........................................................................................................................................................
Block Depth Shift
375
Interactive
.........................................................................................................................................................
Curve Splice
379
Splice Curves
......................................................................................................................................................... 384
Interactive
.........................................................................................................................................................
Dip Picking
386
3 Curve
...................................................................................................................................
Data Manipulation
390
Fill Data Gaps
......................................................................................................................................................... 390
Curve Rescale
......................................................................................................................................................... 392
Index
IV
Senergy
Curve Filter
......................................................................................................................................................... 393
Curve Average
......................................................................................................................................................... 395
4 Manage
...................................................................................................................................
Picture/Core Photo Data
397
Edit / Load
.........................................................................................................................................................
Picture Curve Data
398
Edit Picture
.........................................................................................................................................................
Curve Headers
401
5 Manage
...................................................................................................................................
Text Curves
403
Edit Text .........................................................................................................................................................
Curve Headers
404
Edit / Load
.........................................................................................................................................................
Text Curve Data
404
6 Array
...................................................................................................................................
Image Data
410
Curves to
.........................................................................................................................................................
Array Data
411
Array Data
.........................................................................................................................................................
to Curves
412
Create Acoustic
.........................................................................................................................................................
Im age
413
Create Electrical
.........................................................................................................................................................
Im age
416
Merge Im.........................................................................................................................................................
ages
424
Section 8 View Well and Curve Data
428
1 Working
...................................................................................................................................
with the Log Plot Display
430
Navigating
.........................................................................................................................................................
the Log Plot Window
431
Log Plot Navigation
..................................................................................................................................................
and Sizing
431
Using Zoom
..................................................................................................................................................
in a Log Plot
434
Log Plot Display
..................................................................................................................................................
Shortcuts
438
Log Plot Track
.........................................................................................................................................................
Managem ent
443
Moving Curves
..................................................................................................................................................
and Tracks w ithin a Log Plot
444
Define the
.........................................................................................................................................................
Log Plot Form ats
446
Edit the Log
..................................................................................................................................................
Plot Format
449
Define the...........................................................................................................................................
Log Plot Grid Parameters
450
Define the...........................................................................................................................................
Log Plot Curves Parameters
454
Define the...........................................................................................................................................
Log Plot Shading Parameters
458
Set Default
..................................................................................................................................................
Plot Format
461
Log Plot Styles
.................................................................................................................................................. 462
Zones ........................................................................................................................................... 464
Numeric ........................................................................................................................................... 470
Depth /Time
...........................................................................................................................................
Index
473
Variable Shading
........................................................................................................................................... 476
VDL Plots........................................................................................................................................... 481
Tadpoles ........................................................................................................................................... 484
Waveforms
........................................................................................................................................... 485
Pictures ........................................................................................................................................... 489
Images ........................................................................................................................................... 491
Dip Image........................................................................................................................................... 499
Annotations
........................................................................................................................................... 501
Log Plot File
.........................................................................................................................................................
Output
510
Plot Output:
..................................................................................................................................................
Main Plot
511
Plot Output:
..................................................................................................................................................
Advanced Settings
519
Plot Output:
..................................................................................................................................................
Curve Titles
522
Plot Output:
..................................................................................................................................................
Plot Header
523
Plot Output:
..................................................................................................................................................
Plot Footer
530
Ouput Plot
..................................................................................................................................................
to the Deep Plot View er
531
Output Log
..................................................................................................................................................
Plot Curves to a Crossplot
538
Copy Depth
..................................................................................................................................................
Values to Clipboard
540
Using the.........................................................................................................................................................
Plot Range Editor
540
Using the.........................................................................................................................................................
Pre-Defined Plot Form at Files
541
Manage the
.........................................................................................................................................................
Interactive Log Plot
542
Create a .........................................................................................................................................................
Horizontal Log Plot
544
Index
Contents
Senergy
2 Histograms
................................................................................................................................... 548
Curve Norm
.........................................................................................................................................................
alization
574
3 Managing
...................................................................................................................................
Crossplots
584
Working .........................................................................................................................................................
w ith the Crossplot Dialog
586
Working .........................................................................................................................................................
w ith the Crossplot Window
596
Working .........................................................................................................................................................
w ith Crossplot Areas
605
Working .........................................................................................................................................................
w ith Crossplot Overlay Files
608
Interactive
.........................................................................................................................................................
Modifications in a Crossplot
612
Calculate..................................................................................................................................................
a Regression Line
616
Create a ..................................................................................................................................................
User-Defined Line
624
Display a..................................................................................................................................................
Crossplot Section in a Log Plot
626
Crossplot..................................................................................................................................................
Dockable Zone Window
630
Crossplot
.........................................................................................................................................................
Types
631
3D Crossplots
.................................................................................................................................................. 632
Frequency
..................................................................................................................................................
Crossplots
633
Pressure..................................................................................................................................................
Gradient Plots
637
Standalone
..................................................................................................................................................
Pickett Plot
646
Multi-Well..................................................................................................................................................
Crossplots
649
Multi-Curve
..................................................................................................................................................
Crossplots
651
Input Curves
...........................................................................................................................................
in Multi Curve Crossplot
652
Define Multi-Curve
...........................................................................................................................................
Discriminators
656
Define Multi-Curve
...........................................................................................................................................
Crossplot Scales
656
Multi-Zone
..................................................................................................................................................
Crossplots
661
4 3D
...................................................................................................................................
Parameter Viewer
664
Select the
.........................................................................................................................................................
Required Well
666
Specify 3D
.........................................................................................................................................................
View er Param eters
667
Define 3D.........................................................................................................................................................
View er Settings
669
View the.........................................................................................................................................................
3D Visualization
671
3D Visualization
.........................................................................................................................................................
Exam ples
674
5 Multi-Well
...................................................................................................................................
Correlation Viewer
678
Multi-Well
.........................................................................................................................................................
Correlation View er
679
6 Well
...................................................................................................................................
Map
701
7 Montage
...................................................................................................................................
Builder
711
Section 9 Parameter Set Management
717
1 Load
...................................................................................................................................
Parameter Set
720
2 Save
...................................................................................................................................
Parameter Set to File
725
3 Print
...................................................................................................................................
Parameter Set
728
4 Delete
...................................................................................................................................
Parameter Sets
730
733
Section 10 Interpretation
1 Parameter
...................................................................................................................................
Set Management
0
2 Basic
...................................................................................................................................
Log Analysis
735
Define Input
.........................................................................................................................................................
and Output Curves
736
Define Basic
.........................................................................................................................................................
Log Analysis Param eters
737
Define Zones
..................................................................................................................................................
- Clay Parameters
738
Define Density
..................................................................................................................................................
Parameters
739
Define Sonic
..................................................................................................................................................
Parameters
742
Define Archie
..................................................................................................................................................
Parameters
744
Create Basic
.........................................................................................................................................................
Log Analysis Interactive Log Plot
744
Equations.........................................................................................................................................................
and Methodology
747
Index
VI
Senergy
3 Clay
...................................................................................................................................
Volume Analysis
749
Define Clay
.........................................................................................................................................................
Volum e Output Curves
751
Clay Volum
.........................................................................................................................................................
e Param eters
754
Create a New
..................................................................................................................................................
Zone
0
Changing..................................................................................................................................................
Parameters on Screen
756
Define Zone
..................................................................................................................................................
Depth Parameters
757
Linking Clay
..................................................................................................................................................
Parameters
760
Clay Volume
..................................................................................................................................................
Parameter Names
762
Clay Volum
.........................................................................................................................................................
e Interactive Plot
767
Clay Volum
.........................................................................................................................................................
e Equations and Methodology
772
4 Porosity
...................................................................................................................................
and Water Saturation
777
Define Input
.........................................................................................................................................................
Curves
778
Define Output
.........................................................................................................................................................
Curves
783
Define the
.........................................................................................................................................................
Plot Options
791
Porosity .........................................................................................................................................................
and Sw Interactive Plot
793
Define the
..................................................................................................................................................
Zone Track
795
Define the
..................................................................................................................................................
Gamma Ray Track
796
Define the
..................................................................................................................................................
Porosity Input Track
797
Define the
..................................................................................................................................................
Resistivity Track
798
Define the
..................................................................................................................................................
Salinity Track
799
Define the
..................................................................................................................................................
Matrix Track
803
Define the
..................................................................................................................................................
Logic (PHIFLAG) Track
804
Define the
..................................................................................................................................................
Water Saturation Track
805
Define the
..................................................................................................................................................
Calculated Porosity Track
805
Define the
..................................................................................................................................................
Lithology Track
806
Define the
..................................................................................................................................................
Apparent Matrix Track
808
Define the
..................................................................................................................................................
Comparison Tracks
811
Define the
..................................................................................................................................................
Sand Lam Tracks
813
Porosity .........................................................................................................................................................
and Sw Param eters
814
Create a New
..................................................................................................................................................
Zone
0
Define the
..................................................................................................................................................
Zone Depths
819
Define the
..................................................................................................................................................
Clay Parameters
823
Define the
..................................................................................................................................................
Waters Parameters
825
Define the
..................................................................................................................................................
Hydrocarbon Parameters
827
Define the
..................................................................................................................................................
Matrix Parameters
830
Define the
..................................................................................................................................................
Phi Logic Parameters
832
Define the
..................................................................................................................................................
Sw Logic Parameters
835
Define the
..................................................................................................................................................
Laminated Sand Parameters
839
Define the
..................................................................................................................................................
Limits/Badhole Parameters
840
Define the
..................................................................................................................................................
Density/Neutron Parameters
846
Define the
..................................................................................................................................................
EPT Parameters
848
Define the
..................................................................................................................................................
Sonic Parameters
850
Define the
..................................................................................................................................................
Coal/Salt/Kill Parameters
851
Define the
..................................................................................................................................................
MultiMin Parameters
854
Porosity .........................................................................................................................................................
and Sw Methodology
861
Porosity .........................................................................................................................................................
and Sw Equations
863
5 Cut-off
...................................................................................................................................
and Summations
889
Create a .........................................................................................................................................................
Cutoff and Sum m ations Report
890
Define the
..................................................................................................................................................
Input Curves
891
Define the
..................................................................................................................................................
Reports Set Up and Default Cutoffs
895
Define the
..................................................................................................................................................
Output Curves
897
Cut-off and
.........................................................................................................................................................
Sum m ations Param eters
899
Manage Zone
..................................................................................................................................................
Depths
902
Create a New
...........................................................................................................................................
Zone
0
Manage Cutoffs
.................................................................................................................................................. 904
Manage Reservoir
...........................................................................................................................................
Cutoffs
905
Index
Contents
Senergy
VII
Manange ...........................................................................................................................................
Pay Cutoffs
907
Manage Additional
...........................................................................................................................................
Cutoffs
908
Manage Results
.................................................................................................................................................. 909
Manage Reservoir
...........................................................................................................................................
Results
910
Manage Pay
...........................................................................................................................................
Results
912
Manage Additional
...........................................................................................................................................
Results
913
Printing Cut-off
.........................................................................................................................................................
and Sum m ation Results
914
Report w..................................................................................................................................................
ith Curve Listing
916
Report w..................................................................................................................................................
ith Interval Breakdow n
917
Example Output
..................................................................................................................................................
Listing
919
Cut-off and
.........................................................................................................................................................
Sum m ations Interactive Plot
922
Multi-Well Cutoff
.........................................................................................................................................................
and Sum m ation
0
Cut-off and
.........................................................................................................................................................
Sum m ations Equations and Methodology
925
6 Cut-Off
...................................................................................................................................
Sensitivity Results
927
Cut-Off Sensitivity
.........................................................................................................................................................
Work Flow
929
Cut-off Sensitivity
.........................................................................................................................................................
Output Param eters
931
Cut-off Sensitivity
.........................................................................................................................................................
Com putations
931
Cut-off Sensitivity
.........................................................................................................................................................
Results Plot
933
7 NMR
...................................................................................................................................
Normalization
938
T2 Distribution
......................................................................................................................................................... 939
T2 Advanced
.........................................................................................................................................................
Setup
940
Norm alized
.........................................................................................................................................................
Output T2 Distribution
941
8 NMR
...................................................................................................................................
Interpretation
942
Define Input
.........................................................................................................................................................
Curves
942
Define Output
.........................................................................................................................................................
Curves
950
Define NMR
.........................................................................................................................................................
Interpretation Param eters
954
Define Zone
..................................................................................................................................................
Depths
955
Define T2..................................................................................................................................................
Cutoffs
956
Define Permeability
..................................................................................................................................................
Parameters
957
Define Sw
..................................................................................................................................................
Parameters
958
Define Sw
..................................................................................................................................................
Fluids
959
Define Sw
..................................................................................................................................................
Logic/Limits
961
Define Pc..................................................................................................................................................
Curves
963
Print the NMR
..................................................................................................................................................
Interpretation Parameters
964
Define Perm
.........................................................................................................................................................
eability
967
Define PC.........................................................................................................................................................
Calibration
969
Define the
.........................................................................................................................................................
PC Crossplot
976
Display the
.........................................................................................................................................................
QC Com parison Plot
977
Display the
.........................................................................................................................................................
NMR Interactive Plot
979
NMR Equations
.........................................................................................................................................................
and Methodology
982
Basic NMR
..................................................................................................................................................
Equations
983
NMR Tapered
..................................................................................................................................................
Cutoff
985
Dual Water
..................................................................................................................................................
Saturation Calculations
986
Limits .................................................................................................................................................. 991
Sw LogicFlag
.................................................................................................................................................. 991
Other Calculations
.................................................................................................................................................. 992
NMR T2 to
..................................................................................................................................................
Pc Curve
993
9 Cased
...................................................................................................................................
Hole
995
TDT Stand
.........................................................................................................................................................
Alone
996
Define TDT
..................................................................................................................................................
Stand Alone Parameters
997
Create a New
...........................................................................................................................................
Interpretation Zone
0
Define Sigma
...........................................................................................................................................
Parameters
999
Define SigMat
...........................................................................................................................................
from Matrix Density
1000
Define SigMat
...........................................................................................................................................
from Mineral Volumes
1001
Specify Parameter
...........................................................................................................................................
Limits
1003
Index
VIII
Senergy
TDT Stand
..................................................................................................................................................
Alone Plots
1003
Create Interactive
...........................................................................................................................................
Log Plot
1005
Create Clay
...........................................................................................................................................
Volume/Sigma Crossplot
1008
Create Sigma/Porosity
...........................................................................................................................................
Crossplot
1010
Output Curves,
..................................................................................................................................................
Equations and Methodology
1013
TDT Tim.........................................................................................................................................................
e Lapse
1015
Define TDT
..................................................................................................................................................
Time Lapse Parameters
1017
Create a New
...........................................................................................................................................
Interpretation Zone
0
Create Interactive
..................................................................................................................................................
Log Plot
1018
Equations
..................................................................................................................................................
and Methodology
1018
10 Auto
...................................................................................................................................
Update of Analysis Modules
1020
Section 11 Advanced Interpretation
1023
1 Interactive
...................................................................................................................................
Mineral Solver
1026
Mineral .........................................................................................................................................................
Solver Preprocessing
1029
XRD Weight
..................................................................................................................................................
% to Volume % Conversion
1030
Mineral .........................................................................................................................................................
Solver
1032
Define Mineral
..................................................................................................................................................
Solver Curves
1033
Define Mineral
..................................................................................................................................................
Solver Parameters
1035
Create a New
...........................................................................................................................................
Zone
0
Define Zones/Mixings
........................................................................................................................................... 1036
Define Waters/Clays
........................................................................................................................................... 1038
Define Sw
...........................................................................................................................................
Logic/Limits
1040
Define Sw
...........................................................................................................................................
Params
1043
Define Sonic/Neutron
........................................................................................................................................... 1046
Define Mineral
..................................................................................................................................................
Solver Models
1047
Define Mineral
..................................................................................................................................................
Solver Mixings
1060
Plot the .........................................................................................................................................................
Mineral Solver Results
1061
Interactive
..................................................................................................................................................
Plot
1062
Interactive
..................................................................................................................................................
Crossplots
1067
Combined
..................................................................................................................................................
Model Results
1069
Mineral .........................................................................................................................................................
Solver Calibration
1074
Define the
..................................................................................................................................................
Calibration
1076
Select Multiple
..................................................................................................................................................
Wells
1078
Define Calibration
..................................................................................................................................................
Discriminators
1079
Mineral .........................................................................................................................................................
Solver Equations and Methodology
1080
Mineral Solver
..................................................................................................................................................
Workflow
1081
Equation..................................................................................................................................................
Solver
1083
Equations
.................................................................................................................................................. 1084
Limit Equations
.................................................................................................................................................. 1099
Output Equations
.................................................................................................................................................. 1101
Mineral Types
.................................................................................................................................................. 1105
Water Saturations
.................................................................................................................................................. 1107
Iteration..................................................................................................................................................
Loops
1112
Final Calculations
.................................................................................................................................................. 1113
PHIFlag .................................................................................................................................................. 1114
2 Monte
...................................................................................................................................
Carlo Uncertainty Analysis
1116
Navigating
.........................................................................................................................................................
the Monte Carlo User Interface
1117
Monte Carlo
.........................................................................................................................................................
Uncertainty Analysis Workflow
1121
Define Monte
.........................................................................................................................................................
Carlo Param eters
1122
Define the
..................................................................................................................................................
Monte Carlo Model
1124
Define Clay
..................................................................................................................................................
Volume, Porosity Sw and Cutoff
1126
Define Mineral
..................................................................................................................................................
Solver Parameters
1127
Define the
..................................................................................................................................................
Input Curves
1129
Define the
..................................................................................................................................................
Dependencies
1131
Index
Contents
Senergy
IX
Define the
..................................................................................................................................................
Output
1133
Define the
..................................................................................................................................................
Monte Carlo Histograms
1140
Define the
..................................................................................................................................................
Monte Carlo Crossplots
1142
Define the
..................................................................................................................................................
Tornado Plot
1144
Batch Monte
.........................................................................................................................................................
Carlo
1146
Select the
..................................................................................................................................................
required Wells
1147
Define the
..................................................................................................................................................
Batch Model
1148
Define the
..................................................................................................................................................
Input Curves
1149
Define the
..................................................................................................................................................
Output Curves
1150
Running..................................................................................................................................................
the Monte Carlo Batch
1151
3 Fuzzy
...................................................................................................................................
Logic Curve Prediction
1154
Input Curves
.........................................................................................................................................................
to Prediction Model
1155
Specify .........................................................................................................................................................
Prediction Discrim inators
1160
Create Prediction
.........................................................................................................................................................
Model
1160
Display Prediction
.........................................................................................................................................................
Model Statistics
1162
Run Prediction
.........................................................................................................................................................
Model
1166
Equations
.........................................................................................................................................................
and Methodology
1171
4 Multiple
...................................................................................................................................
Linear Regression
1175
Input Curves
.........................................................................................................................................................
to Regression
1176
Specify .........................................................................................................................................................
Regression Discrim inators
1179
Create Regression
.........................................................................................................................................................
Model
1181
Run Regression
.........................................................................................................................................................
Model
1182
5 Neural
...................................................................................................................................
Networks
1184
Input Curves
.........................................................................................................................................................
to Neural Netw orks Module
1185
Define the
.........................................................................................................................................................
Training Settings
1190
Specify .........................................................................................................................................................
the Training Discrim inators
1191
Training.........................................................................................................................................................
the Neural Netw ork
1192
Specify .........................................................................................................................................................
the Model Run Settings
1194
Running.........................................................................................................................................................
the Neural Netw ork
1195
View Training
.........................................................................................................................................................
Results
1197
Neural Netw
.........................................................................................................................................................
orks Scenarios
1198
6 Cluster
...................................................................................................................................
Analysis for Rock Typing
1201
Input Curves
.........................................................................................................................................................
for Cluster Analysis
1202
Specify .........................................................................................................................................................
Cluster Analysis Discrim inators
1205
Specify .........................................................................................................................................................
Cluster Means
1206
Define Cluster
.........................................................................................................................................................
Consolidation
1210
Define the
.........................................................................................................................................................
Cluster Output
1212
Cluster .........................................................................................................................................................
Analysis Crossplot
1215
Theory of
.........................................................................................................................................................
Cluster Analysis
1217
7 Principal
...................................................................................................................................
Component Analysis
1223
Input Curves
.........................................................................................................................................................
for Principal Com ponent Analysis
1224
Specify .........................................................................................................................................................
Principal Com ponent Analysis Discrim inators
1228
Specify .........................................................................................................................................................
Principal Com ponent Analysis Output
1229
Method.........................................................................................................................................................
for Principal Com ponent Analysis
1231
8 Rock
...................................................................................................................................
Physics
1232
Shear Sonic
.........................................................................................................................................................
QC / Create
1233
Density .........................................................................................................................................................
Estim ation
1237
Fluid Substitution
......................................................................................................................................................... 1239
Equations
..................................................................................................................................................
and Methodology
1254
Lam inated
.........................................................................................................................................................
Reservoir Fluid Substitution
1262
Operational
..................................................................................................................................................
Instructions
1263
Equations
..................................................................................................................................................
and Methodology
1277
Elastic Im
.........................................................................................................................................................
pedance
1301
9 Pore
...................................................................................................................................
Pressure Calculations
1306
Index
Senergy
Density Estim
.........................................................................................................................................................
ation
0
Overburden
.........................................................................................................................................................
Gradient Calculation
1309
Pore & Fracture
.........................................................................................................................................................
Pressure Gradient Calculations
1313
Running..................................................................................................................................................
the Model
1336
View ing..................................................................................................................................................
Output Results
1344
Fracture..................................................................................................................................................
Gradient Models
1350
Overburden
..................................................................................................................................................
Gradient Curves
1358
Pore Pressure
..................................................................................................................................................
References
1359
10 Saturation
...................................................................................................................................
Height Modelling
1361
Capillary.........................................................................................................................................................
Pressure Loader
1362
Capillary..................................................................................................................................................
Pressure Set-Up
1363
Curves Set
...........................................................................................................................................
Up
1365
Correction
...........................................................................................................................................
Parameters
1370
Data View
...........................................................................................................................................
/ Edit
1377
Capillary...........................................................................................................................................
Pressure Crossplot
1383
Typical QC
...........................................................................................................................................
Workflow
1390
Capillary..................................................................................................................................................
Pressure Functions
1392
One Equation
...........................................................................................................................................
for all Pc Curves
1395
Separate...........................................................................................................................................
Equation for each Pc Curve
1407
Discriminators
........................................................................................................................................... 1420
Saturation
..................................................................................................................................................
Versus Height Curves
1422
SW Height
...........................................................................................................................................
Input / Output Curves
1423
SW Height
...........................................................................................................................................
Hydrocarbon Models
1424
Functions
...........................................................................................................................................
Mixing Setup
1432
Log Sw .........................................................................................................................................................
Versus Height Functions
1433
Input Curves
.................................................................................................................................................. 1434
Functions
.................................................................................................................................................. 1436
11 Eastern
...................................................................................................................................
European Resistivity Corrections
1444
EERC Interface
......................................................................................................................................................... 1445
EERC Theory
......................................................................................................................................................... 1453
12 Formation
...................................................................................................................................
Test Analysis
1473
Define the
.........................................................................................................................................................
Form ation Testing Param eters
1476
Define the
..................................................................................................................................................
Project Data
1478
Select the
..................................................................................................................................................
Required Wells
1479
Define the
..................................................................................................................................................
Well Data
1480
Define the
..................................................................................................................................................
Output Curves
1481
Define the
..................................................................................................................................................
Filters
1482
Define the
..................................................................................................................................................
Default Models
1484
Define the
..................................................................................................................................................
Preferences
1485
Create Formation
..................................................................................................................................................
Testing Crossplot
1487
Create and
.........................................................................................................................................................
Analyse a Form ation Test Project
1489
Load Formation
..................................................................................................................................................
Test Data into the Current Well
1490
Define the
..................................................................................................................................................
Formation Test Parameters
1493
Save a Formation
..................................................................................................................................................
Test Analysis Project
1495
Produce..................................................................................................................................................
the Draw dow n Analysis
1496
Produce..................................................................................................................................................
the Derivative Analysis
1500
Produce..................................................................................................................................................
the Spherical Analysis
1505
Produce..................................................................................................................................................
the Radial Analysis
1507
Form ation
.........................................................................................................................................................
Testing Equations and Methodology
1509
Section 12 Working with Multiple Wells
1515
1 Working
...................................................................................................................................
with Curves in Multiple Wells
1517
Manage.........................................................................................................................................................
Multi-Well Well Header Info.
1517
Manage.........................................................................................................................................................
Multi-Well Curve Sets
1521
Manage.........................................................................................................................................................
Multi-Well Curve Headers
1525
Index
Contents
Senergy
XI
Multiple.........................................................................................................................................................
Well Zones/Top Sets
1529
2 Working
...................................................................................................................................
with Parameters in Multiple Wells
1535
Multi-Well
.........................................................................................................................................................
Change Param eters
1536
Multi-Well
.........................................................................................................................................................
Param eter Distribution
1542
3 Multi-Well
...................................................................................................................................
Batch Operation
1553
4 Multi-Well
...................................................................................................................................
Curve Statistics
1562
5 Multi-Well
...................................................................................................................................
Correlation Viewer
1566
6 Multi-well
...................................................................................................................................
Cutoff and Summation
1589
Launch .........................................................................................................................................................
Mutli-Well Cutoff and Sum m ation
1602
Output to
.........................................................................................................................................................
a Single File
1603
Section 13 Calculation and Correction
1606
1 Use-Defined
...................................................................................................................................
Formula
1608
2 Multi
...................................................................................................................................
Line User Formula
1616
3 Basic
...................................................................................................................................
Log Functions
1628
Density .........................................................................................................................................................
Porosity
1629
Matrix ......................................................................................................................................................... 1632
Rw Apparent
.........................................................................................................................................................
/ Sw
1634
Perm eability
......................................................................................................................................................... 1636
Derivatives
......................................................................................................................................................... 1637
Miscellaneous
......................................................................................................................................................... 1638
Conversions
......................................................................................................................................................... 1642
Conversions
.........................................................................................................................................................
2
1643
Horner Plot
......................................................................................................................................................... 1645
4 Temperature
...................................................................................................................................
Gradient
1650
5 RW
...................................................................................................................................
from SP
1652
6 True
...................................................................................................................................
Vertical Depth Calculations
1654
TVD Model
......................................................................................................................................................... 1655
File or Keyboard
.........................................................................................................................................................
Input
1658
Load Data
.........................................................................................................................................................
from External Files
1659
Keyboard
.........................................................................................................................................................
Entry of Deviation Data
1663
View the
.........................................................................................................................................................
Calculation Results
1663
7 True
...................................................................................................................................
Vertical / Stratigraphic Thickness
1665
8 Curves
...................................................................................................................................
from Zones / Parameters
1670
9 Curve
...................................................................................................................................
Integration
1673
10 Environmental
...................................................................................................................................
Corrections
1676
Schlum berger
.........................................................................................................................................................
Corrections
1687
Baker Atlas
.........................................................................................................................................................
Corrections
1691
Halliburton
.........................................................................................................................................................
Corrections
1694
Anadrill.........................................................................................................................................................
Corrections
1698
Baker Hughes
.........................................................................................................................................................
Inteq Corrections
1700
Sperry Sun
.........................................................................................................................................................
Corrections
1703
Weatherford
.........................................................................................................................................................
Corrections
1706
PathFinder
......................................................................................................................................................... 1709
Section 14 Connecting to External

Databases
1714
1 Common
...................................................................................................................................
Database Connection Tasks
1716
Create New
.........................................................................................................................................................
Well and Load ALL External Curves
1716
Create New
.........................................................................................................................................................
Well and Load SELECTED External Curves
1717
Index
XII
Senergy
De-Select
.........................................................................................................................................................
Curves during Im port
1718
Load Tops
.........................................................................................................................................................
from an External Well
1719
De-Select
.........................................................................................................................................................
Tops during Im port
1720
Edit Well.........................................................................................................................................................
Properties
1721
2 Connection
...................................................................................................................................
Protocols
1724
Apache .........................................................................................................................................................
HTTP Server
1724
Secure Shell
......................................................................................................................................................... 1725
The PGLWdblink
.........................................................................................................................................................
Package
1726
The OpenWorks
.........................................................................................................................................................
Link
1727
The Geolog
.........................................................................................................................................................
Link
1731
3 PC
...................................................................................................................................
Configuration
1734
PuTTY SSH
.........................................................................................................................................................
Client
1734
Geolog Interface
.........................................................................................................................................................
Connection
1736
OpenWorks
.........................................................................................................................................................
Interface Connection
1739
ODM Interface
.........................................................................................................................................................
Connection
1741
4 External
...................................................................................................................................
Database Requirements
1742
Read/ Write
.........................................................................................................................................................
to PETCOM DB
1743
GEOLOG6
......................................................................................................................................................... 1749
OpenWorks
......................................................................................................................................................... 1760
ODM
......................................................................................................................................................... 1769
Shell LOGIC
.........................................................................................................................................................
Database Loader
1774
Read / Write
.........................................................................................................................................................
via OpenSpirit
1778
1787
Section 15 Tools
1 Shading
...................................................................................................................................
Types
1788
2 Edit
...................................................................................................................................
Global Sets
1791
3 Edit
...................................................................................................................................
Zone Colors
1794
4 Edit
...................................................................................................................................
Dip Symbols
1796
5 Edit
...................................................................................................................................
Palettes
1798
6 Edit
...................................................................................................................................
Default Lithology
1802
7 Edit
...................................................................................................................................
Curve Aliasing
1806
8 Set
...................................................................................................................................
Default Units
1818
9 Message
...................................................................................................................................
Board
1821
10 System
...................................................................................................................................
Defaults
1822
Edit
Edit
Edit
Edit
Edit
Edit
Edit
Edit
Edit
Curve
.........................................................................................................................................................
System Defaults
1825
Curve
.........................................................................................................................................................
Types Defaults
1827
Curve
.........................................................................................................................................................
Alias Defaults
1829
Mineral
.........................................................................................................................................................
Solver Mineral System Defaults
1831
Mineral
.........................................................................................................................................................
Solver Mineral Equations Defaults
1832
Crossplot
.........................................................................................................................................................
Overlay Set-up File
1833
Monte
.........................................................................................................................................................
Carlo Defaults
1834
Unit.........................................................................................................................................................
Conversions Defaults
1835
Neutron
.........................................................................................................................................................
Tool Types set-up File
1836
11 'IP
...................................................................................................................................
Proprietary' Protection System
1837
Install and
.........................................................................................................................................................
Activate Protection
1839
Update Protection
.........................................................................................................................................................
Options
1843
Uninstall.........................................................................................................................................................
or Transfer Protection
1844
View Protection
.........................................................................................................................................................
Options
1848
12 Options
................................................................................................................................... 1852
External.........................................................................................................................................................
Database Options
1853
Well Options
......................................................................................................................................................... 1855
Index
Contents
Senergy
XIII
File Loader
......................................................................................................................................................... 1865
Well Folder
.........................................................................................................................................................
Structure
1868
LAS 3 Configuration
......................................................................................................................................................... 1870
Miscellaneous
.........................................................................................................................................................
Options
1871
Internet.........................................................................................................................................................
Connection
1874
Custom.........................................................................................................................................................
Toolbars and Menus
1875
Database
.........................................................................................................................................................
and Well Security
1878
Curve Aliasing
......................................................................................................................................................... 1888
Corporate
.........................................................................................................................................................
Search Folders
1889
1896
Section 16 User Programs
1 User
...................................................................................................................................
Program Options
1898
2 New
...................................................................................................................................
User Program
1902
3 User
...................................................................................................................................
Program Code
1915
4 FORTRAN
...................................................................................................................................
Guide
1922
5 Example
...................................................................................................................................
User Programs
1925
Exam ple.........................................................................................................................................................
User Program 1: Interp-Dem o
1925
Exam ple.........................................................................................................................................................
User Program 2: Differentiate
1975
Exam ple.........................................................................................................................................................
User Program 3: Norm alize Array
1981
Exam ple.........................................................................................................................................................
User Program 4: Manage Well Header Info
1988
Index
1992
Index
Section
1
Getting Help for Interactive Petrophysics v3.6
Senergy
The following links enable you to find Help and Support when Installing and Working with
Interactive Petrophysics.
Using the Online Help
Getting Program Updates
Getting Program Support
Frequently Asked Questions
Useful Links
About Interactive Petrophysics

To identify the current version of Interactive Petrophysics you are working with, Select About
from the Help Menu.
Click the System Information Button to display the System Information Dialog.
Section 1.
Getting Help for Interactive Petrophysics v3.6 :
Click Close the Close the About Interactive Petrophysics Dialog.
Related Topics
What's New in Interactive Petrophysics
Installation and Security
Navigating the User Interface
Section 1.
Getting Help for Interactive Petrophysics v3.6 :
Senergy
Senergy
1.1
The Interactive Petrophysics (IP) CD is shipped with comprehensive HELP documentation on the
features, functionality and 'Equations & Methodology' implemented in the software.
Documentation is provided both as a PDF file (IP Help Manual V36.pdf) and an 'online' HELP
document. The PDF file is located in the IP program directory within the Users Manual
subdirectory. The online document is accessed in a number of ways:
'Click' on the 'Help Topics' icon on the main IP 'Help' menu (shown below). Use the '
Contents' tab to browse to the required Help topic or use the 'Index' tab and type in a
keyword. There is also a limited search facility in the 'Search' tab. Plus Help topics which
the user would like to refer back to frequently can be added to the 'Favourites' tab. Or,
alternatively
Place the mouse cursor over the Module item in the IP main menu bar that you wish to get
help on and 'press' the keyboard 'F1' button. This will automatically launch the help
document at the correct chapter.
All IP modules have a 'Help' button on the user-interface. These buttons will launch the
interactive Help document when 'clicked'.
The 'Core' interpretation modules 'Clay Volume', 'Porosity and Water Saturation' and 'Cut-off
and Summation' have their own interactive 'Parameter Help' files which are launched from
each modules 'Parameter' display. The content of the 'Parameter Help' screen updates when
the user moves the mouse cursor between parameter columns in the interface.
The 'Install GCC Compiler' will install the GNU compilers necessary for compiling Fortran code
in the 'User Programs' module.
There is also a limited help prompt which appears on the Status Bar at the base of the IP main
window, illustrated below:
Section 1.1 Getting Help for Interactive Petrophysics v3.6 : Using the Online Help
Senergy
The 'IP User Forum', is a web forum is managed by Senergy Software Ltd. to provide users with
a resource for discussion of topics relating to IP and Petrophysics in general, and to enable users
to share ideas, user programs, work flows that may be of use to the ever-expanding IP-user
community.
Entry to the website is restricted to registered IP users and can only be accessed from the
connection button within the IP program. Registration is quick and very easy. Once registered the
user will have to log on with a User name and Password each time the user wants to visit the 'IP
User Forum' site.
To check the version of IP that a user has installed on their computer use the 'About' button.
Senergy
Related Topics
Useful Links
1.2
Senergy
There are two methods for downloading Interactive Petrophysics Program Updates, either by
downloading directly from the Senergy Software Ltd website, or by using the Check for Updates
feature provided with Interactive Petrophysics.
Download an Update from the Senergy Website

Interactive Petrophysics program updates can be downloaded from the Senergy Software Ltd
website:
http://www.senergyworld.com/iptm/ipdownloads
Complete the required Registration Information to access the Interactive Petrophysics Download
website and download the latest Program Update.
Use the Automatically Check for Updates Feature

1. From Windows Explorer, locate GetIPUpdate.exe in the Interactive Petrophysics Program
folder (C:\Program Files\IntPetro36\GetIPUpdate.exe).
Note: Interactive Petrophysics compares the current version number to the Program Update
version number to determine whether a patch is available for download. The Get Updates
Button will only be activated if a Program Update with a higher version number than the
currently installed version is available.
Section 1.2 Getting Help for Interactive Petrophysics v3.6 : Getting Program Updates
Senergy
2. Click Get Updates to download the latest Program Update (IP_Update.exe).

3. If required Click the Update History Link to View or Save the Update History File.
Note: When a new Program Update is available an Update History PDF file will accompany
the Update on the Senergy Software Ltd website. This document contains information on
all the bug fixes and enhancements implemented in the accompanying Program Update.
4. From Windows Explorer, Double-Click IP_Update.exe to install the Program Update.
Note: IP_Update.exe is a self-extracting zip file which runs automatically when opened.
Note: Interactive Petrophysics must be CLOSED prior to running IP_Update.exe.
5. Click the Automatically Check for Updates Check Box for Interactive Petrophysics to check
the Internet for updates every time Interactive Petrophysics is opened.
Note: If a Program Update is available, the Information Dialog will be displayed:
Click Yes to download the latest Program Update

Click No to continue to work with Interactive Petrophysics
Click Cancel to ensure Interactive Petrophysics continues to Automatically Check for
Updates.
Related Topics
Useful Links
Section 1.2 Getting Help for Interactive Petrophysics v3.6 : Getting Program Updates
1.3
........................... add FAQ's
Related Topics
Useful Links
Section 1.3 Getting Help for Interactive Petrophysics v3.6 : Frequently Asked Questions
Senergy
Section
2
Database Management
11
Senergy
Database Management
The Interactive Petrophysics (IP) 'Database' is a way of organizing multiple wells as an

interpretation 'project'. The database consists of a number of binary data files (.DAT Files) , one
per well, stored together in a user-selected PC directory / folder. When you open IP, the
directory name of the current active database is displayed in the bottom left hand corner of the
main IP window.
Up to 9,999 wells can be saved into an IP database.
Up to 2000 wells can be 'active' in memory at any one time.
Each well can contain up to 1500 curves.
Each well can contain up to 50 Curve Sets
Each Curve Set can contain up to 3 million Depths.
Up to 50 wells can be displayed simultaneously in a multi-well correlation plot.
Each database well consists of the log curve data, general well information and the interpretation
'Parameter Sets' associated with the well.
IP works with well data loaded into memory.
Data can be loaded directly from an external database using the OpenWorks, GEOLOG,
ODM, OpenSpirit or PETCOM Database links.
Alternatively, data can be loaded through one of the 'Input' modules.
When wells are loaded into memory and worked on, the 'external' database disk files are not
immediately updated, unless the 'Autosave' function is turned 'on'. Therefore, one can load a
well from the database, perform computations and edits to curve data in the well and then simply
discard the changes, without affecting the original well in the database.
Multiple wells can be loaded into memory (with the 'multi-well' program option) with a maximum
of 2000 wells resident in memory at one time (although the database can store 9,999 wells,
only 2000 can be loaded into memory and worked on concurrently). This assumes that enough
physical memory is available on the PC. If, when many wells are loaded, the program appears to
be slow, it is probably due to a lack of computer RAM. It is best to keep the number of loaded, inmemory wells to the ones necessary for the current interpretation session.
The program has a mechanism to 'lock' any well that a user has opened. If another user tries to
open the same well, a Confirm dialog will prompt the user stating that the Well is already open
and asking if they wish to Open as a New Well.
The second user then has the option to open the well as a new well (i.e. copy the well into
memory as a new well). If this is done then a 'Save to the Database' operation will create a new
well entry, in addition to the original well.
Section 2.
Database Management :
Database Management
Senergy
12
If the program crashes for some reason, the wells that were in memory will stay 'locked' if the
user re-starts IP straight away. The user can either:
wait approximately 4-5 minutes and the wells will unlock themselves, or
delete the lock file IPDBLock, which can be found in the database root directory. NOTE: this
file should never be deleted if there is any chance of more than one user currently using the
database.
IP Users and Database Files

In each IP database directory, there will be a subdirectory named after each user that accesses
the database. This subdirectory contains two files:
IntPetro.ini - this is the general configuration file. It keeps a record of the last item that
was open in IP, including the last database, last well used, the dimensions of open log
plots and Workarea information. For example, if the user was working on Well4 with a
triple-combo plot open and then closed IP without first closing the plot then the next time
IP was opened a Well4 triple-combo plot would be displayed. This file can be deleted but
the next time IP is opened the user will be prompted to open a database. NOTE: deleting
this file does not delete the items that were displayed but just the record of how they were
displayed.
IPDBProj.dat - stores the parameter Sets when performing multi-well work. This file can
be deleted but the multi-well parameter Sets would be lost. NOTE: do NOT delete this file
if there is a chance that more than one user is currently accessing the database.
NOTE: there is another IPDBProj.dat file which can be found in the project directory.
This is used only if the Test IP database is accessed.
Beginning in IP3.4 there are now two additional file types within the IP project directory which
support the 'History' module. These are:
IPDBWellxxxx_Hist.ald - this contains the actual details for the history event such as
Clay Volume reports, parameters, JPG of environmental correction screens. This file is
accessed when the user chooses to perform a difference comparison between
parameters.
IPDBWellxxxx_Hist.ale - contains a data set of history events that includes an entry for
Section 2.
13
Senergy
each event, date, time, user, module and type.

Within the IP project directory the following files are located:
IPDBWellList - this file can be thought of as a table of contents for IP. This file should be
deleted if a well has been removed from or added directly (by copying the IPDBWellxxxx.
dat file from another database in Explorer) into the database. Once the database is reopened this file will be recreated with an updated list of available wells. NOTE: do NOT
delete this file if there is a chance that more than one user is currently accessing the
database.
ipfolder.ico - this is the IP icon that appears on the database folder when a user
generates a new IP database.
IPDBLock - if IP closes incorrectly there is a possibility that IP will "lock" the well. The
wells that were in memory will stay locked if the user re-opens IP straight away after it
crashes. If the user waits 4-5 minutes the wells will "un-lock". However, a quicker way of
getting the wells to un-lock is to delete the IPDBLock file. NOTE: do NOT delete this file
if there is a chance that more than one user is currently accessing the database.
Desktop.ini - is the desktop icon settings file.
Array Curve Data

'Conventional' log curves have one curve value per depth increment (the well 'Step') in an IP well.
Array curve data can have multiple sample values per depth increment. The array can be one or
two dimensional. A 'Z' dimension, where the depth sampling for the curve is greater than the
normal depth sample, and a 'X' dimension, where multiple samples are stored for each depth
level. Examples of array data are high resolution image data where the 'X' dimension will
represent the values of the image around the borehole and the 'Z' dimension will be the high
resolution depth sampling (~0.1 inch, 72 samples per 0.5 foot). Arrays can be of any size.
Array data curves can be used as input to all IP modules. However, if the module was not
designed to use array data then the value used in the module for each depth level will be the
arithmetic average value of all the array samples at that depth level.
Array data can use enormous amounts of memory. Therefore if the user intends to work with
large intervals (> 100m) of image data (e.g. FMI) it will be necessary to have a relatively large
amount of CPU RAM (+1 Gb). The program should work with smaller amounts of memory but it
could be quite slow.
Curve Sets
'Curve Sets' are a way of managing the curves associated with an IP well or IP database. Curve
Section 2.
Database Management
Senergy
14
Sets have a 'Short' and 'Full' name. The 'Short Set Name', which has a maximum number of
eight characters, is always prefixed to the front of any curve name, with a colon (:) separating the
Set and curve name (e.g. R1:Gr would be the Gr curve in the R1 set). The 'Full Set Name' is a
descriptor used by the user to document the purpose of the Set. A maximum of 50 Curve Sets
can be created in a single IP well.
All wells have a 'Default Set' which does not have a 'Short Set name'. Therefore a curve which is
listed using its name only, for example - a curve name of Gr, would belong to the 'Default' Set.
Curve names must be unique in each Set, but the same curve name can exist in several different
Sets.
Wells created in older IP versions, prior to version 3.2, will have all their curves saved in the '
Default Set'.
Curves can be moved between Sets using the 'Manage Curve Headers' module or the '
Manage Curve Sets' module. Within the 'Manage Curve Sets' module curve Sets can be
created and re-named plus a host of other functions.
Related Topics
Starting Interactive Petrophysics
New Database
Open Database
Create a Database Shortcut
Set Default File Location
Explore Database Folder
Save the Current Well
Save All Wells to Database
Auto Save
Printer Setup
Section 2.
15
Section 2.
Senergy
Database Management
Senergy
2.1
16
When IP is started the Open Database Dialog is displayed providing the ability to select which
database is to be loaded into IP.
Check Allow me to choose which Wells to load using Well List to display the Select Wells to
Load Dialog prior to Opening the Database. The Required Wells can then be loaded as the
database is Opened.
Section 2.1 Database Management : Starting Interactive Petrophysics
17
Senergy
Check Allow me to choose which Wells to load using Well Map to display the Well Map
Display Dialog prior to Opening the Database. The Required Wells can then be loaded as the
database is Opened.
If IP is not Shut Down correctly, the following dialog will be displayed the next time IP is opened,
enabling IP to be started either normally or in Safe Mode.
'Start IP Normally' - this will attempt to start IP with all settings the same as they were when
IP was closed down. If this option does not open IP then select the 'Start IP in Safe Mode'.
'Start IP in Safe Mode' - if this option is chosen then the IPDBList.ini file is deleted. This file
contains a list of wells in the selected database. The user will then be asked to re-select the
database wells once IP opens. This will create a new IPDBList.ini for the selected
Database Management
Senergy
18
database.
Advanced Options
From the IP Startup Dialog Click Advanced Options to Display the Advanced Startup
Options Dialog.
'Refresh user installation files?' - this option will overwrite the users installation files in
their C:\Documents and Settings\username\Local Settings\Application Data\IntPetro35
folder with default files. NOTE: if the user has made changes to the files within this folder,
notably the CPARMDEF.PAR or Default Plots folder, then rename the IntPetro35 folder
before 'checking' the 'Refresh user installation files' and clicking the 'Start IP' button. This
will enable the user to copy back the users files into the 'new' IntPetro35 folder.
'Restore IP configuration to defaults?' - this will restore IP back to its CD image state.
Related Topics
New Database
Open Database
19

Auto Save
Printer Setup
Senergy
Database Management
Senergy
2.2
20
Create a New Database
The 'New Database' button allows the user to manually type in, or browse to, a directory / folder
location which will be used by IP as the project directory for a new database.
A new database can also be created from the Open Database Dialog.
Start IP normally to display the Open Database Dialog.
Section 2.2 Database Management : Create a New Database
21
Click the Create Button to display the New Database Dialog.
Browse for the required Database Location Folder and Click OK to Create the New
Database and Open in Interactive Petrophysics.
Senergy
Database Management
Senergy
Related Topics
New Database
Open Database
Auto Save
Printer Setup
22
23
2.3
Senergy
Open an Existing Database
The 'Open Database' menu item allows the user to select the directory under which the
database data files are stored.
The user can EITHER select one of the 'Recent Databases' from the 'Database' list. In this
case the program remembers the previous well and plots that were loaded when that database
was last accessed and automatically reloads them.
The last 10 'Recent Databases' will be stored and displayed in the window.
The user has the option to delete an entry by selecting the line and pressing the Delete key on
the keyboard. This can be useful if the list contains entries which are no longer active, if, for
example a database folder has been moved / renamed.
OR, If the required database is not in the 'Recent Databases' list then the 'Browse for IP
Database' option should be 'checked' and the database location entered. The 'Browse' button
allows the user to search the computer disk or any Networked drives for the appropriate
directory. The default Read / Write file location can optionally be changed to conform to the new
database location.
It is good practice to have the 'Default File Location' set to the 'Database Location', since this
will mean that all files belonging to a project will be grouped together under one directory.
Section 2.3 Database Management : Open an Existing Database
Database Management
Senergy
24
If the user changes the 'Database Location', then the current database will be closed and the
new database will be opened. In this case, the user will be asked whether the wells currently
loaded into memory should be saved to the old database.
If the response is 'Yes' then the current wells will be saved to the old database.
NOTE: Before the new database is opened, all wells loaded in memory will be removed from
memory, therefore it is important to save the well data if it has changed.
The 'Load Wells from Database' window will now be displayed to allow the user to select the
wells to load into memory.
Note: Once a Database is Opened, the Current Selected Well will be highlighted in the Database
Browser.
25
Related Topics
New Database
Open Database
Auto Save
Printer Setup
Senergy
Database Management
Senergy
2.4
The Create a Database Shortcut feature, creates a Shortcut to the currently selected IP
Database and places it upon the Windows Desktop. When Clicked the Shortcut will open
Interactive Petrophysics with the currently selected database active.
To Create a Desktop Shortcut:
With the required IP Database Open, From the File Menu, Select Create a Desktop
Shortcut.
The Information Dialog will be displayed advising that the Database shortcut has been
created to the Desktop.
If the Database Shortcut already exists, the following Confirm Dialog will be displayed.
Related Topics
New Database
Open Database
Auto Save
Printer Setup
Section 2.4 Database Management : Create a Database Shortcut
26
27
2.5
Senergy
The 'Set Default File Location' option is used by the program to define the 'input' and 'output' file
locations.
The 'output' directory is especially important to set, since the output interpretation
Parameter Sets are automatically written here, without the user being prompted to
confirm the location, at the time they are created. The other directories are useful to set, but
the user has full control over where the input files are loaded from and can override the default
directory.
'Input Directory' : This is where the program will look to find input data files and input
Parameter Sets.
'Output Directory' : This is where the program will save output data files and Parameter
Sets. Normally, the input and output directories are the same.
'Use separate Input / Output directory for each well' : If this box is 'checked' then a new
subdirectory called \Well**** will be created for each well under the 'Output Directory'
name, where **** is the database well number. This allows the user to group together, by
well, all the text and format files that IP can output. When changing databases, the program
looks to see if separate output directories are used and then sets this option automatically.
However, it is good practice to 'check' this option when creating a new database, to make
sure that it is set the way you want.
NOTE: The Well subdirectory is created at the same time as a well is created in IP. In the
Well**** folder are files specific to the well such as interpretation parameter Sets (.set) and well
specific log plots (.plt), crossplots (.xpt),formulas (.frm), depthshifts (.sfo and .sft), text files (.txt),
Section 2.5 Database Management : Set Default File Location
Database Management
Senergy
28
and colour tables (.col).

The rest of the information is saved in the binary IPDBWellxxxx.dat file. The IPDBWellxxxx.dat
files should not be deleted as all IP related information for that well will be lost.
Also within the Well subdirectory are further sub-directories. These are defined in 'Well Folder
Structure'.
'Formula Directory' : This is the directory where the 'User formula' module saves
equations, which can be recalled & re-applied later.
The 'Browse' buttons allow you to search the disk structure to find the directory you want.
The 'Same Directory for all' 'check' box sets the input, output and formula directories to the
directory path defined in the 'Input Directory' field.
'Apply' applies the changes to the current session.
Related Topics
New Database
Open Database
Auto Save
Printer Setup
Section 2.5 Database Management : Set Default File Location
29
2.6
Senergy
The 'Explore Database Folder' option provides the user with a shortcut to browse to the the
current IP project directory/folder, without having to navigate the local hard drive or PC network.
Related Topics
New Database
Open Database
Auto Save
Printer Setup
Section 2.6 Database Management : Explore Database Folder
Database Management
Senergy
2.7
30
The 'Save Current Well As...' module can be accessed from the 'File' and 'Well' menu items.
The user has a number of options for storing the current in-memory well to either the currently
active IP database or to another IP database folder.
3 radio buttons control how IP saves a single well. These are:
'Update selected well in the database'
'Create a new well in current database'
'Create a new well in another database'
The options are described fully below.

'Update selected well in database'. If the displayed well has already been saved to the
current IP database, selecting this option and clicking the 'OK' button, saves any changes
Section 2.7 Database Management : Save the Current Well
31
Senergy
you have made to the well to the IP database binary file. This option will not be available for
a well that has been newly-created in the current IP session.
'Create a new well in current database'. This option can be used;
either to save the currently-displayed well to the current IP database, but under a
different well number. This is a method for creating a duplicate of an existing well in the
database, or
to create a completely new IP well, with a new 'binary' file, IPDBWellxxxx.dat, file in the
current database.
NOTE: the user is able to specify the database number that they wish to store a new, or
duplicate, well to. The options are:
1. Do not fill in a Database Well Number - By leaving the 'Database Well number' text box
empty, the program will automatically assign the next available database number to the well
to be saved. This means that, for example, in a multi-well database where database well
number 3 is vacant, IP will assign the next well to database number 3. If wells have been
saved to consecutive database numbers, then the next well saved to the database will be
assigned the next available number in the numbering sequence.
2. Fill in a Database Well Number - Typing a 'Database Well number' into the text entry box
allows you to dictate where to save your in-memory well to. If you type in a Database Well
number that already exists, you will be warned of the fact and asked to select a different
Database Well number.
'Create a new well in another database'. Selecting this option allows you to save the
currently-displayed well to a different database thus enabling the user to merge IP
databases. This does not change or delete the well in the current database. The 'Database
Name' text entry box and 'Select' button allow you to browse to another IP database folder
where you would like to save the new well. NOTE: the Well Folder is not copied across only
the IPDBWellxxxx.dat. The Well Folders containing any plot, crossplot formats etc. would
Database Management
Senergy
32
have to be manually copied across using Windows Explorer, making sure the Well number
on the folder matched the newly created Database Well number. To get IP to recognise the
copied Well Folders delete the username folder (containing IntPetro.ini and IPBDProj.dat
files) in the new project and restart IP.
Another way of merging two IP databases together is to make a copy of one database. Rename
all the wells in that database so that the names of the wells in the copied database won't
overwrite the wells in the other database.
Once the wells have been renamed then copy these into the other database. Delete the
IPDBWellList file found in the merged database folder. Delete the IntPetro.ini and IPDBProj.dat
files found in the users folder within the merged IP database. When the merged database is
loaded into IP the user will have to reload all the wells, this will then recreate the IPDBWellList for
the merged database.
33
Related Topics
Senergy
Database Management
Senergy
New Database
Open Database
Auto Save
Printer Setup
34
35
2.8
Senergy
Selecting the 'Save All Wells to Database' option will update the database binary files
(IPDBWellXXXX.dat) for the wells that are currently loaded into your PC RAM. For a newlycreated well, a new 'IPDBWellXXXX.dat' file will be created in the IP database folder. NOTE: if
there is a gap in the IPDBWellXXXX numbering, then a newly-created well will, by default, be
saved into the first vacant position in the database folder.
If multiple new wells are created and data loaded into them; on 'Save All Wells to Database', IP
prompts the user to create a new database entry for each new well:
Selecting 'Yes to All' will save all new wells to the database as IPDBWellXXXX.dat files, without
having to confirm the 'save' operation for each individual well.
NOTE: If your IP database wells have consecutive binary file names, for example:
IPDBWell0001.dat
IPDBWell0002.dat
IPDBWell0003.dat
IPDBWell0004.dat
IPDBWell0005.dat
Then any new well will be saved to the next highest data file number i.e. IPDBWell0006.dat
If, however, you have deleted a well from your database, removing the IPDBWell000X.dat file in
the process, then a newly-created well will be saved into the first vacant IPBDWell000X.dat
position. For example, if IPDBWell0002.dat has been deleted, as illustrated below, then the next
new well saved to the database will, by default, be saved to this database binary file.
IPDBWell0001.dat
IPDBWell0001.dat
IPDBWell0002.dat (new well inserted into first vacant database
position)
IPDBWell0003.dat
IPDBWell0003.dat
IPDBWell0004.dat
IPDBWell0004.dat
IPDBWell0005.dat
IPDBWell0005.dat
In IP Version 3.3 and later versions, the user is given the opportunity to choose the database
number for multiple newly-created wells. On selecting the 'Save all Wells to Database' option a
dialog will launch similar to that shown below:
Section 2.8 Database Management : Save All Wells to Database
Database Management
Senergy
You can choose a database number for each new well, or let IP assign database numbers
automatically.
If the user has opened an older database within IP v3.6 and attempts to save the wells, the
following warning message appears:
This gives the user a chance not to save the wells in version 3.6 and thus not make them
incompatible with the version of IP from which they originated.
Related Topics
New Database
Open Database
Auto Save
Printer Setup
Section 2.8 Database Management : Save All Wells to Database
36
37
2.9
Senergy
Auto Save Options
The 'Auto Save' window is used to set up the options for the saving of all well data at user-defined
time intervals. This is equivalent to manually clicking the 'Save All Wells to Database' menu item
at the same time intervals. The function is accessed under the 'File' menu item.
To set up the Automatic Backup facility the user should 'check' the 'Auto Save All Data
every' check box and type in a value into the 'Minutes' text entry box to set the time interval
for auto-saves.
Clicking the 'OK' button applies the changes to the current session, but does not save the
settings for subsequent sessions.
Check the 'Ask Before Each Save' Box to prompt the user each time IP attempts to
automatically save all the Well Data. The following Dialog will be displayed each time IP
attempts to automatically save the Well Data.
Click 'Yes' to Automatically Save All the Well Data.
Related Topics
New Database
Open Database
Section 2.9 Database Management : Auto Save Options
Database Management
Senergy

Auto Save
Printer Setup
Section 2.9 Database Management : Auto Save Options
38
39
2.10
Senergy
Printer Setup
The 'Printer Setup' menu item will bring up the standard WINDOWS printer selection dialog
where the default printer for IP can be selected for this session.
This printer will be used for all printer output, except the Log Plot displays, in the case of Log
Plots a different output device can be selected by the user from the hardcopy dialog screen.
Related Topics
New Database
Open Database
Auto Save
Printer Setup
Section 2.10 Database Management : Printer Setup
Section
3
Well Management
41
Senergy
Well Management
The 'Well Management' options, highlighted in blue in the following screen capture, allow the
user to load, create, display and close wells in IP and to edit well name and well location data.
IP will allow the user to have up to 2000 wells loaded into memory at any one time, depending on
the amount of RAM your PC has. A PC with 512Mb of RAM will be sufficient to load and work on
wells containing conventional curve data. A minimum of 2Gb of RAM will be required if you are
working with acoustic/electric image data.
Related Topics
Create New Well
Load Wells from Database
Select Well to Display
Well - Save Current Well As...
Create / Edit Well List
Close Well
Delete Well
Reset Current Well
Manage Well Header Info.
Date Time Format Setup
Section 3.
Well Management :
Well Management
Senergy
3.1
42
Date Time Wells
The New Date Time Well Feature in Interactive Petrophysics v3.6 enables the user to load and
interpret well log data that has been recorded by Date and Time. Data will normally come from
LWD or MWD surveys.
The Date Time fields in a survey data file, can take many forms. Full customization of the Date
and Time field is available prior to loading the well log data. By viewing the data file before loading
using a text editing application, for example, Notepad, you can then establish the Date Time
format required for loading the well log data.
Related Topics
Create a New Well using the Date Time Format
Define the Well Default Date Time Format
Import a Well Log Data file into a Date Time Well
Import an ASCII data file into a Date Time Well
Import a LAS/LBS Datas file into a Date Time Well
Create a Date Time Log Plot
Output Time Curves to a Depth Curve
3.1.1
Create a New Well using the Date Time Reference
The Create New Well feature creates a new, empty well, within the selected Interactive
Petrophysics Database and enables the user to specify whether the Well Data is to be stored
using either a Depth, Time or Date Time reference. A Time well records the data with reference
to seconds or milliseconds. A Date Time well records the data with reference to the Year, Month,
Day, Hour, Minute and second.
To Create a New Well using a Date Time Reference:
1. From the Wells Menu, Select Create New Well to display the Create New Well Dialog.
2. Type the Well Name into the Well Name Field.
Note: The Well Comment can be appended to the Well Name in the Well Name text box, by
placing typing a space colon and then a space between the Well Name and the Well
Comment.
Section 3.1 Well Management : Date Time Wells
43
Senergy
For example '14/19-23 : Preliminary' will create a well name of '14/19-23' with a well
comment of 'Preliminary'.
3. Select the Units Drop Down Menu to select the Date Time Unit.
This will change the Top Depth/Time and the Bottom Depth/Time text boxes to a Date Time
format.
If the 'Top', 'Bottom', 'Step' and 'Units' boxes are left 'blank' then the well Depth/Time interval
will be taken from the first data file (ASCII, LAS) loaded into the well. This gives the user the
ability to allow the program to adapt the intervals in the well to the input file intervals.
Well Management
Senergy
44
If no wells are loaded at start-up or the database location is changed, a blank well is
automatically created. Therefore, the 'Create New Well' menu function does not need to be
run to load the first well into memory.
Creating a new well does not automatically create a new well in the database (database
disk file). This is only done when the well is saved to the database. The new well is initially
created only in memory.
4. From the Wells Menu, Choose Select Well to display the Select Well Dialog.
5. Select the required Well and Click OK to display the newly created well in the Database
Browser
Note: If the Database does not display in the Database Browser, Right Click the Browser
and Select Show/Hide, then Show Active Wells Only to display the Current Well in the
Database Browser.
45
Senergy
6. From the File Menu, Select Save Current Well As ... to display the Save Well dialog and
click OK to Save the Well to the Interactive Petrophysics v3.6 Database.
7. Select Import a Well Log Data file into a Date Time Well to load the Well Log Data into the
new Well.
Related Topics
Import a LAS Data file into a Date Time Well
Output Time Curves to a Depth Well
3.1.2
Define the Date Time Format for the Selected Well
The Date Time format window allows the setting of the format for display of the Date Time field in
all the IP modules including the Log Plot display.
The Date Time Format dialog contains the controls to uniquely define each aspect of the Date
and Time format and is divided into three sections, Date, Time and Date Time Separator.
The Date section enables you to display the Day, Month and Year individually or together and has
the ability to modify the Date format, the language the date will be displayed in and the separator
that appears between the Day, Month and the Year. If a different language is selected, this will be
Well Management
Senergy
46
displayed when either the Short Name or the Full Name in the Month format drop down list is
selected.
The Time section enables you to specify the format of the time field with the required data file,
providing options to display minutes, seconds and milli-seconds, and also the separator that
appears between them.
The Time Date Display section enables you to specify whether or not the time appears before the
date and also a separator that appears between the time and the date.
The default format of the Date and Time for each Well can be defined by using the Date Time
Format Setup option listed in the Wells Menu.
To specify the default Date and Time format for the selected well:
1. From the Database Browser, Select the Required Well.
2. From the Wells Menu, Select Date Time Format Setup to display the Date Time Format
Dialog.
47
Senergy
The Output Format display, shown at the bottom on the window, shows what will be
displayed in the log plot. The Editable Format display is what is displayed in all modules
where the user can edit the Date Time to select the interval over which to run the module.
Note: If the Date Time reference curve has not be setup when creating the well, the
following information dialog will be displayed.
Related Topics
Well Management
Senergy
3.1.3
48
Import Well Log Data to a Date Time Well
Data can be loaded into Date Time wells using either the ASCII or the LAS file loaders. The LIS
and DLIS loaders will currently not work (IP3.6).
Time files come with a multitude of different formats for the Date Time entry fields. Always
ensure the required data file is opened in a text editing application, for example Microsoft Notepad
prior to loading data into a Date Time well, so that comparisons can be made between the Text
File Date Format and the Data Loader Date Format to ensure that the data is accurately loaded.
Import an ASCII data file into a Date Time Well: The ASCII Data Loader enables ASCII format
delimited data to be imported into an IP well. ASCII Data files that separate the data columns
by using either a space, tab or comma to delimit the data columns can easily be imported
along with any custom defined column delimiter.
Import a LAS Data file into a Date Time Well: The LAS Data Loader enables Log ASCII
Standard (LAS) and Log Binary Standard (LBS) data files to be loaded into an IP Well. IP will
load either 'wrapped' or 'unwrapped' data from LAS files, versions 1.2 and 2.0 as well as LBS
files. LBS files are AS files with the data encoded in Binary format.
Related Topics
Output Time Curves to a Depth Well
3.1.3.1
Import ASCII Data to a Date Time Well
The ASCII Data Loader enables ASCII format delimited data to be imported into an IP well. ASCII
Data files that separate the data columns by using either a space, tab or comma to delimit the
data columns can easily be imported along with any custom defined column delimiter.
IP makes the assumption that decimal numbers use a decimal point as the delimiter. If the
decimal point is not used in the decimal numbers in the ASCII file to be imported, the data will not
be imported correctly.
49
Senergy
Date Time file format

The Date Time stamp in the ASCII file can be in several formats :
Date and Time in separate columns. The order can be Date,Time or Time,Date
Date and Time in the same column. The order can be Date,Time or Time,Date
Only Time column. Date is assumed from the start Date Time entry at the top of the form
Regardless of the format found it is important that the Date Time format is setup to mimic the
format in the file. See section 7 below.
To Import an ASCII data file using the ASCII Data Loader:

1. Open or create a New Date Time Well
2. From the Import/Export Menu, Select Load Data, ASCII Load to display the Load ASCII File
Dialog.
Well Management
Senergy
50
3. Browse to Select the required ASCII data file, and click OK to display the ASCII Load
Window.
Note: Interactive Petrophysics makes an initial analysis of the data contained in the ASCII
file and displays the data in the lower part of the ASCII Load window.
4. From the 'New Units' Drop Down Menu, Select Date Time to display the Start Time and
Stop Time Fields. Select the 'New Well Step' (if not setup when creating the new well), this
should be the same step as the input file.
Note: The Reference Depth Curve field will change to DateTime format and a Format Date
button will display in the Data Formatting section.
5. Specify the 'Start Time' and 'Stop Time' as recorded in the ASCII data file.
6. Click the Format Date Button to display the Date Time Format Dialog.
7. Modify the Date Time Format to match the Date and Time format in the ASCII data file.
51
Senergy
8. Click OK to display the Confirm dialog asking to Re-read input file with new date time
format, click Yes to re-read the ASCII data file with the new Date and Time format and
return to the ASCII Data Loader.
9. Specify the Data Formatting as contained in the ASCII data file.
10.Specify the Number of Data Columns contained in the ASCII data file and click Apply to set
the Number of input columns in the ASCII Data Loader.
11.Specify the line at which the data starts in the ASCII data file and click Apply to set the Data
starts at line field in the ASCII Data Loader.
12.Specify the line number to read the Curve Names from in the ASCII data file and click OK to
set the Read curve names from line field in the ASCII Data Loader. If not line contains the
proper curve names then these will have to be hand entered.
Note: The Curve Names will populate into the Data Parameters table.
Well Management
Senergy
52
The curve names for the Date and Time columns are important. The time column must be
labeled 'Time' and the date column 'Date'. If the Date Time is in one column the the
column must be labeled 'DateTime'. If the column headers are not labeled properly the
following error message will appear.
13.Specify the line number to read the Curve Units from in the ASCII data file and click OK to
set the Read curve units from line field in the ASCII Data Loader. If not line contains the
proper units names then these will have to be hand entered.
Note: The Curve Units will be populated into the Data Parameters Table.
14.Click the Load button to Load the ASCII data file into the selected Interactive Petrophysics
v3.6 Well.
Note: A message will be displayed in the Status Bar confirming the LAS file has been
successfully loaded.
15.The Curves will now be displayed in the selected well in the Database Browser.
16.Close the ASCII Load Window.
17. Create a Date Time Log Plot in the Interactive Petrophysics v3.6 Well.
More information on the ASCII loader can be found in the normal ASCII load help.
Related Topics
53
3.1.3.2
Senergy
Import LAS Data to a Date Time Well
The LAS Data Loader enables Log ASCII Standard (LAS) and Log Binary Standard (LBS) data
files to be loaded into an IP Well. IP will load either 'wrapped' or 'unwrapped' data from LAS files,
versions 1.2 and 2.0 as well as LBS files. LBS files are AS files with the data encoded in Binary
format.
Mulitple embedded Datasets with different step sizes from either individual wells or from multiple
wells within the same LAS file can be loaded.
Date Time file format

The Date Time stamp in the LAS file can be in several formats, it is necessary to open up the file
to view the format :
Date and Time in separate columns. The order can be Date,Time or Time,Date
Date and Time in the same column. The order can be Date,Time or Time,Date
Well Management
Senergy
54
Only Time column. Date is assumed from the start DateTime entry at the top of the form
Regardless of the format found it is important that the Date Time format is setup to mimic the
format in the file. See section 4 below.
To Import a LAS/LBS Data File using the LAS/LBS Data Loader

1. From the Input / Output menu, Select Load Data, LAS/LBS Load to display the Open Dialog.
2. Browse to Select the required LAS data file, and click OK to display the LAS/LBS Load
Window.
IP will populate the Data Parameters Table with the Data Parameters from the selected
LAS file.
Note: The selected LAS file name will be displayed in the Title Bar of the LAS/LBS Load
Window.
Note: The IP Well Units and the Reference Curve will display Date Time, the Interval to Load
will be displayed as a Time and Date format and a Format Date button will be displayed in
the bottom left corner of the LAS/LBS Load window.
55
Senergy
3. In the Data Parameters Table, Set the IP Name for the Time and Date fields. The curve
names for the Date and Time columns are important. The time row must be labeled 'Time'
and the date row 'Date'. If the DateTime is in one field the the row must be labeled
'DateTime'. If the row headers are not labeled properly the below error message will
appear.
4. Click the 'View File' button to open the LAS file and view the Date Time format. Click the
'Format Date' Button to display the Date Time Format Dialog, then set the Date and Time
format to the same format used in the LAS file.
5. Click Close to return to the LAS Load Window.

6. Type the Start Time and the Stop Time displayed in the LAS file into the Interval to Load
section of the LAS Load Window.
7. Click Load to Load the LAS file data into the Well.
Note: If a Curve already exists within the well, you will be prompted to either Overwrite,
Rename or No Load the existing or all duplicate curves.
Well Management
Senergy
56
8. The Curves will now be displayed in the selected Well in the Database Browser.
9. Close the LAS/LBS Load Window.

10.Create a Date Time Log Plot in the Interactive Petrophysics v3.6 Well.
More information on the LAS loader can be found in the normal LAS load help.
Related Topics
3.1.4
Interpret Date Time Data
Date Time (TOD) Wells are treated in IP the same as normal Depth Wells or Time Wells. All the
functions and modules that are available to Depth wells are available to TOD Wells. This
includes the User Formula, User Programming and the Interpretation Modules plus all the
visualization modules. Of course most of the Interpretation modules will make no sense to run
since most sensors are not on depth with each other.
In most modules the Top and Bottom interval to run the module over will be displayed as a Date
and Time entry.
57
Senergy
The Reference curves (the equivalent to the Depth curve in a Depth well) in TOD wells are called
'DateTime'. They have units of 'Time'. The values stored for the dates are double precision
floating point numbers which represents the number of days since 1st Jan 1900. The fraction
part of the number is the part days. If you view the numbers directly in IP they look like this :
The TOD curve was created in User Formula by copying the DateTime curve.
If you work directly with the DateTime curve in a User Formula, Multi-Line Formula or User
program then you will be working with values that represent the number of days since 1900.
Hence if you wanted to shift a DateTime curve by 2 days you would just add or subtract 2.0 from
its value.
The standard log plot works with TOD wells. Create a Date Time Log Plot
To view the TOD curve data in depth it is necessary to copy the data to a Depth Well. This is
Well Management
Senergy
58
done by the Output Time Curves to a Depth Well Module. This module allows you to specify the
Date Time as well as the Depth intervals to copy.
To copy data from a Depth well into a TOD well use the Copy Curves From Well module. This
will allow you to copy a Petrophysical analysis from the Depth well which can then be displayed
alongside the drilling data. When copying the data the user supplies the reference depth curve in
the TOD well, which is used to align the depth data to the Time data. This can mean that the
same depth data could be copied to many different Date Times in the TOD well, all having the
same depth.
Related Topics
59
Senergy

Copy Curves From Well
3.1.4.1
Create a Time of Day Log Plot
Once the required data has been loaded into the selected well, you are then able to create a Date
Time Log Plot based upon the Date Time Curve data that has previously been loaded into the
Interactive Petrophysics v3.6 Date Time well.
To create a Date Time Log Plot:
1. From the Database Browser, Click and Drag the 3 Tracks Blank Log Plot from the IP
Defaults Folder to Work Area 1 to display the Plot (3 Tracks Blank) Window.
2. From the Database Browser, Click and Drag the Date Time Curve to Track 1 of the Plot
Window.
3. From the Database Browser, Click and Drag the other required Curves to the required
Tracks in the Plot Window.
4. Click any Track Header to display the Log Plot Format Dialog then Click the All Tracks
Button to display the Curve Parameters for All the Tracks.
Well Management
Senergy
60
5. Modify the Curve Parameters to display the Date Time Curve Data as required.
Note: Click Apply in the Log Plot Format Dialog to Apply the Changes and Keep the Log Plot
Format Dialog open. Click OK in the Log Plot Format Dialog to Apply the Changes and
Close the Log Plot Format Dialog.
6. From the Log Plot Menu, Select Save Plot Format to display the Write Plot Format to Disk
Dialog.
61
Senergy
The Log Plot will now be displayed in the Database Browser and the Log Plot File Name
displayed in the Title Bar of the Log Plot.
Related Topics
Import a LAS/LBS Datas file into a Date Time Well
3.1.5
Export Time Curves to a Depth Well
Interactive Petrophysics v3.6 enables Date Time Curve data to be copied into a Depth Well within
the same Database as the Date Time Well.
The module allows the user to select a time and a depth interval over which to copy the Data.
Since in a DateTime well it is possible, and usually likely, that you will have multiple data values at
one depth the module offers different methods of selecting which data to copy to the depth well.
The module allows the user to create multiple Depth Time intervals. This allows LWD data from
different dates but the same interval to be copied. Using this technique one could monitor the
invasion profile of a zone over time as the LWD sensors pass the zone, firstly while drilling, and
then later while coming in or out of the hole during a pipe trip.
To Output Time Curves to a Depth Well

1. From the Input / Output Menu, Select Output Time Curves to Depth Well to display the Time
to Depth Window.
Well Management
Senergy
62
2. Select the Plot Setup Tab in the lower half of the Time to Depth Window to display the Plot
Setup Parameters.
3. In the Plot Setup Tab, Specify the Parameters for the Primary Depth and Secondary Y Axis
Curves (this is optional but can be useful for selecting the right data), the Top and Bottom
Values for both, and the Start and Stop Time. The primary Y axis Depth curve is the curve
which is used to align the Time data well to the Depth data well and hence must be the
drilling depth associated with all the curves that are to be copied.
Note: As the fields are edited in the Plot Setup Tab, the Time Depth Plot will be modified.
The plot has several options for zooming and scrolling :

Right mouse click on the plot and hold down, drag the plot left/right/up/down.
Place the cursor on an axis (Left, Right or Bottom axis) click and hold, and the axis can
be dragged up/down or left/right.
To zoom : Left mouse click and hold. Select an area from top right to bottom left.
To un-zoom : Left mouse click and hold. Select an area from bottom left to top right.
Any area can be selected for the un-zoom.
63
Senergy
To zoom only the X axis or Y axis unclick the tick boxes at the base of the plot and use
the same zoom function as above.
4. Select the Copy Data Tab in the lower half of the Time to Depth Window to display the Copy
Data Parameters.
5. Specify the Copy Interval of the Time Curve to be copied into the Depth Well. Multiple
intervals can be created by clicking the 'New Interval' button. This can be done manually or
interactively using the red lines on the plot.
Note: As the Copy Interval fields are edited in the Copy Setup Tab, the Time Depth Plot will
be modified.
6. Specify the Depth Well to Copy the Time Curves into; Well Name, Curve Sets, Depth
Interval and Copy Options.
The New Well button will create a new Depth well in the same database using the entered
depths. The name will be the same as the Time well's name, with the added '- Depth'
string appended.
Since there could be multiple data points at an individual depth the 'Data averaging
method' drop down allows the use to select the required methodology. The options are :
Mean : This will take the average value of all data points at the depth.
Median : This will take the median (middle) value of all data points at the depth. This is
useful for eliminating spikes.
Earliest Time : This will take the first value. Useful for drilling type data like Rate of
Penetration or RPM where you are interested in the value when the drill bit drills the
formation and not any value when reaming or tripping.
Latest Time : This will take the last value recorded at the depth.
When discriminators are used the data at a depth will first have to pass the discriminators
Well Management
Senergy
64
and what is left will be averaged using the selected method.

The 'Fill data gaps' if turned on will extrapolate depth gaps in curves in the depth well.
The user can set the maximum gap width, which allows only small gaps to be filled.
The Time Depth Plot will display the Depth Time Interval as a colored block. The block can
be changed interactively by dragging the red lines at the edges. Multiple intervals will be
shown in different colors.
7. Specify the Source and Destination Curve Names to be copied into the Depth Well plus any
Sensor Length.
In order to put the different LWD sensors on depth the user must specify the distance from
the sensor measure point to the bottom of the drill string, where the depth measurement is
taken. The Sensor Length is stored and is editable from the Curve header module. The
sensor lengths will come from the drilling contractors reports.
8. Specify any Discriminators to apply to the Time Curve Data prior to loading into the Depth
Well. The data has to pass the discriminator test to be included in the data being copied.
65
Senergy
In the above example, the BONB (Bit On Bottom) curve reads 0.0 when drilling and 1.0
when off bottom. Setting the discriminator as above will only copy the data recorded when
drilling.
9. Click Run to Copy the Time Curve Data into the Depth Well.
10.From the Well Menu, Click Select Well to display the Select Well Dialog.
11.Click OK to display the Depth Well in the Database Browser.
Well Management
Senergy
66
12.The copied Curve Data will be displayed in the Curve Set selected in the Time to Depth
Window.
Related Topics
Import a LAS/LBS Data file into a Date Time Well
67
3.2
Senergy
The 'Load Wells from Database' option will allow the user to load wells into memory, where
they can be worked on in IP. The selected wells in the IP database will be listed in a window
similar to that shown below. When the window is launched, wells that are currently loaded into
memory will be highlighted with a blue background colour. If well security has been set up using
the 'Well Security' module then the screen may look very different to that shown below.
To Load wells into Memory:

Highlight the wells in the list that you want to load into memory, using one of the following options:
'Click' on the 'Select All' button. 'Click' the 'Load' button, or
Highlight an individual well to load. 'Click' the 'Load' button, or
'Click' on a well and, holding down the 'Shift' key, 'click' on a well further up/down the list to
select all wells between the two end wells.'Click' on 'Load', or
'Click' on a well and, holding down the 'Ctrl' key, 'click' on additional wells in the list to select
them individually.'Click' on 'Load'.
The 'Well #', shown in the left-hand column of the table, corresponds to the IP 'Database well
number'. This is used in naming the binary data files (IPDBWellXXXX.DAT) which store all the
curves, parameter sets and plot formats for each IP well. The 'Database Well Number' is a
common feature in many IP windows and is used to switch between wells on the main menu '
Well counter', illustrated below. Also, any 'Select Well' dialog will list the 'Database Well
Number ' along with the 'Well Name'.
Section 3.2 Well Management : Load Wells from Database
Senergy
Well Management
68
The available wells list in the 'Load Wells from Database' interface can be sorted by any of the
fields displayed in the window using the 'Primary Sort Order' drop-down list. 'The Secondary
Sort Order' can be used to refine the sorting order of the 'Primary Sort Order' list.
69
Senergy
The well API and UWI number can now be seen on the well loader screen by 'clicking' 'Display
Well API' and 'Display Well UWI'. The wells can also be sorted by API and UWI. The column
headers are now resizable which facilitates the display of long well names.
The sort order can be reversed by 'clicking' the 'Reverse sort' box. Alternatively, by 'clicking' on a
column header the column list will be sorted in ascending/descending order depending on the
data type. 'Clicking' on the column header again reverses the sort.
Saving Well Lists:

The 'Save Well List' and 'Load Well List' buttons allow the user to create and save a list of wells
and then restore them at a later date. This can be useful if there are many wells in the database
and the user only wants to work on a subset of the wells at any one time. NOTE: the well list will
include all selected wells plus wells already loaded in memory.
To save a well list of unloaded wells - highlight the wells to be included in the list and then
click the 'Save Well List' button.
To save a well list of loaded wells - just click the 'Save Well List' button. This assumes that
Well Management
Senergy
70
the user only has the wells loaded that the user wants to make a list from. If the user has
many loaded wells and only wants to make a list of certain wells then the user will have to
close all wells (go to Database Browser, highlight all wells and right-mouse button click to
display menu and select 'Close Well(s)'). Open the 'Load Wells from Database' and
select the wells for the list and 'click' the 'Save Well List' button. Once the list has been
created, 'Select All' and 'Load' to populate the Database Browser again.
To load the well list click the 'Load Well List' button, which launches a 'browser' window in
the IP project directory. Browse to the directory / folder where you saved the well list and
select the required list.
The 'Print' button allows the user to output the database well list to a printer, disk file or into the
clipboard for inclusion in another document.
Related Topics
Create New Well
Close Well
Delete Well
Reset Current Well
71
3.3
Senergy
Create New Well
The 'Create New Well' menu function will automatically create a new, empty well and display the
'Create New Well' window. This allows the user to set the well name and depth/time intervals
and depth Units for the well.
The 'Well Comment' (see 'Manage Well Header Info.') can be set from the 'Well Name' box
by placing a colon, with a space before and after, ( : ) after the well name and appending the well
comment. For example '14/19-23 : Preliminary' will create a well name of '14/19-23' with a well
If the 'Top', 'Bottom', 'Step' and 'Units' boxes are left 'blank' then the well Depth/Time interval
will be taken from the first data file (ASCII, LAS, LIS, DLIS) loaded into the well. This gives the
user the ability to allow the program to adapt the intervals in the well to the input file intervals.
If no wells are loaded at start-up or the database location is changed, a blank well is automatically
created. Therefore, the 'Create New Well' menu function does not need to be run to load the first
well into memory.
Creating a new well does not automatically create a new well in the database (database
disk file). This is only done when the well is saved to the database. The new well is initially
created only in memory.
Related Topics
Create New Well
Section 3.3 Well Management : Create New Well
Well Management
Senergy

Close Well
Delete Well
Reset Current Well
Section 3.3 Well Management : Create New Well
72
73
3.4
Senergy
The 'Select Well to Display' option allows the user to select a well to be displayed, for example,
in a log plot or to be worked on using the editing and interpretation modules. The selected well will
subsequently become the 'active well' for any new IP module that is launched. The 'Well Name'
is displayed on the title bar of the main IP window, and in any secondary, interpretation windows
that are processing this well.
The 'Database Well Number' is displayed, in brackets, at the beginning of each line. A 'negative
' database well number means that the well does not currently exist in the database, only in
memory. This 'negative' number will change to a 'positive' database well number after the well
has been saved / added to the database. For example, in the following screen shot, two wells
have negative database numbers (-5) and (-6), meaning that they exist only in memory.
Section 3.4 Well Management : Select Well to Display
Well Management
Senergy
74
The current, in-memory well can also be changed either :

by clicking on the left / right arrows next to the 'Well' number on the main menu bar.
by using the F11 (up) and F12 (down) keys.
by typing the 'Database Well Number' you wish to see, into the 'Well' box.
The currently-displayed well name is also shown at the base of the main IP window along with its
database number.
The example 'captured' above shows that well A5 is the currently-selected well and it is database
well number '76' in the 'MultiWell test' database.
Select - Well List

In each of the modules listed below there is a 'Select - Well List' or 'Advanced Well Select'
option. This opens a 'Select Wells' module which allows the user to select wells from currently
loaded database wells and then to save the selected wells to a well list file.
'Multi-Well Batch Operation'
'Multi-Well Cutoff and Summation'
'Multi-Well Correlation'
'Multi-well Curve Statistics'
75
Senergy
'Manage Multi-Well Header Info'

'Manage Multi-Well Curve Sets'
'Multi-Well Histogram'
'Multi-Well Crossplot'
NOTE: well lists can also be created in the 'Well'
'Load Wells from Database' module.
The well list file can then be recalled in the two modules listed below as well as all the modules
listed above.
'Multi-well Parameter Distribution'
'Multi-Well Change Parameters'
Creating well lists is very easy to do. Wells must be loaded in memory so that they will appear in
the 'Available Wells' column of the 'Select Wells' module. The 'Available Wells' can be
dragged across individually using the mouse into the 'Selected Wells' column or a number of
wells can be selected using the left mouse button and the 'Shift' key and then dragged across.
They can also be selected individually using the chevron key '>' or collectively using the double
chevron key '>>'. It is also now possible to select wells by double clicking on the well in the '
Available Wells' list and it will automatically move to the 'Selected Wells' list.
The 'Sort' check box allows the user to arrange the 'Available wells' list in ascending alphabetic
order, making the selection of individual wells easier when many wells are loaded in memory.The
well selection is confirmed by clicking the 'OK' button.
Once the wells have been chosen use the 'Save Well List' to open the 'Save Well List' module.
Browse to a relevant folder; the default folder is the active database project folder, and enter a
name for the well list and click 'Save'.
Well Management
Senergy
To retrieve a saved well list 'click' on the 'Select Well List' and the 'Load Well List' Module
appears with any saved wells lists appearing as *.wst files.
76
77
Related Topics
Create New Well
Close Well
Delete Well
Reset Current Well
Senergy
Well Management
Senergy
3.5
78
The 'Save Current Well As...' module can be accessed from the 'File' and 'Well' menu items.
There are three options available when using the Save Current Well As Module.
Update Selected Well in Database
Click OK to Update the Selected Well in the Current Database

Create a New Well in the Current Database
Section 3.5 Well Management : Well - Save Current Well As...
79
Senergy
Specify the Database Well Number (if a User-Defined Numbering System is in use), Specify
the New Well Name and Well Comment, Click OK to Save the New Well in the Current
Database.
Create a New Well in another Database
Specify the Database Well Number (if a User-Defined Numbering System is in use), Specify
the Alternate Database Name, New Well Name and Well Comment, Click OK to Save the
New Well in the Alternate Database.
Related Topics
Create New Well
Close Well
Well Management
Senergy
Delete Well
Reset Current Well
80
81
3.6
Senergy
IP uses the Create / Edit Well List feature to Create New or Edit existing Well Lists. Well Lists
are used to select wells in a large multi-well project. Some Example Well Lists are: All the Cored
Wells in a Field, All the Wells in a Block or All Wet Wells.
From the Well Menu, Select Create / Edit Well List to display the Make or Edit Well List
Dialog.
Select the required Well(s) from the Available Wells List, and Click the Move Button to Move
the Selected Well(s) to the Selected Wells List.
Section 3.6 Well Management : Create / Edit Well List
Well Management
Senergy
82
In the Display with Well Name Box, Select the required Well Header Properties to be
displayed with the Well Name in the Available Wells and Selected Wells List.
Click the All Wells in Database Checkbox to display All Database Wells in the Available
Wells List.
Click the Make Well List Button to Display the Save Well List Dialog and Save the Selected
Wells List to a Well List File (*.wst).
Click the Load Well List Button to Load a Previously Saved Well List File (*.wst) into the
Selected Wells List.
NOTE: The Well Lists Dialog can also be launched from the Select Wells Dialog. The
Select Wells Dialog is Launched from the Advanced Interpretation Modules.
The Create Well List Dialog can be launched from the following IP Modules:
Well > Load Wells From Database
Well > Create/Edit Well List
Well > MW Options > Manage Multi-Well Header Info
Well > MW Options > Manage Multi-Well Curve Sets
Well > MW Options > Manage Multi-Well Curve Header
View > Multi-Curve Crossplot
View > Multi-Well Correlation
View > Multi-Well Curve Statistics
Interpretation > Multi-Well Cutoff and Summation
Advanced Interpretation > Fuzzy Logic
Advanced Interpretation > Multi-Linear Regression
83
Advanced Interpretation > Neural Networks

Advanced Interpretation > Cluster Analysis
Advanced Interpretation > Principal Component Analysis
The Load Well List Dialog can be launched from the following IP Modules:
Well > Load Wells From Database
Well > Create/Edit Well List
Well > MW Options > Manage Multi-Well Header Info
Well > MW Options > Manage Multi-Well Curve Sets
Well > MW Options > Manage Multi-Well Curve Header
View > Multi-Curve Crossplot
View > Multi-Well Correlation
View > Multi-Well Curve Statistics
Interpretation > Multi-Well Cutoff and Summation
Advanced Interpretation > Fuzzy Logic
Advanced Interpretation > Multi-Linear Regression
Advanced Interpretation > Neural Networks
Advanced Interpretation > Cluster Analysis
Advanced Interpretation > Principal Component Analysis
Multi-Well > Parameter Distribution
Multi-Well > Multi-Well Batch
Multi-Well > Change Parameters
Related Topics
Create New Well
Close Well
Delete Well
Reset Current Well
Senergy
Well Management
Senergy
3.7
84
Close Well
'Close well' allows you to remove an 'in-memory' well from RAM and optionally save any updates
you might have made to the well to the IP database.
Select the well or wells you wish to close and remove from memory (use SHIFT or CTRL
keyboard keys and mouse button to highlight multiple wells) and 'click' the 'OK' button. You will
be asked to confirm whether the wells should be saved to the database. If the user selects 'No'
then the wells won't be saved and will not be available the next time the user opens up IP with
that database.
Related Topics
Create New Well
Section 3.7 Well Management : Close Well
85
Close Well
Delete Well
Reset Current Well
Section 3.7 Well Management : Close Well
Senergy
Well Management
Senergy
3.8
86
Delete Well
This menu option allows you to entirely remove a well and all its sub-folders and associated files
from within an IP database. NOTE: when this option is used not only will the IPDBWellxxxx.dat
file be deleted but also the Wellxxxx folder plus the contents of the folder.
Select the well(s) you want to delete and click the 'Delete' button. This deletes the database
well.
If a selected well is currently loaded into memory the 'Delete' operation does not remove this well
from memory, it just flags the well as not loaded from the database. In this case, the user must
first use the 'Close Well' menu option to take the well out of memory. Then choose the 'Delete
Well From Database' menu option, select the well and click 'Delete'.
Related Topics
Create New Well
Close Well
Delete Well
Reset Current Well
Section 3.8 Well Management : Delete Well
87
3.9
Senergy
Reset Current Well
The 'Reset Current Well' option allows the user to undo all the operations performed on the
current well in memory, back to the last time that the 'Save All Wells to database' or 'Save
current well to database As' option was executed. The 'Reset Current Well' function closes
the current well and re-opens it to its' 'last-saved' condition.
The user is prompted to confirm the intended operation.
Related Topics
Create New Well
Close Well
Delete Well
Reset Current Well
Section 3.9 Well Management : Reset Current Well
Well Management
Senergy
3.10
88
The 'Manage Well Header Info.' module allows the user to enter and save well 'Cultural'
information and other important 'Position', petrophysical 'Default Parameters' and 'Logging'
data fields for wells loaded to an IP database. There is also a 'History' button which will allow the
user to display changes made to the well curves by different IP users connected to the same
database.
Well Header data can be loaded to IP in a number of ways:
manually typing in text into the text-entry boxes for each database well.
bulk loading header information for multiple wells from an external ASCII text file, using the '
Load Well Attributes' module. The external file can be space-, tab, comma-delimited or in a
'Fixed' format.
loading header data from external data files (LAS, LIS, DLIS).
loading header data from external databases using IP's 'External Database Connection'
functionality.
loading header data from an external database via an OpenSpirit Connection.
The 'Manage Well Header Info.' module has been re-engineered in IP V3.3 and later versions to
be 'user-configurable'. This means that the user has control over certain (editable) well data '
attributes' that are available for a well. 'Attributes' are parameters associated with a well and
they can be divided into 'Cultural Attributes' or 'Log Attributes'.
'Cultural Attributes' are parameters to do with well ownership, location, operating dates
etc.. and include such parameters as 'Operating Company', 'Location', 'Spud Date' - all
those options found on the 'General' tab within this module.
'Log Attributes' include those 'logging' parameters found in the header sections of digital
log curve (LAS, LIS, DLIS) files. Parameters such as 'Log Run Number', 'Mud Resistivity',
'Mud Filtrate Resistivity' are examples of 'Log attributes'. These data types are stored in
the 'Logging' tab within this module. In addition, well location information (Latitude /
Longitude, UTM easting / UTM Northing & UTM Zone) are loaded into the 'Position' tab. Rig
reference elevations, water depths and log measurement datum's are stored as attributes
that can be viewed on the 'Default Parameters' tab.
Using the 'Tools' menu - 'Options' menu item, the user has the ability to 'add' attributes, set
'Alias' names or 'delete' attributes as necessary. See the 'Options' chapter, 'Well Options' and '
File Loader' topics for a full discussion of this functionality.
Section 3.10 Well Management : Manage Well Header Info.
89
Senergy
'Well Header' information can be manually entered into 6 'tabbed' screens. These are:
'General'
'Position'
'Default Parameters'
'Logging'
'Plot Remarks'
'Plot Annotations'
'General' Tab
The 'General' tab allows the user to set up ''Cultural information about a well, including its Well
Name, Operating Company, Spud Date etc...
The 'Well Comment' field is used to distinguish IP database wells which have the same physical
well names. For example the user might perform a preliminary interpretation on a well and then
carry out a 'final' interpretation. If the interpretations are both kept as separate wells in the IP
database then the well comment field could be used to distinguish between them. For example
one could have a comment field of 'Preliminary' and the other 'Final'.
From the 'Comment with Well' drop-down menu four options are available:
'None'
'Well Comment'
'API'
'UWI'
Depending on which is chosen then, within the program, anywhere the well name is displayed
Well Management
Senergy
90
the 'Comment' is appended to the end of the well name (as shown in the screen below). This is
useful if two IP database wells have the same physical well name, since it allows the user to very
easily tell them apart. For the log plot hardcopy output there is an option on the output set-up
screen to override this option.
The 'History' button will take the user to the 'History' module. A screen similar to the one below
will be displayed.
'Position' Tab
The 'Position' tab allows the user to enter well positioning information, which will enable the well
to be viewed in the 'Well Map' and '3D Parameter Viewer' displays. If the 'Well Surface Position
' boxes are empty, loading an LIS, DLIS or LAS file, with Latitude and Longitude (LATI/LONG)
fields in the respective File headers, will automatically fill in the Lat - Long boxes on the '
Positions' tab.
The Lat - Long (DMS) radio button is for coordinates in degrees, minutes and seconds. Whilst
the Lat - Long (DD) radio button is for degrees in decimal format.
NOTE: if the subject well is in the southern hemisphere, the Latitude value will be loaded as
XXXXXX S (South). If the UTMs radio button is toggled on, the corresponding UTM Northing will
be prefixed by the '-' minus symbol to designate a southern hemisphere position.
91
Senergy
NOTE: if rectangular co-ordinates (UTM) have been mistakenly used as the LATI and LONG
fields in the input LIS or LAS file header, IP will not accept/load them. The user must then
manually type in the surface position UTM co-ordinates and specify a 'Zone' number in the
appropriate boxes, after 'checking' the 'UTMs' radio button.
'Well Path' information, in terms of TVD reference curve and 'East Distance Curve' and 'North
Distance Curve' from the surface location can be entered here. If the IP TVD Calculations
module has been run for the well, these boxes will automatically pick up the calculated curves
EDIST and NDIST, as long as the default curve names EDIST, NDIST, TVD and TVDSS are
used. The user must select the TVD / TVDSS curve and 'Curve Type'.
The user can choose the 'default' Well Surface Position display type (latitude/ longitude or UTM
coordinates & Zone) for all wells in a database by selecting the Display type from the 'Well
Options' dialog of the 'Options' module.
'Default Parameters' Tab

The 'Default Parameters' tab allows the user to set values which are then used to populate
modules that use these parameters/values. When loading log curves from LAS, LIS and DLIS
format files, some parameters/values will be read from the file header. The parameters that are
read into IP are listed under the Data Loading: LAS /LBS File input and LIS File Input sections.
Well Management
Senergy
92
NOTE: The 'Logging Contractor' drop-down list serves an important function within IP.
Setting the 'Logging Contractor' to one of the listed companies will set up that company's
Neutron/Density crossplot overlays when a crossplot from within the Porosity/ Sw module is
subsequently displayed.
The choice of 'Logging Contractor' sets up the 'Neutron Tool Type' parameter for use in the
'Neutron Porosity' calculation in the Basic Log Analysis module and in the Mineral Solver
module.
The 'Logging Contractor' also sets up the default Neutron Tool Look-up tables which are
used to correct Limestone matrix porosities to a Sandstone or dolomite matrix and to correct
for formation salinity.
'Logging' Tab
The 'Logging' tab is used to store Logging Run parameter information (log attributes) and mud
data for up to 25 logging runs. The List of Logging Attributes is editable and extendable and, using
the 'Tools' menu
'Options' menu item the user can modify the attributes that can be stored in
IP. If the 'Default Parameters' tab 'mud data' boxes (Rm, Rmf, Rmc, Rw and their respective
temperatures) are blank, on the 'Default Parameters' tab, they can be populated directly from
this form when appropriate log header information is loaded to IP.
93
Senergy
The 'Logging' tab is populated automatically from the data loading modules (LAS, LIS, DLIS
Loaders). The user selects the logging run (column) into which to load the data from the data
loader window. An example from the LAS loader screen is shown below.
If a Logging parameter is currently not captured and stored within IP, the user can use the 'Tools'
'Options' functionality to set up a new log attribute and 'map' the external mnemonic to the IP
log attribute name, so that the attribute can be saved within the IP database. See the 'Options'
chapter for a full discussion of IP Well Attributes and Log Attributes.
'Plot Remarks' Tab
Well Management
Senergy
94
On this tab the user has the facility to enter well specific log header remarks. These will then be
used for each 'Log Plot Header' if the 'Header Remarks' is 'checked' on within the 'Plot Header'
tab of the 'Plot output' module and a 'Plot Header' is selected.
If the user now opens up a log plot and the 'Plot output' module, under the 'Plot Header' tab
they will see the entered remarks in the 'Header Remark Text' section at the bottom of the page.
95
Senergy
The user could add more comments to the 'Header Remarks' if required and if the user wanted
the additional comments to be available to all their well plots then the user should click on the "+"
button 'Add to Defaults'. This will then add the comment to the 'Plot Remarks' tab of the '
Manage Well Header Info' module.
If the user does not want to use certain comments then 'uncheck' the 'Select' box next to the
comment.
'Plot Annotations' Tab

Log Plot annotations can be stored on a well by well basis. They can then be loaded onto log
plots, as required. The 'Manage Well Header Info' 'Plot Annotations' tab allows the user to edit
the stored well annotations. There is more information on 'Annotations' in the Log Plot Display
help chapter.
Well Management
Senergy
Related Topics
Create New Well
Close Well
Delete Well
Reset Current Well
96
97
3.11
Senergy
History Module
The 'History Module' has been developed in order that users can keep track of changes made to
curves and wells within IP.
The 'History Module' can be accessed via:
'Manage Well Header Info.' module, 'General' tab.
'Manage Log Curve Headers' module, 'History' tab.
'Manage Well Header Info'

From within the 'Manage Well Header Info.' module and from the 'General' tab, there is a '
History' button. 'Clicking' on this brings up the following screen:
This is a list of relevant selected IP 'history events' that have occurred within the 'Active' well
since the well's creation in the IP database. The 'history events' are listed in rows with a number
of columns detailing the history. It is possible to sort, check for differences and remove 'history
events' from within this module.
Due to Interactive Petrophysics' complexity the 'History' module can easily attain a huge
number of 'history events' very quickly. Therefore, there are numerous ways within the module of
filtering the 'history event' information so that the user can quickly find the information that they
require. The first layer of filtering is by using the 'Show' button. Once the user has decided to
filter by well or curves then the second line of filtering can be deployed by filtering on event 'ID' or '
Event' name or 'Date' or specific 'Well/Curve_Name' or 'User_name' or 'Comments'. Plus,
there is a 'Row Filter Options', which is found at the bottom of the 'History' module window.
Underneath the window header are a number of buttons, 'Show', 'Delete', 'Difference', 'Run
Report' and 'Parameters'. These will be described in more detail below.
The 'Show' button has a drop-down menu which allows the user to 'Show All', 'Show
Curves' or 'Show Wells'.
Selecting 'Show All' will show all 'history events'.
If 'Show Curves' is selected then all the curves which have had alterations made to them
Section 3.11 Well Management : History Module
Well Management
Senergy
98
will be displayed.
Filtering using the 'Show Wells' will just show the events associated with the well name.
'Delete' button allows the user to permanently remove the selected rows from the history.
The 'Difference' button only becomes active when just two event 'Type' parameter
generating rows are selected (rows can be selected by 'clicking' on them and using the
usual 'Shift' or 'Ctrl' keyboard buttons to select many rows or individual rows). The event
'Type' has to be the same for both the rows selected. When the 'Difference' button is
clicked a program called 'ExamDiff' opens. This is a freeware visual file comparison tool.
This following screenshot displays the ExamDiff window with the differences between the two
selected event type Trend Curve's.
'Run Report' button

'Parameters' button displays a screen capture of the parameters set for the selected type
event. NOTE: the 'Parameters' button will only be active for type events which produce
parameters, such as 'PhiSw', 'Clay Vol' etc.
Under the buttons are a list of column headers. Common to all the column headers is the ability
to sort the rows, ascending or descending, by left mouse button 'clicking' on the column header.
Further functionality of the column headings is discussed below.
99
Senergy
'ID' column - Right mouse button 'clicking' on the 'ID' column header brings up a
dialogue box where it is possible to 'Enter an Event ID number to search on'.
The event 'ID' is a means for the IP program to keep track of software events.
'Event' column - lists all the different 'history event' types that have happened to the well.
These include the running of interpretation modules, editing/depth-shifting modules,
loading and saving data. To see the events by 'type', right mouse button 'clicking' on the
'Event' column header displays a list of the event 'types'. 'Click' on the 'type' to select.
'Date' - This column lists the date on which the 'history event' took place. Right mouse
button 'clicking' on the 'Date' column header enables the user to filter the events by date.
The date filter options are 'Before selected Date', 'After selected Date' and 'Between
selected Dates'. The required dates can be either typed into the box or else the drop-down
button allows the date to be selected from an interactive calendar.
Well Management
Senergy
100
'Well/Curve_Name' - This column can show curves and / or wells depending on the
selection set in 'Show'. As the history module is only applicable to a single well then only
one well can be selected, the 'Active' well. However, if the 'Active' well has been renamed at
all then more than one well name may be displayed.
This column's main use is filtering on selected curves. Set 'Show' to 'Show curves' and then
right mouse button click on the 'Well/Curve_Name' column header. NOTE: the 'Row Filter
Options' has to be set to 'Filter on curves only'. It is then possible to select the curve by either
typing the name of the curve in the box or else using the drop-down list to select the curve from.
'Ticking' the 'Closest match on Well/Curve Name' will allow the user to type in a curve name
and even if it doesn't match any of the available curves exactly, a curve name closely matching
the entered name will be selected.
'User_Name' - Lists the users who have had interaction with the selected IP database.
'Comments' - These 'Comments' attempt to succinctly describe what changes have to
101
Senergy
taken place to the Well, Curve, User_Name within IP. Right mouse button clicking on the
'Column' header displays a dialogue box where it is possible to type in a text string to search
for within the 'Comments' column.
'Row Filter Options'
'Show Row Filter' - If 'Show Row Filter' is selected then a 'Row Filter' dialogue box appears
next to the 'Parameters' button. The selected 'Row Filter' is visible and user editable. Any
changes to the row filter can be applied by using the 'Apply' button.
See Below for example of using the Row Filter with the Comments Column:
'Manage Log Curve Headers'

The 'History' module can also be accessed from within the 'Manage Curve Headers', 'History'
tab by 'clicking' on the 'Show' button for a selected curve. The 'History' module opens with the
history for the selected curve. However, the module has the same functionality as that opened up
within the 'Manage Well Header Info.' module and any event can subsequently be selected by
using the 'Show All' option from within 'Show'.
Well Management
Senergy
102
Related Topics
Header Info.' module, 'General' tab.
ExamDiff
3.11.1 ExamDiff
ExamDiff This is a freeware Visual File Comparison Tool developed by PrestoSoft.
The program has many features and it is beyond the scope of this Help document to list them all.
However, the main icons are listed below with a brief description of their function.
- Enables user to select the two files that are to be compared.
- This re-compares the selected files.
- Use this icon to swap page position of the two selected files
- View/Edit the first file (left hand side of page).
- View/Edit the second file (right hand side of page).
- Saves just the differences between the two files into a user defined file and directory.
- Shows just the first file.
- Shows just the second file.
- Shows both files.
- Re-orientates the compared file pages so that they are either adjacent to each other or
else one on top of each other.
103
- Re-centres the 'splitter' bar.

- Shows just the differences between the two files.
- Moves to next difference up the page.
- Moves to next difference down the page.
- Current difference.
- Options
- Exit7
Related Topics
Header Info.' module, 'General' tab.
ExamDiff
Senergy
Well Management
Senergy
3.12
104
Delete Parameter Sets
Selecting the 'Delete Parameter Sets' option will delete an interpretation 'Parameter Set' from
the current, active well. This is helpful if the current 'Parameter Set' is found to be incorrect and
the user wants to start an interpretation again from the beginning. This will not delete any
Parameter Sets saved on the hard disk.
Only the 'Parameter Sets' associated with the currently-active well can be deleted.
'Other Sets' option - rather than have an exhaustive list of 'Parameter Sets' in the list, the 'Other
Sets' option, if 'clicked' will launch the 'Manage Zones / Tops' module, from which the user can
highlight the 'Parameter Set' to delete, then click the 'Delete' button.
If the 'Multi Well' box is ticked then all 'Parameter Sets' are displayed for all wells. This enables
Section 3.12 Well Management : Delete Parameter Sets
105
Senergy
fast deletion of 'Parameter Sets' across many wells - a warning message will appear before the
Sets are deleted.
Related Topics
Create New Well
Close Well
Delete Well
Reset Current Well
Section 3.12 Well Management : Delete Parameter Sets
Well Management
Senergy
3.13
106
Plot Range Editor
The 'Plot Range Editor' allows the user to define, save and recall multiple depth ranges and
associated vertical scales settings ('Plot Ranges'), linked to a textual description (max. 20
characters in length). A new 'Plot Range' is added to a list so that, when its' name is selected
from the log plot header, the active log plot will instantly update with the display characteristics of
the 'Plot Range' for the active IP well.
The module will allow the user to set 'Plot Ranges' to view, for example, over different reservoir
intervals, over multiple reservoirs, over cored intervals, or over a perforated interval. The 'Plot
Range' is applied to the current log plot by selecting a 'Range Name' from the drop-down list on
the log plot header.
Two Plot Range names are automatically created by IP. These are :
'[Whole Well]' - this will display the entire well at the 'Full' vertical scale.
'[Default Range]' - this will initially also display the entire well at the 'Full' vertical scale.
The user can edit the top and bottom depth entries and vertical scale to more appropriate
values.
IMPORTANT: Once the user has defined a [Default Range], any 'interactive' log plot,
which is subsequently launched from any of the IP program interpretation modules, will
automatically launch using the [Default Range] depths.
NOTE: If the user extends the depth range of a well, for example, by loading log curves
with a deeper 'Bottom Depth' than the initial depth set up, then the [Default Range] will
have to be manually edited to extend the bottom depth to the new value.
In the 'Mineral Solver' module the [Default Range] is used to initiate the interval for analysis
and to set the depths for the 'Model' interval. The user should therefore define the [Default
Range] before beginning an interpretation.
The square brackets '[ ]' around the 'Whole Well' and 'Default Range' plot range names
indicate that these names are non-editable.
All other user-created 'Plot Ranges' are fully editable.
User-defined 'Plot Ranges' can be set up using the shortcut 'Plot Range' Icon on the right
hand side of the log plot window, illustrated below.
Plot display dimensions can then be quickly changed by selecting another 'Plot Range' from
the list in the Log Plot Header, as illustrated below:
Section 3.13 Well Management : Plot Range Editor
107
Senergy
The 'Plot Range Editor' module is accessed in any of three ways:

from the IP program main menu bar 'Well' Menu,
from the 'Log Plot Menu' on the IP program main menu bar or,
from the Header bar on a Log Plot display window.
The top and bottom depths for a log plot display can be changed in the 'Plot Range Editor' in a
number of ways ;
by manually typing in depth values into the entry boxes, or
by pasting in depths from the IP clipboard (left mouse-button 'clicking' in a log track pastes
Well Management
Senergy
108
the depth of the 'click' into the clipboard, right mouse-click in the Top Depth or Bottom Depth
entry boxes, 'Paste', pastes the depth into the box, or
by selecting a 'Zone/Tops' Set and selecting Zone top and bottom depths, plus 'tolerances'.
Using a selected curve's top and bottom depths by using the 'Depth range from curve'
option.
Manual Depth Entries

Type the Top and Bottom depth values that you would like to use to define a log plot interval, and
select the vertical scale for the plot, in the editor window. Type in a 'Range Name' and 'click' the '
Apply' button.
Plot Range Select from Zone/Tops Set

Use the 'Select Zone/Tops Set' button to launch a dialog window which allows you to
choose an available 'Zone/Tops Set' or 'Parameter Set' from a drop-down list. Then define
the shallowest and deepest Tops that you wish to view in the log plot.
The 'Tolerance' boxes allow the user to type in values, which will be added to the selected
Top and Bottom Depths. In the example shown below the 'Tolerances' are set to start the
log plot 100ft above the Top RN36 (-100) and end the plot 50ft below the Bottom RN12 (50).
A negative 'Tolerance' value is subtracted from the associated Zone Top depth. A positive '
Tolerance' value is added to its associated Zone Top depth.
Click 'OK' to close the 'Select Plot Range' dialog.
The required 'Vertical Scale' can be selected from the drop-down list of appropriate values
on the right hand side of the Plot Range Editor window. If 'None' is selected then the vertical
scale for the plot range will be whatever is currently selected in the '[Whole Well]', '[Default
Well]' or some other defined plot range.
109
Senergy
Type in a 'Range Name' into the text entry box
If the 'Select Zones/Tops Set' functionality has been used, the 'Apply to all in-memory
wells containing these explicit tops' check-box will be 'activated'. This check box, if
'checked' provides the user with a quick way to set up the same 'Plot Range' in multiple
wells, if the in-memory wells contain the 'Zone/Tops Set' or 'Parameter Set' AND the wells
also contain the explicit Tops names selected to define the 'Plot Range'. This would allow
the user, for example, to define a 'Plot Range' over a reservoir section common to all wells
Well Management
Senergy
110
in a multi-well IP Project.
When the 'Apply' Button is 'clicked', an information window will be launched, similar to that
shown below, confirming how many wells have been updated with the new Plot Range.
The 'Depth range from curve' allows users to use a curve, which they know the top and
bottom depths of, to be used to define the plot range. For example, if the user only wanted to
display on a plot data from a particular LWD tool run then they would select a curve from the
LWD tool run and the range would reflect the top and bottom depths of that particular log
run.
Related Topics
Create New Well
111

Close Well
Delete Well
Reset Current Well
Senergy
Well Management
Senergy
3.14
112
Take Notes
The 'Take Notes' menu item is found at the bottom of the 'Well' menu.
The 'Take Notes' option, when selected, opens a 'Notepad'-type text editor in which the user can
record tips, notes and reminders regarding the well they are currently working on. The 'Notes'
stays on-screen and can be accessed at any point in an interpretation, to record the users
thoughts.
The 'default' text file has a number of titles already entered for various IP modules. These titles
can be edited and new titles added if necessary. When the user selects the 'Save' option, the
text file is saved into the appropriate WELLXXXX subdirectory, in a folder called 'WellNotes'.
If you change the well 'focus' in IP and select the 'Take Notes' option, IP will open the appropriate
'Notes' text editor for that particular well, if it exists, or a new, blank text file, ready for editing.
Section 3.14 Well Management : Take Notes
113
The 'Notes' can be easily output to a printer.
Related Topics
Create New Well
Close Well
Delete Well
Reset Current Well
Section 3.14 Well Management : Take Notes
Senergy
Section
4
Curve Management
115
Senergy
Curve Management
Interactive Petrophysics wells are currently able to store up to 1500 log curves, which can be
organized using curve 'Sets'. Up to 50 curve Sets can be created for each Interactive
Petrophysics well. Curve Sets can be saved with different Step Sizes and Depth Interval Ranges,
including Irregular Sampling (often used for Core Data Integration). With the addition of the
flexible Sets with varying Steps some Interactive Petrophysics modules will not allow data to be
input unless the data is of a certain Step.
Each IP Well can contain up to 1500 Log Curves
Each IP Well can contain up to 50 Curve Sets
Each IP Curve Set can contain up to 3 Million Depths
Curve data in Interactive Petrophysics is stored as floating point numbers, not as integers. A
curve value can have a discrete integer value but it will be saved as that value but in floating point
format. For example, 1 will be stored as 1.0000000.
Curve Management Tasks can be completed for a Single Well or for Multiple Wells.
Single Well Curve Management

Manage Curves and Curve Sets
Manage Curve Headers
Manage Zones / Tops
Link Zones / Tops Sets
Multiple Well Curve Management

Manage Multi-Well Well Header Info.
Manage Multi-Well Curve Sets
Manage Multi-Well Curve Headers
Manage Multi-Well Zones/ Tops
Section 4.
Curve Management :
Curve Management
Senergy
4.1
116
Manage Curves and Curve Sets
The Manage Curve Sets module is used to manage the creation and deletion of Interactive
Petrophysics Curve Sets. A maximum of 50 Curve Sets can be created per well.
To View the Manage Curve Sets dialog:
1. Either From the Well Menu, Select Manage Curve Sets or Click the
Set Manager
Button to view the Manage Curve Sets dialog.
Date Time Curve Sets

If the Selected Well is a Time of Day well, the Manage Curve Sets will display the Start Time and
the Stop Time for the Selected Curve Set. The Start and Stop Time can be changed using the Edit
Button for the Selected Curve Set in the Range Column of the Curve Set Definitions Table.
Related Topics
Create and Edit a New Curve Set
Section 4.1 Curve Management : Manage Curves and Curve Sets
117
Senergy
Add Sets from a Set Dictionary

Copy Curves from an Existing Set
Copy Curves from Well
Edit a Curve Set
Copy/Load Data into a Curve Set
Curve and Set Names
Curve Set Grouping
Curve Listing / Curve Edit
Curve Statistics
4.1.1
The Manage Curve Sets Dialog is used to Create New Curve Sets within Interactive
Petrophysics.
1. From the Manage Curve Sets Dialog, Type a New Short Name and Full Name in the next
blank row of the table and Click OK to Save the Curve Set Names.
Note: The Short Name is limited to 8 characters and it must be unique for the well.
Underscore characters can now be used in the Short Name. The Full name is a label for
describing the Set and can be of any length, although it is advisable to keep it short so that it
can be read on the various windows that display the Set Full Name.
Curve Management
Senergy
118
Note: When a new Short Name is entered, the Step column becomes active and the user
can select either to create a 'Regular' curve Set or an 'Irregular' curve Set by using the
drop-down menu. The regular curve Set will use the 'Default' depth curve as its depth
curve until this is changed. The irregular Set will create its own depth curve with no values
in it. Once the 'Update Sets' button is 'clicked' and the Set created then the user can only
change the Set step type by using the 'Edit' button.
2. To rename a Curve Set, Type the new Curve Set Name in the Curve Set Table and Click
Update Sets to Save the New Curve Set Name.
3. To delete a Curve Set, select the required Set, and then Click Delete Set.
Note: This will delete the Set and all the curves contained in the Set. If it is only curves that
need to be deleted, click the View Button for the required Set to list all the curves contained
in the set, select the required curve and Click Delete Curve.
119
Senergy
Related Topics
Edit a Curve Set
Curve and Set Names
Curve Set Grouping
Curve Statistics
4.1.2
The Interactive Petrophysics Manage Curve Sets module has the ability to create a Set
Dictionary, which contains a list of Set Names that can be used in multiple Interactive
Petrophysics databases.
The Set Dictionary contains a list of the Set Names, both Short and
Full Names, which can then be used in any Interactive Petrophysics database. Set Names
contained in the Set Dictionary can either be Default Names or User-Defined Names. The Set
Dictionary files are located in the Application Data Folder: C:\Documents and
Settings\Username\Local Settings\Application Data\IntPetro36. The file SetDictionary.xml
contains the User-defined Set Definitions and the file SampleSet Dictionary.xml contains the
Default Set Definitions.
To Open the Curve Set Dictionary:
1. Either Right Click the required Curve Set and Select Add Set Name to Set Dictionary to
display the Set Dictionary Dialog.
2. Or From the Manage Curve Sets Dialog, Select the Add Sets from Dictionary.
3. From the Set Dictionary, Type a new Curve Name, Full Name and Check Irregular if
required, Click Add to Save the New Curve Set to the Set Dictionary.
Senergy
Curve Management
120
4. To edit an existing Set Name, Double Click the Set Name to enable the Set Name Text
Boxes, Click Update to Save the Changes to the Set Dictionary List.
5. To Add a Selected Set to a Well, Select the Required Set and Click the Add Selected
121
Senergy
Sets to Well to add the Selected Set to the Manage Curve Sets dialog.
Note: The following Information Dialog will be displayed if the Selected Set already
exists in the Manage Curve Sets dialog.
Related Topics
Edit a Curve Set
Curve and Set Names
Curve Set Grouping
Curve Statistics
4.1.3
Curves can be copied or moved from one Curve Set to another using the Manage Curve Sets
Dialog using a Click and Drag Action.
1. Select the required Curve from the Selected Curve List, then Drag to the new Curve Set.
Curve Management
Senergy
122
Note: Select the required Action in the Drag Curves to New Set section.
Overwriting Existing Curves in IP

If the user loads a number of files to IP which contain data with the same curve mnemonics they
will be prompted that 'Curve XXXX already exists. OK to overwrite ?'.
The 'Overwrite' function in IP actually performs a 'replace and concatenate' operation, in effect
an 'Auto-Splice', NOT a 'replace whole of existing curve with new data'.
For example:
An IP well has a GDCORE curve loaded over the depth interval 0-3000 ft
A second DLIS file is loaded containing a curve GDCORE over the depth range 2500-6000ft
On loading the second file a Warning Dialog will be displayed asking to Overwrite any Existing
Curves.
Selecting 'Yes' or 'All' (if there are other curves with existing versions) will prompt IP to replace
the existing GDCORE curve from 2500-3000 ft and add/concatenate the new GDCORE
data from 3000-6000 ft to the existing curve.
If the user wants to completely replace the existing curve with a new curve you must first
delete the existing curve from the IP database and then load the new curve from an external
file.
Related Topics
123
Senergy

Edit a Curve Set
Curve and Set Names
Curve Set Grouping
Curve Statistics
4.1.4
Copy Curves from an Existing Well
The 'Copy Curves from Well' module allows the user to copy specified curves from well to
well, or within a single well, from one Curve Set to another. The destination and the source
wells must both be loaded in memory.
The user selects the 'Source Well' and the 'Destination Well'. The module will show the depth
ranges, units and database step for both wells. The 'Copy Depth Top' and 'Copy Depth
Bottom' can be changed from the well defaults so that only a section of a curve will be copied.
Curve Management
Senergy
124
The user selects the curves to copy by either dragging the curve from the 'Available Curves'
box to the 'Selected Curves' box, or by using the left and right arrow buttons. The curve name in
the destination well can be changed by either; editing the name under the 'IP Curve Name'
column or by appending a suffix to all curves by typing in the suffix in the 'Add to Name' box and
clicking the 'Add' button.
The Curve Set for the copied curves can be defined by using the Output Set button. This
shortcut menu enables the user to Create a New Set, Use the Default Set or Use an existing
Curve Set.
The 'Fill data gaps' check box will, if 'checked', fill any gaps in the copied curves by extrapolating
the data over the gaps. This can be useful if the two wells have different database step intervals.
The module can be used to make a duplicate of a curve in a single well. In this case the 'Source
Well' and the 'Destination Well' will be the same. The 'IP Curve Name' must either be changed
or the curve copied into another 'Curve Set' in the well. This operation can also now be
125
Senergy
performed from within the 'Manage Curve Sets' module.

The Copy Curve from Well module can also be used to copy curves from a Time of Day Well.
NOTE: It is important to ensure that the Source Well and the Destination Well are both Time of
Day Wells.
If the Source and Destination Wells are not the same type, for example Time of Day wells, the
following Error Dialog will be displayed.
Curve Management
Senergy
126
Delete Curves
The 'Delete Curves' window will allow the user to delete one or more curves from a well. If the '
Select All' button is chosen, it will select all curves in the current display. By using the 'Default
Set' button
the user can select curves by Set.
127
Related Topics
Edit a Curve Set
Curve and Set Names
Curve Set Grouping
Curve Statistics
Senergy
Curve Management
Senergy
4.1.5
128
Delete Curves
The 'Delete Curves' window will allow the user to delete one or more curves from a well. If the '
Select All' button is chosen, it will select all curves in the current display.
Related Topics
Edit a Curve Set
Curve and Set Names
Curve Set Grouping
Curve Statistics
129
4.1.6
Senergy
Edit a Curve Set
The Well Set Depths Editor can be opened from within the Manage Curve Sets Dialog,
providing the ability to convert the current well depth intervals (top and bottom depths), the data
sample (Step) Interval and provides the ability to specify Irregular Sampling.
To display the Well Set Depths Editor:
1. From the Manage Curve Sets Dialog, Click Edit, in the Range Column of the Table to
display the Well Set Depths Editor.
2. Type the new values into the Change To Section and Click Run to Save the Changes.
Note: To convert a well from imperial units (ft) to metric units (m) or vice versa, change the
'units' and 'step' and leave the top and bottom depths blank. The program will calculate the
new top and bottom depths in the new units.
Note: If the Step distance is modified, the program will automatically interpolate all curve
data to produce continuous curves.
Note: Once the 'Irregular Sampling' box is ticked all the other options become unavailable.
The irregular sampling option means that core data or capillary pressure data is kept at the
same sample step as the inputted data.
Note: Use this dialog with extreme caution, data can be lost if the wrong depths or
Curve Management
Senergy
130
sample increments are entered. A Confirmation dialog will prompt if any data is
going to be lost.
Related Topics
Edit a Curve Set
Curve and Set Names
Curve Set Grouping
Curve Statistics
4.1.7
Interactive Petrophysics has the ability to copy data from a Curve Set with a Regular Data Step to
an Irregular Curve Set.
To Copy a Curve from a Regular Step Curve Set to an Irregular Curve Set:
Click and Drag the required Curve from the Curve Pane to the Curve Set in the Curve Set
Table.
Note: A Confirmation Dialog will be displayed, either Click Yes to copy all the data into the
irregular Set and the depths in the Curve Set will be expanded to accommodate the data
being copied (for example when copying duplicates of irregular sets, for example a Core
131
Senergy
Data Set) or Click No to copy data points that match the depths in the Irregular Curve Set
(for example, when copying regular spaced data like log porosity into a core data Set).
The first option is useful for making duplicates of irregular Sets, for example a core data Set.
The second option will allow for the movement of regular spaced data like log porosity into a
core data Set.
Note: When loading data into an irregular Set the program will load the data into the same
depth as is in the input file if this depth exists in the irregular Set or if the input depth is less
than the tolerance setting. Hence, this allows data from different files to be aligned properly
in the irregular Set if the depths in the files are just slightly different. If, for example, the user
has a very high sampled dataset such as permeability probe data, then the user will need to
change the tolerance setting to allow this data to be loaded. Irregular Set data should be
useable just like regular Set data in the Cross Plot and Formula Modules.
If a Curve already exists in a Curve Set it is being Copied to, the following Error Dialog will be
displayed, informing that the Copy Process has been Stopped. Click OK to Close this Error
Dialog.
When Copying a Curve into a Set where that Curve already exists, the Overwrite Option in the
Manage Curve Sets Dialog must be used.
Related Topics
Curve Management
Senergy
132

Edit a Curve Set
Curve and Set Names
Curve Set Grouping
Curve Statistics
4.1.10 Curve and Set Names

The 'Curve and Set Names' option launches the 'Curve Select' window, which gives the user a
handy window from which to 'drag and drop' curve names into IP modules.
To Display the Curve Select Window:
From the View Menu, Select Curve and Set Names to Display the Curve Select Dialog.
133
Senergy
All curve Sets for the active well are shown in the lower panel of the window. 'Clicking'
between Set names changes the curve list in the upper panel to help to filter for the
appropriate curve.
If the Active Well is changed while the Curve Select Dialog is Open, Click the Refresh
Button to Display the Curves in the Newly Selected Well.
Curve Management
Senergy
134
Related Topics
Edit a Curve Set
Curve and Set Names
Curve Set Grouping
Curve Statistics
4.1.11 Curve Set Grouping

Curve Sets can be grouped using a color field, to enable easier sorting. The Default color for a
Curve Set is Black, all existing Curve Sets will have the color Attribute set to Black.
If you change the color of a Curve Set that has the same color as other Curve Sets, the following
Confirm Dialog will be displayed, asking if all Sets of the same color are to Change. Click Yes to
135
Senergy
Change All Sets of the Same color, Click No to Change ONLY the color of the Selected Set.
If the color has been Changed for any Curve Sets, when the Close Button is Clicked in the
Manage Curve Sets Dialog the following Dialog will be displayed requesting Confirmation of the
Changes made. Click Yes to Save the Changes, Click No to Discard the Changes.
When Curves contained in a Curve Set are displayed in any Dialog, the Short Set Name is
displayed in the Selected Set color beside the Curve Name. Below are some examples of IP
Dialogs that show the Curve Set Short Name and the Curve Set color beside the Curve Name.
The following example displays the Curve Set colors in the Database Browser.
Below is an example of the Curve Set color displayed in a List Box.
Senergy
Curve Management
The following example shows the Curve Set colors in a Drop Down Menu.
Related Topics
136
137
Senergy

Edit a Curve Set
Curve and Set Names
Curve Set Grouping
Curve Statistics
4.1.12 Curve Listing / Curve Edit

The 'Curve Listing / Curve Edit' module can be used to :
View and output curve data as ASCII listings, optionally sampled at a user-defined depth
increment.
View and output array curve data as ASCII listings with the ability to filter/ discriminate for
positive values in 'sparse' arrays (for example, from conventional core analysis, SCAL ,
Capillary Pressure data arrays). See 'Output of Core Analysis Data from Array Curves'.
View and edit curve and array data values in a tabular listing window.
View a log curve preview of the selected log curve data. The log shows all the selected
curve data at a fixed vertical scale, with the curve color and scale determined by the settings
found within 'Manage Curve Headers'. PLEASE NOTE: the log preview is just a preview.
For full log plot functionality then use the 'Log Plot' module.
Curve listings can be activated by selecting the 'Curve listings / Curve Edit' menu item under
the 'View' menu. It can also be accessed from within the 'Database Browser' window when a
curve or curves are selected and the 'Show Data Listing (spreadsheet)' option is selected
from the right mouse button activated menu.
The 'Curve listings / Curve Edit' functionality allows the user to view curve and array data in a
tabular format and to edit individual point values ('Allow Data Edits') or to perform 'range-type'
edits which substitute values over a number of consecutive depth steps ('Fill Range' / 'Null
Range'). It also allows users to check exactly what data is being used in defined Sets called by
the various IP interpretation modules.
To Display the Curve Listing Dialog:
From the View Menu, Select Curve Listing / Curve Edit to Display the List Data Format
Curve Management
Senergy
Dialog.
The Dialog is arranged on two tabbed screens. These are; 'Select Data' and '
Discriminators / Depths'.
The 'Select Data' Tab

The window shown below allows the user to choose the curves to display.
138
139
Senergy
Curves are selected either :

by highlighting a curve and using the arrow buttons, or
by clicking on a curve and dragging it into the 'Selected Curves' box.
The order that the curves are displayed in the tabular listing is the same as the order (top to
bottom) in the 'Selected Curves' box. To re-arrange the order, use the 'up' and 'down' arrows or
click on a curve and drag it to a different position.
The 'Display Format' box allows the user to set the precision of the displayed values.
If the 'Expand Array Data' box is 'checked', array data will be displayed with all data values
for both the 'X' and 'Z' array dimensions. Only array curves which have the same 'Z'
dimensions can be displayed together. NOTE: IP cannot display 'normal' curve data and
expanded array data in the same window. If the 'Expand Array' box is not 'checked',
array data will be displayed at the normal sample increment (Step) for the well. In this case,
the values displayed will be the average value for the array over the sample interval.
The 'Discriminators / Depths' tab

The 'Discriminators / Depths' tab allows the user to select the data to be displayed. Up to 6
Curve Management
Senergy
140
discriminators can be used and combined using 'and' / 'or' type logic. Discrimination can either
be between a curve and a value or between two curves.
The 'Output Depth Range' allows the user to specify the range over which the selected curves
will be displayed. A top or bottom depth can be entered or else the depth range can be selected
by clicking on the zones icon and selecting a required zone from within the 'Select Zone Depths'
window.
The 'Display Depths Set' is a new feature that allows the user to see the data exactly as
the interpretation modules see the data. This important to know, as all interpretation
modules output data to the 'Output Set' data step. So the user could select input curves
from different Sets which have different steps but the 'Output Set' may be a completely
different step.
In this example the Default Curve Set and the CALC Curve Set both have a different Step.
141
Senergy
From the Curve Listing Dialog, Curves are selected to view from two different Sets. One
with a step of 0.1524, the other with an 'Irregular' step.
Note: Interactive Petrophysics will prompt the user to Select an Output Display Set, if one
has not been defined.
Curve Management
Senergy
142
Click OK to Return to the Curve Listing Dialog and Define the Output Display Set.
From the Discriminators / Depths Tab, Specify the Output Display Set in the Display Depths
Set.
The Step for the Output Display Set will define the Step which appears in the Listing.
NOTE: If the 'Display Depths Set' is made the Default set then the curves from the 'Irregular'
step set are displayed with many null values.
The 'Data Listing frequency' allows the user to reduce the frequency of the displayed data. For
example a value of 10 would display the data on 10 ft ( or 10 meter, depending on Well Depth
unit) increments. 'All Levels' will display data at the 'well step' interval.
Data can be scrolled left / right and up / down by using the scroll bars. The 'Page Up' / 'Page
Down' keys on the computer keyboard will also scroll through the data. Columns can be rearranged in the display by clicking in the column header and dragging the column to a new
position.
143
Senergy
Multiple Columns can be Selected using the List Data Dialog. When Multiple Columns are
selected the Curve Track will be displayed on the Right Side of the List Data Dialog.
There are 4 buttons which allow the user to make changes to the data in the 'List Data' window:
NOTE: not all the buttons will be active if the 'Display Depths Set' selected is a Set which has a
different step to the curves selected to view. In the screenshot above, the curves are from the
'Default' Set which has a step of 0.1524, whereas the 'Display Depths Set' selected was the
'Core' Set which has an irregular step.
'Allow Data Edit' : to edit data values in single cell mode; click the 'Allow Data Edit'
button on the menu bar. The button will appear highlighted. This editing mode allows editing
only one cell at a time. When editing is complete, click the 'Allow Data Edit' button again
and it will return to its normal state.
'Fill Range' : Allows the user to select a range of cells and to linearly interpolate across a
Curve Management
Senergy
144
range between two 'real' end values. The button can also be used to extrapolate data
beyond a data range. In this case the user should highlight the data range-to-fill and
include 2 rows of 'real' data above or below the 'range-to-fill'. The real values will be used to
compute the missing data.
'Null Range' : Allows the user to select a range of cells and replace all values with the 'Null'
value (-999).
'Undo' : Once a value is changed, the 'Undo' button becomes 'active'. This allows the user
to reset data edits to their previous values by stepping cell-by-cell through the edited data
range.
Array data curves can only be edited in the 'Expand Array Data' mode.
'Edit Format' : the 'Edit Format' button allows the user to change the curves that are
displayed in the window, 'click' and you will return to the set-up window where the curve
selection can be changed.
'Output' : Output can be sent to the printer, clipboard or to an external ASCII text file. The
'clipboard' copy can be used to move data directly into other applications that accept
clipboard text.
Output of Core Analysis data from Array Curves

Core analysis data listings can be made from Array type curves using this module and by
applying array curves as discriminators in the module set up.
For example, where a very large 'sparse-sampled' array curve exists, containing only relatively
few (none-null) data points, the 'Curve Listing/ Curve Edit' module can be tailored to output only
the non-null values by adding a discriminator criterion, for example, set the output array curve as
a discriminator curve and set 'Function' and 'Value' to '>' & '0' respectively. This will create a
much smaller listing, which can be output to an ASCII text file for use in other applications, for
example in a spreadsheet. NOTE: this facility has largely been made redundant as the user can
now create irregular curve Sets and use the 'Display Depths Set' to list the curves at the Set
step interval.
Related Topics
Edit a Curve Set
145
Senergy

Curve and Set Names
Curve Set Grouping
Curve Statistics
4.1.13 Curve Statistics

The 'Curve Statistics' module displays and outputs information about the curves in the current
well. The module can also be used to find average values for curves over user-defined depth
intervals. Discriminators can be used to define exactly which parts of a curve should be
averaged. The program produces an ASCII file report which can be viewed with various standard
PC viewers.
The module is arranged on 3 tabbed screens. These are 'Curves', 'Report' and 'Discriminators'
To Display the Curve Statistics Dialog:
From the View Menu, Select Curve Statistics to Display the Curve Statistics Dialog.
The 'Curves' tab

Curves are selected either :
by highlighting a curve in the 'Available Curves' panel and using the arrow buttons to move
Curve Management
Senergy
146
it to the 'Selected Curves' panel,

by clicking on a curve and dragging it into the 'Selected Curves' box,
by holding down the 'SHIFT' key and clicking on curve names to select a block of curves,
then use the '>' button to paste the names into the 'Selected Curves' panel.
by holding down the 'CTRL' key and clicking on individual curves to select them, then use
the '>' button to paste the names into the 'Selected Curves' panel.
by clicking the '>>' button to select all the curves in the current well.
The order that the curves are listed is the same as the order in the 'Selected Curves' box. To rearrange the order, use the up and down 'Order' arrows or click on a curve and drag it to a
different position.
The 'Report' tab

The user can select the statistics that are to be saved in the output report, including an interactive
selection of percentile values to return.
The 'All Standard Statistics' checkbox, if 'checked' will tick all the statistics categories in the
Report screen. To select / de-select individual statistics for the report, 'un-check' the 'All
Standard Statistics' box.
147
Senergy
The report can either be output as a 'Space Delimited' or 'Tab Delimited' text file for viewing in
Notepad or as a 'Comma Delimited' (csv) file for viewing in a spreadsheet program. To output
the '.csv' file using semi-colons instead of commas as the delimiter go to 'Tools'
'Miscellaneous Options'
'Options'
'CSV Delimiter'.
The depth range for the report defaults to the active well Top and Bottom Depths. The user can
modify the report depth range by either:
Manually typing in new depth values, or
click' the 'Zone select' button, to the right of the Bottom Depth text box, to launch the 'Select
Zone Depths' dialog, which can then be used to set up reports for particular formations,
reservoir intervals or reservoir zones.
The 'Discriminators' tab
Curve Management
Senergy
148
Discriminators can be used to further refine the selection of data. They are particularly useful if
the user wants to find out the average value or net interval of a curve over an interval. For
example: if the user wants to do a quick net sand count for an interval and use a gamma ray of
less than 30 API to discriminate the sand interval (the above figure shows how this could be set
up).
When the 'Run' button is clicked the user will be prompted for a file name in which to save the
report. Once the report is created the file will be automatically opened and displayed. An
example of a report is shown below.
Well : A1
Date Run : 27/07/2005 11:01:09
Curve
Mean
Imp:GR
Units
Median
GAPI
Nulls
Mode
0
Fail Disc Top

Std Dev
Bottom
Net
Min
Max
2972.571
21.127
31.078
141.875
2951.293
149
59.028
Imp:DT
64.691
Imp:NPHI
0.091
Imp:RHOB
2.614

47.313
37.100
US/F
0
63.250
61.947
v/v_decima 0
0.076
N/A
G/CC
0
2.626
2.681
Senergy
28.185
2
2951.293
2972.571
21.127
58.875
75.500
2951.293
2972.571
21.127
0.029
0.189
2951.293
2972.571
21.127
2.405
2.762
4.356
2
0.037
2
0.092
The 'Fail Disc' column reports the number of depth steps, within the selected depth range, that
fail to pass any discriminator logic that has been set up by the user.
The 'Net' interval is the number of good samples (non-NULL values) multiplied by the 'Well Step'
interval. For a curve with all non-NULL data, the Net interval will not be equal to the Bottom
minus Top depth, but will be equal to the Bottom minus Top depth plus one database sample
increment.
The 'Mode' is calculated by sorting the data into a 50 cell histogram and taking the highest cell
height (need on average at least 3 values per cell).
The 'Save' and 'Load' buttons at the bottom of the screen allow the user to save and re-load setup formats for the module.
Related Topics
Edit a Curve Set
Curve and Set Names
Curve Set Grouping
Curve Statistics
Curve Management
Senergy
4.2
150
The Interactive Petrophysics Manage Curve Headers Dialog has the ability to:
View and Edit and Save the Log Plot Default Display Attributes of the Log Curves in a Well.
View the Statistics of Curves in a Well.
View the 'history' of log curves in an IP well (how they were loaded, what corrections/ math
has been performed on them , by whom & on what date/time.)
To display the Manage Curve Headers Dialog.
1. From the Well Menu, Select Manage Curve Headers to display the Manage Curve Headers
Dialog.
Note: Log curve attributes are viewed on four separate 'tabbed' screens. The curve
attributes are organized in 'grid'- type, tabular listings. The Column headings and contents
of each table are described below, from left to right in each display. The 'In Name' column,
which contains the Curve Name and its' curve Set name, is common to all tabs and is
always the left-most column. The four tabs are:
General - displays the log curve drawing attributes, like line color, default left and right log
track scales, linear or log scaling.
Descriptions - user editable curve descriptions and 'aliases'
Statistics - curve statistics listings.
History - curve history listings.
2. The 'control' buttons along the bottom of the window are described below.
Click Update to save any changes to the Curve Names, Types or Display Parameters.
Click Cancel to Close the Manage Curve Headers without Saving any Changes.
Click Print to Send the Curve History Data to either a Printer, Clipboard or a File.
Curve Selection by TypeCurve Selection by Type

Many of the IP calculation and interpretation modules select curves by 'Curve Type'. If multiple
Section 4.2 Curve Management : Manage Curve Headers
151
Senergy
curves have the same 'type' then the curve selected will be the most recently-modified curve of
the correct 'type' with the 'Final' flag set. If no 'Final' flags are set, the selected curve will be the
most recently modified curve of the correct 'type'.
Related Topics
Edit Curve Header General Properties
Edit Curve Header Descriptions
Edit Curve Header Statistics
Edit Curve Header History
Edit Curve Header Display
4.2.1
The 'General' Tab in the Manage Curve Headers dialog is used to view and edit curve display
properties that will be applied any time a particular curve is added to a log plot.
The IP installation directory contains a file called CPARMDEF.PAR. See 'Tools' 'Defaults' '
Edit Curve System Defaults'. This is a text file which contains a list of common log curve
mnemonics and a set of 'default' display characteristics. When a log curve is loaded into the
program, from ASCII, LAS/LIS/DLIS, IP searches the CPARMDEF.PAR file to see if there is an
entry for each curve mnemonic in the input file.
If the mnemonic is found, IP will use the associated 'default characteristics' to fill in the
display properties in the 'General' table.
If a mnemonic is not found in the CPARMDEF.PAR file, the curve scales, curve 'type', curve
color etc...will be left 'blank'. The user must then manually fill in the empty fields in the
'General' table.
Curve Management
Senergy
152
If the user loads an unrecognized curve, then fills in the appropriate curve display
characteristics on the 'General' tab, the curve display settings can be saved to an external
file to facilitate loading the same curve mnemonic for other wells in the future. This is
accomplished by using the right-mouse-button functionality in the 'In Name' column,
described below.
'In Name' : This column lists the curve name that was originally used when the curve was
loaded to IP. Where a curve has been loaded to a curve Set, other than the 'Default' Set, the
curve name is prefixed by the 'Short Set Name', as shown in the window above. By
'clicking' the mouse cursor on a curve name in the 'In Name' column the user is given the
following options :
'Add Curve Type to file'. This copies the Curve 'type' (see below) to the user defaults file,
UserCurveType.OPT (See 'Tools' 'Defaults').
'Add Curve Properties to file' copies the user-defined curve display attributes to the UserDefined Curve defaults file, CPARMDEF_USER.PAR (See 'Tools Defaults). IP uses the
IP program file CPARMDEF.PAR and the user-defined file CPARMDEF_USER.PAR to save
curve attributes to. If a CPARMDEF_USER.PAR file contains the same curve mnemonic as
the CPARMDEF.PAR file but, for example, has a different curve color entry for that common
curve, when that curve is loaded into IP from an external file, the CPARMDEF_USER.PAR
settings take preference.
'Out Name' : To rename a curve, click in the 'Out Name' cell and type in the new curve
name.
To delete a curve from the 'Manage Log Curve Headers' interface, 'blank out' the text in the
'Out Name' box. The curve will be deleted when you click the 'Update' button.
'Units' : Type in curve units of measurement.
153
Senergy
'Curve Type' : The 'Curve Type' attribute is used by various modules to choose default
curves. For example, when the user launches the 'Clay Volume' interpretation module,
some of the input curve boxes will be automatically filled in with the appropriate gamma ray
log or sonic log curve name if these curves exist in the subject well, because the curves
have recognized 'Curve Types'. 'Curve Types' are assigned when a curve is loaded into the
program. 'Curve Types' are stored in the CPARMDEF.PAR file in the same data line as
each curve mnemonic. On the 'General' tab a drop-down box allows the user to set the
'Type' from the standard list. The standard types are defined in a user-editable file
'CurveType.opt' which is found in the IP program directory. To add a default type, edit this file
with a text editor (Notepad) and add the new 'Type' to the list. See 'Tools' 'Defaults'.
'Curve Set' : The 'Curve Set' attribute allows the user to assign the Set that a curve belongs
to. A drop-down box allows the selection of available Sets. To create a new Set click on the
'Edit Sets' button at the top of the window. This will launch the 'Manage Curve Sets' dialog.
'Lock' : the lock column allows a curve to be flagged as 'locked', so that its values cannot be
accidentally changed. A 'tick' in this column will indicate the curve is locked. By clicking the
'Lock All' or 'UnLock All' button one can lock and unlock all curves in the well at the same
time. This can also be achieved by 'clicking' on the 'Lock' column header. The 'Set Lock'
button can be used to set the 'Lock' column flag depending on the curves currently displayed
in the active well.
Curve Management
Senergy
154
Left Scale', 'Right Scale', 'Log/Lin', 'Color' : These are default settings that will be used to set
up the display parameters for each curve when it is selected for a log plot.
'Shift Inc' : This parameter is used to make a total 'block depth shift' to a curve (in depth step
increments). A user can manually enter values or the 'Interactive Block Depth Shift' module
sets it. To apply one shift increment to all the curves listed, enter a value into the top 'Shift
Inc' cell and 'click' on the 'Shift Inc' column header this will then populate the entered value
into all the 'Shift Inc' column cells.
To make a shift of 10 feet to a curve with a data spacing of 2 samples per foot, a value of 20
would be entered. A positive value (e.g. 20) will shift a curve downhole. A negative value (e.
g. -20) will shift a curve uphole. NOTE: it isn't now possible to use the 'Shift Inc' column to
depth shift irregular curve Set data. The column will be grayed out over the irregular curves
and a warning message will appear if the user attempts to depth-shift the curves using the
'Shift Inc' column.
155
Senergy
'Final' : This is a 'flag' that can be set to indicate that this is the final version of a curve. This
can be used to select curves for output (see LAS Write) and is also used to preferentially
select one curve over another, when curves are being selected by 'Curve Type'. Click in the
column to set the Flag. The 'Set Final' button will set all the curves that are currently being
displayed in the active Log Plot display as 'Final' curves. This can be very useful for quickly
selecting the curves to output in digital form.
When logs are loaded, their default attributes are looked up in a file called CPARMDEF.PAR
(CparmDef_metric.par for the metric option), which is stored in the IP program directory.
This file can be edited by the user to change or add new curves or defaults parameters. It
contains the defaults for Crossplot and Histogram scales, as well as the log plotting scales.
The file can be opened and edited by selecting the menu item 'Tools' Edit Curve System
defaults'.
Related Topics
Curve Management
Senergy
4.2.2
156
The Descriptions Tab in the Manage Curve Headers Dialog allows the user to include comments
associated with a curve and to set up curve 'Alias' names for use on 'hardcopy' log headers.
'Comments' Field : User-entered comments about a curve.

'Alias' Field : An 'Alias' name can be optionally used for the Hardcopy log output. Rather than
using the IP curve ('In Name') names in the log headers the Alias name can be displayed,
allowing more generic names to be used.
'Description' : Description of the curve. The curve description can be optionally output in a
Log Plot header when it is plotted. The default text strings are set in the CPARMDEF.PAR
file. Every time a curve is created the file is 'checked' to see if a default description exists for
the curve and, if a description is found, it is loaded into this field.
Related Topics
4.2.3
The Statistics Tab in the Manage Curve Headers Dialog is a non-editable tab which gives basic
information about the curves in a well.
157
Senergy
'Array Size' : This column will contain the array size for an array-type curve. For a non-array
curve the cell will be empty. An array size of '12 x 60' would indicate 12 'X' value samples
and 60 'Z' value depth increments. Therefore an array curve of this size would contain 720
data values per 1 normal curve data value. An example of Array curve Statistics is illustrated
below, showing Borehole Televiewer (FMS) curves:
'Minimum', 'Maximum', 'Mean', 'Std. Dev.' : This gives the minimum value, maximum value,
mean / average value and the standard deviation of the values for the curves. This average
ignores Null (-999) data values.
'Top Depth', 'Bot. Depth' : The top and bottom depths for a curve are the first and last 'nonNull' values.
'Net Interval' : The net interval for a curve will be the number of 'non-Null' data values
multiplied by the database step interval. Hence, if a curve has continuous data from top to
bottom of a well then the net interval will be one database step more than the bottom minus
top depth.
Related Topics
Curve Management
Senergy
158

4.2.4
The Manage Curve Headers Dialog History Tab displays the Curve History Listings.
'Show Parameters' : This displays the history for the curve. More details can be found in the '
History Module'
'Create Module' : This displays the module name that created the curve.
'Create date' : This is the date the curve was created. The format of the displayed date is set
by the users default regional settings, set in the Windows control panel.
'Create User' : This is the user name (computer logon name) of the person who created the
curve. For databases created prior to version 3.0 this will be blank.
'Update Module' : This shows the module name that last changed the curve.
'Update date' : Time the module was last updated.
'Update User' : This is the user name (computer logon name) of the person who last
changed the curve.
All fields in the tables are editable, except the original input name ('In Name') and the data
within the 'Curve Stastics tab.
The listing 'Sort Order' can be changed from the drop-down menu list or by clicking in the
curve column header. If the 'Reverse Sort' box is 'checked' then the sort order will be
reversed.
159
Senergy
Related Topics
4.2.5
The Manage Curve Headers Dialog Display Tab displays a Summary of the Log Plot, Histogram
and Cross Plot Default Display Properties for all the Curves in the Selected Well. The Log Plot
fields for which default settings can be defined using this Display Tab are the Left Scale, Right
Scale, Log/Lin, color, Line Width, Line Style and Backup. For the Histogram and the Cross Plot
the fields which the default settings can be defined are the Left Scale, Right Scale and the Log/
Lin fields.
All fields in the tables are editable, except the original input name, in the Name Column.
Curve Management
Senergy
160
The listing 'Sort Order' can be changed from the drop-down menu list or by clicking in the
curve column header. If the 'Reverse Sort' box is 'checked' then the sort order will be
reversed.
Related Topics
161
4.3
Senergy
Manage Zones/Tops
The 'Manage Zones / Tops' module allows the user to manage Zones and Tops Sets. It has
been enhanced in order to help with the 'Link Zones / Top Sets' module.
A 'Zone/ Tops' Set consists of a group of depth-delimited intervals. Each zone has a 'Name', a '
Top Depth' and a 'Bottom Depth' entry. Zones also have their default zone colours assigned by
the IP program. The zone colours are user-editable. 'Parameter' Sets, which are used in the
interpretation modules, are 'extended' Zone Sets in which each zone has a set of parameters
(eg. Rw, Rmf, RhoClay etc) associated with it, in addition to 'Name', 'Top Depth' and 'Bottom
Depth'. Zone / Parameter Sets have a 'Type' associated with them. These relate to the
interpretation module used to create the parameters. Possible 'types' are:
Tops : This is the generic user-created 'Tops' Set, referenced to Measured Depth. No
parameters.
The program converts all the entered depths to measured depths in
order to display them.

TVDss_Set : This is a 'Tops' Set that references TVDss depth. Depths entered as TVDss
remain as TVDss depths.
Basic_loganal : This is the 'Basic Log Analysis' module parameter Set
Clay : This is the 'Clay Volume' module parameter Set.
Section 4.3 Curve Management : Manage Zones/Tops
Curve Management
Senergy
162
PhiSw : This is the 'Porosity and Water Saturation' module parameter Set.
Cutoff : This is the 'Cut-off and Summations' module parameter Set.
UP : This is the 'User Program' parameter Set.
MonteCarlo : This is the 'MonteCarlo Analysis' module parameter Set.
MinSolve : This is the 'Mineral Solver' parameter Set.
NMR : This is the 'NMR Interpretation' module parameter Set.
Pore_Pres_Grad : This is the 'Pore Pressure' module parameter Set
TDT _Stand_Alone : This is the 'TDT Standalone' module parameter Set
TDT_Time_Lapse : This is the 'TDT Time Lapse' module parameter Set
The user can create Zone Sets of the type 'Tops' and 'Parameters' in this module. All Set types
can be 'copied' or 'deleted' from within this module. The module window is launched with a list of
all the Zone Sets that have been created for the current in-memory well. The module will display
the link zone symbol
next to any linked sets.
Related Topics
Create a New Zone / Tops Set
Create a TVDSS Top Set
Set Zone Colours
Copy a Set Type to a Tops Set Type
Copy a Zone Set
Edit a Zone Set
Delete a Zone Set
Edit a Parameter Set
4.3.1
Create a New Zone Set
A New Tops Set can be created using the Edit Zone Tops Dialog.
To create a new Tops Set:
1. From the Zone Sets Dialog, Click the New Tops button to display the Edit Zone Tops Dialog.
163
Senergy
Note: The New Zone Set Name must be typed into the Zone Set Name Text Box.
Tops data can be entered in three ways:
1. Manually Type the Zone Tops Data into the Data Table.
Note: Only the Zone Top Depth Value is required. The Zone Bottom Depth Value will be
automatically updated when OK is clicked, corresponding to the 'Zone Top' depth of the
next zone in the list, or to the 'Well bottom' depth if no deeper zone exists. The order the
zones are added to the table is not critical because the program sorts the Zones /Tops in
increasing depth order before loading them.
2. Click File to Import Tops Data from an ASCII File.
Note: The format of a 'Tops' file is very simple. Data is entered on separate lines as 'Zone
Name', 'Top of Zone', 'Bottom of Zone'; alternatively as 'Top of Zone', 'Bottom of Zone',
'Zone Name'. Separators between the parameters should be one-or-more blank spaces, a
'comma' or 'tab' character. Example text file formats are illustrated below.
If the file is 'space-delimited' and the 'Zone Name' is listed first, then the name must not
contain any blank spaces ('Top Zone A' ,for example is not allowed, but should be written
as 'Top_Zone_A'. That is, with 'underscores' between the words). This does not apply if a
comma or 'tab' delimiter is used to separate the parameters. If the bottom depths are
omitted then the 'Zone Bottom' column will be blank. Lines that do not conform are ignored
and the program skips to the next line. The following are examples of possible tops set
files :
Tab Delimited
Comma Delimited
Space Delimited
Comma Delimited
without Bottom
7790 7875 Top
Top Gas Zone,
Top_Gas_Zone
Depths
Curve Management
Senergy
Gas Zone
8270 8420.0
Bottom Gas
8420 8620 Bottom
Water
7875 8225 Water
7790, 7875
Bottom Gas,
8270, 8420.0
Bottom Water,
8420, 8620
Water, 7875,
8225
7790 7875
Bottom_Gas
8270 8420.0
Bottom_Water
8420 8620
Water 7875
8225
164
Top Gas Zone,

7790
Bottom Gas,
8270.0
Bottom Water,
8420
Water, 7875
3. Paste Data from an External Spreadsheet

Tops can be pasted from an external spreadsheet into the data table, in the external
spreadsheet; select the required columns and Copy to the Windows Clipboard.
Note: Interactive Petrophysics will only load data that has been selected as a continuous
data 'block' in the spreadsheet. It will not load a number of discrete cells (captured using
keyboard 'CRTL' button) from a worksheet.
In the Edit Zone Tops Dialog, Click the Cell in the Data Table where the Initial Cell of the
Pasted Data is required.
Click the Paste from External Spreadsheet Button.
Note: You can paste all three columns at once or one column at a time, clicking in the
appropriate 'start' cell in the Data Table.
3. The 'Reference Depth Curve' list box enables the depth curve to be selected that is
appropriate to the data that is being loaded into the Interactive Petrophysics well. For
example, Fluid contact zones could be loaded using 'TVDSS' as the Depth Reference
Curve if they are defined in an external file in TVDSS. The 'default setting' is the
Interactive Petrophysics wells' DEPTH curve.
165
Senergy
4. If you make a mistake when pasting multiple depth entries into the grid interface, the grid
can be quickly cleared of data by clicking in each column header in turn and selecting
the 'Clear Column' option, as shown below:
5. Click 'OK' to create the new Tops Set. The Tops Set name will be displayed in the '
Zone Sets' Dialog.
Curve Management
Senergy
166
Related Topics
Create a New Zone
Set Zone Colours
Copy a Zone Set
Edit a Zone Set
Delete a Zone Set
4.3.2
Load Zone Tops from an External File
The format of a 'Tops' file is very simple. Data is entered on separate lines as 'Zone Name', '
Top of Zone', 'Bottom of Zone'; alternatively as 'Top of Zone', 'Bottom of Zone', 'Zone Name'
. Separators between the parameters should be one-or-more blank spaces, a 'comma' or 'tab'
character.
1. From the Input/Output Menu, Select Load Data then Load Zone Tops to display the Zone
Sets Dialog.
167
2. Click the New Tops button to display the Edit Zone Tops Dialog.
2. Click File to Import Tops Data from an ASCII File.
Senergy
Curve Management
Senergy
168
3. Select the required Tops ASCII file and Click Open to Load the Tops Data into the Edit Zone
Tops Dialog.
Related Topics
Set Zone Colours
Copy a Zone Set
Edit a Zone Set
Delete a Zone Set
4.3.3
Create a TVDSS Zone Set
The purpose behind the TVDSS Set is to define formation Tops and or Fluid Contacts in TVDss
depth rather than measured depth (MD). This Set can then be transferred to other wells without
the zone depths changing to the well's measured depth reference curve.
The module produces an interpretation zone Set which has a calculation method that sets the
MD zone tops and bottoms from entered TVDss depth parameters. Since this is a normal zone
Set all the interactive functions associated with zone Sets can be used. The calculate method,
which sets the MD zone tops from TVDss, is run manually from the parameter window which is
launched from the 'Manage Zone /Tops' module.
1. From the Zone Sets Dialog, Click New TVDss to display the Edit Zone Tops Dialog.
169
Senergy
Note: A Zone Set Name must be entered. Zones could be entered at this stage but it isn't
necessary.
2. Click OK to create the TVDss Zone Set and display the Zone Set in the Zone Sets Dialog.
3. Select the TVDss zone Set, in the example shown above it is called OWC, and click the '
Edit' button. The parameter listing will then appear.
The first four columns are the standard zone Set entries. The next four are the parameters
associated with the TVDss zone Set.
Curve Management
Senergy
170
'TVDss Top' : Enter the TVDss depth that will be used to calculate the MD zone top. If this
parameter is left blank then when the 'Run' button is 'clicked' it is calculated using the MD '
Zone Top'.
'TVDss Bottom' : Enter the TVDss depth that will be used to calculate the MD zone
bottom. If this parameter is left blank then no calculations will be made to the zone bottom.
'Use Well TVD Curve' : If 'checked' (default) then the calculation from TVDss to MD will be
made using the TVDss curve entered in the well header 'Manage Well Header Info.'
module. If not 'checked' then the curve in the 'TVDss Curve' column will be used.
'TVDss Curve' : Enter the curve to use to convert TVDss to MD. This is only used if the '
Use Well TVD Curve' isn't 'checked'. By selecting a TVT or TST depth curve then it is
possible to use this module to work in TVT or TST depths.
The 'Run' button will make the calculations from TVDss to MD.
Moving TVDss Tops to Multiple Wells

In order to create the same TVDss tops Set in a group of wells, all with the same TVDss depth
for each zone, then the following workflow should be followed.
1. Set up each wells' TVDss depth curve in the well header module 'Manage Well Header
Info.'.
2. Create a TVDss tops Set in one well with the correct TVDss tops for each zone.
3. From the Multi-Well Menu, Select Multi-well Parameter Distribution.
4. Run the '' module from the well with the TVDss Set created in step 2.
5. Select the TVDss tops Set and the wells to distribute the Set to. Do not select any
'Common Tops/Zones set' since the tops in each well will be calculated from the TVDss
parameters and not the MD zone tops or bottoms.
6. Click Distribute to Move the TVDss Tops to the Selected Wells and display the Confirm
Dialog.
7. Click Yes in the Confirm Dialog to make a copy of the selected set.
Note:The Copied TVDss Set can be viewed in the Multi-Well Correlation Window.
171
Senergy
Changing TVDss tops in multiple wells

If a TVDss top needs to be changed in multiple wells at the same time then the 'Multi-well
Change Parameters' module should be run. Here the 'TVDss Top' parameter can be selected
and the value changed for all the selected wells. 'Click' the 'Re-Run Analysis' button to update
all the TVDss top Sets. If the 'OK' button is 'clicked' then the value will be changed in the Set but
the measured depths of the zones will not be changed.
Related Topics
Curve Management
Senergy
172

Set Zone Colours
Copy a Zone Set
Edit a Zone Set
Delete a Zone Set
4.3.4
Copy a Zone Set
The 'Copy' operation will make a duplicate of a highlighted Set Name (either a 'Tops' or
'Parameter' Set) and then launch the 'Edit Zone tops' window with the Set name loaded into it.
The Set will have the words 'Copy Of ' added to the Set name. The user then can change the Set
name and click 'OK' to update the copied Set.
1. Click on the Zone / Tops Set name to highlight it.
2. Click the 'Copy' button. The highlighted Zone Set will be displayed in the 'Edit Zone tops'
window.
173
Senergy
3. Click 'OK' to save the copied Set to the Zone Sets Dialog..
Note: The Parameter Set Information Dialog is displayed if the Set to be copied is a
'Parameter' Set, to confirm that the Zone Tops or Names for the selected Set cannot be
edited using the Edit Zone Sets Dialog, however, the zone colours can be changed.
Changes to the Paramater Set can be made from the Zone Sets Dialog. Select the
required Set and Click Edit to display the Zone Set Parameters Dialog.
Note: If the Selected Set is a 'Tops' Set, the Copied Set is displayed in the Zone Sets
Dialog, where the zones depths, names and colours can be edited.
Related Topics
Set Zone Colours
Copy a Zone Set
Edit a Zone Set
Delete a Zone Set
4.3.5
Edit a Zone Set
To edit a Zone /Tops Set:

1. Click on the Zone / Tops Set name to highlight it.
2. Click the 'Edit Zones' button. The highlighted Zone Set will be displayed in the 'Edit Zone
tops' window. Zones can be added , deleted and Zone names and top and bottom depths
modified. The 'Zone Set Name' can also be changed.
Senergy
Curve Management
174
Note: The 'Output' button allows the user to output the data on the grid into a text file. This is
particularly useful if the user wants to output all the tops from multiple wells into one
document or spreadsheet table. To output the '.csv' file using semi-colons instead of
commas as the delimiter go to 'Tools' 'Options' 'Miscellaneous Options' 'CSV
Delimiter'.
175
Senergy
3. Click Save to display the Confirm Dialog prompting to view the Output file in Microsoft
Notepad.
Note: If the 'Edit Zones' button is 'clicked' when a linked Set has been selected then the
following message appears.
The 'Edit Zone tops' module allows complete redefining of zone numbers and zone tops it is
not possible to use it with a linked Set. The 'Edit' option has to be used instead.
Related Topics
Curve Management
Senergy

Set Zone Colours
Copy a Zone Set
Edit a Zone Set
Delete a Zone Set
4.3.6
Delete a Zone Set
To delete a Tops Set;

1. From the Zone Sets Dialog, Click on a Zone /Tops Set to highlight it.
2. Click the 'Delete' button to delete the Zone Set from the selected well.
Related Topics
Set Zone Colours
Copy a Zone Set
176
177
Senergy
Edit a Zone Set

Delete a Zone Set
4.3.7
The 'Edit' button now opens up a 'Parameter' Set edit window.

To display the Parameter Set Edit Window for a Parameter Set, Select the required
Parameter Set and Click Edit.
Note: If the 'ClayVol' Set was selected then clicking the 'Edit' button would open up the '
Clay Volume' parameter Set module.
To display the Parameter Set Edit Window for a Tops Set, Select the required Tops Set and
Click Edit.
Note: 'Tops' Sets can also be opened up in these windows. However, as there aren't any
parameters within a 'Tops' Set then only zone names, depths and colours can be edited.
Curve Management
Senergy
Click Print in the Parameter Set Edit Dialog to display the Print Options Shortcut Menu.
Note: If 'Parameters to File' is selected the Save Parameters to File Dialog will be
displayed. Click Save to display the Confirm dialog, prompting to view the Output file.
Related Topics
178
179
Senergy

Set Zone Colours
Copy a Zone Set
Edit a Zone Set
Delete a Zone Set
4.3.8
Copy a Set Type to a Zone Set
The 'Copy as Tops' button allows any set type to be copied to a 'Tops' Set type. This can be
useful if the user has zone names and depths defined in a 'Parameter' Set such as 'Cutoff' and
the user wants to use these in a regular 'Tops' Set.
NOTE: all the parameter information in the set which is being copied is lost, only the zone names,
colours and depths are copied.
To Copy a Parameter Set as a Tops Set:
1. From the Zone Sets Dialog Select the required Parameter Set and Click Copy as Tops to
display
2. Click OK to create the New Top Set and Display the Top Set in the Zone Sets Dialog.
Curve Management
Senergy
180
Note: If this new Set is opened using 'Edit' then only the zones depths, names and colours
are available for editing even though the original Set was a 'Parameter' Set but the new Set
is now a 'Tops' Set.
Related Topics
Set Zone Colours
Copy a Zone Set
Edit a Zone Set
Delete a Zone Set
4.3.9
Link Zones / Top Sets
This module allows the user to link zones / Tops Sets. Once Sets are linked then they will have
the same number of zones in each Set. Each zone will have the same 'Top Depth', 'Bottom
Depth', 'Name' and zone colour. Changes made to any linked Set will result in changes being
made to the other Sets to which the Set is linked. Hence, changing a zone top or zone name in
one Set will change the top or name in all linked Sets. Creating or deleting a zone in one Set will
create or delete the same zone in all the linked Sets.
This is a very powerful option so it is essential that the user understands the consequences of
linking Sets.
181
Senergy
To display the Link Zones / Top Sets Dialog:

1. From the Well Menu, Select Link Zones / Top Sets to display the Parameter Set Links
Dialog.
The module has 7 available columns in which to make up combinations of linked Sets
called 'Groups'. Each group acts independently of each other. Each Set can only be in one
group.
The 'Available Sets' column lists all the sets in a well. The number in brackets [ ] next to
the Set name is the number of zones within the set.
To set up a group, 'drag' a Set from the 'Available Sets' column to one of the group
columns. It is also possible to drag a Set from a linked group back to the 'Available Sets'
column.
In the case illustrated above, the 'Linked Sets - Group 1' contains 'Clay Volume (Clay)'
Curve Management
Senergy
182
and 'Porosity / Sw (PhiSw)' Sets. There is an incompatibility between the zones as the '
Porosity / Sw (PhiSw)' Set has a red background colour. This is due to the 'Clay Volume'
Set having 8 zones whereas the 'Porosity / Sw (PhiSw)' Set has 4 zones. Sets with
different number of zones can not be linked and are therefore incompatible.
The top Set (i.e. the Set at the top of the column) within a linked group column is always
considered to be the 'Base Set' and the other Sets within the group are compared to this
'Base Set'.
If the background colour is yellow then the Set has a different top or bottom depth to the
'Base Set'. The user can proceed with the linking but the depths in the Set will have to be
changed to match the 'Base Set' depths. The user can reorder the Sets in a group by
clicking and dragging Sets to different positions within a group.
If the background colour is blue then the Set has different zone names to the 'Base Set'.
The linking can proceed but the zone names will be changed to the names in the 'Base Set'.
If the depths are different and also the names are different then the colour will be yellow.
Only when the 'Ok' button is 'clicked' will the links be created. Warning messages will be
given about different depths and names between the Sets. NOTE: be very aware that the all
the Sets in a group will take the depths, zone names of the 'Base Set'. Re-order the group,
if necessary, before 'clicking' 'Ok'.
Zone colours in all Sets will also be set to those of the 'Base Set'.
The 'Ungroup' button when 'clicked' will automatically move all Sets in the 'Linked Sets'
183
Senergy
column back to the 'Available Sets' column. However, this does not ungroup the Sets until
the 'Ok' button is clicked'.
Linking Clay Volume module to Porosity Water Saturation module

One good example of linking parameter Sets would be the linking of the 'Clay Volume' and the '
Porosity Water Saturation' (PhiSw) module parameter Sets. The 'Clay Volume' module is
normally run first and the necessary zones are created. When the 'Porosity and Water
Saturation Analysis' module is first run (by 'clicking' 'Ok'), before any zones are created, the
following dialog will be displayed:-
Curve Management
Senergy
184
The options can only be selected in order. The second option can only be selected if the first has
been selected and likewise, the third if the second has been selected.
1. The first option 'Copy Zones and Clay parameters from Clay Volume module' was
available in older versions of IP. This will create the same zones in the 'Porosity Water
Saturation' module as there are in the 'Clay Volume' module.
2. The second option 'Link Clay volume and PhiSw module zones' creates the link between
the two modules. Hence, when tops are changed in one module they will be changed in the
other.
3. The final option 'Link Clay parameters between modules' will link the Density, Neutron
and Sonic clay parameters in the modules. Hence, when the user changes 'Rho Wet Clay'
in the 'PhiSw' module it will change the 'ND Den Clay' parameter in the 'Clay Volume'
module. The 'Clay Volume' module will also automatically re-calculate with the changed
parameter before the 'PhiSw' module is re-calculated. The link works both ways so that
when the user changes the 'ND Den Clay' parameter in the 'Clay Volume' module the '
Rho Wet Clay' parameter in the 'PhiSw' module changes. The 'PhiSw' module will be recalculated since the 'Auto update Porosity and Water Saturation' option will have been
turned on.
The linking of parameters is setup by new parameters added to both the 'Clay Volume' and
'PhiSw' modules.
185
Senergy
The 'Link PhiSw Clay' parameter turns on the clay link to the 'PhiSw' module. This
parameter will only be active if the parameter sets are linked (the 'Linked Set' icon will be
shown). NOTE: the 'Link Clay Paras' column in the 'Clay Volume' module relates only to
the double clay indicators in the 'Clay Volume' module.
The
'Link Clay Vol' parameter turns on the clay link to the 'Clay Volume' module. This
parameter will only be active if the parameter sets are linked (the 'Linked Set' icon will be
shown).
It is possible to have the clay link going only one way. I.e. from 'PhiSw' to 'Clay Volume' but
not the other way round. This can be set up by turning off the necessary parameters.
To setup the links manually, without using the second and third options in the 'PhiSw Initial
Setup Options' dialogue, the following steps should be taken.
Link the 'PhiSw' and 'Clay Volume' modules using the 'Link Zones / Top sets' module.
Curve Management
Senergy
186
The two Sets must have the same number of zones.

In the 'Clay Volume' module turn on the 'Link PhiSw Clay' parameter.
In the 'PhiSw' module turn on the 'Link Clay Vol' parameter.
On the 'Interpretation' menu select the 'Auto update Porosity and Water Saturation'
option.
Related Topics
Set Zone Colours
Copy a Zone Set
Edit a Zone Set
Delete a Zone Set
4.3.11 Create a New Zone

The Add New Zone Dialog is launched from the Interpretation Menu using the Parameters
Modules; Clay Volume Parameters, Porosity and Sw Parameters and Cut-off and Summations
Parameters.
From either of the above modules, click the New Zone Button to Display the Add Zone
Dialog.
To add a new zone, the user selects one of the existing zones from the window. The user
187
Senergy
must 'click' on one of the three buttons 'Add Before', 'Add After', or 'Split Zone'. For the '
Split Zone' the user must give the depth to split this zone. The 'Copy Zone #' box is used
to select which zone to copy the parameters from for the new zone. It is possible to add a
new zone, for example, after zone 4 but copy the parameters from zone 1 into this new
zone.
NOTE: It is possible to add multiple zones, by specifying the Number of Zones required in
the 'Number of Zones to Add' field. The zone depths are duplicated and then have to be
changed manually.
In the example below 2 zones are added after Zone 5.
Once the Zones have been added, the Zone Attributes (Name, Depths) need to be entered
into the Parameters Dialog manually. Zones cannot overlap, but there can be a gap
between zones.
Related Topics
Set Zone Colours
Clay Volume Parameters
Porosity and Sw Parameters
Cut-off and Summations Parameters
4.3.12 Set Zone Colours

Interactive Petrophysics has a set of default colours that are assigned when a new Zone Set is
created. These colours can be edited to conform to a user-defined colour scheme that can be
applied throughout all wells in a project by using the 'Set Zone colours' tab of the editor. Zone
Curve Management
Senergy
colours can be selected from a drop-down list of 90 colours.
Related Topics
Set Zone Colours
Copy a Zone Set
Edit a Zone Set
Delete a Zone Set
188
189
4.4
Senergy
Manage Text Curves
The 'Text Curves' function allows the user to create a 'curve' containing text strings and then to
view the text within a curve track on a log plot. It is useful, for example, for labelling RFT
pressure points with actual pressure values or test comments, for labelling core or perforation
top and bottom depths and for including core descriptions or test results from spreadsheet files.
The 'Text Curves' function is located under the 'Edit' menu.
Related Topics
Edit Text Curve Headers
Edit / Load Text Curve Data
Manage Zones / Tops
Curve Management
Section 4.4 Curve Management : Manage Text Curves
Curve Management
Senergy
190
Load Data into IP
4.4.1
The 'Edit Text Curve Headers' dialog is similar to the 'Manage Curve Headers' dialog for
conventional curve data. The editor allows the user to rename or delete text curves from the
database.
To 'delete' a Text Curve, highlight the curve in the 'Out Name' column and hit the Delete
key on the keyboard. Confirm the deletion when the prompt appears.
To 'rename' a Text curve, highlight the curve in the 'Out Name' column, type in a new name
and click on the 'Update' button.
Related Topics
Manage Zones / Tops
Curve Management
4.4.2
The 'Edit / Load Text Curve data' option allows the user to create, load and edit text strings for
display as 'Text Curves' from the dialog screen shown below. NOTE: Only one text curve is
permitted per log track, in a log plot.
From the Edit Menu, Select Text Curves, Edit / Load Text Curve Data
To create a new 'Text Curve', the user must first click the 'Create New Curve' button.
This launches a 'Curve Name' dialog, where a new curve name can be typed in. The Text
191
Senergy
Curve name should not contain any <space> characters.The user should click 'OK' and
then choose the newly-created curve from the 'Select Text Curve' drop-down menu at the
top of the screen.
If a 'Text Curve' already exists, select it from the 'Select Text Curve' drop-down list.
The user then has a number of options for adding text strings to the Text Curve:
1. Manually type in depth values and text strings into the window on the screen.
2. Paste data from an external spreadsheet, using the 'Paste from clipboard' facility at the
top of screen.
3. Load data from an external ASCII format (tab delimited) file with column 1 being Measured
Depth, Column 2 being 'shift' and column 3 being the 'text string' as illustrated below. Click
on the 'Load' button to select the text file to be used to populate the table.
4. Load Formation / Zone Tops 'labels' from an existing Zones / Tops Set in the currentlyactive well. Click on the 'New from Zone/Tops' button and select the Set name from the
drop-down list. The depth can be included with the label by (.txt).
The data are loaded and displayed in the window and can be edited on-screen if necessary.
Curve Management
Senergy
192
The 'Shift' column can be used to nudge individual text strings up or down on a plot. There
is also an option to use a 'Depth Shift Curve', created in 'Interactive Depth Shift', to
adjust the position of the text strings en masse.
The Text Curve entries can be loaded and viewed in a log plot by:
1. 'clicking' in a log track header, or adding a new, blank track.
2. Select the first empty row in the 'Log Plot Format' table and choose the 'Text Curve'
option in the 'Style' column at the right hand side of the window.
NOTE: you must select the 'Style' before selecting the 'Text Curve' name or you will only
be able to see 'conventional' log curve names in the 'Curve Name' drop-down list.
The 'Text Curve' can then be selected under the 'Curve Name' drop down list. A 'Font'
button appears at the right hand side of the screen. This can be used to alter the
193
Senergy
appearance of the text you wish to display. Text colour is controlled by the 'Line Colour'
drop-down menu.
The text can be 'left', 'right' or 'centre' justified in its' track, using the 'Left Scale' menu and
can be 'wrapped' to fit to the track width using the 'Back Up' drop-down menu.
The text strings are linked to their depth 'anchors' by a tick and expandable bar. Where text
strings are closely spaced, they may be offset relative to the anchor depth. The degree of
offset can be changed, either by expanding the vertical display scale of the plot or by making
the text curve track wider. The 'Right Scale' column allows the user to set the depth
'anchor' position. The anchor can be set to the left or right side of the text curve track, or
turned 'off' by selecting the 'Anchor None' option.
Curve Management
Senergy
194
Text curves can be displayed in tracks along with 'conventional' curve data as shown below.
The display order can be modified, for example to show a log curve on top of the text curve,
by clicking in the track header, selecting the 'All Tracks' button and changing the 'Plot
Order' at the right hand side of the 'Grid' tab.
195
Senergy
The 'Clear' button will delete all entries in the text grid.
The 'Delete Row' button will remove a single row from the text grid, where the mouse
cursor is currently placed.
Related Topics
Manage Zones / Tops
Curve Management
Load Data into IP
Curve Management
Senergy
4.5
196
Manage Picture/Core Photo Data
The 'Picture Curves' tool allows the user to manipulate and display graphics files in IP log plot
displays.
Two tools are included within the 'Picture Curves' menu item:
'Edit Picture Curve Headers'
'Edit / Load Picture Curve Data'
Related Topics
Working with Curve Data
Array Image Data
Manage Text Curves
Section 4.5 Curve Management : Manage Picture/Core Photo Data
197
4.5.1
Senergy
Edit / Load Picture Curve Data
The 'Edit / Load Picture Curve Data' module is the main module for manipulating graphics
(picture) data. A 'Picture curve' consists of a set of graphics files, for example a set of white light
or UV core photographs. Each graphics file has a defined top and bottom depth which allows the
picture to be scaled to the log data. The images are not stored directly, but the graphics file and
path name to the pictures are stored in the IP database. When a graphics file is selected, it is
loaded into memory and converted into a bitmap for display.
IP recognizes the following graphics file formats: Bitmap, JPEG, GIF, TIFF, metafile (.wmf) and
enhanced metafile (.emf).
Before any graphics file can be loaded, a 'Picture Curve' must be selected -'Select Picture
Curve' - or a new one created 'Create New Curve'. The IP database can create and store up to
10 picture curves per well.
To 'load' a new graphics file into a picture curve, 'click' the 'Load Graphics File' button or 'click'
in a blank cell under the 'Graphics File Name' column header. A file browser dialog will allow you
to select the graphics file to load. Once selected, you will be asked whether you want to make a
copy of the picture, which will be stored in the wells 'Pictures' sub-directory. If a copy is made,
then the picture file will be copied and renamed to a unique file name. It is good practice to
copy the picture, as prompted, because all related images for the well will then be
grouped together under one directory within the wells' own data directory in the IP
database. This facilitates project saving and back-ups.
Once a graphics file is loaded into the interface, it is necessary to enter the 'Top Depth' and '
Curve Management
Senergy
198
Bottom Depth' depths for the picture. These depths can be pasted in from an Excel
spreadsheet using the 'Paste Rows' button. A 'Comments' field is available for the user to add a
description for the file for future reference.
To 'delete' a picture (an individual graphics file), 'click' in the row you wish to delete (do not 'click'
on the 'Graphics file Name' cell because this will launch the file browser) and then 'click' the '
Delete Row' button.
The 'Update Plots' button will refresh any active Log Plots with any new information that has
been added to the picture curve. This is useful if you are trying to depth match the picture curve
and conventional curve data.
Depth shifting the pictures to log data can be done either :
by typing in the 'Top Shift' and 'Bottom Shift' values, or
by using the results of an interactive depth shift performed on the regular log data.
To use the results of an Interactive Depth Shift operation:
enter the appropriate depth shift curve generated by the 'Interactive Depth Shift' module.
These are depth curves with a name of type 'DepOff$_' (default name will be
'DepOff1_ds') where the '$' will be a number which depends on which track the depth shift
was run in (for a one track depth shift this will be 1). The '' will refer to the default
extension the user set on the depth shift setup window (default is 'ds'). The depth offset
curve is overwritten each time the interactive depth shift module is run, therefore, it will be
necessary to run the image depth shifts straight after the interactive depth shift before the
curve gets overwritten by another interactive depth shift. Another option would be to rename
the depth offset curve using the Manage Curve Headers module straight after the
interactive depth shift so that it does not get overwritten.
Click the 'Apply Depth Shift' button to update the 'Top Shift' and 'Bottom Shift' depths
columns.
Individual pictures can be viewed by clicking the 'View' button which is found to the right-hand
side of the 'Graphics File Name' column. This will bring up the 'Picture Viewer'.
199
Senergy
The 'Picture Viewer' allows the user to see the image at various resolutions. Options are
available to send the picture directly to the printer or to copy it to the clipboard for inclusion in
another document.
Placing the cursor on the picture will display the log depth of the image at that cursor position at
the base of the window.
A picture can be split into two separate files by placing the cursor at the required split depth and
then right mouse clicking. The following dialog will appear.
If the user confirms the split, the picture's current graphics file will be split at the requested depth
Curve Management
Senergy
200
and two new separate files will be created. The old picture file will not be altered but will no longer
be used in the Picture curve.
Splitting pictures can be very useful for core photographs in rubble zones where the core photo
can not be made to match log depths. The split photos can then be separately depth matched to
the log data.
Related Topics
Array Image Data
Manage Text Curves
4.5.2
Edit Picture Curve Headers
The 'Edit Picture Curve Headers' module displays information about 'Picture' type curves inside
the IP database. This module is analogous to the 'Manage Curve Headers' module which works
with the standard log curve data.
'Out Name' : To rename a picture curve, highlight the 'Out Name' and type in the new
name. If you 'blank out' the 'Out Name' box the curve will be deleted from the well when you
click 'Update'.
'Created Module': This displays the module name that created the curve.
'Create date': This is the date the curve was created. The format of the displayed date is set
'Updated Module': This shows the module name that last changed the curve.
'Update date': Time the module was last updated.
'Comments': User-entered comments about this Picture curve.
Related Topics
201

Array Image Data
Manage Text Curves
Senergy
Section
5
Load Data from an External Source
203
Senergy
If the user wishes to load a large number of wells and/or a large volume of curve data into IP,
there is potential for all the system memory to be filled before the data loading is finished, which
could result in application stability issues. In this situation the user should consider loading the
data in stages, saving and closing the loaded wells at each stage, freeing up system memory for
the next loading stage. Once all the data is loaded then the user can re-open the wells. IP is able
to use memory more efficiently if these steps are followed.
the number of wells and curves that can be loaded simultaneously is limited by the amount
of system memory available.
there is a program limit of 1500 'conventional' curves per well.
Array-type curves are treated as single curves in IP and therefore can be used to store a much
greater volume of curve data.
The 'Load Data' options are available under the 'Input / Output' menu.
The ASCII Load module imports log curves, core analysis plug measurements and other data
presented as text files. Input data files can be space-, tab-, comma- or 'Other' delimited
The LAS/LBS Load module will load either 'wrapped' or 'unwrapped' LAS data from version 1.2
and 2.0 LAS files as well as LBS files. LBS are LAS files with the data encoded in binary
format. The file name being loaded is shown in the 'LAS/LBS Load' header bar, as illustrated
below.
The LAS Load module loads LAS3 format data files into IP. LAS3 data files are able to store
well data, such as core plug analysis results, DST Test results, Formation Tops in addition to
log curves, in the same file. Data is partitioned .... See the Canadian Well Log Association
website (http://cwls.org/las_info.php) for a full description of the LAS3 standard.
The LIS Load module imports LIS (Log Information Standard) binary data into Interactive
Petrophysics Curves.
The DLIS Load module imports DLIS (Digital Log Interchange Standard) binary data into
Interactive Petrophysics Curves.
The Formation Tester LIS/DLIS Loader module loads curves specific to Formation Testing
services from LIS or DLIS files. The module allows only curves of interest (by way of a Tool
Type mask) to be loaded into Tool Specific Sets to be used in the Formation Test Analysis
module.
The DBASE4 Load module loads Curve Data into Interactive Petrophysics from a DBASE4
Database.
The LAS Batch Load module loads multiple LAS files into newly-created or existing IP wells.
The Load Zone Tops module loads Zone Tops Data. The format of a 'Tops' file is very simple.
Section 5.
Load Data from an External Source :
Senergy
204
Data is entered on separate lines as 'Zone Name', 'Top of Zone', 'Bottom of Zone'; alternatively
as 'Top of Zone', 'Bottom of Zone', 'Zone Name'. Separators between the parameters are
normally one-or-more blank spaces, a 'comma' or 'tab' character.
The Picture Curves module is the main module for manipulating graphics (picture) data. A '
Picture curve' consists of a set of graphics files, for example a set of white light or UV core
photographs. Each graphics file has a defined top and bottom depth which allows the picture
to be scaled to the log data. The images are not stored directly, but the graphics file and path
name to the pictures are stored in the IP database. When a graphics file is selected, it is
The Text Curves creates, loads and edits text strings for display as Text Curves.
The Interval / Spreadsheet Loader loads data into the IP program such as a facies-type
interpretation, where a certain geological facies, represented by a numerical value, is assigned
over a particular depth interval. The 'Interval Loader' can also be used to load periodic /
discrete data, such as core plug analysis results (grain densities, porosities and air
permeabilities) or wireline formation tester (RFT, RCI, FMT) pressure data.
The Capillary Pressure Data Loader is designed to assist the entering of PC data into IP. A
maximum of 100 plugs can be entered at any one time. It removes the need for using the
Interval Loader to perform this operation. The new PC loader is designed to load data in
columns. Extra data associated with the PC measurement can also be loaded at the same
time
The Load Well Attributes module bulk loads well 'cultural' data (attributes) into IP from an
external text file or from a spreadsheet selection, either loading; into pre-existing, in-memory
wells in an IP database, or into newly-created IP wells, populating these wells with well
properties (attributes) from the external file.
The Real Time Data Link module uses a Schlumberger proprietary data link technology ('
Osprey Connect') enabling an IP user with appropriate security clearances from SIS or other
third-party (logging service company) data providers to connect to a remote data server and
download log curve and drilling data real-time into IP using WITSML data.
Related Topics
Load External Curve Data
Load Picture and Text Curve Data
Using the Interval Loader
Using the Capillary Pressure Data Loader
Section 5.
205
Using the Well Attribute Loader

Real Time Data Link
Section 5.
Senergy
Senergy
5.1
206
This Chapter Outlines the available options for loading data into Interactive Petrophysics from an
External Source.
The ASCII Load module imports log curves, core analysis plug measurements and other data
presented as text files. Input data files can be space-, tab-, comma- or 'Other' delimited
The LAS/LBS Load module will load either 'wrapped' or 'unwrapped' LAS data from version 1.2
and 2.0 LAS files as well as LBS files. LBS are LAS files with the data encoded in binary
format. The file name being loaded is shown in the 'LAS/LBS Load' header bar, as illustrated
below.
The LAS Load module loads LAS3 format data files into IP. LAS3 data files are able to store
well data, such as core plug analysis results, DST Test results, Formation Tops in addition to
log curves, in the same file. Data is partitioned .... See the Canadian Well Log Association
website (http://cwls.org/las_info.php) for a full description of the LAS3 standard.
Petrophysics Curves.
The Formation Tester LIS/DLIS Loader module loads curves specific to Formation Testing
services from LIS or DLIS files. The module allows only curves of interest (by way of a Tool
Type mask) to be loaded into Tool Specific Sets to be used in the Formation Test Analysis
module.
Database.
The LAS Batch Load module loads multiple LAS files into newly-created or existing IP wells.
Related Topics
Real Time Data Link
Section 5.1 Load Data from an External Source : Load External Curve Data
207
5.1.1
Senergy
ASCII Load
The 'ASCII Load' module allows the user to import log curves, core analysis plug measurements
and other data presented as text files. Input data files can be space-, tab-, comma- or 'Other'
delimited. NOTE: IP assumes that all import files use the decimal point as the separator for
decimal numbers. All input files into IP should conform to this standard.
The module has been updated for IP Version 3.3 and later, to allow the user to more-easily create
array-type curves and load data into them. This enhancement was primarily to facilitate the
loading of array data files for use in the 'Capillary Pressure Analysis' module. However, the
modifications also help to streamline the workflow for importing Core analysis plug data (e.g.
Core Porosity, Core Permeability and Grain Density) directly into the program as array curves.
Conventional core data is easily imported directly into IP by using a set with an irregular step.
NOTE: if you want to load external data, stored in a spreadsheet, into IP arrays, it is much
quicker to use the 'Interval Loader' module, which has a convenient 'Copy / Paste from
spreadsheet' feature.
The user opens the 'ASCII Load' module from the 'Input / Output'
'Load Data'
'ASCII
Load' menu item. The first window to be launched is a 'File Select' dialog which you can use to
browse to the appropriate folder / file name to be loaded.
After selecting a data file to load, the main 'ASCII Load' interface is launched. The IP program
makes an attempt to analyse the format of the user-selected file and populates the panel in the
lower part of the window with the data in the input file, together with curve names and curve units.
The user should check the 'grid' entries and make sure it is all correctly filled in, before
proceeding to load the file. If the format is not correct, the user must manually set the data
format.
Senergy
208
The user interface is organized into a number of discrete 'panels'. These are:
Well Properties
Input File Defaults
Data Formatting
Load Set Selection
Curve Definition
Data Grid
Well Properties Panel

In the Upper left hand corner of the interface, the 'Well Properties' panel displays the current
209
Senergy
depth/time limits for the currently-selected IP well. The panel displays 'Well Name', 'IP Well
Step', depth/time 'Units' and 'Top' and 'Bottom' depths/times.
NOTE: If the ASCII file to be loaded contains a Time of Day well, the Top Depth and Bottom
Depth will be replaced with a Start Time and Stop Time. See Also: Import an ASCII data file into a
Time of Day Well
'Well Name' - enter or edit the name of the well in the 'Well Name' box. A 'Well Comment
' (see 'Edit / Well Header Info.') can be set here by placing a colon symbol, with a space
before and after, ( : ) after the well name and typing in the well comment after the colon. For
example 'Test Well : Preliminary' will create a well name of 'Test Well' with a well
'IP Well Step' - this is the database 'Step' (curve data depth increment) for a well. If data has
already been loaded into the in-memory well, then this box will be protected. For a new well it
is necessary to enter a value here. Alternatively, the 'IP Well Step' will be determined from
the first log curve file loaded to IP for the subject well.
'Units' - these are the IP well units ('Feet', 'Meters', 'Seconds' or 'Milliseconds'). A metric
data file can be loaded into an imperial-units database and the data will automatically be
converted. For 'time' indexed wells, the units can be set to either seconds or milliseconds.
'Depth Top' - top depth or top time in the ASCII file from which to load data. The units will be
in the IP well units regardless of the units of the file. The top depth/time does not have to
correspond to the file top depth/time.
'Depth Bottom' - bottom depth or bottom time in the ASCII file from which to load data. The
units will be in the IP well units regardless of the units of the file. The bottom depth/time does
not have to correspond to the file bottom depth/time. For a new well, the database interval
Senergy
210
will be set to the Top and Bottom depths/times.

If the ASCII data in the file that is being loaded covers a depth interval greater than the current
wells depth/time limits, the following message will be displayed.
Click 'Yes' to launch the 'Well Depths Editor' module, so that the IP well depth range can be
extended.
Input File Defaults Panel

This panel, in the top right-hand corner of the interface, is used to set up some key input file
attributes.
'Null Value' - the user must enter the null value (absent value) which is used in the ASCII file
being loaded. The default value is -999.00.
The 'Multi-line data' option, if 'checked', allows the user to load data files where each depth
level contains data that is found on more than one line in the input file. The user enters the
number of lines per depth step.
'Fill data gaps' - this allows the user to automatically extrapolate across data gaps in the
input data. This is useful, for example, if one is loading a one sample (1.0 ft step) per foot
ASCII file into a two sample (0.5ft step) per foot well. The 'Maximum gap width' allows the
user to set the maximum gap (in depth increments) to be filled.
Data Formatting Panels

Two panels in the middle of the 'ASCII Load' screen allow the user to describe the formatting
and content (curve names, curve units, curve types) of the input text file. These are shown
below. The left-hand panel lets the user set the first line of 'data', the 'curve name' line and the
'curve units' line in the input file. The right-hand, 'Data Formatting', panel allows the user to
define the separator character in the input file to be used in the 'Load' operation.
211
Senergy
To correctly set up the file to load into IP the following steps should be followed:
1. Firstly, set the 'Data starts at line' number to that of the first line of data in the 'file-to-load'.
Reference line numbers are shown in the left-hand margin of the data grid in the bottom part
of the screen, with a red coloured background.
2. Click the 'Apply' button, next to the 'Data starts at line' entry box. The data line will be split
into individual numbers using the attribute ('Spaces', 'Tabs', 'Commas', 'Other', 'Fixed')
specified in the 'Data Formatting' panel of the window. If the user chooses a delimiter,
other than 'Spaces', then 'blank' entries in the data will be ignored. For two attributes
adjoining each other, a Null data value will be assumed to exist between them. For example,
a data line reading: 1000.0,55.2,,100 with a 'comma' as the delimiter will load the line as
1000.0 55.2 -999.0 100.0. The parsed data is visible in the bottom row of the Formatting
panel.
The 'Fixed' format option allows the user to specify the format of the input data. This should
only be necessary if the data has been generated using a Fortran type expression where
one number can run into another. The user must enter the format of the data. This is done
by entering the width of each input column separated by a comma. The following are valid
format expressions:
8,8,8,8,10,12,12,12 - This can be simplified by using brackets 4(8),10,3(12)
8,10,12,8,10,12 - If an expression repeats you can leave out the repeat
8,10,12
10,10,10,10,10,10,1 - This could be simplified as 7(10) or just 10
Senergy
212
3. After the first line of data has been set and is verified to be correct, the user sets the 'Read
curve names from line' and 'Read curve units from line' line numbers. Curve names
can either be typed in, or, if they exist in the input file, they can be selected using the 'Read
curve names from line' box. In this case, the user enters the line number of the curve
names and clicks the 'Apply' button. Similarly, for Curve units, either select the line of the
input file which contains the units and click the 'Apply' button, or manually type the units into
the 'Curve Units' row. The curve names and units must be in the same format as the first
line of data for this to work.
4. The program will check the 'Curve Name' entries in the input ASCII file against the IP Curve
Defaults files (CPARMDEF.PAR & CPARMDEF_USER.PAR). Curve names that are
included in these files will have their curve 'Types' automatically set. Curve types are
shown in the Formatting panel, in row 3 from the top, as illustrated below. The user can
manually assign a curve type to blank entries by clicking in the appropriate cell in the grid
and choosing from the drop-down list.
The 'Curve Type' row allows the user to select the curve 'type' that is attached to an input
curve. Curve 'types' are used in IP to help with the auto-selection of curves and default
curve display characteristics used in some calculation modules. 'Curve Types' can be set
later in the 'Manage Curve Headers' module. The default curve type for each input curve
is looked up when the file is scanned.
Load Set Selection Panel

The 'Default Load Set' drop-down list box allows the user to select which Curve 'Set' to load the
new ASCII data into. This can be set simultaneously for all curves, by selecting the required 'Set
Name' from the 'Default Load Set' list.
213
Senergy
The 'Edit Sets' button allows the user to create new Sets using the 'Manage Curve Sets'
module. If a new Set name is created, the user is prompted to use this Curve Set to load all
curves into. A dialog similar to the following screen capture is launched. Click 'Yes' to set the
new Curve Set for all curves to be imported. The 'Load into Set' line is updated.
The 'Reference Depth Curve' drop-down list allows the user to specify the Depth 'type' for the
file to be loaded. This feature allows the user to load data files, for example, that have only a
TVD or TVDSS depth curve as the depth reference. If a 'DEPTH' curve exists in the ASCII file, IP
will display the following error message when you try to load the file.
In this case, the user must choose whether to change the 'Reference Depth Curve' to 'DEPTH'
or to rename the 'DEPTH' curve to something else. For example, the name could be changed to '
DEPTHin', which IP will not interpret as a measured depth curve.
'Formatted Data' Panel

The central 'grid' display in the 'ASCII Load' window displays the parsed input data, separated
into columns, together with all the 'Curve Names', 'Curve Units', 'Curve Types', 'Load-into Set
' and 'Array size' and 'Array Index' settings.
Senergy
214
The Depth / Time Index

'Depth' / 'Time' Curve Units - For wells whose data is defined in terms of 'Depth', whether that
is Measured Depth (MD) or True Vertical Depth (TVD or TVDSS) the depth curve must be
labelled 'DEPTH' in the input 'Curve Name' box, but it does not have to be in the first column in
the input file. For 'Time' indexed wells, the time curve must be labelled 'TIME'. The units for the '
DEPTH' or 'TIME' column are used to determine whether the depth needs to be converted to
match the current well depths before loading. The units box should be 'M' for file depths in
metres, 'FT' for file depths in feet, 'MS' for times in milliseconds and 'SEC' for times in seconds.
'Array Size' and 'Array Index' Selection

The 'Array Size' row in the Formatting 'grid' allows the user to define the dimensions of the
data in an arraytype input file. A 'normal' curve, for example 'GR', would have an 'X
dimension' of 1 and 'Z dimension' of 1. A Water Saturation (Sw) array file, for example, like
that illustrated below, has an 'X dimension' of 6, (there are 6 columns of Sw and 6 columns of
Pc values). A 'Z dimension' has to be chosen that will allow all plug depths to be saved into
the array curve. Too low a 'Z dimension' and some closely spaced plugs will not get saved
into the array. However, if the set into which the data is to be loaded has an 'irregular' step
then the 'Z dimension' can be left at 1. As the IP 'Z dimension' will match the input dataset 'Z
dimension'.
'Array Index' - the user should also define the array dimensions of the input data using the '
Array Index' row of the Formatted Data 'grid'. Using the same Water Saturation (Sw) example
input file, you would type in the array index numbers for the Pc and Sw columns as shown
below.
Loading Array Data

Loading Capillary Pressure Data as Arrays:
Capillary pressure data can also be loaded in the manner described here. The workflow is
explained, using the example array data file illustrated below, which contains 2 curves 'Phi' and
'Gd' which are 'normal' one-dimensional curves and 2 two-dimensional arrays 'Sw' and 'Pc',
each with six array elements. The data will be loaded into an 'irregular' step set which will keep
the same depths as the original dataset.
215
Dept
Senergy
Phi
Gd
Sw
Pc
dec
gm/
dec
psi
h
m
cc
209
0.2
2.68
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0.1
10
20
50
60
0.18
2.64
0.95
0.64
0.42
0.22
0.11
10
20
50
60
0.16
2.66
0.92
0.63
0.53
0.23
0.13
10
20
50
60
0.15
2.69
0.88
0.62
0.49
0.29
0.19
10
20
50
60
1.2
209
3.6
209
4.5
209
5.7
1. Select the ASCII file containing the array data and, when the 'ASCII Load' module launches,
the data panel at the bottom of the window is populated with the selected file.
2. Select the appropriate formatting separator ('Space', 'tab' etc..) for the input file.
3. Select the 'Data Starts at line' number and click 'Apply'.
4. If the data file contains curve names and curve units lines, set these numbers and click the
associated 'Apply' buttons. The 'Formatted Data' panel will show all the data columns in
the 'grid'.
5. Set the 'Default Load Set' to the required Curve Set by using the 'drop down' menu. If the
required set does not exist then create it by using the 'Edit Sets' button. For this dataset an
'irregular' spaced step set will be used.
6. Examine the file and determine the dimensions of the required arrays. In the example, the
Sw and Pc data each have 6 array elements (6 columns of data).
Senergy
216
7. Set the 'Array Size' in the first column of the 'Sw' data block, by clicking in the 'Array Size'
cell in that column. A dialog pops up which allows you to set the 'Curve Dimensions'. The
'X Dimension' should equal the number of columns of data in the array. The 'Z Dimension
' setting can be used to load array data at a smaller depth increment than the current 'well
step'. However, as the set into which the data will be loaded has an 'irregular' step then
this 'Z Dimension' can be left at 1. Set the dimensions of any other arrays in the input ASCII
file, 'Pc' in this example. See the examples given below:
8. On clicking the 'Load' button, IP will create the 'Pc' and 'Sw' arrays with dimensions based
on the indices typed into the 'Array Index' row. This can be confirmed by looking at the '
Manage Log Curve Headers' module, 'Statistics' tab, as illustrated below:
If the data is viewed using 'View - Curve Listing / Curve Edit' and the 'Expand Array Data'
box ticked, it can be seen that the imported data has the same depths as the original dataset.
217
Senergy
Operations Buttons
The Operations buttons, located at the bottom of the user-interface are described below:
Click the 'Load' button to load the ASCII data. The data will be loaded to the closest sample
increment in the well. If a line cannot be read, then the program will skip it and proceed to the
next line. Data can be in any depth order in the file.
'New File' - this allows the user to choose another file to load.
'Save Format' - the user can save the format of the file to disk. This is useful if one has a
lot of files to load, with exactly the same format, which cannot be formatted automatically by
the program.
'Load Format' - this will load the saved format.
The 'Create New Well' button allows the user to create a new IP well and then sets this
newly-created well as the well to load the ASCII data into.
The 'Set Well' button sets the ASCII-read well 'focus'. This will be the well name into which
the curve data will be loaded and is the Well name that is displayed at the top of the 'ASCII
Load' window. The button can be used to load several ASCII files into different wells without
having to close the window and re-open it. The user changes the well focus on the primary
IP window by using the 'Well Navigation' buttons on the IP Toolbar and then 'clicks' the 'Set
Well' button on the 'ASCII Load' window.

an Auto-Splice, NOT a replace the existing curve with new data. This is illustrated below:
Two ASCII files containing core porosity/permeability data with a common depth point at 3610M
depth. CORE1.txt is loaded and the data displayed in IP. The CORE2.txt file is loaded and the
'Warning' message appears. Selecting 'Yes' or 'All' will allow IP to replace the common data
point at 3610 M and add/concatenate the new data points to the existing curve.
Senergy
218
If the user wants to completely replace the existing curve with a new curve you must first 'delete'
the existing curve from the IP database and then load the new curve from an external file.
Related Topics
ASCII Load
LAS / LBS Load
LAS3 Load
LIS Load
DLIS Load
DBASE4 Load
LAS Batch Load
5.1.2
LAS / LBS Load
The 'LAS / LBS Load' module launches a 'Windows Explorer' dialog which is used to locate the
'file-to-load'.
Select the 'file-to-load' from the 'browse' window. The selected LAS / LBS Format file will be
loaded into the interface shown below.
The program will load either 'wrapped' or 'unwrapped' LAS data from version 1.2 and 2.0 LAS
files as well as LBS files. LBS are LAS files with the data encoded in binary format. The file name
219
Senergy
being loaded is shown in the 'LAS/LBS Load' header bar, as illustrated below.
The 'LAS/LBS Load' window is launched. This interface allows the user to select the curves to
load into IP. It is now possible to load multiple datasets with different step sizes from individual
wells or from multi-wells all from within the same LAS file.
The 'Embedded LAS Sequences' window allows the user to see if the LAS file that they have
loaded is a concatenated LAS files. If it is then the LAS files will be listed in this window. By
'clicking' on each file in turn, the contents of the LAS file are displayed. Changes can be made
before loading the data and moving onto the next concatenated file.
By default, on loading a new LAS file into the interface, all curve rows have the 'Load' column
'checked', which flags these curves to be loaded into IP. You can manually 'un-check' curve
names you do not wish to load. Clicking in the 'Load' Column header toggles between 'all
selected' and 'none selected' states. If a few data rows are 'checked' and you click in the column
Senergy
220
header, the 'Load' selection is reversed. The first curve in the list, which should be 'Depth', does
not need to be selected, since the data will be aligned to the primary depth curve that is defined
by the 'Interval to Load (MD)' and 'IP Well Step', which are picked from the LAS file header data
section.
Depth data can be in feet in the LAS file and loaded into a metric depth units well. You can load
part of the file by defining the interval under 'Interval to Load (MD)'. The 'Interval to Load (MD)'
Top Depth / Bottom Depth, or Times, values will be in the 'IP Well Units', regardless of what
units the file is recorded in.
NOTE: If the LAS file contains a Time of Day well and not a Depth Well, the Interval to Load will
display the Date and Time Interval for the Time of Day Well. See also: Import a LAS/LBS Datas
file into a Time of Day Well
If the 'Interval to Load (MD)' extends outside the IP wells depth range the following message will
be displayed.
If 'Yes' is selected then the 'Well Depths Editor' module will be launched so that the well can be
extended. For 'time data' wells, the depth units can be set to either seconds or milliseconds. The
221
Senergy
primary input curve should be called 'TIME'.

The 'IP Name' column lists all the curve names in the selected LAS File. You may manually
change the curve name by typing in new text. Alternatively, a 'Curve Alias Defaults' file can
be set up to load curves from various data sources / logging service companies to a
common set of IP curve names. See the 'Tools'
'Defaults'
'Edit Curve Alias
Defaults' module. This is useful, for example, if the user has a corporate log naming
convention and wants to load curves from external sources using the corporate mnemonics.
The 'Units' name for a particular curve is picked up from the LAS file. You may manually
change the curve 'Units' by typing in new text.
If the user wishes to load data files that do not contain a 'Depth' curve, this can be achieved
by setting the 'Reference Depth Curve' to the appropriate curve (TVDSS or TVD) included
on the LAS file. Curves will be loaded in 'TVD' or 'TVDSS' mode.
The 'Type' column allows the user to select the generic 'Curve Type' that is loaded for the
input curve. 'Curve types' are used in IP to help with the auto-selection of curves and
display criteria used in many interpretation modules. These can be set later in the 'Manage
Curve Headers' screen. The default 'Curve Type' for each input curve is looked up in the
CPARMDEF.PAR file in the IP Program directory, when the file is scanned. If a curve name
entry is found in this external file, the curve display properties will be set up at load time.
'Load LAS Parameters' - if the 'Load LAS Parameters' box (top right-hand corner of the
interface) is 'checked', then the well name and mud resistivity data will be loaded (if available
in the LAS file). Two radio buttons control where, in the IP 'Manage Well Header Info.'
module the LAS well parameters are stored.The options are:
1. 'Use Run # from file' - if selected, the LAS parameters are matched to the exact 'Run
Number' column of the 'Logging' tab in the 'Manage Well Header Info.' module.
2. 'Start at Run' - if selected, allows you to manually type in a log 'Run Number' to
populate with the LAS parameters.
If the selected LAS file was created from an older version of IP (pre.V3.3) where the 'Write well
parameters' option had been chosen, default curve display properties would be picked up from
Senergy
222
the file, in preference to the 'defaults' defined in either the CPARMDEF.PAR or

CPARMDEF_USER.PAR files at load time if 'Load LAS Parameters' is 'checked'.
If the selected LAS File was created by IP, and the 'Use Set Names' option was used in the
export operation, IP will recreate the appropriate curve Sets when such a file is loaded back into
IP.
'Add to Curve Name' - the 'Add to Curve Name' options of 'Prefix' or 'Extension'
allow the user to add an extension to the names of all the curves to be loaded (for
example, add a '1' to the curve names to denote they come from log run 1). Type the
Prefix / Extension into the appropriate box and click 'Add'. NOTE: curve names with
more than 10 characters will be truncated to 10 characters.
'Fill Data Gaps' - the 'Fill data gaps' option, when 'checked' allows the module to
automatically extrapolate across gaps in the input data during the 'Load' operation. This is
useful, for example, if one is loading a one sample per foot file into a two sample per foot
well. The 'Max Gap width' text entry box allows the user to set the maximum gap to be
filled. The 'gap width' is defined in database sample increments.
'Default Load Set' - the 'Default Load Set' entry box allows the user to individually select
which Curve 'Set' to load the LAS/LBS data into. This can be set simultaneously for all
curves, by selecting the required 'Set Name' from the 'Default Load Set' drop-down list.
The 'Edit Sets' button allows the user to create new Curve Sets using the 'Manage Curve
Sets' module. If a new Set Name is created, the user is prompted to use this Set to load all
curves into. A dialog similar to the following screen capture is launched. Click 'Yes' to set
the new Curve Set for all curves to be imported.
223
Senergy
'Sort Alphabetically' - 'checking' this box will sort the curves in the LAS file in alphabetic
order / 'unchecking' the box will reset the list to the LAS file curve order.
'Sort Using Curve Type' - if Curve 'Types' (generic names) are recognized, IP will sort the
curves in ascending alphabetic order, according to their curve type.
The 'Load' button loads the selected LAS data into IP.
The 'New File' Button - this button can be used to select a new LAS file to load, without
having to close the module and open it again.
The 'Create New Well' Button - this button allows the user to create a new IP well and then
sets this newly-created well as the well to load the LAS data into.
The 'Set Well' button sets the LAS-Load well 'focus'. This will be the well name into which
the curve data will be loaded and is the Well name that is displayed at the top of the 'LAS
Load' window. The button can be used to load several LAS files into different wells without
having to close the 'LAS Load' window and re-open it. The user changes the well focus on
the main IP window by using the 'Select Well to Display' options and then 'clicks' the 'Set
Well' button on the 'LAS Load' window.
NOTE: It is possible to use the 'LAS Load' module to create a primary 'reference depth
curve' without having a LAS file to load. To do this, click 'Cancel' when asked which file to
load. On the 'LAS Load' window, shown above, enter the interval, step, and units for the
desired primary depth curve.

For example:
A second LAS file is loaded containing a curve GDCORE over the depth range 2500-6000ft
On loading the second file the following 'Warning' message appears.
Senergy
224
Selecting Overwrite or 'All' (if there are other curves with existing versions) will prompt IP to
replace the existing GDCORE curve from 2500-3000 ft with data from the new curve and to
add/concatenate the new GR data from 3000-6000 ft to the existing curve.
'delete' the existing curve from the IP database and then load the new curve from an external
file.
Related Topics
ASCII Load
LAS / LBS Load
LAS3 Load
LIS Load
DLIS Load
DBASE4 Load
LAS Batch Load
5.1.3
Load LAS3 Data
The module allows the user to load LAS3 format data files into IP. LAS3 data files are able to
store well data, such as core plug analysis results, DST Test results, Formation Tops in addition
to log curves, in the same file. Data is partitioned .... See the Canadian Well Log Association
website (http://cwls.org/las_info.php) for a full description of the LAS3 standard. It can also be
used to load LAS files. NOTE: this loader can not handle concatenated LAS files. Use the 'LAS/
LBS Load' for this.
From 'Input / Output'
'Load Data'
'LAS3 Load', the module can be opened. The first
window to be launched is a 'Select LAS/LAS3 file' dialog from which the user can browse to the
appropriate folder / file name to be loaded. After selecting a data file to load, the main 'LAS3
Load' interface is launched.
225
Senergy
To Import Wells - drag/drop the 'Well', using the left-hand mouse button, from the right-hand
'Tree' view panel into the upper, 'Wells to Import' panel. Alternatively right-mouse-click on a well
name and click the 'Add' button that appears on-screen. IP will read the LAS/LAS3 entries and
will show a similar status window as that illustrated below while it is reading the file. The user
has the option to terminate the 'import' operation at any time by clicking the 'Cancel' button. The
'import' operation will populate the 'Wells to Import' panel with the LAS/LAS3 well names. All the
available LAS/LAS3 curves will be listed in the 'Curves to Import' list.
To Load Curves - drag/drop the individual curve names from the 'Tree' view panel into the
Senergy
226
lower, 'Curves to Import' panel. Alternatively, right-mouse-button-click on a curve name and

click the 'Add' button that appears on-screen. The 'Curves to Import' panel will populate with
the selected curves. To load all the curves for a selected well then drag/drop the 'Curve' title into
the 'Curves to Import' panel.
To Edit Imported Well Details - before importing the selected data into IP, the user may want to
edit the well name or well details. This is achieved by right mouse button 'clicking' on the 'IP Well
Name' in the 'Wells to Import' panel. A 'Properties' box appears. Select this and an 'External
DB Well Properties' window opens up.
Any of the 'External Well' details can be changed by the user. When 'Apply' is 'clicked' then
these changes are seen in the 'IP Well' column.
The user can choose to leave all the well details as they are, in which case a new IP database
well with the 'External Well' name will be created in the current IP database, or, if the LAS/LAS3
well already has a corresponding IP well name entry, that well can be selected from the well
227
Senergy
drop-down list at the top of the screen. In this case, imported log curves will be written to the IP
well, into the user-selected curve set.
To Edit Imported Curve Details - individual log curve properties can be viewed in the 'Curves
to Import' panel by right-mouse-button clicking on a curve name. The following dialog will be
launched:
If you wish to make changes to the curve properties, make them in this dialog and click 'OK'. The
'Curves to Import' panel entry will update to reflect the changes made.
The 'Operations' buttons

'Load All' - the 'Load All' button will execute the import operation of wells / sets and curves
from the LAS/LAS3 file into IP.
'Remove All' - the 'Remove All' button clears all the wells and log curves from the two
right-hand panels of the 'Import into IP' screen.
External Database Interface 'Check-box' Options

The following import options can be 'checked' / 'un-checked' on the 'Import into IP' tab in order
to manage the way Well and Curves data are brought into IP from the LAS/LAS3 file:
'Overwrite Existing Curves'- if 'checked', when importing a curve or curves from the LAS/
LAS3 file into an existing IP well where the identical curve name(s) exist, the LAS/LAS3 file
curves will overwrite the existing data in IP. If 'un-checked' the user will be warned that an
identical curve name already exists in the IP well.
Senergy
228
'Use "Load Into Set" option' - if 'checked' and the curves are being imported to an existing
IP well, the import operation will ignore the LAS/LAS3 file curve Set names and will write the
imported curves into the user-selected IP curve Set (set up from the Well 'Properties'
window). If the box is left 'un-checked', the LAS/LAS3 file curve Sets will be created in the IP
database and curves will be loaded into them.
'Fill Gaps' - if 'checked', IP will automatically extrapolate across any small (up to 5 depth
increments) data gaps existing in the imported curves during the import operation. If the user
wishes to copy Core analysis data (e.g.Core porosity, Core grain density, Permeability) then
the 'Fill Gaps' option should be left 'un-checked'. Importing continuous log curves and
discrete core analysis data from LAS/LAS3 file to IP would therefore require a two step
import operation, with 'Fill Gap' switched 'on' for continuous logs and 'off' for core data.
'Link Zones' - if 'checked', IP will import LAS/LAS3 file Tops information and link the entries
to make a continuous IP Zone Set where the base of one formation is automatically taken as
the next deepest Formation Top depth.
Related Topics
ASCII Load
LAS / LBS Load
LAS3 Load
LIS Load
DLIS Load
DBASE4 Load
LAS Batch Load
5.1.4
Load LIS Data
Petrophysics Curves. The 'LIS Load' module launches a 'Windows Explorer' dialog which is
used to locate the 'file-to-load'.
Select the 'file-to-load' from the 'browse' window. The selected LIS file will be scanned and the
following window will then be displayed:
229
Senergy
The selected LIS File name is displayed in the 'LIS Load' dialog header, in the top left hand
corner of the window, next to the Well name.
The LIS 'File Scan' can be viewed or printed by 'clicking' the 'Print scan report' or 'View Scan'
buttons, respectively. Listings can either be:
'Short' : containing only curve names and intervals, or
'Long' : containing a full listing of the LIS file structure.
The 'show comments' check box, if 'checked', will include any comments found in the LIS file, in
the short listing. A file 'LISscan.log' is automatically created in the project directory, which
contains the results of the last LIS scan. The following is an example of a short listing of the
above file, produced by clicking the 'View Scan' button:
Senergy
230
The internal LIS file sequences will be displayed in the box called 'Select File Sequence' on the
right hand panel of the 'LIS Load' window . 'Click' on the file sequence row in the 'Select File
Sequence' you wish to 'view' or 'load'. The curves in the selected file sequence will be displayed
in the left hand 'grid' panel.
Select the curves to load by clicking the 'Load' 'cell' opposite the curve name. By clicking the '
Load' label at the top of the right hand column the user can toggle between 'select all curves' and
'de-select all curves'. The 'Load' column is useful if the user only wants to load one or two
curves out of a long list.
Input curve names or curve units can be changed, during loading, by manually editing the 'IP
Name' or 'Units' columns. A 'Curve Alias Defaults' file can be set up to load curves from
various data sources / logging service companies to a common set of IP curve names. See the '
Tools'
'Defaults'
'Edit Curve Alias Defaults' module. This is useful, for example, if the
user has a corporate log naming convention and wants to load curves from external sources
using the corporate mnemonics.
By 'checking' the 'Append to curve Name - Service ID' box, the curve service ID (see full scan)
will be appended to the 'IP Name'. The service ID is used in several programs, including IP, to
extend the length of the curve name from four characters (LIS format limits curve names to four
characters). All characters, from the 4th character onwards, are put into the service ID.
Curve Sorting - Curve names in the Load 'grid' panel can be sorted either using the 'Sort
Curves Alphabetically' check box or the 'Sort Curves using Curve Type' check box.
These options may help in selecting a few required curves from a long list of available
curves in the input LIS file. For example, If the user has set up the curve defaults file,
CPARMDEF.PAR (See 'Tools'
'Defaults'
'Edit Curve System Defaults') to pick up
required curve names and has assigned curve 'Types', then IP will map the curve types to
recognized curve names. Using the 'Sort Curves using Curve Type' check box will
quickly 'filter' these curves from all those stored in the input file.
Curve Type - The 'Type' column allows the user to select the curve type that is loaded for
the input curve. Curve types are used in IP to help with the auto-selection of curves used in
some modules. These can be set later in the 'Manage Curve Headers'. The default curve
type for each input curve is looked up when the file is scanned.
Curve Load Set - The 'Default Load Set' entry box allows the user to individually select
which Curve 'Set' to load the LIS data into. This can be set simultaneously for all curves, by
selecting the required 'Set Name' from the 'Default Load Set' list.
The 'Edit Sets' button allows the user to create new Curve Sets using the 'Manage Curve
Sets' module. If a new Set Name is created, the user is prompted to use this Set to load all
231
Senergy
curves into. A dialog similar to the following screen capture is launched. Click 'Yes' to set
the new Curve Set for all curves to be imported.
The 'Curve Step' drop down box allows the step to be selected for when populating the '
Load Set' column using the 'Default Load Set' drop down control.
The 'Prefix' box is used when creating automatic set names. The set name will include this
text (LIS_*)plus a numeric value in order to make it unique.
'Auto. New Sets' button is used to create a new set for each different step interval in the
well. The set name will include whatever is in the 'Prefix' box plus a numeric value.
Some curves in LIS files contain higher sample rate data that the normal frame spacing. The part
listing, below, of a full scan shows this:
Curve
Name
BS
CS
AVCL
SCNL
NPOR
C1
C2
Service
ID
OBDTAB
OBDTAB
OBDTAB
OBDTAB
OBDTAB
OBDTAB
OBDTAB
Units File
#
IN
59
F/HR 59
V
59
59
PU
59
IN
59
IN
59
Size
Byte
4
4
20
2
4
16
16
Num Rep
Samp Code
1
68
1
68
1
68
1
79
1
68
4
68
4
68
The 'Rep' column displays the 'repeat count' of a curve in each frame of data. This packing
of multiple values into the same frame is used for array data. If an array curve is selected to
be loaded into IP then a similar, dimensioned array curve will be created.
The 'Num Samp' column contains the number of samples per frame. The user can see that
curves BS and CS have 1 sample per frame while curves C1 and C2 have 4 samples. The
AVCL curve in the above example is in fact an array data curve with 5 samples in the array.
This can be determined by looking at the Size Byte for the curve (20) and dividing this by the
storage size for each value (4 bytes, Rep code 68).
The 'IP Well Units' and 'IP Well Step' boxes are used to set the IP well database units and
'Step' if they have not been set up when the well was created.
The 'Top Depth' and 'Bottom Depth' boxes are used to define the IP well depth range if it is
not already defined.
Senergy
232
The user can manually type in the depth Interval to load using the 'Top Depth' and 'Bottom
Depth' boxes, or 'double click' on a file sequence row will launch the following dialog:
This allows the actual file sequence depth range to be used as the 'Interval to Load'.
Depth data can be in feet in the file and loaded into a metric depth units well. The user can load
part of the file by defining the interval under 'Interval to Load'. The interval-to-load depth units will
be in the well depth units, regardless of what units the file is recorded in. If the 'Interval to Load'
extends outside the well interval the following message will be displayed.
extended.
The 'IP Well Name' box allows the setting or editing of the well name. The 'Well Comment' (see
233
Senergy
'Manage Well Header Info.') can be set from the well name box by placing a colon, with a
space before and after, ( : ) after the well name and appending the well comment after the colon.
For example '14/19-23 : Preliminary' will create a well name of '14/19-23' with a well comment
of 'Preliminary'.
The 'Load LIS Parameters' check box will allow the loading of any recognised parameters found
in the LIS file. The 'Which Run' box allows the user to select which logging run the parameter
data will be loaded into (see Manage Well Header Info.). The following table shows the LIS
parameters currently recognized and loaded to IP by default. This list is user-editable from the '
Tools'
'Options'
'Well Attributes' and 'Log Attributes' modules.
Senergy
234
'Fill Data Gaps' - the 'Fill Data Gaps' check box will extrapolate the curve data over null
235
Senergy
data gaps when loading. If not 'checked' this same function can be performed using the 'Fill
Data Gaps' module.
If the user wants to add an extension to the name of all the curves (e.g. add a '1' to the curve
names to denote they come from log run 1), then type the extension in the 'Extension' box and
click 'Add'.
The 'OK' button will load the specified curves into the specified well and sets.
'New File' - this allows the user to choose another file to load.
newly-created well as the well to load the LIS data into.
The 'Set Well' button sets the LIS-Load well 'focus'. This will be the well name into which the
curve data will be loaded and is the Well name that is displayed at the top of the 'LIS Load'
window. The button can be used to load several LIS files into different wells without having to
close the window and re-open it. The user changes the well focus on the primary IP window
by using the 'Select Well to Display' options and then 'clicks' the 'Set Well' button on the
'LIS Load' window.

If the user loads a number of files to IP, which contain data with the same curve mnemonics they
For example:
A second LAS file is loaded containing a curve GDCORE over the depth range 2500-6000ft
On loading the second file the following 'Warning' message appears.
the existing GR curve from 2500-3000 ft and add/concatenate the new GR data from 30006000 ft to the existing curve.
Senergy
236
delete the existing curve from the IP database and then load the new curve from an external file.
Related Topics
ASCII Load
LAS / LBS Load
LAS3 Load
LIS Load
DLIS Load
DBASE4 Load
LAS Batch Load
5.1.5
Load DLIS Data
To load a DLIS Data file into Interactive Petrophysics:
From the Input/Output Menu, Select Load, DLIS Loader New to display the New DLIS
Loader.
Click Add Files to Locate and Open the required DLIS file. The DLIS Data file will be
displayed in the Upper Pane of the New DLIS Loader (see below). NOTE: To display the
Curves in the Lower Pane for the required DLIS Data file, click the required file in the Upper
pane.
NOTE: Scanning the DLIS file can take some time, depending on the size of the file. The curve
names in the DLIS file are displayed in the lower pane of the New DLIS Load window. The user
237
Senergy
can view or print the DLIS scan results by clicking the 'Report Button' which then displays the
Verification Listing Window.
If curves have been encrypted by the logging company then they will appear with an 'x' in the '
Load' column. They will NOT be loaded into the IP database along with the other selected
curves. Contact the logging company to get the curves unencrypted.
The 'DLIS File' will be displayed in the upper panel on the right of the 'DLIS Load' window. 'Click'
on the file you wish to view or load. The curves in the file will be displayed in the lower pane of the
New DLIS Loader.

For example:
A second DLIS file is loaded containing a curve GDCORE over the depth range 2500-6000ft
On loading the second file a Warning Dialog will be displayed asking to Overwrite any Existing
Curves.
Senergy
238
the existing GDCORE curve from 2500-3000 ft and add/concatenate the new GDCORE
data from 3000-6000 ft to the existing curve.
delete the existing curve from the IP database and then load the new curve from an external
file.
Related Topics
ASCII Load
LAS / LBS Load
LAS3 Load
LIS Load
DBASE4 Load
LAS Batch Load
5.1.5.1
Specify Curves to Load
Specify Which Curves to Load into Interactive Petrophysics using the File Data Tab in the Lower
Pane of the DLIS File Load Dialog.
To select Curves for loading:
Either manually 'check' the cells in the 'Load' column for each required curve
Or Click the 'Load' label at the top of the right hand column the user can toggle between
selecting / de-selecting all curves
Or, From the Filter Drop Down Menu, Select Load Mask to display the Select Mask File
Dialog and Select a User Defined Mask File.
NOTE: A mask file is a space-delimited text file, which lists the curve mnemonics to search
for and an optional Interactive Petrophysics Display Name. The mask file has the file
extension *.mask
239
Senergy
All curves with names matching the mask entries will be shown in the curve list window. An
example of a mask is shown below. Only the curve names and optional IP curve names are
required:
GR
DT
RHOZ RHOB
(looks for curve 'GR')

(looks for curve 'DT')
(looks for curve name RHOZ and loads it to IP as RHOB)
The 'Filter' drop-down list contains a number of masking options in addition to 'Load Mask':
'No Mask' - view all curves in the DLIS file.
'Selected' - if a number of masks have been applied and the curve 'Load' boxes have been
'checked', this will show the combined results of all the masks.
'IP Defaults' - if a curve name is known to IP, therefore having a default curve type (see '
Tools'
'Defaults'
'Edit Curve System Defaults') , that curve will, by default, be
'checked' to be loaded.
Input curve names or curve units can be changed while loading, by editing the 'IP Name' or '
Units' columns. Alternatively, a 'Curve Alias Defaults' file can be set up to load curves from
various data sources / logging service companies to a common set of IP curve names. See the '
Tools'
'Defaults'
'Edit Curve Alias Defaults' module. This is useful, for example, if the
user has a corporate log naming convention and wants to load curves from external sources
using the corporate mnemonics.
To remove any mask filters Select NO Mask from the Filter Drop Down Menu.
The 'Description' column allows the user to see the curve description that accompanies the
curve from the vendors DLIS file. The column width can be varied so that the whole description
can be seen.
The 'Type' column allows the user to select the curve type that is loaded for the input curve.
Curve types are used in IP to help with the auto-selection of curves used in some modules.
These can be set later in the 'Manage Curve Headers' module. The default curve type for
each input curve is looked up when the file is scanned.
The 'Load Set' column allows the user to individually select which curve set to load the data
Senergy
240
into. This can be changed for all curves at the same time by selecting the required Set from the
'Default Load Set' box. The 'Edit Sets' button allows the user to create new Sets using the '
Manage Curve Sets' module.
The 'Vals' column displays the repeat count of a curve in each frame of data. This packing of
multiple values into the same frame is used for array data (eg FMI image data curves). If an
array curve is flagged to be loaded into IP, then a similarly dimensioned array curve will be
created.
'Step' - DLIS files can contain data at various depth sample rates. The SCAN illustrated above,
shows nine indices these are :
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
6 inches
1 inch
0.5 inches
3 inches
12 inches
18 inches
0.1 inches
0.2 inches
2 inches
(60 x 0.1")
(10 * 0.1").
(5 * 0.1").
(30 * 0.1").
(120 * 0.1").
(180 * 0.1").
(1 * 0.1").
(2 * 0.1").
(20 * 0.1").
This spacing is also included on the DLIS load screen under the 'Step' column.
The 'IP Well Units' and 'IP Well Step' boxes are used to set the IP well database units and step
if they have not been set up when the well was created.
The 'Top Depth' and 'Bottom Depth' boxes are used to define the IP well interval if not already
defined. Otherwise they will define the interval in the DLIS file over which to attempt the data load.
Depth data can be in imperial units in the file and be loaded into a metric depth units well. The
user can load part of the file by defining the interval under 'Interval to Load'. The interval to load
depth units will be in the 'well depth units' regardless of what units the file is recorded in. If the '
Interval to Load' extends outside the well depth range the following message will be displayed.
extended.
241
Senergy
If the user wants to add an extension to the name of all the curves (e.g. add a '1' to the curve
names to denote they come from log run 1), then type the extension in the 'Add Extension to
curve name' box and click 'Add'.
The 'IP Well Name' box allows the setting or editing of the well name. The 'Well Comment' (see
'Manage Well Header Info.') can be set from the well name box by placing a colon, with a
space before and after, ( : ) after the well name and appending the well comment after the colon.
For example '14/19-23 : Preliminary' will create a well name of '14/19-23' with a well comment of
'Preliminary'.
'Load DLIS Parameters' - the 'Load DLIS Parameters' check box will allow the loading of
any recognised parameters found in the DLIS file.
The 'Use Run # from file' box allows the user to select which logging Run the parameter
data will be loaded into (see Manage Well Header Info. 'Logging' tab) or the user can use
the 'Start at Run' box to enter a run number that the DLIS data is to be loaded into.
'Fill Data Gaps' - the 'Fill Data Gaps' check box will extrapolate the curve data over null
data gaps when loading. If not 'checked' this same function can be performed using the 'Fill
Data Gaps' module.
The 'Curve Step' drop down box allows the step to be selected for when populating the
'Load Set' column using the 'Default Load Set' drop down control.
The 'Prefix' box is used when creating automatic set names. The set name will include this
text (DLIS_*)plus a numeric value in order to make it unique.
'Auto. New Sets' button is used to create a new set for each different step interval in the
well. The set name will include the entry in the 'Prefix' box plus the DLIS file 'Frame Name'
for each step interval (which can be viewed using a DLIS Viewer in the Frame Summary
section of the DLIS File). [Note: The DLIS standard groups all curves with the same step
interval into 'Frames']
The 'OK' button will load the specified curves into the specified well and sets. If the user
decides not to go ahead with the load once the 'OK' button has been 'clicked' then a 'Cancel
' button' is now available.
'New File' - this allows the user to choose another DLIS file to load.
newly-created well as the well to load the LIS data into.
The 'Set Well' button sets the DLIS read well focus. This is the well that is displayed at the
top of the DLIS read window. The button can be used to load several DLIS files into different
wells without having to close the window and re-open it. The user changes the well focus on
Senergy
242
the primary IP window by using the 'Select Well to Display' options and then clicks the 'Set
Well' button on the DLIS read window.
Related Topics
Load DLIS Data
Load the DLIS Data
Define DLIS File Load Options
Display the DLIS Header Information
Define DLIS File Global Options
Load Multiple DLIS Files
5.1.5.2
Generic and Curve Set Options can be defined for the DLIS File Load Process using the File
Options Tab in the Lower Pane of the DLIS Load Dialog.
From the Lower Pane of the New DLIS Loader , Select the File Options Tab to display the
File Options for the Selected DLIS File.
Automatically use Frames to Create New Curve Sets enables Curve Sets with a
Specific Prefix to be created when the DLIS file is Loaded into the Interactive Petrophysics
Database. NOTE If this is Selected the Curve Step and Load Set Options are unvailable. If
this is NOT Selected the Curve Step and Any Existing Sets from the DLIS Data File can be
selected from this section. Select the required Curve Step and Load Set to add to the DLIS
Data Load.
243
Senergy
The following General Options can be either Selected or De-Selected.

Extend the Well Interval if the Curves are Outside the Depth Range If the Depth
Range for the Well in the DLIS Data File is greater than the Depth Range for the Well into
which the data is being loaded, this will extend the Depth Range for the Well to
accommodate the Depth Interval contained within the Well in the DLIS Data File.
Extend the Set Interval if the Curves are Outside the Depth Range If the Depth Range
for the Curve Set in the DLIS Data File is greater than the Depth Range for the Curve Set
into which the data is being loaded, this will extend the Depth Range for the Curve Set to
accommodate the Depth Interval contained within the Curve Set in the DLIS Data File.
Load Curves with a High Sample Rate as Array Data High-rate sampling curves can be
loaded into IP as Array Data Curves with more than one depth sample per database depth
increment. If a high sample rate curve is detected then the 'Vals' column value will be >1.
If this option is selected then all High rate Sampled Curves will be loaded as Array Data
Curves.
If the newly loaded curve names match existing curve names, Interactive Petrophysics
offers the following choices:
Ignore If the Curve Names match existing Curve Names, then the matching Curves will not
be loaded.
Insert New Data into the Existing Curve If the Curve Names match existing Curve
Names, the new data will be loaded into the existing Curve.
Create a New Curve with a Numerical Suffix If the Curve Names match existing Curve
Names then a New Curve will be created with a Numerical Suffix.
Related Topics
Load DLIS Data
Load the DLIS Data
Senergy
244

5.1.5.3
Load the DLIS Data
Once the DLIS Load Parameters and File Options have been defined, the DLIS Load Process is
launched by clicking the Next Button in the DLIS Load Dialog.
Click the Next Button to display the Validation Window, listing all the required Actions to Load
the DLIS Data.
Click Finish to Display the DLIS Load Progress Window.
Once the Load is complete, Click Done to Close the New DLIS Loader and make the Loaded
245
Senergy
Well(s) available to be displayed in the Database Browser. See Load Wells from Database.
Related Topics
Load DLIS Data
5.1.5.4
The Upper Pane of the DLIS Load Dialog contains the Header Information for the Selected DLIS
File(s).
To Display the DLIS File Header Information:
Load a DLIS File into the New DLIS Loader
Either Hover the Mouse Button over the DLIS File in the Upper Pane to display the DLIS File
Header Information.
Senergy
246
Or Right Click the DLIS File in the Upper Pane or and Select Browse File to display the DLIS
File Header Information Dialog.
Or Double Click the DLIS File in the Uppoer Pane to display the DLIS File Header
Information Dialog.
Related Topics
Load DLIS Data
Load the DLIS Data
247
5.1.5.5
Senergy
From the Upper Pane of the New DLIS Loader, Click the Options Button to display the
GLOBAL Options Dialog.
Import Settings:
Create a New Set for each File Sequence, Select to Create a New Set for each DLIS File to
be loaded.
Prefix: Specify a Prefix for DLIS Files to be loaded.
User Interface Settings:

Show Tool Tips: Displays Tool Tips in the DLIS Load Dialog.
Automatically Select the Active Well: Automatically Selects the Active Well in the DLIS Load
Dialog.
Related Topics
Load DLIS Data
Load the DLIS Data
Senergy
5.1.5.6
248
The New DLIS Loader can be used to Load Multiple DLIS Data Files at once.
Display the New DLIS Loader.
Click Add Files and Select the First DLIS Data File. This file will appear in the Upper Pane of
the New DLIS Loader. Repeat this step for each file you wish to include within the DLIS Data
File Load.
Related Topics
Load DLIS Data
Load the DLIS Data
5.1.7
DBASE4 Load
Database. The user enters the DBASE 4 file name under the 'Database name' label and clicks '
Open' to open the database. The depths and curves in the database will be displayed. The '
Browse' button can be used to select the database.
249
Senergy
The user selects the curves and the depths to load and clicks 'Load' to load the data. If data is to
be loaded into a new well then the depths, step and units set on the screen will define the well
depths, step and units. If the well depths are already defined then the 'Top' and 'Bottom' boxes
will define the data interval to load.
The 'Units' box defines the units of the database. The user can load a metric database file into
an imperial units well. For 'time' data wells, the units can be set to either seconds or milliseconds. The primary input curve should be called 'TIME'.
The 'Null Value' box must be set to whatever Null value is defined in the database file. The
default in IP is 999.
The 'Depth Curve Name' box defines the depth curve name in the database file. Normally this
will be 'Depth' but if the database defines the depth column with a different name this must be
entered in this box.
The 'Well Name' box allows the user to change the current well name. For a new well, this box
will be blank and the well name can be entered. The 'Well Comment' (see 'Manage Well
Header Info.') can be set from the well name box by placing a colon, with a space before and
after, ( : ) after the well name and appending the well comment after the colon. For example '
14/19-23 : Preliminary' will create a well name of '14/19-23' with a well comment of 'Preliminary
'.
Senergy
250
The 'Set Well' button sets the DBASE 4-read well 'focus'. This sets the well name that is
displayed at the top of the DBASE 4 read window. The button can be used to load several
DBASE 4 files into different wells without having to close the window and re-open it. The user
changes the well focus on the primary window by using the 'Select Well to Display' options and
then clicks the 'Set Well' button on the DBASE 4 read window.
Curve Load Set
The selected curve data will be loaded into the curve set selected in the 'IP Load Set' box. The '
Edit Sets' button allows the user to create new sets using the 'Manage Curve Sets' module.
Related Topics
ASCII Load
LAS / LBS Load
LAS3 Load
LIS Load
DLIS Load
DBASE4 Load
LAS Batch Load
5.1.8
LAS Batch Load
The 'LAS Batch Load' module allows the user to load multiple LAS files into newly-created or
existing IP wells.
Select the LAS file names from the 'Select LAS files to load' dialog box. IP reads the LAS file
headers and extracts the well name, API Number, UWI, number of curves, the log depth interval,
depth units and well step. The 'API Num.' and 'UWI' column can be turned off by 'un-checking'
the 'Display API number' and 'Display UWI' check boxes. If the LAS file do not contain API or
UWI numbers then the 'API Num.' or 'UWI' columns will not be displayed.
251
Senergy
Select the files to load by 'checking' in the 'Load' column to the left of the 'File Name' column. If
the 'Load' column title is 'clicked', then the whole column will be set to the inverse of whatever
has been set for the first file. This allows the user to quickly select or deselect all files.
The number of files selected to be loaded can be seen in the lower left of the module screen.
The order in which wells are listed and loaded to IP can be modified by the user before
loading the LAS files. The user should 'left mouse' click in the margin to the left of the 'Load'
column. A broad grey-coloured bar will appear above the well where the mouse was clicked.
Drag the bar up or down to change the order in which the wells will be loaded into IP.
The 'File Name' column gives the name of the file to load. The file names cannot be edited
in the table. If alternative files need to be loaded, click the 'Select Files' button.
The 'Well Name' column shows the name of the well, taken from the LAS file header. If the
Senergy
252
file is to be loaded to an existing IP well, the name should be changed to the name of the IP
well by 'clicking' in the 'Well Name' cell and selecting the correct well from the drop-down
box.
The API as IP Well Name or the UWI as IP Well Name enables the API or the UWI to be
used as the IP Database Well Name. If this option is selected, the Actual Well Name will
appear as the Well Comment.
The 'Load into Set' column allows the user to individually select which Curve Set to load the
data into using the drop-down button to select the Curve Set. This can be changed for all
wells at the same time by selecting the required Set from the 'Set Default load set' box.
The 'Add Set' button allows the user to create new Curve Set names for selection. Curve
Sets are created in the individual well when the data are loaded.
The 'No. Crvs' column displays the number of curves in the file. This is non-editable.
The 'Top Dep.' and 'Bot Dep.' columns initially give the depth range of the data specified in
the LAS file header. These depths can be changed to limit the range of data to load to within
specified depths. If the 'Create New Well for each file' box is 'checked', then the depths
entered here will define the top and bottom depths of the new IP well.
For an existing well, if the 'Top Dep.' and 'Bot Dep.' extend outside the current well interval the
following message will be displayed.
253
Senergy
extended. This well extension is not done automatically and the user must confirm the new
depths and close the 'Well Depths Editor' module before the LAS file is loaded.
The 'Units' and 'Step' columns initially give the depth curve units and data spacing specified
in the LAS file header. If the 'Create New Well for each file' box is 'checked', then they will
be used to specify the units and database step of the IP well. The user can set the same '
Step' for all LAS files in the 'Batch Load' operation by 'clicking' on the 'Step' column header
title. This action will set all wells in the list to the 'Step' value shown in the top row of the
grid.
If the 'Create New Well for each file' box is 'checked' then the well name entered here will
be the IP well name for the new well.
If the 'Load files into wells with same name' box is 'checked' then the 'Use to Select IP
well' panel becomes available. This offers three choices:
'Well Name'
'UWI'
'API Number'
Depending on which option is selected then as long as the well name or UWI or API number of the
selected LAS file matches a well within the IP database then the LAS data will be transferred. If no
match occurs then an error message will appear and no transfer of data will take place.
The 'Load LAS Parameters' check box will allow the loading of any parameters in the LAS
header that are acceptable to IP (See Table in LAS /LBSFile Input). 'Checking' this option
can pick up data such as mud and mud filtrate resistivity data and temperatures, if it is
encoded in a known format.
Using 'Mask' Files or the 'CurveAlias' file

The 'Use Mask to select curves' check-box allows an external text file (e.g.'LAS Mask.txt') to
be created / used to decide which curves should be selected for loading. The external file format
is very simple and consists of names of curves that should be loaded. One name per line. If the
Senergy
254
user wants the curve to be re-named during the 'Load' operation, then the new name for the
curve should follow the original name. The following characters are acceptable to separate the
'external' curve name from the IP 'load' name: comma, space, tab and semicolon. An example
mask file is given below.
CALI
DEPTH
DRHO
DTLN
GDCORE
LLD
LLD2 LLD
LLS
MSFL1
MSFLC
PERMCORE
PHICORE2; PHICORE
RHOB
RHOB1, RHOB
SGR
SP
TNPH
The 'Mask file name' entry box must contain the valid mask file name if the 'Use Mask to select
curves' box has been 'checked'. The 'Edit Mask File' button can be used to create or browse to
the correct file name.
If no 'Mask' file is selected but the user has a 'CurveAlias.txt' file available, (See 'Edit Curve
Alias Defaults'), then the loaded curves will be named according to the curve name 'mapping' in
the 'Curve Alias' file. NOTE: this is automatically applied, the user does not have to
manually select the 'Curve Alias' file.
The 'Fill data gaps' option allows the user to automatically extrapolate gaps in the input
data. This is useful, for example, if one is loading a one sample per foot file into a two
sample per foot well. The 'Max Gap width' allows the user to set the maximum gap for
filling, the gap is defined in database sample increments.
The 'Load' button loads the LAS files and creates any new well as required.
The 'Select Files' button allows the user to select different input LAS files to load.
The 'View Curves' button will display a window that contains the names of the curves for
the file that is currently selected (highlighted box in the data grid). The following is an
example of a listing.
255
Senergy
The list can be used to create a Mask file for selecting the curves to load. The user must highlight
the curves required and then 'right mouse' click on the window and select the 'Copy Curve
names to clipboard'. This will then copy the curve names, but not units, to the clipboard which
can then be used to copy into the Mask file.
The 'Edit Mask File' can be used to create or edit a mask file. The user selects the file to
edit or create and then the program will automatically open it up in 'NotePad', where the
user can then modify it.
Related Topics
ASCII Load
LAS / LBS Load
LAS3 Load
LIS Load
DLIS Load
DBASE4 Load
LAS Batch Load
Senergy
5.3
256
This Chapter Outlines the Picture and Text Curve Data Loading Processes.
The Picture Curves module is the main module for manipulating graphics (picture) data. A '
Picture curve' consists of a set of graphics files, for example a set of white light or UV core
photographs. Each graphics file has a defined top and bottom depth which allows the picture to be
scaled to the log data. The images are not stored directly, but the graphics file and path name to
the pictures are stored in the IP database. When a graphics file is selected, it is loaded into
memory and converted into a bitmap for display.
The Text Curves creates, loads and edits text strings for display as Text Curves.
Related Topics
Real Time Data Link
Section 5.3 Load Data from an External Source : Load Picture and Text Curve Data
257
5.4
Senergy
The 'Interval Loader' module allows the user to load data into the IP program such as a faciestype interpretation, where a certain geological facies, represented by a numerical value, is
assigned over a particular depth interval. The 'Interval Loader' can also be used to load
periodic / discrete data, such as core plug analysis results (grain densities, porosities and air
permeabilities) or wireline formation tester (RFT, RCI, FMT) pressure data.
This module is very useful if the external data is presented in a spreadsheet form. The 'copy
from spreadsheet' functionality can be utilized to load large amounts of spreadsheet data into
the IP interface. The functionality has been extended in IP Version 3.3 and later versions, to allow
the user to load Array-type data into IP using this module.
Up to 200 curves can be loaded / created at one time, using this interface. See the section on '
Loading Array Data' later in this chapter.
To Display the Interval/Spreadsheet Loader:
sFrom the Input/Output Menu Select Load Data, Interval/Spreadsheet Loader Dialog.
The Interval Loader/Spreadsheet Loader Dialog will now be displayed.
Section 5.4 Load Data from an External Source : Using the Interval Loader
Senergy
258
Data can be loaded into IP in a number of ways using this module.

The user can manually type values into the empty data table, or
Load values from an ASCII data file.
'Click' the'New File' button to launch a 'file selection' dialog and browse to the ASCII file.
If the ASCII file has been set up with a top and bottom depth then leave the 'No Bottom
Depth' box 'un-checked'. However, if the ASCII file has only one depth column then 'tick' the
'No Bottom Depth' box.
The format of the ASCII input file should be a series of data lines with a 'Top Depth' entry,
259
Senergy
and / or a 'Bottom Depth' entry and then data values separated by spaces, tabs or
commas. The 'Interval Loader' only reads lines with numeric data entries. Curve header
text, curve names and curve units are not recognized or loaded. A minimum of three data
columns must exist in the input ASCII file. For core analysis data input or when loading RFT
pressure data, for example, type in 'Bottom Depth' values that are equal to the 'Top Depth'
entries, followed by the Core porosities, air permeabilities or pressure values.
The data file should load into the interface.
Fill in the curve 'Name', curve 'Units', curve 'Set' entries for each column in the input file
and 'Click' the 'Load' button.
Data can also be copied and pasted into the interface from an external spreadsheet.
Select the data range in the spreadsheet to be copied and copy it ('CTRL C' or righthand mouse button 'Copy') into the clipboard. NOTE: the 'Copy/ Paste' functionality only
works with 'continuous' spreadsheet data ranges. 'Click' on the cell on the 'Interval
Loader' grid into which to start the 'paste' operation.
'Click' the 'Paste' icon button at the base of the window. DO NOT use the 'paste'
function from the drop-down menu obtained by right mouse clicking on a cell. This will
only paste a single value into the selected cell.
The 'Header' rows of the 'Interval Loader' interface, with titles in cells with a grey background
colour, are described below:
The 'Name' row allows the user to set up curve names for each column of data loaded into
the interface.
The 'Units' row allows the user to set up curve 'Units' for each column of data loaded into
the interface.
The 'Type' row in the grid allows the user to select the internal IP curve 'type' that is
Senergy
260
assigned to the input data. Curve types are used in IP to help with the auto-selection of
curves used in some modules. Alternatively, these can be set later in the 'Manage Curve
Headers'.
The 'Set' row in the grid allows the user to individually select which Curve Set to load the
curve data into. This can be changed for all curves at the same time by selecting the
required Set from the 'Default Load Set' box. The 'Edit Sets' button allows the user to
create new Sets using the 'Manage Curve Sets' module.
The 'Array Sze' row allows the user to set up the 'dimensions' of curves to be created when
the 'Load' button is clicked. (see 'Loading Array Data' for a full explanation). When the
array size is set to contain multiple X array values the 'Array No.' row will be auto-filled with
the appropriate number of columns. The 'Name' row is also populated for the entire array.
The 'Array No.' row allows the user to set up the 'Array Index number' of a data column in
an array-type curve.
If the 'Delete Curves before write' check box is 'checked', IP will totally clear an existing IP
curve of its data before writing newly imported data to it. If this box is not 'checked' (the default
setting), this allows the user to append/concatenate new data to an existing curve in the
database.
Clicking the 'Clear All' button removes all data entries from the 'Interval Loader' screen.
The 'Clear Row' button allows the user to remove all data entries from a selected row from
within the 'Interval Loader' screen.
The 'Clear Column' button allows the user to remove all data entries from a selected
column from within the 'Interval Loader' screen.
The 'Load' Button - clicking the 'Load' button executes the 'load' operation for the data
currently visible in the interface.
The 'New File' button - clicking the 'New File' button launches a 'Browse' dialog that the
user can use to navigate to locate the file-to-load.
The 'Paste' button - clicking the 'Paste' button pastes the data previously selected from an
external spreadsheet into the interface. The user should first click in an appropriate cell in
the grid to define the first cell for the 'Paste' operation.
Loading Array Data

Loading Capillary Pressure Data as Arrays:
Capillary pressure data can also be loaded in the manner described here. The workflow is
261
Senergy
explained, using the example array data file illustrated below, which contains 2 curves 'Phi' and
'Gd' which are 'normal' one-dimensional curves and 2 two-dimensional arrays 'Sw' and 'Pc',
each with six array elements. The data will be loaded into an 'irregular' step set which will keep
the same depths as the original dataset.
Dept
h
m
209
1.2
209
3.6
209
4.5
209
5.7
Phi
Gd
Sw
Pc
dec
gm/
cc
dec
psi
0.2
2.68
1
1
2
0.8
3
0.6
4
0.4
5
0.2
6
0.1
1
0
2
5
3
10
4
20
5
50
6
60
0.18
2.64
0.95
0.64
0.42
0.22
0.11
10
20
50
60
0.16
2.66
0.92
0.63
0.53
0.23
0.13
10
20
50
60
0.15
2.69
0.88
0.62
0.49
0.29
0.19
10
20
50
60
1. Either, click the 'New File' button and browse to the appropriate ASCII file containing the
array data (check the 'No Bottom Depth' box if the imported data does not have a bottom
depth column). The data panel at the bottom of the window is populated with the selected
file. Or, with an external spreadsheet open, copy / paste data into the appropriate column(s)
in the Interval Loader module.
2. Either, manually type in curve names and curve units for each column of date or copy /
paste them in from the spreadsheet source. If the curve name of one element within an
array curve is subsequently changed then all the curve names within the array are changed.
3. Select Curve 'Types' from the drop-down list, where appropriate.
4. Examine the input file and determine the dimensions of the required arrays. In the example
file, the Phi and Gd are conventional one-dimensional (1x 1) curves while the Sw and Pc
data are arrays, each having 6 array elements (6 columns of data).
5. Set the 'Default Load Set' to the required Curve Set by using the 'drop down' menu. If the
required set does not exist then create it by using the 'Edit Sets' button. For this dataset an
'irregular' spaced step set will be used.
Senergy
262
6. Set the 'Array Size' in the first column of the 'Sw' data block, by clicking in the 'Array Size'
cell in that column. A dialog pops up which allows you to set the 'Curve Dimensions'. The 'X
Dimension' should equal the number of columns of data in the array. The 'Z Dimension'
setting can be used to load array data at a smaller depth increment than the current 'well step'.
However, as the set into which the data will be loaded has an 'irregular' step then this 'Z
Dimension' can be left at 1. Set the dimensions of any other arrays in the input ASCII file, Pc
in this example.
7. The 'Array No.' and 'Name' for each column of the array auto-populates.
8. On clicking the 'Load' button, IP will create the Pc and Sw arrays with dimensions based on
the indices typed into the 'Array Index' row. This can be confirmed by looking at the 'Manage
Log Curve Headers' module, 'Statistics' tab, as illustrated below:
If the data is viewed using 'View - Curve Listing / Curve Edit' and the 'Expand Array Data'
box ticked, it can be seen that the imported data has the same depths as the original dataset.
263
Related Topics
Real Time Data Link
Senergy
Senergy
5.5
264
The capillary pressure (PC) data loader is designed to assist the entering of PC data into IP. A
maximum of 100 plugs can be entered at any one time. It removes the need for using the '
Interval Loader' to perform this operation. The new PC loader is designed to load data in
columns. Extra data associated with the PC measurement can also be loaded at the same time.
This new loader is very flexible as it is highly unlikely that all the input spreadsheet data is
arranged in such a way that it will be able to be loaded with just one mouse click. An example of
how data could be arranged in a spreadsheet for one-mouse-click loading into the Capillary
Pressure Data Loader is shown further down this chapter -Click here to view this example.
The loader form, as shown above, consists of a grid where data can either be typed in or be cut
and pasted in from a spreadsheet. There is a 'Paste' button which can be used for multiple data
selection pastes or if the user right mouse clicks on a cell standard Windows cut/paste
operations are available.
'Well' column - the form allows the loading of data into multiple wells at the same time. The
user selects the well from a drop down of loaded wells. If 'Well' is left blank then the
currently focused well is selected. If PC data is being entered for a well and then the user
moves onto the next column the well will be assumed to be the same and the 'Well' cell will
Section 5.5 Load Data from an External Source : Using the Capillary Pressure Data Loader
265
Senergy
be auto-filled in. 100 sets of PC data can be loaded in any one session.
'Depth' column - this can be typed in or pasted in from a spreadsheet using the 'Paste'
button or else right mouse button 'click' on the cell and select 'paste' from the pop-up menu.
'Curve 1' row - the number of input curves is user configurable through use of the 'No. of
Curves' selector. In the example above 'No. of Curves' is set at 2 so only two curve rows
are seen. The 'Name' and 'Units' have to be manually entered by the user whereas the '
Type' can be selected from a drop down list for each of the curves. The value of the curve in
the row can be typed in or pasted in from a spreadsheet using the 'Paste' button or else
right mouse button 'click' on the cell and select 'paste' from the pop-up menu.
'Text Curve 1' row -the number of text curves is user configurable through use of the 'No.
of Text Curves' selector. The 'Name' can be typed or pasted into the cell.
'PC' row - enables the user to define the 'Name', 'Units' and 'Type' of the PC curve which
will be loaded via the 'PC' column.
'PC Sat.' row - enables the user to define the 'Name', 'Units' and 'Type' of the PC
Saturation curve which will be loaded via the 'PC Sat' column.
'PC' column and 'PC Sat.' column - can be filled in by copying from a spreadsheet and then
'clicking' on the first cell and using the 'Paste' button. The number of rows of data can be
Senergy
266
upto a maximum of 100.

'Reference Depth Curve' - the depth entered per PC plug in the 'Depth' column can either
reference the depth curve in the well or an entered reference curve. This allows the user to
enter the depths as TVDSS.
'Default Load Set' - this is the curve Set that the PC curves will be created in. Sets can be
selected from the drop down list or else new Sets can be created using the 'Edit Sets'
button and the 'Add Set Names' dialogue.
'Depth Tolerance' - when loading data into an irregular step curve Set the program has to
decide whether the depth of the data being loaded corresponds to depth already in the Set or
whether a new depth in the Set has been created. The 'Depth Tolerance' parameter is the
allowable difference between the two depths in order to count the depths as the same.
'PC Data Order' - allows the user to switch the column order to reflect how the PC data is
arranged in the spreadsheet.
'No. of Curves' - the default number of curves is five though this can be changed to
whatever the user requires by use of the 'up/down' arrows.
'No. of Text Curves' - the default number of text curves is two.
'Null Output Curves Before Loading' - if this is 'checked' on then previously created
curves will be nulled before being over-written by the 'new' load. NOTE: this applies
specifically to the core porosity and permeability curves. The array PC curves are
automatically nulled before a 'new' load occurs.
'Skip Column When Pasting PC data' - this 'check' box relates to the core porosity and
permeability data. It tends to be written in a single column in a spreadsheet whereas the Pc
and Pc Sat. data takes up two columns. So when pasting the data in the core porosity and
permeability data gets offset. To avoid this, 'check' the box on then the blank columns in the
core porosity and permeability data are skipped over.
267
Senergy
Senergy
268
'Paste' - using this 'Paste' button allows the user to select multi-rows or columns in a
spreadsheet and to paste these in one go into the loader form. Unless the data is in the
same layout as the loader form, which is highly unlikely, then a number of paste operations
will have to be performed.
'Clear All' - allows the loader form to be cleared of all data entries.
'Clear Row' - will clear all cells in the current row to the right of the currently selected cell.
'Clear Column' - will clear all cells in the current column below the currently selected cell.
'Load' - when the 'Load' button is 'clicked' the necessary curves will be created. The PC
curves will be created with an 'X' array size equal to the maximum number of rows used for
the data entry. If this is less than the 'X' array size of the original curve then the size of the 'X'
array will remain the same. Hence, the 'X' array size will always be the maximum needed to
hold all the PC data.
An example spreadsheet is shown below in a format which will allow it to be pasted into the '
Capillary Pressure Data Loader' in three copy and paste operations:
269
Senergy
Senergy
270
NOTE: the Curve 1....2 ...etc 'Name', 'Units' and 'Type' can all be filled in by hand rather than
copying and pasting them in from a spreadsheet.
Related Topics
Real Time Data Link
271
5.6
Senergy
The 'Load Well Attributes' module provides the user with a means to bulk load well 'cultural'
data (attributes) into IP from an external text file or from a spreadsheet selection, either loading :
into pre-existing, in-memory wells in an IP database, or
into newly-created IP wells, populating these wells with well properties (attributes) from the
external file.
Well attributes are saved into the 'Manage Well Header Info.' interface for each IP well that
has a data entry in the external text file.
'Well Attributes' can include such things as 'Well Name', 'Operating Company', 'Unique Well
Identifier (UWI)', 'Spud Date', 'Completion Date', 'Well Completion Status', as well as the '
Permanent Datum', 'Rig Reference elevations', 'Latitude', 'Longitude' of a well. The full
range of cultural data fields that are available to be loaded into IP are listed in the IP Configuration
'Options' tool, in the 'Well Attributes' section. The list of Well Attributes is 'dynamic', meaning
that the user can modify entries and extend the list to store additional, new attributes.
The 'Load Well Attributes' module is activated from the 'Input / Output'
'Load Data' menu
'Load Well Attributes' option.
Section 5.6 Load Data from an External Source : Using the Well Attribute Loader
Senergy
272
User Interface
When the 'Load Well Attributes' option is selected, you are presented with a WINDOWS
Explorer dialog which allows you to browse to the external text file containing the 'Well attributes'
data you wish to load into IP. You should browse to / select the appropriate text file. The module
window is then launched. The user interface comprises of :
the 'Default Settings for New IP Wells' panel (top left)
the 'Input Data Formatting' panel (top right) and
the 'Data Visualization / Mapping Grid' in the bottom half of the screen.
These are illustrated in the following screen capture:
273
Senergy
The data in the selected text file will be visible in the 'data viewer' panel, in the lower part of the
screen. Initially the data will appear as continuous text strings in the first column of the grid, as
illustrated below. Click on the appropriate 'Input Data Formatting' radio button for your input file,
in the top-right-hand panel of the screen. This will parse the data into the correct format for the
loading operation.
Input Data Formatting

The 'Input Data Formatting' panel allows the user to set up the 'delimiter' that has been used to
Senergy
274
separate the data fields in the input text file. This allows the 'Well Attribute Loader' to resolve
the input file into the appropriate data columns. Data can be loaded into the interface from a
variety of text file formats. The acceptable text file formats are :
'Space-delimited' text,
'Tab-delimited' text,
'Comma-delimited' text and
'Other-delimited' text, for example semi-colon (;).
'Fixed', in which case the user defines the number of columns of text making up each data
category, separated by a comma "," symbol in the Format entry window. The following are
valid format expressions:
8,8,8,8,10,12,12,12 - This can be simplified by using brackets 4(8),10,3(12)
8,10,12,8,10,12 - If an expression repeats you can leave out the repeat 8,10,12
10,10,10,10,10,10,10 - This could be simplified as 7(10) or just 10
Examples of the file formats are shown below:
Tab-Delimited Text File
Space-Delimited Text File
275
Senergy
Comma-Delimited Text File
Fixed Format Text File
In addition, IP can load data copied from a spreadsheet into the WINDOWS clipboard. The data
is then pasted into the import 'grid' in the 'Load Well Attributes' screen by clicking on the 'Paste
from Clipboard' button.
The order in which data is organized within the text file is not important because you will need to
interactively set up 'mappings' between the input file data fields and the IP well attributes.
Default Settings for New IP Wells

The 'Default Settings for New IP Wells' panel sets up the default 'Well Depth units' and 'Well
Step increment' in order for IP to be able to create new IP wells in an existing database. The
defaults, when they are set up, combine with the 'mapped' data fields from the external text file to
create new in-memory wells when the 'Create New Well' button is clicked. The user then has to
use the ' File'
'Save all wells to database' option to add the new wells to the active IP
database.
Senergy
276
The Data visualization Mapping Grid

Well Header properties listed in the imported file have to be 'mapped', to internal IP 'Well
Attributes' using the column header drop-down list in the tabular display. Clicking in a column
header opens a drop-down list of the available IP well attributes that can be assigned to the input
data. The user simply scrolls through the dataset, assigning appropriate attribute names to the
data in the grid. You must assign a 'Well Name' attribute to one column in the grid.
If the imported file contains many more wells than you are using in your IP database, you can
filter out the unwanted rows in the table by clicking, in the 'Select' column, only for the rows /
wells you wish to import data into.
If a well name already exists in memory in IP, when the 'Well Name' column is mapped, the inmemory well name will appear in the 'IP Well Name' column on the left-hand side of the grid, as
illustrated above for well 30/1c-5. In this case any data columns that already have well attributes
loaded into IP are highlighted in light green font on a white cell background. You then have the
option to update the existing IP data, overwriting existing well attributes, or updating the inmemory well(s) only with new well attributes. This functionality is explained below:
Two options buttons are used, in conjunction with the operations buttons at the bottom of the
screen, to determine how well attributes are loaded into new or existing IP wells. These options
are found in the middle of the screen. They are described below:
'Use Unique Well Identifier (UWI) as IP Well Identifer' : when 'checked' this option
prompts IP to load the 'Unique Well Identifier' field in the input file, to the 'Well Name' data
277
Senergy
field in the IP 'Manage Well Header Info.' module, rather than the 'Well Name' data field, if
one is also present in the external file. When left 'un-checked' and both 'UWI' and 'Well
Name' fields are present in the input file, the 'Well name' column will be loaded as the 'Well
Name' attribute and the UWI will be loaded as the 'UWI' attribute.
'Overwrite existing IP Well header Information with new data from file' : when
'checked', this option instructs the IP program to replace any existing well attributes, in
'mapped' IP wells, with new data from the input text file. If the option is left 'un-checked' then
IP will not update any existing well attribute entries if a new value / text string is found in the
text file. Only currently-blank IP well attributes will be updated.
The operations buttons are located along the bottom margin of the 'Load Well Attributes'
screen. They are:
'Create New Well' button : If a data row is selected in the grid, but does not map to an inmemory IP well, a new IP well can be created by mapping some attributes and clicking the '
Create New Well' button. The new well will be assigned whatever depth unit and well step
has been set up in the 'Default Settings for New IP Wells' panel.
'Add Column' button: If you wish to add a new column to the grid, for example, for a
missing attribute in the input file, click the 'Add Column' button. A new, empty column will
be appended to the right-hand side of the table to allow you manually type in the extra data.
NOTE: you are only able to enter data into rows that are already 'mapped' to existing IP well
names. If you enter text /values into such a row, click the 'Update' button to commit the
new data into the IP well.
'All' button: Clicking the 'All' button will update an in-memory IP well with new attributes from
the imported file.
'New File' button : This button launches a Windows Explorer dialog, allowing you to select a
new file to load into the interface.
'Clear' button : This button clears all the entries in the mapping grid.
Senergy
278
'Save Format' button : saves the window configuration to an external 'Well Header format'
(.whf) file, so that the format can be used to load multiple files of the same data format.
'Load Format' button : loads a format file that has previously been saved to an external file.
NOTE: If the user has created a new well the 'All' button will need to be clicked in order to
populate the header fields from the mapping grid.
Related Topics
Real Time Data Link
279
5.7
Senergy
Real Time Data Link
The 'Real Time Data Link' module uses a Schlumberger proprietary data link technology ('
Osprey Connect') enabling an IP user with appropriate security clearances from SIS or other
third-party (logging service company) data providers to connect to a remote data server and
download log curve and drilling data real-time into IP using WITSML data. IP can then be
prompted, using a link to the 'Multi-Well Batch Operation' module, to run user-formulae or
interpretation modules at a certain time increment. An interpretation workflow using, for example,
the 'Clay Volume' computation, 'Porosity and Water Saturation' module and 'Cutoff and
Summation' calculations can be set up to run unattended. The interpretation is updated
depending upon the user-specified 'repeat' timer.
The 'Real Time Data Link' module is launched from the 'Input / Output' menu
'Load Data'
'Real Time Data Link' option. The module is comprised of 2 windows. These are:
The 'Real Time Data Link' window which is an IP interface and controls the data download
and batch operation execution time intervals and starts/stops the 'Osprey Connect'
window.
The SIS 'Osprey Connect' window which, once activated, can be left to operate 'in the
background'.
A number of 'adaptors' are built into the 'Osprey Connect' interface to allow the user to connect
to different sources of real-time drilling / logging data. These are:
'InterACT' (WITSML API 1.2.0 & WITSML API 1.3.1)
'InterACT - Drilling Files' (supports RT, RTT, Risk Xml files and Recorder Output files).
'IDEAL' 12 or 13 adaptor - connects to Schlumberger's 'IDEAL' LWD logging system
'Baker RigLink' (WITSML API 1.2.0 & WITSML API 1.3.1)
'Kongsberg SiteCom' (Sense Intellifield) (WITSML API 1.2.0 & WITSML API 1.3.1) (See
http://www.intellifield.no/ for more information).
'Sperry INSITE Anywhere' (WITSML API 1.2.0)
'Wellstorm' (WITSML API 1.2.0 & WITSML API 1.3.1). (See: http://www.wellstorm.com/ for
more information)
'Generic WITSML Source' (WITSML API 1.2.0 & WITSML API 1.3.1)
An online 'Help' document is included with the 'Osprey Connect' package and can be launched
from the 'Help' button on that interface.
The user can configure the 'Osprey Connect interface to pick up log curves from the external
data source, 'mapped' to IP curve names. These curves are then downloaded into IP and can
Section 5.7 Load Data from an External Source : Real Time Data Link
Senergy
280
optionally be used as input to the 'Multi-Well Batch operation' module.

The Connection and operation steps are summarised in the diagram shown below and are
detailed in the following discussion:
(Note: If a well does not exist it will need to be created under Well > Create New Well. It is
important that an approximate Top and Bottom depth is input at this stage, otherwise the 'RealTime Data link' will not be able to write data to the well. The absolute depth interval is not
important as once data is being written to the well the 'Real-Time Data link' can extend the
interval dynamically if needed.)
The discussion is organized under the following headings:

1. The 'Create Curves' Screen
2. Configure the Osprey Connect Interface
3. Set Up the Curve Mappings
4. Setting the 'Options' Panel.
5. The 'Connection to Osprey Connect' Panel
6. Visualizing the New Data
1. The 'Create Curves' Screen

When the 'Real Time Data Link' is launched for the first time, you are presented with a blank '
Curves' window, illustrated below. This window requires you to create the 'empty' curves within
IP, which will be used to store the 'external' real-time curve data. The 'external' curve names are
subsequently 'mapped' to these IP curve names in order to transfer them in a logical manner into
281
Senergy
IP. This window can also be launched from the 'Create Curves' button located at the bottom of
the 'Real Time Data Link' window.
IP defaults to a curve Set called Real in order to manage the imported data that is being
downloaded from the remote data source. If this Curve Set does not currently exist in your IP
well, it will automatically be created for you.
On clicking the 'OK' button, the following IP interface is launched. This window allows you to
open and configure the 'DataLink2' connection and set up additional options with respect to how
often IP looks for/ imports new data and whether an IP 'Batch Operation' is to be included in the
process.
Senergy
282
The upper, 'Real Time Link Information' panel provides the user with updated status
information on the active connection, when the 'Osprey Connect' adapter is working in the
background.
2. Configure the Osprey Connect Interface

'Click' the 'Connect' button to launch the 'Osprey Connect' interface. The following screen is
opened:
283
Senergy
You must choose a data 'Source' from the 'Select a Source' panel. Click on a 'Source'
option to highlight it. The 'Source Details' will be displayed below the list panel and a 'Login
' / Connection dialog will appear on the right hand side of the window.
You must choose the appropriate Source Type for the data you wish to download and you
need the login settings, including 'User Name' and 'Password' to establish the connection
to the remote data server.
You can save 'Connection Settings' (apart from passwords) by clicking the 'Save' menu
option, see below. To restore 'saved' settings, instead of re-typing in connection details, use
the 'Load' button.
When you have completed the Login details, click the 'Select Wellbore' button at the bottom of
Senergy
284
the window. The interface updates to show the 'Focus on Source' panel, illustrated below (at
right), which is used to select the external well to download data from.
Use the 'Tree View' window to locate the well you wish to download data from.
Click on the 'well name' to highlight it, as illustrated below.
3. Set Up the Curve 'Mappings'

Click the 'Connect to Wellbore' button, which becomes 'active' when a well is selected /
highlighted. The following screen is launched. This interface is designed to allow you to set up
the curve 'mappings' between the external Data Server / Well and the IP well. The window may
be empty initially. Click the 'Click here...' message at the top of the window.
285
Senergy
The window should refresh to display the created IP curves and the available external curves
('data channels'), as shown below.
The upper, 'Data Requested by the Application' panel contains the list of 'empty' IP
curves in the REAL curve Set.
The lower, 'Select from the Available Data Items' panel contains the list of available
'external' log curves.
You should set up the 'mappings' between the IP curves and external log curves. To do
this:
Click in a row in the 'Requested Data' panel to highlight the curve.
Scroll through the 'Select from the Available Data Items' panel to locate the equivalent
'external' curve. place a 'tick' in the 'Map' column for the external curve.
The 'Mapped' column entry for the IP Curve will change from a Cross symbol to a tick
symbol, as shown for the GR curve below, indicating that the curves are 'mapped'.
Repeat the process for all the IP curves you wish to map to external data channels.
When all IP curves are 'mapped', click the 'Start Transfer' button in the bottom right-hand
corner of the window.
Senergy
286
Alternatively, clicking the 'Select Source' button will return you to the previous 'Osprey
Connect' screen. You will be warned that you will lose any mappings you have made, and
offered the chance to save them before returning to the previous screen.
This 'Osprey Connect' interface can then be closed, by clicking on the Windows 'Close' icon
on the top-right-hand corner of the window. The 'Osprey Connect' connection continues to
operate 'in the background'.
The 'Real Time Data Link' window, 'Information' panel, illustrated below, gives details of the
Adaptor Connection Status and how much data is being downloaded to the buffer. NOTE: data
are stored only into the buffer, until the user clicks the 'Run' button at the bottom right-hand
corner of the window. From the time the 'Run' button is clicked, data are then transferred /
written to the selected IP well, into the mapped IP curves at the selected time increment.
287
Senergy
4. Setting the 'Options' Panel

The 'Options' panel on the 'Real Time Data Link' interface is used to set up a number of
functions to initiate the loading and processing of the 'external' data within IP
'Select TVD Curve' - If the data to be imported uses a TVD depth reference, you must select a
'TVD' curve in the IP Well as the reference curve.
'Automatically Extend Well' - if 'checked', the default position, IP will automatically increase
the well 'bottom depth' value as new data are loaded from the remote source. In this position
the user does not have to keep returning to the well to manually extend the depth range when
new log curve data is available, as drilling progresses.
Senergy
288
'Run Batch Operation' - if you wish to run a 'Batch Operation' periodically, using the curves
that have been loaded from the external data Source, a Batch operation file (.fbt) can be set up
from that module and selected using the 'Browse' button in this window. When the 'timer' is set
up and running, the Batch operation will be run at the set time increment.
'Survey File Name' - if well deviation survey data are available from the external data source,
they can be downloaded into IP.
'Run automatically every 'X' seconds' - The Up and Down arrow buttons allow you to change
the time increment which controls the 'update' period that IP waits between downloads of realtime data from the buffer. Click the Up arrow to increase the time between downloads. Click
the Down arrow to decrease the time period between downloads. The minimum time
increment is 6 seconds.
'Run / Stop' - The 'Run' button, when clicked, initiates the automatic update timer to execute a
download operation every X seconds, depending upon the user-selected time interval. When the
'Run' button has been clicked, it toggles to a 'Stop' button. In this condition, if the button is
clicked the data download operation and Batch Operation are terminated.
5. The 'Connection to Osprey Connect' Panel

The 'Connection to Osprey Connect' panel contains a number of 'control' buttons whose
functions are described below:
'Connect' - Click the 'Connect' button to launch the 'Osprey Connect'' window.
'Disconnect' - Click the 'Disconnect' button to close the 'Osprey Connect' window.
'Show' - Click the 'Show' button to bring the 'Osprey Connect' window to the foreground.
'Start' - Clicking the 'Start' button is a shortcut to activate the 'Osprey Connect' interface- '
Start Transfer' option, without having to have the 'Osprey Connect' window in view.
'Stop' - Clicking the 'Stop' button is a shortcut to activate the 'Osprey Connect' - 'Stop
289
Senergy
Transfer' option, without having to have the 'Osprey Connect' window in view.
6. Visualizing the New Data

If you have a log plot display on-screen with the 'mapped' IP curves selected in one or more
curve tracks - as data are downloaded into IP, the log plot display will update, at the specified
time increment, with any new data from the buffer. The Well depth range will also extend if this
option is selected ('Automatically extend well') on the 'Real Time Data Link' interface.
What is WITSML ?
Wellsite Information Transfer Standard Markup Language, "WITSML", was initially developed by
the WITSML project, an oil industry initiative sponsored by BP and Statoil, and later by Shell, as a
new standard for drilling information transfer. Initial participation is from the major service
companies Baker Hughes, GeoQuest, Halliburton, Landmark and Schlumberger. As of the
completion of WITSML V1.2 in March 2003, POSC has custody of WITSML and is managing the
support and future evolution of WITSML through the WITSML Special Interest Group.
Related Topics
Real Time Data Link
Section
6
Save Data to an External File
291
Senergy
The 'Save Data' menu item includes all the tools for saving curve and 'Tops' data to external
files.
ASCII Write: Enables IP Data to be Saved as an ASCII file. Well Log Data from IP can be
saved to the ASCII format using the ASCII Write Dialog. Well Log Data from an External
Source that is saved in ASCII format can also be Loaded into IP using the ASCII Load
Module.
'LAS Write': Enables IP Data to be Saved as a LAS (Log ASCII Standard) file. Well Log Data
from IP can be saved to the LAS format using the LAS Write Dialog. Well Log Data from an
External Source that is saved in LAS format can also be Loaded into IP using the LAS / LBS
Load Module or the LAS3 Load Module. See the Canadian Well Log Association website (
http://cwls.org/las_info.php) for a full description of the LAS standard.
'LIS Write': Enables IP Data to be Saved as a LIS (Log Information Standard) file. Well Log
Data from IP can be saved to the LIS format using the LIS Write Dialog. Well Log Data from
an External Source that is saved in LIS format can also be Loaded into IP using the LIS Load
Module.
DLIS Write: Enables IP Data to be Saved as a DLIS (Digital Log Information Standard) file.
Well Log Data from IP can be saved to the DLIS format using the DLIS Write Dialog. Well
Log Data from an External Source that is saved in DLIS format can also be Loaded into IP
using the DLIS Load Module.
'DBASE4 Write': Enables IP to be Saved to a a DBASE4 Database. The user can add to an
existing 'DBASE 4' database or create a new database.
'Save Zone Tops': This module allows 'Zone and Tops Sets' to be saved to ASCII disk
files.
To display the Save Data Menu:
From the Input / Output Menu, Select Save Data then the required Data Saving Module.
Section 6.
Save Data to an External File :
Senergy
Related Topics
'ASCII Write'
'LAS Write'
'LIS Write'
'DBASE4 Write'
'Save Zone Tops'
Section 6.
Save Data to an External File :
292
293
6.1
Senergy
ASCII Write
The 'ASCII Write' module is launched from the 'Input / Output'
'Save Data' menu item. The '
ASCII Write' window will always appear with the currently-displayed well as the first row of the '
Select Wells and Depth Intervals to output' grid box.
The window will always appear with the currently-displayed well as the first row of the 'Select
Wells and Depth Intervals to output' grid box.
'Select Wells and Depth Intervals to output' Panel

'Use' : 'Check' this box to output an ASCII format file for the well. Clicking on the 'Use'
column header the user can select or deselect which wells to output. first line. This
allows the user to quickly select or de-select all wells.
'Well Name' : The user selects additional wells to output from the drop-down list box. If
the column header is 'clicked' then all the wells currently loaded in memory will be added
to the list.
'Top Dep.' : Enter the top depth of the output interval.
'Bot Dep.' : Enter the bottom depth of the output interval.
'Step' : The default value will be the current well step increment. The user may enter a
new value to change the ASCII output well step.
'Ref Curve' : The default depth reference curve is the DEPTH curve. The user can
change this to write an output file, for example to a TVD or TVDSS reference, if these
curves exist in the well(s) to be exported.
Section 6.1 Save Data to an External File : ASCII Write
Senergy
294
'File Name' : Enter the output file name. File names can be set using the 'Base File
Name' and 'Apply' button or by 'clicking' the 'Use Well name as file name' button.
'Available Curves' Panel

This list box will display the curves in the well whose name is displayed just below the 'Available
Curves' label. To change the well, click on the well name displayed in the 'Select Wells and '
box. Curve names will be displayed in green when they occur in the 'Selected Curves' list. This
allows the user to easily see which curves have been selected.
'Selected Curves' Panel

This contains the selected output curves for all selected wells. It can contain curve names that
do not exist for some of the output wells. If the 'Curve Aliasing' module is turned on then if a
curve name cannot be found then a curve of the same 'Curve Type' will be selected instead. If a
curve does exist for the well displayed in the 'Available Curves' box, then the curve name under
'Curve Name' will be in green, otherwise it will be displayed in black. By changing the well in the '
Available Curves' box the user can easily see which curves are going to be written for individual
wells by looking for the green-coloured selected curves. The 'Output Name' column is editable
and allows the user to change the names of the curves in the output file.
Curves are selected by either highlighting a curve and using the arrow buttons or by clicking on a
curve and dragging it into the 'Selected Curves' box. The order that the curves will be output is
the same as the order in the 'Selected Curves' box. To re-arrange the order, use the up/down
arrows or 'click' on a curve and drag it to a different position in the list.
Setting ASCII Output Properties

Output File Names
295
Senergy
'Output Directory' allows the user to select the output directory where the ASCII files will be
written. The 'Browse' button can be used to select this directory. If separate output
directories for each well have been set up (see 'Set Default File Location') then the user
can 'check' the 'Use the separate output directories' box to send the output files into these
directories. This box will not appear in the window if the output directories have not been set
up.
'Use Well name as file name' button replaces the output file name with the Well Name. The
following characters / symbols cannot be used in a file name (\ / : ; , > <) and will be replaced
by the 'underscore, '_', in the file name.
'Base File Name' box is used to create the default output file name. Appended to this base
name will be '_W**' where ** is the database well number. The 'Apply' will update all file
names with current 'Base File Name'.
'Append to file names' box is used to add a common piece of text onto the end of all file
names. The 'Apply' will update all file names with the extension added. This can be useful
for marking all result file names with a common comment such as "Final analysis".
'File name extension' box allows the user to change the file name extension (default is
'asc'). This is the text string added to the output file name set under 'File Name', to complete
the output file name. If the 'Save in CSV Format' box has been 'checked' then the 'File
Senergy
296
name extension' name is set to 'csv'.
File Options
'Null Values' box allows the user to manually change the output curve 'Null'. The default
value is '-999'.
The 'Dec. places' box allows the user to define the number of decimal places that curves are
outputted as. There is no limit to what can be entered but only reasonable values will be
displayed in the outputted ASCII file.
'Checking' the 'All wells in one file' writes all currently-selected wells into a single ASCII file.
A single output file name must be used.
If the 'Output each curve set using set depths' is 'checked' then a separate data sequence
per curve set is created using the set depth interval and step size rather than the Top Dep.,
Bot Dep. and Step as specified in the 'Select Wells and Depth intervals to output'.
'Save in CSV Format' allows the user to save the data in comma separated format which is
then easier to import into EXCEL than text files. For German language Excel users there is a
'CSV Delimiter' option, within 'Tools'
'Options'
'Miscellaneous Options', to choose
to output the CSV file with semicolons instead of commas as the separator.
Curve Selection
297
Senergy
'Select Final Curves Current Well' button will automatically add all curves that have had their
'Final' flag (see 'Manage Curve Headers') set in the current well to the 'Selected Curves' box
(well displayed under 'Available Curves').
'Select Final Curves All Wells' button will move all final curves from all selected wells into the
'Selected Curves' box.
'Select All Curves All Wells' button will move all curves for all wells into the 'Selected Curves'
box.
'Select All Curves in Set All Wells' button will move all curves for a selected set (use the
drop-down menu in the box below the button to select the set) for all wells into the 'Selected
Curves' box.
'Only output final curves' box, if 'checked', will only write curves in the selected curve list that
have their 'Final' flag set.
'Use Set Names' box, if 'checked', will attach the Curve Set name to the beginning of the
curve name.
The 'OK' button outputs the files.
The 'Save Format' and 'Load Format' buttons allow the user to save the set-up and restore it
at a later date.
'Add Wells' gives the user the option of loading wells from the 'Select Database Wells'
module - 'From Select Well Screen...' or from a created Well List - 'From Well List File'.
The 'Clear all Wells' button will clear all the wells from the 'Select Wells and Depth' box. It
does not affect the curves in the 'Selected Curves' box. These can be cleared by clicking the
Senergy
298
double left chevron button.
Automatically Rename a Curve upon Export

Output Curves can be automatically renamed when being exported to LAS/LIS/DLIS/ASCII files.
This is achieved by changing the curve name in the Output Name column, and creating a Mask
file which contains the new curve name to be used with the Output Name in the new data file.
An example of a Mask file is below. When a new Mask file is created then the first four lines of
text are added automatically. The curve names should then be added to the text file in pairs.
To automatically re-name the curve names upon export:

From the Curve Rename Panel, Click the Browse Button to Select or Create the mask file.
From the Curve Rename Panel, Click the Edit Button to Open the Mask file in Microsoft
Notepad and Add the Curve Name Pairs.
Note: The mask file should be saved from within Notepad.
From the Curve Rename Panel, Click the Apply Button to Apply the Changes to the Output
file definition.
Note: The changes are applied on the Output Curve Name, the output name is located in the
mask file and if found the name changed to the new curve name.
299
Related Topics
'ASCII Write'
'LAS Write'
'LIS Write'
'DBASE4 Write'
'Save Zone Tops'
Senergy
Senergy
6.2
300
LAS Write
The 'LAS Write' module is launched from the 'Input / Output'
LAS Write' window will always appear with the currently-displayed well as the first row of the '

'Use' : 'Check' this box to output a LAS format file for the selected well. If the 'Use' column
header is 'clicked' then the whole column will be set to the inverse of whatever has been set
for the first line. This allows the user to quickly select or de-select all wells.
'Well Name' : The user selects additional wells to output from the drop-down list box. If the
column header is 'clicked' then all the wells currently loaded in memory will be added to the
list.
'Top Dep.' : Enter the top depth of the output interval. Default value is the top well depth.
'Bot Dep.' : Enter the bottom depth of the output interval. Default value is the bottom well
depth.
'Step' : The default value will be the current well step increment. The user may enter a new
value to change the LAS output well step.
'Ref Curve' : The default depth reference curve is the 'DEPTH' curve. The user can change
this to write an output file, for example to a TVD or TVDSS reference, if these curves exist in
the well(s) to be exported.
Section 6.2 Save Data to an External File : LAS Write
301
Senergy
'File Name' : Enter the output file name. File names can be set using the 'Base File Name'
and 'Apply' button or by 'clicking' the 'Use Well name as file name' button.


do not exist in some of the output wells. If the 'Curve Aliasing' module is turned on then if a
and allows the user to change the names of the curves for the output file.
Setting LAS Output File Properties

Output File Names
Senergy
302
'Output Directory' allows the user to select the output directory where the LAS files will be
can 'check' the 'Use the separate output directories' box to send the output files into
these directories. This box will not appear in the window if the output directories have not
been set up.
'Use Well name as file name' button replaces the output file name with the Well Name. The
following characters / symbols cannot be used in a file name (\ / : ; , > <) and will be
replaced by the 'underscore, '_', in the file name.
'Append to file names' box allows the user to add any text onto the output file name by
typing the text into the box and then clicking 'Apply'. This can be useful for marking all result
file names with a common comment such as "Final analysis".
'File name extension' box allows the user to change the file name extension (default is
'las'). This is the text string added to the output file name set under 'File Name', to complete
the output file name.
File Options
303
Senergy
The 'Null Values' box allows the user to manually change the output curve 'Null'. The
default value is '-999'.
The 'Dec. places' box allows the user to define the number of decimal places that curves
are outputted as. There is no limit to what can be entered but only reasonable values will be
displayed in the outputted LAS file.
'Write LAS wrapped data' box, if 'checked', will output the LAS data in wrapped format
with multiple lines per depth increment. If not 'checked', then the data will be written as one
line per depth increment. The file conforms to the LAS version 2.0 format.
If the 'Write well parameters' box is 'checked', then the scales and other curve and well
information will be written into the LAS file. Writing this extra data will not affect the integrity
of the LAS file and its structure will still conform to the LAS version 2.0 format.
Checking the 'All wells in one file' box will output all the selected wells into a single las file.
A single output file name must be used.
'Use Descriptions' and 'Use Comments' options give the user a choice of either
appending the curve description field (see 'Manage Curve Headers') to the curve name in
the curve information section of the LAS file or appending the curve type and curve
comment fields. This does not affect the validity of the LAS file structure, since these fields
are added into a comment part of the LAS structure.
'LAS Version' allows the user to output the LAS file as Version 2.0 or Version 3.0. Version
2.0 is the original LAS standard. Version 3.0 LAS files include a wide variety of data and
require LAS 3.0 data importers.
Senergy
304
Curve Selection
'Select Final Curves Current Well' button will automatically add all curves that have had
their 'Final' flag (see 'Manage Curve Headers') set in the current well to the 'Selected
Curves' box (well displayed under 'Available Curves').
'Select Final Curves All Wells' button will move all final curves from all selected wells into
the 'Selected Curves' box.
'Select All Curves All Wells' button will move all curves for all wells into the 'Selected
Curves' box.
Curves' box.
'Only output final curves' box, if 'checked', will only write curves in the selected curve list
that have their 'Final' flag set.
'Use Set Names' box, if 'checked', will attach the Curve Set name to the beginning of the
output curve name.
The 'Save Format' and 'Load Format' buttons allow the user to save the set-up and
restore it at a later date.
305
Senergy
The 'Clear all Wells' button will clear all the wells from the 'Select Wells and Depth' box.
It does not affect the curves in the 'Selected Curves' box. These can be cleared by clicking
the double left arrow box.


file definition.
Senergy
Related Topics
'ASCII Write'
'LAS Write'
'LIS Write'
'DBASE4 Write'
'Save Zone Tops'
306
307
6.3
Senergy
LIS Write
The 'LIS Write' module is launched from the 'Input / Output'
LIS Write' window will always appear with the currently-displayed well as the first row of the '

'Use' : 'Check' the cell(s) in this column to output an LIS format file for each selected well. If
the 'Use' column header is 'clicked' then the whole column will be set to the inverse of
whatever has been set for the first line. This allows the user to quickly select or de-select all
wells.
list.
depth.
value to change the LIS output well step.
Section 6.3 Save Data to an External File : LIS Write
Senergy
308


Setting LIS Output File Properties

Output File Names
309
Senergy
'Output Directory' allows the user to select the output directory where the LIS files will be
been set up.
''Use Well name as file name' button replaces the output file name with the Well Name.
The following characters / symbols cannot be used in a file name (\ / : ; , > <) and will be
File name extension' box allows the user to change the file name extension (default is 'lis').
This is the text string added to the output file name set under 'File Name', to complete the
output file name.
File Options
Senergy
310
The LIS format only allows curve names of four characters. Therefore the module has to
truncate IP curve names. However, it is possible to use the LIS format curve 'Service ID' to
store the rest of the curve name. This is done by checking the 'Use service ID for long
curve names' check box. If this option is turned 'on', the output names box contains a colon
(:) which now separates the LIS curve name and the service ID name.
'Keep LIS File Open' option when 'checked' will not automatically close the LIS file after the
'OK' button is 'clicked'. This allows the user to append another LIS logical file to the current
LIS physical file. This can be useful if the user wants to store different curves, or different
depth intervals, from the same well into different LIS logical files. To do this the user selects
the curves to be written into the first logical file, checks the 'Keep LIS File Open' and clicks '
OK'. The user then changes the curves to output and clicks 'OK' again. The file is finally
closed when the user exits the module.
By 'checking' the 'All wells in one file' box it is possible to write multiple logical LIS files into
one physical LIS disk file. This allows the user to store multiple wells into one LIS file.
'Output each curve set using set depths' option when 'checked' outputs curves from
different sets and with different steps into multiple logical LIS files within one physical LIS
disk file. NOTE: - Set names cannot be output using LIS write. The 'Null' Value (-999.25) is
hard-coded into LIS formatted files.
Curve Selection
311
Senergy
Curves' box (well displayed under 'Available Curves').
Curves' box.
Curves' box.
The 'Save Format' and 'Load Format' buttons allow the user to save the set-up and restore
it at a later date.
Senergy
312


file definition.
313
Related Topics
'ASCII Write'
'LAS Write'
'LIS Write'
'DBASE4 Write'
'Save Zone Tops'
Senergy
Senergy
6.4
314
DLIS Write
The 'DLIS Write' module is launched from the 'Input / Output'
DLIS Write' window will always appear with the currently-displayed well as the first row of the '

'Use' : 'Check' the cell(s) in this column to output a DLIS format file for each selected well. If
the 'Use' column header is 'clicked' then the whole column will be set to the inverse of
whatever has been set for the first line. This allows the user to quickly select or de-select all
wells.
list.
depth.
value to change the LIS output well step. Irregular step data can be exported in its own
"Frame", unless all data is exported in a single "Frame" by 'unchecking' the 'Output each
curve set using set depths' checkbox.
Section 6.4 Save Data to an External File : DLIS Write
315
Senergy



NOTE: Array data with an X and Y dimension will be exported as 2 dimensions of samples per
depth. All data samples are exported as the DLIS data type "FSINGL" - IEEE single precision
floating point number.
Senergy
316
Setting DLIS Output File Properties

Output File Names
'Output Directory' allows the user to select the output directory where the DLIS files will be
been set up.
''Use Well name as file name' button replaces the output file name with the Well Name.
The following characters / symbols cannot be used in a file name (\ / : ; , > <) and will be
File name extension' box allows the user to change the file name extension (default is 'lis').
This is the text string added to the output file name set under 'File Name', to complete the
317
Senergy
output file name.
File Options
'Write well parameters' outputs all of the well information into the DLIS file. This includes
everything in the 'General', 'Position' and 'Default Parameters' tabs in the 'Manage Well
Header Info' module and the logging run attributes from the 'Logging' tab.
By 'checking' the 'All wells in one file' box it is possible to write multiple logical DLIS files
into one physical DLIS disk file. This allows the user to store multiple wells into one DLIS file.
'Output each curve set using set depths' option when 'checked' (it is 'checked' by default)
outputs curves from different Sets and with different steps into multiple logical DLIS files
within one physical DLIS disk file. This operation is performed by outputting curves in
multiple "DLIS Frame objects" - one per curve Set. 'Unchecking' this option outputs all of the
curves into a single "Frame". NOTE: if IP (v3.5+) reads in these created DLIS files then the
curve Set name can be retained by using the 'Auto. New Sets' button in the 'DLIS Load'
module. NOTE: The 'Null' Value (-999.25) is hard-coded into DLIS formatted files.
Curve Selection
Senergy
318
Curves' box (well displayed under 'Available Curves') .
Curves' box.
Curves' box.
'Use Set Names' will pre-fix the curve name with the Set name.
The 'Save Format' and 'Load Format' buttons allow the user to save the set-up and restore
it at a later date.
319
Senergy


file definition.
Senergy
Related Topics
'ASCII Write'
'LAS Write'
'LIS Write'
'DBASE4 Write'
'Save Zone Tops'
320
321
6.5
Senergy
DBASE4 Write
This option allows the user to save data to a 'DBASE 4' database. The user can add to an
existing 'DBASE 4' database or create a new database.
The user enters the DBASE 4 file name under the 'Database name' label. The 'Browse' button
can be used to select an existing database. The user then selects the curves and depths to write
as output and 'clicks' the 'Write' button.
'Database Null Value' - this text box selects the DBASE 4 null value number. '999' is used
in IP as the Null value number.
'Database Depth Curve Name' - this text box specifies the name of the depth column in the
DBASE 4 file. This is for appending to an existing database. It must be known and will
usually be called 'Depth'.
'Top Depth to write' and 'Bottom Depth to write' boxes allows the user to select the
interval from the IP well to write into the DBASE 4 file.
'Merge Data with existing database' and 'Overwrite existing database' radio buttons
allow the user to control how to access existing DBASE 4 files. These buttons have no
effect if the database is to be newly created.
'Overwrite existing curves' - this check box, if 'checked', allows the user to change the
data of an existing DBASE 4 curve. NOTE: this does not delete the existing curve but
Section 6.5 Save Data to an External File : DBASE4 Write
Senergy
322
simply changes those values that overlap with the defined load interval.
The 'Set Well' button sets the DBASE 4 write well 'focus'. This is the well that is displayed at the
top of the DBASE 4 write window. The button can be used to write several DBASE 4 files from
different wells without having to close the window and re-open it. The user changes the well
focus on the primary window by using the ''Select Well to Display'' option and then 'clicks' the '
Set Well' button on the DBASE 4 write window.
Curve Set names are ignored when writing to a DBASE 4 file. This is due to the limitation of the
DBASE 4 structure where the curve names are stored as column header names, which are
limited to 10 characters. This means the user must be careful not to select the same curve
name from different Sets.
Related Topics
'ASCII Write'
'LAS Write'
'LIS Write'
'DBASE4 Write'
'Save Zone Tops'
Section 6.5 Save Data to an External File : DBASE4 Write
323
6.6
Senergy
Save Zone Tops
This module allows 'Zone and Tops Sets' to be saved to ASCII disk files.
The user selects the Zone Set or Sets to output and chooses the output format. The user clicks
the 'Save As..' button to write the file to disk.
The 'Save for all Wells' option allows all the selected 'Tops Sets' to be output for all currently
loaded wells. This can be useful if the user wants to output all Tops in an IP Project into the
same file.
The 'PetrelTM format' radio button, if 'checked', will output a file which is compatible with the
PetrelTM tops loader. Two options are available:
The 'Version 1' options includes header information which allows Petrel to automatically
load the file.
Section 6.6 Save Data to an External File : Save Zone Tops
Senergy
324
The 'Legacy' option does not include the header information.

The Petrel format includes the X, Y and Z location of the top. The 'X' and 'Y' being the UTM
coordinates and the 'Z' the true vertical subsea depth.
Petrel will not be able to load the file unless the UTM's are included. Hence, to use this format,
UTM curves will have to be created in IP. This can be achieved using the east distance (EDIST)
and north distance (NDIST) curves output by the 'True Vertical Depth' module and then
converted to UTM's in the 'User Formula' module, if necessary. The Petrel format can be output
without the UTM curves, but the file will not be useable by Petrel.
The 'Force negative TVD curve' 'check' box option, when 'checked', forces all depths in the
selected TVD curve to be output as negative numbers below Mean Sea Level. If not 'checked',
the TVD output will be exactly the same depth format as the TVD curve stored in IP.
Example of an IP Tops format file:
$Interactive Petrophysics Well Tops: 04/09/2003
$ TOP
BOTTOM
ZONE_NAME
$Well: XYZ 4, Top Set: Final Tops
10723.5 10860.5 C Sand
10860.5 10909.5 B Sand
10909.5 10945.5 C1 sand
10945.5 10952.5 Mid Shale
10952.5 10998. A Sand
10998. 11420. Base Sand
Example of a Petrel tops format file.

#Interactive Petrophysics Well Tops in Petrel format: 04/09/2003
VERSION 1
BEGIN HEADER
REAL X
REAL Y
REAL Depth
REAL Time
STRING Type
STRING Horizon Name
STRING Well Name
STRING Symbol
REAL Measured Depth
STRING Pick Name
STRING Interpreter
REAL Dip Angle
REAL Dip Azimuth
END HEADER
#Well: XYZ 4, Top Set: Final Tops
7685.63281 87331.5 -7316.20557 -999 HORIZON "C Sand" "XYZ 4" Unknown 10723.5
"" "" -999 -999
325
Senergy
7644.66895 87373.54688 -7439.94434 -999 HORIZON "B Sand" "XYZ 4" Unknown
10860.5 "" "" -999 -999
7631.57666 87387.21875 -7485.13965 -999 HORIZON "C1 sand" "XYZ 4" Unknown
10909.5 "" "" -999 -999
7621.95898 87397.3125 -7518.32959 -999 HORIZON "Mid Shale" "XYZ 4" Unknown
10945.5 "" "" -999 -999
7620.08496 87399.28125 -7524.77979 -999 HORIZON "A Sand" "XYZ 4" Unknown
10952.5 "" "" -999 -999
7607.85742 87412.1875 -7566.6626 -999 HORIZON "Base Sand" "XYZ 4" Unknown
10998. "" "" -999 -999
Related Topics
'ASCII Write'
'LAS Write'
'LIS Write'
'DBASE4 Write'
'Save Zone Tops'
Section
7
327
Senergy
This topic provides a definition of the Curve Types that can be created from within Interactive
Petrophysics.
Conventional Curves are sampled at the Well Step Interval, they can be populated with a single
numeric value or null values. Curves created in Interactive Petrophysics using the Create Curve
Dialog are saved using the existing Well Step for the selected Well. The blank curve can be
used subsequently in another editing mode such as Interactive Curve Edit, to create, for
example, a facies or other flag-type curve
Array Curves can contain numerous data values at a single depth-entry. The Array curve permits
the display of data such as core analysis data points (porosity, permeability, grain density) at the
actual depth that the core plug was cut, not at the IP database depth, which is the load-depth
rounded to the nearest 'well step' interval (6 inches / 0.1524 m), as happens when loading
conventionally from an ASCII file.
Lithology Curves in Interactive Petrophysics are "flag" type curves with values mapped to
Lithology Bitmaps (stored in Lithology.opt). They provide a graphical representation of a lithology
curve with associated Fill Shadings in the Log Plot Display.
Point Curves appear in the Interactive Petrophysics Log Plot as Points within a Log Plot Track.
The resulting points can be output to the Clipboard as a list of Depth Measurements. One
example of how this data might be used is to locate the exact points where Formation Pressure
Tests, Fluid Samples, or Sidewall Cores are to be taken.
Picture / Core Photo Curves consist of a set of graphics files, for example a set of white light or
UV core photographs. Each graphics file has a defined top and bottom depth which allows the
Text Curves contain "Text" strings which can then be viewed in a Log Plot Track in the Log Plot
Display. It is useful, for example, for labelling RFT pressure points with actual pressure values or
test comments, for labelling core or perforation top and bottom depths and for including core
descriptions or test results from spreadsheet files.
The 'Edit' menu provides the functionality for editing / splicing / filtering and rescaling input
curves. Additional modules allow the user to 'create Array curves', create 'Lithology' curves and
create 'Point curves'. NOTE: a log plot has to be open in order for all the options to be available
for selection.
Related Topics
Section 7.
Working with Curve Data :
Senergy
Creating Interactive Petrophysics Curves

Working with Interactive Curves
Curve Data Manipulation
Manage Text Curves
Array Image Data
Section 7.
Working with Curve Data :
328
329
7.1
Senergy
This topic provides a definition of the Curve Types that can be created from within Interactive
Petrophysics.
Conventional Curves are sampled at the Well Step Interval, they can be populated with a single
numeric value or null values. Curves created in Interactive Petrophysics using the Create Curve
Dialog are saved using the existing Well Step for the selected Well. The blank curve can be
used subsequently in another editing mode such as Interactive Curve Edit, to create, for
example, a facies or other flag-type curve
Array Curves can contain numerous data values at a single depth-entry. The Array curve permits
the display of data such as core analysis data points (porosity, permeability, grain density) at the
Lithology Curves in Interactive Petrophysics are "flag" type curves with values mapped to
Lithology Bitmaps (stored in Lithology.opt). They provide a graphical representation of a lithology
curve with associated Fill Shadings in the Log Plot Display.
Point Curves appear in the Interactive Petrophysics Log Plot as Points within a Log Plot Track.
The resulting points can be output to the Clipboard as a list of Depth Measurements. One
example of how this data might be used is to locate the exact points where Formation Pressure
Tests, Fluid Samples, or Sidewall Cores are to be taken.
Picture / Core Photo Curves consist of a set of graphics files, for example a set of white light or
UV core photographs. Each graphics file has a defined top and bottom depth which allows the
Text Curves contain "Text" strings which can then be viewed in a Log Plot Track in the Log Plot
Display. It is useful, for example, for labelling RFT pressure points with actual pressure values or
test comments, for labelling core or perforation top and bottom depths and for including core
descriptions or test results from spreadsheet files.
Related Topics
Section 7.1 Working with Curve Data : Creating Interactive Petrophysics Curves
Senergy
330

Manage Text Curves
Array Image Data
7.1.1
Conventional Curves
'Conventional' curves, those sampled at the 'well step interval', can be named and created
using the Create Curves Dialog. See Also: Array Curves. The Conventional Curve(s) can be
populated with null values if the 'Null' box is 'checked', or with a single data value - available when
the 'Null' box is 'un-checked'. Curves created by this module are saved using the existing 'well
step' interval for the current well. The blank curve can be used subsequently in another editing
mode such as 'Interactive Curve Edit', to create, for example, a facies or other flag-type
curve.
Related Topics
Array Curves
Lithology Curves
Point Curves
Picture / Core Photo Curves
Text Curves
Curve Management
7.1.2
Array Curves
The 'Create Curve / Array Curve' functionality found under the 'Edit' menu, allows the user to
create two types of curve; 'conventional' or 'array' curves.
'Conventional' curves, those sampled at the 'well step interval', can be named and created
using the grid display shown below. The curve(s) can be populated with null values if the 'Null'
box is 'checked', or with a single data value - available when the 'Null' box is 'un-checked'. Curves
created by this module are saved using the existing 'well step' interval for the current well. The
blank curve can be used subsequently in another editing mode such as 'Interactive Curve Edit
', to create, for example, a facies or other flag-type curve.
There is an 'Array Curve' option to enable the user to create an 'Array'-type curve. This type of
curve can contain numerous data values at a single depth-entry. The Array curve permits the
display of data such as core analysis data points (porosity, permeability, grain density) at the
331
Senergy
Loading Core Analysis Data as Array Curves

To load core analysis data as array curves the user must :
1. Create the empty array curves - type in the curve name corresponding to the curve name in
the ASCII file, into the'Crv Name' column,
2. 'Check' the 'Null' box as the default value,
3. 'Check' the 'Use Array' check-box. The 'X' and 'Z' dimension boxes will become 'active'.
These entry boxes allow the user to type in values to set up the dimensions for the new array
curves.
4. Set the 'X dimension' to a value of '1' and the 'Z dimension' to an appropriate value (see
below) and click the 'Create' button.
The Array 'Z' Dimension'

The user should consider the accuracy with which the data to be loaded needs to be visualized.
If the 'well step interval' is 6 inches and there are core plugs more closely spaced than this, then
the user could specify a 'Z' value of 6. This will resample the core data curve to the nearest one
inch of the core plug depth. A value of 12 would place the core plug to the nearest 0.5 inch of the
plug depth. The user-specified array 'Z value' will allow a smaller depth increment to be created
than the existing well step. The diagram below illustrates how the 'Z value' affects the data
sampling.
Senergy
332
5. Once the Array curves are created, the user should proceed to load the core analysis data
using the 'ASCII Load' module, choosing the same curve names as those created for the
Array curves. IP will warn that the curve name(s) already exists:
6. Confirm 'Yes' that it is OK to overwrite the existing curve(s).
The user can check the array curve properties by selecting 'Edit / List Log Curve Headers'
and looking at the 'Statistics' tab.
The following diagram shows an example of how the 'Array' data appears versus 'conventional'
data points. Conventional ASCII data depths are rounded to the nearest well step increment and
data are lost if they are below the well step resolution. Array curve data are displayed at actual
'Load' depths and all points are shown (depending on array 'Z value' that is selected).
333
Senergy
Core analysis information, loaded as Array curves can be visualized in the IP crossplot tool by
checking the 'Expand Array Curve' box in the Edit Format window. If the Expand Array Curves
Checkbox is Selected in the Crossplot Dialog, the Crossplot will display ALL the Curve Values in
the Array.
If the Expand Array Curves in NOT Selected in the Crossplot Dialog, the Crossplot will only
display the values that correspond to the Well Step Interval.
Senergy
334
Related Topics
Array Curves
Lithology Curves
Point Curves
Text Curves
Curve Management
7.1.3
Lithology Curves
The 'Create / Edit Lithology Curve' module, located within the main IP 'Edit' menu, allows the
user to interactively 'digitize' a graphic lithology curve with associated 'fill shadings' into a log plot
display. The graphic shadings can then be used to generate a display such as that illustrated
below:
The 'Create / Edit Lithology Curve' module generates a curve called 'LITH', which is a 'flag'
type curve, whose values are 'mapped' to the lithology bitmaps stored in the IP program
'\Shading Bitmaps' subdirectory. The order in which these bitmaps are listed in the editor tool is
stored either in the Lithology.opt file in the IP program directory or, if the user has defined their
own Default lithology file, in the active IP Project directory as a 'local' Lithology.opt file. See the '
335
Senergy
Edit Default Lithology' tool description for more details.
Creating a New LITH Curve

The user must have an active single well log plot in the IP window.
Select the 'Create / Edit Lithology Curve' option from the 'Edit' menu. The 'Create / Edit
Lithology Curve' dialog window is launched as shown below:
Senergy
336
1. Select a log plot track, from the drop-down list, into which to digitize the 'LITH' curve.
2. Click the 'Plot Curve' button to place the curve in the selected track.
3. 'Click' the 'Start Edit' button (the button then toggles to 'Stop Edit').
4. Select a lithology description, from the drop-down list, to 'digitize'.
5. On the log plot, in the selected track, left -mouse 'click and drag' over the vertical interval
you wish to 'fill' with the first lithology. The track will fill with the selected bitmap shading as
337
Senergy
shown above. Continue until the desired 'LITH' fill is complete.
6. The user can zoom in to a finer depth resolution (e.g.1:500 / 1:200 Scale) to refine the
lithology interpretation. Thin beds (down to the well step increment (0.5ft, 0.1524m) can be
digitized over the top of a thick interval of a single dominant lithology and the thin bed
lithology is inserted into the Flag curve. The '<Clear>' fill can be used to enter an interval of
'unknown' lithology.
7. To end the digitizing, either :
'click' the 'Stop Edit' button and the 'OK' button to save the edited curve into memory.
Senergy
338
Note: the curve will be saved to the active well when the user selects 'Save All Wells to
Database' or clicks the 'Save Current Well to Database As' options, or
'click' 'Cancel' to abort the editing operation without saving the 'LITH' curve.
Plotting Lithology Curve Shading

In a well where the user has created a Lithology curve, the initial log track display, after the curve
has been digitized, will show all the shading bitmaps and their lithology descriptions in the Log
Track header. This is usually impractical for plotting hardcopy, since each log plot could contain
up to 30 bitmap shadings in the Log Plot header and plot footer. To remove this long list of
shadings from the log plot header, the user can simply type in the word 'None' in the 'Shading
Description' column for the track containing the 'LITH' curve, as illustrated below. Click the 'Run
' or 'Apply' button to see the effect on the log plot.
339
Senergy
Adding a Lithology Legend to a Hardcopy Log Plot

An enhanced metafile (.emf) file called Lithology Legend.emf, can be found in the '\Shading
Bitmaps' sub-directory where IP is installed on the users PC. This subdirectory also contains
the IP 'default' lithology bitmap files.
To include a 'Lithology Legend' in a log plot, graphics file or output to clipboard displaying
lithology shadings, the user can use the following steps:
1. In the log plot 'Hardcopy' dialog, On the 'Main Plot' tab, click the 'Plot Size' Button to see
the dimensions of your log plot. Note the 'Width' measurement.
2. Then go to the 'Plot Header' tab and select either the 'Standard' or 'Full' Plot Header style.
3. 'Click' in a blank row of the 'Graphics' panel and use the 'Browse' button to locate the '
Lithology Legend.emf' file. Select this file. Set the 'Width' measurement to the 'width' from
step 1.
4. Type in a 'height' value around half the 'width' value to preserve the graphics files aspect
ratio.
5. 'Check' the 'Use' cell at the end of the row you are working in.
When the log plot is output to File, printer or clipboard, the legend will be embedded in the log plot
header, as illustrated below.
Senergy
340
A Microsoft Powerpoint file, called 'Lithology Legend.ppt', also found in the IP program
'\Shading Bitmaps' subdirectory, contains the text and graphic elements that were used to create
the IP 'Lithology Legend.emf' metafile. The user can use / edit this .ppt file to create their own
custom 'Legend' and save it as a metafile for use in the hardcopy plotting routine.
NOTE: this module accesses the following IP modules, located within the IP 'Tools' menu, in
order to 'map' bitmap shadings to lithology shadings.
341
Senergy
Firstly, 'Shading Types' where all bitmaps and single-colour shadings are set up for IP.
Secondly, the 'Edit Default Lithology' tool which allows the user to set up bitmap shadings
in the IP default list.
Related Topics
Array Curves
Lithology Curves
Point Curves
Text Curves
Curve Management
7.1.4
Point Curves
The 'Create/ Edit Point Curve' module allows the user to interactively digitize points into a log
plot track. The resulting points can be output to the WINDOWS clipboard as a list of depths
that can be used, for example, to confirm with wellsite staff where to take formation pressure
tests / fluid samples /sidewall cores.
The points can also be displayed in a log plot, which can be copied to the clipboard as a further
visual aid to test / core point selection.
The module is launched from the 'Edit' menu. NOTE: a log plot must be active in the main IP
window. The following dialog window is launched with the default curve name 'Points' filled in
the text box at the top of the window. The user can change this name and the 'Output Set' that
the curve will be written to.
If the curve is new, the user should select a track within the active log plot to work in, by selecting
Senergy
342
from the 'Select track' drop-down list.

Click on the 'Plot Curve' button to put the points curve into the selected log track. Click the 'Start
Edit' button (this then toggles the button to 'Stop Edit') and proceed to digitize points.
Points are created by left mouse button clicking in the selected track. A point symbol will
appear in the log track and a depth value will be added to the 'Picked Points' listing. The
user can use the log scale control to zoom in / zoom out of the log plot display when
selecting / creating / deleting points.
Points can be moved by 'clicking and dragging', with the mouse cursor pointing to a point
in the log track. NOTE: dragging a point over another point in the display will delete that
point.
Points can be deleted by positioning the mouse cursor over the required point (the cursor
changes to a cross shape) and clicking the keyboard 'Delete' key.
To finish creating / editing the point curve, click the 'Stop Edit' button.
Click the 'OK' button to save the newly created / edited curve into memory. The curve will be
written to the well when either the 'Save All Wells to Database' or 'Save Selected Well to
Database As' option is selected.
Click 'Cancel' to abort the 'Create / Edit Point curve' operation.
The list of 'Point Depths' shown in the 'Picked Points' panel is pasted into the WINDOWS
343
Senergy
clipboard by clicking the 'Clipboard' button. The user can then use the right-mouse-buttonclick 'Paste' or 'Crtl V' paste functionality to add the points into an e-mail or other external
document.
Related Topics
Array Curves
Lithology Curves
Point Curves
Text Curves
Curve Management
Senergy
7.2
344
This Chapter outlines the Interactive Curve Features within Interactive Petrophysics.
Interactive Curve Edit: The 'Interactive Curve Edit' tool allows the user to edit any curve
currently included in a log plot display in the IP 'workspace'. NOTE: The tool is only 'active'
when a log plot window is on-screen.
Interactive Baseline Shift: The 'Interactive Baseline Shift' allows the user to graphically apply
a baseline shift to any curve currently shown on a log plot.
Interactive Trend / Square Curve: The 'Interactive Trend / Square Curve' allows the user to;
graphically define and save a 'Trend curve' for any log curve or calculation parameter in IP or
graphically define and save a stepped, 'Square' curve from a chosen input curve.
The 'Trend Curve' is very useful, for example; for defining 'GRclean' and 'GRshale' lines over
large log intervals, or for capturing Rw trends over long well sections as input to Sw
determination. Trend Curves can be created for any log analysis parameter and substituted in
any IP calculation module where a parameter is called for. The trend curve can be used to
compute straight line trends for logarithmically-scaled curves for example, or for defining
normal shale compaction trend curves for sonic/resistivity in pore pressure analysis.
The 'Square Curve' functionality can be used, for example, to create stepped sonic and
density curves for input to acoustic impedance modelling.
Interactive Depth Shift: The 'Interactive Depth Shift' module allows the user to depth-shift one,
or many, curves against another, 'reference' curve, either; using 'rubber-band' type shifts to
stretch / squeeze the 'curve-to-shift' relative to the reference curve, or using 'block' depth
shifts to move entire curves up or down relative to the reference curve.
Depth Shift Other Curves: This new module allows shifting of curves using the depth shift
offset curve generated by the original depth shift module.
Interactive Block Depth Shift: The 'Interactive Block Depth shift' module allows the user to
depth-shift a single curve or groups of curves by a fixed amount. This is useful, for example,
for depth-matching two log runs before splicing them together. This module differs from the '
Interactive Depth Shift' module described in the previous chapter in that only one block
depth shift can be made per curve.
Interactive Curve Splice: The 'Interactive Curve Splice' allows the user to splice together
multiple curves to form a single continuous curve. The module can also be used to set certain
intervals in a curve to Null (absent) data. This can be useful for removing bad dta from a log.
Splice Curves: The 'Splice Curves' module allows the splicing of multiple sets of curves at
the same time. It can be used in conjunction with the 'Interactive Curve Splice' module.
Section 7.2 Working with Curve Data : Working with Interactive Curves
345
Interactive Dip Picking: The module is launched from the 'Edit'
Senergy
'Interactive Dip Picking'
menu. Before launching the module an appropriate log plot has to be created that shows the
image and has a track available to display the results of the picked dips. For more information
on how to set up a log plot to display image logs go to this chapter - Images.
Related Topics
Manage Text Curves
Array Image Data
7.2.1
Interactive Curve Edit
The 'Interactive Curve Edit' tool allows the user to edit any curve currently included in a log plot
display in the IP 'workspace'. NOTE: The tool is only 'active' when a log plot window is onscreen. The editing of a particular curve is performed in the log plot, using the attributes
selected on the 'Edit Curve' dialog.
The user selects 'Interactive Curve Edit' from the main 'Edit' menu. The following window will
be displayed:
The user must select the 'Curve to edit'. This is done by 'clicking' on the appropriate curve trace
in the active plot display, or by 'clicking' on the 'Curve Name' in the log track header. The 'Edit
Curve' window will display the selected curve name. Any Log Plot format, which shows the '
Curve to edit', can be used for editing.
NOTE: You cannot manually type a curve name into the 'Curve to edit' box, since the program
has to establish where in the log display the 'Curve to edit' can be found.
Senergy
346
The 'Result Curve' name defaults to the input curve name with a number '1' appended to the
name.
By 'clicking' the option 'Create Backup Curve' the window will change as follows:
In this case, the selected input curve will be copied to the 'Backup Curve' name (RHOBbu)
before any edits are performed, and the editing will be performed on the original curve name
(RHOB). This is useful, for example, when editing a spike out of a curve in the middle of an
interpretation, since the curve names in the interpretation input windows do not need to be
changed.
There are two 'modes' of interactive editing:
'Stream Mode' - In 'Stream mode', 'click & hold' the left-mouse-button down to draw a new
piece of curve. Release the mouse button and click the 'Interval Break' button to move to a
different section of the log curve.
'Point Mode' - In 'Point mode' 'click' the left-mouse-button to start an edit. Each mouse
'click' will draw a straight line between the mouse 'click' points. To make an interval break in '
Point mode' either right mouse 'click' or 'click' the 'Interval Break' button.
Click the 'Start Edit' button to begin the interactive edit. The 'Curve to edit' will change colour
and the user redraws the curve as described above.
347
Senergy
You can scroll up and down the log while in edit mode.
The 'Null the Data' box, if 'checked', will set the interval being edited to Null (absent) data.
This gives the option of setting bad log data to absent rather than editing it to a new value.
The 'Use Fixed Value' box, if 'checked', will set the interval being edited to the entered '
Fixed Value'.
The 'Undo Edit' Button launches another dialog window which shows an interactive 'slider
bar' with which the user can undo a part, or all, of the edits that have just been performed.
Even if the 'Interval Break' function has been used, the 'Undo Edit' operation will reset the
curve values to the original data across editing gaps. To 'undo' and save the part-edited
curve, move the slider bar to the appropriate position then click 'OK' to return to the main
Senergy
348
interactive 'Edit Curve' dialog. To exit from 'Undo Edit' mode, without making any changes
click the 'Cancel' button to return to the 'Edit Curve' dialog.
'Click' the 'Finish Edit' button to complete the edit.
Clicking the 'Cancel Edit' button will abort the edit operation and delete any new or backup
curves, leaving the original curve untouched.
Related Topics
Interactive Baseline Shift
Interactive Trend / Square Curve
Interactive Depth Shift
Depth Shift Other Curves
Interactive Block Depth Shift
Interactive Curve Splice
Splice Curves
349
Senergy
Interactive Dip Picking
7.2.2
The 'Interactive Baseline Shift' allows the user to graphically apply a baseline shift to any curve
currently shown on a log plot. The user selects the 'Interactive Baseline Shift' under the main '
Edit' menu. The following window will be displayed:
The user must now select the 'Curve to shift'. This is done by clicking on the appropriate curve
in the log plot display or by clicking on the curve name in the track header. The 'Curve to Shift'
window will display the selected curve. Any plot format, which shows the curve, can be used for
editing. The user cannot edit a curve that is being displayed on backup scale (you will not
be able to select it). Therefore, make sure the curve is on main scale before trying to select it.
NOTE: The user cannot manually type in a curve name, since the program has to establish in
which track in the log display the 'Curve to shift' can be found.
The 'Result curve' name defaults to the input curve with a '1' appended to the 'Curve to shift'
name.
By 'clicking' the option 'Create Backup Curve' the window will change as follows:
Senergy
350
In this case the 'Curve to shift' will be copied to the backup curve, and the shifts will be
performed on the original curve.
The shifts are made by creating a baseline on the plot. The 'Result curve' values will be the
separation between the baseline and the shift value plus any 'Baseline Value' the user enters.
Click 'Start Shift' to begin the interactive Baseline shifts. The dialog window will be displayed
where the user can optionally select the program to create a result track. The result track can be
used to view what the final shifted curve will look like while the editing is being made.
The Baseline will be drawn as a vertical thick line at the value entered in the 'Baseline Value'
box. Click in the track to move the baseline. The baseline will consist of line sections joining up
the user-entered points. The user-entered points are displayed as small blue circles on the
baseline. The user can move a point by placing the cursor on a point (the cursor will change to a
cross) and while holding down the left mouse button the point can be dragged to a new position.
To delete a point, move the cursor over the point and press the keyboard 'Delete' key.
351
Senergy
Click the 'Finish Shift' button to complete the shifts. The user will be asked whether the shifts
are to be saved to disk to a BaselineShifts.bls file. This will allow the user at a later date to recall
the shifts and make changes.
To recall an old set of shifts 'click' on the 'Recall Shifts' button and select the BaselineShifts.bls
shift file. NOTE: the user must select a shift curve before starting the interactive shifts, even if a
shift table has been recalled. In the log plot track are the 'Curve to shift' and the 'Result curve'
from the BaselineShifts.bls file. Select the curve on the log plot to which to apply the recalled
shift. After choosing the curve, the result curve is automatically renamed by putting a '1' at the
end of the 'Curve to shift name', even if there is already a curve with that name. The 'Result
curve' name should be manually edited to avoid confusion. There is a 10 character limit. NOTE:
if the user leaves the 'Result curve' as SP1, even though SP1 already exists, a warning
message will appear when 'Start Shift' is 'clicked' saying that SP1 already exists and does the
user want to overwrite it or not.
Select 'Start Shift'. If 'Finish Shift' is clicked then the 'Curve to shift' will be shifted by the
recalled shift values and the 'Result curve' will reflect these recalled shifts.
The 'Cancel Shift' button will abort the shifts and delete any backup curves, leaving the original
curve untouched.
Related Topics
Senergy
352

Splice Curves
7.2.3
The 'Interactive Trend / Square Curve' allows the user to :

graphically define and save a 'Trend curve' for any log curve or calculation parameter in IP.
graphically define and save a stepped, 'Square' curve from a chosen input curve.
The 'Trend Curve' is very useful, for example; for defining 'GRclean' and 'GRshale' lines over
large log intervals, or for capturing Rw trends over long well sections as input to Sw
determination. Trend Curves can be created for any log analysis parameter and substituted in
any IP calculation module where a parameter is called for. The trend curve can be used to
compute straight line trends for logarithmically-scaled curves for example, or for defining normal
shale compaction trend curves for sonic/resistivity in pore pressure analysis.
The 'Square Curve' functionality can be used, for example, to create stepped sonic and density
curves for input to acoustic impedance modelling.
The user selects 'Interactive Trend / Square Curve' under the main 'Edit' menu (menu item is
only active if a log plot is currently displayed). The following window will be launched:
First, choose the type of trend curve you want to create ('Trend' or 'Square'), using the
radio buttons. This will determine the resulting curve suffix ('_t' or '_s') for the output curve.
Now select the curve from which the trend or square curve is to be created. This is done
either:
by 'clicking' on the appropriate curve in the log plot display, or
by 'clicking' on the curve name in the log track header. The user should make sure that
the input curve is visible entirely on the main scale in the plot, not 'wrapped' on a backup
353
Senergy
scale. You cannot select a curve on a backup scale.

NOTE: The user cannot manually type in the curve name, since the program has to establish the
curve track where the subject curve can be found.
The 'Result curve' name defaults to the 'Curve to trend' name with a postscript '_t' or '_s'
attached, depending on whether 'Trend ' or 'Square' curve is selected. The user can rename
the output to any required name.
Click 'Start Trend' to begin the trend line creation. The trend line will initially be drawn as a
vertical thick line in the curve track. 'Click' in the track to create the trend line definition points.
The trend line will consist of line sections joining up the user-entered points. The user-entered
points are displayed as small blue circles on the trend line as shown in the diagram below.
The user can move a point by placing the mouse cursor over a point (the cursor will change
to a cross) and while holding down the left-mouse-button, the point may be dragged to a
new position.
To delete a point, move the cursor over the point and press the 'Delete' key on the keyboard.
The left-hand well plot illustrates the 'Trend Curve', the right-hand plot illustrates the
appearance of the 'Square curve'.
Senergy
354
Click the 'Finish Trend' button to create the Trend Curve. The user will be asked whether to
display the resulting trend curve in the plot track.
The user is then prompted whether the trend curve points are to be saved.
Saving the trend curve calibration points to disk allows the user to recall and edit the data at a
later date. The trend curve is scaled to the 'Curve to trend' and details can be found in the '
Manage Curve Headers' display.
Editing Trend Lines

Editing trend lines is performed using the 'Recall Trend' option and can only be performed on '
Trend' or 'Square' curves that have been saved to disk. The user should select the 'Recall
355
Senergy
Trend' button and choose the appropriate disk file for editing.
The user is then prompted for an appropriate curve on the plot to use for calibration of the trend
line definition points. A gamma ray trend line, for example, cannot be plotted in a RHOB/Neutron
log track.
Choose the appropriate curve by 'clicking' on the curve name in the log curve header or by
'clicking' on the curve in the plot track. The 'Start Edit' button is activated and the user can '
move', 'add' or 'delete' calibration points as required. 'Click' on 'Finish Trend' and save the
edited trend curve to the database and the edited calibration points to disk as shown above.
Senergy
356
Related Topics
Splice Curves
7.2.4
The 'Interactive Depth Shift' module allows the user to depth-shift one, or many, curves against
another, 'reference' curve, either;
using 'rubber-band' type shifts to stretch / squeeze the 'curve-to-shift' relative to the reference
357
Senergy
curve, or
using 'block' depth shifts to move entire curves up or down relative to the reference curve.
Depth shifts can either;
be applied manually, using the mouse cursor, or
in IP Version 3.3 and later, depth shifts can be set up using the built in 'Auto-Depth Shift'
functionality, which is activated from within the 'Interactive Depth Shift' log plot display. NOTE:
This functionality does not operate when 'Block Depth Shift' mode is selected.
The 'Interactive Depth Shift' module works in a log plot display that the user must set up or else
the user can use the 'Depth Shift Wizard' to set the log plot up.
When the 'Interactive Depth Shift' module is launched an information screen appears asking if
the user wants to 'Run Depth Shift Wizard?'. If the user answers 'Yes' then the 'Depth Shift
Wizard' starts. If the user answers 'No' then a blank 'Log Plot Format' set-up window is opened.
The user sets up log tracks and the curves to be displayed and shifted. Each log track can act
as an independent set of depth shifts. This allows the user to perform multiple depth shifts
simultaneously.
Interactive depth shifts are performed in a graphical, log plot display. The typical set-up screen for
the log plot is illustrated below. This screen allows you to :
Select the 'type' of depth-shift method you wish to apply ('interpolate' or 'block shift')
Choose the required 'input' curves,
Pick a 'reference (Ref.) curve', 'curves-to-display' and 'curves-to-shift', and
Assign the log plot track number ('track #') that the curves will be displayed in.
In this example, shown below, 2 tracks have been set up. In Track #1, the GREC and RHOB
curves will be depth-shifted relative to the GR curve, with output curves GRECds and RHOBds.
In Track #2, the depth-shifted RHOBds curve will be displayed together with the NPHI curve
which can be depth-shifted relative to the RHOBds curve.
Senergy
358
The set-up 'options' check-boxes, located at the top of the Set-up window are described below.
'Interpolate curve data' check-box :
if 'checked' (default), will allow the program to interpolate between curve data points if the
depth shift operation results in a value falling between two database depth step increments.
If not 'checked', then the closest input value for the shift depth will be chosen. NOTE: For
point data (core data) this box should not be 'checked', otherwise it could result in
interpolations between Null data point (-999) and good data.
'Shift data using blocks' check-box :
This box controls the way IP shifts curve data.
If the box is not 'checked' (default), then the user works with interactive 'depth shift points'.
The 'shift curves' are stretched or squeezed between the selected depth shift points.
If the box is 'checked', then, rather than define interactive points for depth-shifting, the user
defines a 'block' of data to shift. This is designed to simplify shifting core data.
'Result Curve Name Default extension' :
This box contains a text entry that is the default extension that is added to an input curve name to
define the output curve name. For example, using the program default extension of 'ds', an input
curve name of GR would have an output curve name of GRds.
'Output Set' button :
359
Senergy
Allows the user to select the set into which the output depth-shifted curves will be placed.
Clicking the button brings up a small dialogue box where the user can select previously created
sets or else 'Create New Set'. If 'Create New Set' is selected then the 'Manage Curve Sets' dialog
is opened.
'Apply to track' :
Use the drop-down 'Apply to track' menu to select a track that the 'Output Set' will be applied to.
Different 'Output Sets' can be selected for each track or the same 'Output Set' can be selected
for all the tracks.
The 'Depth Offset' box allows the user to define the name of the depth curve associated with the
depth-shift for each track. The depth curve will default to the 'Default depth curve name prefix'
plus the track number. The 'Default depth curve name prefix' is user editable.
With IP v 3.4 irregular stepped curve sets can be created. The 'Depth Offset' curve can not be in
an irregular step curve set. Shifting curves in an irregular curve set will create extra depth entries
in the set for the shifted curves to accommodate for their shifted positions. If this is not required
then a new shifted irregular set should be created in order to accommodate the shifted curves.
To illustrate how the module works we will look at the following scenario:
Two separate log runs have been recorded, GR/LLDLLS/MSFLC and SGR/RHOB/TNPH/DRHO.
The nuclear log curves are off-depth relative to the reference GR/LLD tool and the neutron log
Senergy
360
(TNPH) is also off depth relative to the density log (RHOB) curve, as illustrated below.
In this case, curve GR will be set up in Track #1 as the reference curve to depth shift the SGR
and the RHOB and TNPH curves to. In addition, RHOB and TNPH are set up in Track #2, where
TNPH will be depth-shifted again to match the depth-shifted density curve RHOBds. Note that
any additional curves, named in each track, but not displayed ('Display Curve' entry not
'checked'), will be depth-shifted by the same amount as the displayed 'Shift Curve' in that track.
The Set-up 'grid' defines the appearance of the interactive log plot that will be used to perform the
depth shifts. The grid columns are described below.
361
Senergy
'Trk #' : This column defines the depth-shift track number for the interactive log plot that will
be launched from this set-up window. Up to eight depth shift tracks can be defined. A 'depth'
track is automatically assigned as the first log track to be drawn.
'Input Curve' :This is the name of the input curve to 'shift', 'display' or to use as a 'reference'.
The curve name must either already exist in the well being edited or it can be an output from
a previously-defined shift track. In the example shown above, curve DS:RHOBds is used as
an input curve to track 2, and is already defined as an output curve from track 1. This curve
is therefore allowed as an input to track 2, even though it may not yet exist in the well when
the interactive log plot is launched.
'Output Curve' : This column sets up the names for the output, depth-shifted curves. A
'default' output name will automatically appear when the mouse cursor is moved out of an
'input curve' box. IP will default to the 'Input curve' name with the 'default extension' ('ds')
appended to the curve name. The 'output curve' name is not used unless the 'Shift Curve'
box is 'checked' to flag the output as an edited curve.
'Shift Curve' : 'Check' this column for each row of the grid if the selected input curve is to be
depth-shifted. The first log curve with both 'Shift Curve' and 'Display Curve' 'checked' in a log
track defines the curve that will be interactively moved on-screen during the selection of
shifts. In the above example, the SGRds curve will be the interactive curve displayed in track
1 and the TNPHds curve will be the interactive curve in track 2.
Any additional curves named / listed in a log track will be shifted by the same amount as the 'Shift
Curve', but will not be displayed in the log plot unless the 'Display Curve' column has been
Senergy
362
'checked' for these curve entries.

'Display Curve' : 'Check' this box to display the selected input curve on the depth-shift log
plot. If the selected curve is also flagged as a 'Shift Curve', then the displayed curve will be
the 'depth-shifted result curve', otherwise it will be the input curve. Any curve can be
displayed in any track.
'Ref. Curve' : This column is used to define a 'Reference Curve'. Only one curve can be
defined as the 'reference' and it can not be a 'Shift Curve'. The 'Reference Curve' does not
have to be defined. If a 'Reference Curve' is selected, that curve will be displayed in all log
tracks in the modules interactive log plot.
The 'function' buttons at the foot of the Depth Shift Log Plot Display Dialog are described below:
'Start' : Clicking the 'Start' button checks the input curves, launches the depth-shift
'interactive log plot' and activates the depth-shifting routines.
Load' : The 'Load' button is used to reload previously saved depth-shift files. It will reload all
the old curve names and options along with the associated shifts. This can be useful if you
either wish to modify the previous shifts or add a new curve to shift.
'Clear Grid' : Clicking this button removes all curve names and track numbers from the grid
display
The order that curves are added to the input screen is not that important, apart from those
exceptions stated above. If you forget to set up a curve to shift in the grid display, it can be added
into the interactive log plot track header using the right-mouse-button click functionality.
Continuing with our example depth-shift operation:
Clicking the 'Start' button launches the interactive log plot. A separate dialog, the 'Run Depth
Shift' window is also displayed, which provides a tabular listing of the shift depths and shift
magnitudes that have been defined by the user. Initially this window is empty. This window can
be re-sized to view more or less of the shifts. The 'Run Depth Shift' window cannot be edited to
change the shift values that have been set graphically on the log plot.
The user 'clicks and drags' the 'Shift Curve' to match the 'Reference Curve'. In the background,
the other curves listed in Track 1 are shifted by the same amount as the 'Shift Curve'. Continue
from top to bottom of the logs to check the SGR-to-GR depth match.
Managing Interactive Depth Shifts

To interactively depth-shift a curve in a track, 'Click' in the track and a new horizontal blue shift
line will appear. The red tie line that joins the blue line shows the position of the start of the shift.
The blue horizontal line is shown at the shifted position. The Depth values in the 'Run Depth
Shift' window are the depths for the start of the shift, where the red tie line meets the right side
363
Senergy
of the track.
To move a depth shift point, Put the mouse cursor over a horizontal shift line, the cursor will
change shape to an up/down drag-type cursor. 'Click' the left-hand mouse button and hold
down while you drag the interactive curve to the new position. Alternatively, with the cursor
positioned over a Shift line, use the keypad '+' and '-' keys to nudge the shift-curve up or down
relative to the reference curve.
To remove a depth shift point, place the mouse cursor over the horizontal line, it will turn into
the up/down arrow cursor shown above. Click the keyboard Delete button to remove the point
from the plot.
In the interactive log plot the curve and depth scales can be changed at any time using the
normal plot format window (Edit Plot Format). If a curve does not have its default scales set up it
would be best to do this before running the depth shift module, since every time you run the
module you would have to change the scales manually. See Manage Curve Headers.
Depth Shift Wizard

The aim of the 'Depth Shift Wizard' is to guide a new IP user through the process of populating
the 'Log Plot Format' screen so that the user can then perform simple depth-shifts. PLEASE
NOTE: the wizard is not aimed at the 'expert' IP user.
From the Edit Menu Select Interactive Depth Shift.
The following Information Dialog Box will be displayed. Click Yes to start the Interactive Depth
Shift Wizard.
The 'Wizard' guides the user step-by-step through the process of setting up the 'Log Plot Format'
screen, starting with curves that will be displayed in 'Track 1'.
Senergy
364
The user defines a 'Reference Curve', then moves onto the curves the user would like to shift
'Curve to shift' and 'Other Curves to Shift'.
365
Senergy
The 'Depth output curve' is the depth offset output curve for the specified track and contains the
depth shifts for that track.
Senergy
The 'Extension' screen allows the user to change the 'Output Curves extension' name. The
default is 'ds'. The output Set can be defined here as well. Either select a pre-existing Set or
create a new Set by clicking on the 'Output Set' button.
366
367
The 'Add track' screen asks the user if they want to add another track or not.
Senergy
Senergy
368
If the user answers 'Yes' then the 'Wizard' starts again, this time for 'Track 2'. Answering 'No'
moves the user onto the 'Data blocks' screen.
369
Senergy
Here the user has two questions to answer 'Do you want to shift the data using blocks?' and 'Do
you want to extrapolate the curve data while shifting?'. After these two questions have been
answered then the 'Wizard' is closed by 'clicking' the 'Finish' button.
Senergy
370
The above screenshot is an example of the 'Log Plot Format' screen setup to shift five curves
relative to a 'Reference Curve' after using the 'Depth Shift Wizard'.
Depth Shifting using the Depth 'Auto Correlator'

An 'Auto Depth Match' operation can be set up to automate the depth shifting operation. This
option, when activated, uses a regression analysis to seek out the closest fit between the
'reference' and 'shift' curves and moves the 'shift curve' incrementally relative to the reference
curve to find the best fit, based upon an input R2 correlation coefficient threshold.
The 'Run Auto Depth Match' option is launched by right-mouse button clicking in the interactive
log plot, in the curve track you wish to work with:
371
Senergy
The 'Auto Depth Shift' window opens, displaying the 'Reference Curve' and 'Correlation
Curve' (Shift curve) for that log track. The remaining entry boxes allow you to configure the autocorrelator routine.
'Correlation Window height' This is the length (in depth units) of the 'Shift Curve' to use for
the depth-match exercise. The 'Correlation Window height', together with the length of the
'Maximum shift', which is added above and below the Correlation Window, sets the depth
interval over which the 'Correlation' (Shift) curve regression is computed.
'Maximum shift' This is the maximum value (in depth units) that you want to move the
correlation curve window up or down the well to find the best depth match to the reference
curve.
'Maximum difference between shifts' This is the maximum 'step' you want the curves to
move relative to one another when trying to find the best fit.
'Remove shifts with correlation R2 less than' This option is used to filter out low R2
correlations and sets a minimum threshold regression R2 value that is acceptable for a
depth match.
'Delete all shifts in track' check-box - if 'checked', all previously-defined depth-shift values
Senergy
372
will be deleted when the 'Run' button is pressed. When the 'Delete all shifts in track' is 'unchecked' the user can now specify the 'Minimum distance from original shifts' that a new
shift can be added. The purpose of this is to preserve the original shifts and only add new
shifts away from the original shift.
'Correlation Type' options allow the user to specify what type of correlation between the
reference and correlation curve is allowed.
A 'Positive' correlation is when both curves move in the same numerical direction i.e. both curves
increase or decrease in numerical value together. If both curves are of the same type only
'Positive' correlations are valid.
A 'Negative' correlation is when the curves move in opposite numerical directions. A Neutron and
Density log will be negatively correlated in clean sands with variable porosity - when the porosity
goes up the Neutron will read greater whereas the Density will read less.
If 'Both' is selected then either positive or negative correlations are accepted (this was the default
in IP v3.3). The Neutron and Density logs are quite often positively and negatively correlated in the
same well - negative in sands and positive in shales.
'Top' and 'Bottom' Depths sets the depth range over which to execute the routine. Leave
blank to select the whole well.
'Run' - clicking the 'Run' button executes the auto-correlator routine.
'Close' closes the 'Auto Depth Shift' dialog.
The interactive log plot should be 'checked' carefully to see that the 'Auto Depth Shift' has worked
in the way it was expected to.
373
Senergy
The 'Finish' button, on the 'Run Depth Shift' tabulation, is used to stop the depth-shifting and
compute the other curves that are not on the display. The user will be asked whether to save
the shifts to a disk file. It is always recommended to do this, since this allows the user to reload the shifts and make changes, if necessary, at a later time. The saved file is an ASCII
file, which can be viewed using Windows NotepadTM or other similar programs. It gives the
curve names and the shifts made.
The 'Cancel' button on the 'Run Depth Shift' tabulation, will stop the depth-shifting but will not
compute the non-displayed curves.
Related Topics
Senergy
374

Splice Curves
7.2.5
This new module allows shifting of curves using the depth shift offset curve generated by the
original depth shift module - Interactive Depth Shift.
Enter an 'Input Curve', the 'Output Shifted Curve' name will automatically be created with the
input name plus the 'Result Curve Name Default extension' will be appended to it. The 'Depth
Offset Shift Curve' is selected from the drop down list, which will show all 'Depth' type curves
in the well.
The 'Interpolate curve data' if 'checked' will allow interpolation of the curve data to find the exact
value at the new depth. For point data, such as core data, this should be turned off. The data
values will not be altered but shifted to the closest database step.
The 'Run' button is 'clicked' to perform the shifts. Shift files can be saved and reloaded.
375
Senergy
Related Topics
Splice Curves
7.2.6
The 'Interactive Block Depth shift' module allows the user to depth-shift a single curve or
groups of curves by a fixed amount. This is useful, for example, for depth-matching two log runs
before splicing them together. This module differs from the 'Interactive Depth Shift' module
described in the previous chapter in that only one block depth shift can be made per curve.
The amount of the depth shift is entered as a multiple of the curve step size. If a curve has a step
of 0.1524 then a block shift of 10 will move each data point an equivalent of 1.524m
The module will only be available if there is a log plot display on-screen. The curves in the active
log plot will be the only curves that can be depth-shifted.
On launching the module, a window, similar to that illustrated below, is opened. The window
contains a list of all the curves in the currently-active log plot display.
Senergy
376
To set up the Block Depth Shift operation:

'Select a Reference Curve' : The user clicks the 'Select Reference' button on the 'Block
Depth Shift' window and then clicks on a curve in the active log plot window. The selected
curve trace changes colour to a heavy black line. This step is used for highlighting the 'depth
reference curve'. This is purely for use as a visual guide.
There are a number of modes of operation to perform a block depth shift on single or multiple
curves:
1. For an individual Curve
Click the 'Select Shift Curve' button and 'click' on a single log curve trace in the active log
plot display. A 'tick' will appear in the check-box next to the curve name in the 'Shift Curves'
list.
Click the 'Start Shift' button. The 'Curve-to-Shift' will change to a light green colour in the
log plot.
THEN, EITHER
'Click & drag' the 'Curve-to-Shift' up or down, in the log plot, to the new depth position. The
377
Senergy
'Shift Increment' value will change as the curve is moved.

When you are happy with the depth match, click the 'Finish Shift' button to move the
selected curve by the entered shift value. The Log plot will update with the depth-shifted
curve.
OR,
Type in a 'Shift increment' value (in depth 'steps') into the 'Shift Increment' box, and click
the 'Shift Curves' button. The Log plot will update with the depth-shifted curve.
2. To Shift Multiple Curves by the same shift increment

Click the 'Select Shift Curve' button and 'click' on a single log curve trace in the active log
plot display. A 'tick' will appear in the check-box next to the curve name in the 'Shift Curves'
list.
Click the 'Start Shift' button. The 'Curve-to-Shift' will change to a light green colour in the
log plot.
'Tick' any other curves in the 'Shift Curves' list that you want to move by the same depth
shift value or use the 'Select All' button to select all the listed curves.
'Click & drag' the 'Curve-to-shift' up or down, in the log plot, to the new depth position. The '
Senergy
378
Shift Increment' value will change as the curve is moved.

When you are happy with the depth match, click the 'Finish Shift' button to move the
selected curves by the entered shift value. The Log plot will update with the depth-shifted
curves.
3. To shift other curves in the log plot by a different shift increment:
Click the 'Clear Selected' button. The 'Shift Curves' list will be 'un-checked' and the 'Shift
Increment' box will be cleared.
Select the new curves to shift by 'ticking' their check-boxes.
Enter a 'Shift Increment' value.
Click the 'Finish Shift' button to perform the bulk shift operation.
NOTE: The 'Cancel Shift' button will 'undo' unsaved interactive depth shifts. However, once the '
Finish Shift' button has been pressed, the shift is saved and 'Cancel Shift' will have no effect. In
this situation, select ('tick') the curves again, if necessary, type in a 'Shift Increment' value of '0'
and click 'Finish Shift' again to return them to their original depth positions.
NOTE: Depth shifts made using this module can be manually undone by changing the curve '
Shift Inc.' attribute at the right hand side of the the 'General' tab on the 'Manage Curve
Headers' window.
Managing Block Depth-Shifts

This functionality is useful, for example, for depth-shifting concatenated core analysis data files
where correlation with log curves e.g. Log analysis derived porosity, shows that rubble zones
have not been correctly measured or other depth discrepancies have been introduced.
To add a new block shift: 'Click' at the depth for the top of the block and a blue horizontal line
will be drawn. Then 'click' at the depth for the bottom of the block and the block will be
created. The thick vertical line on the left of the track defines the block. The shift for the block
is defined by the red tie line on the right of the track in a similar manner to the normal point
shift.
To move a block shift: Put the cursor in a block, and it will change shape to a cross. 'Click'
the left-hand mouse button and hold down while you drag the interactive curve to the new
position.
To change a block size: Put the cursor on a block boundary, and it will change shape to an
up/down drag type cursor. 'Click' the left-hand mouse button and hold down while you drag
the block boundary to a new position.
To delete a block shift: Put the cursor in a block, and it will change shape to an up/down
379
Senergy
drag type cursor. Press the 'delete' button on the keyboard and the shift will be removed.
The block shift forces all the data in the block to be shifted by an equal amount. Data between
blocks will be rubber band shifted. For core data, one should set up the blocks so that there is no
core data between blocks.
Consider a scenario where there is one core Porosity curve that contains data from five cores.
Core 3 is off depth and needs to be shifted to match the log data. This would require creating
blocks around the other 'cores' but not shifting the data. A block would be created around core 3
data and this block would be shifted. If only one block was created around core 3 and the data
shifted then all the cores (1 to 5) would be shifted by the same amount.
A further scenario would be to shift two cores independently. This would require 'blocks' on the
cores above and below the cores that are going to be shifted.
Related Topics
Splice Curves
7.2.7
The 'Interactive Curve Splice' allows the user to splice together multiple curves to form a single
continuous curve. The module can also be used to set certain intervals in a curve to Null
(absent) data. This can be useful for removing bad dta from a log.
Senergy
380
The user enters the 'Result Curve' name and the 'Input Curves' which will be used to create the
Result curve. Click 'OK' to display the 'Interactive Curve Splice' plot.
Old splice results can be loaded from saved disk files by clicking on the 'Load Old Splice'
button.
381
Senergy
The splice intervals are shown in track two. To select the Result curve for an interval: click on the
curve trace to use from the available curves in the input curve track. The result of the selection
will be shown in the result track.
To create a new interval, click in the interval track (track 2) and select 'Split Zone' from the popup menu. Interval top and bottom depths can be changed by putting the cursor on the interval
boundary (the cursor will change to a split horizontal cursor) and while holding down the left
mouse button drag the boundary to the required depth. The splice result curve will change
automatically to show the new splice depth.
Once the Curves have been selected, Click Finish Splice to complete the Interactive Splice.
Senergy
382
To finish the splicing click the 'Finish Splice' button. You will be asked whether you wish to
splice other curves at the same depths. If you reply 'yes', then the 'Splice Curves' module will be
run and the 'Interactive Curve Splice' results loaded into it. A reply of 'no' will prompt to save the
current splice results to disk.
Setting Null Data

To set an interval to Null (-999) right mouse click in the relevant interval 'Output Curves' track in
the 'Interactive Curve Splice' Plot and select 'Null Curve turn on' from the drop-down menu.
To turn the null data off, repeat the process and select 'Null Curve turn off' from the dropdown menu.
383
Senergy
Data editing of 'stuck hole' logs

If the user wants to systematically remove bad log data where the logging tool has become
stuck, the following workflow is useful :
1. Remove the depth lag on the tool sensors by temporarily block-depth-shifting the sensors.
This can be done by changing the 'Shift Increment' for a curve in the 'Edit /List Curve
Headers'. (The user needs to know the length from the tool zero to the sensor. Divide this
number by the 'well step' increment and this will be the shift increment required. The log
curves need to be shifted down the well so the shift increment will be positive).
2. Run the 'Interactive Curve Splice' module with one of the curves that needs to be edited.
Once the plot is displayed, add the tension curve to the plot. Use the tension curve to decide
where the tool was stuck and zone the stuck areas and set the result curve to 'Null data' over
these areas.
3. Once finished with the zoning, click the 'Finish Splice' button and choose to 'splice other
curves'. Add the other curve sensors to the 'Splice Curve' window, using the same splice
depths for the Null data. Run the curve splice on all the curves, setting the bad hole sections to
Null data.
4. In the 'Manage Curve Headers' return the 'Shift Increment' (second from right-hand
Senergy
384
column, 'General' tab) to zero and this will put back in the depth lag between the sensors.
Related Topics
Splice Curves
7.2.8
Splice Curves
The 'Splice Curves' module allows the splicing of multiple sets of curves at the same time. It
can be used in conjunction with the 'Interactive Curve Splice' module. In this case the user
should choose the splice intervals using the 'Interactive Curve Splice'. Then, when finished,
select the option to 'Splice Other Curves'.
If the 'Interactive Curve Splice' results have been loaded then the splice depths and the first
column of input curves will be loaded. To add other curves, select their input 'Splice curves' for
each depth interval and add a 'Result Curve' name at the top of the table.
The 'Best Splice' line on the table allows the program to try and adjust the splice depth to give
the most seamless splice. The user puts a check in the box to turn this feature on. If set to 'on',
the program will use the search interval, set at the bottom of the window to find the depth where
the two curves that are to be spliced, have the most similar value.
385
Senergy
Click 'Ok' to run the splice. Splice table results can be saved to disk and restored from the hard
disk using the appropriate buttons. Note that the splice results generated in this module can be
loaded into the 'Interactive Curve Splice' module.
If Null data gaps are required in the spliced output curve, then a curve name of 'Null Data' can be
selected from the drop-down curve list box.
Related Topics
Splice Curves
Senergy
7.2.9
386
The module is launched from the 'Edit'
'Interactive Dip Picking' menu. Before launching the
module an appropriate log plot has to be created that shows the image and has a track available
to display the results of the picked dips. For more information on how to set up a log plot to
display image logs go to this chapter - Images.
Depending on how the image was referenced when the data was being collected the user has a
choice of orientating the displayed image to 'True North' or to the 'High Side of the Hole'. Only
after 'clicking' the 'Start Edit' button does the image re-orient.The user selects the 'Output
Curves'. NOTE: In order to align the dip curve exactly to a bed boundary it is best to select an
Irregular Set to store these curves in. If a regular depth step Set is selected the depths of dips
can only be placed at the exact depths stored in the depth curve for the selected Set.
The 'Input Curves' are the hole azimuth and deviation plus the hole size. If two caliper curves
are entered then the hole size is assumed to be the average of the two calipers. The hole size is
required to calculate the apparent dip of the formation.
Select the Image and Dip result track in the 'Plot Tracks' section of the window, according to the
layout of the appropriate log plot . 'Clicking' the 'Start Edit' button will start the editing and the '
Dip Picking' window will switch to the 'Picked Dips' tab.
387
Senergy
This tab displays the results of the interactively picked dips - see the section below 'Interactive
Dip Picking' for more information on how to do this. It is possible to manually change the dip and
azimuth by changing the numbers in the table. There is also an option to add new dips manually
by using the 'Add new Dip Depth' section.
The dip 'Type' has to be manually selected from the drop-down menu. Dip type is reflected on
the log plot by the colour and shape of the displayed tadpoles. Dip types can be changed in the '
Edit Dip Symbols' accessed from the 'Tools' menu. Here dip types can be modified or new
types created.

With an appropriate log plot, such as the one displayed in the screenshot below, and the 'Dip
Senergy
388
Picking' module open then the user can pick dips on the log plot itself.
New Dip :To add a new dip, left mouse click on the image log at the depth you want to
the dip to be at and while holding down the mouse button drag the interactive sine shape
curve, left / right and up / down to match the shape seen on the image log.
Edit Dip angle and azimuth : To change a dip angle or azimuth, place the mouse cursor
on top of a dip line on the image. The cursor will change to a cross. Left mouse 'click' and
while holding down the mouse button drag the interactive sine shape curve , left / right
and up / down to match the shape of the image.
Edit Dip depth : To change a dip depth on the log plot, place the cursor on top of the
appropriate dip curve on the image. The cursor will change to a cross. Right mouse click
and while holding the mouse button drag the dip line to a new depth.
Delete Dip : To delete a dip on the display, place the cursor on top of the dip to delete.
The cursor will change to a cross. Press the 'Delete' key and the dip will be removed
from the display.
Change Dip type : To change the dip type for an individual dip, place the cursor on
appropriate dip. The selected dip will then be highlighted in green on the 'Picked Dips' tab
and then the type can be changed from the drop-down box.
Related Topics
389

Splice Curves
Senergy
Senergy
7.3
390
This Chapter Outlines the Curve Data Manipulation Methods available from the Interactive
Petrophysics Edit Menu.
Curve Filter: The 'Curve Filter' module allows the user to filter, or smooth, a curve. Three predefined filter types are available. These are 'Square' (box) filter, 'Bell' Filter and 'Median'
Filter.
Curve Average: The 'Curve Average' module allows the user to compute the average value of
several input curves and write the results to an Output curve. This can be useful if several
logging passes have been made over a zone and the user wants the average results.
Curve Rescale: The 'Curve Rescale' module allows log curves that have been digitized, but
using the wrong scales, to be rescaled. This module can also be used to convert count-rate
neutron logs to neutron porosity logs.
Fill Data Gaps: The 'Fill Data Gaps' module allows the extrapolation of data over any gaps
(Null values: -999) found in a curve. It can be very useful for filling in data gaps when a new
curve dataset, with a lower sample rate, is loaded into a well sampled at a high rate, or for
producing continuous curve data from discrete 'point' datasets such as in routine core
analysis plug data.
Related Topics
Manage Text Curves
Array Image Data
7.3.1
Fill Data Gaps
The 'Fill Data Gaps' module allows the extrapolation of data over any gaps (Null values: -999)
found in a curve. It can be very useful for filling in data gaps when a new curve dataset, with a
lower sample rate, is loaded into a well sampled at a high rate, or for producing continuous curve
data from discrete 'point' datasets such as in routine core analysis plug data.
The fill gap interval is set by entering a value in the 'Fill gap maximum width' box and by
choosing whether this will be 'In Samples' (i.e. the well step interval) or in depth units.
Section 7.3 Working with Curve Data : Curve Data Manipulation
391
Senergy
Individual curve names are entered in the 'Input Curves' grid. The output or result curve names
can be entered manually or one of the curve option boxes ' Create backup', 'New Curve' or '
Overwrite Curve' can be 'checked'.
'Create backup' curve option will append a 'bu' to the curve names. When 'Run' is
selected, the program will copy the input curves using the backup names, and the results of
'Fill data gaps' will be overwritten as the input name curves. After a run, the input and output
curve names in the window will be swapped, and the curve option will be set to 'Overwrite
Curve'.
'New curve' curve option will add a '1' to the input curve names.
'Overwrite Curve' curve option will make the input and output curve names the same, and
the program will overwrite the input data.
'Clear all names' button will clean out the input and output curve names and set them to
blanks.
'All curves' button will put the first 100 curve names into the grid. A maximum of 100 curves
can be worked on at one time.
When 'Run' is selected, the program looks for gaps (-999 data) in the data that are less than the
maximum data gap. When found, a linear extrapolation is done using the first sample either side
of the gap. There is no limit to the size of the gap that can be filled.
Clicking 'Save' allows the user to save the current set-up to the current well directory as a .fdg
Senergy
392
file. This file can then be used to to set up the 'Fill data gaps' display on another well(s) by using
the 'Load' button and selecting the *.fdg file.
Related Topics
Fill Data Gaps
Curve Rescale
Curve Filter
Curve Average
7.3.2
Curve Rescale
The 'Curve Rescale' module allows log curves that have been digitized, but using the wrong
scales, to be rescaled. This module can also be used to convert count-rate neutron logs to
neutron porosity logs.
The example shown below will convert a density log (Rhob) that had been incorrectly digitized at
a scale of 1.95 2.95 gm/cc to be rescaled to left and right values of 2.00 - 3.00 gm/cc.
To use this module to calculate a porosity curve from a count-rate neutron curve the user must
first identify a log interval of very low or zero porosity reading (high count rate). Then, using core
data or some other porosity method, find the count-rate-equivalent value of a high porosity. The
low and high porosities, along with their equivalent count rates are entered into the module, the
output 'Logarithmic' box is 'checked' and the 'Run' button 'clicked' to calculate a neutron
porosity curve.
393
Senergy
NOTE: the 'Logarithmic' options use the 'Natural Logarithm' of input / output values.
The example shown above illustrates that the count-rate-neutron log reads about 14500 counts
at low (0.01) porosity and 9720 at high (0.4) porosity.
Related Topics
Fill Data Gaps
Curve Rescale
Curve Filter
Curve Average
7.3.3
Curve Filter
The 'Curve Filter' module allows the user to filter, or smooth, a curve. Three pre-defined filter
types are available. These are:
'Square' (box) filter
'Bell' Filter
'Median' Filter
A user-defined filter is also included. The maximum filter length is 121 database sample
increments if the user-filter table is used, otherwise 2001 sample increments can be used.
Select the 'Input Curve' you wish to filter. The Output curve name is pre-defined depending
Senergy
394
on whether the 'Create Backup Curve' or 'Create New/Overwrite Curve' check boxes are
set.
With the 'Create New/Overwrite Curve' 'checked', the output curve will have the same
name as the input curve with a '1' appended to it. If the user wishes to overwrite the input
curve, they should edit the output curve name to make it the same as the input curve name.
With the 'Create Backup Curve' 'checked', a backup curve will be copied from the input
curve. The backup curve name will be the input curve name with 'bu' appended to it.
If the 'Create Backup Curve' is 'checked', the 'View' button at the base of the window will
be 'active' and visible. This allows the user to view the filtered curve before committing to the
final filter operation. This is only possible if the original curve is displayed on the log plot.
Once the filter is correct / acceptable, 'click' the 'Run' button to save the filtered curve.
The 'Number of levels' box allows the user to define the 'filter length', in units of 'depth
steps'. A number must be entered, which must be a whole, odd number between 3 and 121
(2001 for square, bell or median filters). The 'Filter height' is the well 'step' multiplied by the
'Number of levels'. The units are picked up from the well units.
The 'Top Depth' and 'Bottom Depth' boxes allow the user to specify the interval over which
the filter will be run. There is also a 'Select Zone Depths' icon which will open the 'Select
Zone Depths' module and the interval can be defined using available Top Sets and zones.
The 'Square (or box) Filter' will apply an equal weight to all samples in the filter.
The 'Bell Filter' applies a sine wave shaped filter to the data. The following formula is used
to calculate the filter weights.
Wt j
1 Cos 2
j FiltLen 1
FiltLen 1
Where:
Wtj
FiltLen =
Filter weight at j'th level

Filter length
The 'Median Filter' returns the statistical 'median' value for all values sampled in each filter
length.
For the 'User Filter', the user must enter the weights in the table. The weights will be
normalized before they are used, therefore it is not necessary to ensure that they add up to
1.0.
Related Topics
395
Senergy
Fill Data Gaps

Curve Rescale
Curve Filter
Curve Average
7.3.4
Curve Average
The 'Curve Average' module allows the user to compute the average value of several input
curves and write the results to an Output curve. This can be useful if several logging passes
have been made over a zone and the user wants the average results.
'Output Curve and Units' : The user selects the output curve and units.
'Input Curves' : The user selects the input curves from which to create the average. Up to
ten curves may be used.
'Curve search Mask' : This allows the program to select the input curves using a mask.
This is useful if the input curves have nearly the same name except for one or two letters.
For example, if the user wanted to select the following curves RHOB1, RHOB2, RHOB3,
RHOB4, RHOB5, then the user would enter RHOB* in the 'Curve search mask' box and
click 'Apply'. The '*' is used as a 'wild' character for the searching process.
'Lateral Average or Arithmetic Average' : The user selects the type of averaging that will
be applied to the chosen curves. The 'arithmetic' average takes a straight average of the
Senergy
396
input curves at each well step depth. The 'Lateral' average can give better results since it
gives a median-type average that will not be badly skewed by any outliers in the data.
'Top and Bottom Depth' : The user enters the depth interval over which to perform the
averaging. Or by clicking the
symbol then the 'Select Zone Depths' dialogue box
appears. Within this it is possible to select zone tops by using the drop-down menus.
Lateral Averaging
Lateral averaging is performed by creating pair products of the input data and then taking the
median of the results.
For example, if we had a set of five curves, at a depth XXXX ft the curves values are:
5, 8, 10, 3, 6
The data would be combined in pairs.
5+8, 5+10, 5+3, 5+6, 8+10, 8+3, 8+6, 10+3, 10+6, 3+6
The pairs would then be sorted.
8, 9, 11, 11, 13, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18
The result would be half the middle value, or if the number of pairs is even, the mean of the two
middle values (2 pairs therefore 4 values).
(13 + 13) / 4 = 6.5
This is almost identical to the Hodges-Lehmann method (J.L Hodges and E. L Lehmann, Basic
Concepts of Probability and Statistics, Holden-Day 1970).
Related Topics
Fill Data Gaps
Curve Rescale
Curve Filter
Curve Average
397
7.4
Senergy
The 'Picture Curves' tool allows the user to manipulate and display graphics files in IP log plot
displays.
Two tools are included within the 'Picture Curves' menu item:
'Edit Picture Curve Headers'
'Edit / Load Picture Curve Data'
Related Topics
Array Image Data
Manage Text Curves
Section 7.4 Working with Curve Data : Manage Picture/Core Photo Data
Senergy
7.4.1
398
Edit / Load Picture Curve Data
The 'Edit / Load Picture Curve Data' module is the main module for manipulating graphics
(picture) data. A 'Picture curve' consists of a set of graphics files, for example a set of white light
or UV core photographs. Each graphics file has a defined top and bottom depth which allows the
IP recognizes the following graphics file formats: Bitmap, JPEG, GIF, TIFF, metafile (.wmf) and
enhanced metafile (.emf).
Before any graphics file can be loaded, a 'Picture Curve' must be selected -'Select Picture
Curve' - or a new one created 'Create New Curve'. The IP database can create and store up to
10 picture curves per well.
To 'load' a new graphics file into a picture curve, 'click' the 'Load Graphics File' button or 'click'
in a blank cell under the 'Graphics File Name' column header. A file browser dialog will allow you
to select the graphics file to load. Once selected, you will be asked whether you want to make a
copy of the picture, which will be stored in the wells 'Pictures' sub-directory. If a copy is made,
then the picture file will be copied and renamed to a unique file name. It is good practice to
copy the picture, as prompted, because all related images for the well will then be
grouped together under one directory within the wells' own data directory in the IP
database. This facilitates project saving and back-ups.
Once a graphics file is loaded into the interface, it is necessary to enter the 'Top Depth' and '
399
Senergy
Bottom Depth' depths for the picture. These depths can be pasted in from an Excel
spreadsheet using the 'Paste Rows' button. A 'Comments' field is available for the user to add a
description for the file for future reference.
To 'delete' a picture (an individual graphics file), 'click' in the row you wish to delete (do not 'click'
on the 'Graphics file Name' cell because this will launch the file browser) and then 'click' the '
Delete Row' button.
The 'Update Plots' button will refresh any active Log Plots with any new information that has
been added to the picture curve. This is useful if you are trying to depth match the picture curve
and conventional curve data.
Depth shifting the pictures to log data can be done either :
by typing in the 'Top Shift' and 'Bottom Shift' values, or
by using the results of an interactive depth shift performed on the regular log data.
To use the results of an Interactive Depth Shift operation:
enter the appropriate depth shift curve generated by the 'Interactive Depth Shift' module.
These are depth curves with a name of type 'DepOff$_' (default name will be
'DepOff1_ds') where the '$' will be a number which depends on which track the depth shift
was run in (for a one track depth shift this will be 1). The '' will refer to the default
extension the user set on the depth shift setup window (default is 'ds'). The depth offset
curve is overwritten each time the interactive depth shift module is run, therefore, it will be
necessary to run the image depth shifts straight after the interactive depth shift before the
curve gets overwritten by another interactive depth shift. Another option would be to rename
the depth offset curve using the Manage Curve Headers module straight after the
interactive depth shift so that it does not get overwritten.
Click the 'Apply Depth Shift' button to update the 'Top Shift' and 'Bottom Shift' depths
columns.
Individual pictures can be viewed by clicking the 'View' button which is found to the right-hand
side of the 'Graphics File Name' column. This will bring up the 'Picture Viewer'.
Senergy
400
The 'Picture Viewer' allows the user to see the image at various resolutions. Options are
available to send the picture directly to the printer or to copy it to the clipboard for inclusion in
another document.
Placing the cursor on the picture will display the log depth of the image at that cursor position at
the base of the window.
A picture can be split into two separate files by placing the cursor at the required split depth and
then right mouse clicking. The following dialog will appear.
If the user confirms the split, the picture's current graphics file will be split at the requested depth
401
Senergy
and two new separate files will be created. The old picture file will not be altered but will no longer
be used in the Picture curve.
Splitting pictures can be very useful for core photographs in rubble zones where the core photo
can not be made to match log depths. The split photos can then be separately depth matched to
the log data.
Related Topics
Array Image Data
Manage Text Curves
7.4.2
Edit Picture Curve Headers
The 'Edit Picture Curve Headers' module displays information about 'Picture' type curves inside
the IP database. This module is analogous to the 'Manage Curve Headers' module which works
with the standard log curve data.
'Out Name' : To rename a picture curve, highlight the 'Out Name' and type in the new
name. If you 'blank out' the 'Out Name' box the curve will be deleted from the well when you
click 'Update'.
'Created Module': This displays the module name that created the curve.
'Create date': This is the date the curve was created. The format of the displayed date is set
'Updated Module': This shows the module name that last changed the curve.
'Update date': Time the module was last updated.
'Comments': User-entered comments about this Picture curve.
Related Topics
Senergy

Array Image Data
Manage Text Curves
402
403
7.5
Senergy
Manage Text Curves
The 'Text Curves' function allows the user to create a 'curve' containing text strings and then to
view the text within a curve track on a log plot. It is useful, for example, for labelling RFT
pressure points with actual pressure values or test comments, for labelling core or perforation
top and bottom depths and for including core descriptions or test results from spreadsheet files.
The 'Text Curves' function is located under the 'Edit' menu.
Related Topics
Manage Zones / Tops
Curve Management
Section 7.5 Working with Curve Data : Manage Text Curves
Senergy
404
Load Data into IP
7.5.1
The 'Edit Text Curve Headers' dialog is similar to the 'Manage Curve Headers' dialog for
conventional curve data. The editor allows the user to rename or delete text curves from the
database.
To 'delete' a Text Curve, highlight the curve in the 'Out Name' column and hit the Delete
key on the keyboard. Confirm the deletion when the prompt appears.
To 'rename' a Text curve, highlight the curve in the 'Out Name' column, type in a new name
and click on the 'Update' button.
Related Topics
Manage Zones / Tops
Curve Management
7.5.2
The 'Edit / Load Text Curve data' option allows the user to create, load and edit text strings for
display as 'Text Curves' from the dialog screen shown below. NOTE: Only one text curve is
permitted per log track, in a log plot.
From the Edit Menu, Select Text Curves, Edit / Load Text Curve Data
To create a new 'Text Curve', the user must first click the 'Create New Curve' button.
This launches a 'Curve Name' dialog, where a new curve name can be typed in. The Text
405
Senergy
Curve name should not contain any <space> characters.The user should click 'OK' and
then choose the newly-created curve from the 'Select Text Curve' drop-down menu at the
top of the screen.
If a 'Text Curve' already exists, select it from the 'Select Text Curve' drop-down list.
The user then has a number of options for adding text strings to the Text Curve:
1. Manually type in depth values and text strings into the window on the screen.
2. Paste data from an external spreadsheet, using the 'Paste from clipboard' facility at the
top of screen.
3. Load data from an external ASCII format (tab delimited) file with column 1 being Measured
Depth, Column 2 being 'shift' and column 3 being the 'text string' as illustrated below. Click
on the 'Load' button to select the text file to be used to populate the table.
4. Load Formation / Zone Tops 'labels' from an existing Zones / Tops Set in the currentlyactive well. Click on the 'New from Zone/Tops' button and select the Set name from the
drop-down list. The depth can be included with the label by (.txt).
The data are loaded and displayed in the window and can be edited on-screen if necessary.
Senergy
406
The 'Shift' column can be used to nudge individual text strings up or down on a plot. There
is also an option to use a 'Depth Shift Curve', created in 'Interactive Depth Shift', to
adjust the position of the text strings en masse.
The Text Curve entries can be loaded and viewed in a log plot by:
1. 'clicking' in a log track header, or adding a new, blank track.
2. Select the first empty row in the 'Log Plot Format' table and choose the 'Text Curve'
option in the 'Style' column at the right hand side of the window.
NOTE: you must select the 'Style' before selecting the 'Text Curve' name or you will only
be able to see 'conventional' log curve names in the 'Curve Name' drop-down list.
The 'Text Curve' can then be selected under the 'Curve Name' drop down list. A 'Font'
button appears at the right hand side of the screen. This can be used to alter the
407
Senergy
appearance of the text you wish to display. Text colour is controlled by the 'Line Colour'
drop-down menu.
The text can be 'left', 'right' or 'centre' justified in its' track, using the 'Left Scale' menu and
can be 'wrapped' to fit to the track width using the 'Back Up' drop-down menu.
The text strings are linked to their depth 'anchors' by a tick and expandable bar. Where text
strings are closely spaced, they may be offset relative to the anchor depth. The degree of
offset can be changed, either by expanding the vertical display scale of the plot or by making
the text curve track wider. The 'Right Scale' column allows the user to set the depth
'anchor' position. The anchor can be set to the left or right side of the text curve track, or
turned 'off' by selecting the 'Anchor None' option.
Senergy
408
Text curves can be displayed in tracks along with 'conventional' curve data as shown below.
The display order can be modified, for example to show a log curve on top of the text curve,
by clicking in the track header, selecting the 'All Tracks' button and changing the 'Plot
Order' at the right hand side of the 'Grid' tab.
409
Senergy
The 'Clear' button will delete all entries in the text grid.
The 'Delete Row' button will remove a single row from the text grid, where the mouse
cursor is currently placed.
Related Topics
Manage Zones / Tops
Curve Management
Load Data into IP
Senergy
7.6
410
Array Image Data
Array image data processing modules are found under the 'Edit' menu. Two modules allow the
conversion of array data to normal curves and the creation of array curves from groups of normal
curves. There are two additional modules for the creation of image curves from acoustic and
electrical array data.
The 'Array Image Data' tools include:

'Curves to Array Data'
'Array data to Curves'
'Create Acoustic Image'
'Create Electrical Image'
'Merge Images'
Section 7.6 Working with Curve Data : Array Image Data
411
Senergy
The 'Merge Images' option allows the user to combine, for example, two electrical images from
2 tools run together in the same logging run. An example is shown in the 'Merge Images' Help
item.
Related Topics
Curves to Array Data
Array data to Curves
Create Acoustic Image
Create Electrical Image
Merge Images
7.6.1
The 'Curves to Array Data' module allows the combining of old (IP pre version 2.7) array curves
(one curve per array sample) into proper array curves.
The user selects one of the curves in the set of curves that make up the array, or gives the 'Input
base curve name', the program will find the other curves that make up the array. The module will
then combine all the input curves into the one output array curve.
The 'Start sample number' and 'Stop sample number' allows the user to select part of the set
of curves to put into the final array set. If the boxes are left blank the program will select all curves
in the well with the same common 'base name'.
Senergy
412
Related Topics
Merge Images
7.6.2
Array Data to Curves
The 'Array Data to Curves' module is used to extract data from an array curve into
'conventional' curves.
The user selects the 'input array curve name' and types in the 'output base curve name'. The
module will then create one output curve per sample in the input array curve. In the above
example the input array curve, 'FCA1', which has 12 samples per depth will be converted into 12
curves named Pad1_1, Pad1_2, Pad1_3 .... Pad1_12.
The 'Start sample number' and 'Stop sample number' allows the user to select only part of
the input array. If the boxes are left blank the program will output all samples in the input array. It
is allowable to have the same 'Start sample number' and 'Stop sample number', this will then
extract just one sample and produce one output curve.
The 'Output high sample rate data' box, if 'checked', will make the output curves have the
same high depth sample rate as the input array curve. This will mean that the output curves are
array curves but they only have one 'X' sample but potentially multiple 'Z' depth samples per well
413
Senergy
depth sample. If the box is not 'checked' then the output curves will be at the standard 'well step'
sample frequency. The output value will be the average of the data points in the 'Z' direction. For
example if the array data was stored at 0.1" in a 6" sample well then the output would be the
average of the 60 values in that 6" depth increment.
The above example will output one curve called Res_Pad11 at the database sample frequency.
The curve name has '11' at the end since the base name is Res_Pad1 and the sample chosen
was '1' which has been appended to the base name. This example could be used to extract a
resistivity curve from a FMI raw data curve.
Related Topics
Merge Images
7.6.3
The 'Create Acoustic Image' module is used to create corrected image data from acoustic
image logs (CBIL, UBI, CAST, AST). The raw data input array curves can be plotted directly.
However, this module will align the image to true north using the 'azimuth' curve and optionally
dynamically normalize the image to enhance geological features in the image.
Senergy
414
The user enters the 'Amplitude' and 'Transit Time' uncorrected curves along with the 'Azimuth
' curve.
The 'Input' and 'Output' boxes allow the user to change the way the input curve values are
mapped to the output curve values. The defaults will generally give acceptable results. The output
defaults of '0' and '255' are the default number of colours used for creating the image. All images
are created using 256-colour palettes. The defaults therefore allow direct mapping of the image
values to the palette colours. The 'Get Max / Min' buttons will look up the maximum and
minimum input values and display them in the 'Input' boxes. If the 'Input' boxes are left 'blank'
415
Senergy
then the maximum and minimum values will automatically be used.

The 'Clip Output to low high value' will clip any input values that fall outside the 'Input' low to
high value range. This can be useful if there are some spurious data values in the image which
have no meaning and need to be removed from the image.
The option to 'Dynamically normalize image' will enhance the image to emphasize geological
features. The user enters the 'window length' over which the enhancement is performed. The
normalization is executed in a number of steps :
The maximum and minimum values of the data at each depth sample are computed, for the
specified window length.
These maximum and minimum values are then filtered, using the same window length, in
order to remove any sudden change in scaling.
The final filtered maximum and minimum values are then used to rescale the input curve so
that the full dynamic range of colours can be seen in the image for each window length.
The user can also optionally correct the input Pad 1 Azimuth (P1AZ) curve for magnetic
deviation from true north. This correction is sometimes performed by the logging company at the
time of acquisition. The user can also change the mapping position of the input arrays to the
azimuth input curve. The default setting maps the first 'X' sample in the input arrays to the
azimuth curve.
[Note: If a Relative Bearing curve (i.e. RB) is used to correct the image to the top side of the
borehole (as in cased-hole applications where magnetic azimuthal curves are invalid due to
magnetised casing) it is possible that the Relative Bearing curve could be recorded on an
inverted scale (i.e. increasing 'anti-clockwise' looking into the borehole rather than 'clockwise' as
expected by IP). In this case the correction will be in the wrong direction, so the user should
rescale the RB curve from 0-360 to 360-0 using 'Edit > Curve Rescale'.]
It is possible to run the module only over certain depth intervals by entering a 'Top' and 'Bottom'
depth.
The 'Save' and 'Restore' buttons will allow the input data values to be saved to an external file
and restored at a later date. NOTE: IF YOU DO NOT SAVE THE SETTINGS - you will lose any
changes you have made from the default settings, when you exit the module.
Related Topics
Senergy
416
Merge Images
7.6.4
The 'Create Electrical Image' module is used to create corrected image data from raw electrical
image curves. The output image data from pad-type imaging tools (example FMI, FMS, OBMI,
EMI) consists of a number of array curves that correspond to the button arrays on the imaging
tools. This module takes the input curves and maps them to an output array image. The format of
the mapping can be controlled by the user or a pre-defined format can be selected from the '
Load Defaults' drop-down list. The screen, shown below, illustrates the default mapping for a
standard FMI tool input. IP is set up with default settings for FMI, FMS, OBMI and EMI tools.
417
Senergy
Input Array Curves

The user should select one of the default formats for the logging tool being used. If a default is not
available then the format will have to be built. To do this the mapping of the input array curves to
the physical button positions on the tool must be known.
'Input Curve' : The input name of the array curve to map. The 'Change input set' box will
change all the inputs curve names so that the selected set is added to the start of the name.
This allows the user to select a default template and then the input set name for the raw
data image curves.
'Number Buttons' : The number of buttons or array samples in the input curve.
'Button Spacing' : The spacing between the buttons in inches.
'Orient to Azimuth' : The orientation of the 1st array sample to the azimuth curve in degrees.
(example 90 degrees will indicate that this curve is 90 degrees clockwise, looking down
hole, to the azimuth curve).
'Depth Shift' : This is the depth shift in inches that needs to be applied to this curve before
mapping it to the image.
'Rotation Shift' : This is the rotational shift, clockwise looking down hole, in inches that is
applied to the curve after it has been orientated using the azimuth curve.
'Button order file name' : This is an optional input file that allows for mapping of each button
individually. The file consists of ASCII text, with one line of data per button. Each line
contains two numbers:
1. The first number is the rotation shift for the button in inches, clockwise around the hole,
looking down hole,
2. The second number is the depth shift in inches, positive for a shift downwards.
Lines that start with a '$' character are ignored. These individual button shifts are added to
the overall curve shift before mapping the button to the image. An example input file could
look like this, the first button will be moved 2.2 inches clockwise and no added depth shift will
be applied. :
$ Button order for Schlumberger FMI tool
$ 12 buttons order is counter clockwise around hole
2.2 0
2.0 0
1.8 0
1.6 0
1.4 0
1.2 0
1.0 0
Senergy
418
.8 0
.6 0
.4 0
.2 0
0 0
The normal button mapping is counter clockwise looking down the hole. This is left to right
button order looking at the face of the tool pad. The button order file can therefore override
this.
Image Output
The 'Input' and 'Output' 'Low Value' and 'High Value' boxes allow the user to change the way
the input curve values are mapped to the output image values. The defaults will generally give
acceptable results. The output defaults of 0 and 255 are the number of colours used for creating
the image. All images are created using 256-colour palettes. The defaults therefore allow direct
mapping of the image values to the palette colours.
NOTE: for resistivity image devices such as the FMI, mapping low resistivity values to Low
Output values and high resistivity to High Output Values results in an image-shading scale which
grades from light to dark colours. However, the Schlumberger Oil-Based-Mud Imager (OBMI) is
a conductivity device. So, to give an equivalent look for this tool, compared to the other electrical
images - reverse the output values to Low Value = '256' and High Value to '0'.
The 'Get Max / Min' buttons will look up the maximum and minimum array input values and
display them in the 'Input' boxes. If the 'Input' boxes are left blank then the maximum and
minimum values will automatically be used.
It is a useful step to check the curve data Max / Min values. This is done by loading an array
curve into a plot track, right 'click' in the track and select / display the histogram for that curve.
The max/min values selected by IP may reflect extreme outlying data points which means that
more realistic max/min values can be manually set by the user. An example is illustrated below:
419
Senergy
The 'Clip Output to low high value' will clip any input values that fall outside the 'Input' low high
range. This can be useful if there are some spurious data values in the image which have no
meaning and need to be removed from the image.
The option to 'Dynamically normalize image' will enhance the image to bring out geological
features. The user enters the window length over which the enhancement is done. The
normalization is done by taking first the maximum and minimum of the data at each depth
sample for the specified window length. This maximum and minimum is then filtered using the
same window length in order to remove any sudden change in scaling. The final filtered
maximum and minimum is then used to rescale the input curve so that the full dynamic range of
colours can be seen in the image for each window length.
The 'Hole Size' and 'Image Resolution' boxes are used to create the size of the output curve
image arrays. The image 'X' dimension size will be Hole Size / Image Resolution. The Image
resolution needs to be set to the button resolution of the tool (for FMI tool this is 0.1 inch). The
depth 'Y' sample increment for the output curve array is set the same as the input array curves.
Azimuth
The user can also optionally correct the input Pad 1 Azimuth curve (P1AZ) for magnetic deviation
Senergy
420
from true north. This correction is sometimes made by the logging company at the time of
acquisition.
[Note: If a Relative Bearing curve (i.e. RB) is used to correct the image to the top side of the
borehole, it is possible that the Relative Bearing curve could be recorded on an inverted scale (i.
e. increasing 'anti-clockwise' looking into the borehole rather than 'clockwise' as expected by IP).
In this case the correction will be in the wrong direction, so the user should rescale the RB curve
from 0-360 to 360-0 using 'Edit > Curve Rescale'.]
Depths
It is possible to run the module only over certain depth intervals by entering a 'Top' and 'Bottom'
depth.
The 'Save' and 'Restore' buttons will allow the input data values to be saved to a file and restored
at a later date. Otherwise you will lose all changes from the defaults when you exit the module.
Images from Dipmeter Curves

It is possible to create an image type display from a set of dipmeter curves. The following
example shows a set to create an image.
421
Senergy
The four high-resolution dipmeter button curves (Pad11, Pad21, Pad31, Pad41) are selected.
These are single 'X' value array curves. However the number of buttons is set to 20. This will set
the width of each curve in the image. In this example the width of the image will be 20 x 0.1 = 2
inches. This will then create an image which makes four 2" images around the 8.5" borehole. The
image resolution value should be set to the same value as the button spacing (0.1" in the
example shown above).
An example of an image plot made this way is displayed below.
Senergy
422
Processing Images from 2 OBMI Tools run in tandem

Load data from file, selecting the Pad-1 Azimuth curves, the 4 pad-array curves for each tool, the
gamma ray curve and the caliper curves for the two tools.
Process the Array curves to create the Image logs for tools 1 and 2:
423
Senergy
Repeat the process for the second tool, selecting all the '*****_2' curve names, outputting data to
a new image curve name.
Open up a new plot or one of the IP default formats with empty tracks. Set the curve names and
display parameters as illustrated below:
Senergy
424
In order to merge the images from the two tools, follow the instructions under the 'Merge Images
' Help item.
Related Topics
Merge Images
7.6.5
Merge Images
The 'Merge Images' option allows the user to combine the processed images from a number of
tools into one 'Image'. This could be used, for example, to view the data recorded by 2 borehole
imaging tools run in tandem.
425
Senergy
Select the two processed image curves to be merged and type in a name for the 'Result Image
'. Select 'Run'.
The example shown below is of 2 Oil-based-mud Imaging tools (OBMI) run connected together.
The sensor pads on the second tool are oriented rotated at 45 degrees to the pads on the first
tool. Image logs for each tool are processed separately (Tracks 1 and 4) and the merged image
('Image 3') is shown in Track 3.
Senergy
426
NOTE: that the image traces are not a constant distance apart - this indicates that the second
tool must have rotated out of phase with tool 1 in some parts of the wellbore.
Related Topics
Merge Images
Section
8
View Well and Curve Data
Senergy
428
The 'View' menu allows the user to visualize log analysis data.
Working with the Log Plot Display: Interactive Petrophysics (IP) is built around a graphical
user-interface which allows the user to perform the majority of interpretation workflow steps
using unique 'Interactive Log Plot' displays. In addition, there is considerable flexibility built
into the program to allow the setting up, saving and recall of user-defined 'Plot Formats' (.PLT
files). Some basic log template 'formats' are provided with the software. These formats can
be launched from drop-down menus and then customized by adding, moving or deleting log
tracks and log curves to the users preferred display characteristics. The modified plot format
can be saved and applied to other wells within an IP database.
Histograms: The Histogram has a 'new look' in that a sunburst background colour has been
added and there is also an improved statistics table. Multiple histograms can be displayed
simultaneously. Histograms can be created for a single well or can be set up to display
multiple wells. When a histogram is launched and a log plot for the active well is on-screen - if
you move the mouse cursor over the log plot window, a small light blue bar, visible on the
histogram display, tracks the mouse cursor movement. The histogram curve value updates
as the mouse is moved. The bar disappears when the cursor is moved back over the
histogram window. The bar is visible, simultaneously, on as many histograms as you have
open for the active well.
Managing Crossplots: The Crossplot has a 'new look' in that a sunburst background colour
has been added.
3D Parameter Viewer: The 3D Parameter Viewer and 3D Visualization provides a versatile,
interactive, graphical representation of the selected well data and can output results from any
Interpretation module within Interactive Petrophysics v3.6. The 3D Visualization Window
enables calculated reservoir parameters, for example Porosity and Water Saturation, Net
Reservoir and Net Pay Thickness for all wells or for selected wells in an Interactive
Petrophysics v3.6 database. Deeper investigation and Data Examination, for example Rw,
Wet Clay Density, m, n, used in Porosity and Water Saturation can be completed on a fieldwide basis. Using the 3D Parameter Viewer enables the comparison of parameter values
across different Interactive Petrophysics modules, or in the same module after different
Interpretations have been run.
Multi-Well Correlation Viewer: The 'Multi-Well Correlation Viewer' module provides the user
with an interface to view multiple wells and to plot correlation lines between wells held in an IP
database. Zone tops can be displayed and edited and wells can be 'datumed' (Flattened) on a
zone top or to a reference depth by simple 'mouse click' operations. Wells can be added or
Section 8.
View Well and Curve Data :
429
Senergy
removed from the display window and moved around within the multi-well viewer. Multi-well
plot formats can be saved into the database directory for easy recall and re-display. Plots can
be output to the clipboard for pasting into external documents or can be sent directly to
available printers.
Well Map: The 'Well Map' is a graphical interface where wells can be viewed together with
geographical and cultural information loaded into IP from external SHAPE, .OVL or .DAT files.
The interface allows users to identify and discriminate between wells that are in the database
but not loaded into memory ("Available Wells") and in-memory ("Loaded Wells") based on
symbol colours.
Montage Builder: The IP 'Montage Builder' is a standalone application, shipped with IP, that
provides a graphical-object editing and display 'workspace' in which the user can combine log
plots, crossplots, histograms, correlation panels, core photographs and text on one montage.
A comprehensive set of paper-sizing and orientation attributes allows you to work in a scaled
workspace, to change display scales (Zoom in / out) and modify object orientation (rotate /
flip), to add shape 'primitives' with user-specified colours and colour fill to enhance your
presentation.
Related Topics
Log Plot
Horizontal Log Plot
Set Default Plot Format
Histogram
Crossplot
Multi-curve Crossplot
3D Parameter Viewer
Multi-Well Correlation Viewer
Montage Builder
Section 8.
View Well and Curve Data :
Senergy
8.1
430
Working with the Log Plot Display
Interactive Petrophysics (IP) is built around a graphical user-interface which allows the user to
perform the majority of interpretation workflow steps using unique 'Interactive Log Plot' displays.
In addition, there is considerable flexibility built into the program to allow the setting up, saving
and recall of user-defined 'Plot Formats' (.PLT files). Some basic log template 'formats' are
provided with the software. These formats can be launched from drop-down menus and then
customized by adding, moving or deleting log tracks and log curves to the users preferred display
characteristics. The modified plot format can be saved and applied to other wells within an IP
database.
The 'Log Plot' interface is launched in a number of ways in IP:
by selecting the 'Log Plot' or 'Horizontal Log Plot' options from the 'View' menu,
by using the speed buttons on the 'Data View' toolbar,
By 'clicking and dragging' a Log Plot icon from the 'Database Browser' into the programs'
workspace,
by 'double-clicking' on a log plot icon in the 'Database Browser' tree view.
Up to 250 log plots can be displayed simultaneously. Multiple log plots can be launched for one
well or many different wells, as long as the wells are loaded in memory.
'Clicking' on a log plot makes the well associated with the plot the 'active well'. The active 'Well
Name' is displayed at the top of the main IP window. Any module, which is selected from the
main menu bar, will then be primed to work on data from the active well.
Related Topics
Navigating the Log Plot Window
Log Plot Track Management
Define the Log Plot Formats
Log Plot File Output
Using the Plot Range Editor
Using the Pre-Defined Plot Format Files
Manage the Interactive Log Plot
Create a Horizontal Log Plot
Section 8.1 View Well and Curve Data : Working with the Log Plot Display
431
8.1.1
Senergy
The following links provide detailed instruction on the Navigation and Use of the Log Plot Window.
Log Plot Navigation and Sizing: The log plot shown below consists of 10 log tracks, including
the depth and TVD depth tracks, plus an 'Overview' track on the right hand side of the display
(track number 10 is 'hidden'). The 'Overview' track shows the entire depth range for the well,
with the current display section (in the main plot window) as two horizontal red lines (top and
bottom). By 'clicking' in the overview track, the user can quickly navigate to any part of the log
display in the main log plot window. The user can change the depth interval being displayed by
right mouse clicking on one of the red marker lines and dragging it to a new position. The main
log plot will be re-scaled to fit into the window.
Using Zoom in a Log Plot: Interactive Petrophysics provides the ability to Zoom into a user
defined range in the Log Plot Window.
Log Plot Display Shortcuts: describes the shortcuts available for manipulating the Log Plot
Window.
Related Topics
8.1.1.1
Log Plot Navigation and Sizing
The log plot shown below consists of 10 log tracks, including the depth and TVD depth tracks,
plus an 'Overview' track on the right hand side of the display (track number 10 is 'hidden'). The
'Overview' track shows the entire depth range for the well, with the current display section (in the
main plot window) as two horizontal red lines (top and bottom). By 'clicking' in the overview track,
the user can quickly navigate to any part of the log display in the main log plot window. The user
can change the depth interval being displayed by right mouse clicking on one of the red marker
lines and dragging it to a new position. The main log plot will be re-scaled to fit into the window.
Senergy
432
The curve 'Header' box can be resized by 'clicking' on the bottom border of the header box
and dragging it up or down to a new size.
The vertical scroll bar, to the left of the Overview track, allows the user to scroll the main log
screen display up or down. Clicking above or below the scroll button in the scroll track will
move the display up or down by one screen interval. Clicking on the arrows at the top or
bottom of the scroll track, will scroll the display up or down 10% of the display interval.
The horizontal scroll bar, located in the bottom right-hand corner of the log plot window,
moves the display horizontally in increments of one track. Normally, it is better to simply
expand the whole window if some of the tracks are not displayed, rather than scrolling
horizontally. If the 'Fit' box is 'checked' the horizontal scroll bar has no effect.
The 'Scale 1: ' and its associated drop-down list of plot scales allows the user to quickly
change the vertical scale of the log plot display. The user selects a scale, for example 1:
500, 1:200 etc.. and the window redisplays at the appropriate vertical scale. The user can
also use the keypad '+' and '-' buttons to change the vertical display scale of the plot in the
display. The '+' button zooms in, expanding the vertical scale. The '-' button zooms out,
compressing the vertical scale. The user can also type in a vertical scale value into the text
box.
433
Senergy
The 'Fit' check box, (illustrated above) in the log plot window header, when 'checked', will
adjust the width of all the log plot tracks so that the whole log plot fits exactly into the plot
window. Setting the box to 'checked' does not change the width of the tracks when a log plot
is sent to the printer. Un-checking this box displays the log plot at its correct 'physical',
hardcopy width.
The 'Lock' check box, (illustrated above) in the log plot window header, when 'checked', sets
the currently-displayed plot as the 'Default Plot' for this well. The 'Default Plot' format is
saved into the database and is the log plot displayed automatically when a new plot window
is launched or when the well focus for a log plot is changed. If the user launches a second
plot for the same well, the 'Default Plot' will be launched. The 'checked' lock box will be set in
the newly-activated 'Default Plot' window and the 'tick' will be cleared on the original plot.
This feature allows the user to set up and customize individual log plots for IP wells in a
database so that, when a well is loaded into memory and a log plot is launched, the log plot
defaults to the 'locked' plot format.
Colour Coded Curve Values

The Status Bar displays the values for the selected Curve in the associated Color of the Curves
in the Selected Track.
Senergy
434
Related Topics
Using Zoom in a Log Plot
Log Plot Display Shortcuts
8.1.1.2
Interactive Petrophysics v3.6 provides the ability to Zoom into a user defined range in the Log Plot
Window.
To Zoom In to a User Defined Range:
Right Click any Panel in the Log Plot Window and Select Zoom In from the Shortcut Menu.
435
Senergy
Click the Top Depth of the required Interval. Note: this depth will be displayed as a solid red
line.
Click the Bottom Depth of the required Interval to automatically zoom the Log Plot Display to
the selected Interval.
Senergy
436
To reset the Log Plot Display Window to Normal, Right Click any panel on the Log Plot
Display Window and Select Un-Zoom.
Note: the Un-Zoom Shortcut Menu Item will only be displayed if the Zoom-In Menu Item in the
Shortcut Menu has previously been utilised.
Shortcut Keys
To Zoom In to a Log Plot,
Click the Start Depth with the Middle Mouse Button, THEN Click the End Depth with
the Left or Middle Mouse Button.
437
Senergy
To Zoom In and Out of the Log Plot Display,

Press the + or - Sign on the Number Key Pad to Zoom In or Out by one Step in the
Scale Box.
To Zoom to the End of the Log Plot Display,

Press the End Key on the Number Key Pad to Zoom to the End of the Log Plot.
To Zoom to the Start of the Log Plot Display,

Press the Home Key on the Number Key Pad to Zoom to the Start of the Log Plot.
Senergy
438
To Scroll Through a Log Plot,

Either Turn the Mouse Wheel Or Press the Page Up Key or the Page Down Key in the
Number Key Pad.
Related Topics
8.1.1.3
The following list outlines the Navigation Shortcuts available when working in a Log Plot Display.
To display the Normal Shortcut Menu from a Zone Track,
Press the Ctrl Key and Right Click the Zone Track
To Copy a Depth to the Clipboard for pasting into a Depth Field,

Left Click at required Depth on a Log Plot, the Paste into a DEPTH field.
439
Senergy
To Swap Track Positions in a Log Plot Display,

Right Click the Required Header and Drag to a New Position.
To Change track width,

Click and Drag the Track Border to change the Track Width.
To Copy a Curve from one Track to another,

Press Ctrl, Right Click the Curve Name then Drag to move a Curve from one Track
to another.
Senergy
440
To Move a Curve from one track to another,

Press Shift, Right Click the Curve Name and Drag to Move the Curve to another
Track.
To Delete a Curve from a Track,

Press, Shift, Right Click the Curve Name and Drag Downwards off the Bottom of the
Curve Header.
To re-arrange the Plotting Order of Curves within a Track,

Press, Shift, Right Click the Curve Name and Drag to a different position in the same
Track Header.
441
Senergy
To Zoom In to a Log Plot,

Click the Start Depth with the Middle Mouse Button, THEN Click the End Depth with
the Left or Middle Mouse Button.
To Zoom In and Out of the Log Plot Display,

Press the + or - Sign on the Number Key Pad to Zoom In or Out by one Step in the
Scale Box.
To Zoom to the End of the Log Plot Display,

Press the End Key on the Number Key Pad to Zoom to the End of the Log Plot.
Senergy
442
To Zoom to the Start of the Log Plot Display,

Press the Home Key on the Number Key Pad to Zoom to the Start of the Log Plot.
To Scroll Through a Log Plot,

Either Turn the Mouse Wheel Or Press the Page Up Key or the Page Down Key in
the Number Key Pad.
To Make a Cross Plot.
Press and Hold the X Key, Left Click the X Axis Curve Header Name, then the Y Axis
Curve Header Name and then the Z Axis Curve Header Name (Optional). Continue to
Hold the X Key and either Select Crossplot from the View Menu or Click the
Crossplot Button.
See Also: Crossplots
Related Topics
443
8.1.2
Senergy
Right-mouse-button 'clicking' in a log plot track launches a pop-up menu, which allows the user to
select a histogram display for any curve found in that track, as shown in the following figure. Other
editing functions are also available. These are described below.
NOTE: a 'Zone' track in a log plot has different functionality from 'conventional' log curve tracks.
'Zones' can be interactively edited and deleted in the log plot display. The user should right
mouse button 'click' in order to launch the normal pop-up menu for a 'Zone' track. Selecting the '
Edit Zone' opens the 'Edit Zone tops' module where the zone names, depths and colours can
all be changed.
The editing options available on the curve track pop-up menu are described below:
The 'Add Annotation' option launches a text editor which allows the user to write
annotations / add lines / arrows to the log plot. This is the same functionality as clicking the '
Annotations' button on the log plot window header.
The 'Expand Track' function expands the chosen track to fill the whole plot, apart from a
depth track. To return the plot to a normal view, right-mouse click in the track and choose '
Normal Track' from the pop-up menu.
The 'New Track' function will create a new track. If the user 'clicks' in the right half of a log
track, then the new track will appear to the right hand side of the track that has been clicked
in. If the user 'clicks' in the left half of the track, then the new track will appear to the left hand
side of the track that has been clicked in. The vertical grid lines in the new track will be set
up the same as for the track the user clicked in.
Senergy
444
The 'Duplicate Track' function will copy the current track settings, with all curves and
shadings, into a new track. If the user clicks in the right half of the track-to-duplicate, then the
new track will appear to the right of the track that has been selected. If the user clicks in the
left half of the track-to-duplicate, then the new track will appear to the left of the track that
has been selected.
A log track, together with its curves and shadings settings, can be copied from one log plot
display to another as long as the same well is displayed in each log plot. This is
achieved using the 'Copy Track' and 'Paste Track' options. The user right-mouse clicks in
the 'track-to-copy' and selects the 'Copy Track' option. Then right-mouse click in the plot
you wish to add the new track into and select the 'Paste Track' option.
The 'Delete Track' function removes the selected track from the log plot.
The 'Hide Track' function will temporarily hide a track. The track can be re-displayed by
clicking the 'Edit Format' button in the log plot header, selecting the 'Grid' tab and
re-'checking' the 'show track' cell for the hidden track.
'Show / Hide Curves' - this option allows the user to choose to hide any curve that is
displayed in a log track. The user should 'un-check' the curve-to-hide in the drop-down
curve list. The curve can be turned 'on' again by 'checking' the hidden curve name in the
same drop-down menu.
Related Topics
8.1.2.1
Moving Curves and Tracks within a Log Plot
Log curve tracks can be moved to different positions in a Log Plot by right-mouse-button 'clicking'
in a track header and dragging the track to a new position.
445
Senergy
Curves can be copied, moved and deleted from the tracks in which they occur:
To 'move' a curve - hold down the 'Shift' button, right 'click' on the curve name in the track
header and drag the curve to a new track.
To 'copy' a curve - hold down the 'Ctrl' button, right 'click' on the curve name in the track
header and drag the curve to a new track.
To 'delete' a curve - hold down the 'Shift' button, right 'click' on the curve name in the track
header and drag the curve out of the header.
Related Topics
Senergy
446

8.1.3
Log Plot 'Formats' are used by IP to save and restore log plot display settings such as;
Log curve track order,
Curve line colour,
Line style and thickness,
Curve fill colours / patterns.
IP provides the user with a number of 'default' log plot formats which are launched from the 'File'
menu in the Log Plot interface. An example log plot format is shown at the end of this chapter.
See the 'Format Files' section.
Log Plot Formats are available from a number of sources:

1. The 'Program Default Plots' are normally stored in the IP program directory under a
subdirectory called '..\Default Plots'. However, this location can be changed by editing the
'ProgDefs.opt' file and changing the file location. Using the IP '..\Default Plots' directory
allows networked users to share common log plot formats. Each user sets their default plot
location to the common directory. Any plot format file saved into the directory will
automatically appear in each users menu system.
447
Senergy
2. The 'Project / Well Plots' list will display all plot formats that have been saved either to the
main IP project directory or in the selected wells' sub-directory (WELL000X). Under the 'File'
menu the 'project-specific' plot formats will appear at the top of the list ('Complog', 'cpi' and
'triple combo' in the example shown above) followed by the 'well-specific' plots ('LITHtest'
and 'TempPlotFile' in the example shown above). Other log plot formats can be loaded by
clicking the 'Load Plot Format' menu option. This allows the user to 'browse' to a plot file
from another well or IP project.
3. 'Load Plot Format' - To recall a previously-saved plot, that is not displayed in the menu,
click the 'Load Plot Format' menu item and select the plot to recall. Log plot formats can be
created either using actual curve names or generic curve 'Types'. Curve 'Types' are defined
when curves are created or they can be changed using the 'Manage Curve Headers'
module. When curves are loaded, their default 'Types' are looked up in the CparmDef.par
file (see 'Edit Curve System Defaults').
4. 'Save Plot Format' - The 'Save Plot Format' menu item allows the user to save a plot format
for later use. All the interactive features in the plot are saved. The default directory to save a
plot will be the 'Output directory' set under 'Default file Location' or the well directory, if this
option is being used.
5. 'Save Plot Format Generic' - The 'Save Plot Format Generic' option saves the complete log
plot exactly the same as the 'Save Plot Format' operation, except that curve 'Types' are
substituted for curve 'names' in the format file . This allows the creation of a plot format
which can be used in different wells where curve names are different but curve 'types' are
the same.
NOTE: in IP Version 3.3 and later, log plot formats are saved in such a way that, if a particular
plot format is selected for a well, and that well does not contain some of the log curve names in
the .PLT file, the program will still keep the missing curve name in the log track headers in the
Senergy
448
second well. For example, if a plot format is saved in 'Well A' with a porosity log curve PHIE in it,
and the plot format is then applied to 'Well B', that does not have a PHIE curve, the curve name
will still appear in the plot format.
Each time you edit that log track ,containing the missing PHIE curve name, in 'Well B', a Confirm
dialog will be displayed. This 'Confirm' dialog recognizes that curve name PHIE does not exist
in the current IP well and allows you either:
To Click 'Yes' - to acknowledge that the curve is absent, but still to continue plotting the log
plot.
To click 'No' - to go back into the 'track manager' and select another log curve in place of
PHIE.
To click 'Yes to All' - to acknowledge that curve name PHIE and some other curves do not
exist in the current IP well, but still allow further curves to be added / deleted / changed into
the log plot, without launching this 'Confirm' dialog repeatedly.
Related Topics
449
8.1.3.1
Senergy
Edit the Log Plot Format
The 'Edit Format' window allows the user to set up and change the Log plot format.
The module is accessed under the main menu 'Log Plot Menu'
'Edit Format' or using the '
Edit Format' button on the log plot window. The window is arranged on three 'tabbed' screens.
These are :
'Grid' - where the log track background grid lines are defined
'Curves'- where the curves to display are defined
'Shading' - where shadings between two curves or between a curve and a constant value
can be defined.
Related Topics
Define the Log Plot Grid Parameters
Define the Log Plot Curves Parameters
Define the Log Plot Shading Parameters
Senergy
450
8.1.3.1.1 Define the Log Plot Grid Parameters
'Grid' Tab
The 'Grid' tab contains the track numbers ('Trk #'), user-defined track name ('Trk Name' optional), track width dimensions and settings for depth grid (horizontal) lines and curve scale
(vertical) grid lines.
The following table summarizes the function of the columns in the 'Grid' tab.
Trk #
Track Number - this is the order in which the tracks are displayed across
the page. 'Clicking' on a track number, in the grey, left-hand column and
dragging it up or down to another position in the list can change the track
order. Whole tracks can be re-arranged very easily in this manner.
Track Name
The user has the option to add track titles to a log plot. By typing in names in
this column and 'checking' the 'Show Track Headers' box, user-defined
labels will be displayed in the track header in each track. If the Track Name
fields are blank and the 'Show Track Headers' box is 'checked', the Track
Number is automatically displayed on the Log Plot.
Width inch/
The approximate width of the track in inches (or cm).
cm
Show Trk
If 'checked', the track will be displayed. If not 'checked', the track will be
hidden.
Plot Grid
'Check' to plot grid lines in the track.
Depth Lines
This column allows you to set up different display options for horizontal
'depth' lines. The options are 'Full' where depth grid lines are drawn across
the full width of a log track, 'Left' or 'Right' where depth 'ticks' are plotted on
the left hand or right hand margin of the log track. 'Center' where the depth
'tick' is in the centre of the track; 'Lft &Rht' where depth 'ticks' are placed at
both left and right hand margins; and 'None' where no horizontal lines or
'ticks' are plotted in the log track.
Scale Lines
A number is typed in here which represents the number of vertical 'scale'

lines that will be drawn in a log track.
Log Grid
# Dec
Left Scale
'Check' this column to display logarithmic grid lines.

Number of log decades to be drawn for logarithmic track.
Starting left-scale value for a logarithmic track. 0.2 or 2 will give the same
result.
451
Minor Lines
Senergy
If 'checked', all the logarithmic vertical lines will be plotted; if not, only the
'major', decade lines will be plotted.
Overview
Check the track that will be the overview track on the right of the plot. Only
one track can be the overview track, and it must be the last track number.
Plot Set
To plot a horizontal line across a track, at the top of each zone in a Zone /
Tops or Parameter Set , 'check' the 'Plot Set' box. Then click the 'Define'
button next to the 'checked' cell to select the appropriate Tops Set. See
below for an illustration.
Define Set
The 'Define' button allows the user to select the Parameter / Zone tops to
display in the Plot. On clicking the 'Define' button a set-up window appears.
The user selects the 'Tops' or 'Parameter' Set from the drop-down list and
then has the options of choosing Line 'colour' & whether or not to show
Zone Name 'labels' as well as lines. If 'Plot Names' is selected, 'Font Size'
and 'Font Style' can be selected. Select 'OK' to display the lines/labels in a
single track. The 'All Subsequent' button provides a useful shortcut to
set up all subsequent tracks with the same Top Set line and Name settings
for display on the log plot. If you do not want to see lines/labels in a
particular track simply 'un-check' the 'Plot Set' for the appropriate
Track number. To display lines but not labels, 'un-check' the 'Plot Names'
box.
Plot Order
The 'Order' button launches a window which allows the order that objects
are layered in a track, on the plot, to be changed. Click in the 'Order' column
and drag objects up / down in the order to effect changes. See below for an
illustration.
The user can add horizontal lines, coincident with a user-defined Zone /Tops Set, across one or
all log curve tracks. The Zone Tops are set up as described below.
Click a Column Header in the Log Plot to display the Log Plot Format Dialog.
From the Grid Tab, 'Tick' the 'Plot Set' column in the track you wish to view 'Tops' labels in.
Click the 'Define' button to launch the 'Tops Set selection' dialog.
Choose a Set name from the drop-down list and select the label colour, font and font size
you want to see on the log plot.
Click 'OK' to set this Tops set to display only in this one log track, or
Click the 'All Subsequent' button to set up these labels and display features in all other
(subsequent) log tracks in the log plot.
Senergy
452
The 'Plot Order' in which curves, shadings and gridlines are overlain in a track is controlled by
the 'Plot Order' column, 'Order' button, as illustrated above. The 'Order' button launches a
window which allows you to set up the drawing order in which log curves, depth grids, curve
shadings, text curves etc... are displayed in a particular log track. The user can click in the lefthand margin of the dialog and drag a feature up or down the list to change the display order of the
features. The 'Plot Order' can be different for each log track or by using the 'All Tracks' button
all the tracks can have the same 'Plot Order'.
Depth Grid Datum and Depth Labelling

The depth grid horizontal lines displayed on a log plot are controlled from the check-boxes and
drop-down options located at the bottom of the 'Grid' tab.
The 'Depth Grid Datum Curve' selection box allows the user to change the log plot grid
453
Senergy
datum. This allows the user to plot 'TVD' or 'TIME' datumed log plots. The user selects a
depth-type curve from the drop-down box. Only 'DEPTH' or 'TIME' type curves can be
selected. If the curve required is not displayed, then find the curve name and change its type
to Depth or Time in the 'Manage Curve Headers' module.
NOTE: Unpredictable results will occur if the selected TVD curve reverses in
direction. Therefore, you cannot use a highly-deviated wells' TVD curve, if the well
path goes up and down.
The 'Depth Grid Line and number Spacing' options allows the user to override the
'default' depth grid plotting settings. If the 'Default' box is not 'checked' then the grid line and
number spacing will be fixed to whatever is set in the text-entry boxes, regardless of the log
vertical scale.
Log Plot Headers and Log Track Borders

These log plot elements are controlled using the options illustrated in the screen captures shown
below:
The 'Show Track Headers' 'tick-box controls whether or not log 'Track Headers' are
displayed on the top of a log plot display. 'Tick' the box to display track headers, 'Un-tick' the
box to omit log track headers
The drop-down colour list can be used to set the 'Log Track Header Background colour'
Senergy
454
for each individual log plot. Different background colours can be set up for different wells.
The 'Track Border Width' (thickness) number affects the thickness of the lines separating
log tracks in a log plot, as illustrated below:
Related Topics
8.1.3.1.2 Define the Log Plot Curves Parameters
The 'Curves' tab is a 'grid' type display that allows the user to see all the curve names / Zone Sets
that are being used in the log plot, together with the curve left and right scales; whether the curve is
455
Senergy
shown in a linear (Lin) or Logarithmic (Log) scale, the line width (Wth) and Line Style (described
below).
Trk: Enter the track to plot the curve in. Curves can be entered in any order
Curve Name: Enter the curve name to plot, or choose it from the drop-down box. If the Style is
set to 'Zone', then choose the 'Parameter Set' from the drop-down menu. If Style is 'VDL' or '
Waveform' then the user enters one of the curves that makes up the VDL or Waveform input
set. (See VDL or Waveform). Curve 'Type' can be substituted for curve name by appending a '*
' in front of the Type. For example '*GammaRay' will pick up a gamma ray curve. If style is '
Image' then choose from an image curve. (see Image / picture plots). If the user wishes to
display a 'Text Curve' firstly select 'Text Curve' from the Line 'Styles' column, this will filter to
any Text-type curves and the required curve can then be selected from the 'Curve Name' dropdown list.
Left Scale: Left scale value. If left blank, its value will be taken from the preceding curve. For '
Text Curves' Left Scale offers the options for text justification in the track (left, right and centre)
Right Scale: Right scale value. If left blank, its value will be taken from the preceding curve. For
'Text Curves' Right Scale offers the options for text 'anchoring' in the track . An 'anchor' links
the Text strings in the curve to their depth entries.
Visible: This allows the temporary removal of an individual curve from the log plot. The curve
stays in the format and can be re-displayed by re-applying the tick.
Senergy
456
Back Up: Curve back-up option. Choose options from the drop down box. None, LBU (left
backup) or RBU (right backup). x10 (multiplies the original scale by 10) and Wrap (allows the
curve to wrap using a continuation of the original scale). For 'Text Curves' the back-up options
switch text 'wrap' on or off.
Log Sc: Choose whether to plot the log with a linear or logarithmic scale.
Line colour:
Choose line colour from drop-down box. If the 'Style' has been set to Zone then the drop-down
box will allow the choice of:
Plot num : This will plot the zone number in the middle of the zone colour boxes,
Names : This will plot the Zone name in the middle of the zone colour boxes,
No Text : This will plot just the zone colour boxes
Clear : This will plot the zone name but will remove the colour from the zone box.
Width: Choose line width 1-3. This will also control the size of the points for point plotting.
Style: Choose the style of the display from the drop-down box.
Lines can be Solid, Dot, Dash, Dot-Dash.
Blocked lines will be drawn as blocked curves rather than smooth curves.
For Point plotting choose from the cross, square, circle, triangle or star.
Tadpoles can have circular, triangular, square or diamond shape heads. If a tadpole is chosen
then a define button will allow the setting up of the other tadpole parameters (See Tadpoles).
The Numeric style allows plotting data as numeric values at defined intervals. The column next
to the style will change to a define button, which allows the user to set up the Numeric display
(See Numeric).
The Pip style is designed to plot horizontal lines from the data point to the value zero.
Cumulative is used, for example, to plot lithology-type shading. The value plotted for a
'cumulative' style curve is equal to the curve value plus the values of all other 'cumulative' style
curves in the log track whose names appear higher in the curve list than the curve being plotted.
Mirror will plot the selected curve with its mirror image (same curve with reversed scale). The
gap between the two curves is shaded with the selected curve colour.
Zone will turn this track into Zone track (See Zones).
For VDL the Line colour column entry will change to a button, which allows the user to set up
the displays (See VDL).
For Waveform the column next to the style will change to a define button, which allows the user
to set up the waveform display (See Waveforms).
For Pictures select this option and then select the picture curve under the curve name column
(See Pictures).
457
Senergy
For Images the Line colour column entry will change to a button, which allows the user to set up
the displays (See Images).
The Dip Image allows the displaying of dips as sine wave curves on an image log (See Dip
Image).
The Text Curve is used for curves containing text strings (See Text Curves)
Edit Track Header

If the user clicks in the header of a track then the 'Log Plot Format' window will appear with the
curves for the selected track. The user can add or delete curves or change shading for the track.
By clicking on the 'All Tracks' button the 'Log Plot Format' window will revert to the standard
display with all curves shown and will include the 'Grid' tab.
Automatically Update Shading

For complicated Log Plots it is sometimes necessary to be able to retain the shading attributes
that have been defined when Curve Names are changed in the Log Plot Format Dialog, Curves
Tab. This is useful for mud log which have been set up with many default shading types The
Default Setting for shading to be automatically updated is On. If the Curve Names are to be
changed but the existing shading is still required, the Auto Update Shading Checkbox in the
Curves Tab of the Log Plot Format Dialog should be un-checked.
If the Auto-Update Check-Box is un-checked, when the Curve Name is Changed in the Curves
Tab, the existing Curve Name and Shading will remain in the Shading Tab.
Senergy
458
Related Topics
8.1.3.1.3 Define the Log Plot Shading Parameters
The 'Shading' tab allows the user to define colour and pattern shading for use between 2 curves or
between curves and 'Fixed values' to enhance the appearance of log plots.
Trk: Enter the track for the shading. This must be done first.
Left Side of Shading:
Curve Name: Choose a curve from the drop down curve box or leave blank to shade to a
fixed value.
Fixed Value: Enter a value to shade to. Leave blank to shade to a curve.
Right Side of Shading:
Curve Name: Choose a curve from the drop-down curve box or leave blank to shade to a
fixed value.
Fixed Value: Enter a value to shade to. Leave blank to shade to a curve.
Visible: This allows the removal of shading from the log plot. The shading stays in the
format and can be re-displayed by re-checking the box.
Shading Type: Choose from the drop-down box the type of shading to use.
459
Senergy
Variable Shading: If the 'Variable' Shading type is selected then a 'Define' button will
appear in this column, adjacent to the Variable 'type'. Click the button to set up the variable
shading. See 'Variable Shading' for more details on setting up this type of display.
Shading Description: This is the text string which is displayed in the shading box in the
curve header.
Examples from the above figure:
Line 1 : Shade a Variable shading between the value 0 and the SGR curve.
Line 2 : Shade 'Yellow' between the two curves when the RHOB curve is to the left of the
TPNH curve.
Line 3 : Shade 'Green' between the two curves when the TPNH curve is to the left of the
RHOB curve.
Adding Shading Patterns

User-defined bitmaps can be loaded to IP and used as alternative shading to the default shadings
provided with the program. Bitmaps can be designed in PC applications such as Microsoft
'Paint'. Bitmaps should have dimensions of 16x16 pixels.
See the 'Tools' menu item 'Shading Types' for further details.
Shading Tab Buttons
OK : The 'OK' button will create a new plot using the current format.
Apply : This button will update the current plot but not close the log plot format window. This
is useful for previewing changes to the log plot format.
Senergy
460
Save Format : The 'Save Format' button saves the current plot format to disk. The
program will first apply the format to check it before saving. The user will be asked for a
name under which to save the format.
Load Format : The 'Load Format' button allows the user to load a previously saved format
from the hard disk. The program will load and apply the format, plotting all curves that are
available. In the 'Log Plot Format' window all the curves from the saved format will be
displayed. This allows the saving of generic formats that can be applied to other wells with
different curve names. The user loads the format and modifies the curve names to match
the current well.
Related Topics
461
8.1.3.2
Senergy
The 'Set Default Plot Format' is a new option that gives the user the ability to set the place
where the default plot for a well comes from. When selected the following Dialog appears;
There are two basic options:

'Use Well Default Format for new plots' - currently the method employed with IP v3.3.
'Use the following plot Format as default for new plots in all wells' - this option allows
the user to pick a plot template to be applied on all the wells within a database when a new
plot is created.
The 'Browse' button allows the selection of the plot format template:
If the 'Look in Project Plots' box is 'checked' then the file select dialogue opens up within the
current project. If it is not 'checked' then the global 'Default Plots' dialogue opens, as seen
above. The 'Default Plots' are stored in C:\Documents and Settings\<username>\Local
Senergy
462
Settings\Application Data\IntPetro35 folder.
Related Topics
8.1.3.3
Log Plot Styles
This topic outlines the Line Styles available to be used in the Log Plot Window.
Zones: Zone Sets, whether they contain geological formation tops data or Petrophysical
interpretation zones, for example 'fluid' zones, are displayed in 'Zone' tracks. Zone labels
and colours can be displayed on their own or they can be viewed in 'conventional' log curve
tracks, overlaying log curves. Only one 'Zone / Tops' Set can be displayed per single log
track. If no Zone Set exists then it will first need to be created - see 'Manage Zones / Tops'
for details on how to do this. Once the Zone Set has been created then it can be viewed in
the log plot.
Depth /Time Index: The way that the user sets up and visualizes 'depth Index' values has
been updated for Version 3.3 and later. The user now has more interactivity with the way
depth values are plotted in a log plot display.
Numeric: The 'Numeric' style of log curve plotting results in log curve 'values' being plotted
in the user-selected track, rather than as a line or symbols. If 'Numeric' style has been
selected then, when the user 'clicks' the 'Define' button, the 'Set up Numeric' window will
be launched.
Variable Shading: If 'Variable Shading' type has been selected then the user must 'click'
the 'Define' button to set up the shadings. The Define Variable Shading Dialog will be
displayed. The 'Shading controlled by curve' entry box allows the user to select the curve
that will determine the shading colours. The curve name is selected from the available
curves, in the drop-down list. This can be any curve in the well. The value of the curve at a
depth in a well will be used to decide the type of shading to apply at that depth. Two types of
variable shading are available:
VDL Plots: In order to plot a 'Variable Density Log' ('VDL') the IP well must contain either;
An array curve to use to define the VDL, or A group of curves in the well which make up the
463
Senergy
VDL. Where a group of curves make up the VDL, all the curve names must have the same
'Base Name' with a numeric extension attached to them. For example, curve names 'Prob1',
'Prob2', 'Prob3', 'Prob4' would be acceptable.
Tadpoles: If a curve style of 'Tadpole' is chosen, then a 'Define' button will appear next to
the 'Style' column. Clicking the button will allow the set-up of the tadpole curve type. The
tadpole 'Dip Azimuth curve' must be entered (allowed values 0-360 degrees).
Waveforms: In order to plot a 'Waveform' the user must have an array curve or a group of
curves in the well which make up the 'waveform'. If the user is trying to visualize a set of
related conventional curves, all the curve names must have the same 'base name' with a
number extension attached to it. For example C1, C2, C3, C4, .C29, C30 would be
acceptable. Where a group of related curves are used to create a waveform, the program
will automatically select all the curves with the same 'base name' and use them to plot the
waveform with the lowest extension number plotted on the left hand margin of the waveform
track and the highest extension number on the right hand side. If the user selects an arraytype curve, for example CMR 'T2_DIST', then IP will automatically load the array data.
Pictures: 'Picture' curves can be displayed in any log track by selecting the 'Pictures' style
for a curve on the 'Curves' tab. The picture curve is then selected under the 'Curve name'
column. Pictures with a scale from 0-1 will be displayed across the whole track. Scales can
be adjusted if the picture is to fill only part of a track. Other normal curves can be plotted on
top of a picture curve. Only one picture curve can be plotted in each track.
Images: To plot an 'Image', the array curve is entered on the 'Curves Tab' under curve
name. The curve 'Style' is set to 'Images'. The left and right scale values for the Image can
be filled in and, if this is done, the scales will be displayed in the curve header. However, the
scales are not used for creating the Image.
Dip Image: The 'Dip image' plot object allows the plotting of tadpoles as sine wave curves
on an image log. To plot a dip image, the tadpole dip curve is entered on the 'Curves Tab'
under curve name. The curve 'Style' is set to 'Dip Images'. The left and right scale values
for the Image can be filled in and if done will be displayed in the curve header. However the
scales are not used for creating the Image.
Annotations: Three types of 'Annotations' can be displayed in the Log Plot Window; 'Text'
annotations can be single or multi-line and the user has total control on the formatting of the
text, 'Line' annotations can be a single line or an arrow. The user can control the direction,
length, colour, type and size of the line, 'Graphical Image' annotations allows the user to
place any graphical image onto the log plot. The image is loaded from a disk file and can be
re-sized to fit any area on the plot
Senergy
464
Related Topics
8.1.3.3.1 Zones
Zone Sets, whether they contain geological formation tops data or petrophysical interpretation
zones, for example 'fluid' zones, are displayed in 'Zone' tracks. Zone labels and colours can be
displayed on their own or they can be viewed in 'conventional' log curve tracks, overlaying log
curves. Only one 'Zone / Tops' Set can be displayed per single log track. If no Zone Set exists
then it will first need to be created - see 'Manage Zones / Tops' for details on how to do this.
Once the Zone Set has been created then it can be viewed in the log plot.
To load and view an existing 'Zone /Tops' Set in a log plot, the user must:
1. Either 'click' in an existing log track header, or right mouse button click in an existing log
track and select 'NewTrack' to create a new log track.
2. In the first blank row in the 'Log plot Format' screen' you must select line 'Style' (righthand column) of 'Zone'.
3. This sets up the 'Curve Name' drop-down list to display available 'Zone / Tops' Sets, from
which you can choose the Set required for visualization.
The Zone Set name will be displayed in the log plot track header.
'Zone' tracks can be plotted in several different 'styles'. The style is selected on the Plot Format
Window on the 'Curves' tab under the 'Line colour' column.
465
Senergy
The styles of Zone Labelling listed in the Line/Colour drop down menu are:
'Plot Num.' - Displays a coloured background with Zone Numbers overlaid.
'Names' - Displays a coloured background with Zone Names overlaid.
'No Text' - Displays a coloured background with no text overlaid.
'Clear' - Displays a clear background with Zone Name overlaid.
The following plot illustrates the styles. For the 'Names' and 'Clear' options the zone name text is
plotted horizontally if the 'Zone' track width allows, otherwise it is plotted vertically.
Right Click a Zone Track to display the Zone Track Shortcut Menu, illustrated above left. This
menu is different to the Shortcut Menu in a conventional Curve Track. The 'Normal' Track
Senergy
466
Shortcut Menu is displayed by holding down the keyboard CTRL or SHIFT button while rightmouse-button 'clicking' in the 'Zone' track. See Also: Log Plot Display Shortcuts.
Split Zone
Split Zone: From the Zone Track Shortcut Menu, Select Split Zone to Split One Zone into
Two.
Delete Zone
Delete Zone: From the Zone Track Shortcut Menu, Select Delete Zone to Delete the
Selected Zone.
Display Zone Table

This displays the Zone Parameters Dialog, which enables the user to, for example, add
467
Senergy
'zone names' and 'zone colours' to an existing Tops Set.
NOTE: Zone Sets, associated with particular interpretation modules (for example, 'Cutoff' or
'Porosity /Water Saturation') can only be edited from within their respective modules. You
are limited to being able to change zone colours for such Sets in this module.
NOTE: The Zone Parameters Dialog now contains a Lock Zone Column, which displays a
Tick Mark if any of the Zones in the Log Plot are Locked.
Display Zone Names

Change Zone Numbers to Zone Names: The Zone Names for a Specific Zone Track can
also be displayed by Selecting Display Zone from the Shortcut Menu. This menu item
toggles between Display Zone Names and Display Zone Numbers. If the Zone Names are
already displayed the Shortcut Menu will have the Menu Item Display Zone Numbers instead.
Senergy
468
Lock/Un-Lock Zone
Each individual Zone with a Zone Track can be locked to a specific Top and Bottom Depth.
When a Zone is locked the Zone cannot be moved or changed unless the Zone becomes
Un-Locked. To lock a specific Zone, Right Click the required Zone and Select Lock Zone
from the Shortcut Menu.
Note: In the screenshot below, Zone 1 has been locked and the Bottom Depth of Zone 2
moved. If Zone 1 was unlocked, then the Top Depth of Zone 1 would remain the same as
the Bottom Depth of Zone 2. While Zone 1 is locked, the Top Depth of Zone 1 will remain
static.
469
Senergy
To unlock a previously locked zone, Right Click the required Zone and Click Un-lock Zone
from the Shortcut Menu.
Edit a Zone Name

Right Click the required Zone Track and Select Edit Zone Name from the Shortcut Menu to
display the Rename Zone Dialog.
Senergy
470
Related Topics
Zones
Depth /Time Index
Numeric
Variable Shading
VDL Plots
Tadpoles
Waveforms
Pictures
Images
Dip Image
Annotations
8.1.3.3.2 Numeric
The 'Numeric' style of log curve plotting results in log curve 'values' being plotted in the userselected track, rather than as a line or symbols. If 'Numeric' style has been selected then, when
the user 'clicks' the 'Define' button, the 'Set up Numeric' window will be launched.
The window allows the the user to set up the vertical spacing of the numeric data in the plot and
471
Senergy
has 3 'Plot Reference' check boxes that can be selected.

'Position data on major depth / time lines'
'Position data on its own depth / time axis (Depth / Time curve)'
'Plot depth / time Ticks in track'
With all options, there is a 'Decimal Places' entry box to allow the user to specify the number of
decimal places the numeric data should be displayed to.
If the 'Position data on major depth / time lines' box is 'checked' then the curve values will be
plotted at the same depth as the heavy grid lines in the log plot display
The 'Position data on its own depth / time axis (Depth / Time curve)' check-box, if 'checked',
will plot curve values every 'Depth Plot Interval' (The 'Plot Depth every ....' entry box), not
synchronized with the heavy depth grid lines.
Senergy
472
By checking this box the user then has the ability to check the 'Plot depth / time Ticks in track'
check box to allow tick marks to be associated with the numeric data. This will sensitize the rest
of the form
The following log plot example shows the TVDSS curve being plotted as numeric data with all the
different 'Tick Alignment' options.
The position of numeric text in the track depends on its left and right scale value. The text will be
plotted so that the middle of the text will be at a value of 0.5 in relationship to the left and right
473
Senergy
scale value. This means that a scale of 0 - 1 will plot the text in the middle of the track. The text
cannot be plotted outside the track boundaries.
Related Topics
Zones
Depth /Time Index
Numeric
Variable Shading
VDL Plots
Tadpoles
Waveforms
Pictures
Images
Dip Image
Annotations
8.1.3.3.3 Depth /Time Index
The way that the user sets up and visualizes 'depth Index' values has been updated for Version
3.3 and later. The user now has more interactivity with the way depth values are plotted in a log
plot display.
Depth value labels can be rotated through 0, 90 or 270 degrees within the Depth track.
Depth value label Font Size can be adjusted.
Senergy
474
Additional attributes called depth 'ticks' can be added to further enhance a log plot output.
Depth 'ticks' are illustrated in the following screen capture.
Depth 'ticks' can be added to a 'Depth' track on a log plot using the 'Edit Format'
'Grid'
screen.
'Ticks' are synchronized to the 'Depth Grid Datum Curve' and 'tick spacing' is controlled
by the 'Depth Grid Line and number Spacing' properties. When 'Default' is 'checked',
and the user changes the log plot vertical scale, the depth ticks adjust to the new depth grid
lines.
475
Senergy
By default, where a 'Depth' curve is displayed in a log plot, 'ticks' are turned 'off'. To turn
them 'on', on the 'Grid' tab, place a 'tick' in the 'Plot Grid' column, in the row containing the
track with the 'Depth' curve, as shown in the following illustration:
Senergy
476
Related Topics
Zones
Depth /Time Index
Numeric
Variable Shading
VDL Plots
Tadpoles
Waveforms
Pictures
Images
Dip Image
Annotations
8.1.3.3.4 Variable Shading
If 'Variable Shading' type has been selected then the user must 'click' the 'Define' button to set
up the shadings. The Define Variable Shading Dialog will be displayed.
The 'Shading controlled by curve' entry box allows the user to select the curve that will
determine the shading colours. The curve name is selected from the available curves, in the
drop-down list. This can be any curve in the well. The value of the curve at a depth in a well will
be used to decide the type of shading to apply at that depth. Two types of variable shading are
available:
a continuous spectrum or palette of colours, or
a fixed colour / pattern for a range of values.
477
Senergy
'Use Spectrum' Option

When this radio button is selected, the user sets the low and high log curve values that will
correspond to the high and low colour values. The colour 'values' can be any positive integer. A
colour value greater than 256 will cause the spectrum to repeat. The 'colour spectrum' window to
the left of the user input boxes will change as the user adjusts the high and low colour numbers.
It is possible to switch the high and low colour value order. This will 'reverse' the spectrum.
To clip the value of the control input curve to stay within the high / low entered values, 'check' the
'Clip values outside range to high / low colour' check box. If the box is not 'checked' then the
spectrum is repeated when the value of the control input curve is greater than the entered high
value.
'Use Palette' Option

This option, if selected, will allow the user to select a different colour range from the normal
'spectrum' palette. Palettes can be edited and new ones created using the 'Tools' menu
'Edit
Senergy
478
Palettes' module.
'Use Values' Option

If the 'Use Values' option is 'checked', then the user enters the range (Low Value High Value)
for each selected type of shading. If the 'High Value' box is left blank then it is assumed to be the
same as the 'Low Value'. The 'Description' box can be used to describe the shading. This
description will be included along with shading coding in the Log Track header. If the '
Description' column is left completely blank, then the shading descriptions will not appear in the
Log Track Header.
Lithology Curve Shading

In a well where the user has created a 'lithology' curve, the initial display, after the curve has been
digitized, will include all the shading bitmaps in the Log Track header. This is usually impractical
for plotting hardcopy, since each log plot would contain 27 bitmap shadings and their descriptions
in the Log Plot. To remove this long list of shadings from the log plot header, the user can simply
type in the word 'None' in the 'Shading Description' column for the track containing the
'Lithology' curve, as illustrated below. Click the 'Run' or 'Apply' button to see the effect on the log
plot.
The 'Save' button allows the user to save a shading set-up to an external 'colour Info.' (.col
) file for use in other wells, or other projects. NOTE: clicking the 'Save' button only saves the
'Variable Shading' set-up, not the log plot. The 'shading control curve' name is not saved
with the set-up.
The 'Restore' button allows the user to restore a particular setup for use in another plot
containing the correct 'shading control curve' name.
479
Senergy
Use Red Green Blue Curve Mixing

The User Red Green Blue Curve Mixing option enables the user to control the colour using three
input curves, each one controlling a primary colour, Red, Green or Blue. Each Input Curve
determines the amount of Primary Colour to be included in the final colour used to shade at a
particular depth. This type of shading can be very useful when trying to correlate wells where the
Red, Blue and Green colors can be assigned to the spectral Gamma Ray Thorium, Potassium
and Uranium curves.
To define Red Green and Blue Curve Mixing:
Click the Plot Header to display the Log Plot Parameters Dialog, In the Shading Tab, specify
the Curve to be used as the left boundary for the shading and the curve name to be used as
the right boundary for the curve name. Set the Shading Type as Variable and Click Define to
Display the Define Variable Shading Dialog.
From the Define Variable Shading Dialog, Select the Use Red Green Blue Curve Mixing
Option. Specify the Curves or Values for each of the Primary Colours.
Note: It is only necessary to complete one colour, however to make use of the full colour
range all three colours should be completed. All inputs in the grid can either be curves or
fixed values. This allows the user to change the calibration of the colours by depth range.
Senergy
480
The Control Curve or Value Column is used to define the colour within the range of the Zero
Colour and Max Colour range values. When the Control value is less than or equal to the
Zero Colour then the colour intensity is zero. When the Control values is greater than or
equal to the Max Colour then the colour intensity is maximum. Zero intensity for all colours
will result in Black shading. Full intensity for all colours will result in White shading.
Click OK to return to the Log Plot Display Parameters Dialog, then Click OK to return to the
Log Plot Display with the Shading applied.
Related Topics
Zones
Depth /Time Index
Numeric
Variable Shading
VDL Plots
Tadpoles
Waveforms
481
Senergy
Pictures
Images
Dip Image
Annotations
8.1.3.3.5 VDL Plots
In order to plot a 'Variable Density Log' ('VDL') the IP well must contain either :
An array curve to use to define the VDL, or
A group of curves in the well which make up the VDL.
Where a group of curves make up the VDL, all the curve names must have the same 'Base
Name' with a numeric extension attached to them. For example, curve names 'Prob1', 'Prob2',
'Prob3', 'Prob4' would be acceptable.
The program will automatically sort all the curves with the same 'Base Name' and plot them from
left to right across the log track, in the order of increasing curve extension number. Using the
above example, the 'Prob' VDL track would be divided into 4 and curve 'Prob1' would be plotted in
the left-most quarter of the track as solid shading, the shading type being defined by the VDL
colour set-up and the value of the curve.
It is possible to define a VDL made up of one curve. In this case the curve would be plotted
across the whole track.
The 'Array' curve name or 'Base Curve' name must be entered on the Log track 'Curves' tab, in
the 'Curve Name' column.
Set the curve 'Style' to 'VDL'. The left and right scale values for the VDL can be filled in, however
the scales are not used for creating the VDL.
Click the 'Define' button, which appears in the 'Line colour' box, to display the 'Define VDL
colours' window shown below.
Senergy
482
The 'Define VDL colours' window is set up in the same way as the 'Define Variable Shading'
window except that the 'Shading controlled by curve' curve selection list box is fixed to the '
Curve Name' and cannot be changed.
An example plot showing a VDL and variable type shading is illustrated below. The lithology in
track 2 is plotted using the 'Cumulative' option for the VWCL, VLime and VSand curves. The
ProbB array is displayed as a VDL with the BinN-ml curve overlaying the VDL shading.
483
Related Topics
Zones
Depth /Time Index
Numeric
Variable Shading
VDL Plots
Tadpoles
Waveforms
Pictures
Images
Dip Image
Annotations
Senergy
Senergy
484
8.1.3.3.6 Tadpoles
If a curve style of 'Tadpole' is chosen, then a 'Define' button will appear next to the 'Style'
column. Clicking the button will allow the set-up of the tadpole curve type.
The tadpole 'Dip Azimuth curve' must be entered (allowed values 0-360 degrees).
The 'Dip Grade curve' is optional. If entered, it must contain a value of 1,2 or 3. Values less than
1 will be assumed to be 1 and values greater that 3 will be assumed to be 3. The value is used to
decide how the head of the tadpole is plotted. A 1 value will plot a solid head, a 2 value will plot a
hollow head with a heavy line and a 3 value will plot a hollow head with a thin line.
The 'Dip Symbol curve' is also optional. If entered the value will be used to decide how each
tadpole is plotted as far as its colour and head shape. This will override the selection in the '
Curves' tab for colour and dip head type. The symbol curve must contain a set of integer values
that correspond to the types of tadpoles. To change or add to the tadpole symbol definitions use
the module 'Edit Dip Symbols' found under the 'Tools' menu item.
The 'Plot all Tadpoles' and 'Plot average Tadpoles' options allows the user to either plot every
good tadpole or to plot an average tadpole over an interval. The average tadpole is useful for
plotting things like hole deviation and azimuth. Here there would normally be a hole dip value
every database sample and therefore if all tadpoles were plotted the tadpoles would be
unreadable, especially at large plot scales. However if one plotted an average value every ten feet
the plot will be much easier to interpret.
The following plot shows some tadpoles plotted on a logarithmic scale with the tadpole colour
and head being defined by a Dip Symbol type curve. Hole dip and azimuth are plotted in track 4
using a 10 foot average value.
485
Senergy
Related Topics
Zones
Depth /Time Index
Numeric
Variable Shading
VDL Plots
Tadpoles
Waveforms
Pictures
Images
Dip Image
Annotations
8.1.3.3.7 Waveforms
In order to plot a 'Waveform' the user must have an array curve or a group of curves in the well
which make up the 'waveform'.
If the user is trying to visualize a set of related conventional curves, all the curve names must
have the same 'base name' with a number extension attached to it. For example C1, C2, C3, C4,
Senergy
486
.C29, C30 would be acceptable. Where a group of related curves are used to create a
waveform, the program will automatically select all the curves with the same 'base name' and
use them to plot the waveform with the lowest extension number plotted on the left hand margin
of the waveform track and the highest extension number on the right hand side. If the user
selects an array-type curve, for example CMR 'T2_DIST', then IP will automatically load the array
data.
NOTE: the maximum number of 'conventional' curves that can be used to create a waveform is
currently set at 400. This is so because there is a maximum curve limit per well of 500 curves,
enabling the user to load, compute and store another 100 curves, in addition to the waveform
curve data. This waveform curve limit does not apply when Array-type curves are used to
generate a waveform.
If a curve style of 'Waveform' is chosen in a Log Plot track header then a 'Define' button will
appear next to the 'Style' column in the track header. 'Clicking' the 'Define' button will launch the
following window, which allows the user to set up the waveform curve attributes. There is now no
limit on the number of waveforms that can be displayed in each track.
The user can check the selected array curve statistics in the Edit/ List Curve headers
tabulation, or make a histogram display to view the data range of the array curve. This should
point out any spurious outlier points that are not representative of the majority of the data. This
will help when setting the 'Log Low' and 'Log High' values.
The 'Waveform height' setting defines the maximum physical height of the waveform on the log
plot. This will represent the waveform height as determined from the user-entered 'Log high
487
Senergy
value' and 'Log low value'. The 'zero crossing' value for the waveform (the value where the
waveform line will be at the depth of the waveform being plotted) will be the log value half way
between the 'Log high value' and the 'Log low value' (see the following diagram).
NMR-type waveforms are only 'half waveforms' because they are clipped to a minimum value
of 'zero'. Therefore, to display this type of data, with the zero amplitude value at the actual depth
of the reading, the 'Log low value' should be set to the negative value of the 'Log high
value'. This will produce, for example - a T2 distribution waveform displayed at the depth of the
zero amplitude value, as illustrated below.
To add colour shading to the waveform above a certain value, set the 'value' in the 'Log value
shading cut-off' box. Choose the shading colour from the drop-down colour box. To exclude
shading, leave the 'Log value shading cut-off' box blank.
The depth frequency with which the waveforms are drawn on the log plot is set in the 'Plot
waveform every' box.
If the user 'checks' the 'Average Data over interval' box, then waveforms will be stacked
(averaged) over the depth interval specified, before being plotted.
For example, if a CMR array curve 'T2_DIST' with 6 inch sample interval is plotted every 1 ft,
then, if the 'Average Data over interval' box is 'checked' the waveform is calculated as the
Senergy
488
average of the data in 2 depth steps. If the 'Average Data over interval' box is left 'un-checked'
then waveform data, between the user-specified output intervals, is ignored.
The 'Start sample number' and 'Stop sample number' allow part of a waveform to be plotted.
This can be useful for certain types of array data where only part of the array contains useful
information.
The waveforms in the plot shown here (track 5) were set up as illustrated in the 'Set Up
Waveforms' window, shown above.
Related Topics
Zones
Depth /Time Index
Numeric
Variable Shading
VDL Plots
Tadpoles
Waveforms
Pictures
Images
Dip Image
Annotations
489
Senergy
8.1.3.3.8 Pictures
'Picture' curves can be displayed in any log track by selecting the 'Pictures' style for a curve on
the 'Curves' tab. The picture curve is then selected under the 'Curve name' column. Pictures
with a scale from 0-1 will be displayed across the whole track. Scales can be adjusted if the
picture is to fill only part of a track. Other normal curves can be plotted on top of a picture curve.
Only one picture curve can be plotted in each track.
To Create a Picture Curve:
From the Edit Menu, Select Picture Curves, Edit/Load Picture Curve Data.
Picture curves will be plotted at the same scale as the rest of the plot. To view a picture at higher
resolution, either zoom in on the Log Plot by changing the plot scale or 'right mouse click' on the
picture and select 'Expand Image' from the drop-down menu. The picture will then be loaded into
the picture viewer at its native resolution.
Senergy
Related Topics
Zones
Depth /Time Index
Numeric
Variable Shading
VDL Plots
Tadpoles
Waveforms
Pictures
Images
Dip Image
Annotations
490
491
Senergy
8.1.3.3.9 Images
To plot an 'Image', the array curve is entered on the 'Curves Tab' under curve name. The curve '
Style' is set to 'Images'. The left and right scale values for the Image can be filled in and, if this is
done, the scales will be displayed in the curve header. However, the scales are not used for
creating the Image.
Click the 'Define' button in the 'Line Colour' box to display the 'Define Image Shading' window.
The user selects the 'colour Palette' from the drop-down box. Palettes can be edited and new
ones created using the 'Edit Palettes' module under the 'Tools' menu.
The 'Low' and 'High' entry boxes allow the user to select the limits between which the image will
be plotted. If array values fall outside these limits then these areas in the image are set to
transparent. This can be used to remove bad data from the image plot. If the 'Clip values
outside range to high / low colour' is 'checked' then, rather than becoming transparent, the
plotted colour will be set to either the high or low colour value as defined in the palette. The 'Get
Min and Max' button allows the user to find the total dynamic range of the data in the image. If
the image was created by the 'Create Acoustic Image' or the 'Create Electrical Image'
modules the dynamic ranges will normally be 0 to 255, which is the dynamic range of colours in a
palette.
Senergy
492
Images can be dynamically normalized while being displayed. If the 'Dynamic' button is selected
then the user can either normalize the image over the currently displayed window interval (check
'Selected Range') or over a defined depth interval (enter 'Depth Range'). This type of dynamic
normalization will depend on the scale and exact interval being displayed. If the screen is scrolled
a little then the image could change its colours. To obtain a stable, dynamically-normalized image
log - use the dynamic normalization options in the Create Acoustic Imageor the Create Electrical
Image Modules.
The 'Transparent Colour' sets the colour in the image that will plot as transparent. Normally this
does not make any difference since the transparent part of the images are set to null or absent
data and as such automatically plot as transparent. However for CGM output, it is necessary to
set the 'Transparent Colour' to the colour of the track background, normally white.
The following is a small section of an FMI image.
493
Senergy
'Right mouse clicking' on an image will display a pop-up menu. If the 'Expand Image' option is
selected then the image will be displayed in a 3D picture viewer. Any transparent sections in the
picture will be displayed using the 'Transparent Colour'.
The 'Picture Viewer' has many options to allow the user to view the picture at different angles.
Use the pop-up 'hint' help boxes for help on the many options.
Senergy
Palette Modify
If the 'Change Palette' option is selected the 'Palette Modify' window is displayed.
The overall palette can be changed by selecting a different palette from the drop-down box.
There are three palette editing modes that allow manipulation of the palette to enhance the
image. Any changes to the palette will be instantly reflected on the log plot image.
1.
Line
494
495
Senergy
The line mode allows the user to change how the log values are mapped to the colour palette. By
changing the shape of the line one can emphasise certain features in the plot.
The line end points can be moved as well as adding pivot points in the line. The line can be set
horizontally in which case the image will have just two colours that are the palette end points.
Senergy
496
The following plot has been made by setting the line horizontally.
2.
Scroll
The scroll mode allows the user to rotate the colour palette. The user right mouse clicks on the
palette colours and drags the colours either left or right.
497
3.
Senergy
Stretch
The stretch mode allows the user to stretch part of the colour palette. The user right mouse
clicks on the palette colours and drags either the image left or right. Several stretches can be
made on the same palette.
Senergy
498
The 'Reset' button will reset the palette back to its default settings. The 'Reverse colours' check
box will reverse the current colours so what appears on the left will now be on the right.
Related Topics
Zones
Depth /Time Index
Numeric
Variable Shading
VDL Plots
Tadpoles
Waveforms
Pictures
Images
Dip Image
Annotations
499
Senergy
8.1.3.3.10 Dip Image
The 'Dip image' plot object allows the plotting of tadpoles as sine wave curves on an image log.
To plot a dip image, the tadpole dip curve is entered on the 'Curves Tab' under curve name. The
curve 'Style' is set to 'Dip Images'. The left and right scale values for the Image can be filled in
and if done will be displayed in the curve header. However the scales are not used for creating
the Image.
Click the 'Define' button to the right of the 'Style' box to display the 'Dip Image setup' window.
The tadpole 'Dip Azimuth curve' must be entered.

The 'Dip Grade curve' is optional. If set, then a value of 1or less will produce a solid curve, a
value of 2 a dashed curve and 3 or more a dotted curve.
The 'Dip Symbol curve' is optional. If set, then it defines the colour of the dip image curves. The
colour coding is set up in the 'Edit Dip Symbols' module. This allows the colour of the dip image
to correspond to the colour of a corresponding tadpole.
The 'Bore Hole Azimuth' and 'Bore Hole Deviation' are optional inputs, but must be entered if
the dip image is to be corrected for hole deviation from the vertical and thus allow the dip image
to align properly with an image log.
The 'Caliper 1 / hole size' box must either contain a caliper curve or a fixed hole size value. This
is used to calculate the magnitude of the dip image curve.
Senergy
500
The 'Caliper 2' input is optional and is used if both X and Y axes caliper curves are available. The
program then will average the two caliper values and use the average value to calculate the
magnitude of the dip image curve.
The 'Plot All Dips' and 'Plot average Dips' options allows the user to either plot every good dip
curve or to plot an average dip curve over an interval.
The following plot shows a dip image curve overlaying an image log. The same dip is plotted as a
tadpole in the next track.
Related Topics
Zones
Depth /Time Index
Numeric
Variable Shading
VDL Plots
Tadpoles
Waveforms
Pictures
Images
Dip Image
Annotations
501
Senergy
8.1.3.3.11 Annotations
The 'Edit Annotations' module can be launched in a number of ways :

by clicking the 'Edit Annotations' button in the 'Log Plot Menu' on the main IP menu bar,
or
by right-mouse-button 'clicking' on the active log plot and selecting 'Add Annotation' from
the pop-up menu. The depth and position of the cursor will be pasted as a new annotation
line in the 'Annotations' window.
by 'clicking' the 'Annotations' button on the active Log Plot header bar.
on a log plot place the cursor on the top left hand corner of an annotation and when the
cursor changes to the drag cursor (
) double click on the plot. This will bring up the 'Edit
Annotations' window and allow the user to perform the editing.

annotations once they have been created can be saved to a well and can be edited from
within the 'Plot Annotations' tab in the 'Manage Well Header Info' module. NOTE: the
annotations cannot be associated with a plot from within this tab.
Three types of 'Annotations' are allowed:
'Text' annotations can be single or multi-line and the user has total control on the formatting
of the text.
'Line' annotations can be a single line or an arrow. The user can control the direction,
length, colour, type and size of the line.
'Graphical Image' annotations allows the user to place any graphical image onto the log
plot. The image is loaded from a disk file and can be re-sized to fit any area on the plot.
Groups of annotations can now be created. This gives the user greater flexibility in the use of
annotations across different log plot formats and from well to well.
To create an annotation in the 'Edit Annotations' module right mouse button 'click' in the grey
area below the first row. An 'Edit Annotations' sub-menu will appear.
Senergy
502
'Add New Annotation' : this will create a new row with the 'Plot', 'Group', 'Depth', '
Position' and 'Type' all filled in with values from the preceding row. The user can edit these
as required as well as the 'Annotation' column.
'Plot' : check this box to plot the annotation line. By clicking at the top of this column on
the word 'Plot' all the plot lines will either be turned on or off. This is a quick way of
turning off the annotations without deleting them all.
'Group' : this is a user editable column. There is a limit of 20 characters for the name of
the 'Group'. The user can group annotations together and then use these annotation
groups in different log plots. The user can double click on the 'Group' name cell to
enable/disable the plotting of all other annotations within that 'Group'.
'Depth' : this specifies the depth for the annotation.
'Position' : this is the distance in inches (or centimetres) from the left hand edge of the
plot.
'Type' : this is selected from the drop-down menu and can be either 'Text', 'Line' or '
Image'.
'Annotation' : what is displayed here depends on the annotation type.
'Delete Annotation' : 'click' on the row that is to be deleted and select 'Delete Annotation'.
A message box will appear asking the user to confirm that they wish to delete the annotation
in row X.
'Delete Group' : 'click' on a row that contains a group that is to be deleted and select 'Delete
Group'. A message box will appear asking the user that they wish to delete the 'Group'.
'Copy To Well' : this copies an individually selected annotation to the active well. They are
then stored in the 'Manage Well Header Info' 'Plot Annotations' tab.
'Copy Group To Well' : this copies a number of annotations that all have the same 'Group'
503
Senergy
name to the active well. Again they are stored in the 'Manage Well Header Info' 'Plot
Annotations' tab.
'Copy All To Well' : this copies all of the annotations irrespective of groups to the active well.
In the screenshot below a number of different annotation groups can be seen.
The annotations can be applied on a plot by plot basis by 'checking' the 'Plot' column and they
can be saved to individual wells. To quickly select all the annotations associated with a 'Group'
for adding to a plot double click on the required 'Group' cell. This will 'check' all of the 'Plot' cells
for that particular 'Group'.
In order to make the task of recalling the annotations easier there is a 'Filtering' section with the
options;
'Well/Plot Annotations' : the user can choose between displaying all the 'Plot
Annotations' or the 'Well Annotations'. If the 'Plot Annotations' option is chosen then if
the user right mouse button 'clicks' on the gray area then all the Copy options in the submenu relate to copying annotations / Groups to the well. However, if the 'Well Annotations'
option is chosen then the Copy options relate to copying annotations / Groups to the plot.
'Annotation Group' : here the user can '-- View All --' the annotations or select the
annotations according to 'Group'.
The screenshots below illustrate these features:
Senergy
504
505
Senergy
Senergy
506
The 'File Load/Save/Import' box contains:

'Load File' and 'Save to File' Buttons : these buttons allow the user to save and restore
groups of annotations. This allows the transfer of annotations between wells. The
annotations are saved to the Well folder as a '.ano' file . Annotations are also saved as part
of the normal Save Plot Format procedure.
Paste from Excel' Button : allows annotations to be prepared in an excel spreadsheat and
then simply highlighted, copied and pasted into IP.
'History' Button : opens up the 'History' module.
'OK' Button : this applies the annotation to the plot and closes the annotation window.
'Apply' Button : this applies the annotation to the plot but leaves the window open for further
editing.
The top panel of the window will change depending on the type of annotation you are editing.
Clicking on an annotation line will change the top panel to allow you to edit the selected
annotation type.
Text Annotation
The user enters the text into the multi-line drop-down box.
507
Senergy
The following formatting can be made to each line:

Font type; Font size; Bold; Italic; Underline; Rotation (any rotation number 0-360 deg. can be
entered). The text orientation convention is illustrated in the diagram shown below. The angle of
rotation is counterclockwise from 'Zero' degrees. Note the different orientation angles for the
'normal' and 'Landscape' log plot displays.
Vertical text position in relation to input depth (Centre will align the middle of the text at the
requested depth), Text colour; Background colour ('Transparent' background colour will
allow information under the annotation to be seen).
Line Annotation
The 'Length' of the line can be set in inches (or centimetres). The 'Width' in pixels (1-3). The '
Rotation' will change the angle of the line. The 'Type' can either be 'Line', 'Left Arrow', 'Right
Arrow' or 'Unconformity'. The 'Style' can be 'Solid', 'Dash', 'Dot' or 'Dot Dash'. The 'Colour'
of the line can be chosen from one of the colours in the drop-down box. The 'Full Width' box will
make the line a horizontal line going across the full width of the log plot. If this box is selected the '
Length' and 'Rotation' options will not do anything. The 'Unconformity' option will draw a
horizontal sinusoidal line.
Senergy
508
Image Annotation
When the 'Image' type is selected the location of the image picture on disk must be entered. The
'Browse' button can be used to select the file. Images must be one of the following formats:
Bitmap, JPEG, GIF, TIFF, Icon, metafile or enhanced metafile. When the picture is loaded its
width and height will be displayed in the 'Picture width' and 'Picture height' boxes. The height
and width can be changed. The 'Use Log heights' box, if 'checked', will change the meaning of
the 'Picture height' box from a direct measurement (inches or centimetres) to a relative height
based on the log plot scale. For example if 10 were entered in the 'Picture height' box and the
plot depth scale was in feet, then the image would be displayed over the equivalent of 10 feet of
well depth. The 'Justification' allows the setting of how the image will be displayed in relation to
its 'Depth' and 'Position'.
The following plot shows the annotations that were set up in the above 'Edit Annotations'
window.
509
Senergy
Annotations can be moved and resized interactively.

To move a 'Text' annotation: place the cursor on the top left line of the text. The cursor will
change shape to an arrow attached to a small white square. The user clicks and holds down the
left-hand mouse button and drags the cursor to the new position. When the mouse button is
released, the annotation will be displayed in its new position.
To move a 'Line' annotation: place the cursor at the beginning of the line. The cursor will change
shape to an arrow attached to a small white square. The user clicks and holds down the lefthand mouse button and drags the line to the new position. To change the 'Length' or 'Direction'
of a line: place the cursor at the end of the line. The cursor will again change shape to an arrow
attached to a small white square. The user clicks and holds down the left-hand mouse button
and drags the line to a new length or direction.
Senergy
510
To move an 'Image' annotation: place the cursor at the top left corner of the image. The cursor
will change shape to an arrow attached to a small white square. The user clicks and holds down
the left-hand mouse button and drags the image to the new position. To change the 'Size' of an
image: place the cursor at the bottom right hand corner. The cursor will again change shape to
an arrow attached to a small white square. The user clicks and holds down the left-hand mouse
button and drags the image to a new size.
Related Topics
Zones
Depth /Time Index
Numeric
Variable Shading
VDL Plots
Tadpoles
Waveforms
Pictures
Images
Dip Image
Annotations
8.1.4
Log Plots can be output in a number of ways:

As Graphics files,
Sent directly to a connected printer, or
Copied into the WINDOWS clipboard for incorporation in other documents.
Click the 'Output to Plotter' menu item or the 'Print' button on a log plot window, to launch
the 'Plot Output' window.
511
Senergy
The 'Plot Output' window is arranged on five 'tabbed' screens.

1. 'Main Plot' controls the depth intervals, vertical scales, depth gridline spacing, border line
colour and background shading options for the 'hardcopy'. The output 'device' - to 'Graphics
File', to 'Printer' or to 'Clipboard' format for the Log Plot are also selected here.
2. 'Advanced' allows settings to be adjusted for resolving some printer problems associated
with different MS WINDOWS
printer drivers.
3. 'Plot Header' controls the addition of an optional 'Header' to the Log Plot and allows the user
to customise the plot header.
4. 'Curve Titles' allows the user to control how each curve is titled in the Log track header.
5. 'Plot Footer' controls an optional Log plot 'Footer' for the Log Plot.
Related Topics
Ouput Plot to the Deep Plot Viewer
Output Log Plot Curves to a Crossplot
Copy Depth Values to Clipboard
8.1.4.1
Plot Output: Main Plot
The Log Plot output can be sent to any of the following:

Output to a WINDOWS printer. 'Check' the 'Printer' radio button and click the 'Setup
Printer' button to set up the printer you wish to send the log plot to.
Senergy
512
The 'Fit Plot to printer page' option only operates on output sent to a 'physical' printer.
If the box is 'checked', the plot routine will shrink or expand the Log Plot to fit one page on the
selected Printer.
If left 'un-checked', the Log Plot will be output on multiple pages, as required by the
dimensions of the log plot.
If the Log Plot is too wide for the selected printer/plotter, the log plot width will always be
shrunk to fit the selected page width, regardless of whether 'Fit Plot to printer page' is
'checked'.
The 'Eject page at start of plot' option will force the selected printer to start a new page at
the start of a Log Plot. This can be very useful for continuous feed, fan-fold type plotters (e.g.
EPSON 1500, 3000) where the user wants each Log Plot to start at the top of a new page.
With this option turned 'on' you can batch print multiple plot copies, with each copy starting
at the top of a new fan fold page.
Output to a Graphics File. 'Check' the 'Graphics File' option and set the 'File name'. The
output format is determined by the file extension used on the output file
513
Senergy
.
The 'Rotate Plot 90 Deg' option is only available when output is directed to the 'Clipboard',
or to a 'Graphics File' (excluding .emf or .CGM graphics file formats). If 'checked', the
output to the graphics file or clipboard will be rotated through 90 degrees. A Horizontal log
plot will be re-oriented vertically (portrait mode). A vertical log plot will be re-oriented
horizontally (landscape mode).
The following graphics file formats are supported:
Enhanced Metafile (*.emf), a vector file and as such, .emf outputs can be re-sized easily
without losing their resolution.
Bitmap (*.bmp).
CGM (*.CGM), a vector file and as such, .CGM outputs can be re-sized easily without losing
their resolution. If 'Graphics File' output is selected and set to 'CGM' then a temporary
enhanced metafile is produced which is converted automatically to CGM format using
Larson CGM Software. The Larson EMF to CGM converter is included with IP. See Also
Plotting of CGM Files. For more information on CGM viewing, montaging and printing and
see www.cgmlarson.com.
GIF (*.gif) .GIF format output will generally produce the most compact picture-type file.
JPEG (*.jpg).
Portable Network Graphics File (*.png).
TIFF Image Files (*.tif).
NOTE: When OK is clicked if outputting to a Graphics file the following Confirm Dialog will
be displayed.
Senergy
514
Click 'Yes' to preview the new graphics file in a WINDOWS viewer.

Click 'No' to not launch a preview of the new graphics file in a WINDOWS viewer.
Click 'Yes to All' to automatically launch a preview of all graphics files created in the current
IP session.
Click 'No to All' to switch off the preview functionality for the current IP session. (The option
will be available again if the user closes IP and opens it again).
Output to the WINDOWS
'Clipboard'. Selecting the 'Clipboard' option will output the Log
Plot to the WINDOWS clipboard as an Enhanced Metafile (.emf). This can then be pasted
directly into other documents that accept this format, for example MS WORD, MS EXCEL.
The 'Rotate Plot 90 Deg' option is only available when output is directed to the 'Clipboard', or
to a 'Graphics File' (excluding .emf or .CGM graphics file formats). If 'checked', the output to
the graphics file or clipboard will be rotated through 90 degrees. A Horizontal log plot will be reoriented vertically (portrait mode). A vertical log plot will be re-oriented horizontally (landscape
mode).
Output to Deep Plot View. The Deep Plot View will be saved in the Output Folder with the
file extension *.dpv.
515
Senergy
Plotting multiple depth ranges - Multiple depth intervals and log vertical scales can be set
up to be output in one continuous Log Plot. The user fills in the 'grid' with the depth intervals
and vertical scales required. The 'Major', 'Minor' and 'Lite' depth grid lines displayed on
each Log Plot can be set up as required.
If the 'Use Default Grid Line Spacing' check box is 'checked' then, when the user clicks on
the 'Plot Scale' drop-down list box and selects a log vertical scale, the grid line spacing
boxes will be updated to the default settings for that vertical scale. For example a Scale of
1:500 has 'Major', 'Minor' and 'Lite' grid lines plotted at 50m / 100ft, 25m / 50ft, 5 m / 10 ft
respectively.
Senergy
516
'Set Top/Bottom Depths' - The 'Set Top/Bottom Depths' button, if 'clicked', will set the '
Top Depth' and 'Bottom Depth' fields to the values of the current 'Plot Range' for the well
to be plotted. The user should click in a row of the grid and click 'Set Depths to Plot
Range' to paste the top and bottom depths into the grid.
The 'Use 'Depth Grid Datum' depths' option allows the user to specify a log plot depth
range in terms of another datum curve, for example a TVDSS 'depth', or or TWT 'Time'
curve, The check-box, if 'checked', will allow the user to specify the depth range for their log
plot in whatever 'Depth Type' (MD, TVD, TVDSS, TWT etc...) that has been set as the '
Depth Grid Datum curve' for the users log plot. See 'Log Plot Display' - 'Depth Grid
Datum and Depth labelling' for more details.
'Plot Track Header Titles' - when 'checked' Track Header Titles will be included on the
output log plot.
517
Senergy
The 'Plot Scales at bottom of log' box, if 'checked', will append the curve scales labelling
to the base of the Log Plot as well as the top.
The 'Plot Shading description in header' box, if 'checked', will output the shading coding
boxes with their shading description inserted into the boxes in the curve track headers. This
is what the user sees in the on-screen Log Plot.
'Hide Track Scales' - 'If this option is 'checked', then the output Log Plot will not display any
curve name / colour / scales details in the Log track headers.
The following example has the Track Header Titles Displayed AND the Track Scales
displayed.
The following example has the Track Header Titles Displayed BUT the Track Header Scales
are Hidden.
The following examples displays only the Track Header Scales.
Senergy
518
The 'Plot Well Name Comment with Well Name' box, if 'checked', will attach the 'Well
Name Comment' to the well name for output in the Log Plot header (see Manage Well
Header Info.).
The 'Grid and Border line Colour' drop-down list box allows the selection of the colour to
be used for the plot boundaries and gridlines. The 'default' is black.
The 'Plot Background Colour' drop-down list box allows the selection of the colour to be
used for the background of the Log Plot. The 'default' is white.
The 'Plot Border Colour' drop-down list box allows the selection of the colour to be used
for a border line to be placed around the Log Plot.
519
Senergy
The 'Border Width' box sets the width of the border in inches (centimetres). If a value of
'zero' is entered then no border is printed.
The 'Left hand Margin' box is the offset to the left hand side of the page before the Log Plot
will start. If the Log Plot width is changed to fit a page, then this left hand margin will be rescaled to match.
NOTE: Continuous, long Log Plots can be generated if the selected plotter can handle
continuous paper feed. For example; to plot to the Epson 1550 or 3000, with continuous tractor
feed paper, the user sets the paper type to 'banner' and paper size to the correct 'width' of the
paper (the length is not important). The Log Plot will be output to the plotter one page at a time,
but the pages will join up, making a continuous plot.
Absolute Plot Calibration

The absolute scaling of a Log Plot can be adjusted for an individual printer (i.e. if a printer always
makes a Log Plot 3% too long, this can be adjusted for). To do this, the user edits the file 'Plotter
Calibration.opt' file found in the IP program directory and adds the 'calibration factors' for the
printer, to the file. Instructions for doing this are in the file.
Related Topics
Plot Output: Advanced
Plot Output: Plot Header
Plot Output: Curve Titles
Plot Output: Plot Footer
8.1.4.2
Plot Output: Advanced Settings
The Plot Output Advanced Tab enables greater flexibility in the way the Log Plot is output to a
printer. Printer drivers vary greatly under WINDOWS
and some have problems plotting IP
enhanced metafiles, especially the 'lithology' bitmap shading. Some older Postscript drivers will
totally seize up when plotting. If this happens, the user can try turning 'on' the 'Use large
Bitmaps for bitmap shading' option. If this does not work, then removing the bitmap shading (e.
g. 'Limestone' or 'Sandstone') or changing them to solid colour shading will generally overcome
the problem.
Senergy
520
The 'Output resolution (dpi)' list box sets the resolution that the Log Plot will be generated
at. This generally affects the width of the border and curve lines and can affect the size of
the 'lithology' patterns. The higher the resolution, the thinner the lines become. The
resolution setting will not affect the shape of the log curves. A resolution of 200 DPI will
normally give an optimum result. However, if the lithology patterns are too big or small then
the resolution can be changed.
The 'Set Graphics File and Clipboard output to screen resolution' option, if 'checked',
will force the shading patterns in a log plot to be the same size in the clipboard image as that
seen on the IP screen plot.
The 'Use Accelerated Shading' box and the Use Print Compatibility Mode, if 'checked',
changes the method used for plotting lithology bitmap shading. 'Checking' this option will
increase the plotting speed considerably, but will not work for some printer drivers. If the
printing is very slow try switching 'on' this option to see if things improve.
The 'CGM bitmap shading expansion factor' allows the user to increase this number if
the printed bitmap shading is too small.
521
Senergy
If 'Graphics File' output is selected and set to 'CGM' then a temporary enhanced metafile is
produced which is converted automatically to CGM format using Larson CGM Software.
The Larson EMF to CGM converter is included with IP. Plotting of CGM files to printers
can be problematical and it will probably be necessary to make several trial and error plots
in order to obtain the required results. Most of the problems will be associated with the size
of the lithology code shadings which use bitmaps, like 'Sandstone' or 'Clay'. These
shadings can sometimes be very large or very small, depending on the plotting software.
The IP program allows the user to change the 'CGM bitmap shading expansion factor' ('
Advanced' Tab). If the shading is too small, then increase this factor. If the shading is too
large, then reduce the factor (a value of '1' is the minimum setting). The 'Output resolution'
option will also affect the size of the shading. The larger the DPI number, the larger the
shading patterns (this will only have an effect if the 'Plot Metafile and Clipboard output at
screen resolution for shading patterns' is turned 'off' by 'un-checking' the box next to the
label. In order to plot images to CGM files with transparent parts in the image, the user must
set the 'transparent' colour for the image to the track background colour. See Image plotting.
For more information on CGM viewing, montaging and printing and see www.cgmlarson.
com.
The 'Do not print interactive lines' check box, if 'checked' will remove the vertical
interactive lines from any output Log Plot. This can be useful if one of the automatic
interactive plots, from one of the IP Interpretation modules, is required as final hardcopy
output.
Related Topics
Senergy
8.1.4.3
522
The 'Curve Titles' tab allows the user to change how the log curve names are displayed in the Log
Plot header. Four options are available:
1. 'Display Name (With Set Name)' - Curve names are displayed as in the on-screen log
plot.
2. 'Name Only (No Set Name)' - Curve names are displayed without their Set names prefixed
to the curve name.
3. 'Use Curve Type as Name' - Curve names are replaced with the 'Curve Type' name.
When no 'Curve Type' is set then the screen plot display name will be used.
4. 'Curve Alias Name' - Curve Alias names will be used. If no Alias name has been set, then
the screen plot display name will be used.
Curve Alias names can either be set on this screen or in the 'Manage Curve Headers' form, on
the 'Descriptions' tab.
Related Topics
523
8.1.4.4
Senergy
The Plot Header Tab in the Plot Output Dialog allows the user to set up the Header format for a
well Log Plot. The Log Plot headers are fully customisable. However, there are a number of
header templates which can be adapted to suit the users requirements.
The Header template options can be accessed from the drop-down list in the 'Plot Header' box:
'None', 'Full', 'Full Rotated', 'Minimum', 'Minimum Rotated', 'Standard Footer', 'Standard
Footer Rotated', 'Standard Multiwell No Logo', 'Standard Multiwell', 'Standard', 'Standard
Rotated'
The Header styles are more fully described in the following section.
'None' - Adds only the Well Name and Depth / vertical scale information as a header to the
Log Plot, as illustrated below:
'Standard' - Adds an IP 'Standard' Log header as illustrated below. Data fields in the Header
are filled in when equivalent information is entered into the 'Manage Well Header Info.'
module. The user can fill in boxes to add logo's, graphics files, text files to the header.
Senergy
524
'Full' - The 'Full' Well header is similar to an API style Log header and contains details of
logging measurements and borehole fluid properties, if such data has been entered into the
'Logging' tab of the 'Manage Well Header Info.' module.
'Minimum' - the 'Minimum' header Style in IP displays the following basic well Information
and any user-supplied Logo.
'Standard Multiwell' - displays just the logo and the plot title.
Customising a Log Plot header

Log Plot Headers can be edited or created from new.
Edit Log Plot header

Select a 'Plot Header' from the drop down list, preferably 'Full' and then 'click' on the 'Edit'
button.
525
Senergy
A message similar to the screenshot below will appear. 'Clicking' 'Yes' will open up the '
Montage Builder' window with the 'Full' header copy ready for editing. If 'No' is selected
then the user is returned to the 'Plot output' window.
Each of the fields on the Log Plot Header can be edited by moving the mouse cursor over
the field, waiting for the cursor to change to a cross symbol and then left mouse button
clicking on the field.
Once the field has been highlighted double left mouse button 'click' on the field to open up a '
Text Box Settings' window. Alternatively, right mouse button click and select 'Properties'.
Senergy
526
Within this window it is possible to change the font, style, size, colour and alignment of the text
within the field. It is also possible to change the item to one held within the 'Well Attributes', 'Log
Attributes' 'Well Attributes Display Alias' or 'Log Attributes Display Alias' lists. This gives the
user total flexibility over the content and style of their Log Plot Headers. All the fields can be
moved, resized and reshaped according to the users requirements. New fields can be added.
Create New Log Plot Header

Selecting 'New' opens up a blank Montage Builder window which allows the user to produce
their own Log Plot Header using the design capabilities of Montage Builder.
All the Plot headers are saved to the IntPetro35\Default Plots directory as *.svg files.
Headers can contain company logos, ASCII text files and graphics files. The user selects the
options for the Header and gives the file names where the data can be found. Multiple graphics
and text files can be included in the same Header. The 'logo' and 'graphics files' can be one of
several graphics file types (bitmap, GIF, TIFF, JPEG. enhanced Metafile). The graphics file will
be scaled using the dimensions input in the 'Height' and 'Width' columns. Company 'Logos' will
be scaled to be one inch high, keeping the same height/width ratio as their original graphics file (.
jpeg, .bmp).
Header Remarks are now completely user editable and unlimited in number. Each line can
be 'checked' on or off or all the header remarks can be turned off using the 'Header
Remarks' check-box. The well specific remarks can be edited in the 'Plot Remarks' tab of
527
Senergy
the 'Manage Well Header Info' module or they can be edited in the 'Header Remarks Text
' window and then saved to the 'Plot Remarks' tab of the 'Manage Well Header Info'
module by 'clicking' on the "+" 'Add to Defaults' button. If the 'Add to Defaults' button isn't
used then changes to the 'Header remark Text' are specific to the log plot. If they are saved
to the 'Plot Remarks' tab of the 'Manage Well Header Info' module then the remarks
become well specific.
Curve descriptions for the Log Plot output curves can be optionally listed in the Plot
Header by 'checking' the 'Curve Descriptions' box. The curve descriptions can be edited
using the 'Manage Curve Headers' module, or by 'clicking' the 'Edit' button on the 'Plot
Header' tab. Clicking the 'Edit' button launches the following window, where the log curve
names in the Log Plot display will be listed and their 'Curve Descriptions' can be edited.
The 'Clipboard' button on the 'Edit' dialog will copy the curve names and their descriptions
to the WINDOWS clipboard. The Clipboard contents can then be pasted into an external
report.
The 'Zonal Summation Report' box, if 'checked', will list the current 'Summation' results
report in the Log Plot header. This is the report that is displayed when the 'Print parameter
Set'
'Cut-off and Summation' menu item is selected.
Senergy
528
The 'Clay Volume Parameters' and 'Porosity and Sw parameters' boxes, if 'checked',
will output a reduced set of parameters used in the current interpretation. The values listed
will be the values of the most recent analysis.
The 'Mineral Solver Parameters' and 'Simple Log Interpretation Parameters' boxes if
'checked' will output a reduced set of parameters used in the current interpretation. The
values listed will be the values of the most recent analysis.
The following diagram is an example of the 'Standard' Log plot header with a crossplot (graphics
file) and a small section of log plot.
529
Related Topics
Senergy
Senergy
530

8.1.4.5
The 'Plot Footer' tab allows the user to set up a title block to be displayed at the base of a log plot.
This can be selected from the drop-down list in the 'Plot Footer' window. In a similar way to the
Log Plot Header the Plot Footer can be edited or created from scratch using the 'Edit' and 'New'
buttons respectively.
'Footer Title' - Text String. Defaults to the 'Plot Header Title' if one has been entered on
the 'Plot Header' tab.
The user has the ability to browse to a logo graphics file.
An example of a Plot Footer is shown below:
531
Senergy
Related Topics
8.1.4.6
The Deep Plot Viewer enables large Log Plots to be output and viewed in a raster format. A
Deep Plot View file is selected in the Plot Output Dialog. Once the Output variables have been
defined and the OK button pressed, the Log Plot will be split, and the Images displayed in the
Deep Plot Viewer.
To display a Log Plot using the Deep Plot Viewer:
From the Log Plot Menu, Select Output to Plotter to display the Plot Output Dialog.
In the Main Tab Select Output to Deep Plot View.
Specify a Folder Path for the Deep Plot View File to be Saved.
The Deep Plot View will be saved in the Output Folder with the file extension *.dpv.
Click OK to Split the Log Plot and Open the Deep Plot Viewer.
Senergy
532
Navigating the Deep Plot Viewer

To navigate freely around the Log Plot Image, Click and Drag using the Left Mouse Button.
To Scroll up and down the Log Plot Image, Roll the Mouse Wheel forwards and backwards.
To navigate to the Top of the Log Plot Image, Click the Top Button in the Navigation Toolbar.
533
Senergy
To navigate to the Bottom of the Log Plot Image, Click the Bottom Button in the Navigation
Toolbar.
To Zoom In to the Log Plot Image,

Either Click the Left Mouse Button on the Log Plot Image.
Or, Roll the Mouse Wheel forwards.
Or Click the Zoom In Button in the Navigation Toolbar.
Senergy
To Zoom Out of the Log Plot Image,

Either Press Ctrl and Roll the Mouse Wheel forwards and backwards.
Or Click the Zoom Out Button in the Navigation Toolbar.
To Fit the Log Plot Image to the Width of the Window, Click the Fit Image Width Button.
534
535
Senergy
To Fit the Log Plot Image to the Height of the Window, Click the Fit Image Height Button.
Using the Deep Plot Viewer Selection Tools

To enable Area Selection for Copying, Click the Area Selection Tool Button
, the cursor
will become a Cross-Hair (+).

Click and Drag the required area in the Log Plot Image using the Left Mouse Button.
NOTE: Press Ctrl+A to Select the Whole of the Log Plot Image.
Senergy
536
Click the Copy Button to Copy the Selection to the Clipboard.

NOTE: Alternatively, Press Ctrl+C to Copy the Selection to the Clipboard.
Click the Area Selection Tool Button
again to disable Area Selection.
NOTE: The Deep Plot Viewer Requires Microsoft Silverlight to be installed. If Microsoft
Silverlight is NOT installed the following Window will be displayed. Click the Install Microsoft
Silverlight Button and follow the Instructions to Install Microsoft Silverlight. Once Installed the
Deep Plot Viewer will be able to Display the Deep Plot View file. See Also: http://silverlight.
net/.
537
Senergy
Sharing the Deep Plot Viewer Output Files

Once created, the Deep Plot View file can be located in the file location specified in the Main
Tab of the Plot Output Dialog.
Senergy
538
To distribute the Deep Plot View file, Copy both the *.dpv file and the Hidden folder with the
same name to the new location. In the example above the file called 10_0001 - DPTH.dpv
and the folder called 10_0001 - DPTH both need to be copied to the new location.
From Explorer, Double Click the *.dpv file to open the Deep Plot View file in the Deep Plot
Viewer.
Related Topics
8.1.4.7
Curves can be selected by holding down the 'X' key and using the left mouse button to click on the
curve name in the log track header and, whilst continuing to hold down the 'X' key, opening the
Crossplot window. This will automatically populate the Crossplot with those curves selected. The
first curve selected occupies the X-axis, the second curve is the Y-axis and the third curve is the Zaxis. This functionality applies to both vertical and horizontal log plots.
539
Senergy
Zone Sets can also be selected, if they are available on the log plot, by holding the 'X' key down
and clicking on the actual Zone name in the track header at the same time as selecting the
curves. The default zone shown is the first available one.
Related Topics
Senergy
540

8.1.4.8
By left-mouse clicking in one of the plot tracks the user can automatically copy the depth, where
they 'click', into the clipboard. This depth value can be pasted into any input box that requires a
depth entry. This can be very useful for quickly setting depth intervals for example, in the 'Plot
Range Editor'. A depth is registered automatically every time the user left-mouse-button
clicks in a plot. NOTE: There is no visible indication that it has happened. To paste the
depth value into an edit-box, right-mouse-button 'click' in the edit-box and select 'Paste'.
Related Topics
8.1.5
This feature allows the user to quickly change the plot depth interval for the current plot. See the
Plot Range Editor Section for a full description.
Related Topics
541
Senergy

8.1.6
Plot format files must end with the file extension of '.plt'.
The pre-defined plots are very flexible. They can, for example, plot a Gamma Ray that is called by
different names (GR, SGR, GRC etc.). The pre-defined plot formats use curve name 'Types' to
define the curves. Plot format files can be created outside the program using an editor such as
Notepad. It is good practice to copy an existing example and make changes to it. The following
is an example of a plot format containing some shading:
$ Density Neutron plot file with shading
$
$ Track Format
$
--------Logarithmic Tracks-------- OverView
$TRACK Width Grid Grid Decades Left_Scale Minor_Grid Track Grid Lines
$
$ Curve Format
$CURVE Name
Left_Scale Right_Scale Backup Thickness colour Log/Lin Point_Plotting
$ Names that start with a '*' are curve Types
$
$ Grid and depth Format
$
Depth ---Grid Spacing--- User Defined ----------------Hard Copy-------------$GRID Curve Heavy Medium Light
Spacing
Top Depth Bottom Depth Scale Grid colour
$
$Recognised colours are:
$ Aqua, Black, Blue, DkGray, Fuchsia, Gray, Green, Lime, LtGray,
$ Maroon, Navy, Olive, Purple, Red, Teal, White, Yellow
$
$
$ gr caliper track
TRACK
2.00
Yes
No
2
0.200
No
No
5
$CURVE Name
Left_Scale Right_Scale Backup Thickness colour Log/Lin Point_Plotting
CURVE *GammaRay 0.0000
150.0000
RBU
1
Green
LIN
Solid
CURVE *Caliper 6.0000
16.0000
RBU
1
Blue
LIN
Solid
$ make depth track
TRACK
0.50
No
No
2
0.200
No
No
5
CURVE
DEPTH
0.0000
1.0000
NONE
1
Black
LIN
Solid
$ density neutron track
TRACK
4.00
Yes
No
4
0.200
Yes
No
10
CURVE *Density 1.9500
2.9500
LBU
1
Red
LIN
Solid
CURVE *Neutron 0.4500
-0.1500
LBU
1
Green
LIN
Solid
CURVE *Drho
-0.7500
0.2500
NONE
1
Black
LIN
Solid
$ shade when Density curve is to the left of Neutron curve using YELLOW
SHADE *Density Curve *Neutron Curve Yellow
$ shade when Neutron curve is to the left of Density curve using GREEN
Senergy
SHADE *Neutron Curve *Density Curve Green
$ OverView Track
TRACK
0.50
No
No
2
0.200
CURVE DEPTH
0.0000
1.0000
NONE
CURVE *GammaRay 0.0000
150.0000
RBU
$ Grid and depths
GRID DEPTH 100.00 10.00 2.00
FALSE
$ end of plo
No
1
1
-999.000
Yes
Black
Green
542
5
LIN
LIN
-999.000
Solid
Solid
-1.00
Black
NOTE: Lines starting with a '$' are comments.

When the file is read by IP, only those lines that have valid curve names or curve name 'Types'
are included in the plot. This allows the user to make 'Generic' plot formats that can be used
with curve mnemonics from different logging service companies.
Related Topics
8.1.7
The interactive plot allows the changing of several parameters interactively by placing the cursor
on the vertical parameter line and dragging the line to a new position. When the mouse button is
released the program will automatically recalculate the zone and update the result on the plot.
This gives the user immediate feedback on changes to parameters.
The Interactive Log Plot is launched from the following Interpretation Modules:
'Basic Log Analysis', 'Clay Volume', 'Porosity and Water Saturation', 'Cut-off and Summation', '
Multi Well Cut-off and Summation', 'NMR Normalization', 'NMR Interpretation', TDT StandAlone Sw analysis, TDT Time Lapse.
From any one of the above Interpretation Modules, Click Make Plot to Display the Interactive
Log Plot. The following example has been taken from the Basic Log Analysis Module.
543
Senergy
Undo/Redo
Once the Parameter lines have been altered undo/redo arrows appear in the top left-hand corner
of the log plot. These allow the user to go back to the original position of the parameter lines. As
the arrows are 'clicked' the parameter lines move and the output curves are recalculated. The
undo/redo arrows only work if the well and zones remain unchanged during the current
interpretation session.
The Undo/Redo Buttons have a Drop Down Menu which enables specific actions be be Undone
or Re-done.
Senergy
544
Related Topics
8.1.8
The 'Horizontal Log Plot' display has been introduced to give the user more options for log
curve visualization. Selecting the 'Horizontal Log Plot' option from the 'View' menu, or from the
'Data View' toolbar, will launch the currently-active, in-memory wells' 'Default plot format',
rotated through 90 degrees, from a 'Portrait' to a 'Landscape' orientation.
This allows users with multiple computer monitors to see more of their logs for any particular log
vertical scale, since the log plot can be expanded across more than one screen. Single-monitor
545
Senergy
users can also utilize this display to visualize their log curves in the new orientation.
Much of the 'normal' functionality associated with the 'Portrait' plot, for example; launching
histograms, moving / creating / deleting / editing log tracks and moving / creating / deleting log
curves is retained. 'Clicking' in the log track header activates the Log Plot Format editor, where
curve graphic characteristics and shadings can be set up and changed. The user can use the '
Well' scroll arrows or the 'Select Well to Display' dialog to change the well in the display.
Senergy
546
The 'Horizontal Log Plot' window is designed to display a 'hardcopy' length of 8 feet / 2.44
metres of log data. The Overview track and slider bars on the main horizontal log plot window
provide the navigation tools for the interface and the log 'vertical scale' drop-down list functions
exactly as in the 'normal' log plot display. Changing the log display scale will be reflected in the
positions of the red marker bars in the Overview track. Depending upon the vertical scale
selected, the horizontal slider bar will either fill the window or will appear somewhat smaller than
the window. The user simply scrolls the horizontal scroll bar to move through a section of log
data.
NOTE: log curve editing functions are not enabled in the Horizontal log plot view so curve
editing operations such as curve depth-shifting and curve splicing must all be performed in the
conventional 'portrait' log plot orientation.
Interactive Log plots, launched from the Interpretation modules in IP, can be re-oriented to the
'Landscape' display and retain their interactivity in terms of interactive lines and the ability to
launch histograms and crossplots from a drop-down menu selection. NOTE: it is very
important that you should 'un-check' the 'Lock' setting for the active well 'Default' plot
format and close other log plots for the subject well before launching the Horizontal Log
Plot.
547
Senergy
It is also possible to change the log scale by using the '+' and '-' keys on the numeric part of the
keyboard.
Log Track Management

Log track management is identical to that in the conventional 'Portrait' log plot window.
'Right-mouse-button' clicking in a log track header allows the user to drag the selected track
to a new location within the log plot.
The Right-hand mouse button, when used with the keyboard SHIFT or CTRL buttons allows
the user to move , or copy, curves from one log track to another. If you hold down the
SHIFT button and right-mouse-button 'select' a curve, then dragging the curve from the log
plot header removes that curve from the log plot display.
Left-mouse-button clicking in a log track header launches the Log Plot Format editor for that
track, where curve display characteristics can be modified.
Left-mouse-button clicking in a log track opens the track editing and curve histogram dialog
for that particular track. The dialog, illustrated above, allows the user to :
1. View the histogram for any curve in the selected track.
2. Add Annotation at the last place the mouse button was clicked.
3. Use any of the Track editing options in the pop-up menu ('Expand Track', 'New Track',
'Duplicate Track' etc...).
Related Topics
Senergy
8.2
548
Histograms
The 'Histogram' graphic plot can be activated in a number of ways.

by selecting the 'Histogram' menu item under the 'View' menu.
by using the speed button (
).
by 'right-mouse-button clicking' in the track of a Log Plot and choosing the appropriate
histogram from the pop-up menu. In this case the histogram plot will activate with default
parameters.
by 'right-mouse-button clicking' in the log track of an interpretation module interactive log
plot brings up a particular interactive histogram plot with user-editable lines used, for
example, to define 'GRclean' and 'GRshale' values in the Vclay module.
by 'clicking & dragging' a histogram format name from the 'Database Browser' into the
IP workspace.
by 'double-clicking' on a histogram format name in the 'Database Browser' view.
Multiple histograms can be displayed simultaneously.
Histograms can be created for a single well or can be set up to display multiple wells.
When a histogram is launched and a log plot for the active well is on-screen - if you move
the mouse cursor over the log plot window, a small light blue bar, visible on the histogram
display, tracks the mouse cursor movement. The histogram curve value updates as the
mouse is moved. The bar disappears when the cursor is moved back over the histogram
window. The bar is visible, simultaneously, on as many histograms as you have open for
the active well.
The Histogram has a 'new look' in that a sunburst background colour has been added and there
is also an improved statistics table. The sunburst background can be disabled / enabled in 'Tools
'
'Options'
switched off in 'Tools'
'Options'
'Enable Background'. The statistics table can be
'Show Histogram
Statistics Table'. Enabling or disabling these options within the 'Miscellaneous Options' will
affect how the histogram appears on the screen. Within the Histogram module there are controls
that determine how the histogram appears as hard copy. These will be discussed below.
The Histogram set-up is arranged on 3 'tabbed' screens. These are :
Scales
Discriminators
Options
Section 8.2 View Well and Curve Data : Histograms
549
Senergy
The 'Scales' Tab

This is used to set up the wells, curves and zones to be visualized in the Histogram plot.
The 'Curve Name' is selected from the drop-down list which displays all curves for the
currently selected well.
The 'Number of divisions' box allows the user to define the number of 'classes' into
which to divide the curve data. For example, the GR curve in the screen shown above
will be displayed as 50 divisions from GR value '0' to Gr value '150' i.e. in classes 0-3, 46, 7-9, 10-12 ...145-147, 148-150. The smaller the 'Number of divisions' is, the larger
the class size. This also has implications for the appearance of the histogram data. For
example, under the 'Type' menu, in the Histogram plot window, - if the data is displayed
and 'Plot Curves' is selected, the smaller the number of divisions, the coarser the curves
will look.
The 'Left Scale' and 'Right Scale' entries are user-editable numbers, but should default
to the values entered into the curve system defaults file - CPARMDEF.PAR, if the curve
is listed there.
The 'Logarithmic' check box is used if the user wishes to define a log scale. Appropriate
'Left Scale' and 'Right Scale' values will have to be set.
The 'Y Axis' scale can be displayed either as a 'Frequency Count' (actual number of
Senergy
550
points in each division) or as a 'Percentile' percent of the total number of points.

The 'Y Axis Max' value can be set to override the IP default value, which is designed to
maximise the histogram size in the window.
The 'Normalize each curve to 100%' box is used to re-scale each histogram curve in
the plot so that equal areas are seen under each curve. This option would be used, for
example, if the number of points in one histogram is very different from other wells in the
display and the curves with the low number of points are hardly visible.
The depth interval for the plot can be defined by either a 'Top' and 'Bottom' depth, or by
using 'Zonal Depths'. For 'Zonal Depths', select a 'Parameter Set' and choose the '
Active zone'.
The 'Load Format' button will load a previously saved histogram format. The format is
saved by using the menu on the histogram plot, click 'File'
'Save Format'.
The 'Multi-well / Curve Histograms' check box should be 'checked' if the user wishes
to compare similar log curves from a number of wells. 'Check' this box and 'Click' the '
Select Wells and Curves' button to launch the following window, allowing you to select
additional wells and curves for the histogram plot:
Well Name : Click in a 'blank' Well Name' row and select the required 'Well Name' from
the drop-down list, to be added to the histogram. If the selected curve on the 'Scales' tab
is named consistently across the database, IP will select the appropriate curve, in this
case GR, for any newly selected well. By clicking on the 'Well Name' column header, all
the wells currently loaded in memory will be loaded into the data grid.
Plot Curve : Place a 'tick' in the box to add the selected curve to a plot. 'Clicking' in the
column header will toggle between 'on' or 'off' for all the curves.
Curve Name : Select the 'Curve Name', from the drop-down box, to plot in the
histogram.
Top Depth Bottom Depth : The Top and Bottom depths can be changed to view part
of a well when the 'Interval Depths' option is selected on the Histogram Scales window.
Discriminator Set : A 'Discriminator Set' is used to select which parts of the chosen
curve to plot in the histogram. Details of how to set up discriminators are given in The
'Discriminators' tab description, below.
Up to 10 different Discriminator 'Sets' can be set up. This allows the user the flexibility to apply
different sets of display criteria for different curves. For example, the user could have '
Discriminator Sets' of rules to differentiate between gas sands, water sands and for shales. The
551
Senergy
user could then produce a histogram with the same 'Curve Name' plotted three times with each
'curve' filtered by different discriminators. An example of such a process is given below :
Senergy
552
553
Senergy
Cumulative Curve Set name : This feature allows several input curves to be
'accumulated' into one curve on the histogram. The user must type in a distinguishing
name for the 'Cumulative Curve Set'. When the next curve is entered to add to the set,
select the same 'Set Name' from the drop-down menu. For normal histograms leave this
box 'blank'.
Curve colour : This will be the colour of the curve on the histogram. Leave at 'Default' to
let the program choose the colour. If a colour is chosen and 'Zonal Depths' is selected
on the histogram scales window, then all histogram curves associated with this input
curve will have this same fixed colour (the default is a different colour for each zone).
The following is an example of 'Cumulative Curve Sets' working with the 'Discriminator Sets' to
produce single histogram curves for the gamma ray from two wells for 'Gas Sands', 'Water
Sands' and 'Shales'.
Senergy
'Advanced Well Select' : uses the 'Select Wells' module for creating, saving and
retrieving well lists.
The 'Zone/Well List' list at the side of the histogram can be detached from the histogram
window and resized as required.
554
555
Senergy
The detached 'Zone/Well List' can be easily reattached to the crossplot either by dragging the
window onto the crossplot window or else 'clicking' on the
icon in the top right-hand corner of
the 'Zone/Well List' window.

The 'Discriminators' Tab
Senergy
556
The 'Discriminators' tab allows the user to refine which data are displayed in the histogram. The
user can up to 10 discriminator 'Sets'. Up to 6 discriminator criteria can be set up and used, per
'Set'. The discriminators can be combined using 'and' or 'or' type logic. Discrimination can
either be between a curve and a value or between two curves.
If the 'Multi Well / Curve Histogram' box is 'checked', under the 'Scales' tab, then up to ten
different Discriminator Sets can be defined. The user can scroll through the different Sets by
clicking the left and right arrow buttons next to the Set number at the head of the tab.
The 'Options' tab
The 'Options' tab allows the user to override the defaults for histogram plot titles. Leave the title
boxes 'blank' to in order to use the default titles. If no title is required then put a blank space
(space bar key) in the text-entry box. The 'Hard Copy' options allow the width and height of the
557
Senergy
plot to be specified. If this is left blank the plot is automatically fitted to the plot page.
'Un-checking' the 'Plot Zone, depth and parameter information' removes this
information (which appears as a 'Legend' for the plot) from the hard copy plot.
'Un-checking' the 'Show Curve Statistics' will remove the statistics table from the output
hardcopy.
'Un-checking' the 'Plot Active Zone title' removes this information from the output hard
copy plot.
'Un-checking' the 'Display Colored Background' removes the 'sunburst' background
from the output hard copy plot. NOTE: even if the 'Enable Background' is 'un-checked'
within 'Miscellaneous Options', a 'sunburst' background colour will appear in the
hardcopy histogram plot if the 'Display Colored Background' is 'checked' on within the
'Options' tab. The 'Display Colored Background' is by default 'un-checked'.
Percentile Statistics
Each of the percentile statistic boxes are user definable. The default values are 10th percentile,
50th percentile and 90th percentile. Users can enter whatever value they like in the percentile
statistic boxes i.e. P0.5, P90.5 etc. 'Un-checking' the 'Show Percentile 1' box(es) will remove
the percentile from the statistics table, if the table is being shown.
Interactive Histogram Plots
'Interactive' Histograms are launched from within the 'Log Plot' windows of the Interpretation
modules. The user should 'right -click' in a log curve track to activate a drop-down list of
available histograms and crossplots.
Senergy
558
The 'ZONES' section of the histogram will only be visible if zone depths are selected in
the 'Histogram Scales' window. The colour of the histogram bar chart for a zone is the
same as the colour of the zone bar on the log plot.
Viewing zones : to change the zones visible in the histogram, click on 'ZONES' on the
right side of the histogram window to activate or de-activate any zone.
Changing parameter values : to change parameters associated with the histogram
(example : Gamma Ray Clean, Gamma Ray Clay), drag the parameter lines, which will
be displayed on the histogram, to their new value. The values displayed are shown at the
bottom of the window along with their cumulative percentile. When the mouse button is
released, the zone will be recalculated automatically with the new parameter values, and
all displays will automatically be updated with the new results of the calculations.
There are now undo/redo buttons in the top left-hand corner of the 'interactive' histograms. These
enable the user to change the parameter lines and then go back to how the parameter lines were
originally set. As the user 'clicks' on the arrows the parameter lines change on the histogram and
also on the interactive plot. The undo/redo buttons only become visible once a parameter line has
been moved. The undo/redo only works if the well/zones are the same as when the first parameter
line move was made.
559
Senergy
Senergy
560
561
Senergy
By 'clicking' on the drop-down icon (between the two arrows) a list of user operations can be seen.
This gives the user the opportunity to select the action that they would like to un-do or re-do. Any
'greyed-out actions relate to a previous set-up of the module. To reset any of these 'greyed-out'
actions the user must reset the histogram back to how it was when the actions were made.
Changing Active Zone : the 'Active zone' is the zone name displayed at the top of the
window, below the histogram title. Any parameter changes that the user applies are made
to this zone. To change the active zone, the user can either :
click on the 'Edit Format' button and change the Active Zone in the Histogram
Scales window, or
click on the 'Active Zone' button on the Histogram main menu bar. In this case,
after clicking the 'Active Zone' menu button, select the new active zone(s) from
the list of zones on the right hand side of the window. Then, to end the selection
process, click again on the 'Active Zone' button.
Selecting multiple active zones : It is possible to have multiple zones active at the
same time. This allows the user to change the same parameter for multiple zones. To do
this, follow the same instructions for 'Changing Active Zone', except this time, select all
the zones wanted as active zones before ending the selection with a second click of the
'Active Zone' button. The 'All Zones' box will allow the selection of all zones. The first
Senergy
562
zone selected will have its parameters displayed on the plot. Then, when any parameters
are changed, the same changes will be made to all the active zones. If the chosen active
zones do not have the same starting parameters, a warning message will be displayed to
see if you wish to continue.
Histogram Main Menu items
The Histogram main menu bar comprises of 4 buttons:
'File'
'Edit Format'
'Active Zone'
'Type'
'File' Button:
The 'File' menu allows the user to save and load histogram formats, output the histogram to a
plotter, file or clipboard and to close the histogram window. The Normalize Curves module is
also started from here.
'Program Default Histograms' : Provides a drop-down list which can be populated with
histogram formats. These formats are located in the IP program directory, under the '
\Default Plots' subdirectory. 'Default' histogram formats can be saved to this folder and
563
Senergy
will then be available from any IP project the user opens.

'Project / Well Histograms' : At the top of the list will be any histogram format files saved
into the IP Project's 'Root' directory, followed by histogram format files saved into a wells
IP subdirectory.
'Save Format' allows you to save a particular histogram set-up to a disk (.hst) file. The
histogram can be restored by clicking the 'Load Format' button and browsing to the
required format file.
'Print' - will print the current histogram plot directly to a connected printer.
'File' - The histogram graphic display can output to a number of graphics file formats. The
graphic format is selected in the file selection dialog and it depends on the file name
extension. Graphics formats available are : EMF, CGM, GIF, TIFF, PNG, JPEG and BMP.
'Clipboard' - selecting this option copies the graphic display as an .emf file, to the
WINDOWS clipboard. You can paste the graphic directly into other applications such as
Excel or Powerpoint.
'Clone' - 'clicking' this will create an exact copy of the active histogram.
'Save and View Histogram Report' - this saves the details of the histogram as a text
file, HistoStats.txt, with the statistics table and cumulative curve values. An example of
the text file is shown below:
Senergy
564
The 'Edit Format' button is described above, under the headings 'Scales' tab, 'Discriminators'
tab and 'Options' tab
The Active Zone button is described above under the 'Changing Active Zone' header.
Histogram 'Type' Button:

The Histogram 'Type' menu allows the user to choose how a histogram is to look on-screen.
The user 'clicks' on an option in the menu bar to select it. A marker, or 'tick' appears next to the
selected option. The user toggles between display options by 'clicking' on the option in the dropdown menu.
565
Senergy
The default histogram 'Type' is a 'Bar' chart with different wells / zones cumulatively
added to the display. 'Clicking' the 'Type' button on the Histogram main menu bar, and
selecting 'Plot Curves' changes the plot into a series of curves, one curve for each well /
zone,as illustrated below:
The 'Cumulative Curve ?' option allows the user to display a cumulative frequency curve
for the data displayed in the histogram.
The Y axis scale for the histogram can be plotted in a number of ways:
Senergy
566
'Plot as Frequency': this will display the actual number of points in each division.
'Plot as Percent': points are plotted as a percentile of the total number of
points.
If the 'Equal areas under curves ?' option is 'checked' then each histogram curve is
normalized so that the areas under each curve are the same. This option is only valid
when 'Plot Curves' is selected.
The following plot illustrates a 'curve' histogram without the cumulative frequency curve. The
heavy line curve indicates the active zone (1).
'Colour by Zone' : sets the histogram shading and line colour to the active zone colour.
'Colour by Well' : sets the histogram shading and line colour to distinguish between
wells in a multi-well histogram plot.
'Show Statistics Table' : enables the user to hide or show the statistics table. For multiwells the statistics table can become very large.
'Hide All Statistics Lines' : removes any statistical line that had previously been
selected and displayed on the histogram plot.
'Show Gaussian Fit' : draws the Gaussian fit curve for the frequency distribution shown
in the histogram. The Gaussian fit curve is drawn as a thin dashed line when drawn with
bars or curves. When 'Plot Bars' or 'Plot Curves' are de-selected the Gaussian lines
appear as bold, solid lines in the plot area.
567
Senergy
NOTE: separate Gaussian fit lines for multi-well displays are only available when the 'Plot
Curves' option, not 'Plot Bars', is selected.
'Show Standard Deviation' : switches on the +/- 1 Standard Deviation lines for the
Gaussian Fit line. The standard deviation lines appear as green dashed lines.
'Show Minimum Line' : switches on the minimum line. This appears as a solid blue line
when histogram bars are displayed.
'Show Maximum Line' : switches on the maximum line. This appears as a solid blue
line when histogram bars are displayed
'Show Mean Line' : switches on the mean line for the Gaussian Fit line. This appears as
a solid blue line when histogram bars are displayed .
'Show Mode Line' : switches on the mode line. This appears as a solid blue line when
histogram bars are displayed. NOTE: if there is no single mode value for the data then
the 'Mode' statistics cell will be blank.
'Show Percentile 1 Line' : switches on the first percentile line if it has been 'checked' in
the 'Options' tab.
'Show Percentile 2 Line' : switches on the second percentile line if it has been
'checked' in the 'Options' tab.
'Show Percentile 3 Line' : switches on the third percentile line if it has been 'checked' in
the 'Options' tab.
'Show All Gaussian Lines' : switches on all the Gaussian Lines (Gaussian Fit, Mean
and Standard Deviation) for the histogram on display.
'Show No Gaussian Lines' : switches off any Gaussian lines that are currently
displayed.
'Plot Only Gaussian Lines' : shows only the Gaussian Line fits to the histogram data.
Displays as separate curves when 'Plot Curves' is selected and displays as a single
curve when 'Plot Bars' is selected.
Senergy
568
If the 'Plot Curves' option is chosen then all the statistical lines appear as the same colour as
that chosen for the zone colour, as shown in the screenshot below:
569
This feature is useful for when the user is comparing multi-well curve values.
Senergy
Senergy
570
If the user wants to copy specific values from the statistics table for a histogram then rightmouse 'clicking' on the cell enables the user to see the following two options:
'Copy Selected Cell(s) to Clipboard' - the user can select one cell or a number of cells
(by selecting the first cell and then holding down the left-mouse button and dragging
across to the other cells to be selected, which are highlighted in blue as they are
selected.
'Copy All to Clipboard' - this copies all of the statistics table to the clipboard.
571
Senergy
'Print', 'Copy to the Clipboard' and 'Output to File' : These options, described above, under
the 'File' button ,are also available by right-mouse-button clicking in the Histogram graphic
display. They allow the histogram to be sent either:
to the currently-selected printer, or
copied to the windows clipboard, or
output to a disk file
The clipboard option is very useful for pasting copies of the histograms into other documents.
The data is copied to the clipboard as a windows enhanced metafile (.emf). This allows the
histogram to be easily re-scaled inside the host document with no loss of picture resolution.
To output histogram statistics for each zone 'check' the 'Show Curve Statistics' box within the '
Options' tab of the 'Edit Format' window.
Senergy
Multi-well zonal histograms allow the selection of multiple zones from different wells. The
following plot is displaying three zones from 'A2 and one zone for well 'A3'.
572
573
Senergy
The text statistics file from this histogram will look like the following. The cumulative values have
been cut out after the 10th bin to shorten the listing.
HISTOGRAM STATISTICS
Date :
10/31/2008 13:17:54
GR (API)
Mean
Minimum
Maximum
Mode
- Zone : (1) RN36
31.125
147.25
34.5
- Zone : (2) N28
21.156
46.812
28.5
- Zone : (3) N26
24.796
67.125
31.5
- Zone : (3) N26
21.531
125.68
25.5
21.156
147.25
34.5
Std Dev
Well(16): A2 : 24353762
58.003
31.44
Well(16): A2 : 24353762
32.084
6.93
Well(16): A2 : 24353762
33.742
7.683
Well(24): A3
36.376
19.69
All Zones
42.949
Value
24.59
Total
Senergy
GR
Cum %
1.5
0.
4.5
0.
7.5
0.
10.5
0.
13.5
0.
16.5
0.
19.5
0.
22.5
3.142
25.5
15.14
28.5
27.14
8.2.1
574
Curve Normalization
'Normalization' is a mathematical process that adjusts for differences among data from varying
sources, in order to create a common basis for comparison. 'Well Log Normalization : Methods
and Guidelines' - Daniel E. Shier Petrophysics, Vol45, No.3 (2004) is a good reference paper on
the subject of log normalization.
The Histogram module can be used to normalize curves, for example; between log runs within
a single well or between multiple wells in an IP project. To do this:
set up the histogram so that it contains the curve or curves you want to normalize and
include a 'Reference Well' and 'Reference Curve', if appropriate. NOTE: a 'Reference
Curve' is only necessary if the user is going to use the 'Normalize to fixed percentiles'
option. For other normalization types the 'Reference Curve' entry box can be left blank.
The Normalization window is accessed either :
by using the Histogram menu item 'File' 'Normalize Curves' option, or
by right-mouse-button clicking on the histogram graphic display and selecting '
Normalize Curves' from the menu that is launched.
575
Senergy
The following window is launched plus the histogram changes from displaying data as bars to
displaying data as curves:
Senergy
576
The user selects the 'Curve to normalize' from the drop-down box. This curve will now
be plotted on the histogram with a thick line style, but not as thick as the 'Reference
Curve' line, if one is specified. The 'Result Curve' box will be filled in with the userselected curve name, with the characters in the 'Default curve extension' box appended
to it. The user can change the 'Result Curve' name or curve extension as required.
Where curves are to be normalized to a 'Reference Curve', the 'Reference Curve'
should be selected from the drop-down list box. This curve will now be plotted on the
histogram with a very thick line style to distinguish it from the curve to be normalized.
Normalization Type
Three types of curve normalization operation are enabled in IP :
'1 Point Linear Shift' : This will add / subtract a fixed value to / from the user-selected
curve, as illustrated in the screen capture shown below.
577
Senergy
'1 Point Scale Factor' : This will multiply the user-selected curve by a fixed value, as
illustrated below:
'2 Point' : This combines the first two types, allowing a scaling plus a linear shift
operation, as illustrated below:
Senergy
578
The 'Normalization Values' text-entry boxes display the available normalization factors. A box
will be 'greyed out' (inactive) depending on the type of normalization the user selects (for
example: if the '1 Point Linear Shift' is selected, then the multiplication box (X) becomes noneditable and fixed to the value 1.0.
Interval to Normalize
The user can choose to normalize the input curve over the 'Whole Well' or just over the intervals
of the currently 'Selected Zones' on the main histogram window.
if the 'Use Discriminators' 'check-box' is 'checked', then any discriminators that were set up for
the normalization curve on the Histogram 'Discriminators' tab, will be applied to decide if a
particular depth step should be normalized. In this way discriminators can be applied to both the
'Whole Well' and 'Selected Zones' options.
579
Senergy
The output 'Result Curve' is created when the 'Keep' or 'Next' buttons is 'clicked'. The output
curve is created using the factors in the 'Normalization Values' box.
Normalizing One / Multiple Curves to a Reference Curve
There are three possible methods for setting the normalization factors for one/many 'Curves to
Senergy
580
Normalize' with respect to a 'Reference Curve'.

1. Use one or two fixed percentile value(s) to normalize the selected curve to the reference
curve - 'Normalize to Fixed Percentiles' option.
2. The user interactively selects the amount to shift a curve, on the histogram. This method
does not use any reference curve.
3. The user can manually type in the scale factors in the 'Normalization Values' boxes.
The histogram is updated so the user can see the effect.
1. Normalize to Fixed Percentile Values
To normalize to Fixed Percentiles:
Select the 'Reference Curve' and 'Curve to Normalize'.
Select 'Normalization Type' - '1 Point Linear Shift', '1 Point Scale Factor' or '2 Point'.
Type in the 'Lower %' and 'Upper %' (percentile values) to normalize the 'Curve to
Normalize' to, into the 'Normalize to fixed Percentiles' text-entry boxes . The 'Upper %'
box is only used for '2 Point' normalization. The histogram plot will be updated to show
the percentile lines for the 'Reference Curve' and the curve being normalized. The
vertical percentile lines are coloured the same as the input curves. The numbers that are
displayed are the actual curve values corresponding to the chosen percentiles.
Click the 'Calculate' button to calculate the normalization factors, which are displayed in
the 'Normalization Values' box, and the normalized curve is added to the histogram as a
dashed line. NOTE: that no output curve has been created at this stage.
The following screen capture shows a '1 Point Linear Shift', 10% (Percentile) normalization.
Note that the actual percentile values are displayed on the histogram.
The following screen capture illustrates a '2 Point' normalization using fixed percentiles (10%
and 90%)
581
Senergy
The output curve, in this case 'GRn', is created when either of the 'Keep' or 'Next'
buttons are 'clicked'. Clicking the 'Close' button will cancel the normalization operation
without saving a normalized curve.
2. Interactive Normalization
The 'Interactive Normalization' procedure is set up as follows (a 2 Point Normalization is
described) :
Select the 'Normalization Type'.
Click the 'Interactive' button.
On the Histogram Plot - Click at a point on the 'Curve to Normalize'. A vertical line
Senergy
582
labelled 'Norm 1' is displayed.

Click at the point on the 'Reference Curve' that you wish to shift line 'Norm 1' to. A
second vertical line labelled 'Ref 1' is displayed.
Click at a second point on the 'Curve to Normalize'. A third vertical line labelled 'Norm 2'
is displayed.
Click at the point on the 'Reference Curve' that you wish to shift line 'Norm 2' to. A
second vertical line labelled 'Ref 2' is displayed.
The following is an example of a '2 Point Shift'.
The vertical reference lines are interactive and can be dragged to a new position. When the
mouse button is released the 'Shifted Curve' and the 'Normalization Values' will automatically
update.
'Keep' / 'Next' / 'All' Buttons
Clicking one of the 'Keep', 'Next' or 'All' buttons, located at the bottom of the Curve
Normalization screen, executes the normalization routine on the selected curves.
'Keep' Button - By clicking the 'Keep' button the 'Result Curve' is created or updated
with the normalized data. If the 'Result Curve' is a new curve then all the data from the
original curve is copied into it before the normalization is performed on the selected parts.
'Next' Button - The 'Next' button performs the same operation as the 'Keep' button,
except that afterwards it automatically selects the next curve in the list of 'Curves to
Normalize' and will automatically recalculate the percentiles and 'Normalization Values'
583
Senergy
for the new curve . This can allow the user to process multiple curves quickly, with
minimal user-input, except for checking that the normalization looks optimal, before
selecting the next curve.
'All' Button - The 'All' button does the same as clicking the 'Next' button until all the wells
in the histogram have been normalized.
Listing
When the user closes the normalization window an optional output listing of all the curves
normalized and their normalization values and intervals can be made. The following is an
example listing.
Curve Normalization
04/09/01 15:25:58
Well
: Test Well 1
Input curve : GrC
Result curve : GrCn
Reference curve : SGR (XYZ # 1)
10
Percentile , Reference : 25.0249
90
GrCn = 0.84827 x GrC + 7.13713
Interval 7614. - 8738.
Well
: Test Well 3
Input curve : SGR
Result curve : SGRn
Reference curve : SGR (XYZ # 1)
10
90
SGRn = 1.0035 x SGR + 4.56156
Interval 7614. - 8738.
Value : 21.0873
Value : 115.9373
Value : 20.392
Value : 100.57
Senergy
8.3
584
Managing Crossplots
'Crossplots' can be launched in a number of ways within IP:

From the View Menu, Select Crossplot
Click the Crossplot button'
in an interpretation module 'Interactive Log Plot' - by 'right-mouse clicking' in a track and
choosing the appropriate Crossplot option from the pop-up menu. In this case the Crossplot
will launch with curve default parameter values set and will show interactive lines and endpoints.
by 'clicking & dragging' a Crossplot format name from the 'Database Browser' into the IP
workspace.
by 'double-clicking' on a Crossplot format name in the 'Database Browser' view.
from a log plot hold the 'X' key down and use the left mouse button to select curves and
zones and then click on the Crossplot icon on the main menu bar. See 'Selecting Log Plot
Curves for Output to Crossplot' for more details.
The Crossplot has a 'new look' in that a sunburst background colour has been added. The
sunburst background can be disabled / enabled in 'Tools'
'
'Options'
'Miscellaneous Options
'Enable Background'.
Navigating the Crossplot Dialog

The Crossplot display set-up is arranged on 4 tabbed windows. These are:
'Scales' - sets up curves, symbols, depth ranges,
Crossplot 'Type' ('Normal', 'Frequency', 'Pressure Gradients', 'Standalone Pickett') and
optional overlay lines.
'Discriminators' - sets up the data filtering criteria for user-defined displays.
'Z Axis colours' - sets up the colours when a Z axis curve is selected.
'Options' - allows the user to add Crossplot and XY axis titles, switch 'on/off' regression line
equations, plot zone depth and parameter information, set the dimensions (inches/cm) of
the output graphics file.
Section 8.3 View Well and Curve Data : Managing Crossplots
585
Related Topics
Working with the Crossplot Dialog
Working with the Crossplot Window
Working with Crossplot Areas
Working with Crossplot Overlay Files
Interactive Modifications in a Crossplot
Crossplot Types
Senergy
Senergy
8.3.1
586
When Creating a Crossplot the Crossplot Dialog is used to define the Crossplot Attributes. To
display the Crossplot Dialog Click the Crossplot Button.
The 'Scales' tab is where the input curves and their display scales and display symbols are set
up. Crossplot overlay lines for many standard chartbook plots can be added to the display from
this screen. The 'X axis' and 'Y axis curves', and 'Z1' and 'Z2' curves where required, are
selected from the drop-down curve lists. Where curve display parameters have been set up in
the 'Manage Curve Headers' module, these default minimum and maximum values will be
automatically set.
NOTE: the user can type in curve 'types', prefixed by either a '@' or '*' character, into the 'Curve
Name' entry boxes in order to pick up curves 'generically'. For example, typing in '@density' will
pick up the 'final' (if flagged), or most recently loaded / updated density curve, '*sonic' will pick
up the default sonic curve, as illustrated below.
The user must 'check' the 'Log' check-box in order to display any selected curve on a logarithmic
scale. The 'Vert. Lines' / 'Hori. Lines' 'Number' text entry box should be set to '10' to display
the correct Logarithmic decade grid lines.
The depth interval for the Crossplot can be defined either by selecting:
'Interval Depths' - a top and bottom depth are typed in, or by using
'Zonal Depths' - the user must select from a list of available IP 'Parameter set' and
choose the 'Active Zone'.
The 'Z axes' settings are optional, and if entered, can be turned 'off' from the Crossplot window to
allow the zonal display only.
587
Senergy
The 'Z1 axis' changes the colour of a point in the Crossplot, depending on the value of
the Z1 axis curve.
The 'Z2 axis' changes the symbol of a point in the Crossplot, depending on the value in
the Z2 axis curve.
The 'Number' of 'Colours' and 'Symbols', entered into the text boxes in the right hand column of
the screen, sets the number of sub-divisions to use for the 'Z1' and 'Z2' axes. The maximum
number of colours is 13. The maximum number of symbols is 35. An example of a Crossplot
incorporating 'Z1' and 'Z2' curves is shown in the figure shown below:
Senergy
588
The 'Point Symbol' drop-down box, found below the curve selection panel, will allow the user to
change the style of the symbol displayed on the Crossplot. The following styles are available.
If the user elects to create a multi-well Crossplot, the additional wells, when selected, will be
589
Senergy
displayed, initially, with the same 'Point Symbol' as that for the primary, in-focus well.
The 'Point Size' drop-down box allows the user to change the size of the symbol selected in the '
Point Symbol' drop-down box. The size range is from one to five. If the small points (1 pixel
square) are selected then the 'Point Size' is grayed out.
The 'OverLay Lines' box allows the user to select Service Company chart book 'Neutron /
Density' and 'Neutron / Sonic' porosity lines to display with Crossplot data. The user can
choose what kind of overlay, if any, to display on a Crossplot. If a required overlay is not available
from the IP program list, it is possible for the user to create / add a new overlay to the program.
See 'Creating New Crossplot Overlays' for a full description.
The 'Crossplot Options' Panel

Four check boxes can be used to launch additional Crossplot functionality. These are:
'Expand Array Curves' - If the user selects an array-type curve to display in the Crossplot
as an X or Y curve, this check box will be 'activated'. If the box is 'checked', the array curve
will be 'expanded' so that every point in the array curve has a separate point in the
Crossplot. If the box is left 'un-checked', then the array curve data will be averaged to the
well depth step increment, and the average array curve value will be plotted against the other
user-selected curve.
'Frequency Crossplot' - The 'Frequency Crossplot' check-box launches an additional
menu that allows the user to display Crossplot data as 'Frequency' - type displays; either as
alpha-numeric characters or as colour-coded cells. See 'Frequency Crossplots' for a full
description. The menu is launched when the user clicks the 'OK' button.
'Pressure Gradients' - The 'Pressure Gradients' check-box launches an additional menu
that allows the user to analyse formation test pressures versus depth. See Pressure
Gradient Plots for a full description. The menu is launched when the user clicks the 'OK'
button.
'Standalone Pickett Crossplot' - The 'Standalone Pickett Crossplot' check box launches the
Pickett Crossplot which is independent of the 'Porosity and Water Saturation' module.
NOTE: The relevant porosity and resistivity curves, with logarithmic scales, have to be
selected before the Crossplot will launch. See 'Standalone Pickett Plot' for a full
description.
Senergy
590
The 'Discriminators' tab

The 'Discriminator' tab allows the user to refine what data are displayed in the Crossplot. Up to
6 discriminators can be used at once and combined using 'and' or 'or' type logic. Discrimination
can either be between a curve and a value or between two curves. There are a maximum of 10
discriminator sets that can be used. To access the other discriminator sets use the
arrow buttons to move between the sets. These discriminator sets are especially useful for multiwell Crossplots, where different sets can be used on different wells depending on the data.
591
Senergy
The 'Z AXES CLIPPING' check boxes at the base of the 'Discriminators' tab allows the user to
decide whether Z axis curve data values that fall outside the defined scales are to be included on
the Crossplot. When the boxes are not 'checked' the data that are outside the defined scale
range will be plotted with the colour or symbol of the maximum or minimum value of the scale
range.
The 'Display every th point' box allows the user to filter the amount of data being displayed on
the Crossplot. Displaying every 1th point displays all the data. Displaying every 5th point will
display the 1st, 6th, 11th, 16th... etc data points. To change the start point of the data to be
filtered alter the top depth to be displayed.
For example, if the user has GR data over a 100 ft interval with a 0.5 ft step and the first data
point is at 100ft and the user wants to display only the 2nd data point i.e the foot values then in
the 'Interval Depths' 'Top' box on the 'Scales' tab the user would enter 100 and in the 'Bottom'
box 200. On the 'Discriminators' tab the user would enter 2 in the 'Display every th point' box.
The 'Z Axis Colours' tab
Senergy
592
The 'Z Axis Colours' tab allows user-defined colours to be specified for ranges of values. The
Z1 axis curve must be selected on the 'Scales' tab. The user 'checks' the 'Use these Z Axis
colours' box to override the scales defined in the 'Scales' tab. The table is filled out to define the
colour associated with a range of Z axis values. The 'Label' column is optional and is shown
alongside the colour scale, to the right of the Crossplot.
'Save Colours to File' : if you 'click' this button the current colour / label set-up scheme will
be saved to an external ascii (.zcl) file.
'Load Colours from File' : 'clicking' this button allows you to restore a colour/ label scheme
that has been saved to an external .zcl file.
'Fill From Z1 Settings' : 'clicking' this button will take the Z1 curve 'Min' and 'Max' values
and divide the colour bar, using the 'Number' of Z1 divisions' from the 'Scales' tab, to create
a colour bar and associated labels, as illustrated below:
593
Senergy
The following Crossplot is an example of a plot with a user-defined Z1 axis colour scheme which
has been manually entered into the 'Z Axis colours' tab.
The 'Options' tab

The 'Options' tab allows the user to override the program defaults for Plot titles. If the user
leaves the boxes 'blank', the program default titles and axis labelling are applied. If no title is
required, then put a 'space' character (space bar key) in the 'Main Title (Hard Copy)' box.
Senergy
594
The 'Hard Copy' options allow the width and height of the plot to be specified. If 'Width' and '
Height' boxes are left 'blank' the plot is automatically scaled to fit to the plot page. Un-checking
the 'Plot Zone, depth and parameter information' check box removes this information from
the plot. Un-checking the 'Plot Active Zone title' check box, removes this label from the plot.
The 'Put regression Line equation on plot' check box at the bottom of the 'Options' tab, if
'checked' will display a regression line equation on the plot when the 'Regression' option is
run. There is no limit on the number of different equations that can be displayed. The
placement of the equation on the plot can be changed by placing the mouse cursor on the
first letter of the equation line (the cursor changes to a drag cursor) and then by dragging the
line to a different position. The equation will appear on the hard copy output in approximately
the same position as it is displayed on the screen.
The 'Turn off 'Areas' for output to clipboard' check box option, when 'checked' will
remove any user-digitized polygons from the Crossplot before the graphic is sent to the
clipboard. This is a useful option for 'cleaning' up a Crossplot display before using the
graphic in other applications.
595
Senergy
Load a Pre-Defined Crossplot Format

The 'Load Format' drop-down button in the Crossplot Dialog can be used to pick up IP
default Crossplot formats to help to speed up the process of setting up Crossplots. IP
program default Crossplot formats are stored in the IP Program directory, normally C:
\Program Files\IntPetro3x, within the 'Default Plots' subdirectory. They are further
subdivided into functional groups. These are 'core', 'fluid', 'lithology', 'parameter' , '
porosity' and 'saturation'.
The user can create their own 'default' Crossplot formats and save them into the IP Project
directory or the Well directory. They will then appear as submenu items from the 'Load Format'
drop-down menu. The order of the sub-menu items can be changed, more folders can be
created and the paths to the folders can be defined within the 'Corporate Search Paths' menu
item within 'Tools'
'Options'.
Related Topics
Crossplot Types
Senergy
8.3.2
The Crossplot Window is illustrated in the figure below.
The Crossplot 'File' menu

The following options can be located in the Crossplot File Menu.
596
597
Senergy
'Program Default Crossplots' : Provides a drop-down list of IP default Crossplot formats.

These formats are located in the IP program directory, under the '\Default Plots'
subdirectory. The default formats are further classified in terms of their application. The
following screen shot illustrates the 'functional' groupings:
The plot formats are listed in the following order:
Senergy
598
At the top of the list are Crossplot format files saved into the 'Default Plots' subdirectory,
followed by Crossplot formats saved into the 'functional' subdirectories ('core', 'fluid',
'lithology', parameter', 'porosity', 'saturation').
The user can create their own hierarchy of Crossplot formats for an IP project by manually
creating a subdirectory in the IP Project directory with the 'NAME'.xpt extension and saving
Crossplot format files into it. The default formats are saved as 'generic' formats and work
where a user has set up curve 'Types' correctly.
'Project / Well Crossplots': Provides a drop-down list of user-defined Crossplot formats
saved either into the IP Project directory or into individual 'WellXXXX' subdirectories within
the IP project.
'Save Format' and 'Load Format': These options allow the user to save a Crossplot
format to a disk file and restore it at a later time. The default location for these files will be
the IP project directory. The 'Load Format' option can also be activated from the 'Edit
Format' window, from the 'Load Format' button on the bottom of the Crossplot window.
'Save Format Generic': the user can type in curve 'types', prefixed by either a '@' or '*'
character, into the 'Curve Name' entry boxes in order to pick up curves 'generically'. For
example, typing in '@density' will pick up the 'final' (if flagged), or most recently loaded /
updated density curve, '*sonic' will pick up the default sonic curve.
The 'Print', 'File' and 'Clipboard' options on the menu allow the Crossplot to be sent to the
current printer, copied to the WINDOWS clipboard or output to a file. Output to a 'File' can
be in a number of graphics formats. The graphic format is selected in the file selection
dialog and it depends on the file name extension. The supported graphic file formats are :
EMF, PNG, CGM, GIF, TIFF, JPEG and BMP. NOTE: to remove the sunburst background
before outputting the Crossplot to a graphics file or printer go to 'Tools'
Miscellaneous Options'
'Options'
'
'Enable Background' and 'uncheck' the 'Enable Background'
option.
The 'Clipboard' option is very useful for pasting a copy of a Crossplot into other
documents / spreadsheets / slide presentations. The data is copied to the clipboard as a
WINDOWS enhanced metafile (.EMF). This allows the Crossplot to be easily re-scaled
inside the host document with no loss of resolution.
The 'Clone Crossplot' option allows the user to launch a new Crossplot window with
exactly the same set up as the current, active Crossplot. It is useful for example, for setting
up a number of Crossplots using different discriminator parameters, for a common set of
wells. If areas have been selected on the active Crossplot then these will also come through
on the cloned Crossplot
599
Senergy
The Crossplot 'Edit Format' Menu

The 'Edit Format' button returns the user to the Crossplot set-up windows where curve
values, symbols, overlay files etc.. can be modified.
The Crossplot 'Z Axes' Menu

The 'Z Axes' Menu allows the user to change the 'sense' of the Z axis colour or symbol on the
Crossplot display.
Senergy
600
The Z axis on the Crossplot is a colour or symbol display that allows the user to apply visual
'discriminators' to the display:
'Zone' : The symbol colour will correspond to the colour of the zone that the point comes
from. This is for plots utilising zone / tops Sets or parameter Sets.
'Curve' : The symbol colour will correspond to a Z axis curve value. In this case the colour
scale and or symbol scale for the Z axis will be displayed to the right hand side of the
Crossplot.
'Well' : For multi-well Crossplots the symbol colour will be set to the colour in the multi-well
Crossplot set-up. In this case, each well name will be highlighted in a separate colour in the
list to the right hand side of the Crossplot.
To change the sense of the Z axis, 'click' the 'Z Axes' button and choose the type of Z axis.
The Crossplot 'Active Zone' Button

The 'Active Zone' functionality is only available when the user selects:
The 'Zonal Depths' option,
601
Senergy
a 'Parameter set' from the list of available Sets,

or an 'Active Zone' from the selected Parameter Set.
These are all selected in the 'Scales' tab window. 'Active Zone' allows the user to select one or
more zones, in one or multiple wells to be 'active' at any one time. In the Crossplots launched
from an interpretation module interactive log plot, this enables the user to change an
interpretation parameter in multiple zones, potentially in multiple wells in an IP project.
The 'Active Zone' is shown as the zone number ('Z:1, 2, 3...') displayed at the top of the
Crossplot display window. This is the zone /zones that any parameter changes are made to,
should the user change any associated interactive lines or end-points. To change the 'Active
Zone', the user can either :
'click' on the 'Edit Format' button and change the active zone in the 'Zonal Depths' set-up
panel, OR
'click' on the 'Active Zone' button. Select the new active zone / zones by clicking in the
required 'cells' in the list of zones on the right hand side of the window. Then, to end the
selection process, click on the 'Active Zone' button again.
'Double clicking' in a zone box will automatically select that particular zone in all the
selected wells. 'Double clicking' the zone box again will deselect the active zone selection.
Senergy
602
Data point symbols will either display in the colour of the appropriate zone as shown in the right
hand part of the display window, or will be dependent on the Z axis scales selected by the user.
The 'All Zones' box , found below the Well Name, to the right hand side of the Crossplot, is a
shortcut to select all the zones in a well to be plotted on the Crossplot. The first zone selected
will have its parameters displayed on the plot. Then, when any parameters are changed, the
same changes will be made to all the active zones. If the chosen active zones do not have the
same starting parameters, a warning message will be displayed to ask if you wish to continue.
The Crossplot 'Function' Menu

The 'Function' menu allows the user :
to set up and manage 'Areas' for use in regression analysis, or for creating 'Flag' type
curves. See the 'Areas' topic for a full description.
to set up, manage and display 'Regression lines' for selected areas of the Crossplot. See
the 'Regression' section for a full description.
to activate the 'Pressure Gradient' menu,
to activate the 'Frequency Plot' menu,
603
Senergy
to create and display 'User-defined lines' on a Crossplot window. See 'User-Defined

Lines' for a full description.
to ensure that any overlay lines are plotted on top of the data rather than being plotted
behind, and hence hidden by, the data points.
To reset the Crossplot axes ('Reset Axes') to their original set-up if the user has zoomed
in / out of the Crossplot window.
The Crossplot Display Navigation Buttons

Three buttons and their associated menus provide the user with the ability to 'zoom in', 'zoom
out' and to 'rubber-band'-select a part of a Crossplot to view.
Senergy
604
Drop-down menus, activated by clicking the arrows to the right hand side of the navigation
buttons sets the 'Mode' of the button. The user can 'Zoom In' or 'Zoom Out' on:
'Both axes' - expands / shrinks the display in both x and y directions simultaneously.
'X axis only' - expands / shrinks the display in the x axis direction only.
'Y axis only' - expands / shrinks the display in the y axis direction only.
'Reset Axes' - restores a display to the scales set on the 'Edit Format' screen.
The 'Area Zoom' allows the user to quickly focus on a particular area of a Crossplot by clicking
on the icon in order to activate the 'mode' and then by clicking the left hand mouse button and
dragging the mouse cursor in the graphic window over the area of interest.
The user can also use the zoom functionality in the graphic window by using the following keys
and the mouse wheel:
'Zoom X Axis only' - hold down 'x' character key and scroll the mouse wheel in / out.
'Zoom Y Axis only' - hold down 'y' character key and scroll the mouse wheel in / out.
'Zoom Both Axes' - hold down 'Ctrl' key and scroll the mouse wheel in / out.
By holding down the mouse wheel in the graphic window and dragging the mouse, the user
can move / 'pan through' the data in any direction.
Related Topics
Crossplot Types
605
8.3.3
Senergy
'Areas' are created interactively, as graphical discriminators, in the Crossplot window to

generate data 'sub-sets' in the display. 'Areas' are used in conjunction with the 'Regression'
functionality for Crossplot data analysis.
Areas can be selected on the Crossplot by clicking the 'Function' button and then 'Create Area'.
They can also be created by 'right clicking' the mouse on the Crossplot graphic and choosing '
Create Area' from the pop-up menu. The cursor will turn to a cross and the area can be
'digitized' by clicking on the Crossplot to define the corners of the Area. To end and close the
polygon, click with the right mouse button or press any keyboard key. The user must select at
least three points to create an area. Up to 10 areas can be defined per Crossplot. Once areas
have been defined, the user can edit them in the following ways:
The corners of an area can be moved by clicking on a corner and dragging the point to a
new location.
To delete an area - put the mouse on a corner of the area, the cursor will change to a cross,
press the Delete key on the keyboard and the area will be removed.
To delete all areas use the menu function 'Delete all Areas'.
In the following Crossplot 4 areas have been defined.
Senergy
606
Creating Curves from Areas

To create a 'Flag' curve from user-defined 'Areas', select the 'Create curve from Areas' item on
the 'Function' menu or from the pop-up menu. The following window will be displayed:
607
Senergy
The user can select the flag value assigned to each area. The defaults are '1' for area '1', '2'
for area '2' etc. If a Crossplot data point falls within an area the Flag value for that area will
be written at the appropriate depth in the output curve. If areas overlap, then points that fall in
several areas will be assigned the value of the highest area number. For example if a point
falls in areas 2 and 4 then the value assigned for that point will be the value for area 4.
The user can type in the name of the output curve (default - 'XpFlag') into which the results
are written.
If the 'Add Results' button is 'checked' then only those depth levels that fall within the areas
will have their values changed.
The 'Delete before Write' button allows the output curve to be set to 'Null' values before the
program starts adding the data from the areas.
The 'Add To Plot' check-box, when 'checked, will automatically put the Flag curve in the
depth track of the active log plot of the in-memory well. The colours in the flag curve will
correspond to the colours of the areas.
If the Crossplot is a multi-well Crossplot then the 'Create curve for:' panel will be 'active'. This
allows the user to decide whether to create a Flag curve for all wells in the plot or just the current
well (the current well is the well name that is shown at the top of the Crossplot window).
Senergy
608
When the 'Run' button is 'clicked' the Flag curve will be written and the log plots updated. If the '
Create Flag Curve' window is left open and the 'Auto Update' check box is 'checked', any
changes made to the areas on the Crossplot will automatically run the 'Create Flag Curve'
module, updating the current flag curve and then refreshing the active log plot. This means that
any changes to the areas are instantly reflected in the log plot display.
Related Topics
Crossplot Types
8.3.4
There are default IP Crossplot Overlay files contained in the IP Program Directory. New Overlay
Files can be added to the IP Program Directory and the added to the IP Overlay File Listing
(Overlay_Files.ovlx) for use in the Crossplot.
609
Senergy
To Create a new Density / Neutron overlay file using the following format as a template.
Save the file to the IP program directory with the file extension '.ovl '.
The following is an example of a neutron density overlay file with a single Limestone ('LS') Line.
Lines that begin with a '$' are 'comment lines'. The X and Y values are the coordinates of the
overlay line values for 0, 5, 10, 15 pu etc... on the Neutron vs. Density Crossplot.
The first data line gives the 'Tool Types'. In this case 'Neutron' and 'Density'. This information
is used for automatically picking up the correct overlay files.
The second data line is the 'Label' of the line. This will be displayed as a label on the plot, at the
bottom end of the line. If there are more than one overlay line, the line names must be separated
by spaces. The number of names indicates the number of lines in the overlay. In the above case,
there is one name 'LS', therefore only one line in the overlay.
Senergy
610
The third data line is the 'Colour of Line'. For a list of acceptable colour names, see the file
CparmDef.par'in the program directory. The file can be opened and edited by selecting the menu
item 'Tools -> Edit Curve System defaults'.
A maximum of thirty (30) lines can be defined in an overlay file.
The data (calibration points) follow the 'Colour of line' entry, and each data point is described by
the format ;'X value', 'Y value', 'Type' for the first overlay line, followed by the same format for
any other lines. The 'X Value' and 'Y Value' inputs are self explanatory. The 'Type' tells the
program whether to put a tick (enter 'Tick') by this point on the line, a 'Value' (enter the value, for
example '10') or nothing (enter '-').
NOTE: If there are multiple overlay lines in the file it is not necessary to have the same number of
points to define each line. In the example shown below, the SS and DOL line have 11 points
while the LS line is defined by 10 points. However, It is necessary to fill out lines with no data with
hyphens '-' for X and Y values so that there is always the same number of parameters per line.
The maximum number of points per overlay line is 20.
Data labels can be added to the overlay. For example, one could add the Crossplot definition, as
shown in the example below and lithology points to a cross plot. Up to 30 data labels can be
added. The format of the data label lines is 'X position', 'Y position', 'Text rotation' (0 degrees
is a normal horizontal line), 'text colour' and the 'label text'. If the X and Y values in the first data
label line are set to 0, the line will be plotted as a title label at the bottom left hand corner of the
plot. Data labels start after the text line '$ Data Labels'.
NOTE: the line '$ Data Labels' is required in the file in order to make the overlay file work
correctly.
To Add the new overlay file name to the overlay list:
Save the Overlay file to the IP Program Directory (C:\Program Files\IntPetro36\)
Edit the Overlay List file by editing the Overlay_Files.ovlx file in the IP program directory.
Note: The file contains comment lines that describe its format.
611
Senergy
Restart Interactive Petrophysics to Update the Installation Files and Include the New Overlay
in the Overlay Lines Drop Down Menu of the Crossplot Dialog.
The overlay lines are normally displayed underneath the data but can optionally be displayed on
top. 'Check' the option under the 'Function' menu to show 'Overlays on top of data' or rightmouse click on the Crossplot graphic window to launch the same menu.
Senergy
612
Related Topics
Crossplot Types
8.3.5
These are associated with a number of IP interpretation modules. They allow the user to
graphically change interpretation parameters for one or more wells, in one or multiple zones, by
manipulating interactive lines and mineral end-points in Crossplot displays.
'Changing parameter values' : to change a parameter associated with the Crossplot. For
example : Density/Neutron Crossplot launched from the 'Clay Volume' module Interactive Log
613
Senergy
Plot, where Density and Neutron clay indicators have been 'checked',
'Click and drag' the parameter point, which is marked by a heavy red 'Square' symbol, to its
new value. The associated 'Neutron Clay' / 'Density Clay' parameters will change as the line
or end-point is moved.
Once the parameter lines have been moved undo/redo arrows appear in the top left-hand side of
the Crossplot. These allow the user to 'scroll' through changes made to the parameter lines
during an interpretation session. They only allow the user to see historical changes if the wells
and zones are kept the same during the session.
If the drop-down icon (between the two arrows) is 'clicked' then a list of all the possible undo's /
redo's is displayed. This facilitates the selection of which undo / redo the user wants to complete.
Senergy
614
If the user changes zones or wells then the drop-down list will contain 'greyed-out' lines as these
actions weren't performed on the changed set-up.
615
Senergy
On some Crossplots it is possible to move the whole line. If the mouse cursor changes to a '+'
when it is over an interactive line, then the line can be moved. The parameter values of the endpoints are shown at the bottom of the window. When the mouse button is released after moving
a line/point, the active zone(s) will be re-calculated automatically with the new parameter values,
and all displays will automatically be updated with the new results of the calculations.
Multi-well zonal Crossplots allow the selection of multiple zones from different wells. If the
parameters are interactively changed, then all active wells will be re-calculated.
Multi-well interval Crossplots allow the user to select individual wells by 'clicking' on the 'Well
Name' to the right of the Crossplot. The following Crossplot is displaying data from intervals
defined on the Crossplot 'Select Well' window for two wells. The Z axis colour and plot symbol
corresponds to the well that the data comes from, set up in the multi-well Crossplot set up. This
is the same data as in the Crossplot shown above, but this time the 'Z Axes' is set with the '
Well / Curve Set' selected. So the data points are coloured according to the well colour not the
zone colour as previously.
Related Topics
Managing Crossplots
Calculate a Regression Line
Senergy
616
Create a User-Defined Line

Display a Crossplot Section in a Log Plot
Crossplot Dockable Zone Window
8.3.5.1
The 'Regression' function can be used to calculate a regression line using the data in the
crosslot.. If 'Areas' are defined, then all the points falling within each coloured polygon are used in
the regression analysis. If the 'Use All Points on Xplot' box is 'checked' then the areas are
ignored and all the data on the Crossplot are used in the regression analysis. When the '
Regression' function is 'clicked', the 'Regression Analysis' window will be launched.
From within the 'Regression Analysis' window it is possible to apply regression functions etc for
one regression line. However, if the user wants to apply regression analysis on a number of
areas within a Crossplot then there is an 'Advanced' button that brings up another window where
multiple regression functions can be manipulated.
The user can choose the type of regression function to be applied to the Crossplot data ('Linear',
'Polynomial', 'Exponential', 'Power'). Multiple regression types can be selected and displayed
simultaneously.
For the Linear regression options of 'Y=f(x)' and 'X=f(y)', the user can optionally enter a point, in
the 'Force fit' text-boxes, through which the regression line will be forced. The regression lines
are displayed on the Crossplot.
617
Senergy
Ordinary least-squares (OLS) regression minimises the sum of the squares of the 'error'
distances from the line to the data points.
For Y=f(x), the squared Y-error distances are minimised.
For X=f(y), the squared X-errors are minimised. For example, if porosity is being predicted from
bulk density, porosity is positioned as the Y variable and the Y=f(x) prediction equation is used. In
this way, 'central' values of porosity are predicted at each bulk density value.
Outlying data points should be edited from the dataset before carrying-out OLS regression. The
Crossplot must be inspected to determine whether a linear or a 'curved' relationship is
appropriate for the data being analysed. Curved relationships are analysed either by using the
non-linear regression tools ('Polynomial', 'Power', 'Exponential' options) or by transforming X
and/or Y data before regressing using power, logarithm, exponential or other functions.
The 'RMA' (reduced major axis) line-fit gives an equation that is midway between the two OLS
methods. Normally, 'RMA' is not used to predict Y from the usual 'error-included' measured X
data. Normally, 'RMA' estimates the underlying theoretical relationship between the 'error-free'
counterparts of X and Y, and presumes that X and Y each have the same error fraction. When
plot scatter is caused by difficult core depth shifting (i.e. poor X-Y pairing), RMA provides a
plausible line-fit when standard regression methods may not. RMA always reproduces the
standard deviation of Y, from any X variable. Predicted porosity highs and lows will be located at
different depths to the calibration data but the predicted standard deviation will be the same. Y=f
(x) OLS predictions underestimate the standard deviation of porosity when depth shifting is the
primary cause of the scatter.
The 'Robust fit' minimises the sum of the errors in the Y direction. Instead of minimising the
squared distances, the 'Robust fit' minimises the Y error distances (not squared). The variable
being predicted must be selected as Y. Compared to OLS, the method reduces the effect of
outliers. The robust method used in IP is free to calculate the optimum gradient and intercept,
and the line is not forced to pass through the mean, or the median, of the calibration data.
All regressions produce a R2 (multiple R2 ) which is calculated as :
2
Yi Y mean
R
Yi Yi
Yi Ymean
Where
Yi
: Y value at the i'th sample
Ymean : Mean value of all Y samples
^
Yi
: Y result at the i'th sample calculated from the regression equation.
Senergy
618
By clicking 'View Report' the user will be asked to type a file name into which to save the
regression results. The regression results report (example below) will be displayed in the
WINDOWS NotePad. The user can cut and paste the equation directly from NotePad straight
into the 'User Formula' module.
Regression analysis example report
REGRESSION PARAMETERS
Date :
02/12/02 14:20:11
Well Name
Test well number 1
Test well number 1
X Curve
RHOB
RHOB
Y Curve
PHICORE
PHICORE
Top
7800.00
8300.00
Bottom
8300.00
8730.00
Discriminators
Data Points used :339
Y function of X linear regression
PHICORE = 1.015328643 - 0.343891436 * RHOB
R2 =
0.483892
X function of Y linear regression
PHICORE = 1.876137408 - 0.710678635 * RHOB
R2 =
0.483892
Advanced Regression Options

The following example demonstrates using the Advanced Regression Options.
From the Function Menu, Select Regression to display the Regression Analysis Dialog.
619
Senergy
Click the Advanced Button to Display the Advanced Options Dialog.
Click Close to Save the Regression File and Display the Regression Line in the Crossplot.
Senergy
620
The 'Advanced' features window of the Crossplot has similar features as to the 'Pressure Plot'
set-up window.
Multiple regression lines can be selected with different areas to be included or excluded
from the regression. The regression line and equation can be selected to be displayed by
using the check boxes 'Display Line' and 'Display Eqn'.
The 'Line Style' box opens up the Choose Line Style Dialog. The 'Width' of the line can
be altered by either using the up/down arrows or typing a number (between 1 and 10) into
the box.
621
Senergy
'Regression Type' is a drop down menu allowing the user to select between 'Linear', '
RMA', 'Robust', 'Poly 2nd', 'Poly 3rd', 'Poly 4th', 'Poly 5th', 'Exponential' and 'Power'
functions.
If the 'Inverse' box is ticked then the regression equation is inverted.
The 'Include / Exclude' box allows the user to specify which areas are to be included
within the regression analysis. This is used in conjunction with the 'Areas to select data
from' boxes.
'Areas to select data from' boxes are coloured according to the colour of the created
area on the Crossplot. The areas can be selected by 'clicking' on the box. If no boxes are
ticked then the regression will be applied to all the data points.
'Force Fit' applies to the 'Linear' regression options of 'Y=f(x)' and 'X=f(y)', the user can
optionally enter a point, in the 'Force fit' text-boxes, through which the regression line will
be forced.
The 'Show Key' brings up a 'Crossplot Key' window in which each regression line is listed with
the line type and colour plus the regression equation. This could then be cut and pasted into a
report.
Senergy
622
The 'Use mean point of area' if ticked will calculate the mean value of a selected area and then
uses this mean point in the regression calculation. The user can select between 'Arithmetic
Mean', 'Geometric Mean' and 'Harmonic Mean' for both the 'X' and 'Y' coordinates.
The 'Arithmetic Mean' is the sum of all the points divided by the number of points. Using
the arithmetic mean can lead to data skewing.
The 'Geometric Mean' is the nth root of the product of all members of the data set.
The 'Harmonic Mean' is the number of data set points divided by the sum of the
reciprocals of the points. The harmonic mean in certain situations, provides the correct
notion of 'average'.
It is possible to redefine the selected area by 'dragging' one of the area corner points to a new
position. 'Click' on 'Apply' and this then recalculates the area mean point and the new regression
line.
623
Senergy
The 'View Report' button allows the user to save the regression details to a text file (default
name is Regression.txt) in the well sub directory folder. This can then be pasted into a report.
To return to the main 'Regression Analysis' window from the 'Advanced' window 'click' on the
button again.
Viewing Regression Line Equations

The display of regression line equations on the Crossplot can be turned 'off' and 'on' from either:
the 'Options' tab on the Crossplot format window - 'Put regression line equation on plot',
or
the 'Display Equation Labels' 'check' box on the 'Regression Analysis' set-up window.
The placement of the equation line on the plot can be changed by placing the cursor on the first
letter of the equation line text (the cursor changes to a drag cursor) and dragging the text to a
different position. The equation line will appear on the hard copy output in approximately the same
position as it is displayed on the screen. The colour of the regression lines on the Crossplot can
be changed by clicking on the colour button to the right of each regression type. The user can
then select the colour of the line from the colour menu box.
More information about use of regression analysis in Petrophysics can be found in "Statistical
Regression Line-Fitting in the Oil and Gas Industry" by Richard (Dick) Woodhouse, 2002,
published as both e-book and hardcopy by PennWell Publishers.
Related Topics
Managing Crossplots
Senergy
624

8.3.5.2
To create a user-defined line on the Crossplot, select the 'Create User Line' menu option from
the 'Function' menu.
Within the 'User Line' module the following functions are available by clicking on the icons:
- Loads a user line formula from disc, if one has been saved.
- Saves a user line formula to disc. Default file extension is '.XUL' and the default file location
is the project directory.
- Deletes the currently selected user line formula.
- Edit the currently selected user line.
NOTE: If the line was created using the mouse then a message will appear telling the user to edit
the line by dragging the ends of the line.
- Sets the style, colour and thickness of the user defined line from the 'Choose Line Style'
module.
- Copies the selected user line formula to the clipboard. From the clipboard the user can
paste the equation into a document or directly into an IP User Formula.
625
Senergy
- Removes the user line label from the Crossplot window.

- Creates a user defined line by the user entering a formula into the text box. NOTE: in order
for the equation to be calculated, it must be written with the following syntax:
The equation should be typed in, excluding the 'Result' term - 'Y', for 'Y as a function of X', or
'X' for 'X as a function of Y'. For example 'Y=2.5*X - 3.5' would be written '2.5*X - 3.5'.
NOTE: use 'X' and 'Y', not the curve names used to set up the Crossplot.
- Creates a user line by using the mouse. With a left mouse 'click' on the Crossplot, drag the
mouse cursor to define a straight line in the graphical display. The line can be interactively moved
once displayed. The User line equation will update as the end-points are moved.
The equation for the line will be automatically displayed on the plot. To quickly clear all the user
defined lines off a Crossplot then select 'Function'
'Delete All User Lines'.
The position of the equation text on the Crossplot can be moved by 'hovering' the mouse cursor
over the character at the beginning of the text. The cursor should change to this
. The text
can now be dragged to a new position.

There is no limit to the number of user lines that can be created in any one session. Each time a
line is created it is added to the system memory. It is possible to recall these lines using the
'drop-down' button.
It is possible to close down the 'User Line' module and then re-open it without losing the unsaved-to-disc user-defined lines. However, if the Crossplot module is closed down then the unsaved user-defined lines will be cleared out of system memory and won't be available for
subsequent recall.
Related Topics
Managing Crossplots
Senergy
8.3.5.3
626
Crossplot Sections can be selected and displayed in a Log Plot using the new Crossplot to Log
Plot Tools. If a section of a Crossplot is selected the data can be displayed on the corresponding
Log Plot. NOTE: The Corresponding Log Plot must already be Open when selecting the section of
the Crossplot.
Ensure the Required Log Plot is Open.
To Select a section of the Crossplot, Click the Select Section Button on the Crossplot and
define the Crossplot Selection parameters, then Click the required section in the Crossplot
to Create the Selection Point. NOTE: The Select Points Checkbox MUST be Selected to
enable the Select Section Function.
The Log Plot will now display the Selected Section.
627
Senergy
NOTE: The Highlight Selection Button in the Log Plot Display is ACTIVE and will display the
Highlights for that SPECIFIC Log Plot. If the Highlights do not display in the Log Plot the
Highlight Selection Button in both the Crossplot and Log Plot MUST be Selected.
NOTE: The Highlight Selection Button in the Crossplot Window will display the Highlights on
ALL Open Log Plots.
Senergy
628
Multiple Selections can be made using the Select Section Button.
Selections can be removed by either; Clicking the Clear Points Button or by Selecting Clear
Points from the Function Menu. It is also possible to Clear a Selected Point by placing the
Cursor over the point and pressing either the Backspace Key or the Delete Key.
629
Place the Cursor over a Selection Point and Click and Drag to Move.
Related Topics
Managing Crossplots
Senergy
Senergy
630

8.3.5.4
The 'Zone/Well List' of the Crossplot window can be moved off the Crossplot in order to create
more space within the Crossplot window. 'Click' and 'drag' on the 'perforations' at the top of the '
Zone/Well List' to move to a more convenient place. Once moved off the Crossplot window the '
Zone/Well List' can be resized to suit.
To restore the 'un-docked' 'Zone/Well List' back onto the Crossplot window, 'click' the Close
Button in the top left corner of the 'Zone/Well List'.
631
Senergy
Related Topics
Managing Crossplots
8.3.6
Crossplot Types
Interactive Petrophysics has the ability to create a variety of Crossplots, which are briefly
described below.
3D Crossplots displays Curve Data in a 3-Dimensional Format. Cross Plots can be
toggled between 2-Dimensional Format and 3-Dimensional Format. However, the Crossplot
MUST have a Z Axis to be displayed and modified in 3D.
Frequency Crossplots displays curve data as Frequency distributions, either as
alphanumeric characters or as colour coded cells.
Pressure Gradient Plots displays Wireline Formation Tester pressure data and applies
'reference lines' to compare pressures versus depth , and hence fluid gradients and fluid
contacts.
Standalone Pickett Plot displays a Curve Data as a Double Logarithmic plot of a resistivity
measurement versus a porosity measurement.
Multi-Well Crossplots displays Curve data from Multiple Wells in a single Crossplot.
Multi-Curve Crossplots use a selected number of curves and quality checking the data . It
can be performed on one well or many wells (upto 500).
Multi-Zone Crossplots enable Curve Data to be displayed in a Crossplot for a specific Zone,
Senergy
632
Multiple Zones or All Zones in a Well.
Related Topics
Managing Crossplots
3D Crossplots
Frequency Crossplots
Pressure Gradient Plots
Standalone Pickett Plot
Multi-Well Crossplots
Multi-Curve Crossplots
Multi-Zone Crossplots
8.3.6.1
3D Crossplots
Crossplots with a 'Z axis' defined in the set up can be displayed in three dimensions by checking
the '3D' box on the Crossplot header. The following screenshot is an example of a 3D Crossplot.
3D Crossplots can be rotated left / right / up / down using the scroll bars on the bottom left hand
corner of the Crossplot display. Rotating the plot can also be performed by left mouse clicking on
the plot and holding and then moving the mouse up and down or left and right. The Crossplot will
633
Senergy
rotate with the mouse movements.

The X and Y axes scales can be moved by right mouse clicking and holding and then moving the
mouse up and down or left and right. The data will move across the axes with the mouse
movements. However this does not add data to the Crossplot that might have got clipped due to
the original scale values. It is best to go back into 'Edit Format' and change the original 'Scale'
values.
The Crossplot can be zoomed by using the Zoom scroll bar.
The Z-axis 'depth' of any overlay lines can be changed by using the 'Overlay Lines' scroll bar in
the bottom left-hand corner of the display.
No interactive functions are available for the 3D Crossplot. The user should return to 2D mode,
by 'un-checking' the '3D' check box to return to 'interactive' mode.
Related Topics
Managing Crossplots
3D Crossplots
8.3.6.2
The 'Frequency Crossplot' functionality enables the user to display curve data as Frequency
distributions, either as alphanumeric characters or as colour coded cells, as illustrated below.
Senergy
634
The user selects the Frequency Crossplot options either:

by 'checking' the 'Frequency Crossplot' box on the 'Scales' Tab of the Crossplot Dialog,
or
by selecting the 'Frequency Crossplot' option from the pop-up menu, which is activated by
'right-mouse button clicking' in the Crossplot graphical window.
635
Senergy
The 'Frequency Crossplot' Dialog is described below:
The 'Number of Columns and Rows' sets up the dimensions of the Frequency 'bins', in
terms of the input curve values, into which the Crossplot data will be divided.
Senergy
636
The 'Drop Value' is the 'Minimum Frequency' value that will be displayed on the Frequency
plot. For example, set to '1' means that every 'bin' containing 1 or more values will be
displayed. Applying a higher 'Drop value' removes from the display those data bins that
contain only a few points. A drop value of 4, for example, will display only those bins
containing 4 or more data points.
The 'Display as Symbols' radio button, when selected, will place an alphanumeric
character in each 'bin' where numbers 1 to 9 are assigned to bins which contain between 1
and 9 data points. Alphabetic characters ('a' to 'z') are assigned to bins which contain data
frequencies of between 10 and 35 points. Bins with data frequencies of greater than 35 are
displayed as a '#' symbol.
The 'Frequency' selector allows the user to further modify the data display. The entered
number is used to divide the bin frequency values by, to allow the visualization and
discrimination of bins containing high frequencies. A frequency of 2 will divide all bin
frequencies by '2' so that bins containing up to 70 values will have an alphanumeric
character assigned (70 divided by 2 = 35,symbol 'z'), rather than the '#' symbol. For multiwell Crossplots, where there may be many hundreds of points in each bin, setting '
Frequency' to a value of 50, for example, would allow visual discrimination of frequency bins
containing up to 1750 points.
The 'Display as Colour Cells' radio button, when selected, sets up a colour scale for the
frequency bins in the Crossplot. The user can assign a spectrum ('Use Spectrum') or
colour palette ('Use Palette') and use the 'slider bar' to optimise the number of colours
used to visualize the frequency data. An example is shown in the screen capture at the top
of this section.
NOTE: if a Crossplot data point lies on the border line of a data 'bin' then the point is
included in the 'Frequency' count for the next highest data bin, because the data point value
is counted as "> or equal to" the bin 'low value'.
To switch back to normal Crossplot viewing mode, close down the 'Frequency Crossplot'
menu and right click on the Crossplot and 'un-tick' the 'Frequency Crossplot' from the popup menu.
Related Topics
Managing Crossplots
3D Crossplots
637
Senergy
8.3.6.3
The 'Pressure Gradient Plot' is set up so that the user can tailor a standard Crossplot window
to display Wireline Formation Tester pressure data and apply 'reference lines' to compare
pressures versus depth , and hence fluid gradients and fluid contacts.
The user should select the pressure data (units should be 'psi' or 'bar') as the 'X Axis' and
DEPTH, TVD or TVDSS curves as the 'depth' curve (depending on well deviation and TVD
preference - KB or MSL) as the 'Y Axis'.
To activate additional functionality associated with the pressure versus depth plot, 'check' the '
Pressure Gradients' check box in the 'Crossplot Options' panel of the 'Scales' tab window.
Set up 'Zonal Depths' and check the 'Multi well Crossplot' option, if required. Click 'OK' to
display the Crossplot.
Senergy
638
Alternatively select Pressure Gradients from the Crossplot Function Menu.
The conventional Crossplot display will be initiated PLUS the 'Pressure Plot' Dialog., as shown
in the diagram below. This Dialog has three tabs; Regression Lines, Reference Lines, Line
Intersections.
'Regression Lines' tab

Pressure points can be analysed by using the Crossplot 'Areas' functionality. Additional control
over which points are displayed can be implemented by applying a 'Z Axis' curve or by the use
of 'Discriminators' which could, for example, be set to exclude low permeability points
639
Senergy
associated with the pressure dataset / using, for example, 'mobility' as a discriminator.
Use the 'Pressure Plot' module to set up regression calculations and associate 'Areas' with '
Regression Line' colours.
The user 'checks' the 'Display Line' check box to choose the regression lines to plot in the
Crossplot window.
The user 'checks' the 'Display Eqn' check box to display the regression / gradient line equation
in the Crossplot window. The display equation can be moved around the Crossplot window by
'hovering' the mouse cursor over the display equation until the mouse cursor changes from an
arrow to an arrow plus white rectangle. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the display
equation to a new position and release the left mouse button.
Senergy
640
The 'Line Style' for the regression (gradient) line is selected by 'clicking' the icon in the 'Line
Style' column. This launches the 'Choose Line Style' dialog box as illustrated above.
'Click' in the coloured cells in the 'Areas to select Data from' columns to link the 'Areas' and '
Regression lines'. The user can then either :
'check' the 'Fixed Grad' button and type in a pressure 'Gradient' value, or
Click the 'Calculate' icon to allow IP to calculate the regression line for the points in the
chosen area.
The user has the option to select from a number of 'Regression Types' from the drop-down list.
These are:
x = f (y)
x = RMA (y)
x = Robust fit (y) (the default type)
y = f (x)
Up to 6 regression lines can be calculated from digitized 'Areas'.
'Reference Lines' tab

The 'Reference Lines' tab provides the user with the facility to add further gradient lines to the
display.
641
Senergy
These could, for example, be used to display offset well pressure gradients and fluid contact
depths for comparison with the well data being analysed.
'Reference Lines' are defined by a gradient, in appropriate units, and an (x,y) coordinate through which the line passes. Line style can be selected from the 'Choose
Line Style' window.
Below is an example of a Pressure Plot with the References Lines crossing at the
Passing Thro' point defined in the Pressure Plot Dialog.
Senergy
642
'View Report' allows the user to save the Pressure gradient interpretation data. A pop-up
window prompts the user for a file name for the .txt file which will be saved to the external
wellXXX directory. The report for the Crossplot illustrated above is listed below:
643
Senergy
The pressure versus depth Crossplot format can be saved for future use by selecting the 'Save
Format' option from the 'File' menu.
'Line Intersections' tab

The 'Line Intersections' tab enables the user to add line intersection points to regression lines
and reference lines. The intersection points can be defined by selecting a line and then using the
drop-down boxes in the 'Clip Left To' and 'Clip Right To' to select available boundary lines. Or
by using these icons to select the clip point with the mouse cursor
- 'click' on this icon and then use mouse cursor to select left intersection point. This
will automatically fill in the 'Clip Left To' box with a value.
- 'click' on this icon and then use mouse cursor to select right intersection point. This
will automatically fill in the 'Clip Right To' box with a value.
Senergy
644
'Show Label' - 'checking' the appropriate row turns 'on' /'off' the regression line intersection
point label which appears on the Crossplot as a Pressure / depth pair of coordinates in
parentheses.
Below is an example of the 'Line Intersections' tab with Regression Lines 2 and 3 Clipped
to Regression Line 4.
The Intersection Points are where the Lines are Clipped to Regression Line 4.
Printing
645
Senergy
Crossplots can be sent to the clipboard for pasting into other applications for annotation. If the
user wishes not to have 'areas' displayed on the output image there is an option, found by
clicking the 'Edit Format' button to display the Crossplot Dialog, on the 'Options' tab, to 'Turn
off 'Areas' for output to clipboard'. This should be 'checked'.
In common with other Crossplot print options, the user can save the plot as an image (.emf) or
print directly to the IP default printer.
Related Topics
Managing Crossplots
3D Crossplots
Senergy
8.3.6.4
646
The 'Standalone Pickett Plot' can be accessed from the main Crossplot window. The
necessary Pickett Plot curves are required to be entered into the 'X' and 'Y' axes. Both the X
and the Y Axis MUST be defined as a LOG SCALE and have a value GREATER THAN
ZERO. NOTE: whatever porosity curve is used it MUST have its 'Curve Type' set to Porosity.
Or use 'Load Format'
'Project Defaults Crossplot'
'saturation'
'Pickett' to chose the
default Pickett plot.
'Clicking' 'Apply' causes the following screen to be displayed. Here it is possible to set up the
lines of equal Water Saturation and enter values of Rw, m, n, and a.
647
Senergy
The 'Lock' feature allows the Rw or m values to be fixed whilst the interactive line on the Pickett
plot plot is adjusted. Locking one value will allow only the other value to be adjusted and can be
used to prevent any rounding errors occurring as the line is moved.
The Rw values calculated and displayed in the 'Sw Pickett plot lines' screen or in the task bar of
the Crossplot window are at the formation temperature. NOTE: this temperature is the average
formation temperature in the zone being worked on and is from the inputted temperature curve.
The values of Rw, m, n and a are not fed through to any other IP module from the 'Standalone
Pickett Plot'.
The 'Sw Pickett plot lines' screen can be accessed by left mouse button clicking on the
Senergy
648
Crossplot to bring up the Crossplot menu and then selecting 'Sw lines for Pickett plot'.
Values of Rw, m, n and a can be manually entered into the 'Sw Pickett plot lines' screen and
the lines on the Crossplot will adjust accordingly. The undo/redo functionality becomes available
once the Sw parameter lines are adjusted. This allows the user to easily restore the pickett plot
to its original state.
Related Topics
Managing Crossplots
3D Crossplots
649
8.3.6.5
Senergy
A Multi Well Crossplot displays Curve data from Multiple Wells in a single Crossplot.
To define a Multi Well Crossplot. Open the Cross Plot Dialog
From the Cross Plot Dialog Select the Multi Well Crossplot Check Box, then Click Select
Wells and Curves to display the Crossplot Select Wells and Curves Dialog.
From the Crossplot Select Wells and Curves Dialog, Select the additional wells and curves
for the Crossplot. The same well and / or curves can be added many times if necessary.
NOTE: In the top row of the grid, the selected well is the current 'active' IP well'. The 'Plot
Well' 'tick' is locked in this row, so the well cannot be 'un-checked'.
'Well Name' : Enter the well(s) from which to add data to the Crossplot. By clicking on the '
Well Name' column header, all the wells currently loaded in memory will be added to the
column. The user can 'check' and 'uncheck' rows to change the well selection available for
Senergy
650
cross plotting. Alternatively, 'click 'in a blank 'Well Name' cell and choose an in-memory well
from the drop-down list.
'Plot Well' : Place a 'tick' in the box to add a well and its data to the Crossplot. Clicking in the
column header will toggle between turning 'on' / 'off' all data rows in the grid.
'Data Identification' : This is a user editable text box. Whatever is placed in this is
displayed on the Crossplot under the 'Well' list.
'X & Y Axis Curve Names' : Select the curve names for each axis of the Crossplot. Z axis
curve names are only necessary if a Z axis is to be displayed. By clicking in the 'X , Y, Z axis'
column headers the user can refresh the default curve name for each data line. The default
curve name will be the curve name shown in the top data row of the grid.
'Top Depth Bottom Depth' : The top and bottom depth can be changed to view part of a
well when the 'Interval Depths' option is selected on the Crossplot 'Scales' tab window.
'Discriminator Set' : By 'clicking ' in this column a drop-down list of all the available
discriminator sets appears. The discriminator sets are set up within the 'Discriminators'
tab. NOTE: to quickly change all the wells 'Discriminator Set', change the top well '
Discriminator Set' and then click on the 'Discriminator Set' header.
'Point Style' : The default symbol will be that of the 'Point Symbol' chosen on the 'Scales'
tab. The user can choose the style in which to plot the points for individual wells by
selecting a symbol from the drop-down list box at the end of each row. NOTE: to quickly
change all the wells 'Point Style', change the top well 'Point Style' and then click on the '
Point Style' header.
'Point Size' : The default size will be that of the 'Point Size' chosen on the 'Scales' tab.The
user can choose the size in which to plot the points for individual wells by selecting a size
from the drop-down list box at the end of each row.
'Point colour' : Choose the colour in which to plot the points from the drop-down box . This
will not be used if the 'Z axis colour' is set to be the zone colour or if the 'Z axis colour' is
set to another curve.
'Advanced Well Select' : launches the 'Select Wells' module in which the user can create,
save and retrieve well lists.
The 'Clear' button will clear all data from the input grid.
Click OK to return to the Crossplot Dialog. Click OK to Create the Multi Well Crossplot.
651
Senergy
NOTE: To remove the 'active well' from the Crossplot, simply deselect it from the well list,
found to the right hand side of the graphical display. The user can also toggle between a
single well and multi-well Crossplot format by Selecting or De-Selecting the 'Multi well
Crossplot' check box on the 'Scales' Tab of the Crossplot Dialog.
Related Topics
Managing Crossplots
3D Crossplots
8.3.6.6
The 'Multi-curve Crossplot' can be used for making up Crossplots using a selected number of
curves and quality checking the data . It can be performed on one well or many wells (upto 500).
Almost the same Crossplot functionality can be found within the 'Cluster Analysis' module.
To create a Multi-Curve Crossplot, From the View Menu, Select Multi-Curve Crossplot to
display the Multi-Curve Crossplot Dialog.
This displays all the curves cross-plotted against each other with the Z axis showing the clusters.
Senergy
652
The cluster mean points are displayed as filled circles. Histograms for each of the curves with all
of the data from the selected wells is also shown.
Related Topics
Managing Crossplots
Crossplot Types
Input Curves in Multi Curve Crossplot
Define Multi-Curve Discriminators
Define Multi-Curve Crossplot Scales
8.3.6.6.1 Input Curves in Multi Curve Crossplot
The user can select up to 500 wells and 8 curves plus a Z-axis curve to Crossplot in this tab. The
cells can be populated in a number of ways.
The user can set up their 'Curve Alias' table so that the correct curve is selected for each well.
Alternatively, they can use the drop-down curve list and select curves manually.
'Use Curve' - 'check' this column to select a curve. 'Clicking' on the Column Arrow will
select/deselect all the curves.
653
Senergy
'Default Name' column - Each 'Default Name' is automatically filled in the first time a curve
is selected for that row, and can be changed manually thereafter. The values in the 'Default
Name' cells are used as the default curve names when a new well is added to the grid.
When a new well is added, if the well contains curves that match the default names then
those curves are pre-selected for the user. This can be over-ridden if the user has 'Curve
Aliasing Mode' set to 'Manual' or 'Automatic'.
'Log' column - if 'checked' will take the base 10 logarithm of the curve before cross plotting.
'Well' column - in the top ('Well Name') row of the grid, the user selects the wells for cross
plotting.
'Input Curve' rows - contain the names of the curves that the user wishes to use for cross
plotting. The 'Input Curve' types should be the consistent for all wells. For example, all
gamma ray logs should be in the same row of the grid, all density log curves should be in
the same row of the grid. NOTE: Curve names can vary from well to well. You can use up to
eight input curves per well. 'Clicking' on the arrow next to the 'Input Curve'
after first entering a 'Default Name' and 'checking' the 'Use Curve' column will autopopulate all the selected wells in that row with the curve name associated with the 'Default
Name' curve type.
'Use Well for Xplot Build' - if this is 'checked' then the data from that well will be used in
the cross plot.
'Top Depth' and 'Bottom Depth' these rows are used to specify the depth interval over
which to cross plot in the subject well. The default depths are the log minimum and
maximum depths in the well. These depths can be changed with the 'Get Depths from
Zones' button, or by manually entering new values.
'Show Plot' - this button opens a log plot window for the appropriate well which shows all of
the input curves, each in a separate track.
Senergy
654
'Discriminator Crv1' and 'Discriminator Crv2' rows are used to input 'discriminator
curves', which can be used to further constrain the data displayed and also to restrict which
depth intervals to run the model over.
The 'Get Depths from Zones' button, in the bottom left-hand corner of the 'Input' tab,
launches a 'Select Depths' dialog. The 'Select Depths' dialog provides the user with an
alternative way of specifying the depth ranges. If the 'Full Well Range' box is 'checked' then
the 'Zone/Top Set', 'Top' and 'Bottom' boxes are grayed out as the full well range will be
used. To select zones then 'uncheck' the 'Full Well Range' box the user then has the option
to select a Zone/Tops Set from the drop-down list and use these depths in one well or in
multiple wells (click the 'All Wells' button).
The Advanced Well Select Button enables the selection of Wells from the Select Wells
Dialog. When the button is clicked a drop down menu is displayed, where the user has the
following options.
655
Senergy
The Add Wells option will Display the Select Wells Dialog to Select the required Wells for the
Multi-Curve Crossplot.
The Delete Current Wells option removes all the current wells, but leaves the Default curve
names and any model currently in use. This then allows a new group of wells to be easily
selected using the other options. Once loaded the current selected model can easily be
applied to them.
'Use Custom Plot Format' - if this is 'checked' then it allows the user to type in or browse
for a saved plot format that they wish to use.
'Multi-well Plot' - creates a multi-well plot, in the 'Well Correlation Viewer' module, of the
currently selected 'Use Well for Xplot Build' wells.
The 'Reset form' button clears all the user defined entries in the 'Input' tab of the module,
returning this tab to its default state.
The 'Load model' and 'Save model' buttons allows the loading and saving of models. A
model can also be saved using the 'Save Parameter Set' menu item.
Related Topics
Managing Crossplots
Crossplot Types
Senergy
656
8.3.6.6.2 Define Multi-Curve Discriminators
The 'DISCRIMINATORS' can be used for limiting the data for input into the model and also
limiting the interval over which to run the model.
Related Topics
Managing Crossplots
Crossplot Types
8.3.6.6.3 Define Multi-Curve Crossplot Scales
Within this tab the user can refine the scales of the curves that are going to be displayed in the
Crossplots. If the curve has a mnemonic that exists within theCPARMDEF.PAR file then the curve
will be displayed with its 'default' display characteristics. See 'Tools'
'Defaults'
'Edit Curve
657
Senergy
System Defaults' for more information on the CPARMDEF.PAR file.
If the user wishes to change their curve selection then they will have to go back to the 'Input'
tab to do this. The number of 'Z axis Colors' can be defined here. To view the 'Multi-curve
Crossplot' 'click' the 'Crossplot' button. Depending upon the number of wells and curves
selected then it can take a few seconds for the 'Multi-Curve Crossplot' window to populate.
Senergy
658
This displays all the curves cross-plotted against each other with the Z axis showing either the Z
axis curve or the well(s). There are also histograms of each of the curves with data included from
all the wells selected.
It is possible to increase or decrease the size of the Crossplots by using the buttons in the topleft of the module. If data falls outside the scales then a quick way of seeing the data is to hold
the cursor over a Crossplot and then drag, whilst holding down the right mouse button, the cursor
vertically - this changes the Y axis scale. If the right mouse button is held down and the cursor
dragged horizontally then the X axis is changed. Alternatively the scales for each curve can be
set in the 'Crossplot' tab.
To zoom in on a certain area of the Crossplot hold the left mouse button and drag the cursor over
the data that needs to be enlarged. A small white box will be drawn.
659
Senergy
Once the left mouse button is released the Crossplot resizes focussed in on the area of interest.
If the 'Wells Z Axis' box is 'checked', the 'Display Z Axis Colors' and colour bar become hidden
from view. By using the 'Show' check box it is possible to quickly select/deselect wells.
If the 'Auto Update' box is 'checked' then every change made occurs immediately. However, if
there are many curves and wells selected then the Crossplots could take time to refresh with the
changes. In this case in would be best to 'un-check' the 'Auto Update' box. If wells are now deselected, the 'Show' column for the de-selected well turns a peach colour.
Senergy
660
Only when the 'Update' button is 'clicked' do the changes take effect and the 'Show' column
changes back to white.
The 'Show Lower diagonal plots only' box is available to speed up the refresh of the screen
after any changes have been made. This is particularly needed if many wells and curves have
been chosen.
661
Senergy
'Clicking' on the 'Output' button gives the option of outputting the 'Multi-Curve Crossplot'
screen to
'Printer' - output goes directly to the users 'default' printer.
'Clipboard' - allows the user to paste the 'Multi-Curve Crossplot' screen to a Word,
PowerPoint or Excel document.
'File' - save the screen as an .emf, .bmp, .cgm, .gif, .jpg, .png, or .tif file in the project
folder.
Related Topics
Managing Crossplots
Crossplot Types
8.3.6.7
Crossplots can be created for Multiple Zones within a Well.

To define a Mutli Zone Crossplot. Open the Cross Plot Dialog
From the Cross Plot Dialog, Select the Zonal Depths Radio Button, Specify the required
Parameter Set and Active Zone to display in the Crossplot.
Senergy
Click OK to Display the Multi-Zone Crossplot.
Related Topics
Managing Crossplots
662
663
3D Crossplots
Senergy
Senergy
8.4
664
3D Parameter Viewer
The 3D Parameter Viewer and 3D Visualization provides a versatile, interactive, graphical

representation of the selected well data and can output results from any Interpretation module
within Interactive Petrophysics v3.6. The 3D Visualization Window enables calculated reservoir
parameters, for example Porosity and Water Saturation, Net Reservoir and Net Pay Thickness
for all wells or for selected wells in an Interactive Petrophysics v3.6 database. Deeper
investigation and Data Examination, for example Rw, Wet Clay Density, m, n, used in Porosity
and Water Saturation can be completed on a field-wide basis.
Using the 3D Parameter Viewer enables the comparison of parameter values across different
Interactive Petrophysics modules, or in the same module after different Interpretations have been
run.
The 3D Parameter Viewer is arranged over 3 separate Tabs, Well Selection, Parameter
Selection and Define 3D View, providing a logical sequence to producing a 3D Visualization.
Select the Required Well
Specify 3D Viewer Parameters
Define 3D Viewer Settings
View the 3D Visualization
Data can be viewed on a single-zone (row) basis or can be combined to provide composited
(Multiple row) averaged or summed results. These options can be used, for example, to view
average porosity across a number of reservoir zones or to view total net pay thicknesses over a
number of zones.
Note: The tool is not a 'mapping' application and does not produce output such as 'grids' that
can be used in other applications.
Note: Wells should have location data (Lat. / Long. or UTM E / N), and in the case of deviated
wells - deviation surveys, loaded to Interactive Petrophysics. (See Manage Well Header Info.
) in order to display data points in correct spatial position relative to adjacent wells.
Section 8.4 View Well and Curve Data : 3D Parameter Viewer
665
Related Topics
3D Visualization Examples
Senergy
Senergy
8.4.1
666
The first step to viewing well data as a 3 Dimensional Model is to Select the Required Well.
1. From the View Menu, Select 3D Parameter Viewer to display the 3D Parameter Viewer
Window.
NOTE: It is important for the correct spatial distribution of the wells and parameters in the
3D view, that wells have valid Locations (Lat /Long or UTM) and, if deviated, have deviation
surveys loaded to Interactive Petrophysics v3.6.
The Surface Location Information can be
entered manually into the Position Tab of the Manage Well Header Info Dialog. Well
Deviation Survey Data can be loaded by selecting True Vertical Depth from the Calculation
Menu.
667
Senergy
2. Select the required wells and ensure all TVD Curves are specified for the selected wells.
3. Click Next to display the Parameter Selection Tab and Specify the 3D Viewer Parameters.
Related Topics
8.4.2
Once the required well is selected, the Parameter Selection Tab in the 3D Parameter Viewer is
displayed. The Parameter Selection tab enables the definition of the Parameter Sets and
associated Parameters to be viewed in the 3D Viewer. Wells appear in the Parameter Selection
Tab in a Tabular Grid display, sorted by Zone Name, Depths and Values.
1. From the Parameter Set Drop Down Menu, Select the required Parameter Set to display the
list of available Parameters in the Parameter to View Drop Down Menu.
2. From the Select Parameter to View Drop Down Menu, Select the required Parameter.
3. Click either the Well Header, the Zone Name or the Individual Well Zones to Select the
Senergy
668
required Well Zones.

Note: Clicking an individual cell, selects a single Well Zone, Clicking the Well Header,
selects all Zones for the Selected Well and Clicking the Zone Header selects all Wells for
the selected Zone.
Note: Comparison of Parameters can be done per zone or by selecting multiple rows.
Values can be Summed or Averaged by Selecting either Averaged Values or Summed
Values. For example: the Total (Sum) Net Pay for All Wells, or Average Porosity/Water
Saturation for a Range of Zones.
Note: When the Auto-Refresh button is selected, any modifications to the Well / Zone Grid
will be saved to the 3D Viewer, once the initial 3D View has been executed.
Related Topics
669
8.4.3
Senergy
The Define 3D View tab enables the definition of the properties of the graphical representation
displayed in the 3D Viewer.
1. From the Z Axis and Contours section and the Colour Scale, specify either Depth or
Parameter.
Note: When Depth is selected the Scale Text Boxes display Shallow Value and Deep Value
and are populated with the minimum and maximum depths of the selected data range.
These values can be entered manually and Saved by selecting Keep My Scale.
Note: When Parameter is selected the Scale Text Boxes display Min Value and Max Value
and are populated with the minimum and maximum values of the selected Parameter
Senergy
670
range. These values can be entered manually and Saved by selecting Keep My Scale.
Note: Contour Spacing is set to a default nominal value which can be user-defined and
saved by Clicking Keep My Scale.
2. Click Save to Save the 3D Visualization parameters for each 3D Plot, (saved as a *.p3d
file).
Click Load to open a *.p3d file and Load the parameters into the 3D Parameter Viewer
dialog.
3. Once the 3D View Settings have been defined, Click Run Visualization to display the
selected wells in the 3D Visualization Window.
671
Senergy
Related Topics
8.4.4
The 3D Visualization Window displays a 3-dimensional graphical representation of the well data.
1. Click and Drag the Visualization to rotate.
2. Select the required Colour Spectrum from the Spectrum Drop Down Menu
Senergy
672
3. Select Show Contours to display or remove the contours from the 3D Visualization.
4. Increase the Thickness Value to increase the line thickness of the displayed contours.
5. Click Show Well Labels and Select either Names, Values, or Names and Values to display
the Well Labels in the 3D Visualization.
Note: The Well Labels Radio Buttons are only active when Show Well Labels is selected.
6. Click Show Grid Lines to display the rectangular grid lines that define the depth or
parameter surface.
Note: The 3D Grid dimensions are defined in the 3D Parameter Viewer dialog, Define 3D
View Tab. When edited in the 3D Parameter Viewer dialog, the changes will be displayed in
the 3D Visualization.
7. Click Show Whole Well Path to display the entire well path and it's orientation within the
selected Depth Scale.
Note: The Show Whole Well Path is only active if the Z Axis in the 3D Parameter Viewer
dialog is set to Depth. By default, well paths are truncated at the intersection of the well and
the Depth or Parameter surface.
673
Senergy
8. Click 3D View mode to display the Visualization as a 3-Dimensional Graphical

Representation. If this Check Box is not selected the Visualization will be displayed as a 2Dimensional Map.
9. Click Setup to display the 3D Parameter Viewer - Output Setup dialog.
Note:This dialog enables the addition of Titles for the 3D Visualization.

Note: The Plot Size dimensions will set the size of any clipboard image to the Height and
Width Settings.
Note: The default font for the Title and Annotation can also be defined.
10.Click Clipboard to copy the current 3D Visualization to the clipboard for use in other
applications.
Click Print to send the 3D Visualization to the Interactive Petrophysics default printer (File
Menu, Printer Setup).
Related Topics
Senergy
8.4.5
Below are some examples of 3D Visualization in Interactive Petrophysics v3.6.
Z axis Depth / colour Scale Depth
Z Axis Depth / colour Scale Parameter (Net Pay)
674
675
Z Axis Parameter / colour Scale Parameter (Net Pay)
Senergy
Senergy
Z Axis Parameter / colour Scale Parameter (net Pay)
676
677
Related Topics
Senergy
Senergy
8.5
678
The 'Multi-Well Correlation Viewer' module provides the user with an interface to view multiple
wells and to plot correlation lines between wells held in an IP database.
Zone tops can be displayed and edited and wells can be 'datumed' (Flattened) on a zone top
or to a reference depth by simple 'mouse click' operations.
Wells can be added or removed from the display window and moved around within the
multi-well viewer.
Multi-well plot formats can be saved into the database directory for easy recall and redisplay. Plots can be output to the clipboard for pasting into external documents or can be
sent directly to available printers.
Section 8.5 View Well and Curve Data : Multi-Well Correlation Viewer
679
8.5.1
Senergy
The 'Multi-Well Correlation Viewer' is launched by selecting the 'Multi-Well Correlation

Viewer' menu item under the 'View' menu, or by using the speed button (
).
Up to 10 multi-well plots can be displayed simultaneously. Each multi-well view can display up to
50 wells. However, there is an overall display limit of 250 individual well plots.
The multi-well viewer uses 'Zone / Tops Sets' (tops) to draw correlation lines and shading
between the wells in the view window. The same 'Zones / Tops' Set should be available in all
wells in order to draw the correlation lines between the wells. The module uses the 'Zone Name'
to decide which zones correlate between wells. It is therefore essential that a consistent naming
convention is used. The module does not distinguish between upper and lower case characters,
therefore 'C zone' and 'c Zone' would be considered to be the same.
In the Multi-Well Correlation viewer the user can create a new Zone / Tops Set, then interactively
create, move or delete zone tops in that Set. Alternatively, the user can select an existing multiwell Zone / Tops Set, make a copy of it and perform the same operations on that Set.
When the Multi-Well Correlation Viewer window launches, the user uses the header bar buttons
to set up and modify the correlation viewer display.
The Buttons are:

'Wells'
'File'
'Settings'
'Options'
The functionality associated with each button is described below.
Creating, editing and re-naming tops in this module is covered in the 'Editing Tops in the Multiwell Correlation Viewer' Section.
A 'New Correlation workflow' is presented at the end of this chapter.
'Wells' Button
The user must first select the wells to be displayed.
Click on the 'Wells' button and, in the 'Select Wells' dialog, move the wells to be displayed from
the 'Available Wells' column to the 'Selected Wells' column. The 'arrow' buttons allow the user
to move wells between the 'Available Wells' and 'Selected Wells' panels. It is also possible to
'left mouse click' on a well name and drag it to the opposite panel while holding down the mouse
button. The order, from top to bottom, in which the selected wells appear in the 'Selected Wells'
Senergy
680
list will be the order, left to right, in which they are displayed in the Multi-Well Correlation Viewer
display.
Click 'OK' to display the wells in the plot. At this stage only the well names and tops and bottom
depths will be displayed.
681
Senergy
To display a Zone Set 'click' on the 'Zone Set' drop-down list box and select a Zone / Tops Set to
use. The zone tops and bottoms will be displayed in the window, together with any zone colours
scheme that has been set up in the 'Edit Zone / Tops Set' module. A number of interactive
'handles/markers' and menus are available in the Correlation window to allow the user to modify /
create / delete zones in the correlation viewer.
The user can 'datum' the multi-well view on a zone top, at an arbitrary depth ('Align Reference
Depth') or at a user-selected depth ('Set Align Depth'). These are illustrated in the following
screen capture.
Senergy
'Checking' the 'Fit' check box in the correlation viewer header bar will force all wells to be
displayed in the plot window. If 'Fit' is not 'checked', the wells will be displayed at their proper
width and the user will have to scroll left and right to display all wells.
682
683
Senergy
In the display shown above the 'Tops' set is being used for the correlation. The plot is depthaligned on the top 'Ness' Zone. The vertical scale has been expanded to make the zone names
legible.
The 'Tops Only' check box allows the user to toggle between a 'Tops Only' display (illustrated
above) and a 'Log Plot' view. To view the Log Plot display 'uncheck' the 'Tops Only' check box.
In this case the 'default' log plot format for each well will be displayed.
To display all wells in the correlation panel with a common plot format, use the 'File'
'Load
Single Well Format to all Wells' option, which copies a user-selected log plot format to all wells
in the window.
'Overview' tracks can be displayed for each well. However, these can often detract from the
overall plot appearance and it is suggested that a plot format, without an overview track, is used.
Overview tracks can be turned 'off' from the 'Options' menu
'Hide all overview tracks'.
Senergy
684
To edit an individual well plot format, click in the track header of the well you wish to change. The
normal 'Log Plot Format' window will appear. To get access to the grid properties click the 'All
tracks' button on this window. This will also allow you to load a saved log plot format for that
specific well. This will only affect the well being worked on.
Editing Tops in the Multi-Well Correlation Viewer
Interactive Changing of Tops

There are two methods for changing zone tops interactively.
1. If a zone track is displayed in a well then its zone tops and bottoms can be interactively
changed in the same way as the normal single well plot (click on, and drag).
2. With the Ctrl key held down place the cursor on one of the correlation lines in between
plots next to the well for which you want to change the zone top. The cursor will change to
an up-down pointer. 'Click and drag' the zone top to the new position.
Re-Naming Tops
Place the mouse cursor on one of the correlation lines between two wells, next to the well that
685
Senergy
you want to rename a zone top. The cursor will change to a 'pointing hand'. A right mouse 'click'
will bring up the following dialog box. Using this dialog you can choose whether to rename the
well top in the left- or right -hand well, or bring up the 'Create/Edit Zone Link' window by
selecting 'Properties'.
If the 'Rename Left Side' or 'Rename Right Side' option is 'clicked' then the 'New Zone Name'
window appears.
If you rename a Top, the correlation will no longer be valid, since you have broken the
'connection' between adjacent wells. The correlation line will be deleted.
Linking Tops
Un-named tops or tops with different names can be linked so that a common 'Top' name is used.
This is done by 'clicking' on the 'Zone Top' marker (small green square) and dragging the top line
Senergy
686
to the next well to the 'Top' that is to be linked. When the mouse button is released the 'Create/Edit
Zone Link' window (see above) will appear, allowing the user to set the name for the top and
therefore link the tops.
Adding New Tops

To add a new zone to a well where no zone previously existed, hold the 'Ctrl' key down and right
mouse 'click' in the grey area between wells next to the well where the zone is to be created.
Select the 'New Zone' pop-up menu item and the new zone will be created. The new zone has a
top and bottom depth. The bottom depth can be changed by holding the 'Ctrl' key down and then
placing the cursor on the zone bottom marker and dragging the line to a new depth.
687
Senergy
Deleting Tops / Splitting Zones

To delete or split a zone, hold the 'Ctrl' key down and right mouse click in the grey area between
wells next to the well where the zone is to be deleted or split. Select the required function from the
pop-up menu .
Changing Zone associated with analyses modules

If the selected Zone Set is not of type 'Tops', for example from the 'PhiSw' interpretation module
(the zone Set type is displayed in brackets next to the zone name) then every time a zone top or
bottom is moved, the analysis routine associated with the Set will automatically be run. This can be
very useful if the user uses the multi-well Correlation module to align analysis tops so that similar
parameters are used in the same zones in each well in a field.
'File' Button
The 'File' button allows the user to save and restore (Load) multi-well formats (Wells / well
order / plot formats) as well as providing the facility to load a single well format to all wells in the
multi-well plot. This last function is very useful for applying an identical plot format to all wells in
the display. A format can be created in a single well and then saved to disk using the 'Save Plot
Format Generic' menu option, this can then be recalled from the multi-well plot 'File' menu and
used for all wells.
When the user saves a particular cross section format and then recalls/loads the format file (.
Senergy
688
wmp), the name of the format/cross section panel is displayed in the multi-well panel header bar,
in parentheses after the Multi-Well Correlation label, in the top left-hand corner, as illustrated
below:
'Settings' Button
Click the 'Settings' button to open up the 'Multi-Well Settings Format' window. This window
allows the user to change the overall format of the wells in the correlation panel. The user can
change a number of display parameters and zone colour shading. The Settings are arranged on
two 'tabbed' screens. These are :
'Wells' and
'Zones'.
689
Senergy
The 'Wells' Tab
'Trk # ': This column shows the order in which the selected wells will be displayed in the
Correlation window. 'Clicking and dragging' on a track number in the 'Trk #' column, will
allow the order of the wells in the plot to be re-arranged.
'Well Name' : This column allows the user to change or remove wells from the plot.
Wells can be changed by clicking on a 'Well Name' entry in the grid and selecting a
different well name from the drop-down well list. A well can be removed by clicking on a
Well Name in the grid and selecting the 'blank' entry in the well name list. A well can be
added more than once to the correlation plot.
'Width' : This column shows the width of each well log plot in the correlation panel, in IP
project 'default units' (inches or cm).
'Gap' : This column shows the width of the gap that is set between wells in the correlation
panel (inches or cm).
'Top Depth' : Enter the top depth for the well. This is the well measured depth,
regardless of what curve is used as the 'Ref Depth'. The 'Default' value is well 'Top
Depth'.
'Bot Depth' : Enter the bottom depth for the well. The 'Default' value is the well 'Bottom
Depth'.
Senergy
690
'Ref Depth' : Enter the Depth reference curve name from the drop-down list. The
Depth Reference curve will be used to align the wells in the correlation panel. This can
be set to DEPTH (Measured Depth) or to TVD / TVDSS (True Vertical Depth) for all wells
in the display. NOTE: IP will warn you if you select, for example, wells which have
TVDSS curves in a mix of 'positive' and 'negative' depth notation. TVDSS curves must
ALL be in a common positive' or 'negative' notation.
'Define' : Click the 'Define' button to set the well display depths from the selected 'Zone/
Top Set' tops and bottoms. This will display the 'Select Plot Range' window, similar to
that illustrated below:
The 'Select Plot Range' window allows wells to be displayed using depths picked from
the current Tops Set.
Select the 'Top' and 'Bottom' from the drop-down boxes.
The 'Tolerance' column is used to modify the log display relative to the selected top
depths. In the above example, for 'Well A1', the data will be displayed 100 ft/meters
shallower ('minus' notation) than the 'RN36 (Top)' and 100 ft/meters deeper than the '
Bottom' of the 'RN12 (Bottom)'.
The 'Full Well Range' box, if 'checked', will set the depths to the full well range for the
selected well.
The 'All Wells' button, if clicked, will apply the 'Select Plot Range' criteria to all wells
currently loaded in the multi-well panel display. This allows the user to quickly make a plot
over a selected zonal range for all wells.
The 'Ok' button will set the depths for all the displayed well.
'Default Widths' : The 'Default widths' box on the 'Multi-Well Settings Format'
window, allows the user to set the same 'Well Gap' and 'Well Width' for all wells.
'Set Ref. Depth Curve for all Wells' : this option gives the user a shortcut to set the
depth reference curve for all wells in a multi-well correlation. The user can select TVD or
Measured Depth (MD) options. The program will find the relevant curve in every well in
the correlation, if the curve exists.
The 'Zones' Tab
691
Senergy
The 'Zones' tab sets up the display criteria for the area between wells. The window shows a list
of the Zone names in the user-selected Zone Set, the number of wells ('No Wells') in which each
zone is present in the display and a Zone colour selection column. A number of check boxes that
affect the correlation view are described below:
'Hide Shading' check box : If the 'Hide Shading' box is not 'checked' (the default setting)
then the inter-well gaps will be shaded with the colours shown in the colour table. The
user can change the colours as needed.
'Hide Zone Markers' check box : The 'Hide Zone Markers' option, if 'checked', will
remove the small square zone markers which are shown to the sides of each well in a
correlation panel. This option allows the user to 'clean up' a correlation display before
printing or copying to the clipboard for pasting into other applications.
'Show Zone Names above Zone Tops' : if 'un-checked' will remove the zone names
from above the zone correlations.
'Set Zone colours in Wells' check box : if 'checked', this option allows the user to save
any changes they make to the zone colours in the multi-well display, back into the Zone
Set that was selected when setting up the correlation viewer.
Senergy
692
'Options' Button
The 'Options' button launches a number of display controls that affect all wells in a correlation
view, simultaneously.
'Hide All Overview Tracks' : This will remove from the well plots any overview track
which has been included in the plot format. The overview track is generally not useful in
the correlation plot.
'Add a Zone Track to all Wells - Names only' : This will add a zone track, containing
the currently-selected Zone Set, to the left hand side of all well plots. This can be useful
for changing zone tops.
'Add a Zone Track to all Wells - Colour Zones' : This will add a zone track, containing
the currently-selected Zone Set and colour coded (as set up in the 'Edit Zones /Tops
Sets' module), to the left hand side of all well plots in the correlation view.
'Remove Zone track from all Wells' : This removes the zone track from all wells in a
correlation view, if the Zone tracks are present as the left-hand track in each log plot.
'Add Zones / Tops lines to all Tracks': This will add horizontal lines across each log
track in each log plot, using the currently-selected Zone Set. The following dialog box will
allow the user to select the colour of the lines.
'Remove Zone / Tops lines from all Tracks' : This reverses the 'Add Zones / Tops
693
Senergy
lines to all Tracks' operation.

'Create a New Zone / Tops Set for selected wells' : This allows the user to create a
new multi-well Tops Set in the wells in the correlation panel in order to start a new
correlation. The following dialog allows the user to choose the name of the Tops Set.
'Add this Zone Set to all selected wells' : This is useful if one wants to add a new well
into a correlation and then to correlate between it and surrounding wells. This option,
when selected, will add the current Zone Set into the new well.
'Create a copy of the selected Zone / Tops Set' : This will make a copy of the currentlyselected Zone Set and make this copy the 'active' Zone Set. This is useful if the user
wants to edit the current correlation but does not want to overwrite the existing correlation
zones.
'Change Track Border Width All Wells' : This option, if selected, allows you to change
the line thickness used to define log track boundaries on each log plot. The line thickness
change is applied to all wells in the correlation panel. The default line thickness is set to
'2'. Thicker border lines can be achieved by typing in a higher value and clicking 'OK'.
Output to Printer or File
Senergy
By clicking on the print button
694
the plot can be output to a printer, the Clipboard or to a
graphics file. The same options are available as for the single well plot output, except that plot
depths are now set up in the multi-well plot 'Settings' window and horizontal, log track depth grid
lines can be set up for each well.
The 'Advanced' tab allows you to set up further 'hardcopy' options. These are described below:
695
Senergy
In the 'MultiWell' Panel on the 'Advanced' tab, highlighted above, the user is able to select one,
or more, of the following options:
'Hide Shading' - 'Ticking' this option will remove any Zone shading, that may be visible
inside IP, from between the wells in the multi-well panel on the hardcopy output.
'Hide Zone Markers' - 'Ticking' this option will remove the Zone Tie symbols, the small,
dark green markers on the sides of each well log, from the hardcopy output.
'Plot Well Name Header just above well plot' - 'Ticking' this option will 'anchor' the '
Well Name' title box to the top of each individual well log plot, rather than to the top of the
Correlation panel.
'Plot Well Header at bottom of log' - 'Ticking' this option will put a 'Well Name' title box
at the bottom of the correlation Panel. If 'Plot Well Name Header just above well plot'
is also 'checked', the title boxes on the bottom of the panel are 'anchored' to the base of
Senergy
696
each individual log plot.
New Correlation Workflow

The following workflow is one way in which a new correlation could be made.
1. Create a Multi-well correlation and load all wells in the correlation into it ('Wells' button).
2. Load a simple correlation log plot for each well. 'File'
'Load a Single Well Format to
all Wells' and display the log plots ('Tops Only' 'un-checked').
3. Create a new Tops Set for all wells. ('Options'

selected wells').
'Create a New Zone / Tops Set for
697
Senergy
4. Add the Tops to each well plot as lines. ('Options'

'Add Zone / Tops lines to all
Tracks'). A confirm message appears which also allows the user to select the colour of the
Tops lines.
5. In the first well, create a new zone and drag its top and bottom depth to cover the total
correlation interval. The top should be aligned to the top zone in the correlation. NOTE: the
green solid rectangle is the zone marker; the yellow solid rectangle is for guidance
purposes only. Therefore tops can only be drawn between green solid rectangles. If the
green rectangles don't exist then 'Ctrl' right click and 'Split Zone' to create new zones
between the green solid rectangle and the yellow solid rectangle.
6. In the second well, create another new zone and align as in the first well.
Senergy
698
7. Link and name the top correlation. Click on the left-well top marker and drag it to the rightwell top marker.
8. Create the next zone down by splitting the upper zone. Do this for both left and right
wells.
699
Senergy
9. Name and link the next zone by dragging the left-well top marker to the right-well top
marker as done in step 7.
10. The correlation can be continued in the same way by splitting zones and linking
markers. When the first two wells are correlated then the user can move on to the next well
using exactly the same methodology until the whole correlation has been built up.
Senergy
700
701
8.6
Senergy
Well Map
The 'Well Map' is a graphical interface where wells can be viewed together with geographical
and cultural information loaded into IP from external SHAPE, .OVL or .DAT files. The interface
allows users to identify and discriminate between wells that are in the database but not loaded
into memory ("Available Wells") and in-memory ("Loaded Wells") based on symbol colours.
NOTE: IP only recognizes Latitude and Longitude values that use the WGS84 datum. A 'datum'
is the combination of an ellipsoid, which specifies the size and shape of the earth, and a base
point from which the latitude and longitude of all other points are referenced. Well location
coordinates based on one datum will not necessarily overlay data based on another
datum. For example, entering Latitude and Longitude coordinates using any other datum, e.g.
ED50, will not compute a correct UTM Easting / Northing for a well, since the IP Geographical to
rectangular coordinates conversion assumes values are input as WGS84.
Geographical coordinates are entered for a well, using the appropriate text entry boxes on the '
Position' tab of the 'Manage Well Header Info.' module.
The 'Well Map' interface is launched from the 'View' menu or from the 'Project' toolbar.
The 'Well Map' enables the user to view an often extensive IP well list to either:
load wells individually into memory, or
load multiple wells into memory at one time by dragging a box around the wells in the
graphical display and selecting 'Load'.
'Available Wells' (those wells included in the current IP project, but not loaded into memory) and
Section 8.6 View Well and Curve Data : Well Map
Senergy
702
'Loaded Wells' (in-memory) are distinguished by their symbol colours and the text colour in the '
Well List' panels;
Fuschia coloured symbols on the map and Maroon coloured names in the 'Available
Wells' panel for 'non-loaded IP Project' wells,
Blue coloured symbols on map and Blue coloured names in 'Loaded Wells' panel for 'inmemory', and therefore 'active' wells.
The size of the well symbol indicates whether a well has a deviation survey loaded for it, or not.
A well which does not have a deviation survey loaded to IP will display with a smaller colour-filled
circle than a well which has a deviation survey loaded to the program. The symbol colour
denotes 'in-memory' or 'available', as described above.
NOTE: wells must have a 'Well Position' entered in the 'Position' tab of their respective 'Well
Header Info.' editors (diagram below), before they will appear on the 'Well Map'. The 'default'
position for a well with no position loaded is Latitude 0 degrees / Longitude 0 degrees. Also, in
order to be able to see deviated well paths, a deviation survey must have been processed
through the 'True Vertical Depth' module for each well, or alternatively 'Departure' curves ('
EDIST' and 'NDIST') must be loaded into the well and then be selected in the 'Well Path' panel
703
Senergy
as illustrated below.
In the 'Manage Well Header Info..' window the 'Well Surface Positions' can be entered as
either :
Latitude/Longitude (WGS84 datum) as Degree, Minutes and Seconds (DMS),or
Latitude / Longitude as Decimal Degrees (DD), or
UTM Eastings and Northings (UTM Zone must be known).
The user can convert Lat/Long (DMS or DD) to UTM co-ordinates and vice versa by clicking on
the UTMs/Lat-Long radio buttons.
When changing from Lat/Long to UTM co-ordinates, IP will calculate the UTM Zone value from
the current Longitude value.
The user must 'check' one of the 'Well Path Data Format' radio buttons to tell IP how to interpret
the 'East Distance Curve' and 'North Distance Curve' when they have been loaded to the
program or computed within IP.
Screen Navigation Controls
Senergy
704
'Pan or drag screen' : Click the red arrows to scroll the screen display in the direction of the
arrow, or 'click & drag' the mouse cursor on the actual map display to position the display
where you want it.
'Zoom' : 'Click and drag' the slider button to change the magnification level. The zoom
scale range is: 'Minimum' - 6000miles, to 'Maximum' - 8 metres.
A range scale bar is shown on the bottom of the screen to aid distance measurements. The
same 'zoom' operation is performed by rotating the mouse-wheel when the cursor is in the
map display area.
'Font Size' : Use the 'Font Size' buttons to change the size of the text displayed on screen.
Well Position Display

'Well Names' : 'check' to display the well name at the wells' surface location.
'Show at end of Path' : for platform wells, well names plotted at the surface location will
overwrite and be illegible. 'Checking' the 'Show at end of Path' button will display the well
name at the bottom hole location.
'Well Paths' : Well path information are stored as 'East' and 'North' curves in IP wells.
These curves are calculated in the 'True Vertical Depth' module or they are imported from
external data. The user must choose these 'departure' curves in the 'East Distance' and '
North Distance' curve drop-down boxes in the 'Manage Well Header Info.' module - '
Position' tab.
705
Senergy
For depth correction, a TVD curve may also be selected. The 'TVD Type' selection allows
you to set the type of TVD curve. Well paths will be shown on the 'Well Map' if the user
zooms in to a suitable scale, and has 'checked' the 'Display'
'Well Path' option box.
Cultural Data Overlays

Adding overlays to a well location map improves the visual quality of the map. Overlay files can
be standard GIS Shape (*.SHP) files, or ASCII (.DAT) and (.OVL) formatted data. The Field
outlines shown in the map above are part of a GIS Shape file drawn in light yellow as a 'Polygon',
see the section on 'Display Options' below for setting this up.
Click the 'Load' button to load an overlay file.
Find Text
The 'Find Text' text-entry box allows the user to type in a text string, for example a 'Well name',
and IP will locate the well and centre the map on that well. If a text field is associated with a
SHAPE file, for example 'Block Number', then you can enter a Block Number into the 'Find Text'
box, click 'Find' and the Map will centre on the 'Block Number', if it is found.
Web Resources
Many useful web sites containing free Shape files exist. A few useful sites for extracting
coastline and other geographical data from are found at :
http://oas.ngdc.noaa.gov/mgg/plsql/extractor.search_screen
http://www.esri.com
For UKCS cultural Information, Shape files can be downloaded from the DEAL website at:
http://www.ukdeal.co.uk/
Files downloaded from this site can simply be re-named with a '.OVL' file extension and used
directly as a map overlay.
'Right-click' on a map overlay label to activate the pop-up parameter menu.
Draw Sequence and Overlay Priority

Overlays are drawn on the map in the order listed on screen, from bottom to top. In the screen
capture shown below the 'licgeo.shp' file will be drawn first and the 'IP WELLS' will be drawn last,
on top of everything else. The user can move an overlay up / down the display order to achieve
the best visual result.
Senergy
706
'Show overlay text' : GIS Shape files (*.SHP) usually have associated database files
containing relevant textual information. When loading a SHP file the user is asked to choose
one or more of these text fields. Selecting 'Show Overlay Text' will show the text on
screen at the position defined in the database. NOTE: .DAT & .OVL files do not contain any
textual information.
'Set colour': Use this setting to choose the colour of the lines for your overlay.
'Change UTM Zone' : .DAT files are written using UTM coordinates, as such, a UTM zone
is required before they can be correctly imported. If you used the wrong zone during the
import process, this option allows you to change the zone and therefore the position of the
overlay.
'Draw as filled Polygon' : Sequential points making up a closed shape lend themselves for
display as polygons. A polygon is another way to describe a closed-outline shape with many
points. Polygons can be colour-filled (as in the screen shot above) and look nicer on screen.
The inside of a polygon shape is your chosen colour and the outline will always be drawn in
black. The disadvantage with polygons is they must be closed shapes and drawn in a
sequential manner, strange results will be seen if your overlays are not proper polygons.
Select this option to see if your file will display properly as a polygon, if not, de-select this
option.SHP files are sometimes best shown as polygons.
'Change text fields' : Allows the user to change the text associated with each point as
described in 'Show overlay text', above. Use this option to add or remove any available text
fields. Text Fields are only available for .SHP files where a DBF file is present.
The following descriptions show the format for allowed polygon files:
.DAT file format
707
Senergy
The valid ASCII DAT file format is as follows:x, y, segid

409349.77,
409258.76,
409319.43,
409440.78,
6836961.80,
6837295.51,
6837811.23,
6838266.29,
1
1
1
1
etc...
The first line is ignored.
The positions are in UTM co-ordinates. IP will ask you for a UTM Zone number when you load
files of this type.
Column 3 is the Segment ID ('segid'). Segments (or polygons) are listed sequentially and a new
segment ID number signifies the start of a new segment.
For closed shapes the start and end positions must be defined as the same number.
.OVL file format
The format for ASCII OVL files are as follows:# -b [LF]
-61.102493 -52.006747[LF]
-61.102493 -52.005866[LF]
-61.101613 -52.005280[LF]
-61.100146 -52.005573[LF]
etc...
The file is read sequentially and new segments are defined by the presence of "# -b" flag.
Co-ordinates are in Lat / Long format (decimal degrees) and separated by a Line Feed [LF]
character, decimal 10, or 0Ah.
Mouse Position
These information panels on the bottom of the Map View display the position of the mouse as you
move it about in the map view.
UTM Eastings and Northings and UTM Zone values are calculated automatically and
displayed with the corresponding Latitude/Longitude position.
The Lat / long co-ordinates are in the WGS84 Datum.
'Available Wells' / 'Loaded Wells'
Senergy
708
The upper, 'Available Wells' panel displays the wells available in the current IP database,
but which are not loaded into memory. These wells are shown in the map display by a
'Fuschia' coloured symbol.
The lower, 'Loaded Wells' panel lists all those wells currently loaded into IP memory. Wells
listed in the lower window are shown as blue coloured symbols in the map view. These are the
wells that the user can scroll through using the main menu 'Well' toolbar.
The Map View can be used to load wells from the 'Available Wells' list, into memory in a number
of ways:
Drag & drop a well from the top window to the bottom window, or
Select the well on the Map display by clicking it, then click the 'Load' button below the '
709
Senergy
Available Wells' panel, or

Use the 'Load Wells by Area' method which is described below.
NOTE: wells must have a valid 'position' before they will be displayed on-screen in the
correct geographical location. Wells with no 'Position' (see 'Manage Well Header Info.')
have IP default co-ordinates Lat / Long (0 degrees North, 0 degrees East) and are displayed on
the Equator.
'Go to' button :The 'Go to' button will move to, and centre the screen on, the highlighted
well. This makes finding a particular well in a large database very easy. There are 'Go to'
buttons for 'Available Wells' and 'Loaded wells'.
'Load' button: In the 'Available Wells' list, click on a single well or use the 'SHIFT' and
mouse click to select multiple wells to load into memory. Click the 'Load' button to load the
selected well or wells. The well names will transfer from the 'Available Wells' list to the '
Loaded Wells' list.
'Refresh' button: The 'Refresh' button re-loads the current database file. You may have to
use the 'File' ->Save All Wells to Database option, before some changes are visible.
'Load Wells by Area' button: Click the 'Start draw' (left hand button) and then 'click &
drag' out a rectangle on screen. Wells falling within this box are highlighted in the map view
and in the 'Available Wells' panel to be loaded into memory. The usual Windows 'SHIFT'
key can be used to select / de-select more wells. Click the 'Load' button to load the
selection into memory. Click on the right hand button to erase the selection rectangle if you
do not want to load the selected wells.
'Properties' button: Select a well in the 'Loaded Wells' list and click the 'Properties' button
to take you to the Manage Well Header Info. dialog for that well. Click the 'Position' tab
and enter XY location information if needed.
Related Topics
Log Plot
Horizontal Log Plot
Histogram
Crossplot
3D Parameter Viewer
Senergy
Montage Builder
710
711
8.7
Senergy
Montage Builder
The IP 'Montage Builder' is a standalone application, shipped with IP, that provides a graphicalobject editing and display 'workspace' in which the user can combine log plots, crossplots,
histograms, correlation panels, core photographs and text on one montage. A comprehensive
set of paper-sizing and orientation attributes allows you to work in a scaled workspace, to
change display scales (Zoom in / out) and modify object orientation (rotate / flip), to add shape
'primitives' with user-specified colours and colour fill to enhance your presentation.
The 'Montage Builder' application is launched from the 'View' menu.
Section 8.7 View Well and Curve Data : Montage Builder
Senergy
712
The application allows the user to 'capture' graphic objects using the IP 'Clipboard' feature which saves the IP graphic as an enhanced metafile (.emf). These emf files can be pasted
directly into the 'Montage Builder' 'canvas' using traditional WINDOWS controls.
Graphic files, saved outside of the IP program as .EMF, .GIF, .TIFF, .BMP , .CGM, .JPEG
or .PNG files can be inserted into a montage as standalone images or as 'linked' images.
A 'linked' image allows you to update a Montage, without repeatedly cutting / pasting
graphics elements (log plots, crossplots, histograms etc...) into the montage when an
interpretation changes or new log curves become available. You should save the modified
IP log plot, crossplot etc.. to the same graphics file name that was used in the original
Montage (overwriting / replacing the existing file). Then on the 'Montage Builder' tool, with
your montage open, click 'View'
'Refresh' and all edited / modified, linked graphics files
will be updated with your changes applied.

Shape 'primitives' - Lines, squares, rectangle, triangles, circles, ovals, can be added as
border polygons and colour-filled to highlight some feature on a log plot, for example or to
add a border line. colourfill can be added and modified using the 'Transparency' tool to
713
Senergy
modify the effect, from completely opaque (0%) to completely transparent (100%).
A Text editing tool allows you to manually type in text or numeric strings and to select the
Font, font size, colour, and orientation of the text.
The 'MontageBuilder' User Interface

The 'Montage Builder' interface is illustrated below. Many familiar WINDOWS editing functions
are available from the toolbars on the main menu bar.
Toolbars can be switched on / off from the 'View' menu
'Toolbars' option. 'Hints', opened by
placing the mouse cursor over a toolbar icon, explain the functionality of the toolbar icon. To
remove a toolbar, 'un-tick' the toolbar name from the list.
Setting Up a New Montage

When you wish to set up a new montage you must select a paper size on which to build the
montage. The paper size is selected from the 'File' menu
'Page Set Up' option, which
launches a 'Document Properties' dialog which incorporates a Paper Size drop-down list from
which you can choose the required dimensions and orientation ('Portrait' or 'Landscape'). Click '
Senergy
714
OK' when you have made your selections.
Building a Montage
The 'Montage Builder' workspace will open with a 'blank' document in which to work. The
montage can then be compiled, using a combination of IP 'Clipboard' functionality, the 'shape'
elements, inserted graphics files and the 'Text' tool in the application workspace.
All the components in the montage can be moved and resized as required. NOTE: all log plot
output from IP, either to the clipboard or to a graphics file will be at the vertical scale set in the
hardcopy output routine. Rescaling these graphics in the 'Montage Builder' will change the
'hardcopy' vertical scale of the graphics file or clipboard contents.
Saving a Montage File

Click the 'File' menu
'Save' option to save a montage that you have built. By default this
creates a montage (.ipm) file. A montage itself can also be saved to the following graphics file
formats:
715
Related Topics
Log Plot
Horizontal Log Plot
Histogram
Crossplot
3D Parameter Viewer
Montage Builder
Senergy
Section
9
Parameter Set Management
717
Senergy
IP stores Petrophysical interpretation parameters in 'Parameter Sets'. 'Parameter Set

Management' is an important topic that the user should understand before undertaking
an interpretation using IP.
'Parameter Sets' are managed using a number of tools.
The important topic of 'Parameter Set Management' is discussed here, since a knowledge of
the appearance and function of 'Parameter Sets' is integral to the operation, and underlies the
flexibility, of many of the interpretation tools within the IP program.
A 'Parameter Set' consists of a set of 'zones'. In the simplest form, called a 'Zone / Tops Set'
the Set is comprised of entries containing a 'Zone name' with an associated 'Top' depth and '
Bottom' depth. For the interpretation module parameter sets, for example the 'Clay Volume'
parameter Set, this basic structure is extended to store a number of petrophysical 'Parameters'
associated with the interpretation module. The names and numbers of parameters in a '
Parameter Set' depend on the interpretation module selected .
The working 'Parameter Sets' for the interpretation modules are automatically saved into the IP
database every time a well is saved. The 'Parameter Sets' are restored when the well is loaded
into memory.
The 'Parameter Set Management' screen is used to manage the 'Parameter Sets' from the
'zonable' interpretation modules. The tool is available in the set-up window of any of the following
modules:
'Clay Volume'
'Porosity and Water Saturation'
'Cutoffs and Summation'
'Mineral Solver'
'Basic Log Analysis'
'NMR Interpretation'
'TDT Standalone'
'TDT TIme Lapse'
'Pore Pressure Gradient'
For information on how to distribute 'Parameter Sets' between wells then look at the chapter on '
Multi-Well Parameter Distribution'.
The 'Parameter Set Management' window is displayed when you click the 'Load / Save
Parameter Sets' button, which is found on the 'set-up' window for each of these interpretation
Section 9.
Parameter Set Management :
Senergy
718
modules. The 'Clay Volume' module is illustrated below:
Parameter Set 'types' are related to specific interpretation modules. Set 'types' are as follows :
Tops : Generic, user-created 'Tops' Set. No parameters.
Clay : Clay volume module Parameter Set.
PhiSw : Porosity and water saturation module Parameter Set.
Cutoff : Cut-off and summations module Parameter Set.
Splice : Zones from the interactive splice module.
Basic_Loganal : Basic log analysis module Parameter Set.
TDT_Stand_Alone : TDT-Stand-Alone analysis module Parameter Set.
TDT_Time_Lapse : TDT time-lapse analysis module Parameter Set.
NMR : NMR interpretation analysis module Parameter Set.
Minsolve : Mineral Solver module Parameter Set.
Pore_Pres_Grad : Pore pressure gradient module. Parameter Set management screen
not available.
Section 9.
719
Senergy
UP****** : Zoned user program modules. '******' will be the name of the user program.
The 'Parameter Set Management' dialog window allows the user to save and restore
Parameter Sets in addition to the working Parameter Sets. This can be useful if you want to
try a different interpretation technique but still have the ability to go back to the original
interpretation set-up. You can save the original 'Parameter Set' under a user-defined name,
change the interpretation parameters / equations and run the new interpretation model. The
original parameters can be recalled / restored from the saved 'Parameter Set' at a later date.
You can save 'Parameter Sets' either ;
To an external disk file, given a user-defined name (this is the same procedure as that
accessed from the main menu 'Input / Output
'Save Parameter Set to File' operation)
or,
The Parameter Set can be saved into the well database under a user-specified name.
The 'Parameter Set Management' window is divided into two sections, one for saving the '
Parameter Set' and one for loading the 'Parameter Set'. Both sections allow the user to save
and restore 'Parameter Sets' from the database, as well as from separate, external disk files.
The 'Save' section, however, allows the user to restore a 'Parameter Set' from a different well or
a 'Parameter Set' of a different type (from the database only).
If a Parameter Set of a different 'Type' to the module that is being run is restored, then
only the 'Top', 'Bottom 'and 'Zone name' fields are copied for each zone. Not all of the
interpretation parameters associated with each zone will be copied and values will be
set to the default values for that type of Set.
Copying 'Parameter Sets' of a different 'Type' between interpretation modules can be very
useful. For example, if the user has loaded a Tops Set (Type 'Tops') using the ' Manage Zones /
Top Sets' module, these tops might be the ones required for the 'Cut-off and Summation'
module and can be loaded using the 'Load from Database' option, which is activated from the
screen launched by clicking the 'Load / Save Parameter Sets' button.
Related Topics:
Load Parameter Set
Save Parameter Set to file
Print Parameter Set
Section 9.
Senergy
9.1
720
Load Parameter Set
To load a 'Parameter Set' from the database; in the 'Load Parameter set' window, 'click' on the
required 'Parameter Set' name to highlight it, as shown in this example using the Clay Volume
Dialog.
From the Clay Volume Analysis Dialog, Click Load / Save Parameters to display the
Parameter Set Dialog.
Note: The Parameters Sets Dialog can also be displayed from the Porosity and Water
Saturation Analysis Dialog and the Cut Off and Summation Report Dialog.
From the Parameters Sets Dialog, Click Load from Database to Load the Parameter
Sets from the active Database.
Section 9.1 Parameter Set Management : Load Parameter Set
721
Senergy
If the 'All Sets' box is 'checked' then all the Sets, regardless of 'type', will be displayed in the
window. If the user loads a Set of a different 'Set Type' to the module from where the '
Parameter Set Manager' window is launched, then only the 'Top', 'Bottom' and 'Zone
name' are loaded and the parameters are all set to their internal IP 'default' values.
Senergy
722
If the 'All Wells' box is 'checked' then the Sets for other in-memory wells are also displayed.
The well name will be added to the 'Parameter Set' window for all wells except for the
'active' well. An example window with this option set is displayed below.
723
Senergy
Senergy
724
The 'Delete Set from Database' button allows the user to delete a highlighted Set from the
Set list.
The 'Load from Disk File' allows the user to load a 'Parameter Set' from a disk file. Only '
Parameter Sets' of the correct 'type' can be loaded to an IP module in this way.
Related Topics:
Load Parameter Set
Print Parameter Set
725
9.2
Senergy
Save Parameter Set to File
'The Save Parameter Set to File' functionality has largely been superseded, since the IP '
Parameter Sets' are currently stored together with the curve data in the IP database .DAT files.
However, the function has been retained as an alternative method for saving an interpretation '
Parameter Set'. It is definitely worth saving 'All Sets all wells' at the end of a project for data
security purposes.
'Save Parameter Set to file' is a useful method of moving parameters between wells. The user
saves the 'Parameter Set' for the current well using this function. The new well is then selected
and using the 'Load / Save Parameter Set' button on the 'Interpretation' input screen, the user
can select the previously saved 'Parameter Set' belonging to the other well.
To save a 'Parameter Set' for an interpretation, select the interpretation module name and the
complete Set will be saved to disk. This disk file can be restored from within the interpretation
Section 9.2 Parameter Set Management : Save Parameter Set to File
Senergy
726
module's interface at a later date (see Parameter Set Management), and contains all the
information used in the interpretation. The file will be stored under the Set name, used in the
interpretation module, with the extension of '.set' and will be put in the output data directory,
which can be set under Set Default File Location.
'All Sets current Well' and 'All Sets all wells' allows the user to save multiple Sets at one time.
This is very useful for making an archive record of all the 'Parameter Sets' used in all the wells in
a project database.
Save Parameter set

The user can edit the 'Save Parameter set name' in the text entry box, to distinguish one
Parameter Set from any other.
Clicking the 'Save to Database' button will copy the Set into the database and the name will be
added to the list in the 'Parameter set' window. Clicking the 'Save to Disk File' button will
activate a file directory dialog box to select where the file should be saved. The default is the
output directory (see 'Set Default File Location').
Related Topics:
727
Load Parameter Set

Print Parameter Set
Senergy
Senergy
9.3
728
Print Parameter Set
To print 'Parameter Sets' from the interpretation modules, or to save them to a disk file, select
the 'Print Parameter Set' menu item, followed by the interpretation module name, followed by
your choice of printer or file name. If 'Printer' is selected, then the output will be directed to the
default printer or whichever printer has been selected under 'Printer Setup'. If 'File' is chosen,
then the output will be sent to a hard disk file. The file will be stored under the Set Name used in
the interpretation module, with the extension of ".txt" and will be put in the output data directory,
which can be set under Set Default File Location.
Selecting the 'All wells - Printer' and 'All wells - File' allows the user to save multiple
Parameter Sets at one time.
These options are also available for individual modules by using the 'Print' button on the '
Parameter' windows.
Related Topics:
Load Parameter Set
Print Parameter Set
Section 9.3 Parameter Set Management : Print Parameter Set
729
Section 9.3 Parameter Set Management : Print Parameter Set
Senergy
Senergy
9.4
730
Selecting the 'Delete Parameter Sets' option will delete an interpretation 'Parameter Set' from
the current, active well. This is helpful if the current 'Parameter Set' is found to be incorrect and
the user wants to start an interpretation again from the beginning. This will not delete any
Parameter Sets saved on the hard disk.
Only the 'Parameter Sets' associated with the currently-active well can be deleted.
'Other Sets' option - rather than have an exhaustive list of 'Parameter Sets' in the list, the 'Other
Sets' option, if 'clicked' will launch the 'Manage Zones / Tops' module, from which the user can
highlight the 'Parameter Set' to delete, then click the 'Delete' button.
If the 'Multi Well' box is ticked then all 'Parameter Sets' are displayed for all wells. This enables
Section 9.4 Parameter Set Management : Delete Parameter Sets
731
Senergy
fast deletion of 'Parameter Sets' across many wells - a warning message will appear before the
Sets are deleted.
Related Topics:
Load Parameter Set
Print Parameter Set
Section 9.4 Parameter Set Management : Delete Parameter Sets
Section
10
Interpretation
733
10
Senergy
Interpretation
The following 'standard' Modules are available under the 'Interpretation' Menu:
'Basic Log Analysis' The 'Basic log Analysis' module is used to make a quick and 'basic'
log analysis. The functionality has been deliberately simplified to perform a type of analysis
that could be easily duplicated using a calculator.
'Clay Volume' The 'Clay Volume' interpretation module is used to interactively calculate
clay volume curves from multiple clay indicators.
'Clay Volume Parameters' The 'Clay Volume Parameters' window allows the user to
manually change any Clay Volume interpretation parameter and to create, modify and delete
interpretation Zones.
'Porosity and Water Saturation' The 'Porosity and Water Saturation' interpretation module
is used to interactively calculate porosity (PHI), water saturation (Sw), flushed zone water
saturation (Sxo), matrix density (RHOMA) , hydrocarbon density (RHOHY) and wet and dry
clay volumes (VWCL & VDCL). The number and type of output curves depends on the
porosity model chosen and the logic selected.
'Porosity and Water Saturation Parameters' The 'Porosity Water Saturation Parameters'
window allows the user to manually change any Porosity / Water Saturation computation
parameter, and to create, edit and delete interpretation zones. The window is launched from
the main menu '
'Cut-off and Summation' The Cut-offs and Summation module allows the user to
interactively define Net Reservoir and Net Pay cut-off criteria and zones, and to calculate
the average petrophysical properties of porosity, clay volume and water saturation for each
zone within a petrophysical interpretation.
'Cut-off and Summation Parameters' The Cutoff Parameters window allows the user to
change any Cutoff parameter, and create, delete and edit interpretation Zones.
'Multi Well Cut-off and Summation' The Multi well Cutoff and Summation module allows the
user to run the Cutoff and Summation computation for multiple wells from a single window.
The module has sophisticated reporting options that allow results from multiple wells to be
written to one report file. The module can be used to either re-run the current Cutoff and
Summation results in each well with some modification, for example to a changed VCL cutoff, or can be run to create the Cutoff and Summation results for each well from scratch.
'NMR Normalization'
'NMR Interpretation' The 'NMR Interpretation' module allows the user to interpret the T2
array data produced from NMR tools. The module allows the user to set a T1 or T2 cut-off
Section 10.
Interpretation :
Interpretation
Senergy
734
for free fluid (FF) and also for clay-bound fluid (BF). Permeability is calculated using the '
Timur / Coates' permeability equations and, if some external permeability data is available,
the module will allow automatic calibration of the equation coefficients.
'Cased Hole' The Cased Hole log interpretation tools are included here. The following tools
are included under the Cased Hole menu item:
TDT Stand-Alone Sw analysis: The TDT Stand Alone module is used to calculate water
saturation from thermal decay tools (TDT) or any pulsed neutron tool that measures the
formation capture cross section (Sigma). A Porosity curve is needed as input. A Clay
Volume curve input is optional. These curves are best taken from an open hole log
analysis.
TDT Time Lapse: The TDT Time Lapse module is used to calculate water saturation
from differences between two thermal decay tool (TDT) logs or any pulsed neutron tool
logs that measures the formation capture cross section (Sigma). An accurate Porosity
and original Water Saturation (Sw Base) curve is needed as input, which is best taken
from an open hole log analysis.
Related Topics
Basic Log Analysis
Auto Update of Analysis Modules
Section 10.
Interpretation :
735
10.2
Senergy
Basic Log Analysis
The 'Basic log Analysis' module is used to make a quick and 'basic' log analysis. The
functionality has been deliberately simplified to perform a type of analysis that could be easily
duplicated using a calculator.
'Clay volume' is calculated from a Gamma Ray.
'Porosity' is either from the Density or Sonic tool.
'Water saturations' are calculated using the basic Archie equations. No hydrocarbon or
bad-hole corrections are made. No flushed zone Sxo calculations are made.
The analysis is zonable and an Interactive Plot can be used to apply/modify interpretation
parameters.
From the Interpretation Menu, Select Basic Log Analysis to Display the Basic Log Analysis
Dialog.
Related Topics
Define Input and Output Curves
Define Basic Log Analysis Parameters
Create Basic Log Analysis Interactive Log Plot
Section 10.2 Interpretation : Basic Log Analysis
Interpretation
Senergy
736
10.2.1 Define Input and Output Curves

Input Curves : The user must enter either a 'Density' or 'Sonic' curve or both. If both are
selected, then the density will be used by default. However, the user can manually select the
sonic for designated zones (see parameters below).
A 'Gamma Ray' curve can be entered. This will be used to calculate a clay volume. If the
box is left blank, the clay volume will be assumed to be zero and no clay corrections will be
made to the porosity. This can work sometimes for density porosities but sonic porosities
will always be too large in shaly zones or shales.
The 'Resistivity' curve is used to calculate water saturation. If a curve name is not entered,
only porosity and clay volume will be calculated.
Output Curves : The 'Porosity' (PHI) curve will be the porosity calculated from the Density or
Sonic log.
The 'Sw Unlimited' (SwU) curve will be the result of the Sw calculation from Archie's
equation. No 'limits' have been applied. This means that the 'SwU' curve could have values
greater than 1.0 (100 %). This curve is useful for assessing how much greater than the
100% wet line the computed curve values reach, in the wet zones. This allows the user to
set interpretation parameters like 'm' or 'Rw' to give an average 100% Sw in a wet zone.
The 'Sw' (SW)curve is the same as the unlimited curve except that it has been 'clipped' to
have values between '0' and '1.0'. The 'Sw' curve is used in the summation and cut-off
module for calculating average zonal water saturations.
The 'Bulk Volume Water' (BVW)curve is computed from porosity multiplied by water
saturation and shows the amount of water in the rock. It is used mainly for plot displays.
The 'Clay Volume' (VCL) curve gives the result of the clay volume calculations. The curve
is clipped so that the results lie between 0 and 1.0 (100%).
The 'Rw apparent' (RWapp) curve is the result of a calculation to estimate the apparent
water resistivity in a zone assuming the zone to be 100% wet. This curve is used on the
interactive plot to allow the user to set 'Rw' in a wet interval.
NOTE: the module will overwrite any current output curves with the same name, without
warning, so the user should be careful not to use duplicate names. The 'Porosity and
Water Saturation' module uses many of the same names, so if this and the 'Porosity and
Water Saturation' module are run then it would be best to rename the output curves so as
not to get confused.
Related Topics
737
Senergy

10.2.2 Define Basic Log Analysis Parameters

The 'Parameters' tab is subdivided into 4 'sub-tabs' described below:
The 'Zones - Clay' Tab defines the Interpretation Zone Parameters; Zone Name, Zone Top,
Zone Bottom, Zone Colour, Lock Zone, Gr Clean and Gr Clay (both used for calculating
Clay Volume).
The 'Density' Tab defines the Parameters required for the calculation of Porosity, where
Density has been selected as the Porosity Model.. Once Density has been selected as
the Porosity Model, the Sonic Parameters will be unavailable indicating that only the Density
Porosity Model will be used in the calculations.
The 'Sonic' Tab defines the Parameters required for the calculation of Porosity where Sonic
has been selected as the Porosity Model. Once Sonic has been selected as the Porosity
Model, the Density Parameters will be unavailable indicating that only the Sonic Porosity
Model will be used in the calculations.
The 'Archie' Tab defines the Formation Water Resistivity at Formation Temperature
Parameters required for the Archie water saturation (SwU and Sw) calculation.
Note: Changing a parameter will not immediately mean that a zone is re-calculated. The user
must click the 'Run' button in order to re-calculate all zones and update all displays. See Also:
Create a New Zone.
Column Edits in the Parameters Tab

If the user wants to set all the parameters in one column of the 'Parameter' screen to be the
same value, then the header of the column should be 'clicked'. This will turn the column header
box green. Now, any one parameter that is changed in that column will change all the parameters
in the column to the same value. To turn the column edit off, click the column header again and
its colour will return to grey. Column edits remain active while the well stays loaded in memory.
They have to be reset, if required, next time the well is loaded.
The 'Parameter set name' box is used to name the file where the parameters will be if the
parameters are saved to a disk file using the 'Save Parameter Sets' function in the IP main
menu. The same name is also used to save the parameter Set listing to hard disk with an
Interpretation
Senergy
738
extension of '.TXT'.
The 'Load / Save Parameter Sets' button allows the user to manage the basic log analysis
parameter sets. See Parameter Set Management and Link Zones / Top Sets.
The 'Run' button runs the analysis for all zones and creates any output curves needed.
Related Topics
Basic Log Analysis
Define Zones - Clay Parameters
Define Density Parameters
Define Sonic Parameters
Define Archie Parameters
10.2.2.1 Define Zones - Clay Parameters
The Zones - Clay Tab defines the Interpretation Zone Parameters; Zone Name, Zone Top,
Zone Bottom, Zone Colour, Lock Zone, Gr Clean and Gr Clay (both used for calculating Clay
Volume).
'Zone Name' : The zone name is an optional parameter and is used by the user to identify a
zone by giving it a name. Zone names can be displayed in the log plot. See Zone plotting.
739
Senergy
'Zone Top' : The top depth of the zone.

'Zone Bottom' : The bottom depth of the zone.
'Zone Color' : This is the user editable Zone colour associated with the interpretation zone.
'Lock Zone' : If this is 'checked' then the zone becomes grayed out in all tabs and the
parameters cannot be altered within that zone, including interactively.
'Gr Clean' : Gamma Ray clean value. Used for calculating Clay Volume. Should be set to
the minimum Gamma Ray value seen in clean (non shaly) intervals. This defaults to the
minimum Gamma Ray value seen in the Gamma Ray input curve.
'Gr Clay' : Gamma Ray clay value. Used for calculating Clay Volume. Should be set to the
maximum Gamma Ray value seen in shale intervals. This defaults to the maximum
Gamma Ray value seen in the Gamma Ray input curve.
Related Topics
Basic Log Analysis
10.2.2.2 Define Density Parameters
The DensityTab defines the Parameters required for the calculation of Porosity; where Density
has been selected as the Porosity Model. Once Density has been selected as the Porosity
Model, the Sonic Parameters will be unavailable indicating that only the Density Porosity Model
will be used in the calculations.
Interpretation
Senergy
740
'Porosity Model' : To use the density log as porosity over a zone, select 'Density' from the
drop-down menu. Once 'Density' has been selected then the 'Sonic' tab parameters 'grey'
out indicating that only the density porosity model will be used in the calculation of porosity.
'Rho Matrix' : Matrix density of the clean rock. Used for calculating porosity from the density
tool. Defaults to 2.65 gm/cc for sandstone. Set to 2.71 gm/cc for limestone.
'Rho Fluid' : Density of the fluid in the rock. Used for calculating porosity from the density
tool. Defaults to 1.0 gm/cc for fresh water. Set to 1.1 gm/cc for salt water. To make
hydrocarbon corrections to the porosity adjust the fluid density to account for the
hydrocarbons.
'Rho Clay' : Density of the clay in the rock. Used to correct the density porosity for clay.
Chosen from log plots as the density reading in shale. The default value is chosen as the
maximum density reading over the interval where the sonic is high.
Note: Once Density has been selected as the Porosity Model, the Sonic Parameters will be
unavailable indicating that only the Density Porosity Model will be used in the calculations.
741
Related Topics
Basic Log Analysis
Senergy
Interpretation
Senergy
742
10.2.2.3 Define Sonic Parameters
The Sonic Tab defines the Parameters required for the calculation of Porosity where Sonic has
been selected as the Porosity Model.
'Porosity Model' : To use the sonic log as porosity over a zone, select 'Sonic' from the
drop-down menu. This is the same parameter that is on the 'Density' sub-tab. The setting
can be changed in either tab. Once 'Sonic' is selected then the 'Density' tab parameters
'grey' out indicating that only the sonic porosity model will be used in the calculations.
'Sonic Equ' : Two models are available to calculate porosity from the sonic: the original '
Wyllie' time average and the empirical field observation 'Hunt-Raymer' formula. Select the
required model from the drop-down menu. It is recommended that the 'Hunt-Raymer'
equation is used by default since this equation automatically takes care of the problem of
unconsolidated sands, whilst the 'Wyllie' equation has an extra compaction factor
parameter which has to be estimated.
'DT Matrix' : Sonic matrix transit time of the clean rock. Used for calculating porosity from
the sonic tool. Defaults to 55 uSec/ft for sandstone. Set to 49 uSec/ft for limestone.
'DT Fluid' : Sonic fluid transit time in the rock. Used for calculating porosity from the sonic
tool. Default value is189 uSec/ft. For salt-saturated formation water use about 174 usec/ft.
To make hydrocarbon corrections to the porosity adjust (increase) the fluid transit time to
account for the hydrocarbons.
'DT Clay' : Sonic of the clay in the rock. Used to correct the sonic porosity for clay. Chosen
from log plots as the sonic reading in shale. The default value is chosen as the maximum
sonic reading over the interval.
743
Senergy
'Sonic Cp' : Wyllie equation compaction factor. Used for calculating porosity from the sonic
tool when the Wyllie time average equation is chosen. Defaults to 1.0. For unconsolidated
sands this needs to be increased. A rule of thumb for estimating this parameter is to divide
the sonic clay parameter by 100. The result should be greater than 1.0 for a valid Cp value.
Note: Once Sonic has been selected as the Porosity Model, the Density Parameters will be
unavailable indicating that only the Sonic Porosity Model will be used in the calculations.
Related Topics
Basic Log Analysis
Interpretation
Senergy
744
10.2.2.4 Define Archie Parameters
The Archie Tab defines the Formation Water Resistivity at Formation Temperature Parameters
required for the Archie water saturation (SwU and Sw) calculation.
'Rw' : Formation water resistivity at formation temperature. Defaults to 0.1 ohmm but must
be adjusted by the user to the correct value.
'a factor' : Archie equation 'a' factor. Defaults to 1.0.
'm Exponent' : Archie equation 'm' (cementation) factor. Defaults to 2.0.
'n Exponent' : Archie equation 'n' (saturation exponent) factor. Defaults to 2.0.
Related Topics
Basic Log Analysis
10.2.3 Create Basic Log Analysis Interactive Log Plot

The interactive plot allows the changing of several parameters interactively by placing the cursor
on the vertical parameter line and dragging the line to a new position. When the mouse button is
released the program will automatically recalculate the zone and update the result on the plot.
This gives the user immediate feedback on changes to parameters. See Also: Manage the
Interactive Log Plot.
745
Senergy
To display the Interactive Log Plot.

From the Interpretation Menu, Select Basic Log Analysis to Display the Basic Log Analysis
Dialog.
Define the Basic Log Analysis Parameters.
From the Basic Log Analysis Dialog Click Make Plot to Display the Interactive Log Plot.
Changes made to the Interactive Log Plot can be Undone or Re-done. See Also: Manage the
Interactive Log Plot.
Display a Histogram from the Interactive Log Plot

Histograms of any of the curves can also be used to change parameters interactively. Right click
in a track with an interactive parameter and select the appropriate curve from the pop-up menu
(example RHOB curve).
Interpretation
Senergy
746
The above histogram can be modified Interactively. Once the lines have been changed then the
undo/redo arrows will appear in the top left-hand corner of the crossplot enabling the user to
quickly revert the lines back to their original positions if required.
Related Topics
747
Senergy
10.2.4 Equations and Methodology

Clay Volume (Vcl) is calculated :
Vcl
GrLog
GrClean
GrClay
GrClean
Porosity (Phi) is calculated :

If Density is selected as the porosity method :
Rho matrix
Phi
Rho b
Vcl
Rho matrix
Rho matrix
Rho clay
Rho fluid
If Sonic porosity is selected :

Wyllie
Dt
Phi
Dt matrix Vcl
Dt Fluid
Dt Clay
Dt matrix
Dt matrix
Cp
Raymer
Phiclay
Phison
Phi
Vma Vclay
Vma V log
2 Vma Vf
2 Vma Vf
4 Vma
2 Vma
2 Vma Vf
2 Vma Vf
4 Vma
2 Vma
Phison
Phiclay Vcl
Where
Vma
= 1/Dtmatrix
Vf = 1/Dtfluid
Vlog
= 1/Dt
Porosity is limited to being greater than 0.0.
Apparent water resistivity (RWapp) is calculated :

Rwa
Phi m Rt
a
Archie water saturation (SwU and Sw) is calculated :

Unlimited water saturation
Interpretation
Senergy
SwU
a Rw
Phi m Rt
Sw is limited to be less than or equal to 1.0.
Related Topics
748
749
10.3
Senergy
Clay Volume Analysis
The 'Clay Volume' interpretation module is used to interactively calculate clay volume curves
from multiple clay indicators. The module is accessed under the main menu 'Interpretation'
Clay Volume' option.
The 'Clay Volume' module can now be linked to the 'Porosity and Water Saturation' module see 'Linking Clay Volume module to Porosity Water Saturation' module in the 'Link Zones /
Top Sets' chapter for more details.
The 'Clay Volume Analysis' window, shown above, sets up the clay indicators and their input
and associated output curves. The input curve boxes will automatically be filled in with
appropriate curve names if the input curve 'types' have been set up in the study well. The user
can select an alternative input curve name if the selected IP default is not correct. The IP
program default names for the output curves are displayed in the right hand column of the
screen. The user can edit these names to any preferred nomenclature.
The program assumes that any neutron curve entered is in 'Limestone matrix' units. If
Section 10.3 Interpretation : Clay Volume Analysis
'
Interpretation
Senergy
750
this is not the case, then the curve should be converted to Limestone porosity units using the
appropriate service company environmental correction module or the Basic Log Analysis
Functions module.
The 'Minimum Clay Volume' (VCL) curve is calculated as the minimum clay volume response
of all user-selected single and double clay indicators, and, by default is picked as the 'Wet Clay
Volume' (VWCL) curve used in the set up of the 'Porosity and Water Saturation' Module.
The clay indicators are divided into 2 sections, 'Single Clay Indicators', where a single curve is
selected for use in the 'Clay Volume Interactive Plot'. One extra, user-defined 'Single Clay
Indicator' can be set up.
The 'Double Clay Indicators' are defined in the middle part of the window. These are standard
curve crossplot combinations (Density/Neutron, Density/Sonic ,Sonic/Neutron). One extra '
Double Clay Indicator' can be specified in addition to the standard indicators. The user can
enter the name of the indicator in the box provided under the 'Name' column.
The 'Bad Hole Indicators for Double Clay Indicators' section allows the user to select curves
that can be used in the 'Clay Volume Interactive Plot' to discriminate where the 'Double Clay
Indicators' will be used. For example, a caliper curve could be used as the 'Bad Hole Indicator'
to determine where a Density/Neutron 'Double Clay Indicator' is not going to be reliable. When
using the caliper log as a 'Bad Hole Indicator', setting the minimum threshold parameter '
BadH1Min', the 'Bad Hole Indicator' will switch off the Density/Neutron 'Double Clay Indicator'
where the caliper is greater than the user- entered threshold value.
The user selects the 'Bad Hole Indicators' by 'checking' the boxes on the left hand side of the
window. The indicators can be 'zoned', so 'checking' a box does not necessarily force the user to
use the indicator in every interpretation zone.
NOTE: It is good practice to 'check' any indicator that might possibly be used, BEFORE running
a 'Clay Volume Analysis' interpretation, since this will allow the program to initialise the 'default
clay parameters' and create the 'Bad Hole' tab parameters .
The 'Parameter Set name' box is used to name the file where the parameters will be stored, if
the parameters are saved to a disk file using the 'Save Parameter set' in the main 'Parameter
Sets' menu. The same name is also used to save the parameter Set listing to hard disk with an
extension of '.TXT'. The 'Print Parameter set' menu item can be used to do this or the print
button in the parameter window can be used.
The 'Load / Save Parameter Sets' button allows the user to manage the 'Clay Volume'
Parameter Sets. See Parameter Set Management.
The user 'clicks' the 'Run' button to start the Clay Volume analysis.
If an old Parameter Set has been loaded, or the user has already run the clay volume module,
751
Senergy
then the user will be asked whether the log plot should be re-initialized. The user should normally
confirm 'Yes' to this, since this activates the special interactive plot features. Answering 'No' will
leave the current plot active.
If this is a new 'Run', then 'default' parameters will be calculated for each clay indicator and these
values will populate the 'Clay Volume Parameters' Set. These defaults are not meant to be the
optimum interpretation parameters, but are chosen simply to set the parameters within the
correct range of values for a particular single curve or pair of curves.
For the 'Single Clay Indicators' the defaults are generally the maximum and minimum readings
for the indicator.
For the 'Double Clay Indicators' the defaults will be the 'sandstone' line for the 'clean line', and
the 'shale point' will be chosen towards the bottom right hand edge of the 'shale points', as
seen on a standard crossplot.
Related Topics
Define Clay Volume Output Curves
Clay Volume Interactive Plot
Clay Volume Equations and Methodology
10.3.1 Define Clay Volume Output Curves

An Output curve will be produced for each clay indicator selected. The curve results for these
indicators will not be limited to between 0 and 1.0. These curves are meant for quality control
purposes, and should not be used in another module for Vclay, unless they are clipped first to
between 0 and 1.0. This clipping could be done using the formula module.
Vclay minimum (VCL)and Vclay average (VCLAV)curves will also be calculated. These curves
are clipped to between 0 and 1.0. For the VCLAV curve, the separate Vclay indicator curves will
first be clipped before the average curve is created.
The Output curve, VCLMIX utilises both the VCL Minimum and the VCL Average curves. A
parameter is set by zone that determines whether the selected curve is VCL Minimum or the
VCL Average Curve.
There are two new methods for calculating VCL Average. Currently the VCL A/verage is the
mean value of all the VCL results at a level. The two new methods are Median and Lateral.
The Lateral average is the median value of all the individual pair products. This is almost
Interpretation
Senergy
752
identical to the Hodges-Lehmann method.

The new curve is defined in the Clay Volume Analysis Dialog Box, Clay Volume Mixed
(VCLMIX).
From the Interpretation Menu, Select Clay Volume Parameters to display the Clay Volume
Parameters Dialog, where the methods for calculation can be defined. For VCL Average;
Mean, Median or Lateral and for VCL Mix; Minimum or Average.
753
Senergy
Select the VCLAV Parameter and Click Help to Display the Parameter Help for the VCL
Average.
Select the VCLMIX Parameter and Click Help to Display the Parameter Help for the VCLMIX
Parameter.
Interpretation
Senergy
754
Related Topics
10.3.2 Clay Volume Parameters

The 'Clay Volume Parameters' window allows the user to manually change any Clay Volume
interpretation parameter and to create, modify and delete interpretation Zones. The window is
selected from the main menu 'Interpretation'
button
'Clay Volume Parameters' or using the speed
next to the 'Clay Volume' speed button
755
Senergy
The 'Clay Volume Parameters' window displays the 'Clay Volume' interpretation parameters
arranged on 'tabbed' screens across the page, with the interpretation 'zones' arranged vertically
down the page. There are a number of tabs in addition to the 'Zone Depths' tab. Each tab sets
up the 'clean' and 'clay' end-points for the 'Single' and 'Double' Clay indicators:
'Single Clay Indicators' use a single log curve to define 'clean and 'clay' cut-offs. These
indicators are organized onto one or more 'tabs', depending upon how many single clay
indicators have been selected. A maximum of two Single indicators will be stored on each
tab. So, if 4 single clay indicators (Gamma Ray, Neutron, SP and Resistivity) are chosen,
they will be arranged on two 'tabs'. The example shown above has only 'Gamma Ray' (Gr)
and 'Resistivity' (Res) indicators selected.
'Double Clay Indicators' are crossplot combinations of log curves, Neutron/Density, Sonic/
Density. Each 'Double Clay indicator' that the user selects has its' own 'tab'. In the screen
capture shown above two Double Clay indicators 'Neutron/Density' (Neu/Den) and 'Sonic /
Density' (Son/Den) have been selected.
Related Topics
Interpretation
Senergy
756
10.3.2.2 Changing Parameters on Screen
To Display the Clay Volume Parameters Dialog:

From the Interpretation Menu, Select Clay Volume Parameters to display the Clay Volume
Parameters Dialog.
If a parameter is an 'On' / 'Off'- type flag, for example - any parameter with 'Use' in the title,
then 'ticking' it will switch it between 'On' and 'Off'. In the following screen, the 'GR Use' and
'Neu Use' parameters are 'On' / 'Off' flag parameters.
If a parameter is a 'List'- type parameter - any parameter with the word 'Method', 'Model', '
Source' or 'Equation' in the parameter title, then 'clicking' on it will launch a pop-up menu
where the parameter can be changed. In the screen shot shown below the parameter 'GR
Method' is a 'list' parameter and launches the associated options list:
757
Senergy
Related Topics
Changing Parameters on Screen
Define Zone Depth Parameters
Linking Clay Parameters
Clay Volume Parameter Names
10.3.2.3 Define Zone Depth Parameters
The 'Zone Depths' tab allows the user to change interpretation zone top and bottom depths and
to set optional 'Zone Names' and 'Zone colours'. The 'Zone Name' in this module is only used
as a label when printing out the parameter listings.
Interpretation
Senergy
758
The user has the option to display zone names or zone depths, if they have been set up, on all
Parameter tabs. This is accomplished by 'ticking' the 'Show Additional Zone info' tick-box.
The user then has the option of showing the zone name or the zone depths on each tab.
Depending on which option is chosen, when you select another Parameter tab, the zone names
or zone depths will be shown in the left-hand column of the 'grid'. The 'Show Default Info' option
is just displaying the 'Zone #' column populated with the zone number.
Alternatively, left-mouse-button 'click' in the 'Zone (#)' column header box of any parameter
screen and you will see the same three options as those seen from 'clicking' the 'Show
Additional Zone Info' button.
Clicking the 'New Zone' button will display the Add Zone Dialog. See Also: Create a New Zone.
The 'Delete zone' button on the 'Clay Volume Parameters' window allows the user to delete one
or more interpretation zones. The user must select the zones to delete, and click 'OK'.
759
Senergy
The 'Print' button on the parameter window will pop up the following menu. This allows output of
the summation report to the printer or to a file. The file will be written to the 'default output
directory' using the file Set name, with the extension of ".txt".
The 'Close' button on the 'Clay Volume Parameters' window closes the window, but does not
cancel any changes made to the parameters. If the user closes the window without clicking 'Run'
then the changes made will not come into effect until some other interactive parameter is
changed for that zone, and therefore forces a re-calculation of the zone.
The 'Help' buttons on the parameter screens are unique to the IP program in the sense that they
do not link to the Help document. The button will display a small window (example below) which
will give some help on individual parameters in the display. Once the window is displayed, the
user places the cursor on a parameter in the parameter window, and the help for that parameter
is displayed.
Lock Zone
Interpretation
Senergy
760
The 'Lock Zone' column allows a user to lock any zone which will prevent any of the parameters
of that zone in any of the tabs from being changed. It will also prevent any interactive lines on the
interactive plots from changing the parameter for that zone. The 'Multi-Well Change
Parameters' module will also be affected. If a zone has been locked by 'checking' the 'Lock
Zone' column then the zone will be 'grayed' out throughout all the tabs of the module.
Related Topics
10.3.2.4 Linking Clay Parameters
The 'Link Clay Paras' parameter (an 'On' / 'Off' tick box) has the following function:
When 'checked' for example, where double clay indicators Density/Neutron and Density/Sonic
are set up, any changes made to the 'common' curve (in this case Density) by moving a
crossplot end-point (say 'ND Den Clay'), will simultaneously update the Density Clay parameter
in the other double clay indicator ('DS Den Clay'). The interactive 'ND Den Clay' and 'DS Den
Clay' lines in the 'Clay Volume Interactive Plot' will also update to reflect any changes.
NOTE: Setting this parameter to 'on' DOES NOT update Single Clay Indicators, so, for example
a neutron log used as a single clay indicator (parameter 'Neu Clay') would not be affected if the
double clay indicator parameter 'ND Neu Clay' were changed in a crossplot or in the parameter
grid.
761
Senergy
Linking PhiSw Clay Parameters

The 'Link PhiSw Clay' parameter turns on the clay link to the 'PhiSw' module. This parameter
will only be active if the parameter sets are linked (the 'Linked Set' icon will be shown). In the
case shown above there is no link icon
and the 'Link PhiSw Clay' column is 'greyed' out.
If the 'Clay Volume' and 'PhiSw' parameters sets were linked then 'ticking' the 'Link PhiSw
Clay' column 'On' will mean that any changes made in either module to the Density, Neutron and
Sonic clay parameters will be made to the other module as well. It will also cause the module to
be re-run automatically with the new parameter value.
NOTE: Changing a parameter in a grid display does not mean that a zone is re-calculated
immediately. The user must click the 'Run' button in order to re-calculate all zones and
update all displays unless the modules are linked.
Column Edits
If the user wants to set all the parameters in one column of a parameter screen to the same
value, then 'click' in the header cells of the column. This will turn the column header box to green.
Now, changing a single value in the column will populate the entire column with the same new
value. To turn the 'column edit' off, 'click' the column header again and its colour will return to
grey. Column edits remain active while the well stays loaded in memory. They have to be reset, if
required, next time the well is loaded. The following shows a column edit turned on for the 'Gr
Clean' parameter.
Interpretation
Senergy
762
Related Topics
10.3.2.5 Clay Volume Parameter Names
The following input parameters are used in the 'Clay Volume' module. Only those parameters
that are selected on the 'Clay Volume Analysis' screen will be available in the interactive plot.
The clay indicators will be displayed on separate 'tabs' in the 'Clay Volume Parameter' module
window.
Numbers in parentheses ( ), prefixing a parameter name, relate to the Monte Carlo Error
Analysis module and correspond to Clay Volume inputs found in the file MonteCarloDefaults.
par.
(1) 'Gr Use' Flag
Set to 'On' if you wish to use the gamma ray as a clay indicator in this zone.
Set to 'Off' for 'Vclay from gamma ray' to be set to Null values over this zone.
(2) 'Gr Clean'
Value of the gamma ray in a clean, zero Vclay zone.
(3) 'Gr Clay'
Value of the gamma ray in a 100% clay zone.
(4) 'Gr Method'
The following methods can be selected:
'Linear' : Linear relationship between Gr and VclGr
'Curved' : A composite curved relationship.
'Clavier' : As per Clavier et al.
'Stieber' : As per Stieber et al (South Louisiana Miocene and Pliocene).
'Old Rock' : As per Larionov et al for older rocks (Mesozoic).
'Young Rock' : As per Larionov for younger rocks (Tertiary clastics).
(5) 'Neu Use' Flag
Set to 'On' if you wish to use the neutron as a clay indicator in this zone.
Set to 'Off' for 'Vclay from neutron' to be set to Null values over this zone.
763
Senergy
(6) 'Neu Clean'

Value of the Neutron log in a clean, zero Vclay zone. The Neutron log should have been
recorded in Limestone porosity units.
The user should be careful in setting the 'Neu Clean' parameter at any value other than zero,
since the indicator can easily under-estimate the clay volume if the parameter is set too high.
(7) 'Neu Clay'
Value of the neutron log in a 100% clay zone.
(8) 'SP Use' Flag
Set to 'On' if you wish to use the SP as a clay indicator in this zone.
Set to 'No' for 'Vclay from SP' to be set to Null values over this zone.
(9) 'SP Clean'
Value of the SP in a clean, zero Vclay zone.
(10) 'SP Clay'
Value of the SP in a 100% clay zone.
(11) 'Res Use' Flag
Set to 'On' if you wish to use a resistivity log as a clay indicator in this zone.
Set to 'Off' for 'Vclay from resistivity' to be set to Null values over this zone.
The resistivity indicator will generally only work in hydrocarbon-bearing zones where the
surrounding shales have low resistivities.
(12) 'Res Clean'
Value of the resistivity in a clean, zero Vclay zone. Generally chosen as the highest resistivity
in a hydrocarbon-bearing, clay-free zone.
(13) 'Res Clay'
Value of the resistivity in a 100% clay zone.
(14) 'Oth Use' ('Other single indicator')Flag
Set to 'On' if you wish to use an extra user-defined single indicator as a clay indicator in this
zone.
Set to 'No' for 'Vclay from other single indicator' to be set to Null values over this zone.
The 'other single indicator' is a linear indicator similar to the gamma ray linear indicator.
(15) 'Oth Clean'
Value of the other single indicator in a clean, zero Vclay zone.
(16) 'Oth Clay'
Value of the other single indicator, in a 100% clay zone.
The Image below displays the layout of the parameter 'Neu/Den' tab for the Neutron/Density
Interpretation
Senergy
764
double clay indicators. NOTE: the input Neutron Porosity curve should have been recorded in
limestone porosity units.
(17) 'ND Use' Flag

Set to 'On' if you wish to use the Neutron/Density as a clay indicator in this zone.
Set to 'Off' for Vclay Neutron/Density to be set to Null values over this zone.
(18) 'ND Neu Clay'
Neutron clay value for the Neutron / Density clay indicator.
(19) 'ND Den Clay'
Density clay value for the Neutron / Density clay indicator.
(20) 'ND Den Clean1'
Density value for point 1 on the clean line.
The clean line is defined by two points on the crossplot.
(21) 'ND Den Clean2'
(22) 'ND Neu Clean1'
Neutron value for point 1 on the clean line.
(23) 'ND Neu Clean2'
(24) 'SD Use' Flag
Set to 'On' if you wish to use the Sonic/Density as a clay indicator in this zone.
Set to 'Off' for Vclay Sonic/Density to be set to Null values over this zone.
(25) 'SD Son Clay'
Sonic clay value for the Sonic / Density clay indicator.
(26) 'SD Den Clay'
765
Senergy
Density clay value for the Sonic / Density clay indicator.

(27) 'SD Den Clean1'
(28) 'SD Den Clean2'
(29) 'SD Son Clean1'
Sonic value for point 1 on the clean line.
(30) 'SD Son Clean2'
(31) 'NS Use' Flag
Set to 'On' if you wish to use the Neutron/Sonic as a clay indicator in this zone.
Set to 'Off' for Vclay Neutron/Sonic to be set to Null values over this zone.
(32) 'NS Neu Clay'
Neutron clay value for the Neutron / Sonic clay indicator.
(33) 'NS Son Clay'
Sonic clay value for the Neutron / Sonic clay indicator.
(34) 'NS Son Clean1'
(35) 'NS Son Clean2'
(36) 'NS Neu Clean1'
(37) 'NS Neu Clean2'
(38) 'OD Use' ('Other Double') Flag
Set to 'On' if you wish to use another, user-defined, double indicator as a clay indicator in this
zone.
Set to 'Off' for Vclay other double to be set to Null values over this zone.
The other double clay indicator is calculated just like the Neutron /Density clay indicators with
a clay point and a clean line.
(39) 'OD Curv1 Clay'
Clay value for curve 1 for the other double clay indicator.
Interpretation
Senergy
766
(40) 'OD Curv2 Clay'

Clay value for curve 2 for the other double clay indicator.
(41) 'OD Curv1 Clean1'
Other double curve 2 value for point 1 on the clean line.
(42) 'OD Ot2 Clean2'
(45) 'BadH1 Use' Flag
Set to 'On' ('checked') if you wish to use the 'Bad Hole Indicator 1' curve in a zone.
Set to 'Off' ('blank') to turn 'Bad Hole Indicator 1' curve off in a zone.
(46) 'BadH1 Min'
Bad Hole Indicator 1 Minimum value.
When the 'Bad Hole Indicator 1' curve values are greater than this minimum value, any
double clay indicators will be switched off.
When the parameter is left 'blank', the discriminator curve is ignored.
(47) 'BadH1 Max'
Bad Hole Indicator 1 Maximum value.
When the 'Bad Hole Indicator 1' curve values are less than this maximum value, any double
clay indicators will be switched off.
(48) 'BadH2 Use' Flag
Set to 'On' if you wish to use the 'Bad Hole Indicator 2' curve in a zone.
Set to 'Off' to turn 'Bad Hole Indicator 2' curve off in a zone.
(49) 'BadH2 Min'
Bad Hole Indicator 2 Minimum value.
When the 'Bad Hole Indicator 2' curve values are greater than this Minimum value, any
(50) 'BadH2 Max'
Bad hole indicator 2 Maximum value.
767
Senergy
When the 'Bad Hole Indicator 2' curve values are less than this Maximum value, any
When the parameter is left 'blank', the discriminator is ignored.
Related Topics
10.3.3 Clay Volume Interactive Plot

The 'Clay Volume Interactive Plot' consists of (from left to right): A Depth track, 'Zone' track,
'Single Clay indicators' (one per track), 'Double Clay indicators' (one per track), a 'Bad Hole' track
and a 'Result' track containing a curve for each of the clay indicator interpretations.
Zone Track
The Zone track is used for displaying the current Clay Volume zonation used in the interpretation.
Zones can be 'created', 'deleted' and zone 'tops' can be moved.
Interpretation
Senergy
768
To create a new zone by splitting a current zone: 'click' in the 'zone track' at the depth for the
split and choose 'Split Zone' from the pop-up menu.
To delete a zone, choose 'Delete Zone' from the pop-up menu.
Zone tops and bottoms can be moved by placing the cursor on the top of a zone in the zone
track and, with the left mouse button held, drag the top to a new position. It is possible to
have gaps between zones. To remove a gap, drag the bottom of the zone above a gap to
below the top of the zone below the gap.
'Clicking' 'Edit Zone' opens the 'Edit Zone tops' module. This has limited operability. It is
only possible to import tops data from a spreadsheet, or output the created Clay Volume
zones to a text file. For greater 'editability' of Clay Volume zones open the 'Clay Volume
Parameters' module.
Single Indicator Track

The track will consist of a single curve, which is the indicator, plus two vertical parameter lines,
which are the indicators 'Clean' and 'Clay' parameter values. To interactively change a
parameter, place the cursor on a parameter line. The name of the parameter and its value will be
displayed at the bottom left corner of the main window. With the left mouse button, drag the line
to its new value. When the mouse button is released, that zone will be re-calculated and all
displays updated.
By 'clicking' in a track , a pop-up menu will appear. Firstly, this allows the user to turn 'On' / 'Off'
the indicator in this zone. Secondly, the user can select a histogram plot for the indicator. This
will allow the user to change the parameter values using the interactive lines on the histogram
plot. (See Histogram section).
Double Indicator Track

This type of track will contain two curves which make up the 'double indicator', plus two vertical
lines that will be the 'clay' parameter values for each of the two curves. The clay parameter lines
can be moved interactively, as described for the single indicators. The pop-up menu has an
additional feature, which allows a crossplot of the double indicator to be displayed. The crossplot
will allow the user to interactively set the 'clay point' and the 'clean line' (See Crossplot section).
The crossplot method is the most useful for setting the double indicator parameters.
When the 'Link Clay Paras' parameter, on the 'Zone Depths' tab of the 'Clay Volume
Parameters' interface is turned on ('checked') then, where multiple double clay indicators are
active, any common double clay parameter- for example 'ND Den Clay' and 'DS Den Clay' will
be simultaneously updated when a crossplot Clay point or interactive line on the 'Clay Volume
769
Senergy
Interactive Plot' is moved.
Bad Hole Indicator

The bad hole indicator track will only be displayed when a curve is selected as a 'bad hole'
indicator in the 'Clay Volume Analysis' module . Initially, the bad hole indicator logic is not active
nor are its cut-off parameters set. The cut-off values need to be initialized in the 'Clay Volume
Parameters' interface and then they will be displayed as vertical lines in a log track on the 'Clay
Volume Interactive Plot'. Once displayed, the cut-off values can be changed interactively as
described in the single indicator section above.
Where a single Bad Hole Indicator curve, such as the Caliper log, is used to switch off doubleclay indicators where the borehole is washed out, the user needs to input a 'BadH1 Min'
parameter value into the 'Clay Volume Parameters' 'Bad Hole' tab. When the caliper log
values are greater than the 'BadH1 Min' parameter, the double clay indicators are switched off.
The screen shot shown below illustrates a Bad Hole logic Flag set up to turn off double clay
indicators in 2 zones where the Bad Hole Indicator (caliper) curve values exceed 10.5 inches.
The user must set the 'BadH1 Min' parameter to the maximum allowable caliper value (in
caliper curve units).
If the user wishes to discriminate 'bad hole' conditions using a caliper log for example, to switch
off the double clay indicators where hole diameter is greater than a maximum threshold (over
gauge) and also where the caliper tool is closed (caliper curve values over some intervals are
less than a minimum threshold) the Caliper curve should be selected in both 'Bad Hole
Interpretation
Senergy
770
Indicators for Double Clay Indicators' 'Name' boxes in the 'Clay Volume Analysis' module.
After clicking the 'Run' button and launching the 'Clay Volume Interactive Plot', open the 'Clay
Volume Parameters' interface.
On the 'Bad Hole' tab set the parameters as illustrated below; 'BadH1 Max' and 'BadH2 Min'.
The double clay indicators will be switched off where these two thresholds are exceeded.
Result Track
The result track will contain the resulting 'Clay Volume' curve for each clay indicator selected.
The minimum and average of all the clay indicators will not be displayed but can easily be added,
if required, by 'clicking' on the track header and adding the curve. A clay indicator which is not
used in a zone will not be displayed in the result track for that zone (its values having been set to
'Null' over that zone).
Undo/Redo
the arrows are 'clicked' the parameter lines move and the output curves are recalculated. The
771
Senergy
If the drop-down icon (between the two arrows) is 'clicked' then a list of all the possible undo's /
redo's is displayed. This facilitates the selection of which undo / redo the user wants to perform.
Interpretation
Senergy
Related Topics
10.3.4 Clay Volume Equations and Methodology

Gamma Ray
The Gamma Ray clay indicator (VclGr) can be calculated using the following methods:
Linear :
VclGr
Gr GrClean
GrClay GRClean
Curved :
Z = VclGr as above
772
773
VclGr
for Z less than 0.55
Senergy
0.0006078
for Z greater than 0.55 and less than 0.73 VclGr 2.1212
for Z greater than 0.73 and less than 1.0 VclGr = Z
Clavier :
VclGr
1.7
3.38
0.7
Stieber (South Louisiana Miocene and Pliocene) :

VclGr
0.5 Z
1.5 Z
Larionov older rocks (Mesozoic) :

VclGr
0.333 (2 2
1)
Larionov younger rocks (Tertiary clastics) :

VclGr
0.08336 (2 3.7
1)
The following plot shows the different gamma ray Vclay relationships.
100.0 Z
0.81667
1.58527
Interpretation
Senergy
SP
VclSP
SP SPClean
SPClay SPClean
Neutron
VclNeu
neu
neu
neuClay
neuClay
neuClean
neuClean
Resistivity
Z
Rclay
Rt
Rclean
Rclean
Rt
Rclay
for Rt greater than 2 x Rclay then

otherwise
Vcl Re s
0.5
2 Z
0.67 Z 1
VclRes = Z
774
775
Senergy
Other Linear
Vcl
LogCurve LogClean
LogClay LogClean
Neutron / Density
The 'Double Clay Indicators' work on the principle of defining a 'clean line' and a 'clay point'.
The clay volume is calculated as the distance the input data falls between the 'clay point' and
the 'clean line'. The following plot illustrates the principle:
VclND
DenCl 2
DenCl 2
DenCl1
DenCl1
Neu
NeuCl1
Den
DenCl1
NeuClay
NeuCl1
DenClay
NeuCl 2
DenCl1
NeuCl1
NeuCl 2
NeuCl1
Where DenCl1 & NeuCl1 and DenCl2 & NeuCl2 are the density and neutron values for the two
ends of the clean line.
Sonic Density
VclSD
DenCl 2
DenCl 2
DenCl1
DenCl1
Son
SonCl1
Den
DenCl1
SonClay
SonCl1
DenClay
SonCl 2
DenCl1
SonCl1
SonCl 2
SonCl1
Where DenCl1 & SonCl1 and DenCl2 & SonCl2 are the density and sonic values for the two
Neutron Sonic
Interpretation
Senergy
VclNS
NeuCl 2
NeuCl 2
NeuCl1
NeuCl1
Son
SonCl1
Neu
NeuCl1
SonClay
SonCl1
NeuClay
SonCl 2
NeuCl1
776
SonCl1
SonCl 2
SonCl1
Where NeuCl1 & SonCl1 and NeuCl2 & SonCl2 are the neutron and sonic values for the two
Other Double Indicator

VclOD
OD1Cl 2
OD1Cl 2
OD1Cl1
OD1Cl1
OD2
OD2Cl1
OD1 OD1Cl1
OD2Clay
OD2Cl1
OD1Clay
OD2Cl 2
OD1Cl1
OD2Cl1
OD2Cl 2
OD2Cl1
Where OD1Cl1 & OD2Cl1 and OD1Cl2 & OD2Cl2 are the other double clay volume input curves
(OD1 and OD2) values for the two ends of the clean line.
Bad Hole Indicator

If the 'Bad Hole indicator' logic is used, then over any interval which is flagged as Bad Hole all
the 'Double Clay Indicators' will be set to Null (-999).
Related Topics
777
10.4
Senergy
Porosity and Water Saturation
The Porosity and Water Saturation interpretation module is used to interactively calculate
porosity (PHI), water saturation (Sw), flushed zone water saturation (Sxo), matrix density (
RHOMA) , hydrocarbon density (RHOHY) and wet and dry clay volumes (VWCL & VDCL). The
number and type of output curves depends on the porosity model chosen and the logic selected.
The module is accessed under the main menu Interpretation
Saturation or from the
Porosity and Water
speed button.
The set-up screens allow the user to select default porosity and water saturation models which
will initiate the Porosity and Water Saturation Parameters display. Once the OK button is
clicked, any changes to calculation methods or interpretation parameters should be made using
the Porosity and Water Saturation Parameters screen. The porosity and saturation
equation defaults are also used to set up the Interactive Plot for this interpretation
module. It is therefore important that the correct models are selected, in order for the
appropriate Interactive Log Plot to be launched.
The Porosity and Water Saturation module can now be linked to the Clay Volume module see Linking Clay Volume module to Porosity Water Saturation module within the Link Zones / Top
Sets chapter for more details.
The Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis module is arranged on three tabbed screens.
These are, Input Curves, Output Curves, Plot Options.
Related Topics
Define Input Curves
Define Output Curves
Define the Plot Options
Porosity and Sw Interactive Plot
Porosity and Sw Methodology
Porosity and Sw Equations
Section 10.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation
Interpretation
Senergy
778
10.4.1 Define Input Curves

The Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis Set Up window shown above, sets up the input
and output curves for these calculations, plus some default logic. The input curve entry boxes
will be automatically filled in with appropriate curve names if IP finds them in the currentlyselected well. The user can change any input curve name if the defaulted curve name is not
correct.
To Display the Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis Dialog:
From the Interpretation Menu, Select Porosity and Water Saturation to display the Porosity
and Water Saturation Analysis Dialog.
Alternatively press the Keys Ctrl+Alt+P to display the Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis
Dialog
779
Senergy
It is not necessary to fill in all Input Curve boxes. Only those needed as input to the userselected Porosity and Saturation models are required. The Clay Volume will be assumed to be
zero if the Clay Volume input curve entry box is left blank.
Default Models
The Initial Porosity Model and Default Saturation Equation are selected from on-screen
drop-down lists.
Interpretation
Senergy
780
The Default Mud Type is OBM check-box allows the user to set up the mud type for this
interpretation module.
Pass Through Porosity

The Pass through Porosity entry box, illustrated below, allows the user to select a pre-existing
781
Senergy
porosity curve (one calculated outside of this module) to be used in the Water Saturation
computation.This input curve is used to override the default porosity calculations. When a curve
name is entered into this box, the module will only calculate water saturation. On running the
module, the user should check the Porosity Water Saturation Parameters table, On the Phi
Logic tab, select the Input Crv option in the Porosity Method column and choose the Input
Porosity type (Total or Effective) as shown in the diagram below. Then Run the calculation
again.
Other Input Curves

The program assumes that any neutron curve entered is in Limestone matrix units. If this
is not the case, then the curve should be converted to Limestone porosity units using the
appropriate service company environmental correction module or the Basic Log Analysis
Functions module.
The Bad Hole Discriminator curve entry box can be used to set up a curve as a flag to indicate
depth intervals where hole conditions are such that the default porosity method is not valid, for
example, in sufficiently badly-washed-out, rugose hole where the Density and Neutron tools are
no longer in pad contact with the borehole wall. In such a case the Porosity model will default to
calculating a Sonic Porosity over the bad hole interval.
The Non Calculation Flag curve can be used to turn off the calculations over an interval. If
this type of input flag contains any value other than 0 or Null, then such a depth level is not
calculated (Porosities, clay volume, mineral volumes are set to 0 and Sw set to 1.0). This can be
used to flag special minerals like Coal or Salt using techniques outside this module (for example
these could be picked by hand using the Interactive Curve Splice module using the Null Curve
option).
The Temperature is an essential curve and must be calculated and selected as an input for
Interpretation
Senergy
782
this module to operate. A Temperature curve can either be imported from an external source, or
the curve can be calculated using the Temperature Gradient Module.The Temperature Units
drop-down list box is used to define the units for any temperature entered as a parameter. For
instance, the Rw parameter will have a temperature associated with it.
Multi-Mineral Interpretation Settings

The Multi-Mineral Analysis Defaults are used to set up multi-mineral naming and Interactive
log Plot defaults. Checking the box in the top left hand corner of this panel activates this analysis
option.
The 3 Minerals and 4 Minerals radio button options allows the user to set the default number of
mineral volumes to calculate. If the 4 Minerals option is selected for the initial model Run, the
user can subsequently change and use the 3 Minerals option, over specified zones, by changing
the Model Type parameter for that zone. This is achieved through editing the Porosity and
Water Saturation Parameters.
The mineral names are user-editable text entries and must be entered under the Name box.
These names are used on the parameter screens to identify the different minerals that are being
calculated. Changing the mineral name will change the Output Mineral Volume curve name on
the Output Curves tab. The check boxes next to the mineral names are used to set up the
default interactive log plot so that the correct lithology is displayed. The user can only select
(check) one mineral type per line. If this is the first time the module is Run then the mineral type
will be used to set default mineral parameters.
783
Senergy
Related Topics
Define Input Curves
10.4.2 Define Output Curves

The Output Curves tab allows the user to select the output curves that are to be produced by
the module. IP provides default output curve names for some outputs, but the user can edit any
name to customize the outputs. Not all output curves are produced automatically. Those text
entry boxes with no curve names in them are optional curves. You must type in a curve name to
create them as output curves. The output curve list depends on the Default Saturation
Equation used and the input curves selected.
Interpretation
Senergy
784
Optional output curves include:

Rw at Form. Temp - Formation Water Resistivity at formation temperature
Density reconstruct - Reconstructed density curve
Den Fluid Rxo Zone - Density of Fluid in the Flushed Zone computed from the following
equation:
Den Fluid Rxo Zone = RhoFiltrate * Sxo + (1-Sxo) * RhoHyd
where:
RhoHyd is the apparent hydrocarbon density, as seen by the density tool i.e. electron
density.
In addition to the curves defined on the Output Curves tab, the following curves are also created
automatically by the program:
RWAPP
Apparent water resistivity.
RMFAPP
Apparent flushed zone water resistivity.
QVN
Normalized Qv. Only if Juhasz water saturation model is chosen.
CWAPP
Apparent water conductivity. Only if Juhasz water saturation model is
chosen.
785
Senergy
QVapp
Apparent Qv. Only if Waxman Smits water saturation model is chosen.
PhiT_recp
Reciprocal of PhiT. Only if Waxman Smits water saturation model is
chosen.
QVN, CWAPP, QVapp and PHIT_recp are output curves based on the Water Saturation model
selected.
New output curves for v3.5
BVWT
Bulk volume total. PhiT * SwT
BVWSXOT
Bulk volume flushed zone total. PhiT * SxoT
PhiTLam :
Total porosity in laminated sand layer.
SwTLam :
SwT in the laminated sand layer.
BVWTLam
RtLam
RxoLam :
Bulk volume water total in laminated sand layer. PhiTLam * SwTLam
Rt in the sand lamination used in the SwLam calculations.

Rxo in the sand lamination used in the SxoLam calculations.
VFINES (Volume of Fines) is the sum of VSILT plus VWCL. The user can now use the
Cumulative Curve Style option within log plots to create these intermediate type curves.
The Interactive Log Plot will look slightly different, depending on the saturation equation chosen
and the input curves selection. The most important difference is seen between a Dual Water
saturation equation, where Rw bound can be interactively changed, and the other Archie type
equations, where Rt clay can be interactively changed. If the Juhasz and the Waxman Smits
equations are selected, additional output curves are created (listed above), which allow special
Interactive Crossplots, designed for these equations, to be made available. The Multi-Mineral
option, if selected, will also change how the Interactive Log Plot is formatted. It is therefore
important that the input saturation equation and multi-mineral defaults are selected with due
care.
There is now the option in v3.5 to display just Total porosity curves on the Interactive Log Plot.
The Parameter set name box is used to name the file where the Porosity and Water
Saturation parameters will be stored after an interpretation is finished. Parameter Sets are
saved by selecting the Save Parameter set in the main menu. The same name is also used to
save the Parameter Set listings to the hard disk with an extension of .TXT. The Print Parameter
set menu item is used to do this. Parameter sets are also stored automatically in the database.
The Load / Save Parameter Sets button allows the user to manage the Porosity and Water
Saturation Parameter Set. See Parameter Set Management.
The user clicks the OK button to start the Porosity and Water Saturation interpretation.
If this is the first OK using this module on a particular well, a new Parameter Set (default name
Interpretation
Senergy
786
PhiSw) is created, and default parameters will be calculated or initialized for each interpretation
parameter. The user will be asked whether the clay parameters from the Clay Volume module
should be copied to initialize the PhiSw parameters. If the user chooses to copy the clay
parameters, then all the zone top and bottom depths from the Clay Volume module will be
copied to the Porosity and Water Saturation module along with the clay parameters for each
zone.
If an existing Parameter Set has been loaded, or the user has already run the Porosity and
Water Saturation module, then the user will be asked whether the Interactive Log Plot should be
created. The user should normally answer Yes to this, since this initializes all the special
Interactive log Plot features.
Method Comparison Output Curves

If the following porosity output curves are checked on then these porosities are calculated at the
end of the analysis under Section 21 Final Calculations in the Porosity and Sw Equations and
Methodology section. The porosities are calculated using the same equations as defined in the
porosity methods section 5 through 10 in the Porosity and Sw Equations and Methodology
section except that the Sw used in the equations is the Sw calculated from the main logic. Hence
it is possible that these porosities will be marginally different than the same method selected as
the Porosity Method parameter. Since Sw will be calculated using the Porosity Method
parameter which may be different from the comparison porosity.
These comparison methods are designed to compare porosity calculation methods. However,
the final porosity used for summations should be the Phie curve derived using the method set
with the Porosity Method parameter. This will ensure that the calculated Sw uses the correct
porosity curve in the calculation.
A similar set of output comparison Sw curves can be created if the following boxes are checked.
The saturations are calculated at the end of the analysis - Section 21 Final Calculations. The
user can output effective and total water saturations for each method. The calculations are made
787
Senergy
using the Phie and PhiT curves. The Phie and PhiT curves are hydrocarbon corrected using
the Sxo curve which is calculated using the Sat Equation parameter in the Sw Logic tab of the
Porosity Water Saturation Parameters module. Hence it is possible that these Sws will be
marginally different than the Sw calculated from the same method selected as the Sat Equation
parameter.
These comparison methods are designed to compare water saturation methods they should not
be used for anything other than this. The final Sw used for summations should be the Sw and
SwT curves using the method set with the Sat Equation parameter.
To illustrate the water saturation comparison method and the mnemonics used further we will
use the Archie equation as an example.
There are two Archie equations; the Archie and the Archie Total. Archie outputs an effective water
saturation (SwArch). While Archie Total outputs a total water saturation (SwTArchT). One
cannot compare Sw and SwT directly as they are different things. Hence, the program calculates
a SwT from the Archie equation (SwTArch) and a Sw from the Archie Total (SwArchT) equation.
It does the same for the all of the water saturation equations. These curves are meant for rough
comparison purposes only as they havent been hydrocarbon corrected in the same way as water
saturations calculated via the Sat Equation parameter in the Sw Logic tab of the Porosity
Water Saturation Parameters module.
The default log plot will include these comparisons as separate tracks. These tracks will only
appear if one or more comparison curves are output. The standard result (Phie and Sw curves)
are included in the comparison tracks.
Interpretation
Senergy
788
Clay Type Distribution

Using the Thomas-Stieber method for shale (clay) distribution, IP can now output the volumes of
Laminated, Dispersed and Structural clay in the rock.
The method comes from the Juhasz SPWLA paper Assessment of the distribution of shale,
porosity and hydrocarbon saturation in shaly sands. The techniques described within IP are the
same as in the Thomas -Stieber paper but developed further so that Phie and Vcl can be used
directly rather than the raw Neutron / Density crossplot. This allows for hydrocarbon corrected
results.
In IP we generally talk in terms of clay volumes, however, it is perfectly possible to adjust
parameters so that calculated volumes are shale volumes. This is really up to the preference of
the user. The results from the calculations are perfectly legitimate regardless of whether the user
is calculating clay or shale volumes.
789
Senergy
The basic Thomas-Stieber crossplot model for shale distribution is shown above. Depending on
whether a point falls above or below the Laminated line either a Dispersed / Laminated or a
Laminated / Structural model is used. There is no option to have a Dispersed / Structural model.
The Clay Type Distribution calculations are automatically made and the results are output only if
the user selects in the Plot Options tab the following three options:
Display Clay / Shale Type
Display Sand Lamination properties track
Display SwT Laminated in Sw track
The twelve output curves related to the Clay Type Distribution are:
Vclay Laminated (Vlam) - is the volume of laminated clay in the whole rock (i.e. sand and
shale laminations combined).
Vclay Dispersed (Vdisp) - is the volume of the dispersed clay in the whole rock.
Vclay Structural (Vstruc) - is the volume of the structural clay in the whole rock.
Phi Laminated (PhieLam) - is the effective porosity in the laminated sand layer.
PhiT Laminated (PhiTLam) - is the total porosity in the laminated sand layer.
Sw Laminated (SwLam) - is the effective water saturation in the laminated sand layer.
SwT Laminated (SwTLam) - is the total water saturation in the laminated sand layer.
BVW Laminated (BVWLam) - is the bulk volume water in the laminated sand layer.
BVWT Laminated (BVWTLam) - is the total bulk volume water in the laminated sand layer.
Vcl Laminated (VclLam) - is the dispersed clay volume in the actual sand laminations.
Interpretation
Senergy
790
Rt Sand Lamination (RtLam) - is the deep resistivity (Rt) in the sand lamination used in the
SwLam calculations.
Rxo Sand Lamination (RxoLam) - is the invaded zone resistivity (Rxo) in the sand lamination
used in the SxoLam calculations.
For the equations showing the derivation of these curves go to Section 23. Clay Type
Distribution Equations in the Porosity and Sw Equations and Methodology section.
The Laminated result curves are the properties of the sand laminations in a Shale/Sand
laminated sequence.
Related Topics
Define Input Curves
791
Senergy
10.4.3 Define the Plot Options

The Plot Options tab allows some customization of the default Phi/Sw plot.
The Porosity, Resistivity and Salinity track scales can be set here.
The Auto scale input Density and Neutron logs check box allows the user to select auto
scaling of the Density and Neutron curves. If the box isnt checkedthen the default curve
scales will be displayed.
If the Display Silt box is checked then Silt will be displayed in the lithology track.
Tick the Display Coal / Salt / No analyses flags box if the user wants to output a flag
showing that no analysis was performed over a coal or salt interval.
A Gamma Ray track can be switched on or off using the Display a Gamma Ray track tick
box.
The Display Module Logic Track creates a logic track which displays the PhiFlag curve
results.
Interpretation
Senergy
792
The shading for the clean matrix can be selected from the drop-down selection box of all
available lithology types Main Lithology shading.
The Hydrocarbon Fluid shading options are used to set up the hydrocarbon display colour
in the Interactive Log Plot.
If the Oil option is chosen, then the plot will show the hydrocarbon as green shading.
If the Gas option is chosen, hydrocarbon will be displayed as red shading.
The Both option will set up a variable shading for hydrocarbon, which will make the
shading green when the output hydrocarbon density is greater than 0.4 gm/cc and red
when the density is less than 0.4 gm/cc. This cut-off value can be changed by the user
in the Plot Format.
The Make Total Porosity Display when checked will display the default PhiSw log plot with
Total porosity curves. The Porosity track will show PhiT, BVWSXOT and BVWT curves.
The Lithology track will contain VDCL (dry clay), VSILT (silt) and PHIT (total porosity).
If the Laminated sand options are turned on then the Lithology track will still contain
effective porosity curves. This is due to Thomas Steiber shale type analysis curves being
wet clay curves.
The last three Plot Options relate to Clay Type Distribution.

The Display Clay / Shale Type check box enables the user to display in the Lithology track
of the default Phi/Sw plot the three types of shale. The normal VWCL curve is no longer
shown since this is the sum of the three shale types.
If the Display Sand Lamination properties track is checked, the default Phi/Sw plot has
two tracks added to it; Sand Lam and Sand Lam Res.
If the Display SwT Laminated in Sw track is checked then the SwTLam curve is added to
793
Senergy
the Saturation track. NOTE: SWLam is not added in the effective porosity display since it is
the same as Sw.
For the equations showing the derivation of these curves go to Section 12. Laminated Sw
Model in the Porosity and Sw Equations and Methodology section.
Related Topics
Define Input Curves
10.4.4 Porosity and Sw Interactive Plot

The Porosity and Water Saturation module Interactive Plot format, from left to right, consists
of:
Depth track
Zone track: The Zone track is used to display the current zonation scheme for the study
well. Interpretation zones can be created, deleted and zone top depths moved for use in
an interpretation.
Gamma Ray track : Gamma Ray. This contains Gamma Ray curves. This track is for
reference purposes only. It can be switched off by using the Display a Gamma Ray track
check box in the Plot Options Tab of the Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis
module.
Porosity Input track : Neutron, Density and Sonic. The Porosity Input track will contain the
Neutron, Density, Sonic and, if available, EPT TPL curves.
Resistivity track : Rt and Rxo. The Resistivity track will contain the input Rxo and Rt
curves, displayed along with their clay parameter interactive lines.
Salinity track : Rw and Rmf apparent track. Rw Apparent (RWAPP)and Rmf Apparent (
RMFAPP) curves are automatically calculated from the Phi Total (PHIT) and resistivity
curves, using the a and m parameters that are entered on the Sw Logic tab of the Phi/Sw
Parameters table. The output RWAPP and RMFAPP curves have been converted, within
IP, to the temperature entered for the Rw or Rmf parameter (Rw temp or Rmf temp.
Interpretation
Senergy
794
parameter) on the Sw Logic parameters tab. Interactive lines for Rw and Rmf are available.
If the Dual Water saturation model was selected as the default (see Input window above),
then RwB (Rw bound) and RmfB (Rmf bound) interactive parameter lines will also be
displayed in the track.
Matrix Track : Rho matrix, Dt matrix and Hydrocarbon density. Three curves are generally
displayed in this track. Rho matrix (RHOMA), DT matrix (DTMA)and Rho Hydrocarbon (
RHOHY). These are computed curves from the interpretation run. These curves are often
seen as vertical lines, since they represent fixed values in the interpretation.
Logic Flag: PHIFLAG Logic. The Logic track displays the PHIFLAG curve. This curve
should contain no values after a normal execution of the PHI/Sw computation module.
Water Saturations Track : Sw and Sxo. The Saturation track contains the computed
SwU and SxoU curves, which are the unlimited curves.
Calculated Porosity Track :Phi Effective and Phi Total. The Porosity track will contain the
Total and Effective porosity computed curves plus a Moveable Oil Plot.
Lithology track : Vclay, Vsilt, Vsand. The Lithology track will contain a display showing
the proportion of the total rock for Wet Clay, Silt, Sand and Porosity.
If the method comparison output curves for porosity and water saturation have been checked on
in the Output Curves tab of the Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis then a further three
tracks will be displayed:
Sw Comparison track : Sw curves from the different water saturation equations calculated
using Phie.
SwT Comparison track : SwT curves from the different water saturation equations
calculated using PhiT.
Phie Comparison track : Phie curves calculated using the different porosity equations.
If the Display Sand Lamination properties track has been checked on in the Plot Options tab
of the Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis then a Sand Lam and Sand Lam Res track will
be added to the Phi/Sw interactive plot.
Below is the standard Phi/Sw Interactive Plot. See Also: Manage the Interactive Log Plot
795
Senergy
Related Topics
Define Input Curves
10.4.4.1 Define the Zone Track
The Zone track is used to display the current zonation scheme for the study well. Interpretation
zones can be created, deleted and zone top depths moved for use in an interpretation. To create
a new zone, split an existing zone:
click in the Zone track at the depth for the split,
choose the Split Zone option from the pop-up menu.
To delete a zone, choose the Delete zone option from the pop-up menu. Zone tops and
bottom depths can be moved by placing the cursor on the top of a zone in the Zone track
and, with the left mouse button held, drag the top to a new position. It is possible to have
Interpretation
Senergy
796
gaps between zones. To remove a gap, drag the bottom of the zone above the gap to some
point below the top of the zone below the gap.
Clicking Edit Zone opens the Edit Zone tops module. This has limited operability. It is only
possible to import tops data from a spreadsheet, or output the created PhiSw zones to a
text file. For greater editability of PhiSw zones open the PhiSw Parameters module.
Related Topics
Define the Zone Track
Define the Gamma Ray Track
Define the Porosity Input Track
Define the Resistivity Track
Define the Salinity Track
Define the Matrix Track
Define the Logic (PHIFLAG) Track
Define the Water Saturation Track
Define the Calculated Porosity Track
Define the Lithology Track
Define the Apparent Matrix Track
Define the Comparison Tracks
Define the Sand Lam Tracks
10.4.4.2 Define the Gamma Ray Track
This contains Gamma Ray curves. This track is for reference purposes only. It can be switched
off by using the Display a Gamma Ray track check box in the Plot Options Tab of the
Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis module.
Related Topics
797
Senergy

10.4.4.3 Define the Porosity Input Track
The Porosity Input track will contain the Neutron, Density, Sonic and, if available, EPT TPL
curves. There will be one Interactive Parameter Line per curve, which will be the Wet Clay
parameter value for that curve. To interactively change a parameter, place the cursor on a
parameter line. The name of the parameter and its value will be displayed at the bottom left
corner of the main window. With the left mouse button, drag the line to its new value. When the
mouse button is released, that zone will be re-calculated and all displays updated.
By clicking in the track, away from the parameter line, a pop-up menu will appear. Firstly, this
menu allows the user to select a histogram plot for individual curves. The user can change the
Wet Clay parameter values for each curve in the track, using the interactive line on the histogram
plot. (See Histogram section). Secondly, the user can choose from several crossplots (Neutron/
Density, Neutron/Sonic and Sonic/Density), depending on the track contents. The crossplots
allow the user to interactively change the Wet Clay and dry clay parameters. (See Crossplot
section).
The input Density and Neutron curves can be set on auto-scale by using the check box found in
the Plot Options Tab of the Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis module.
Related Topics
Interpretation
Senergy
798

10.4.4.4 Define the Resistivity Track
The Resistivity track will contain the input Rxo and Rt curves, displayed along with their clay
parameter interactive lines. The pop-up menu in this track contains Wet Clay Volume versus
Resistivity crossplots, where the value of resistivity clay can be chosen interactively.
Porosity versus Resistivity crossplots (Pickett plots) are also available. These allow the
user to modify Rw and m (cementation factor) interactively . The information windows at the
bottom left hand corner of the Pickett plot display the values of Rw at formation temperature (Rw
Form Temp) as well as the Rw value that has been entered into the Waters tab of the Phi/Sw
Parameters table, which could be at a different temperature (e.g. 60 degF).
Sw Lines can be defined Interactively from the Function Menu, Sw Lines for Picket Plot Option.
799
Senergy
Related Topics
10.4.4.5 Define the Salinity Track
Rw Apparent (RWAPP)and Rmf Apparent (RMFAPP) curves are automatically calculated

from the Phi Total (PHIT) and resistivity curves, using the a and m parameters that are entered
on the Sw Logic tab of the Phi/Sw Parameters table. The output RWAPP and RMFAPP curves
have been converted, within IP, to the temperature entered for the Rw or Rmf parameter (Rw
Interpretation
Senergy
800
temp or Rmf temp. parameter) on the Sw Logic parameters tab. Interactive lines for Rw and
Rmf are available. If the Dual Water saturation model was selected as the default (see Input
window above), then RwB (Rw bound) and RmfB (Rmf bound) interactive parameter lines will
also be displayed in the track.
If the Juhasz saturation model is chosen as the default water saturation equation in the Porosity
and Saturation Analysis Dialog then a CwApp versus QvN crossplot will be added to the Salinity
track Shortcut menu in the Porosity and Water Saturation Log Plot Display.
Select this Option to Display the CwApp versus. QvN crossplot
801
Senergy
If Waxman Smits has been chosen as the default water saturation equation then a PhiT_recp
(1/PhiT) versus QVApp crossplot will be added to the track pop-up menu.
Interpretation
Senergy
Related Topics
802
803
Senergy
10.4.4.6 Define the Matrix Track
Three curves are generally displayed in this track. Rho matrix (RHOMA), DT matrix (DTMA)
and Rho Hydrocarbon (RHOHY). These are computed curves from the interpretation run.
These curves are often seen as vertical lines, since they represent fixed values in the
interpretation.
Three interactive parameters are associated with the Rho matrix curve. These are:
Rho GD, which is the input grain density. This value is not important if a variable output
grain density is being calculated, but if the user elects to calculate the hydrocarbon density,
or fixes the input grain density, then this interactive parameter can be used to change the
input grain density. In the case where the grain density is varying, two other interactive lines
come into play. These are
Rho GD min - allows the output grain density to be clipped to this lower limit.
Rho GD max - allows the output grain density to be clipped to this upper limit.
For Hydrocarbon Density; the user has the options of either:
calculating a variable hydrocarbon density, or
fixing the Hydrocarbon Density value over a zone.
For the Variable Hydrocarbon Density case, the HC Den min parameter will set a lower limit
to the output hydrocarbon density and the HC Den parameter will set an upper limit. For the
Fixed Hydrocarbon Density case, the HC Den interactive parameter sets the fixed value.
The track pop-up menu has three logic options which can be turned on and off interactively.
The Variable Hc Den option switches on / turns off the calculation of hydrocarbon density.
The Variable GD option switches on / turns off the calculation of a matrix density.
The Variable Vcl option switches on / turns off the option to re-calculate the clay volume, if
Interpretation
Senergy
804
needed, to resolve the input curves, parameters and logic (see section Equations and
Methodology).
Related Topics
10.4.4.7 Define the Logic (PHIFLAG) Track
The Logic track displays the PHIFLAG curve. This curve should contain no values after a
normal execution of the PHI/Sw computation module. However, if the PHIFLAG value is greater
than zero the curve will be colour shaded, reflecting that some bad-hole logic is generally being
invoked. The user must closely evaluate the results over these flagged sections. The PHIFLAG
numeric codes are described under the Porosity and Saturation Equations and Methodology
, PHIFLAG section.
The Logic track can be turned on or off in the Display Module Logic track check box found in
the Plot Options Tab of the Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis module.
Related Topics
805
Senergy

10.4.4.8 Define the Water Saturation Track
The Saturation track contains the computed SwU and SxoU curves, which are the unlimited
curves. The curves can have values greater than 1.0. The output Sw and Sxo curves will be
clipped to 1.0 (100%). The xxU curves are good for visualizing how much greater than the 100%
water saturation is being calculated in the water zones. Thus, it is possible to arrive at statistically
100% Sw in a water zone, by adjusting the Rw.
If the Dual Water model is chosen as the default porosity model (see input window above) then
the output curves SwTU, SxoTU and Sw will be displayed. SwTU is the unlimited total water
saturation, and SxoTU is the flushed zone total unlimited water saturation.
Related Topics
10.4.4.9 Define the Calculated Porosity Track
The Porosity track will contain the Total and Effective porosity computed curves plus a
Moveable Oil Plot. The shading for oil and gas can be turned on or off using the Hydrocarbon
Interpretation
Senergy
806
Fluid shading buttons in the Plot Options Tab of the Porosity and Water Saturation
Analysis module.
Related Topics
10.4.4.10 Define the Lithology Track
The Lithology track will contain a display showing the proportion of the total rock for Wet Clay,
Silt, Sand and Porosity. The Silt display can be turned off using the Display Silt check box in the
Plot Options tab of the Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis module. If the Display Clay /
Shale Type is checked on in the Plot Options tab then three types of shale will be displayed.
The normal VWCL curve will not be shown since this curve is the sum of the three shale types.
807
Senergy
As well as getting the option of displaying histograms of all the curves listed in the Lithology
track it is also possible to crossplot VWCL / PHIE and VWCL / PHIT. If the Laminated Sands
option is turned on in the Plot Options tab of the Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis
module then an interactive line allowing the adjustment of PhiMax, the critical parameter in the
Thomas-Steiber shale type calculations, can be made.
Related Topics
Interpretation
Senergy
808

10.4.4.11 Define the Apparent Matrix Track
Multi-Mineral Analysis/Apparent Matrix Track

The multi-mineral analysis Interactive Plot has an extra track for display of the Umatrix
apparent (UMAPP), Dtmatrix apparent (DTMAPP) and Rho Matrix apparent (RHOMAPP)
curves. The Multi-Mineral Analysis Defaults are defined in the Porosity and Water Saturation
Analysis Dialog.
The Apparent Matrix Column is then added to the Porosity and Water Saturation Log Plot Display.
809
Senergy
Umatrix, Dtmatrix and Rhomatrix are calculated from the input curves for sonic, density and
Pef. Corrections are made for hydrocarbons and for clay if the Vclay is an input curve and the
Clay Correct input logic parameter is set to Yes. The Umatrix versus Rhomatrix and
Rhomatrix versus Dtmatrix crossplots are used to select the mineral end-points. Right mouse
clicking in the Apparent Matrix track produces a pop-up menu where these crossplots can be
selected.
Interpretation
Senergy
Related Topics
810
811
Senergy
10.4.4.12 Define the Comparison Tracks
Sw Comparison Track
If the following curves are checked in the Output Curves Method Comparisons tab of the
Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis module then the different water saturation equations
are computed and the Sw curves are output.
SwT Comparison Track

This track contains the total water saturation output curves calculated from the different water
saturation equations. Check the required boxes in the Output Curves tab to compare the different
methodologies.
Phie Comparison Track :

Check the required boxes in the Output Curves tab to compare the different porosity
methodologies.
Interpretation
Senergy
812
If the method comparison porosity and water saturation output curves are checked in the Output
Curves tab of the Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis then the Interactive Plot will look
similar to this:
Related Topics
813
Senergy

10.4.4.13 Define the Sand Lam Tracks
Sand Lam Track

This track is added to the Phi/Sw interactive plot if the Display Sand Lamination properties track
is checked on in the Plot Options tab of the Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis. The track
contains the properties of the sand laminations. The volume of clay shown is therefore only the
dispersed or structural clay in the actual sand lamination. The porosity is the porosity in the sand
lamination and will always be greater than or equal to the effective porosity of the total rock, which
includes the shale laminations. The screenshot below was created with the Make Total Porosity
Display checked off.
Sand Lam Res Track :

This track is added to the Phi/Sw interactive plot if the Display Sand Lamination properties
track is checked on in the Plot Options tab of the Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis.
The track contains the calculated Rt and Rxo curves for the sand laminations. There are also
interactive lines for the parameters Res Lam Shale, Rt Lam Sand and Rxo Lam Sand in this
track. The screenshot below was created with the Make Total Porosity Display checked on.
Display the Sand Lam Tracks in the Porosity and Water Saturation Log Plot Display
If the Laminated sand options are turned on then the Lithology track will still contain effective
porosity curves. This is due to Thomas Steiber shale type analysis curves being wet clay curves.
Interpretation
Senergy
814
Related Topics
10.4.5 Porosity and Sw Parameters

The Porosity Water Saturation Parameters window allows the user to manually change any
Porosity / Water Saturation computation parameter, and to create, edit and delete interpretation
zones. The window is launched from the main menu Interpretation Porosity Water Saturation
Parameters option, or by using the speed button
speed button
next to the Porosity and Water Saturation
815
Senergy
The Porosity Water Saturation Parameters window displays the Porosity / Water Saturation
interpretation parameters organized onto tabbed screens arranged across the window, with the
interpretation zones listed in rows vertically in the window.
If a parameter is an On / Off-type flag, then ticking it will switch it between On and Off. In the
following screen, the Variable Hc Den, Variable GD, Variable Vcl and OBM ? parameters are
On/Off flag parameters.
If a parameter is a List-type parameter - including many parameters with the word Method, Model,
Source or Equation in the Parameter title, then clicking on it will launch a pop-up menu where the
parameter can be changed. In the screenshot shown below the parameters Porosity Method and
Mineral Model are list parameters and launch the associated options list:
Interpretation
Senergy
816
If the Multi-Mineral Analysis Defaults option is checked on the main Porosity and Water Saturation
set-up window, then additional parameter tabs; MultiMin 1, MultiMin 2 and MultiMin 3 tabs will be
visible in the Parameters window.
Parameter cells in the tabular display that have a grey background are not used in the analysis
for that zone. In the example shown below, the greyed out parameters are only associated with
the Waxman Smits water saturation equation and, since the water saturation equation parameter
is set to Dual Water in two zones, the Waxman Smits parameters are greyed out.
NOTE : Changing a parameter value on a tab does not mean that a zone is automatically recalculated. The user must click the Run button in order to re-calculate all zones and update all
interactive displays.
The Null all result curves before running calculations check box (illustrated below), if checked will
set all output curve values from this module to null (-999) before re-running the computations.
This is useful if the user runs an interpretation and then subsequently wishes to modify the depth
interval over which the computations are run or to remove / merge interpretation zones.
817
Senergy
The Porosity and Water Saturation Parameters are listed on the following tabs; Zone Depths,
Clay, Waters, Hydrocarbon, Matrix, Phi Logic, Sw Logic, Laminated Sand, Limits / Badhole, Den/
Neu, Sonic, EPT, Coal / Salt / Kill, MultiMin1, MultiMin2, MultiMin3
The Print button on the parameter window will produce the following menu. This allows output of
the summation report to the printer or to a file. The file will be written to the default output
directory using the file set name, with the extension of ".txt".
The Close button on the Parameters window closes the window, but does not cancel any
changes made to the parameters. If the user closes the window without clicking Run, then the
changes made to the parameters will not come into effect until some other interactive parameter
is changed for that zone and therefore forces a re-calculation of the zone.
The Help buttons on the parameter screens are unique to the IP program in the sense that they
are not linked to this Help document. The button will display a small window (example below)
which will give a definition / clarification for individual parameters in the display. Once the window
is activated the user places the mouse cursor over a parameter in the Parameters window and
the Help for that parameter is displayed.
Interpretation
Senergy
818
Column Edits
To set all the parameter entries in one column of the Parameters screen to the same value, the
user should:
click in the header (title cells) of the column. This action turns the column header boxes to a
green highlight.
Now, changing any one parameter value in the highlighted column will change all cells in that
column to the same number.
To turn the column edit function to off, click the column header again and its colour will return to a
grey background. Column edits remain active while the well stays loaded in memory. They have
to be reset, if required, next time the well is loaded. The following shows a column edit turned on
for the Rw parameter.
NOTE: if a zone has been locked by checking the Lock Zone cell within the Zone Depths tab then
the value in the cell wont change.
Porosity and Water Saturation Parameter Names

The following input parameters are used in the Porosity Water Saturation Parameters module.
Only those that are relevant for the selected input curves will be displayed in the parameter
window. Therefore, sections on the EPT will only be shown if the EPT TPL curve is entered.
819
Senergy
Numbers in parentheses ( ), prefixing a parameter name, relate to the Monte Carlo Error Analysis
module and correspond to Porosity and Water Saturation inputs found in the file
MonteCarloDefaults.par.
Related Topics
Define Input Curves
10.4.5.2 Define the Zone Depths
The Zone Depths tab allows the user to change interpretation zone top and bottom depths and to
set optional Zone Names and Zone Colour. The Zone Name parameter can be used to facilitate
the distribution of interpretation parameters to other wells in an IP dataset if the additional wells
contain the same zone names as those in the interpreted well.
See Also: Define the Zone Track
Interpretation
Senergy
820
Parameter tabs except the Zone Depths tab. This is accomplished by ticking the Show Additional
Zone info tick-box. The user then has the option of showing the zone name or the zone depths
on each tab. Depending on which option is chosen, when you select another Parameter tab, the
zone names or zone depths will be shown in the left-hand column of the grid. The Show Default
Info option is just displaying the Zone # column populated with the zone number.
Alternatively, left-mouse-button click in the Zone (#) column header box of any parameter screen
and you will see the same three options as those seen from clicking the Show Additional Zone
Info button.
NOTE: this functionality is available on any of the tabs.
821
Senergy
The Zone Depths tab displays the current zonation scheme set up by the user. The zones can
either be copied from the Clay Volume module if this has already been run, or the user can set up
separate zones in the Porosity / Water Saturation interactive log plot.
Clicking the New Zone button will display the Add Zone Dialog. See Also: Create a New Zone.
The Delete zone button on the parameter window allows the deletion of one or more zones.
Select the zones to delete, and click OK.
The Lock Zone column allows a user to lock any zone which will prevent any of the parameters of
that zone in any of the tabs from being changed. It will also prevent any interactive lines on the
interactive plots from changing the parameter for that zone. The Multi-Well Change Parameters
module will also be affected. If a zone has been locked by checking the Lock Zone column then
the zone will be grayed out throughout all the tabs of the module.
Also within this tab is the option to link or un-link zones to the Clay Volume module using the Link
Clay Vol option. If the modules are linked then whatever changes are made in the Clay Volume
module will be passed through to the Porosity Water Saturation module. In the screenshot above
the Link Clay Vol column is grayed out, showing that the two modules are not linked. For more
information on linking modules go to Link Zones / Top Sets. Below is a screenshot of how this tab
would look if the two modules where linked.
Interpretation
Senergy
Related Topics
Zone Depths
Clay
Waters
Hydrocarbon
Matrix
Phi Logic
Sw Logic
Laminated Sand
Limits / Badhole
Den/Neu
Sonic
EPT
Coal / Salt / Kill
MultiMin1
MultiMin2
MultiMin3
822
823
Senergy
10.4.5.3 Define the Clay Parameters
The Clay Tab is used to Define the Clay Parameters to be Displayed in the Porosity and Water
Saturation Log Plot Display.
(11) Rho Wet Clay

Density of Wet Clay in gm/cc (kg/m3). Used for calculating porosity from the density log and
for calculating Wet Clay Total Porosity if a value is not entered in the PhiT Clay column.
A value must be entered if a density tool is selected on the set-up window.
(12) Rho Dry Clay

Density of Dry Clay in gm/cc (kg/m3). Used for calculating clay total porosity, PhiT Clay. ( IP
defaults to 2.78 gm/cc.)
(13) Neu Wet Clay

Neutron Wet Clay reading in decimal notation. Used for calculating Neutron Porosity.
A value must be entered if a neutron tool is selected on the set-up window.
(14) Sonic Wet Clay

Sonic Wet Clay value in Sec/ft ( Sec/m). Used for calculating Sonic Porosity.
A value must be entered if a sonic tool is selected on the set-up window.
Pef Clay
Pef value of Clay. Used in the multi-mineral analysis to clay-correct Umatrix when the Clay
Corr Input flag is set to On.
Interpretation
Senergy
824
(15) Res Clay

Resistivity of the Clay. Used for the Simandoux, Modified Simandoux and Indonesian
water saturation equations.
A value can be set using the interactive Resistivity versus Vclay crossplot.
(16) Rxo Clay

Resistivity of the Clay seen by the micro resistivity tool. Used for the Simandoux, Modified
Simandoux and Indonesian water saturation equations for calculating Sxo.
The Rxo Clay value is normally the same as the Res Clay parameter, but can be different due
to the different responses of the micro-resistivity and deep resistivity tools in Shaly zones.
A value can be set using the interactive Rxo versus Vclay crossplot.
(82) PhiT Clay

Total Porosity of Clay. If a cell is left blank, PhiT Clay will be calculated from the Rho Dry
Clay and Rho Wet Clay parameter entries.
Related Topics
Zone Depths
Clay
Waters
Hydrocarbon
Matrix
Phi Logic
Sw Logic
Laminated Sand
Limits / Badhole
Den/Neu
Sonic
EPT
Coal / Salt / Kill
MultiMin1
MultiMin2
MultiMin3
825
Senergy
10.4.5.4 Define the Waters Parameters
The Waters Tab is used to Define the Waters Parameters to be Displayed in the Porosity and
Water Saturation Log Plot Display.
(1) Rw
Formation Water Resistivity.
Rw Temp
Temperature associated with Rw; units set on curve input/output window. The program will
convert the Rw to formation temperature using the user-selected Temperature curve.
If Rw Temp is left blank then the Rw value will be assumed to be at formation
temperature, and no further conversion will be made. The user should understand that,
because Rw is temperature sensitive, it must have an associated temperature to enable the
interactive line in the Phi/Sw interactive plot to work. In the screen illustrated above, the Rw
Temp is set to 60 degF. This means that the Rwapp curve computed by the module will be
Rwapp at 60 DegF.
(3) Rmf
Mud filtrate resistivity.
Rmf Temp
Temperature associated with Rmf; units set on curve input/output window. The program will
convert the Rmf to formation temperature using the user-selected Temperature curve.
If Rmf Temp is left blank then the Rmf will be assumed to be at formation temperature, and
no further conversion will be made.
Interpretation
Senergy
826
(5) Rw bound
Clay bound water resistivity. Used in the Dual Water saturation equation option.
The value can be estimated from the Rw apparent curve in the Shaly wet sections. Rw
bound can be adjusted to give 100% Sw in these zones.
Rwb Temp
Temperature associated with Rw bound; units set on curve input/output window. The
program will convert Rw bound to formation temperature using the user-selected
Temperature curve.
If Rwb Temp is left blank then Rw bound will be assumed to be at formation temperature,
and no further conversion will be made.
(7) Rmf bound

Clay bound water resistivity in the flushed zone. Used in the Dual Water saturation
equation option. Normally the same as Rw bound but can vary, due to the different responses
of the micro resistivity and the deep resistivity curve in Shaly zones.
The value can be estimated from the Rmf apparent curve in the Shaly wet sections. Rmf
bound can be adjusted to give 100% Sxo in these zones.
Rmfb Temp
Temperature associated with Rmf bound; units set on curve input/output window. The
program will convert Rmf bound to formation temperature using the user-selected
Temperature curve.
If Rmfb Temp is blanked out, then Rmf bound will be assumed to be at formation
temperature, and no further conversion will be made.
Rho Sxo zone

Flushed zone water density in gm/cc (kg/m3). Used in the density equation for the density of
the water seen by the tool.
If Rho Sxo zone is blank the value is calculated from the Rmf parameter.
In oil-based mud Rho Sxo is calculated from Rw if the cell/column is left blank.
Salin Sxo zone

Flushed zone water salinity in decimals (e.g. 25 KPPM entered as .025). Used for making
formation salinity corrections to the neutron log and calculating TP water.
827
Senergy
If Salin Sxo zone is left blank, the value is calculated from the Rmf parameter.
In oil based mud Salin Sxo zone is calculated from Rw if the cell/column is left blank.
Related Topics
Zone Depths
Clay
Waters
Hydrocarbon
Matrix
Phi Logic
Sw Logic
Laminated Sand
Limits / Badhole
Den/Neu
Sonic
EPT
Coal / Salt / Kill
MultiMin1
MultiMin2
MultiMin3
10.4.5.5 Define the Hydrocarbon Parameters
The Hydrocarbon Tab is used to Define the Hydrocarbon Parameters to be Displayed in the
Porosity and Water Saturation Log Plot Display.
Interpretation
Senergy
828
(17) Hc Den
Hydrocarbon density in gm/cc (kg/m3). Used to calculate the apparent hydrocarbon density
seen by the density tool and the apparent hydrocarbon hydrogen Index seen by the neutron
tool.
If using the Density / Neutron model and the variable hydrocarbon density flag is set, then
Hc Den will be the maximum allowable hydrocarbon density.
If Hc Den is left blank, the value defaults to 1.0 gm/cc (1000 kg/m3).
Hc Den Min
Minimum allowable hydrocarbon density in gm/cc (kg/m3). Used only in the Density / Neutron
model and with the variable hydrocarbon density flag set. This value will set the minimum
possible hydrocarbon density.
PhiShr limit
Volume of hydrocarbon limit seen in the flushed zone in decimals (Phi*(1-Sxo) default 0.02 .
Used only in the Density / Neutron model and with the variable hydrocarbon density flag set.
When Phi*(1-Sxo) is less than PhiShr limit, then the level is considered to have too little
hydrocarbon to accurately calculate a hydrocarbon density and the default value (Hc Den) is
used.
Neu Hc HI
Neutron hydrocarbon Hydrogen Index in decimals. If the user wants to override the default
calculation then enter the value here; otherwise it will be calculated from the Hc Den
parameter.
Default calculation is Neu Hc HI = RhoH * 9 (4 - 2.5 RhoH) / (16 - 2.5 RhoH) where RhoH is
the input hydrocarbon density (Hc Den) in gm/cc.
Den Hc app
Density tool apparent hydrocarbon density in gm/cc (kg/m3). If you want to override the default
calculation, then enter the value here, otherwise it will be calculated from the Hc Den
parameter.
Default calculation is Den Hc app = RhoH * 2 (10 - 2.5 RhoH) / (16 - 2.5 RhoH)
where RhoH is the input hydrocarbon density (Hc Den) in gm/cc.
(21) Sonic Hc
829
Senergy
Sonic Hydrocarbon response in Sec/ft ( Sec/m). Must be entered if Sonic porosity model is
chosen.
Related Topics
Zone Depths
Clay
Waters
Hydrocarbon
Matrix
Phi Logic
Sw Logic
Laminated Sand
Limits / Badhole
Den/Neu
Sonic
EPT
Coal / Salt / Kill
MultiMin1
MultiMin2
MultiMin3
Interpretation
Senergy
830
10.4.5.6 Define the Matrix Parameters
The Matrix Tab is used to Define the Matrix Parameters to be Displayed in the Porosity and
Water Saturation Log Plot Display. See Also: Define the Matrix Track.
GD source
Matrix grain density source. Options are:
Fixed value entered as a parameter
Variable value entered as a curve
Multi-mineral. Grain density is calculated from mineral volumes using the TRUE mineral
densities. (Multi-mineral option only)
(24) Rho GD
Matrix grain density in gm/cc (kg/m3). Used if the GD source parameter is set to param.
For the density porosity model, this is the matrix density used to calculate porosity.
For the neutron/density porosity model, this is the starting input matrix density. If the variable
matrix grain density flag (Variable GD on the PHI logic tab) is set, then this value can be
different to the output matrix density.
For the neutron porosity model, this value will override any neutron matrix value (Neu Matrix)
entered. For example: if you wanted to calculate a neutron sandstone, enter 2.65 (2650) , and
the non-linear neutron sandstone transform will be used.
Rho GD max
Matrix grain density maximum value in gm/cc (kg/m3). Used only in the Density / Neutron
model and with the variable matrix grain density flag set (on the PHI logic tab). This value will
set the maximum possible matrix density.
831
Senergy
Rho GD min
Matrix grain density minimum value in gm/cc (kg/m3). Used only in the Density / Neutron
model and with the variable matrix grain density flag set (on the PHI logic tab). This value will
set the minimum possible matrix density.
Neu matrix
Neutron matrix value in decimal porosity units. Used only in the Neutron porosity model. This is
the neutron difference between 0% porosity limestone (assumed entered neutron porosity
matrix) and 0% porosity of the formation matrix.
A linear response is used. Therefore, if you want to convert to either sandstone or dolomite, it
is better to enter a value of Rho GD, and the non linear transform will be used.
Any value for the Rho GD parameter will totally override Neu Matrix, therefore if you want to
use Neu Matrix, blank out the Rho GD parameter.
(28) Sonic matrix

Sonic matrix travel time in Sec/ft. Used for sonic porosity model and bad hole sonic porosity.
Related Topics
Zone Depths
Clay
Waters
Hydrocarbon
Matrix
Phi Logic
Sw Logic
Laminated Sand
Limits / Badhole
Den/Neu
Sonic
EPT
Coal / Salt / Kill
MultiMin1
MultiMin2
MultiMin3
Interpretation
Senergy
832
10.4.5.7 Define the Phi Logic Parameters
The Phi Logic Tab allows the user to set up the Porosity Method to be applied to each
interpretation zone, together with the Mineral Model if the multi-mineral option was chosen,
whether Oil-Based mud was used in the hole and, if Pass through Porosity was selected,
whether the input curve is an effective or total porosity curve.
Porosity Method
Porosity calculation method. Options are : Neutron/Density, Neutron/Sonic, Neutron, Density
and Sonic
Input Crv.
If a porosity curve is entered in the Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis module Pass
through Porosity, the input curve name is used directly for porosity. In this case, the user
needs to set the Input Porosity parameter to Total or Effective porosity.
Variable Hc Den
Variable Hydrocarbon Density flag. Used in the Neutron/Density porosity model.
Set to On to calculate hydrocarbon density in the hydrocarbon zones, defined by PhiShr limit
parameter (on the Hydrocarbon tab). Parameters Hc Den Min and Hc Den define the limits
of the result.
Variable GD
Variable matrix grain density flag. Used in the Neutron/Density porosity model.
Set to On to calculate matrix density. Parameters Rho GD max and Rho GD min define the
833
Senergy
limits of the result.

If the Variable Hc Den flag is also set, then the hydrocarbon density will be calculated firstly
using the input matrix density. Only if the Hc Den is outside its limits will the matrix density be
varied.
Variable Vcl
Variable Clay Volume flag. Used in the Neutron/Density porosity model.
Set to On to calculate clay volume. Result must be between 0 and 1.
If the Variable Hc Den or Variable GD flag is also set, then these will be varied first. Only if
both are at their limits will the input clay volume be varied.
If Hc Den, Matrix Den and Clay Vol are all at their limits and no solution is possible, then the
neutron and/or density input curve will be reduced in order to resolve the solution, given the
input variables. When this happens the PHIFLAG curve will be set to 6 to indicate a reduction
in density, and 7 to indicate a reduction in neutron.
Mineral Model
Mineral model option. Used in the Neutron/Density, Neutron/Sonic and Neutron porosity
models and for the EPT to calculate TP matrix.
Options are :
Sandstone/Limestone/Dolomite (ss/ls/dol). If matrix density is greater than 2.71g/cc (2710
kg/m3), then the model will be Limestone/Dolomite; less than 2.71g/.cc (2710 Kg/ m3),
Sandstone/Limestone.
Sandstone/Dolomite (ss/dol).
Sandstone/Special mineral (ss/sp min). The special mineral matrix values must be entered.
Limestone/Special mineral (ls/sp min). The special mineral matrix values must be entered.
Dolomite/special mineral (dol/sp min). The special mineral matrix values must be entered.
OBM ?
Oil based mud flag. If set to On (ticked) then the following logic is applied:
Sxo must be less than or equal to Sw.
Invasion factor logic with OBM assumes that Sxo <= Invasion factor. Therefore, if the Invasion
factor is set at 0.5 then Sxo will be the minimum of 0.5 or Sw.
Input Porosity
Used when a curve name is entered as an input in the Pass through Porosity box of the
Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis module.
Set to Total if input curve is Total Porosity
Interpretation
Senergy
Set to Effective if input curve is Effective Porosity

IP will calculate Total Porosity if Effective Porosity is entered and Effective Porosity if
Total Porosity is entered.
Related Topics
Zone Depths
Clay
Waters
Hydrocarbon
Matrix
Phi Logic
Sw Logic
Laminated Sand
Limits / Badhole
Den/Neu
Sonic
EPT
Coal / Salt / Kill
MultiMin1
MultiMin2
MultiMin3
834
835
Senergy
10.4.5.8 Define the Sw Logic Parameters
The Sw Logic Tab is used to Define the Sw Logic Parameters to be Displayed in the Porosity
and Water Saturation Log Plot Display.
Sxo Method
Method for Sxo calculation. Options are :
Rxo Sxo calculated from Rxo resistivity.
TPL Sxo calculated from EPT TPL curve.
Invasion Factor (Inv Fac) Sxo calculated from invasion factor.
m source
Source for Archie m factor. Options are :
Parameter
Input from fixed parameter.
Curve
Input from a curve.
Shell
Calculate from the Shell formula m = 1.87 + 0.019 / PHIE
Rxo EPT
A variable m is calculated from Rxo, using the Sxo calculated from the
EPT. The resultant m value is limited by the parameters min m value and max m value.
m*
Used only for the Waxman&Smits and Dual Water saturation equations. A
variable m* is calculated.
m* = m + Cm(1.128 Y + 0.22 (1-e**(-17.3Y))) W&S
m* = m + Cm(0.258 Y + 0.20 (1-e**(-16.4Y))) Dual Water
Y = Qv PhiT / (1 - PhiT)
Cm* is an input parameter
Qv = a/PhiT + b where a and b are user-entered parameters. Qv can also
Interpretation
Senergy
836
be entered as an input curve.
n source
Source for Archie n factor. Options are :
Parameter Input from fixed parameter.
Curve
Input from a curve.
Rxo EPT
A variable m is calculated from Rxo, using the Sxo calculated from the
EPT. n is set equal to the resultant m plus the parameter m plus value (n = m + mPlus)
Sat Equation
Saturation equation. Used both for calculation of Sxo and Sw. The following equations are
available:
Archie
1/Rt = Phi**m.Sw**n / (a.Rw)
Archie PhiT
1/Rt = PhiT**m.Sw**n / (a.Rw)
Same as Archie except PhiT used instead of Phie.
Simandoux
1/Rt = Phi**m.Sw**n / (a.Rw) + Vcl.Sw / Rcl
Modified Simandoux
1/Rt = Phi**m.Sw**n / (a.Rw.(1-Vcl)) + Vcl.Sw / Rcl
Indonesian (Poupon-Leveaux)
1/Rt**.5 = ((Phi**m/(a.Rw))**.5 + Vcl**(1-(Vcl/2))/Rcl**.5 ).Sw**(n/2)
Modified Indonesian
1/Rt**.5 = ((Phi**m/(a.Rw))**.5 + Vcl**((1-Vcl)/2)/Rcl**.5 ).Sw**(n/2)
Dual Water
1/Rt = PhiT**m.SwT**n/a.(1/Rw + Swb/SwT(1/Rwb-1/Rw))
Juhasz
1/Rt = PhiT**m.SwT**n.(1+Bn.Qvn/SwT)/(a.Rw)
Qvn = Vcl*PhiClay / PhiT
Bn = B normalized, entered parameter
Waxman-Smits
1/Rt = PhiT**m.SwT**n.(1+B.Qv/SwT)/(a.Rw)
B = entered parameter or calculated from T and Rw
837
Senergy
Qv = a / PhiT + b
where a and b are entered parameters.
Qv can also be entered as an input curve.
(64) a factor
Archie equation a factor or tortuosity factor.
(65) m exponent
Archie m factor or cementation factor. Use when m source parameter is set to Param.
(66) n exponent
Archie n factor or saturation exponent. Use when n source parameter is set to Param.
Invasion factor
Used to calculate Sxo when no Sxo device is available.
For water based mud Sxo = (Sw +InvasionFactor) / (1+ InvasionFactor).
For Oil based mud
Sxo = InvasionFactor.
min m value
Minimum m value when m is calculated from Rxo and Ept.
max m value
Maximum m value when m is calculated from Rxo and Ept.
m plus value
Addition to variable m to calculate n. Used when n source is set to Rxo and Ept. n = m +
mPlus.
(94) B fact Juhasz

B factor(equivalent conductance of clay cations) in the Juhasz Waxman-Smits equation.
Default 1.0 meq/ml
Can be set interactively using the Cwa versus Qvn crossplot.
(132) B fact W-S

B factor(equivalent conductance of clay cations) in the Waxman-Smits equation.
If left blank then this is calculated from formation temperature and Rw.
Interpretation
Senergy
838
Qv W-S Source
Qv source in the Waxman-Smits equation and Dual Water (variable m*) equation.
Set to Param for calculation of Qv from the equation :
Qv = a / PhiT + b
Where a and b are the entered Qv a and b constant parameters.
a and b can be selected interactively from the 1/PhiT versus QvApp crossplot.
If set to Curve then Qv is taken from the input curve.
(134) Qv a Const
The a Constant in the Qv equation :
Qv = a / PhiT + b
Used in the Waxman-Smits Sw equation.
(135) Qv b Const
The b Constant in the Qv equation :
Qv = a / PhiT + b
(140) Cm*
Cm constant in the W&S and Dual Water, variable m* equation. Default value is 1.0. If set
to 0.0, m* will be equal to equation input m.
The variable m* option is turned on by setting the m source parameter to m*.
Related Topics
Zone Depths
Clay
Waters
Hydrocarbon
Matrix
Phi Logic
Sw Logic
Laminated Sand
Limits / Badhole
Den/Neu
839
Senergy
Sonic
EPT
Coal / Salt / Kill
MultiMin1
MultiMin2
MultiMin3
10.4.5.9 Define the Laminated Sand Parameters
The Laminated Sand Tab is used to Define the Laminated Sand Parameters to be Displayed in
the Porosity and Water Saturation Log Plot Display.
This tab is only visible if the Display Clay / Shale Type is checked in the Plot Options tab of
the Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis module.
Sat Model
This is the saturation model for a zone. Options are:
Normal - the standard approach to Sw calculations is taken.
Laminated - saturations are calculated in the sand lamination using the porosity, clay
volume and resistivity of the sand lamination. Once the sand laminated Sws are calculated
the normal Sw and SwT will be calculated, assuming that there is no hydrocarbon in the
shale laminations.
Res Lam Shale

This is the resistivity of the shale lamination. It is used to calculate Rt and Rxo in the sand
lamination from the normal entered Rt and Rxo and the volume of laminated shale from the
Interpretation
Senergy
840
Thomas Steiber calculations. This parameter is not used if the resistivity of the sand is
entered.
Rt Lam Sand
This is the deep resistivity (Rt) of the sand lamination. If the cell is left blank then it is
calculated from the Res Lam Shale parameter and the entered Rt curve.
Rxo Lam Sand

This is the invaded zone resistivity (Rxo) of the sand lamination. If the cell is left blank then it is
calculated from the Res Lam Shale parameter and the entered Rxo curve.
Related Topics
Zone Depths
Clay
Waters
Hydrocarbon
Matrix
Phi Logic
Sw Logic
Laminated Sand
Limits / Badhole
Den/Neu
Sonic
EPT
Coal / Salt / Kill
MultiMin1
MultiMin2
MultiMin3
10.4.5.10 Define the Limits/Badhole Parameters
The Limits / BadHole Tab permits the user to set up and apply Limits parameters which allow
the IP program:
to limit the maximum porosity calculated in reservoir intervals
841
Senergy
to reduce the porosity calculated in shales

to set Water Saturation to 1.0 (100%) in very low (effective) porosity intervals
to set effective porosity to a very small number (0.0001) and Sw to 1.0 (100%) where
(effective) porosity is below a Limit value
to set effective porosity to 0.0001 and Water saturation to 1.0 when Volume wet clay
(VWCL) is greater than a limit value
These limits are applied according to the logic described below. The logic statements also allow
the computation of the Silt Index as shown in the diagram and described, below. The Vcl cutoff parameter can be used to remove porosity in shale zones and, in conjunction with the m vari
wth Vcl logic, will also remove any spurious hydrocarbons from zones of high clay volume.
Phi max
The Phi Max parameter should be set to the Maximum likely porosity value in silt-free
sand, in decimal porosity units. It is used to calculate the Silt Index (VSILT), and also to limit
porosity when used with the Vcl cut-off logic described below. It is important to note that the
Silt Index is simply that, an index. That Silt volumes are not designed to be accurate and that
the VSILT curve is used only for the Lithology display in the Porosity and Water Saturation
modules interactive log plot. The premise is that a shaly sand can be thought of as being
made up of clean sand of a certain porosity (PhiMax), Silt of zero porosity and Clay. If the
calculated effective porosity is greater than Phi Max, then there is no silt in the rock. However,
where PHIE is less than Phi Max and VClay is less than 1.0, then some proportion of the rock
will be made up of non-porous Silt. The Silt Index is computed from the following formula :
VSILT = 1 - VolwetClay - (Phie / PhiMax)
The derivation of the VSILT index is illustrated in the following graph:
Interpretation
Senergy
842
Delta Phi max

This parameter, Addition to Phi Max can be adjusted by the user to remove unrealistic
porosities. It is applied as follows:
If Vcl > Vcl cut-off then:
Phie <= (PhiMax+DeltaPhiMax)*(1.0-Vcl)*10**(-10.0*(Vcl-Vclcut-off)**1.6))
m vari wth Vcl

This parameter Variable cementation factor m with Vcl flag is used in conjunction with the
Vcl cut-off as follows:
If set to On (box is checked) and If Vcl > Vcl cut-off then :
m = m*10**(Vcl - Vcl cut-off).
This has the effect of removing any hydrocarbons in zones of high clay content.
843
Senergy
Vcl cut-off
The Vclay cut-off parameter (decimal) is used with the logic described below to remove
porosity in Shale zones, as illustrated in the Silt Index and Phi Limits diagram shown above:
If Vcl > Vcl cut-off then
Phie <= (PhiMax+DeltaPhiMax)*(1.0-Vcl)*10**(-10.0*(Vcl-Vclcut-off)**1.6))
The Vcl cut-off parameter can also be used to boost the Archie parameter m in shales. This
has the effect of removing unlikely hydrocarbon saturations in shales as described above. In
addition, the Vcl cut-off logic is used to limit the output wet clay volume as follows:
If Vcl > Vcl cut-off and variable Vcl logic (on the Phi Logic tab) is chosen then:
VolWetClay (Vcl out) >= Vcl input.
Sxo Limit ?
Limit Sxo flag. If set to On then the calculation of Sxo is limited by the following equation Sxo < Sw**SxoLimit.
Sxo Limit
Sxo limit exponent. If the Sxo Limit ? flag is set to On, then the Sxo Limit exponent value is
used in the following equation Sxo < Sw**SxoLimit.
Bad Hole Disc ?

Bad hole discriminator flag. If a curve is selected in the Porosity and Water Saturation
Analysis module set-up window (Bad Hole Discriminator entry) and is subsequently set to
On (ticked) in the Porosity Water Saturation Parameters interface, the bad hole
discriminator logic is turned on and a Porosity from Sonic log is calculated.
If the values in the input Bad Hole Discriminator curve are greater than the Disc Min
parameter, OR are less than the Disc Max parameter, then the minimum of the Sonic
porosity or the user-selected porosity model is output. Where Sonic Porosity is the
output, then the Phi Logic Flag will be set to a value of 1.
The principle is illustrated in the following figure, which uses the caliper log curve (CALI) as the
Bad Hole Discriminator. The user should only set up the discriminator with either the Disc Min
or Disc Max parameter for a single zone. NOTE: the logic DOES NOT WORK if BOTH
discriminators are set in a zone.
Interpretation
Senergy
844
Disc Min
Discriminator minimum value, in units of the input discriminator curve. If the parameter is
blank, then this discriminator is not used.
If the input discriminator curve value is greater than the Disc Min parameter then Phi
Model <= Phi Sonic.
If both the Disc Min and Disc Max parameters are left blank and the Bad Hole Disc flag is
turned on, then Phi Model is always limited to be less than Phi Sonic.
Disc Max
Discriminator maximum value, in units of the input discriminator curve. If the parameter is
blank, then this discriminator is not used. If the input discriminator curve value is less than
the Disc Max parameter, then Phi Model <= Phi Sonic.
845
Senergy
If both the Disc Min and Disc Max parameters are left blank and the Bad Hole Disc flag is
turned on, then Phi Model is always limited to be less than Phi Sonic.
The following logic can be applied to clean up an interpretation by limiting Effective Porosity
and Water saturation in poor quality, non-reservoir rock.
Phie Sw Limit
The Phie Sw Limit: when effective porosity (PHIE) < Phie Sw Limit value, Sw and SwT etc..
will be set to 1.0 (100%).
Phie Limit
The Phie Limit: when effective porosity (PHIE) < Phie Limit value, effective porosity (PHIE)
will be set to 0.001, Sw, SwT etc.. will be set to 1.0 (100%).
Vcl Limit
The Vcl Limit: when Volume Wet clay (VWCL) > Vcl Limit value, effective porosity (PHIE)
will be set to 0.0001, Sw, SwT etc... will be set to 1.0 (100%).
Swi Limit
The Swi Limit: when the saturation calculations give Sw, SwT etc. < Swi Limit, then the
resultant Sw, SwT etc... will be set to the Swi Limit value before being used in other
calculations (BVW, BVWSXO, PHIE etc.)
Related Topics
Zone Depths
Clay
Waters
Hydrocarbon
Matrix
Phi Logic
Sw Logic
Laminated Sand
Limits / Badhole
Den/Neu
Sonic
EPT
Coal / Salt / Kill
Interpretation
Senergy
846
MultiMin1
MultiMin2
MultiMin3
10.4.5.11 Define the Density/Neutron Parameters
The Density/Neutron Tab is used to Define the Density/Neutron Parameters to be Displayed in

the Porosity and Water Saturation Log Plot Display.
Rho Sp mineral
Density special mineral in gm/cc (kg/m3). Used for neutron/density porosity model when the
mineral model chosen includes a defined special mineral.
Neu Form Sal

Neutron formation salinity correction flag. Check the box(es) if you want IP to perform
formation salinity corrections. The formation salinity correction depends on true porosity and
water saturation.
If the neutron log curve has already had formation salinity corrections applied, then un-check
this option.
It is better to have the program perform the salinity correction, since it will take into account
water saturation in the flushed zone.
Neu Log Cont

Neutron logging contractor. Select the appropriate contractor from the drop-down list.
847
Senergy
Neu Tool Type

Neutron tool type. Select appropriate tool type from the drop-down list.
If the appropriate tool type cannot be found, and its response is significantly different to any
other tool type, it is possible for the user to create a new tool type and tool response
parameter file. See Porosity and Sw Equations and Methodology.
Neu Sp mineral
Neutron special mineral in decimal porosity units. Used for neutron/density and neutron/
sonic porosity models when the mineral model chosen includes a defined special mineral.
Related Topics
Zone Depths
Clay
Waters
Hydrocarbon
Matrix
Phi Logic
Sw Logic
Laminated Sand
Limits / Badhole
Den/Neu
Sonic
EPT
Coal / Salt / Kill
MultiMin1
MultiMin2
MultiMin3
Interpretation
Senergy
848
10.4.5.12 Define the EPT Parameters
The EPT Tab will only be visible if the user has set up an ETP / TPL curve on the Porosity and
Water Saturation Analysis module (Input Curves tab).
TP water
Propagation time for water in nsec/m. Used for calculating Sxo from the EPT. If not
entered, TP water will be calculated from formation temperature and salinity in the flushed
zone.
TP Lime
Propagation time for limestone in nsec/m. Used for calculating Sxo from the EPT. Must be
entered if the EPT is used. Default 9.1.
TP Sand
Propagation time for sandstone in nsec/m. Used for calculating Sxo from the EPT. Must be
TP Dol
Propagation time for dolomite in nsec/m. Used for calculating Sxo from the EPT. Must be
TP Clay
Propagation time for clay in nsec/m. Used for calculating Sxo from the EPT. Must be
entered if the EPT is used. Default 8.0 normal range 7-16.
849
Senergy
TP Hc
Propagation time for hydrocarbon in nsec/m. Used for calculating Sxo from the EPT. Must
be entered if the EPT is used. Normal values gas 3.3, oil 4.7-5.2.
TP Sp mineral
Propagation time for special mineral in nsec/m. Used for calculating Sxo from the EPT
when mineral model chosen includes a defined special mineral.
Related Topics
Zone Depths
Clay
Waters
Hydrocarbon
Matrix
Phi Logic
Sw Logic
Laminated Sand
Limits / Badhole
Den/Neu
Sonic
EPT
Coal / Salt / Kill
MultiMin1
MultiMin2
MultiMin3
Interpretation
Senergy
850
10.4.5.13 Define the Sonic Parameters
The Sonic Tab is used to Define the Sonic Parameters to be Displayed in the Porosity and Water
Saturation Log Plot Display.
Sonic Equ
Equation used for calculating sonic porosity. Options are :
Wyllie time average equation
Raymer Hunt equation
Sonic Lime
Sonic limestone travel time in Sec/ft. Used for neutron/sonic porosity model. Default 49
(160 Sec/m).
Sonic Sand
Sonic sandstone travel time in Sec/ft. Used for neutron/sonic porosity model. Default 56
(180 Sec/m).
Sonic Dol
Sonic dolomite travel time in Sec/ft. Used for neutron/sonic porosity model. Default 44
(145 Sec/m).
(40) Sonic water

Sonic water travel time in Sec/ft. Used for neutron/sonic and sonic porosity model and bad
hole sonic porosity. Default 189 (620 Sec/m).
Sonic Cp
Sonic compaction factor. Used in the Wyllie time average equation (Default 1.0).
DT Sp mineral
851
Senergy
Sonic special mineral travel time in Sec/ft. Used for neutron/sonic porosity model when
the mineral model chosen includes a defined special mineral.
Related Topics
Zone Depths
Clay
Waters
Hydrocarbon
Matrix
Phi Logic
Sw Logic
Laminated Sand
Limits / Badhole
Den/Neu
Sonic
EPT
Coal / Salt / Kill
MultiMin1
MultiMin2
MultiMin3
10.4.5.14 Define the Coal/Salt/Kill Parameters
The Coal/Salt/Kill Tab is used to Define the Coal/Salt/Kill Parameters to be Displayed in the
Porosity and Water Saturation Log Plot Display.
Interpretation
Senergy
852
Coal Logic
Flag to turn on the Coal Logic. The level is considered to be Coal when :
Density <
Rho Coal
Neutron >
Neu Coal
Sonic
Dt Coal
>
If either Rho Coal, Neu Coal or Dt Coal is left blank, then they will not be used in the logic.
Rho Coal
Density limit to test for coal. The level is considered coal when :
Density <
Rho Coal
Neutron >
Neu Coal
Sonic
Dt Coal
>
Neu Coal
Neutron limit to test for coal. The level is considered coal when :
Density <
Rho Coal
Neutron >
Neu Coal
Sonic
Dt Coal
>
DT Coal
Sonic limit to test for coal. The level is considered coal when :
Density <
Rho Coal
Neutron >
Neu Coal
Sonic
Dt Coal
>
Salt Logic
Flag to turn on the Salt Logic. The level is considered to be Salt when :
Density <
Rho salt
Neutron <
Neu salt
Sonic
Dt salt
<
If either Rho salt, Neu salt or Dt salt is left blank, then they will not be used in the logic.
853
Senergy
Rho Salt
Density limit to test for salt. The level is considered salt when :
Density <
Rho salt
Neutron <
Neu salt
Sonic
Dt salt
<
Neu Salt
Neutron limit to test for salt. The level is considered salt when :
Density <
Rho salt
Neutron <
Neu salt
Sonic
Dt salt
<
DT Salt
Sonic limit to test for salt. The level is considered salt when :
Density <
Rho salt
Neutron <
Neu salt
Sonic
Dt salt
<
Kill Logic
The Kill Logic parameters only become available if the Kill Analysis Flag output curve is
selected in the Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis module Output Curves tab. The logic
parameters have been added so that the user can now turn off the analysis over certain zones.
Examples of zones over which to do this would be cased intervals, extreme bad hole or volcanic
sections where standard analysis is impossible.
The user sets the Kill Val/Crv 1 and Kill Val/Crv 2 plus the Kill Operator parameters to reflect
the situation for when the analysis should be turned off. When the logic is true the porosity and
volume outputs will be set to 0.0 and the water saturations will be set to 1.0. All other outputs will
be set to null values. The default plot will show the killed zones as brown shading in the
Lithology track.
Related Topics
Zone Depths
Interpretation
Senergy
854
Clay
Waters
Hydrocarbon
Matrix
Phi Logic
Sw Logic
Laminated Sand
Limits / Badhole
Den/Neu
Sonic
EPT
Coal / Salt / Kill
MultiMin1
MultiMin2
MultiMin3
10.4.5.15 Define the MultiMin Parameters
The MultiMin Tabs is used to Define the MultiMin Parameters to be Displayed in the Porosity and
Water Saturation Log Plot Display. The MultiMin Tabs are ONLY displayed in the Porosity and
Water Saturation Parameters when the Multi-Mineral Analysis Defaults have been Selected in the
Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis Dialog.
855
Senergy
Multi-Mineral 1 Parameters Tab
Model Type
Multi-mineral model type. Options are :
U/Rho
: 3 mineral volumes will be calculated from Umatrix and Rhomatrix
Rho/Dt
: 3 mineral volumes will be calculated from Rhomatrix and DTmatrix
U/Rh/Dt
: 4 mineral volumes will be calculated from Umatrix, Rhomatrix and
DTmatrix
Mineral 1
: mineral volumes will be set to 0 except Mineral 1 which will be 1-Phie-Vcl
Mineral 2
Mineral 3
Mineral 4
The last four methods are used to force the mineralogy to a fixed value.
Interpretation
Senergy
856
Clay Corr Input

Flag: if set to On then the Umatrix, DTmatrix and RhoMatrix curves are corrected for clay
using the input clay volume. The input clay volume curve is also used to clay-correct any
water saturation equation.
If set to Off then the input Vcl curve is ignored and clay can be calculated as one of the
minerals.
This is used only with the multi-mineral option.
Min1 Clay ?
If the Clay Corr Input flag is set to Off (is not checked), then setting the Min1 Clay? flag to
true (checked) allows this mineral to be counted as clay. The VWCL output curve will be the
same as the mineral volume for Mineral 1. This clay volume will also be used to correct the
water saturation equations for clay.
If the Clay Corr Input flag is set to On (is checked) then the Min1 Clay? parameter has no
effect. Clay volume is taken as the input VCL curve.
Min2 Clay ?
If the Clay Corr Input flag is set to Off (is not checked), then setting the Min2 Clay? flag to
Min3 Clay ?
If the Clay Corr Input flag is set to Off (is not checked), then setting the Min3Clay? flag to
Min4 Clay ?
If the Clay Corr Input flag is set to Off (is not checked), then setting the Min4Clay? flag to
857
Senergy
Min1 Umat
U matrix of Mineral 1
Min2 Umat
Min3 Umat
Min4 Umat
Min1 RhoMat
Rho matrix Mineral 1
Min2 RhoMat
Min3 RhoMat
Min4 RhoMat
Interpretation
Senergy
858
Min1 DtMat
DT matrix Mineral 1
Min2 DtMat
DT matrix Mineral 2
Min3 DtMat
DT matrix Mineral 3
Min4 DtMat
DT matrix Mineral 4
Min1 Rho True

Rho matrix true Mineral 1. This is used along with the calculated mineral volumes to
calculate a total clean matrix density. The clean matrix density is used to calculate porosity
from the density if the grain density source parameter GD source, on the Matrix tab is set to
Multi-mineral. This is the default setting if the multi-mineral options are activated.
Min2 Rho True

from the density if the grain density source parameter GD source, on the Matrix tab, is set to
Min3 Rho True

859
Senergy
from the density if the grain density source parameter GD source, on the Matrix tab, is set to
Min4 Rho True

Rho matrix true Mineral 4. This is used along with the calculated mineral volumes to calculate
a total clean matrix density. The clean matrix density is used to calculate porosity from the
density if the grain density source parameter GD source, on the Matrix tab, is set to Multimineral. This is the default setting if the multi-mineral options are activated.
Min1 Dt True
DT matrix true Mineral 1. This is used along with the calculated mineral volumes to
calculate a total clean matrix DT. The DT matrix is used to calculate secondary porosity from
the sonic.
Min2 Dt True
the sonic.
Min3 Dt True
the sonic.
Min4 Dt True
the sonic.
Min1 TP
TPL matrix Mineral 1. Propagation time for mineral 1 in nsec/m. Used for calculating Sxo
from the EPT. Must be entered if the EPT is used. This is used along with the calculated
mineral volumes to calculate a total clean matrix Propagation time.
Min2 TP
Interpretation
Senergy
860
Min3 TP
Min4 TP
Related Topics
Zone Depths
Clay
Waters
Hydrocarbon
Matrix
Phi Logic
Sw Logic
Laminated Sand
Limits / Badhole
Den/Neu
Sonic
EPT
Coal / Salt / Kill
MultiMin1
MultiMin2
MultiMin3
861
Senergy
10.4.6 Porosity and Sw Methodology

The following block diagrams summarise the overall methodology of the Porosity and Water
Saturation module.
The Neutron Density Porosity option is treated separately since its logic is more complicated,
Interpretation
Senergy
862
with three separate options for controlling the calculations. The three options are:
Variable hydrocarbon density,
Variable matrix density, and
Variable clay volume.
The options work in series, and can all be active at any depth level.
The Porosity and Water Saturation module logic options are described below, under the following
headings:
Coal and Salt Logic
Calculate Filtrate Salinity and Density
Calculation of TPL Water
Calculate Hydrocarbon Hydrogen Index and Apparent Density
Density Porosity model
Neutron Porosity Model
Neutron Look-up Tables
863
Senergy
Sonic Porosity Model

Neutron - Density Porosity Model
Variable Hydrocarbon Density Logic
Variable Matrix Density Logic
Variable Clay Volume Logic
Neutron Sonic Porosity Model
Pass Through Porosity Option
Laminated Sw Model
Porosity Limits / Bad Hole Logic
Porosity Limit Shaly Zones and Bad Hole
Total Porosity and Bound Water Saturation Calculation
Multi-Mineral Analysis
Water Saturation Equations
Flushed Zone Sxo Calculations
Sxo Limits
Variable m
Iteration Loops
Final Calculations
PHIFLAG Logic
Clay Type Distribution Equations
Related Topics
Define Input Curves
10.4.7 Porosity and Sw Equations

1.
Coal and Salt Logic

If the Coal and Salt logic are activated, and the input porosity tools meet their cut-off values,
Interpretation
Senergy
864
then the output curve VCOAL or VSALT will be set to a value of 1.0 over those intervals, and all
porosity outputs will be set to 0.0 and all water saturation outputs to 1.0.
Coal is detected if :
Density <
Rho Coal
Neutron >
Neu Coal
Sonic >
Dt Coal
Salt is detected if:

Density <
Rho salt
Neutron <
Neu salt
Sonic <
Dt salt
It is not necessary to use all the porosity input tools to flag the Salt or Coal; only those which
work. A blank parameter input will remove that cut-off criterion from the logic.
2.
Calculate Filtrate Salinity and Density

If the mud filtrate salinity or mud filtrate density are not entered, then they are calculated from
the entered Rmf.
Salinity
A log
3.562 Log Rmf 75 0.0123

0.955
1.0 7 Salinity 10
mf
Temp 80
10
ppm
gm/cc
Where
Temp =
Entered formation temperature F.
Rmf75 =
Rmf value converted to 75F.
For oil-based mud, if filtrate salinity or density are not entered, they are calculated from Rw
using the same equation as above.
3.
Calculation of TPL Water

If TPL water is not entered, it is calculated as follows:
E ' (79.4 202.69 Sal ) 1 0.385 (T

E"
4558
T
TPW
1.568
75) (3230.0 T ) 10
6 2
16 .34
Rmf
2.3586
E ' 2 E" 2
E'
Where
Sal = Salinity of filtrate in ppm10-6
865
T=
Senergy
Formation temperature F.
Rmf = resistivity of filtrate at formation temperature.

For oil-based mud, Rw is substituted for Rmf.
4.
Calculate Hydrocarbon Hydrogen Index and Apparent Hydrocarbon Density

NeuHydHI
DenHydApp
4 2.5
16 2.5
hden
hden
hden
hden
10 2.5
16 2.5
hden
hden
Where
hden
5.
Input hydrocarbon density
Density Porosity Model

If the density porosity model is selected, then porosity is calculated as follows:
ma
ma
b
fl
Vcl
Sxo
ma
HyAp
cl
1 Sxo
Where
ma
Matrix density, can be a curve, parameter or calculated from the mineral
volume (multi-mineral options).

b
cl
fl
= Input bulk density log

=
Wet clay density
Filtrate density, calculated in 2 or entered as a parameter
HyAp
Vcl =
Apparent hydrocarbon density, calculated in.4, entered as a parameter
Wet clay volume
Sxo = Flushed zone water saturation
6.
Neutron Porosity Model

If the neutron porosity model is selected, then porosity is calculated as follows:
neu
Vcl
NeuCl
Sxo
NeuMatrix
1 Sxo
Exfact
NeuSal
NeuHyHI
Interpretation
Senergy
866
2
ma
Exfact
2 Swx
2.65
Vcl NeuCl
2
x
0.04
Sxo (1 Sxo) * NeuHyHI
Swx
1 Swx
Vcl NeuCl
Where:
neu
Vcl =
Input neutron log

Wet Clay volume
NeuCl =
Neutron wet clay value
NeuMatrix =
Neutron matrix correction
Exfact =
Neutron excavation factor
NeuSal =
Neutron formation salinity correction

NeuHyHI =
Neutron hydrocarbon apparent hydrogen index
The Neutron salinity correction is only calculated if the Neu Form Sal parameter on the Den /
Neu parameters tab is checked as On. The salinity correction is calculated from the Neutron
Tool look-up table that is defined for a particular neutron logging tool, selected with the Neu
Tool Type parameter. The entry into the Look-up table will be formation porosity, flushed zone
salinity and matrix density. The result will be an interpolation between the values in the Look-up
table. The matrix type in the Look-up table will depend on the input matrix density and the
Mineral Model parameter.
For example, if the mineral model chosen was Sand/Dolomite and the input matrix density
was 2.75 g/cc, then the correction would be half way in-between the correction for Sand and
Dolomite. For special mineral models, the salinity correction will assume the same salinity
correction for the special mineral as for the main mineral.
The Neutron matrix correction NeuMatrix on the Matrix parameters tab will be calculated from
the Neutron tool look-up tables for the defined tool. The result will depend on the actual
formation porosity, the input matrix density and the mineral model. Therefore, if the matrix
density indicates a mixture of minerals, then the same mixture will be used to define the
overall neutron mineral response.
If the Neutron hydrocarbon apparent hydrogen index (NeuHyHI) is entered as a parameter then
the Neutron excavation factor (Exfact) will be set at 0.0. This is done to allow any corrections
for hydrocarbons to be turned off by setting the NeuHyHI input parameter to 1.0 when
calculating porosity from the Neutron log alone. The NeuMatrix parameter is either calculated
from the look up tables using the entered Matrix Density to set the mineral type or if the Rho
867
Senergy
Matrix input parameter is set to a blank value. Its value then will be the value of the Neu Matrix
parameter. Hence, if the user wants to use the input neutron log for porosity, with no
corrections for matrix or hydrocarbon, the following parameters should be set :
Neu Matrix = 0.0
Matrix Density = Blank
NeuHyHI = 1.0
7.
Neutron Tool Look-up Tables

The neutron tool look-up tables are ASCII user-editable text files, which define the response for
a particular tool, for Limestone, Dolomite and Sandstone, at different porosity values. It is
assumed that the input neutron porosity is in Limestone porosity units. Formation salinity
corrections at each porosity value are defined for each standard matrix type. This allows
proper matrix and salinity corrections to be defined for any type of neutron tool.
A number of neutron tool look-up tables are provided with the IP software, but the user can
create a new table for a tool not previously defined. To do this the user must :
1. Add the new tool into the file Neu_Parm_Files.neu, which is found in the IP program
directory. This file defines the names shown in the Porosity and Water Saturation module
Parameter table, plus the file names of the look-up tables.
2. Create the new look-up table. It is best to copy an existing file and modify it. The spacing
between the parameters is not important, but the number of parameters in each line and the
number of porosity lines are important.
The following is an example of one of the tables:
$ Interactive Petrophysics
$
$ Sch_CNL.neu file
$ Contains lookup table for Schlumberger CNL TNPH
$
$
$ Data is arranged in columns as follows :
$ True Phi (limestone matrix), Sandstone Matrix correction, Dolomite Matrix correction,
Salinity correction Sand, Salinity correction Lime, Salinity correction Dol
$ Formation Salinity corrections are for following values 50, 100, 150, 200, 250 Kppm and
in this order
$ Porosity values must not be changed
$
$phi ss Dol 50 SS 100 150 200 250 50 LS 100 150 200 250 50
Dol 100 150 200 250
.00 .020
-.006 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0
000 .0000 .0000 .0000
.02 .022 -.009 -.0012 -.0032 -.0040 -.0056 -.0060 -.0012 -.0024 -.0032 -.0036 -.0040
-.0020 -.0044 -.0064 -.0076 -.0092
Interpretation
Senergy
.05 .028 -.012

-.0050 -.0110
.10 .036 -.017
-.0100 -.0190
.15 .045 -.022
-.0120 -.0240
.20 .049 -.030
-.1960 -.0290
.25 .051 -.037
-.0180 -.0300
.30 .052 -.045
-.0180 -.0300
.35 .049 -.052
-.0160 -.0260
.40 .046 -.059
-.0150 -.0230
.45 .043 -.066
-.0150 -.0220
.50 .040 -.073
-.0140 -.0200
.55 .037 -.080
-.0130 -.0180
.60 .034 -.087
-.0120 -.0160
-.0030
-.0160
-.0070
-.0270
-.0120
-.0330
-.0160
-.0370
-.0160
-.0370
-.0150
-.0340
-.0130
-.0290
-.0100
-.0240
-.0120
-.0210
-.0110
-.0180
-.0100
-.0150
-.0090
-.0120
-.0080
-.0190
-.0140
-.0330
-.0220
-.0400
-.0270
-.0420
-.0370
-.0400
-.0350
-.0360
-.0180
-.0280
-.0140
-.0210
-.0140
-.0170
-.0120
-.0130
-.0100
-.0090
-.0080
-.0050
-.0100
-.0230
-.0190
-.0380
-.0290
-.0450
-.0340
-.0440
-.0330
-.0410
-.0290
-.0330
-.0190
-.0260
-.0140
-.0180
-.0140
-.0130
-.0110
-.0080
-.0080
-.0030
-.0050
.0020
868
-.0140 -.0160 -.0030 -.0060 -.0080 -.0090 -.0100

-.0230 -.0280 -.0060 -.0120 -.0160 -.0200 -.0210
-.0340 -.0350 -.0100 -.0190 -.0260 -.0300 -.0340
-.0370 -.0380 -.0140 -.0260 -.0320 -.0350 -.0390
-.0340 -.0330 -.0160 -.0290 -.0350 -.0390 -.0390
-.0290 -.0270 -.0200 -.0310 -.0380 -.0380 -.0380
-.0190 -.0150 -.0200 -.0310 -.0350 -.0350 -.0330
-.0120 -.0070 -.0180 -.0280 -.0310 -.0300 -.0270
-.0100 -.0030 -.0170 -.0240 -.0280 -.0260 -.0220
-.0060 .0020 -.0160 -.0220 -.0250 -.0220 -.0170
-.0020 .0070 -.0150 -.0200 -.0220 -.0180 -.0120
.0020 .0120 -.0140 -.0180 -.0190 -.0140 -.0070
The Neutron tool look-up table shown above has been colour-coded so that the reader can
more easily understand the file layout. Each lithology type is colour coded; Limestone (Black),
Sandstone (Red) and Dolomite (Blue) and the numbers are the Porosity Unit corrections (in
decimal notation) for Sandstone and Dolomite at different salinities.
The values of porosity extend to 60 pu., and it is necessary to complete the table up to this
value even though it is unlikely that there are any published results for these high porosities. It
is necessary to extrapolate the data as accurately as possible.
Creating a Neutron Look-up Table

The Look-up table is created in the following way:
Take the Neutron Porosity Equivalence Curves Chart for the tool you wish to add to IP. An
example is shown in the diagram below.
Tabulate, using an existing look-up file as a template, the corrections between the
Limestone porosity values (at 0%, 2%, 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%,
50%, 55% and 60% p.u.) and the true porosities for a Sandstone matrix and a Dolomite
matrix.
For example, in the diagram below, Limestone Porosity is 20%, the correction for a Sandstone
matrix is the difference between the true Sandstone matrix porosity 25% and 20% i.e +5%.
869
Senergy
The correction for Dolomite matrix is the difference between the Limestone matrix porosity
20%, and the true Dolomite matrix porosity, 15% i.e. - 5%. NOTE: all values in the table
should be in decimal notation.
The Formation Salinity corrections are calculated and tabulated in the following way:
Using the Neutron Porosity equivalence chart and the appropriate Neutron log environmental
correction nomograph for the tool you are considering, back-calculate the Limestone matrix
porosity for true sandstone and dolomite porosities at 0%, 2%, 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%,
30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55% and 60% p.u. for each matrix type.
Take the environmental correction nomograph and select the Formation Salinity panel. An
example is shown below:
Calculate the equivalent Limestone matrix porosity value for Sandstone or Dolomite
Interpretation
Senergy
870
porosities of 0%, 2%, 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55% and
60%.
Enter each equivalent Limestone matrix porosity value into the Formation Salinity panel of
the nomograph and calculate the magnitude and sign (+/-) of the porosity correction at 50,
100, 150, 200 and 250 k ppm formation salinity.
Tabulate the data as shown in the example file shown above, in the column order described
( Sandstone - 50 SS 100 150 200 250, followed by Limestone - 50 LS 100 150 200 250 and
Dolomite - 50 Dol 100 150 200 250).
8.
Sonic Porosity Model
If the sonic porosity model is selected, then porosity is calculated as follows:
Wyllie equation:
Dt
Dtfl
Dtma Vcl
Sxo
Dthy
Dtcl
Dtma
(1 Sxo)
Dtma
Cp
Where
Dt =
Sonic input curve
Dtma =
Sonic matrix value
Dtcl = Sonic clay value

Dtfl = Sonic filtrate value
Dthy =
Vcl =
Sonic hydrocarbon
Wet clay volume

Cp =
Compaction factor
Raymer equation:
2 Vma Vf
clay
Vfc
1
Dtfl Sxo Dthy
2 Vma Vfc
son
son
clay
2 Vma Vf 2 4 Vma
2 Vma
Vma Vclay
1 Sxo
2 Vma Vfc 2
2 Vma
4 Vma
Vma V log
Vcl
Where
Vma =
1/Dtma
871
Vf =
9.
Senergy
1/Dtfl
Vclay =
1/Dtclay
Vlog =
1/Dt
Neutron Density Porosity Model
For the logic flow, see the block diagram above.
Variable Hydrocarbon Density logic:

The program solves the following equations for porosity and hydrocarbon density:
Vcl NeuCl NeuMatrix Exfact NeuSal

Sxo 1 Sxo NeuHyHI
neu
Vcl ( ma
cl )
Sxo
HyAp (1 Sxo)
ma
ma
fl
NeuHyHI
HyAp
hden
hden
4 2.5
16 2.5
10 2.5
16 2.5
hden
hden
hden
hden
Variable Matrix Density logic:

Using the input Mineral Model parameter, the program calculates the porosity for each mineral
from the neutron and density logs. For the Sand/Limestone/Dolomite model, the program first
decides, based on the matrix density, whether the Sand/Limestone or Limestone/Dolomite
model should be used. Once the four porosities (density porosity for 2 minerals and neutron
porosity for 2 minerals) have been calculated, using the equations in Section 5 (Density
Porosity Model) and Section 6 (Neutron Porosity Model), above, the crossplot porosity is
calculated as follows:
N1
D1
1 (
N1
D1
N2 ) / (
D1
D2
Where
N1
= Neutron corrected porosity for matrix 1
N2
= Neutron corrected porosity for matrix 2
D1
= Density corrected porosity for matrix 1
Interpretation
Senergy
D2
872
= Density corrected porosity for matrix 2
Once the porosity has been calculated, then the matrix density is calculated from the density
equation in section 5.
Variable Clay Volume logic:

The program solves the same equations as for the variable hydrocarbon density logic
described above, except for porosity and clay volume. The hydrocarbon density being known.
10.
Neutron Sonic Porosity Model

The model uses the same logic as the Variable matrix density logic in the Neutron/Density
model, except that the sonic log is substituted for the Density log, and Dt matrix is calculated
from the porosity. Sonic porosities are calculated using the equations in Section 8, therefore
the user has the choice of sonic porosity models.
11.
Pass Through Porosity Model

This option assumes that porosity is calculated externally to the Porosity and Water Saturation
module. The user inputs the porosity curve and it is used in the calculations of water
saturation. The parameter Input Porosity (on the Phi Logic tab) must be set to indicate whether
the input porosity is an effective or total porosity.
If Input Porosity is set to Effective then :
e
= Phi input
Vcl
tClay
If Input Porosity is set to Total then :

e
Phi input Vcl
tClay
= Phi input
Where
tClay
is entered as an input parameter or is calculated from the dry clay density (see
section below).
12. Laminated Sw Model

When this option is selected Sw and Sxo are calculated in the sand lamination using the
873
Senergy
selected Sw equation but substituting the following inputs;

PhiT = PhiTLam
Phie = PhiLam
Vcl = VclLam
Rt
= RtLam
Rxo = RxoLam
RtLam and RxoLam are either input parameters / curves or are calculated as follows;
RtLam
= (1.0 - Vlam) * Rt * Rshale / ((Rshale - Rt) *Vlam)
RxoLam = (1.0 - Vlam) * Rxo * Rshale / ((Rshale - Rxo) * Vlam)

Where
Vlam =
Calculated volume of shale / clay lamination in the whole rock.
Rshale =
The entered Res Lam Shale parameter.
If calculated then RtLam and RxoLam are output as curves.

Due to the nature of the equation the results are very sensitive to the Rshale parameter.
Hence, to keep results within sensible numbers the RtLam and RxoLam are limited to 200
ohmm.
The above chart shows the sensitivity of the laminated sand resistivity to the shale lamination
pick. The three lines have been made to all go through 40% shale lamination. The three lines
represent a resistivity of shale of 1.0, 1.5 and 2.0 ohmm. The resulting sand resistivities are
respectively; 50.0, 5.75 and 2.83 ohmm. Hence, a small change in the pick of shale resistivity
can have a large effect on the calculated Sw results. Hence, it is much better if an external,
calculated sand resistivity can be used.
Once the Sws in the sand laminations are calculated the total rock saturations are calculated
assuming all hydrocarbons are in the sand laminations.
Interpretation
Senergy
874
Sw = SwLam
SwT = 1.0 - PhiTLam * (1.0 - SwTLam) * (1 - Vlam) / PhiT
13. Porosity Limits / Bad Hole Logic

If the Bad Hole discriminator logic is switched on, then a Porosity from Sonic will be calculated
over the Bad Hole interval, using the equations described in Section 8. The Dt matrix input
value will be the parameter Sonic matrix. The following logic will be applied:
If Disc. Curve > Disc Min and Disc. Curve < Disc Max then
sonic
14.
Porosity Limit Shaly Zones and Bad Hole

In order to limit porosity in very Shaly zones, or zones which are badly washed out (with
unreasonably high porosities), the following limits are applied:
limit
= (PhiMax+DeltaPhiMax)x(1.0-Vcl)
If Vcl > Vcl cut-off then
( PhiMax
lim it
DeltaPhiMa x) (1 Vcl ) 10
10 (Vcl VclCutoff )1.6
limit
15.
Total Porosity and Bound Water Saturation Calculation

If the total clay porosity parameter is not entered, it is calculated from the dry clay density as
follows:
dryClay
wetClay
tclay
dryClay
fl
Where
dryClay
wetClay
fl
Dry clay input parameter
Wet clay input parameter
tClay
Filtrate density
=
Phi total clay
Total porosity and bound water saturations are calculated as follows:

t
Vcl
tclay
875
Senergy
Swb 1
Where
t
= Total porosity
= Effective porosity, result from porosity model equations
Swb =
Bound water saturation
Vcl =
Wet clay volume
16. Multi-mineral Analysis

If the PEF curve is entered as an input, then U, U clay, U water and U hydrocarbon are calculated
:
U=
Pef x (
+ 0.1883) x 0.93423
wetClay
UClay =
PefClay x (
Uwat =
0.00481 x Sal + 0.3883
For gas (
hden
+ 0.1883) x 0.93423
less than 0.4)
Uhyd =
0.119 x
hden
0.133 x
hden
For Oil :
Uhyd =
Rho matrix apparent is calculated as per Section 9, assuming a variable matrix density and a
Sand/Lime/Dolomite mineral model. This will calculate a hydrocarbon-corrected apparent
matrix density. Clay volume is set to zero unless the parameter option to Clay corrected input
is set. In this case the Rho matrix apparent will be clay-corrected using the input VCL curve.
If the PEF curve is entered then the U matrix apparent will be calculated as follows :
U matrixApp
Vcl U Clay
NDxp
1.0
U water
NDxp
Sxo U hyd 1.0 Sxo

Vcl
Porosity is the neutron/density crossplot porosity as calculated for the Rho matrix apparent
calculation. Clay volume is set to zero unless the parameter option to Clay corrected input is
set. In this case the U matrix apparent will be clay corrected using the input Vcl curve.
If the sonic curve is used as an input, then DT matrix apparent will be calculated as in Section
10, above, using a Sand/Lime/Dol mineral model. This will make a hydrocarbon-corrected
apparent sonic matrix. Clay volume is set to zero unless the parameter option to Clay
Interpretation
Senergy
876
corrected input is set. In this case the DT matrix apparent will be clay corrected using the input
Vcl curve.
For the three mineral option the following equations are solved for mineral volumes:
matrixApp
V1
V2
V3
If model is Umatrix/RhoMatrix
U matrixApp
U 1 V1
U 2 V2
U 3 V3
If model is Dtmatrix/RhoMatrix
DTmatrixApp
DT1 V1
1.0 V1 V2
DT2 V2
DT3 V3
V3
For the four mineral option the following equations are solved :
matrixApp
U matrixApp
V1
U 1 V1
DTmatrixApp
U 2 V2
DT1 V1
1.0 V1 V2
V3
V2
V3
U 3 V3
DT2 V2
V4
U 4 V4
DT3 V3
DT4 V4
V4
Where :
1
are the entered mineral density parameters
U1 U4
are the entered mineral U parameters
DT1-DT4
are the entered mineral DT parameters
V1 - V4are the result dry mineral volumes

If negative volumes are calculated they are set to zero and the other volumes are recalculated
keeping the same ratios so that the total of all volumes is 1.
If the porosity method parameter has been set to Density and the matrix density option
parameter set to Multi-mineral (default settings for Multi-mineral) then the matrix density is
calculated as follows :
matrix
True1
V1
True 2
V2
True3
V3
True 4
V4
Where :
True1
True 4
are the entered true mineral density parameters
The true mineral density can be different to the apparent mineral density if the minerals are not
the standard Limestone / Dolomite / Quartz. For example, Clay could have an apparent matrix
density of 3.0 but a true density of 2.5. This is due to the apparent crossplot porosity in the clay
calculating an apparent matrix density which is much too high.
The dry mineral volumes are corrected to bulk volume as follows :
877
BV min 1
V1
1.0
BV min 2
V2
1.0
Vcl
BV min 3
V3
1.0
Vcl
BV min 4
V4
1.0
Vcl
Senergy
Vcl
Where Vcl is set to zero, unless the parameter option to Clay corrected input is set. The bulk
volume minerals are set into the output mineral volume curves.
If the parameter option to Clay corrected input is set to false and any of the parameter options
Min1 Clay ? - Min4 Clay ? are set to true, then the output clay volume VWCL (default name) is
set to sum of the minerals that have had their parameter option set to Clay. This allows one or
more of the minerals to be identified as clay and used in the water saturation equations.
17.
Water Saturation Calculations

The following options are available for calculation of water saturation:
Archie:
m
1
Sw n
Rt
a Rw
This can be re-arranged to give an effective water saturation:
Sw
a Rw
Rt Phie m
For a total water saturation, which is used in the water saturation comparison, the equation is
as follows:
SwT
Sw 1 Swb
Swb
Archie PhiT:
1
Rt
m
T
SwT n
a Rw
This can be re-arranged to give a total water saturation:
SwT
a Rw
Rt PhiT m
For an effective water saturation, which is used in the water saturation comparison, the
equation is as follows:
Sw
SwT Swb
1 Swb
Interpretation
Senergy
878
Simandoux:
m
Sw n
a Rw
1
Rt
Vcl Sw
Rcl
Modified Simandoux:
m
1
Rt
Sw n
Rw (1 Vcl )
Vcl Sw
Rcl
Indonesian (Poupon-Leveaux):
m
Vcl 1
a Rw
Rt
(Vcl 2 )
Sw n 2
Rcl
Modified Indonesian
m
Vcl
a Rw
Rt
(1 Vcl ) 2
Rcl
Sw n 2
Dual Water:
m*
T
1
Rt
SwT n
a
1
Rw
Swb
1
SwT Rwb
1
Rw
if the m source parameter is set to m* then m is calculated as follows
m*
minput
Qv
1
C m 0.258
0.2 1 e
16.4
T
T
Qv is either entered as a curve or is calculated from PhiT using the a and b input parameters.
The a and b parameters can be interactively selected through the 1/PhiT versus Qvapp
crossplot..
The Cm* parameter is used to adjust the weighting on the variable m* and is entered as a
parameter (Default is 1.0).
If the m source parameter is not set to m* the m* used in the equation will be the input m
parameter.
Juhasz (Waxman-Smits):
879
1
Rt
Qvn
m
T
SwT n
a Rw
Vcl Tclay
1 Bn Qvn
Senergy
Rw
SwT
Waxman-Smits:
1
Rt
m*
T
SwT n
a Rw
1 B Qv
Rw
SwT
Qv is either entered as an input curve or is calculated from the following equation:
Qv
a
PhiT
a and b are entered parameters and can be interactively selected through the 1/PhiT versus
Qvapp crossplot.(see the Interactive plot section above).
B is either an entered parameter or it is calculated from the following equation:
1.28 0.225 T
0.0004059 T 2
1 Rw1.23 0.045 T
0.27)
if the m source parameter is set to m* then m is calculated as follows :
m* minput Cm 1.128
Qv
1
0.22 1 e
17.3
T
T
The Cm* parameter is used to adjust the weighting on the variable m* and is entered as a
If the m source parameter is not set to m*, the m* used in the equation will be the input m
parameter.
Where
m
Cementation factor
m*
Cementation factor used for "Dual Water" or "W & S" equations
Saturation exponent
Tortuosity factor
Vcl
Wet clay volume
Sw
Effective water saturation
SwT
Total water saturation
Swb
Bound water saturation
Rw
Formation water resistivity
Interpretation
Senergy
880
Rwb
Bound water resistivity
Rt
Input resistivity curve
Rcl
Resistivity of the clay
Qvn
"Normalized" cation exchange capacity per unit total pore volume
Bn
"Normalized" equivalent conductance of clay cations (Qvn/

Cwapp crossplot)
Qv
Cation exchange capacity per unit total pore volume
Equivalent conductance of clay cations
Formation temperature in degrees centigrade
Qvn is output as a curve if the Juhasz W&S equation is set as the default Sw equation.
Apparent water conductivity is also output (see Section 20). The interactive Qvn versus
Cwapp crossplot can be used to set the Bn factor. The Bn factor is adjusted on the crossplot
so that the 100% wet line goes through the wet shaly points. It should be noted that there is a
strong correlation between the bound water volume (PhiT minus Phie) and the Bn factor. If you
change the bound water by changing the dry clay density (or total porosity clay) then the Qvn/
Cwapp relationship will change and the Bn should be adjusted.
The cementation factor can either be entered as a parameter, an input curve, calculated using
the Shell formula, or calculated from the EPT/Rxo logs.
If calculated from the Shell formula, the following equation is used:
187
.
0.018
e
If the m vari wth Vcl parameter is set to On, then over zones where Vcl > Vcl cut-off, m is
adjusted as follows:
m m 10 Vcl VclCutoff
This logic has the effect of removing any hydrocarbons from shale intervals.
The saturation exponent can be entered as a parameter, an input curve, or if m has been
calculated from the EPT/Rxo logs, then n can be set to m plus a fixed value. This is done by
setting the m plus value parameter.
If the Archie PhiT, Dual Water, Juhasz or Waxman Smits saturation equation has been used,
then the effective water saturation is calculated as follows:
Sw
18.
SwT Swb
1 Swb
Flushed Zone Sxo Calculations

Sxo can be calculated in the following ways:
881
Senergy
from a user-selected Rxo curve,

estimated using an empirical formula, or
from a user-selected EPT TPL curve.
Rxo curve:
The same equation that was chosen for the Sw calculation will be used for Sxo. The
parameters are substituted as follows:
Rmf for Rw
Rxo for Rt
Rmfb for Rwb
RxoCl for Rcl
Empirical formula:
Sxo
Sw InvasionFactor
1 InvasionFactor
The Invasion Factor is a user-entered parameter.
EPT TPL curve:

Sxo
TPL Vcl TPclay
TPwater
Vcl
TPmatrix
TPhyd
TPhyd
Where
TPL =
Input TPL curve
TPclay =
Input parameter TP clay
TPhyd =
Input parameter TP hydrocarbon
TPmatrix is calculated from the input parameters for TPlime, TPsand, TPdolomite and
TPspecialMineral. Using the calculated matrix density and the Mineral Model parameters, an
extrapolation is made between the TP matrix parameters to calculate an apparent TPmatrix,
which is used in the Sxo calculation.
If the multi-mineral option is set then TPmatrix is calculated using the mineral volumes and the
entered TPmatrix parameters.
TPmatrix
TP1 V1
TP2 V2
TP3 V3
TP4 V4
Where :
TP1 TP4
are the entered mineral TP matrix parameters
Interpretation
Senergy
882
Sxo Limits
The porosity logs generally have a shallow depth of investigation and as such measure in the
Flushed zone. An estimate of the water saturation seen by the porosity tools (Sxo) is therefore
required for porosity determination.
No matter which Sxo method has been selected, the following limits are always applied to the
final Sxo curve, in order to give sensible water saturation values for a given drilling mud
environment. This limited Sxo curve is then utilised in the porosity equations.
Oil Based Mud (OBM)

As no additional water is introduced into the formation with the use of oil-based muds then Sxo
can not be greater than the water saturation in the undisturbed zone (Sw). Therefore, when
the OBM? option is selected (when the OBM Flag? is checked) for a zone, the Flushed zone
water saturations are limited using the following logic:
Sxo Sw
Consequently, Sxo is usually the same as Sw in hydrocarbon zones in OBM environments.
If the OBM Flag? is turned on, (on the Phi Logic tab) then Sxo can be calculated (Sxo Method
parameter, on the Sw Logic tab) either from :
an input Rxo curve or
an input EPT TPL curve, or
set to Invasion Factor, in which case Sxo will be equal to the Invasion Factor parameter.
The Invasion Factor parameter is the same parameter used in water-based mud logic, when
no Rxo tool is available, but is used in a different way with OBM.
NOTE: the Sxo Limit logic (Limits / Bad Hole tab) is not used (options are greyed out) when
the OBM? option is selected.
Water Based Mud (WBM)

Water based muds introduce additional water into the formation and as such Sxo will be
greater than or equal to Sw. Therefore, when the OBM? option (Phi Logic tab) is not selected
for a zone, the saturations are limited using the following logic
Sxo Sw SxoLimit
Consequently, Sxo is usually the same as Sw in water bearing zones in WBM environments.
Sxo Limit? Option

The Sxo Limit ? option, in the Limits /Bad Hole parameter tab, when checked, turns on the
883
Senergy
upper bound limit Sw^SxoLimit in the Mud Logic as described in the Sxo Limits above. NOTE:
It is only available in water-based mud where the Sxo Method parameter (Sw Logic tab) is set
to Rxo or ETP TPL. It is useful to turn this option on in WBM environments for the situation
where a micro resistivity (Rxo) tool loses pad contact and calculates too high an Sxo. This will
limit the Sxo to the value of Sw^SxoLimit in such zones. The Sxo Limit is generally not
reached in OBM environments.
19.
Variable m
If the user has selected to calculate a variable m, then this is calculated using the chosen
water saturation equation given in Section 16, solving it for m by using the Sxo value
calculated from the EPT TPL curve.
The resultant m, which can be output as a curve, can be limited in its values by setting the
parameters min m value and max m value. These limits allow the restriction of m to sensible
values.
20. Iteration Loops

The input porosity logs have a hydrocarbon correction applied, using the Sxo value calculated
from the porosity. Since Sxo is needed to calculate porosity, and porosity is needed to
calculate Sxo, an iterative process is used. The iteration loop continues until the difference
between iterations in porosity and Sxo are as follows:
e
difference < 0.001
Sxo difference < 0.002
21.
Final Calculations
Vdcl =
Vcl
Sw
BVW =
Sxo
BVWsxo =
Vsilt =
tClay
Volume dry clay

Bulk volume water
Bulk volume water flushed zone
Vcl
max
Vshale = Vcl + Vsilt

Rwapp =
Rmfapp =
Rt
Rxo
Shale volume
/a
m
t
Volume Silt
Rw apparent
/a
Rmf apparent
Cwapp = 1 / Rwapp Apparent water conductivity
Interpretation
Senergy
884
Rwapp, Rmfapp and Cwapp are converted to the temperature entered for Rw and Rmf
respectively.
Qvapp
B Rt
PhiT_recp
1.0
B Rw
= 1 / PhiT
Apparent Qv
Reciprocal of PhiT
If both the EPT TPL and the Rxo curve are entered, and Sxo is calculated from the EPT, and
the m is not calculated from the EPT/Rxo logs, the following calculations are made:
1. Rmf equivalent. The equations in sections 16 and17 are solved for Rmf using the value of
Sxo calculated from the EPT TPL curve. The results are output in the RMFEQ curve.
2. A Bulk volume irreducible water is calculated. This is the amount of formation water left in
the flushed zone. The Rmf equivalent calculated in 1 (above) should be the value of Rmf if all
the formation water is flushed out by the filtrate. Any variance from this can be used to
calculate the amount of unflushed formation water.
BVWIRR
Sxo
Rw
Rmf
Rmf
Rmfeq
Rmf
Rw
Bulk volume water irreducible
The following limits are applied to BVWIRR:

BVW > BVWIRR > 0
If hydrocarbon corrected log is requested to be output, the following calculations are made:
Density hydrocarbon corrected
DenHcCor
(1 Sxo) ( fl
HyAp )
Neutron hydrocarbon corrected

NeuHcCor
ExFact
neu
NeuSal
NeuSalWet
(1 Sxo) (1 NeuHyHI )
Sonic hydrocarbon corrected

for Wyllie
DtHcCor
DT
Cp(1 Sxo)
( Dthy
Dtfl )
for Raymer
DtHcCor
Vflc
1. 1 / Dt
1. Dtfl
* (Vflc 1 / Dtfl )
Sxo
Dthy (1 Sxo)
If a Ro output curve is entered then Ro is calculated from the appropriate Sw equation in

Section 16 with Sw set to 1.0. This curve can be useful to judge the appropriateness of the
water saturation model. Ro should equal Rt in the non-hydrocarbon zones.
885
Senergy
If a Density Reconstructed output curve is entered then this density curve is calculated using
the equation in Section 5. This curve will generally be the same as the input density curve
except in regions of bad hole where the porosity could have been calculated from the sonic.
The curve is useful for input into the Rock Physics modules or where a bad-hole corrected
density is needed.
If the multi-mineral option is selected and a sonic curve is available then a secondary porosity
is calculated :
Sonic matrix density is calculated from the mineral volumes and the true DT matrix values:
DTmatrix
DTTrue1 V1
DTTrue2 V2
DTTrue3 V3
DTTrue4 V4
Where :
DTTrue1
DTTrue4
are the entered true mineral DT matrix parameters
Sonic porosity is calculated as per section 8 using the DT matrix calculated above. Clay
volume is set to zero unless the parameter option to Clay corrected input is set.
Secondary porosity is calculated :
sec ondaryUnlim ited
effective
sonic
The secondary porosity unlimited can go negative therefore another curve is output which
limits the secondary porosity to be greater than zero.
22. PHIFLAG Logic

The output curve PHIFLAG is a Logic flag curve. It can contain any combination of the
following values:
PHIFLA LOGIC
G
VALUE
0
No limits were applied to the results.
Bad hole logic used. Porosity set to be equal to the sonic porosity.
Hydrocarbon iteration loop did not converge after 20 loops.
Porosity set to be equal to the maximum porosity limit (see section 12).
Porosity was limited to be greater than 0.
Sxo Limit parameter is set.
Neutron/Density model. Porosity was calculated from only the neutron log. Density
log was incompatible with selected logic options.
Neutron/Density model. Porosity was calculated from only the density log. Neutron
log was incompatible with selected logic options.
Interpretation
Senergy
886
Iterative solving of the saturation equations did not converge after 10 loops
If the calculated VWCL curve is greater than the VCL Limit or the calculated Phie
curve is less than the Phie limit then Phie = 0.0001 and all output saturation curves
are set to 1.0
10
If the calculated Phie curve is less than the Phie Sw Limit then all output saturation
curves are set to 1.0
11
The Sw or SwT curves have been clipped to the Swi Limit. The SwU or SwT curves
have not be changed.
For a normal execution of the program at any depth level, the PHIFLAG value should be zero.
Any time the curve reads any other value, then the user should investigate the depth level to
see if the results are reasonable.
23. Clay Type Distribution Equations

Shale/Clay Volumes
PhiMax Phie
PhiMax
Vlam
If Vlam < Vcl then the model Dispersed/Laminated is used and
Vcl
Vlam
Phie PhiMax
1 PhiMax
Vstruc = 0
Vdisp = Vcl - Vlam
Otherwise the Laminated/Structural model is used and
Vdisp = 0
Vstruc = Vcl - Vlam
Limits
Vlam must be between 0 and 0.99
Vlam + Vstruc + Vdisp = Vcl
Where
Vlam
: Volume laminated clay / shale.
Vcl
: Volume wet clay, normally the input Vcl.
Phie
: Effective Porosity.
Phi Max
: Maximum Porosity in clean sand. Input parameter in Limits / BadHole tab.
Laminated properties
These are the properties of the sand laminations.
887
Senergy
Phie
1 Vlam
PhieLam
PhieLam is limited using the same logic as the Phie curve. This is shown in Section 13.
It is assumed that there is no hydrocarbon in the shale lamination but that the entire
hydrocarbon content is in the sand laminations. Hence, BVH can be written in the form:
Phie Sh
PhieLam ShLam (1 Vlam)
and in terms of Sw:
Phie (1 Sw)
PhieLam (1 SwLam) (1 Vlam )
which can be written in terms of SwLam:
Phie (1 Sw)
PhieLam (1 Vlam)
SwLam 1
or SwLam = Sw
SwLam is limited to be between 1.0 and 0.001
BVWLam
PhieLam
SwLam
Vcl Vlam
1 Vlam
VclLam
Where
PhieLam
: Effective Porosity in the sand lamination.
SwLam
: Effective Water Saturation in the sand lamination.
BVWLam
: Bulk Volume Water in the sand lamination.
VclLam
: Clay Volume in the sand lamination.
If using the Make Total Porosity Display option then the following extra calculations are made
for the new output curves:
PhiTLam
PhiLam
SwTLam
BVWTLam
VclayLam
PhiTCl
1 SwLam PhiLam
PhiTlam
PhiTLam
SwTLam
Where
PhiTCl : Total porosity in 100% clay
The following are extra output curves
BVWT
PhiT
BVWSXOT
SwT
PhiT SxoT
Related Topics
Define Input Curves
Interpretation
Senergy

888
889
10.5
Senergy
Cut-off and Summations
The Cut-offs and Summation module allows the user to interactively define Net Reservoir and
Net Pay cut-off criteria and zones, and to calculate the average petrophysical properties of
porosity, clay volume and water saturation for each zone within a petrophysical interpretation.
The Cut-off and Summation functionality allows the user to compute zone average values for
up to 7 input curves, in addition to the 3 default porosity, Sw and clay volume curve inputs. The
user also has the option to set up and execute up to 5 Summation Reports. This allows the
user to generate 3 extra sets of output, in addition to the traditional Net Reservoir and Net Pay
Summation reports. The increased versatility of this new set-up will allow the user, for example,
to compute zonal average properties for reservoirs containing different fluid types (gas/oil/water)
or, in a mixed clastic / carbonate geological section, to determine the zonal properties of the
separate clastic or carbonate beds in the well. In the simplest case, should the user simply not
apply any cut-off criteria, then the module will compute and report zonal averages for all defined
zones / formations in the subject well.
The Summation results are output in various file formats and/or to a printer.
Cut-off and Summation
option or from the icon on the Interpretation toolbar. The Cut-offs and Summation Setup
window is used primarily to set up the curves to be used, the curve cut-off values to be applied,
any additional Reports that the user wishes to generate and any output curves to be created.
NOTE: after the first time that the Run button is pressed, any changes to the cut-off
parameter values must be made on the Cut-off and Summation Parameters screens or on
the interactive log plot. However, the number of curves selected for averaging and the
input curve names can be updated/changed on the setup Input Curves screen. Clicking
the Apply button will update the curves used in the Summation exercise.
Related Topics
Create a Cutoff and Summations Report
Printing Cut-off and Summation Results
Cut-off and Summations Interactive Plot
Mutli-Well Cutoff and Summation
Cut-off and Summations Equations and Methodology
Section 10.5 Interpretation : Cut-off and Summations
Interpretation
Senergy
890
10.5.1 Create a Cutoff and Summations Report

The Cut-offs and Summation Setup window is used primarily to set up the curves to be used,
the curve cut-off values to be applied, any additional Reports that the user wishes to generate
and any output curves to be created.
NOTE: after the first time that the Run button is pressed, any changes to the cut-off
parameter values must be made on the Cut-off and Summation Parameters screens or on
the interactive log plot. However, the number of curves selected for averaging and the
input curve names can be updated/changed on the setup Input Curves screen. Clicking
the Apply button will update the curves used in the Summation exercise.
To Display the Cuttoffs and Summations Reports Dialog:
From the Interpretation Menu, Select Cutoffs and Summation to Display the Cutoffs and
Summation Report.
Alternatively press the Keyboard Short-cut Ctrl_Alt_X.
The Cutoffs and Summation Dialog is organised on 3 tabbed screens. These are Input
Curves, Reports Set-Up / Default Cut-offs and Output Curves.
891
Senergy
Related Topics
Define the Input Curves
Define the Output Curves
Define the Reports Set Up and Default Cutoffs
10.5.1.1 Define the Input Curves
Up to 10 input curves can be entered into this screen for use in the summation computation. The
first three curves are pre-defined as 1. Porosity, 2. Water Saturation, and 3. Clay Volume.
The additional 7 curves (rows 4 - 10) are user-defined options and can be any curve the user
selects as an input. For example, a calculated permeability curve might be used. The Cut-off
Name column allows the user to type in a text string which describes the curve being used as a
cut-off. The names are used as log track titles in the Cut-off and Summation Interactive log plot.
Interpretation
Senergy
892
If the Use column is checked next to a curve then zonal average values for the checked curve
will be computed and presented in the output report, whether or not the checked row is used as a
cut-off. This gives the user the flexibility to experiment with the number and type of curves used
in the Summation calculation and the number of curve averages reported in the output file or
printed report.
The Short Name column allows the user to type in an abbreviated curve name. When the user
selects either the Run or Apply button and the summation calculation is performed, the Short
893
Senergy
Name is used to populate the column headers in the Cut-off and Summation Parameters
Screens.
In addition, when the user creates an output report to file or printer, the Short Names are used as
column headers in the report.
The Curve Type column allows the user to set a Type for the input Porosity, Water Saturation
and Clay Volume curves. In effect, setting a Curve Type applies a pre-processing routine to
the input curves. The CurveTypes perform the following operations
1. Phi - clip the input curve to values greater than zero.
2. Vcl - clip the input curve to values between zero and one. This allows the user, for
example, to select a clay volume from GR curve as the input. The program will clip the curve
values to lie between zero and one before the summation calculations are performed.|
3. Sw - clip the input curve to values between zero and one. Also, this Type tells the program
to compute a porosity-weighted average for the input curve when computing zonal averages.
The Input Curve column allows the user to select the curves to be used in the Summation
Report, either as curves for defining the cut-off criteria or as curves for which average values, by
zone, are required.
The Cut-off Type column allows the user to set the sign of the the cut-off type if a curve is to be
used as a cut-off criterion. Options are selected from a drop-down list.
The Average Method column allows the user to define the averaging method to apply to input
curves. The options are available from a drop-down list. The options are : Arithmetic,
Geometric and Harmonic.
Interpretation
Senergy
894
The Result Precision column allows the user to type in / define the number of decimal places to
which the zonal average values are reported in the file or print output. The default setting is 3
decimal places. The maximum setting is 6 places of decimal. However, the text string length to
file or printer is set to 8 characters, so setting to a Result Precision of 6 is only useful for
reporting very small decimal numbers, for example very low, small fractional permeabilities.
The Output Curve Cum CrvH column allows the user to create cumulative curve thickness
curves, if required. For example, if a permeability curve is specified as an input, then checking
the Output Curve cum CrvH cell for this row in the Input Curves screen will compute a
cumulative permeability footage curve which sums all depth steps meeting the specified Net Pay
cut-off criteria.
The Add Zone X/Y location to report checkbox, if checked, will include the zonal mid-depthpoint UTM rectangular coordinates for each interpretation zone in the output file or print-out for the
Summation exercise. These coordinates can only be computed if the well has a valid deviation
survey and surface location loaded into IP.
The TVD, TVT Depth Curve box allows the user to calculate TVD or TVT Net and Pay
thicknesses. The user selects the name of the TVD or TVT curve for the well, from the dropdown curve list.
The Use same cut-off value for all zones box forces the same cut-off values to be used for all
zones. This is useful if the user does not want to change cut-offs for different interpretation
zones.
The Parameter set name box is used to name the file where the Cutoff parameters will be
stored after an interpretation is finished. Parameter Sets are saved by selecting the Save
Parameter sets option in the main menu. The same name is also used to save the Parameter
Set listing to the hard disk with an extension of .TXT. The Print Parameter set menu item is
used to do this.
The Load / Save Parameter Sets button allows the user to manage the Cutoff Parameter Sets.
See Parameter Set Management.
The Run button will execute the summation calculations and will offer the user the option to
launch the Cut-off and Summation interactive log plot. NOTE: once the Run button has been
used, the default settings for cut-off values can no longer be edited on the second set-up tab.
Any further modifications must be made in the Cut-off and Summation Parameters window.
The Apply button allows the user, after the Run button has been used once, to modify the Input
curves screen, for example to modify the optional curve selection for which to calculate zonal
averages.
895
Senergy
Related Topics
10.5.1.2 Define the Reports Set Up and Default Cutoffs
The Reports Set-Up / Default Cut-offs Tab allows the user to set up the cut-off criteria to be
used in the Summation exercise. The default computation only requires the user to fill in cut-off
values in the Reservoir report and Pay report columns for the selected Porosity, Water
Saturation and Clay Volume curves on the Input Curves Tab. An additional three optional
reports can be set up in the remaining columns to the right of the default columns. In the
example shown below the cut-offs are set up as:
Reservoir (default) - Porosity >= 0.1, Clay Volume ,<= 0.5
Pay (default) - Porosity >= 0.1, Clay Volume <= 0.5, Water Saturation <= 0.5
Sw < 0.45 (optional) - Porosity >=0.1, Clay Volume <= 0.5, Water Saturation <= 0.45
PHIT > 0.15 (optional) - Clay Volume <= 0.5, Water Saturation <= 0.5, Porosity (note
different porosity curve selected) >=0.15
Interpretation
Senergy
896
The Default Cut-offs values are used to initialize the calculations. If the user subsequently
wishes to make changes to cut-off values, these changes must be applied from the Cut-off and
Summation Parameters screens.
The Report Title row allows the user to type in names that will be used to distinguish each
Summation calculation in an output report. The defaults are Reservoir and Pay reports. Report
titles permit a maximum 25 alphanumeric characters in each text box. The Report Title text
entries are used as headings in the output file/printout and as the name shown in the Cut-off and
Summation interactive log plot Flag shadings. See Cut-off and Summation Interactive Plot.
The Short Name row allows the user to type in an abbreviated report name that will be used to
name the Flag Curve generated by each summation calculation. The Short Name allows a
maximum of 4 characters in the name.
The Use report row allows the user to switch on/off one or more of the summation reports by
unchecking /checking the appropriate cell in the grid. Un-checking a column will deactivate that
report. The user can then use the Apply button to re-run the summations, excluding the unchecked report(s).
The Default Cut Value grid allows the user to set up the curve cut-off values to be used for each
summation report. Values typed into the Reservoir report column for Porosity, Water Saturation
897
Senergy
and Clay Volume automatically populate the appropriate cells in the Pay report column. For
optional reports, the user can type in the cut-off values to be used in the appropriate row(s) of the
grid. In the example shown above, Report 3 (REP3) uses a lower Sw cut-off than that in the
default reports and Report 4 (REP4) uses a different porosity curve to define Net Reservoir / Net
Pay.
The Default Use column allows the user to check / uncheck options in the grid to modify the
summation computation criteria.
Related Topics
10.5.1.3 Define the Output Curves
The Output Curves tab allows the user to set up the names of the output curves generated from
the Cut-off and Summation module. If a particular output curve is not needed, then the user can
set its name to a blank entry. The PayFlag and ResFlag curves are used in the interactive log
plot display, and should always be calculated.
Interpretation
Senergy
898
The other default curves are:

Cumulative Reservoir Porosity Thickness (ResPhiH)
Cumulative Reservoir Thickness (ResPhiSoH - net)
Cumulative Reservoir Clay Volume Thickness (ResVclH)
Cumulative Pay Porosity Thickness (PayPhiH)
Cumulative Pay Thickness (PayPhiSoH - pay)
Cumulative Pay Clay Volume Thickness (PayVclH)
The Net Flag row displays the Flag curve names for each active / selected report.
The Net Height row displays the name of the Cumulative height curve for each active /
selected report.
The Cumulative Output Curve column headers provide the user with a shortcut to typing
in many curve names for the various reports. By clicking in either the Cumulative or Output
Curve column header cells, the program will automatically fill in appropriate cumulative
output curve names for each report scenario. In the example above the REP3 column has
been filled in with all required output curve names. The same operation was performed for
the REP4 column, but only the cumulative permeability thickness curve (REP4RHOBH)
was required as an output. The other curve names were deleted by clicking in individual
cells and hitting the keyboard Delete key.
The user clicks the Run button to start the Cut-offs and Summation Report interpretation. If an
old parameter set has been loaded, or the user has already run the module, then the user will be
asked whether the log plot should be re-initialized. The user should normally answer Yes to this,
since this sets up all the special interactive plot features. An answer of No will leave the current
plot active.
If the user has already Run the summation calculations but subsequently wishes to change the
input curve selection or to deactivate one of the optional reports, for example, simply make the
changes then click the Apply button. This will update the parameters and report results. You
will also be asked whether you want to re-initialize the interactive log plot. The user should
normally answer Yes to this, since this sets up all the special interactive plot features. An answer
of No will leave the current plot active.
Note: The output cumulative curves are calculated after each zonal computation. They include
only the data within all the defined zones. Therefore, if a level is not defined as being in a zone, it
will not be included in the cumulative curves, regardless of whether the level meets the cut-off
criteria.
Related Topics
899
Senergy

10.5.2 Cut-off and Summations Parameters

The Cutoff Parameters window allows the user to change any Cutoff parameter, and create,
delete and edit interpretation Zones. The window is selected from the main menu Interpretation
Cut-off and Summation Parameters option or using the speed button on the Interpretation
toolbar.
To Display the Cutoff and Summation Parameters Dialog:
From the Interpretation Menu, Select Cutoff and Summation Parameters to Display the
Cutoff and Summation Parameters Dialog.
The Cutoff and Parameters Dialog is divided into the following Tabs; Zone Depths, Reservoir
Cutoffs, Pay Cutoffs, Additional Cutoffs, Reservoir Results, Pay Results and Additional
Results.
Interpretation
Senergy
900
If additional Reports are Activated, by checking the Use report cell in the Reports Set-Up /
Default Cut-offs tab of the launcher screen, then correspondingly more Parameter tabs will
be available for editing. This is shown below, where a third report (Sw < 0.45) and fourth
report (PHIT > 0.15) have been checked for execution:
In terms of the number of parameters visible, the Parameters tabs expand to accommodate up
to 7 optional additional curves that the user can specify in the Setup screens. Each additional
curve will have a Curve Short Name / Cut e.g. RHOB Cut column where the user can type in a
new cut-off value (See Input Curves tab on the Set-up screens) and a Short Name / Use e.g
RHOB REP3 Use column which the user needs to check if the cut-off values are to be used in
the computation (see Reports Set-Up / Default Cut-offs tab). The user can then further tailor
cut-off criteria, for example, by Using an additional curve cut-off in a particular zone or set of
901
Senergy
zones.
The Cutoff Parameters tabs are arranged left to right across the Parameters window. They
are Zone Depths, Reservoir Cut-offs, Pay Cut-offs, Additional Cut-offs, Reservoir Results
, Pay Results, Additional Report Results.
The Parameter tabs displays the Cut-off parameters arranged as columns, left to right, across
the page and with the zones arranged in rows down the page.
Cut-off and Summation Parameter Help

The Help buttons on the parameter screens are unique to the program in the sense that they will
launch a small window (example below) which will provide information on individual parameters
in the display. Once the window is displayed, the user places the mouse cursor over a parameter
in the parameter window, and the help for that parameter is displayed.
Column Edits
If the user wants to set all the parameters in one column of the parameter screen to the same
value then the header of the column should be clicked. This will turn the column header box to
green. Now, any one parameter that is changed in that column will change all the parameters in
the column to the same value. To turn the column edit off, click the column header again and its
colour will return to grey. Column edits remain active while the well stays loaded in memory.
They have to be reset, if required, next time the well is loaded. The following shows a column edit
turned on for the Phi cut-off parameter.
Interpretation
Senergy
902
The Close Button

The Close button on the parameter window closes the window, but does not cancel any changes
made to the parameters. If the user closes the window without clicking OK then the changes
made will not come into effect until some other interactive parameter is changed for that zone,
and therefore forces a re-calculation of the zone.
Related Topics
Manage Zone Depths
Manage Cutoffs
Manage Results
10.5.2.1 Manage Zone Depths
The Zone Depths Tab permits the user to manage the zone names for the Summation report.
Zone names and associated top and bottom depths can be edited manually under the Zone
Depths tab.
903
Senergy
Parameter tabs except the Zone Depths tab. This is accomplished by ticking the Show
Additional Zone info tick-box. The user then has the option of showing the zone name or the
zone depths on each tab. Depending on which option is chosen, when you select another
Parameter tab, the zone names or zone depths will be shown in the left-hand column of the grid.
The Show Default Info option is just displaying the Zone # column populated with the zone
number.
Alternatively, left-mouse-button click in the Zone (#) column header box of any parameter screen
and you will see the same three options as those seen from clicking the Show Additional Zone
Info button. NOTE: this functionality is available on any of the tabs.
The Zone Name column is there if the user wishes to type in an optional zone name. The
Zone Name will be output in the report.
The Zone Top is the Top Depth for a zone.
The Zone Bottom is the Bottom Depth for a zone.
Interpretation
Senergy
904
The Lock Zone column enables the user to lock zones. This prevents any changes being
made to the parameters in that zone in any of the tabs within the module. It also prevents
changes being made interactively to the zones in the Cut-off and Summation Interactive plot.
The Sub Total parameter allows the user to compute average reservoir properties for two
different scenarios:
1. Sub Total can be used to compute average reservoir properties over a number of zones,
as illustrated above; A Sand (1980.13 - 2079.342m) is a Sub Total of A Sand Oil (1980.13 2007.652m) and A Sand Water (2007.562 - 2079.342m), or
2. Sub Total can be used to compute average reservoir properties for a user-defined depth
interval, which is, for example, half the thickness of an existing zone.
Sub Total zones are not displayed on the interactive plot and have no associated cut-offs,
but use the interpretation results from the normal zones to determine net pay or net
reservoir average properties. The user flags that a zone is a Sub Total by checking the
appropriate cell in the grid. In the example shown above, the A Sand zone is flagged as a
Sub Total zone whose top depth is that of the A Sand Oil zone and whose bottom depth is
that of the A Sand Water zone.
NOTE: If a TVD Curve has been selected on the Input Curves Tab of the launcher screens
then additional columns will be reported on the Zone Depths Tab. These are:
TVD/TVT Top - the True vertical depth of the Zone Top.
TVD/TVT Bottom - the True vertical depth of the Zone Bottom
Clicking the New Zone button will display the Add Zone Dialog. See Also: Create a New
Zone.
The Delete zone button on the parameter window allows the deletion of one or more zones.
Select the zones to delete, and click OK.
Related Topics
Manage Zone Depths
Create a New Zone
Manage Cutoffs
Manage Results
10.5.2.2 Manage Cutoffs
The Reservoir Cutoffs and Pay Cutoffs Tabs are initially populated with the cut-off parameters
that the user sets up on the Cutoff and Summation launch screens.
If a parameter is an On / Off-type flag, then clicking it will change its state. If it is a list-type
905
Senergy
parameter, then clicking on it will produce a pop-up menu where the parameter can be changed.
The Zone Depths tab allows the user to change zone tops and bottoms, and set a zone name.
The Reservoir Results, Pay Results and any additional report Results tabs have no editable
fields and are used to display the results of the calculation.
NOTE: Simply changing a parameter in the display will not immediately mean that a zone is recalculated. The user must click the OK button again in order to re-calculate all zones and
update all displays.
The default Reservoir and Pay cut-off parameters are described in the topics; Manage
Reservoir Cutoffs and Manange Pay Cutoffs. NOTE: Numbers in parentheses ( ), prefixing a
parameter name, relate to the Monte Carlo Error Analysis module and correspond to Cut-off
module inputs found in the file MonteCarloDefaults.par.
Related Topics
Manage Cutoffs
Manage Reservoir Cutoffs
Manange Pay Cutoffs
Manage Additional Cutoffs
10.5.2.2.1 Manage Reservoir Cutoffs
fields and are used to display the results of the calculation. The default Reservoir and Pay cutoff parameters are described below. NOTE: Numbers in parentheses ( ), prefixing a parameter
name, relate to the Monte Carlo Error Analysis module and correspond to Cut-off module inputs
found in the file MonteCarloDefaults.par.
The default Reservoir Cutoffs are Selected:
Interpretation
Senergy
906
Min Res Height

Allows the user to set the minimum thickness of a zone in order for it to count as net
reservoir.
Default is 0. (All depth intervals will count towards net if they meet the cut-off criteria).
(3) Phi Cut Res/Pay
Porosity cut-off value.
If the input porosity curve value is greater than or equal to this value, then the level can be
considered for Pay or Reservoir if the level also meets all the other cut-offs.
Phi Res Use
Flag
Set to On (checked) to use the porosity input for a Net Reservoir cut-off.
(6) Sw Cut Res/Pay
Water saturation cut-off value.
If the input water saturation curve is less than or equal to this value, then the level can be
considered for pay or reservoir if the level also meets all the other cut-offs.
Sw Res Use
Flag
Set to On (checked) to use the water saturation input for a Net Reservoir cut-off.
(9) Vcl Cut Res/Pay
Clay volume cut-off value.
If the input clay volume curve is less than or equal to this value, then the level can be
considered for pay or reservoir if the level also meets all the other cut-offs.
Vcl Res Use
Flag
Set to On (checked) to use the clay volume input for a Net reservoir cut-off.
Related Topics
Manage Cutoffs
Manange Pay Cutoffs
907
Senergy
10.5.2.2.2 Manange Pay Cutoffs
fields and are used to display the results of the calculation. The default Reservoir and Pay cutoff parameters are described below. NOTE: Numbers in parentheses ( ), prefixing a parameter
name, relate to the Monte Carlo Error Analysis module and correspond to Cut-off module inputs
found in the file MonteCarloDefaults.par.
The Default Pay Cutoffs are Selected:
Min Pay Height

Allows the user to set the minimum thickness of a zone in order for it to count as Net Pay.
Default is 0. (All depth intervals will count towards pay if they meet the cut-off criteria).
Phi Pay Use
Flag Set to On (checked) to use the porosity input for a Net pay cut-off.
Sw Pay Use
Flag Set to On (checked) to use the water saturation input for a Net Pay cut-off.
Vcl Pay Use
Flag Set to On to use the clay volume input for a Net pay cut-off.
Related Topics
Manage Cutoffs
Manange Pay Cutoffs
Interpretation
Senergy
908
10.5.2.2.3 Manage Additional Cutoffs
The Additional Cutoffs and Reports Tabs are only activated if the user sets up additional Reports
with associated input curves in the Cutoff and Summation set-up screens. Up to three extra
reports can be set up, each with its own optional set of cut-off criteria. The user has immense
flexibility in how to use these additional reports. They do not necessarily have to be set up to
report Net and/or Pay. The example shown below, however, is set up as a Pay report with a
Report Title "SW < 0.45", Short Name "REP3". The number of columns displayed will depend
on the number of curves selected in the Set-up Input Curves screen.
For each selected curve there will be a pair of adjacent columns named using the following
syntax:
CurveName / Cut / Report Short Name (e.g. Phi Cut REP3) and
CurveName / Report Short Name / Use (e.g. Phi REP3 Use).
Type in a cut-off value in the ...Cut... column and check the adjacent ...Use column if you wish to
use a particular curve as some form of discriminator.
The Additional Reports parameters are described below. NOTE: Numbers in parentheses ( ),
prefixing a parameter name, relate to the Monte Carlo Error Analysis module and correspond
to the Cutoff inputs found in the file MonteCarloDefaults.par.
All additional Cutoff Parameter tabs have a common column format, with the Report Short
Name (in the example shown above, REP3) inserted into the column headers and the Cutoff Tab
labelled with the Report Title (SW < 0.45). The Short Name has been replaced by XXXX in the
following listing, for simplicity.
Min XXXX Height
Allows the user to set the minimum thickness of a zone in order for it to count in whatever
Report computation is being executed. Default is 0. (All depth intervals will be counted, if they
meet any cut-off criteria that may have been set).
909
Senergy
(12) Other cut-off 1

Other input curve 1 cut-off value. If the user decides to apply some cut-off criteria, and if the
other input curve 1 is >= or <= (depending on setting on input curve window) to this value, then
the level can be used in the report if the level also meets all the other cut-offs.
Other cut-off 1 Use
Set to On (checked) to use the extra cut-off curve 1 input for a cut-off.
Extra input curve 2 cut-off value. If the extra input curve 2 is >= or <= (depending on setting on
input curve window) to this value, then the level can be considered for pay or reservoir if the
level also meets all the other cut-offs.
Other cut-off 2 Use
Extra input curve 3 cut-off value. If the extra input curve 3 is >= or <= (depending on setting on
input curve window) to this value, then the level can be considered for pay or reservoir if the
level also meets all the other cut-offs.
Other cut-off 3 Use
Related Topics
Manage Cutoffs
Manange Pay Cutoffs
10.5.2.3 Manage Results
The Reservoir Results tab allows the user to view the results of a summation calculation for Net
Reservoir - determined by the application of the Porosity and optional Clay Volume cut-off criteria
- for each defined zone.
The Pay Results tab allows the user to view the results of a summation calculations for Net Pay
- determined by the application of the Vclay, Porosity and Water Saturation cut-off criteria - for
each defined zone.
Interpretation
Senergy
910
report Net and/or Pay.
Related Topics
Manage Results
Manage Reservoir Results
Manage Pay Results
Manage Additional Results
10.5.2.3.1 Manage Reservoir Results
The Reservoir Results tab allows the user to view the results of a summation calculation for Net
Reservoir - determined by the application of the Porosity and optional Clay Volume cut-off criteria
- for each defined zone.
The Reservoir Results parameters are described below:

Gross Interval
Gross interval. Result parameter. Non-editable.
Net Res
Net reservoir interval. Result parameter. Non-editable.
Net/Gross Res
Net/Gross ratio for the reservoir interval. Result parameter. Non-editable.
Av Phi Res
Average porosity in the reservoir interval. Result parameter. Non-editable.
Av Sw Res
Average water saturation in the reservoir interval. This is a porosity-weighted average. Result
parameter. Non-editable.
911
Senergy
Av Vcl Res
Average clay volume in the reservoir interval. Result parameter. Non-editable.
Other Curve Av (Name) Res
Average of the additional input curves 1-7 in the reservoir interval. Average type (Arithmetic,
Geometric, Harmonic) is specified on the input curve window. Result parameter. Noneditable.
PhiH Res
Computed Porosity - Thickness product of reservoir rock meeting the Porosity and optional
clay volume cut-off criteria. Result parameter. Non-editable.
PhiSoH Res
Computed Hydrocarbon Pore thickness product of reservoir rock meeting the Porosity and
optional clay volume cut-off criteria. Result parameter. Non-editable.
Other Curve (Name)H Res
Cumulative thickness of the additional input curves 1-7 in the reservoir interval. Average type
(Arithmetic, Geometric, Harmonic) is specified on the input curve window. Result parameter.
Non-editable.
NOTE: If a TVD Curve has been selected on the Input Curves Tab of the launcher screens then
additional data will be reported in the Reservoir Results Tab. These are:
TVD/TVT Gross
True vertical depth Gross Zone Thickness. Result parameter. Non-editable.
TVD/TVT Net Res
True vertical depth Net Reservoir Thickness. Result parameter. Non-editable.
TVD / TVT N/G Res
True Vertical Depth Net to Gross Ratio. Result parameter. Non-editable.
NOTE: If $$ are seen in the columns then this indicates that there is null data in that zone interval.
Related Topics
Manage Results
Manage Pay Results
Interpretation
Senergy
912
10.5.2.3.2 Manage Pay Results
The Pay Results tab allows the user to view the results of a summation calculations for Net Pay
- determined by the application of the Vclay, Porosity and Water Saturation cut-off criteria - for
each defined zone.
The Pay Results parameters are described below:

Gross Interval
Gross interval. Result parameter. Non-editable.
Net Pay
Net pay interval. Result parameter. Non-editable.
Net/Gross Pay
Net/Gross ratio for the pay interval. Result parameter. Non-editable.
Av Phi Pay
Average porosity in the pay interval. Result parameter. Non-editable.
Av Sw Pay
Average water saturation in the pay interval. This is a porosity-weighted average. Result
parameter. Non-editable.
Av Vcl Pay
Average clay volume in the pay interval. Result parameter. Non-editable.
Other Curve Av (Name) Pay
Average of the additional input curves 1-7 in the reservoir interval. Average type (Arithmetic,
Geometric, Harmonic) is specified on the input curve window. Result parameter. Noneditable.
PhiH Pay
Computed Porosity - Thickness product of reservoir rock meeting the Porosity and optional
clay volume cut-off criteria. Result parameter. Non-editable.
PhiSoH Pay
913
Senergy
Computed Hydrocarbon Pore thickness product of reservoir rock meeting the Porosity and
optional clay volume cut-off criteria. Result parameter. Non-editable.
Other Curve (Name)H Pay
Cumulative thickness of the additional input curves 1-7 in the reservoir interval. Average type
(Arithmetic, Geometric, Harmonic) is specified on the input curve window. Result parameter.
Non-editable.
NOTE: If a TVD Curve has been selected on the Input Curves Tab of the launcher screens then
additional data will be reported in the Pay Results Tab. These are:
TVD/TVT Gross
True vertical depth Gross Zone Thickness. Result parameter. Non-editable.
TVD/TVT Net Pay
True vertical depth Net Pay Thickness. Result parameter. Non-editable.
TVD / TVT N/G Pay
True Vertical Depth Net to Gross Ratio. Result parameter. Non-editable.
NOTE: If $$ are seen in the columns then this indicates that there is null data in that zone interval.
Related Topics
Manage Results
Manage Pay Results
10.5.2.3.3 Manage Additional Results
report Net and/or Pay.
If the user has set up any additional Reports in the set-up screens, each scenario will create an
extra Results tab. The SW < 0.45 Results tab shown in the screen above is an example. Up to
3 reports, in addition to the default Net Reservoir and Net Pay reports are possible.
The user has complete flexibility in how to set up and use these additional reports. The input
curve selection is therefore important in determining whether the computed output is a Net
Reservoir, Net Pay or Other type of report.
Interpretation
Senergy
914
Related Topics
Manage Results
Manage Pay Results
10.5.3 Printing Cut-off and Summation Results

The Print button on the Cutoff Parameters window will launch the following list of options:
This menu allows the user to output the summation results report to a printer, file or to the
clipboard in a variety of different formats with or without a listing of curves.
The Normal Report
File option launches a Save Parameters to File dialog where the
results will be written to a user-defined file name in the default output directory . The
default file name uses the name, with the ".txt" extension.
The Comma Delimited option will write the file using commas to separate the fields and will
have a file extension of ".csv". This facilitates loading the data into a spreadsheet
915
Senergy
application. To output the .csv file using semi-colons instead of commas as the delimiter go
to Tools
Options
Miscellaneous Options
CSV Delimiter.
The Tab Delimited option will write the file using tabs to separate the fields and will also
have a ".txt" extension but will be a Tab Delimited type.
The RTF format can be used to load into word processing software and contains the
formatting information for the text. The output file will have a ".RTF" extension.
The ClipBoard options allow the user to save the reports directly onto the clipboard for
subsequent pasting into WordTM or PowerPoint TM documents.
If the Report With Curve Listing options are chosen then, in-between the normal
summation results a listing of curve data can be displayed. See the section below to set up
the listing.
Note: The Output Report has been changed to put the average values on the second line
when TVD reports are made.
Note: When the Cumulative curve height is put in the same Column as the average value
(only output to printer, RFT, clipboard) the order is changed as is the order in the header.
This means the average value is on the second line.
Related Topics
Interpretation
Senergy
916

Report with Curve Listing
Report with Interval Breakdown
10.5.3.1 Report with Curve Listing
The Report with Curve Listing option creates an output report / file in which summation results
for each zone are listed, followed by a listing of the user-selected curves for that depth interval. If
the option to create a curve listing in the report is selected, the following window is displayed.
The functionality of this window is identical to the Curve Listing / Curve Edit set-up module.
Any curve in the database can be selected. Discriminators can be used to limit the output as well
as setting the output data frequency. In the above example only data that count as net reservoir
will be listed. The listing data frequency is at all levels.
Related Topics
917
Senergy

10.5.3.2 Report with Interval Breakdown
The Report with Detail Interval Breakdown option gives the user the ability to view a listing
similar to the report generated within the Cut Off and Summation module.
Plus there is a detailed breakdown for each zone with a Gross Interval, Total Number of Intervals,
Total Net Thickness, Mean Interval Thickness, Thinnest Interval Thickness and Thickest Interval
Thickness for each of the Reservoir and Pay intervals. Both the Reservoir and Pay intervals can
be listed or either Reservoir or Pay can be listed by using the drop-down selection box.
The net thickness is determined by Bottom minus Top plus depth step. The Top is the depth of
the first instance of where the flag curve turns on. The Bottom is last depth where the flag curve
is on. To illustrate this further; think of an interval where there is just one step with the flag curve
on. Top = Bottom but thickness will be the depth step.
Interval averages are the average values of all the intervals. The main report zonal averages are
the thickness weighted averages. Hence interval average multiplied by the number of intervals
does not necessarily equal zonal average.
On the main report all zone averages are thickness weighted averages not arithmetic averages.
Interpretation
Senergy
918
The Default curves for the interval listing are PHIE, SW and VWCL although more curves can be
added by clicking on an empty box within the Curves to output and using the drop-down curve
listing to pick other curves. An example of part of a detailed interval breakdown is shown below.
919
Senergy
Related Topics
10.5.3.3 Example Output Listing
Result Output Listing

To obtain the result output listing, use the Print Parameter set menu item on the main menu
under File or the Print button on the cut-off parameters window.
Interpretation
Senergy
920
Example listing 1 :
cut-off SUMMARY REPORT
Well :
Date :
Test well # 1
09/02/98 11:24:31
NET RESERVOIR ROCK SUMMARY
Zn Zone Name
Vcl Phi*H
Phi*So*H
#
Top
Bottom
Gross
Net
N/G
TVDSS
TVDSS
TVDSS
TVDSS
TVDSS
7790.00
7875.00
85.00
69.50
0.818
-7590.00
-7675.00
85.00
69.50
0.818
7875.00
8225.00
350.00
282.50
0.807
-7675.00
-8025.00
350.00
282.50
0.807
8270.00
8420.00
150.00
90.00
0.600
-8070.00
-8220.00
150.00
90.00
0.600
8420.00
8620.00
200.00
181.75
0.909
-8220.00
-8420.00
200.00
181.75
0.909
7790.00
8620.00
785.00
623.75
0.795
-7590.00
-8420.00
785.00
623.75
0.795
Zn Zone Name
Vcl Phi*H
Phi*So*H
#
Top
Bottom
Gross
Net
N/G
TVDSS
TVDSS
TVDSS
TVDSS
TVDSS
7790.00
7875.00
85.00
65.00
0.765
-7590.00
-7675.00
85.00
65.00
0.765
7875.00
8225.00
350.00
46.25
0.132
-7675.00
-8025.00
350.00
46.25
0.132
8270.00
8420.00
150.00
70.50
0.470
-8070.00
-8220.00
150.00
70.50
0.470
8420.00
8620.00
200.00
14.50
0.073
-8220.00
-8420.00
200.00
14.50
0.073
Top Gas Zone

13.620 10.041
Water
48.976
Av Phi
Av Sw
Av
0.196
0.263
0.147
0.173
0.629
0.168
0.187
0.360
0.177
0.195
0.659
0.127
0.184
0.556
0.155
Av Phi
Av Sw
Av
0.200
0.248
0.130
0.215
0.208
0.093
0.199
0.291
0.138
0.202
0.405
0.115
18.169
Bottom Gas
16.797 10.746
Bottom Water
35.505 12.102
All Zones
114.899 51.058
NET PAY SUMMARY
Top Gas Zone

13.013 9.785
Water
9.960
7.887
Bottom Gas
14.031 9.945
Bottom Water
2.931
1.744
921
All Zones
39.935 29.362
Senergy
7790.00
8620.00
785.00
196.25
0.250
-7590.00
-8420.00
785.00
196.25
0.250
Zone Name
Top
Bottom
Top Gas Zone

Water
Bottom Gas
Bottom Water
7790.00
7875.00
8270.00
8420.00
7875.00
8225.00
8420.00
8620.00
0.203
0.265
0.123
cut-offs USED
Zn
#
1
2
3
4
Depth Units : ft
TVD / TVT depth curve name : TVDSS
>
>
>
>
Phi
Pay
PHIE
0.100
0.100
0.100
0.100
<
<
<
<
Sw
Pay
SW
0.500 Y
0.500 Y
0.500 Y
0.500 Y
<
<
<
<
Vcl
Pay
VWCL
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
Units : ft
Example listing 2 : Part listing with option of including curve listing between zonal
summaries.
Well :
Date :
Test Well 3
03/12/02 16:55:33
Zn Zone Name
Phi*H
Phi*So*H
#
Top
Bottom
Gross
Net
N/G
Av Phi
Av Sw
Av Vcl
1 Upper Oil
30.336 19.323
7778.00
7924.50
146.50
142.50
0.973
0.213
0.363
0.057
DEPTH
FT
7790.
7800.
7810.
7820.
7830.
7840.
7850.
7860.
7870.
7880.
7890.
7900.
7910.
7920.
VWCL
Dec
0.05327
0.3844
0.2673
0.05524
0.5224
0.01823
0.03271
0.1014
0.03495
0.04284
0.03141
0.03785
0.1669
0.03822
PHIE
Dec
0.2008
0.09666
0.1397
0.2044
0.1188
0.2184
0.2272
0.1846
0.2362
0.2058
0.2395
0.196
0.1822
0.2229
SW
Dec
0.6609
0.9356
0.4536
0.2316
0.5447
0.2054
0.2322
0.4652
0.3478
0.1591
0.1348
0.2191
0.3379
0.5205
ResFlag
1.
1.
1.
1.
1.
1.
1.
1.
1.
1.
1.
1.
1.
1.
PayFlag
0.
0.
1.
1.
0.
1.
1.
1.
1.
1.
1.
1.
1.
0.
Zn Zone Name
Phi*H
Phi*So*H
#
Top
Bottom
Gross
Net
N/G
Av Phi
Av Sw
Av Vcl
2 Upper water
51.287 1.269
7924.50
8250.50
326.00
288.50
0.885
0.178
0.975
0.099
Interpretation
Senergy
DEPTH
FT
7930.
7940.
7950.
7960.
VWCL
Dec
0.06897
0.1337
0.
0.02743
PHIE
Dec
0.1768
0.1587
0.1885
0.1863
SW
Dec
0.8746
0.8541
1.
0.9994
ResFlag
1.
1.
1.
1.
922
PayFlag
0.
0.
0.
0.
Related Topics
10.5.4 Cut-off and Summations Interactive Plot

The Cut-offs and Summation module interactive plot consists (from left to right) of: a Depth
track, Zone track, a TVD Depth track (if theTVD option is selected) and Input Curve tracks (one
track per input curve) with track titles as typed into the Input Curves Tab of the set-up screen.
The Zone track is used to perform the following functions:

1. To display the current zonation used in the interpretation
2. To create and delete interpretation zones
3. To move zone tops.
923
Senergy
To create a new zone by splitting a current zone, click in the zone track at the depth for the split
and choose from the pop-up menu Split Zone.
To delete a zone, choose Delete Zone from the pop-up menu. Zone tops and bottoms can be
moved by placing the cursor on the top of a zone in the zone track, and, with the left mouse
button, drag the top to a new position. It is possible to have gaps between zones. To remove a
gap, drag the bottom of the zone above a gap to below the top of the zone below the gap.
The Input Curve tracks are all similar in appearance. They contain a single input curve, together
with the flag curves of all the Reports that the user has defined in the set-up screens. If a
particular curve is used in a Report as a cut-off criterion, a cut-off line is also displayed in the log
track.
1. The Flags are labelled as in the Report Title field in the Reports Set-Up / Default Cutoffs Tab of the set-up window. The Flag curves appear as coloured bars at either side of
each track.
2. The Cut-Off values that were set up for individual curves are displayed as vertical
interactive lines in their respective tracks. To interactively change a cut-off, place the mouse
cursor on the cut-off line. The name of the cut-off parameter and its value will be displayed at
the bottom left hand corner of the main window. Use the left mouse button to drag the line to
its new value. When the mouse button is released, that zone will be re-calculated and all
displays updated.
3. If the right-hand mouse button is clicked in a log track, a pop-up menu will appear. The
menu will allow the user to:
turn on and turn off the net pay /net reservoir /optional report use options. This function
is identical to the user opening the Cut-off and Summation Parameters screen and
checking or unchecking the equivalent curve Use column on the appropriate Report tab.
a histogram of the input curve or any of the Flag curves in the track can be displayed,
with an interactive line to change the cut-off value (See Histogram Section).
Crossplots of the cut-off parameters can be displayed, with interactive lines allowing the
changing of cut-off parameters (See Crossplots Section).
Interpretation
Senergy
924
Undo/Redo
Once the Interactive cutoff lines lines have been altered undo/redo arrows appear in the top lefthand corner of the log plot. These allow the user to go back to the original position of the
interactive lines. As the arrows are clicked the interactive lines move and the output curves are
recalculated. The undo/redo arrows only work if the well and zones remain unchanged during the
current interpretation session.
Related Topics
925
Senergy
10.5.6 Cut-off and Summations Equations and Methodology

Each depth in the data is considered a discrete interval, with the recorded depth being the centre
of the interval. Therefore, when making averages over an interval, only half of the top and bottom
depth increments are counted. The following diagram provides an example explaining how net
reservoir would be calculated:
It is worth pointing out that the above equation misses out the zero points as in total there are
nine intervals and so the equation should really be written like this:
Net = [((1 x 6) + (1 x 0)) + ((0.5 x 0) + (0.5 x 1))] x 0.5 = 3.25
Average porosity:
i n
av
hi
i
i 1
i n
hi
i 1
Average water saturation:

i n
hi
S av
1 Sw
i 1
i n
i
hi
i 1
Average Clay volume:
Interpretation
Senergy
926
i n
Vcli
hi
i 1
Vclav
i n
hi
i 1
Extra curves Arithmetic average:

i n
Curvei
Curveav
hi
i 1
i n
hi
i 1
Extra curves Geometric average:

i n
Curveav
C1 . C2 . C3 . C4 ..... Cn
1
i 1
hi
Extra curves Harmonic average:

i n
hi
Curveav
i 1
i n
hi Curvei
i 1
Where
i
hi
n
= ith input value

= ith input interval
= number of samples
For the Geometric and Harmonic averages, any input value which is less than or equal to zero,
will be ignored and not included in the final average.
Related Topics
927
10.6
Senergy
Cut-Off Sensitivity Results
TheCut-off Sensitivity Results module is a standalone tool which allows the user to load and
visualize sensitivity run results saved from the 'Cut-off Sensitivity' module. When the user runs
the 'Cut-off Sensitivity' module the inputs, calculated data tables and output graphic defaults
can be saved to an external (.cosr) file. These saved data and settings can subsequently be
reloaded into this module.
The module is launched from the 'Interpretation' menu.
The user interface is illustrated below. When the module is launched, initially the window is
empty of graphics and data. 'Click' the 'Load Results' button and use the Windows browser to
select the saved 'Cutoff Sensitivity Results' (.cosr) file you wish to look at. 'Click' Open. The
forms are populated with the saved data and the graphic display is rebuilt.
Section 10.6 Interpretation : Cut-Off Sensitivity Results
Interpretation
Senergy
Related Topics
928
929
Senergy

Cut-Off Sensitivity Work Flow
Cut-off Sensitivity Results Plot
Cut-off Sensitivity Output Parameters
Cut-off Sensitivity Computations
10.6.1 Cut-Off Sensitivity Work Flow

For example, one could visualize the impact of different porosity (PHIE) cut-offs on Net Porosity
Thickness (PhiH Reservoir). The workflow and set-up window for this example are illustrated
below:
The workflow is as follows:
1. Select the well or wells to work on. IP defaults to the current, in-focus well.
2. Select the cut-off parameter to investigate. This could be any of the cut-off parameters
saved by the 'Cut-off and Summation' module, but normally will be Phie, Sw or Vcl.
3. Enter the 'Cutoff Start Value', 'Cutoff Stop Value' and the 'Cutoff Step' for the selected
cut-off parameter. These numbers are the minimum and maximum limits for the selected
cut-off parameter and the 'step' is the amount to increment the selected parameter between
these two limits. In the screen capture shown below, the PHI cutoff limits to test are from
0.0 to 35 pu, using a 1.0 pu increment.
4. Select the 'Output Parameter' to plot (e.g. PhiH Reservoir). Multiple output results can be
selected simultaneously by adding an entry in additional rows in the grid. Each result
parameter will be shown as a sensitivity line on the 'Results' plot, when the 'Make Plot'
button is clicked.
5. Select a named 'Zone' or All Zones to get the data from, by clicking in the 'Zone' column,
for each 'Output Parameter' row. For example, one could plot the PHiH Reservoir
sensitivity to PHI Cut-off in different reservoir zones using the grid set-up.
Note, that in the multi-well option, if a zone is missing in one or more wells, the computation
will continue with a warning message about the well the zone is missing from.
The 'Zone' column title box can be 'activated' by 'clicking' in it. This provides the same
functionality as elsewhere in the Interactive Petrophysics software - when switched
'on' (Green color) selecting a particular zone and clicking away from the grid will populate all
rows in the grid with that value.
6. Click the Make plot button. The module cycles through the cut-off parameter limits from
'Start' to 'Stop' value, using the 'Step', running the 'Cutoff and Summation' module in each
selected well. The results are accumulated for the selected well(s) and copied to the display
Interpretation
Senergy
930
module and the graphics are updated. On the first operation of this module the 'Update
Plot' button will be 'greyed out'. 'Clicking' the 'Make Plot' button activates the 'Update
Plot' functionality.
Within the Setup window there are options for modifying the parameters to be visualized:
The 'Clear Row' and 'Clear All' buttons allow the user to remove one or all entries from the
'Output Parameters' grid.
The 'Save Format' button is used to save the wells, set-up parameters and cut-off limits for
a particular run of the module. The parameters are written to an external '.cos' file.
The 'Load Format' button is used to reload a saved Cut-off Sensitivity format (.cos) file.
Related Topics
931
Senergy
10.6.2 Cut-off Sensitivity Output Parameters

The Cut-off Sensitivity module is designed to provide the user with an easy-to-use tool for
visualizing the effect of changing any single cut-off parameter (typically Vclay, Porosity, Water
Saturation) on any 'Summation' Net Reservoir or Net Pay output parameter. The module is
launched from the 'Interpretation' menu.
The typical output parameters from the 'Cut-off and Summation' module are listed below:
Related Topics
10.6.3 Cut-off Sensitivity Computations

The cut-off criteria that are used to generate a reservoir summary report for 'Net Reservoir' and
'Net Pay' can be critically important. Deciding what values of Vclay, Porosity and Sw to use as
cut-offs is quite often guesswork and therefore sensitivities run on the cut-off values can be
useful in helping to make a decision on the appropriate cut-off value to apply.
The 'Cut-off Sensitivity and Cut-off Sensitivity Report modules work in a complementary
way to allow the visualization and reporting of the changes observed in Summation 'Net
Reservoir' and 'Net pay' parameter outputs, based upon varying one cut-off parameter within
user-defined limits and by a user-defined increment.
The two modules can be used in 'single well' and 'multi-well' modes. Multi-well mode requires
that input curves (typically the Porosity, Clay volume and Water saturation curves) in all the wells
Interpretation
Senergy
932
have the same names. In addition, when using multiple wells, a common Zone set should exist.
Note that not all zones have to be present in every well. The module identifies if a zone is missing
from a well and warns the user, before continuing to process other wells.
As a prerequisite to using these modules the Cut-off and Summation module or the 'MultiWell Cutoff and Summation' module must initially have been run on all wells that are to be run
in the sensitivity computation. Sensitivities can then be set up to see the impact of changing any
one of the cut-off inputs (Porosity, Clay Volume, Water Saturation etc..) on any output parameter
e.g. Hydrocarbon Pore Thickness Pay (PhiSoH Pay).
Calculating Multi-Well Output Values

There are two types of 'Results' parameters output from the Summation computation. These are :
1. 'Average properties' e.g 'Av Vcl Res', 'Av Phie Res' or 'Av Sw Pay' &
2. 'Value Thickness' products e.g. 'PhiH Res' (Net Porosity Thickness Reservoir), 'PhiSoH Pay'
(Net Hydrocarbon Pore Thickness Pay)
In multi-well mode an 'average property' is computed by adding together the 'value thickness' of
the parameter for all selected wells, then by dividing the result by the total thickness in all wells.
This is illustrated in the following example:
Well 1 (Zone 1)
Av Phi
0.195
Net Thickness
50ft
Phi H
50 x 0.195 = 9.75
Av Sw
0.25
Phi So H
9.75 x (1-0.25) = 7.313
Well 2 (Zone 1)
Av Phi
0.165
Net Thickness
20ft
Phi H
20 x 0.165 = 3.3
Av Sw
0.30
Phi So H
3.3 x (1-0.3) = 2.31
Phi = Porosity
Sw = Water Saturation
So = Hydrocarbon saturation = 1 - Sw
Phi So H = Net Hydrocarbon Pore thickness
Phi H = Net Porosity thickness
933
Senergy
Combined values for the two wells for Zone 1:

Phi H
9.75 + 3.3 = 13.05
Net Thickness
50 + 20 = 70ft
Phi So H
7.313 + 2.31 = 9.623
Av Phi
13.05 / 70 = 0.187
Av Sw
1.0 - 9.623 / 13.05 = 0.263
These averages are called 'thickness weighted' averages and are the values used inside the
'Cutoff and Summation' module.
Related Topics
10.6.4 Cut-off Sensitivity Results Plot

'Clicking' the 'Make Plot' button launches the 'Cut-off Sensitivity Results' window. The
restored sensitivity run results are organized on two 'tabbed' screens 'Plot' and 'Data'. The 'Cutoff Sensitivity Results' plot window contains a graph in the upper panel, showing the crossplot
of the results of the sensitivity run. The Cut-off parameter values are shown on the X-axis; the
corresponding output parameter values are shown on the Y-axis. The statistical results
associated with the sensitivity run are displayed in the table underneath the graph.
The 'Plot' tab, illustrated below shows a crossplot display and grid of statistics associated with
the input data.
The 'Data' tab presents a tabular listing containing all the data that went into the construction of
the 'Plot' graphic and the associated statistics grid.
The 'Percentile' lines drawn on the graph are user-editable and can be changed by typing in a
different value into the appropriate 'cell' in the grid and keying 'Enter'. The associated Cut-off
value and Output parameter value for the modified Percentile are recomputed.
Changing the displayed 'Percentiles', 'Cutoff' or 'Output Parameter' Values.

The Grid display in the bottom of the window shows the statistical values associated with the
Interpretation
Senergy
934
plot. The program defaults to display the 10th, 50th and 90th Percentile results. These include
the 'Cut-off' value corresponding to that 'Percentile' and the 'Value' of the selected output
parameter for that percentile. The user can type in a new 'Value', 'Percentile' or 'Cutoff' into
the appropriate 'cell', Key 'Enter' or 'click' elsewhere on the grid and IP will recalculate the other
two values and update the graphic display.
Column headers are 'active' in the grid part of the window. 'Click' in the 'title' cell of a column
and it turns green (active). To change all displayed values in a column to a particular value, type
in, for example, the value 5 in the top row of an active 'Percentile' column and key the 'Enter/
Return' button or 'click' elsewhere in the grid. All rows in that column of the grid will update with
the new Percentile value and the associated output parameter and cut-off value will be
recalculated. The graphic display will update to reflect the imposed changes.
935
Senergy
The 'Options' tab allows the user to modify the Y-axis scale(s) for any output parameter result.
This could be used, for example to make display scales consistent if one is visualizing the
effect of a Cut-off parameter on an Output for multiple zones. In the following screen capture
the 'Options' screen has been used to set the 'PHISoH Pay' to the same scales for 2 reservoir
zones and 'All zones':
Interpretation
Senergy
936
Save Results
The 'Save Results' button allows the user to save all the results of a particular sensitivity run to
an external 'Cut-off Sensitivity Results' (.cosr) file. Once such a file has been saved, it can be
reloaded into the standalone 'Cut-off Sensitivity Results' module without having to re-run the
sensitivity computation, which could be time-consuming, depending upon the number of wells /
zones to be visualized.
When run on a single well the 'Save Results' operation will save a results file into the active
wells sub-folder in the active IP database.
When run in multi-well mode the 'Save Results' operation will save the results file to the IP
project folder level.
937
Senergy
Print Options
Under the 'Print' button are options for saving the graphic display and for saving the digital data
associated with the graphic display. The digital data and Plot can be sent directly to a printer, to
external files (.txt for data, .emf file for plot) or into the WINDOWS Clipboard, from which they can
be pasted into other applications such as Excel or PowerPoint. in addition, the digital data can be
copied to the clipboard in a 'spreadsheet-friendly' format using the 'Data to Clipboard
(Spreadsheet)' option, which avoids unnecessary formatting of the data for use in the external
application.
Related Topics
Interpretation
Senergy
10.7
938
NMR Normalization
Schlumberger and Halliburton (post 2000) provide T2 and T1 distributions that span 4 log
decades, 0.3ms to 3000ms or 0.5ms to 5000ms. Baker Atlas and Halliburton (pre 2000) provide
T2 distributions that do not span complete decades and vary depending on the data gathered, e.
g. 4ms to 512ms, 0.5ms to 1024ms, 1ms to 4096ms.
The problem with asymmetric distributions is that they cannot be plotted properly on a log grid
and as a result they are usually plotted without any grid behind them. That means the user
cannot properly plot a cut-off or any other T2 value such as oil T2, max water T2, or peak value.
It also means that when the user uses the interactive plot in the NMR Module to pick a cut-off they
are not picking what they thought they were. It does calculate the correct results for whatever cutoff is in the parameter if the start and stop times are mapped correctly. But the cut-off does not
sit against the T2 distribution properly in the log plot as the log plot cannot plot incomplete
decades.
The T2 Normalization module re-samples the T2 array and produces a polynomial fit through the
array. This creates a smooth fitting curve through the array with many more points than the initial
array. The polynomial curve then has to be normalised with the porosity in order to not overcall
the porosity. The resulting T2 output array curve can then be correctly plotted and easily
compared to other T2 arrays.
Section 10.7 Interpretation : NMR Normalization
939
Senergy
Related Topics
NMR Normalization
T2 Distribution
T2 Advanced Setup
Normalized Output T2 Distribution
10.7.1 T2 Distribution
The 'Base T2 array distribution base curve name' must be entered for NMR porosities to be
calculated (not necessary if only Sw calculations are wanted). Array data in IP are either stored in
array curves or they consist of groups of curves with a common 'base name' with a numerical
extension attached to the 'base name'. The user either selects an array curve or selects any
curve in an array curve group, in which case the program will automatically select the other
curves. The 'Units' box tells the program whether the input T2 data porosities are in
measurements of '%' or 'dec'.
The 'Tool Type' drop-down allows the user to select from one of the pre-defined tools. By
changing the tool type the defaults for the setup are altered. All the defaults can be manually
changed by 'clicking' on the 'Advanced Setup' button and adjusting the settings. NOTE: the
defaults for the tools are found in the file NMR_Tools.csv in the IP program directory. These can
be added to or modified by the user.
The T2 distribution will be normally calibrated directly in porosity. However, it is found that for
some older tools some calibration factor is needed to convert the T2 array data to porosity. This
is best done by using the input T2 total porosity curve produced by the logging company to
calibrate the T2 array data. This curve is always provided along with the T2 array data and should
be loaded along with the T2 array data.
To calibrate the T2 array data 'check' the 'Calibrate T2 Porosity using input curve' box and
select the calibration curve name. The units of the input curve must also be selected. IP works
with porosities in decimals. However, the NMR porosities as produced by the logging companies
are often in percent.
Related Topics
NMR Normalization
T2 Distribution
T2 Advanced Setup
Interpretation
Senergy
940
10.7.2 T2 Advanced Setup

If the 'Advanced Setup' button is 'clicked' the following panel is displayed:
The 'Start sample number' and 'Stop sample number' allows the user to only use part of an
array. If these fields are left blank then all of the array will be used.
NOTE: the Schlumberger CMR plus tool can encode the T2 distribution in a 90 sample array.
Only the last 30 samples represent the T2 distribution data. For this tool the 'Start sample
number' should be set to 61 and the 'Stop sample number' to 90.
The 'Start T2 time' and 'Stop T2 time' must be entered. They are time values for the end points
of the T2 distribution. These can generally be found on the well site log header.
The 'T2 Start, Stop times are bin mid point times' check-box tells the program whether values
entered represent the left/right edge of the porosity T2 bins or whether they represent the middle
values of the first and last bin. In general for all Schlumberger tools this box should not be
'checked' but for Numar (Halliburton / Baker Atlas) tools the box should be 'checked'. The
difference in results will be small except for those tools that use a low number of bins.
The defaults for the Schlumberger CMR are 3 and 3000. For the CMR plus tool, which can
measure much faster decay times, the default values are 0.3 and 3000.
941
Senergy
Related Topics
NMR Normalization
T2 Distribution
T2 Advanced Setup
10.7.3 Normalized Output T2 Distribution

In this data set a Schlumberger CMR T2 array is converted from a 3 to 3000 ms T2 to a 0.3 to
3000 ms T2. The results of this can be seen below:
Related Topics
NMR Normalization
T2 Distribution
T2 Advanced Setup
Interpretation
Senergy
10.8
942
NMR Interpretation
The NMR Interpretation module allows the user to interpret the T2 array data produced from
NMR tools. The module allows the user to set a T1 or T2 cut-off for free fluid (FF) and also for
clay-bound fluid (BF). Permeability is calculated using the Timur / Coates permeability equations
and, if some external permeability data is available, the module will allow automatic calibration of
the equation coefficients.
With the optional input of a resistivity curve, water saturation can be calculated using the Dual
Water equation. The logic uses the NMR for total porosity and clay bound water and the NMR
Swi to limit the lower value of Sw.
Capillary pressure curves can be generated from the T1 or T2 array curves. These need to be
calibrated to an imported capillary pressure measurement made on the actual rock. The module
provides an interactive tool for doing this calibration. Crossplots of the generated capillary
pressure curves can be made. The curves can also be used to generate a Sw height curve from
the entered FWL, water and hydrocarbon densities.
To Display the NMR Interpretation Module:
From the Interpretation Menu, Select NMR Interpretation to display the NMR Interpretation Dialog.
The NMR Interpretation Dialog contains six Tabs, Input Curves, Output Curves: , Parameters,
Permeability , Pc Calibration, Pc Crossplot
Related Topics
Define Input Curves
Define NMR Interpretation Parameters
Define Permeability
Define PC Calibration
Define PC Crossplot
Display the QC Comparison Plot
Display the NMR Interactive Plot
NMR Equations and Methodology
10.8.1 Define Input Curves

Define T2 Distribution
The Base T2 array distribution base curve name must be entered for NMR porosities to be
Section 10.8 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation
943
Senergy
calculated (not necessary if only Sw calculations are wanted). Array data in IP are either stored in
array curves or they consist of groups of curves with a common base name with a numerical
extension attached to the base name. The user either selects an array curve or selects any
curve in an array curve group, in which case the program will automatically select the other
curves. The Units box tells the program whether the input T2 data porosities are in
measurements of % or dec.
T1 distribution data can be handled exactly the same as T2 distribution data although, of course,
different cutoffs will be required. Throughout this document T2 will be referred to but this should
be considered as interchangeable with T1.
The Tool Type drop-down allows the user to select from one of the pre-defined tools. By
changing the tool type the defaults for the setup are altered. All the defaults can be manually
changed by clicking on the Advanced Setup button and adjusting the settings. NOTE: the
defaults for the tools are found in the file NMR_Tools.csv in the IP program directory. These can
be added to or modified by the user.
The T2 distribution will be normally calibrated directly in porosity. However, it is found that for
some older tools some calibration factor is need to convert the T2 array data to porosity. This is
best done by using the input T2 total porosity curve produced by the logging company to calibrate
the T2 array data. This curve is always provided along with the T2 array data and should be
loaded along with the T2 array data.
To calibrate the T2 array data check the Calibrate T2 Porosity using input curve box and
select the calibration curve name. The units of the input curve must also be selected. IP works
with porosities in decimals. However, the NMR porosities as produced by the logging companies
are often in percent.
NMR Sw Calculations Input Curves

To make Sw calculations using the NMR the user must enter deep resistivity (Rt) and
temperature curves. The temperature curve is used for correcting Rw values to formation
conditions and also optionally calculating a bound water conductivity.
The PhiT and VCL curve are used only when the user does not want to use the NMR input for
clay bound water calculations (older tools didnt measure this). The user needs to set the CBF
Method parameter in the Sw logic/Limits sub-tab of the Parameters tab to use these inputs.
Interpretation
Senergy
944
Optional Input Curves

The Optional Input Curves are used partly for comparison purposes and partly to make
moveable oil displays with the NMR clay bound fluid being compared to the Bulk Volume
Water from normal log analysis (QC plot).
The TVDss input is used for calculating a capillary pressure at a height above FWL. This is used
for calculating the Sw height curve from the NMR Pc curves.
If the T2 curve is not available (for example, when preliminary wellsite logs are only available)
then it is still possible, given the NMR porosities, to use the module to calculate water
saturations. In this case the user must enter the NMR total porosity and NMR free fluid optional
curves to allow the module to run.
945
Senergy
Parameter Sets
The Parameter set name is used to set the default name for the output of the parameter listings.
The Load / Save Parameter Sets button allows the user to manage the NMR parameter Sets.
See Parameter Set Management for more information on how to do this.
Null all result curves before running calculations if checked will null all output curves from a
previous interpretation before starting the calculations on a new interpretation.
T2 Advanced Setup
If the Advanced Setup button is clicked the NMR Interpretation Dialog is expanded to display the
T2 Advanced Setup Panel.
Interpretation
Senergy
946
The Start sample number and Stop sample number allows the user to only use part of an
array. If these fields are left blank then all of the array will be used.
The Start T2 time and Stop T2 time must be entered. They are time values for the end points of
the T2 distribution. These can generally be found on the well site log header.
The T2 Start, Stop times are bin mid point times check-box tells the program whether values
entered represent the left/right edge of the porosity T2 bins or whether they represent the middle
values of the porosity T2 bins. In general for all Schlumberger tools this box should not be
checked but for Numar (Halliburton / Baker Atlas) tools the box should be checked. The
difference in results will be small except for those tools that use a low number of bins.
947
Senergy
The defaults for the Schlumberger CMR tool are 3 and 3000. For the CMR-200 and CMR plus
tools, which can measure much faster decay times, the default values are 0.3 and 3000.
Tool
Start T2
Stop T2
30
3 ms
3000 ms
CMR-200 1
30
0.3 ms
3000 ms
CMR+
30
0.3 ms
3000 ms
CMR
Start
Stop
Sample
Sample
NOTE: If the Schlumberger CMR plus tool has been logged in a Multi-Wait mode it also encodes
the T2 distribution in a 90 sample array T2_DIST_MW curve. Only the last 30 samples
represent the T2 distribution data. For this input array the Start sample number should be
set to 61 and the Stop sample number set to 90.
For the new Schlumberger MR Scanner the following table provides information on how to set
up IP depending on the mode logged.
Mode
SP - T1
Start
Stop
Start T2
Stop T2
Sample
Sample
64
1 ms
9000 ms
64
1 ms
3000 ms
64
10
500,000
64
1 ms
9000 ms
64
1 ms
3000 ms
64
10
500,000
30
0.5 ms
3000 ms
30
0.5 ms
3000 ms
30
0.5 ms
3000 ms
30
0.5 ms
3000 ms
data
SP - T2
data
SP - DC
data
T1 - T1
data
T1 - T2
data
T1 - DC
data
RP - T2
data
HR - T2
data
BMR T2 data
BF - T2
data
Interpretation
Senergy
948
Where
SP mode is Saturation Profiling mode using shells 1+4 or 1+4+8
T1 mode is T1 Profiling mode using shells 1+4 or 1+4+8
RP is T2 Radial Profiling mode using shells 1+4 or 1+4+8
HR is High Resolution mode using shells LHR+3 or UHR+3
BMR is Basic MR Processing mode using shells 1+4
BF is Bound Fluid mode using shell 3 only
Data directly from field MAXIS software cannot be displayed directly in Geoframe or IP. Data from
the field must be processed through the Geoframe MRX Preprocessor module in order to split
out the different shell information for processing.
To display a distribution in IP, add the distribution to a Log Plot as a Waveform. Choose Define
next to Waveform in Log Plot format window. For T2 distribution in SP mode the following
Waveform settings are recommended:
The data format of Numar (Halliburton / Baker Atlas) MRIL NMR tools depends on the tool
version, the vendor and the vintage of software used for processing; but the T2 bin times will
always be mid-point bin times. For all Baker Atlas MRIL data and Numar (Halliburton) MRIL
data prior to 2003 the output is typically an 8 to 12 bin T2 distribution, with T2 bin times as
powers of 2, although some data sets were processed with more bins.
The number of bins and the T2 times depends mostly on whether the tool logged effective or total
porosity. Typically, 8 and 9 bin data will be effective porosity and go from 4 ms to 512 ms or 1024
949
Senergy
ms. While 12 or 13 bin data will be total porosity and go from 0.5 ms to 1024 ms or 2048 ms.
Tool
Start
Stop
Start T2
Stop T2
Sample
Sample
MRIL-B
4 ms
512 ms
MRIL-C
4 ms
1024 ms
MRIL-
12
0.5 ms
1024 ms
12
0.5 ms
1024 ms
13
0.5 ms
2048 ms
Ctp
MRILPrime
MRILPrime
Numar/Halliburton typically only provide discrete bin data which can be used as provided, whilst
Baker Atlas often provide cumulative bin data which may need to be manipulated in order to
provide discrete bins prior to use.
Numar/Halliburton also typically provide a 200 element array curve for plotting purposes,
TASPEC, which can also be used as an input. The start and stop times will, for this vector, be
the same as used for the regular discrete bins.
Array data provided by Baker Atlas frequently contain extra zero value samples at the beginning
and end of the array, purely for plotting aesthetics. Care must be taken to make sure the correct
T2 start and stop times are selected depending on whether these extra bins are included in the
processing or not. For example, 8 bin data from 4 ms to 512 ms may be provided in a 10 bin
array from 2 ms to 1024 ms.
The data format of Halliburton/Sperry Sun MRIL-Prime (post 2003) and MRI-LWD tools will
typically be a 54 bin array curve, T2DIST or T1DIST, although 200 element arrays were also
provided for plotting, TASPEC curve. The 54 bins were based on multiples of the powers of 2
starting at 0.5 ms, and although they are usually presented to 5000 ms the last bin is actually at
4870.99 ms. The 200 bins were from 0.3 ms to 3000 ms in order to be comparable with previous
generation logs. Again, the T2 bin times will always be mid-point bin times.
Tool
MRIL-
Start
Stop
Sample
Sample
54
Start T2
Stop T2
0.5 ms
4870.99
Prime
MRIL-
ms
1
200
0.3 ms
3000 ms
Prime
Interpretation
Senergy
950
Baker Atlas MREX T2 data is typically provided in a 26 bin array curve, TPOR. Again with the
first and last bins set to zero for plotting aesthetics. The 24 T2 times solved for in the inversion
are multiples of the powers of 2 starting at 0.3535 and ending at 1024, as given in the bin centre
times array curve, BCNTR. NOTE: the T2 bin times are mid-point bin times. With the extra
zeros the 26 bins go from 0.25 ms to 1448.15 ms.
Tool
MREX
Start
Stop
Start
Sample
Sample
T2
26
0.25 ms
Stop T2
1448.15
ms
Related Topics
Define Input Curves
Define Permeability
Define PC Crossplot
10.8.2 Define Output Curves

The Clay Bound Fluid Cutoff box should be checked if the NMR measures clay fluid (newer
tools). When checked the T2 clay bound cutoff is used to calculate effective and total porosity.
When not checked the NMR PhiT and Phie are the same.
If the Remove Clay Bound fluid from Coates Permeability calculation box is checked then
the option is available to remove the clay-bound fluid from the Timur / Coates permeability
equation (effective porosity rather than total porosity is used).
To output the porosity bin curves check the Make Porosity Bin Curves box. The user needs
to select the number of bins to output and enter the bin start and stop times in the table. The
value output in the bin curve will be the NMR porosity between the two T2 entered times. It is
possible to have bins that overlap. However, when all the bins are summed, the results will no
longer be the NMR porosity.
951
Senergy
To output PC curves from the T2 distribution check the Make Pc Curves from T2 box. Set the
output pressure units required.
The following are the output curves created by this module. If an output curve is not wanted then
uncheck the box next to its name.
NMR effective porosity (nmrPhie): Porosity calculated from the T2 spectrum above the
clay bound cutoff. If no clay bound cutoff this equals the NMR total porosity.
NMR total porosity (nmrPhiT): Porosity calculated from T2 spectrum with no cutoffs.
NMR Total bound fluid (nmrBFT): The total bound fluid, both clay and capillary bound.
This will be the same as nmrBFTc or NMRTt depending on the method selected
Interpretation
Senergy
952
NMR clay bound water (nmrCBW): The porosity calculated below the T2 clay bound
cutoff.
NMR capillary bound fluid (nmrBFE): The total bound fluid minus the clay bound fluid.
NMR free fluid (nmrFF): The porosity calculated above the T2 bound water cutoff. For the
tapered method this is nmrPhiT minus nmrBFT.
NMR Swe irreducible (nmrSwiE): Effective irreducible water saturation. nmrBFE /
nmrPhie.
NMR SwT irreducible (nmrSwiT): Total irreducible water saturation. nmrBFT / nmrPhiT.
NMR Sw bound (nmrSwb): Bound water saturation. nmrCBM / nmrPhiT.
NMR permeability (nmrPerm): Permeability calculated from Timur/ Coates equation.
Bound Fluid total cutoff (nmrBFTc): Total bound fluid calculated using the cutoff method.
The calculated porosity below the T2 bound water cutoff.
Bound Fluid eff. cutoff (nmrBFEc): Effective bound fluid calculated using the cutoff
method. The calculated porosity below the T2 bound water cutoff and above the clay bound
cutoff.
Bound Fluid total Tapered (nmrBFTt): Total bound fluid calculated using the tapered
method.
Bound Fluid eff. Tapered (nmrBFEt): Effective bound fluid calculated using the tapered
method.
NMR SwT (nmrSwT): Total water saturation, calculated from the input Rt curve and the
Dual Water equation. Limited between 1.0 and 0.0.
NMR SwT unlimited (nmrSwtU): Total water saturation unlimited, calculated from the
input Rt curve and the Dual Water equation. Values can be greater than 1.0.
NMR SwE (nmrSw): Effective water saturation, calculated from SwT and nmrSwb. Limited
between 1.0 and 0.0.
NMR SwE unlimited (nmrSwU): Effective water saturation unlimited, calculated from Sw
and nmrSwb. Can be greater than 1.0.
Final effective porosity (Phie_f): Effective porosity used for calculating Sw. This will be
the same as the nmrPhie except if the parameter Phi Method is changed from NMR. In
this case the porosity will be the entered porosity parameter / curve Phi In.
Final total porosity (Phie_f): Total porosity used for calculating Sw. This will be the same
as the nmrPhie except if the parameter Phi Method is changed from NMR. In this case
the porosity will be the entered porosity parameter / curve Phi In.
953
Senergy
Final clay bound water (Phie_f): Clay bound water used for calculating Swb used in the
Sw calculations. This will be the same as the nmrCBW curve except if the parameter CBF
Method is changed from NMR. In this case the CBW will either be calculated from the
entered input PhiT curve (CBW = PhiT nmrPhie) or Vcl curve (CBW = Vcl x PhiT Clay).
NMR BVW (nmeBVW_f): Bound water volume (Phie_f x nmwSw).
NMR BVWT (nmeBVWT_f): Total Bound water volume (PhiT_f x nmwSwT).
NMR Rw apparent (nmrRwapp): Apparent water resistivity. Calculated from Rt and Phie_f
.
NMR z wet (nmrZwet): Water saturation equation z parameter assuming rock is 100%
wet.
NMR z Swi (nmrZwet): Water saturation equation z parameter assuming rock is at
irreducible saturation (at nmrSwirT).
NMR z (nmrZ): Calculated z parameter from Z Slope and Z offset parameters or if the
m n Method parameter is set Parameter then from the m and n parameters.
T2 free cutoff (T2cutoff): T2 bound water cutoff output.
T2 bound cutoff (CBFT2cut): T2 clay bound water cutoff output.
Sw Logic flag (nmrLogic): Dual water Sw equation logic flag.
NMR Pc pressure (nmrPc): Pc pressure curve calculated from the T2 input curve (array
curve, same number of elements as the T2 input curve).
NMR Pc Sw (nmrPcSw): Pc Sw curve calculated from T2 input curve (array curve).
NMR Sw Height (nmrSw_Ht): Sw calculated from the T2 PC curves using the FWL,
Water density and Hydrocarbon density parameters.
NMR phi Bin Curves (nmrBin*): Output porosity bin curves. Up to 7 different porosity bins
can be output.
Related Topics
Define Input Curves
Define Permeability
Define PC Crossplot
Interpretation
Senergy
954

10.8.3 Define NMR Interpretation Parameters

There are 7 sub-tabs within the NMR Interpretation Parameters tab; Zone Depths, T2 Cutoffs,
Permeability, Sw Parameters, Sw Fluids, Sw logic / Limits and Pc Curves.
Zone Depths: The Zone Depths Tab defines the Interpretation Zone Parameters; Zone
Name, Zone Top, Zone Bottom, Zone Colour and Lock Zone.
T2 Cutoffs: The T2 Cutoffs Tab defines the following parameters for each zone; Free Fluid
Cut, Cly B Fluid Cut, BF Method, T2 cutoff, Tapered, Maximum, Tapered Constants
, Tapered m factor and Tapered b factor.
Permeability: The parameters in this section are used with the Timur / Coates permeability
equation.
Sw Parameters / Sw Fluids : The parameters in this section and Sw Fluids section are used
to calculate Sw from the Dual Water equations below. Two basic forms of the equation are
used, one where the Archie parameters m and n are defined; the other where m and n
are converted to the Z function parameter, which is defined by the equation below.
Sw logic / Limits: The Sw logic / Limits Tab defines Parameters used in both the Dual Water
and the Permeability Equations.
Pc Curves: These parameters are used when the Make Pc Curves from T2 option is
checked on the Output Curves tab.
Related Topics
Define Input Curves
955
Senergy
Define Permeability
Define PC Crossplot
10.8.3.1 Define Zone Depths
The Zone Depths Tab defines the Interpretation Zone Parameters; Zone Name, Zone Top,
Zone Bottom, Zone Colour and Lock Zone.
Zone Name : The zone name is an optional parameter and is used by the user to identify a
zone by giving it a name. Zone names can be displayed in the log plot. See Zone plotting.
Zone Top : The top depth of the zone.
Zone Bottom : The bottom depth of the zone.
Zone Color : This is the user editable Zone colour associated with the interpretation zone.
Interpretation
Senergy
956
Lock Zone : If this is checked then the zone becomes grayed out in all tabs and the
parameters cannot be altered within that zone, including interactively.
Related Topics
NMR Interpretation
Zone Depths
T2 Cutoffs
Permeability
Sw Parameters
Sw Fluids
Sw logic / Limits
Pc Curves.
10.8.3.2 Define T2 Cutoffs
The T2 Cutoffs Tab defines the following parameters for each zone; Free Fluid Cut, Cly B Fluid
Cut, BF Method, T2 cutoff, Tapered, Maximum, Tapered Constants, Tapered m factor
and Tapered b factor.
Free Fluid Cut : Free fluid cutoff value. This is displayed as an interactive line on the plot.
A curve can be entered for a variable T2 cutoff.
Cly B Fluid Cut : Clay bound fluid cutoff. Only used if the option on the Output Curves
tab Clay Bound Fluid Cutoff is checked. This is displayed as an interactive line on the plot.
A curve can be entered for a variable cutoff.
BF Method : The method for calculating the final Bound fluid porosities.
T2 cutoff will calculate the BF using a straight cutoff set in above parameters.
Tapered will use a weighted cutoff where each T2 bin will have a different cutoff.
957
Senergy
Maximum option will take the maximum value calculated by the two other methods.
Tapered Constants : Options are Sand, Carbonate and User. By changing this
parameter the Tapered m factor and Tapered b factor parameters are changed.
The User option will allow the user to set their own factors.
Tapered m factor : This is the m factor is the weighting factor equation used to
determine the bound fluid in each T2 bin.
Wi = 1.0 / (m.T2 + b)
Tapered b factor : This is the b factor is the weighting factor equation used to
determine the bound fluid in each T2 bin.
Related Topics
NMR Interpretation
Zone Depths
T2 Cutoffs
Permeability
Sw Parameters
Sw Fluids
Sw logic / Limits
Pc Curves.
10.8.3.3 Define Permeability Parameters
The Permeabilty tab defines the following parameters for each zone; Perm Const, Perm FF/BF
Exp and Perm Phi Exp. The parameters in this section are used with the Timur / Coates
permeability equation, described below. An external source of permeability data must be available
to do this.
Interpretation
Senergy
958
Perm Const : The a constant.

Perm FF/BF Exp : The b exponent.
Perm Phi Exp : The c exponent.
Timur / Coates permeability equation

K
FF
BF
Phi c
Related Topics
NMR Interpretation
Zone Depths
T2 Cutoffs
Permeability
Sw Parameters
Sw Fluids
Sw logic / Limits
Pc Curves.
10.8.3.4 Define Sw Parameters
The parameters in the Sw Parameters Tab and the Sw Fluids section are used to calculate Sw
from the Dual Water equations described below.
a factor : Archies a factor.

m exponent : Archies Cementation m exponent.
n exponent : Archies Saturation n exponent.
959
Senergy
m n Method : Select Parameter to use the entered m and n parameters. Select Z

Function to use Z method of calculating the equations.
Z wet : Z wet value used in the Z equation.
Z irreducible : Z irreducible value used in the Z equation.
Dual Water Equations

Two basic forms of the equation are used, one where the Archie parameters m and n are
defined; the other where m and n are converted to the Z function parameter, which is defined by
the equation below.
Ct
PhiT SwT
Cw
a
Swb
SwT
Ccw
Swb
SwT
Ccw
Swb
SwT
Where
Z offset
Z Slope SwT
or
Ct
PhiT m SwT n
Cw
a
Swb
SwT
Related Topics
NMR Interpretation
Zone Depths
T2 Cutoffs
Permeability
Sw Parameters
Sw Fluids
Sw logic / Limits
Pc Curves.
10.8.3.5 Define Sw Fluids
The parameters in the Sw Fluids Tab and the Sw Parameters Tab are used to calculate Sw from
the Dual Water equations below.
Interpretation
Senergy
960
Rw : Formation water resistivity in ohmm.

Rw Temp : Formation water resistivity temperature. Units of the value are set at the
base of the tab. If left blank, then the Rw value entered will be assumed to be at formation
temperature. If not blank then the Rw will be converted to formation temperature using this
value and the entered temperature curve.
Rwb Method : if set to Parameter then Rwb will be calculated from the entered Rwb and
Rwb Temp parameter. If set to Function then Rwb will be calculated from the Coates
Dual water Ccw function
Ccw
1
Rwb
0.000126
T 16.7
T 504.4
Where
T is in degF
Rwb : Bound water resistivity in ohmm.
Rwb Temp : Bound water resistivity temperature. Units of the value are set at the base of
the tab. If left blank, then the Rwb value entered will be assumed to be at formation
temperature. If not blank then the Rwb will be converted to formation temperature using this
value and the entered temperature curve.
Dual Water Equations

Two basic forms of the equation are used, one where the Archie parameters m and n are
defined; the other where m and n are converted to the Z function parameter, which is defined by
the equation below.
961
Ct
PhiT SwT
Cw
a
Swb
SwT
Ccw
Swb
SwT
Ccw
Senergy
Swb
SwT
Where
Z offset
Z Slope SwT
or
Ct
PhiT m SwT n
Cw
a
Swb
SwT
Related Topics
NMR Interpretation
Zone Depths
T2 Cutoffs
Permeability
Sw Parameters
Sw Fluids
Sw logic / Limits
Pc Curves.
10.8.3.6 Define Sw Logic/Limits
The Sw logic / Limits Tab defines Parameters used in both the Dual Water and the Permeability
Equations.
Phi Method : This selects the source for the porosity used in the Dual Water and
permeability equations. Select NMR to use the NMR PhiT value. If analyzing a zone where
the NMR porosity is not correct (i.e. gas affected) then select Phie Para or PhiT Para and
Interpretation
Senergy
962
enter a porosity curve under the Phi In parameter. The selection of Phie Para or PhiT
Para will depend on whether the entered porosity curve is a total or effective porosity. The
program will convert an effective porosity to a total porosity using the NMR clay bound
porosity.
Phi In : This is the input curve used for porosity when the Phi Method is set to Phie Para
or PhiT Para.
CBF Method : This selects the source for the clay bound fluid used in the Dual Water
equation to calculate Swb. Normally this would be NMR but for older tools which did not
measure CBF an alternative method can be selected.
Select PhiT in Crv to use the PhiT input curve setup on the Input Curves tab. In this
case CBF will be the difference between the NMR porosity (assumes effective) and the PhiT
curve.
Select VCL in Crv to use the Vcl input curve setup on the Input Curves tab. In this case
CBF will be Vcl multiplied by the PhiT Clay parameter. PhiT will be the NMR effective
porosity plus the CBF.
PhiT Clay : Total porosity of 100% clay. Used for calculating CBF porosity when the CBF
Method is set to VCL in Crv.
Swi Limit : This is the minimum value of SwT that can be output. When the calculated SwT
is less than the limit, SwT is set to the limit and the logic flag is set to 2. Defaults to 0.0.
FF Sw Limit : When the NMR Free fluid is below this limit then it is assumed that there are
no movable fluids and therefore any water saturation calculations are meaningless. When
the FF is less than this limit, SwT is set to 1.0 and the logic flag is set to 3. Defaults to
0.005.
Phi Sw Limit : When the NMR effective porosity is below this limit it is assumed water
saturation calculations are meaningless. When the nmrPhie is less than this limit, SwT is
set to 1.0 and the logic flag is set to 4. Defaults to 0.0.
CBW Sw Limit : When the NMR clay bound fluid is above this limit it is assumed the rock is
too shaly for meaningful water saturation calculations. When the nmrCBF is above this limit
SwT is set to 1.0 and the logic flag is set to 5. Defaults to 1.0.
Related Topics
NMR Interpretation
Zone Depths
963
Senergy
T2 Cutoffs
Permeability
Sw Parameters
Sw Fluids
Sw logic / Limits
Pc Curves.
10.8.3.7 Define Pc Curves
These parameters are used when the Make Pc Curves from T2 option is checked on the
Output Curves tab.
The T2 distribution is converted to PC pressures using the calibration parameters.
Pc i
A log Pc gain Log
1
T2i
Pc offset
Where
Pci and T2i is the Pc and T2 value at the ith value in the T2 array.
The results are in psi units. If the output units for the Pc curve is not psi then the results are
converted to the selected output units
The calculation of the Sw height curve is done by first calculating the capillary pressure at a
depth and then using this to look up the saturation in the Pc curve which have been created from
the T2 distribution.
Pc
FWL TVDss
Density
Water
Density
Hydrocarbon
Nmr to PC Offset : This is the Pc offset calibration parameter in the above equation.
Nmr to PC Gain : This is the Pc gain calibration parameter in the above equation.
Interpretation
Senergy
964
FWL TVDss : Free water level used to calculate the height above contact used in the Sw
height Pc calculation.
Water Density : Density of the water used in the Pc height calculations. The units for this
are set at the base of the input tab.
Hyd Density : Density of the hydrocarbon used in the Pc height calculations. The units for
this are set at the base of the input tab. If a curve is entered here to try and account for a
variable hydrocarbon density its values at a depth must be the average hydrocarbon density
of the hydrocarbons below this depth (i.e. the program does not integrate the hydrocarbon
curve).
Related Topics
NMR Interpretation
Zone Depths
T2 Cutoffs
Permeability
Sw Parameters
Sw Fluids
Sw logic / Limits
Pc Curves.
10.8.3.8 Print the NMR Interpretation Parameters
The Print button in the NMR Interpretation Dialog will allow the parameters used in the
interpretation to be output to a printer or a disk file. An example printout is displayed below.
NMR PARAMETERS
NMR PARAMETERS
Well :
Date :
Test CMR 3.5

09/22/2008 17:57:16
Input
T2 array
: T2_norm
(3
NMR Phi Cal. Curve : CMRP
Tool Type
: Schlumberger CMR-Plus
T2 Start time
: 0.3
T2 Stop time
: 3000.
Times are mid pnts : No
Rt
: ILD
Temperature
: Temp
Total Porosity
: Fnl:PHIT
Clay Volume
: Fnl:VWCL
Output Curves
NMR effective porosity
: nmrPhie
NMR total porosity
: nmrPhiT
965
Senergy
NMR capillary bound fluid
: nmrBFE
NMR Total bound fluid
: nmrBFT
NMR free fluid
: nmrFF
NMR clay bound water
: nmrCBW
NMR Swe irreducible
: nmrSwiE
NMR SwT irreducible
: nmrSwiT
NMR Sw bound
: nmrSwb
NMR permeability
: nmrPerm
Bound Fluid total cutoff
: nmrBFTc
Bound Fluid eff. cutoff
: nmrBFEc
Bound Fluid total Tapered
: nmrBFTt
Bound Fluid eff. Tapered
: nmrBFEt
NMR SwT
: nmrSwT
NMR SwT unlimited
: nmrSwtU
NMR SwE
: nmrSw
NMR SwE unlimited
: nmrSwU
Final effective porosity
: Phie_f
Final total porosity
: PhiT_f
Final clay bound water
: CBW_f
NMR BVW
: BVW_f
NMR BVWT
: BVWT_f
NMR Rw apparent
: nmrRwapp
NMR z wet
: nmrZwet
NMR z Swi
: nmrZswi
NMR z
: nmrZ
Sw Logic flag
: nmrLogic
T2 free cutoff
: T2cutoff
T2 bound cutoff
: CBFT2cut
NMR Pc pressure
: nmrPc
NMR Pc Sw
: nmrPcSw
NMR Sw Height
: nmrSw_Ht
NMR phi Bin 1
: nmrPhiB1
NMR phi Bin 2
: nmrPhiB2
NMR phi Bin 3
: nmrPhiB3
NMR phi Bin 4
: nmrPhiB4
NMR phi Bin 5
: nmrPhiB5
NMR phi Bin 6
: nmrPhiB6
NMR phi Bin 7
: nmrPhiB7
Zone number 1
Free Fluid Cut : 25.
13081.98047
Perm FF/BF Exp : 2.3012
Top : 4735.50
Cly B Fluid Cut : 2.
Perm Phi Exp
: 4.
BF Method
: T2 cutoff
Tapered Constan : Sand
"a" factor
: 1.
"m" "n" Method
: Z Function
Z Slope
: 0.87746
Z offset
: 1.30172
Rw
: 0.256
Rw Temp
: 60.
Rwb Method
: Function
Phi Method
: NMR
Swi Limit
: 0.
FF Sw Limit
: 0.005
Phi Sw Limit
: 0.
CBW Sw Limit
: 1.
CBF Method
: NMR
nmr to PC Offse : 3.
nmr to PC Gain
: 1.
FWL TVDss
: 4850.
Water Density
Hyd Density
: 0.7
Zone number 2
Free Fluid Cut : 25.
13081.98047
Top : 4914.50
Cly B Fluid Cut : 2.
Bottom : 4914.50
Perm Const
Bottom : 5124.50
Perm Const
: 1.
Interpretation
Senergy
Perm FF/BF Exp
: 2.3012
966
Perm Phi Exp
: 4.
BF Method
: T2 cutoff
Tapered Constan : Sand
"a" factor
: 1.
"m" "n" Method
: Z Function
Z Slope
: 0.877
Z offset
: 1.3
Rw
: 0.2
Rw Temp
: 60.
Rwb Method
: Function
Phi Method
: NMR
Swi Limit
: 0.
FF Sw Limit
: 0.005
Phi Sw Limit
: 0.
CBW Sw Limit
: 1.
CBF Method
: NMR
nmr to PC Offse : 3.
nmr to PC Gain
: 1.
FWL TVDss
: 4850.
Water Density
Related Topics
Define Input Curves
Define Permeability
Plot the NMR Parameters
Print the NMR Interpretation Parameters
: 1.
967
Senergy
10.8.4 Define Permeability

The Permeability tab allows the calibration of the Timur / Coates equation constants. Some
external source of permeability data must be available to do this.
The user must enter the input curves for Porosity, Bound fluid, Free fluid and Permeability.
The first three of these input curves would normally be the output from the NMR porosity
calculations.
The zone to work on is selected from the Zone to use drop-down box. When a zone is chosen,
the current values for the a, b and c coefficient constants for that zone will be displayed in the a,
b and c coefficient boxes.
The user can calibrate the equation to the input permeability data by clicking the Calculate
Coefficients button. The a, b and c coefficients will be computed and displayed. The Fix check
Interpretation
Senergy
968
boxes allow the user to fix a coefficient to a value and then calculate the other coefficients. It is
possible to fix two coefficients and calculate the third. The Defaults button will return all
coefficients to the default values.
The Update Parameters button will copy the current parameters to the currently-selected zone
and then re-run the NMR permeability. If, the Zone to use is changed to All before the Update
Parameters button is clicked then, when the Update Parameters button is clicked, the
constants will be copied to all zones.
The Make Crossplot button will create a crossplot of the NMR permeability versus the input
permeability. This will allow the user to see how well the calibrated permeability fits the known
input permeability. An example of the crossplot follows.
Related Topics
Define Input Curves
Define Permeability
969
Senergy
Define PC Crossplot
10.8.5 Define PC Calibration

The Pc Calibration tab allows the calibration of the T2 Pc equation. T2 is converted into Pc
using the following equation :
Pc i
A log Pc gain Log
1
T2i
Pc offset
Where
Pci and T2i is the Pc and T2 value at the ith value in the T2 array. The Pcgain and
Pcoffset parameters are the calibration parameters.
Interpretation
Senergy
970
The calibration is done by matching a T2 distribution to a real Pc curve that has been loaded into
IP. The Pc curve is converted to a pore radius distribution and overlaid with the raw T2 curve and
the calibrated T2 curve.
The conversion of the Pc curve to a pore radius distribution makes assumptions about the
contact angle and interfacial tension and is only approximate but is adequate for the calibration
since its absolute value is not necessary, as long as we know how to go back and forward from
capillary pressure to Pore radius. The equation used is :
PoreRadius
100
Pc
Where
Pc pressure is in units of Psi.
971
Senergy
The Pc curve Sets are selected in the top panel. The Pc Use Curve, which is optional, is the
same flag curve used in the Capillary pressure module to flag bad points inside a Pc curve. Once
the Pc curve Set is selected the depths of the individual curves found will be shown in the Pc
Curve Depth box. The user selects the depth of the curve wanted. The curve will be displayed in
the calibration graph. The T2 distribution, also displayed in the calibration graph, can be selected
by changing the depth value in the T2 Depth box. It is possible to use a different depth for the T2
distribution and the Pc curve.
The graphic Y axis will by default be a normalized pore volume. The T2 and Pc curves being
normalized separately. The normalization adjusts the Y axis values so that when all are summed
they add up to 1.0. If the Y axis Sw values box is ticked the Y axis is converted to water
saturation. The X axis stays the same.
Interpretation
Senergy
972
The calibration can be done either as a one point shift where the Offset parameter is changed
and the gain is fixed at 1.0 or a two point calibration where the gain and offset are adjusted.
For the calibration to be meaningful the T2 distribution should be from a water zone. Oil
or gas zones will affect the T2 signal in the long wait times making their values meaningless as
far as a comparison to a Pc curve. If calibrating in an oil or gas zone the late part of the T2
distribution should be ignored and the calibration done only near the irreducible water part of the
Pc and T2 curves.
The calibration is performed by clicking on the Calibrate button. This will display on the graph
two or four vertical lines. Two lines for the one point and four for the two point calibration. The
lines are labeled and mark the start and end point of the shift required for the calibration. The
973
Senergy
user can interactively adjust the point positions by placing the cursor on a line and dragging the
line to a new position.
One Point Calibration

The one point calibration can either calibrate the pore entry pressure point, i.e. the late T2 times
corresponding to the largest pores (this will only be valid in a 100% wet T2 distribution). Or
calibrate in the irreducible water saturation point, i.e. the early T2 times corresponding to the
bound water.
The following example is calibrated in the late T2 times to match the Pc pore entry pressure.
To calibrate at the irreducible end, the Y axis as Sw display may be more useful. Here we are
trying to match the plateau seen in T2 distribution to the irreducible Sw seen in the Pc curve.
Interpretation
Senergy
974
Two Point Calibration

The two point calibration allows both end points to be calibrated at the same time. Remember
the T2 distribution is only valid in a water zone for the large pores.
975
Senergy
Using the calibrations

To use the calibration to make the Pc curve from the T2 distribution the calibration parameters
need to be copied into the NMR zonal parameter table. This is done by clicking the Update
Parameters button. The parameters will be copied into the zone displayed in the Zone box. If
All is chosen then the same calibration parameters will be copied into all zones.
It will probably be necessary to have different sets of calibration parameters for different rock
types. This can either be done by zoning the well into different intervals or using trend curves as
the calibration parameters. The trend curves values could be created in a user formula using a
log facies curve to select the calibration parameters, which could be created in this module from
different Pc curves selected by facies.
Related Topics
Define Input Curves
Define Permeability
Define PC Crossplot
Interpretation
Senergy
976
10.8.6 Define the PC Crossplot

The Pc Crossplot tab allows the viewing of the T2 Pc curves inside the crossplot module. Since
a Pc curve will be created at each depth step the options allow for a subset of the available
curves to be displayed.
By default the NMR Pc curves are selected for display but the module could be used to display
any PC curves.
977
Senergy
Related Topics
Define Input Curves
Define Permeability
Define PC Crossplot
10.8.7 Display the QC Comparison Plot

By clicking the Make Plot button in the NMR Interpretation Dialog the user can select two
interactive log plots. A QC comparison Plot for viewing the NMR data or an Interpretation Plot
for displaying calculated results for permeability and water saturations.
Interpretation
Senergy
978
QC comparison Plot
An example NMR QC comparison plot is shown below:
On the above plot, Track 2 contains the zoning scheme for the cut-off and permeability
parameters. By right mouse clicking in the track, new zones can be created. This
functionality is identical to the interactive zone functionality seen in other interpretation
modules.
Track Swi contains an overlay plot of Sw from the petrophysical analysis and SwiT
(irreducible) calculated from the NMR (see NMR equations).
Track Phi Bins contains the porosity bin results (if set up).
Track Comparison is a quality control track which compares the input logging companys
NMR porosities against the IP-calculated porosities. This can be used to check that the
979
Senergy
correct start and stop T2 time have been set and that the results generated for free fluid
match the logging companys free fluid with the same T2 cut-off.
Track NMR Phi gives the breakdown of the clay-bound (if used), capillary-bound and free
fluid volumes as seen by the NMR.
Track Movable Fluids will give a display of the volumes of bound water, movable water and
hydrocarbon seen in the rock, if a BVW (bulk volume water) input curve is entered.
Track T2 displays the NMR T2 waveform with the interactive T2 cut-offs for free fluid and
clay bound fluid (if set up). To change a cut-off value click on the cut-off line and drag it to a
new value. While dragging, the value will be displayed in the bottom left corner of the log plot.
Once the mouse button is released the porosities and permeabilities will be instantly
recalculated and the plot re-displayed.
Related Topics
Define Input Curves
Define Permeability
Define PC Crossplot
10.8.8 Display the NMR Interactive Plot

By clicking the Make Plot button in the NMR Interpretation Dialog the user can select two
interactive log plots. A QC comparison Plot for viewing the NMR data or an Interpretation Plot
for displaying calculated results for permeability and water saturations.
Interpretation
Senergy
980
Interpretation Plot
An example NMR Interpretation plot is displayed below.
Track Swi contains the nmrSwiT (irreducible) calculated from the NMR; the water
saturation calculated from NMR porosities and input resistivities nmrSwT; the saturation
height curve calculated from T2 Pc curves using the entered FWL.
Track Phi Bins contains the porosity bin results (if set up).
Track NMR Phi gives the breakdown of the clay-bound (if used), capillary-bound and free
fluid volumes as seen by the NMR.
Track Resistivity contains the input resistivity Rt curve.
From the NMR Interactive Plot, Right Click the the track an interactive Pickett plot can be
displayed either Rt / Phie or Rt / PhiT. See the PhiSw module for more information on the
working of these Pickett plots.
981
Senergy
Track Salinity displays the Rw apparent curve nmrRwapp which is calculated from PhiT
and Rt assuming the interval is wet. The track contains a Rw and Rwb interactive line.
These can be moved by clicking and dragging to a new value.
Track Z param displays the Dual Water Z parameters. nmrZswi is the Z factor assuming
the zone is at irreducible water saturation. nmrZwet is the Z factor assuming the zone is
100% wet. The nmrZ curve is the calculated Z parameter. The nmrZ curve will normally fall
between the two other curves except when the interval calculates over 100% Sw in this
case the curve will be greater than the nmrZwet curve.
The track contains Z wet and Z irreducible interactive lines. These can be moved by
clicking and dragging to new values. Z wet should be adjust to overlay nmrZswi in a clean
wet zone and Z irreducible should be adjusted to indicate minimal free water in a zone
assumed to be at irreducible conditions. For further details on the Z function please refer to
the NMR Equations.
Track Logic the nmrLogic curve displays the special logic results from the Sw calculations.
A value of 0.0 means the calculations were made with no limit logic being applied. See NMR
Equations for the values.
Track Sw. The track displays the nmrSwtU curve which is the SwT unlimited (not clipped
between 0.0 and 1.0) from the Dual Water saturation equation. The nmrSwU curve is the
Interpretation
Senergy
982
equivalent Sw effective curve calculated from the SwT and Swb results, again unclipped.
The nmrSwb curve is calculated from the NMR clay bound water. The unclipped Sw curves
are displayed rather than the nmrSwT and nmrSw curves so that the user can see any
overshoots from 100% values.
Track Porosity will give a display of the volumes of bound water, movable water and
hydrocarbon seen in the rock.
Track Perm shows the NMR permeability and Core Permeability (if setup).
Track T2 displays the NMR T2 waveform with the interactive T2 cut-offs for free fluid and
clay bound fluid (if set up). To change a cut-off value click on the cut-off line and drag it to a
new value. While dragging, the value will be displayed in the bottom left-hand corner of the
log plot. Once the mouse button is released the porosities and permeabilities and saturation
will be instantly recalculated and the plot re-displayed.
Related Topics
Define Input Curves
Define Permeability
Define PC Crossplot
10.8.9 NMR Equations and Methodology

There are seven sections within this chapter on NMR Equations and Methodology.
Basic NMR Equations
NMR Tapered Cutoff
Dual Water Saturation Calculations
Limits
SwLogic Flag
Other Calculations
NMR T2 to Pc curve
983
Senergy
Related Topics
Define Input Curves
Define Permeability
Define PC Crossplot
10.8.9.1 Basic NMR Equations
NMR total porosity (nmrPHIT)

PhiT = Sum of the porosity in all the T2 bins.
NMR effective porosity (nmrPHIE)

Phie = Sum of all the bins above the T2 clay bound cut-off. If no clay bound cut-off is set then
this will be the sum of all the bins.
Clay bound fluid (nmrCBF)

CBF = PhiT Phie
Free Fluid (nmrFF)

FF = Sum of all bins above the capillary bound fluid cut-off. Or if the tapered method is select
a weighting factor is applied to each bin (see below).
Bound Fluid (nmrBFT)
Interpretation
Senergy
984
BF = PhiT - FF
Bound Fluid effective (nmrBFE)

BFE = Phie - FF
Irreducible total water saturation (nmrSwiT)

Swi = 1.0 FF / PhiT = BFT / PhiT
Irreducible effective water saturation (nmrSwiE)

Swi = 1.0 FF / Phie = BFE / Phie
NMR permeability (nmrPerm)

K
FF
BF
Phi c
Where a, b and c are the entered Timur / Coates permeability constants.

If the Remove the Clay Bound fluid from the Coates Permeability calculation has been
checked (see Output Curves tab) then Phi will be substituted for PhiT in the equation.
The Phi or PhiT used in this equation normally come from the NMR, however, in gas zones the
NMR porosity will be too low. In these circumstances it is possible to change the Phi Method to
use an external porosity curve for the Sw and permeability calculations. The input curve is
entered as the zonal parameter (Phi In, Sw Logic / Limit tab).
Related Topics
Basic NMR Equations
NMR Tapered Cutoff
Limits
SwLogic Flag
Other Calculations
NMR T2 to Pc curve
985
Senergy
10.8.9.2 NMR Tapered Cutoff
In some situations the standard cut-off method can underestimate the total bound water volume
and a tapered function can yield a more reliable result.
For example when the T2 distribution has a very narrow spectrum that can be easily fitted with a
single large exponential decay rate, i.e. a long T2 as would be the case in well sorted, coarse
grained, high porosity sandstone. In this situation a cut-off will often yield unreasonably low
bound water volumes, and sometimes even zero, which causes the computed permeability to be
erroneously high.
A tapered function, sometimes referred to as spectral function, addresses this by assuming that
each pore size will contain some bound water and assigning weighting factors to each pore size.
Small pores will have a large weighting factor as most of the water in a small pore will be bound,
and large pores will have a small weighting factor as most of the water in a large pore will be
mobile.
The equation for the tapered bound fluid is as follows:
n
nmrBFTt
Wi
PHI i
i 1
Where
n = the number of bins in the input T2 distribution.
PHIi = the porosity associated with each bin in the input T2 distribution.
and Wi is the weighting factor associated with each bin given by:
1
Wi
m T2i
Where
m = the input tapered function coefficient.
b = the input tapered function offset.
T2i = the T2 time associated with the ith bin in the input T2 distribution.
Based on a global core study of some 340 sandstone samples and 71 carbonate samples
default coefficients have been derived as follows:
Sandstones
m= 0.0618
b=1
Carbonates
m = 0.0113
b =1
(Coates et al, "A new characterization of bulk-volume irreducible using magnetic resonance",
paper QQ 38th Annual SPWLA Symposium 1977).
The module allows the user to select one of the two default constants or input their own.
Bound fluid effective for the tapered method is calculated as:
nmrBFEt = nmrBFTt nmrCBF
Interpretation
Senergy
986
There are also situations when the total bound water volume derived from a tapered function can
be too low. For example, in a hydrocarbon bearing interval at irreducible water saturation, the
water signal may have a weighting factor of less than one associated to it by the tapered function
even though all of it is bound water. Hence, total bound water volume may more accurately be
taken as the maximum of the tapered and cut-off methods.
The module outputs both cutoff and tapered method bound fluids and the final answer used can
be set to one or the other or the maximum of the two.
Related Topics
Basic NMR Equations
NMR Tapered Cutoff
Limits
SwLogic Flag
Other Calculations
NMR T2 to Pc curve
10.8.9.3 Dual Water Saturation Calculations
The standard dual water equation is displayed below. The big advantage of using this equation
with the NMR is that one of the major uncertainties Swb is measured directly by the NMR (Swb =
CBF / PHIT). Also PhiT is directly measured and does not need to be calculated from other
porosity tools.
Ct
1
Rt
PhiT m SwT n
PhiT m SwT n
Cw
a
Swb
SwT
1
a Rw
Ccw
Swb
SwT
Swb
SwT
1
Rwb
or
Swb
SwT
Where
Rw : Entered parameter. The program will convert to formation temperature.
Rwb : Either an entered parameter converted to formation temperature or calculated
from the following equation.
Ccw
1
Rwb
0.000126
T 16.7
T 504.4
987
Senergy
where T is in units of degF.

Swb : Calculated from NMR (Swb = CBW / PHIT) or if NMR CBW is not available
(older tools did not measure this) can be calculated from input PhiT curve or input
VCL curve. PhiT and VCL being calculated from traditional logs in other modules.
PhiT curve :
PhiT = Input PhiT Curve
CBW = PhiT nmrPhie
VCL curve :
CBW = VCL(input curve) x PhiTClay
PhiT = CBW + nmrPhie
PhiTClay = total porosity in 100% clay, entered parameter
PhiT : Normally nmrPhiT, but can be changed in gas zones to an external curve.
Set the Phi Method parameter to Phie Para or PhiT Para and enter the input
porosity curve under the Phi In parameter.
Rt : Entered input curve.
a : Archie a parameter.
m, n : Archie m and n parameters. These are not used if the m n Method
parameter is set to Z Function.
Sw effective is calculated from SwT using the following equation :
Swe
SwT Swb
1 Swb
Z Function
The dual water equation can be rewritten as :
Ct
PhiT SwT
Cw
a
Swb
SwT
Ccw
Swb
SwT
Where
log PhiT m SwT n

log PhiT SwT
m log phiT n log SwT

log PhiT SwT
If Z is plotted against Sw for a particular PhiT, m and n then a plot like this shown below is
produced:
Interpretation
Senergy
988
The actual curve is plotted in blue however it can easily be seen that apart from very low Sws the
curve can be approximated very well by the linear curve in red. Z will always be the same as the
cementation factor m when SwT = 1, at the left side of the plot.
The module allows the user to use this linear line as an alternative method of selecting m and n
and solving the equation.
If the parameter m n Method is set to Z function then Z will be calculated by the equation:
Z offset
Z Slope SwT
Where
Z offset is the parameter Z irreducible and Z slope is the difference between the
parameter Z irreducible and Z wet.
The Z irreducible and Z wet parameters can be picked from Interactive Plot (see NMR
Interactive Plotsection).
In order to help pick the Z irreducible and Z wet parameters theoretical Z curves are output for
the wet and irreducible conditions.
log
Z
Ct
Cw 1 Swb / SwT Ccw Swb / SwT
log PhiT SwT
At SwT = 1, then this becomes
log
nmrZwet
Ct
Cw Swb Ccw Cw
log PhiT
989
Senergy
At irreducible, this becomes:
log
nmrZwi
Cw
Ct
Swb / nmrSwiT Ccw Cw
log PhiT
nmrZwet and nmrZswi can be considered as end-points in the Sw computation; they will overlay
each other where there is no free fluid, claystones and siltstones, and will separate with
increasing free fluid with nmrZwet kicking to the right (higher Z) and nmrZswi kicking to the left
(lower Z). The position of the computed Z between these two end-points is related to Sw, with
increasing resistivity, i.e. decreasing conductivity Ct, giving a lower Z and hence lower Sw.
The default values of 2.0 for Z wet and 1.6 for Z irreducible are reasonable values for most
clastics and frequently give reliable results. Users should exercise caution when adjusting these
parameters from the defaults.
The Z wet parameter should be selected so that it overlays nmrZwet in a clean wet sand. This is
effectively the cementation exponent m and picking it is analogous to picking a wet trend on a
Pickett Plot. If you pick through the middle of the trend you will show some lobes of
hydrocarbons and if you pick the extreme right hand edge of the trend (higher Z) you will show no
hydrocarbons at all, i.e. SwU will be greater than 100%.
The Z irreducible parameter should be selected so as to show minimal free water in a zone the
user believes to be at irreducible saturation. In a zone with very little bound fluid Z irreducible
should be just a little lower than nmrZswi, i.e. to the left, and further to the left of Z irreducible as
the bound fluid volume increases. Z irreducible should not be picked to overlay nmrZswi as Z
irreducible corresponds to the offset in the straight line relationship where SwT = 0 in the graph
above, and Swi will not be zero.
Alternatively, a cross-plot of nmrSwT against nmrZswi for the zone believed to be at irreducible
can help in identifying the correct selection of Z irreducible. If a straight line is projected from
the Z wet point at nmrSwT =1 on the right hand edge of the plot, down through the data believed
to be at irreducible, to the left hand edge where nmrSwT =0, the value of Z at this point is Z
irreducible. The example below shows a plot from a 40ft sand where Z wet was to taken as 2,
determined from a nearby wet sand, and Z irreducible was determined as 1.7 from the crossplot.
Interpretation
Senergy
990
The difference between Z wet and Z irreducible is the slope of the Z function and is effectively a
gain control on the computed Sw, i.e. how much reduction in Sw there should be for a given
increase in resistivity. Hence, caution needs to be used in selecting Z irreducible to avoid being
overly optimistic. Z irreducible is typically between 0.2 and 0.5.
If the Z function is not used for SW calculation the Z value is still calculated and output using the
fixed values of m and n.
The Z factor is limited to a minimum value of the nmrZswi. This limits the SwT calculation
to the nmrSwiT. This limit is applied regardless whether the Z function is used or not.
Related Topics
Basic NMR Equations
NMR Tapered Cutoff
Limits
SwLogic Flag
Other Calculations
NMR T2 to Pc curve
991
Senergy
10.8.9.4 Limits
Several limits can be applied to restrain the final results to reasonable values.
Swi Limit : This limits the SwT calculated to a minimum of this value. Useful if
unrealistically low values of Sw are being calculated. Default value 0.0.
FF Sw Limit : This limit stops the calculation of SwT when the NMR is indicating so little
free fluid to make any calculation meaningful (FF < limit makes SwT = 1.0). Default value
0.005.
Phi Sw Limit : This limit stops the calculation of SwT when the effective porosity is too low
to make any calculation meaningful (Phie < limit makes SwT = 1.0). Default value 0.0.
CBW Sw Limit : This limit stops the calculation of SwT when the clay bound water is too
high to make any calculation meaningful (CBF > limit makes SwT = 1.0). Default value 1.0.
When any of the limits are invoked the Sw logic output curve will indicate which ones were used.
Related Topics
Basic NMR Equations
NMR Tapered Cutoff
Limits
SwLogic Flag
Other Calculations
NMR T2 to Pc curve
10.8.9.5 SwLogicFlag
The output curve SWLOGICFLAG is a logic flag curve. It can have one of the following values:
SWLOGI
LOGIC
CFLAG
VALUE
1
The Z equation loop did not converge after 20 iterations
SwT curve has been clipped to the Sw irreducible (Swi)

parameter limit. The SwU and the SwTU curves have not
changed.
SwT curve has been set to 1.0 due to the Free Fluid Volume
being below the limit.
Interpretation
Senergy
992
SwT curve has been set to 1.0 due to the Effective Porosity being
below the limit.
SwT curve has been set to 1.0 due to the Clay Bound Volume
being above the limit.
SwT equation loop did not converge after 10 iterations.
For a normal execution of the program at any depth level, the SWLOGICFLAG should be zero.
Related Topics
Basic NMR Equations
NMR Tapered Cutoff
Limits
SwLogic Flag
Other Calculations
NMR T2 to Pc curve
10.8.9.6 Other Calculations
Rw apparent is calculated and displayed on the interactive log plot. It is calculated as follows :
Rt PhiT m
a
Rwapp
Where
m = entered m parameter or if the Z function is being used
m = Zoffset + Zslope
Rwapp is converted to the temperature of the entered Rw Temp parameter or if this is not
entered left at formation temperature.
Related Topics
Basic NMR Equations
NMR Tapered Cutoff
Limits
SwLogic Flag
Other Calculations
993
Senergy
NMR T2 to Pc curve
10.8.9.7 NMR T2 to Pc Curve
The theory about converting T2 distributions to Pc curves an be found in the SPE paper 81057
Deriving Capillary Pressure and Water Saturation from NMR Transversal Relaxation Times by
J. C. Glorioso.
The module outputs two array curves which contain the capillary pressure results.
nmrPC contains the pressures in units set by the user on the Output Curves tab.
nmrPcSw contains the water saturations associated with each Pc pressure.
The array curves will have the same dimensions as the T2 array curve.
In IP we convert the T2 to Pc using the following equation. The PCgain and PCoffset
parameters need to be found by calibrating results to an actual PC curve (see section on T2 to
Pc calibration).
Pc i
A log Pc gain Log
1
T2i
Pc offset
The Pc Sw curve is calculated from T2 array values. The module assumes that the highest T2
time will be the 100% Sw value. From this value each T2 bin porosity is converted into a
saturation (BinPhi / PhiT) and subtracted from the previous value. The lowest T2 time will have
0% Sw.
The output Pc curves can be displayed in the crossplot module. The PC Crossplot tab allows
these to be easily setup.
Saturation Height Curve
The Pc curves can be used to calculate a saturation height curve. This is done by first calculating
a capillary pressure at a depth and then using this to look up the Sw value in the T2 PC curve.
Pc
FWL TVDss
Density
Water
Density
Hydrocarbon
Where
FWL : Entered parameter
TVDss : Entered curve
Density Water : Entered parameter
Density Hydrocarbon : Entered parameter
The Sw height curve is displayed in the Interpretation Plot.
The values obtained by this method will only be as good as the calibration of the T2 to Pc curve.
This calibration will change with rock type. Hence it is highly recommended to use these results
with caution.
Interpretation
Senergy
Related Topics
Basic NMR Equations
NMR Tapered Cutoff
Limits
SwLogic Flag
Other Calculations
NMR T2 to Pc curve
994
995
10.9
Senergy
Cased Hole
The Cased Hole log interpretation tools are included here. The following tools are included under
the Cased Hole menu item:
TDT Stand-Alone Sw analysis: The TDT Stand Alone module is used to calculate water
saturation from thermal decay tools (TDT) or any pulsed neutron tool that measures the
formation capture cross section (Sigma). A Porosity curve is needed as input. A Clay
Volume curve input is optional. These curves are best taken from an open hole log
analysis.
TDT Time Lapse: The TDT Time Lapse module is used to calculate water saturation from
differences between two thermal decay tool (TDT) logs or any pulsed neutron tool logs that
measures the formation capture cross section (Sigma). An accurate Porosity and original
Water Saturation (Sw Base) curve is needed as input, which is best taken from an open
hole log analysis.
To access the Cased Hole Interpretation Tools:
From the Interpretation Menu, Select Cased Hole, and the required Interpretation Tool.
Related Topics
Basic Log Analysis
Section 10.9 Interpretation : Cased Hole
Interpretation
Senergy
996

NMR Normalization
NMR Interpretation
10.9.1 TDT Stand Alone

The TDT Stand Alone module is used to calculate water saturation from thermal decay tools
(TDT) or any pulsed neutron tool that measures the formation capture cross section (Sigma). A
Porosity curve is needed as input. A Clay Volume curve input is optional. These curves are
best taken from an open hole log analysis.
The results are very sensitive to clay volume due to the high value of sigma clay. It is therefore
important that a correct clay volume is entered into the module. The sigma curve can, in fact, be
used as a clay indicator in the Clay Volume module (enter Sigma as the user-defined linear clay
indicator). If no Clay Volume curve is entered then clay volume is assumed to be zero.
The Matrix Density Curve, if entered, is used to set the value of sigma matrix.
The Sw Open Hole and BVW Open Hole curves are optional choices and are only used as part
of the display in the Interactive Plot.
The Load / Save Parameter Sets button allows the user to manage the Parameter Sets (See
Parameter Set Management). The working Parameter Set for this module is named :
TDT_Stand_Alone and type TDT_Stand_Alone. This can be seen in the Edit Zones / Top
997
Senergy
sets module.
Related Topics
Create a New Interpretation Zone
Define Sigma Parameters
TDT Stand Alone Plots
Output Curves, Equations and Methodology
10.9.1.1 Define TDT Stand Alone Parameters
The Parameters tab allows the user to change any of the input parameters. Column edits are
possible by clicking in a column header, the header will turn green and then any changes to any
parameter in the column will result in all the parameters in the column having the same value.
However, if a zone is locked then the zone wont update with the new value.
The TDT Stand Alone Parameter Tabs are described below:

The 'Zones' Tab allows the user to create and edit the interpretation zones. This can also be
done on the interactive plot. It is also possible to lock zones using the 'Lock Zone' column. If
this is 'checked' then the zone is shaded in all tabs and the parameters for that zone cannot
be changed. This also applies to interactive parameter lines on the interactive plots.
Interpretation
Senergy
998
The Sigma Parameters Tab contains the main fluid and formation sigma parameters and is
where the user selects the source for Sigma Matrix .
The SigMat from Matrix Density Tab will only be active, i.e. not grayed out, when the
parameter Sigma Ma Source has been set to Matrix Den.
The SigMat from Mineral Volumes Tab will only be active, i.e. not grayed out, when the
parameter Sigma Ma Source has been set to Mineral Vols. Up to six mineral volume
curves can be input and this tab is where the sigma for each mineral is input. A drop down
list is available with a list of default mineral sigma values
The Limits Tab permits the user to set up and apply Limits which force the output Sw,
SwTDT, to 1.0 allowing the user to clean up an interpretation by limiting Sw in poor quality,
non-reservoir rock.
Related Topics
Define TDT Stand Alone Parameters
Define SigMat from Matrix Density
Define SigMat from Mineral Volumes
Specify Parameter Limits
999
Senergy
10.9.1.1.2 Define Sigma Parameters
The Sigma Parameters contains the main fluid and formation sigma parameters and is where
the user selects the source for Sigma Matrix .
Sigma Water : If formation water salinity is known, the sigma water value can be looked up
in most log chart books(Schlumberger Tcor-2) or use the Conversions 2 tab within the
Basic Log Analysis Functions module. The value can also be picked interactively from
the SigWatApp curve or the Porosity/Sigma Xplot launched from the Interactive Log Plot.
Sigma Hyd
: The sigma hydrocarbon value can be looked up in most log chart books
(Schlumberger Tcor-1) or use the Conversions 2 tab within the Basic Log Analysis
Functions module. The value can also be interactively picked from the Porosity/Sigma Xplot
launched from the Interactive Log Plot.
Sigma Clay : Sigma clay can be interactively picked from the sigma curve in the shales or
from the Clay Volume / Sigma Xplot launched from the Interactive Log Plot. It should be
adjusted so that the SwTDTU curve reads 1.0 in the wet shaley zones.
Sigma Ma Source : Selects whether Sigma Matrix is taken from the Sigma Matrix
parameter, computed from the optional input Matrix Density curve, or computed from the
optional input Mineral Volume curves.
The following options are available:
1. Parameter This uses the current Sigma Matrix Parameter, i.e. a fixed constant, which
is the interactive Sigma Matrix point on the Phi - Sigma Xplot.
Interpretation
Senergy
1000
2. Matrix Density This computes Sigma Matrix from the entered Matrix Density, curve or
parameter, using the mineral sigmas and model input as per current module
3. Mineral Vols This uses the input Mineral Volume curves, MinVol1 through MinVol5, and
the mineral sigmas, SigMin1 through SigMin5.
Sigma Matrix: This is only available when the Sigma Matrix Source parameter is set to
Parameter. The value can be interactively picked from the SigMat curve or the Porosity/
Sigma Xplot launched from the Interactive Log Plot..
Related Topics
10.9.1.1.3 Define SigMat from Matrix Density
The SigMat from Matrix Density Tab will only be active, i.e. not shaded, when the parameter
Sigma Ma Source in the Sigma Parameters Tab has been set to Matrix Den.
Matrix Input : Selects whether the matrix density is taken from the optional input Matrix
Density curve or the Matrix Den parameter.
1001
Senergy
Matrix Den : Input matrix density used to control the sigma matrix. Will be ignored if the
Matrix Input parameter is set to Curve.
Model Input : This selects the type of mineral mixture model that is used to calculate sigma
matrix. The options are SS-LS-DOL which will use a sandstone-limestone-dolomite model
or SS-DOL which will use a sandstone-dolomite model.
Sigma Sand : Sigma matrix for sandstone. This value will be used when the input matrix
density is 2.65 gm/cc (Default 4.3 CU).
Sigma Lime : Sigma matrix for limestone. This value will be used when the input matrix
density is 2.71 gm/cc (Default 7.1 CU).
Sigma Dol : Sigma matrix for dolomite. This value will be used when the input matrix density
is 2.85 gm/cc (Default 4.7 CU).
Related Topics
10.9.1.1.4 Define SigMat from Mineral Volumes
The parameters in this tab will only be active, i.e. not shaded, when the parameter Sigma Ma
Source has been set to Mineral Vols in the Sigma Parameters Tab. Up to six mineral volume
curves can be input and this tab is where the sigma for each mineral is input. A drop down list is
available with a list of default mineral sigma values.
Interpretation
Senergy
1002
Mineral Volume Inputs

5 additional input curves for Mineral Volumes, called VolMin1 through VolMin5, to allow for
alternative computation of Sigma Matrix are included in the Parameter Pane. Five additional
Sigma Mineral parameters will also be required, SigMin1 through SigMin5. Sigma Matrix is given
by:
SigMat = VolMin1*SigmaMin1 + VolMin2*SigmaMin2 + VolMin3*SigmaMin3 + VolMin4*SigmaMin4
+ VolMin5*SigmaMin5
Related Topics
1003
Senergy
10.9.1.1.5 Specify Parameter Limits
The Limits Tab permits the user to set up and apply Limits which force the output Sw, SwTDT, to
1.0 allowing the user to clean up an interpretation by limiting Sw in poor quality, non-reservoir
rock.
Phi Limit : If input Porosity < Phi Limit then SwTDT is set to 1.0, default 0
Vcl Limit : If input Clay Volume > Vcl Limit then SwTDT is set to 1.0, default 1
Sw Limit : If input SW Open Hole > Sw Limit then SwTDT is set to 1.0, default 1
Related Topics
10.9.1.2 TDT Stand Alone Plots
The TDT Stand Alone Model can be displayed as either an Interactive Plot or a Crossplot.
The Interactive Plot provides the ability to view Sigma Clay, Sigma Water, Sigma Matrix, Phi
Limit, Vcl Limit and Sw OH Limit as an Interactive Plot. The Sw and BVW curves will only
appear in the plot if they have been entered on the Curve tab. The Interactive Plot also contains
Interpretation
Senergy
1004
the reconstructed Sigma curves, SigRec, SigRecWat, SigRecHyd plus the original Sigma curve.
The Clay Volume/Sigma Crossplot will show a strong correlation with increasing Clay Volume
giving a higher Sigma. The aim is to pick a value for the Sigma of 100% pure wet clay but that
usually does not occur in oil wells (that would be a china clay pit) to follow the increasing Sigma
with increasing Clay Volume trend in the data and project it out to 100%. The data at low Clay
Volumes should be ignored on this plot as it is the clean reservoir intervals and the Sigma will be
responding more to the saline water in the reservoir than to the clay.
The Sigma/Porosity Crossplot is also identifying trends but this time to try and identify the water,
hydrocarbon and matrix Sigma values in the reservoir rocks and not the clay rich shales. Matrix is
the basic rock fabric like sandstone, limestone etc. I have shown 3 such trends on the plot
below.
One trend goes NW, increasing sigma with decreasing porosity. This is the clay trend and where
it reaches zero porosity is effectively the same clay point we established on the Volume Clay
crossplot, but it is less accurate so it is really on for QC.
The second trend goes NE, increasing sigma with increasing porosity. This is the clean wet
reservoir trend and if you follow that trend out to 100% porosity it would be the pure water point,
which is what we are trying to pick. If you follow the same trend in reverse, down to zero porosity
that is the pure matrix point which is another point we are trying to pick. This trend should follow
the 100% wet blue overlay curve.
The third trend goes SE and is the hydrocarbon trend, clean reservoir rock with increasing oil or
gas content. If the rock had no water in it and all the porosity was filled with hydrocarbon this
trend should reach down to the red 0% water line, but in reality there is always some water so it
never get s down to this. If you followed the red 0% water line out to a porosity of 100% it would
be the pure hydrocarbon point, another parameter we want to pick. Again, following the trend
back to zero porosity takes you back to pure rock matrix.
1005
Senergy
Related Topics
10.9.1.2.1 Create Interactive Log Plot
The interactive plot is created by clicking on the Make Plot button. Six interactive lines are
available to change parameters for Sigma Clay, Sigma Water, Sigma Matrix, Phi Limit, Vcl Limit
and Sw OH Limit.
Note: The Sw and BVW curves will only appear in the plot if they have been entered on the Curve
tab.
Track 4 contains the reconstructed Sigma curves, SigRec, SigRecWat, SigRecHyd plus the
original Sigma curve. The yellow shading is between the sigma water (SigRecWat) and the
sigma hydrocarbon (SigRecHyd) reconstructed curves. The actual sigma should fall in the yellow
range if the parameters are all set correctly.
Interpretation
Senergy
1006
Track 3 contains the Interactive Line to modify the Sigma Clay Parameters. Click and Drag the
Interactive Line to modify the Sigma Clay Parameters from within the Log Plot Display. Hover
over the Sigma Clay Interactive Line to display the Sigma Clay Parameters in the Status Bar.
Track 5 contains the Interactive Line to modify the Sigma Water Parameters. Click and Drag the
Interactive Line to modify the Sigma Water Parameters from within the Log Plot Display. Hover
over the Sigma Water Interactive Line to display the Sigma Water Parameters in the Status Bar.
1007
Senergy
Track 6 contains the Interactive Line to modify the Sigma Matrix Parameters. Click and Drag the
Interactive Line to modify the Sigma Matrix Parameters from within the Log Plot Display.
Undo/Redo
the arrows are clicked the parameter lines move and the output curves are recalculated. The
Interpretation
Senergy
1008
Related Topics
Create Interactive Log Plot
Create Clay Volume/Sigma Crossplot
Create Sigma/Porosity Crossplot
10.9.1.2.2 Create Clay Volume/Sigma Crossplot
The Clay Volume/Sigma Crossplot is launched from Track 3 of the Interactive Log Plot GR and
Sigma track.
Right Click Track 3 of the Interactive Crossplot and Select the VWCL/SGFM (Clay Volume
Curve/Sigma Curve) Xplot. In the example below the Clay Volume Curve is VCLAV and the
Sigma Curve is TDT:SGFM.
1009
Senergy
The Clay Volume/Sigma Crossplot will then be displayed.
The sigma scales may need to be adjusted. The interactive point on the right hand side is the
Interpretation
Senergy
1010
interactive Sigma Clay parameter and is pinned to the Clay Volume of 1.

Note: The Clay Volume/Sigma Crossplot includes a clay line where the parameter Sigma Clay is
the endpoint of the line at Vcl = 1. This is the same functionality as the VWCL RT Xplot in PhiSw. The other end of the line is free floating as it does not represent any specific parameter. In
this example the clean data (Vcl <0.2) shows 2 clear trends which are the wet and hydrocarbon
sands. The clay trend is only apparent at higher Vcl, > ~0.5, such that Sigma Clay ~ 30.
Related Topics
10.9.1.2.3 Create Sigma/Porosity Crossplot
The Sigma/Porosity Crossplot is launched from Track 3 of the Interactive Log Plot.
Right Click Track 3 of the Interactive Crossplot and Select PHIE/SGFM (Porosity Curve/
Sigma Curve) Xplot to display the Sigma/Porosity Crossplot. In the example below the
Porosity Curve is PHIE and the Sigma Curve is TDT:SGFM.
The Porosity/Sigma Crossplot will then be displayed.

Note: The scales may need to be adjusted.
1011
Senergy
Apply Sigma Overlay Lines

From the Porosity/Sigma Crossplot Window click the Edit Format Button to Display the
Crossplot Dialog. From the Scales Tab, Overlay Lines Select Sigma / Porosity with Sw
Lines and Click Ok to display the Sigma Overlay Lines on the Crossplot.
Interpretation
Senergy
1012
The overlay lines are created automatically when the Sw calculations are run and are
adjusted for sigma matrix, water and hydrocarbons. If any of the sigma end-points are
changed , then the crossplot will have to be re-launched in order to pick up the changed
overlay lines. The lines on the crossplot are constant Sw lines. Shale intervals are normally
plotted above the 100% Sw line.
The overlay as used currently is constructed using three parameters:
Sigma Water (blue dot) sigma at a porosity of 1 on the wettrend
Sigma Hydrocarbon (red dot) sigma at a porosity of 1 on the hydrocarbon trend
Sigma Matrix (green dot) sigma at a porosity of 0
The 100% Sw line goes from the matrix point to the water point and idealized data on this
plot clearly shows the idea of a wet trend following the 100% Sw line.
The 0% Sw line goes from the matrix point to the hydrocarbon point. The hydrocarbon trend
does not follow the 0% Sw line as there is never 0% Sw. Instead it will follow a trend at the
irreducible Sw, Swi, which in this case appears to be about 25% Sw. Note the trend
between the 100% Sw line and the 25% Sw line is the transition zone, the hydrocarbon trend
ids the small tail following the 25% Sw line.
The data trend to the left of and above the 100-% Sw line are typically shales, and while this
can be used to confirm Sigma Clay we should not include Sigma Clay on this plot as it is
better picked for m the Vclay Sigma Xplot. (Depending on the open hole interp
methodology this may be Sigma Shale rather than Sigma Clay, and also clean tight zones
can plot in this region if they have a different mineralogy than the main reservoir, hence,
1013
Senergy
without discriminators an erroneous pick may be made)

To use this Xplot to pick the 3 sigma parameters you need to identify these trends in the
data and pick the endpoints accordingly. However, on such a large scale the trends may be
very hard to make an accurate pick on, so the default scales will normally be used to do the
actual picking on. This means the user will normally adjust Sigma Matrix and the slope of
the 100% Sw and 0% Sw lines rather than Sigma Water and Sigma Hydrocarbon, although
of course they need to be adjustable if the user changes the scales.
Currently the Sw lines are saved as an overlay file so to get them to update after a
parameter change the user has to go into Edit Format and Apply or OK. The 25%, 50% and
75% lines should be part of the interactive plot and update every time a change is made.
If the user adjusts Sigma Matrix via the interactive Phi-Sigma Xplot they are implicitly forcing
the model to use a constant value and not to compute a sigma matrix from the density.
Currently this is achieved by entering a value in Sigma Matrix which then greys out the
matrix density parameters and Sigma Matrix becomes an interactive parameter line on the
interactive plot rather than the computed Sigma Matrix. The interactive Phi-Sigma Xplot must
share this same functionality. If the user has selected to use Matrix Density to compute
Sigma Matrix then the Sigma Matrix point on the will be plotted as the mean of the computed
Sigma Matrix for that zone, as is done currently, but it should not be interactive. It should only
be an interactive point when Sigma Matrix Parameter is the selected method.
Related Topics
10.9.1.3 Output Curves, Equations and Methodology
Sigma Matrix - SigMat

If the sigma matrix source parameter, Sigma Ma Source, is set to Matrix Den then RhoMat
(matrix density) will either be taken from the input Matrix Density curve or from the input
parameter, Matrix Den, depending on the method chosen in Matrix Input.
If the Model Input is set to Sandstone - Dolomite then
SigMat
SigDol
RhoMat 2.65
SigDol
2.85 2.65
SigMat Sigsand
SigSand
SigSand
Interpretation
Senergy
1014
If the Model Input is set to Sandstone - Limestone - Dolomite then
if
RhoMat 2.71
RhoMat maximum of 2.65 or RhoMat
RhoMat 2.65
SigMat
SigLime SigSand SigSand
2.71 2.65
if RhoMat 2.71
RhoMat minimum of 2.85 or RhoMat
RhoMat 2.71
SigMat
SigDol SigLime SigLime
2.85 2.71
If the sigma matrix source parameter, Sigma Ma Source, is set to Mineral Vols then RhoMat
(matrix density) will be computed from the input Mineral Volume curves and corresponding
mineral sigma, Sig Mat 1 through Sig Mat 6:
Water Saturation - SwTDTU

SigLog
SwTDTU
SigMat
SigWat
SigHyd
SigHyd
SigMat
Vcl SigClay SigMat

SigWat SigHyd
SwTDT will limit the SwTDTU curve to between 1 and 0.
Bulk Volume Water - BVWTDT

BVWtdt
SwTDT
Sigma Water Apparent - SigWatApp

SigWatApp
Sigma
SigMat (1 Vcl
) SigClay
Vcl
Reconstructed Sigma Curves - SigRec, SigRecWat, SigRecHyd

These are QC type curves and are used to get a feel of the range of values to be expected for a
100% wet zone and a 100% hydrocarbon zone. The reconstructed open hole sigma curve should
fall between the wet and hydrocarbon curves.
Sigma Open Hole Reconstructed - SigRec

Sig Re c
(1 Vcl
) SigMat
Vcl SigClay
SwOH
SigWat
Sigma Water Reconstructed - SigRecWat

Sig Re cWat
(1 Vcl
) SigMat
Vcl SigClay
SigWat
Sigma Hydrocarbon Reconstructed - SigRecHyd

Sig Re cHyd
(1 Vcl
) SigMat
Vcl SigClay
SigHyd
(1 SwOH ) SigHyd
1015
Senergy
Related Topics
10.9.2 TDT Time Lapse

The TDT Time Lapse module is used to calculate water saturation from differences between two
thermal decay tool (TDT) logs or any pulsed neutron tool logs that measures the formation
capture cross section (Sigma). An accurate Porosity and original Water Saturation (Sw Base)
curve is needed as input, which is best taken from an open hole log analysis.
The method uses the differences between the two sigma curves, run at different times, to
calculate the change in water saturation. Using this method the matrix properties of the rock do
not influence the results and much more accurate changes in water saturation can be calculated
in comparison to the TDT Stand Alone analysis.
The method relies on the changes in sigma being wholly related to changes in water saturation.
Hence, if different tool types are used for the different Sigma runs the tool difference must be
somehow normalized out before an accurate Sw change can be calculated.
The Sigma new curve is the most recently run log. The Sigma Base curve is the sigma curve
that represents the formation saturated with hydrocarbons as shown by the Sw base curve. The
Sigma Base curve should be run on the well after completion before any water movement has
Interpretation
Senergy
1016
occurred.
Several sigma logging passes are usually made over the reservoir. These should be first depth
matched and then averaged before using the averaged value in this module. The Curve Average
module using the Lateral Averaging option can be used for this.
The Clay Volume and Porosity input curve can be optionally used to set cut-offs for the intervals
to apply the analysis. This is useful for removing non-net intervals. The BVW Open Hole curve is
optional and is only used in the automatic plot.
The Load / Save Parameter Sets button allows the user to manage the parameter sets. See
Parameter Set Management. The working parameter set for this module is name :
TDT_Time_Lapse and type TDT_Time_Lapse. This can be seen in the Edit Zones / Top sets
module.
Related Topics
TDT Time Lapse
1017
Senergy
10.9.2.1 Define TDT Time Lapse Parameters
The Parameters tab allows the user to change any of the input parameters. Column edits are
possible by clicking in a column header, the header will turn green and then any changes to any
However, if a zone is locked then the zone wont update with the new value.
This tab contains the main fluid and formation sigma parameters and is where the user selects
the source for Sigma Matrix .
Sigma Water : If formation water salinity is known, sigma water value can be looked up in
most log chart books (Schlumberger Tcor-2)
Sigma Hyd : The sigma hydrocarbon value can be looked up in most log chart books
(Schlumberger Tcor-1).
Phi Cutoff : If the input value of porosity is less than this value the interval is considered as
non reservoir and the Delta Sw TDT output curve will be 0. Set to 0 to disable this option.
Vcl Cutoff : If the input value of clay volume is greater than this value the interval is
considered as non reservoir and the Delta Sw TDT output curve will be 0. Set to 1 to disable
this option.
Related Topics
TDT Time Lapse
Interpretation
Senergy
1018

10.9.2.2 Create Interactive Log Plot
The default plot is created by clicking of the Make Plot button. There are no interactive lines on
the plot.
Related Topics
TDT Time Lapse
10.9.2.3 Equations and Methodology
Delta Sw - DltSwTDT
Sw
SigNew SigBase
SigWat SigHyd
Cut-offs
if
cutoff
Sw
or Vcl
Vclcutoff
0.0
Sw time lapse - SwTDTU and SwTDTU
1019
SwTDTU
SwBase
Sw
SwTDT will be the same as SwTDTU except it will be clipped between 0 and 1.0.
Bulk Volume Water - BVWtdt

BVWtdt
SwTDT
Related Topics
TDT Time Lapse
Senergy
Interpretation
Senergy
1020
10.10 Auto Update of Analysis Modules

The Auto Update Options enable the interpretation modules to be chained together so that
changes in any one module will propagate through the other modules without the user having to
manually run them. When Interactive Petrophysics is first started up these options are not
switched on. The modules can also be linked using the 'Link Zones / Top Sets' module.
NOTE: The Auto Update options should be turned 'off' IF using the 'Multi-well Parameter
Distribution' module. This is because the Zone Sets will be automatically run before they are
properly set up.
If the 'Auto update Porosity and Water Saturation' menu item is 'checked', then every time the
Clay Volume module is run, the Porosity and Water Saturation module will be run automatically
afterwards.
If the 'Auto update Cut-off and Summation (PhiSw)' menu item is 'checked', then every time
the Porosity and Water Saturation module is run, the Cut-off and Summation module will be run
automatically afterwards.
Section 10.10 Interpretation : Auto Update of Analysis Modules
1021
Senergy
If the 'Auto Update Cut-off and Summation (MS)' menu is 'checked' then every time the
Mineral Solver module is run, the the Cut-off and Summation module will be run automatically
afterwards.
Related Topics
Basic Log Analysis
Section 10.10 Interpretation : Auto Update of Analysis Modules
Section
11
Advanced Interpretation
1023
11
Senergy
A number of Modules are grouped under the banner of 'Advanced Interpretation'. The following
modules are included :
'Mineral Solver': The interactive Mineral Solver module is used to solve for mineralogy,
porosity and fluid saturations in a well. The Mineral Solver modules comprise the Mineral
Solver Preprocessor tool and the Mineral Solver model interfaces. The interactive Mineral
Solver module is used to resolve mineralogy, porosity and fluid saturations in a single
reservoir or multiple reservoir zones within a wellbore. It can also be used for cased hole
calculations using input sigma curves.
'Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis': The 'Monte Carlo Error Analysis Module' uses a
Monte Carlo simulation to estimate the errors in a petrophysical analysis. The user enters
the distribution of possible errors associated with the interpretation parameters and the input
curves. The program, using the error distributions, randomizes the input parameters and
makes multiple passes through the analysis modules. The results for each simulation are
accumulated and a distribution of the results can be made.
'Batch Monte Carlo': The 'Batch Monte Carlo' module allows the user to set up and run the
Monte Carlo simulation program on multiple wells. Since the Monte Carlo simulation can
take considerable time to run (from minutes to hours depending of the workflow model),
batching multiple wells can mean that the process can be run overnight without the need of
user input.
'Fuzzy Logic Curve Prediction': The Fuzzy Logic Curve Prediction module uses the
mathematics of Fuzzy Logic as described by Cuddy, S. (1997) in his paper "The
Application of the Mathematics of Fuzzy Logic to Petrophysics" (Paper S. 38th Annual
Symposium of the SPWLA), to allow the prediction of a Result curve from a number of
Input curves.
'Multiple Linear Regression': The Multiple Linear Regression module allows the user to
predict a result curve from a number of input curves, using a least squares regression
routine, which will try and find the best fit to the input data.
'Neural Networks': The Neural Networks curve prediction module uses neural networks to
allow the prediction of a result curve from a number of input curves.
'Cluster Analysis for Rock Typing': The Cluster Analysis module uses standard statistical
routines to allow the user to cluster the data into groups to produce an electrical facies log.
This log can then hopefully be used to correlate to geological facies.
'Principal Component Analysis': Principal component analysis (PC) is a technique used to
Section 11.
Advanced Interpretation :
Senergy
1024
reduce multidimensional data sets to lower dimensions for analysis. This technique can be
useful in Petrophysics and Geology as a preliminary method of combining multiple logs in to
a single or two logs without losing information. The PC curves then can be used for various
tasks like multi-well tops correlation and regression analysis.
'Rock Physics': The Rock Physics section in IP contains the following independent
modules; Shear Sonic QC/Create Module, Fluid Substitution Module, Density Estimation,
Laminated Fluid Substitution, Elastic Impedance Module.
'Pore Pressure Calculations': The 'Pore Pressure Calculation' Modules comprise the
following three tools; 'Overburden Gradient Calculation', 'Run Pore and Fracture Pressure
gradient calculations'. These tools can be used to evaluate the subsurface pressures
encountered within a well. They enable the user to model Overburden (OB), Pore (PP) and
Fracture (FP) pressures based on conventional log curves, drilling information and seismic
data input. It can be used as a pre-drill (predictive) and while-drilling (real-time) tool, as well
as for post-drilling analysis to update and refine OB, PP and FP models.
'Saturation Height Modeling (Capillary Pressure)': The Capillary Pressure modules allow the
user to QC the raw Pc measurements and make corrections for overburden stress, for
clay-bound water and for laboratory to reservoir conditions conversion. Multiple Sw versus
Capillary Pressure functions can be derived. Core plug Capillary Pressure array data and
their associated Saturation, Porosity and Permeability values are loaded from external
sources using the 'Capillary Pressure Data Loader' module. Alternatively, the 'ASCII
Load' or 'Interval Loader' modules can be used if desired.
'Saturation Height modeling (Log Curves)': The 'Log Sw versus Height Functions' module
is used to generate Water saturation (Sw) versus Height functions from log curve data. Logderived water saturation curves can be used, in conjunction with Free Water Level (FWL)
depths to derive 'Sw versus Height above FWL' functions. This module does not require
core data.
'Eastern European Resistivity Corrections': The 'Eastern European Resistivity
Corrections' Module is a specialist tool developed by the A.G.H University of Science
and Technology, Krakw, and integrated into IP. The module provides functionality
enabling the correction of 'Normal' and 'Lateral' type resistivity curves for hole size and
environmental effects.
Formation Test Analysis: Formation Test Analysis is a process of evaluation that takes
place to determine the viability of a reservoir of oil, prior to the production stage, in particular
the type of fluid present in a reservoir and the potential for production. When Formation
Section 11.
1025
Senergy
Testing takes place, measurements are taken using wireline testing methods and then
recorded in a Data Log file for interpretation.
Related Topics
Calculation and Correction
Interpretation
Section 11.
Senergy
11.1
1026
Interactive Mineral Solver
The interactive Mineral Solver module is used to solve for mineralogy, porosity and fluid
saturations in a well. The Mineral Solver modules comprise the Mineral Solver Preprocessor
tool and the Mineral Solver model interfaces. The interactive Mineral Solver module is used
to resolve mineralogy, porosity and fluid saturations in a single reservoir or multiple reservoir
zones within a wellbore. It can also be used for cased hole calculations using input sigma
curves.
The Mineral Solver user interface comprises 2 modules:
the Mineral Solver Preprocessor module
the Mineral Solver module
The user enters:
a Mineral or Rock model of the formations penetrated,
the logging tools / equations / constants to be used, and
the parameters relating the tool equations to the Mineral model.
The program will then try to solve the system of equations to find the most probable result for
each layer in the well. This is traditionally called a Probabilistic Interpretation. The workflow
used for this type of Probabilistic Interpretation in IP is as follows.
1. Create Mineral Models that describe the main minerals and fluids in the rock column. For
a Carbonate / Oil reservoir such a model could include : Limestone, Dolomite, Anhydrite,
Clay, Oil and Water.
2. Select the Logging tools (Equations) that are available in the well and add these to the
model. The user should input at least the same number of tools (equations) as there are
minerals and fluids in the model.
3. Enter the equation end-points (100% mineral readings) for each mineral. For example,
100% Calcite density would be 2.71 g/cc, for 100% fresh water the density would be set to 1.0
g/cc.
4. Enter the weighting factor for each equation. This is the relative importance of one
equation to another. For example, the density tool is generally considered to provide a far more
accurate measurement of porosity than the sonic tool. Hence, the weighting on the density
should be higher.
5. The Model is run and the reconstructed tool responses are compared to the original input
tool responses. The results are presented in a log plot view.
6. The user adjusts the end-point parameters and / or Mineral model to give the best
possible reconstruction.
Section 11.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver
1027
Senergy
One often finds that a single Mineral Model is not sufficient to describe all the formations present
in a well. For example, one model is needed for a carbonate interval, another for a clastic interval.
Special models are often required for zones of bad-hole conditions, where some of the logging
tools are not reading valid values.
For multiple Mineral Model interpretations the typical workflow is extended as follows :
7. Each Mineral model is individually set up and adjusted to give the best results for the depth
interval to which it applies.
8. The separate Mineral models are combined to give a final Combined Result. The models
are combined on a zonal basis, using a Mixing Routine. The Mixing Routine allows the use
of logic statements to decide which model should be used for the Combined Result. Mixing
routines can be as simple as setting a single model over a zone or more complex - for
example, using multiple logic statements to determine which model to use for each individual
depth level.
9. When making the final combined plot it is now possible to smooth the transition between
models using the Mdl Merge Dist function.
Fluids
Most logging tools that respond to lithology read quite shallow and are normally assumed to read
in the flushed zone close to the borehole wall. The normal way to set up a Miner Solver model is
to include in the model only the fluids in the flushed zone. The Sw value is calculated after the
model has been resolved from the porosity and deep resistivity curve.
However, it is possible to run the Mineral Solver with both flushed zone fluids and un-invaded
zone fluids in the same model. This allows the user to then specify for each input tool whether
the tool reads in the flushed zone, the un-invaded zone or somewhere in between the two. This
can become important for tools like the neutron, which read somewhat deeper than the density
and hence can need more correction for hydrocarbon than what is calculated in the flushed zone.
To Display the Mineral Solver Module:
From the Advanced Interpretation Menu, Select the required Mineral Solver Module.
Senergy
Below is an example Log Plot created from the Mineral Solver Module.
Related Topics
Mineral Solver Preprocessing
Mineral Solver
Plot the Mineral Solver Results
Mineral Solver Calibration
Mineral Solver Equations and Methodology
1028
1029
Senergy
11.1.1 Mineral Solver Preprocessing

The Mineral Solver MinSolve Preprocessing module consists of two tabs.
General - this allows the user to calculate :

Volumetric Cross Section (U) curve from inputs of density and PEF curves
U is calculated from the equation
U = Pef x (RHOB + 0.1883) x 0.93423
Conductivity (Ct and Cxo) curves from input Rt and Rxo curves.
Dry Weight to Volume Conversion - this performs :
Elemental volume fractions conversion from mineral dry-weight fractions . Dry
weight fractional data from XRD core analysis, can be converted to mineral volume
fractions and used as input to the Mineral modelling.
Related Topics
Senergy
1030
XRD Weight % to Volume % Conversion

Mineral Solver
11.1.1.1 XRD Weight % to Volume % Conversion
XRD Weight % to Volume % Conversion

Core X-ray diffraction mineral analysis data is usually provided by core laboratories in weight
percent of the dry fraction of the rock. In order for this data to be used in the Mineral Solver
module it should be converted into a wet volume percent. This conversion is performed here.
The conversion is controlled by the following equation :
Wet Vol % = (Dry Weight %) x (1 Porosity) x (Rock Grain Density) / (Mineral Grain Density)
The Rock Grain Density and Porosity can be taken from the routine core analysis results. The
Mineral Grain Density will be fixed for a particular mineral and can be found in the standard Log
chart book reference tables ( See Useful Links). The Porosity part of this correction is usually
the most important input and, if the Mineral Grain Density is not known exactly - for example in
clay, then a good estimate is generally quite satisfactory.
The user must load XRD weight % curves, for example, from an XRD analysis results
spreadsheet, as illustrated below, together with the Grain Density (GDen) and Porosity (CPor)
curves.
1031
Senergy
In the Dry Weight to Volume Conversion tab, the user sets up the XRD mineral Weight %
curves and the appropriate Porosity and Grain Density curves and fills in the names for the
output Mineral Volume Curves. The Input Mineral Density values for many common minerals
are stored in an external file, MINDEF.PAR, located in the IP program directory. The user has
three options for filling in the Mineral Density data:
You can either;
Take the presented default density value for a mineral, or
Manually type in a new value for an existing mineral, or
If the mineral is not in the list, type in an appropriate density value.
The Pre -Processor settings can be saved to an external Mineral Solver Preprocessor ASCII
file (.mpp) for later recall.
Senergy
1032
Click the Run Tab button to execute the calculations.
Related Topics
Mineral Solver
11.1.2 Mineral Solver

The modelling interface to Mineral Solver consists of a window with 4 tabbed sections. These
are :
Curves - allows the user to set the input curves used for Sw calculations and the names of
the output curves which are generated for each separate model and for the Combined
Model.
Parameters - contains input data which are mainly used for Sw calculations, with the
1033
Senergy
parameters arranged on sub-tabs listed on a zone by zone basis. The tab also allows the
user to set options for the neutron and sonic equations.
Models - sets up the different Mineral Models used in the interpretation.
Mixings - sets up the different Mixing Models that can be used to generate the final
Combined Result model.
Related Topics
Mineral Solver
11.1.2.1 Define Mineral Solver Curves
The Curves Tab is used to define the Input and Output Curves to be used in the Mineral Solver
Module.
Senergy
1034
Input curves
The input Temperature curve is used to convert the input resistivity parameters, like Rw and
Rmf, to their downhole values.
The input Rt and Rxo curves are used to calculate Sw and Sxo. If these curves are not entered,
it is still possible to calculate Sxo inside the model using an Rxo conductivity curve or an EPT
TPL curve. If no Sw can be calculated, then Sw is assumed to be 1.0 and the Sxo result must
also be 1.0, unless the OBM ? option (on the Parameters - Sw Logic sub-tab) is turned on.
Checking the OBM ? option forces Sxo <= Sw.
A No Calculation flag curve can be used to turn off calculations over certain zones. When the
input Flag curve is any value, other than Zero or Null Value (-999), then no calculations
are made over this depth level. In such No Calculation zones, the water saturation curve
results are set to 1.0, porosity curves to 0.0 and mineral volumes to 0.0. This can be useful if
zones where no analysis is possible have been flagged using a different IP module and the user
just wants to turn off the module over these zones. An example for use would be over coal beds
which have been picked using the interactive curve splice.
Output Curves
The output curves are created for each Model and for the Combined Model. No Set names
should be included with the curve names. The output curves will automatically be put into the
appropriate curve Set for the model that is being run.
Some of the result curves are only calculated for particular water saturation equations, for use in
some of their special interactive plots. If a curve is not needed as an output, the user can delete
the curve name from the Output Curves list and it will not appear in the result curve Sets.
In addition to these output curves, each model will output the model mineral volumes and fluid
volumes and the reconstructed input curves (***_re) together with the input curve uncertainties
curves (***_me) minus error and (***_pe) plus-error, where *** is the input curve name.
Related Topics
Mineral Solver
Define Mineral Solver Curves
Define Mineral Solver Parameters
Define Mineral Solver Models
Define Mineral Solver Mixings
1035
Senergy
11.1.2.2 Define Mineral Solver Parameters
The Parameters tab is used to enter parameters for all Models. There are 5 tabbed pages for
entering the parameters. These are:
Zones / Mixings: The Zones/Mixings Tab defines the Zones Parameters for use in the Mineral
Solver Module.
Waters Clays: The Waters/Clays Tab defines the Parameters to be used in the Mineral
Solver for the Water and Clay Resistivity, Porosity and Temperature.
Sw Logic / Limits: The Sw Logic / Limits Tab defines the Saturation Parameters, Equations
and Limits for use in the Mineral Solver Module.
Sw Params:
Sonic /Neutron: The Sonic/Neutron Tab defines the Parameters for the Equation used to
calculate Sonic Porosity.
Column Edits
If the user wants to set all the parameters in one column of the Parameters screens to the same
value, then click in the Header Title box of the column. This will turn the column header box to
green as shown below. Now, any one parameter that is changed in that column will change all
the parameters in the column to this same value. To turn the column edit off, click the column
header again and its colour will return to grey. Column edits remain active while the well stays
loaded in memory. They have to be reset, if required, the next time the well is loaded. The
following shows a column edit turned on for the Rw parameter on the Waters Clays tab.
Related Topics
Mineral Solver
Senergy
1036
11.1.2.2.2 Define Zones/Mixings
The Zones/Mixings Tab defines the Zones Parameters for use in the Mineral Solver Module.
Zone Name : Optional zone name.

Zone Top :
Top of current zone.
Zone Bottom : Bottom of current zone.

Lock Zone : This column allows the user to lock zones within the module. After a zone has
been checked then in all the tabs that zone is grayed out.
Zone Mixing : Model mixing scheme to be used for this zone. Set up on the Mixings tab.
Mdl Merge Dist : If the Mdl Merge Dist parameter is not zero then a smooth transition
between the two models will be made where the transition will be the Mdl Merge Dist. For
example, if the Mdl Merge Dist is set to 2.0 in a 0.5 step Set then the transition will occur
over 4 samples. Assuming the transition is from Mdl1 to Mdl2 then the first depth step of the
transition will take 20% of the volumes from Mdl1 and add those to 80% of Mdl2. The second
step will take 40% of Mdl1 and 60 % of Mdl2. The third step will take 60% of Mdl1 and 40% of
Mdl2 and the fourth step will take 80% of Mdl1 and 20% of Mdl2.
Porosity, BVW, Sw, Sxo and Vcl along with mineral volume curves are transitioned between
models. The combined reconstructed curves will not be transitioned and will be as if the
Mdl Merge Dist is set to 0.0 (i.e. off). The Model_Num output curve will now be an array
curve with a X dimension as the number of models in the analysis. Each X dimension
represents the amount of contribution the model makes to the final result. The X columns
will be in the same order as the models are created.
The plot below shows three models being mixed to a final combined result. The Mix track shows
1037
Senergy
where each model is being used. The brown bars indicate the model being used. The Mdl
Merge Dist is set to 0.0 and no transitioning is used.
In the next example plot, shown below the Mdl Merge Dist is set to 2.0 and a 4 depth step
transitioning is used. The Mix track colours indicate the percentage amount of each model used at
a depth.
The Model_Num output curve displays the percentages of each model at a depth level. The
columns will always add up to 1.0 (100%) at each depth level.
The calculations are made by first setting each column in the array with either a 1 (model selected
at depth level) or 0 (model not selected). Then the columns are filtered one at a time using the Mdl
Merge Dist as the filter length and as a box filter. Finally, the array values are normalized at each
depth level so that they add up to 1.0.
Related Topics
Create a New Zone
Senergy
1038
Define Waters/Clays
Define Sw Logic/Limits
Define Sw Params
11.1.2.2.3 Define Waters/Clays
The Waters/Clays Tab defines the Parameters to be used in the Mineral Solver for the Water and
Clay Resistivity, Porosity and Temperature.
Rw : Formation water resistivity.

Rw Temp :
Temperature associated with Rw; Temperature units are set in the Temp.
input Units box at the bottom of the Parameters window. The program will convert the Rw
to formation temperature using the entered temperature curve. If the Rw Temp field is blank
then the Rw will be assumed to be at formation temperature, and no conversion will be
performed.
Rmf : Mud filtrate resistivity.
Rmf Temp : Temperature associated with Rmf; Temperature units are set in the Temp.
input Units box at the bottom of the Parameters window. The program will convert the Rmf
to formation temperature using the entered temperature curve. If Rmf Temp field is blank
then the Rmf will be assumed to be at formation temperature, and no further conversion will
be performed.
1039
Senergy
Rw bound : Clay-bound-water resistivity. Used in the Dual Water saturation equation

option. The value can be estimated from the Rw apparent curve in the Shaly wet sections.
Rw bound can be adjusted to give 100% Sw in these zones.
RwbTemp : Temperature associated with Rw bound; Temperature units are set in the
Temp. input Units box at the bottom of the Parameters window. The program will convert
Rw bound to formation temperature using the entered temperature curve. If Rwb Temp is
blank then Rw bound will be assumed to be at formation temperature, and no further
conversion will be performed.
Rmf bound : Clay-bound-water resistivity in the flushed zone. Used in the Dual Water
saturation equation option. Normally the same as Rw bound but it can be different due to
the different response of the micro-resistivity curve to the deep resistivity curve in Shaly
zones. The value can be estimated from the Rmf apparent curve in the Shaly wet
sections. Rmf bound can be adjusted to give 100% Sxo in these zones.
RmfbTemp : Temperature associated with Rmf bound; Temperature units are set in the
Temp. input Units box at the bottom of the Parameters window. The program will convert
Rmf bound to formation temperature using the entered temperature curve. If Rmfb Temp is
blank, then Rmf bound will be assumed to be at formation temperature, and no further
conversion will be performed.
Res Clay :
Resistivity of the Clay. Used for the Simandoux, Modified Simandoux and
Indonesian water saturation equations. Can be chosen on the resistivity / Vclay crossplot.
Rxo Clay :
Resistivity of the Clay seen by the micro-resistivity tool. Used for the
Simandoux, Modified Simandoux and Indonesian water saturation equations for

calculating Sxo. Normally the same as Res Clay, but could be different due to the different
response of the micro-resistivity curve to the deep resistivity curve in Shaly zones. Can be
chosen on the Rxo / Vclay crossplot.
PhiT Clay : Total porosity of the Clay. Must be entered and greater than 0 unless Bound
Water is part of the Mineral Model. PhiT Clay can be calculated from the mineral volumes
and output as an Output equation curve. This curve can then be entered as the PhiT Clay
parameter.
Related Topics
Create a New Zone
Define Waters/Clays
Senergy
1040
Define Sw Params
11.1.2.2.4 Define Sw Logic/Limits
The Sw Logic / Limits Tab defines the Saturation Parameters, Equations and Limits for use in the
Mineral Solver Module.
Saturation (Sat) Equation :

Saturation equation. Used for calculation of Sxo and Sw. The following equations are available:
Archie
1/Rt = Phi**m.Sw**n / (a.Rw)
Archie PhiT
1/Rt = PhiT**m.Sw**n / (a.Rw)
Same as Archie except PhiT used instead of Phie.
Simandoux
1/Rt = Phi**m.Sw**n / (a.Rw) + Vcl.Sw / Rcl
Modified Simandoux
1/Rt = Phi**m.Sw**n / (a.Rw.(1-Vcl)) + Vcl.Sw / Rcl
Indonesian (Poupon-Leveaux)
1/Rt**.5 = ((Phi**m/(a.Rw))**.5 + Vcl**(1-Vcl/2)/Rcl**.5 ).Sw**(n/2)
Dual Water
1041
Senergy
1/Rt = PhiT**m.SwT**n/a.(1/Rw + Swb/SwT(1/Rwb-1/Rw))

Juhasz
1/Rt = PhiT**m.SwT**n.(1+Bn.Qvn/SwT)/(a.Rw)
Qvn = Vcl*PhiClay / PhiT
Bn = B normalized, entered parameter
Waxman-Smits
1/Rt = PhiT**m.SwT**n.(1+B.Qv/SwT)/(a.Rw)
B = entered parameter or calculated from T and Rw
Qv = a / PhiT + b
where a and b are entered parameters.
Qv can also be entered as a fixed parameter or an input curve.
Sw Method :
Method for Sw calculation. Options are :
Rt : Sw calculated from Rt resistivity input curve.
Min Model : Sw will be calculated from the mineral model. It is assumed that the model will
output Sw ((1-Hydrocarbon Volume un-invaded zone) / Total Fluid volume). If the model
does not output an Sw, then Sw will be 1.0.
No Calc. : If set then Sw calculations will not be made. The following curves will be set to a
null value: Sw, Swu, SwT, SwTu and BVW. The Sxo Limit logic will not be used. The No
Calc options are designed to solve models where either no Rt curve is available (eg. cased
holes) or models where no hydrocarbons are wanted./
Sxo Method :
Method for Sxo calculation. Options are :
Rxo : Sxo calculated from Rxo resistivity input curve.
Min Model : Sxo will be calculated from the mineral model. It is assumed that the model will
output Sxo ((1-Hydrocarbon Volume) / Fluid volume). If the model does not output an Sxo, then
Sxo will be 1.0.
Inv Fac: If the Sxo Method is set to Inv Fac (invasion factor) then This is used to calculate
Sxo when no Sxo device is available. For water based mud Sxo = (Sw + InvasionFactor) / (1 InvasionFactor). For Oil based mud Sxo = InvasionFactor.
No Calc. : If set then no Sxo calculations will be made. The following curves will be set to null
values: Sxo, Sxou, SxoT, SxoTu, BVWsxo. The No Calc options are designed to solve
Senergy
1042
models where either no Rt curve is available (eg. cased holes) or models where no
hydrocarbons are wanted.
OBM ? : (Oil base mud ?) flag. If set to On then the following logic is applied:
Sxo must be less than or equal to Sw. Invasion factor logic with OBM assumes that Sxo <=
Invasion factor. Therefore if the Invasion factor is set at 0.5 then Sxo will be the minimum of
0.5 or Sw. The default value is 0.5.
Sw Sxo Inv Logic : This sets the Sw Sxo invasion logic. By default this is set to true.
When checked on Sxo >= Sw in Water Based Mud and Sxo <= Sw in Oil Based Mud.
When un-checked this logic is disabled along with the Sxo Limit logic. Overall, this logic can
be used to model complicated invasion where the normal relationship between Sxo and Sw no
longer holds true. An example of the could be situations where the OBM breaks down and the
water fraction in the OBM invades.
m vari wth Vcl : Variable cementation factor m with Vcl flag. Used for bad-hole with the Vcl
cut-off. If set to On and If Vcl > Vcl cut-off then
m = m*10**(Vcl-Vcl cut-off).
This has the effect of removing any hydrocarbons in zones of high clay content.
Vcl cut-off : Vclay cut-off as a decimal fraction. If Vcl > Vcl cut-off and m vari wth Vcl flag
is set then;
m = m*10**(Vcl-Vcl cut-off)
Sxo Limit ? : Limit Sxo flag. If set to On then Sxo < Sw**SxoLimit.
Sxo Limit : Sxo limit exponent. If the Sxo limit flag is set, then Sxo < Sw**SxoLimit. The
default value is 0.2.
Invasion factor : Invasion factor. This is used to calculate Sxo when no Sxo device is
available. For water based mud Sxo = (Sw + InvasionFactor) / (1 + InvasionFactor). For Oil
based mud Sxo = InvasionFactor.
Phi Sw Limit : When effective porosity PHIE < Phie Sw Limit value, Sw and SwT etc.. will
be set to 1.0 (100%).
Vcl Sw Limit : When Volume Wet clay VWCL > Vcl Sw Limit value, effective porosity
PHIE will be set to 0.0001, Sw, SwT etc... will be set to 1.0 (100%).
Swi Limit : The minimum value of Sw allowed. This limit is applied to the effective water
saturation Sw, if an effective Sw equation is used. The limit is applied to the total water
saturations if a total Sw equation is used. NOTE: this limit does not affect the SwU or SwTu
curves, just the Sw and SwT curves. If the Swi Limit has be used at a depth level then the
1043
Senergy
PhiFlag output curves is set at a value of 7.
Related Topics
Create a New Zone
Define Waters/Clays
Define Sw Params
11.1.2.2.5 Define Sw Params
m source : Source for Archie m factor. Options are :

Parameter:
Input from fixed parameter or enter an input curve.
Shell:
Calculate from the Shell formula m = 1.87 + 0.019 / Phie
m*:
m variable with Qv. Only available for Dual Water and W&S equations.
Rxo and Ept: A variable m is calculated from Rxo, using the Sxo calculated from the EPT
from the mineral model. The resultant m value is limited by the parameters min m value
and max m value.
m*:
Used only for the Waxman&Smits and Dual Water equations. A variable
m* is calculated.
Senergy
1044
m* = m + Cm(1.128 Y + 0.22 (1-e**(-17.3Y))) Waxman-Smits

m* = m + Cm(0.258 Y + 0.20 (1-e**(-16.4Y))) Dual Water
Y = Qv PhiT / (1 - PhiT)
where Cm is an input parameter
Qv = a/PhiT + b
where a and b are entered parameters. Qv can also be entered as an input curve.
n source : Source for Archie n factor. Options are :
Parameter :
Input from fixed parameter or enter an input curve.
Rxo and Ept : A variable m is calculated from Rxo, using the Sxo calculated from the EPT
from the mineral model. n is set equal to the resultant m plus the parameter m plus value.
n = m + mPlus
a factor : Archie equation a factor / tortuosity factor.
m exponent : Archie m factor or cementation factor. Use when m source parameter is set
to parameter.
n exponent : Archie n factor or saturation exponent. Use when n source parameter is set to
parameter.
min m value : minimum m value when m is calculated from Rxo and Ept.
max m value : maximum m value when m is calculated from Rxo and Ept.
m plus value : addition to variable m to calculate n. Used when n source is set to Rxo and
Ept. n = m + mPlus.
B fact Juhasz :
B factor (equivalent conductance of clay cations) in the Juhasz Waxman-Smits equation.
Default 1.0 meq/ml
Can be set interactively using the Cwa / Qvn crossplot.
B fact W&S :
B factor (equivalent conductance of clay cations) in the Waxman-Smits equation.
If left blank then this is calculated from formation temperature and Rw.
Qv :
Qv factor for Waxman-Smits or Dual Water (variable m*) equation can be a fixed parameter
or an input curve.
Qv can be calculated from the mineral volumes and output as an Output equation curve. This
curve can then be entered as the Qv parameter.
If left blank then Qv is calculated from :
Qv = a / PhiT + b
1045
Where a and b are the entered Qv a and b constant parameters.

a and b can be selected interactively from the 1/PhiT QvApp crossplot.
Qv a Const :
The a Constant in the Qv equation :
Qv = a / PhiT + b
Used in the Waxman-Smits Sw equation.
Qv b Const :
The b Constant in the Qv equation :
Qv = a / PhiT + b
Cm* :
Used in the m* equation to vary the weighting factor of the variable m*. Default is 1.0.
m* = m + Cm(0.258 Y + 0.2 0(1 - e**(-16.4Y))) Dual Water
m* = m + Cm(1.128 Y + 0.22 (1 - e**(-17.3Y))) Waxman-Smits
Related Topics
Create a New Zone
Define Waters/Clays
Define Sw Params
Senergy
Senergy
1046
11.1.2.2.6 Define Sonic/Neutron
The Sonic/Neutron Tab defines the Parameters for the Equation used to calculate Sonic
Porosity.
Sonic Equ : Equation used for calculating sonic porosity. Options are :
Wyllie time average equation
Hunt Raymer equation
Sonic Cp : Wyllie equation compaction factor. Default 1.0
Neu Form Sal : Neutron formation salinity correction flag. Set to On if you want the program
to make formation salinity corrections. The formation salinity correction depends on true
porosity and water saturation. If set to Off then the neutron water hydrogen index will be set
to 1.0. If the neutron tool has already had formation salinity corrections applied, then
un-check this option. It is better to have the program perform the salinity correction, since
it will take into account water saturation in the flushed zone. This parameter will have no
effect if the Neutron Water HI is not set to Auto.
Neu Log Cont : Neutron logging contractor. Select the appropriate contractor from the dropdown list.
Neu Tool Type : Neutron tool type. Select appropriate tool type from the drop-down list. If a
tool type cannot be found, and its response is significantly different to any other tool type, it is
possible for the user to create a new tool type and tool response parameter file. See
Porosity and Water Saturation module. This parameter will have no effect if the Neutron
mineral end points for Sand, Limestone and Dolomite are not set to Auto.
1047
Senergy
Related Topics
Create a New Zone
Define Waters/Clays
Define Sw Params
11.1.2.3 Define Mineral Solver Models
The Models tab is the main window for setting up the Mineral Models.
Models are created or viewed by clicking the left and right arrow buttons at the top left hand
corner of the Models window. Up to 20 models can be created and used together in a well.
Senergy
1048
The Model Name can be typed into the Name box. This is useful for reflecting the use of each
model. For example Main Sands, Bad Hole, Fulmar Sand, Reef etc, depending on the complexity
of the geological section in the well under analysis. If the Model Name is changed, the user is
prompted whether the long Set name should be changed to reflect the Model name.
The Result set box will display the Set name that the results from the model will be written to.
The Set can be selected from the drop-down menu or a new Set can be created by clicking the
Edit Sets button.
The Add Global Set Names window will display all the Set names in the current well and allow
the user to add a new Set name. The actual Set will only be created when the model Run button
is clicked. The Full name usually should reflect the model name and the Short Set name, the
model numbers. However, the user has full control over naming conventions.
The Model Grid
The Model grid is set up by specifying a set of minerals across the top row of the window and a
set of equations which are selected in the second-from-left-hand column in the window.
1049
Senergy
For each Mineral and Equation there will be an end-point parameter (the result of the equation if
the rock was composed 100% of that mineral). The grid can be visualized as setting up a matrix
of linear equations, each equation being of the form :
Y = Min1 x Vol1 + Min2 x Vol2 + Min3 x Vol3 + Min4 x Vol4 .
Where
Y
= Input tool value or fixed constant
Min1 - Min4 = Mineral end-point values for each mineral 1-4

Vol1 - Vol4
= Result volumes
Equation Columns (on the left hand side of the Models window)
1. Curve / Val : This is the Y value of the equation. Enter either an input curve name, or a
fixed value for constant, or, in the case of mineral volumes, the unity equation which
ensures that all mineral volumes, when modelled and summed, total 100%, or 1.
2. Equation : This is the Equation type. The Equation type is used to decide what sort of
logic to use for the equation. For example the non-linear equations are recognised by the
Equation type. NOTE: It is very important that this is set correctly, especially for
Density, Neutron, U, Sonic, EPT and the Conductivity equations. The equations are
explained in more detail in the Mineral Solver Equations and Methodology Section.
3. Eq. Mode : the Equation Mode options are selected from the drop-down list. They are:
Model - The equation is used in the model for solving the mineralogy.
<Limit - The equation is a limit equation. The results of the mineralogy must be less than the
input Curve / Val. This can be used for setting maximum limits for resultant minerals or fluids.
Senergy
1050
>Limit - The equation is a limit equation. The results of the mineralogy must be greater than
the input Curve / Val. This can be used for setting minimum limits for resultant minerals or
fluids.
Output - The equation is not used in the model, but the results of the mineralogy is used to
output a result curve. This can be used to output useful curves that can be used to QC the
interpretation (Grain Density) or intermediate curves that are needed to calculate Sws (Qv,
Total Clay porosity). It can also be used to create conventional logging curves that are missing
in a well (e.g. sonic, density etc).
4. Use : The Use column, if checked for an Equation row will mean that the equation will be
included in the model. If not checked, the equation will not be used. This is useful for
temporarily removing an equation from the model in order to see what effect this has on the
results.
5. Confidence : The equation Confidence sets the weighting factor for the equations. The
smaller the confidence number, the more the weight that will be attached to this
equation (exception to this is the resistivity equation). The values entered are in the units of
the equation. For example Density confidence would be in gm/cc, GammaRay in API units.
One can directly relate the confidence value to how accurate the reading of the tool is, in
terms of the response equation. Constant equations also have confidence numbers which
again relate to the weighting on these equations. It is possible to enter an input curve for the
equation confidence. This will allow the user to change the confidence for each database step
interval. This can be useful, for example, in badly washed-out hole, where the density equation
/ tool accuracy decreases markedly. Equation confidence curves can be created in other
modules in IP (e.g. User Formula).
6. Inv. Fact. : The Invasion Factor sets the invasion depth of the equation. A value of 1.0
means the equation reads in the flushed (Sxo) zone and will be effected by fluids in this zone.
A value of 0.0 means the equation reads in the un-invaded (Sw) zone. Values between 0 and 1
are possible and allows the equation to read partly in the flushed and partly in the un-invaded
zone. It is possible to enter a curve for the invasion factor. The curve must have values
between 0 and 1. This would allow the depth of invasion to be controlled at a level by level
basis.
Mineral Columns
A mineral is added to the grid by clicking in an empty cell in the top Mineral row of the grid.
Mineral parameters are then set up in the separate columns defined by the user. The Mineral,
Type, Shading and Use rows are described below:
1051
Senergy
1. Mineral : The Mineral row entries define a label for each mineral in a model. The mineral
name is used for picking default properties for mineral end-points from the default tables. The
Mineral name can be selected from the drop-down list or a name can be manually typed in.
Names that are not in the drop-down list will not have any default end-point values defined.
2. Type : Type can only be selected from the drop-down list. It can have values of :
Water Sxo - flushed zone water
Bound Water
Hyd. Sxo - flushed zone hydrocarbon
Matrix
Wet Clay or
Dry Clay
Water Sw - un-invaded zone water
Hyd. Sw - un-invaded zone hydrocarbon
This field is very important in calculating the Model results. The mineral Type is used for
calculating porosity, water saturation and clay volume.
NOTE: The user cannot mix Wet Clay and Dry Clay types in the same model or Wet Clay
and Bound Water.
This field is also used for telling the program whether a fluid is in the flushed zone Water Sxo
and Hyd. Sxo or is in the un-invaded zone Water Sw and Hyd. Sw. It is not necessary to
include un-invaded fluids in the model unless one of the input equations is set to read in the
un-invaded zone (Inv. Fact. < 1.0).
3. Shading : This is used for the default Log Plots. It allows the user to specify how each
mineral will appear on the interactive log plot displays.
4. Use : The Use row, if checked for a mineral column, will mean that the mineral will be
included in the model. If not checked, the mineral will not be calculated. This is useful for
temporarily removing minerals to see what effect this has on the results.
5. Result : The Mineral Volume output curve name.
Mineral End-Points
The Mineral End-Point parameters need to be completed for all minerals and all equations.
Senergy
1052
Certain end-point parameters can be automatically calculated. If this is possible, then the
parameter entry cell will have a blue background colour. If Auto is entered then the parameter will
be automatically calculated. If a value is entered then that actual value will be used. In order for
the program to use the non-linear equations for the Neutron curve, the Calcite, Quartz and
Dolomite parameters must be left at Auto.
For the water minerals the Auto option will mean that the density and HI of the water will be
calculated from the entered Rmf value (in the Parameter table) corrected for current depth and
temperature. For OBM or un-invaded zone water the value will be calculated from the Rw
parameter.
If the parameter entry cell background colour is green, then this will be a hydrocarbon-entry cell
and the entered value should be in down-hole true hydrocarbon density. The program will convert
the true hydrocarbon density to its tool response equivalent (i.e. for density - electron density and
for neutron - hydrogen index).
Any end-point value can be entered as a curve. This would allow Trend curves created by the
Interactive Trend curves module, to be used to vary parameters on a level by level basis.
New Models
By selecting the Equation type first, all the default mineral end-points will be automatically
entered in the table when Minerals are selected. The program will also try to look up an
appropriate input Curve Name for each equation. If a curve is not found, the user will have to
manually select the input curve. The Defaults for this list can be changed by editing the
MINEQDEF.PAR file found in the IP program directory or by selecting the menu item Tools
Defaults
Edit Mineral Solver Mineral Equation Defaults which launches the file in the
WINDOWS Notepad.
The Mineral Equation Defaults (MINEQDEF.PAR) and Mineral System Defaults (MINDEF.
PAR) files work together and allow the user to define new minerals with new default values for
1053
Senergy
the input equations.

Mineral names can be selected from a drop-down box in the topmost, Mineral, row of the Model
grid or the name can be typed in. The drop-down list is activated by clicking in a Mineral cell.
When the user highlights a Mineral and releases the mouse button, the Mineral is selected and its
default properties populate the appropriate column in the Model grid.
The minerals displayed in the drop-down box are pre-defined with default parameters for some
tools. The mineral defaults list can be changed or added to, by editing the MINDEF.PAR file
found in the IP program directory or by selecting the menu item Tools
Defaults
Edit
Mineral Solver Mineral System Defaults.

If the user wants to delete a line then changing the Equation type to blank will do this.
Selecting a Depth Interval

The Depth interval on the Models tab is used to select the depths to run the current model over,
when the Run Model button is clicked. The user inputs a top depth and bottom depth into the
appropriate boxes or uses the (...) button to select depths from a Parameter or Zone /Tops Set.
Senergy
1054
These Model depths will be ignored when the Combined Model is created using the Run button
at the bottom of the Mineral Solver window. In this case the intervals are taken from the Mineral
Solver parameter zones.
Options
When the Options button is clicked, the following window is launched. This screen allows the
user to change various settings for how the model is run and results displayed. The separate
panels are described below:
1055
Senergy
Water Saturations
If the Automatically Add Sxo equation into Model is checked (default) then the Sxo equation
will be added into the model at run time. The Sxo equation looks like the following :
0 = (Sxo-1)Vwater + Sxo *Vhydrocarbon1 + Sxo * Vhydrocarbon2 + ...
Where
Vwater
: Volume of water flushed zone
Vhydrocarbon1 : Volume of first entered hydrocarbon flushed zone

Vhydrocarbon2 : Volume of second entered hydrocarbon flushed zone
Sxo
: Calculated from entered Rxo curve using the selected Sw equation
NOTE: if No Calc has been set in the Parameters Sw Logic sub tab Sxo Method then do
not check this option.
If the Automatically Add Sw equation into Model is checked then the Sw equation will be
Senergy
1056
added into the model at run time. This is used if un-invaded fluids have been added into the
model. If no un-invaded fluid are used then checking this will have no effect.
The Sw equation looks like the following :
0 = (Sw-1)VwaterU + Sw *VhydrocarbonU1 + Sw * VhydrocarbonU2 + ...
Where
VwaterU
: Volume of water un-invaded zone
VhydrocarbonU1
: Volume of first entered hydrocarbon un-invaded zone
VhydrocarbonU2
: Volume of second entered hydrocarbon un-invaded zone
Sw
: Calculated from entered Rt curve using the selected Sw equation
NOTE: if No Calc has been set in the Parameters Sw Logic sub tab Sw Method then do not
check this option.
The Sw and Sxo equation confidence can be set using the relevant boxes. The default value of
0.01 (1 saturation unit) gives good results normally.
Hydrocarbon Densities
By checking the boxes in this section the user can enter true hydrocarbon densities on the
mineral end-point parameter grid. For the neutron tool this will also allow a gas excavation factor
correction to be made.
Model Plot Options (Applies to all Models)

Display reconstructed resistivity curves : if checked, this option will add two more tracks
to the Model Plot, which will contain the input Rt and input Rxo curves with the
reconstructed Rt and Rxo curves superimposed. These reconstructions are not part of the
main equation solver and do not indicate how well the model end-point parameters are set
up. However, they do indicate how well the water saturation equation works, especially in the
water zones. In the hydrocarbon zones the curves should reconstruct perfectly.
Display reconstructed Sxo and Sw curves : if checked, then on the Model Plot, tracks will be
added to show the reconstructed Sw and Sxo curves superimposed on the model input Sxo
and Sw curves. These tracks will only be shown if the Automatically Add Sxo and/or Sw into
Model options are on. Normally the curves will overlay perfectly. However, if the user has
relaxed the Sxo and/or Sw equation confidences then there could be slight differences
between the input and reconstructed curves.
Display valid but unselected input curves and their model reconstructions : if the user has
entered an equation as part of a model, but has chosen not to use the equation (the Use cell
is not checked), IP will continue to reconstruct the input equation / curve if this option is
1057
Senergy
checked and display the results on the Model Plot. The curve reconstruction track for such a
curve will not have the yellow shading seen on the curves that are actually used in the
Model.
Display output equation results : if checked, a new log curve track for each output equation
will be added to the Model Plot.
Display Constant and limit equation results : if checked, this option will add a curve track
to the Model Plot for each constant and/or limit equation in the model. Each track will
display a straight line (i.e. a constant value) where a limit is reached.
Display invaded zone fluids in separate track : if checked a track will be created to the
right of the Model track and it will contain the invaded fluid porosity curves. These are the
same fluid porosities that are shown in the model volumes track except if the Display
Movable fluids plot in Model results track option has been checked on.
Display Un-invaded zone fluids in separate track : if checked and un-invaded fluids are
used then a track will be created to the right of the Model track and it will contain the uninvaded fluid porosities.
Display Movable fluids plot in Model results track : if checked the model results track,
rather than containing the mineral and fluid volumes in the flushed zone, will contain a
movable fluid plot to the right side of the minerals volumes. The movable fluid plot will
contain Phie, BVW and BVWSxo.
The following example shows the separate tracks for invaded and un-invaded fluids plus the
movable oil display in the Model track.
Senergy
1058
Save, Load and Delete Models

The Save Model button will save an individual model to a disk file. This can be useful for
moving models between wells or for copying models when creating a new model.
The Load Model button will reload a saved model and replace the current model with its
values. There are two options from where to pickup saved models :
Project Model This will present a dialog to select a model from the project well directory.
Default Model This will present a dialog to select a model from the default Mineral Solver
1059
Senergy
model area. This is a directory (..\Mineral Solver Models) found in the IP program directory.
The user may add models to this directory by using the Save Model button and selecting
this directory to save to. This directory allows users to save their common models for reuse
in other wells or projects.
The Delete Model button deletes the current model.

Sets of models and their Mixings can be saved though the Load and Save Parameter Sets
button. This will save everything associated with the Mineral Solver set-up for the well. If
model Sets need to be copied between wells, the correct way to achieve this is by using the
Load /Save Parameter Sets functionality, NOT by using the Save Model and Load Model
buttons.
Senergy
1060
Related Topics
Mineral Solver
11.1.2.4 Define Mineral Solver Mixings
The Mixings tab allows the user to create sets of rules on how to combine Models to create the
final Combined Model Results.
Further details on the Mixings functionality is found under the Combined Model Results
section of this document.
Cased Hole Calculations

If the mineral solver is to be used for cased hole calculations using sigma curves then the
following parameters should be set.
Curves tab
Input Curves - Rt and Rxo curves should be absent.
Parameters tab - Sw Logic sub-tab
1061
Senergy
Sw Method is set to No Calc

Sxo Method is set to Min Model.
The saturation is then calculated from the input sigma curve in the model.
Parameters tab - Waters Clays sub-tab

Rmf should still be entered as this will be used to calculate salinities, which are used for
automatically calculated parameters for neutron logs.
Models tab
From the Options button the Model Options window can be accessed. Turn off the
Automatically Add Sxo equation into Model and Automatically Add Sw equation into
Model options.
The output curves Sxo and SxoT will be the saturations calculated by the model. The difference
being the clay bound water. Sw and SwT will be absent since the Sw Method is set to No Calc.
Related Topics
Mineral Solver
11.1.3 Plot the Mineral Solver Results

The interactive functions enabled in both the log plot and the cross plot depend on the settings in
the zonal parameters. Most of the special interactivity is concerned with the type of water
saturation equation selected. Therefore, if the user changes the water saturation equation it is
best to recreate the interactive plot by re-clicking the Make Plot button from the Mineral Solver
Dialog.
Interactive Plot: The Make Plot button on the Models tab of the Mineral Solver Dialog creates
a Log Plot from the parameters defined in the Mineral Solver Dialog.
Interactive Crossplots: The Crossplot button on the Models tab allows the creation of
crossplots of any of the input curves with the mineral end-points displayed on them. Clicking
the Crossplot button will display the follow window. The user can select a crossplot and
then select the mineral end-points to be displayed on the crossplot. A maximum of 8 mineral
end-points can be displayed on each crossplot.
Senergy
1062
Combined Model Results: When the user clicks the Run button at the bottom of the main
Mineral Solver window, the Combined Model results are calculated. The results will be
stored in the Combined Models Result Set (Msol).
Related Topics
Mineral Solver
11.1.3.1 Interactive Plot
The Interactive Plot is created by clicking the Make Plot button to the right of the Options
button. The Make Plot button at the bottom of the page will create the Combined Model plot.
The interactive functions enabled in the log plot depend on the settings in the zonal parameters.
Most of the special interactivity is concerned with the type of water saturation equation selected.
Therefore, if the user changes the water saturation equation it is best to recreate the interactive
plot by re-clicking the Make Plot button. See Also: Manage the Interactive Log Plot
Track 2: Zones
1063
Senergy
The Zone track is used to display the current zonation used in the interpretation. This track
allows the user to create and delete zones and to move zone tops.
To create a new zone by splitting a current zone, right mouse click in the zone track at the
depth for the split and choose Split Zone from the pop-up menu .
To delete a zone, choose Delete Zone from the pop-up menu.
Zone tops and bottoms can be moved by placing the cursor on the top of a zone in the zone
track and, with the left mouse button, drag the top to a new position. It is possible to have
gaps between zones. To remove a gap, drag the bottom of the zone above a gap to below
the top of the zone below the gap.
Track 3: Resistivity
The Resistivity track will have the Rxo and Rt input curves displayed.
If the Indonesian, Simandoux or modified Simandoux equations are selected then the Clay
parameter interactive lines will be displayed. The pop-up menu will also allow a Wet Clay Volume
/ Resistivity crossplot, where the value of clay resistivity (Res Clay) can be chosen interactively.
Also available are Porosity / Resistivity crossplots (Pickett plots) where Rw and m (cementation
factor) can be changed interactively. The text boxes at the base of the Pickett crossplot list the
Rw at formation temperature (Rw Form Temp) as well as the Rw value that is entered into the
Parameter table, which could be at a different temperature (default 60 degF).
Senergy
1064
Track 4: Salinity
Rw Apparent and Rmf Apparent are automatically calculated from the Phi Total, resistivity
curves, and a and m parameters. The resulting resistivity is converted to the temperature used
for the Rw or Rmf parameter (Rw or Rmf temp. parameter). The displayed interactive lines are
Rw and Rmf. If the Dual Water model is selected, then RwB (Rw bound) and RmfB (Rmf
bound) interactive parameter lines will also be displayed.
If the Juhasz / W&S equation is chosen then a Cwapp / Qvn crossplot will be added to the track
pop-up menu.
1065
Senergy
If the Waxman-Smits equation is chosen, then a PhiT_recp (1/PhiT) / Qvapp crossplot will be
added to the track pop-up menu.
Senergy
1066
Track 5: Saturations
The Saturation track will contain the calculated SwU and SxoU curves, which are the unlimited
curves and can have values greater than 1.0. The Sw and Sxo curves will be clipped to 1.0
(100%). The xxxU curves are good for visualizing, in the water zones, how much over the 100%
line Sw and Sxo are being calculated. Thus, it is possible, by adjusting Rw, to arrive at
statistically 100% Sw in a water zone.
The SxoU curve has no logic limits applied to it. Hence it could be less than Sw in a WaterBased Mud system, or greater than Sw in an Oil-Based Mud system.
NOTE: Replace SxoU and SwU with Sxo and Sw for any final plots.
Track 6: Porosity
The Porosity track will contain the Total and Effective porosity calculations plus a moveable-oil
plot (BVW and BVWSXO).
Track 7: Model Volumes Results

The model volumes will be displayed. The shading used will be the same as that set up in the
model grid.
The hydrocarbon and water displayed will be the flushed-zone volumes . The water volume may
not exactly match the BVWSXO curve. This is due to the Sxo and BVWSXO curves being
calculated after the model calculations from the input Rxo curve. However, they should be very
close.
Track 8: Error
The Model Normalized Total Error curve (TotErr) is displayed. Error values greater than 2.0
are displayed in red. This can be used by the user to visualize how well the results reconstruct.
The PhiFlg curve will display any error or logic flags output by the calculations. Curve values and
their meaning are shown in the equations and methodology section. The user needs only to be
concerned if the PhiFlg curve value is non-zero.
Track 9+ Curve Reconstructions

There will be one track per input curve equation. Constant equations are not displayed. The track
contains the original input curve plus, in yellow shading, the Confidence Band for the curve. The
1067
Senergy
Confidence Band width is set on the Model grid. The reconstructed curve is displayed in red
colour. The closer the reconstructed curve is to the original curve, the better the Model and the
results fit and the lower the Total Error will become.
Track Rt Reconstruction
If the Display reconstructed resistivity curves on model plots option is checked on the
Options page, then two extra tracks will be displayed. One for Rt and one for Rxo. Two curves
will be displayed in each track: the original resistivity and the reconstructed resistivity. Yellow
shading will show any differences between the curves. Note that there are no confidence shading
associated with these curves since they are not part of the Mineral model.
Related Topics
Interactive Plot
Interactive Crossplots
Combined Model Results
11.1.3.2 Interactive Crossplots
The Crossplot button on the Models tab allows the creation of crossplots of any of the input
curves with the mineral end-points displayed on them. Clicking the Crossplot button will display
the follow Dialog.
The user can select a crossplot and then select the mineral end-points to be displayed on the
Senergy
1068
crossplot. A maximum of 8 mineral end-points can be displayed on each crossplot. NOTE: The
Select Minerals panel will only list those minerals which can be displayed on the selected
crossplot. Mineral end-points which are entered as Auto (blue shaded boxes in the Model grid) or
hydrocarbon parameters that are entered as true down-hole densities (green shaded boxes in
the Model grid) will not be included in the Select Minerals list.
The Swap Axes check box allows the user to interchange X and Y axes in the crossplot set-up
window.
The Interactive Run Check box allows the user to turn off the automatic re-running of the model
each time an endpoint parameter is changed on the crossplot. For slow computers or
complicated models it is better to make all the changes needed to the parameters then run the
model manually at the end.
The crossplot will show the mineral end-points as red circles, labelled with the mineral name. By
left clicking on the mineral point the user can drag the point to a new position. When the mouse
button is released the model will automatically be re-run and the user can evaluate the results.
Multiple crossplots can be displayed at the same time. Each one has to be set up as described
1069
Senergy
above. Mineral end-points that are displayed in different crossplots will move simultaneously
when the user moves any of the single points.
Once the interactive points have been moved then redo/undo arrows appear in the top left-hand
edge of the crossplot. These allow the user to go back to the original positions of the mineral endpoints.
Related Topics
Interactive Plot
11.1.3.3 Combined Model Results
When the user clicks the Run button at the bottom of the main Mineral Solver window, the
Combined Model results are calculated. The results will be stored in the Combined Models
Result Set (Msol). The user can select the Combined Models Result Set from the drop-down
box or create a new Set by clicking on the Edit Sets button.
If the user has checked the Auto Update Cutoff and Summation (MS) option in the Advanced
Interpretation menu then each time the Mineral Solver module is run the Cutoff and
Summations module (if set-up) will be run as well.
The Combined Model Results are created zone by zone. The zones are those set up in the
Parameters tab.
Senergy
1070
The program looks at the Mixings model for each zone and then runs all the individual models
needed for the mixing rules. The Combined Model results for the zone are then created using
the mixing rules for the zone.
For an explanation on how the program deals with transitions between models see the Mineral
Solver chapter and the Zones / Mixings tab.
Tab 4 (Mixings)
The Mixings tab allows the user to create sets of rules on how to combine models to create the
final Combined Model results.
Mixings are created or viewed by clicking the left and right arrow buttons at the top of the
window, next to the Mixing label. Up to 5 different sets of mixing rules can be created and
applied in an interpretation.
1071
Senergy
The Name box allows the user to name each Mixing. This name is used to identify and set the
Zone Mixing on the Parameters tab - Zones / Mixings sub-tab. The Default Model name must
be selected from the drop-down list at the top of the Mixings tab This list contains all the models
that have been created in the Models tab. The Default Model is used if all the mixings rules fail
to come up with a model for a depth step.
If a single, constant model is required over a zone then the only thing that needs to be set is the
Default Model. The other rules can be left blank.
Mixing Rules
For each depth level in a zone the program applies the mixing rules sequentially from the top of
the list downwards and stops when any statement becomes true. The model selected will be the
one for that rule. If no rule evaluates to true then the default model will be used.
The Columns in the Mixings grid are described below:
Column 1. Use - To have the program evaluate the row then a tick must be entered in a row.
Column 2. Value / Curve / Formula - the user can input either;
A fixed value, or
A curve name must be entered. The curve can be any curve in the database and can
include the output of a model. Since all the models are evaluated before the final Combined
Model results are made using the mixings, then a model result curve is perfectly valid.
However, do not include a result curve from the Combined Model set, or
A Formula, which can be typed into the appropriate grid cell.
Column 3. Func -This is selected from the drop-down box and can be one of the standard
logic functions.
Column 4. Value / Curve / Formula - A fixed value, a curve name or a formula must be
entered.
Column 5. What to do - The user selects from the drop-down box either Then, and or or.
Then allows the selection of a model from the 6th column.
and joins this logic statement with the next line with the and logic.
or joins this logic statement with the next line with the or logic.
Senergy
1072
The lines are evaluated from the top down and when an or or and statement is found, the two
lines that are connected with the statement are evaluated before the next line is read. For
example, if we have three logic lines (Line1, Line2 Line3) :
Line1 or Line2 and Line3 : will evaluate true if Line3 is true and either Line1 or Line2 is true.
Line1 and Line2 or Line3 : will evaluate true if Line3 is true regardless whether Line1 or
Line2 is true.
Column 6. Model - The user must select a Model from the drop-down list if the previous
column was a Then statement.
Interactive Combined Model Plot

When the Make Plot button is clicked at the bottom of the screen an interactive Combined
Model plot is made. The user has a choice of No Reconstructed Curves or Include
Reconstructed Curves to make before the selected Combined Model plot is created.
The Combined Model plot has the same Resistivity, Salinity, Saturation and Porosity tracks as
the Single Model result plots. The same interactive line and water saturation parameter
crossplots are available as in the Single Model plot.
1073
Senergy
The results of each Model are displayed in separate tracks. The Mix track contains the
Model_Num output curve which is automatically created and put into the Combined Model Set.
The curve shows which model is used for the Combined Model results, on a level-by-level
basis. The values will correspond to the Model number in the Model tab.
The Error track will contain the Combined Model normalized total error curve plus the
combined PhiFlag curve.
Print
The Print button gives the user the following options.
If outputting to an external file, the file name will be the Parameter Set Name as entered on the
Mineral Solver window, with an extension of .txt.
The output file gives all the models, parameters and mixings used in the analysis.
Senergy
1074
Load / Save Parameter Sets

The Load / Save Parameter Sets button allows the user to save the full Mineral Solver
parameter Set into the database under a separate name or to a disk file. Saved parameter Sets
can also be recalled. See Parameter Set management.
The currently- displayed parameter Set is automatically saved into the well database when the
well is saved. To completely delete the current parameter Set use the Manage Zones/ Tops
Sets module, select the Mineral Solver parameter Set, called MinSolve, and click the Delete
button.
Related Topics
Interactive Plot
11.1.4 Mineral Solver Calibration

This functionality can be used to calibrate the mineral end-points using core data. The calibration
can be made from data from any wells currently loaded to the IP database. Discriminators can
be used to filter the data to be used in the calibration. The calibration is performed using multilinear regression and is made for each equation, separately. Certain parameters can be selected
as fixed and the regression will be run to find the best solution for the other, variable
parameters.
The Calibrate button on the Mineral Solver Dialog launches the MinSolve Model Calibration
window.
1075
Senergy
The Calibration window is arranged on 3 tabbed screens. These are :

Callibrate
Multi-well Select
Discriminators
Core X-ray diffraction mineral analysis data is usually provided by core laboratories in weight
percent of the dry fraction of the rock. In order for this data to be used in this module it should
be converted into a wet volume percent. This conversion can be made in the the
Preprocessor module.
The Rock Grain Density and Porosity can be taken from the routine core analysis results. The
Mineral Grain Density will be fixed for a particular mineral and can be found in the standard Log
chart book reference tables( See Useful Links). The Porosity part of this correction is usually
the most important input and, if the Mineral Grain Density is not known exactly - for example in
clay, then a good estimate is generally quite satisfactory.
Reset Button
The Reset button is used to re-set the minerals and equations back to the Model defaults. This
is useful if the model is changed (new mineral or new equation added) since the changes will not
be reflected in the calibration window until the Reset button is clicked.
NOTE : The Reset button will clear all input volume curve names.
Copy Parameters Button
Senergy
1076
The Copy Parameters button, when clicked, will transfer the selected mineral end-point values
back to the Model grid. The selected parameters are chosen by using the Use column and row
selectors. In this way it is possible to select each individual parameter. It is not necessary to
transfer all the parameters that were used in the regression Calculation.
Related Topics
Mineral Solver
11.1.4.1 Define the Calibration
The Calibrate grid is very similar to the Model set-up grid and it consists of a number of equations
arranged in rows down the grid and a number of mineral columns across the grid. It is not possible
to change either the number of equations or the number of minerals since these are selected from
the original Model grid. However, if the user changes the minerals or number of equations in the
Model grid then the Reset button on the Calibrate window will change the Calibrate grid to
conform to these changes.
NOTE: if Reset is selected, all input mineral volume curves will have to be re-entered.
If a mineral or equation is not required for the calibration, then this can be turned off by unchecking the Use box.
1077
Senergy
Equation Columns
1. Curve : Input equation result curve. Cannot be changed on this grid. This is picked up
automatically when the module is first run or the Reset button is clicked. The curve can be
changed on the Multi-well Select tab.
2. Use : If checked then the calibration will be run for the equation when the Calculate button
is clicked. It is also used to decide what end-point parameters are passed back to the Model
grid when the Copy Parameters button is clicked.
3. Corr Coeff : Displays the correlation (R2) coefficient of the regression. The field is noneditable.
4. Num Points : Displays the number of points used in the regression. The field is noneditable.
Mineral Rows
1. Mineral : This is the name of the mineral as displayed in the Model grid.
2. Curve / Val : The input curve name for this mineral is entered. This can also be entered on
the Multi-Well Select tab. It is also possible to enter a fixed-value volume for a mineral by
typing a number in this row. If the user leaves an input curve volume blank, then the program
will add up all the volumes from the other curves and assume the remainder belongs to the
blank input entry. It is only possible to leave one input curve blank. The units of the input
volume curves must be set as either Dec (V/V) or Percent % using the drop-down box on the
top left of the grid.
3. Use : If checked then this mineral will be used in the regression. If un-checked then all
parameter-end points for this mineral will be ignored. It is also used to decide what end-point
parameters are passed back to the Model grid when the Copy Parameters button is clicked.
4. Fixed / Var : By clicking in this row the user can change the option for each mineral from
Variable to Fixed and back again. When the option is Variable and the Calculate button is
clicked, the regression will return the calculated mineral end-point. When the mineral is set to
Fixed the user can manually enter the end-point value into the grid and the regression will use
this value as a fixed part of the equation. This allows the user to enter known end-points, for
example the density of fresh water at 1.0 gm/cc.
Related Topics
Define the Calibration
Senergy
1078
Select Multiple Wells

Define Calibration Discriminators
11.1.4.2 Select Multiple Wells
The Multi-well Select grid allows the the user to select input logs and mineral volume curves
from multiple wells. The user selects the Well from the drop-down list of wells loaded in memory
and then selects the compatible logs and mineral volume curves. The Top Depth and Bottom
Depth rows allow the user to select a specific part of a well to use for the calibration.
The first column of the grid will contain the well which is currently being evaluated with the
Mineral Solver module. Changing the curve names in the Logs section will automatically
change the names on the main Calibrate grid.
The Use row is used to decide which wells are to be used in the calibration. This allows the user
to quickly evaluate the influence of individual wells on the calibration results.
Related Topics
1079
Senergy
11.1.4.3 Define Calibration Discriminators
The Discriminator grid allows the user to apply more stringent filters to data that are to be used
in the model calibration. For example, if the user believed the core mineral volumes were not
accurate when the permeability was very low, then the discriminator shown above could be used
to select only those data where the permeability is greater than 0.1mD.
NOTE: If using log data from multiple wells, then any discriminator curve must be available in all
wells.
Calculate Button
When the Calculate button is clicked, a multiple linear regression is run for each equation line
that is selected (Use column ticked). The equation of regression is :
Input Curve = Min1 x Vol1 + Min2 x Vol2 + Min3 x Vol3 ..
Where
Min1, Min2, Min3
are the mineral end-point parameters that are solved for.
Vol1, Vol2, Vol3
are the input curve mineral volumes
For cases where the mineral end points are Fixed the equation is re-arranged so that the fixed
minerals are subtracted from the Input curve before the regression is run.
Notice that the difference between this equation and the normal multi-linear regression is that
there is no constant term in the result co-efficients.
By using the Use equation and Use mineral selections the user can work on one equation at a
time to get the optimum result. It may be necessary to fix several of the mineral end-points in
Senergy
1080
order to get a sensible result. Several iterations will normally be needed to obtain the optimum
result.
Related Topics
11.1.5 Mineral Solver Equations and Methodology

This chapter defines the Equations and Methodology used in the Mineral Solver Module.
Equation Solver: The linear-equation solver incorporated into this module comes from
Numerical Recipes (Cambridge University Press) and the technique used is Singular Value
Decomposition. This technique is very fast and stable. The equation solver solves a set of
normalized linear equations.
Equations: The entered equations can be used for four different uses or modes. The
equation mode (Eq. Mode) is selected on the model grid and can be one of the following;
Model, >Limit, <Limit or Output.
Limit Equations: Limit equations are used to control the maximum or minimum results for
individual minerals / fluids or groups of minerals / fluids. The program first solves the model
without any limit equations and then checks the limit equations to see if the result fits within
the limits. If the results fall outside a limit equation then this equation is added into the model
and a new solution is sought (see the flow diagram above). The limit equations are added
one at a time and the model is completely resolved before adding another equation. The
order that equations are added is the order that they are entered into the grid.
Output Equations: If the Eq. Mode is set to Output then the equation is not used in the
model to calculate mineral volumes but it is used to output a log curve that is created from
the result mineral volumes and the end point parameters for the Output equations. The
output curve name is set under the Curve / Val column.
Mineral Types: The Mineral Types, set from the drop-down menu, control how a mineral is
to be used to make the final results. It is very important that the correct Type is set.
Water Saturations: Water Saturations (Sw and Sxo) can either be calculated directly from
the model by setting the Sw Method and Sxo Method parameter in the parameter table or
by using one of the Sw equations below. It is recommended not to use the direct
method, since the water saturation equation used is limited to a modified Archie with n = m.
1081
Senergy
Iteration Loops: The input auto-calibrated end-point parameters and the Sxo equation need
the porosity and flushed-zone water saturation to be entered. To calculate the porosity and
Sxo, the mineral calculation needs to be solved. Hence, an iterative loop is used to solve the
results. The iteration loop continues until the difference between iterations in porosity and
Sxo are as follows:
Final Calculations: The Final Calculations for the Mineral Solver Module define the Bulk
Volume Water, the Bulk Volume Water Flushed Zone, the Rw Apparent, the Rmf Apparent
and the Apparent Water Conductivity Calculations.
Phi Flags: The output curve PHIFLAG is a logic flag curve. It can have one of the following
values, 2 (A Limit equation was used in the model results), 4 (Main linearization loop did not
converge after 20 iterations), 5 (Solver did not converge after 30 iterations), 6 (Sw curve set
to 1.0 due to Phi Sw Limit or Vcl Sw Limit parameter limits being reached), 7 (Sw limited to
Sw irreducible parameter) or 8 (Sw equation loop did not converge after 10 iterations). For a
normal execution of the program at any depth level, the PHIFLAG should be zero.
Related Topics
Mineral Solver
11.1.5.1 Mineral Solver Workflow
The main flow logic in Mineral Solver is shown below in the work flow diagram. The logic
consists of an iterative loop which is repeated until the porosity and Sw terms converge between
loops. This methodology allows for the solving of non-linear equations using a linear equation
solver. The non-linear equations are made linear by adjusting their input end-point mineral values
knowing what the porosity and water saturation values are.
The results of the process should be very similar to those obtained by non-linear solvers. The
advantages of this technique over the non-linear solver are speed and stability. Both techniques
use iterative processes to refine their results and find the best result. However this technique
keeps the iteration outside the pure mathematical manipulations where knowledge of what is
going on can be used to converge on the correct result many times faster. Non-linear solvers
Senergy
can also from time to time be extremely sensitive to the input initialization and may become
unstable.
1082
1083
Senergy
Related Topics
Mineral Solver Workflow
Equation Solver
Equations
Limit Equations
Output Equations
Mineral Types
Water Saturations
Iteration Loops
Final Calculations
PHIFlag
11.1.5.2 Equation Solver
The linear-equation solver incorporated into this module comes from Numerical Recipes
(Cambridge University Press) and the technique used is Singular Value Decomposition. This
technique is very fast and stable.
The equation solver solves a set of normalized linear equations. The following steps are used to
solve the equations :
1. Each equation is normalized by dividing all terms in the equation by its confidence
weighting.
2. The equations are solved by Singular Value Decomposition.
3. If any of the volume result terms are negative then the largest negative term is set to zero
and removed from the model. The equation solver is re-run and results checked for negative
terms. This continues until all volumes are positive.
4. The result volumes are adjusted so that they add up to 1.0. Due to the way the equation
solver works, the unity equations will not necessarily force the results to absolutely 1.0. (The
tolerance of the unity equation is set at 0.01 by default).
5. The input logs are reconstructed from the volume results.
6. The total normalized error is calculated from the difference between the input log and
results. The following equation is used to calculate the total error.
Total Error
Abs InputLog i
Re constructedLog i ConfidenceWeight i
Where
InputLog i
= ith input log
Senergy
Reconstructed i
1084
= ith reconstructed log from the volume results
Confidence Weight i = ith log confidence weighting
Related Topics
Equation Solver
Equations
Limit Equations
Output Equations
Mineral Types
Water Saturations
Iteration Loops
Final Calculations
PHIFlag
11.1.5.3 Equations
The entered equations can be used for four different uses or modes. The equation mode (Eq.
Mode) is selected on the model grid and can be one of the following :
Model :
The equation is used in the model for solving the mineralogy.
> Limit :
The equation is a limit equation. The results of the mineralogy must be less
than the input
Curve / Val:
This can be used for setting maximum limits for resultant minerals or
fluids.
< Limit :
The equation is a limit equation. The results of the mineralogy must be

greater than the input
Curve / Val:
This can be used for setting minimum limits for resultant minerals or fluids.
Output :
The equation is not used in the model, but the results of the mineralogy are
used to output a result curve. This can be used to output useful curves to
QC the interpretation (Grain Density) or intermediate curves that are
needed to calculate Sws (Qv, Total Clay porosity). It can also be used to
create normal logging curves that are missing in a well (sonic, density etc).
The general form of an input equation for all equation modes is :

Y = Vol1 x Min1 + Vol2 x Min2 + Vol3 x Min3 ...
1085
Senergy
Where
Y = Input tool curve or fixed value. For Output equations, this will be the result curve.
Vol1,Vol2,Vol3 = Calculated result volumes
Min1,Min2,Min3 = Mineral end-point values
The Equation Type selected on the Model grid controls the non-linear equations. Output
equations also use the equation type to control the end point parameters used in the construction
of the output curve. The following sections describe how different equation Types are handled in
Mineral Solver. Unity Equation, Porosity equalization, Invasion Factor, Density equation, Neutron
equation, Neutron Tool look-up tables, Sonic equation, EPT equation, Weight Percent (Wt%)
equation, Volumetric cross-section (U) equation, Conductivity equation, Resistivity equation, Uninvaded Zone Resistivity / Conductivity equations, Constant equation, Sxo equation, Sw equation
and Saturation Output equation.
Unity equation
The unity equation, which is always included in the model, states that the sum of all the mineral &
Fluid volumes must be equal to 1 :
1 = Vol1 + Vol2 + Vol3 .
Porosity equalization
If invaded and un-invaded fluids are included in the model then the fluid porosity in both the
flushed and un-flushed zone must be the same. This equation is automatically added if both
invaded and un-invaded fluids are used in a model.
VwatU + VhydU1 + Vhyd2U + ... = Vwat + Vhyd1 + Vhyd2 + ...
or
0 = -VwatU VhydU1 - Vhyd2U - ... + Vwat + Vhyd1 + Vhyd2 + ...
Invasion Factor
The invasion factor for each equation sets the proportion of un-invaded zones and invaded zone
fluids seen by the equation. A value of 1.0 indicates the equation sees only invaded fluids. A
value of 0.0 then only un-invaded fluids. Values in between allow mixing of volumes.
Whether a fluid is in the invaded or un-invaded zone is setup by the Mineral Type option. Water
Sxo and Hyd. Sxo are invaded zone fluids. Water Sw and Hyd. Sw are un-invaded zone fluids.
When the model is solved, the mineral end points for the fluid are multiplied by the Invasion
Factor (IF) for invaded fluids and 1-IF for un-invaded fluids.
The Invasion Factor (IF) is used for those tools which are believed to read deeper than the
Senergy
1086
flushed zone. The neutron tool, for example, is quite often felt to read more in the un-invaded
zone than the flushed zone therefore a value of closer to 0.0 might be appropriate.
Density equation
The density equation is linear. However, the hydrocarbon and water mineral end-points can be
automatically calculated.
Basic equation:
b
min 1
Salinity
Den
water
Vol1
min 2
3.562
A log
Vol 2
Log Rmf 75 0.0123

0.955
7 Salinity 10
1.0
Vol 3.........
min 3
Temp
80
ppm
2
10
gm/cc
where
Temp = Entered formation temperature F.
Rmf75 = Rmf value converted to 75 F.
For oil-based mud Rw and Rw temperature will be used in same equation as above.
Denhydrocarbon
hden
10
16
2.5
2.5
hden
hden
where
= Entered hydrocarbon end-point value
Neutron equation
The neutron tool end-points for sand, limestone and dolomite are non-linear and depend on the
type of neutron tool. If the user selects the mineral end-points for these minerals to be Auto then
the end-points will be calculated, dependent on porosity and water saturations.
Basic equation:
neu
Vcl NeuCl NeuMatrix Exfact NeuSal

Sxo 1 Sxo NeuHyHI
The hydrocarbon and water Hydrogen Indices (HI) end-points can also be calculated. If the user
has selected to have the program calculate the hydrocarbon HI then this will be adjusted for
excavation effects.
It is also possible to change the zone where the neutron tool is reading from the flushed (Sxo)
zone to the un-invaded (Sw) zone.
1087
Senergy
Water-HI
The water-HI is calculated from the neutron salinity look-up tables and takes into account the
matrix type and the water salinity seen by the neutron tools. If the Neutron Salinity parameter
is set to off, then the water-HI will be 1.0.
Dolomite and Quartz matrix HI
If the end-point parameter is set Auto then it will be calculated from the neutron look-up tables
taking into account the porosity at the depth level.
Hydrocarbon-HI
If the hydrocarbon-HI end-point is set to be calculated from an entered hydrocarbon density, then
it is calculated as follows:
NeuHyHI
4 2.5
16 2.5
hden
hden
hden
Exfact
ma
2.65
2 Swx
0.04
1 Swx
Vcl NeuCl
Sx (1 Sx) NeuHyHI
Swx
Vcl NeuCl
Neu hydrocarbon
NeuHyHI Exfact
1 Sx
Where
Vcl
= Wet Clay volume.
NeuCl
= Neutron wet clay value end point.
Exfact
= Neutron excavation factor.
NeuSal = Neutron formation salinity correction.

Sx
= Water saturation as seen by the neutron tool.
NeuHyHI = Neutron hydrocarbon apparent hydrogen index.

Neutron Tool look-up tables
The neutron tool look-up tables are ASCII-formatted, user-editable text files, which define the
response for a particular tool, for Dolomite and Sandstone, at different porosity values. It is
assumed that the entered neutron porosity is in Limestone units. Formation salinity
corrections at each porosity value are defined for each standard matrix type. This allows for the
proper matrix and salinity corrections to be defined for any type of neutron tool.
Senergy
1088
Several neutron tool look-up tables are provided with the software, but the user can easily create
a new table for a tool not previously defined. To do this:
1. Add the new tool into the file Neu_Parm_Files.neu, which is found in the program executable
directory. This file defines the names shown in the module parameter table, plus the file names
of the look-up tables.
2. Create the new look-up table. It is best to copy an old one and modify it. The spacing between
the parameters is not important, but the number of parameters in each line and the number of
porosity lines are. The following is an example of one of the tables:
$
$ Sch_CNL.neu file
$ Contains lookup table for Schlumberger CNL TNPH
$
$
$ Data is as follows
$ True Phi, Sandstone Matrix, Dolomite Matrix, Salinity
$ Salinity correction are for following values 50, 100,
$ Porosity values must not be changed
$
$phi ss
Dol
50 SS
100
150
200
250
250
.00 .020
-.006
.0000
.0000
.0000
.0000
.0000
.0000
.02 .022 -.009 -.0012 -.0032 -.0040 -.0056 -.0060
-.0076 -.0092
.05 .028 -.012 -.0030 -.0080 -.0100 -.0140 -.0160
-.0190 -.0230
.10 .036 -.017 -.0070 -.0140 -.0190 -.0230 -.0280
-.0330 -.0380
.15 .045 -.022 -.0120 -.0220 -.0290 -.0340 -.0350
-.0400 -.0450
.20 .049 -.030 -.0160 -.0270 -.0340 -.0370 -.0380
-.0420 -.0440
.25 .051 -.037 -.0160 -.0370 -.0330 -.0340 -.0330
-.0400 -.0410
.30 .052 -.045 -.0150 -.0350 -.0290 -.0290 -.0270
-.0360 -.0330
.35 .049 -.052 -.0130 -.0180 -.0190 -.0190 -.0150
-.0280 -.0260
.40 .046 -.059 -.0100 -.0140 -.0140 -.0120 -.0070
-.0210 -.0180
.45 .043 -.066 -.0120 -.0140 -.0140 -.0100 -.0030
-.0170 -.0130
.50 .040 -.073 -.0110 -.0120 -.0110 -.0060
.0020
-.0130 -.0080
.55 .037 -.080 -.0100 -.0100 -.0080 -.0020
.0070
-.0090 -.0030
.60 .034 -.087 -.0090 -.0080 -.0050
.0020
.0120
-.0050
.0020
corr Sand, Salinity corr Lime, Salinity corr Dol

150, 200, 250 Kppm and in this order
50 LS
100
150
200
250
.0000
-.0012
.0000
-.0024
.0000
-.0032
.0000
-.0036
.0000
-.0040
-.0030
-.0060
-.0080
-.0090
-.0060
-.0120
-.0160
-.0100
-.0190
-.0140
50 Dol
100
150
200
.0000
-.0020
.0000
-.0044
.0000
-.0064
.0000
-.0100
-.0050
-.0110
-.0160
-.0200
-.0210
-.0100
-.0190
-.0270
-.0260
-.0300
-.0340
-.0120
-.0240
-.0330
-.0260
-.0320
-.0350
-.0390
-.1960
-.0290
-.0370
-.0160
-.0290
-.0350
-.0390
-.0390
-.0180
-.0300
-.0370
-.0200
-.0310
-.0380
-.0380
-.0380
-.0180
-.0300
-.0340
-.0200
-.0310
-.0350
-.0350
-.0330
-.0160
-.0260
-.0290
-.0180
-.0280
-.0310
-.0300
-.0270
-.0150
-.0230
-.0240
-.0170
-.0240
-.0280
-.0260
-.0220
-.0150
-.0220
-.0210
-.0160
-.0220
-.0250
-.0220
-.0170
-.0140
-.0200
-.0180
-.0150
-.0200
-.0220
-.0180
-.0120
-.0130
-.0180
-.0150
-.0140
-.0180
-.0190
-.0140
-.0070
-.0120
-.0160
-.0120
The values of porosity go up to 60 pu., and it is necessary to complete the table up to this value,
even though it is unlikely that there are any published results for these high porosities. It is
advisable to extrapolate the data as accurately as possible.
Sonic equation
The sonic Wyllie equation is linear as long as the compaction factor is set to 1.0
Dt Dtma Vcl Dtcl
Dtfl Sxo Dthy (1 Sxo)
Dtma
Dtma
Cp
1089
Senergy
This can be re-written:
Dt
Dtma 1
Cp Vcl
Dtfl Sxo Cp
Dthy 1 Sxo Cp
Dtcl Vcl
or in the terms of volumes:

Dt
Dtma VolMat Dtfl VolWater
Dthy VolHyd
Dtcl VolClay
To accommodate the compaction factor we multiply all the fluid parameters (water plus
hydrocarbon) by the compaction factor and we ignore the compaction factor term in the
VolMat term. Since the compaction factor term is only an adjustment to give reasonable
porosities in unconsolidated formations, it is felt that this compromise is acceptable.
The Hunt-Raymer equation as used in IP is :
Vfc
1
Dtfl Sxo Dthy
2 Vma Vfc
1 Sxo
2 Vma Vfc
4 Vma
Vma V log
2 Vma
Where
Vma
= 1/Dtma
Vf
= 1/Dtfl
Vlog
= 1/Dt
This is a non-linear equation and as a non-linear equation it has been hard-coded into the
module. To accommodate this in Mineral Solver a relationship has been determined between
the Wyllie compaction factor, as used in Mineral Solver and the Hunt-Raymer equations above.
This relationship is :
Cp = 0.65156 + 0.8109 * Phi + 0.01322 * Dtma - 0.003261 * Dtfl
Phi units are decimals, Dtma and Dtfl units are usec/ft.
This relationship is used as part of the iteration loop. Dtma and Phi come from the results of the
Model solver. The calculated Cp value is used in the Wyllie equation above.
EPT equation
The TPL curve can be used for calculating flushed-zone water saturation directly in the Mineral
model. If the EPT equation is entered, then the Sxo equation should be removed from the model.
See the Options selection on the model window. The Sxo Method parameter should be set to
Min Model so that, for the final results, Sxo will come from the EPT result.
If the TPL curve from the EPT tool is entered, equation type EPT, then the water end-point values
can be set to Auto and it will be calculated from the flushed-zone water salinity as follows :
E ' (79.4
202 .69 Sal)
1 0.385 (T
75) (3230 .0 T ) 10
6 2
Senergy
4558
T 1.568
E"
TPW
1090
16.34
Rmf
2.3586
E ' 2 E" 2
E'
Where
Sal
= Salinity of filtrate in ppm10-6
= Formation temperature F.
Rmf
= resistivity of filtrate at formation temperature.
For oil-based mud, Rw is substituted for Rmf.
Weight Percent (Wt% ) equation

Spectral Gamma Ray tools output curves that measure dry weight percent results either in the
form of minerals or actual elements. In order to use them inside the mineral solver these curves
need to be converted into volumes. This can be done automatically by setting the Equation type
to a Wt% curve. As well as this, an output Grain Density equation needs to be setup.
The key to the conversion is that the equation type has the Wt% in the name. If the input curve is
really in units of percent then it will also get divided by 100. This conversion will happen if the
curve units are % or pec.
The equation used for the conversion from weight to volume is:
Wet Vol % = (Dry Weight %) x (1 - PhiT) x (Rock Grain Density) / (Mineral Grain Density)
Where
Rock Grain Density =
Total dry rock grain density
Mineral Grain Density = Dry grain density of the mineral / element being converted
The Rock Grain Density and Mineral Grain Density come from the Grain Density equation.
A type setup for an ECS tool is shown above. The output grain density equation will give the dry
grain density of the rock. The density of wet clay has been entered as 2.78 which is the dry grain
density not the wet grain density.
The ECS_Clay (Wt%) equation sets the value of Wet Clay as 0.85 rather than as 1.0. This is
1091
Senergy
because the setup is using a wet clay model and the ECS is measuring dry clay. Hence, if the
zone is 100% wet clay and the total porosity in the clay is 0.15 then the ECS_Clay input curve will
read 0.85 after conversion from weight to volume.
ECS_Clay (Vol) = ECS_Clay (Wt%) x (1 - 0.15) x (2.78 / 2.78)
For a dry clay model the ECS_Clay parameter would be 1.0. For a dry clay model a typical setup
is shown below.
Volumetric cross-section (U) equation

If the U equation is selected, then both the hydrocarbon and water end-point values can be
automatically calculated from the true hydrocarbon density and the water salinity. The following
equations are used.
Uwat
= 0.00481 x Sal + 0.3883
For gas (Input Hyd Den less than 0.4)

U
hyd
hden
0.119
For Oil :
U
hyd
hden
0.133
U must be calculated from the Pef and Rhob curves outside of the Mineral Solver module. The
equation for this is as follows :
U
Pef
0.1883
0.93423
Conductivity equation
Flushed-zone water saturation is normally calculated from the input of the Sxo equation into the
model. However, it is possible to add a conductivity curve directly into the model. This is not the
recommended method, since the water saturation equation used is limited to a modified Archie
with n = m.
Archies equation
Senergy
1092
1
Rxo
Sxo
a Rmf
Is re-written in terms of conductivity with n = m

Cxo
Sxo
C rmf a
or
Cxo1 / m
Sxo
C rmf a 1 / m
If the input curve and end-point parameters have the 1/m th root taken, then the equation becomes
linear.
In Mineral Solver this equation is generalized so that conductive minerals and multiple waters
can be entered. The generalized equation is :
Cxo1 / m
Vwati
Cwat i / a
1/ m
V min i
C min i
1/ m
where
Cwati = ith input water end point parameter.
Cmini = ith input conductive mineral end point parameter.
Vwati = ith result water volume.
Vmini = ith result mineral volume.
The user enters the flushed-zone conductivity curve and the conductivity of the waters and any
conductive minerals (Clays). The program takes care of the conversions to the 1/m th root.
The confidence factor has 1/m th root taken of it before using in the solver. The input confidence
shading shown on the result track is shown in terms of errors in the solver. Hence the shading
width is related to 1/m th root of the entered confidence. Example :
Input conductivity = 500 mmho
Input confidence = 5 mmho
m=2
Solver input value = 22.3 (1/m th root)
Solver confidence = 2.24
Output confidence range
+ error
= (22.3 + 2.24)^2 = 602.2 mmho
- error
= (22.3 - 2.24)^2 = 402.4 mmho
An example of a set-up for the conductivity equation is shown below.
1093
Senergy
Clay conductivity has been set at 250 mmhos or4.0 ohmm. Rmf is set at 16,000 mmhos or
0.063 ohmm.
The parameter set-up has been changed to use the results from the model for Sxo. Sxo Method
set to Min Model.
The model option has been changed from default to remove the Sxo equation from the model.
Sw will still be calculated using the input Rt curve and the specified water saturation equation (in
this case Indonesian).
Resistivity equation
Flushed-zone water saturation is normally calculated from the input of the Sxo equation into the
model. However, it is possible to add a resistivity curve directly into the model. This is not the
recommended method, since the water saturation equation used is limited to a modified Archie
with n = m.
The logic for this is exactly the same as the Conductivity equation above except resistivites are
used instead of conductivities.
Senergy
1094
The user enters the flushed-zone resistivity curve and the resistivity of the waters and any
conductive minerals (Clays). The program converts the resistivites to conductivities and takes
the 1/m th root.
The confidence factor is converted to conductivity and has 1/m th root taken of it before using in
the solver. The input confidence shading shown on the result track is shown in terms of errors in
the solver. Hence the shading width is related to 1/m th root of the entered confidence. Example :
Input resistivity = 2 ohmm = 500 mmho
Input confidence = 200 ohmm = 5 mmho
m=2
Solver input value = 22.3 (1/m th root)
Solver confidence = 2.24
Output confidence range
+ error
= (22.3 + 2.24)^2 = 602.2 mmho = 1.661 ohmm
- error
= (22.3 - 2.24)^2 = 402.4 mmho = 2.485 ohmm
An example of a set-up for the resistivity equation is shown below.
Clay resistivity has been set at 4 ohmm. Rmf is set at 0.063 ohmm. The confidence has been
set at 200 ohmm.
The parameter set-up has been changed to use the results from the model for Sxo. Sxo Method
set to Min Model.
The model option has been changed from default to remove the Sxo equation from the model.
1095
Senergy
Sw will still be calculated using the input Rt curve and the specified water saturation equation (in
this case Indonesian).
Un-invaded Zone Resistivity / Conductivity equations

For direct calculation of Sw within the model a Cond. Sw and Res. Sw type equations can be
added. These equation work the same as the Cond. Sxo and Res. Sxo equations described
above. Except the entered water parameters relate to formation water (Rw) not Rmf. Since these
equations read in the un-invaded zone the Invasion Factor must be set to 0.0. The Automatic
Add Sw equation option must be turned off and the parameter Sw Method must be changed to
use Min Model.
This is not the recommended method, since the water saturation equation used is limited to a
modified Archie with n = m.
Constant equation
Constant equations are extra equations that the user adds to give more information about the
mineral model. The Unity equation can be considered as a constant equation.
An example of a constant equation would be 2% of the rock contains Pyrite. This can be written
simply : 0.02 = VPyrite and added into the model. The following example shows this equation
added.
Senergy
1096
Another example could be that the bound water volume in the wet clay was 0.15. This equation
would be written.
0.15
or
0.0
VboundWater
VdryClay VboundWater
0.15 VdryClay 0.85 VboundWater
This would be entered into the model like this :
If multiple clay volumes are used in the model then the total porosity for each clay mineral can be
set. The equation for bound water would be written as follows :
V BoundWater
VdryClay 1
1
Tclay 1
VdryClay 2
1
Tclay 1
Tclay 2
....
Tclay 2
or
0
Tclay 1
Tclay 1
VdryClay 1
Tclay 2
VdryClay 2
....
V BoundWater
Tclay 2
The constant end point parameters for the equation are the clay total porosity divided by one
minus the clay total porosity. This is to take into account that the output volumes are dry clay
volumes.
The above example shows how the bound water porosity can be set for Illite and Chlorite. By
choosing the BoundWater equation the defaults for this constant equation can be set
1097
Senergy
automatically.
The confidence level for these constant equations should be set at about 0.01. This would
represent a 1% volume error in the result, since the constant equations have units of volume.
Dependencies between different minerals can be set up such as in this example below:
If Orthoclase is 20% of Quartz
Orthoclase = 0.2 * Quartz
Hence
0 = (0.2 * Quartz) - Orthoclase
This would be entered into the model like this:
Linear relationships between different mineral assemblages can be entered as constant

equations:
If VGlau = VQtz * a + b
then re-arranging
b = VGlau - a * VQtz
The Constant equation will be entered with b in the left hand column (this will be zero for an
intercept at 0,0). The parameter for VGlau is 1.0. The parameter for VQtz is a. All other
parameters will be zero.
This is how it could be entered into the model:
Sxo equation
When the Sxo equation is added into the model the equation is as follows:
Vwateri
Sxo
Vwateri
Vhydrocarbon i
which can be re-written:
Senergy
0
Sxo
Vhydrocarbon i
1 Sxo
1098
Vwateri
Where
Vwater i = ith Mineral of type Water in the invaded zone
Vhydrocarboni = ith Mineral of type Hydrocarbon in the invaded zone
Sxo = Flushed zone saturation calculated from Rxo
The equation controls the ratio of the Water to the hydrocarbon in the model in the flushed zone.
Sxo is calculated as part of the iteration loop using the input Rxo curve and the selected water
saturation equation. The use of Sxo as part of the model allows the proper non-linear saturation
equations to be used and fully integrated into the model.
Sw equation
The Sw equation is similar to the Sxo equation except it works in the un-invaded zone. When the
Sw equation is added into the model the equation added is as follows:
VwaterU i
Sw
VwaterU i
VhydrocarbonU i
which can be re-written:
Sw
VhydrocarbonU i
1 Sw
VwaterU i
Where
VwaterUi = ith Mineral of type Water in the un-invaded zone
VhydrocarbonUi = ith Mineral of type Hydrocarbon in the un-invaded zone
Sw = Un-invaded zone saturation calculated from Rt
The equation controls the ratio of the Water to the hydrocarbon in the model in the un-invaded
zone. Sw is calculated as part of the iteration loop using the input Rt curve and the selected
water saturation equation.
Saturation Output equation

If the user wants to calculate a fluid saturation directly from the model results it is possible by
selecting the output equation SaturationEff or SaturationTot. The output curve name then
needs to be changed to reflect what is being calculated. The user then selects the fluids that will
go into the saturation calculation by placing a 1.0 in the parameter value for the fluid. Multiple
fluids can be selected.
The effective saturations are calculated by:
1099
Vol i
Saturation
eff
Saturation
Tot
Senergy
EndPo int Parameter
Phie
The total saturations are calculated by:
Vol i
EndPo int Parameter
PhiT
The following is a model that includes Gas and Oil in the flushed zone and outputs the effective
gas and oil saturations of the flushed zone.
Related Topics
Equation Solver
Equations
Limit Equations
Output Equations
Mineral Types
Water Saturations
Iteration Loops
Final Calculations
PHIFlag
11.1.5.4 Limit Equations
Limit equations are used to control the maximum or minimum results for individual minerals /
fluids or groups of minerals / fluids. The program first solves the model without any limit
equations and then checks the limit equations to see if the result fits within the limits. If the results
fall outside a limit equation then this equation is added into the model and a new solution is
Senergy
1100
sought (see the flow diagram above). The limit equations are added one at a time and the model
is completely resolved before adding another equation. The order that equations are added is the
order that they are entered into the grid.
Limit equations added into the model are treated like constant equations. The Confidence value
for the limit equation is used to adjust the weighting on the equation. This means that the results
could still be outside the limits of the equation depending on how well the model works. Setting a
maximum porosity limit over a zone where the hole is badly washed out and the density is
reading far too low will not necessarily produce a good result. The figure below shows a result in
a zone where the hole is washed out and a porosity limit of 0.05 has been added. The results
show all the curves to be badly reconstructed with a large total error. The results are clearly
wrong because the model does not work in this interval. Limit equations should only be used to
make minor adjustments to the results. If a limit equation is going to radically alter the balance of
the other equation, as in this example, then it probably should not be used. In this case a bad hole
model should be constructed that removes the density curve from the model.
The porosity limit equation is written as follows :
0.3 Vwater Vhyrocarbon

This will set the maximum porosity to 0.3. The following shows how this is set up on the Model
grid. If the equation type of PhiLimit is selected from the drop-down menu in the Equation
column then the equation will be automatically set up.
Setting a maximum limit of 0.2 Calcite in a model would be set up as follows:
1101
Senergy
Related Topics
Equation Solver
Equations
Limit Equations
Output Equations
Mineral Types
Water Saturations
Iteration Loops
Final Calculations
PHIFlag
11.1.5.5 Output Equations
If the Eq. Mode is set to Output then the equation is not used in the model to calculate mineral
volumes but it is used to output a log curve that is created from the result mineral volumes and the
end point parameters for the Output equations. The output curve name is set under the Curve /
Val column.
The Equation column is used to set the type of output equation used in the creation of the curve.
For Sonic, Density, Neutron, Conductivity, Ept and U equations the same parameter end-points
and special processing that is performed when used in the model is also performed when used as
an Output equation. For example, if an output equation type was set to Sonic then the sonic
equation type (Wyllie or Hunt Raymer) and compaction factor would be taken into account.
For normal linear equations the following equation is used to calculate the output curve.
OutputCurve
Voli
EndPointParameteri
Senergy
1102
The following extra special procession Equation types are available for Output equations :
Grain Density
This output equation is designed to output a rock grain density. The user enters the matrix density
of the minerals that are to be included in the grain density and sets a parameter value of 0.0 for
those minerals or fluids that are not to be included. The program will calculate the grain density as
follows :
Voli
GrainDensi ty
EndPointParameteri
Voli
for all minerals that do not have a 0.0 EndPointParameter
The above example will give the clean grain density of rock. To include the clay in the grain
density one would need to set the Wet Clay end point parameter to the density of the clay. The
fluids have the end point parameters set to 0.0 so are not included in the grain density.
Qv
This output equation is designed to output a Qv curve for use in the Waxman Smits or Dual
Water equation. The output Qv curve is calculated as follows.
Qv
Voli
EndPointParameteri
T
Total Porosity of the Rock
The mineral end point parameters need to be set for the clay minerals only. The end point
parameters can be calculated from the CEC of the clay and its density and total porosity.
Since :
Qv
dcl
Vdcl
CECdcl
Then the end point parameter for wet clay parameters will be :
EndPointParameter
dcl
CECdcl
Tclay
and for dry clay parameters
1103
EndPointParameter
dcl
Senergy
CECdcl
The above example will output a Qv curve (Qv_ms) for the Illite and Chlorite clay minerals. The
output Qv curve can be fed directly into the Sw parameter grid (see below) and used in the
Waxman & Smits or Dual Water equations. The output curves are calculated after each loop of
the mineral solver and before the water saturation calculations are made.
PhiTClay
This output equation is designed to output a clay total porosity curve for use in the Waxman
Smits or Dual Water equation. This should be used for wet clay models only. The output
PhiTClay curve is calculated as follows.
Voli
Tclay
EndPointParameteri
Voli
for all minerals that do not have a 0.0 EndPointParameter

The mineral end point parameters are set for the wet clay minerals only. The other minerals and
fluids are set to zero. The Wet clay minerals end point parameters used in the PhiTClay equation
are the total porosities in 100% wet clay for each mineral. If only one clay mineral is used then the
result curve will be a fixed constant and its value can be entered directly into the parameter grid
PhiT Clay parameter.
The above example will output the curve PhiTcl_ms. The Illite wet clay porosity is set to 0.156 and
the Chlorite to 0.101. The output curve will have values between 0.156 and 0.101. In zones of zero
clay the program will output the value of the first clay mineral (in this case it would be 0.156).
Senergy
1104
The PhiTcl_ms curve can be input into the parameter grid (see below) to be used to calculate the
total porosity from the effective porosity that is calculated from the model.
T
Vclay
Tclay
For dry clay models the PhiTClay is the bound water and should be entered as a mineral / fluid
directly into the model grid. The bound water volume should be calculated by using a constant
equation (see the above section on Constant Equations).
Related Topics
Equation Solver
Equations
Limit Equations
Output Equations
Mineral Types
Water Saturations
Iteration Loops
Final Calculations
PHIFlag
1105
Senergy
11.1.5.6 Mineral Types
The Mineral Types, set from the drop-down menu, control how a mineral is to be used to make
the final results. It is very important that the correct Type is set.
Un-invaded Fluids
Matrix types of Water Sw and Hyd. Sw are the fluids in the un-invaded zones. These are not
used for calculating porosity and do not have to be entered unless an equation has fluids that
read in the un-invaded zone (see Invasion Factor above). The porosity in the un-invaded zone
will be the same as the porosity in the invaded zone (see Porosity equalization above).
Clay Model and Porosity

The clay added into the model can either be Dry Clay or Wet Clay. An error message will result
if wet and dry clays are mixed in a model. Bound Water can only be added into a Dry Clay
model.
Regardless of whether a Dry or Wet clay model is created, the program calculates effective and
total porosity and any of the water saturation equations can be used.
Wet Clay Model
Phie
Vcl
Phit
Vdcl
Vwater i
Vhydrocarbon i
Vwet clay i
Phie Vcl PhitClay
Vcl Phit Phie
Where
Vwateri = ith Mineral of type Water Sxo
Vhydrocarboni = ith Mineral of type Hydrocarbon Sxo
Senergy
1106
Vwetclay i = ith Mineral of type Wet Clay

Phie = Effective Porosity
Phit = Total Porosity
Vcl = Wet clay volume
Vdcl = Volume dry clay
PhitClay = Entered parameter total clay porosity (PhiT Clay)
Dry Clay Model
If bound water is included in the model then :
Phie
Vwater i
Vdcl
Vdry clay i
Phit
Vcl
Phie
Vhydrocarbon i
Vboundwater i
Vdcl ( PhiT
Phie)
If no Bound water is entered into the model then we assume that the water entered is total
porosity then :
Phit
Vwater i
Vdcl
Vdry clay i
Vhydrocarbon i
Vcl Vdcl 1 PhitClay

Phie PhiT PhitClay Vcl
PhitClay is the Total Clay Porosity parameter entered in the zonal parameter section (PhiT
Clay). This can be a curve which can be calculated from the mineral volumes as an Output
equation curve.
Flushed Zone Water Saturation

If the Sxo Method parameter is set to Min Model in the parameter section, the resulting Sxo will
be calculated from the mineral model volumes.
For the Wet Clay model or the Dry Clay model where Bound water is included in the model :
1107
Sxo
Senergy
Vwateri
Vwateri
Vhydrocarbon i
For the Dry Clay model where Bound water is not included in the model and the Water mineral
is taken as total porosity :
Vwateri
Sxot
Vwateri
Vhydrocarbon i
Related Topics
Equation Solver
Equations
Limit Equations
Output Equations
Mineral Types
Water Saturations
Iteration Loops
Final Calculations
PHIFlag
11.1.5.7 Water Saturations
Water Saturations (Sw and Sxo) can either be calculated directly from the model by setting the
Sw Method and Sxo Method parameter in the parameter table or by using one of the Sw
equations below. It is recommended not to use the direct method, since the water saturation
equation used is limited to a modified Archie with n = m.
Flushed zone and un-invaded zone water saturations are calculated after the porosity is obtained
from the linear-equation solver.
The following options are available for calculation of water saturation:
Archie:
1
Rt
Sw n
Rw
Archie PhiT:
1
Rt
m
T
SwT n
a Rw
Senergy
1108
Simandoux:
1
Rt
Swn
a Rw
Vcl Sw
Rcl
Modified Simandoux:
1
Rt
Swn
a Rw (1 Vcl)
Vcl Sw
Rcl
Indonesian (Poupon-Leveaux):
m
Vcl 1
a Rw
Rt
Vcl 2
Swn 2
Rcl
Modified Indonesian:
m
Vcl
a Rw
Rt
(1 Vcl ) 2
Sw n 2
Rcl
Dual Water:
1
Rt
m*
T
SwT n
a
1
Rw
Swb
1
SwT Rwb
1
Rw
m*
minput
Qv
1
C m 0.258
0.2 1 e
16.4
T
T
Qv is either entered as a curve or calculated from PhiT using the a and b input parameters as
below. Qv can be calculated from mineral volumes and output as an Output Equation curve
and then entered as an input parameter curve.
The Cm parameter is used to adjust the weighting on the variable m* and is entered as a
parameter.
Juhasz (Waxman-Smits):
1
Rt
Qvn
m
T
SwT n
a Rw
Vcl Tclay
1 Bn Qvn
Rw
SwT
1109
Senergy
Waxman-Smits:
m*
T
SwT n
a Rw
1
Rt
1 B Qv
Rw
SwT
Qv is either entered as a fixed value or input curve or calculated from:

a
PhiT
Qv
Where a and b are entered parameters and can be interactively selected through the 1/PhiT /
Qvapp crossplot.(see the Interactive Plot section above)
B is an entered parameter or calculated from:
1.28 0.225 T 0.0004059 T 2
1 Rw1.23 0.045 T 0.27 )
m*
m C m 0.258
Qv
1
0.2 1 e
16.4
T
T
The Cm parameter is used to adjust the weighting on the variable m and is entered as a
parameter.
Where
m
= Cementation factor
m*
= Cementation factor used for Dual Water or W & S equations
= Saturation exponent
= Tortuosity factor
Vcl = Wet clay volume

Sw = Effective water saturation
SwT
= Total water saturation
Rw = Formation water resistivity

Rwb
= Bound water resistivity
Rt = Input resistivity curve

Rcl = Resistivity of the clay
Qvn
= "Normalized" cation exchange capacity per unit total pore volume
Bn = "Normalized" equivalent conductance of clay cations (Qvn/Cwapp crossplot)

Qv = Cation exchange capacity per unit total pore volume
Senergy
1110
B = Equivalent conductance of clay cations

T = Formation temperature in degrees centigrade
Qvn is output as a curve if the Juhasz equation is set as the default Sw equation. Apparent water
conductivity is also output. The interactive Qvn/Cwapp crossplot can be used to set the Bn
factor (see the Interactive Crossplot section above). The Bn factor is adjusted on the crossplot
so that the 100% wet line passes through the wet shaly points. It should be noted that there is a
strong correlation between the bound-water volume (PhiT-Phie) and the Bn factor. If the user
changes the bound-water by changing the PhiTclay parameter, then the Qvn/Cwapp will
change and the Bn should be adjusted.
The cementation factor can either be:
entered as a parameter.
entered as an input curve.
calculated using the Shell formula.
calculated from the EPT/Rxo logs.
calculated from Qv to produce a variable m*. Dual Water and W&S equations only.
For the EPT/Rxo option then the EPT tool must be part of the mineral model and the Sxo
Method parameter must be set to Min Model. The Sxo equation option should not be included
in the mineral model since the EPT equation will be used to calculate the flushed-zone saturation
as part of the mineral model.
If m is calculated from the Shell formula, the following equation is used:
m 1.87
0.018
e
If the m vari wth Vcl parameter is set to On, then over zones where Vcl > Vcl cut-off, m is
adjusted as follows:
m 10Vcl
VclCutoff
This has the effect of removing any hydrocarbons in the shales. This adjustment occurs after any
calculation of a variable m*.
The saturation exponent can be entered either:
as a parameter,
as an input curve, or
if m has been calculated from the EPT/Rxo logs, then n can be set to m plus a fixed value.
This is done by setting the m plus value parameter.
If the Archie PhiT, Dual Water, Juhasz or Waxman Smits saturation equation has been used,
then the effective water saturation is calculated as follows:
1111
Sw
Senergy
SwT Swb
1 Swb
Swb 1 Phie Phit
Flushed zone water saturations

The same equation that was chosen for the Sw calculation will be used for Sxo. The parameters
are substituted as follows:
Rmf
for Rw
Rxo
for Rt
Rmfb
for Rwb
RxoCl
for Rcl
If no Rxo tool is available then Sxo can be calculated from an empirical formula. The Sxo
Method parameter must be set to Inv Fac and the Invasion Factor parameter is used to set the
relationship between Sw and Sxo. The equation used is :
Sxo
Sw InvasionFactor
1 InvasionFactor
The default value of the Invasion Factor is 2.0. The following graph shows the relationship
between Sxo and Sw with different invasion factors.
In Oil-Based Mud, the invasion factor parameter gives the actual value of Sxo in the flushed
Senergy
1112
zone. Hence an invasion factor of 0.5 would give a maximum Sxo in the flushed zone of 0.5.
Sxo limits
For water based mud (WBM) Sxo is limited to be greater than Sw.
If the Sxo Limit flag parameter is set, then Sxo will also be limited to the following:
Sw SxoLimit
Sxo Sw
For oil based muds (OBM) Sxo is limited to be less than Sw.
Sw
Sxo
Variable m and n
If the user has selected to calculate a variable m, then this is calculated using the chosen water
saturation equation, solving it for m by using the Sxo value calculated from the EPT TPL curve.
The resultant m, which can be output as a curve, can be limited in its values by setting the
parameters min m value and max m value. These limits allow the restriction of m to sensible
values.
Related Topics
Equation Solver
Equations
Limit Equations
Output Equations
Mineral Types
Water Saturations
Iteration Loops
Final Calculations
PHIFlag
11.1.5.8 Iteration Loops
The input auto-calibrated end-point parameters and the Sxo equation need the porosity and
flushed-zone water saturation to be entered. To calculate the porosity and Sxo, the mineral
calculation needs to be solved. Hence, an iterative loop is used to solve the results. The iteration
loop continues until the difference between iterations in porosity and Sxo are as follows:
e difference
< 0.001
1113
Sxo difference
Senergy
< 0.002
Related Topics
Equation Solver
Equations
Limit Equations
Output Equations
Mineral Types
Water Saturations
Iteration Loops
Final Calculations
PHIFlag
11.1.5.9 Final Calculations
The Final Calculations for the Mineral Solver Module are described below:
BVW
BVWsxo =
Rwapp
Cwapp
Bulk volume water
Sx
Bulk volume water flushed zone

m
Rt
Rxo
Rmfapp =
Sw
t
m
t
/a
Rw apparent
/a
Rmf apparent
= 1 / Rwapp
Apparent water conductivity
Rwapp, Rmfapp and Cwapp are converted to the temperature entered for Rw and Rmf
respectively.
Vcl
Qvn =
QvApp =
Tclay
T
Normalized Qv (Juhasz W&S plot)
a
B Rt
PhiT_recp = 1 / PhiT
1.0
B Rw
Apparent Qv (W&S plot)

Reciprocal of PhiT (W&S plot)
If the Rxo curve is entered, and Sxo is calculated from the EPT mineral model, and m is not
calculated from the EPT/Rxo logs, the following calculations are made:
1. Rmf equivalent. The flushed-zone water saturation equations are solved for Rmf using the
Senergy
1114
value of Sxo, calculated from the mineral model. The results are output in the RMFEQ curve.
2. A Bulk volume irreducible water is calculated. This is the amount of formation water left in the
flushed zone. The Rmf equivalent, calculated in 1 (above), should be equal to the value of Rmf if
all the formation water is flushed out by the filtrate. Any variance from this can be used to
calculate the amount of residual formation water.
BVWIRR
Sxo
Rw
Rmf
Rmf Rmfeq
Rmf Rw
Where
BVWIRR = Bulk volume water irreducible
The following limits are applied to BVWIRR:
BVW > BVWIRR > 0
Related Topics
Equation Solver
Equations
Limit Equations
Output Equations
Mineral Types
Water Saturations
Iteration Loops
Final Calculations
PHIFlag
11.1.5.10 PHIFlag
The output curve PHIFLAG is a logic flag curve. It can have one of the following values:
PHIFLAG
LOGIC
VALUE
2
A Limit equation was used in the model results
Main linearization loop did not converge after 20 iterations
Solver did not converge after 30 iterations
Sw curve set to 1.0 due to Phi Sw Limit or Vcl Sw Limit

parameter limits being reached
Sw limited to Sw irreducible parameter
1115
Sw equation loop did not converge after 10 iterations
For a normal execution of the program at any depth level, the PHIFLAG should be zero.
Related Topics
Equation Solver
Equations
Limit Equations
Output Equations
Mineral Types
Water Saturations
Iteration Loops
Final Calculations
PHIFlag
Senergy
Senergy
11.2
1116
Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis
The 'Monte Carlo Error Analysis Module' uses a Monte Carlo simulation to estimate the errors
in a petrophysical analysis. The user enters the distribution of possible errors associated with the
interpretation parameters and the input curves. The program, using the error distributions,
randomizes the input parameters and makes multiple passes through the analysis modules. The
results for each simulation are accumulated and a distribution of the results can be made.
The module is accessed under the main 'Advanced Interpretation' menu
'Monte Carlo
Error Analysis'.
Related Topics
Navigating the Monte Carlo User Interface
Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis Workflow
Define Monte Carlo Parameters
Batch Monte Carlo
Section 11.2 Advanced Interpretation : Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis
1117
Senergy
11.2.1 Navigating the Monte Carlo User Interface

The user interface is organized on 'tabbed' screens. The 'Model' tab is used to set up the
interpretation workflow that will be analyzed.
The user selects the IP interpretation modules to include in the workflow. Each module that is
selected (the 'Use' column is 'checked') has a 'set-up' screen. The 'module' set-up tabs have
some properties which are common throughout the interface for setting up curves and
parameters for the Monte Carlo simulation runs. These properties are illustrated for the 'Clay
Volume' module in the following screen capture.
Senergy
1118
The 'Use' column - 'checking' a row, flags that the entered row is to be used in the Error
analysis workflow.
'Parameter Name' - lists the parameter names found within the interpretation modules' (in
this case 'Clay Volume') Parameter Set.
The 'Type Shift' column allows the user to select the 'type of shift' to be applied to each
parameter. Three options are available from the a drop-down box list:
'Linear' : The parameter is changed by adding or subtracting the shift.
Result = Input + Shift
'Percent' : The parameter is changed by using a percent shift.
Result = Input x (1 + Shift / 100)
'Reciprocal' : The reciprocal of the parameter is changed by adding or subtracting the shift.
Result = 1 / ( 1 / Input + Shift )
The 'Shift Distribution' column allows the user to select the type of random distribution to
apply to each parameter. Three options are available from the drop-down box list:
'Gaussian'
'Triangular', and
'Square'.
The program uses a random number generator, seeded through the CPU clock time, to calculate
the shifts for each parameter for each simulation. At the start of each simulation, each parameter
is changed using a different random number.
The 'Initial Value' column displays the current range of starting values for the parameter.
Since each module could have multiple zones with different values in each, the maximum
and minimum values are shown in the 'Initial Value' entries.
The 'Low Value Shift' and 'High Value Shift' columns set the ranges for the shifts in the
parameters. These values must be positive values. For the 'Gaussian' distribution the 'Low
Value Shift' + 'High Value Shift' represents four standard deviations. The following diagrams
show how the distribution type, 'Low Value Shift' parameter and 'High Value Shift' parameter
affect the distribution shape.
1119
Senergy
The 'Gaussian' distribution is limited to 2.5 standard deviations either side of the Mean value. If
the random number generator comes up with a value outside of this range, then another random
number will be chosen. This is done to try and keep the distribution within reasonable limits,
since very large shifts in parameters will make some parameters, like Rw, have non-sensible
results (negative) and will result in the interpretation module refusing to run.
The number of visible 'set-up' screens in the Monte Carlo Error Analysis interface depends upon
which interpretation modules / Parameter Sets are selected for use in the Monte Carlo simulation
workflow on the 'Model' tab. The following list includes all the IP modules that can be run in a
simulation, together with the output curves and output graphic results in the form of histograms,
crossplots and Tornado plot.
The 'Start' Button

The 'Start' button will activate the Monte Carlo simulation run. The following window is displayed.
The 'Simulation Count' allows the user to see how many iterations have been made.
The 'Pause' button temporarily pauses the simulation to allow the user to look at the current
results without the screens continually updating. Once paused, the 'Run' button becomes
active, and 'clicking' this restarts the simulations.
The 'Stop' button stops the simulation at the current count, restores all parameter sets and
curves to their starting position, and cleans up the temporary curves.
Results from the simulation can be output to the printer or to a disk file by selecting 'Print
Senergy
1120
Parameter set' under 'File' on the main menu.
'Run Errors'
It is quite likely that the user will experience error messages similar to that shown below.
These are caused when the input parameter has been adjusted by the program to have a value
that lies outside the normal expected range, and the interpretation module will not run with that
value. If this happens, click 'OK' and then stop the simulation. It will then be necessary to adjust
the appropriate parameter, which is going outside its normal range, by changing the 'Shift' values
associated with that parameter.
The parameters that are most likely to cause this problem are resistivity-type parameters,
which make no sense if they become negative.
Print Button
If the 'Print' button is 'clicked', the user has the option to output the simulation results to a text file
or to the printer. The listing will include result listing plus a list of all input parameters used in the
simulations along with their shifts.
If the 'Simulation Raw results data to file' is 'clicked', then a '.csv' (comma delimited) file is
produced containing all of the raw output data from each simulation run. This file will contain one
line of text per simulation run. Each line will have all the input shifts and output results. This file is
designed to be loaded into a spreadsheet for detailed analysis by the more expert user. To output
the '.csv' file using semi-colons instead of commas as the delimiter go to 'Tools'
'CSV Delimiter'.
Related Topics
'Options'
1121
Senergy

Batch Monte Carlo
11.2.2 Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis Workflow

The Workflow displayed below shows the process which is required to run the Monte Carlo
Uncertainty Analysis Module.
Related Topics
Batch Monte Carlo
Senergy
1122
11.2.3 Define Monte Carlo Parameters

This Topic describes the Parameters available for definition in the Monte Carlo Uncertainty
Analysis Module.
Define Monte Carlo Model: The 'Model' tab allows the user to set up the Monte Carlo
analysis workflow. For each simulation iteration, the program will run the interpretation
modules in the order displayed on this screen (from top to bottom). The interpretation
modules are selected by choosing the module name from the drop-down box and then
'checking' the 'Use' box adjacent to the Module name.
Define Clay Volume, Porosity Sw and Cutoff: The 'Clay Volume', 'Porosity Sw' and 'Cutoff'
tab screens allow the user to specify the input parameters to be used for the simulations.
The defaults are read from a user-editable disk file 'MonteCarloDefaults.par', stored in the
IP program directory.
Define Mineral Solver Parameters: When the 'Mineral Solver' is selected as an input module
to the Monte Carlo Error analysis and the 'Use' column is 'checked' adjacent to the module
name, the 'Mineral Solver' tab will be available. The 'Mineral Solver' tab contains two subtabs; 'Zonal Parameters' and 'Model Parameters'.
Define the Dependencies: The 'Dependencies' tab allows the user to set dependencies
between parameters. This can mean that if one parameter is changed, for example - to
increase its value, then the second, 'dependent' parameter will also be increased. The
degree of correlation between the parameters can be set using the 'Correlation' parameter.
A 'Correlation' parameter of zero (0) will mean that there is no correlation. A value of 1
equates to a 100% correlation and a value of '-1' equals an inverse 100% correlation.
Define the Output: The 'Output Curve Names' allows the user to select up to 10 curves to
be output. For each output curve, the program will calculate the Mean and Standard Deviation
statistics on a level-by-level basis. Any curve can be chosen as an output curve. For
example, if the user wants to see how a simulation input curve varies, add its name to the
output list. The output statistics curves (Mean, plus one standard deviation & minus one
standard deviation) are output to the 'Curve Set' entered in the box below the 'Output Curve
Names' list panel. To add a new Set to the well click the 'Edit Sets' button.
Define the Monte Carlo Histograms: The 'Histo's' tab allows the user to set up the
histograms to be displayed. Up to nine different histograms can be displayed together.
1123
Senergy
Histograms can be either made from the input parameters and curves (in this case what is
displayed are the shifts applied to the parameter at each simulation level), or made from one
of the output summation results. The user selects the parameter to create a histogram for
from a drop-down box and 'checks' the 'Use' box to display the histogram.
Define the Monte Carlo Crossplots: The 'Xplot's' tab allows the user to set up the crossplots
to be displayed. Up to nine different crossplots can be displayed together. Crossplot axes can
be made either of the input parameters and curves (in this case what is displayed are the
shifts applied to the parameter at each simulation level), or one of the output summation
results. The user selects the names of the different axes from drop-down boxes and 'checks'
the 'Use' box to display the crossplot.
Define the Tornado Plot: The 'Tornado Plot' error analysis display shows the relative
importance of each parameter in the overall error associated with a result parameter. In
order to calculate the errors, a set of workflow runs is made. For each parameter in the
Monte Carlo analysis, two runs are made; one with the parameter set to its low value and one
set to its high value ( 2 standard deviations for Gaussian distributions). All other parameters
are kept to their default values. This can take a little time to run, but once run, a tornado plot
can be made for any output parameter without having to re-do the simulation runs. Any
change in the Monte Carlo Error Analysis set-up will mean the 'Tornado Plot' error runs will
have to be re-made.
Related Topics
Batch Monte Carlo
Senergy
1124
11.2.3.1 Define the Monte Carlo Model
The 'Model' tab allows the user to set up the Monte Carlo analysis workflow. For each simulation
iteration, the program will run the interpretation modules in the order displayed on this screen
(from top to bottom). The interpretation modules are selected by choosing the module name from
the drop-down box and then 'checking' the 'Use' box adjacent to the Module name.
NOTE: The order in which modules are run can be changed by 'clicking' in the grey space to the
left of the 'Use' column. The user can then drag a Module entry line up or down, to a new
position.
The 'Mineral Solver' can be run as a 'module'. This allows the results of a probabilistic
interpretation to be included in the Monte Carlo Error computation. The 'Mineral Solver'
module must already have been run on the subject well before selecting the 'Mineral Solver
' Parameter Set in the Monte Carlo operation. An additional 'Mineral Solver' tab will be
visible in the MonteCarlo interface when this module is 'checked', as described below.
The 'Formula' and 'Multi-Line Formula' modules can be used to perform functions that
are not available in the standard log analysis modules. Multiple 'Formula' modules can be
included in a workflow. Therefore, a simple log analysis workflow could be built up by simply
running 'Formula' or 'Multi-Line Formula' several times without using the 'Clay Volume'
or 'Porosity Sw' modules.
1125
Senergy
The 'Fuzzy Logic' and 'Multi-Linear Reg(ression)' modules can be included in the
workflow. This allows results from these analysis modules, to be added to the Monte Carlo
Error computation. Hence, if you are using the 'Fuzzy Logic' module to compute a
permeability curve, for example, then the errors in the input to the Fuzzy Logic computation
can be modeled.
The 'Curves from Zones' module can also be included in the workflow. This module turns
zoned parameters into curves. Since the Monte Carlo Error Analysis changes the
parameters in modules, then, if the results of these parameters are used to calculate other
results, the inclusion of this module in the workflow allows the user huge flexibility over what
calculations are made. For example, the zone average PHI Res values from the 'Cut-off
and Summation' module could be written to an output curve using this module and then
another computation ('User Formula' / 'Multi-line Formula') could be run using the
parameter 'Curve', for instance, to compute permeability for each Monte Carlo model
iteration.
Any 'User Program' that is currently available to the program can also be used in the
model. In the drop-down box there will be the name of the user programs. In the example
above, only the Archie user program is available.
NOTE: In order for any modules to be used in the workflow, they must have been set up and run
on the well data before using the Monte Carlo module. You must, therefore, have made an
interpretation before starting. This includes the User Programs.
The 'Set Name' box on the 'Model' tab gives the name of the Parameter Set to be used for the
module. For the 'Clay Volume', 'Porosity Sw' and 'Cutoff' modules this Set name will default to
the current Parameter Set loaded in memory. If the user wants to select another Parameter Set
from disk, then the full file name can be entered.
To use the 'Formula' or the 'Multi-line Formula' modules, the user must have first saved the
formula to disk using the 'Save Formula' button in their respective windows. The user then
enters the full file name of the saved user formula in a row under the 'Set Name' column
heading. The 'Browse' buttons are very useful in selecting the full file names.
The 'Cutoff' module is not required in the workflow list, but when not used, it limits the results to
only showing the foot by foot errors on the output curves.
The 'Set Name' box, below the data input 'grid', allows the user to select the output name of the
file into which to store the full Monte Carlo simulation results. The results and input parameters
are saved by 'clicking' the 'Save' button or 'File'
Save Parameter Set
'Monte Carlo' on
the main menu. The results, once saved, can be re-loaded by clicking the 'Load' button on the
Senergy
1126
Monte Carlo window and selecting the saved file name.
Related Topics
Define the Monte Carlo Model
Define Clay Volume, Porosity Sw and Cutoff
Define the Dependencies
Define the Output
Define the Monte Carlo Histograms
Define the Monte Carlo Crossplots
Define the Tornado Plot
11.2.3.2 Define Clay Volume, Porosity Sw and Cutoff
'Clay Volume', 'Porosity Sw' and 'Cutoff' tab screens allow the user to specify the input
parameters to be used for the simulations. The defaults are read from a user-editable disk file '
MonteCarloDefaults.par', stored in the IP program directory.
The user can select which parameter to use by 'clicking' in the 'Use' box. All parameters by
default are selected. Many of these parameters will in fact not be used in the analysis. This does
not cause a problem, since changing a parameter that is not used will have no effect on the
1127
Senergy
results.
The parameter names are identical to those shown in each Interpretation module's 'Parameter'
windows.
Related Topics
Define the Output
11.2.3.3 Define Mineral Solver Parameters
When the 'Mineral Solver' is selected as an input module to the Monte Carlo Error analysis and
the 'Use' column is 'checked' adjacent to the module name, the 'Mineral Solver' tab will be
available. The 'Mineral Solver' tab contains two sub-tabs; 'Zonal Parameters' and 'Model
Parameters'.
The 'Model Parameters' sub-tab contains the following elements:
'Model Name' drop-down list - a list of the 'models' contained within the 'Mineral Solver'
Parameter Set.
'Use' column - 'check' a row to use it in the Monte Carlo computation.
'Mineral Column' - drop-down list of the 'Minerals' and 'Fluids' used in the Mineral Solver
model.
'Equation Line' - drop-down list of the 'Equations' / 'Tools' used in the Mineral Solver
model.
'Shift Type' - 'Linear', 'Percent' or 'Reciprocal'.
'Shift Distribution' - 'Gaussian', 'Triangle' or 'Square'.
'Initial Value' - Equation end-point value for the selected 'Mineral', taken from the Mineral
Solver model.
'Low / High Values' - 'default values' are filled in which are equal to the Mineral end-point
value plus or minus 10% of the 'valid value'. The user can change these values.
Senergy
The 'Zonal Parameters' screen is illustrated below:
The user can edit any of the 'Initial Value' and 'Low / High Value Shift' entries for the
1128
1129
Senergy
parameters loaded from the 'Mineral Solver' Parameter Set. The 'Parameter Name'
correspond to the saved 'Mineral Solver' parameters in that module.
Related Topics
Define the Output
The 'Input Curves' tab allows the user to specify the type of errors to be applied to the input
curves. The same options are available as for the Interpretation module parameter shifts.
The 'Input Curves' options are the only way the user can vary results in the 'Formula' module. If
Senergy
1130
you want to use a constant value in an equation and vary that constant during the simulation; then
the constant value must be converted into a 'Constant' curve (using the formula module) and use
the curve, instead of the constant value, in the original formula. You can then add the constant
curve to the 'Input Curves' list and vary it as a normal curve.
Related Topics
Define the Output
1131
Senergy
11.2.3.5 Define the Dependencies
The 'Dependencies' tab allows the user to set dependencies between parameters. This can
mean that if one parameter is changed, for example - to increase its value, then the second, '
dependent' parameter will also be increased. The degree of correlation between the parameters
can be set using the 'Correlation' parameter. A 'Correlation' parameter of zero (0) will mean
that there is no correlation. A value of 1 equates to a 100% correlation and a value of '-1' equals
an inverse 100% correlation.
The 'Correlation' works by taking the randomly-selected shift for 'Parameter 1' and applying the
same shift to dependent 'Parameter 2'. If the correlation is 'negative' then the shift will be the
inverse amount. For correlation coefficients of less than 1, the correlated shift will then have a
randomness applied to it - depending on the value of correlation. A coefficient of 0.5 will apply a
randomness of half what would have been selected if the coefficient was 0.0.
To illustrate the procedure the following crossplots show an 'm' and 'n' dependency correlation of
0.5 and a 'Neu Wet Clay' and 'Rho Wet Clay' dependency correlation of -0.8.
Senergy
Related Topics
Define the Output
1132
1133
Senergy
11.2.3.6 Define the Output
The 'Output Curve Names' allows the user to select up to 10 curves to be output. For each
output curve, the program will calculate the Mean and Standard Deviation statistics on a level-bylevel basis. Any curve can be chosen as an output curve. For example, if the user wants to see
how a simulation input curve varies, add its name to the output list. The output statistics curves
(Mean, plus one standard deviation & minus one standard deviation) are output to the 'Curve Set'
entered in the box below the 'Output Curve Names' list panel. To add a new Set to the well
click the 'Edit Sets' button.
The 'Top Depth' and 'Bottom Depth' boxes allow the user to limit the interval over which to run
the simulation. The output curves will have their statistics calculated over this interval exactly. For
the 'Clay Volume', 'Porosity Sw' and 'Cutoff' modules, each module zone will be calculated if
its depth interval overlaps with the entered 'Top Depth' and 'Bottom Depth' interval. The 'User
Formula' and 'Multi-Line Formula' modules, if they are included in the simulation run, make no
checks to see if the depth ranges overlap, but just run the interval specified on the formula input
screen.
The 'Stop simulation at' box puts a maximum limit at which to halt the simulations. The user
can halt the simulation at any time by 'clicking' the 'Stop' button. The maximum number of
simulations allowable is 5000, the default value is 2000.
The 'Update Graphics every' box allows the user to set the iteration steps between updates of
Senergy
1134
the graphical output displays. If the workflow runs very slowly then this number may need to be
changed to meet the users speed requirements.
The 'Output Percentiles' boxes allow the user to select the percentiles to display in the results
listing. By default, the 10th percentile will be the 10th percent lowest value of all the simulation
results, except for Sw where it will be the 10th percent highest value. If this convention does not
suit the user, then it can be changed by editing the 'MonteCarloDefaults.par' file (stored in the
IP program directory) and changing the 'Results' section at the end of the file.
The 'Auto Log Plot' button will change the Log Plot display to a standard display giving the result
curves mean values and their standard deviations. For each output curve, three other curves are
created in the well. The curve mnemonics and format are illustrated below:
XXXMN
'Mean Result' curve
XXXPSD
'Plus one standard deviation'
XXXMSD
'Minus one standard deviation'
Where XXX is the original curve name

The following is an example of the 'Auto Log Plot' with the default input curves. The original
curves (PHIE, SW, VWCL and PHIT) are displayed as dashed lines. It should be noted that the
original curves are the direct output of the 'Interpretation' modules and that they will display the
results of a single 'deterministic' simulation. The user will therefore see values that fall outside
the standard deviation range during the Monte Carlo simulation run. Once the simulation is
finished the curves will be restored to their original value and should fall very close to the Mean
value.
1135
Senergy
The 'Histograms' button will display a set of histograms, which can be set up under the 'Histo's'
tab. The following is an example output.
Senergy
1136
The histograms are displayed with the Mean value displayed as a vertical blue line and a one
standard deviation line in green either side of the Mean line. The green curve represents a
'Gaussian' distribution curve fitted to the data. Optionally a 'Triangular' distribution line can be
fitted.
By right-mouse 'clicking', or selecting the menu, the user can copy the graphics to either the
printer or the clipboard. The graphics copied to the clipboard are saved as an enhanced metafile
(.emf) and can be pasted and re-sized in standard presentation-type software.
The 'Crossplots' button will display a set of crossplots, which can be set up under the 'Xplot's'
tab. The following is an example output.
1137
Senergy
The 'Result Listing' button will display the zonal results which were set up in the 'Cut-off'
module, along with their percentile results from the simulation. The following is an example of
part of a listing.
Senergy
1138
The top line for each zone lists the original 'deterministic' results from the 'Cutoff' module. The
second line of the report gives the Mean value of all the individual 'probabilistic' simulation results.
The following lines then display the probabilistic percentile results as defined by the user.
NOTE: Each simulation run randomly changes the input curves and interpretation parameters.
The parameters used for each simulation iteration are saved in-memory. At the end of the
MonteCarlo simulation run, which could involve several thousand iterations, the values used for
every parameter are ranked from low to high and basic statistics are run on each one. The Mean
and Percentile results are calculated on an individual parameter-by-parameter basis. So, for
example, the AvPhi Res P50 value will not necessarily come from the same simulation iteration
as the Av VCL Res parameter P50 value. This means that a straight multiplication of the P50
'Gross thickness', P50 'Net to Gross Ratio', P50 AvPhi Res and P50 (1-Av Sw Res) values will
not yield the exact P50 value for the 'Net PayThickness Res' (Phi*So*H) parameter, though it
should be close. It is up to the user to decide on how to use the results and resolve the
discrepancies between the interdependencies.
Parts of the screen listing shown above can be copied to the clipboard by highlighting the
required text, then with a right mouse 'click' select 'Copy Listing to clipboard'.
1139
Related Topics
Define the Output
Senergy
Senergy
1140
11.2.3.7 Define the Monte Carlo Histograms
The 'Histo's' tab allows the user to set up the histograms to be displayed. Up to nine different
histograms can be displayed together. Histograms can be either made from the input parameters
and curves (in this case what is displayed are the shifts applied to the parameter at each
simulation level), or made from one of the output summation results. The user selects the
parameter to create a histogram for from a drop-down box and 'checks' the 'Use' box to display
the histogram.
The 'Zone' box applies to the output result histograms. The user can select which zone to
plot.
The 'Lft Scale' and 'Rht Scale' boxes allow the user to select the histogram scale. If left
blank, the program will select a scale that displays the total range of values.
The 'Overlay' box allows the user to select what type of overlay lines are displayed on the
histogram. The default is to have a 'Gaussian' distribution. The 'Triangular' distribution will
put a triangle on the histogram connecting the left most point to the highest point to the right
most point.
The 'Display' button will update the histogram plot with any changes that have been made.
1141
Related Topics
Define the Output
Senergy
Senergy
1142
11.2.3.8 Define the Monte Carlo Crossplots
The 'Xplot's' tab allows the user to set up the crossplots to be displayed. Up to nine different
crossplots can be displayed together. Crossplot axes can be made either of the input parameters
and curves (in this case what is displayed are the shifts applied to the parameter at each
simulation level), or one of the output summation results. The user selects the names of the
different axes from drop-down boxes and 'checks' the 'Use' box to display the crossplot.
The 'Zone' box applies when the user selects an X or Y axis name which is an output result.
The user can select which zone to plot.
The 'Lft Scale', 'Rht Scale', 'Bot Scale' and 'Top Scale' boxes allow the user to select the
crossplot scales. If left blank, the program will select scales to encompass the total range of
values.
The 'Display' button will update the crossplots with any changes that have been made.
1143
Senergy
The default crossplots and histograms can be changed by editing the 'MonteCarloDefaults.
par' file (stored in the IP program directory).
Related Topics
Define the Output
Senergy
1144
11.2.3.9 Define the Tornado Plot

The 'Tornado Plot' error analysis display shows the relative importance of each parameter in the
overall error associated with a result parameter. In order to calculate the errors, a set of
workflow runs is made. For each parameter in the Monte Carlo analysis, two runs are made; one
with the parameter set to its low value and one set to its high value ( 2 standard deviations for
Gaussian distributions). All other parameters are kept to their default values. This can take a little
time to run, but once run, a tornado plot can be made for any output parameter without having to
re-do the simulation runs. Any change in the Monte Carlo Error Analysis set-up will mean the '
Tornado Plot' error runs will have to be re-made.
The 'Calculate errors' button will run the error analysis.
The 'Display Plot' button will activate the 'Tornado Plot' and run the error analysis, if not
previously run.
1145
Senergy
The 'Tornado Plot' displays the errors associated with any of the output parameters.
Parameters are selected from the 'X Axis Parameter' list box at the bottom of the plot.
Parameters can be displayed by zone or 'All' zones can be displayed. The plot is displayed with
all selected input parameters shown in the Y axis with decreasing importance towards the
bottom of the plot. The red bands show the effect of the selected input parameter on the output
parameter. The Monte Carlo error ranges for each parameter, along with their starting values, are
displayed on the right of the plot. A '%' sign indicates that the shift for the parameter is in percent.
An 'R' character indicates that this is a reciprocal shift (see the section on 'Clay Volume',
'Porosity SW' and ' Cut-offs' Tab, above).
The Tornado plot can either be sent to the clipboard for inclusion in another document or sent
directly to a printer by either using the 'Print' button or else right mouse 'clicking' on the plot to
display the two options 'Copy Graphics to Clipboard' and 'Output to Printer'.
Related Topics
Senergy
1146

Define the Output
11.2.4 Batch Monte Carlo

The 'Batch Monte Carlo' module allows the user to set up and run the Monte Carlo simulation
program on multiple wells. Since the Monte Carlo simulation can take considerable time to run
(from minutes to hours depending of the workflow model), batching multiple wells can mean that
the process can be run overnight without the need of user input.
Before the 'Batch Monte Carlo' can be run, a parameter model file must be created in the
regular Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis module. This is done by setting up and running the '
Monte Carlo Error Analysis' module on one well. Once run (only a few simulations are
needed), the results are saved as a 'Model' file by using the 'Save' button at the bottom of the '
Monte Carlo Error Anaylsis' module window.
To Display the Batch Monte Carlo:
From the Advanced Interpretation Menu, Select Batch Monte Carlo.
Related Topics
1147
Senergy

Batch Monte Carlo
11.2.4.1 Select the required Wells
The user selects the wells to run the Monte Carlo analysis on and the 'Monte Carlo Parameter
Model file' to use.
The 'Stop simulation at' box allows the user to select the number of simulations to run for each
well. This will override the number set in the regular 'Monte Carlo Error Analysis' parameter file.
The 'Output listing to disk' will output for each well the zonal result listing. This file will be put
into each wells 'output directory'. Therefore, it is important that separate output directories
are used for each well, otherwise the results will all be written to the same file.
The 'Output listing to printer' will send the zonal result listing, for each well, to the printer.
The 'Raw Simulation Results to disk' will output the raw simulation results for each well. This
file will be put into the wells output directory.
Senergy
1148
The 'Save' and 'Load' buttons allow the saving and restoring of the setup for the batch job.
Related Topics
Batch Monte Carlo
Select the required Wells
Define the Batch Model
Running the Monte Carlo Batch
11.2.4.2 Define the Batch Model
The model set allows the user to set the parameter set names for the workflow for each well.
This is necessary since the user might be using different parameter set names in different wells.
The 'Set Default Set names for all wells' button is very useful since it searches each well in
turn and looks up the default set names for each module in the workflow.
1149
Senergy
Related Topics
Batch Monte Carlo
The input curve set-up allows the user to check that all the correct curves have been selected for
the curve input.
If a curve is missing for a well then an Error Dialog will be displayed informing the user that an
Input Curve is missing and to Continue anyway with the Batch Run. The user can choose to
ignore the error and continue. If this is done then this curve will be removed from the Monte Carlo
input curves.
Senergy
1150
Related Topics
Batch Monte Carlo
The output curve setup allows the user to set the output curves that are created in each well.
These are the curves that have been set up in the Monte Carlo to have foot by foot statistics
generated on them.
If a curve is missing for a well then an Error Dialog will be displayed informing the user that an
Output Curve is missing and to Continue anyway with the Batch Run. The user can continue but
1151
Senergy
no statistics will be generated for the missing output curve.
Related Topics
Batch Monte Carlo
11.2.4.5 Running the Monte Carlo Batch
The 'Run' button starts the batch job. The first thing the module does is to check the input for
each well before starting the simulations.
If any errors are found an Error Dialog will be displayed. Below is an example Error Dialog.
The user must fix the problem and then start the batch job again.
The error message dialog at the bottom of the window reports the status of the job and whether
any errors were found. Right mouse clicking on the dialog will bring up a pop-up menu where the
selected messages can be copied into the clipboard for inclusion into another document.
Senergy
1152
It is recommended that a test run is made for all wells with 1 or 2 simulations set in the 'Stop
simulation at' box so that the user is confident that every thing is setup correctly before setting
the final number of simulation runs (2000) and letting the program run for many hours.
'Stop' Button
The 'Stop' button will display the following message. The user can either let the current well
finish and then the batch job will be aborted or stop the current Monte Carlo run using the 'Stop'
on the Monte Carlo count window (see below) to abort the run immediately. The message
window will report what has been done.
Related Topics
Batch Monte Carlo
1153

Senergy
Senergy
11.3
1154
Fuzzy Logic Curve Prediction
The Fuzzy Logic Curve Prediction module uses the mathematics of Fuzzy Logic as described
by Cuddy, S. (1997) in his paper "The Application of the Mathematics of Fuzzy Logic to
Petrophysics" (Paper S. 38th Annual Symposium of the SPWLA), to allow the prediction of a
Result curve from a number of Input curves.
Fuzzy Logic is a type of logic that recognizes more than just a simple true or false value. With
Fuzzy logic , propositions can be represented with degrees of truthfulness or falsehood.
The Fuzzy Logic module is arranged on 4 tabs, Input, Create Model, Model Statistics, Run Model
These tabs allow the user to set all the curve Inputs, Create the Fuzzy Logic Model, view the
Model Statistics and Run Model to generate the Output curve in the subject well. This
Chapter describes the Tabs and what the user must do to create the model, evaluate the
effectiveness of the model and run the model in a subject well (or wells).
To Display the Fuzzy Logic Curve Prediction Module.
From the Advanced Interpretation Menu, Select Fuzzy Logic to Display the Fuzzy Logic
Curve Prediction Module with the Input Curves Tab Displayed. Alternatively Ctrl+Alt+F on
the keyboard can be pressed to Display the Fuzzy Logic Curve Prediction Module.
Section 11.3 Advanced Interpretation : Fuzzy Logic Curve Prediction
1155
Related Topics
Input Curves to Prediction Model
Create Prediction Model
Specify Prediction Discriminators
Display Prediction Model Statistics
Run Prediction Model
11.3.1 Input Curves to Prediction Model

The Input tab in the Fuzzy Logic Module allows the user to select multiple wells and their
associated Input curve names that will be used to build the Prediction Model.
Display the Fuzzy Logic Curve Prediction Module.
Senergy
Senergy
1156
Well Name - In the top (Well Name) row of the grid, the user selects the wells needed to
create the model. For each well, the user must choose the input curves to be used in the
Prediction Model.
Curve to Predict - The second row of the grid, Curve to Predict, contains the name of the
curve that the user wishes to predict. The Curve to Predict values are sorted in order of
value then divided into bins so that all bins have the same number of data. In addition, all
Input Curves are divided into the same bin sizes according to Input Curves data at the
same depths as Curve to Predict depths. If a well is not to be used in the creation of a
model, then leave the Curve to Predict cell blank for that well. In the grid shown above, the
Curve to Predict cell is left blank in well Well 2. We are therefore trying to create a model
to predict curve PERMCORE in Test Well 3 (Well 2), using the inputs of SGR, RHOB and
TNPH. The user can use up to eight input curves per well, in a Prediction run.
Input Curves(s) - The Input Curve types should be the consistent for all wells. For
1157
Senergy
example, all gamma ray logs should be in the same row of the grid, all density log curves
should be in the same row of the grid. Note, however that Curve Names can vary from well
to well.
Default Name Column - The Default Name column is used to identify the selected input
curves on other displays. For example, the labels on the Bin Statistics crossplots (see
later). The Default Name is also used to indicate whether or not an input curve row should
be used in the Prediction model. If the Default Name cell is left blank then the row (and its
associated curves) will not be used to build the Prediction model. This is very useful for
switching between models without having to re-enter all the curve names for all the wells.
For example, the user can enter the curve names for Neutron, Density, Sonic, Gr and
Resistivity for multiple wells and then by just blanking out the Default Name, create a much
simpler model, using (for example) just the Gr and Density curves.
Log Norm Column - The Log Norm column, if set to Yes will normalize the curves in that
particular row of the grid. This is done by taking the base 10 logarithm of the curve before
using it in the Prediction model. All other displays in the Fuzzy Logic module will then reflect
this. For example, when the Log Norm flag is set to Yes, then the minimum and maximum
reported values for a curve (See Model Statistics) will be the logarithmic maximum and
minimum for that particular input curve.
The Top Depth - Model Build and Bottom Depth - Model Build rows are used to limit
the depth range of the data used to create a Prediction model. The default top and bottom
depths are the log minimum and maximum depths in each selected well. Changing these
depth values allows the user to create a Prediction model using only a subset of the
selected curve data, for example over an interval where core has been taken. Using the Top
Depth - Model Run and Bottom Depth - Model Run rows allows the user to apply the
Prediction model to the entire logged interval in the Prediction well. Once a Prediction Model
has been built, The Top Depth - Model Run and Bottom Depth - Model Run rows are
used to specify the depth interval over which to run the Prediction model in the subject well.
The default depths are the log minimum and maximum depths in the well.
The Discriminator Curve 1 and Discriminator Curve 2 rows are used to input
discriminator curves, which can be used to further constrain the data used in model
building and also to restrict which depth intervals to run the model over.
The Get Depths from Zones button, in the bottom left-hand corner of the Input tab,
launches a Select Depths dialog. The Select Depths dialog provides the user with an
alternative way of specifying the depth ranges over which to build or apply the Fuzzy Logic
model. To use the dialog you must click the mouse cursor in an appropriate depth entry box
Senergy
1158
(Top Depth / Bottom Depth Model Build or Model Run rows). You then have the option
to select a Zone/Tops Set from the drop-down list and use these depths in one well or in
multiple wells (click the All Wells button).
following options.
The Add wells for Model build and Model Run option will select the model build and
model run option for the newly selected wells.
The Add wells for Model build only option will select only the model build option for the
newly selected wells. The model run option will be turned off.
The Add wells for Model Run only option will select only the model run option for the
newly selected wells. The model build option will be turned off.
1159
Senergy
applied to them.
The Report button gives the user the options to either Save Report or Print Report. If
Save Report is selected then a Fuzzy.Txt file is saved in the currently loaded database
folder. The report can then be viewed on the users screen. Below is a screenshot of part of
the saved report. Selecting Print report will send the Fuzzy.Txt directly to the users default
printer.
The Reset form button clears all the user defined entries in the module returning the
module to its default state.
The Load model and Save model buttons allows the loading and saving of models. A
model can also be saved using the Save Parameter Set menu item. NOTE: To be able
to select curves from a Curve Set the user must first click a cell in the appropriate Well
column and then use the Curve Set drop-down menu.
Related Topics
Senergy
1160
11.3.2 Specify Prediction Discriminators

The Discriminators Tab enables the user to specify Discriminators to be used both when the
Prediction Model is Built and Run. The DISCRIMINATORS can be used for limiting the data for
input into the model and also for limiting the interval over which to run the model.
Click the Discriminators Tab to display the Discriminators Panel.
Specify the required Discriminators for the Prediction Model.

Related Topics
11.3.3 Create Prediction Model

The Create Model tab is used to set up the Prediction Model logic and to create a Model.
Click the Create Fuzzy Model Tab to Define the Model Attributes.
1161
Senergy
Input curve data will be divided into a number of data Bins for use in the Model. The number of
bins must be between 2 and 100. Two types of bin sorting can be applied :
1. Variable size bins : This is generally used only for discrete input data such as facies
numbers. The user must enter the starting bin number and the bin width. The data will then be
sorted into bins according to the discrete values of the input data. For example, if you have
facies-type data with facies numbers between 1 and 8, then set the number of bins to 8, the
starting bin number will be 1 and the bin width will be 1.
2. Equal sampled bins : The program will make a preliminary pass through the input data to
calculate the data maxima and minima for all curves. IP will then set the bin spacings so that
an equal proportion of data will be placed in each bin. This will not always provide an exactly
equal number of samples in each bin. Problems could arise when one has more identical data
values than there should be samples in a bin.
Senergy
1162
For example, if one has a dataset with 100 samples and 20 of the samples have the same
value, then, if the number of bins is set to 10 (i.e. ten samples per bin) the program can not
distribute the data equally into each bin. This will not prevent the Model from running, since the
data is handled in the same way as for the Variable size bins. However, the user should be
aware of this potential complication when viewing the Model statistics - See below.
The Weight bin by number of samples in bin is used in Prediction mode when the Variable
size bins option is chosen. The default is to have this box checked. This then adjusts the
probability that the data belongs to a bin by the number of samples in the bin. For example, if one
is trying to predict facies and the input data are representative of the overall facies distribution,
then the probability that a facies exists at a level is also dependent on the overall probability that
the facies exists. If the input data are felt not to represent the distribution of facies, for example,
you lack data for 1 facies, then uncheck this box will remove the weighting function when
calculating the probabilities and better results can be obtained.
The Model Set Name is the file name used to save the parameters, when using the Save
Parameter Sets menu function.
The Run button is used to calculate the statistics for the Prediction model. After the statistics are
calculated the program will automatically display the Model Statistics tab.
Related Topics
11.3.4 Display Prediction Model Statistics

The Model Statistics tab displays the results of the Model Build calculations. Statistics are
displayed for individual bins (the Bin Number - Bin# is shown in the top left hand cell of the Model
Statistics grid). To view the statistics for different bins in the model, use the Scroll Bin statistics
left & right arrows.
1163
Senergy
The Model Statistics are Displayed in the Create Fuzzy Model Tab.
Number Values - shows a count of the data points for each input curve falling within each
data bin.
The Mean Value, Standard Deviation and Minimum / Maximum Value columns report the
statistics for each input curve in the selected data bin.
The Show Stats Histos button, when clicked generates a set of histograms for the input curves,
for the data in the current data bin. The Bin # is shown in the title line, at the top of the Histogram
plot. By clicking the Scroll Bin statistics left-right arrows, the user can scroll through the
histograms of the input curves for individual data bins. An example of a histogram plot is shown
below:
Senergy
1164
A normal Gaussian distribution line is overlain on the actual input curve data. The vertical green
lines represent one Standard Deviation either side of the Mean value (the blue vertical line).
To print these histograms, or copy the graphics to the clipboard the user should right mouseclick on the plot and select one of the Print options.
The Show Curve Xplots button on the Model Statistics tab, when clicked, produces a set of
crossplots of the bin Mean value versus bin number (Bin #) for each input curve. An example
is shown below:
1165
Senergy
The green vertical bars represent one Standard Deviation either side of the bin Mean value
(the horizontal orange bar). To print or copy the graphics to the clipboard right-mouse-button click
on the plot and select the required Print option.
Related Topics
Senergy
1166
11.3.5 Run Prediction Model

The Run Model tab in the Fuzzy Logic Module allows the user to set up the output curves for the
Prediction Model and to run the Fuzzy logic model in the Prediction well.
Click the Run Model Tab to Specify the Model Results Attributes.
The Run button will run the model displayed in the Model Statistics tab for all wells specified
under the Input tab.
The Output curves generated by the model will depend on which Output Result boxes are
checked. The output curve names can be selected by checking the Output Result check boxes,
next to the Most Likely, 2nd Most Likely and Wt av. 2 most likely labels.
Most Likely : The result with the highest probability.
1167
Senergy
2nd Most Likely : The result with second highest probability.

Wt av. 2 most likely : A weighted average of the two most likely results. The following
equation is used:
Re sult
Re s _ ml
Pr ob _ ml Re s _ 2l Pr ob _ 2l
Pr ob _ ml Pr ob _ 2l
Where:
Res_ml = Most Likely result
Res_2l = 2nd Most Likely result
Prob_ml = Probability of Most Likely result
Prob_2l = Probability of the 2nd Most Likely result
Probabilities all bins : Checking this box will generate a probability array curve. Each bin
will be a different sample in the array. This can be used to make a VDL type plot of
probability versus bin number.
Most Likely high/low probability : checking this box will generate high (_mlH) and low
(_mlL) probability results curves for the Most Likely result.
Wt av. 2 most likely high/low probability : checking this box will generate high (_avH) and
low (_avL) probability results curves for the weighted average of the two Most Likely
results.
The output curves, under the Curve Name column heading, are where the results of the model
are stored. The values in these curves are the Mean bin values calculated in the model creation.
The output curves, under the Probability column heading, give the probability associated with
the computed results. This is a relative rather than an absolute probability, and its value does
depend on the number of curves used in the model. Therefore, one cannot compare the
absolute values of two models created using different numbers of input curves. (See
Section 30.5.)
The output curves, under the Closeness of fit column heading, provide an indication of how
good the results are. The curve compares the result to the original curve, which was used to
create the model. The comparison is made on bin distance.
For example, if the original curve was in bin 4 and the result is in bin 6 then the Closeness of fit
curve will have a value of 2. The result is always positive. If there is no data for the original curve
then the Closeness of fit curve will have a null value (-999). No Closeness of fit curve is
Senergy
1168
generated for the weighted average result, since this makes no sense.
The output curves, under the Result Bin column header, list the bin numbers of the result
curves. This will be the bin number with the highest probability for the Most Likely result.
These curves are useful when displaying the probabilities as VDL-type displays. The curve can
be plotted on top of the VDL to show which bin has been selected for the result.
The Output curves under the Low curve name and High curve name titles give the high / low
probability results. See Most Likely Result Range Section, below.
The values under the Percentile title give the percentile distance away from the selected result to
calculate the high / low probability results. See Most Likely Result Range Section below.
The Default Curve Name box is used to change the Output Curve names easily, without
having to re-type all curve boxes. The user enters the root part of the output name and clicks
Apply. This will change all the output curve names on the tab.
The Show Log Plots button will generate a generic plot of the results. An example is displayed
below. The Cfit_ml and Cfit_2l curves are displayed as points since the input curve to display, in
this example, was core permeability PERM, also plotted as points.
Curves can also be written to different Sets by choosing the Output Set name in the Output
Results Set box or by creating a new Set by clicking the Add Set button. In multi-well exercise
Sets will be automatically created in wells that do not contain the new Set.
The Null All output Curves button will set to Null data (absent) all the Output curves from the
module. This is useful for clearing the results from a plot before rerunning a model, to ensure that
the model is outputting to the correct intervals.
1169
Senergy
A histogram of the Closeness of fit curve can be easily generated by clicking the right mouse
button in the track containing that curve. An example of such a histogram is shown below. From
the cumulative frequency curve one can easily see, in this example, that 80% of the results are
within 2 bins and 75% are within 1 bin of the Most Likely result.
Senergy
1170
The Show Cross Plot button will generate a generic plot of the results. An example is shown
below. The crossplot will seem to be banded since the results have only discrete values (the
mean of each bin).
1171
Senergy
Related Topics
11.3.6 Equations and Methodology

The user chooses the number of bins into which the training data is to be divided. The program
sorts the training data into roughly equal-sampled bins, starting at the lowest values and
extending to the highest. For each data bin the program calculates the Mean (
) and the
Senergy
Standard Deviation (
1172
) for all the associated curves to be used in the prediction. The Mean
and Standard Deviation values are then used by the program, when run in prediction mode, to
find the Most Likely result.
To make the prediction, the program first calculates the fuzzy probability that an input log is in a
certain bin. The following equation is used for this:
P (Cb )
nb
2
b
/ 2
2
b
Where
P(Cb ) - The probability that curve C is in bin b
nb - The number of samples in bin b
C - The input value for curve C
The mean value for curve C for bin b
bb-
The standard deviation for curve C for bin b
The probabilities for all the input curves are then combined as follows:
1
Pb
1
P (C1b )
1
P(C 2 b )
1
....
P (C 3b )
Where
Pb - The total probability for bin b
P(C1b) - The probability for curve C1 for bin b
The Most Likely solution will be the bin with the highest probability. The program outputs the
Most Likely bin result, the second highest probability bin, and a weighted average of these
two highest results. The weighting is done as follows:
Rav
Rml
Pml
Pml
Rsl
Psl
Psl
Where:
Rav - Average weighted result
Rml - Most likely result
Rsl - Second most likely result
Pml - Probability of most likely result
Psl - Probability of the second most likely result
Most Likely Result Range

To give a quantitative feel for the errors in the results, High and Low Result Curves can be
generated for the Most Likely and the Weighted Average results. These curves are
constructed as follows:
At each level the bin probabilities are converted to a normalized (0-1) cumulative frequency
distribution.
1173
Senergy
The Result Bin Percentile is found (ResPC).

The Low result is the bin that has the percentile ResPc Er.
The High result is the bin that has the percentile ResPc + Er.
Where Er is the percentile error entered on the Run Model tab.
The figure above shows an example of how the high and low bin numbers are calculated using a
percentile error of 25%. To find the high and low result, extrapolations are made between the bins
Mean result values.
If the resultant shifted cumulative frequency is outside the normalized range (01) then the result
value will be the Mean value for the first bin or last bin plus or minus two standard deviations of
the spread of data in the bin. This gives some feel for the range of data in the end bin members.
The following plot shows the results of the high and low curves in track 2. The heavy red curve is
the Most Likely result while the yellow shading gives an indication of the range (fuzziness) of the
results. Track 5 contains the bin probabilities plotted as a VDL. The heavy black curve is the
position of the Most Likely bin.
Senergy
Related Topics
1174
1175
11.4
Senergy
Multiple Linear Regression
The Multiple Linear Regression module allows the user to predict a result curve from a number
of input curves, using a least squares regression routine, which will try and find the best fit to the
input data.
To Display the Multi Linear Regression Module.
From the Advanced Interpretation Menu, Select Multi Linear Regression to Display the Multi
Linear Regression Module.
Alternatively press Ctrl+Alt+R on the keyboard to also Display the Multi Linear Regression
Module.
Related Topics
Input Curves to Regression
Specify Regression Discriminators
Run Regression Model
Section 11.4 Advanced Interpretation : Multiple Linear Regression
Senergy
1176
11.4.1 Input Curves to Regression

The Input tab sets up the input curve names to be used. Multiple wells can be used to create the
prediction model.
Display the Multiple Linear Regression Module
The Input Tab will be displayed by default.
Select the wells needed to create the model on the first line of the grid. Once a well is selected,
choose the curves to use in the model.
The second line of the grid Curve to Predict is the data to be used to create the model. If a
well is not to be used in the creation of a model, but only for prediction, then leave the Curve
to Predict cell blank.
The Default Name column is used to identify the input curve for reference on other displays.
It is also used to see if an input curve row should be used in the model. If the Default Name
is blank then the row will not be used. This is very useful for switching between models
without having to re-enter all the curve names for all the wells. For example, the user can
1177
Senergy
enter the curve names for Neutron, Density, Sonic, Gr and Resistivity for multiple wells and
then by just blanking out the Default Name for a curve, create a much simpler model, using
(for example) just the Gr and Sonic curves.
The Log column will normalise the curve by taking the base 10 logarithm of the curve before
using it. All other displays in the module will then reflect this.
The Top Interval Model Build and Bottom Interval Model Build rows are used to limit the
data used in the creation of a model. The defaults are the total well depths. They are not
used for running a created model. This allows the creation of a model using a subset of the
data, and checking of the model on all the data.
The Top Interval Model Run and Bottom Interval Model Run rows are used to specify
the interval over which to run the model. The defaults are the total well depths.
The Show Plot row and button will generate a generic plot of the results. Since the curve to
predict in the example below is core permeability Perm it is plotted as points.
The Discriminator Curve 1 and Discriminator Curve 2 rows are used to input
discriminator curves which can be used to limit the data used in model building and also
restrict which intervals to run the model over.
Senergy
1178
alternative way of specifying the depth ranges over which to build or apply the Multi-linear
regression model. To use the dialog you must click the mouse cursor in an appropriate
depth entry box (Top Depth / Bottom Depth Model Build or Model Run rows). You then have
the option to select a Zone/Tops Set from the drop-down list and use these depths in one
well or in multiple wells (click the All Wells button).
following options.
The Add wells for Model build and Model Run option will select the model build and model
run option for the newly selected wells.
The Add wells for Model build only option will select only the model build option for the newly
selected wells. The model run option will be turned off.
1179
Senergy
The Add wells for Model Run only option will select only the model run option for the newly
selected wells. The model build option will be turned off.
applied to them.
The Load model from disk and Save model to disk buttons allow the user to load or save
models to / from external disk files. Models can also be saved using the Save Parameter
Set menu item.
NOTE: To be able to select a Curve Set you first have to select a cell in a well column.
Related Topics
11.4.2 Specify Regression Discriminators

The Discriminators Tab enables the user to specify Discriminators to be used both when the
Regression Model is Built and Run. The DISCRIMINATORS can be used for limiting the data for
input into the model and also limiting the interval over which to run the model.
Click the Discriminators Tab to display the Discriminators Panel.
Senergy
Specify the required Discriminators for the Prediction Model.

Create Regression Model
Related Topics
1180
1181
Senergy
11.4.3 Create Regression Model

The Create Regression Model tab is used to set up the model logic and create a model.
The Create Regression Model tab displays the results of the model creation calculations. The
coefficients are displayed, corresponding to each input curve. Norm Coefficients are also
displayed to give an indication of how much each input curve affects the model. The closer the
normalized coefficient value is to zero for an input curve, the lower its effect on the model build.
Conversely, the closer the value is to one, the more important is the curves effect on the model
build.
Additional information such as the Total number of data points used from the input curves and
the R2 (R-squared) value are shown.
To obtain the result as a formula, right-click anywhere in the coefficients grid and click the Copy
as Formula menu item. This will put the result in the clipboard as a formula and can be pasted
into other fields or documents.
Senergy
1182
Related Topics
11.4.4 Run Regression Model

The Run Model Tab defines the Output Discriminators for the Regression Model.
The Run button will run the model displayed in the Regression Results tab for all wells specified
under the Input tab.
The Result curve name box is the curve name used when the model is run on the wells
entered in the Input tab. This curve can also be output to different sets by choosing the set name
in the Output set box or creating a new set by clicking the Add Set button.
The Run button is used to calculate the coefficients for the model.
The Null All Output Curves button will set to Null data (absent) all the output curves from the
module. This is useful for clearing the results from a plot before re-running a model to ensure that
the model is outputting to the correct intervals.
The Clip resultant curve box will, when checked, restrict the output curve to have values within
the minimum and maximum values entered.
The Show Crossplot button will generate a generic multi-well crossplot of the results. An
example is shown below.
1183
Related Topics
Senergy
Senergy
11.5
1184
Neural Networks
The Neural Networks curve prediction module uses neural networks to allow the prediction of a
result curve from a number of input curves.
A neural network is a mathematical model that is inspired by the way biological nervous systems,
such as the brain, process information. It is composed of a number of highly interconnected
processing elements (called neurons) which work together to solve the problems presented to it.
Neural Networks learn by example, a process known as training the network, which involves
adjustments to the synaptic connections that exist between the neurons.
The neural network that IP uses is a commercial product by Neuro Solutions - www.
neurosolutions.com
The IP neural networks are built with NeuroSolutions 5.5. The number of Hidden layers = 1. For
further information visit their website at www.neurosolutions.com
To Display the Neural Networks Module.
From the Advanced Interpretation Menu, Select Neural Networks to Display the Neural
Networks Module with the Input Curves Tab Displayed. Alternatively Ctrl+Alt+N on the
keyboard can be pressed to Display the Neural Networks Module.
The Neural Networks module is arranged on 4 tabs, Input, Training Settings, Discriminators,
Model Run Settings.
Section 11.5 Advanced Interpretation : Neural Networks
1185
Senergy
Related Topics
Neural Networks
Input Curves to Neural Networks Module
Define the Training Settings
Specify the Training Discriminators
Training the Neural Network
Specify the Model Run Settings
Running the Neural Network
View Training Results
Neural Networks Scenarios
11.5.1 Input Curves to Neural Networks Module

The Input tab allows the user to select multiple wells and their associated Input Curve names that
will be used to train the Neural Networks Model.
Display the Neural Networks Module
Senergy
1186
Well Name - In the top (Well Name) row of the grid, the user selects the wells needed to
create the model. For each well, the user must choose the input curves to be used by the
Neural Network Model.
Curve to Predict - The second row of the grid, Curve to Predict, contains the name of the
curve that the user wishes to predict. This is only required for wells that the user wishes to
train with.
Input Curves(s) The Input Curve rows contain the names of the curves that the user
wishes to use to predict the Curve to Predict. The Input Curve types should be the
consistent for all wells. For example, all gamma ray logs should be in the same row of the
grid, all density log curves should be in the same row of the grid. NOTE: Curve names can
1187
Senergy
vary from well to well. You can use up to eight input curves per well.
Default Name column - The Default Name column serves several purposes:
1. The values in the Default Name cells are used as the default curve names when a new
well is added to the grid. When a new well is added, if the well contains curves that
match the default names then those curves are pre-selected for the user.Each Default
Name is automatically filled in the first time a curve is selected for that row, and can be
changed manually thereafter.
2. The Curve to Predict default name is used as the name of the output curve if a Curve
to Predict has not been supplied for a well.
3. The default names are also used to indicate whether or not an input curve row should
be used in the Neural Network Model. If the Default Name cell is left blank then the row
(and its associated curves) will not be used to build the model. This is very useful for
switching between models without having to re-enter all the curve names for all the
wells. For example, the user can enter the curve names for Neutron, Density, Sonic, Gr
and Resistivity for multiple wells and then by just blanking out the Default Name, create
a much simpler model, using (for example) just the Gr and Density curves.
Log Column - The Log column, if checked will take the base 10 logarithm of the curve
before using it in the Neural Network Model. For curve data which is in logarithmic form
(such as core permeability) this can greatly improve the accuracy of the predicted results.
Use Well for Training If this is checked for a well then the data from that well will be
used when training the Neural Network. This (in conjunction with Use Well for Model Run)
allows the user to include both wells that they wish to train on and wells that they wish to
predict in the same model.
Zone Set for Training Neural network training is performed on zones of data (see the
Training section for more details). For this purpose special Neural Training Zones Sets are
used. Use this drop-down box to select an existing Neural Training Zones Set, or type a
new name to create a new one. The specified zone Set is created when the Show Plot for
Training button is clicked.
Show Plot for Training this button opens a Training log plot window for the appropriate
well. See the Training section for more details.
Use Well for Model Run If this is checked for a well then an output curve will be
predicted for that well when the neural network model is run.
Top Depth and Bottom Depth These rows are used to specify the depth interval over
which to run the Neural Network Model in the subject well. The default depths are the log
minimum and maximum depths in the well. These depths can be changed with the Get
Senergy
1188
Depths from Zones button, or by manually entering new values.

Show Plot for Model Run this button opens a log plot window for the appropriate well
which shows the input curves and the output curve for the appropriate well. NOTE: If the
model has not yet been run for the well, this will just show the input curves.
alternative way of specifying the depth ranges over which to run the Neural Network Model. If
the Full Well Range box is checked then the Zone/Top Set, Top and Bottom boxes are
grayed out as the full well range will be used. To select zones then uncheck the Full Well
Range box the user then has the option to select a Zone/Tops Set from the drop-down list
and use these depths in one well or in multiple wells (click the All Wells button).
following options.
1189
Senergy
applied to them.
The Load Setup and Save Setup buttons allows the loading and saving of models. This
remembers all the settings on the Neural Networks form.
The Report button allows the user to print or save a report on the status of the neural
network (Well details, Training Settings, Training Results and Model Run Settings). The
button has two options when clicked; Save Report, which saves the report as a text file,
and Print Report, which allows the report to be output directly to a printer. NOTE: To be
able to select curves from a Curve Set the user must first click a cell in the appropriate Well
column and then use the Curve Set drop-down menu.
Related Topics
Neural Networks
Senergy
11.5.2 Define the Training Settings

The Training settings Tab of the Neural Networks Dialog provides the ability to specify the
Training Zones and Parameters required when Training the Neural Network.
Related Topics
Neural Networks
1190
1191
Senergy

11.5.3 Specify the Training Discriminators

The Discriminators Tab enables the user to specify Discriminators to be used when the Model
is Run. The DISCRIMINATORS can be used for limiting the data for input into the model and
also for limiting the interval over which to run the model.
Related Topics
Neural Networks
Senergy
1192
11.5.4 Training the Neural Network

To train the neural network click the Train Neural Network button which appears at the top-left
of each Training log plot window. A progress bar will appear showing the progress of the training.
If large training zones are used the training may take a few moments to complete.
Once the training is complete, each open Training log plot window will show a new curve
(suffixed with _nnt for neural network training) alongside the existing Curve to Predict. These
curves allow the user to see how well the neural network has been trained. If there are areas
where the network has not trained well try creating additional zones in those areas and training
again.
NOTE: that these _nnt curves are temporary and will be removed when the Neural Networks
form is closed.
NOTE: that the results can be different each time the neural network is trained, even if the input
data and training zones have not been changed. This is due to the fact that each training run
begins with randomised settings and this is normal behaviour for a neural network. As such, it
can often be helpful to train the network several times to see if the results vary each time and
decide which results fit best. To aid this approach each training run can be undone with the
Undo Training button if the user decides that the results are worse than the last training run.
Once the user is happy with the training results they can, if desired, save the trained neural
network model by clicking the Save Model button. This saves the neural networks trained state
to a file, which can be re-used for subsequent model runs (see the Model Run Settings tab). The
last trained model can also be saved in the Model Run Settings tab.
For each well that the user wishes to use to train the neural network the following steps should
be performed:
1. Select the Curve to Predict.
2. Select the Input Curves.
3. Make sure the wells Use Well for Training entry is ticked.
4. Either select an existing Training Zones Set or enter the name of a new Set that you wish
to create.
5. Click the wells Show Plot for Training to bring up the wells Training log plot window.
NOTE: The Training log plot is a specialised version of a normal plot window with some of
the more advanced options removed, but new neural network specific buttons added.
6. On the Training log plot window, create zones (in the second log plot track) that contain
representative examples of good data. The data within these zones is what will be used to
train the neural network.
7. For most purposes a small number (4-8) of narrow zones is enough to generate good
1193
Senergy
results. See the Neural Networks Scenarios section for more details.
NOTE: that in Training log plots, zones can be created simply be clicking in the zone track.
Once training zones have been created for all training wells the neural network can be trained.
NOTE: that if any of the training wells do not contain training zones a warning message will
appear and the training will not start.
Related Topics
Neural Networks
Senergy
1194
11.5.5 Specify the Model Run Settings

The Model Run Settings tab is used to specify various options that are used when running the
neural network with the Run Model for selected Wells button:
Output_Curve Suffix This is appended to the output curves name so that the curve can
be easily identified.
The Overwrite existing output curves? check-box gives the user the ability to overwrite
output curves from an old Neural Network session with curves from a more recent session.
Output Result Set Output curves can be written to different Sets by choosing the output
Set name in the Output Results Set box or by creating a new Set by clicking the Add Set
1195
Senergy
button. NOTE: In multi-well exercise Sets will be automatically created in wells that do not
contain the new Set.
Closeness of Fit Curve - Output curve displayed on the log plots which gives the user an
idea of how close the predicted curve was to the original data.
Round output to nearest integer? This option will round all data in the output curves to
the nearest whole number. This provides an alternative method of predicting Facies data.
Overwrite existing output curves This specifies whether to overwrite existing curves
with the same name or not. For example: predicting a RHOB curve will create an output
curve called RHOB_nn. If this option is ticked, predicting again will overwrite the existing
RHOB_nn curve. If this option is not ticked then predicting again will create a RHOB1_nn
curve, with the next run creating RHOB2_nn.......etc.
Use the last trained model Selecting this option instructs the neural network to use the
last trained model when creating output curves. This option will not be available if the neural
network has not been trained since opening the neural networks form.
Save Model - - This saves the last trained model to a file, which can be re-used for
subsequent model runs.
Load Model User can browse for a saved model.
Related Topics
Neural Networks
11.5.6 Running the Neural Network

For each well that the user wishes to run the neural network on the following steps should be
performed:
1. Select the Input Curves.
2. Make sure the wells Use Well for Model Run entry is ticked.
3. Make sure the wells Top Depth and Bottom Depth are correct.
Senergy
1196
Once the user is happy they can click the Run Model for selected Wells button located at the
lower-right of the Input tab. A progress bar will appear showing the progress of the model run.
Once the progress bar disappears the model run is complete.
The resulting output curves can be viewed by clicking the appropriate wells Show Plot for
Model Run Show Plot button.
Related Topics
Neural Networks
1197
Senergy

11.5.7 View Training Results

Additional Buttons
Report - There are two options available
View Report - this displays a text file of the Neural Networks Prediction Parameters similar
to the one in the screenshot below:
An explanation of the Training Results displayed in the report is given below:

Epochs Trained - number of epochs actually performed in that training pass, which may
not be the same as the epochs per pass requested as the training may have decided to stop
because cross-validation showed it was beginning to over train.
Epoch of Best Cost - if present this shows which epoch produced the best results for that
training pass. This is for information only and isnt really of any practical use. If not present it
Senergy
1198
means that this training pass did not improve on the previous one.
Best Cost - if present this shows the minimum error that was achieved in the training pass
(the lower the better). This is the error that was achieved during the Epoch of Best Cost.
Raw Sensitivity - shows the sensitivity of each input - basically how much affect each input
has on the output. If all sensitivities are of the same magnitude then all inputs are equally
important, but if for example one input is significantly lower than the rest (e.g. 5, 6, 0.1, 5.5)
then you could probably exclude that input without adversely affecting the results, and it may
in fact improve the results.
Print Report - Sends the text file of the Neural Networks Prediction Parameters to the users
default printer.
Reset Setup - this will clear all the input wells and resets other options to their default
settings.
Load Setup - loads a saved Neural Network setup from a user defined location.
Save Setup - saves a Neural Network setup to a user defined location. The file is saved by
default as NeuralNetworks.nns into the IP project folder.
Related Topics
Neural Networks
11.5.8 Neural Networks Scenarios

This topic outlines specific Neural Networks Scenarios, Continuous Log Prediction, Core
Porosity Prediction and Facies Prediction.
Continuous Log Prediction

The following advice applies to predicting continuous log curves:
When creating training zones, create a small zone for each distinct lithology evident in each
curve.
1199
Senergy
A small number of zones (4-8) is often enough to produce good results.

If certain lithologies are not predicting well, try adding additional zones within the affected
lithologies.
Remember to select zones that represent examples of good data. Ignore areas of
obviously incorrect data.
Do not use a classification network.
Do not round the output.
Using a single average value from each zone may be applicable if a large number of small
zones are created.
Core Porosity Prediction

The following advice applies to predicting core porosty curves:
Create a single training zone that covers all of the core data. This is safe as input values that
do not contain any core data will be automatically ignored during training.
Do not use a single average value from each zone.
Facies Prediction
There are two ways to predict Facies data:
1. Using a classification network:
Enable the classification network option on the Training Settings tab.
NOTE: that the classification network can predict a maximum of 10 categories of Facies.
2. Rounding the output curves
Enable the Round output to the nearest integer option on the Model Run Settings tab.
Related Topics
Neural Networks
Senergy

1200
1201
11.6
Senergy
Cluster Analysis for Rock Typing
The Cluster Analysis module uses standard statistical routines to allow the user to cluster the
data into groups to produce an electrical facies log. This log can then hopefully be used to
correlate to geological facies.
To Display the Cluster Analysis Module.
From the Advanced Interpretation Menu, Select Cluster Analysis to Display the Cluster
Analysis Module with the Input Curves Tab Displayed. Alternatively Ctrl+Alt+T on the
keyboard can be pressed to Display the Cluster Analysis Module.
The Cluster Analysis module is a arranged on six tabs: Input, Discriminators, Cluster Means,
Cluster Consolidation, Cluster Output, Crossplot
These tabs allow the user to set all the curve inputs, determine the number of clusters and the
clustering method, to generate the cluster output in the subject well or wells. The following
sections describe the Tabs and what the user must do to create the model, evaluate the
effectiveness of the model and run the model in a subject well (or wells).
Related Topics
Cluster Analysis
Input Curves for Cluster Analysis
Specify Cluster Analysis Discriminators
Specify Cluster Means
Define Cluster Consolidation
Section 11.6 Advanced Interpretation : Cluster Analysis for Rock Typing
Senergy
1202
Define the Cluster Output

Cluster Analysis Crossplot
Theory of Cluster Analysis
11.6.1 Input Curves for Cluster Analysis

The Input tab allows the user to select multiple wells and their associated Input Curve names
that will be used for clustering. Below is a multiple screenshot showing one way in which the
columns can be populated. However, other ways of populating the grid are possible. One way is
to select the Well from the drop-down box then select the curve, again from a drop-down list.
The Use Curve and Default Name columns will auto-populate.
Use Curve - check this column to select a curve to be used in the cluster analysis. All
Curves can be Selected or De-Selected using the Column Header Arrow. This is very
useful for switching between models without having to re-enter all the curve names for all
the wells. For example, the user can enter the curve names for Neutron, Density, Sonic, Gr
and Resistivity for multiple wells and then by just un-checking the Use Curve, create a
much simpler model, using (for example) just the Gr and Density curves.
1203
Senergy
Default Name column - Each Default Name is automatically filled in the first time a curve
is selected for that row, and can be changed manually thereafter. The values in the Default
Name cells are used as the default curve names when a new well is added to the grid.
those curves are pre-selected for the user.
Log column - if checked will take the base 10 logarithm of the curve before using it in the
cluster analysis. For curve data which is in logarithmic form (such as core permeability)
this can greatly improve the accuracy of the predicted results.
Well column - in the top (Well Name) row of the grid, the user selects the wells needed to
cluster analysis module.
Input Curve rows - contain the names of the curves that the user wishes to use for cluster
analysis. The Input Curve types should be the consistent for all wells. For example, all
the same row of the grid. NOTE: Curve names can vary from well to well. You can use up
to eight input curves per well. Clicking on the arrow next to the Input Curve after first
entering a Default Name and checking the Use Curve column will auto-populate all the
selected wells in that row with the curve name associated with the Default Name curve
type.
Use Well for Model Build - if this is checked then the data from that well will be used in
the cluster analysis model build.
Top Depth and Bottom Depth these rows are used to specify the depth interval over
which to run the cluster analysis in the subject well. The default depths are the log
minimum and maximum depths in the well. These depths can be changed with the Get
Depths from Zones button, or by manually entering new values.
Use Well for Model Run - if this is checked then the data from that well will be used in the
cluster analysis model run.
Show Plot - this button opens a log plot window for the appropriate well which shows as
default; the input curves, cluster distribution curve and the facies clustering results curves
each in a separate track. NOTE: If the model has not yet been run for the well then this will
just show the input curves.
Discriminator Crv1 and Discriminator Crv2 rows are used to input discriminator
curves, which can be used to further constrain the data used in model building and also to
restrict which depth intervals to run the model over.
Senergy
1204
alternative way of specifying the depth ranges over which to run the cluster analysis Model.
If the Full Well Range box is checked then the Zone/Top Set, Top and Bottom boxes
are grayed out as the full well range will be used. To select zones then uncheck the Full
Well Range box the user then has the option to select a Zone/Tops Set from the dropdown list and use these depths in one well or in multiple wells (click the All Wells button).
Dialog. When the button is clicked a drop down menu is displayed, where the user has
the following options.
1205
Senergy
The Delete Current Wells option removes all the current wells, but leaves the Default
curve names and any model currently in use. This then allows a new group of wells to be
easily selected using the other options. Once loaded the current selected model can
easily be applied to them.
Use Custom Plot Format - if this is checked then it allows the user to type in or browse
for a saved plot format that they wish to use.
Report - this has two options Print or File. Selecting Print will send the ClusterAnalysis.
txt file directly to the users default printer. The File option will save ClusterAnalysis.txt to
the currently loaded database folder.
Multi-well Plot - creates a multi-well plot, in the Well Correlation Viewer module, of the
currently selected Model Run wells. This is very useful for comparing clustering results.
The Reset form button clears all the user defined entries in the Input tab of the module,
model can also be saved using the Save Parameter Set menu item.
Related Topics
Cluster Analysis
11.6.2 Specify Cluster Analysis Discriminators

The DISCRIMINATORS can be used for limiting the data for input into the model and also limiting
the interval over which to run the model.
Senergy
1206
Related Topics
Cluster Analysis
11.6.3 Specify Cluster Means

The Cluster Means tab is used to run the K-mean clustering on the data. The data used is from
all wells selected from Model Build on the Input tab. In order to calculate the clusters the Mean
values for each curve and each cluster must be initialized with some value. The initialization can be
done in three ways:
manually type numbers into the grid,
click the Seed Clusters button,
use the Crossplot button to interactively move pre-assigned points.
If wanting to use the interactive crossplot it is best to use the Seed Clusters as a starting point
for the points on the crossplot.
The Seed Clusters button seeds the grid by performing a principal component analysis on the
1207
Senergy
input data. The results are sorted and the data is divided up equally into the required number of
clusters using the Number of Clusters box. The input data in each cluster is then averaged to
give the mean seed points. The screenshot below shows the mean values after clicking on the
Seed Clusters button.
Once the Mean columns are filled with values click on the Run Clustering to fill the rest of the
grid. An error message like this may appear;
If this happens then re-run the clustering again to get a similar result to the screenshot below.
Senergy
1208
If a row has a small value in the # Points column then the row can be selected by clicking in the
Mean column of the row to be deleted and then clicking on the Delete Row button.
Clicking the Crossplot button displays the Multi-Curve Crossplot module.
1209
Senergy
In the Multi-Curve Crossplot Module that has been launched from the Cluster Analysis Module,
the drop-down box in the top right corner allows the user to select from the different cluster Sets
which have been created in the Cluster Consolidation tab. The Z axis and cluster mean colour
bars will change to reflect the Set chosen. The colours and values of the cluster Sets can be
changed in the Cluster Output tab.
Z axis colors from "All Clusters" set - if this is checked then the Z axis colours set up in
the Cluster Output tab for the All Clusters Set will be used even if a different User set is
selected in the drop-down box. This is very useful for quickly comparing the differences
between cluster Sets.
Edit Cluster means - only if this is checked is the user able to move the cluster mean
points interactively on the crossplots using the mouse cursor. When the cluster is released,
after moving it with the mouse, the mean value on other crossplots with the same X and Y
axis will update. The mean values in the Cluster Means tab will also update.
Display only Selected - allows the user to display selected clusters. To select a cluster
click on the Show cell next to the cluster to be displayed. To select all the clusters click on
the Show cell itself. To deselect all the clusters click on the Show cell again
Auto Update - having this checked means that any changes to selected wells or clusters
Senergy
1210
will take effect immediately. However, if there are many wells and clusters the crossplots
may be slow in refreshing. In this case it may be better to uncheck the box and use the
Update button for applying changes.
Display Cluster Means - Unchecking this will remove the cluster mean points from the
crossplots.
Display Z Axis Colors - if this is un-checked then all the cluster mean points are displayed
in blue. NOTE: if the Run Clustering hasnt been run then all the crossplots points will be in
blue and there will be no horizontal Z axis colour bar visible at the bottom of the module
screen.
It is possible to edit the displayed Z axis cluster colours by selecting different colours from the
drop-down list. The Z axis colours for each individual cluster can also be turned on or off by
checking the Show column. For any changes to take affect click the Update button, if the Auto
Update is un-checked.
Wells Z Axis - checking this box allows the user to view the cluster data with the Z axis
displaying the well colour instead of the cluster colour. The cluster mean circle for each
cluster remains visible depending on if it has been selected.
Related Topics
Cluster Analysis
11.6.4 Define Cluster Consolidation

Once the K-mean clustering is completed the user normally ends up with more clusters than can
be justified geologically. The next step in the analysis is to consolidate the clusters into
meaningful groups. This is done either manually by assigning clusters to groups using the
crossplot or log plot displays or automatically by using hierarchical clustering on the individual
clusters using the Cluster Consolidation Tab. The automatic grouping is done by using a
hierarchical clustering technique and then specifying the number of groups wanted in the
Number of cluster groups box. A Cluster Grouping Dendrogram plot shows how the
1211
Senergy
clusters are grouped hierarchically.
There are 5 different clustering methods which can give quite radically different results. The
Dendrogram can be saved to Printer, File or Clipboard using the Output Dendrogram button.
Cluster groupings can be copied to the Cluster Output tab using the Copy clusters to User set
box for the creation of facies curves. This allows the user to plot different groupings on a log plot
to try and determine which is more geologically feasible. NOTE: there is a maximum number of
User sets which is seven, as this is the number allowed in the Cluster Output tab.
A Cluster Randomness Plot can be used to help select the number of groups. This plot shows
how random the clustering is in comparison to a completely random arrangement of clusters.
Senergy
1212
Related Topics
Cluster Analysis
11.6.5 Define the Cluster Output

The Cluster Output tab allows the creation of the cluster curves in the wells. It also allows the
manual editing of cluster groups and the shading colours on the output plots. NOTE: users should
not use colours with shading i.e. bitmaps as the crossplot program wont be able to recognise the
bitmap and will supply an alternative colour.
1213
Senergy
Null all output curves before running calculations - will set to Null data (absent) all the
output curves from the module. This is useful for clearing the results from a plot before rerunning a model to ensure that the model is outputting to the correct intervals.
Copy Selected Column - click in the column that you want to copy (either the Value or
Shading column) and enter a User Set number and then click the Copy Selected Column
button. Apart from creating copies of cluster Sets this is also a useful way of clearing
unwanted results by selecting an empty User Set and then copying it to the unwanted User
Set.
Cluster Distance output curve - this is the distance between clusters that was calculated
from the Clustering Method selected from the Cluster Consolidation tab.
Output Curves - to create the output curves, which then can be plotted either in the Multiwell Plot or from the Input tab Show Plot, this button MUST be clicked.
Output Curve set - the output curve Set for the Cluster Analysis output curves can be
Senergy
1214
changed here. An existing Set can be selected from the drop-down menu or a new Set
created using the Edit button and the Add Set Names module.
In the screenshot below, four wells have been selected from the same field. K-mean clustering
has been performed with an initial 15 clusters - the L_FaciesAll. The L_Facies used the same
Clustering Method but was restricted to 11 cluster groups. The L_Facies2 used 8 cluster
groups and the L_Facies3 used 5 cluster groups. The program attempts to keep similar colours
and values for the cluster groups in order to keep the log plots looking broadly similar.
To view the results of the clustering click the Output Curves button and then click the Multiwell Plot button. This opens up the Multi-Well Correlation Plot with a default facies plot for
each of the wells selected.
1215
Senergy
Alternatively, the user could go to the Input tab and select Show Plot for one of the wells and a
single well facies plot will be displayed.
Related Topics
Cluster Analysis
11.6.6 Cluster Analysis Crossplot

The Crossplot scales for each of the selected curves can be changed here and the multi-curve
Crossplot can be opened by clicking the Crossplot button.
Senergy
Related Topics
Cluster Analysis
1216
1217
Senergy
11.6.7 Theory of Cluster Analysis

The module works in two stages. Firstly, the data is divided up into manageable data clusters.
The number of clusters should be enough to cover all the different data ranges seen on the logs.
15 to 20 clusters would appear to be a reasonable number for most data sets. The second step,
which is more manual, is to take these 15 to 20 clusters and group them into a manageable
number of geological facies. This may involve reducing the data to 4 to 5 clusters.
Stage-1 K-mean clustering

The first stage of Facies Clustering uses the K-mean statistical technique to cluster the data
into a known entered number of clusters. For this to work an initial guess has to be made of the
mean value of each cluster for each input log. The initial guess can affect the results and in order
to get good results the initial values should cover the total range of the logs. The initial guesses
can be manually entered in the K-mean table of the Cluster Means tab or the automatic seeding
option can be used - Seed Clusters button of the Cluster Means tab.
The automatic seeding option works by calculating the first principal component log of the data.
This will normally contain most of the variation in the data and hence is an ideal way to seed the
data to give maximum coverage in the seeded values. Once the principal component log is
calculated the data is sorted. The data is then divided up equally into the number of wanted
clusters. From the data in each cluster the average value for each log is calculated and this value
is used as the seed point.
K-mean clustering works by assigning each input data point to a cluster. The routine tries to
minimize the within-cluster sums of squares of the difference between the data point and the
cluster mean value. The routine works by calculating the sum of the squares difference for a data
point and each cluster mean and assigning the point to the cluster with the minimum difference.
Once all the data points have been assigned to the clusters the new mean values in each cluster
are calculated. Using the new mean values the routines starts again re-assigning the data to the
clusters. This loop continues until the mean values do not change between loops. These then
become the results.
All input log data is normalized (standardized) before starting so that each input log has the same
dynamic range. The normalization is done by calculating the mean and standard deviation of the
log and then normalizing the data by subtracting the mean and dividing by the standard deviation.
Hence a normalized log data value of 1.0 or -1.0 will be one standard deviation.
The Cluster Means grid shows the mean values plus other statistics.
Senergy
1218
# Points : This is the number of data levels in each cluster.

Cluster Spread : Within each cluster this is the standard deviation of the distance of each
data point from the cluster mean (units are
standard deviation of the original data).
Hence, the lower this value the tighter the data is clustered around its mean value.
Mean : This is the mean value of the log for the cluster in units of the input log (i.e. unnormalized).
Std Dev. : This is the standard deviation of the data in a cluster for the log. This allows the
user to see for an individual log how its data is grouped in an individual cluster. Large
standard deviations for all clusters would indicate that this log bears little influence on which
cluster the data is assigned to and could probably be excluded from the input with little
change in the results.
Stage-2 Cluster Consolidation

Cluster consolidation can be done completely manually by using the crossplot and log plot output
to group data, or a hierarchical cluster technique can be used to group the data.
Hierarchical clustering works by computing the distances between all clusters and then merging
the two clusters closest together. The new cluster distance to all other clusters is then
recomputed and the two closest clusters merged again. This process continues until you have
only one cluster. The results can be plotted as a dendrogram, which IP displays. The
dendrogram shows how the clusters were merged and the order they were merged. The
1219
Senergy
numbers at the top of each branch give the merging order. The original results from the K-mean
clustering are shown at the base of the plot.
IP has five different clustering methods which decide how the clusters are merged. The different
methods will show considerably different results. The default method Minimize the withincluster sum of squares distance gives good results for separating out the different log
lithologies into different clusters.
The five methods differ in how the distance calculation is updated after two cluster have been
joined.
If we assume, in the diagram below, cluster "A" and "B" have just been joined to form cluster "Z",
and we need to calculate the distance of "Z" with another cluster called "C".
For the different techniques the calculations are made as follows:
Minimum distance between all objects in clusters - the distance from Z to C is the
minimum of the distances (A to C, B to C).
Maximum distance between all objects in clusters - the distance from Z to C is the
maximum of the distances (A to C, B to C).
Average distance between merged clusters - the distance from Z to C is the average
Senergy
1220
distance of all objects that would be within the cluster formed by merging clusters and C.
Average distance between all objects in clusters - the distance from Z to C is the
average distance of objects within cluster Z to objects within cluster C.
Minimize the within-cluster sum of squares distance - clusters are formed so as to
minimize the increase in the within-cluster sums of squares. The distance between two
clusters is the increase in these sums of squares if the two clusters were merged.
In general, Minimum distance between all objects in clusters will yield long thin clusters
while Maximum distance between all objects in clusters will yield clusters that are more
spherical. Average distance between merged clusters and Minimize the within-cluster sum
of squares distance tend to yield clusters that are similar to those obtained with Average
distance between all objects in clusters.
The grouping of the clusters into a known number of groups is easily done by stopping the
grouping at a certain cutoff level. In IP, the dendrogram automatically colours each grouping in a
different colour. The groupings above the cutoff are in black. The following plot shows a cutoff at
5 groups.
It is possible to analyse the groupings to decide at which level adding another cluster gives more
information or is just adding noise. The Cluster Randomness Plot provides this information.
1221
Senergy
The chart calculates for each number of cluster groups the perceived randomness of the data.
The higher the value the less random the clusters are - i.e. more structured data.
The randomness is calculated by first calculating the average number of depth levels per cluster
- i.e. the average thickness of a cluster layer. This is performed on the original log data. Then the
theoretical average thickness is calculated assuming the clusters to be assigned randomly at
each depth level. The randomness is the ratio of the two. A value of 1 would be totally random,
higher values less random.
Av. Thickness = Number of depth levels / Number of cluster layers
Random Thickness =
pi / (1 pi)
Where pi is the proportion of depth levels assigned to the ith cluster.

Randomness index = Av. Thickness / Random Thickness
The plot is interpreted by picking the number of clusters that are least random (highest peaks). In
the above example, a cluster grouping of 6 or perhaps 10 would seem to give the most likely
information into the grouping of the log data.
For more information on Cluster Analysis techniques a good starting point is Multivariate Pattern
Recognition and Classification Methods, Geological Log Analysis Using Computer Methods, J.H
Doveton.
Related Topics
Cluster Analysis
Senergy

1222
1223
11.7
Senergy
Principal Component Analysis
Principal component analysis (PC) is a technique used to reduce multidimensional data sets to
lower dimensions for analysis. This technique can be useful in Petrophysics and Geology as a
preliminary method of combining multiple logs in to a single or two logs without losing
information. The PC curves then can be used for various tasks like multi-well tops correlation and
regression analysis.
To Display the Principal Component Analysis Module:
From the Advanced Interpretation Module Menu, Select Principal Component Analysis.
Alternatively, press Ctrl+Alt+A on the keyboard to display the Principal Component Analysis
Module.
Related Topics
Input Curves for Principal Component Analysis
Specify Principal Component Analysis Discriminators
Specify Principal Component Analysis Output
Method for Principal Component Analysis
Section 11.7 Advanced Interpretation : Principal Component Analysis
Senergy
1224
11.7.1 Input Curves for Principal Component Analysis

The Input tab allows the user to select multiple wells and their associated Input Curve names
that will be used for Principle Component Analysis.
Display the Principal Component Analysis Module
Select the wells on which to perform PC and the curves by using the drop-down lists in the
Well column.
Use Curve - check this column to select a curve to be used in the PC analysis. Clicking on
the Column Header Arrow will select/deselect all the curves. This is very useful for switching
between models without having to re-enter all the curve names for all the wells. For
1225
Senergy
example, the user can enter the curve names for Neutron, Density, Sonic, Gr and Resistivity
for multiple wells and then by just un-checking the Use Curve, create a much simpler
model, using (for example) just the Gr and Density curves.
Default Name column - Each Default Name is automatically filled in the first time a curve is
selected for that row, and can be changed manually thereafter. The values in the Default
Name cells are used as the default curve names when a new well is added to the grid.
those curves are pre-selected for the user.
Log column - if checked will take the base 10 logarithm of the curve before using it in the
cluster analysis. For curve data which is in logarithmic form (such as core permeability) this
can greatly improve the accuracy of the predicted results.
Well column - in the top (Well Name) row of the grid, the user selects the wells needed to
PC analysis module.
Input Curve rows - contain the names of the curves that the user wishes to use for PC
analysis. The Input Curve types should be the consistent for all wells. For example, all
the same row of the grid.
NOTE: Curve names can vary from well to well. You can use up to eight input curves per
well. Clicking on the arrow next to the Input Curve
after first entering a
Default Name and checking the Use Curve column will auto-populate all the selected wells
in that row with the curve name associated with the Default Name curve type.
Use Well for Model Build - if this is checked then the data from that well will be used in the
PC analysis model build.
Top Depth and Bottom Depth these rows are used to specify the depth interval over
which to run the PC analysis in the subject well. The default depths are the log minimum
and maximum depths in the well. These depths can be changed with the Get Depths from
Zones button, or by manually entering new values.
Use Well for Model Run - if this is checked then the data from that well will be used in the
PC analysis model run.
Show Plot - this button opens a log plot window for the appropriate well which shows as
default; the input curves and the PC analysis result curves each in a separate track. NOTE:
If the model has not yet been run for the well, this will just show the depth curve.
Senergy
1226
Discriminator Crv1 and Discriminator Crv2 rows are used to input discriminator curves
, which can be used to further constrain the data used in model building and also to restrict
which depth intervals to run the model over.
alternative way of specifying the depth ranges over which to run the Neural Network Model. If
the Full Well Range box is checked then the Zone/Top Set, Top and Bottom boxes are
grayed out as the full well range will be used. To select zones then uncheck the Full Well
Range box the user then has the option to select a Zone/Tops Set from the drop-down list
and use these depths in one well or in multiple wells (click the All Wells button).
1227
Senergy
following options.
The Add wells for Model build and Model Run option will select the model build and model
run option for the newly selected wells.
The Add wells for Model build only option will select only the model build option for the newly
selected wells. The model run option will be turned off.
The Add wells for Model Run only option will select only the model run option for the newly
selected wells. The model build option will be turned off.
applied to them.
Use Custom Plot Format - if this is checked then it allows the user to type in or browse for
a saved plot format that they wish to use.
Report - this has two options Print or File. Selecting Print will send the
PrinCompAnalysis.txt file directly to the users default printer. The File option will save
PrinCompAnalysis.txt to the currently loaded database folder.
Multi-well Plot - creates a multi-well plot, in the Well Correlation Viewer module, of the
currently selected Model Run wells. This is very useful for comparing PC results.
The Reset form button clears all the user defined entries in the Input tab of the module,
Senergy
1228
model can also be saved using the Save Parameter Set menu item.
Related Topics
11.7.2 Specify Principal Component Analysis Discriminators

The DISCRIMINATORS can be used for limiting the data for input into the model and also limiting
the interval over which to run the model.
Related Topics
1229
Senergy
11.7.3 Specify Principal Component Analysis Output

After selecting Wells, curves and intervals in the Input tab and using the Discriminator tab to
remove possibly erroneous data the Output tab is where the user can run the PC analysis and
generate results.
The user has the option to select which curves to output using the Output check-box. The output
curve names are also user selectable and editable. The % Variability column is only filled in
once the Run button is clicked.
The Output Curve Set is defaulted to PC (Principal Component), however, this is user
editable. Clicking on the Edit button brings up the Add Set Names module where users can
create a new curve Set.
Senergy
1230
In the Analysis data selection section there are two options;

Principal component analysis run on each individual well - this will run the PC analysis
on each individual well in turn and then output the PC curves for each well. To see the
results of the analysis use the Multi-well Plot. NOTE: the PC analysis runs nearly
instantaneously so there will be no on-screen indication that the analysis has run.
Principal component analysis run on model build wells - this runs the analysis on all the
wells which have their Use Well for Model Build checked. A % Variability is calculated for
all the combined wells and displayed.
Null all output curves before running calculations will set to Null data (absent) all the output
curves from the module. This is useful for clearing the results from a plot before re-running a
model to ensure that the model is outputting to the correct intervals.
The Run Model Only outputs the PC curves without recalculating the PC analysis equations.
Run button runs the PC analysis and produces the PC output curves.
Related Topics
1231
Senergy
11.7.4 Method for Principal Component Analysis

The input data is normalized for each curve. This is done for each data point by subtracting the
curve mean value and dividing by the curve standard deviation. The normalized data is then used
to create the principal component curves. The total variability in the data for each PC curve is
reported on the Output tab. The Eigen vectors are also reported in the listings.
An example of the result is shown below.
% Variability / Eigen vectors
Pc
% Variability
rhob
dt
nphi
gr
1st
48.88
-0.29412
0.56258
0.66652
0.39083
2nd
37.51
0.68196
-0.27708
0.14744
0.66062
3rd
11.06
0.50637
0.77419
-0.36116
-0.11741
4th
2.54
0.43819
-0.08581
0.63527
-0.63012
Input curves normalization

rhob
dt
nphi
gr
Mean Value
2.63535
64.53714
0.1321
79.13452
Std Deviation
0.15722
9.54118
0.07116
43.40833
In the above example 48.9% of the total variability in the data can be seen in the PC1 curve. PC2
curve will have 37.5%. Hence the first 2 curves will contain 86.4 of the variability. Hence we have
practically reduced the information in the 4 curve input to 2 curves.
The result PC curves are calculated from the Eigen vectors by taking an input data level in a well.
Normalizing the data using the normalization data and then multiplying the normalized curves by
the corresponding Eigen value for the curve and adding up the result.
In the above example listing the PC1 curve will be computed as follows
PC1 = -0.294 (Rhob 2.635)/0.157 + 0.563 (Dt 64.53)/9.54 + 0.667 (Nphi 0.132)/0.071 +
0.391 (Gr 79.13) / 43.41
The module is accessed under the main menu Advanced Interpretation menu list.
The Principal Component Analysis module is set out in a similar way to the other Advanced
Interpretation modules. There are three tabs Input, Discriminators and Output.
Related Topics
Senergy
11.8
1232
Rock Physics
The Rock Physics section in IP contains the following independent modules:

The Shear Sonic QC/Create module either creates a synthetic shear sonic curve from a
compressional sonic log, or quality controls a recorded shear sonic curve.
The Density Estimation module provides the user with a means to generate a density curve
from sonic log data. When density log information is not available, it is often estimated from
P-wave velocity (Vp) using an empirical relationship. A number of authors have published
density-from-sonic transit time algorithms. The methodologies included here are those of
Gardner1, Bellotti et al2 and Lindseth3.
The Fluid Substitution module removes the effect of the drilling fluid from the sonic and density
log measurements and then restoring the log responses to those resulting from the original
reservoir fluids at their original saturations. The output density and sonic (velocity) curves are
subsequently used to generate an Acoustic Impedance (AI) log. The AI log is used to
calculate a reflection co-efficient (RC) series for the boundaries between rocks of different
lithologies. The RC log is then used in the computation of synthetic seismograms.
The Laminated Fluid Substitution is an Gassmann equation based fluid substitution application
that transforms density and sonic logs to any saturation condition. Like many commercial
programs there are two stages to the program. The input logs are first transformed to the
100% water saturated condition to verify the integrity of the invasion corrections, and then
modeled at specified conditions of reservoir fluid type and saturation.
The Elastic Impedance module The Elastic Impedance (EI) is as calculated by P. Connolly in
The Leading Edge paper (1999). The equation used is the one for high angle inversion (
equation 4.1). There is little difference between the low angle equation and the high angle
equation for angles below about 20. For angles above 30 the low angle equation starts to
become unstable.
Related Topics
Shear Sonic QC/Create
Density Estimation
Fluid Substitution
Laminated Fluid Substitution
Elastic Impedance
Section 11.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics
1233
Senergy
11.8.1 Shear Sonic QC / Create

The Shear Sonic QC / Create module can be used to:
create a synthetic shear sonic curve from a compressional sonic log, or
to quality control a recorded shear sonic curve.
The Shear sonic curve is a required input to the Fluid Substitution Module.
The module is accessed under the main Advanced Interpretation menu
Rock Physics
Shear Sonic QC/Create and is arranged on 2 tabbed screens. The tabs are described below:
Create a DT Shear Curve

The user must enter the DT compressional input curve and the name of the DT shear output
curve. The units of the input sonic curve can be selected by changing the radio button in the
Units box. NOTE: while the input sonic curve can have metric or imperial units, the
equation constants for calculating the shear sonic curve are always in Km/sec.
The DT shear curve is calculated using the Greenberg-Castagna (1992) empirical relationships
for different minerals. The default constants are those defined by Greenberg-Castagna for 100%
brine-saturated rocks. The default constants (a const, b const and c const) can be changed by
the user. If the user changes any of the constants, clicking the Reset default coefficients button
will return the coefficient values to their original values.
The Mineral Method radio buttons allow the user to select the method of mineral input to the
computation.
Senergy
1234
The input mineralogy can be set either :

by selecting the Curves Mineral Method radio button and then by entering input curve names
for each mineral volume in the Mineral - Input Curve column, or
by selecting the Fixed Volumes radio button and entering fixed volumes of different
minerals in the Volume column. Mineral volumes can be entered either in percent or
decimals (default) by toggling between the Mineral Volumes - Percent or Decimals radio
buttons.
The Default mineral radio button specifies which mineral is used as the default when the other
minerals do not add up to 100%. For the example above, only a Shale input mineral curve has
been entered and the default mineral has been set to sandstone. Therefore, the mineral mixture
will be the shale volume specified by the VCL curve with the sandstone volume being 1 VCL.
The resulting DT shear output curve is calculated by first computing the equivalent velocities for
all the pre-defined minerals and then averaging the results using a Voigt-Reuss-Hill averaging
technique. This technique creates mineral volume weighted arithmetic- and weighted harmonicaverages and then takes the average of these results. The following equation is used :
VS
1
2
X i Vsi
i 1
X i Vsi
i 1
Where
Xi = Volume of ith mineral
Vsi = Shear velocity of ith mineral
Vs = Shear Velocity
NOTE: Once the inputs are to the users satisfaction then click OK for the DT shear curve to be
calculated.
1235
Senergy
Define the DT Shear Quality Control

The Shear Velocity QC Crossplot generated by this module uses the Greenberg-Castagna
empirical relationship to check that the recorded shear sonic curve is a good shear curve and not
a mud-wave or Stoneley-wave velocity produced by poor processing of the sonic waveform data.
The user enters the measured DT compressional and DT shear sonic curves. The module
generates the equivalent compressional and shear velocity curves (Vp and Vs) plus the
Poissons ratio (PoisRatio), Vp/Vs Ratio, Bulk Modulus (KB) and Shear Modulus (Mu)
curves. The input units for the slowness curves and the output units for the velocity curves can
be set by the user by selecting the appropriate radio buttons in the In Units and Out Units
panels of the interface.
The Poissons Ratio is calculated as follows :
Vp 2 2Vs 2
2 Vp 2 Vs 2
Youngs Modulus Curve

The Shear Sonic QC/Create module outputs a Youngs Modulus curve under the Dt Shear
Qc tab.
The default curve name is E. Output is in GPa. The equation for this is :
E = 2.0 x G (1 + Pr)
Where G is the shear modulus and Pr is the Poisson ratio.

G = Rho x Vs2
Where Rho is the bulk density and Vs is the shear velocity.
Senergy
1236
Create a Shear QC Crossplot

The Crossplot Interval and Lithology Lines panels of the interface are used to set up the QC
crossplot.
The Crossplot Interval sets up the depth range to be covered by the crossplot and can be set
either :
by selecting the Interval Depths radio button and specifying the top and bottom depths, or
by selecting the Zonal Depths radio button and specifying an Interval set and Zone
number.
The Lithology Lines panel allows the user to set up the crossplot overlay lines that will be
displayed on the QC crossplot.These overlay lines are created each time the user clicks Run
and they represent the relationships set up on the Create DT shear tab. Changing the
coefficients for the relationships on the Create DT shear tab will change the shape of the overlay
lines on the crossplot but only when OK is clicked, to make a new crossplot.
When the user clicks OK, a crossplot of Vp versus Vs is created.
The Crossplot Z axis curve is optional. The default setting is to use the gamma ray curve.
The following crossplot, which was created by the DT Shear QC set up shown in the above
window.
1237
Senergy
Related Topics
Density Estimation
Fluid Substitution
Elastic Impedance
11.8.2 Density Estimation

Density Estimation provides the user with a means to generate a density curve from sonic log
data.
When density log information is not available, it is often estimated from P-wave velocity (Vp)
using an empirical relationship. A number of authors have published density-from-sonic transit
time algorithms. The methodologies included here are those of Gardner1, Bellotti et al2 and
Lindseth3.
Senergy
1238
The density-from-sonic transit time methodology has the advantage that it can be used ahead of
drilling, by utilising seismic data, converting seismic interval velocities (V, in ft/sec) to sonic
transit times (1/V *106 (usec/ft).
The Input curve is a sonic log curve.
The model to be run (Gardner, AGIP Bellotti, Lindseth) is selected by checking the
appropriate box. Parameters such as the coefficients for the Gardner transform can be edited,
saved and re-called. A number of passes can be made through the various models and, if
possible, the Output Rhob curve can be calibrated against a well containing a RHOB curve.
Output curves are RhoGard, RhoAgip and RhoLind , depending on which method is selected.
Depth intervals for the computation can be input manually, or by selecting the
button and
choosing the appropriate Tops Set from the Select Zone Depths window. The default depth
range is that covered by the sonic log.
Note
Bellotti et al2 found more acceptable results comparing actual FDC curves to their
Unconsolidated formations equation. (illustrated by examples from the Adriatic, Mauritania and
1239
Senergy
Indonesia see Reference 2).
REFERENCES
1. Gardner G. L. F., Gardner L.W., & Gregory A.R. (1974) Formation velocity and density - the
diagnostic basics for stratigraphic traps Geophysics 39, 770-780.
2. Bellotti, P. Di Lorenzo, V. & Giacca, D. - Overburden gradient from sonic log Trans. SPWLA,
London March 1979
3. Lindseth, R. O., (1979) Synthetic Sonic Logs a process for stratigraphic interpretation,
Geophysics v.44 no.1 p.3-26
Related Topics
Fluid Substitution
Elastic Impedance
11.8.3 Fluid Substitution

Fluid Substitution is a process of removing the effect of the drilling fluid from the sonic and
density log measurements and then restoring the log responses to those resulting from the
original reservoir fluids at their original saturations. The output density and sonic (velocity) curves
are subsequently used to generate an Acoustic Impedance (AI) log. The AI log is used to
calculate a reflection co-efficient (RC) series for the boundaries between rocks of different
lithologies. The RC log is then used in the computation of synthetic seismograms.
The Fluid Substitution module is accessed from the main Advanced Interpretation menu
Rock Physics
Fluid Substitution.
The module input parameters and functionality are arranged on a number of tabs. These are:
Fluid Properties
Input Curves / Matrix
Average Gassmann
Discriminators
Log Fluid Substitution
Fluid Properties Tab

Fluid properties need to be calculated for all fluid zones used in the Fluid Substitution
calculation. This, at a minimum, will include the Flushed zone (zone seen by the sonic tool) and
the Reservoir zone (the zone away from well bore influence). The Substitution fluids need only
Senergy
1240
to be entered if different fluids are to be substituted into the reservoir. The same fluid properties
can be used for all zones.
The View Properties panel and its associated radio buttons, highlighted in bold blue font, is
used to toggle the screen view of the Fluid Properties Results between different fluid zones.
The user can toggle the display between the the Flushed zone, Reservoir zone and
Substitution zone fluid properties by clicking on the appropriate radio button (Flushed, Reservoir
or Substitution).
The Fluid Properties tab is arranged in 5 panels. These are Reservoir Pressure and
Temperature, Water, Oil, Gas, Fluid Properties Results.
To calculate the fluid properties the user can either;
enter appropriate Density, Bulk Modulus (K) and Velocity values directly into the Fluid
Properties Results panel at the bottom of the window, or alternatively,
fill in the Water, Oil and Gas panels to calculate these fluid properties. When the Calculate
button is clicked adjacent to each fluid type, the Fluid Properties Resultsare updated in
the table.
The Reservoir Pressure and Temperature values and their associated units must be
entered, in order to calculate any of the fluid properties.
Water : The user can either enter the salinity (in ppm NaCl) of the formation water or an Rw
value and the associated Rw Temperature. The user should select the appropriate radio
button to flag that the formation water is Gas Free water or Gas Saturated water.
Alternatively a Gas/Water Ratio (GWR) can be entered. By clicking the Calculate button the
water properties will be updated in the Fluid Properties Results panel.
1241
Senergy
Oil : The user must enter the oil density (API) at atmospheric pressure, its associated Gas
Density and either the Gas/Oil Ratio (GOR) value (and its units) or check the Gas
Saturated check-box. Checking the Gas Saturated check-box prompts IP to calculate the
GOR, assuming the oil is gas-saturated. By clicking the Calculate button the oil properties
will be updated in the Fluid Properties Results panel.
Gas : The user must enter the Gas Density, relative to air, at atmospheric pressure. By
clicking the Calculate button the gas properties will be updated in the Fluid Properties
Results panel.
Fluid Properties Results : Fluid Properties (Density, Bulk Modulus (K) and Velocity), if
known, can be entered directly into the data table or calculated from the Water , Oil and
Gas calculations described above. If two properties of a given fluid are known / entered, the
third property can be calculated by clicking the Calculate button in the bottom right hand
corner of the panel.
For example, if the Density and the Velocity values are known then the Bulk Modulus can
be automatically calculated by clicking Calculate. The formula used used is:
Bulk Modulus = Density x Velocity^2
The correlations used for calculating the Oil, Gas and Water properties are the ones
presented by Batzle and Wang (1992) in Seismic Properties of Pore Fluids.
Input Curves / Matrix Tab

The user must provide the Input Curves for Compressional sonic and Shear sonic, either as
velocity or slowness curves and select the curve units from the Sonic input Type and Units
Senergy
1242
panel. Bulk Density, Porosity, and Water Saturation curves are also required as inputs.
The user can either enter a flushed-zone water saturation (Sxo) curve name or, if no Sxo curve
is available, then this can be calculated by using the Empirical Sxo option. When selecting the
Empirical Sxo method, Sxo is calculated from the Water Saturation input curve. The user has
the choice of two relationships, depending on whether the well was drilled with Oil-Based Mud or
Water-based mud. The empirical relationships are the same as those used in the Porosity and
Water Saturation Module and are shown on the screen as labels below the Water Based Mud
and Oil Based Mud radio buttons. The IV parameter is the Invasion Factor in the Water Based
Mud logic.
The selection of one of the Display Velocity units options converts the units of all the velocity
1243
Senergy
curves on this tab and on the Average Gassmann tab.

NOTE: It also sets the units for the output velocity curves under the Log Fluid Substitution tab.
Matrix Properties
Matrix Properties must be entered in the Matrix Properties grid. Several default minerals can
be selected from the drop-down box or the user can create their own minerals and define the
associated matrix properties.
Each default mineral has a set of default matrix properties. These can be edited as necessary by
the user. The default mineral values are taken from the publication The Rock Physics
Handbook (Tools for Seismic Analysis in Porous Media) by G. Mavko, T. Mukerji and J.
Dvorkin (1999). An input Mineral Volume curve must be entered for each mineral, except for
the Default Mineral. The curves must contain the mineral volumes in decimal fractions. Only
one mineral can be designated as the default. The default is used to make up matrix volumes to
100%. A mineral volume curve name is not needed for the Default Mineral.
Average Gassmann Tab

The Average Gassmann tab is used to investigate the validity of the fluid and matrix properties
with respect to the input velocities and input petrophysical parameters, on a zonal basis. It is also
used for a rapid evaluation of the effects of fluid substitution. The input data are inverted for the
dry rock parameters using Gassmanns equation.
Senergy
1244
The elastic parameters for two-phase fluid mixtures are calculated using a saturation curve and
the fluid mixing approach of Brie et al (1995) "Shear Sonic interpretation in Gas-bearing
Sands" SPE 30595 (pp701 - 710). The Fluid Mixing Law Exponent is designed to account for
the effect of patchy saturation (different fluids in different pores) at logging frequencies.
Accounting for this effect is more important with gas/water systems than oil/water fluid systems.
Brie et al (1995) proposed using a value of 3 to simulate the effect of patchy saturation in gas/
water systems. In oil/water systems a value of 1.5 is close to a Voigt-Reuss-Average mix.
It is important to note that this type of fluid mixing is only used for the dry parameter inversion.
On the Log Fluid Substitution tab, homogenous (Reuss) mixing is used to simulate the effect
of fluid mixing at seismic frequencies.
1245
Senergy
The Dry Rock Poisson Ratio parameter is subsequently used in the Log Fluid Substitution
tab. It is also important in the set-up for the Fluid Substitution Crossplot which is launched from
the button at the bottom of this interface. The IP program uses the approach of Gregory (1977)
for Gassmann fluid substitution, to predict Vs from dry rock Poisson ratio and Vp inputs. As a
rule of thumb, values of dry rock Poisson ratio range between 0.1 and 0.2 for consolidated rocks
(average 0.15) and between 0.1and 0.25 for relatively unconsolidated rocks.
Zonal Log Average

The user selects the interval over which the program is to average the log curve properties. The
interval can be specified either:
By selecting the Interval Depths radio button and entering a Top and Bottom depth, or
By selecting the Zonal Depths radio button and using Zonal Depths (selected from an IP
Parameter or Tops Set) and then selecting the Zone number.
If the Use Discriminators for averages check-box is checked, then the selected interval is
additionally constrained by the user-defined discriminators which can be set on the
Discriminators tab.
Clicking the Calculate Averages button will calculate the zonal averages for all the input curves
and display the results in the list under the Log Average headings. The water saturation
averages are porosity-weighted averages. The same average values will also be set into the
white edit boxes, except for the Porosity value which is calculated from the input density log,
mineral volumes, matrix densities and fluid properties. The Dry Rock Properties and Fluid
Properties Flushed Zone are also calculated.
The user can change the values in the white edit boxes to see what effect it has on other
parameters.
Changing the Vp or Vs values will change the Dry Rock Properties.
Changing RhoB will change the Porosity value and the Dry Rock Properties.
Changing the mineral volumes will change the Porosity value and the Dry Rock Properties
. One can not change the volume of the default mineral since this is calculated from the
other volumes.
Changing the Fluid Density will change the Porosity value and the Dry Rock Properties.
Changing the Fluid Modulus or Fluid Velocity will change the Dry Rock Properties.
Changing the hydrocarbon type will change the Porosity value, Fluid Properties and the
Dry Rock Properties.
Changing the Porosity value will change RhoB and the Dry Rock Properties.
Senergy
1246
Sw cannot be changed since it is not used in the calculations.

Changing Sxo or the Fluid Mixing Law Exponent will change the Porosity value, Fluid
Properties and the Dry Rock Properties.
Changing the Dry Matrix Bulk Modulus will change the Vp input.
Changing the Dry Matrix Shear Modulus will change the Vs input.
Changing the Dry Matrix Poisson Ratio has no effect on the other parameters but does
affect the fluid substitution of the average data (Fluid Substitution Crossplot button) and
the log curves (Log Fluid Substitution tab).
Changing the Dry Matrix Modulus Ratio has no effect.
An option is available to use the Reuss harmonic average formula for fluid mixing in order to
back out the effect of flushed-zone hydrocarbons on the sonic log. This methodology uses a
harmonic-type averaging of the fluid properties. This is normally considered to overestimate the
influence of gas on the sonic tool and an empirical fluid mixing law is usually used. However,
under certain conditions it is found to give better results. If this option is turned off (default) then
the empirical mixing law is used.
Fluid Substitution Crossplot

Clicking the Fluid Substitution Crossplot button produces a display similar to that illustrated
below. The purpose of the Fluid Substitution crossplot is to enable the user to visualize the
relationships between the velocities, density, AI and Poissons Ratio results. The user can
change the Y and Z axes and scales for the crossplot. The data plotted in the graphic display are
listed in the grid at the base of window. The user can edit the Sw values in the first row of the grid
and, if the values are changed, then the other parameters will be recalculated.
1247
Senergy
The table data are calculated by taking the property values displayed on the Average Gassmann
tab and computing the 100% wet values for velocities and densities. The 100% wet values are
then fluid substituted with the varying amounts of hydrocarbons (1-Sws). The fluid properties for
bulk modulus are calculated using the Reuss average formula (harmonic average).
The Porosity panel allows the user to change the computed zonal averaged porosity value and
to see the effect of this change on the fluid substitution. The equations used for recalculating the
properties are only valid for relatively small changes in porosity.
The Output button allows the crossplot to be output to a printer, to a file in enhanced metafile
format or directly to the clipboard. The table can be output to the clipboard, which then can be
directly pasted into other windows programs.
Discriminators Tab
The Discriminators tab allows the user to further constrain which data are used for the Average
Gassmann zonal log averages and also to discriminate the zones to be fluid-substituted in the
Senergy
1248
Log Fluid Substitution calculation.

If different discriminators are required for the Average Gassmann and the Log Fluid
Substitution then the user must manually change the values between running the two functions.
Up to 6 discriminators can be used simultaneously and combined using and or or type logic.
Discrimination can either be between a curve and a value or between two curves.
Log Fluid Substitution Tab
1249
Senergy
The Log Fluid Substitution tab performs a fluid substitution on the data in the input density and
sonic logs at the well step increment. Along with the fluid-substituted density and sonic curves,
both fluid-substituted Acoustic Impedance and Poissons Ratio curves are calculated and velocity
and sonic slowness curves are output.
Flushed zone Hydrocarbon type

The user selects the hydrocarbon type (Gas or Oil) that is seen in the flushed zone. The
program will use the flushed-zone fluid properties for this hydrocarbon type to back out the effect
of the flushed zone on the density and sonic logs. This allows wells drilled with Oil-Based mud
which drill through gas-bearing reservoirs to use the Oil-Based mud oil properties to correct the
logs before substituting the reservoir gas properties back into the logs.
Senergy
1250
Analysis Interval
The output curves will only be changed over the user-selected analysis depth interval. The user
has two choices :
Interval Depths. The user sets the interval top and bottom depths manually or uses the
Select Zones /Tops
button to select a depth range from an existing Zone / Tops Set in
the subject well.

Zonal Depths. The user selects the required Top Set. The analysis will be run on all Zones
in the selected Tops Set.
NOTE: If the Tops Set has gaps between zones, then gaps will appear in the output
results curves.
The Use Discriminators for net reservoir check box and the Net reservoir input curve list
box are used to discriminate reservoir rock (permeable rock with porosity) from non-reservoir
rock (shale or non-permeable rock). The fluid substitution will only be performed on the reservoir
quality rock. The non-reservoir rock will contain the same output values for density and
sonic as those in the input curves. The Net reservoir input curve is a computed flag curve
in which values greater than 0 are counted as reservoir rock. If both a Net reservoir input curve
is selected andUse Discriminators for net reservoir is checked, then each depth level must
pass both tests before any fluid substitution is performed.
Actual Reservoir fluid type (as seen by Sonic / Density tools)

This box will either contain one interval, if the Interval Depths button is selected, or will contain
one row per zone in the Top Set, if the Zonal Depths button is selected. The screen shot shown
above illustrates the view when the Zonal Depths is selected.
The user must select the hydrocarbon type for each zone. NOTE: If a zone is water-wet, then
leave both the Oil and Gas check boxes un-checked.
Substitute Fluids
If the user wants to substitute different fluids or use a different water saturation profile to that
found in the actual well, then the Substitute Fluids check-box should be checked.
The user must select the new hydrocarbon type for each zone. If the zone is water-wet then
leave both the Oil and Gas columns un-checked.
The Substitute Sw curve box must contain the curve name for the new Sw curve. The user can
use the same Sw curve as that entered under the Input Curves / Matrix tab.
1251
Senergy
Output Curves
The user enters the names for the result curves. The Substituted line of output curves is only
created if the Substitute Fluids box is checked. If an output curve is not needed then delete the
curve name from the Output Curves grid.
The Run button will create the output curve, if necessary, and perform the fluid substitution.
The Log Plot button creates a new log plot that contains the input curves and results curves of
the fluid substitution. The following is an example plot.
The Null All Output Curves button will set null (absent) values in all the Output Curves. This
can be useful if one wants to clear the result log data from a log plot and start again.
The Save and Load buttons at the bottom of the window allow the user to save and re-load
parameter Sets, which contain all the parameters associated with the Rock Physics modules.
The Rock Physics modules are Shear Sonic QC / Create, Fluid Substitution, Elastic
Impedance and Laminated Fluid Subs.
Senergy
1252
The Print button outputs a listing of the parameters used in the module and the results from the
Average Gassmann calculations. The following is an example listing :
Fluid Substitution Parameters
Well :
Date :
Test Well 1
22/08/01 17:12:34
Fluid Properties
Flushed zone
Brine
Density (gm/cc)
1.008
Bulk Modulus (GPA) 2.375
Velocity (ft/sec) 5035
Oil
0.675
0.589
3064
Gas
0.293
0.134
2223
Oil
0.675
0.589
3064
Gas
0.293
0.134
2223
Reservoir zone
Brine
Density (gm/cc)
1.008
Velocity (ft/sec) 5035
Matrix Properties
Mineral Name
Density (gm/cc)
Modulus (GPA)
Velocity (m/sec)
Input Curve
Default Mineral
Quartz
2.650
37.000
6050
Wet Clay
2.600
21.000
3410
VCL
Yes
Average Gassmann results

Log Inputs
Data from interval : 7776.00
Vp (m/sec)
Vs (m/sec)
Vp/Vs Ratio
Poisson Ratio
Density (gm/cc)
Quartz (dec)
Wet Clay (dec)
Porosity (dec)
Sw (dec)
Sxo (Dec)
Log Value
3563
1982
1.797
0.276
2.307
7922.50
0.231
Value Used
3563
1982
1.797
0.276
2.307
0.769
0.231
0.179
0.332
0.503
0.184
0.332
0.503
Flushed zone fluid mixture is Oil / Brine

Fluid mixing law exponent is 3.000
Fluid Properties
Density (gm/cc)
Modulus (GPA)
Velocity (m/sec)
0.843
0.8162
984
Dry Rock Properties

Shear Modulus (GPA) 9.066
Poisson Ratio
0.263
1253

Modulus Ratio
1.779
Related Topics
Density Estimation
Fluid Substitution
Elastic Impedance
Senergy
Senergy
1254
The following block diagram gives a possible workflow to use with the Rock Physics modules.
1255
Senergy
Senergy
Average Gassmann Equations

Shear Modulus
Vs 2 b
Where
Vs = Input average shear velocity
b
= Input average density
Wet Bulk Modulus
Vp 2 b
43
Where
Vp = Input average compressional velocity
Matrix Modulus using Voigt Reuss-Hill mixing scheme
n
1
2
K ma
Vol i
Kmin i
i 1
Vol i Kmin i
i 1
Where
Voli = Average volume of ith mineral
Kmini = Modulus of ith mineral
n = Number of minerals
Matrix Density
n
ma
Vol i ma min i
i 1
Where
ma min i
= Matrix density of ith mineral
Fluid Density
Sxo brine
(1 Sxo) hydrocarbon
Where
Sxo = Input average flushed zone water saturation
hydrocarbon
= Oil or Gas density in the flushed zone
Fluid Modulus calculated using fluid mixing law exponent
Kf
Sxo Exp
(K brine
K hydrocarbon ) K hydrocarbon
Where
K hydrocarbon
= Oil or Gas Modulus in the flushed zone
K brine
= Water Modulus in the flushed zone

Exp = Fluid Mixing Law exponent
If the Reuss Harmonic Average Formula option is selected (by ticking the check box) for
flushed zone mixing, then the Fluid Modulus is calculated as follows:
1256
1257
Kf
Sxo
K brine
1
1 Sxo
Senergy
K hydrocarbon
Porosity
ma
ma
Dry rock Modulus using Gassmann
Kd
K ma K f 1
K ma K f K K ma
K ma
1
Dry Poisson Ratio

d
3 Kd 2
2
6 Kd
Modulus Ratio
Kd
Fluid Substitution Crossplot

These equations assume that the pore Bulk Modulus and Dry Rock Poissons Ratio stay the
same as porosity changes. This is true for small changes in porosity.
Pore bulk modulus from original porosity from Average Gassmann
Kp
ag
1 K d 1 K ma
Where
ag
= Porosity from Average Gassmann calculation
Dry bulk Modulus
Kd
K p 1 K ma
xp
Where
xp
= Porosity from crossplot window
Shear Modulus
1
3
Kd 3
4
1
Fluid Density for each Sw value in crossplot
Sw brine
(1 Sw) hydrocarbon
Where
Senergy
hydrocarbon
1258
= Oil or Gas density reservoir zone
brine
= Water density reservoir zone

Fluid Modulus for each Sw value in crossplot using Reuss average formula
Kf
Sw K brine
1
1 Sw K hydrocarbon
Where
K hydrocarbon
= Oil or Gas Modulus reservoir zone
K brine
= Water Modulus reservoir zone

Density from porosity for each fluid density
(1
xp
xp
) ma
Shear velocity for each density
Vs
Bulk Modulus wet for each fluid Modulus
1 K d K ma
Kd
xp
K fl
xp
K ma
K d K ma
Compressional velocity for each Bulk modulus
Vp
43
b
Acoustic Impedance for each Vp and density
AI
Vp
Poisson ratio wet for each Vp and Vs
Vp 2 2Vs 2
2 Vp 2 Vs 2
Log Fluid Substitution Equations

If Sxo is not entered as an input curve then Sxo can be calculated using one of the empirical
equations:
For Water based mud:
Sxo
Sw Inv
1 Inv
1259
Senergy
Where
Sw = Input Sw curve
Inv = User entered invasion factor (default 1.0)
For Oil based mud:
Sxo = minimum of Sw or SwMax
Where
SwMax = User entered maximum Sw (default 0.5)
Fluid density is calculated for the invaded zone, reservoir zone and special fluid substitution
Sxo brine
(1 Sxo) hydrocarbon
Fluid substituted densities
b100
b log
fBrine
fSxo
bRes
b log
f Re s
fSxo
bSub
b log
fSub
100% wet
Reservoir conditions
fSxo
Special fluid substitution
Where
blog
= Input log density
= Input porosity
fBrine
fSxo
= Density of brine for the reservoir fluids

= Density of the fluid mixture in the flushed zone
f Re s
fSub
= Density of the fluid mixture in the reservoir zone

= Density of the fluid mixture for the special fluid substitution
Dry Matrix properties using Voight-Reuss-Hill average method
K ma
1
2
Vol i
Kmin i
i 1
Vol i Kmin i
i 1
Where
Voli = Vol of ith input mineral
Kmini = Modulus of ith mineral
n = Number of minerals
Fluid Modulus in the flushed zone using fluid mixing law exponent.
K fSxo
Sxo Exp
(K brineSxo
K hydrocarbonSxo ) K hydrocarbonSxo
Where
K hydrocarbonSxo
= Oil or Gas Modulus flushed zone
K brineSxo
= Water Modulus flushed zone

Exp = Fluid Mixing Law exponent
Senergy
Dry Modulus from Dry Poisson Ratio as per Gregory 1977, Hampson & Russell
1
1
d
d
S 1
Kd
Vp 2 K ma
K ma K fSxo
Vp 2 K ma
b2 4 a c
2 a
K ma 1
K ma K fSxo
Shear Modulus
K d 1.5
1 2
1
d
d
Shear Velocity
Vs 100
b100
Vs Re s
b Re s
Vs Sub
bSub
Bulk Modulus flushed zone
K ma
K Sxo
1
K fSxo
K ma K fSxo
K fSxo
K ma K fSxo
Kd
K ma K d
Kd
K ma K d
Bulk Modulus at 100% wet
K ma
K 100
1
K Brine
K ma K Brine
K Brine
K ma K Brine
Kd
K ma K d
Kd
K ma K d
1260
1261
Compressional Velocity at 100% wet
Vp 2
Vp 100
K Sxo
K 100
b100
Fluid Modulus at reservoir conditions using Reuss formula
K fRes
Sw K brineRes
1
1 Sw K hydrocarbonRes
Bulk Modulus at reservoir conditions
Compressional Velocity at reservoir conditions
Fluid Modulus at special fluid substitution conditions using Reuss formula
K fSub
Sw K brineSub
1
1 Sw K hydrocarbonsSub
Bulk Modulus at special fluid substitution conditions
K ma
K Sub
1
K fSub
K ma K fSub
K fSub
K ma K fSub
Kd
K ma K d
Kd
K ma K d
Compressional Velocity at special fluid substitution conditions
Vp Sub
Vp 2
K Sxo
K Sub
bSub
Related Topics
Density Estimation
Fluid Substitution
Elastic Impedance
Senergy
Senergy
1262
11.8.4 Laminated Reservoir Fluid Substitution

This Gassmann equation based fluid substitution application transforms density and sonic logs to
any saturation condition. Like many commercial programs there are two stages to the program.
The input logs are first transformed to the 100% water saturated condition to verify the integrity of
the invasion corrections, and then modeled at specified conditions of reservoir fluid type and
saturation.
The user selects one of two alternative models depending on whether the shale is evenly
distributed within the sand or present in discrete laminations not resolved in the log
interpretation1. If the shale is evenly distributed (the shaley sand model) the bulk modulus of the
solid fraction is modeled as a weighted average of the moduli of all the components of the rock.
In laminated reservoirs, fluid effects only occur within the sandy laminations, and the appropriate
moduli and porosity are those of the sandy laminations. Experience shows that the modeled
results are often more sensitive to the choice of shale distribution than to the uncertainty in fluid
or rock properties, so it is very important to model the shale distribution appropriately.
If a shear sonic log is not available the program iteratively solves the Gassmann equation for the
100% water filled result and uses the Greenberg-Castagna (GC) model to estimate the shear
slowness.
Although the program is principally a Gassmann implementation, alternative models for
computing dry frame bulk modulus are also available. These are useful for validating results and
parameter picks.
The program was designed around the needs of the Petrophysicist and Geophysicist working in
clastic environments. It has not been validated in carbonates, and reference to sands in this
document reflects our awareness of the limitations of a Gassmann type model in carbonates.
This module was developed by Chris Skelt, Chevron.
1 Skelt C, "Fluid substitution in Laminated Sands", The Leading Edge, May 2004.
2 Skelt C, "The influence of shale distribution on sensitivity of compressional slowness to
reservoir fluid changes", SPWLA 45th Annual Symposium, 2004.
Related Topics
Density Estimation
Fluid Substitution
Elastic Impedance
1263
Senergy
11.8.4.1 Operational Instructions
The Laminated Reservoir Fluid Substitution module is accessed under the main menu Advanced
Interpretation
Rock Physics
Laminated Fluid Subs. Parameters, inputs and outputs are
entered through a series of tabs:
Fluid Properties
Rock Properties
Input Curves
Output Curves
Program theory and suggestions for QC are described in the Equations and Methodology
chapter.
Fluid Properties Tab

Fluid Property Calculators
Fluid properties may be obtained from several sources. If the zone of interest is more than a
single reservoir, we recommend setting up trend curves for the fluid properties. This can be done
by interpolating between properties computed (say) every thousand vertical feet.
Batzle and Wang 1992 Fluid Calculator. This is provided for compatibility with other
commercial programs that still use these algorithms. This option is not generally
recommended because the results are only valid over a limited range of temperature and
pressure. Clicking on this button opens the following module
SM-UH FLAG program Fluid Calculator. Only available to Colorado School of Mines-
Senergy
1264
University of Houston consortium members. FLAG computes approximate water, oil and
gas properties using limited input data. NOTE: The consortium members need to place the
FLAG programs in the IP IntPetro35 directory.
PVT data measured on locally acquired fluids is not always available, but is a better
source of fluid properties, especially for oil.
Initial Saturations - Flushed Zone - Zonal Fluid properties

The user enters density and bulk modulus for up to three fluids at initial saturations, that is to say
the saturations corresponding to the input density and sonic logs specified on the Input Curves
tab. Den Filtrate or Mod Filtrate may have oil or water properties depending on the mud type.
In permeable reservoirs drilled with water base mud, standard log analysis practice is to assume
that there is no formation water in the invaded zone. In OBM, filtrate invasion should be estimated
as part of log analysis. If changes in hydrocarbon saturation are thought to influence the elastic
properties of the rock, or to put in another way, the effect of invasion on the density and sonic log
responses should be considered.
In OBM we recommend using a multi-mineral multi-fluid program such as IPs Mineral Solver
for the log analysis with a model designed to solve for the three fluids actually present in the
invaded zone. If a shaley sand log analysis program is run the computed hydrocarbon density (
RHOHY is the IP default mnemonic) needs to be transformed to the corresponding fractions of
OBM filtrate and formation hydrocarbon.
1265
Senergy
In wells with large vertical zones of interest or stacked oil and gas reservoirs, formation
hydrocarbon properties may be defined by trend curves spliced from the oil and gas property
trends.
The Woods Mix Factor allows the user to simulate patchy saturation by stiffening the fluid
mixture. A value of one honors Woods Law and zero mixes the fluids by Voigt average of the
bulk moduli. Intermediate values are weighted averages of Woods and Voigt averaging.
In general we assume that the logs respond to the invaded zone. However, if the user believes
that, say, the density responds to the invaded zone while the sonic logs respond to the
undisturbed zone, he could adjust the density to undisturbed zone saturation using simple linear
superposition and specify undisturbed zone saturations in the initial saturations box of the inputs
tab.
When specifying invaded zone fluid properties used to substitute to the wet case the user should
be aware of the distinction between bulk density and the apparent density of light hydrocarbons
that determines the density log response.
All fluid moduli are entered in GPa. Fluid densities are entered in the project density units, either
g/cm 3 or kg/m 3.
Modelled Reservoir Saturations - Undisturbed Zone - Zonal Fluid Properties

The user enters properties for oil, water and gas in the undisturbed zone. Usually we model oilwater and gas-water mixtures. There is also provision for three phase cases such as critical gas
saturation in an oil column or a secondary gas cap on residual oil.
The formation water properties specified here are usually the same as those in the invaded zone.
The oil and gas properties may be actual or hypothecated. It is good practice to test the
sensitivity of computed results to a range of hydrocarbon properties to assess the importance of
accurate PVT data. For example, the sensitivity to oil GOR may be tested by running models with
oil properties corresponding to zero GOR, and to bubble point.
Rock Properties Tab

Fluid Substitution Model
The user selects the type of shale distribution by using either the Laminated Sand Model or
Shaley Sand Model radio buttons. The tabs appearing in the lower half of the screen under
Zonal Properties reflect the different inputs needed by the two models. Once the parameters for
both models have been set, the user can toggle between the two options and evaluate the effect
of shale distribution model choice on computed results.
The Pass Through Inputs on Computation Breakdown box is checked to make the outputs
Senergy
1266
continuous over intervals where the Gassmann equation breaks down. It should be left unchecked to identify these problem areas while refining the model, and checked for the final pass
of the program.
The program populates the Rocks and default parameters table from the
FluidSub_Default_Parameters.par file in the IP installation directory. The user can edit this file
to add rocks and minerals and change parameter values.
The rocks listed under Rocks and default parameters are the default values for the solid
components of the log analysis results. If the Laminated Sand Model is selected, laminated
shale properties are specified under the Zonal Properties tab, and only the rocks and minerals
present in the sand laminations are selected in this table. When running the Shaley Sand Model
, shale should also be present in the table. The order of the columns determines the order in
which the rocks are plotted from left to right in the results plots.
The Default Mineral volume fraction is calculated as the volume unaccounted for after summing
the porosity and the other volumes, not by its rock volume curve name. This allows the user to
run fluid substitution using a solid model that is simpler than the log analysis results.
The Bulk K and Greenberg-Castagna (G/C or GC) coefficients for the rocks and minerals
appearing in the table are the program defaults used to populate new models.
Zonal Properties
1267
Senergy
This panel contains a number of sub-tabs. NOTE: The Laminated Shale sub-tab is only
available when the Laminated Sand Model radio button is checked.
Zone Depths sub-tab - The zones can be manually edited in the Zone Depths sub-tab but
new zones are created in the Fluid Properties tab using the New zone button, which
opens the Add Zone selection window.
Laminated Shale sub-tab - The Laminated Shale sub-tab is only available when the
Laminated Sand Model radio button is checked.
In Crv Phi Lam allows the user to specify a curve representing the porosity of the sand
laminations in place of computing sand lamination porosity from effective porosity and the
shale lamination fraction.
The density (Rho Lam Sh) and compressional slowness (DTc Lam Sh) of the shale
laminations may be constants or trend curves.
NOTE: that the shale laminations within a sand package are usually denser and faster than
the intervening massive shales.
The definitions of the GC coefficients Lam Shale a, Lam Shale b, and Lam Shale c are
consistent with the constants used in Rock Physics
Shear Sonic QC / Create.
Rock Properties sub-tab - The user specifies the bulk modulus for each component of the
rock other than laminated shale. The individual bulk moduli are mixed to determine the bulk
modulus of the solid material using the Voigt and Reuss averages weighted by the Voigt Mix
Fact. A value of 0.5 is synonymous with the Hill average and is recommended in the
absence counter-indications.
G/C Coeffs sub-tab - The user specifies GC coefficients for the rocks in the Rock
Properties menu. They are used for shear sonic prediction if a shear log is not available,
and for estimation of the fluid effects in the laminated model whether or not a shear log was
run. They should therefore be validated as part of the workflow any time the Laminated
Model is run.
Senergy
1268
Cutoffs / Limits sub-tab - Phi Max is the maximum porosity allowed for the sand
laminations and acts as a limit in cases where the computation of sand lamination porosity
goes unstable in low net to gross intervals. It should be set at the highest porosity
anticipated for the zone of interest.
The Vsh Max and Phi Min are cutoffs beyond which the fluid substitution computations are
suppressed and the outputs set equal to the inputs.
The Kill Logic is additional to the cutoffs and allows the user to use an external flag to
suppress computation. It uses the same logic as that defined in the Phi/Sw module.
K_df Model sub-tab - The program always computes dry frame bulk modulus using the
Gassmann equation, but also offers alternative models that may help validate or diagnose
problems with Gassmann results. In some circumstances, such as low net to gross
laminated reservoirs or very unconsolidated formations the alternative models may yield
more stable results than the Gassmann equation.
The alternative models are all explained in detail in the literature, and are described in briefly in the
accompanying Program Theory document. Each model uses different input parameters, and the
unused parameters are greyed out in the menu.
The menu of alternative models does not claim to be exhaustive, so the user may also enter an
external K_df from another model or from laboratory measurements.
NOTE: that the K_df model choice is a zoned parameter, so the user could for example use the
Gassmann model in deeper reservoirs and one of the alternative models in higher porosity
reservoirs where the Gassmann solution for K_df is ill-conditioned.
1269
Senergy
Input Curves Tab

Elastic logs, Porosity and Shale fraction
The Density, DT Compressional and DT Shear logs are usually the edited, quality controlled
logs. If no shear log is available then the entry is left blank and the program uses the coefficients
entered on the G/C Coeffs tab to compute DTs using the Greenberg-Castagna method.
Porosity (Phie in this case) and Shale Lamination Index (VShLam) are from log analysis.
VshLam and VShale are not synonymous. VShLam is the volume fraction of shale laminations,
determined by reference to core data or using a log-based method such as Thomas-Stieber.
When using the laminated model the program transforms the input porosity to sand lamination
porosity using
Phi_Slam = Phie / (1 VshLam)
unless the In Crv Phi Lam entry is checked on the Laminated Shale tab. The computation of
Phie should take account of Gassmanns contention that electrostatically bound water is part of
the rock frame and capillary bound water part of the pore system.
Additional solid fractions in more complex mineralogical models are input under the Rock
Properties tab.
Senergy
1270
Initial Saturations
In general these are the saturations of the fluids in the invaded zone. Only two should be
specified. The program calculates the third on the basis that the three saturations sum to one.
Saturations may be curves or constants.
For example, for a gas well drilled with water-based mud, the user would specify Sxo for filtrate
saturation and zero for oil saturation and the program would compute invaded zone gas
saturation equal to 1 0 Sxo.
Modelled Reservoir Saturations

In this case Sw_HC is a modelled water saturation for a hydrocarbon-filled model. Setting oil
saturation to zero describes a gas reservoir.
Invasion corrections to the logs are made by entering the reservoir fluid saturations computed from
the logs here.
One special case is substituting to dry frame conditions to estimate the density and velocity of
the formation in the absence of fluids. This is achieved by setting water saturation to zero and
gas saturation to one and entering gas density and bulk modulus of zero.
1271
Senergy
Output Curves Tab

Three sub-tabs are found under the Output Curve tab.
Elastic Properties Output Curves - list the elastic properties computed from the density
and slowness at observed, wet and modeled saturations.
QC Checks Output Curves - essential QC outputs for the user to verify that the program
has run as intended.
Diagnostics and Output Curves - diagnostics to identify breakdowns in the computations.
Output Set
In order to distinguish the results of each fluid and saturation scenario, it is recommended to use
a three letter scheme where the letters specify the basic model (in this application Laminated or
Shaley Sand) the hydrocarbon type (Gas, Oil, Water or In-situ) and the saturation model (H
ydrocarbon filled, In-situ or Fizz). Some examples are tabulated.
Code
Shale
HC
type
Saturation
Comments
LII
Laminated
In-situ
In-situ
Laminated sand/shale invasion

compensation
SII
Shaley
sand
In-situ
In-situ
Evenly distributed shale invasion

compensation
LGI
Laminated
Gas
In-situ
Fill all HC bearing intervals with gas according

to the observed water saturation
LGH
Laminated
Gas
HC filled
Fill all sands with gas using hydrocarbon filled

saturation model
SOH
Shaley
Sand
Oil
Oil Filled
Fill all sands with oil using hydrocarbon filled

saturation model
Output Curve units

Elastic Moduli are output in GPa. The user may select velocity and impedance units. The
selections shown in the figure are recommended for compatibility with Greenberg-Castagna and
for unit compatibility with the output rock and fluid moduli.
In the event that the user or his client wants to work with moduli in psi, the conversion from GPa
to psi is 1 Mpsi = 0.145038 GPa. For conversions between feet and meters, note that 1 foot is
precisely 0.3048 meters, and that I meter is approximately 3.2808 feet.
Elastic Properties Output Curves
Senergy
1272
The Observed properties are computed from the input density and slowness curves and are
intended to provide the user with a complete set of elastic properties corresponding to the
observed logs. Changing the substitution model has no effect on these results because they are
computed from the input density and slowness. The formulae used are from linear elastic theory
and are listed under Elastic Property Formulae.
The Wet properties are derived from the wet density and slowness curve that are the result of
substitution from the observed logs using the specified initial saturations and fluid properties.
These outputs are unaffected by changes in the saturations and fluids specified for the
undisturbed zone.
The Modeled column holds the modeled reservoir saturations.
All the entries in each column may be toggled on and off by clicking on the Use button. Since the
observed and wet cases are unaffected by changes in the modeled saturation there is no need to
compute these for all modeled cases.
QC Checks Output Curves

These outputs allow the user to verify that the program is using the input data as intended, and
for basic troubleshooting in the case of unexpected results. The curves specific to the model not
1273
Senergy
being used are greyed out.
Curve definitions are tabulated below

Phie_fs
Porosity used by the program. Usually the effective porosity from

log analysis
K_Flxo
Bulk modulus of the mixture of three fluids in the invaded zone.

Check this to verify that it behaves consistently with the specified
saturations, fluid properties and Woods factor.
Rho_Flxo
Density of the mixture of three fluids in the invaded zone.
K_FlRes
Bulk modulus of the mixture of three fluids in the modeled zone
Rho_FlRes
Density of the mixture of three fluids in the modeled zone
Volume of Rock n
The individual rock volumes used by the program to compute the

bulk modulus of the solid fraction if more than one non-shale
material is in the model. There should be a simple mapping from
log analysis results to these volumes.
Senergy
No_Com_Flg
1274
= 0 if computation runs.
= 1 if porosity or shale fraction outside cutoffs
= 2 if the Gassmann equation cannot be applied, for example
because the computed formation bulk modulus is greater than
the computed modulus of the solid fraction.
Vshlam
Phi_Slam
Shale lamination volumetric fraction

Sand lamination porosity. This may be computed from input
effective porosity or input directly.
Kvo_Slam
Voigt computation of bulk modulus for the solid fraction in the

sandy laminations
Kre_Slam
Kr_Slam
Reuss computation of bulk modulus for the solid fraction fraction in

the sandy laminations.
Hill average of the Voigt and Reuss computations.
K_df_lam
Dry frame bulk modulus of the sandy laminations, computed using

the algorithm specified on the K_df Model tab.
K_df_Gas_Lm
Dry frame bulk modulus of the sandy laminations, computed using

the Gassmann equation. This computation is always made,
irrespective of which K_df_Model is selected.
K_ReSolFlL
Reuss average of solid and fluid components of the sandy

laminations. Data points lying below this value are evidence of
bad data or incorrect parameter picks.
PR_df_Lam
Sand lamination dry frame Poissons ratio.
Kvo_WRoc
Voigt computation of the bulk modulus of the mixture of non-shale

solids and shale (Whole Rock).
Kre_Wroc
Reuss computation of the bulk modulus of the mixture of nonshale solids and shale.
K_Wroc
K_df
Hill average of the Voigt and Reuss results.

Computed whole rock dry frame bulk modulus using the algorithm
specified on the K_df Model tab.
K_df_Gass
Dry frame bulk modulus of the whole rock, computed using the
Gassmann equation. This computation is always made,
irrespective of which K_df_Model is selected.
K_Re_SolFl
Reuss average of solid and fluid components of the whole rock.

Data points lying below this value are evidence of bad data or
incorrect parameter picks.
1275
PR_df
Senergy
Whole rock dry frame Poissons ratio
Diagnostics Output Curves

These curves are not usually output but may be selected to help the user diagnose awkward
error conditions in the results, especially those related to breakdown of the Gassmann equation.
The formulae for the curves named tmp* are listed in the Equations and Methodology section
Compressional Sonic Log substitution to wet document. NOTE: that the program computes
K dry frame only once, during the computation from observed to wet (***OtoW). The same dry
frame value is used to predict the ****_Wet (brine-filled) and ****_Res (modeled) elastic
properties.
Elastic Property Formulae

Conversion factors are for moduli are in GPa, velocities in ft/s, impedances in g/cm 3.km/s, density
are in g/cm 3 and slowness in s/ft.
Compressional impedance
Alc
304.8
tc
Senergy
1276
Shear impedance
Als
304.8
ts
Compressional to shear velocity ratio
VpVs
ts
tc
Bulk Modulus
Kb
304.8
2
tc
4 304.8
2
3 ts
Compressional Velocity in km/s
vp
tc
304.8
Shear Velocity in km/s
vs
ts
304.8
Poissons ratio
2
PR
t s 2 tc
2
2
ts
tc
0.5
Hiltermans acoustic impedance
P5 Al
0.5 In 304.8
tc
Lamda Rho LaRh

b
v p 0.3048 10
vs 0.3048 10
3 2
vs 0.3048 10
3 2
Mu Rho MuRh
3 2
Shear Modulus
vs 0.3048 10
3 2
Youngs Modulus
2
ts
3 t s 4 tc
2
2
ts
tc
Compressional Modulus
0.3048 10
3 2
Make Plot
The Make Plot button lists three template plot options, Elastic properties plot, Velocities and
1277
Senergy
Poissons Ratio Plot and QC plot :
Print
There are three print options, Parameters to Printer, Parameters to File and Parameters to Both
File and Printer.
Related Topics
Density Estimation
Fluid Substitution
Elastic Impedance
Laminated Reservoir Fluid Substitution
Introduction
Fluid substitution follows petrophysical log analysis. The two activities share many input curves
and parameters. For example, the lithology and invaded zone fluid saturations from log analysis
are key principal inputs to fluid substitution, and the pressures and temperatures used for log
analysis are used to estimate the bulk moduli and densities of the fluids used in fluid substitution.
Inconsistencies in fluid substitution results may identify shortcomings in log analysis, so iteration
between log analysis and fluid substitution is common.
The four tabs on the main program define the order in which the user sets up the input and output
parameters. Wherever possible, mnemonics are consistent with conventions used elsewhere in
IP.
The program first runs substitution from the observed logs to the 100% water saturated case,
Senergy
1278
and then uses these results as the input to a simulation of any modeled saturation condition. The
user should run quality checks on the observed to wet results to verify correct treatment of the
invaded zone fluids before drawing any conclusions from the modeled zone results.
Data Preparation
Many of the inputs needed for fluid substitution are known once a provisional log analysis pass
has been made.
The log analysis outputs should include wet shale, effective porosity and an analysis of the
invaded zone hydrocarbon density, or fractions of gas, oil and OBM filtrate in the invaded zone.
In his classic paper1, Gassmann stated that electrostatically bound water should be considered
part of the rock frame, while capillary bound water is included in the porosity.
The rock fraction may include as many or as few components as the geology and data indicate.
The user should verify that the solid fractions plus effective porosity sum to 1.0. If a simple sandshale model was run, a sand fraction should be calculated as:
Vsand
1 Vshale
effective
A Vshale rather than Vclay interpretation is recommended. If the shale intervals are interpreted as
100% shale with zero porosity, their density, slowness and bulk modulus may be estimated by
reading the logs directly. If shale intervals are interpreted as clay-silt mixtures with significant
porosity it is more difficult to estimate the clay properties because pure clay does not occur in the
log analysis results.
The Greenberg-Castagna compressional-shear velocity relation works well in many areas. The
user needs to specify GC coefficients for all the rock components present in the sand
laminations in the laminated model. It is permissible to assign small fractions of secondary
minerals with unknown GC coefficients the same coefficients as sand, or alternatively to lump
together quartz and any secondary mineral into a single composite rock quartz-feldspar-mica or
QFM type rock.
Fluid Substitution program theory and model - Observed to Wet

This section describes the fluid substitution from observed to wet conditions using the
Gassmann equation. The density, shear sonic and compressional sonic are handled
sequentially, and the validity of each step depends on the previous results. So for example, there
is no point in trying to diagnose a problem with compressional sonic substitution if there are
inconsistencies in the density and shear substitution.
Density log substitution to wet
1279
Senergy
The observed density log is transformed using the estimated hydrocarbon density HC from log
analysis using the formula:
wet
obs
1 S xo
wtr
HC
In practice, the hydrocarbon density is the properties of the mixture of hydrocarbons in the
invaded zone, for example, OBM filtrate and gas.
Shear sonic log substitution to wet

On the assumption that the density and shear sonic log are both reading the same fluid mix, the
shear sonic log may be transformed using the assumption that shear modulus is unaffected by
fluid content:
t swet
wet
t sobs
obs
Compressional sonic log substitution to wet

Selection of the Laminated Sand or Shaley Sand model determines whether the following logic
applies to the whole formation, or to the sand laminations alone.
Compute invaded zone fluid modulus Kf using a weighted average of the Woods (or Reuss) and
Voigt mixing models. Weight the Woods model by Woods factor (Woodfac), for which the default
value is 1 for Woods mixing. This approach is a simple way of honoring the observation that the
invaded zone fluid mixture often behaves as though stiffer than predicted by the Woods model.
See the Fluid Properties tab for more details.
1
K fW oods
K fVoigt
Kf
S filtrate
SW
KW
SW
K filtrate
KW
S HC
K HC
S filtrate K filtrate S HC
Woodfac K fW oods
1 Woodfac
K HC
K fVoigt
Start with a Woods factor of 1.0, and reduce if necessary to achieve a plausible result in
substitution to the wet case. The figure below shows how a Brie2 exponent of 3 compares with
various values of Woodfac.
Senergy
1280
Woods Factor for Fluid Mixing

3.000
K_Woods
2.500
K_Serial
Bulk Modulus (GPa)
Woodfac 0.25
2.000
Woodfac 0.5
Woodfac 0.75
1.500
Brie Exp 3
1.000
0.500
0.000
0.000
0.200
0.400
0.600
Water Saturation
0.800
1.000
Compute the solid rock bulk modulus Kr using a weighted average of the Reuss and Voigt mixing
models. Weight the two cases by the Voigt factor, for which the default value of 0.5 yields the Hill
average. A maximum of five rocks is allowed. Generally the secondary minerals such as
feldspars, micas and heavy minerals are lumped together with sand to create a quartz-feldsparmica or QFM rock. For simplicity this example shows only three solids.
Vsand
Krsand
K r Re uss
K r Voigt
Kr
Vsilt
Krsilt
Vshale
Krshale
Vsand K r sand Vsilt K r silt Vshale K r shale
Voigtfac K rVoigt
1 Voigtfac
K r Re uss
Compute the formation shear modulus. NOTE: that we assume that this is unaffected by changes
in fluid content, and therefore in principle there are two alternative formulae:
wet
t swet
obs
2
t sobs
Compute the observed formation bulk modulus from the observed density and sonic logs:
Kb
1
2
tc
4
2
3 ts
Compute the dry frame bulk modulus using the Gassmann equation, assigning K for the invaded
zone fluid mixture to the porosity. The numerator and denominator are available as tmp1_OtoW
and tmp2_OtoW and are useful diagnostics of program breakdown.
1281
kb
K df
K flxo
1
Kr
1
Kr
2
Kr
K flxo
Senergy
1
tmp1 _ OtoW
tmp2 _ otoW
Kb
Kr
Compute the wet bulk modulus using the Gassmann equation rearranged as shown, assigning
the formation water bulk modulus to the porosity. The numerator and denominator of the formula
are output by the program as tmp3_OtoW and tmp4_OtoW.
1
K bW et
K df
K df
Kr
1
Kr
K wtr
K df
Kr
K df
tmp3 _ OtoW
tmp4 _ OtoW
Compute the wet compressional sonic using the following formula:
tc W et
b W et
K b W et
4G 3
These wet results, particularly the wet compressional, should be compared with the GC derived
wet compressional, and any discrepancies understood.
This completes the observed to wet program sequence in the shaley sand case. Similar logic
applies to the laminated model, but it differs in several key aspects.
Laminated model considerations

The following figure shows how effective porosity and shale fraction relate to the laminated
reservoir model.
The laminated model differs from the shaley sand model in two key respects:
1. The porosity relates to the sand laminations. It is derived from the effective porosity using
the formula:
Senergy
sand lams
effective
1282
1 Vshalelams
The shale lamination fraction may be derived from a correlation with core based sand
fraction, or a Thomas-Stieber density-neutron analysis.
2. The fluid effects the differences between the observed and fluid substituted values of the
logs only occur in the sand laminations, and need to be attenuated by multiplying by the
sand lamination fraction
1 Vshalelams
Laminated and Shaley Sand models compared

The laminated model estimates the shear slowness in the sand laminations using GreenbergCastagna, and adds the computed fluid effect to the input log. Consequently the two shale
models give different results in the absence of shale laminations, although the difference is
negligible if valid Greenberg-Castagna coefficients are specified.
To a first approximation, the shaley sand model may be considered a special case of the
laminated model with a shale lamination index equal to zero, but with one important difference. In
the laminated model, the magnitude of the fluid effects is determined using a shear slowness
estimated from the compressional using the Greenberg-Castagna method. This is done to
preserve stability in low net to gross laminated intervals where the shale correction becomes illconditioned. The output shear slowness is equal to the observed log plus the computed fluid
effects. If a shear log is available, the shaley sand model uses it in substitution to wet and from
wet to modeled saturation.
If no shear log is present, the program iterates to wet compressional predicted shear using
Greenberg-Castagna. In these circumstances the evenly distributed shale model is a special
case of the laminated model with a shale lamination fraction VshLam of zero throughout.
Alternative models for dry frame bulk modulus: Gassmann Model

Computer programs apply the Gassmann equation in the forms:
K dryframe
f K b , K fluid , K solid ,
or
Kb
f K dryframe, K fluid , K solid ,
An alternative statement of the model:
K dryframe
Kb
K solid
Kb
K solid
K dryframe
K fluid
( K solid
K fluid )
leads to the graphical illustration.
1283
Senergy
Graphical illustration of the Gassmann equation.

Points lying on the Reuss average of the solid and fluid properties have zero dry frame modulus,
and points lying below the line have negative calculated dry frame modulus, or more likely
incorrect fluid, solid, porosity or solid material composition. The intercept porosity
is implicit in
the equation and not normally computed.
Critical Porosity Model

The critical porosity model3 is based on the observation that bulk moduli of water saturated
samples measured in the laboratory lie close to a straight line between the solid material
modulus at zero porosity and the Reuss average of the solid and fluid properties at the critical
porosity, the point at which the sample transitions between solid and emulsion like behaviour. At
this point the bulk and shear moduli of the dry frame are both zero. The equation for dry frame
bulk modulus is
K df (CPM )
K solid
1
crit
The shear modulus is unaffected by fluid content and points lie on a straight line between zero at
critical porosity and the solid material shear modulus at zero porosity.
Senergy
1284
The model is purely empirical and no claims are made for any basis in physics. Nonetheless, the
parallel with the graphical display of the Gassmann model is noteworthy, though the implied
analogy between the critical porosity and Gassmanns fR is apparently illusory.
Graphical illustration of bulk versus the critical porosity model.

Shear modulus is zero at the critical porosity, implying zero shear velocity. Our implementation of
fluid substitution does not honour this precisely, and instead estimates shear modulus from the
bulk modulus and GC coefficients.
Krief Model
The Krief model is another empirical model that differs from the critical porosity model at very
high porosity as shown on the figure. The model may be refined by altering the term m from its
default value of 3. Unlike the critical porosity model, the Krief model allows for shear propagation
at very high porosity.
K df ( Krief )
K solid
m1
1285
Senergy
Bulk modulus from the Krief Model
Soft, Stiff, Intermediate and Mixed sand models

This family of models4 is based on the premise that the stiffness of the dry frame is related to the
effective stress (simplified to an equivalent average effective stress) via the mechanics of grain
to grain interaction defined by the Hertz-Mindlin theory. Dry frame modulus is also a function of
the porosity of the original sand pack at the time of deposition, the coordination5 number, the
degree of adhesion between grains and the shear modulus of the solid material.
The Hertz-Mindlin theory gives the following pressure dependent expressions for dry frame bulk
and shear moduli where a fraction f of the grain contacts have perfect adhesion:
2
K HM
GHM
C 2 1 0 GR
P
2
18 2 1
2 3f
1 3f
52
1
3
3C 2 1
2 21
2
0
GR
2
Where
C is the coordination number
GR the solid rock material shear modulus
Senergy
1286
P the average effective stress

the Poissons ratio of the solid material
0
the original porosity.
The (uncemented) soft sand model follows the lower Hashin-Shtrikman bound between the
properties at the original and zero porosity. Cementation is assumed to occur away from the
grain contacts. The intermediate model is a special case of the soft sand model with KHM defined
by a coordination number equal to 15.
1
1
D
K eff ( soft)
K HM
4
G HM
3
4
G HM
3
4
G HM
3
The stiff sand model follows the upper Hashin-Shtrikman bound between the original and zero
porosity end points, and assumes an adhesion fraction of one, that friction prevents slippage
between the grains.
1
1
D
K eff ( stiff )
K HM
4
GR
3
4
GR
3
4
GR
3
The mixed model is a weighted average of the soft and stiff sand models, favouring the soft
model at high porosity and the stiff model at low porosity in line with some6 observations.
The figures below compare the models, and show the influence of the adhesion fraction.
1287
Bulk Modulus from soft, intermediate, stiff and mixed sand models.
Models other than Stiff Sand have zero adhesion between grains
Senergy
Senergy
Bulk Modulus from soft, intermediate, stiff and mixed sand models.
All models have total adhesion (zero slippage) between grains.
Block diagrams showing Observed to Wet logic
1288
1289
Senergy
Senergy
1290
1291
Senergy
Quality control - Substitution to wet

Quality control should verify that the results of saturation to wet have no visible imprint from the
original saturations. The scheme shown here has worked in many areas. The figure below
shows key inputs and outputs for QC. Track 3 shows the formation volumes that should match
Senergy
1292
the log analysis results. Tracks 4 and 5 show the invaded and undisturbed zone saturations. At
this stage the undisturbed zone saturations are only relevant for identifying hydrocarbon-bearing
intervals. Track 6 shows the input effective porosity, and if a laminated model was used the
computed un-discriminated sand lamination porosity. The remaining tracks show some of the
key elastic logs. This plot shows a subset of the curves plotted under Make Plot
Elastic
Properties Plot.
Cross-plots are also useful. The distribution of density versus effective porosity should not
depend on water saturation. The left hand plot shows the observed (olive) and water substitution
(blue) over the water and gas legs in the same well. The presence of gas reduces the density for
a given effective porosity. The right hand plot shows the substitution to wet for the entire interval,
coloured by the computed water saturation. Correct treatment of the fluid effects on the density
log is indicated by the wet substitution collapsing on to a single trend with no saturation
dependence as shown on the right.
1293
Senergy
The fluid effects on shear slowness are small, but it is still worthwhile making the plots as they
may also be used to validate the raw shear data.
The Gassmann equation is defined in terms of bulk modulus, so successful computation of wet
bulk modulus can be verified using similar logic. As before, the left hand plot shows the observed
and wet data, while the right hand plot shows how bulk modulus has collapsed on to a single
trend after fluid substitution.
Wet compressional slowness is computed from wet bulk modulus, and similar reasoning is
applied.
Senergy
1294
Geophysicists are interested in the effects of fluids on the VpVs ratio. This may be examined by
reference to cross-plots of shear against compressional slowness for the observed (left) and wet
substituted data (right) as shown below. The gas effect on compressional slowness is evident on
the left hand plot, while on the right the points from the gas bearing intervals lie on a similar trend
to the data from the water leg.
Alternatively, the consistency of the VpVs ratio may be evaluated in plots against effective
porosity as shown below.
1295
Senergy
Substitution to Modeled Saturation

Fluid substitution program theory and model - wet to modeled
Once a model for substitution from observed to wet has been established, substitution to any
other fluid condition and saturation profile is a largely mechanical exercise. The undisturbed
zone saturations are used to specify the modeled saturation condition. There are a number of
common scenarios.
1. 100% water saturated. The program always computes the responses (Rho_Wet, DTc_Wet
and DTs_Wet) with the effective porosity filled with formation water. A number of QC
checks are made with this set of curves.
2. Observed fluids and saturations. The water saturation input is the petrophysicists best
estimate of true formation saturation. Any low hydrocarbon saturations in water zones must
be removed to prevent spurious effects in the modeled results. In a gas reservoir, set the oil
saturation to zero. In wells with oil and gas, compute one or other of oil and gas saturation
equal to zero or one minus Sw according to the hydrocarbon present.
3. Fill zones with hydrocarbon. The effect of filling wet zones with hydrocarbon can be
simulated by selecting a modeled water saturation curve driven off a correlation observed in
hydrocarbon bearing zones. A simple correlation with shale fraction or effective porosity
often works well. The example shown below worked in one of our fields. The correlation
was picked off a cross-plot and clipped at one.
S wHC
a b
2
e
Senergy
1296
4. Fill zones with fizz. A fizz saturation may be defined by limiting a curve such as SwHC
specified above between 0.85 and 1.0. This is illustrated below where Swirr_Phie (track
19) came from the function in the cross-plot above and closely matches the calculated
saturations in the hydrocarbon bearing intervals. Sw_Fiz_Phi is Swirr_Phie clipped at a
minimum value of 0.85. Sw1 in track 18 is the water saturation from log analysis. The are fill
identifies the oil and gas sands.
5. Compute dry frame properties. Correlations with static mechanical properties measured in
the laboratory are usually made with respect to dry frame properties which may be thought
of as the density and slowness of the rock frame with no contribution from fluids. This case
is achieved by setting gas saturation to unity, and specifying a gas with zero density and
bulk modulus.
Block diagrams showing wet to modeled logic
1297
Senergy
Senergy
1298
Quality control - Substitution to modelled saturation

QC of computed outputs should address these questions
1. Were the fluid saturations and properties correctly specified, or did the user make an error?
Do the different cases differ as expected?
The standard plot formats provided in IP are designed to illustrate the key input saturations.
For example, the plot below identifies the filtrate invasion and reservoir hydrocarbon (gas) in
the invaded zone and fluids in the undisturbed zone in tracks 4 and 5.
1299
Senergy
Other checks depend on circumstances For example, since most reservoir fluids are have
lower density and stiffness than mud filtrate, the invasion corrected logs should lie further
from the wet case than the observed logs. The result of running a gas-filled model in a gas
bearing sand should be similar to the invasion corrected case.
Filling a zone with gas at low (fizz) saturation should lower the density slightly. At moderate
pressure it should yield a compressional sonic close to the gas filled case. The effect of low
gas saturation is reduced at high pressure.
2. Are there any spikes or other obviously wrong results?
Density and shear slowness substitution results are generally stable, as the equations are
robust and unlikely to break down. Several conditions cause Gassmann equation
breakdown.
- If the formation bulk modulus is higher than the computed modulus of the solid fraction the
Gassmann equation cannot be applied. This condition tends to occur in tight streaks,
typically carbonates, in shales or very shaley formations. Because the formation is tight,
fluid effects are likely to be small and the user should pass the input curves though to the
outputs. This condition is identified by No_Com_Flg equal to 2.
- Poorly specified parameters or the application of a shaley sand model in a laminated
reservoir can result in unstable, zero or negative dry frame bulk modulus. This condition can
be identified by inspecting the K_df output curve. This is not usually a problem when
applying the laminated model
3. How confident should we be in the results?
Senergy
1300
The QC of the wet case result should verify that initial saturation effects have been
removed, and similar plots of the results of filling the interval with gas or oil should verify
consistency in the modeled results.
There is often uncertainty in the modeled fluid properties, particularly for oil. Passes may be
made using a range of fluid properties to quantify the effects of uncertainty. We generally
find that the oil-filled model results are quite sensitive to the specified GOR, and that PVT
measurements and FLAG estimates are quite different, while in gas models at moderate
temperature and pressure the results are very insensitive to changes in the specified gas
properties.
The influence of the choice of shale distribution model may be assessed by running passes
with the laminated and evenly distributed shale model. The sensitivity to shale model choice
is often larger than the sensitivity to the plausible fluid property range.
Notes
1
. Gassmann classic paper, translated by Berrymans students.
. Brie A, et al, "Shear Sonic Interpretation in Gas-Bearing Sands", 1995, SPE 30595
Mavko, Mukerji and Dvorkin, 1998, "The Rock Physics Handbook", Cambridge University
Press.
4
. Mavko, Mukerji and Dvorkin, 1998, "The Rock Physics Handbook", Cambridge University
Press.
5
. The coordination number is the number of grains in contact with each grain. Published data
from Murphy (1982) suggests that this

varies from about 8 to 14 as porosity reduces from 0.4 to 0.2. it is also thought to
increase with clay content.
6
. R.Beardsley, personal communication, 2007.
Related Topics
Density Estimation
Fluid Substitution
Elastic Impedance
1301
Senergy
11.8.5 Elastic Impedance

The Elastic Impedance (EI) is as calculated by P. Connolly in The Leading Edge paper (1999).
The equation used is the one for high angle inversion (equation 4.1). There is little difference
between the low angle equation and the high angle equation for angles below about 20. For
angles above 30 the low angle equation starts to become unstable.
EI
Vp 1
Sin 2
Vs
1 4 K Sin 2
8 K Sin 2
b
Where
Vp = Compressional velocity
Vs = Shear velocity
K = Constant representing the average
b
= Bulk Density
= Incidence angle
Vs 2 Vp 2
for the interval
Input curves
The user enters the Vp, Vs and density curves and their appropriate units.
Result Elastic Impedance Curves

Base Name : One EI curve will be generated for each angle requested to be processed. The
result curve names will consist of the Base Name plus the angle number. For the above
example the output curve names are EI_10, EI_20 and EI_30.
Angles grid box : The user enters the angles to process. Up to 10 different angles can be
processed at once.
Senergy
1302
K constant
The K constant for the EI equation must be entered. The Calculate K from interval button can
be used to calculate the average K over the selected interval. If this button is clicked the following
pop-up window will appear :
If the user selects Yes then an output curve called EI_Kconst will be created in the well. This will
be the instantaneous K value over the whole well.
Vs 2 Vp 2
The average K value, for the selected depth interval, will be displayed in the K Constant box
window regardless of whether the user has chosen to create an EI_Kconst curve.
1303
Senergy
Calculation Units
The user can select the calculation units for the velocity and density input into the EI equation.
Due to the form of the equation the result curve shapes will be different depending on the
calculation units. NOTE: Unit conversion can not be made afterwards on the output curve but
must be made on the input curves.
EI Normalization
Since the overall average values of the EI curves depend on the angles, the EI normalization
allows the curves to be normalized to the AI curve at defined depths so that the differences
between the AI curve and the EI curves can be easily seen.
Check the Normalize to AI curve box to turn on the normalization.
Enter the logs depths at which to normalize the curves. At these depths the EI normalized curves
will be identical in value to the AI curve. The normalization is done by taking the ratio of AI/EI at
the normalization depths and applying this ratio to the EI curve away from these depths. If more
that one normalization depth is entered then the normalization value between the entered depths
will be a linear extrapolation of the values at the entered depths.
Senergy
1304
Intervals
The user can either select the depth range over which to calculate the EI curves or select a tops
set and the zones over which the calculations are to be made.
The Run button will make the calculations and update the log plots.
The Log Plot button will produce a drop-down box that will allow the user to choose either to add
to the current log plot or to create a new log plot.
The following is an example of a New Plot. If the Add to current plot is selected then the right
hand EI/AI track, seen in the example below, will be added to the right hand side of the current
plot.
1305
Related Topics
Density Estimation
Fluid Substitution
Senergy
Senergy
11.9
1306
Pore Pressure Calculations
The 'Pore Pressure Calculation' Modules comprise the following three tools:
'Density Estimation',
'Overburden Gradient Calculation'
'Run Pore and Fracture Pressure gradient calculations'
These tools can be used to evaluate the subsurface pressures encountered within a well. They
enable the user to model Overburden (OB), Pore (PP) and Fracture (FP) pressures based on
conventional log curves, drilling information and seismic data input. It can be used as a pre-drill
(predictive) and while-drilling (real-time) tool, as well as for post-drilling analysis to update and
refine OB, PP and FP models.
In pore pressure computations many data types are integrated to provide as comprehensive a
sub-surface pressure analysis as possible. Data collation, preparation and QC are essential
pre-analysis steps. The diagram below, while not providing an exhaustive list, illustrates the
types of data that should be retrieved and accessible before starting an analysis.
Section 11.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations
1307
Senergy
When data compilation is complete, the following 'Preparation workflow', should be followed
within Interactive Petrophysics (IP); before proceeding to the Pore Pressure evaluation modules:
Senergy
Then proceed to the main 'Interpretation' menu
1308
'Pore Pressure Calculations'. The
following options are available under the 'Pore Pressure Calculation' menu:
The technical papers on which these modules are based are listed in the 'Pore Pressure
References' Section. The inexperienced user is advised to locate and read at least a few of
these references to familiarize themselves with the techniques / calculations being used.
Recommended reading would include the following:
1. SPE Reprint Series No.49 "Pore Pressure and Fracture Gradients".
2. Mouchet, J-P., Mitchell, A. Abnormal Pressures While Drilling - Manuels Techniques 2 Elf
Aquitaine (1989)
1309
Senergy
Related Topics
Density Estimation
Pore & Fracture Pressure Gradient Calculations
11.9.2 Overburden Gradient Calculation

The 'Overburden Gradient Calculation' tool is the second module within the Pore Pressure
Calculation 'suite' and calculates the instantaneous average overburden gradient and overburden
pressure curves relative to the 'reference depth' datum , whether that is KB (TVD KB) , Mean
Sea Level (TVDSS) or TVD Sea Bed.
NOTE: we are working in a 'True Vertical Depth' domain in both the 'Overburden Gradient
Calculation' module and the 'Run Pore and Fracture Pressure gradient calculation' module.
This module permits the user to model the overburden gradient OBGrad and overburden
pressure OBPres curves for the well under evaluation. The OBGrad curve can be modelled
directly from a combination of :
User-selected density curve data and / or
User-input average density values (with associated top and bottom depths).
in the absence of density logs, 'Look-up tables' or
An empirical 'Amoco' relationship can be used.
NOTE: While a default 1 psi/ft (19.25 lbs/gal) overburden gradient may give acceptable results
for onshore wells, it is not recommended for use with deep water interpretations, where the
effects of depth of water and thickness of poorly-consolidated sediments need to be evaluated
more rigorously.
The 'Overburden Gradient Calculation' screen is divided into a number of 'panels':
'Input Well Data'
'Input Density Curves or Fixed Values'
'Intervals where Density Curve is Missing'
'Overburden Results Curves'
Senergy
1310
Input Well Data

This section requires the user to select a 'Depth Curve'. If the subject well is vertical then the
'measured depth' DEPTH curve would be suitable. However, if the well is significantly deviated
then a TVD KB, TVD SS or TVD SB (referenced to Sea Bed) depth curve should be computed
and selected. The user should also, if necessary, use the 'Well Depths Editor' functionality to
extend the subject wells depth range to surface before running this module. This enables the
Overburden Gradient and Overburden Pressure curves to be computed over the entire well,
rather than only where wireline logs have been loaded.
'KB Height' is picked up from the 'Well Header Info.'
'Default Parameters' tab if the data
1311
Senergy
has been entered there. Otherwise, type in a KB elevation above your well depth datum - usually
Mean Sea Level offshore ( the 'Air gap').
'Water Depth' / 'Density'. In the offshore drilling situation the Water Depth and Water Density
values are required to compute the overburden contribution of the water column. The water
density value can be input using the following units - lbs/gal, psi/ft, gm/cc, Kg/m 3.
Input Density Curves or Fixed Values

This 'grid' table enables the user to select a density curve, either from the 'Density Estimation'
calculation, or from an existing well log, or user-entered constant values of bulk density over a
depth range, for use in the computations. The OBGrad and OBPres curves are then created by
an integration operation performed on the density log data and any other values added into the
grid. The values of 'Water Depth' / 'Density' allow the calculation of the overburden gradient
contribution of this interval to the final model.
Intervals where density curve is missing

For intervals within the subject well, where no density curve exists, the following section provides
a means to compute 'missing' overburden gradient and pressure data. This section allows the
user to apply a number of methods for computing a 'continuous' overburden gradient curve from
surface / reference depth to Well Total Depth.
1. The user can apply an empirical relationship, selected by 'checking' the 'Amoco Avg.
Sediment Density' option, then by typing an average sediment density value into the text box
and selecting a density 'unit' from the drop-down list. This method is documented by
Traugott, M.4. The relationships are shown below:
OBG
8.5 W
avg
D W
if you know the
avg
value to input
Where
OBG = Overburden Gradient
W
= water depth (ft)
8.5
= assumed sea water density (lbs/gal)
Senergy
= TVD depth below KB (ft)
= Air gap (ft)

avg
1312
= average sediment density (lbs/gal, gm/cc, etc.)
If you do not have a
avg
value, 'checking' the 'Amoco Compaction Relationship' option
will calculate the average sediment density input to the 'Amoco Avg. Sediment Density'
method, using the following equation.
avg
= 16.3 + [(D-W-A) / 3125] 0.6
This simple compaction relationship is only suitable for sand/shale sequences that have not
experienced unloading/uplift. The value, 0.6, is an empirical exponent.
2. Alternatively, a user-defined 'Lookup tables' overburden gradient curve can be loaded
directly into IP. Details of the data formatting and file naming conventions required for this are
included in the 'Overburden Gradient Curves' section.
Three overburden gradient curves have been included with IP. These are:
The 'Offshore Texas/Louisiana' dataset was provided by Unocal.

The 'Average GOM (Amoco)' data was taken from Figure 2 in the 'Fracture Prediction
for the New Generation' paper, by Eaton and Eaton5. The 'Deepwater GOM (Amoco)'
data was based on calculations by Barker and Wood6. By including an air gap and water
depth / water density in the computation, the 'Barker & Wood' overburden gradient curve can
be calculated for any water depth from the rig depth reference point (RT / KB) using the
following equation:
Cum. Av. Formation. Bulk Density (lb/gal) = 5.3 * (TVDBML) 0.1356
(where depth units are in feet and TVDBML = TVD depth Below Mud Line)
Overburden Results Curves

The output results curves OBGrad (gradient) and OBPres (Pressure) curves, their curve units
and the 'Output Depth Type' can all be selected in this panel.
1313
Senergy
The 'Output Depth Type' drop-down list allows the user to change the datum for the output
curves. For example, if the input data is relative to TVD KB, the output curve could be adjusted to
a TVD Sub Sea datum or TVD Sea Bed datum, depending upon the way the user wishes to use
the 'Pore Pressure Calculations' Module.
NOTE: It is good practice to decide upon an Output Depth Type for the Overburden
Gradient calculations and use that same reference consistently in the Pore /Fracture
gradient module.
The Module buttons have the following functions:
'OK' - executes the computations using the curves, values and methodology that the user
has selected.
'Make Plot' - launches a QC log plot to show the computed overburden gradient and
overburden pressure curves.
'Save' - allows the user to save the module settings to an external (.obu) file.
'Load' - allows the user to re-load a set of saved settings from an external (.obu) file.
Related Topics
Density Estimation
11.9.3 Pore & Fracture Pressure Gradient Calculations

'Run Pore and Fracture Pressure gradient calculation' is the third module within the 'Pore
Pressure Calculations' suite.
This module provides the user with the methodologies to generate Pore Pressure and Fracture
Pressure gradient models for the study well, based on the analysis of input log curves and
Senergy
1314
additional drilling information, when this is available.

The 'Pore Pressure Gradient' parameters and set-up are organized on a number of screen '
tabs'. These are:
'Input'
'Output Curves'
'Parameters'
'Well Data'
'Result Xplot'
1315
Senergy
An additional tab, 'Daines Parameters', will only be visible if the user elects to 'Calculate
Fracture Gradient / Pressure from:' and selecting 'Daines' methodology.
The tabs are described below.
References to technical papers whose techniques are implemented in this module are provided
in the 'Pore Pressure References' section.
'Input' Tab
The 'Input' tab allows the user to select the log curves and well depth data to be used in the
interpretation, together with the Pore Pressure and Fracture Pressure Gradient models to be
applied to the data. Log curves can be selected from the drop-down menu boxes.
Senergy
1316
The 'Input' tab is split into a number of panels:
'Well Input Data' Panel

This section allows the user to set up a number of well properties which IP uses in the pore
pressure calculations.
The 'Overburden Gradient Curve' input is the output results curve calculated in the '
Overburden Gradient Calculation' module or a user-supplied curve. The input curve
units are selected from the adjacent drop-down list.
Overburden Gradient Curve 'Ref' - This is the depth 'Reference Datum' that was used to
1317
Senergy
create the Overburden Gradient (OBGrad) and Overburden Pressure (OBPres) curves.
The 'Depth Curve' should be the curve that was used in the Overburden Gradient
calculation module. This could be the DEPTH curve if the subject well is vertical, or a
computed TVD KB or TVDSS curve when the well is significantly deviated.
The Depth Curve 'Ref' (reference) is selected from the adjacent drop-down list.
The 'Shale Discriminator Curve' can be selected from the drop-down list box and should
be either :
1. A clay volume curve from the output of running the 'Clay Volume' interpretation module,
or
2. Another 'clay indicator' curve (e.g.GR).
When the 'Shale Discriminator Curve' check box is 'checked' and the interactive Log plot for
this module is launched, a shale discriminator track with interactive cut-off line will be visible. This
helps the user to select shale intervals for use in the pore pressure calculations.
'KB Height (Air Gap)' - the Kelly Bushing elevation for the well. This value will be
automatically filled in, if the appropriate value has been entered into the 'Manage Well
Header Info.' module, on the 'Default Parameters' tab. The user can type the 'KB Height'
value into the box if it is empty.
'Water Depth' - The 'Water Depth' value will be automatically filled in, if the appropriate
value has been entered into the 'Manage Well Header Info.' module, 'Default Parameters'
tab. The user can type the 'Water Depth' value into the box if it is empty. The water depth
value should be a positive integer.
'Water Density' - The pore pressure calculations take into account the pressure exerted by
the height of the water column in the offshore environment. The user should type in an
appropriate sea water density value and 'Unit'. The IP default value is 8.5 lbs/gal, which is
equivalent to 0.441psi/ft or 1.018 gm/cc.
Pressure Gradient Conversion Factors

Typical conversion factors between lbs/gal, psi/ft and gm/cc are included here for reference:
1.0 lbs/gal = 0.051948 psi/ft
1.0 psi/ft
= 19.25 lbs/gal
1.0 gm/cc = 8.3454 lbs/gal

1.0 psi/ft
= 2.30666 gm/cc
A Fresh water pressure gradient would be 0.434 psi/ft or 8.345 lb/gal

A Saturated brine pressure gradient would be 0.519 psi/ft or 9.991 lb/gal.
Senergy
1318
'Calculate Pore Pressure Gradient / Pressures from' Panel

The 'Calculate Pore Pressure Gradients / Pressure from' panel sets up the curves to be used
as Pore Pressure 'indicators'. The underlying computations are based on Eaton's7 methodology
and use a deep-reading resistivity, a sonic log and/or a Drilling Exponent (Dxc) curve as inputs.
The user 'checks' the models to be initiated when the calculations are executed.
Eaton established the following empirical relationships, based on the principle that the
relationship between an 'observed' parameter versus a 'normal' parameter ratio and the
formation pressure depends on changes in the overburden gradient. In IP, Shale 'Normal
Compaction Trend' (NCT) lines are established for each input curve (sonic, resistivity and Dxc)
and the deviation of the 'observed' log response from the appropriate NCT line is used to
compute a Pore Pressure, using the calculated overburden gradient OBGrad curve. The Eaton
relationships are illustrated below:
Resistivity:
P
D
S
D
S
D
P
Rsh observed
*
Dn
Rsh normal
S
D
S
D
P
*
Dn
1.2
Sonic:
P
D
Tshale normal
Tshale observed
3.0
Drilling Exponent:
P
D
S
D
S
D
P
Dxc observed
*
Dn
Dxc normal
1.2
Where
S/D = Overburden Stress Gradient (Psi/ft)
P/D = Formation Pore Pressure gradient (Psi/ft)
P/Dn = Normal Pore pressure gradient (Psi/ft)
Rsh = Shale resistivity (ohmm)
Tshale = Shale travel time (usec/ft)
Dxc = Drilling exponent in Shale
The Eaton 'exponents' used in these equations are sufficiently reliable for widespread use in
exploration wells. However, where for example, calibration pressure data is available from offset
wells, the exponents can be validated. The Eaton exponents can be modified on the 'Parameters
' tab of this module.
1319
Senergy
In equations where the Eaton exponent is 1.2 (Resistivity and Dxc) , the range can be between
0.9 2.00. In the Tshale equation, where the exponent is 3.0, the range can be 2.0 4.0.
Eaton's method is generally accepted as the most widely applied pore pressure evaluation
technique.
If the Resistivity model is 'checked' there is an option, on the input screen, to correct the
resistivity curve to a constant temperature, using a user-defined temperature curve.
The Arps equation has been used to temperature correct the resistivity log. The temperature
correction has the effect of reducing the drift of the resistivity curve with increasing depth/
temperature. The temperature-corrected resistivity curve is called ResCorr in the 'Output
curves' scheme. An alternative temperature correction equation (Amoco) replaces (+6.77) with
(-6) in the Arps equation and can be applied as a 'user-formula' from the 'User Defined Formula
' module.
Note that the 'Resistivity' method has a number of limitations which must be considered
during an evaluation:
Variations in Cation Exchange Capacity (CEC) will affect the normal shale compaction trend
line (NCT_Res).
Formation temperature and fluid salinity effects are significant, especially at shallow depths.
The computation calculates pore pressures in low TOC shales only.
The methodology becomes less accurate at deep burial depths where porosity is low.
'Calculate Fracture Gradient / Pressure from' Panel

The 'Calculate Fracture Gradient / Pressure from' Panel allows the user to select a Fracture
Gradient calculation model to apply in the subject well. The available models are :
'Eaton'
'Matthews & Kelly'
'Modified Eaton'
'Barker & Wood'
'Daines'
Senergy
1320
These models are described more fully in the 'Fracture Gradient Models' section. The user
should 'check' the radio button of the 'Model' to be used. Both the 'Eaton' and 'Matthews and
Kelly' models incorporate additional 'Options', which can be selected from the drop-down lists.
Please refer to the 'Fracture Gradient Models' section for more details.
'Output Curves' Tab

The 'Output Curves' tab allows the user to either; take the default IP curve names for computed
pressure and gradient curves, or to rename individual curves to the users own specifications.
Output pressure units, gradient units and depth references are also selected here.
1321
Senergy
The 'Calculate Pore Pressure Tolerances' check box, if 'checked' before the model is run, will
create 'High-side' and 'Low-side' curves for each input to the Pore Pressure model. For
example, If the sonic log is used to model pore pressure, then the interactive log plot display will
show the computed Pore-Pressure-from-Sonic curve within a shaded 'envelope' defined by the '
High-side' and 'Low-side' curves.
The user must type a value into the '% Tolerance' box to be used to calculate these additional
curves. For example, a value of '5', the default value, would allow IP to calculate the 'Pore
Pressure plus 5%' ('High-side') and Pore Pressure minus 5% ('Low-side') curves.
The 'Null Output Curves' button, when 'clicked' allows the user to set all output curve values to -
Senergy
1322
999. This can be useful if the user has 'run' a model and then wishes to experiment with different
depth ranges for the pore/fracture pressure gradient calculations, for example, or if the user
wishes to change the Fracture Pressure model and re-run the calculations without having to
delete the results curves before proceeding.
'Parameters' Tab
The 'Parameters' tab contains a number of 'sub-tabs' which give the user further interactivity
with the Pore and Fracture pressure calculations. The sub-tabs are:
'General'
1323
Senergy
'Resistivity'
'Sonic'
'D Exponent'
The 'General' sub-tab permits the user to create / delete zones, to edit zone top/ bottom depths
and to manually edit the cut-off value for the Shale Discriminator curve, including the ability to turn
on/off the Shale discriminator curve in any zone.
The tab also allows the user to input a 'normal' hydrostatic gradient value, the 'Hydro Gradient'
parameter, and 'Hyd Grad Units' (hydrostatic gradient units). This value is used in the Eaton
Pore Pressure models (the 'P/Dn' term). The IP default normal hydrostatic gradient is set at 1.0
gm/cc (Fresh water).
Senergy
1324
The 'Resistivity', 'Sonic' and 'D Exponent' sub-tabs allow the user to modify the Eaton
exponents (described above), if the default values do not generate a pore pressure curve that
matches closely to some measured subsurface calibration pressures from, for example, RFT.
All tabs contain the same column headings, which are described below.
1325
Senergy
The 'Eaton Exp.' (Exponent) column contains the 'default' exponent for resistivity, sonic and
Dxc as determined by Eaton. This parameter is user-editable.
The 'Filter Length' option allows the user to select a 'smoothing' distance over which the
output Pore Pressure, Fracture gradient and pressure curves ('PPG_XXX', 'FG_XXX'and '
PP_XXX') are averaged. The filter length, in units of 'depth steps', must be entered, and be a
whole, odd number between 3 and 2001 for both the 'Square' and 'Bell' filters.
NOTE: setting the 'Filter Length' to a value of '1' will compute the output curves at the input
curve depth increment and will calculate the exact output values according to Eatons
equations. Applying a 'Filter Length' will result in an 'averaging' of the Output curves, which
will depend on the 'type' of filter selected and the 'Filter Length' value.
The 'Filter Type' parameter, can be 'toggled' to select an appropriate filtering algorithm.
The choices are 'Square' and 'Bell'. These are described briefly below:
The 'Square' (or box) filter will apply an equal weight to all samples in the filter.
The 'Bell' shape filter applies a sine wave shape filter to the data. The following formula is
used to calculate the filter weights.
1 Cos 2
Wt j
j
Filtlen 1
Filtlen 1
Where
Wtj = Filter Weight at j'th level
FiltLen = Filter Length
The 'Extra Gaps' parameter allows the user to extrapolate across data gaps in the selected
Res_Shale, Son_Shale or Dex_Shale curves since these curves will have gaps where the '
Shale discriminator' cut-off value is not reached. When 'checked' this option helps to make a
continuous pair of output Pore Pressure and Fracture gradient results curves for each selected
Senergy
1326
pore pressure indicator curve.

The'Extrap Abv Zone' parameter allows the user, in a 'zoned' interpretation, to select to
extrapolate above a zone, in order to create continuous pore pressure and fracture gradient and
pressure curves. If 'checked' the output curves will be displayed as continuous curves.
'Daines Parameters' Tab

The 'Daines Parameters' tab is only visible when the 'Daines Fracture Gradient Model' is
selected on the 'Input' Tab. This screen allows the user to set up the data to create or load a '
Poissons Ratio' curve that is intrinsic to the Daines methodology. See the 'Fracture Gradient
Models' section for a full description.
The tab contains two data input 'panels'.
1. The upper 'Manual Input for User-Created Poissons Ration Curve' panel is used to
manually create a Daines 'Poissons Ratio' curve. The user enters a top and bottom depth
value and selects a 'Lithology' from the drop- down list. The Daines Poissons ratio value is
filled in automatically. By tabulating the lithologies penetrated in the subject well, IP will create
the Poissons Ratio curve for the well when the 'OK' button is 'clicked'. IP also creates a '
Facies Code' curve (Facies_PP) based on the selected lithologies. This curve is added to
the interactive log plot display as a 'graphic lithology' track with bitmap shading for each
lithology type.
1327
Senergy
2. The lower panel is used to input 'Daines Leak Off Test' (LOT) Data Input' information.
These data are used to calibrate the 'Daines Fracture Gradient' Model. The user should fill
in the data 'grid' with any LOT data that has been acquired in the subject well. See the '
Fracture Gradient Models' section for more information.
Senergy
1328
'Well Data' Tab

The 'Well Data' tab is used :
To record 'Casing Strings' details, including Leak Off Test pressures.
To compute 'Mud Weight' (gradient) and mud pressure curves. NOTE: If a 'Mud Weight'
curve is selected or created, it will automatically appear in the 'Pore Pressure Gradient
Results' and 'Fracture Gradient Results' tracks of the Interactive Log Plot.
To record 'Operational Problems', for use in the interactive and final crossplots.
1329
Senergy
'Casing Strings' sub tab

Casing string details are manually entered into the blank 'Casing information' table. Users can
select a casing size from the drop-down list or type in their own values.
The 'Mud Weight' sub-tab

The 'Mud Weight' sub-tab allows the user either:
to select an existing mud weight curve (loaded elsewhere in IP) which can be used to to
Senergy
1330
generate a 'mud pressure' curve, or

to manually enter depths and mud weights into a table, choosing the appropriate mud weight
units, and select the 'Create curves' button.
Mud weight (gradient) and pressure curves are created with the names that the user enters into
the data entry boxes at the top of the tab.
1331
Senergy
The 'Operational Problems' sub-tab

The 'Operational Problems' sub-tab gives the user the opportunity to record any operational or
formation/drilling information that might be useful to store and display on the Results Xplot.
Symbols have been linked to some common problem types and these can be added to the Xplot
annotations by using the
button at the bottom of the 'Well Data / Operational
Problems' sub tab. This operation pastes the well data information into the 'Results Xplot Annotations' table with the ability to add to the existing annotations or to replace the current
annotations. Additional comments can then be added in the text box of the 'Annotations' tab
Senergy
1332
When the user is satisfied with the pore and fracture pressure interpretation in the interactive
window, a results crossplot (Xplot) can be output.
'Results Xplot' Tab

This 'tab' allows the user to choose whether to plot modelling results as Depth versus
Pressure or as Depth versus Pressure Gradients, by selecting the appropriate 'X axis Scale
'. The user can then choose the units to be used to display the pressures.
'Mud weight lines' can be displayed as overlays on the Pressure plot by toggling the 'Display
Lines' 'check' box. Overlay line units can be selected from the drop-down 'Units' box.
1333
Senergy
Default overburden-, pore- and fracture pressure curve names from the interpretation are
available to plot. Curves can be added or de-selected by 'un/checking' the 'Plot' column on the
left hand side of the window. Curve attributes (colour, symbol, weight, title) can all be changed
interactively.
The plot is displayed by selecting
Additional well information can be added to a plot from the 'Annotations' tab. Text and symbols
are placed on the plot by inputting XY coordinates (which depend on the type of plot required) and
then by typing in comments and selecting font size and colour. Plots are updated for new
annotation data by clicking on the
button.
Senergy
1334
Both the Depth versus Pressure 'Fan Diagram' and the Depth versus Pressure Gradient '
Gradient' Plot' can be annotated with casing shoe symbols, RFT pressure points, Leak Off
Pressure values and operational comments to identify hole stability problems such as mud
losses, stuck pipe, Kicks / well flows. Additional curve data such as mud weight /ECD curves
can be added to the display. Examples of the two plot formats are illustrated below. All
annotations, log curves and plot scales can be saved to a format file (.fpt) in order to be able to
reproduce the plot at a later date.
The 'Options' tab allows the user to add a plot title and subtitle, set X and Y axis names, depth
labelling intervals and add a legend to the gradient and pressure plot.
1335
Example of a Depth versus Pore/Fracture Pressure Plot
Example of a Depth versus Pore / Fracture Gradient Plot
Senergy
Senergy
1336
Related Topics
Density Estimation
11.9.3.1 Running the Model
When all input curve data, Leak Off Test information (for 'Daines' Fracture Gradient Model), Mud
Weight and Output curve options are entered into the interface and the Pore and Fracture
Gradient models have been selected, the module should be initiated by 'clicking' the 'OK' button.
Click the 'Make Plot' button to launch the module's 'Interactive Log Plot'.
The 'Interactive Log Plot' comprises of:
1337
Senergy
a 'Depth' track,
a 'Zone' track,
a 'Shale Discriminator' track,
'Pore Pressure Model' tracks; one each for Resistivity , Sonic, Dxc, depending on what
was 'checked' in the 'Input' tab. The sonic and resistivity curves are displayed on a
logarithmic scale versus depth.
'Pore Pressure Gradient Result' and 'Fracture Pressure Gradient Result' tracks'. The
computed output Pore and Fracture Pressure gradient curves are illustrated in the two
tracks on the right hand side of the plot. If a 'Mud Weight' curve has been selected or
created in the 'Well Data' - 'Mud Weight' sub tab, then this curve will also be automatically
added to the 'Results' log tracks.
The 'Zone' track enables the well to be 'zoned' according to user requirements; for example
- to separate major intervals of shale lithology from non-shale.
The 'Shale Discriminator' track allows the user to set the interactive 'Shale discriminator
line' for the well, in the log plot display. The Shale indicator can also be switched 'on'/'off
' (right-mouse-button 'click' in track) for a particular zone. This is the 'default' method for
Senergy
1338
selection of Shale Intervals which will be used for computing the Pore and Fracture
pressures and gradients.
Moving the interactive 'Shale Discriminator' cut-off line results in corresponding changes to the
amount of highlighted log curve (in red) in the adjacent 'Pore Pressure Model' tracks. Only the
highlighted (red) 'Shale' data are used in the computations. The Pore Pressure Gradient (PPG)
and Fracture Gradient (FG) Results tracks are immediately updated for any changes the user
makes to shale cut-offs or for any manual edits that are made to shale intervals in the Resistivity,
Sonic and Dxc evaluation tracks.
Sonic, Resistivity and Drilling Exponent are displayed in separate 'Model' tracks in the
interactive display. A Normal Compaction Trend (NCT) line for sonic log response in shale (
NCT_Son), for resistivity in shale (NCT_Res) and for D exponent in Shale (NCT_Dex) are
also displayed in the appropriate track.
1339
Senergy
Editing 'NCT' Lines

The 'NCT' (Normal Compaction Trend) lines are interactive and are initially defined by 2 blue
marker points, which can be moved around within each input curves 'Model' track.
To change the position / slope of the NCT line in a particular track:
1. Left-mouse-button 'click' in a 'Model' track to open the editing dialog, Right-mouse-button
'click' on the 'Editing NCT' option (highlighted in the following figure).
2. Place the mouse cursor over one of the blue coloured interactive points. The cursor
changes to a cross (+) symbol.
3. 'Click' and hold down the mouse button and drag the point to another place in the log track.
The NCT line will be re-oriented and the pore and Fracture pressure gradient calculations for
that input curve will be recalculated.
4. Additional NCT 'points' can be added to an existing line by right-mouse button clicking in a
track. The point will be added to the NCT line and the pore and fracture gradient calculations
will be re-run.
Senergy
1340
The NCT lines can be 'zoned' by adding extra calibration points. This is done by 'clicking' the
left hand mouse button to create a point, and then by dragging the cursor to an appropriate place
in the track.
1341
Senergy
Adding points either side of a zone boundary preserves the original trend line and new trend.
To remove unwanted points, put the mouse cursor over a blue calibration point, the cursor
changes to a cross, press the 'Delete' key on the keyboard.
Based on Eaton's methodology, the difference between the 'normal' trend line and the
'observed' (log) curve is converted to a Pore Pressure measurement. This is immediately
updated in the 'Pore Pressure Results' track on the right hand side of the plot. The 'Fracture
gradient' curve is similarly updated as a result of changing the Pore pressure curve, since it is
calculated as a function of the Pore pressure and Overburden pressure gradients. This is only
true if either the 'Daines', 'Eaton' or 'Matthews & Kelly' models are selected.
Editing Shale Intervals for Individual Pore Pressure Models

Further interactivity is included within the evaluation plot. 'Right-mouse-button clicking' in a 'Pore
Pressure Model' track launches a drop-down menu. Editing options are found at the top of the
menu list.
In order for the Editing options to be active, the 'Shale Discriminator' must be switched
'off' in the zone the user is working in. This is done by right -mouse-button 'clicking ' in the '
Shale discriminator' track and selecting 'Use Cutoff turn Off' option, or, alternatively, go to the
'Parameters' tab / 'General' sub-tab, 'un-check' the 'Use Cutoff' entries and click the 'OK'
button.
As well as allowing the NCT line to be edited, additional options - 'Add Interval' and 'Delete
Interval' are available to allow the user to manually edit the 'Shale' data, highlighted in red, in the
Senergy
1342
interactive plot. An editing option is selected by clicking on it. A 'tick' will appear next to the
'active' editing mode, as shown below, where 'Delete Interval' is the active mode.
The 'Add Interval' option allows the user to 'digitize' additional shale points, which might not have
been picked up by the Shale discriminator and interactive Shale cut-off line. The user can either
add individual 'Shale points' by 'clicking' in the log curve track or shale 'intervals' can be added
by 'clicking & dragging' with the mouse cursor over the depth interval to be added as 'Shale'.
1343
Senergy
The 'Delete Interval' option can be used to de-select some, or all, of the highlighted 'Shale
points' selected for a particular pore pressure indicator. The user selects the editing option from
the drop-down menu in the interactive log track and 'click & drags' the left mouse button over the
interval to be deleted. The highlighted, red coloured ResShale, SonShale or DexShale points/
line are removed from the plot. The computations are automatically re-run for the edited pore
pressure indicator curve and the results curves are updated.
When you are happy that the Pore and Fracture Gradient interpretation you have made supports
the observations and measurements made while drilling / logging the subject well, you can
proceed to make the summary Crossplots.
Summary Crossplots can be created for the subject well, either as 'Pore / Fracture
pressure gradients versus depth' or as 'Pore / Fracture Pressure versus depth', the socalled 'Fan diagram'. These are described in the 'Viewing Output Results' section.
Related Topics
Running the Model
Viewing Output Results
Senergy
1344
Fracture Gradient Models

Overburden Gradient Curves
Pore Pressure References
11.9.3.2 Viewing Output Results
The 'Result Xplot' 'tab' allows the user to choose whether to plot modelling results as 'Depth
versus Pressure' or as 'Depth versus Pressure Gradients'; to add 'Annotations'; and to add '
Plot titles and axis titles' for the output to clipboard.
The 'Curves / Scales' sub-tab

The 'Curves / Scales' sub-tab is where the user sets up the curves , depth range and type of
'Results' plot to output.
The 'Y Axis' panel allows the user to select a Depth curve and its' depth 'Type' for the output
plot.
The 'X Axis' panel allows the user to toggle between the two available plot formats - 'Plot
Gradients' or 'Plot Pressures'.
The 'Plot Gradients' option, if selected, will created a 'Depth versus Pressure Gradient'
plot. The 'Units' drop-down list allows the user to select an output pressure gradient 'unit' for
the crossplot. The user chooses a unit from lbs/gal, gm/cc, Kg /m3, psi/ft.
The 'Plot Pressures' option, if selected will create a 'Depth versus Pressure' plot. The '
Units' drop-down list changes to list appropriate pressure units. These are 'Bar and psi.
'Mud weight lines' can be displayed as overlays on the Results Pressure plot by toggling the '
Display Lines' 'check' box. Overlay line units can be selected from the drop-down 'Units' box. If
the user changes the Mud weight line 'units', clicking the 'Set Default' button will refresh the Mud
Weight lines for the selected units. The line values can also be edited manually to change the
overlay lines on the results crossplot.
1345
Senergy
The 'Input Curves' panel - Default overburden, pore and fracture 'pressure' or pressure 'gradient'
curve names from the interpretation are available to plot. Changing the 'X Axis Scale' between '
Plot Gradients' and 'Plot Pressures' changes the default settings for the curves to be used in
the crossplot. Curves can be added or de-selected by 'un/checking' the 'Plot' column on the left
hand side of the window. Curve attributes (colour, symbol, weight, title) can all be changed
interactively. For example the user might have some RFT pressure points which they wish to
display. These can be added as a new curve in the 'Input curves' grid in an empty row in the
grid. Fill in the 'Title' cell for each curve. This will set up the legend that appears on the bottom of
the Results Crossplot.
Senergy
1346
The Annotations sub-tab

Additional well information can be added to a plot from the 'Annotations' tab. Text and symbols
are placed on the plot by inputting XY coordinates (which depend on the type of plot required) and
then by typing in comments and selecting font size and colour. Plots are updated for new
annotation data by clicking on the 'Make Plot' button.
Both the Depth versus Pressure 'Fan Diagram' and the Depth versus Pressure Gradient '
Gradient' Plot' can be annotated with casing shoe symbols, RFT pressure points, Leak Off
1347
Senergy
The 'Options' sub-tab

The 'Options' sub-tab allows the user to add a plot title and subtitle, set X and Y axis names,
depth labelling intervals and add a legend to the gradient and pressure plot.
The 'Pore Pressure Gradient' module outputs two Crossplot displays that are set up in the '
Senergy
1348
Results Xplot' tab - 'Curves / Scales' sub tab. The options are to display results as depth
versus 'Gradients' or depth versus 'Pressures' plots.
Both the depth versus pressure 'Fan Diagram' and the depth versus pressure gradient '
Gradient' plot can be annotated with casing shoe symbols, RFT pressure points, Leak Off
Example of a Depth versus Pore/Fracture Pressure Plot
Example of a Depth versus Pore / Fracture Gradient Plot
1349
Related Topics
Running the Model
Senergy
Senergy
1350
11.9.3.3 Fracture Gradient Models
Five Fracture Gradient models are implemented in IP. These are:

'Eaton'
'Matthews & Kelly'
'Modified Eaton'
'Barker and Wood'
'Daines'
The Eaton, Matthews & Kelly and Daines Fracture gradient models utilise the Overburden
Gradient curve computed in the 'Overburden Gradient Calculation' module. Pore Pressure
and Fracture Pressure gradients are computed simultaneously when these models are run.
The Barker & Wood methodology is an empirical relationship based on observations of actual
well Leak Off Test (LOT) data and was established for application to the Deep Water Gulf of
Mexico region.
An outline of the four models is given below.
PLEASE NOTE that Mouchet et al6 (1989) were very critical of all fracture gradient
methodologies because, either the computations considered over-simplistic geologic/tectonic
models or they introduced additional unknowns e.g. Daines tectonic component to the stress
determined by Poissons ratio. The methods should therefore be approached with caution and
take into consideration other critical factors such as well trajectory, the nature of the formation
being tested to leak off and knowledge of the in-situ stresses on a local as well as regional scale.
'Eaton' Fracture Gradient Model

Eaton10 (1969) attempted to take into account the subsurface stress regime in fracture gradient
calculation, by using the Poisson's Ratio an elastic constant reflecting the horizontal to vertical
stress ratio.
Where :
= Poissons ratio.
F/d = Fracture Gradient.
S/d = Overburden Gradient.
P/d = Pore Pressure Gradient.
This equation can be applied worldwide given that the following 3 steps are followed:
1351
Senergy
1. determine overburden gradient

2. determine pore pressure gradient
3. determine Poisson's Ratio for the study area.
Eaton further developed algorithms to calculate the input Poisson's Ratio values for Gulf Coast
and Deep water GOM cases. Eaton and Eaton11 (1997) describes equations applicable for
Poissons Ratio calculations for well depths from 0 5000 ft below mud line/Sea Bed and for
depths of > 5000 ft below mud line/Sea Bed for the US Gulf Coast and Deep Water GOM cases.
These equations are illustrated below and are implemented under the 'Model' drop-down list
when the 'Eaton' Model is selected.
'Gulf Coast' Poisson's Ratio Calculation

0 4999 ft (Depth) below mud line/Sea Bed:
> 5000 ft (Depth) below mud line/Sea Bed:
'Deep Water' Gulf of Mexico Poisson's Ratio Calculation

0 4999 ft (Depth) below mud line/Sea Bed:
> 5000 ft (Depth) below mud line/Sea Bed:
The Poisson's Ratio versus depth curves resulting from these equations are illustrated below:
Senergy
1352
The appropriate curve is then applied in the calculation of Fracture Gradient and Fracture
Pressure for the interactive plot and the Results Xplot.
'Matthews & Kelly' Fracture Gradient Model

Matthews and Kelly9 (1967) model is based on Gulf Coast Texas and Louisiana sandstones
and assumes a constant OBG of 1 psi/ft, therefore it is of little use outside the GOM coast region
The Fracture Pressure formula is of the form:
Where:
F = Fracture Pressure
1353
Ki =
Senergy
the 'effective stress coefficient'
= (S P) = net effective overburden stress

S = Overburden stress
P = Pore pressure
Matthews and Kelly derived Ki curves from plots of effective overburden stress (S-P) vs Ki,
back-calculated from offset well Leak Off data. Ki curves exist in the literature (Reference 9) for
South Texas Gulf Coast (S Tx Coast) and Louisiana Gulf Coast (LA G Coast). These have been
digitized and incorporated as look-up tables which the user can select from the 'Options' dropdown list.
NOTE: It is only possible to use this approach when the Ki vs depth is well known for a specific
area.
'Modified Eaton' Fracture Gradient Model

Simmons and Rau (1988) proposed a 'Modification' to the Eaton technique for predicting
Fracture Pressures / Gradients in the offshore drilling environment. The 'modification' they
proposed was to take into account the effect of a water column on the composite vertical rock
stress at the depth of interest in the subject well. This recognizes that the hydrostatic pressure
of the sea water above the sediments would provide a contribution to the overburden load. In
using this Fracture Gradient model the input Overburden Gradient curve should be referenced to
a TVD Sub Sea datum.
1. The Overburden gradient curve is used as an input to the 'Composite Vertical Stress' equation:
vc
0.442 WD
OBGrad Dsed
(Equation 1)
Where:
vc
= Composite Vertical Stress.
WD = Water Depth.
Senergy
1354
OBGrad = Overburden Gradient curve.

Dsed = Sediment Penetration Depth.
2. This is input to the calculation of the 'matrix stress ratio' (Ke) at the 'Effective Depth' (Deff),
where;
Ke 0.05329427 0.99996 Deff Deff 0.3006479
(Equation 2)
and Deff = the 'effective sediment penetration depth' defined by :

Deff = (Water Depth/2) + DSed
(Equation 3)
Where
DSed = Sediment penetration depth
3. Using Eaton's basic Fracture Pressure equation (Equation 4), the anticipated Fracture
Pressure is calculated.:
FP PP Ke
vc
PP
(Equation 4)
Where:
FP = Fracture Pressure.
PP = Pore Pressure.
Ke = Matrix stress Ratio.
= Composite Vertical Stress.
4. The Fracture Pressure Gradient is calculated by dividing each calculated pressure by its
associated depth value.
NOTE: the resulting Fracture Pressure and Fracture Gradient curves are referenced to a TVD
subsea datum and will have to be adjusted if a Rig Floor/ Kelly Bushing datum is required.
'Barker & Wood' Fracture Gradient Model

Barker and Wood13 (1997). This method has been used specifically for the pre-drill estimation
of shallow below mud line (BML), Deep Water Gulf Of Mexico (GOM) fracture gradients in the
Central and Western parts of the GOM (to a depth of ca. 8000 ft below mud line, in water depths
ranging between 2000 and 7000 ft). The method utilizes a typical GOM deep water, shallow
below mud line sediment bulk density estimate and requires no other data. The method is limited
to depths up to approximately 8000ft BML.
More than 50 Leak off Tests (LOT) from 20 GOM wells were analysed. Using the water depth
and LOT information from all these wells, the authors' found the best fit curve through these data
to be given by:
Cum. Av. Formation. Bulk Density (ppg) = 5.3 * (TVDBML) 0.1356
1355
Senergy
Therefore, adding the hydrostatic pressure of the water column (assumed an 8.55 lbs/gal water
density) to the bulk density from the equation above computes the total overburden pressure.
Since the model assumes that the fracture gradient is equal to the overburden gradient in the
shallow sediment overburden, the fracture gradient can be calculated by dividing the overburden
pressure by the depth of interest RKB.
If choosing to run this option for fracture gradient computation, the output curve name will
correspond to whichever curves are being utilised for the pore pressure calculation. For
example, if pore pressure is being computed using the sonic log, the output fracture gradient
curve will be FG_Son since the IP naming scheme does not include the methodology used to
create the curve. The user has the facility to change the fracture gradient and fracture pressure
curve names to appropriate defaults (e.g. FG_BW, FP_BW) before running the model.
'Daines' Fracture Gradient Model

Daines12 (1980). This method attempts to account for regional stress ratios, rock type and
variable overburden in the computation of Fracture Gradient and Fracture Pressure. Daines
solves the following equation to compute Fracture Gradient (FG):
Where:
= Poisson's Ratio (Daines reference table)

= Horizontal tectonic stress (equivalent to minimum effective stress -
= Maximum effective compressive stress (Overburden Pressure (S) minus Pore

Pressure (P))
S
= Overburden Pressure
P = Pore pressure
The methodology assumes that, in a relatively relaxed basin setting, the horizontal to vertical
stress ratio, termed
, remains relatively constant with depth and is defined by :
for the test depth can be calculated at the first good Leak-Off test point in a well. Knowing
Senergy
(S-P) will allow the calculation of
and thus values of
1356
can be readily calculated for all other
depths in the well.

The Daines Fracture Gradient model is calibrated to the first Leak Off Test (LOT) in compacted
formation. This is manually input in the 'Daines Parameters' tab as a 'LOT Depth' and 'LOT
Press' (psi). In a 'zoned' well, all rows in the table must contain a depth and LOT pressure for
the computation to run. A single LOT depth / pressure pair can be copied to all rows by '
switching on' the column headers and filling in the first row of data.
Daines Fracture Gradient methodology uses as input 'Poissons Ratio' data for the overburden,
in order to calculate the Fracture Gradient curve. The Daines Poissons Ratio data can either :
1. be entered into the upper grid in the 'Manual Input for User-Created Poissons Ratio
Curve' panel, or
2. the user may load and use a 'Poissons Ratio' curve derived elsewhere, by 'checking' the '
Use existing PR Curve' radio button.
1357
Senergy
The geological column must be divided up by the user into broad lithological units using all
available data (cuttings descriptions / wireline logs / composite and mud logs). The top and
bottom depths for each lithology interval are entered manually into the 'Poissons Ratio' table. A
drop- down list of descriptive lithologies appears by 'clicking' on the 'Default Lithology' column.
The data for the table are found in the IP program directory in the 'Poisson_Ratio_Lithologies.
par' file. The descriptors correspond to a table in Daines original paper.
Each lithology descriptor has a default 'Poissons Ratio' value associated with it, taken from
Daines12. When a lithology is selected, the Daines 'Poissons Ratio' is automatically filled in on
the grid. These values can be manually edited. A 'Facies Code' field is also automatically filled
in when a lithology is chosen. This code is linked to a symbol library and can be used to
generate a 'Facies Curve' (Facies_PP), which in turn can be used to create a lithology column
for the final Pressure Plot.
Senergy
1358
Related Topics
Running the Model
11.9.3.4 Overburden Gradient Curves
User-created overburden gradient curves can be created externally to IP and then loaded for use
with the Pore Pressure modules.
A number of Overburden Gradient (OBG) curves have been included within the IP Pore Pressure
module; namely 'Offshore Texas / Louisiana' (Unocal) and 'Deepwater GOM (Amoco)' and '
Average GOM (Amoco)'. These overburden gradient curves have been taken from the available
literature and are stored within the IP source directory as text files. Where sufficient local well
data and burial history knowledge is available, further OBG curves can be added to IP by the
user.
The data is stored as a space-delimited text file with the '.obg' file extension (e.g.
Amoco_Deep_GOM.obg). The file name must also be recorded in the 'OBG_Files.obg' file
which references all the individual OBG data files. Examples of the text file formats is included
below:
(extract from 'Offshore_Texas_Louisiana.obg'):
$ Overburden gradient for Louisiana Texas offshore
$ Supplied by Unocal March 2003
$ Units
Ft lbs/gal
$
$ Data
5.000
9.009
1359

10.000
15.000
20.000
25.000
30.000
35.000
Senergy
9.061
9.112
9.164
9.216
9.268
9.320
Note: Lines with a '$' prefix are comment lines added to describe the source of the overburden
gradient data.
Format for the OBG_Files.obg file:
$
$ OBG_Files.obg file
$ Contains list of overburden gradient files that are available
$
$ Format is
$ OBG file name ',' Name displayed in the OBG module
$
Offshore_Texas_Louisiana.obg, Offshore Texas/Louisiana
Amoco_Deep_GOM.obg, Deepwater GOM (Amoco)
Gulf_of_Mexico_Amoco.obg, Average GOM (Amoco)
Related Topics
Running the Model
11.9.3.5 Pore Pressure References
REFERENCES
1. Gardner G. L. F., Gardner L.W., & Gregory A.R. (1974) Formation velocity and density the diagnostic basics for stratigraphic traps Geophysics 39, 770-780.
2. Bellotti, P. Di Lorenzo, V. & Giacca, D. - Overburden gradient from sonic log - Trans.
SPWLA, London March 1979.
3. Lindseth, R. O., (1979) Synthetic Sonic Logs a process for stratigraphic interpretation,
Geophysics v.44 no.1 p.3-26.
4. Traugott, M. - Pore Pressure and Fracture Pressure Determinations in Deepwater Deepwater Technology Supplement to World Oil, August 1997.
5. Eaton B.A. and Eaton T.L. Fracture gradient prediction for the new generation - World Oil
Senergy
1360
(October 1997).
6. Barker, J. W. and Wood, T.D. Estimating Shallow below Mudline Deepwater Gulf of
Mexico Fracture Gradients (1997) Houston AADE Annual Technical Forum.
7. Eaton, B.A. (1972) Graphical Method Predicts Geopressures Worldwide - World Oil 182, 6,
51-56.
8. Matthews, W.R. and Kelly, J.(1967) How to Predict Formation Pressure and Fracture
Gradient - Oil &Gas Journal, 65, p92-106.
9. Eaton B. A., (1969) Fracture Gradient Prediction and its Application in Oil Field Operations J.Pet.Tech. 21, p1353-1360.
10. Daines S.R. (1980) The Prediction of Fracture Pressures For Wildcat Wells - SPE 9254.
11. Simmons E.L. & Rau, W.E. (1988) Predicting Deepwater Fracture Pressures: A Proposal
(SPE 180250)
OTHER USEFUL REFERENCES

12. Pore Pressure and Fracture Gradients - SPE Reprint Series No.49 (1999 edition).
13. Mouchet, J-P., Mitchell, A. Abnormal Pressures While Drilling - Manuels Techniques 2 Elf
Aquitaine (1989).
Related Topics
Running the Model
1361
Senergy
11.10 Saturation Height Modelling

The 'Saturation Height Modelling' suite of modules is designed to enable the IP user to create '
Saturation versus height' functions from either capillary pressure (Pc) data or from calculated
water saturation curves, or a combination of both approaches. The 'Saturation Modelling'
modules have a multi-well interface and allow the user to consolidate, QC and interrogate data
from multiple wells in a field / study area.
Capilliary Pressure: The Capillary Pressure modules allow the user to QC the raw Pc
measurements and make corrections for overburden stress, for clay-bound water and for
laboratory to reservoir conditions conversion. Multiple Sw versus Capillary Pressure functions
can be derived. Core plug Capillary Pressure array data and their associated Saturation,
Porosity and Permeability values are loaded from external sources using the 'Capillary
Pressure Data Loader' module. Alternatively, the 'ASCII Load' or 'Interval Loader' modules
can be used if desired.
Log Curves: The 'Log Sw versus Height Functions' module is used to generate Water
saturation (Sw) versus Height functions from log curve data. Log-derived water saturation
curves can be used, in conjunction with Free Water Level (FWL) depths to derive 'Sw versus
Height above FWL' functions. This module does not require core data.
The 'Saturation Modelling' suite is comprised of 4 tools that are interrelated:
1. 'Capillary Pressure Set-Up'
2. 'Capillary Pressure Functions'
3. 'Saturation versus Height Curves'
4. 'Log SW versus Height Functions'
For example, the 'Capillary Pressure Set-up' module is used to QC and edit capillary pressure
(Pc) curves. The core plugs flagged as 'Good' or 'Part Good' plugs from this module are used as
input to the 'Capillary Pressure Functions' module. The 'Saturation versus Height Curves'
module is used with the functions derived in the 'Capillary Pressure Functions' or the 'Log SW
versus Height Curves' module to model Saturation versus Height above the FWL in multiple
wells.
NOTE: All four modules write their parameters / set-up to a common external parameter file.
When the 'Save' button is clicked on any one of the module interfaces, the parameters are
written to this external Parameter Set (.cap file) which, by default, is located in the IP project root
directory. The parameters are also saved automatically into the project database file IPDBProj.
dat. These project files are saved for each user logging into the database. Hence, if the
parameters need to be shared by multiple users it is highly recommended to save them
Section 11.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling
Senergy
1362
separately using the 'Save' button.
Related Topics
Saturation Height Modelling
Capillary Pressure Loader
Capillary Pressure Set-Up
Capillary Pressure Functions
Saturation Versus Height Curves
Log Sw Versus Height Functions
11.10.1 Capillary Pressure Loader

The Capillary Pressure modules allow the user to QC the raw Pc measurements and make
corrections for overburden stress, for clay-bound water and for laboratory to reservoir conditions
conversion. Multiple Sw versus Capillary Pressure functions can be derived. Core plug Capillary
Pressure array data and their associated Saturation, Porosity and Permeability values are loaded
from external sources using the 'Capillary Pressure Data Loader' module. Alternatively, the '
ASCII Load' or 'Interval Loader' modules can be used if desired.
To display the Capillary Pressure Loader Features:
From the Advanced Interpretation Module, Select Saturation Height Modelling (Capillary
Pressure).
The Capillary Pressure Module comprises the following three Features:

Capillary Pressure Set-Up: The 'Capillary Pressure Set-Up & Corrections' interface is used to
1363
Senergy
set up the study well (or wells) and their Capillary Pressure (Pc) and associated Water
Saturation (Sw) datasets. The corrected / converted Pc and water saturation curves that are
output from this module are subsequently used in the 'Capillary Pressure Functions' module.
Capillary Pressure Functions: The computations built into the 'Capillary Pressure Functions'
module are used to find a curve fitting function or a set of curve fitting functions which can be
used to represent the Qc'd and corrected capillary pressure (Pc) dataset from the 'Capillary
Pressure Set-up' module.
Saturation Versus Height Curves: The 'Saturation Versus Height Curves' module is used to
take the functions that have been developed in the 'Capillary Pressure Functions' and 'Log Sw
Vs. Height Functions' modules and to apply these functions to multiple wells and multiple
reservoir zones. The module can also be used to calculate an unknown 'Free Water Level
' (FWL) in a well, using a function to predict the 'Most Likely' value.
Related Topics
11.10.1.1 Capillary Pressure Set-Up
The 'Capillary Pressure Set-Up & Corrections' interface is used to set up the study well (or wells)
and their Capillary Pressure (Pc) and associated Water Saturation (Sw) datasets. The
corrected / converted Pc and water saturation curves that are output from this module are
subsequently used in the 'Capillary Pressure Functions' module. The functionality within the
'Capillary Pressure Set-Up & Corrections' module allows the user to :
Set-up the study wells and input Pc and saturation curves to use,
Select the output Set into which the results curves will be written,
Convert Pc data from different measurement techniques to a common 2 phase system,
Optionally stress-correct and /or apply a Clay-bound water correction to the Pc data.
Visualize raw and corrected Pc Curve data and quality check the data.
Edit bad data points from the Pc dataset.
The following Tabs are available in the Capillary Pressure Set-Up Dialog:
Senergy
1364
Curves Set Up: The 'Curves Set-up' tab is used to select wells and their associated Capillary
Pressure (Pc) and Saturation (PcSw) curve data. The interface is a large tabular display,
where each row in the grid can be used to set up a different well for QC and correction of its
Pc dataset. Each output name for each Pc curve is differentiated by appending a number
(1,2,3.....) automatically to the end of the curve name.
Correction Parameters: As well as depending upon grain size, grain shape, sorting and
cementation, the relationship between capillary pressure and water saturation is dependant
upon the interfacial tension between the two immiscible fluid phases present and the contact
angle between the wetting phase and the rock surface and the density difference between the
two fluids. Capillary pressure curves can be defined for any 2 phase fluid system in a given
rock. The only variables are the 'Contact Angle' (
and the 'Interfacial tension' (
. One
can therefore normalize capillary pressure curves from different measurement techniques to a
single system. One can also convert from one fluid system to another, given the knowledge of
these two variables in the two systems. The 'Correction Parameters' tab is set up to allow
the user to define the 'Laboratory' and 'Reservoir' values of 'Contact Angle' and 'Interfacial
Tension' for the respective 'Mercury Injection', 'Centrifuge' or 'Porous Plate'
methodologies. These values will be used to convert laboratory measured capillary pressures
to a Reservoir fluid system and not the core porosity.
Data View / EditThe 'Data View / Edit' tab is used to set up a Crossplot graphical window
which will allow you to visualize and perform data edits on a multi-well Pc dataset. Two tables,
'Select Pc Curves for Display' and 'Select Individual Plugs for display' control which core
plugs are available for visualization and editing. The two tables are connected and interactive.
'Clicking' between 'Curve Identification' rows in the left-hand table changes the entries in the
core plug table on the right hand side of the screen.
'Capillary Pressure Functions'
regression routines are also set up from the Data View / Edit Tab.
Capillary Pressure Crossplot: The Crossplot display is used to visually quality-check the
'Corrected' (& / or 'Raw') Pc datasets. You must make your own decisions as to whether
each curve is 'Good' or 'Bad'. If for example, you think a Pc Curve is a 'Double curve', i.e.
a 'composite' curve composed of two curves, each representing one pore network, it
should be excluded from your dataset. Obviously invalid Pc versus Saturation curves
1365
Senergy
should also be discarded. Simply set the 'Plug Bad' flag to 'on' (ticked) in the 'Data View /
Edit' right hand table.
Typical QC Workflow: This Topic defines a Typical Workflow for using the Capillary Pressure
Dialog.
NOTE: IT IS IMPORTANT TO UNDERSTAND THAT ALL CORE PLUGS (FROM ALL
WELLS) THAT ARE 'FLAGGED' AS 'GOOD' OR 'PART GOOD', ON THE 'DATA VIEW /
EDIT' TAB IN THIS MODULE AND WHICH HAVE THE 'SELECT PLUG' COLUMN 'TICKED'
ARE AUTOMATICALLY SELECTED FOR USE IN THE 'CAPILLARY PRESSURE
FUNCTIONS' MODULE AND WILL BE LOADED WHEN THAT MODULE IS LAUNCHED.
SUBSEQUENT PROCESSING, TO DERIVE PC VS SW FUNCTIONS, REQUIRES THE
USER TO SET UP & USE 'DISCRIMINATOR' LOGIC TO CREATE SUBSETS OF THE
CORE PLUG DATASET FOR ANALYSIS.
Related Topics
Curves Set Up
Correction Parameters
Data View / Edit
Capillary Pressure Crossplot
Typical QC Workflow
11.10.1.1.1 Curves Set Up
The 'Curves Set-up' tab is used to select wells and their associated Capillary Pressure (Pc) and
Saturation (PcSw) curve data. The interface is a large tabular display, where each row in the grid
can be used to set up a different well for QC and correction of its Pc dataset. Each output name
for each Pc curve is differentiated by appending a number (1,2,3.....) automatically to the end of
the curve name. This gets over the problems seen in previous versions of IP of how to handle
multiple Pc curves all at the same depth.
To overcome the problem of incompatible input and output Sets,where one input Pc curve might
be in a regular Set while another is in an irregular Set, an option has been added 'Output Sets
same as PC curve Input sets'. This option will be 'checked' by default for all new projects.
When it is 'checked' the output Set will have the same step size as the input Set. NOTE: if the
Capillary Pressure module has been previously run using IP v3.4 then this option won't be
'checked' and the output curves won't have a number appended to them. This is to maintain
compatibility with IP v3.4 datasets.
Senergy
1366
NOTE: it is no longer possible to select an 'Output Set' in the 'Capillary Pressure Functions'
module. All output curves from this module will be placed in the Set selected in the 'Curves Setup' tab of the 'Capillary Pressure Set-Up & Corrections' module.
The user chooses a 'Well Name' from the drop-down list box in the 'Well Name' column and
then sets up the remaining curve entry boxes and input curve units for each well.
IP will accept capillary pressure (Pc) data in the following units; psi, Bar, Kg/M 2, Mpa
The program converts Pc pressure values to 'psi' based on the user-input units.
Saturation values and Porosity values can be supplied either as Percentages or as
decimals. IP will convert to decimals based on the user-input units.
Permeabilities can be supplied as milliDarcies (mD) or m 2. IP will convert the values to
milliDarcies for all computations.
Default output curve units are 'psi' for corrected Capillary Pressure curves and decimals for
Corrected Pc Saturation curves.
The grid column names and their functions are described below, progressing from left to right
through the screen.
'Curve Identification' - The 'Curve Identification' column is found on all 3 'Set-up and
Correction' Tabs. Because of the multi-well functionality of this module, this column is
present to help the user to keep track of which well and which curves they are working on
and visualizing.
When the user selects the Capillary Pressure (Pc) and Pc Saturation curve names for a
well on the 'Curve Set-up' tab, this column populates with a summary text string, containing
the 'Database Well Number' followed by the input Pc and Pc Saturation Curve names in
the following notation:
For example - W:6 Pc/PcSw which translates to IP database "Well 6" followed by the 'Capillary
1367
Senergy
Pressure input curve name' & 'Pc Saturation input curve name', as illustrated below:
Identically named 'Curve Identification' columns are found on both the 'Correction Parameters
' and 'Data View /Edit' tabs to help the user to navigate through the corrections and visualization
screens. NOTE: - THIS COLUMN IS USER EDITABLE - you can clear the 'default' text and
manually type in a simpler, or more informative text string if you wish to do so.
The screen capture shown above illustrates the interactive drop-down menus available within the
'Curves Set-up' interface.
Column Descriptions:
'Well Name' - This column allows the user to select the database wells to be worked on.
Wells are chosen by 'clicking' in a blank cell in the 'Well Name' column, then selecting a
well name from the drop-down well list.
Senergy
1368
'Pc Curve In' - Select the Capillary Pressure (Pc) curve / array name for the subject well
from the curve drop-down list.
'Pc Units In' - Select the input Capillary Pressure (Pc) curve units from the drop-down list.
The options are:
Pounds per square inch (psi)
Bar (Bar)
Kilograms per square meter (Kg/m2)
MegaPascals (MPa)
'Pc Sat Curve In' - Select the input Saturation Curve / Array for the subject well from the
curve drop-down list.
'Pc Sat Units In' - Select the Saturation Curve units from the drop-down list. The options
are:
'%' - percentage
'dec' - decimal
'Pc Sat Type in' - The 'Pc Sat Type in' parameter is used to indicate how the input Pc
Saturation data has been reported in the external data file. The user must set whether the
Pc Saturation data is being reported in terms of the 'wetting' or 'non-wetting' fluid phase.
For example, in the case where the Mercury Injection saturations are being reported as
Mercury Saturation (the non-wetting fluid) ,'SHg', then the user would choose the 'Non Wet'
option and the IP program would compute the wetting-phase Saturation as the output
'corrected Pc Water Saturation' ('SwPcCorr') curve using a formula of the following form:
SwPc = 1 - (Snw)
Where:
Snw = input Non-wetting-phase Saturation.
SwPc = Wetting Phase Water Saturation.
Water Wet - should be set when the measurement technique reports saturation as the
wetting phase saturation.
Non Wet - should be set when saturation data is reported in terms of the non-wetting fluid.
'Measurement Type In' -Select an option from the drop-down list. The choices are:
Mercury Inj - Measurements from Mercury Injection
Centrifuge - Measurements from Centrifugation
Porous Plate - Measurements from Porous Plate Apparatus
Curve - If Capillary pressure data are loaded into IP from an external source, for example a
1369
Senergy
spreadsheet, which contains data measurements from different Pc measurement

techniques ('Mercury Injection', 'Porous Plate', 'Centrifuge'), the measurement techniques
can be differentiated by giving each a numerical 'Measurement Method' 'flag' value in the
spreadsheet. The 'Measurement Method' 'Flag' values can be loaded into IP, as a curve,
at the same time as the Pc and Pc Saturation data and this curve can then be selected from
the 'Measurement Type In' drop-down list. The 'Measurement Type In' curve values then
have to be 'mapped' to the correct 'measurement technique' values on the 'Correction
Parameters' tab, in the 'Method ID' column of the 'Reservoir and Laboratory Fluid /Rock
Properties' table.
'Porosity Curve In' - the input Core Porosity curve name. NOTE: the core porosity should
be overburden corrected as the function generated will be used with log porosity.
'Porosity units In' - the units of the data in the Core Porosity curve.
'Permeability Curve In' - the input Core Permeability curve name. NOTE: the core
permeability should be overburden corrected only if used with log data which has generated
an overburden corrected permeability. I.e. log and core data should be the same with
respect to overburden correction.
'Permeability Units In' - the units of the input Core Permeability curve.
'Pc Corr. Out' - The Corrected Capillary Pressure (PcCorr) output curve.
'Pc Corr. Units Out' - the units of the data in the Corrected Capillary Pressure curve.
'Pc Sat Corr. Curve Out' - The Corrected Pc Water Saturation (SwPcCorr) output curve.
'Pc Sat Curve Units Out' - The units of the data in the Corrected Pc Water Saturation
curve.
'Pc Use Flag Curve Out' - This is an array curve of the same dimensions as the input Pc
Pressure and Pc Saturation array curves The array contains values, either 'zero' or 'one',
which 'indicate 'Bad' or 'Good' data points, respectively, within the Pc data input arrays.
Where a 'Bad' point on a Pc curve has been edited out during the QC process, a 'PcUse'
Flag value of 'zero' is set in the corresponding array position in the 'PcUse' curve. This
curve is updated when the user performs any edits to the Pc versus Saturation dataset,
using the Crossplot tool. See 'Data View / Edit' below.
'Pc Height Curve Out' - This converts the corrected Pc curve to a height curve. Allows for
the crossplot of Height against Sw for each plug to be made. It is an array curve with the
same dimensions as the Pc curve.
'Closure Correction Curve Out' - This curve contains any Sw closure correction that
needs to be applied to the Raw Sw curve. The values in this curve can be set from the 'Data
Senergy
1370
View / Edit' tab.

'Pore Size Curve Out' - This curve converts the Pc and Sw input curves into an array curve
of pore size. The curve is an array curve of X dimension of 80. Each X value represents a
pore size. The first X value is a pore size of 0.01 microns and the 80th X value is a pore size
of 100 microns. The scale is logarithmic with 20 X values per decade. The curve is plotted
as a waveform.
'Pc Normalized Curve Out' - This curve converts the Pc and Sw input curves into an array
curve which represents the Pc curve and can be used to plot the Pc curve on the log plot as
a waveform. The curve has an X cell dimension of 51. Each cell represents 2.0 saturation
units. The value in the cell is the pressure value. The transformation is approximate due to
the coarseness of the cells.
Related Topics
Curves Set Up
Data View / Edit
Typical QC Workflow
11.10.1.1.2 Correction Parameters
As well as depending upon grain size, grain shape, sorting and cementation, the relationship
between capillary pressure and water saturation is dependant upon the interfacial tension
between the two immiscible fluid phases present and the contact angle between the wetting
phase and the rock surface and the density difference between the two fluids. Capillary pressure
curves can be defined for any 2 phase fluid system in a given rock. The only variables are the '
Contact Angle' (
and the 'Interfacial tension' (
. One can therefore normalize capillary
pressure curves from different measurement techniques to a single system. One can also
convert from one fluid system to another, given the knowledge of these two variables in the two
systems. The 'Correction Parameters' tab is set up to allow the user to define the 'Laboratory'
and 'Reservoir' values of 'Contact Angle' and 'Interfacial Tension' for the respective 'Mercury
Injection', 'Centrifuge' or 'Porous Plate' methodologies. These values will be used to convert
laboratory measured capillary pressures to a Reservoir fluid system and not the core porosity.
Pc data can also be 'Stress-corrected' to reservoir conditions and 'Clay-Bound Water'
1371
Senergy
corrections can be applied.
Clicking the 'Run Corrections' button will perform all the stress / clay-bound water corrections
and the Laboratory-to-Reservoir conversions to create a consistent set of Pc and associated
wetting-phase saturation data for analysis.
Reservoir and Laboratory fluid / rock properties Table

This table is used to set up the 'default' values for 'Contact Angle' ( ) and 'Interfacial Tension' (
) values for the 3 Capillary Pressure methodologies. This will allow the user :
1. To 'Normalize' capillary pressure data from different laboratory methods, or
2. To convert Pc data from one fluid system to another, say from 'Laboratory' to 'Reservoir'.
Default values for 'Interfacial Tension' and 'Contact Angle' parameters are provided. However,
the table is fully editable to the users own requirements.
'Measurement Type' - The 'Measurement Type' column lists the 3 Pc experimental

methodologies. These are:
Mercury Injection
Senergy
1372
Centrifuge
Porous Plate
'Method ID.' - if the user has imported Capillary Pressure data into IP, for example, from a
spreadsheet containing a combination of 'Mercury Injection' and 'Porous Plate'
measurements, where each plug is 'flagged' with a value to represent the measurement
'method', IP can be set up to recognize the Capillary Pressure measurement method so that
the program can automatically apply the appropriate conversions. To do this:
1. The user loads the 'Measurement Method' data from the external spreadsheet, as
a curve, into IP.
2. On the 'Curves Set-up' tab, under the 'Measurement Type In' column, select this '
Measurement Method' flag curve.
3. On the 'Correction Parameters' tab, in the 'Method ID' column, Type in the flag
curve values that correspond with the measurement techniques in the data file.
'Contact Angle Laboratory' - This is the laboratory-defined Contact Angle for the
measurement system used.
'Interfacial Ten. Laboratory' -This is the laboratory-defined Interfacial Tension for the
measurement system used.
'Contact Angle Reservoir' - This is the subsurface Contact Angle for the fluid system
under investigation.
'Interfacial Ten. Reservoir' - This is the subsurface Interfacial Tension for the fluid system
under investigation.
The 'Restore Defaults' button - should the user edit the default Laboratory 'Contact Angle'
and 'Interfacial Tension' values and then decide to return the values to the IP default settings,
clicking the 'Restore Defaults' button will reset the values in the first 3 columns of the table.
Reservoir properties Default

Reservoir Fluid system 'default values' for 'Contact Angle' and 'Interfacial Tension' for a 'Gas /
Water' or an 'Oil / Water' system can be quickly set by 'clicking' either of the buttons in the '
Reservoir properties Default' panel, as shown below:
1373
Senergy
Clicking 'Set Gas / Water' returns 'Contact Angle Reservoir' 0 degrees and 'Interfacial
Tension Reservoir' 50 dynes/cm.
Clicking 'Set Oil / Water' returns 'Contact Angle Reservoir' 30 degrees and 'Interfacial
Tension Reservoir' 30 dynes/cm.
These default values are user- editable in the 'Reservoir and Laboratory fluid / rock
properties' table, should you have an independent source for these data.
Pc Height
The 'Pc Height' box allows the user to select the densities used for the conversion from Pc
pressure to Height above FWL. The formula used in the conversion is:
Height = PcCorr / (Water Density - Hyd Density)
PcCorr will be the corrected Pc value. The Height will be in the same units as the database depth
curve. Densities are converted to the correct units for the formula. The corrections are performed
when the 'Run Corrections' button is 'clicked'.
Corrections to Pc Curves Table

The 'Corrections to Pc Curves' table allows the user:
1. to convert the Laboratory Pc data to a 'Reservoir' fluid system,
2. to apply stress corrections and
Senergy
1374
3. to 'Clay Correct' the Pc data. During cleaning and drying of 'shaly' core plug samples, claybound water could be lost. IP allows you to correct for the lost clay-bound water. A 'Qv' input
curve is required for the Clay correction to work.
Several Columns ('Stress Correct', 'Clay Correct' and 'Convert to Reservoir') are 'Flag'
columns. To set all rows in a column to 'on', click in the first row of the table so a 'tick' appears,
then 'click' the Column header and the remaining cells will be ticked automatically. To de-select
a column, clear the tick from the top row, then 'click' in the column header, all rows will be
cleared. Similarly, if you wish to fill any column with the same numerical value, type the value
into the appropriate cell in the first row in the table, 'click' the column header and the value will be
copied to all empty rows in that column.
'Curve Identification' - The 'Curve Identification' column lets you see which well you are
setting up corrections for. For example, in the picture shown above, All three wells are to be
Stress-corrected, using the 'PhiRes/PhiLab Factor' set to 0.9562, while only Well 6 is to be
'Clay Corrected' using an input Qv curve and a Salinity of 30Kppm NaCl. All three wells will
have the 'Convert to Reservoir' applied. See 'Convert to Reservoir' , below.
Stress Corrections
'Stress Correct' - This is a 'Flag' which switches the Stress-correction calculation
'on' ('checked') or 'off' ('un-checked'). The Stress Correction is performed by applying the
following formulae:
PcCorr = Pc * ('PhiRes/PhiLab Factor') ^ (-0.5)
&
SwPcCorr = 1- [(1-SwPc) * (PhiRes/PhiLab Factor)]
Where:
Pc = input Raw Pc pressure curve
SwPc = input Pc saturation (wetting phase) curve
PcCorr = Stress Corrected Pc Curve
SwPcCorr = Stress Corrected Pc Saturation (wetting phase)
PhiRes/PhiLab Factor = Stress Correction Factor.
'PhiRes/PhiLab Factor' - This is the Porosity correction factor (in decimal notation), from
1375
Senergy
Laboratory to Reservoir conditions, that is activated / applied when the 'Stress Correct' Flag
is 'on' (ticked).
Clay-bound-water Corrections
'Clay Correct' - This is a 'Flag' which switches the 'Clay Correction' 'on' ('checked') or
'off' ('un-checked'). During cleaning and drying of core plug samples, clay-bound water could
be lost. Where an Air/Mercury measurement system has been used, applying the 'Clay
Correct' Flag provides a correction for the missing clay-bound water, using a supplied 'Qv'
input curve and a Formation Water Salinity value.
The 'Clay Correction', based on the method described by Hill, Shirley and Klein 1979 (
SPWLA 20th annual Symposium Paper AA - "The Central Role of Qv and Formation
Water Salinity in the Evaluation of Shaly Formations") is performed by applying the following
two equations to the input Pc and PcSw curves:
PcCorr = Pc* (F) ^ (-0.5)
&
SwPcCorr = 1- (1 - SwPc) * F
Where:
Pc = input Raw Pc pressure curve
SwPc = input Pc saturation (wetting phase) curve
PcCorr = Clay-Corrected Pc Curve
SwPcCorr = Clay-Corrected Pc Saturation (wetting phase)
F = Clay Correction Factor which is calculated from the equation :
F = 1 - [0.6425 * (Salinity ^ (-0.5) + 0.22 ] * Qv]
Where:
Salinity = formation water salinity (Kppm NaCl equivalent).
Qv = Cation exchange Capacity per total pore volume (meq/ml).
'Salinity (Kppm NaCl)' - This is the salinity input value to be used, together with 'Qv' input
curve, for the 'Clay Correct' calculation.
'Qv meq/ml Curve In' - The user must choose the Qv input curve, from the drop-down list
box, if the 'Clay Correct' Flag is 'on' (ticked).
Conversion to Reservoir Fluid System

'Convert to Reservoir' - This is a 'Flag' which switches 'on' ('checked') / 'off' ('un-checked')
the 'Laboratory to Reservoir' conversions set up in the upper, 'Reservoir and Laboratory
fluid / rock properties' table. If 'Convert to Reservoir' is ticked for a row in the table, the
Senergy
1376
Laboratory Pc data will be converted to the selected Reservoir 'Oil / Water' or 'Gas /Water'
fluid system when the 'Run Corrections' button is clicked.
The conversion uses the following equation, multiplying the known Pc values by the
'absolute' ratio of the Laboratory and Reservoir '
Cos ' values:
Where:
Pc, Res = Capillary Pressure at Reservoir Conditions.
Pc, Lab = Capillary Pressure at Laboratory Conditions.
Lab = Interfacial Tension under Laboratory Conditions.
Lab = Contact Angle under Laboratory Conditions.
Res = Interfacial Tension under Reservoir Conditions.
Res = Contact Angle under Reservoir Conditions.
Closure Correct
If the 'Closure Correct' column is ticked, then the values in the 'Closure Corr.' curve will be
used to correct the input Sw curve to give the 'SwCorr' curve. The correction is performed
as follows:
SwCorr = Sw (input) - SwClosure
Sw(input) is the water saturation input curve. The units of the Closure curve will be the
same as the output Sw units.
'Run Corrections'- 'Clicking' the 'Run Corrections' button will execute all the fluid system
(Lab. / Reservoir) conversions and stress / Clay-bound-water corrections that have been set
up on the 'Correction Parameters' tab in the following order:
1. Convert input Pc Saturation data to Non-wetting phase saturations (check the 'Pc Sat
Type In' parameter setting).
2. Perform the Stress Correction, if selected, on the input Cap. Pressure curves and Nonwetting phase saturation data.
3. Apply the Clay-bound-water correction, if selected.
4. Convert saturation data to Wetting phase saturations.
5. Perform the Laboratory to reservoir Pc Corrections, if selected.
'Clear All' - 'Clicking' the 'Clear All' button will remove all well and curve settings from the '
Curves Set-up' grid. You will be prompted to confirm that this is what you want to do.
1377
Senergy
NOTE - any Pc curve edits that you have performed up until the point when you click
'Clear All' will be lost by confirming 'yes' to this operation.
'Save' - 'Clicking' the 'Save' Button WILL ONLY SAVE the current curve set-up, Correction
parameter table settings and Data View options. IT DOES NOT SAVE the output curves or
edited curves for each well to the IP database. REMEMBER to save your study wells to the
IP database at the end of a session using either the 'Save current well to database As.' or
'Save All Wells to Database', under the IP 'File' menu.
'Load' - 'Clicking' the 'Load' button will launch a browse window that allows you to restore
the parameter settings from a 'Saved' session.
Related Topics
Curves Set Up
Data View / Edit
Typical QC Workflow
11.10.1.1.3 Data View / Edit
The 'Data View / Edit' tab is used :

1. To set up a Crossplot graphical window which will allow you to visualize and perform data
edits on a multi-well Pc dataset. Two tables, 'Select Pc Curves for Display' and 'Select
Individual Plugs for display' control which core plugs are available for visualization and
editing. The two tables are connected and interactive. 'Clicking' between 'Curve
Identification' rows in the left-hand table changes the entries in the core plug table on the right
hand side of the screen.
2. To select the core plugs that will go into the 'Capillary Pressure Functions' regression
routines.
The 'Data View / Edit' tables give the user the ability to visualize:
The 'Raw' & / or 'Corrected' Pc vs Pc Saturation curve for a single core plug from one well,
The 'Raw' & / or 'Corrected' Pc vs Pc Saturation curves for multiple core plugs from one
well,
The 'Raw' & / or 'Corrected' Pc vs Pc Saturation curves for multiple core plugs from multiple
Senergy
1378
wells.
Individual core plug data from each well can be visualized using the 'Make Crossplot'
functionality and then plugs can be 'Flagged' as 'Good' or 'Bad'. Where a plug is flagged as '
Bad', the Pc curve will be excluded from the dataset that is used in the 'Capillary Pressure
Functions' module. Edited Pc curves, where one or more data points have been 'deleted', are
given a 'Part Good' status.
The 'Data View / Edit' interface contains 2 tables; 'Select Pc Curves for Display' and 'Select
Individual Plugs for display'.
Select Pc Curves for Display Table

Clicking in the 'Curve Identification' column in a row refreshes the adjacent 'Select Individual
Plugs for display' table with the core plug details for that particular well.
1379
Senergy
'Curve Identification' - the common 'Well / Curve' identification field that allows you to keep
track of which well you are processing through the 'Capillary Pressure Set-up and
Corrections' module. Click in the well row to set up the right-hand table with the core plug
data for that well.
'Plot Raw' column - 'tick-box' entry field that flags that you want to view the 'Raw' input Pc vs.
input Pc Saturation curves for a particular well or wells.
'Plot Correction' column - 'Tick-box' entry field that flags that you want to view the
'Corrected' output 'PcCorr' vs. 'SwPcCorr' curves for a particular well or wells. 'Corrected'
curves can be viewed after you have set up and run all the curve unit conversions and
executed the curve stress / clay / reservoir correction routines found on the 'Correction
Parameters' tab.
'Select All Plugs' column - 'tick-box' entry field that flags that you want to view all plugs for a
particular well. Depending upon the combination of 'checked'boxes in a row in this table,
you can choose to view all raw curves, all corrected curves or all raw curves and all
corrected curves', simultaneously. Putting a 'tick' in this column in a particular row of the
grid, automatically 'ticks' all the individual plug entries in the adjacent table. The selected
plugs are automatically available for use in the 'Capillary Pressure Functions' module.
'No. Plugs Selected' - This column contains the 'count' of 'core plugs that have been
flagged in the right-hand table, by placing 'ticks' in the 'Select Plug' column . The user can
Senergy
1380
view individual Pc versus Saturation curves and decide whether the data is valid, or not, or
to be edited. 'Bad' plugs can be switched 'off' by 'ticking' the 'Plug Bad' column in the righthand table.
Select Individual Plugs for display Table

This table gives you the option to classify individual core plugs in each well in the dataset as '
Good' or 'Bad'. Setting a plug to 'Bad' will exclude it from further calculations. A plug status of '
Good' or 'Part Good' flags a core plug for inclusion in the dataset for further processing in the '
Capillary Pressure Functions' module. Setting a core plug Status to 'Good' or 'Bad' is usually
done after visualizing the Pc versus Sw data for that core plug, using the 'Make Crossplot' tool.
You can manually select the plugs you wish to pass through to the 'Capillary Pressure
Functions' module by 'ticking' the 'Select Plug' column in an individual row in the grid.
Alternatively, click in the 'Select Plug' column header to select all core plugs, or use the 'Select
All Good Plugs - This Curve' button to quickly select all the 'Good' and 'Part Good' core plugs
from the highlighted well for further processing.
The columns in the table are described below:
1381
Senergy
'Colour column' - This colour is the same colour as the plug will be plotted on the crossplot
if the Z axis option is set to 'Well /Curve Set'. This is a visual reference only. To edit the plug
colour use the 'Edit Format' -> 'Select Wells and Curves' option within the the crossplot
module.
'Select Plug' - Place a tick in this column for each core plug you wish to see displayed with
the crossplot tool. 'Click' in the column header to toggle between 'select all plugs' and '
select no plugs', or use the 'Select All Good Plugs - This Curve' button to select curves
to visualize. Those plugs that have the 'Select Plug' column ticked will become part of the
dataset that will be available to the 'Capillary Pressure Functions' module.
'Plug Depth' - This is the core plug depth taken from the input Pc array dataset.
'Plug Type' - This is the capillary pressure measurement 'Method', set using the '
Measurement Type In' parameter on the 'Curves Set-up' tab.
'Plug Phi' - This is picked up from the input core porosity curve.
'Plug Perm' - Picked up from the input core permeability curve.
'Plug Status' - Text field, the text reflects the position of the user-entered 'ticks' in the
adjacent 'Plug Good' or 'Plug Bad' Columns. The text entries are:
'Good',
'Bad' and,
'Part Good' - if a plug has been QC'd using the crossplot tool and some of its Pc /Sw
data points have been edited out, it will have a 'Plug Status' of 'Part Good'.
'Plug Good' / 'Plug Bad' - The 'Plug Good' and 'Plug Bad' columns are 'Flag'-type entry
fields which let the user set the 'Use' status of individual core plugs during the QC process. '
Plug Good' means that all Pc and associated Sw data points for a core plug are valid data
points.
WARNING - clicking in the 'Plug Good' or 'Plug Bad' column header is a quick way to
change the status of all the data points for all plugs in a well, HOWEVER - there are serious
implications for your data should you use this functionality.
Clicking the 'Plug Good' column header will launch the following Warning Message
Senergy
1382
Changing all Plugs to 'Plug Good' status will reset all the plugs that you have QC'd and
possibly edited (by removing spurious data points) to 'Good'. Your data is returned to its unedited state. Any edits you have made are discarded.
If a core plug is labelled as Plug Status = 'Part Good' (meaning that one or more data points
have been edited out), clicking in an individual cell in the 'Plug Good' column launches the
following warning message:
Changing a single plug from 'Part Good' to 'Plug Good' status will reset all the data points
in the core plug that you have edited. Your data is returned to its un-edited state. Any edits
you have made are discarded.
Clicking the 'Plug Bad' column header will launch the following Warning Message
Changing all plugs for a well to 'Plug Bad' status will mean that none of the Pc / Sw data for
that particular well will be available for the next 'curve fitting' step in data processing.
Clicking in an individual cell in the 'Plug Bad' column launches the following warning
message:
Changing a single plug to 'Plug Bad' status will set all the Pc data points for that plug to '
Bad'. This means that none of the Pc / Sw data for that particular plug will be available for
the next 'curve fitting' step in data processing.
1383
Senergy
'Closure Correction' - This is picked up from the input closure curve. The values can be
edited in the table. Changing the values in the table changes the values in the input curve.
'Select All Good Plugs - All Curves' Button - allows the user to quickly set-up all curves in
all wells for visualization in the crossplot interface.
'Select All Good Plugs - This Curve' Button - allows the user to quickly set-up all curves in
the currently-highlighted well for visualization in the crossplot interface and for use in the '
Capillary Pressure Functions' module.
Make Crossplot' - 'Clicking' the 'Make Crossplot' button launches the crossplot tool, with
the Pc datasets you have selected on the 'Data View / Edit' screen loaded into the graphic
interface. See Also: Capillary Pressure Crossplot.
Related Topics
Curves Set Up
Data View / Edit
Typical QC Workflow
11.10.1.1.4 Capillary Pressure Crossplot
The Crossplot display is used to visually quality-check the 'Corrected' (& / or 'Raw') Pc datasets.
You must make your own decisions as to whether each curve is 'Good' or 'Bad'. If for example,
you think a Pc Curve is a 'Double curve', i.e. a 'composite' curve composed of two curves, each
representing one pore network, it should be excluded from your dataset. Obviously invalid Pc
versus Saturation curves should also be discarded. Simply set the 'Plug Bad' flag to 'on' (ticked)
in the 'Data View / Edit' right hand table. Rogue data points within individual Pc curves can be
edited out using the crossplot functionality as described below.
The Crossplot displayed below has been set up using the Well A4 and its' corrected core plug
data. The plotting 'set-up' tables provide you with the flexibility to set up and visualize any
combination of Pc curves on one crossplot. You can set up a crossplot for :
a single raw or corrected Core Plug Pc dataset in one well.
The raw and corrected Pc datasets for a single core plug in one well.
Multiple raw or multiple corrected Pc datasets for one well
The same flexibility is available for multi-well displays.
Senergy
1384
To set up a Pc pressure versus Pc Saturation crossplot

'Click' on a 'Curve Identification' cell in the 'Select Pc Curves for Display' table, the cell
background changes to a green colour. The 'Select individual Plugs for display' table
refreshes to show all the plug entries in that well /curve.
'Click' in the 'Plot Correction' cell for that row.
'Click' the 'Select All Good Plugs - This Curve' button. A tick appears in the 'Select Plug'
column in the right-hand table. Note the Well Number is displayed in the title of the right-hand
table, after the colon (:). Initially, all core plugs are flagged as 'Plug Good', with a tick in the '
Plug Good' column of the 'Select individual Plugs for display' set-up table.
'Clicking' the 'Make Crossplot' button displays the following menu which allows different
crossplot templates to be selected. For QC'ing plug data the 'Pc V Sw. Z axis Use flag'
crossplot must be selected. The Phi and Perm crossplots cannot be used for QC'ing the plugs
interactively. The reason for this is that these crossplots don't know about the PcUse curves and
hence can't change their values.
1385
Senergy
The height plots allow the Pc curve to be displayed as height against the Sw curve and thus give
a better indication as to which part of the curve is applicable to the reservoir.
If the 'Pc v Sw. Z axis Use flag' crossplot is selected then the following crossplot is displayed.
The initial view displays the Pc versus Pc Saturation curves for all the plugs for all the wells
selected in the 'Curves Set-up' tab. The plugs corresponding to well A4 (database well 8) have
to be selected and the 'Z Axes' 'Well / Curve Set' ticked.
We can see that there are a number of curves with suspect data points. These plugs can be
Senergy
1386
removed by either;
Flagging the entire plug in the 'Plug Bad' column in the 'DataView / Edit' screen, which
removes all the data points in the Pc curve from further analysis. Then re-launch the
crossplot with the 'excluded' plugs not displayed, or
Alternatively we can 'clean up' the obvious incorrect data points in each Pc curve using the
crossplot editing menu.
We may have to expand the crossplot scales to see all the data points in the graphic interface,
as shown below. The editing sequence is shown in the next screen capture.
1387
Senergy
Senergy
1388
NOTE: if multiple points are on top of each other then the 'Remove / Restore data point' will
only change the top point. Hence, it is best when QC'ing Pc curves to work on one Pc curve at a
time.
The Graphical window 'Z Axes' button can be used to 'toggle' the crossplot view of the core
plugs. By setting 'Z Axes' to 'Curve' you will see the data points drawn in colours to represent
either 'Good' or 'Bad' status (see below left). By setting 'Z Axes' to 'Well / Curve Set' you will see
each Pc curve in a separate colour (see below right):
All 'Bad' Pc points have a 'zero' value written into the output 'PcUse' Flag curve. The 'PcUse'
curve is an array curve of the same dimensions as the input Pc and Pc Saturation arrays. Valid
Pc / Pc Saturation data have a 'PcUse' Flag value of 'one'.
1389
Senergy
The Crossplot module has been changed to allow sets of discriminators to be assigned to
different Pc curves. This now allows multiple 'PcUse' flag curves to be created in different output
curve sets.
Senergy
1390
Related Topics
Curves Set Up
Data View / Edit
Typical QC Workflow
11.10.1.1.5 Typical QC Workflow
1. Load Pc and Pc Saturation data from external spreadsheet / array curves. Import Core
Porosity & Permeability curves and a 'Measurement Method' Flag, if such data is available.
2. Open the 'Curves Set-up' tab and select each well and its Capillary Pressure (Pc) and Pc
Saturation (PcSw) curves, setting the input curve units to the correct values.
3. Type in a 'Well identifier' in the 'Curve Identification' column for each well that has been
set up.
4. Ensure that the 'Pc Sat Type In' is set to 'Water Wet' if the input PC Saturation data is
reported as Water saturation, or 'Non Wet' if the raw Pc Saturation data is reported in
terms of the laboratory 'Non-wetting' fluid phase.
5. Select a 'Measurement Type In' from the drop-down list or, if a 'Measurement Method'
flag curve has been loaded into IP, select the Flag curve from the drop-down list.
1391
Senergy
6. Select the Core Porosity and Core Permeability curves and their associated curve units.
7. Select the Output Results Curve Set from the 'Output Results Set' list-box at the bottom of
the window.
8. Select the Output corrected Pc curve, 'Pc Corr', units.
9. Select the Output corrected Pc Saturation curve, 'SwPcCorr', units.
10.Crossplot Raw Pc curves.
11.Determine 'Closure Correction'.
12.On the 'Correction Parameters' tab:
If 'Measurement Type In' was set to a Flag curve name, type in the curve values
corresponding to the Measurement type - 'Mercury Injection', 'Centrifuge' &/or 'Porous Plate'
techniques.
13.Set up the 'Reservoir and Laboratory Fluid /Rock Properties' table. Ensure that you are
happy with the Laboratory and Reservoir values for the fluid and rock system 'Contact
Angle' and 'Interfacial Tension' parameters.
14.Set up the lower, 'Corrections to Pc Curves' table if you want to apply Stress corrections
or Clay-bound-water corrections to the raw Pc and Pc Saturation data.
15.'Tick' the rows in the 'Convert to Reservoir' column that you wish to apply the 'Contact
Angle' / 'Interfacial Tension' (laboratory to reservoir) conversions to. Leave this column
blank if you simply wish to convert input Pc Pressure curves from multiple wells to a
consistent output curve unit (psi, Kg/m2/Mpa/Bar) or to convert Pc Saturation values from
'%' to 'decimal'.
16.'Tick' the 'Stress Correct' rows and enter a 'PhiRes/PhiLab Factor' for the wells that
require stress correction applying.
17.'Tick' the 'Clay Correct' rows and enter a 'Salinity' and 'Qv Curve in' curve name for the
wells that require clay-bound-water correction applying.
18.'Tick' the 'Closure Correct' rows for wells that require closure correction.
19.'Click' the 'Run Corrections' button.
20.On the 'Data View/ Edit' Tab:
'Click in a 'Curve Identification' row in the left-hand table. The 'Curve Identification'
Name will be highlighted in green. The right-hand table will refresh with a list of core plugs
available in that well.
21.If you have clicked the 'Run' button, to perform Pc Pressure and Pc Saturation corrections,
'tick' the 'Plot Correction' cell (in the 'Select Pc Curves for Display' table) for the
highlighted row. This will set up the crossplot to only display the corrected Pc and Pc
Saturation data.
Senergy
1392
22.'Click' the 'Select All Good Plugs -This Curve' button. This will set all the core plugs for
display in the crossplot.
23.'Click' the 'Make Crossplot' button and Select the required Pc vs Sw Curve from the
Drop Down Menu at the bottom of the screen to launch a crossplot which will display all the
core plugs for your selected well.
24.Right Click the Crossplot and use the Select Points Function to QC individual Pc vs PcSw
curves, flagging 'Bad' curves and editing invalid points from individual curves.
25.Save all your set-up parameters by 'clicking' the 'Save' button.
26.Important - Under the 'File' menu, use the 'Save all Wells to Database' or 'Save Current
Well to Database as..' options to save all your output curves.
Related Topics
Curves Set Up
Data View / Edit
Typical QC Workflow
11.10.1.2 Capillary Pressure Functions
The computations built into the 'Capillary Pressure Functions' module are used to find a curve
fitting function or a set of curve fitting functions which can be used to represent the Qc'd and
corrected capillary pressure (Pc) dataset from the 'Capillary Pressure Set-up' module. There
are two basic methods of doing this :
1. 'One Equation for all Pc curves' option - Find a single equation which fits all (or a subset) of
the data, or
2. 'Separate equation for each Pc curve' option - Fit curves through each individual Pc curve,
then combine the fitting parameters into a 'Combined equation'.
When 'One Equation for all Pc curves' is selected, the user can create 'Leverett 'J' function'
curves for all, or selected groups of Pc curves by setting up 'Models' and 'Discriminator' logic.
Different 'Models' can be created which represent different Pc functions. A 'Model' may
represent a particular function equation (eg Leverett-J Function) or may represent the application
of different 'Discriminators' used to create the function. For example, a standard scenario would
be to create separate models that can be applied over different porosity ranges. i.e. a model that
1393
Senergy
works in the 10-15% porosity range, a second model for the 15-20% porosity range and a third
for the 20-25% porosity range. To speed up the selection of a model there is a 'Regression
Function Comparator' which will run through all of the models and give a rating for each. The
user can then select the one that suits.
An alternative approach is to use the 'Separate equation for each Pc curve' option. When this
option is selected, the user can run one of three non-linear regression equations on all, or
selected Pc curves, by setting up 'Models' and 'Discriminator' logic. The curve fit coefficients
for each individual Pc curve can then be combined into a 'Combined Equation' which describes
the best fit line for those Pc curves.
The 'Capillary Pressure Functions' module takes, as inputs, the wells and Pc curves ('PcCorr
', 'SwPcCorr', 'PcUse') that are created in the 'Capillary Pressure Set-up' module. Each core
plug that was flagged as 'Plug Status' 'Good' or 'Part Good' and has the 'Select Plug' column '
ticked' in the 'Individual Plugs for Display' table on the 'Data View / Edit' tab is loaded into this
module. Therefore, to be able to modify the number of core plugs being used as inputs to this
module, the 'Capillary Pressure Set-Up' module should be kept open. Each Model can have a
different set of plugs. The Model being used is displayed in the 'Capillary Pressure Set-up and
Corrections' window.
This module creates 'Curve Fitting Model' functions. These functions are then applied, using
the 'Saturation versus Height Curves' module.
NOTE: it is no longer possible to select an 'Output Set' in the 'Capillary Pressure Functions'
module. The output curve from this module will be placed in the Set selected in the 'Curves Setup' tab of the 'Capillary Pressure Set-Up & Corrections' module. The output curve will
automatically have a 1.2.3....etc appended to its name as it is stored in the defined Set. The user
does not have to do anything to the output name or output Set within this module.
The 'Capillary Pressure Functions' module is set up on two 'tabbed' screens. These are; '
Equations', and 'Discriminators'
Different Pc 'Models' can be set up using the control buttons and 'scroll arrows' at the top of the
module interface. The menu bar is illustrated below:
Senergy
1394
'Model' - The 'Model' number in the top left-hand corner of the screen is incremented if more
than one Pc curve fitting model is defined by the user. The 'left' and 'right' arrows allow the
user to scroll through the Pc curve fitting models defined for the current dataset. For example,
one could set up different models to reflect different porosity or permeability classes.
'Name' - the model 'Name' can be manually typed into the text entry box to allow the user to
discriminate between Pc curve fitting models.
'Type' - the model 'Type' determines how the capillary pressure curves will be used to build a
curve fitting model. The options are:
'One Equation for all Pc curves'
'Separate equation for each Pc curve'
Depending upon the users choice of 'Type', the 'Equations' tab will toggle between two distinctly
different views. These two views are described below.
'New Model' - This button creates a new Pc curve fitting Model. The user is offered the
choice of copying the current model or of opening a new, 'blank' model. 'Clicking' the 'New
Model' button opens the following message:
NOTE: Copying an existing model can be a quick way of setting up multiple models using the
same curve fitting routines, but allows you to set up different 'Discriminator' logic for each new
model, for example by applying different porosity or permeability ranges or different facies
classes.
'Delete Model' - This button deletes the currently-displayed Pc Curve fitting model. Clicking
the 'Delete Model' button will launch a message similar to the following message:
1395
Senergy
Click 'Yes' to confirm the delete operation, Click 'No' to cancel the operation.
Related Topics
Capillary Pressure
Log Curves
11.10.1.2.1 One Equation for all Pc Curves
When the 'One Equation for all Pc curves' option is selected, the 'Equations' tab looks similar to
the screen capture shown below.
Senergy
1396
To apply the 'One Equation for all Pc curves' curve fitting 'Type' :
1. Select a 'Method' from the drop-down list box. The options are:
a. 'Leverett J Function'
b. 'Leverett J Function, porosity modifier'
c. 'Porosity & Height Function 1'
d. 'Porosity & Height function 2'
e. 'Porosity & Height function 3'
f. 'Porosity and Pc Lambda function'
g. 'Thomeer function'
'Leverett J Function' - If this option is selected, the program will compute the Leverett 'J'
function for all the Pc curves in the dataset, depending upon the 'Discriminator' logic set up by
the user. The Leverett 'J' function allows Pc data to be normalized to take into account
changes in permeability ('K' - the input Core Permeability curve) and Porosity (' ' - the input
core porosity curve). The following screen display is opened:
1397
Senergy
The screen displays the equation of the 'Leverett J Function':

J = 0.2166 * Pc / (
* COS
Where:
J = dimensionless capillary pressure (Pc) function.
Pc = the input, corrected capillary pressure ('PcCorr' curve), psi (input curve is converted
to psi).
= Interfacial Tension (Gas/water or Oil/water system), dynes/cm.
= Contact Angle (Gas/water or Oil/water system), degrees.
K = Core Plug Permeability, mD. This curve is selected in the 'Capillary Pressure SetUp' module, 'Curves Set-Up' tab).
= Core Plug Porosity, fractional. This curve is selected in the 'Capillary Pressure SetUp' module, 'Curves Set-Up' tab).
You must enter 'Interfacial Tension' (
and 'Contact Angle' (
values. Default settings for (
gas / water) or (oil / water) can be set up by 'clicking' one of the two buttons; 'Set Gas / Water'
or 'Set Oil / Water'. The text-box entries are user-editable if you want to input different values for
these parameters.
The curve fitting 'Regression Equation', used to fit the 'J' function curves, is selected from a
drop-down list. Three non-linear regression methods are available. They are:
Senergy
1398
'Lambda' - Lambda is a capillary pressure-specific curve fitting function, where Sw = a * J^

(- ) + b
'Hyperbola' - A hyperbolic curve fitting function, where Sw = a / (J-b) + c.
'Exponential' - an exponential curve fitting function, where Sw = a * e^(b*J) + c.
Where
'a', 'b', ' ' and 'c' are fitting constants in the respective equations
If the 'Weight Regression' box is ticked on then the points that go into the regression are
weighted by the reciprocal of the Sw value. The Sw value will be in decimal units and the
maximum weighting factor will be 10. Therefore an Sw of 1.0 will have a weight of 1 and an Sw of
0.1 will have a weight of 10. The overall effect of this is to weight the regression towards low Sw
values.
'J' output curve name' - The 'Leverett J function' curve is output for each well/core plug in
the dataset. The 'default' name is 'Lev_J'. NOTE: it is no longer possible to attach a Set
name to the output curve name. The output curves will be automatically output to the
same Set as the Pc corrected curves. In addition a 1, 2, 3..... is appended by default at
the end of the curve name. This ensures that each curve is unique and plugs at the same
depth won't overwrite. Hence, if the output Pc curve for the second Pc curve group is called
PCcore:PcCorr2 then the output regression curve will be called PCcore:SwCpReg2. The
same restrictions apply to the output curves from the 'Separate equation for each Pc
curve' type models.
'Leverett J Function, porosity modifier'- This method uses the cementation exponent 'm'
to incorporate a 'tortuosity' factor into the equation, which can reduce scatter in the
corrected Pc data. This could be used where the permeability range of the core plugs is
large. If this option is selected the following screen display is opened:
The screen displays the equation of the 'Leverett J Function, porosity modifier' which is .
J = 0.2166 * Pc / (
* COS
^m
where:
J = dimensionless capillary pressure (Pc) function.
Pc = the input, corrected capillary pressure, psi (input curve is converted to psi).
1399
Senergy
= Interfacial Tension (Gas/water or Oil/water system), dynes/cm.

= Contact Angle (Gas/water or Oil/water system), degrees.
K = Core Plug Permeability, mD.
= Core Plug Porosity, fractional.
m = cementation exponent.
The user needs to input 'Interfacial Tension' (
, 'Contact Angle' (
and Porosity modifier ('m
') values. Default settings for Contact Angle and Interfacial Tension (gas / water) or (oil / water)
can be set up by 'clicking' either of the two buttons 'Set Gas / Water' or 'Set Oil / Water'. The
text-box entries are user-editable if you have different values for these parameters. The 'default' '
m' value is set at a value of 2.8.
The curve fitting 'Regression Equation' used to fit the 'Leverett J function, porosity modifier'
data is selected from a drop-down list. Three non-linear regression methods are available.
These are:
'Lambda' - Lambda is a capillary pressure-specific curve fitting function, where Sw = a * J^
(- ) + b
'Hyperbola' - An hyperbolic curve fitting function, where Sw = a / (J-b) + c.
'Exponential' - an exponential curve fitting function, where Sw = a * e^(b*J) + c.
Where
'a', 'b', ' ' and 'c' are fitting constants in the respective equations
Both 'Hyperbola' and 'Exponential' regression fits are better suited to use in poor quality rock,
because they are not very good at representing sharp transition zones seen in high porosity /
permeability reservoir.
If the 'Weight Regression' box is ticked on then the points that go into the regression are
weighted by the reciprocal of the Sw value. The Sw value will be in decimal units and the
maximum weighting factor will be 10. Therefore an Sw of 1.0 will have a weight of 1 and an Sw of
0.1 will have a weight of 10. The overall effect of this is to weight the regression towards low Sw
values.
''J' output curve name' - The 'Leverett J function, porosity modifier' output curve is
saved for every well/plug in the analysis dataset. The 'default' curve name is 'Lev_J'.
Three additional non-linear 'Porosity / Height' functions, relating wetting-phase saturation to
Capillary Pressure can be selected from the 'Method' drop-down list. These methods are
suitable for poor quality (low porosity & permeability) reservoir rocks which have significant
transition zones :
'Porosity & Height Function 1' - If this option is selected the following screen display is
Senergy
1400
opened:
'Porosity & Height function 2'- If this option is selected the following screen display is opened:
'Porosity & Height function 3'- If this option is selected the following screen display is opened:
'Porosity & Pc Lambda Function' - if this option is selected the following screen display is
opened:
The units of the Pc variable in the equations will be the units of the 'output Pc curve' set-up in the
'Capillary Pressure Set-Up and Corrections' module. The porosity variable ( ) units will
always be decimals.
'a', 'b', ' ' and 'c' are fitting constants in the respective equations.
'Thomeer Function' - if this option is selected the following screen display is opened:
The screen displays the equation of the 'Thomeer Fuction' which is .

Sw = 1.0 - (BVnw
/ ) e^( -G / Log10(Pc/Pd) )
where:
Pc = the input, corrected capillary pressure, psi (input curve is converted to psi).
BVnw8 = Fitted constant, represents the bulk volume of the non wetting phase fluid at
infinite PC pressure.
= Input porosity
1401
Senergy
G = Fitted constant, defines the curve shape.

Pd = Fitted constant, defines the displacement pressure (PC pressure needed to start
reducing saturations).
When analyzing the results of applying one of these four functions, using the crossplot tool, no
Regression line function is created.
2. After selecting a 'Curve Fitting Method', click the 'Run Regression' button which is
located above the grid which occupies the bottom half of the interface. The 'Regression
Results' table in the lower part of the window will be populated with data.
Regression Function Comparator

The 'Regression Comparison' button is only visible when the 'One Equation for all Pc curve'
curve fitting type is selected. When 'clicked' a regression is performed for all models and a
comparison of the results is shown in a separate window, sorted with the best R2 at the top. The
user can select any result and then click 'Use Selected' and the main form will update with this
model. This allows the user to quickly review all models to find the best fitting one.
The 'Regression Results' Panel

When the 'Run Regression' button is clicked, the grid panel in the lower part of the 'Equations'
tab display will update to display the 'Best Fit' (Result) regression line equation and other
statistics and coefficients associated with the regression equation solution. The tabulated entries
depend upon the Curve 'Method' and 'Regression Equation' selected. The following screen
Senergy
1402
capture illustrates the 'Equations' tab display after setting up a 'Leverett J, porosity modifier'
Function, and 'Lambda' curve fitting regression equation:
The data rows in the table are described below:

'Result Equation' - the regression 'best fit' equation is illustrated in the top row of the grid.
This equation can be 'copied' from the table, using right-mouse-button functionality, into the
WINDOWS clipboard so that it can be pasted into the IP 'User Formula' calculation module
or into an external document. The equation cannot be edited directly in this row of the table.
However, individual coefficients can be edited in their respective data rows.
'R2 Regression Coeff.' - The R2 correlation coefficient for this line fit is shown in row 2 of
the grid.
'Num of Pc Crvs used' - this is a 'count' of the number of input Pc curves meeting the
'Discriminator' cutoffs. 'Discriminators are set on the 'Discriminators' tab and by default the
'PcUse' Flag from the 'Capillary Pressure Set-up and Corrections' module is included in
order to discriminate 'Good' from 'Bad' data points.
'Num of Points used' this is a 'count' of the number of valid data points in the Pc Curves,
1403
Senergy
used in the regression.

'Coefficient' rows - depending upon the curve fitting 'Regression Equation' selected, there
will be one row in the table for each coefficient in the regression equation. In the example
shown above there are entries for 'a', ' ',and 'b' coefficients. The coefficient entries are
user-editable fields. If you edit a coefficient entry, the corresponding entry in the 'Result
Equation' line will be updated. To reset an edited coefficient to its original value, either;
manually type in the original value and click the 'Output Regression Sw Curves' button, or
'clear' the coefficient entry value and 'click' the 'Run Regression' button again.
'Clicking' the 'Output Regression Sw Curves' button at the bottom of the screen will then apply
the regression equation to the input Pc or 'J' function data and will compute the 'Water Saturation
from Pc Regression' (SwPcReg) curve for each core plug. If in the 'Capillary Pressure Set-up
and Corrections' module the 'Output Sets same as PC curve Input sets' box has been
'checked' then the output curve SwPcReg will be automatically output to the Set that the input Pc
curves are in. Plus a 1,2,3....will be appended to the curve name for each time the module is run,
so the user will see SwPcReg1, SwPcReg2 etc curves. in the Set that contains the input
capillary pressure curves. This removes the old problem of over-writing the output curve every
time the module was run.
The 'Crossplot Results' button, launches a number of QC plots. The options are described
below, in the 'Output and Visualization' section.
Output and Visualization Buttons

Output regression curves and data visualization is performed using the buttons at the bottom of
the 'Equations' window
'Output Regression Sw Curves' button - 'clicking' the 'Output Regression Sw Curves'

button creates a 'Water Saturation from Pc Regression' curve ('SwPcReg') for each Core
Plug in the active dataset. The default output curve name is shown in the text-entry box next
to the 'Sw Regression Results Curve Name' label. The text box curve name is usereditable, should you wish to change the name. The default output Curve Set is the Set that
was created / selected as the output curve Set for the corrected curves from the 'Capillary
Pressure Set-up and Corrections' module. If the user wants to place the Sw Regression
result curve into a different Set than the output Set defined in the 'Capillary Pressure Set-
Senergy
1404
up and Corrections' module then use the 'Output Set' button to select the Set from the
drop-down list. If the user then chooses another model the 'Output Set' will have to be
defined again.
'Crossplot Results' button - clicking the 'Crossplots Results' button opens a drop-down
menu containing 3 options. These are:
'Sw measured / Sw regression comparison'
'Individual Pc curve comparison'
'Input Pc curves with Regression line'
Examples of the crossplot types are given below:
'Sw measured /Sw regression comparison'

This display illustrates the effectiveness of the curve fitting computations. Plotting input corrected
water saturation curves (SwPcCorr) versus water saturation from a regression fit (SwPcReg)
gives a visual indication of how well the regression equation fits to the input data.
1405
Senergy
'Individual Pc curves comparison'

This display illustrates, for each core plug, the input, corrected Water Saturation (SwPcCorr)
curve and its corresponding 'J' function regression curve, (Lev_J). The crossplot should only
be used to compare a single core plug and its 'J' function regression equivalent.
Displaying all the wells / curves is meaningless in this plot.
In the well list, to the right-hand side of the crossplot display, wells are listed in the following order
:
'(1) Well 1 Plug 1'
'(1) Well 1 Plug 1 Reg' (regression)
'(1) Well 1 Plug 2'
'(1) Well 1 Plug 2 Reg' (regression)
etc...
Senergy
1406
'Input Pc curves with Regression line'

This display allows you to view the input saturation (SwPcCorr) versus 'J' function (Lev_J) for
all the selected core plugs in one crossplot, together with the 'Single Fitting Curve' that has
been computed from these data. In the screen capture shown below the 'Lambda' regression
line solution is shown as a green dashed line and the associated Regression equation is shown
on the crossplot as a 'User Line'.
Related Topics
One Equation for all Pc Curves
Separate Equation for each Pc Curve
Discriminators
1407
Senergy
11.10.1.2.2 Separate Equation for each Pc Curve
This Model 'Type', as shown below, will take all the corrected Pc versus saturation input data from
the 'Capillary Pressure Set-up and Corrections' module and will allow the user to fit curves
through each individual Pc curve, then combine the fitting parameters into a 'Combined Equation'
iteratively running regression calculations on each individual curve fit calculation.
The 'Equations' tab, when 'Separate equation for each Pc curve' is selected looks similar to
the following screen capture.
Senergy
1408
You should :
1. Select a 'Regression Equation' from the drop-down list at the top of the window which will be
applied to the Pc data for each 'Good' or 'Part Good' core plug. Three non-linear regression
methods are available. These are:
'Lambda' - Lambda is a capillary pressure-specific curve fitting function, where Sw = a *
Pc^(- ) + b
'Hyperbola' - An hyperbolic Pc curve fitting function, where Sw = a / (Pc-b) + c.
'Exponential' - an exponential Pc curve fitting function, where Sw = a * e^(b * Pc) + c.
'Thomeer' - The Thomeer equation models Bulk volume fluid against capillary pressure,
1409
Senergy
where Sw = 1.0 - (BVnw / ) e^( -G / Log10(Pc/Pd) ).

Where
BVnw8 = Fitted constant, represents the bulk volume of the non wetting phase fluid at
infinite PC pressure.
= Input porosity
G = Fitted constant, defines the curve shape.

Pd = Fitted constant, defines the displacement pressure (PC pressure needed to start
reducing saturations).
The units of the Pc variable in the equation will be the units of the output Pc curve set-up in the '
Capillary Pressure Set-Up and Corrections' module.
2. Set up any 'Discriminators' you wish to apply, on the 'Discriminators' tab, for example, to
select data from within a certain porosity range.
3. 'Tick' the 'Weight Regression' box to weight the points by the reciprocal of the Sw value if a
weighting is required.
4. 'Click' the 'Run Regression' button at the top of the screen. Underneath the 'Run
Regression' button, the number of Pc curves found is presented. If Discriminator logic is
turned on, this number will be updated to reflect the number of 'Good' and 'Part Good' plugs
detected in the current dataset that meet the discriminator logic cut-offs. The two on-screen
tables are populated with the results of the regression run.
The upper, 'Individual Equations Statistics' table provides a listing of each individual core
plugs Pc curve fitting coefficients, the R2 correlation coefficient and the number of data points
used in each regression. The equation coefficients change, depending upon the 'Regression
Equation' selected, when the 'Run Regression' button is clicked. The 'Use' column for a plug
can be 'un-checked' if the user wants to remove the regression results from the 'Combined
Equation Statistics' results. The vertical scrollbar on the right hand side of the table allows
you to analyze the list of individual plug statistics.
The 'Combined Equation Statistics' table, in the lower part of the window, contains the
combined statistics for each regression equation coefficient, from all the selected core
Senergy
1410
plugs.
The data rows in the 'Combined Equation Statistics' table are described below:
'Average Value' - reports the average value, for each coefficient, of all the individual core
plug curve fit regressions.
'Median Value' - reports the Median value, for each coefficient, of all the individual core plug
curve fit regressions.
'Min / Max Values' - reports the minimum and maximum values found in the individual core
plug curve fit regressions for each coefficient.
'Standard Deviation' - reports the Standard Deviation of the individual core plug curve fit
regressions for each coefficient.
'Correlation Curve (X)' - Drop-down curve selection list. Choose a curve name to correlate
a coefficient against.
'Correlation Type' - Drop-down list box. Select a correlation 'Type' from the drop-down list.
The options are:
'y = Av. Value'
'y = Median Value'
'y = f(x)'
'x = f(y)'
'RMA'
'2nd Order Poly'
'3rd Order Poly'
These are described more fully, below:
1411
Senergy
'y = Av. value' - This is the 'default' setting when the module is first opened. The coefficient
values in the 'Combined Equation' text box correspond to the 'a', 'b' and ' ' or 'c' coefficient
'Average Value' (first row in the table) from the 'Combined Equation' statistics table, as
illustrated below:
'y = Median value' - select this option to return the 'Median Value' (second row in the table)
for each coefficient from the 'Combined Equation' statistics table.
Correlation 'Types' can also be equations. The options are:

'y = f(x)' - linear regression where 'Coefficient' (Y) is a function of the selected 'Correlation
Curve' (X). The squared Y-error distances are minimised.
'x = f(y)' - linear regression where 'Correlation Curve' (X) is a function of the selected
'Coefficient' (Y). The squared X-errors are minimised.
'RMA' - The 'RMA' (reduced major axis) line-fit gives an equation that is midway between
the above methods.
'2nd Order Poly' - Second Order Polynomial regression equation.
'3rd Order Poly' - Third Order Polynomial regression equation.
In the case, where one of the five 'Correlation Type 'equations' is selected, then you should
follow the workflow steps listed below.
1. Select the 'Correlation Curve (X)' curve by clicking in the ''a' Coeff' column, in the '
Correlation Curve (X)' cell and choose a curve from the curve drop-down list.
Senergy
1412
2. Select the 'Correlation Type' in the ''a' Coeff' column - the example illustrated below uses '
RMA' for the 'a' Coefficient versus Core Porosity ('RawC: Phi') regression.
3. If you want to set either the 'X' or 'Y' curve as a logarithmic curve, 'tick' the 'Log (X)' and / or
'Log (Y)' tick boxes.
4. Click the 'Run' button in the ''a' Coeff' column - the regression R2 value and equation
coefficients are listed underneath the 'View' button. The 'Combined Equation' text box is
updated to reflect the new calculation 'Type' and coefficients. So, in the example illustrated
below, the equation 'a' and 'b' coefficients, for the relationship between Core Porosity (RawC:
Phi) and ''a' Coeff' are included into the 'Combined Equation' window.
The relationship between the Correlation Type (X) and coefficient (Y) can be visualized by
clicking the 'View' button in the appropriate 'coefficient' column. A crossplot window is launched
which shows the cross plotted data and includes the regression line fit to the data and its'
equation. An example is shown below:
1413
Senergy
The crossplot display options are described below :

'Copy Graphics to Clipboard' - the graphics can be copied to the WINDOWS clipboard.
'Output to Printer' - the graphics can be output directly to a connected printer.
'Edit Regression Line' - if this is selected the regression line can be moved by grabbing the
ends of the line and moving the line. The new equation is shown at the base of the plot and
also transferred back into the module window.
'Create Area' - this is used to select an area on the plot by clicking on the plot. Each click
will create a new point and which joins to the last created point. The area automatically
closes. Each point can be dragged to a new position. A point can be deleted by placing the
Senergy
1414
cursor on a point and hitting the 'Delete' key.

'Delete Area' - deletes the created area.
'Re-run Regression using Area' - this re-runs the regression using the points within the
created area. The results will be displayed at the base of the plot and also in the 'Combined
Equation' text box within the 'Capillary Pressure Functions' module.
In the example illustrated below, If the 'Correlation Type' is set to '2nd Order poly' function for
the 'a' coefficient and this regression is run, the 'Combined Equation' text box will be updated
such that the second order polynomial best fit regression equation is substituted for the single
coefficient (''a' Coeff') value in the equation, as shown below:
'Combined Equation Statistics' table entries (continued):

'Log(X)' - 'tick' -box flag that, when ticked, takes the Log of the 'X' value before the
regression is run (click the 'Run' button).
'Log(Y)' - 'tick'-box flag that, when ticked, takes the Log of the 'Y' value before the regression
is run (click the 'Run' button).
'Run Regression' - 'Clicking' the 'Run' button in a coefficient column, runs the regression
computation for that particular coefficient.
'View' - 'clicking' the 'View' button in a coefficient column launches a crossplot display of the
'coefficient' versus 'X' curve data. The regression line will also be shown on the crossplot.
'R2 Correlation' - output correlation coefficient statistic for the X (curve) versus Y
(coefficient) regression function.
''a' Coeff' - output regression coefficient for the X (curve) versus Y(coefficient) regression
function.
''b' Coeff' - output regression coefficient for the X (curve) versus Y(coefficient) regression
1415
Senergy
function.
''c' Coeff' - output regression coefficient for the X (curve) versus Y(coefficient) regression
function.
The 'Combined Equation' text box displays the regression equation resulting from
whichever Correlation 'Type' has been selected for the Combined regression dataset.
5. Click the 'Output Regression Sw Curves' button. An 'Sw-from-regression' output curve
('SwCpIndReg') will be calculated for each core plug in the list. In addition a 'Combinedequation-Sw-from-regression' output curve ('SwCpReg') will be computed for each core
plug in the list.
Output and Visualization Buttons

Output regression curves and data visualization is performed using the buttons at the bottom of
the 'Equations' window
'Output Regression Sw Curves' button - 'clicking' the 'Output Regression Sw Curves'

button creates a 'Water-Saturation-from-Regression' curve ('SwCpIndReg') for each
Core Plug in the active dataset that meets the users 'Discriminator Logic' settings for a
particular 'Model'. The default output curve name is shown in the text-entry box next to the '
Individual Curve Sw Regression Results, Curve Name' label. The text box curve name
is user-editable, should you wish to change the name.
If the user wants to output the results curves to a different Set than that defined in the 'Capillary
Pressure Set-up and Corrections' module then use the 'Output Set' button to select a different
Set.
The result curve for the 'Combined equation Sw Regression Results, Curve Name' is
output as curve 'SwCpReg'.
'Crossplot Results' button - clicking the 'Crossplots Results' button opens a drop-down
menu containing 4 options. These are:
Senergy
1416
'Ind. Eqs : Sw mea / Sw Reg comparison'

'Ind Eqs : Pc curves comparison'
'Comb. Eqs : Sw mea /Sw Reg comparison'
'Comb. Eqs : Pc curves comparison'
Examples of the crossplot types are given below:
'Ind. Eqs : Sw mea / Sw Reg comparison' Plot, using a Porosity discriminator, (in this example
porosity must be < 15% - nine plugs are filtered from a larger dataset and are displayed in the
crossplot). The output shows a near-perfect 1:1 regression curve fit for each separate plug, as
we are regressing only one curve at a time.
'Ind Eqs : Pc curves comparison': This plot is used to view each individual plugs' Pc versus Sw
relationship and its' individual regression equation curve fit.
1417
Senergy
'Comb. Eqs : Sw mea /Sw Reg comparison' - This plot illustrates the comparison between the
individual Core plug saturations versus the 'Combined Equation' computed Saturation line fit.
This plot will show much wider data scatter than for the individual curve regressions since it is
using a single 'Combined Equation' to try and fit each individual plugs' Pc versus Sw data.
Senergy
1418
'Comb. Eqs : Pc curves comparison' - Compares each individual core plug Pc versus
saturation relationship against the 'Combined Equation' regression curve fit. The 'Combined
Equation' regression fit has a postscript 'Reg' after the plug depth label.
1419
Senergy
The regression results can be output to a printer, text file or to the clipboard from the dropdown menu visible when the 'Print' button is clicked. The report includes all the regression
results for the individual plugs. Below is a sample from an output report.
Model (1) : Lev J Phi < .15
Individual regression run of each Cap Pressure curve
Regression Type
: Lambda
Regression Equation
: Sw = a.Pc^(-?) + b
Number of Pc curves
:3
Sw Weighted regression used : No

Pc Plug
Use 'a' Coeff '?' Coeff 'b' Coeff 'R2' corr. No. Points
W(8) Depth:4400.19
Yes 0.2885
-1.9828
0.1932
0.998
41
W(8) Depth:4403.23
Yes 0.6839
-2.3015
0.1945
0.995
31
W(8) Depth:4403.39
Yes 0.3272
-1.067
0.1733
0.981
47
'?' Coeff
'b' Coeff
(Y)
'a' Coeff
'R2' corr.
Senergy
Average Value
0.43323
-1.78377
Median Value
0.32724
-1.9828
0.18698
0.19318
0.99119
0.99451
Min Value
0.28852
-2.30148
0.17326
0.98145
Max Value
0.68392
-1.06704
0.19449
0.9976
Std Deviation
0.218
0.6408
Corr. Curve (X)
RawC:Phi
Correlation Type
RMA
0.0119
RawC:Phi
1420
0.0086
RawC:Phi
y = Av. Value y = Av. Value
Log (X)
No
No
No
Log (Y)
No
No
No
'R2' correlation
'a' Coeff
'b' Coeff
'c' Coeff
'd' Coeff
Result equation
Sw = (-999. - 999. * RawC:Phi) * Pc^(-1.78377) + 0.18698
Discriminators
RawC:Phi
<
0.15
<
0.9
and
SwPcCorr
Zones Selected from set : Tops1

RN26
RN23
LS-3 (top 4C)
Related Topics
Discriminators
11.10.1.2.3 Discriminators
The 'Discriminators' tab is used to partition core plug data. Discriminators can be used to 'tune'
the input data for the regression computation, for example using Porosity or Permeability curves, or
a Facies flag to investigate the relationships to these parameters. Different discriminators can be
set up for a number of models and used to generate appropriate Pc curve fitting functions to
represent your core data.
There is now an option to select a generic input curve as a discriminator, for example 'Input
1421
Senergy
PcSw(dec)', since each input Pc curve Set will have a different name, discriminating multiple
input Sets is now impossible. The generic input curve will automatically select the correct input
curve when getting data from each Pc curve group. The units of the generic input curve, in
brackets, show the user the input curve units. These units are setup when the output curves are
setup in the 'Capillary Pressure Set-up and Corrections' module.
Zones can now be used to select the Pc data to be used within Models. If 'Use Zones' is ticked
then only Pc plugs found within the selected zones will be used.
Related Topics
Discriminators
Senergy
1422
11.10.1.3 Saturation Versus Height Curves
The 'Saturation Versus Height Curves' module is used to take the functions that have been
developed in the 'Capillary Pressure Functions' and 'Log Sw Vs. Height Functions' modules
and to apply these functions to multiple wells and multiple reservoir zones. The module can also
be used to calculate an unknown 'Free Water Level' (FWL) in a well, using a function to predict
the 'Most Likely' value.
The user sets up the input wells and curves and then creates 'Hydrocarbon Models' incorporating Free Water Level depths and depth ranges over which to run a set of functions. '
Function Sets' are created in the 'Function Mixing Setup' tab. This allows the user to specify
which function is to be used in which circumstance. An example of this would be the use of
different functions dependent on a certain porosity range or facies coding. Obviously, the '
Functions Mixing' set up should follow closely the discriminators used to create the functions in
the first place, however a considerable degree of flexibility is allowed. Hence it is possible to
create a function using discriminators for porosity > 0.1, for example, but apply the function to all
porosity ranges.
The module has been further enhanced to handle situations of gas over oil reservoirs. To
calculate capillary pressure in the gas leg, for use in a Pc function, it is necessary to know the
gas/oil contact plus the density of the gas and oil.
NOTE:
1. The 'Functions Mixing Setup' relies on a consistent curve naming convention in all selected
wells. So, for example, if a 'Function' discriminator setting uses a curve called 'PHIE', then this
curve must be available in all wells.
2. On the 'Sw Height' tab ('Setup Input / Output curves' sub-tab) 'continuous' porosity /
permeability input log curves, calibrated to core data (where available), are the required 'input'
types. Sparse data Core Porosity and / or Core Permeability curves are not suitable for use in
this module.
The user interface is organized on tabbed screens. These are:
'Sw Height', which has 2 sub-tabs:
SW Height Input / Output Curves
SW Height Hydrocarbon Models
And the
Functions Mixing Setup tab
Related Topics
1423
Senergy
Capillary Pressure
Log Curves
11.10.1.3.1 SW Height Input / Output Curves
The 'Sw Height' - 'Input / Output Curve' tab is illustrated below. This interface is used to set up
the input wells, input porosity, permeability and water saturation log curves and the TVDSS curve
for each well. The outputs from this module are 4 curves;
'Sw Height Curve Out' - Water Saturation as a function of Height above FWL (Sw_Ht).
'Sw Pc Curve Out' - Water Saturation from Pc curves calculated from height above FWL (
Sw_PcHt). This curve will only contain data if Capillary Pressure data has been entered in
the 'Capillary Pressure Set-up and Corrections' module. For each Pc plug found above
the FWL, the calculated capillary pressure for this depth will be used to look up the Sw value
in the Pc curve. The corrected Pc data is used.
'Hght Above Cont Curve Out' - Height above contact (HtAbCont). This is the height, in
units of the well (feet / metres), above the FWL in vertical depth.
'Pc pressure Curve Out' - Pc pressure above contact (PcAbCont). This is the Pc
pressure calculated at each depth level from the vertical depth above the contact using the
hydrocarbon and water densities. This does not include any IFT correction factor.
Senergy
1424
The porosity and water saturation input curves must be in decimal units. The permeability input
curve which is used in the 'J' function and the 'RQI' function should either be in units of
milliDarcies (mD) or SI units of 'm 2'. The units are read from the curve 'Units' attribute and the
input value is converted to 'mD' before being used in the calculations.
Related Topics
Functions Mixing Setup
11.10.1.3.2 SW Height Hydrocarbon Models
The 'Sw Height' - 'Hydrocarbon Models' tab is used to set up the 'Wells', 'Free Water Level',
'calculation depth ranges' for the study wells.
There are a number of control buttons at the top of the 'tab' interface which are there to help the
user to set up different hydrocarbon models, for example, for different reservoir intervals and
1425
Senergy
different hydrocarbon fluid types. The controls are illustrated below:
The user interface is used to set up separate Hydrocarbon models in multiple wells - in order to
accommodate one, or more, field-wide Hydrocarbon contact scenarios. Subsets of wells can be
selectively evaluated, for example, in a fault compartmentalized reservoir where different Free
Water Levels exist in different fault blocks.
'Use' Wells to be used in the current model are selected for use by ticking the box.
'TVD Free Water Level' True Vertical Subsea Depth value must be entered for each
selected well.
'TVD Gas Oil Contact' - True Vertical Subsea Depth of the gas oil contact. This is only
required for calculations using Pc models and for Gas-over-Oil reservoirs, otherwise leave
Senergy
1426
blank.
'MD Calc. Top Depth' Top depth for the output calculated Sw curve. If not entered will be
the top of the well.
'MD Calc. Bot Depth' Bottom depth for the output calculated Sw curve. If not entered will
be the bottom of the well or the FWL, which ever is shallower.
'Hyd Density' Hydrocarbon density. Used for calculating capillary pressure. Not required if
Log Functions are used. Can be entered as a fixed value or as a curve. This allows
compositional hydrocarbon densities to be used. If a curve is entered the capillary pressure
at a level is calculated by calculating the thickness weighted average of the input density
curve from this level to the contact (either FWL or GOC). This allows for high angle wells
where the hole angle may be varying over the interval of calculation.
'Gas Density' - This is the gas density for Gas-over-Oil reservoirs. The oil density is entered
under the 'Hyd Density' column. The column will be 'greyed' out if no GOC has been
entered. Numbers can still be entered in the column but no calculation will be made on
them. Can be entered as a fixed value or as a curve. This allows compositional hydrocarbon
densities to be used.
'Water Density' Water density. Used for calculating capillary pressure. Not required if Log
Functions are used.
'Density Units' Units of the Hydrocarbon and Water density values. Used for calculating
capillary pressure. Not used if Log Functions are used.
'IFT Corr Factor' Interfacial tension correction factor. Used either for converting Pc
Functions fluid type to actual fluid type or for normalizing Pc functions to Log Sw values.
'IFT Gas Corr Fact' - This is the gas IFT for Gas-over-Oil reservoirs. It is used to adjust the
Pc value to account for the differences between the IFT and contact angle used in the
corrected Pc curve data and the actual reservoir IFT and contact angle. The column will be
'greyed' out if no GOC has been entered.
'Function Mixing' Select the function mixing to use for each selected well. These are set
up on the 'Function Mixing Setup' tab.
'Make Plot' Click the 'View' button to create an interactive plot for the well showing the
results of the saturation height curve.
Model Calculations
Click the 'Run All Wells' button to make the calculations for the selected wells for this
hydrocarbon model. This outputs the 'Sw_ht' and 'Sw_PcHt' curves set up on the 'Setup Input /
1427
Senergy
Output Curves' tab.

If the 'Null output Sw Curves' box is 'checked' then the output curves are deleted and reinitialized before the calculations are made. Warning: if you are using multiple hydrocarbon
models, checking this box will delete the results from other models.
Oil Situation
The calculations are made using the functions setup for the function mixing selected. If capillary
pressure functions are used, the Pc value used in the functions is calculated as follows.
Pc = (DenWater DenHyd) x HT x IFTCorrFactor
Where
DenWater = Entered density of the water
DenHyd = Entered density of the hydrocarbons
HT = TVD height above the entered FWL
IFTCorrFactor = Entered IFT correction factor
Output units are the same as the corrected Pc output curves in the 'Capillary Pressure Set-up'
module. These are the units expected by the functions.
Gas over Oil Situation

The Pc value is calculated as follows.
Between the FWL and GOC
Pc = (DenWater - DenHyd) x (FWL - HT) x IFTCorrFactor
Above the GOC
Pc = (DenWater - DenHyd) x (FWL - GOC) x IFTCorrFactor + (DenWater - DenGas) x
(GOC - HT) x IFTCorrFactorGas
Where
DenWater = Entered density of the water
DenHyd = Entered density of the hydrocarbons
FWL = TVD free water level
GOC = TVD gas oil contact
HT = TVD height above the entered FWL
IFTCorrFactor = Entered IFT correction factor
DenGas = Entered density of gas
IFTCorrFactorGas = Entered IFT correction factor for the gas zone
If a Pc function has been developed and is to be used in both the Gas and Oil zones then the '
Senergy
1428
IPTCorrFactorGas' is used to adjust the IFT and contact angle differences between the gas and
oil fluid properties.
For example, if the function was developed for oil with an IFT value of 30 and a contact angle of
30 degrees, then used in gas with an IFT of 50 and a contact angle of 0 degrees. The '
IFTCorrFactorGas' would be equal to 50 x Cos(0.0) / (30 x Cos(30.0) = 1.924
Interactive Log Plot

By clicking the 'View' button under the 'Make Plot' column an interactive plot for the selected well
will be displayed. The plot shows a comparison of the calculated Sw curves against the log Sw
curve. The Pc Sw values curve 'Sw_PcHt' is also displayed as individual points wherever a Pc
value exists.
A Zone Set is automatically created in the well called 'CapPress FWL'. The FWL for the model is
the bottom of the zone. By dragging the bottom of the zone up or down, the Sw model will be
recalculated and the results displayed. If multiple models are used then the Zone Set will have
more than one zone. Each zone will represent a model, for example, for different fluids in
different reservoirs.
In the Sw comparison track (track 4) the 'IFT Corr Factor' is displayed as an interactive line. The
user can drag this line to adjust this parameter. When the value is changed the Sw model is run
and the plot updated. This allows the user to manually set the value to give the best match with
log Sw results.
1429
Senergy
Track 7 displays the pore size distribution curve.

The pore size is given as a radius in microns and the equation for its calculation is shown below:
R = 2* IFT * Cos (CA) /Pc
Where
R = Radius
IFT = Interfacial tension at lab conditions
CA = Contact angle at lab conditions
Pc = Capillary pressure
The report from the module has been enhanced to give the Pc equation for each well and also
the Function model equation. The equations can easily be cut and pasted for use in other
applications.
SATURATION HEIGHT
Hydrocarbon Model : Gas
Well :Exp 4
TVD FWL
: 3128.8
MD Top Depth
Hyd. Density
: 0.2 gm/cc
Water Density
1.14
Functions Mixing : Log Mixing
Pc = (3128.8 - TVDSS) * 1.29659
psi
MD Bot. Depth
: 1. gm/cc
IFT Corr. Factor :
Function Mixing : Log Mixing

Default Function = Log Function : Log Function 1
Model Functions
Pc Function : Lev J Phi > .2
Sw = 0.1174 * (Pc * 3.84900E-2 * (K/)^0.5)^(-0.43881) + 0.28661
Log Function : Log Function 1
Sw = 1.0 / ( (3.59475 + h^0.3406) * ^0.74781 )
Fluid Contact Fitting

If an Sw model has been established for a field this can be used to asses whether a new well
with no clear FWL fits the established field FWL or has a different FWL. This is done by
estimating the depth range within which the FWL sits and then running the Sw model many times
over this depth range to see which set of results best fits the log-calculated water saturation. The
'Search for best contact using log Sw data in selected wells' panel at the bottom of the
window allows the user to do this.
Senergy
1430
The panel works the following way:

1. Select the well or wells for which to run the search.
2. Enter the 'Contact between' depth range over which to run the search.
3. The 'Use Hydrocarbon volumes' button is 'checked' (default) to make the comparison
between model results and log results using porosity-weighted results. If not 'checked', then
the comparisons are made on just the Sw curves.
4. 'Click' the 'Search' button and the following window is launched, which shows the progress
of the comparison and the results of the computation. The 'Cumulative Difference' value is
the sum of the differences of the hydrocarbon volumes (or Sw's) for each depth step above
the current FWL, for all selected wells. The lowest values will be the 'Most Likely' FWL.
5. The 'Best Fit FWL' depth is displayed as a label at the bottom of the panel.
6. 'Click' the 'Use Contact' button to copy this 'Best Fit FWL' depth into the 'TVD Free Water
Level' column of all selected wells and 'click' the 'Run All Wells' button to re-run the model
using this FWL depth.
IFT Fitting
When using capillary pressure curves to create Sw functions for a reservoir, one of the
uncertainties is the IFT value and contact angle for the fluids in the reservoir. Sometimes it is felt
1431
Senergy
that the log interpretation Sw values give better absolute values of water saturation due to these
uncertainties. The 'Search for best IFT correction factor' panel allows the user to find the best
IFT correction factor that makes the Pc functions match the log Sw values.
The panel works the following way:

1. Select the well or wells for which to run the search.
2. Enter the IFT 'Factor Between' range over which to run the search. The range is
logarithmic and the defaults of 0.1 to 5 are normally adequate.
3. The 'Use Hydrocarbon volumes' button is 'checked' (default) to make the comparison
between model results and log results using porosity weighted results. If not 'checked' then
the comparisons are made on just the Sw curves.
4. Click the 'Search' button and the window, shown below, will be displayed to show the
progress and the results of the comparison. The 'Cumulative Difference' value is the sum of
the differences of the hydrocarbon volumes (or Sw's) for each depth step above the current
FWL for all selected wells. The lowest values will be the best match IFT correction factor.
5. The 'Best Fit IFT Correction Factor' is displayed as a label at the bottom of the panel.
6. 'Click' the 'Use' button to copy this factor into the 'IFT Corr. Factor' column for all selected
wells and 'click' the 'Run All Wells' button to re-run the model using this correction factor.
Senergy
1432
Related Topics
11.10.1.3.3 Functions Mixing Setup
The 'Functions Mixing Setup' Tab is used to set up the combination of 'Capillary Pressure'
and / or 'Log Sw Vs. Height' functions that will be applied in the selected wells. The screen has
a number of 'control' buttons and text-entry boxes at the top of the window. These are illustrated
below:
The user sets up the 'Discriminator' grid, illustrated below, along with the selection of the '
Default Function' to choose the functions to be applied to the study wells.
NOTE: It is good practice to give 'Capillary Pressure' functions and 'Log Sw Vs. Height'
functions descriptive 'Function Names' that help you to select them from the drop-down list box.
This helps when you are trying to set up 'Mixing' discriminator logic. An example 'Mixing' setup is shown below:
1433
Senergy
If working with log functions, capillary pressure is not required. The equations only work with
height above contact. The Oil / Gas density and IFT correction factors are not used.
Related Topics
11.10.2 Log Sw Versus Height Functions

The 'Log Sw versus Height Functions' module is used to generate Water saturation (Sw)
versus Height functions from log curve data. This module does not require core data.
Senergy
1434
The user sets up the input data from one or multiple wells on the 'Input Curves' tab. A Free
Water Level (FWL) must be known in each well, from which the 'height above FWL' is calculated
for use in the functions. It is assumed that all wells are in the same depth units, whether this is
'Feet' or Metres'. DO NOT mix wells with imperial (Feet) and metric units (meters) in the same
function, unless the TVDSS input curves which are used as an input have been converted so
they all contain consistent units.
NOTE: This module can only be run after an interpretation to evaluate Porosity and Water
Saturation has been made in each well. If the RQI (Rock Quality Index) functions are to be used,
then a permeability curve will be also be required as an input.
The module allows the user to apply different curve fitting techniques to the log curve data with
the option to apply 'Discriminator' logic, for example, to derive average 'saturation versus height'
functions for different porosity classes. The 'Use' and the 'FWL TVDSS' is now setup and saved
by the model 'Function'. Hence, in a reservoir with multiple stacked reservoirs different functions
can be developed for each reservoir, with the the setup saved by function. To speed up the
selection of a model there is a 'Regression Function Comparator' which will run through all of
the methods and equations and give a rating for each. The user can then select the one that
suits.
The module is organized on 2 'tabbed' screens. These are:
'Input Curves' and
'Functions'.
Related Topics
11.10.2.1 Input Curves
The 'Input Curves' Tab is used to set up the wells and curves to be used in determining the log
Sw versus Height relationships. As noted above, the input Porosity (PHIE), Water Saturation (SW
) and Bulk Volume Water (BVW) curves must have already been computed in all subject wells.
An optional permeability curve, which is used in the 'Rock Quality Index' (RQI) calculation, may
also need to be supplied.
1435
Senergy
A True Vertical Depth 'TVDSS' curve (NOTE: the 'Curve Type' of the TVDSS curve must be set
to depth in the 'Manage Curve Headers' module) and a Free Water Level (FWL) depth value in '
True Vertical Depth', must also be entered into the table.
Click in a blank cell in the 'Well Name' column to open the 'select well' drop-down list. All inmemory wells are listed. Select a well from the list to load it into the interface.
Choose the curves for each well, in the appropriate columns.
Type in an appropriate 'Free Water Level' depth value, in ft / m TVDSS, for each well.
The Sw, Porosity and BVW input curves must be in the units of decimals (this is the standard
output for all IP interpretation modules). The permeability input curve which is used in the 'RQI'
function should either be in the units of 'md' or SI units of 'm 2'. The units are read from the curve '
Units' attribute and the input value is converted to 'md' before being used in the calculations.
Related Topics
Input Curves
Functions
Senergy
1436
11.10.2.2 Functions
'Log Sw versus Height Functions' are managed using the function 'counter' and operations
buttons found at the top of the 'Functions' tab.
'Function' - The 'Function' number in the top left-hand corner of the screen is incremented
if more than one log Sw vs. Height function is defined by the user. The 'left' and 'right'
arrows allow the user to scroll through the log Sw vs. Height functions defined for the current
dataset. For example, one could set up different models to reflect different porosity or
permeability classes.
'Name' - the Log Function 'Name' can be manually typed into the text entry box to allow the
user to visually discriminate between log Sw vs. Height functions.
'New Function' - This button creates a new Log Sw vs. Height function. The user is offered
the choice of copying the properties of the current function or, of opening a new, 'blank'
function. 'Clicking' the 'New Function' button opens the following message:
NOTE: Copying an existing function can be a quick way of setting up multiple functions using the
same fitting routines, but allows you to set up different 'Discriminator' logic for each new function.
For example, you could apply different porosity or permeability ranges or different facies
discriminators for different functions.
'Delete Function' - This button deletes the currently-displayed 'Sw versus Height function
'. Clicking the 'Delete Function' button will launch a message similar to the following
message:
1437
Senergy
Click 'Yes' to confirm the 'delete' operation, Click 'No' to cancel the operation.
The 'Functions' tab is further subdivided onto 2 screens. These are 'Equations' and '
Discriminators'
The 'Equations' Sub-Tab

The 'Equations' sub-tab is used to set up one or more 'Sw versus Height Functions' which
represent the wireline-log-derived 'Water Saturation as a function of height' curve. One function
or a number of functions can be used to describe a set of Sw versus height relationships, using
different equations and discriminator logic.
'FWL TVDSS' - If the free water level is changed on this tab then all the FWL values will be
Senergy
1438
changed on the 'Input Curves' tab. If the user wants to use different FWL's for different wells in
the development of the function then leave the 'FWL TVDSS' box blank on the 'Functions' tab
and enter values on the 'Input Curves' tab.
NOTE: If the same FWL's have been entered for each well on the 'Input Curves' tab then this
value will automatically be shown on the 'Functions' tab.
'Methods' - The 'Method' drop-down list, illustrated in the screen capture shown below,
provides the user with a number of methods of calculating water saturation, based upon the
user-selected Input curves and FWL depths set up in the 'Input Curves' tab.
The available 'Methods' are:

'Sw function of height',
where Sw = f(h)
'BVW function of height',
where BVW = f(h)
'Rock Quality Index',
where Sw = f(RQI.h) & RQI =
'Rock Quality Index, porosity modifier',
where Sw = f(RQI.h) & RQI =
^m)
(where an 'RQI' method is selected, an additional 'RQI' curve is output by the module)
Where:
BVW = Bulk Volume of Water
h
= Height above FWL
RQI
= Rock Quality Index
= Permeability (from logs) in mD

= Porosity (from logs) in decimal format
= cementation exponent
Four additional non-linear 'Porosity versus Height' functions, relating log water saturation to
height-above-FWL can be selected from the 'Method' drop-down list. These are:
'Porosity & Height function 1'
where Sw = 1.0 / [(a +h^b). ^c]
where Sw = 1.0 / [(a +b.h^c)). ^d]
1439
Senergy
where Sw = [a + b.Log(h) + c.Log(h)^2
+ d. Log(h)^3 ] / [ ^f
'Porosity & Height Lambda function'
where Sw = a.h^(b. + c) + d
Where:
a, b, c, d, f are fitting constants.
'Regression Equation' - the 'Regression Equation' drop-down list, illustrated below,
provides the user with a number of options to line-fit the selected 'water-saturation-fromheight' function that the user has selected from the 'Method' list.
The available Regression Equations are:

'Linear'
where Sw = a + b.h
'Linear / Log'
where Sw = a + b.Log(h)
'Log / Linear'
where Log(Sw) = a + b.h
'Log / Log'
where Log(Sw) = a + b.Log(h)
'Lambda'
where Sw = a.(h)^(- ) + c
'Hyperbola'
where Sw = a / (h - b) + c
'Exponential'
where Sw = a.e^(b.h) + c
Where:
h = Height above FWL
a, b, c,
= Fitting constants
Before running the regression it is possible to apply a weight to the non-linear regression
functions by 'ticking' the 'Weight Regression' box. This then weights the points that go into the
regression by the reciprocal of the Sw value. The Sw value will be in decimals and so the
maximum weighting factor will be 10. The effect of this is to weight the regression towards low
Sw values.
Evaluating Log Sw Versus Height above FWL relationships
Senergy
1440
To evaluate different 'Methods' and 'Regression Equations', the user should :

Select options from these two drop-down lists, then
Click the 'Run Regression' button. The 'Result Equation', the 'R2 correlation coefficient
', the 'Number of points used' in the regression and the regression fitting constants
(depending on the regression equation selected) are listed in the tabular display in the
centre of the window. An example is illustrated below:
To see a rating of all available models (there are 32 models) click on the 'Regression
Comparison' button.
Click the 'Output Regression Sw Curves' button. The 'Water Saturation from Log Sw vs.
Height' regression ('SwLogHt') and the Height above FWL curve ('Ht_FWL') are output to
the selected 'Output Results' Set.
Click the 'Crossplot Results' button to launch the QC crossplots:
1441
Senergy
Regression Function Comparator

The 'Regression Comparison' button when 'clicked' performs a regression for all methods and
equations and a comparison of the results is shown in a separate window, sorted with the best
R2 at the top. The user can select any result and then click 'Use Selected' and the main form will
update with this model. This allows the user to quickly review all models to find the best fitting
one.
Senergy
1442
Fitting an 'External' Sw vs. Height' function

An additional option in IP, for the scenario where the user already has a Log Sw vs. height
function from some external source and wants to apply that to the wells in IP, is to:
Select the wells & Plugs / Discriminator logic.
Find an equation of the required form, from the drop-down 'Regression Equation' list.
Manually enter the equation coefficients in the appropriate rows of the table. The 'Result
Equation' row will update.
Click the 'Output Regression Sw Curves' button.
Use the 'Crossplot Results' options to QC the results.
The 'Discriminators' Sub-Tab

The 'Discriminators' sub-tab provides the user with a means to set up and experiment with
discriminator logic. Discriminators can be set, for example to filter data into different porosity or
permeability 'classes' or 'facies' classes. Different Log Sw Vs. Height above FWL functions can
be created using this functionality. Generic versions of the input curves can be selected.
The discriminators can be used to select data over certain depth ranges. This can be done by
typing in the depths. However if a 'Tops' set is available a flag curve can be created from the tops
using the 'Curves from Zones' module. Set the flag values for each zone to group together the
intervals to analyse so that the data intervals can be selected by using the result flag curve in the
discriminators.
1443
Related Topics
Input Curves
Functions
Senergy
Senergy
1444
11.11 Eastern European Resistivity Corrections

The 'Eastern European Resistivity Corrections' Module is a specialist tool developed by the A.
G.H University of Science and Technology, Krakw, and integrated into IP. The module
provides functionality enabling the correction of 'Normal' and 'Lateral' type resistivity curves for
hole size and environmental effects.
The documentation for this module is organised within 2 chapters, 'EERC Interface' and 'EERC
Theory' which provide details on how to use the module and secondly, give some background
to the theory and principles underpinning this module.
Related Topics
Eastern European Resistivity Corrections
EERC Interface
EERC Theory
Section 11.11 Advanced Interpretation : Eastern European Resistivity Corrections
1445
Senergy
11.11.1 EERC Interface

The 'Eastern European Resistivity Corrections' (EERC) Module is accessed from the '
Advanced Interpretation' menu.
The Module is arranged on two 'tabs' allowing corrections to be applied to 'Lateral and Normal
Logs' and 'Multiple Lateral Logs' respectively.
The 'Lateral and Normal Logs' tab contains the largely automated functionality to correct a
combination of Normal and Lateral resistivity curves for borehole and environmental effects,
producing output curves for Rt, Ri, Rxo and a Di (diameter of invasion) curve.
The 'Multiple Lateral Logs' tab provides more sophisticated modelling functionality for use
when only Lateral resistivity curves are available.The user must understand and apply the
criteria for bed boundary definition using Lateral resistivity logs. The principles for utilising this
functionality are discussed further, under 'EERC Theory', Sections 1 and 2 .
Senergy
1446
The 'Lateral and Normal Logs' Tab

This screen allows the user to select and process a combination of Normal and Lateral resistivity
logs taking into account tool configuration, borehole temperature and mud resistivity
characteristics.
'Input Curves' : Requires the selection of a minimum of 3 Lateral and Normal resistivity
curves for processing.
'Tool Length' : this is determined from a consideration of the the tools electrode
configuration as illustrated in EERC Theory, Section 1.2 and Figure 4.
The 'Tool Length' is calculated depending on the type of device. Often in FSU/ Eastern
European logging, the Sonde name provides the required information.
For Lateral devices the Tool length is equal to : AB/2 + AM
For Normal Devices the Tool Length is equal to: AM.
For example :
Sonde Name (Type)
Electrode Spacing
Tool Length
B2.5A0.25M
B - 2.5m - A -
0.25m
(Normal)
0.25m -M
B0.5A2M (Lateral)
B - 0.5m - A - 2.0m
0.5m / 2 + 2.0m = 2.25m
-M
B7.5A0.75M
B - 7.5m - A -
0.75m
(Normal)
0.75m - M
M2A0.25B (Lateral)
M - 2.0m - A -
2.0m + 0.25m / 2 =
0.25m - B
2.125m
NOTE: electrode configuration is often determined by local geology (Clastics or carbonates) and
resistivity conditions.
'Filter Lateral curves' : applies a 'smoothing' factor to the input Lateral curves. If the 'Filter
Lateral curves' box is 'checked', the user should select the number of depth steps to filter
over. The filter value must be a whole, odd number.
'Input Temperature curve or value' : Select the temperature curve for the well, computed
in the 'Calculation' -> 'Temperature Gradient' module, or type in a representative
downhole temperature value to correct the resistivity curves to.
'Input Caliper curve or value' : Select a caliper curve for use in the hole size correction or
type in a hole size value.
'Mud Resistivity' : type in the mud resistivity value for the subject well.
1447
Senergy
'Mud Resistivity Temperature' : type in the temperature measurement at which the mud
resistivity reading was made.
'Hole Size' : 'Hole Size' must be entered in the default units for the caliper log - See Set
Default Units.
'Top / Bottom Depths' : These are the top and bottom depths over which the user wishes
to run the corrections. Leave the boxes blank to apply the environmental corrections to the
entire well. The
button allows the user to specify depth intervals from a 'Zone / Tops
Set' selection window.

'Run' : The 'Run' button will apply the mud resistivity / temperature and hole size
corrections to the Input curves to create the output corrected Rt, Ri and Rxo resistivity and
Di (depth of invasion) curves.
'Result Plot' / 'Make Plot' : The 'Make Plot' button is initially 'greyed out'. It is activated after
the environmental corrections have been 'Run'. The following Log Plot is launched, which
shows a depth track on the left hand side next to a track containing the Correlation Logs
followed by the input curves in one track, the Results curves in the next and the
Diameter of Invasion curve in the final, right hand, track. The Rt curve is also added to
the 'Input Resistivities' track as a dashed line in red.
Senergy
1448
'Correlation Logs' : 2 Additional curves e.g GR and NPHI can be added to the 'Result Plot
'. The two drop-down lists allow the user to choose the curves to display.
'View Normal Curves' : This Plot option activates a series of reference theoretical 'Normal
' curves. See EERC Theory, Section 2.
'View Lateral Curves' : This Plot option activates a series of reference theoretical 'Lateral'
curves. See EERC Theory, Section 3.
If the Normal Curves and Lateral Curves crossplots are activated, the user is able to 'click' at a
depth point in the 'Input Resistivities' track of the 'Result Plot' and points, corresponding to the
number of Normal and Lateral curves selected, will plot on the charts. In the example shown
above, a single point will appear on the 'View Normal Curves' Crossplot reference charts and
two points will appear on the 'View Lateral Curves' Crossplot charts as illustrated below.
'Save' / 'Load' : The 'Save' and 'Load' buttons allow the user to save the borehole / tool
configuration set-up for the environmental corrections to an external (.env) file.
'Zone #' : The left and right arrow buttons allow the user to create new environmental
'Zones' for the environmental corrections. These could correspond to a new hole section
with different bit size, a change of mud chemistry, change of logging tools ...etc. The set-up
for each zone can be individually saved and recalled. NOTE: To update the current
parameters you have to click 'Run'.
'Delete Zone' : The 'Delete Zone' button allows the user to select and delete a zone from the
zone list.
1449
Senergy
The 'Multiple Lateral Logs' Tab

This tab enables the user to set up the processing window for multiple Laterolog environmental
corrections, in order to compute the Rt, Ri, Rxo, resistivity curves and the Di and DiRxo
'diameter of invasion' curves.
The theory relating to the environmental correction of the Lateral curves is described in EERC
Theory, Section 2.
'Input Curves' : Lateral curves 1 - 5. The user selects the Lateral curves from the dropdown list boxes for use in the module. NOTE: a minimum of 4 Lateral curves is required.
'Bed Tops curve' : This is a user-created curve that controls where bed boundaries are
modeled. This is critical for Lateral log processing and if this box is left blank, IP will prompt
for a valid curve name if the user attempts to 'Run' the computation and the 'Interactive
Senergy
1450
Plot' is called up. Bed tops are identified by the user according to the rules described in the
Theory section. See in particular EERC Theory, Sections 1.2 and Section 2.1 for a
discussion of the principles involved in selecting 'Bed Tops'.
The user works interactively on the screen, examining 5 (or 4) Lateral curves and two additional
correlation logs in order to find minima or maxima on the curves. For both extremes the user
should pick a common depth point for all logs, but a small depth misalignment between log
extremes can often be observed and can be accepted. The user then decides the depth at which
they want to put the top of the bed, according to the principles of the theory of Lateral logs and
using their knowledge of the geological environment for the logged formation. In defining tops it
should be remembered that the shortest Lateral log has the most important role, because its
curve has the highest vertical resolution.
When the model is 'Run' and the Interactive Plot is activated, the user can create / edit the Bed
Tops curve on-screen as illustrated below:
'Input Temperature curve or value' : Select the temperature curve for the well, computed
in the 'Calculation' -> 'Temperature Gradient' module or type in a representative
downhole temperature value to correct the resistivity curves to.
'Input Caliper curve or value' : Select a caliper curve for use in the hole size correction or
type in a hole size value.
'Mud Resistivity' : type in the mud resistivity value for the subject well.
'Mud Resistivity Temperature' : type in the temperature measurement at which the mud
resistivity reading was made.
1451
Senergy
'Hole Size' : 'Hole Size' must be entered in the default units for the caliper log - See Set
Default Units.
'Top / Bottom Depths' : These are the top and bottom depths over which the user wishes
to run the corrections. Leave the boxes blank to apply the environmental corrections to the
entire well. The
button allows the user to specify depth intervals from a Zone Set
selection window.
'Run' : The 'Run' button will apply the mud resistivity / temperature and hole size corrections
to the 'Input Curves' to create the output corrected Rt, Ri and Rxo resistivity and Di / Dixo
(depth of invasion) curves.
'Interactive Plot' / 'Make Plot' : This button only becomes active after the 'Run' button has
been executed. The Interactive plot is launched. The plot contains a Correlation track,
Laterals (input curves) track, Result Resistivities track and Diameter of Invasion track. The '
Result Resistivities' track in the log plot contains the 'squared' Rt, Ri are Rxo curves
computed from the input Lateral curves.
'Correlation Logs' : two additional log curves can be added to the 'Interactive Plot' as
correlation curves e.g. GR, Neutron, Sonic.
'Result curves' : The 'Result curves' button is initially 'greyed out'. After the 'Run' button is
'clicked', the button becomes active and the user can view the model results by 'clicking'
the 'Result curves' button. This action will launch a crossplot window which displays the '
Input Curves' average resistivity values (one 'dot' per input curve per bed) superimposed
on the 'Lateral theoretical resistivity curves' charts. If the user moves the mouse cursor
up / down the Laterals track between 'beds' on the Interactive Plot, the chart will
automatically update to show the 'best fit' chart selected for that bed. In a 'thin bed', 4 charts
are displayed - 'clicking' on a small chart launches a larger crossplot.
Senergy
1452
'Lateral curves' : Shortcut to theoretical Lateral curve reference charts (h/d > 32). See
EERC Theory Section 2.2. The charts can be printed directly from the 'print' icon or copied
to a clipboard for pasting into other applications.
'Thin beds curves' : Shortcut to theoretical Lateral 'Thin Beds' curve reference charts (h/d
<= 32) See EERC Theory, Section 2.4 The charts can be printed directly from the 'print'
icon or copied to a clipboard for pasting into other applications.
'Save' / 'Load' : The 'Save' and 'Load' buttons allow the user to save the borehole / tool
configuration set-up for the environmental corrections to an external (.env) file.
'Zone #' : The left and right arrow buttons allow the user to create new 'Zones' for the
environmental corrections. These could correspond to a new hole section with different bit
size, a change of mud chemistry, change of logging tools ...etc. The set-up for each zone
can be individually saved and recalled. By creating and applying environmental zones where
necessary, the user can compute the required Rt, Ri and Rxo curves for an entire well
section.
'Delete Zone' : The 'Delete Zone' button allows the user to select and delete a zone from
the zone list.
Related Topics
EERC Interface
EERC Theory
1453
Senergy
11.11.2 EERC Theory

The following chapter provides a discussion of the theory applying to 'Normal' and 'Lateral'
resistivity log environmental corrections.
1.
Introduction
'Normal' and 'Lateral' logs are the oldest resistivity measurements in well logging and are
strongly influenced by the borehole environment in which the measurements have been
recorded. The simple construction of the logging tools and, in particular, the fact that the electric
current beam is not focussed, are the most important reasons for the application of
environmental corrections.
Recording five Lateral logs, or two Normal and one Lateral, in so-called 'Side-Wall Resistivity
Logging' or 'Simplified Resistivity Logging', has been very popular in Central and Eastern
European countries and in the Soviet Union for many years (Bala et al3 1999). Countless such
logs are stored in archives everywhere and they are a very important source of information. In
recent times and with other data, they provide very important additional information on reservoir
formation parameters.
1.1 A Brief History of Classic Resistivity Logging Theory

In early 1940's Alpin (Alpin2 1964, Dakhnov 6 1967) presented a theoretical solution for the
Poisson equation for the electric field potential in a borehole surrounded by an invaded zone and
a virgin formation, when the source of the electric field is located in the borehole axis. In his
model it is assumed that each of the layers (the borehole, the flushed zone, the invaded zone
and the virgin formation) is cylindrical, coaxial, homogeneous and isotropic, and is infinite in the
z-direction (
, where h represents the bed thickness). Figure 1 presents the basic model
and the full nomenclature. The assumption of infinity allows neglecting the mutual influence
between the electric field in a given bed (point) and an adjacent one, in the interpretation
process.
Senergy
1454
The analytical solution of the field equations is the basis for constructing sets of theoretical
curves for the Normal and the Lateral resistivity logging tools. The equation for the ideal Lateral
device (
MN
or
AB
, see Figure 2 for the idealized tool representation) is shown
here below:
Ra
Rm 1
4 L2
d
mC m (m) sin m
2L
dm
d
(Equation 1)
Where: Ra = apparent resistivity, Rm = mud resistivity, L = device length, and d = borehole

diameter.
C m ( m)
is a function of the resistivity parameters of the formation and the invaded zone, and of
the borehole geometrical parameters, i.e. diameter of the borehole and the invaded zone.
C m ( m)
is expressed in terms of the modified Bessel functions I0, I1 and K0, K1. The integrand is
complicated and oscillating, and to calculate the theoretical curves, the 64-point Gauss
quadrature method has been chosen. The accuracy of the integral calculation is 0.5 per cent (
Abramovitz, Stegun1 1970).
1455
Senergy
The analytical solution is the basis for calculating sets of theoretical curves
Ra / Rm
f ( L / d; R t / R m )
, where Rt represents the true formation resistivity. The family of
theoretical curves calculated for a two-layer formation (only borehole and virgin zone) plays the
main role. It comprises the curves
Ra / Rm
f (L / d )
for various modules
Rt / Rm
, and is
the starting point to any interpretation. The other theoretical curves, calculated for a three-layer
formation (borehole, invaded zone and virgin zone) are grouped in families according to the
constant parameters Ri/Rm and D/d, where Ri and D are the resistivity and the diameter of the
invaded zone respectively. These theoretical curves are the basis of the interpretation, which
consists in the comparison of five measured points (one for each device at the same depth
reference) on each of the curves for each of the individual devices,
theoretical values on the curves
Rt / Rm,Ri / Rm,D / d
Ra / Rm
f (L / d; R t / R m )
Ra / Rm
f (L / d)
to the
and choosing the parameters (
) that give the best-fit curve as a result. Figure 3 illustrates an example
of such an interpretation.
Senergy
1456
The theory is significantly more complicated for a formation consisting of a bed of given
thickness, with adjacent beds above and below it, and intersected by a borehole. The solution for
such cases has been found by Pierkov 9 (1964) using the results of analog modelling. A
numerical solution has been also obtained on the basis of Alpin's 'induced charges' method and
a way of calculating the full set of theoretical curves has been presented (Ossowski8 1990).
Modeled and calculated curves have been collected for many cases of the two-layer formation
(borehole and virgin zone) for a defined bed and surroundings. The theoretical curves
Ra / Rm
f ( L / d; R t / R m )
the formation model: h/d and
are grouped according to the constant parameters characterizing
Rs / Rm
, where: Rs represents the resistivity of the surrounding
beds (shoulder bed resistivity, assumed to be the same from the top and the base of the given
1457
Senergy
bed).
1.2 Normal and Lateral Devices and Their Resistivity Curves

Figures 4a and 4b show the schematic layout of Normal and Lateral logging devices, with
various electrode arrangements. Each device consists of two circuits:
the imposed current circuit, always including electrodes A and B, and
the measuring (potential) circuit with electrodes M and N.
A knowledge of the distance between electrodes is essential in defining whether the tool
measures the potential of the electric field (Normal devices) or the potential gradient
(Lateral devices).
Exchanging the role of electrodes (AB to MN) has no influence on the logging results: the
resistivity curves do not change. The length of the device is determined according to the
sketch in Figure 4. The measurement reference point is also indicated in Figure 4. The radius
of investigation of a device depends on its length and for Normal devices it is approximately twice
the length and for Lateral devices only a single length (Pirson10 1963). The devices are named "
bottom", when the pair of MN (AB) electrodes is placed in the lower part of a device and "top" in
the reversed case. For the remainder of this consideration we will assume that a set of five
Lateral logs, or two Normal and two Lateral logs, can deliver complete information on the
resistivities in the flushed zone, the invaded zone and the virgin formation.
Senergy
1458
A characteristic resistivity anomaly is observed in the case of a single high resistivity

bed in low resistivity surroundings. In Normal logs the resistivity curve shows the
anomaly to be symmetrical with respect to the midpoint of the bed. With a Lateral device,
however, the response is asymmetric with two characteristic points: a minimum at the top
1459
Senergy
of the given bed and a maximum at the base. They are distinctly visible and are shown
schematically in Figure 5. These points are the basis for identifying given beds in a continuous
resistivity curve recorded in a borehole traversing discrete beds of varied lithology.
1.3
Interpretation
The approach to the interpretation, i.e. correcting the measured resistivity logs for borehole
effects and presenting resistivity values for the various sections of the borehole and formation
environments, is based on fitting the so-called measured curve (constructed on the basis of the
measured logs and consisting of 5 (or 4 points minimum) in the case that only Lateral devices
are available, and 4 (or 3 points minimum) in the case where both Normal and Lateral devices
are available, obviously all at the same depth level, to the theoretical one (Bala et al.3 1999;
Senergy
1460
Jarzyna et al.5 1999; Jarzyna et al.7 2002).

The two possible measurement set-ups require two different approaches:
a). For five (four) Lateral logs of different radii of investigation the logged profile is subdivided
into a sequence of discrete beds of different resistivity (different lithology and/or saturation of
the pore space) and each bed is then treated as having constant parameters. The
interpretation delivers a set of constant values for each bed, resulting in a set of 'squared',
corrected resistivity curves.
b). For two Lateral and two Normal curves (or for three of them) the interpretation is done
continuously, i.e. for each set of resistivity samples at each depth level.
2. LATERAL CURVES
2.1.
Identification of the Beds and Apparent Resistivity Readings
The initial identification of the beds is necessary only when there are no Normal logs (Approach
a). above). The beds are the basis for defining intervals of apparent resistivity. In Approach b). the
apparent resistivity values at the given depth are sampled directly from the logs.
As already mentioned, the Lateral resistivity curve has characteristic points - minima and
maxima - associated with beds boundaries. Bed boundaries are selected as follows:
for a high resistivity bed surrounded by low resistivity beds and for the "bottom" Lateral
device, the maximum of an anomaly indicates the base of the bed and the minimum the top
(see Figure 5).
For the inverse case (a low resistivity bed surrounded by high resistivity beds or the "top"
Lateral device) the appearance of the anomaly is also reversed and bed boundaries are
selected accordingly.
In practical terms the interpretation on the computer screen proceeds as follows:
Looking at the plot of several apparent resistivity curves vs. depth, the interpreter picks the
depths of the tops of beds that can be identified. The characteristic extremes should hopefully be
visible on each curve (5 or 4 curves) and there may well be some depth shift between some of
them. In this case, the interpreter has to decide on a single depth for an extreme, common for all
logs. In these cases, the curve recorded by the shortest Lateral device is the most useful.
The tops picked on it should be considered definitive for interpretation, since the shortest
Lateral device is considered in this context as the log having the highest vertical
resolution.
Two additional logs (used as correlation logs, usually GR or NPHI or LL3) are also presented on
the screen. They are helpful in identifying bed boundaries. The top-picking procedure is greatly
1461
Senergy
helped by learning and understanding the nature of the geological formations under investigation:
are the beds (fairly) homogeneous or laminated?, or fining (coarsening) upwards? Any
information on the morphology of the beds will help to position the pick in the optimal place,
bearing in mind that there will be a balance to be struck between the shape and amplitude of the
apparent resistivity indicated by each device, their vertical resolution and the influence of the
borehole environment. Knowledge of the stratigraphy will help to establish the best pick. There
must be no gaps in the subdivision of the log profile into beds, i.e. the base of one bed becomes
the top of the next bed.
For each bed the following set of parameters is collected:
the depth of the top (Htop ) and the depth of the base (Hbase ) defined according to the rule
described above, and the thickness of the bed (h = Hbase - Htop ),
the maximum resistivity, Ram ax, for the so called "thin" resistive beds (h/d <32), or the
minimum resistivity, Ram in, when a low resistivity thin bed is surrounded by resistive
neighbors,
the average resistivity, Raav, for the so-called "thick" beds (h/d>=32), calculated taking into
account all resistivity samples from the log inside the depth interval Hbase - (Htop - 0.2h),
the average caliper, d, in the interval h,
the resistivity of adjacent beds, Rs . This parameter is necessary in the interpretation of the
"thin" beds. Rs is calculated as an average value of two readings from the curves recorded
by the Lateral device at points LL=1.05 and LL=2.625 m. The Rs value is then taken as
average resistivity in the section of 0.5h above the top of the given bed. This procedure to
determine Rs is justified by the greater influence of the formation resistivity at the top of the
given layer on the measured Ra under consideration, for the "bottom" Lateral device (which
is in any case the most common tool configuration).
2.2 Interpretation in "Thick" Beds, h/d >= 32

In this case the Alpin's2 solution curves are the basis for the interpretation. The following
assumptions (mentioned earlier) for the validity of theoretical curves are respected in every
case:
Thickness of the given bed is infinite (
),
Cylindrical coaxial layers: borehole (diameter d), homogeneous invaded zone (diameter D,
resistivity Ri) and virgin zone (resistivity Rt) are present.
2.2.1 Determination of Rx0, Ri and Rt
Senergy
1462
At each depth level, values of apparent resistivity (Ram ax or Ram in, Raav) are read and normalized
by dividing them by the resistivity of the mud Rm, corrected for formation temperature. The
correction of mud resistivity for temperature is made according to the formula:
Rm(tbed) = Rm(tmud pit) * (tmud pit + 21.5)/(tbed+21.5) (Equation 2)
t bed
t0
H 20
Gg
100
(Equation 3)
where:
R m ( t bed )
= resistivity of the mud at the temperature of the bed midpoint (tbed) [ohmm]
Rm(tmud pit) = resistivity of the mud in the mud pit (tmud pit) [ohmm]
t0 = annual mean surface temperature [C]
Gg = geothermal gradient [C/m]. For temperature expressed in [F] the factor 21.5 in (
Equation 2) should be changed to 6.77.
Each apparent resistivity ratio
borehole, yielding
Racorr / Rm
Ra / Rm
is individually corrected for the influence of the
. The two-layer theoretical curves are used for this correction.
Then, a so-called 'measured curve'
Racorr
( i ) / Rm
f ( L L (i ) / d )
is constructed. This curve
approximates the changes in resistivity of the given bed in the radial direction. The measured
curve is then fitted to the theoretical curves to get the true (interpreted) resistivities of the
cylindrical 'flushed', 'invaded' and 'virgin' zones.
If all values of
R a (i )
corr
/Rm
are close (within 10%) we assume that there is no invaded zone,
and the true resistivity of a formation, Rt, is equal to:
1
i
R corr
a (i )
i
, where i is a number of Lateral
curves included in the interpretation.

If, after the correction, the values of
R a (i )
corr
/Rm
obtained from the short devices are different
from those obtained from the long devices, the three-layer case applies and an invaded zone
is present. In this case we have "increasing" (Ri>Rt) or "decreasing"(Ri<Rt) influence of the
mud filtrate on formation resistivity.
After analysis of apparent resistivities recorded by several devices of various lengths in beds
of different lithology and formation properties, it was observed that t resistivity recorded by the
shortest device (LL(1), where in many cases LL(1)=0.55 m) is strongly influenced by mud
filtrate. This means that the resistivity recorded by the shortest device and corrected for
1463
Senergy
borehole effects represents the resistivity of the flushed zone,
R corr
a ( i 1)
R x0
. If there is no
shortest device, Rx0 is not determined

If
R a ( 2)
corr
/Rm
and
R a ( 3)
corr
/Rm
Ri, is derived from the average
1
2
are close (within 10%), the resistivity of the invaded zone,

3
R corr
a (i )
i 2
. In the next step the theoretical three-layer curves
are chosen, which are closest to the just-calculated Ri. Then, four
5 are compared to curves of constant
Ri / Rm
R a (i )
corr
/Rm
values, i=2,,
and various Di/d until the best fit of the four
points to the theoretical curve is obtained. Finally, the module of the theoretical curve
Rt / Rm
is taken as the basis to calculate the resistivity of the virgin zone, Rt. The
measure of the best fit is the minimum of the sum of the squares of the differences between
the measured points and the corresponding relevant points on the theoretical curve. If two
values of Ri have been chosen, Rt is calculated as an average, and D/d is also determined as
an average of the parameters of the chosen theoretical curves used in the interpretation.
If either the second device resistivity, (Ra(i=2)), Case aa), or the third device resistivity (Ra
(i=3)), Case bb), are not available, the criteria for the determination of the invaded zone
resistivity, Ri, and the diameter of that zone, D, are changed as follows:
aa).
bb).
Ri
R a ( 3)
corr
Ri
R a ( 2)
corr
and D = LL=3 (in most cases LL=3=2.625 m);

and D= LL=2 (in most cases LL=2=1.05 m);
The so-called 'annulus' occurs only when the formation contains oil in addition to formation
water. In the pore space, formation water is being displaced in preference to oil when mud
filtrate invasion is taking place. In this case, low values of the apparent resistivity ratios
R a (i
3)
/Rm
or
R a (i
4)
/Rm
can be observed. If the difference in apparent resistivity ratio
between point 4 and point 5 is less then 20% then point 4 is taken into interpretation. If the
difference between apparent resistivities of points 3 and 5 is also less then 20%, point 3 is
included in the interpretation. In the opposite cases the mentioned points are excluded from
the interpretation. These considerations are correct only in the case of decreasing mud filtrate
invasion. An annulus is considered only when:
R corr
a (1)
R corr
a ( 2) / 2
R corr
a ( 4)
R corr
a (5) / 2
. If one of
these devices is unavailable, the assumptions mentioned are not applicable and an annulus is
Senergy
1464
not taken into consideration.

If the apparent resistivity of the longest devices (LL(4) or LL(5)) was not recorded, the
interpreting procedure (fitting of the measured points to the theoretical curves) uses the points
from devices LL(2), LL(3) and LL(4) or LL(2), LL(3) and LL(5) and the module of the theoretical
curve,
2.3
Rt /Rm
, yields the resistivity of the virgin zone.
Determination of the Diameter of the Flushed Zone and the Invaded Zone
It has been assumed that the shortest Lateral device delivers the information for the flushed
zone. Bearing in mind the tool geometry, the diameter of this zone is considered to be equal to
the length of the shortest device (in most cases 0.55m). If there is no log for the shortest device
the parameters for the flushed zone are not determined.
The diameter of the invaded zone is obtained automatically during the interpretation using threelayer theoretical curves.
If the second (next longer) device has not been run, the diameter of an invaded zone is set equal
to the length of the third one, or, conversely, if the third device has not been run, the diameter of
the invaded zone is equal to the length of the second device.
2.4. Interpretation in "Thin" Beds, h/d < 32

The interpretation of the "thin" beds is based on the set of curves derived using an analog model
and presented by Pierkov 9, for ratios h/d =1,, 24 and on the results of numerical modelling for
h/d=32, for the full set of ratios Rt/Rm and Rs /Rm. For all theoretical curves the assumption is
made that the parameters characterizing layers and beds are constant.
To perform the interpretation, the following parameters are chosen using the model of a two-layer
geological formation without invaded zone:
Maximum or minimum apparent resistivity, divided by mud resistivity at formation
temperature, Ra/Rm,
Thickness of the selected bed relative to borehole diameter, h/d,
Resistivity of adjacent beds, also Normalized by the mud resistivity, Rs/Rm.
2.5
Selection of the Theoretical Curves
For each interpreted bed, after determining the parameters:

and h/d, named now
Ra / Rm
h meas / d
f ( L / d, R t / R m )
Ra / Rm
named now
Rsmeas / Rm
, the four families of theoretical curves:
with the closest parameters:
R stheor / R m
and
h theor / d
, are
1465
Senergy
selected. The interpretation is performed independently for each curve family and, at the end, a
weighted average of the results is calculated.
2.6
Determination of the Weights for the Four Families of Theoretical Curves
The factors
R stheor / R m
and
h theor / d
are the selected parameters for the families of the
theoretical curves and they differ from the measured ones,
Rsmeas / Rm
and
h meas / d
.A
numerical measure of this difference for each family is defined as follows:

wi
R stheor / Rm
1 /(1
where:
Rstheor
R smeas
R smeas / Rm
h theor / d
h meas / d
(Equation 4)
= the resistivity of an adjacent bed in the nomogram for a given model,
= the resistivity of an adjacent bed read from the measured resistivity curve.
Similar nomenclature is assumed for the thickness h. Weights are in the range [0-1]. If a weight
is less then 0.25, the relevant family is not included in the interpretation. It is only possible to take
a single curve family into the next stages.
2.7
Correction for Borehole and Shoulder Bed Effects
Corrections are made for each apparent resistivity in the selected bed on the basis of the curve
recorded by each device. The outcome
Rt /Rm
R corr
/Rm
a
is the result of reading the module
of the theoretical two-layer curve in the family described by Rs /Rm and h/d closest
to the measured point. The value of
R corr
/Rm
a
derived in this way is the basis for the next steps
in processing.
2.8
Resistivity of the Virgin Zone
According to the approach proposed by Pierkov 9, the true resistivity of the virgin zone is
determined on the basis of the apparent resistivity of the curve measured with the longest device,
Rt / Rm
R5corr / Rm
. In the interpretation procedure presented here, the true resistivity is the
weighted average of the values of
Rt / Rm
R5corr / Rm
taken from the four (or less) families of
curves included. Before determining true resistivity Rt, new weights have to be calculated:
Senergy
1466
Wi
wi /
wi
i
(Equation 5)
where:
N = the number of families of the theoretical curves fulfilling the previous criterion of
wi
0.25
N
Rt / Rm
. Resistivity of the virgin zone is then calculated according to the equation:
Wi [( Racorr
(5) / Rm )] i
(Equation 6)
Double calculation of the weights (wi and W i ) follows naturally from their definitions. The sum of
the weights at each level must be equal to unity. Calculation of the true resistivity of the virgin
zone according to Equation 6 requires the determination of new weights W i .
When there is only the resistivity curve recorded by the shorter LL(4) device,
R4corr / Rm
becomes
the basis for the determination of Rt.
2.9
Resistivity and Diameter of the Invaded Zone
The curves for the two-layer model are the basis for the determination of the diameter of the
invaded zone.
When five apparent resistivities, recorded by five devices with different radii of investigation and
corrected for borehole and adjacent beds are available, the interpreter proceeds as follows,
obtaining the following results:
2.9.1
Resistivity, Rx0, and diameter, Dx0, of the flushed zone, equal to
R corr
a (1) / R m
and LL
(1) respectively;
2.9.2
If two short device curves give similar values of
Racorr / Rm
(within 20%) and the
third one gives a value that is distinctly different (the difference between the third and
an average of the first two first higher than 20% of the average) the calculation
proceeds as follows:
2.9.2.1
Determine the average of the resistivities of the two first devices
average1,
2.9.2.2
Determine the average of the resistivity of the third device and the average1
average2,
2.9.2.3
If (average2- average1)/ average1<35%, the third device is considered to still show

the resistivity of the invaded zone, and Ri is calculated as follows:
1467
Ri / Rm
1
2
Senergy
R corr
a (i ) / R m
i 2
, and the diameter of the invaded zone D is set to be equal
to LL(3) (in many cases 2.625 m),

2.9.2.4
If (average2- average1)/ average1>35%, the third device indicates a resistivity close

to that of the virgin zone and Ri is calculated as follows:
Ri / Rm
R corr
a ( 2) / R m
and the diameter of the invaded zone is set equal to LL(2) (in many cases 1.05 m),
2.9.3
If the first device resistivity differs by more then 20% from the resistivities of the
second and third (either greater or smaller), the resistivity of the invaded zone is
calculated as the average of the second and third device resistivity,
Ri / Rm
1 3 corr
Ra ( i ) / Rm
2i 2
if the difference between them is not higher than 35%, in other cases the resistivity
of the invaded zone is set equal to the resistivity of the second device,
Ri / Rm
Racorr
( 2 ) / Rm
and the diameter, D, is to the LL(2).

2.9.4
If
Racorr
( i ) / Rm
are similar for four devices, it means either; there is no invasion, or the
invasion is very deep. In this case Ri is calculated as an average of the four
Ri / Rm
resistivities,
1
4
R corr
a (i ) / R m
i 2
and the diameter of invasion in the same
sense as previously described does not exist. In the authors' experience, however, a
certain difference between resistivities Rx0, Ri and Rt can still exist despite previous
considerations and the assumption of no invasion. If this is the case the interpreter
should take into account following additional conditions:
Rt / Rm
Ri / Rm / ( Rt / Rm
Ri / Rm ) / 2
0.35
2.9.4.1
If
, D=Dx0=LL(1),
2.9.4.2
If not, D= LL(3).
2.10
If the shortest device (LL(1)) has not been run, resistivity Rx0, and the diameter Dx0,
of the flushed zone are not determined. This case is similar to that discussed in
point 3.5.4.1, only with D=LL(2).
2.11
If the second device (LL(2)) has not been run, the assumption for all the cases
discussed above is that the resistivity of the invaded zone equals the resistivity
Senergy
shown by the curve of the third device,
Ri / Rm
R corr
a ( 3) / R m
1468
, and the diameter of
the invaded zone equals the length of this device, D=LL(3).

2.12
If the third device (LL(3)) has not been run, in all the cases discussed above the
resistivity of the invaded zone equals the resistivity shown by the curve of the
second device,
Ri / Rm
R corr
a ( 2) / R m
, and the diameter of the invaded zone equals
the length of the second device, D=LL(2). In the case discussed in point 3.5.4.2 we
have D=LL(4).
3. LATERAL AND NORMAL CURVES

3.1
Continuous Interpretation with a Combined Set of Lateral and Normal Logs
The method of resistivity interpretation with combined Lateral and Normal curves is different from
that using only Lateral curves. There is no need to identify and pick beds and the interpretation is
performed continuously, i.e. at each depth point.
In the interpretation, the parameters obtained from four (or three) resistivity logs are used
simultaneously. For each combination of apparent resistivities (Lateral and Normal logs) true
resistivities for all zones (flushed, invaded and virgin) are calculated. The theoretical curves for
two- and three-layer models of the formation are also obtained from Alpin's2 solutions for the
Lateral devices:
R lateral
/Rm
a
f (L / d; R t / R m ; R i / R m ; D / d )
and for the Normal devices:
R anormal / R m
f (L / d; R t / R m ; R i / R m / D / d )
All assumptions made for this approach are also satisfied.

Apparent resistivities are sampled at each depth from all curves in the combined Lateral-Normal
set:
R a ( N1) , R a ( N 2 ) , R a ( L1) , R a ( L 2 )
They are corrected for the influence of the borehole (mud resistivity at formation temperature and
borehole diameter) and then form the basis of Alpin's2 theoretical two-layer curves. Four
independent, corrected resistivities are thus obtained:
corr
Racorr
( N 1) / R m , R a ( N 2 ) / R m
and
corr
Racorr
( L1) / R m , R a ( L 2 ) / R m
As in the case of the Lateral curve interpretation and with the same procedures, the corrected
resistivities are expressed as Normalized with the mud resistivity.
1469
3.2
Senergy
Resistivity and Diameter of the Flushed Zone
The assumption is made, that the short Normal device (length=LN1) delivers the resistivity of the
flushed zone,
R x0
R corr
a ( N1)
. According to the model of the Normal tool, the radius of
investigation of a Normal device is taken as being equal to the double of its length, for standard
muds with resistivity 2-10 times greater than formation water resistivity (Chapellier4 1992). In
this procedure it is assumed that Dx0 is a little less then 2LN1 and is taken to be 90% of the
double length of the short Normal, 2LN(1).
3.3
Resistivity and Diameter of the Invaded Zone
The resistivity of the invaded zone, Ri, is calculated as the average of the resistivities of the two
Normal devices:
Ri
1
2
R corr
a ( Ni )
i 1
The diameter of the invaded zone, D, is obtained automatically from the average of the
parameters in the families of curves selected for the computation of Fmin , as shown in Section
4.3 here below.
3.4
Resistivity of the Virgin Zone
The resistivity of the virgin zone is calculated on the basis of the resistivity ratios used to
calculate the function F in Equation 7, below. The assumption here is that two short devices with
small radius of investigation deliver the resistivity of the invaded zone (including the flushed
zone), while two longer devices with greater radius of investigation deliver the resistivity of the
virgin zone. This is shown schematically in Figure 6. On the background of the family of the
theoretical two-layer curves, two lines have been drawn for LL1 and LL2 (Lateral) and for LN1 and L
N2
(Normal) and they intersect all theoretical curves in the points with parameters
for all ratios Ri/Rm and D/d.
Rt /Rm
Senergy
For each depth level the function F can now be calculated as follows:
3
{( X meas (i )
X theor(i ) ) 2
(Ymeas (i )
Ytheor(i ) ) 2 }
i 1
(Equation 7)
where:
X meas (1)
corr
R corr
a ( N 2) / R a ( L 2)
Ymeas (1)
corr
R corr
a ( N1) / R a ( L 2 )
X meas ( 2 )
corr
R corr
a ( L1) / R a ( L 2 )
Ymeas ( 2 )
corr
R corr
a ( N 2) / R a ( L 2)
X meas ( 3)
corr
R corr
a ( N 2 ) / R a ( L1)
Ymeas ( 3)
corr
R corr
a ( N1) / R a ( L1)
X meas ( 4 )
corr
R corr
a ( L1) / R a ( L 2 )
Ymeas ( 4 )
corr
R corr
a ( N 2) / R a ( L 2)
X theor(1)
corr
R corr
a ( N 2) / R a ( L 2)
Ytheor(1)
corr
R corr
a ( N1) / R a ( L 2 )
X theor( 2 )
corr
R corr
a ( L1) / R a ( L 2 )
Ytheor( 2 )
corr
R corr
a ( N 2) / R a ( L 2)
X theor( 3)
corr
R corr
a ( N 2 ) / R a ( L1)
Ytheor( 3)
corr
R corr
a ( N1) / R a ( L1)
and
1470
1471
X theor( 4 )
corr
R corr
a ( L1) / R a ( L 2 )
Ytheor( 4 )
Senergy
corr
R corr
a ( N 2) / R a ( L 2)
Everywhere in Equation 7 the index meas(i) means the ratio calculated for the measured
resistivities. Resistivity values used in the ratios with index theor(i) have been read from the
theoretical curves. The complete set of four ratios is shown above, but in the calculation of
function F only three of them are involved, as shown in Equation 7. The factors with index meas(4)
and theor(4) are only used in the case when the short Normal device LN1 has not been run.
Ra / Rm
For each family of the theoretical curves
Ri / Rm
and D/d the individual values for
R corr
a (i )
f ( L / d, R t / R m )
with given parameters
are taken on the vertical lines for L/d equal to LN1
/d, LN2/d for the Normal devices and on the vertical lines for LL1/d and LL2/d for the Lateral
devices. Values of
Rt /Rm
are determined in most cases by suitable interpolation between
neighboring curves. In familiar fashion, the families of theoretical curves defined by the
parameters
Ri / Rm
and D/d, for which function F has the minimum value Fmin has been
retained. They are the basis for the calculation of Rt and the final Rt value is calculated from the
average of the three values obtained for the Lateral resistivities and for the longer Normal
resistivity.
In order to shorten the processing time of the interpretation, the given parameters Ri/Rm and D/d
obtained from the resistivities of Normal devices have been used directly as keys for the
selection of the nearest families of theoretical three-layer curves. Also, the F function is
calculated for limited group of parameters and not for the entire possible set.
3.5
Absence of One Resistivity Curve
In the interpretation procedure there are provisions for such cases, when we have the minimum
of three resistivity logs. In these cases the F function can still be calculated with the relevant
ratios according to measured logs available.
3.5.1
When the second Normal device has not been run, only Rx0 is obtained and the
assumption is made that

3.5.2
Ri
R x0
R corr
aN (1)
When the shortest Normal device has not been run, the resistivity of the flushed
zone is not determined. Ri is calculated only on the basis of
R corr
a ( N 2)
Senergy
3.6
1472
Additional Boundary Condition
When a measured point lies outside the space of the calculated theoretical curves, it is assumed
that Rt/Rm =1000 if it is above or Rt/Rm=0.5 if it is below.
In either case there is no differentiation between Dx0 and D.
4.
REFERENCES
Related Topics
EERC Interface
EERC Theory
1473
Senergy
11.12 Formation Test Analysis

Formation Test Analysis is a process of evaluation that takes place to determine the viability of a
reservoir of oil, prior to the production stage, in particular the type of fluid present in a reservoir
and the potential for production. When Formation Testing takes place, measurements are taken
using wireline testing methods and then recorded in a Data Log file for interpretation.
Specific pressure measurements are recorded using a pressure gauge lowered into the borehole
using a wireline. A small amount of formation fluid is withdrawn from the reservoir, creating a
Drawdown pressure measurement. Build Up measurements are then recorded over a period of
time, until the pressure of the fluid in the pressure gauge reaches the pressure equal to that of
the fluid in the reservoir, the formation pressure or Final Build Up measurement.
Interactive Petrophysics using the Formation Test Analysis Module to record these pressure
measurements Graphically, so that accurate analysis of the Formation Testing measurements
can take place.
Drawdown Analysis
The Drawdown Analysis Chart displays a Graphical representation of the Formation Testing
Pressure measurements, Hydrostatic Pressure, Drawdown Pressure, Final Build Up Pressure
for interpretation and analysis.
The Hydrostatic pressure is the measurement of pressure within the reservoir fluid prior to the
Drawdown of reservoir fluid taking place. The Drawdown Pressure is the measurement of
pressure within the withdrawn fluid over a period of time, as the withdrawal of fluid from the
reservoir is taking place. The Build Up Pressure is the measurement of pressure within the
withdrawn fluid taken over a period of time, until the point in time where the pressure of the
withdrawn fluid is equal to that of the pressure of fluid in the reservoir. Additional known
Section 11.12 Advanced Interpretation : Formation Test Analysis
Senergy
1474
measurements can be added manually to the Drawdown Analysis in Interactive Petrophysics to

calculate the Drawdown Permeability and the Drawdown Mobility.
Derivative Analysis
A derivative plot is used when there is uncertainty in the detection of radial flow, a condition that
may occur when the duration of the formation test has not elapsed over a sufficient period of
time.
Build Up Analysis
Once the primary measurements for the Drawdown Analysis have been recorded in the
Formation Test Analysis Module of Interactive Petrophysics, the Build Up Analysis can then be
completed. Analysis of the Build Up pressure measurements enables the determination of a
reliable pressure gradient from the Formation Test data. There are three Build Up Analysis Plots
used in the Formation Test Analysis Module.
Spherical Build Up Analysis

Spherical flow pressure measurements can be acquired when the pre-dominant direction of flow
in a reservoir is towards a point. Where there is Spherical flow in a reservoir the Vertical
Permeability can be calculated.
1475
Senergy
The Spherical Build Up Analysis calculates the Spherical Pressure Gradient and P* Radial.
Additional known measurements can be added to the Spherical Build Up Analysis to calculate the
Spherical Permeability and the Spherical Mobility.
Radial Build Up Analysis

Radial Flow pressure measurements are taken at a late stage in the Formation Test and are
indicated by a horizontal levelling in the pressure measurements taken. Where there is Radial flow
in a reservoir the Horizontal Permeability can be calculated.
The Radial Build Up Analysis calculates the Radial Pressure Gradient and P* Radial. Additional
known measurements can be added to the Radial Build Up Analysis to calculate the Radial
Senergy
1476
Permeability and the Radial Mobility.
Related Topics
Define the Formation Testing Parameters
Create and Analyse a Formation Test Project
Formation Testing Equations and Methodology
11.12.1 Define the Formation Testing Parameters

The Formation Testing Project Parameters are defined using the Formation Testing Setup
Dialog, where the Parameters are defined for each of the Formation Tests created and initialized
for Analysis using the Formation Test Analysis Dialog.
To Setup a Formation Test the following Parameters must be Selected:
Define the Project Data: The Formation Testing Setup Dialog is initially displayed with the
Data Tab Active. Each row contains the following information for each Formation Test that
has been run using the Formation Test Analysis Dialog.
Select the Required Wells: The Well Selection Tab enables the selection of the required
well, for the loading of Formation Test Data. Once a well has been selected the Formation
Tests available in the Selected Wells will be displayed in the Data Tab.
Define the Well Data: The Well Data Tab enables the Data variables to be defined, for the
loading of the Formation Test Data. Well Data Variables are selected from each Drop Down
Menu. There are two Sub Tabs in the Well Data Tab, Time Based Data which enables the
creation of Formation Tests from Time Based Data and Interpreted Depth Data which
enables the creation of Formation Tests based upon Interpretation Data derived from the
Formation Test Analysis Dialog.
Define the Output Curves: The Output Curves displays the Parameters for the Output
Curves derived from the Formation Test Analysis. This Tab displays the Parameter Name,
the Base Curve Name, the Label and Units for each Output Curve.
Define the Filters: The Filters Tab enables the application of Filters to each Formation Test.
Define the Default Models: Default Models can be created and applied to the Formation
Tests using the Default Models Tab. If Model Values are Changed in this Tab, the changes
will not be applied to previously initialized tests.
Define the Preferences: The Preferences Tab enables Formation Test specific Preferences
to be defined; Project Preferences, Status Values, User Preferences, Axes Scales and
Output Units.
1477
Senergy
To Display the Formation Testing Setup Dialog:

1. From the Advanced Interpretation Menu, Select Formation Testing to display the Formation
Testing Setup Dialog.
2. The Formation Testing Setup Dialog is displayed with the Data Tab Active. As the
Formation Testing Project Parameters are defined, these are then displayed in the Data
Tab.
Formation Testing Setup Buttons

This section describes the Buttons available in the Formation Testing Setup Dialog and their
purpose.
Regenerate Curves: Re-creates the Curves used in the Formation Testing Projects.
Output Charts: Saves the Formation Testing Project Charts to a PDF File.
Check for New Tests: Checks the Selected Wells for Newly Initialized Tests.
Load Project: Loads a Previously Saved Formation Testing Project.
Save Project: Saves the Current Formation Testing Project.
Close: Closes the Formation Testing Setup Dialog.
Help: Displays the Formation Testing Setup Dialog Help.
Related Topics
Senergy
1478

11.12.1.1 Define the Project Data
The Formation Testing Setup Dialog is initially displayed with the Data Tab Active. Each row
contains the following information for each Formation Test that has been run using the Formation
Test Analysis Dialog.
View: Displays a View Button, which when clicked launches the Formation Test Analysis
Dialog with the Selected Formation Test Displayed.
To Print: Displays a Checkbox, which when selected Prints the Default Charts selected in
the Preferences Tab.
Crossplot Visibility: Displays a Checkbox, which when selected shows the selected well
when the Formation Testing Crossplot is launched.
Well: Displays the Well Number for each available Formation Test.
DD#: Displays the Number of Available Drawdown Tests.
Depth: Displays the Depth for each available Formation Test.
TVDSS: Displays the TVDSS Value for each available Formation Test, this field can be
filtered to display only X, Y, Z or Z2 Axis values.
Final Build Up Pressure (psi): Displays the Final Buildup Pressure for each available
Formation Test.
Drawdown Mobility: Displays the Drawdown Mobility Value for each available Formation
Test.
Analysis Status: Displays the Analysis Status for each available Formation Test, Not
Analyzed, Drawdown only, Drawdown and Build Up or Bad Test.
1479
Senergy
Test Status: Displays the Test Status for each available Formation Test. This field is UserDefinable and Entries can be added or modified in the Preferences Tab.
Related Topics
Select the Required Wells
Define the Well Data
Define the Filters
Define the Default Models
Define the Preferences
Create Formation Testing Crossplot
11.12.1.2 Select the Required Wells
The Well Selection Tab enables the selection of the required well, for the loading of Formation
Test Data. Once a well has been selected the Formation Tests available in the Selected Wells
will be displayed in the Data Tab.
Related Topics
Define the Project Data
Define the Filters
Senergy
1480
11.12.1.3 Define the Well Data
The Well Data Tab enables the Data variables to be defined, for the loading of the Formation Test
Data. Well Data Variables are selected from each Drop Down Menu. There are two Sub Tabs in
the Well Data Tab, Time Based Data which enables the creation of Formation Tests from Time
Based Data and Interpreted Depth Data which enables the creation of Formation Tests based
upon Interpretation Data derived from the Formation Test Analysis Dialog.
For Time Based Data the following fields should be defined.

Tool: Use the Tool Drop Down Menu to Select the Tool used for the Formation Test.
Model: Use the Model Drop Down Menu to select a Pre-Defined Model of Parameters to be
used in the Formation Test.
TVDSS: Select the required TVDSS Curve to be used in the Formation Test.
Input Set: Select the required Input Curve Set that contains the Curve Data to be used in the
Formation Test.
Time: Select the required Time Curve to be used in the Formation Test.
Pressure: Select the required Pressure Curve to be used in the Formation Test.
Volume: Select the required Volume Curve to be used in the Formation Test
Flowrate: Select the required Flowrate Curve to be used in the Formation Test.
Porosity: Select the required Porosity Curve to be used in the Formation Test.
Output Set: Select the required Output Curve Set that contains the Curve Data to be used in
the Formation Test.
For Interpreted Depth Data, the following fields are defined as per the Time Based Data.
Tool: Use the Tool Drop Down Menu to Select the Tool used for the Formation Test.
TVDSS: Select the required TVDSS Curve to be used in the Formation Test.
1481
Senergy
Output Set: Select the required Output Curve Set that contains the Curve Data to be used in
the Formation Test.
User-Definable fields are then used to build the Formation Test Well Data Parameters for
Interpreted Depth Data. These Parameters are derived from the Formation Test Analysis. Below
is a list of the User-Definable Fields available in the Well Data, Interpreted Depth Tab.
Hydrostatic Before, Hydrostatic After, Drawdown Start, Drawdown End, Final Build Up
Pressure, Delta Time, Drawdown Pressure, Volume, Flowrate, Drawdown Permeability,
Drawdown Mobility, P* Spherical, Spherical Permeability, Spherical Mobility, P* Radial,
Radial Permeability, Radial Mobility, Comments, Crossplot Visibility and Crossplot
Regression Flag.
Related Topics
Define the Filters
The Output Curves displays the Parameters for the Output Curves derived from the Formation
Test Analysis. This Tab displays the Parameter Name, the Base Curve Name, the Label and
Units for each Output Curve.
Senergy
Related Topics
Define the Filters
11.12.1.5 Define the Filters
The Filters Tab enables the application of Filters to each Formation Test.
Select Filter: Select a Previously Created Filter from the Drop Down Menu.
1482
1483
Senergy
Create New: Click the Create New Button to make the Filter Definition Fields Active.
Name: Type the Name of the New Filter.
Discriminators
Combine With: Select the Combination Method from the Drop Down Menu.
Use: Select the Use Checkbox to Include the Selected Discriminator in the Filter
Value/Curve: Specify a Value or Curve to use in the Discriminator
Function: Specify the required Function to use in the Discriminator, either Greater Than,
Less Than, Equal To, Greater Than or Equal To or Less Than or Equal To.
Zones
Zone Set: Specify the required Zone Set to use in the Filter. Select the required Zones within
the Selected Zone Set.
Delete: Click Delete to Delete a Previously Saved Filter.

Save: Click Save to Save the Newly Defined Filter.
Note: When Save has been Clicked, a Confirm Message will be displayed in Red.
Related Topics
Senergy
1484

11.12.1.6 Define the Default Models
Default Models can be created and applied to the Formation Tests using the Default Models Tab.
If Model Values are Changed in this Tab, the changes will not be applied to previously initialized
tests.
Tool: Select the required Tool to be used in the Selected Model. Click the Save Tool Button
to Save the Tool to the Model.
Note: If the Tool for a Model is changed, the following dialog will be displayed requesting
confirmation that the Tool is to be changed and that the previously saved values will now be
changed.
Model: Select the required Model for modification.
Delete Model: Click the Delete Model Button to Delete the Model from the Formation Testing
Setup Dialog.
Label: Defines the Label for the Model Parameters.
Value: Edit this field to change the Default Value of the Selected Field.
Units: From the Drop Down Menu, Select the Default Units for the Selected Field.
Related Topics
1485
Senergy

Define the Filters
11.12.1.7 Define the Preferences
The Preferences Tab enables Formation Test specific Preferences to be defined; Project
Preferences, Status Values, User Preferences, Axes Scales and Output Units.
Project Preferences: Drawdown Options

The Drawdown Options in the Project Preferences Tab define Parameters specific to the
Drawdown Analysis in the Formation Test Analysis Workflow.
Multiple Drawdown Test as Single: Displays Multiple Drawdown Tests as one Single
Drawdown Test in the Drawdown Analysis Tab.
Flowrate Option for Permeability: Select either Average or Maximum.
Volume Value Source: Select either Volume Curve, Flowrate Curve or Model Value.
Flowrate Value Source: Select either Volume Curve or Flowrate Curve.
Project Preferences: Status Values

The Status Values in the Preferences Tab of the Formation Testing Setup Dialog defines the
Default User-Definable Status Values for the Formation Test Analysis Project.
Test Status Values: These Values are User-Definable, and are displayed in the Drawdown
Analysis Tab of the Formation Testing Analysis Dialog..
Senergy
1486
User Preferences: Chart Options

The Chart Options defines the User Preferences when displaying Formation Test Analysis
Charts.
Zoom after Drawdown Selection:
Show Volume Curve:
Show Rate Curve:
Show Temperature Curve:
Show Flowing Pressure Lines:
Show Average Pressure Lines:
Reverse Time Function Axes:
Pick Mode: Defines the Default Pick Mode for the Drawdown Analysis, either Manual or
Semi-Automatic.
Split RFT Drawdown End/Start: Defines the Default for Splitting the Drawdown End/Start,
either Ask, Always or Never.
User Preferences: Output Units

The Output Units in the Preferences Tab of the Formation Testing Setup Dialog defines the
Default Output Unit Types for the Formation Test Analysis Project.
1487
Senergy
Pressure: Defines the Default Output Units for the Pressure Value; either psi, psia, bar, Pa,
KPa or MPa.
Volume: Defines the Default Output Units for the Volume Value, either L, mL, m 3 cm 3 bbl,
gas (US), gal (imp), floz (US) or floz (imp).
Flowrate: Defines the Default Output Units for the Flowrate Value, either cm 3/s, l/s, l/min,
US G/min or m 3/s.
Permeability: Defines the Default Output Units for the Permeability Value, either D, mD or
m 2.
Viscosity: Defines the Default Output Units for the Viscosity Value, either P, cP or Pa.S.
Radius: Defines the Default Output Units for the Radius Value, either in or mm.
User Preferences: Print Options

The Print Options in the Preferences Tab of the Formation Testing Setup Dialog defines the
Default Print Options for the Formation Test Analysis Project.
Print Drawdown Chart: Sets the Default Print Options to include the Drawdown Chart.
Print Derivative Chart: Sets the Default Print Options to include the Derivative Chart.
Print Spherical Chart: Sets the Default Print Options to include the Spherical Chart.
Print Radial Chart: Sets the Default Print Options to include the Radial Chart.
Related Topics
Define the Filters
11.12.1.8 Create Formation Testing Crossplot
Specific Formation Tests can be selected for inclusion in a Formation Test Crossplot using the
Formation Testing Setup Dialog.
To Create a Formation Test Crossplot:
From the Formation Testing Setup Dialog, Select the required Formation Tests in the
Crossplot Visibility Column.
Senergy
1488
Click Create Crossplot to Launch a Formation Testing Crossplot for the Selected Formation
Tests.
Related Topics
1489
Senergy

Define the Filters
11.12.2 Create and Analyse a Formation Test Project

This Chapter describes the workflow for Creating and Analyzing a Formation Test Analysis
Project.
Define the Formation Test Parameters: Prior to the Formation Test Data can be analyzed the
Formation Test Project Parameters need to be defined.
Save a Formation Test Analysis Project: A Formation Test Project can be saved using the
Save Project feature in the Formation Testing Setup Dialog. The Formation Test Project is
saved with the file extension *.fta. The default location for the Formation Testing Project to be
saved is C:\users\username\appdata\local\IntPetro36\Formation Testing\.
Load Formation Test Data into the Current Well: The 'Formation Tester LIS/DLIS Loader'
module allows the user to load curves specific to Formation Testing services from LIS or DLIS
files. The module allows only curves of interest (by way of a Tool Type mask) to be loaded into
Tool Specific Sets to be used in the Formation Test Analysis module.
Produce the Drawdown Analysis: Once the Formation Test Parameters have been defined,
the Drawdown Analysis can be produced. The Drawdown Analysis Chart displays a Graphical
representation of the Formation Testing Pressure measurements, Hydrostatic Pressure,
Drawdown Pressure, Final Build Up Pressure for interpretation and analysis.
Produce the Derivative Analysis: Once the Drawdown Analysis has been completed, the
Derivative Build Up Analysis Chart will be displayed in the Derivative Plot Tab.
Produce the Spherical Analysis: Once the Drawdown Analysis has been completed, the
Spherical Build Up Analysis Chart will be displayed in the Spherical Plot Tab.
Produce the Radial Analysis: Once the Drawdown Analysis has been completed, the Radial
Build Up Analysis Chart will be displayed in the Radial Plot Tab.
Related Topics
Senergy
1490
11.12.2.1 Load Formation Test Data into the Current Well
The 'Formation Tester LIS/DLIS Loader' module allows the user to load curves specific to
Formation Testing services from LIS or DLIS files. The module allows only curves of interest (by
way of a Tool Type mask) to be loaded into Tool Specific Sets to be used in the Formation Test
Analysis module.
1. From the Input/Output Menu, Select Load Data then Formation Tester LIS/DLIS Load to
display the Select FT Files to Load dialog.
2. Browse to locate the required Formation Test Data File and Click Open to return to the
Formation Tester DLIS/LIS Loader Dialog.
1491
Senergy
3. Select the required Tool Type from the Select Tool Type Drop Down Menu to automatically
populate the Curves to Load and the Set to Load the Curves into.
Senergy
1492
Note: The Curves to Load variables can be edited manually. The Curves to Load Table
displays the available Curves for the selected Tool to be loaded into the Formation Testing
Module.
Note: A different Set to Load the Curves into can be selected/created by clicking the Edit
Sets Button.
Note: The Select Files Button displays the Select FT Files to Load dialog to change the Data
File.
Note: The Set Well Button enables a different well to be selected for the Formation Test
Data to be loaded into.
4. Click the Load Button to Load the Formation Test Data into the Current Well.
Note: The Loaded Curve Set and Curves will be displayed in the Database Browser.
1493
Senergy
Related Topics
Define the Formation Test Parameters
Save a Formation Test Analysis Project
Produce the Drawdown Analysis
Produce the Derivative Analysis
Produce the Spherical Analysis
Produce the Radial Analysis
11.12.2.2 Define the Formation Test Parameters
Prior to the Formation Test Data can be analyzed the Formation Test Project Parameters need
to be defined.
1. From the Interpretation Menu, Select Formation Test Setup to display the Formation Testing
Setup Dialog.
Note: The Formation Testing Setup Dialog will display the Data Tab with no wells selected.
2. Click the Well Selection Tab to Select the required Well, Click the Move Button to Select the
required well.
Senergy
3. Click the Well Data Tab to define the Well Data Parameters for loading.
4. The Data Tab will Display the Formation Tests for the Selected Well Data.
5. From the Data Tab click Show to display the Formation Test Analysis Dialog for the
Selected Well.
1494
1495
Senergy
6. Produce the Drawdown Analysis.
Related Topics
Load Formation Test Data into the Current Well
11.12.2.3 Save a Formation Test Analysis Project
A Formation Test Project can be saved using the Save Project feature in the Formation Testing
Setup Dialog. The Formation Test Project is saved with the file extension *.fta. The default
location for the Formation Testing Project to be saved is C:
\users\username\Appdata\local\IntPetro36\Formation Testing\.
1. From the Advanced Interpretation Menu, Select Formation Testing to Display the Formation
Testing Setup Dialog.
2. From the Formation Testing Setup Dialog, Type the Name of the Formation Testing Project
and Click Save Project to display the Save Formation Testing Analysis Well dialog.
Senergy
1496
3. Type the Formation Testing Project File Name and Click Save to Save the Formation
Testing Project (*.fta) file.
Related Topics
11.12.2.4 Produce the Drawdown Analysis
Once the Formation Test Parameters have been defined, the Drawdown Analysis can be
produced. The Drawdown Analysis Chart displays a Graphical representation of the Formation
Testing Pressure measurements, Hydrostatic Pressure, Drawdown Pressure, Final Build Up
Pressure for interpretation and analysis. The Project Data Section displays Formation Test
Analysis Project Data along with the Hydrostatic Start and End Values, when they have been
defined using the Picks Feature in the Drawdown Analysis Chart.
Produce the Drawdown Analysis in the Formation Test Analysis Dialog
1497
Senergy
1. Set the Formation Test Parameters and Display the Formation Test Analysis Dialog.
2. In the Test Data Section, Specify a number for the current Formation Test Analysis.
3. If required Click and Drag the Hydrostatic Start and Hydrostatic End Picks the the Drawdown
Analysis Chart.
4. Click and Drag the Drawdown Start Pick from the Toolbar to the Drawdown Start position on
the Drawdown Analysis Chart.
Note: The Drawdown Start variable will appear in the Drawdown Analysis Calculation Pane.
Senergy
1498
5. Click and Drag the Drawdown End Pick from the Toolbar to the Drawdown End position on the
Drawdown Analysis Chart.
Note: When the Drawdown Start and the Drawdown End Picks are selected in the Drawdown
Analysis Chart, the Drawdown Time and the Flowing Pressure are automatically populated in
the Drawdown Analysis Pane and the Data Pane. Flowing pressure can be adjusted by
clicking on the dashed line and moving the line to the correct pressure. This can be useful if
there are any pressure spikes on the data.
6. Click and Drag the Final Build Up Pick from the Toolbar to the Final Build Up position on the
Drawdown Analysis Chart.
1499
Senergy
Note: The Final Build Up Pressure and the Drawdown Pressure are automatically populated in
the Drawdown Analysis Pane and the Data Pane.
7. The Drawdown Permeability and Drawdown Mobility are automatically calculated once all the
Picks have been selected.
8. The Drawdown Analysis Calculations are updated automatically in both the Drawdown
Analysis Pane and the Drawdown Analysis Table.
Senergy
1500
Related Topics
11.12.2.5 Produce the Derivative Analysis
Once the Drawdown Analysis has been completed, the Derivative Plot of the buildup data will be
displayed in the Derivative Plot Tab. A derivative plot can be useful to determine the flow regime
exhibited in the buildup data and hence the type of buildup analysis which is most appropriate
(spherical flow or radial flow).
Classic well test theory suggests that the derivative indicates spherical flow when the gradient of
the derivative is -1/2 and radial flow when the gradient of the derivative is zero. A user defined line
is also supplied that will return its gradient value to aid the user in other techniques.
Note: This technique is borrowed from well test analysis and may not be appropriate due to the
small volumes of fluid involved with a formation tester.
1. Click the Derivative Plot Tab to display the Derivative Build Up Analysis.
1501
Senergy
Note: due to the nature of the derivative plot and the buildup data used as input to it, gauge noise
in late time causes large fluctuations in the derivative. Filters have been supplied with the
Derivative plot to filter the input data and / or the the derivative.
2. Click the Filter Raw Build-up Data Button to display the Filter Raw Build-up Data Dialog.
Type the Required Number of Levels to Filter the Raw Build-up Data by and Click Apply to
Apply the Filter to the Derivative Plot.
Senergy
1502
3. Click the Filter Raw Derivative Data to display the Filter Raw Derivative Data Dialog.
Type the Required Number of Levels to Filter the Raw Derivative Data by and Click Apply to
Apply the Filter to the Derivative Plot.
1503
Senergy
Add a Gradient Line or a User Line to the Derivative Plot

Either a Zero Gradient Line or a Negative Half Gradient Line can be added to the Derivative Plot
using the Gradient Line Buttons in the Derivative Plot Pane. The following example shows a Zero
Gradient Line in the Derivative Plot.
The next example shows a Negative Half Gradient Line.
Senergy
1504
A User Line can also be added to the Derivative Plot by Clicking the Add User Line to the Chart
Button.
Related Topics
1505
Senergy

11.12.2.6 Produce the Spherical Analysis
Once the Drawdown Analysis has been completed, the Spherical Build Up Analysis Chart will be
displayed in the Spherical Plot Tab. The Spherical Buildup plot uses pressure data since the stop
of the drawdown (the buildup) plotted against the Spherical Time Function. Once a spherical flow
regime is achieved in late time the plot exhibits a constant gradient that can be extrapolated to the
y-axis (infinite time) where a theoretical extrapolated formation pressure is read off (P*). The
gradient can be used to determine mobility (and permeability if the fluid viscosity is known).
1. Click the Spherical Plot Tab to display the Spherical Build Up Analysis.
2. Click the Select Points for Regression Button and Click the Required Points in the
Spherical Build Up Analysis Chart to define the Spherical Build Up Gradient and P*
Spherical.
Senergy
1506
3. Right Click the Spherical Build Up Analysis to automatically draw the Spherical Build Up
Gradient on the Spherical Build Up Analysis Chart and to automatically add the values
for the Spherical Build Up Gradient and P* Spherical to the Data Table and the Spherical
Build Up Analysis Pane.
4. Manually enter the values for Viscosity, Compressibility and Porosity to automatically
update the Spherical Permeability and the Spherical Mobility values in the Data Table
and the Spherical Build Up Analysis Pane.
1507
Senergy
Related Topics
11.12.2.7 Produce the Radial Analysis
Once the Drawdown Analysis has been completed, the Radial Build Up Analysis Chart will be
displayed in the Radial Plot Tab. The Radial Buildup plot uses pressure data since the stop of the
drawdown (the buildup) plotted against the Radial Time Function. Once a radial flow regime is
achieved in late time the plot exhibits a constant gradient that can be extrapolated to the y-axis
(infinite time) where a theoretical extrapolated formation pressure is read off (P*). The gradient
can be used to determine mobility (and permeability if the fluid viscosity is known).
1. Click the Radial Plot Tab to display the Radial Build Up Analysis.
Senergy
1508
2. Click the Select Points for Regression Button and Click the Required Points in the Radial
Build Up Analysis Chart to define the Radial Build Up Gradient and P* Radial.
3. Right Click the Radial Build Up Analysis to automatically draw the Radial Build Up Gradient
on the Radial Build Up Analysis Chart and to automatically add the values for the Radial
Build Up Gradient and P* Radial to the Data Table and the Radial Build Up Analysis Pane.
1509
Senergy
4. Manually enter the values for Viscosity and Thickness to automatically update the Radial
Permeability and the Radial Mobility values in the Data Table and the Radial Build Up
Analysis Pane.
Related Topics
11.12.3 Formation Testing Equations and Methodology

The single drawdown and buildup equations (listed below) can be used for both single and
multiple drawdown types of Formation Tester tools on the market. The only exception is when
Schlumberger's RFT (Repeat Formation Tester) data is available. In this case the RFT dual-rate
Senergy
1510
equations are listed.
1. Equations Used For Drawdown Analysis

Drawdown Analysis uses the following equation (SI Units):
Drawdown Analysis Equation

There are 2 methods available for calculating 'Effective Probe Radius', rpe
, from Muskat
, from Carlson and Jaeger
The 'Drawdown Analysis Equation' can be re-written in terms of field units (and mobility) as,
Nomenclature:
rs
= snorkel radius (inches)
Pdd = Drawdown Pressure (psi)

V
= Volume of pre-test chamber (cc)
= Pre-test drawdown time (sec)
= Flow rate of pretest (V/T, cc/sec)
= Flow coefficient (1.0 to 1.5 dimensionless)
2. Equations Used For Spherical Buildup Analysis

Analysis is based on spherical flow in an infinite acting homogeneous medium from the
expression:
Spherical Flow Equation

where,
is the 'Single Rate Spherical Time Function' and is used for all
Formation Testing tools except for RFT, and,
is the '2-Rate Spherical Time Function' and is only

used for spherical analysis of RFT data.
A plot of P versus 'Spherical Time Function' yields a straight line once spherical flow is achieved
1511
Senergy
and the effect of wellbore (or system) storage is minimal. 'Spherical Permeability' is calculated
from the gradient of this straight line from:
which rearranged gives,
Spherical Permeability Equation

Finally the extrapolated pressure, P*, is given by the intercept of this gradient line and the
Pressure axis.
Nomenclature and units used:
pi
= initial formation pressure, psi
ps
= probe pressure (spherical buildup), psi
q1
= flowrate during the first sampling period, cc/sec
q2
= flowrate during the second sampling period, cc/sec
= viscosity of fluid in uncontaminated formation, cp
= porosity of formation, fraction
ct
= total compressibility of fluid in uncontaminated formation, psi-1
ks
= isotropic spherical build-up permeability, md
T1
= sampling time at rate q1, seconds or minutes
T2
= elapsed time after shut-in, seconds or minutes
3. Equations Used For Radial Buildup Analysis

Used to calculate a P* at time function = 0 by using a best fit line through the radial part of the plot
(if it exists), extrapolated to the pressure axis.
Can also be used to calculate a permeability, however viscosity, , and bed thickness, h, is
required. (h can be estimated from open hole logs). Generally flowrate, q, is average rate from
drawdown.
Analysis is based on radial flow in an infinite acting homogeneous medium from the expression:
Radial Flow Equation

where,
is the 'Single Rate Radial Time Function' and is used

for all Formation Testing tools except for RFT, and,
Senergy
1512
is the '2-Rate Radial Time Function' and is only

used for radial analysis of RFT data.
A plot of P versus 'Radial Time Function' yields a straight line once radial flow is achieved and the
effect of wellbore (or system) storage is minimal. 'Radial Permeability' is calculated from the
gradient of this straight line using the equation:
Radial Permeability Equation

Finally the extrapolated pressure, P*, is given by the intercept of this gradient line and the
Pressure axis.
Nomenclature and units used:
pi
= initial formation pressure, psi
pc
= probe pressure (radial buildup), psi
q1
= flowrate during the first sampling period, cc/sec
q2
= flowrate during the second sampling period, cc/sec
= viscosity of fluid in uncontaminated formation, cp
= porosity of formation, fraction
ct
= total compressibility of fluid in uncontaminated formation, psi-1
kr
= isotropic radial build-up permeability, md
= thickness of bed, ft
T1
T2
= elapsed time after shut-in, seconds or minutes
4. Equations used For Derivative Plot

The Derivative plot is plotted on a Log-Log scale and plots 2 sets of data which are calculated
based on the buildup starting at Time=0 and the corresponding flowing pressure.
The first set of data is 'Delta-P' which is t he difference between the buildup pressure (at
Time>0) and the flowing pressure (at Time=0),
P=P(t)-Pf lowing
The second set of data is the 'Derivative' itself,
Derivative t.
d ( P)
dt
1513
Related Topics
Senergy
Section
12
Working with Multiple Wells
1515
12
Senergy
To handle large multi-well projects within IP a number of modules have been developed to make
the task easier. These modules can be accessed from this menu or from some of the other main
menu items as shown below.
Manage Multi-Well Header Info.. This module can also be accessed from within the Well
Multi-Well Options menu.
Manage Multi-Well Curve Sets. This module can also be accessed from within the Well
Manage Multi-Well Curve Headers. This module can also be accessed from within the Well
Manage Multi-Well Zones/Tops. This module can also be accessed from within the Well
Multi-well Parameter Distribution.
Multi-Well Batch Operation.
Multi-Well Change Parameters.
Multi-Well Curve Statistics. This module can also be accessed from within the View menu.
Multi-Well Correlation Viewer. This module can also be accessed from within the View
menu.
Multi-well Cutoff and Summation. This module can also be accessed from within the
Interpretation menu.
Related Topics
Multi-Well Parameter Distribution
Multi-Well Batch Operation
Section 12.
Working with Multiple Wells :
Senergy
Multi-Well Change Parameters

Multi-Well Curve Statistics
Section 12.
Working with Multiple Wells :
1516
1517
12.1
Senergy
Working with Curves in Multiple Wells
The Multi-well Options menu item was introduced in Version 3.3. to un-clutter the Well dropdown menu. All the multi-well Well Header management, Curve Header management, Curve
Set management and editing of multi-well Zone/Tops Sets tools can be launched from both
the Well Menu and the Multi-Well Menu.
Related Topics
Multiple Well Zones/Top Sets
12.1.1 Manage Multi-Well Well Header Info.

The Manage Multi-Well Well Header Info. module provides the user with an editing interface
where cultural well data entries can be edited and checked for consistency. For example, one
could have a database containing 20 wells drilled from the same platform / drilling rig and you
might like to make all the Rig Name or Operating Company names consistent. This interface
allows the user to make multi-well edits simultaneously which will be saved to the IP database
Section 12.1 Working with Multiple Wells : Working with Curves in Multiple Wells
Senergy
1518
when Save all Wells to Database is selected from the File menu.
The module is launched from the Multi-Well Options sub-menu, located under the main Well
menu.
Selecting this module launches a Select Wells dialog. The user can create a well list using the
wells loaded in memory or retrieve a saved well list. Once the wells have been selected the
Manage Multi-Well Header Info. window is initialized. The editing operations are all performed
within this single grid type interface, illustrated below:
The module is based around a spreadsheet style interface which lists, in columns, the Well
Attributes loaded for all selected, in-memory wells.
Click the Change Wells Button to Display the Select Wells Dialog and Edit the Loaded
Wells.
1519
Senergy
Each well occupies one row in the table.

The user navigates through the Well Attributes by scrolling left-to-right across the screen.
Individual well entries can be edited for any attribute, or global changes can be applied to multiple
wells in the well list.
To change a single well attribute in a single well :
Type a new value or select an option from a drop-down menu (where available) into the
single cell. Click Apply to make the change and save the change into the well.
To change a single well attribute in multiple wells :

1. Tick the Select column for all the rows (wells) you wish to edit. Then either:
2. Select an existing entry value or text string for an attribute you wish to make consistent, by
clicking in the cell containing that value.
3. Then click the Column Same button. All entries in all selected wells will update to the
chosen value, or
4. In a column that is entirely blank, type in a value in a single cell, then click the Column Same
Senergy
1520
button. All entries in all selected wells will update to the new value.
Display Well Location as - gives the user the choice of displaying a Wells surface
coordinates as UTMs or as Latitude / Longitude.
The Output button allows the user to create a text file (WellHeaders.Txt) of the Multi-Well
header Info. listing or to output the listing to the clipboard where it can then be pasted into an
ExcelTM spreadsheet document.
Related Topics
1521
Senergy

12.1.2 Manage Multi-Well Curve Sets

The Manage Multi-Well Curve Sets module allows the user to edit Curve Set names within a
multi-well IP project. This functionality could be used in numerous ways. For example:
To standardize Set names within an IP project.
To check and correct for inconsistencies in Set naming conventions across multiple wells in
an IP project.
To tidy up a database, by removing any Sets which do not contain any curves.
To create well lists which the user knows contain certain Sets. These well lists are then
used in other IP modules.
Selecting the module launches a Select Wells dialog. Once the wells have been selected the
Manage Multi-Well Curve Sets window is initialized. The editing operations are all performed
within this single grid type interface, illustrated below:
The window comprises a Set Filter control panel in the top left hand corner of the window, the
Operations buttons in the top right hand corner and a grid display panel. The grid panel is
Senergy
1522
initially populated with all the curve Sets in all the selected wells. The data is arranged in the grid
with each row showing a Well Name and a Set Name. The columns are, from left to right, Well
Name, Short Set Name, New Set Name, Long Set Name, Curve Count (the number of
curves each Set contains) and Selected and Delete Columns.
Set Filter Panel

In the Set Filter panel, the user should type in a text string into either the Short Set Name or
Long Set Name text box. The star symbol,*, wildcard can be used as a quick way to filter for
Sets with similar names. The wildcard can be used in the following ways:
text * - find any Set names starting with the characters text.
* text - find any Set names ending with the characters text.
* text * - find any Set names which contain the characters text within them.
NOTE: the following notation is not valid: *text*text*
Using both Short and Long Set names in the filter allows the user a further level of filtering
capability. Clicking the Apply Filter button applies the user-defined filter to the current well
selection. The editing grid is populated with curve Set names meeting the users filter criteria.
Multiple filter operations can be performed by changing the filter text string and clicking Apply
Filter. The user has the ability to either:
Add to List - Appends multiple filter results rows to the grid display. Select the Add to List
radio button before clicking Apply Filter.
Replace List - Clears the existing filter results and only displays the new results. Select the
Replace List radio button before clicking Apply Filter.
The grid refreshes with wells and Curve Sets that meet the filter criteria. The rows can be sorted
alphabetically, either by selecting a category in the Sort Order drop-down box, or by clicking in
the title cell of a column in the grid. This has the same effect as sorting in ascending /
descending alphabetic order, depending on the column the user clicks on. The Reverse Sort
check box performs the same function.
The Operations Buttons:

Clear Filter - clears all entries from the grid display.
Apply Filter - after typing in a filter text string in the Short Name or Long Name box clicking
the Apply Filter performs the operation.
Select All Sets - this button sets a flag in all rows in the grid display in the Selected column.
The button toggles between Select all Sets and Un-select all Sets - allowing the user to
quickly select/un-select multiple rows in the grid.
1523
Senergy
Select Empty Sets - sets a delete flag in the Delete Column in grid rows where Curve Count
is 0. The user can scroll down the grid and uncheck any rows that they do not want to
delete. Click the Apply button to perform the delete operation.
Change Wells - launches the Select Well dialog, allowing the user to change the wells being
used in the filter process.
Column Same - this button is only active when the mouse cursor is clicked in a cell in either
the New Set Name or Long Set Name columns. The button allows the user to paste a
selected Curve Set name into all Well rows in the grid display.
Make Well List - this creates a well list of the wells selected using the Set filters. This list can
then be used to load wells which the user knows contain certain Sets into other IP modules.
Renaming Multiple Curve Sets

Multiple Curve Sets can be renamed to a consistent Short Set Name / Long Set Name by
filtering on a character string, selecting a name to call all rows in the grid and then clicking the
Column Same operation button. This works in the following way:
1. Apply the required filter to the well selection.
2. Click the Select All Sets button. A tick will appear in each Selected row. Un-check the
Selected column for any rows containing Sets you do not wish to change.
3. Click in the grid cell of the New Set Name you wish to use for all selected wells. Either use
an existing Set Name or type in a character string (max. 4 characters and must not start
with a number).
4. Click the Column Same button.
5. To change the Long Set Name - click in the Long Set Name cell you wish to copy to other
wells, or type in a new Long Set Name in a cell.
6. Click the Column Same button.
Senergy
1524
The selected rows will update to the user-selected New Set Name.
Clicking the Apply button commits any changes the user has made to the IP in-memory
database wells.
Trying to rename sets within the same well to the same name will cause warning
messages to be displayed as IP will attempt to merge the contents of the sets into the one
newly named set. This is not recommended.
Deleting Empty Curve Sets

Empty Curve Sets (Curve Count = 0) can be deleted from the IP project by :
Clicking the Select Empty Sets button to flag all empty curve Sets for deletion. (a tick
appears in the Delete column of the selected Sets).
Click the Apply button to perform the delete operation.
Related Topics
1525
Senergy
12.1.3 Manage Multi-Well Curve Headers

The Manage Multi-Well Curve Headers functionality allows the user to select and edit curve
names and curve display parameters for multiple wells in an IP database. The module is
able to filter and perform edits to curve display parameters for up to 1024 curves at one time, in
the selected database. It also allows the user to delete multiple curves from multiple wells
using curve filtering criteria.
Selecting the module launches a Select Wells dialog. Once the well selection is confirmed by
clicking the OK button the editing window is initialised.
The Manage Multi-Well Curve Headers editing window contains a number of panels. The upper
panel is used to set up and execute search criteria to filter to desired groups and types of curves
and to select the type of edit that will be performed on the curves. The lower panel contains an
interactive grid organised into four tabs General, Descriptions, Statistics and History, as per
the single well Manage Curve Headers option, to show curve display parameters.
The user can apply a number of filters to select the curves to be edited or deleted.
The Curve Type filter allows a generic sorting of curves in the selected wells. For example,
filter for all curves of type Density or type Neutron.
The Curve Name box can be filled in by typing in a known curve name, or by typing in a text
character or text string plus wild character *. For example, typing in GR selects all curves
named GR while entering G* will select all curves beginning with the letter G. The filter is not
case sensitive.
The Set Name box allows the user to filter for a particular Set Name across a multi well data
set. The box can be filled in by typing in a known Set name, or by typing in a text character or
text string plus wild character * , which will look for all matching Set name text strings.
Senergy
1526
The Update Module filter offers a further level of curve discrimination, for example to view
Gamma ray curves that have been modified by the Curve Splice module.
The Update Date From and To filters allow the user to select curves loaded or updated
within a particular time window. This is over-ridden by checking the Any Date check box
(default).
Final Curves only selects only those curves that have been been checked as Final in each
respective, single well, Manage Curve Headers module.
The Curve Sort Order drop-down list displays the criterion on which the filtered curve names
will be displayed.
The filter criteria are applied by selecting Go.
The grid will be populated with the wells and curves that meet the filter criteria.
The curves selected by the search / filter criteria can be edited collectively, using the operator
buttons in the top right hand corner of the editing window.
The Delete All button will add a tick to all the rows in the Delete Column in the table. Click on
Apply to execute the curve deletions.
The Lock All button will add a tick to all the rows in the Lock column in the table. The Lock
function prevents the user from inadvertently changing curve display attributes. Click on
Apply to lock all selected curve entries.
1527
Senergy
The Row all Same button permits the user to globally assign curve display parameters from
one row in the grid to all other rows in the grid. This would be used, for example, to
standardize curve type, curve line colour and right and left scales for all instances of a
particular curve in the database. This option does not change curve names in the grid. The
user clicks in one of the three left hand columns of the row which has the desired display
parameters, click the Row All Same button and all the display parameters in the rest of the
grid change to those of the selected row. Click on Apply to commit the changes to the
database.
The Column Same button allows the user to globally change individual curve names or
curve display parameters for all curves meeting the filter criteria. Click in the cell which
contains the desired curve name or parameter. Select Column Same button and all
selected cells in that column of the grid will change to the selected cell value. Click Apply to
save the changes to the database.
Senergy
1528
Combining and Clearing Filter Results

The user has the option to combine a number of searches and display the results in the same
grid using the Add to List and Replace List radio buttons. After displaying the first set of search
results and then applying a second set of filter criteria with Add to List selected, will concatenate
the results of the two searches in the grid. If you wish to select a new set of curves to edit and
you wish to see only those new curves, select the Replace List radio button to clear the grid
before clicking the Go button.
The Count of Wells meeting filter criteria message at the bottom left hand corner of the
interface lets the user see how many wells meet the search criteria for a particular curve or
curves.
The Change Wells button allows the user to re-select the wells selected for use in the
editing operation.
The Clear Filters button allows the user to completely clear the curve display grid at any
point and start again.
Make Well List button creates a well list. This well list file (Well List.wst) can then be used in
another module to load wells that the user knows contain a certain curve.
Print button can output a listing to a printer, file or to the clipboard. The printer listing is
limited and does not contain curve statistics. This is due to the limited width of hardcopy
output. This function will allow the user to output all or selected curves in a project.
Search for a Specific Curve Type

The Multi Well Curve Headers Dialog can be used to Filter Specific Curve Types for the Selected
1529
Senergy
Wells.
In the Filter Pane, Select the required Filter Parameters and Click Go to Display the Filter
Results in the Lower Pane.
NOTE: in the example below the Filter is for the GR Curve.
Related Topics
12.1.4 Multiple Well Zones/Top Sets

If the Multi Well check-box, in the top right-hand corner of the Zone Sets window, is checked,
the Zone Sets window will display all available Zone Sets for all in-memory wells. All the editing
functions that can be performed on a single well basis can now be performed on the Zone Sets
for all wells currently loaded into memory apart from Edit. For example, if you want to create the
same Tops Set for all wells, click the New button and a multi-well Tops Set will be created for
each well loaded in memory.
The Wells column shows the number of wells, currently loaded in memory, that contain a
particular Zone Set.
Senergy
1530
Edit Zones for Multiple Wells

The Multi Well Edit Zone tops window has the same functionality as the single well window.
However, when the New, Copy, Copy as Tops, or Edit Zones button is clicked then the Edit
Zone tops window appears and the window now has an additional column , Well Name, to
select the well to add a zone to. If the user is manually adding new Tops entries for additional
wells, a well name can be selected by clicking in a blank row in the Well Name Column and then
selecting a well name from the drop-down list box that is launched.
1531
The File and Paste from Spreadsheet

File and Paste from Spreadsheet
Senergy
buttons work in the same way as for a single well

operation, except that the first column of the data
selected from the spreadsheet must now contain the Well Name entries. It is possible to load all
tops for all wells simultaneously using this wi1ndow. The window allows up to 19,999 rows of
tops data to be loaded.
When the OK button is clicked the tops are loaded into the specified wells. If the well name
cannot be found amongst the currently loaded-in-memory wells then the row in the table is
ignored. NOTE: no error message is given. To check what was actually loaded, return to the
Edit Zone tops window by clicking Edit Zones on the Zones Sets window. All loaded tops for all
wells will then be listed.
Load Zones using the API or UWI in Multiple Wells

When loading the data in the Edit Multiple Zones Dialog the Well Name column can now contain
either the Well Name, the Well API Number or the Well UWI number. The option on what it
contains is selected at the base of the window Use to Select IP well.
Senergy
1532
Note when loading the program first will use the option selected, if it can not find a well to load the
data against it will make another search of open wells using the Well Name to match against.
Output Zones using the API or UWI in Multiple Wells

When the Output button is clicked this makes an ASCII file of the data in the window. The
Output Option section allows the addition of extra columns for API and UWI into the ASCII file.
The option of DB Well Number if checked will add the database IP well number in front of the
well name.
1533
Senergy
Note that if the API or UWI are included in the output then the data file can no longer be reloaded
using the File load option in the module.
Below is an example of the Output file displaying the API Number and the UWI Number for each
of the wells.
Related Topics
Senergy

1534
1535
12.2
Senergy
Working with Parameters in Multiple Wells
The Multi-Well Change Parameters module allows the user to change one or more parameters
in an interpretation module and (optionally) to re-run the analysis with the new parameter(s). This
can be useful if a field-wide interpretation has been made and new data has been acquired (for
example a new Rw value, or a different cementation factor m) that means changing an
interpretation parameter in all wells in the Field.
The Multi-well Parameter Distribution module is used in a multi-well field-type interpretation. It is
used to copy Parameter Sets from one well to other wells in the same project. The correct input
and output curves should be created and the user can check to see if the input curves have been
correctly chosen. At the same time as copying the parameters, the Zone Tops for each Parameter
Set are changed to reflect the zone tops in the other wells. NOTE: If zones have been locked in a
wells Parameter Set which is then subsequently distributed to other wells then the locked zones
will appear in the other wells Parameter Sets.
A typical workflow for a multi-well field study could be as follows :
Section 12.2 Working with Multiple Wells : Working with Parameters in Multiple Wells
Senergy
1536
Related Topics
12.2.1 Multi-Well Change Parameters

The Multi-Well Change Parameters module allows the user to change one or more parameters
in an interpretation module and (optionally) to re-run the analysis with the new parameter(s). This
can be useful if a field-wide interpretation has been made and new data has been acquired (for
example a new Rw value, or a different cementation factor m) that means changing an
interpretation parameter in all wells in the Field.
The module comprises 2 tabbed screens. The Wells tab allows the user to select / deselect
wells to make changes to. The Parameters tab allows the user to set up the Parameter Sets
and petrophysical parameters that are to be changed in all the selected wells.
1. On the Wells tab the user selects the wells to work on , either by ticking individual well
entries or by clicking the Select All button which will tick all in-memory wells. The UnSelect All button will remove any ticks from the selected wells. The Select - Well List
allows the user to select wells using a previously created well list. When a Parameter Set
is selected, any well that does not contain that particular Set will be greyed out on the Wells
tab.
1537
Senergy
2. On the Parameters tab, select the Parameter Set which includes the parameter that is to
be edited.
3. The Output Parameter drop-down list will be populated with all the relevant Parameters for
that particular Parameter Set. The values for the selected parameter will be displayed in the
grid panel, organized by zone (rows) and by well (columns). The program will try to set all
zones with the same Zone name on the same line, if no zone names have been used, then
the zones will be listed in increasing depth order.
Petrophysical parameter values can be edited in two ways:
1. One at a time - by manually changing each value in the grid by typing the value in or by
selecting a curve from the drop-down list,
Senergy
1538
2. collectively - by clicking in a row or column header, which will turn green (indicating a
column or row edit). In this mode, changing one value in the selected row or column will
automatically change all the values in that row or column to the selected value. If a curve
has been selected rather than a value the curve will be selected for all rows or columns.
These actions are illustrated below:
Column Edit:
Row Edit:
1539
Senergy
3. If all values of a parameter need to be changed in all zones and all wells then edit the value
in the New Value box and click the Apply to All Wells All Zones button. For flag-type
parameters (yes / no), for example, GR Use, OBM?, N/D Use, the check box to the left of
the New Value box is activated and can be used to switch on or off the selected flag.
Senergy
1540
1541
Senergy
Multiple parameter values for the same Parameter Set can be changed simultaneously. After
changing one parameter, select the second parameter and make the changes to that one.
Continue selecting parameters and making changes until finished. The parameters that have
been modified are listed in the panel in the top right hand corner of the window.
The Parameter Values can be copied to the clipboard and then pasted into another application,
for example, Microsoft Excel, using the Copy Button in the lower left corner of the dialog.
Modifications are not applied to the IP wells until the the OK button or the Re-Run Analysis
button is clicked. NOTE: If the user changes the Parameter Set before clicking the OK or ReRun Analysis button, any modifications to the previously selected Parameter Set will be lost.
The OK button, when clicked, will make the changes to the selected parameters for each well.
Changes that are made are recorded in the message panel at the base of the window.
Senergy
1542
By right mouse button clicking in the message window box, the selected messages can be
copied to the clipboard for inclusion in a document, all messages can be deleted and all lines in
the dialog box can be selected. The message box size can be re-arranged by placing the cursor
on the grey area just above the box and then dragging the box to a different height.
The Re-Run Analysis button, when clicked, will firstly save all parameter changes and then rerun the analyses used by the Parameter Sets. Results are reported in the message window.
Related Topics
12.2.2 Multi-Well Parameter Distribution

The Multi-well Parameter Distribution module is used in a multi-well field-type interpretation. It is
used to copy Parameter Sets from one well to other wells in the same project. The correct input
and output curves should be created and the user can check to see if the input curves have been
correctly chosen. At the same time as copying the parameters, the Zone Tops for each Parameter
Set are changed to reflect the zone tops in the other wells. NOTE: If zones have been locked in a
1543
Senergy
wells Parameter Set which is then subsequently distributed to other wells then the locked zones
will appear in the other wells Parameter Sets.
The user sets the well focus to the well with the interpreted Parameter Sets and then starts the
Parameter Distribution module. The following window will appear.
The user should select the multi-well Zone /Tops Set that is common to all wells, from the
Common Tops/Zones set drop-down list box. These zones do not have to be the same as the
interpretation parameter zones. If this box is left blank then the Zones Sets will still be copied to
the user-selected wells but the zone tops depths will remain the same as in the original well.
Wells to Populate. The user selects the wells into which to copy the selected Parameter
Sets.
Tops/Zones sets to distribute. The user selects the Parameter Sets from the current well
to copy to the other wells. The Clay Volume, Porosity / Sw and cut-off are the three
primary interpretation Parameter Sets.
The Select All and Select None buttons, located beneath the Wells to Populate list enable
Senergy
1544
you to toggle between selecting or de-selecting all wells in the list.

Select - Well List allows the user to use a previously created well list to check the Wells to
Populate boxes.
The Select All button, located beneath the Tops/Zones sets to distribute list, if clicked, will
automatically select all the listed Parameter Sets. Use the Select None button to deselect
all the Sets.
Copy using zone names - If checked, will allow the user to more-accurately distribute
Parameter Sets to multiple wells in an IP project or to distribute parameters to multiple
penetrations of reservoir zones in a single horizontal well. NOTE: this is a special case as
the user is required to be more rigorous in setting up the zones in the interpretation
modules. It is only useful if the names of all zones are defined in all the Sets being
distributed and in the common Tops Set.
The Run button will distribute the Parameter Sets. The user will be asked to confirm
whether or not to overwrite existing Sets.
The following is an illustration of how the tops are correlated between the common Parameter
Sets and the distributed Sets.
1545
Senergy
To illustrate the usage of the Copy using zone names option further see the following example
below:
In this example there are three wells B7, B1 and B4. B7 is the active well. "Final Tops" is the
common Tops Set. The user wants to distribute the Tops Set "Test" to wells B1 and B4. NOTE:
the Tops Set "Test" has zone names and depth intervals that are not found in any Set within the
wells B1 and B4. If the parameter distribution is performed with the Copy using zone names unchecked then a "Test" Tops Set is created in wells B1 and B4. The depth intervals for each zone
are realigned using the common Tops Set as a guide.
This method does not require that the zones in the parameter Sets being copied have the same
top and bottom depths or have the same number of zones as the common Tops Set. This gives
this method the advantage of allowing interpretation Sets with different zonation schemes to be
moved from well to well with their depth intervals being realigned using a different zonation
scheme.
Senergy
1546
If this procedure is now repeated but with the Copy using zone names checked then an Error
message will appear informing the user that the well B1 does not have any zone names in
common with the "Test" Tops Set. The user can either remove the well or select a Set (to be
distributed) that does have similar zone names to the common Set or uncheck the Copy using
zone names box.
1547
Senergy
So this option is only really useful if all zones are named consistently between wells. If this is
done then it is possible to have a base vertical well interpretation parameter Set being copied to a
horizontal well with repeat zones (named the same).
If an interpretation Parameter Set is selected in the Top/Zones sets to distribute list then a tab
will appear with the name of the interpretation module. This allows the user to look through all the
wells and check that the Input Curves for that module have the correct curves assigned to them.
Currently, the list of Input Curves includes all of the curves in the interpretation module whether
they are used in the interpretation or not. The screenshot below illustrates this point.
Senergy
1548
1549
Senergy
When the Distribute button is clicked a number of Confirm messages may appear depending
on the individual database circumstances. If, as in the case illustrated above, there are missing
curves then the following message will appear:
If the user answers Yes to this then they are taken back to the Clay Volume tab of the
Parameter Distribution module and can type in a curve name or select a curve name from the
drop down lists for the missing curves. If, however, they are quite happy that all the wells have
the correct curves for the module then the user should select No or No to All. If the user
answers No to All then all the {Try to populate on run} messages disappear. As the Clay
Volume module is normally the first module to be run in a petrophysical analysis the input curves
are not dependant on another module so there isnt a chance of missing curves being populated
on run. However, for the Porosity and Water Saturation and Cutoff and Summation modules
if these have missing curves, due to the modules not previously being run, then the curves will be
filled in as they are created.
The module then checks to see if the wells have the Clay Volume parameter Set already and if
they do then the following message will appear:
This gives the user the chance to remove a well that they dont want the Clay Volume parameter
Set replacing in.
In the following example the Clay Volume parameters are being distributed from well A1 to wells
A2, A3, A4, A6 and A7. The Distribute and Re-run Analysis button is clicked.
Senergy
1550
The reason why the analysis failed in well A3 was because there wasnt a neutron curve available
in that well. The user had the chance to correct this when they received the second Confirm
message but chose to ignore it and attempted to run the analysis. To avoid this type of scenario
the user could have removed the well from the Parameter Distribution module or furnished a
neutron curve for the well or changed the Clay Volume Analysis in well A1 to use a Double Clay
Indicator of Density and Sonic instead of Density and Neutron.
The output curves for each well can be the same as those in the Parameter Set being
distributed. However, within the module there is the functionality to create new Sets and change
the depths and step of the output Set.
In the example below the Clay Volume Analysis module has been run on well A1 with the output
curves going into a Set called "O" (Output). To distribute this Parameter Set to wells A2, A3 and
A4 the Parameter Distribution module is opened. As well as the Clay Volume tab there is now
an Output Sets tab.
The Output Sets tab allows the user to quickly see which wells have the same output Set as the
in-focus well.
1551
Senergy
By clicking on a yellow cell, i.e. a well that has the output Set already in it, the Well Set Depths
Editor is opened. The user can then change the output Set depth interval, the step and the units
of that output Set.
If the well does not have an output Set of the same name as the in-focus wells Parameter Set
then this Set will be created in the well when the Distribute button is clicked. The top and bottom
depths and step for the created output Set will be taken from that wells Default Set. This can
subsequently be changed by going back to the Output Sets tab and clicking on the now yellow
cell to bring up the Well Set Depths Editor.
Note: If the Mineral Solver Parameter Set is chosen to be distributed then he trend curves as
well as the input curves for each model appear in the MinSolve Interp tab.
Senergy
Related Topics
1552
1553
12.3
Senergy
The Multi-Well Batch Operation module is used to run multiple IP module scripts, on one or
more wells, in a single batch procedure. The module is accessed from the main Multi-Well
menu
Multi-Well Batch Operation.
Well Selection List

Loaded Wells - If this option is chosen then by clicking in a blank row in the Wells panel a well
name can be chosen from the drop-down well list. Alternatively, all the wells currently loaded in
memory and those not loaded can be added to the list simultaneously, by clicking on the Wells
panel title.
Section 12.3 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-Well Batch Operation
Senergy
1554
All Database Wells - If this option is chosen then only those wells which have been saved to
memory will be shown. When this option is chosen the Display with Well Name panel becomes
active.
Display with Well name

There are a number of choices from which the user can choose to include a well comment or API
number or UWI with the well name. This should make it easier for the user to distinguish wells.
None
Well Comment
API number
UWI
NOTE: if a selection other than None has been made, the user wont see any change to the well
name until the Wells column header is clicked or the individual well is reselected from the dropdown list within the Wells column.
The Select - Well List button allows the user to utilize the Well List functionality to select and
load sub-sets of database wells.
The Batch Operation Panel

The Batch Operation panel contains 6 columns; Use, Module, Parameter File Name / Set
Name, Output Set, Top Dep and Bot Dep.
1555
Senergy
The Use column lets the user select which modules are to be run in the batch process. To
select / de-select individual modules to run in the batch process, the user should tick the
Use cell for that module. Clicking on the Use column title, toggles all module rows that have
been filled in, between selected (checked) and de-selected (un-checked) modes.
The Module options for each line can be selected from the drop-down menu.
Click in the first empty Module cell to see the full drop-down list of options. as illustrated above.
The small zone icon in front of some of the modules indicates that in these modules, if selected,
the user can define the interval over which the module will run. For the other modules the interval
over which they will run has been defined within the module. If the user wants to change the
interval then they would have to go into the module, select the depths, run the module and then
Senergy
1556
select it within the Batch Operation module.

NOTE: The shown list includes User Programs which may not be available to every IP user.
The following modules can be run in the batch process. NOTE: the text in parentheses "()" at
the end of each line in the following list is the file extension that IP uses to identify different Set
types when they have been saved externally as disk files:
Formula
: User Formula module (.frm)
Multi-Line Formula : Multi-Line Formula module (.mlf)

Temperature
: Temperature Gradient module (.tem)
ZoneCurves
: Zones to Curves. Converts zone numbers into a Flag curve or

Interpretation module parameters, for example Gr Clay, to a continuous
curve. Or, where a Tops Set has been set up to define a Flag curve, the
curve is created using Zone Names and an associated user-selected
flag value (.ztc).
Filter
: Filter module. Filters log curves (.flt)
Basic Log Func
: Basic Log Functions module. One or more of the function tabs can be
run (.blc)
Fill Data gaps
: Fill Data Gaps module (.fdg)
Basic Log Anal
: Basic Log Analysis module. One or more of the calculation tabs can be
run (.set)
Clay Volume
: Clay Volume Interpretation module (.set)
Porosity Sw
: Phi /Sw interpretation module (.set)
Mineral Solver
: Mineral Solver module (.set)
Cutoff
: Cut-off and Summation module (.set)
UserPrograms
: Any available user program (Archie, Differentiate, Normalize Array,

etc....) (UsrProg..)
The modules that are to be run in the batch process for the selected list of wells must have
saved Parameter Sets. Parameter Sets are saved from within the actual interpretation modules
that have been run on individual wells. The user can see them by using the Load / Save
Parameter Sets button
Save to Database or Save to Disk File buttons in each module. See
Parameter Set Management for more details.

The Parameter File Name / Set Name column - The user adds the Parameter Set name to the
data grid. Zoneable Parameter Sets, generated by the interpretation modules, can either be saved
internally within the IP database, or as external (.set) files in individual well subdirectories. Internal
1557
Senergy
parameter sets are distinguished by having a grey background colour and a name without any file
path prefix. External parameter sets are distinguished by containing a full file path and file name.
NOTE: In the example shown below, the Clay Volume parameter Set is an internal set ("Clay")
and the Porosity / Water Saturation parameter set ("PhiSw.set") is an external parameter set.
See Parameter Set Management for more details. The Browse buttons can be used to find
and select the required external file names (.set, .frm, .mlf, etc...). When an Interpretation
module is selected from the list e.g. Clay Volume, the Parameter File Name / Set Name cell in
that row of the grid will default to pick up the internal Parameter Set type for the selected module.
To choose another, external Set, click the Browse button to search for and load an appropriate
Parameter Set file (file extension is .set).
Output Set column - this allows the user to select a Set into which the output curves from the
selected module will be output to. The Module Set is the output Set of the selected module. The
output Set can be different to the Module Set of the module. So if the user decides to run the Clay
Volume module on a number of wells the user can output the results of the Clay Volume module
to a different Set than the Clay Volume Parameter Set (Module Set) which is defined within the
module. Output Sets can be selected from the drop-down list of all available Sets.
Top Dep / Bot Dep column - this allows the user to define the depths over which a module will
be run. Depths can either be typed directly into the Top Dep / Bot Dep columns or can be
selected using the
symbol. Clicking on this opens the Select Zone Depths dialogue box.
Here the user can select Top Sets and individual zones. These can be displayed within the
Multi-Well Batch Operation module as either depths or zones using the Return radio buttons.
Senergy
1558
The modules will be run in the order they are displayed (from top to bottom) in the window.
Therefore, if one module depends on the results of another, it will be important that the running
order in the list is correct. The order the modules are run in can be re-arranged by clicking in the
grey column to the left of the Use column and dragging a row up or down to another position.
Curve Sets
If a Set name is not available in the drop-down list then clicking the Add Set button will launch
the Add Set Names dialog which allows the user to create a new Set name which will appear in
all the in-memory wells.
Separate Parameter Set per Well - This check box has the following functions:
If not checked - the program will search for the specific Parameter Set / Formula / User
1559
Senergy
Program that is displayed in the Parameter File Name / Set Name column and these
Parameter Sets / Formulae / User Programs will be run on all wells in the Well list, when the
Run button is clicked.
If checked - the program will search the WELL**** subdirectories of each well in the well list
for the particular Parameter Set / Formula / User Program names set up in the Module list.
This gives the user the ability, for example, to call slightly different user formulae for different
wells (as long as the user formulae have the same name) or to select different interpretation
Parameter Sets for individual wells (as long as they are named consistently). The Parameter
File Name / Set Name column display will change to show the Parameter Set / formula name
only, without the full directory path extension. When the Run button is clicked, the Batch
Operation Process Log panel in the lower part of the window will indicate whether a Module
has been run successfully in a well or an error message will be displayed where a Parameter
Set / Formula does not exist.
Set Path button : The user can use this button to fully specify the directory path of each of the
Modules called in the Multi-Well Batch operation. This is useful if several users need to run
the same multi-well batch files, since the full file location of each Set/ Formula/User Program
is saved into the Batch (.fbt) file.
Clicking the Run button will start the batch processing operation. The process is run by
loading the saved Parameter Set into the module and executing it. As the batch operation
executes, a scrolling information log will be visible in the Batch Operation Process Log text
panel at the bottom of the window.
Any errors found while running the module will stop the batch process and a Confirm dialog
will appear along with an error message in the Batch Operations Process Log.
The user will be prompted to Continue with the batch items ?. The user has three choices:
1. If the user chooses Yes, to continue with the process, then the Confirm dialog will be closed
and the rest of the batch process will continue, step by step, for every well in the routine.
Choosing this option then requires the user to confirm Yes to every error that is flagged in
the process log window. This could be a laborious task if there are tens or even hundreds
of wells in the batch operation. The alternative in such a situation is to click the Yes to All
Senergy
1560
button (See below).

2. If the user chooses No, the batch process will stop. The Multi-Well Batch Operation
window will stay open but the user can try to correct the errors in the failed well, before rerunning the batch operation. NOTE: Any modules showing errors in the information window
will not have been run.
3. Clicking the Yes to All button will continue to run the selected modules and will simply
provide error information on failed processes. The batch process will not stop at each
failure but will continue to run all selected modules on all wells in the well list. When the
batch operation has finished, the user can then examine the Batch Operation Process
Log, analyse the failures and correct the modules, re-selecting only the failed wells and rerun the batch routine. It is possible to cancel a running Multi-Well Batch operation by
clicking on the Cancel button.
The Batch Operation Process Log can be copied to a text file by right-mouse-clicking on the
information window to launch the Select All / Copy / Delete All dialog.
Select All - selects all the text in the process log
Copy - copies the selected text into the Windows clipboard
Delete All - clears all text from the Process Log information window.
The selected messages will be copied to the clipboard and can be pasted into another
application.
The Save button - allows the user to save a batch operation to a text (.fbt) file.
The Load button - allows the user to re-load a batch process from a saved (.fbt) file.
The Clear All button - allows the user to clear both the selected Wells and the Modules
from the Batch Operation interface.
The Clear Wells button - allows the user to clear the Wells panel of all entries.
Related Topics
1561
Senergy
Senergy
12.4
1562
Multi-Well Curve Statistics allows the user to display and report curve statistics on multiple
curves in multiple wells in an IP database. The module is organized on 3 tabs, MultiWell Curves,
Report, Discriminators.
Multi-Well Curves Tab

Select the wells to report curve statistics for, by clicking in a blank row and highlighting a well
from the drop-down list. Alternatively, click on the Well Name column title to quickly select
all in-memory wells. The selected well list can then be further modified by ticking or unticking the Use column on the left-hand side of the grid. Click on the Use column title to
toggle between selecting all wells / selecting no wells to include in the report.
Clicking the Advanced Well Select allows the user to utilize the Well List functionality to
select and load sub-sets of database wells.
Curves are selected by highlighting a curve name in the Available Curves panel and then
either;
Click on the > chevron to copy the curve name into the Selected Curves All Wells panel, or
Drag/drop a curve name from the Available Curves panel to the Selected Curves All
Wells panel.
If the selected curve is present in the other selected wells in the list, the curve name will be
highlighted in red text colour in those wells. If the equivalent curve is not named consistently
between wells, the user must identify and select all appropriate curve names in all the wells,
before running the statistics. To do this, click in a well row. The curves associated with that
Section 12.4 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-Well Curve Statistics
1563
Senergy
well will be listed in the Available Curves list. Select the curves you wish to include by
drag/drop or using the > or >> buttons. Alternatively, the user could use the Multi-Well Manage Curve Headers module to name curves consistently across the entire well
dataset.
The user can choose to display curve statistics over a particular zone or group of zones in
multiple wells by using the Define button at the right-hand end of each selected Well row. The
following window is launched:
If a selected well does not contain the Zone / Tops Set or the Top or Bottom are not defined in a
well, the well will be de-selected from the main Multi-Well Curve Statistics window.
The corresponding check box in the Use Column will be cleared. At this point the user can
choose either :
to continue with the operation, excluding wells that have been de-selected, or
to edit the appropriate Zone /Tops set (See Edit Zone Tops) to add the missing Tops and
Bottoms in the de-selected wells, save the edits and re-apply the Define filter.
The Report Tab

The Report Tab allows the user to select the statistics that are to be saved in the report,
including an interactive selection of percentile values to return. The report can either be output as
Senergy
1564
a Space Delimited (.txt) text file for viewing in Notepad or as a Comma Delimited (.csv) file for
viewing in a spreadsheet program.
The Discriminators Tab

The Discriminators tab can be used to further refine the selection of data for which to report the
statisitics. Discriminators are particularly useful if the user wants to find out the average value or
net interval of a curve over an interval. For example: the user wants to do a quick net sand count
for an interval and use a gamma ray of less than 30 API to discriminate the sand interval.
When the Run button is clicked the user will be prompted for a file name under which to save the
report. Once the report is created the file will be automatically opened and displayed. The
following is an example of a Multi-Well curve statistics report:
Da t e
We l l
Ru n
2 7 / 0 7 / 2 0 0 5
Cu r v e
Me a n
A1
I mp : G R
1 6 0 . 0 0 0
A2
GA P I
6 8 . 3 6 7
GR
1 8 3 . 3 7 5
A4
GA P I
7 9 . 0 9 5
GR
1 6 0 . 3 7 5
A3
Un i t s
Me d i a n
GA P I
8 6 . 6 1 6
GR
1 6 7 . 3 7 5
GA P I
7 0 . 0 9 6
1 1 : 3 2 : 4 9
Nu l l s
F a i l Di s c
Mo d e
1 9
8 1 . 8 1 3
0
5 7 . 2 1 9
0
9 7 . 3 7 5
0
8 0 . 0 0 0
St d
0
2 1 . 2 1 1
0
3 2 . 5 9 1
0
9 8 . 7 7 0
0
9 6 . 7 0 4
To p
Bo t t o m
Ne t
Mi n
3 1 4 2 . 0 4 0
3 5 9 . 2 9 9
7 . 4 8 4
3 6 8 4 . 9 7 2
1 8 5 . 1 2 6
1 9 . 9 5 3
3 2 2 0 . 0 6 4
3 6 0 . 2 1 1
1 0 . 7 1 1
3 3 2 7 . 9 6 3
3 1 8 . 1 1 3
1 0 . 3 2 8
De v
2 7 8 1 . 9 7 6
4 3 . 3 9 5
3 5 0 0 . 0 0 0
3 4 . 5 3 3
2 8 6 0 . 0 0 0
4 4 . 1 8 6
3 0 1 0 . 0 0 0
3 1 . 1 2 6
Related Topics
Ma x
1565

Senergy
Senergy
12.5
1566
The Multi-Well Correlation Viewer module provides the user with an interface to view multiple
wells and to plot correlation lines between wells held in an IP database.
Zone tops can be displayed and edited and wells can be datumed (Flattened) on a zone top
or to a reference depth by simple mouse click operations.
Wells can be added or removed from the display window and moved around within the
multi-well viewer.
Multi-well plot formats can be saved into the database directory for easy recall and redisplay. Plots can be output to the clipboard for pasting into external documents or can be
sent directly to available printers.
The Multi-Well Correlation Viewer is launched by selecting the Multi-Well Correlation

Viewer menu item under the View menu, or by using the speed button (
).
Up to 10 multi-well plots can be displayed simultaneously. Each multi-well view can display
up to 50 wells. However, there is an overall display limit of 250 individual well plots.
The multi-well viewer uses Zone / Tops Sets (tops) to draw correlation lines and shading
between the wells in the view window. The same Zones / Tops Set should be available in all
wells in order to draw the correlation lines between the wells. The module uses the Zone
Name to decide which zones correlate between wells. It is therefore essential that a
consistent naming convention is used. The module does not distinguish between upper and
lower case characters, therefore C zone and c Zone would be considered to be the same.
In the Multi-Well Correlation viewer the user can create a new Zone / Tops Set, then
interactively create, move or delete zone tops in that Set. Alternatively, the user can select
Section 12.5 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-Well Correlation Viewer
1567
Senergy
an existing multi-well Zone / Tops Set, make a copy of it and perform the same operations
on that Set.
When the Multi-Well Correlation Viewer window launches, the user uses the header bar
buttons to set up and modify the correlation viewer display.
The Buttons are, Wells, File, Settings, Options

The functionality associated with each button is described below. Creating, editing and renaming tops in this module is covered in the Editing Tops in the Multi-well Correlation
Viewer Section. A New Correlation workflow is presented at the end of this chapter.
Wells Button
The user must first select the wells to be displayed.
Click on the Wells button and, in the Select Wells dialog, move the wells to be displayed from
the Available Wells column to the Selected Wells column. The arrow buttons allow the user to
move wells between the Available Wells and Selected Wells panels. It is also possible to left
mouse click on a well name and drag it to the opposite panel while holding down the mouse
button. The order, from top to bottom, in which the selected wells appear in the Selected Wells
list will be the order, left to right, in which they are displayed in the Multi-Well Correlation Viewer
display.
Senergy
1568
Click OK to display the wells in the plot. At this stage only the well names and tops and bottom
depths will be displayed.
To display a Zone Set click on the Zone Set drop-down list box and select a Zone / Tops Set to
use. The zone tops and bottoms will be displayed in the window, together with any zone colours
scheme that has been set up in the Edit Zone / Tops Set module. A number of interactive
handles/markers and menus are available in the Correlation window to allow the user to modify /
create / delete zones in the correlation viewer.
The user can datum the multi-well view on a zone top, at an arbitrary depth (Align Reference
Depth) or at a user-selected depth (Set Align Depth). These are illustrated in the following
screen capture.
1569
Senergy
Checking the Fit check box in the correlation viewer header bar will force all wells to be displayed
in the plot window. If Fit is not checked, the wells will be displayed at their proper width and the
user will have to scroll left and right to display all wells.
Senergy
1570
In the display shown above the Tops set is being used for the correlation. The plot is depthaligned on the top Ness Zone. The vertical scale has been expanded to make the zone names
legible.
The Tops Only check box allows the user to toggle between a Tops Only display (illustrated
above) and a Log Plot view. To view the Log Plot display uncheck the Tops Only check box. In
this case the default log plot format for each well will be displayed.
To display all wells in the correlation panel with a common plot format, use the File
Load
Single Well Format to all Wells option, which copies a user-selected log plot format to all wells
in the window.
Overview tracks can be displayed for each well. However, these can often detract from the
overall plot appearance and it is suggested that a plot format, without an overview track, is used.
Overview tracks can be turned off from the Options menu
Hide all overview tracks.
1571
Senergy
To edit an individual well plot format, click in the track header of the well you wish to change. The
normal Log Plot Format window will appear. To get access to the grid properties click the All
tracks button on this window. This will also allow you to load a saved log plot format for that
specific well. This will only affect the well being worked on.

Interactive Changing of Tops
There are two methods for changing zone tops interactively.
1. If a zone track is displayed in a well then its zone tops and bottoms can be interactively
changed in the same way as the normal single well plot (click on, and drag).
2. With the Ctrl key held down place the cursor on one of the correlation lines in between plots
next to the well for which you want to change the zone top. The cursor will change to an updown pointer. Click and drag the zone top to the new position.
Re-Naming Tops
Place the mouse cursor on one of the correlation lines between two wells, next to the well that
you want to rename a zone top. The cursor will change to a pointing hand. A right mouse click
will bring up the following dialog box. Using this dialog you can choose whether to rename the
Senergy
1572
well top in the left- or right -hand well, or bring up the Create/Edit Zone Link window by
selecting Properties.
If the Rename Left Side or Rename Right Side option is clicked then the New Zone Name
window appears.
If you rename a Top, the correlation will no longer be valid, since you have broken the connection
between adjacent wells. The correlation line will be deleted.
Linking Tops
Un-named tops or tops with different names can be linked so that a common Top name is used.
This is done by clicking on the Zone Top marker (small green square) and dragging the top line
to the next well to the Top that is to be linked. When the mouse button is released the Create/
Edit Zone Link window (see above) will appear, allowing the user to set the name for the top and
therefore link the tops.
1573
Senergy
Adding New Tops

To add a new zone to a well where no zone previously existed, hold the Ctrl key down and right
mouse click in the grey area between wells next to the well where the zone is to be created.
Select the New Zone pop-up menu item and the new zone will be created. The new zone has a
top and bottom depth. The bottom depth can be changed by holding the Ctrl key down and then
placing the cursor on the zone bottom marker and dragging the line to a new depth.
Senergy
1574
Deleting Tops / Splitting Zones

To delete or split a zone, hold the Ctrl key down and right mouse click in the grey area between
wells next to the well where the zone is to be deleted or split. Select the required function from
the pop-up menu .
Changing Zone associated with analyses modules

If the selected Zone Set is not of type Tops, for example from the PhiSw interpretation module
(the zone Set type is displayed in brackets next to the zone name) then every time a zone top or
bottom is moved, the analysis routine associated with the Set will automatically be run. This can
be very useful if the user uses the multi-well Correlation module to align analysis tops so that
similar parameters are used in the same zones in each well in a field.
File Button
The File button allows the user to save and restore (Load) multi-well formats (Wells / well order /
plot formats) as well as providing the facility to load a single well format to all wells in the multiwell plot. This last function is very useful for applying an identical plot format to all wells in the
display. A format can be created in a single well and then saved to disk using the Save Plot
Format Generic menu option, this can then be recalled from the multi-well plot File menu and
used for all wells.
When the user saves a particular cross section format and then recalls/loads the format file (.
wmp), the name of the format/cross section panel is displayed in the multi-well panel header bar,
in parentheses after the Multi-Well Correlation label, in the top left-hand corner, as illustrated
below:
1575
Senergy
Settings Button
Click the Settings button to open up the Multi-Well Settings Format window. This window
allows the user to change the overall format of the wells in the correlation panel. The user can
change a number of display parameters and zone colour shading. The Settings are arranged on
two tabbed screens. These are Wells and Zones.
The Wells Tab
Senergy
1576
Trk # : This column shows the order in which the selected wells will be displayed in the
Correlation window. Clicking and dragging on a track number in the Trk # column, will allow
the order of the wells in the plot to be re-arranged.
Well Name : This column allows the user to change or remove wells from the plot. Wells
can be changed by clicking on a Well Name entry in the grid and selecting a different well
name from the drop-down well list. A well can be removed by clicking on a Well Name in the
grid and selecting the blank entry in the well name list. A well can be added more than once
to the correlation plot.
Width : This column shows the width of each well log plot in the correlation panel, in IP
project default units (inches or cm).
Gap : This column shows the width of the gap that is set between wells in the correlation
panel (inches or cm).
Top Depth : Enter the top depth for the well. This is the well measured depth, regardless of
what curve is used as the Ref Depth. The Default value is well Top Depth.
Bot Depth : Enter the bottom depth for the well. The Default value is the well Bottom
Depth.
1577
Senergy
Ref Depth : Enter the Depth reference curve name from the drop-down list. The Depth
Reference curve will be used to align the wells in the correlation panel. This can be set to
DEPTH (Measured Depth) or to TVD / TVDSS (True Vertical Depth) for all wells in the
display. NOTE: IP will warn you if you select, for example, wells which have TVDSS curves
in a mix of positive and negative depth notation. TVDSS curves must ALL be in a common
positive or negative notation.
Define : Click the Define button to set the well display depths from the selected Zone/Top
Set tops and bottoms. This will display the Select Plot Range window, similar to that
illustrated below:
The Select Plot Range window allows wells to be displayed using depths picked from the
current Tops Set.
Select the Top and Bottom from the drop-down boxes.
The Tolerance column is used to modify the log display relative to the selected top depths.
In the above example, for Well A1, the data will be displayed 100 ft/meters shallower (minus
notation) than the RN36 (Top) and 100 ft/meters deeper than the Bottom of the RN12
(Bottom).
The Full Well Range box, if checked, will set the depths to the full well range for the
selected well.
The All Wells button, if clicked, will apply the Select Plot Range criteria to all wells
currently loaded in the multi-well panel display. This allows the user to quickly make a plot
over a selected zonal range for all wells.
The Ok button will set the depths for all the displayed well.
Default Widths : The Default widths box on the Multi-Well Settings Format window,
allows the user to set the same Well Gap and Well Width for all wells.
Senergy
1578
Set Ref. Depth Curve for all Wells : this option gives the user a shortcut to set the depth
reference curve for all wells in a multi-well correlation. The user can select TVD or
Measured Depth (MD) options. The program will find the relevant curve in every well in the
correlation, if the curve exists.
The Zones Tab

The Zones tab sets up the display criteria for the area between wells. The window shows a list
of the Zone names in the user-selected Zone Set, the number of wells (No Wells) in which each
zone is present in the display and a Zone colour selection column. A number of check boxes that
affect the correlation view are described below:
Hide Shading check box : If the Hide Shading box is not checked (the default setting) then
the inter-well gaps will be shaded with the colours shown in the colour table. The user can
change the colours as needed.
Hide Zone Markers check box : The Hide Zone Markers option, if checked, will remove
the small square zone markers which are shown to the sides of each well in a correlation
panel. This option allows the user to clean up a correlation display before printing or copying
1579
Senergy
to the clipboard for pasting into other applications.

Show Zone Names above Zone Tops : if un-checked will remove the zone names from
above the zone correlations.
Set Zone colours in Wells check box : if checked, this option allows the user to save any
changes they make to the zone colours in the multi-well display, back into the Zone Set that
was selected when setting up the correlation viewer.
Options Button
The Options button launches a number of display controls that affect all wells in a correlation
view, simultaneously.
Hide All Overview Tracks : This will remove from the well plots any overview track which
has been included in the plot format. The overview track is generally not useful in the
correlation plot.
Add a Zone Track to all Wells - Names only : This will add a zone track, containing the
currently-selected Zone Set, to the left hand side of all well plots. This can be useful for
changing zone tops.
Add a Zone Track to all Wells - Colour Zones : This will add a zone track, containing the
currently-selected Zone Set and colour coded (as set up in the Edit Zones /Tops Sets
module), to the left hand side of all well plots in the correlation view.
Remove Zone track from all Wells : This removes the zone track from all wells in a
correlation view, if the Zone tracks are present as the left-hand track in each log plot.
Add Zones / Tops lines to all Tracks: This will add horizontal lines across each log track
in each log plot, using the currently-selected Zone Set. The following dialog box will allow the
user to select the colour of the lines.
Senergy
1580
Remove Zone / Tops lines from all Tracks : This reverses the Add Zones / Tops lines to
all Tracks operation.
Create a New Zone / Tops Set for selected wells : This allows the user to create a new
multi-well Tops Set in the wells in the correlation panel in order to start a new correlation. The
following dialog allows the user to choose the name of the Tops Set.
Add this Zone Set to all selected wells : This is useful if one wants to add a new well into a
correlation and then to correlate between it and surrounding wells. This option, when selected,
will add the current Zone Set into the new well.
Create a copy of the selected Zone / Tops Set : This will make a copy of the currentlyselected Zone Set and make this copy the active Zone Set. This is useful if the user wants to
edit the current correlation but does not want to overwrite the existing correlation zones.
Change Track Border Width All Wells : This option, if selected, allows you to change the line
thickness used to define log track boundaries on each log plot. The line thickness change is
applied to all wells in the correlation panel. The default line thickness is set to 2. Thicker
border lines can be achieved by typing in a higher value and clicking OK.
1581
Senergy
Output to Printer or File

By clicking on the print button
the plot can be output to a printer, the Clipboard or to a
graphics file. The same options are available as for the single well plot output, except that plot
depths are now set up in the multi-well plot Settings window and horizontal, log track depth grid
lines can be set up for each well.
Senergy
1582
The Advanced tab allows you to set up further hardcopy options. These are described below:
1583
Senergy
In the MultiWell Panel on the Advanced tab, highlighted above, the user is able to select one, or
more, of the following options:
Hide Shading - Ticking this option will remove any Zone shading, that may be visible inside IP,
from between the wells in the multi-well panel on the hardcopy output.
Hide Zone Markers - Ticking this option will remove the Zone Tie symbols, the small, dark
green markers on the sides of each well log, from the hardcopy output.
Plot Well Name Header just above well plot - Ticking this option will anchor the Well Name
title box to the top of each individual well log plot, rather than to the top of the Correlation panel.
Plot Well Header at bottom of log - Ticking this option will put a Well Name title box at the
bottom of the correlation Panel. If Plot Well Name Header just above well plot is also
Senergy
1584
checked, the title boxes on the bottom of the panel are anchored to the base of each individual
log plot.
New Correlation Workflow

The following workflow is one way in which a new correlation could be made.
1. Create a Multi-well correlation and load all wells in the correlation into it (Wells button).
2. Load a simple correlation log plot for each well. File
Load a Single Well Format to all
Wells and display the log plots (Tops Only un-checked).
3. Create a new Tops Set for all wells. (Options
Create a New Zone / Tops Set for
selected wells).
1585
4. Add the Tops to each well plot as lines. (Options
Senergy
Add Zone / Tops lines to all Tracks
). A confirm message appears which also allows the user to select the colour of the Tops
lines.
5. In the first well, create a new zone and drag its top and bottom depth to cover the total
correlation interval. The top should be aligned to the top zone in the correlation. NOTE: the
green solid rectangle is the zone marker; the yellow solid rectangle is for guidance purposes
only. Therefore tops can only be drawn between green solid rectangles. If the green rectangles
dont exist then Ctrl right click and Split Zone to create new zones between the green solid
rectangle and the yellow solid rectangle.
6. In the second well, create another new zone and align as in the first well.
Senergy
1586
7. Link and name the top correlation. Click on the left-well top marker and drag it to the rightwell top marker.
8. Create the next zone down by splitting the upper zone. Do this for both left and right wells.
1587
Senergy
9. Name and link the next zone by dragging the left-well top marker to the right-well top marker
as done in step 7.
10. The correlation can be continued in the same way by splitting zones and linking markers.
When the first two wells are correlated then the user can move on to the next well using
exactly the same methodology until the whole correlation has been built up.
Senergy
1588
1589
12.6
Senergy
Multi-well Cutoff and Summation
The Multi well Cutoff and Summation module allows the user to run the Cutoff and
Summation computation for multiple wells from a single window. The module has sophisticated
reporting options that allow results from multiple wells to be written to one report file. The module
can be used to either re-run the current Cutoff and Summation results in each well with some
modification, for example to a changed VCL cut-off, or can be run to create the Cutoff and
Summation results for each well from scratch.
This module works with the single well Cut-off and Summation module. It provides a multi-well
front-end to the module. Once this module is run, all the settings and results produced will
also be found populating the single well module. Therefore, if one does not want to lose the
settings and results that are currently in the single well cut-offs they should be saved before
starting to use the multi-well cut-off module. To do this, see the section below on the Topsets.
Multi Well Cutoff and
Summation. On selecting Multi Well Cutoff and Summation the Select Wells module
appears. This allows the user to create a well list or to select from a saved well list.
To select a well, click on one or more of the available wells and then use the left arrow (>) to
move the selected item to the right panel. Wells can also be dragged from the Available Wells
panel to the Selected Wells column. The double arrow (>>) boxes will move all wells from the
available to the selected or vice versa.
Section 12.6 Working with Multiple Wells : Multi-well Cutoff and Summation
Senergy
1590
Once the wells have been selected the Multi Well Cutoff and Summation module opens. It
consists of 7 tabs: Curve Set-Up, Input Curves, Output Curves, Zones, Reports, Cutoffs,
Results
The user must set up all the window tabs before clicking the OK button to calculate the
Summation Results.
Curve Set-up Tab

The Curve Set-up tab allows the user to select the curves that will be used in the Cutoff /
Summation routine. One must set up the Porosity and Water Saturation curves to be used for
the report. A Clay Volume curve is optional. One can also optionally select up to 7 additional
curves that will have zonal averages computed for them, in each selected well. For example,
one might want to report average Gamma Ray value, average bulk density or average computed
Permeability by zone. You must type in a Cutoff Name and Short Name for each additional
curve to be used.
The averaging technique used for each additional input curve can also be changed using the
drop-down list in the Average Method column. Clicking in a cell in this column allows you to
choose on of Arithmetic, Geometric or Harmonic averages.
1591
Senergy
The Use column allows the user to include or exclude an input curve row from the Summation
report. For example, if the user had made a report as shown above and then wished to remove
all the optional curves from the report, the user could simply uncheck the Use column for the
extra Cutoff Name entries and re-run the report without having to remove the extra input curves
for every well.
If you have deviated wells, which have TVDSS curves, you can output a Summation report using
TVDSS depths by checking the Calculate TVD/TVT report check-box.
Input Curves Tab

The Input Curves tab sets up the input curves for the selected wells. Curves must be entered
into the Porosity and Water Saturation rows in the grid, for each well. The Clay Volume curve
is optional, but must be entered if clay volume is used as a cut-off. Up to 7 other input curves can
be entered. If a name is entered in the Cutoff Name column of the Curve Set-up tab, a
corresponding row will be set up on the Input Curves tab. If an input curve is not used as a cutoff then it is not necessary that the curve is entered for all wells. For example, if the average core
permeability was going to be included in the report then this curve could be entered only for the
cored wells in which the curve exists.
If a curve name is typed into the Default Curve Name column, the program will try and find the
appropriate curve in all selected wells and will populate that row of the grid. Alternatively,
manually select curve names by clicking in a cell and selecting the curve from the drop-down list.
Senergy
1592
The TVD/TVT entry is used for entering TVD or TVT depth curves. If entered, the net thicknesses
will be output in TVD or TVT thickness. It is not necessary that all wells have a TVD curve. The
report will show which depth reference is being used for each well.
Output Curves Tab

The Output Curves tab allows the selection of curve names for the output results. If a curve
name cell is left blank then no curve will be output. To change a curve name, select the cell and
type in a new name or choose a curve name in the well from the drop-down list. To change all
curve names in one row, type the new curve name in the Default Curve Name column. Typing a
blank in a cell in this column will remove the curve output for all wells.
The Pay Flag and Reservoir Flag curves must be output. However, their names can be
changed from the default names.
1593
Senergy
Zones Tab
The Zones tab allows the user to set up Summation Zones. Zones do not have to exist in all
wells. Blank zone Top and Bottom depth cells indicate that a zone is absent in a well. For
example, in Well A3, below, zone d is not present.
To create a new zone, type a zone name into an empty cell in the Zone Name column.
To delete a zone, click the mouse cursor in a cell in the appropriate row and click the Delete
Zone button.
Senergy
1594
The Sub Total parameter column allows the user to compute average reservoir properties
either:
over a number of zones, i.e. a composite zone, or
to compute a sub total which is, for example, half the thickness of an existing zone.
Sub Total zones have no associated cut-offs, but use the interpretation results from the normal
zones to determine net pay or net reservoir average properties. The user flags that a zone is a
Sub Total by checking the appropriate cell in the grid. For example, if one wants to have a
summary of the top two zones one could create a Sub Total of the top two zones. To make a
zone a Sub Total, click in the Sub Total column. To automatically create a new Sub Total for all
wells, click the New Sub Total button. The following window will appear.
1595
Senergy
Select the zones to be grouped together as a Sub Total and enter a name for this Sub Total.
Clicking the OK button will then create the new Sub Total.
The order in which zones appear in the final report depends on the type of report required. If a
separate result file is created for each well, then the zones will be ordered by depth. For reports
with all the well results in a single file, the order of the zones will be the same as the order in the
Zone tab. To change the order of zones click in a row and use the up and down arrows on the
Senergy
1596
Zone tab.
Reports Tab
The Reports tab allows the user to set up the type of report to be produced. The default setting
is to create a combined Net Reservoir and Net Pay report, labelled Reservoir and Pay for each of
the selected wells. To output a Report Name, check the Use column.
Cutoffs Tab
The Cutoffs tab allows the user to set up cut-off values for each zone. The same zonal cut-offs
are used in each selected well in the grid. All zones, set up in the Zones tab, will be displayed
here except Sub Totals. Sub Totals have no associated cut-off values, since they are created
from other zones, which have their own cut-offs defined.
1597
Senergy
If cut-offs do not need to be applied to an input curve, for example for Gamma Ray in the screen
capture shown above, remove the ticks from the Use column for that curve. To turn on and off
all the ticks in a column, click on the Use label in the column header, to activate it, then click in a
cell in the column to toggle between checked and un-checked.
To change the cut-off value for all zones in a column, edit the value in the top row of the grid and
then click on the Value label in the column header. This will set all the cut-off values to the same
as the top cell value.
The Minimum Height allows the user to set the minimum thickness of a zone in order for it to
count as net reservoir (Reservoir sub-tab) or net pay (Pay sub-tab). The default is 0. (All depth
intervals will count towards net if they meet the cut-off criteria).
The Cutoffs tab grid can be scrolled to the right to view any extra input curves, if these are
required in the output report.
Results Tab
The Results tab sets up the type of report to generate. Two basic outputs can be produced.
These are:
Output Individual files per well radio button, if selected, will create a separate output file
for each well. Each of these files will be identical to that which is normally produced by the
single well cut-off and summation module.
The Output one file for all wells radio button, if selected, will output all the well summation
Senergy
1598
results into one single file.
The Separate pay and Reservoir results check-box, if checked, will activate the Sort by
Zone and Sort by Well radio buttons, which allow the separation of the pay results and
reservoir results so that they can be grouped by zone or well. If not checked, results will be
output in a similar format to the single well summation report, combined in one file.
The Sort by zone box, if checked, will output the results sorted by zone. For example all the
results for top zone will be displayed for each well then all the results for the second zone
etc...
The Sort by Well option will output the results sorted by well, but separating the pay and
reservoir results into different sections.
The Output Field average results check-box, if checked, will create a new entry in the output
results file called All Wells. This entry will contain the field average values for all the zones.
The field averages are net thickness weighted averages.
Add Zone X/Y location to report check-box, if checked, will include, where deviation survey
data are available in the selected wells, in the output report, the X/Y coordinates of the top of
each reservoir zone.
Output TVD depths on same line as Measured Depths check-box, if checked, will create
additional columns in the output file reporting the top and bottom depths in TVDSS, and net
TVD thickness for each reservoir zone. The default option (un-checked) is to put a second line
in the report that contains the TVD/TVT/ Net results for each zone.
1599
Senergy
Output to - Summation Reports can be sent directly to a printer or to a disk file by selecting
one of the Output to radio buttons. Selecting the File option allows the user to choose the
format of the output file. The comma-delimited file is compatible with spreadsheet programs.
The .rtf file output will contain a format similar to what was sent to the printer. When the OK
button is clicked, the program will automatically launch a program to display the file results. The
program launched will depend on the setup default program for the file type. For example .csv
could launch Microsoft Excel, .txt could launch Microsoft NotePad and .rtf could launch
Microsoft Word. To output the .csv file using semi-colons instead of commas as the delimiter
go to Tools
Options
CSV Delimiter.
Topsets button
The Topsets button has several functions:
It allows the user to save all the current cut-off results, for all wells, under a new cut-off Set
name. This could be useful if one wanted to restore the previous cut-offs and zones at a later
date.
It allows the user to reload a saved Tops Set.
It loads Tops Sets of different types to the cut-offs Tops Set. This means that a Tops Set
that has been loaded to IP using the Edit Zones /Tops Sets functionality, can be
imported into the multi-well cut-offs module and then used for producing summation
reports. Clicking the Topsets button produces the following window:
Senergy
1600
The top section of the window allows the user to save the current parameters for the cut-off
modules for the individual wells selected. This is the same functionality as seen in the Load and
Save Parameter Sets button on the cut-off input window, except that it runs on all wells
currently selected in the module. The Set name is entered into the box and then the Save to
Database or Save to Disk File is clicked.
To restore a previously saved Parameter Set, select the required Set in the list window and click
Load from Database. If the All Sets box is checked then Sets of a different type to a Cutoff Set
can be loaded. In this case only the zone names and zone top depths will be loaded. It is possible
that Parameter Sets for all wells may not be available to load. The number of wells Num Wells
found for each Parameter Set name is displayed. If a Parameter Set is not available for a
particular well then nothing will be loaded for that well. However, the Parameter Sets will be
loaded for the other wells.
The Load From Disk File button allows the the user to re-load Parameter Sets that have been
written to separate disk files using the Save to Disk File button.
1601
Senergy
The Save and Load buttons on the main window allow the user to save and restore the multi-well
cut-off setup windows. The multi-well cut-off setup is not saved when you exit the program
or change the database. Therefore, it is good practice to save the format after running the
module.
An example output for two wells, plus the all wells average follows. The listing was generated
using the Sort by Zone option.
Date : 25/04/02 10:23:44

Well
Phi*So*H
All Wells
XYZ 1
XYZ 3
All Wells
XYZ 1
XYZ 3
All Wells
XYZ 1
XYZ 3
All Wells
XYZ 1
XYZ 3
All Wells
XYZ 1
XYZ 3
Zone Name Type Units Top

C Sand
C Sand
C Sand
B Sand
B Sand
B Sand
Mid Shale
Mid Shale
Mid Shale
A Sand
A Sand
A Sand
All Zones
All Zones
All Zones
MD
MD
MD
MD
MD
MD
MD
MD
MD
MD
MD
MD
MD
MD
MD
Bottom Gross
97.75
ft 7295.00 7416.50 121.50
ft 6970.00 7044.00 74.00
97.00
ft 7416.50 7552.00 135.50
ft 7044.00 7102.50 58.50
19.50
ft 7552.00 7565.50 13.50
ft 7102.50 7128.00 25.50
52.00
ft 7565.50 7656.50 91.00
ft 7128.00 7141.00 13.00
66.56
ft 7295.00 7656.50 361.50
ft 6970.00 7141.00 171.00
Net
97.00
121.50
72.50
97.00
135.50
58.50
6.50
2.75
10.2
44.8
77.5
12.2
61.3
337.25
153.50
N/G Av Phi Av Sw Av Vcl Phi*H

0.992
1.000
0.980
1.000
1.000
1.000
0.333
0.204
0.402
0.863
0.852
0.942
0.922
0.933
0.898
0.222
0.206
0.248
0.236
0.223
0.265
0.171
0.187
0.167
0.189
0.187
0.201
0.220
0.029
0.064
0.141
0.197
0.064
0.131
0.194
0.010
0.128
0.478
0.022
0.681
0.770
0.161
0.222
0.161
0.161
0.024
0.021
0.030
0.043
0.039
0.053
0.156
0.086
0.174
0.046
0.037
0.099
0.039
0.032
0.054
21.517
25.020
18.014
22.905
30.284
15.527
1.112
0.514
1.710
8.475
14.492
2.458
13.502
9.832
9.832
18.477
20.087
16.867
19.895
24.421
15.368
0.970
0.268
1.672
2.701
3.339
2.063
10.511
8.252
8.252
Well
Zone Name Type Units Top
Bottom Gross
Net
N/G Av Phi Av Sw Av Vcl Phi*H
Phi*So*H
All Wells C Sand
MD
97.75 97.00 0.992 0.222 0.141 0.024 21.517
XYZ 1
C Sand
MD
ft 7295.00 7416.50 121.50 121.50 1.000 0.206 0.197 0.021 25.020
XYZ 3
C Sand
MD
ft 6970.00 7044.00 74.00 72.50 0.980 0.248 0.064 0.030 18.014
All Wells B Sand
MD
145.88 145.13 0.995 0.231 0.134 0.037 33.581
XYZ 1
B Sand
MD
ft 7416.50 7552.00 135.50 134.75 0.994 0.224 0.192 0.039 30.119
XYZ 3
B Sand
MD
ft 7044.00 7102.50 58.50 58.50 1.000 0.265 0.010 0.053 15.527
All Wells Mid Shale MD
92.44 78.19 0.846 0.227 0.129 0.047 17.720
XYZ 1
Mid Shale MD
ft 7552.00 7565.50 13.50
1.00 0.074 0.149 0.381 0.218 0.149
XYZ 3
Mid Shale MD
ft 7102.50 7128.00 25.50 10.25 0.402 0.167 0.022 0.174 1.710
All Wells A Sand
MD
98.22 54.59 0.556 0.217 0.174 0.045 11.866
XYZ 1
A Sand
MD
ft 7565.50 7656.50 91.00 20.50 0.225 0.187 0.415 0.012 3.835
XYZ 3
A Sand
MD
ft 7128.00 7141.00 13.00 10.50 0.808 0.207 0.111 0.096 2.178
All Wells All Zones MD
66.56 53.69 0.807 0.225 0.144 0.038 12.069
XYZ 1
All Zones MD
ft 7295.00 7656.50 361.50 337.25 0.933 0.026 0.111 0.032 8.711
XYZ 3
All Zones MD
ft 6970.00 7141.00 171.00 153.50 0.898 0.057 0.111 0.054
8.711 7.744
18.477
20.087
16.867
29.092
24.339
15.368
15.428
0.092
1.672
9.803
2.243
1.936
10.325
7.744
NET PAY SUMMARY
cut-offs USED
Zone Name
C Sand
B Sand
Mid Shale
Phi
Pay
> 0.100
> 0.100
> 0.100
Sw
Pay
< 0.500 Y
< 0.500 Y
< 0.500 Y
Vcl
Pay
< 0.500
< 0.500
< 0.500
Senergy
A Sand
> 0.100
< 0.500
1602
< 0.500
Related Topics
Manage Cutoff and Summation Results
Launch Mutli-Well Cutoff and Summation
Output to a Single File
12.6.1 Launch Mutli-Well Cutoff and Summation

To launch the Multi-Well Cutoff and Summation Module:
From the Multi-Well Menu, Select Multi-Well Cutoff and Summation to display the Select
Wells Dialog.
Select the Required Wells and Click OK to Display the Multi-Well Cutoff and Summations
Dialog.
1603
Senergy
Related Topics
12.6.2 Output to a Single File

The Reporting Panel when Outputting Individual Files per well displays the File Output Panel.
This panel is only available when output is to individual files.
Senergy
1604
Output files to well directories if checked (default) will output each file to the individual well
directory. If unchecked then all files will go to the project directory.
Use Well Name in file name if checked (default) will change the output file name to
Summation ---- where ---- is the well name. If not checked the file name will be the same as
the cutoff set name for each well.
Related Topics
Section
13
Senergy
13
1606
The 'Calculation and Correction' Modules provide the user with the functionality to perform log
environmental corrections and to compute and convert various basic petrophysical parameters
such as 'Temperature gradients', 'Rw from SP' and 'Curves from Zones / Parameters'. In
addition, there are a number of modules that deal with interpretation 'parameters' and their
distribution in a multi-well project setting. See 'Parameter Set Management' for a discussion of
this important topic.
Related Topics
User Formula
Multi Line User Formula
Basic Log Analysis Functions
Temperature Gradient
Rw from SP
True Vertical Depth
True Vertical / True Stratigraphic Thickness
Curve From Zone / Parameters
Curve Integration
Environmental Corrections
Section 13.
Calculation and Correction :
1607
Section 13.
Calculation and Correction :
Senergy
Senergy
13.1
1608
Use-Defined Formula
The 'User-Defined formula' module can be used to manipulate 'conventional' single

dimensional curve and multi-dimensional 'array' curve data, either:
using a simple one-line-formula format, or
incorporating various discriminator and 'if' / 'then' / 'else' logic statements as part of the
computation.
The module can be used to very-easily create a curve with a fixed value, or to calculate a
complex formula. Discriminators can be used to limit the depth range over which the calculation
can take place. It is worth avoiding the use of single letter curve names in the formula, such as
the letter 'e' or combining letters and numbers in the same curve name, for example e42 etc.
This can cause syntax errors.
Performing math functions on array-type curves is discussed in the section on 'Working with
array (multi-dimensional) curves'.
The module is accessed from the main 'Calculation' menu
'User Formula' option.
The module works using the FORTRAN type expression; 'If or / and then else '. The
example shown above uses values of the RDEEP and VCL curves to decide which porosity
formula to use to create the result curve PHIden.
The use of 'Discriminator logic', found in the top row of the window, is optional, and if the
discriminator text boxes are left 'blank' then only the top Formula line ('then') is computed. The
discriminator boxes can either contain curve names or numeric values.
The following functions are available (The syntax for each function is shown in bold font at the
end of each line) :
*
+
-
:
:
:
Multiply
Add
Subtract
Section 13.1 Calculation and Correction : Use-Defined Formula
1609
Senergy
/
**
^
Log
Alog
: Divide
: Raise to power - x**y
: Raise to power (same as '**') - x^y
: Returns the Logarithm to the base 10 - LOG(number or curve name)
: Returns the Antilogarithm to the base 10 of a number - ALOG(number or
curve name)
Ln
: Returns the Natural logarithm of a number - LN(number or curve name)
EXP
: Returns 'e' raised to the power of a given number - EXP(number or curve
name)
Tan
: Returns the tangent of an angle. Input in degrees - TAN(number or curve
name)
Sin
: Returns the Sine of an angle. Input in degrees - SIN(number or curve
name)
Cos
: Returns the Cosine of an angle. Input in degrees - COS(number or curve
name)
ATan
: Returns the Arctangent of an angle. Output in degrees - ATAN(number or
curve name)
ASin
: Returns the Arcsine of an angle. Output in degrees - ASIN(number or
curve name)
ACos
: Returns the Arccosine of a number. Output in degrees - ACOS(number or
curve name)
Sqrt
: Returns the Square Root of a number - SQRT(number or curve name)
Abs
: Returns the Absolute value of a number, a number without its sign - ABS(
number or curve name)
Min
: Returns the smallest of two parameters separated by a comma - MIN(
number1 or curve1, number2 or curve2,...)
Max
: Returns the maximum of the two parameters separated by a comma - MAX(
Trunc
: Truncates a number by removing all digits after the decimal place - TRUNC(
number or curve name,num_digits)
Random : Generates a random number between 0 - 1 at each depth level. Useful for
adding noise to a curve.
The 'Min' and 'Max' functions can be 'nested', for example - to provide limits to function
equations. The following example would calculate a VCL curve from the GR curve and limit its
result to between 0 and 1.
Senergy
1610
The order in which expressions are evaluated is traditional. Braces/brackets can be used to
'nest' expressions.
An example of using the 'Random' expression is given below:
NOTE: Since the result is completely random each time the formula is run then a different result
curve will be generated.
Curve Name Selection using 'Curve Type'
1611
Senergy
Text-entry boxes that allow the user to manually type the curve name in, will also allow the curve
to be selected using the generic 'Curve Type' reference (see Manage Curve Headers). The
user prefixes an '@' character to the 'Curve Type'. For example '@GammaRay' will select the
gamma ray curve, '@density' will select the density curve, etc...
Output 'Control' Options

In the lower part of the 'User-Defined Formula' window, the check- and text entry-boxes enable
the user to set the output curve properties:
'Clip Resultant Curves' - The 'Clip Resultant curves' check box, when 'checked' can be
used to clip the output 'Result Curve' maximum and minimum values to within user-defined
limits. The 'Minimum value:' and 'Maximum Value:' text entry boxes are only active when
this check box is 'checked'.
'Result Curve' - The 'Result Curve' list box allows the user to select an output curve to
write the computation results to, from the existing curve list. Alternatively, the user can type
in a curve name for the 'Result Curve'.
'Units' - The 'Units' text box enables the user to type in a measurement unit for the 'Result
Curve'.
'Check for null data' - The 'Check for null data' box, if 'checked', will check all input
curves for null data (-999) and, if nulls are found, will set the output curve to null values at the
same depth step. If not 'checked', then the user is responsible for handling null data
problems within the equations.
'Auto Save' - The 'Auto Save' box, if 'checked', will automatically save a user-defined
formula to an external ".frm" file when the 'Run' button is clicked. The ".frm" file will be
named using the 'Result Curve' name. In the screen shown above, the auto-saved formula
file will be called PHIden.frm.
The 'Top' and 'Bottom' depths over which to run the computation, if left 'blank' will default to
the entire well depth range. The user can manually type in depth values. Computation depth
ranges can also be set using 'Zone Names'. 'Clicking' on the
button launches the
following 'Select Zone Depths' window:
Senergy
1612
The user selects the 'Top Set' or 'Zone Set' from the drop-down list at the top of the window.
You can then select the 'Top' and 'Bottom' depths from the zone list drop-down boxes. In the '
Return' panel, the user has the option of returning numerical values or zone names.
If the 'Depth' option is selected, numbers are returned in the main User-Formula window.
If the 'Zones' option is selected, then the actual zone names are returned, as illustrated
below.
When the 'OK' button is 'clicked' on the window, the selected zone top and bottom depths are
returned to the formula window.
If 'Zone Names' are returned and the formula is 'Run' and 'Auto Saved' or 'Save Formula' is
'clicked', then these zone names will be used to look up the depth range over which to run the
user-formula. The advantage of this option is that the same formula can be then be used in
multiple wells and run over the same formation interval, even though the formation top and
bottom depths will vary from well to well. This can be especially useful if the formulae are being
run in the 'Multi-Well Batch' module.
1613
Senergy
Once the formula has run successfully a confirmation message will appear in the Status
Bar.
The 'Save Formula' and 'Load Formula' buttons are used to save and reload the userformula so that they can be re-called and re-used.
The default directory in which to save the expressions is defined under 'File'
'Set Default
File Location' on the main IP menu.

'Clear' button - The 'Clear' button clears all entries in the window so that a new formula can
be created.
Working with Array (multi-dimensional) Curves

All the Math functions that can be performed on conventional curves execute on array type
curves. For example, applying the 'SQRT' function to an array curve will calculate and return the
square root of each value in the input array curve to an output array curve with the same
dimensions as the input array.
In addition, functions can be executed involving multiple array curves. The following section
describes how multi-dimensional array operations will be handled within the IP 'User Formula'
and 'Multi-line Formula' modules. The examples show how IP handles math operations on
arrays of different dimensions: The examples use the multiply (*) function for the illustrations.
If the following array curve dimensions are defined ;
'Cap' : X = 100, Z = 2
'Por' : X = 1, Z = 2
'Phi' : X= 1, Z = 1 non array curve
Senergy
1614
'Cp' : X = 2, Z = 2
'Result' : X = 100, Z = 2
Example 1. Result = Cap x Cp should yield :
Result(1, 1)
Result(1, 2)
Result(2, 1)
Result(2, 2)
Result(3, 1)
Result(3, 2)
Etc etc
=
=
=
=
=
=
Cap(1, 1) * Cp (1, 1)
Cap(1, 2) * Cp (1, 2)
Cap(2, 1) * Cp (2, 1)
Cap(2, 2) * Cp (2, 2)
NullValue Cp(3,1) does not exist
NullValue Cp(3,2) does not exist
NOTE: Calculations only work where array dimensions are compatible.

Example 2. Result = Cap x Por should yield :
Result(1, 1) = Cap(1, 1) * Por(1, 1)
Result(1, 2) = Cap(1, 2) * Por(1, 2)
Result(2, 1) = Cap(2, 1) * Por(1, 1)
Result(2, 2) = Cap(2, 2) * Por(1, 2)
Result(3, 1) = Cap(3, 1) * Por(1, 1)
Result(3, 2) = Cap(3, 2) * Por(1, 2)
Etc etc
NOTE: This is a special case where the Por array has only one X dimension.
Example 3. Result = Cap x Phi should yield :
Result(1, 1) = Cap(1, 1) * Phi(1, 1)
Result(1, 2) = Cap(1, 2) * Phi(1, 1)
Result(2, 1) = Cap(2, 1) * Phi(1, 1)
Result(2, 2) = Cap(2, 2) * Phi(1, 1)
Result(3, 1) = Cap(3, 1) * Phi(1, 1)
Result(3, 2) = Cap(3, 2) * Phi(1, 1)
Etc etc
NOTE: This is a special case where the Phi curve has only one X and one Z dimension i.e. Non
array curve
Related Topics
User Formula
Rw from SP
True Vertical Depth
Curve Integration
1615
Senergy
Senergy
13.2
1616
The 'Multi-Line User Formula' module allows the user to create and execute multiple formula
lines in a single interface. Intermediate steps in a calculation 'stream' can be set up to create
output curves in order to QC the formula workflow. Formula lines can be 'flagged' as
'continuation lines' to enable very long character strings to be implemented in a user-friendly
way.
The module incorporates 'Excel' Spreadsheet style logic key words 'IF', 'AND', 'OR', compiles
and executes 'nested' logic equations, allows formula lines to be 'commented' out and allows
formulae to be saved and reloaded to be applied in multiple wells.
NOTE: It is worth avoiding the use of single letter curve names in the formula, such as the letter
'e' or combining letters and numbers in the same curve name, for example e42 etc. This can
cause syntax errors.
The module is able to perform mathematical operations on array-type curves. This is explained
in more detail in the 'Working with array (multi-dimensional) curves' section.
The module is launched from the main IP 'Calculation' menu list or from the 'User Formula'
Toolbar, which is launched from the 'View' menu
'Toolbars' option.
The user interface comprises a 'grid' type display which is organized in the following column
order, from left to right:
'Line' : The Line number of the formula, saved to the external multi-line formula text file (.mlf)
when the 'Save' Button is selected.
'Use' : A 'check' box flag, which toggles between 'on' / 'off', instructing IP to treat a line as a
Section 13.2 Calculation and Correction : Multi Line User Formula
1617
Senergy
formula or not. If the box is not 'checked' then the line is treated as a text / comment line.
The text is saved in the .mlf file, when the 'Save' button is clicked. This allows the user to
include some explanatory documentation with the multi-line formula, as illustrated in Line 2,
Line 4 and Line 7, above.
'Cont.' : A 'check' box flag, which toggles between 'on' / 'off', instructing IP to treat a line as
the 'continuation' of the preceding equation line. This is useful for breaking up a long,
complex formula into more manageable components.
'Out' : A 'check' box flag, which toggles between 'on' / 'off', instructing IP to treat the result of
an equation line as an 'output'.
'Name' : When 'Out' is 'checked', the 'Name' text box is used to either type in a 'result
curve name' or select the name of an existing curve from the drop-down curve list.
'Unit': When 'Out' and 'Name' are selected, the user can type in the 'curve units' for the
output curve.
'Formula' : This text box is where the user either types in the formula that you wish to
execute ('Use' column 'checked') or the user can type in comments that explain the multiline workflow ('Use' column 'un-checked') , as illustrated above.
The following functions are available (The syntax for each function is shown in bold font at the
end of each line) :
*
+
/
**
^
Log
Alog
Ln
EXP
Tan
Sin
Cos
ATan
ASin
ACos
: Multiply
: Add
: Subtract
: Divide
: Raise to power - x**y
: Raise to power (same as '**') - x^y
: Returns the Logarithm to the base 10 - LOG(number or curve name)
: Returns the Antilogarithm to the base 10 of a number - ALOG(number or
curve name)
: Returns the Natural logarithm of a number - LN(number or curve name)
: Returns 'e' raised to the power of a given number - EXP(number or curve
name)
: Returns the tangent of an angle. Input in degrees - TAN(number or curve
name)
: Returns the Sine of an angle. Input in degrees - SIN(number or curve
name)
: Returns the Cosine of an angle. Input in degrees - COS(number or curve
name)
: Returns the Arctangent of an angle. Output in degrees - ATAN(number or
curve name)
: Returns the Arcsine of an angle. Output in degrees - ASIN(number or
curve name)
: Returns the Arccosine of a number. Output in degrees - ACOS(number or
Senergy
1618
curve name)
: Returns the Square Root of a number - SQRT(number or curve name)
: Returns the Absolute value of a number, a number without its sign - ABS(
number or curve name)
Min
: Returns the smallest of two parameters separated by a comma - MIN(
Max
: Returns the maximum of the two parameters separated by a comma - MAX(
Trunc
: Truncates a number by removing all digits after the decimal place - TRUNC(
number or curve name,num_digits)
Random : Generates a random number between 0 - 1 at each depth level. Useful for
adding noise to a curve.
Sqrt
Abs
Logical 'IF' / 'THEN' / 'ELSE' / 'AND' / 'OR' statements can also be implemented in the user
scripts. They need to be formatted in 'Excel spreadsheet' style i.e. in brackets with comma
separators between each statement. The 'AND', 'OR' statement only applies to one logical
condition. If more than one logical condition is required then the 'AND' statement has to be
nested.
IF
:
IF(logical_test, value_if_true, value_if_false)
AND
:
AND (logical1)
OR
:
OR (logical1)
The following example shows the syntax for an IF / THEN / ELSE type equation.
NOTE: the first processing step, when the 'Run All' button is clicked, is to re-combine all
'Continuation' lines into a single line statement to check the syntax, like that shown in row 6 of the
example shown above.
NOTE: The 'Output Curve' (the 'Results' curve) should be named in the first row of the grid,
in the 'Name' cell. Curve 'Dpor' is the output curve for the formula shown above.
NOTE: Rows in the multi line formula can be re-ordered by clicking in the 'Line' number box on
the left-hand margin of the screen and dragging the row to another position in the interface.
1619
Senergy
Some examples of IF / AND and IF / OR statement syntax are illustrated in the following screen
captures:IF(AND(x <y, z > y),value_if_true, value_if_false)
This is one way this statement could be entered:-
Alternatively, it could be written all on the same line:-
A statement which includes a number of 'AND' conditions could be entered like this:-
Senergy
IF(OR(x <y, x > z), value_if_true, value_if_false)
For more than one 'OR' condition then the equation can be entered like this:-
1620
1621
Senergy
An example of using the 'Random' expression is given below:
NOTE: Since the result is completely random each time the formula is run then a different result
curve will be generated.
Error Messages
When the user 'clicks' the 'Run All' button, IP checks the multi-line formula syntax. If there are
syntax errors, a message is launched which advises the user of the location of the error in the
entered formulae. An example is illustrated below where a missing brace, ')', has been detected.
Senergy
1622
This allows the user to 'de-bug' their formula.
The position of the missing brace, ')' is given as position 19. The text file below, is a manually
created representation of how the Multi-Line Formula positional logic works.
The buttons which allow the user to add and delete rows in the grid and to set the depth range
over which to execute the formulae are arranged below the formula text 'grid'. These are shown
below:
1623
Senergy
'Output Set' button - Allows the user to select the output Curve Set for the results curve from
the formula execution.
'Insert Line' button - The user can insert additional lines in between entered lines in the multiline interface by clicking this button
'Add Line' button - The user can append additional lines to the multi-line interface by clicking
this button.
'Delete Line' button - The user can delete a line from the multi-line interface by clicking in any
'cell' in the 'row-to-delete', then clicking the 'Delete Line' button. Alternatively, if you just want to
temporarily switch 'off' an equation line, un-check the 'Use' cell in that line of the formula.
'Check for null data' 'check' box - when 'checked' the program will interrogate all input curves
for null values. If null data are found then the multi-line formula will return a null value at the
equivalent depth, in the result curve(s). if the option is left 'un-checked', null values will be
counted in the computations and it is likely that there will be some unpredictable values in the
output curves.
'Show Progress Bar' 'check box' - when 'checked' a progress bar is displayed indicating how
far through the Multi-Line Formula calculation the module is once the 'Run' button is pressed. It
should be noted that the progress bar adds overhead to processing resulting in increased time
for the module to run. When used in a Multi-well Batch process this overhead can be
significant.
'Top' and 'Bottom' depth entry boxes - the user can either:
manually type in a depth range over which to run a multi-line formula. The default depth
range, if the boxes are left 'blank, is the well top to well bottom depths, or
use the 'Select Zone Depths'
shortcut button to launch the dialog from which to
choose a Tops Set and the Top Zone depth and Bottom Zone depth for the calculations,
Senergy
1624
as shown above. The user selects the 'Top Set' or 'Zone Set' from the drop-down list.
You can then select the 'Top' and 'Bottom' depths from the zone list drop-down boxes.
When the 'OK' button is 'clicked', the selected zone top and bottom depths are returned
to the formula window.
In the 'Return' panel, there are two options to choose from. If the 'Depth' option is selected,
numeric values are returned in the main Multi-Line Formula window. However, if the 'Zones'
option is selected, then the actual zone names are returned, as illustrated below.
If 'Zones' are returned and the formula is executed and 'Save' is 'clicked', then these zone
names will be used to look up the depth range over which to run the user-formula. The advantage
of this option is that the same formula can be then be used in multiple wells in an IP database
and run over the same formation interval, even though the formation top and bottom depths will
vary from well to well. This can be especially useful if the formulae are being run in the 'MultiWell Batch' module.
The 'function' b1uttons are arranged at the bottom of the interface:
'Run All' button - Clicking this button will execute all the 'active' formula lines (those lines with
the 'Use' column 'checked'). The user will be informed if the formula(e) ran successfully or an
error dialog window will be launched if the formula syntax is incorrect , for example having
mismatched parentheses '()' in a long equation. The error message will indicate which part of
the equation is incorrect. A 'Status' message is also displayed in the information bar at the
bottom left-hand corner of the window.
'Load' button - Use this button to re-load a previously saved multi-line formula (.mlf) from file.
'Save' button - Use this button to save a newly-created multi-line formula to the IP database.
'Clear All' button - Use this button to clear all entries/ comments in the multi-line formula 'grid'.
1625
Senergy
Changing the order of Formula Lines

The user has the functionality to change the order in which formula lines are executed by
'clicking' in the left-hand column and dragging a row up or down, to another position in the grid.
Inserting 'Comments' lines

The user can insert text strings into a formula line in the interface which will be saved with the
multi-line formula file. The 'Use' check box must be 'un-checked' so that IP does not try to use
the line in the formula workflow.
Curve Name Selection using 'Curve Type'

Text-entry boxes that allow the user to manually type the curve name in, will also allow the curve
to be selected using the generic 'Curve Type' reference (see Manage Curve Headers). The
user prefixes an '@' character to the 'Curve Type'. For example '@GammaRay' will select the
gamma ray curve, '@density' will select the density curve, etc...
Using the 'List Curves / Sets' Functionality

Curve names can be dragged / dropped into a formula line from the 'List Curves /Sets' list box
as illustrated below. Note: a formula line will only allow curves to be dragged / dropped into it
when the 'Formula' text box is bordered in a dark grey colour. Click once in a 'Formula' box to
set the box to accept drag / drop entries. When the Formula text is 'highlighted' (white text on
blue background) the drag / drop functionality does not work.
Senergy
1626
Working with Array (multi-dimensional) Curves

The 'Multi-Line Formula' module has been built to accommodate the use of array-type curves
in calculations. All the Math functions that can be performed on conventional curves will now
execute on array type curves. For example, applying the 'SQRT' function to an array curve will
calculate and return the square root of each value in the input array curve to an output array
curve with the same dimensions as the input array.
In addition, functions can be executed involving multiple array curves. The following section
describes how multi-dimensional array operations will be handled within the IP 'User Formula'
and 'Multi-line Formula' modules. The examples show how IP handles math operations on
arrays of different dimensions: The examples use the multipy (*) function for the illustrations.
If the following array curves have dimensions defined as;
'Cap' : X = 100, Z = 2
'Por' : X = 1, Z = 2
'Phi' : X= 1, Z = 1 (non array curve)
'Cp' : X = 2, Z = 2
'Result' : X = 100, Z = 2 (the 'result' array curve dimensions)
Example 1. Result = Cap multiplied by Cp should yield :
Result(1, 1)
Result(1, 2)
Result(2, 1)
Result(2, 2)
=
=
=
=
Cap(1, 1) * Cp (1, 1)
Cap(1, 2) * Cp (1, 2)
Cap(2, 1) * Cp (2, 1)
Cap(2, 2) * Cp (2, 2)
1627
Senergy
Result(3, 1) = NullValue Cp(3,1) does not exist

Result(3, 2) = NullValue Cp(3,2) does not exist
Etc etc
NOTE: Calculations only work where array dimensions are compatible.
Example 2. Result = Cap multiplied by Por should yield :
Result(1, 1) = Cap(1, 1) * Por(1, 1)
Result(1, 2) = Cap(1, 2) * Por(1, 2)
Result(2, 1) = Cap(2, 1) * Por(1, 1)
Result(2, 2) = Cap(2, 2) * Por(1, 2)
Result(3, 1) = Cap(3, 1) * Por(1, 1)
Result(3, 2) = Cap(3, 2) * Por(1, 2)
Etc etc
NOTE: This is a special case where the 'Por' array has only one X dimension.
Example 3. Result = Cap multiplied by Phi should yield :
Result(1, 1) = Cap(1, 1) * Phi(1, 1)
Result(1, 2) = Cap(1, 2) * Phi(1, 1)
Result(2, 1) = Cap(2, 1) * Phi(1, 1)
Result(2, 2) = Cap(2, 2) * Phi(1, 1)
Result(3, 1) = Cap(3, 1) * Phi(1, 1)
Result(3, 2) = Cap(3, 2) * Phi(1, 1)
Etc etc
NOTE: This is a special case where the 'Phi' curve has only one X and one Z dimension i.e. Non
array curve
Related Topics
User Formula
Rw from SP
True Vertical Depth
Curve Integration
Senergy
13.3
1628
Basic Log Functions
The 'Basic Log Analysis Functions' module performs a number of simple log analysis
calculations and unit conversions. The module is arranged on five 'tabs'. These are:
The Porosity Tab calculates Porosity from Density, Sonic and Neutron Curves.
The Matrix Tab calculates various lithology indicator curves.
The Rw Apparent / Sw Tab calculates quick-look type apparent water resistivities plus water
saturations calculated from Archie's equation.
The Permeability tab calculates permeability using an industry standard formula.
The Derivatives Tab calculates the first and second derivative of a curve. The first derivative
operation calculates the slope of the input curve, the second derivative operation, the rate of
change of the slope. These derivative curves can be useful for automatic bed boundary
picking.
The Miscellaneous Tab calculates Velocity, Differential Caliper, Volumetric Cross Section and
Conductivity.
The Conversions Tab completes some standard conversions of log analysis type data. The
conversions provide the functionality of various charts found in the standard chart books.
The Conversions 2 calculates downhole oil and gas densities from surface density
measurements. The correlations used are the same as those used in the 'Rock Physics'
module and come from the paper by Batzle and Wang "Seismic Properties of Pore Fluids",
Geophysics (1992).
The Horner Plot Tab calculates a formation temperature from bottom hole temperature
measurements. A Log / Lin plot of Horner Time against temperature is created. The points are
curve fit and the line extrapolated to a Horner time of 1.0 to give the formation temperature.
Each 'tab' works as a stand-alone operation and the 'Run Tab' button must be 'clicked' for each
page to compute the calculations. However, if the module is used in the 'Multi-Well Batch'
module, then each tab will be run automatically, if an output curve name is specified and the
module tick box is 'checked'.
Related Topics
User Formula
Rw from SP
True Vertical Depth
Section 13.3 Calculation and Correction : Basic Log Functions
1629
Senergy

Curve Integration
13.3.1 Density Porosity

The Porosity Tab calculates Porosity from Density, Sonic and Neutron Curves.
To Display the Basic Log Functions Dialog:
From the Calculation Menu, Click Basic Log Functions to Open the Basic Log Functions
Dialog with the Porosity Tab displayed.
Calculate Density Porosity

To calculate Density Porosity, Select the Density Checkbox
Specify the Input Density Curve, the Output Porosity Curve , the Matrix Density and the Fluid
Density.
Click Run Tab to Run the Calculation and Output the Result to the Output Porosity Curve.
Density porosity is calculated using :
Rho ma
Rho ma
Rhob
Rho Fluid
'Convert density porosity to Bulk Density' check box enables the user to calculate a bulk
density curve from an input porosity curve using :
Rhob
Rho ma
Rho Fluid
When the 'Convert density porosity to Bulk Density' check box is 'checked' the 'Input
Density' name changes to 'Input Porosity' and the 'Output Porosity' name changes to '
Senergy
1630
Output Density'. The selected curves within the boxes DO NOT change. It is up to the user to
select the required input and output curves from the drop-down curve lists or to manually type in
curve names before 'clicking' the 'Run Tab'.
Calculate Sonic Porosity

To calculate Sonic Porosity, Select the Sonic Checkbox
Specify the Input Curve Variables and the Output Porosity Curve.
Sonic porosity is calculated using :
Wyllie
DT DTmatrix
DTFluid DTmatrix
Cp
Hunt - Raymer
2 Vma Vf
2 Vma Vf
4 Vma
Vma V log
2 Vma
Where:
Vma
Vf
Vlog
= 1/Dtma
= 1/Dtfl
= 1/Dt
Calculate Neutron Porosity
1631
Senergy
To calculate Neutron Porosity, Select the Neutron Checkbox

Specify the Input Curve Variables and the Output Porosity Curve Variables.
The Neutron input is already in porosity units and the routine simply performs lithology
transformations. The user sets the input and output lithology along with the type of neutron tool.
The program then looks up the lithology transform for the tool and outputs the corrected neutron
porosity.
The neutron tool lithology conversions are made using Look-up Tables. These are also used by
the 'Porosity and Water Saturation' module. The 'Output Porosity' curve PhiNeu is a Neutron
'Curve Type' rather than a Porosity (Phi) 'Curve Type'.
The 'Limits' option allows the user to limit the resultant porosity curve values to lie within a
certain range. This can be useful for making sure no negative porosities are calculated.
Related Topics
Porosity
Matrix
Senergy
1632
Rw Apparent / Sw
Permeability
Derivatives
Miscellaneous
Conversions
Conversions 2
Horner Plot
13.3.2 Matrix
The 'Matrix' tab outputs various lithology indicator curves. The user enters the input curves and
then selects the outputs required.
Define the Matrix Input Curves

For the 'Density' curve a 'Fluid Density' value is required in the adjacent box. This will be the
fluid density in the flushed zone.
The 'Neutron' curve input must be in decimal limestone lithology units and its tool type must be
set. If the input neutron is in sandstone units it must first be converted to limestone using the
neutron equations in the 'Porosity' tab.
The 'Sonic' curve input requires the fluid sonic input and the equation type, Wyllie or HuntRaymer.
Define the Matrix Output Curves
1633
Senergy
The ability to Define the Matrix Output Curves are only enabled when the Input PEF Curve is
defined.
'Rho matrix apparent' is calculated by first calculating the neutron / density crossplot porosity
and then the matrix density using the density equation in the 'Porosity' tab. The neutron/density
crossplot porosity uses the neutron tool type to generate the standard chartbook neutron/density
crossplots for sandstone, limestone and dolomite and then calculates the crossplot porosity from
where the data falls on the chart.
'DT matrix apparent' is calculated using the neutron / sonic crossplot porosity and the
requested sonic equation to solve for DT matrix. The neutron / sonic crossplot porosity is
calculated in a similar fashion to the neutron / density crossplot porosity.
'U matrix apparent' is calculated from the PEF equation using the neutron / density crossplot
porosity.
U matrixApp
U water
NDxp
1.0
NDxp
'U' and 'Uwater' are calculated from the PEF curve and the water density. Equations used for
this can be found in the 'Porosity and Water Saturation' module.
The 'M' and 'N' lithology identifiers are calculated as follows :
'M '
'N'
DT fluid
Rhob
1
Rhob
DT
Rho fluid
0.01
neu
Rho fluid
Output Matrix Curves to a Crossplot

Crossplots can be output automatically by checking the required crossplot and clicking the 'Make
Crossplots' button.
Senergy
Related Topics
Porosity
Matrix
Rw Apparent / Sw
Permeability
Derivatives
Miscellaneous
Conversions
Conversions 2
Horner Plot
13.3.3 Rw Apparent / Sw
The 'Rw Apparent / Sw' Tab outputs quick-look type apparent water resistivities plus water
saturations calculated from Archie's equation.
Define Rw Apparent / Sw Input Variables
1634
1635
Senergy
NOTE: Either Input Curves or Fixed Values can be defined as the Input Variables, which could
be useful for things like formation temperature where a fixed value may be required.
Define Rw Apparent / Sw Output Variables

If a Porosity Curve / Value has not been defined in the Input Section, the Output Curve Options
will be disabled. A Porosity Curve / Value MUST be defined to enable the Output Curves
Checkboxes.
The Archie formation factor (FF) is also output. The following equations are used:
FF
' a'
'm '
Rt
FF
Rxo
Rmfapp
FF
Rwapp
Sw
FF Rw
Rt
Sxo
FF Rmf
Rxo
'n '
'n '
Rw and Rmf will be converted to formation temperature using their entered temperature values
and the formation temperature curve. If the Rw temperature and / or the Rmf temperature box
are left blank then no temperature conversion will be made.
Related Topics
Porosity
Matrix
Rw Apparent / Sw
Permeability
Derivatives
Miscellaneous
Senergy
1636
Conversions
Conversions 2
Horner Plot
13.3.4 Permeability
The 'Permeability' tab allows for the calculation of permeability using an industry standard
formula.
Define Permeability Input Variables

The constants in the formula can be entered by 'clicking' on the 'Use' button in the 'Defaults' box or
else selected as curves in the 'Input Curves / Values'.
Define Permeability Default Variables

The 'Timur', 'Morris Biggs oil' and 'Morris Biggs gas' defaults come from the Western Atlas
chartbook, whilst the 'Schlumberger Chart K3' is from the Schlumberger chartbook.
These equations are applicable only over zones which are at irreducible water saturation i.e.
hydrocarbon zones above the transition zone.
1637
Senergy
Define Permeability Output Variables
Related Topics
Porosity
Matrix
Rw Apparent / Sw
Permeability
Derivatives
Miscellaneous
Conversions
Conversions 2
Horner Plot
13.3.5 Derivatives
The 'Derivatives' Tab allows the calculation of the first and second derivative of a curve.
Define Derivatives Input Variables

The Input Variables required for the Derivatives Calculation are an Input Curve and the Number
of Samples to use in Average numeric value.
The 'Number of samples to use in average' field is used to determine the averaging of the data
that goes into the calculations. A value of 2 will use the two data samples above and the two
below the level of calculation for determining the slope.
Senergy
1638
Define Derivatives Output Variables

Two Output Curves can be defined for the Derivatives Calculation. The first derivative operation
calculates the slope of the input curve, the second derivative operation, the rate of change of the
slope. These derivative curves can be useful for automatic bed boundary picking.
Related Topics
Porosity
Matrix
Rw Apparent / Sw
Permeability
Derivatives
Miscellaneous
Conversions
Conversions 2
Horner Plot
13.3.6 Miscellaneous
The Miscellaneous Tab calculates Velocity, Differential Caliper, Volumetric Cross Section (U) and
Conductivity.
To Display the Basic Log Functions Dialog:
1639
Senergy
From the Calculation Menu, Click Basic Log Functions to Open the Basic Log Functions
Dialog with the Porosity Tab displayed, Click the Miscellaneous Tab.
Calculate Velocity
To calculate Velocity, Select the Velocity Checkbox
Specify the Input Curve, the Output Curve and the Output Units.
Click Run Tab to Run the Calculation and Output the Result to the Output Curve.
NOTE: Velocity = 1 / DT
Input Units are acquired from the Input DT Curve. If no Input Units
are defined, the System Default for Sonic can be used. UnitsConversion.pas contains all
the default routines and defaults needed for conversions.
Calculate Differential Caliper

To calculate the Differential Caliper, Select the Differential Caliper Checkbox.
Specify the Input Curve, the Output Curve and the Output Units.
Senergy
1640
There are two options for calculating Differential caliper (DCal),
Either Use DCAL as the Input Curve and Caliper as the Output Curve
or Use Caliper as the Input Curve and DCAL as the Output Curve
NOTE: Output units options should included, Inches, mm or m. UnitsConversion.pas

contains all the default routines and defaults needed for conversions. The Parameter, Bit
Size is displayed in the Default Units for the Caliper Curve. Caliper = DCal + Bit Size.
Calculate the Volumetric Cross Section (U)

To calculate the Volumetric Cross Section (U) (U = Rhob * PEF), Select the Volumetric
Cross Section (U) Checkbox.
Specify the Input Density Curve, the Input PEF Curve, and the Output Curve.
1641
Calculate Conductivity
To calculate Conductivity, Select the Conductivity Checkbox.
Specify the Input Curves and the Output Curves.
NOTE: Ct = 1000 / Rt and Cxo = 1000 / Rxo
Related Topics
Senergy
Senergy
1642
Porosity
Matrix
Rw Apparent / Sw
Permeability
Derivatives
Miscellaneous
Conversions
Conversions 2
Horner Plot
13.3.7 Conversions
The 'Conversions' tab completes some standard conversions of log analysis type data. The
conversions provide the functionality of various charts found in the standard chart books. These
routines do not output any curves.
'Resistivity Temperature Conversion' will either convert resistivities at one temperature to
another temperature with its equivalent salinity or, if the salinity and temperature is entered, the
resistivity will be calculated.
The 'Pressure' routine calculates pressure at a given depth in a well from a fluid weight.
The 'Water Density' routine calculates water density at a given temperature pressure and
salinity.
1643
Senergy
The 'Mud Resistivity' routines use empirical relationships to calculate Rmf and Rmc from Rm,
or Rm and Rmc from Rmf. The equations are valid for salinities below 70 Kppm. The 'Lowe and
Dunlap' option does not calculate Rmc.
The Lowe and Dunlap equations come from "Estimation of Mud Filtrate Resistivity in Fresh
Water Drilling Mud's" The Log Analyst (March-April 1986).
The Overton and Lipson equations come from "A Correlation of the Electrical Properties of
Drilling Fluids with Solids Content" Transactions AIME (1958)
Related Topics
Porosity
Matrix
Rw Apparent / Sw
Permeability
Derivatives
Miscellaneous
Conversions
Conversions 2
Horner Plot
13.3.8 Conversions 2
This new tab calculates downhole oil and gas densities from surface density measurements. The
correlations used are the same as those used in the 'Rock Physics' module and come from the
paper by Batzle and Wang "Seismic Properties of Pore Fluids", Geophysics (1992).
The Reservoir Pressure and Temperature Measurements MUST be defined for Calculation of all
Senergy
1644
Conversions to Run. The Oil, Gas, Sigma Water, Sigma Oil and Sigma Gas Sections will not be
ACTIVE unless the Reservoir Pressure and Temperature Measurements have been defined.
Downhole oil density is calculated from the entered 'Oil' API and 'Gas Density'. Either the 'GOR'
can be entered or the 'Gas Saturated' option 'checked'. In which case the 'GOR' will be
automatically calculated assuming a gas saturated oil.
Downhole gas density is calculated from the entered 'Gas Density'.
'Sigma Water' is calculated using the charts in the Schlumberger chart book (Tcor-2a and Tcor3b).
'Sigma Oil' is calculated from 'GOR' using charts in the Western Atlas chart book (8-6 Rev1 1295 chart book).
'Sigma Gas' is calculated using the Schlumberger chart for 'Methane' (Tcor-1). If 'Wet Gas' is
selected then the methane sigma is corrected as per chart 8-4 in the Western Atlas chart book. If
'Condensate' is selected then the methane sigma is corrected as per chart 8-5 in the Western
Atlas chartbook.
1645
Senergy
Related Topics
Porosity
Matrix
Rw Apparent / Sw
Permeability
Derivatives
Miscellaneous
Conversions
Conversions 2
Horner Plot
13.3.9 Horner Plot

A Horner plot is used to calculate a formation temperature from bottom hole temperature
measurements. A Log / Lin plot of Horner Time against temperature is created. The points are
curve fit and the line extrapolated to a Horner time of 1.0 to give the formation temperature.
To Create a Horner Plot:
From the Calculation Tab, Select Basic Log Functions to display the Basic Log Functions
Dialog, Click the Horner Plot Tab.
Type Depth, Circulation Time, and then the Measured Temperature / Time Since Circulation
Stopped.
The Horner Plot will then be displayed with the result.
Senergy
1646
NOTE: The Read Log Runs button will look up the temperatures and Time since
circulation stopped from the wells log attributes. The Parameter Read from Log Run will
set where the program should start reading from. When clicked this should clear the
current table before starting the read.
It is possible to have multiple sets of these tables and graphics stored in the well. One set
will be used for each logging job. The Next Depth Level and Previous Depth Level will
allow the user to access all the levels. There should be some indication of how many of
these tables are currently available.
1647
Senergy
Click Read Log Runs to Display the Select Log Runs Dialog.
Click OK to Import the Values from the Log Runs into the Selected Horner Plot.
Click Export to Temp Gradient to Export the Horner Plot Data to the Temperature Gradient
Dialog.
You will be prompted to Overwrite if the Temperature Gradient Values already exist.
Senergy
Click Yes to Overwrite the Temperature Gradient Values and Open the Temperature
Gradient Dialog.
The Selected Horner Plot can be copied to the Clipboard by Selecting the Output to
Clipboard Button.
NOTE: The Output Clipboard will copy graphics to clipboard in EMF format.
1648
1649
Related Topics
Porosity
Matrix
Rw Apparent / Sw
Permeability
Derivatives
Miscellaneous
Conversions
Conversions 2
Horner Plot
Senergy
Senergy
13.4
1650
The 'Temperature Gradient' module is used to create a continuous temperature curve, used in
the interpretation modules for converting water resistivities to formation temperatures. The
module is accessed under the main menu 'Calculation'
'Calculate Temperature Gradient'.
The temperature curve can either be calculated by entering a temperature gradient, or by

entering temperatures at fixed points and the program will extrapolate between them. The
temperature gradient is entered in degrees per 100 feet or meters, depending on the units of the
well. A reference depth and temperature also need to be entered to give a starting point for the
temperature curve.
The output curve units are important and are used in the interpretation modules to make the
correct temperature conversions. They are set by toggling the box to the right of the 'Output
Curve' name box. 'F' for Fahrenheit, 'C' for Centigrade.
The 'Save' and 'Load' buttons are used to save and reload the parameters in the module. This is
particularly important if you want to use this module in the Multi-Well batch module.
Related Topics
User Formula
Section 13.4 Calculation and Correction : Temperature Gradient
1651

Horner Plot
Rw from SP
True Vertical Depth
Curve Integration
Section 13.4 Calculation and Correction : Temperature Gradient
Senergy
Senergy
13.5
1652
RW from SP
The 'Rw from SP' module is used to create a continuous Rw curve. This is useful for estimating
Rw values over a number of zones. The module is accessed under the main menu 'Calculation'
'Rw from SP'.
The user enters the baseline-shifted SP curve. The shale baseline must have been set to 0.0 mv.
The baseline shifts can be made in the 'Interactive Baseline Shift' module.
A Formation Temperature curve must be entered. If not available, one can be created using the '
Temperature Gradient' module.
The result RwSP curve will be calculated and corrected to the output temperature entered. The
output temperature can either be a curve or a fixed value.
The optional Salinity curve (leave box blank if not wanted) converts the RwSP results to a salinity
in units of Kppm NaCl equivalent.
The 'Start Depth' and 'Stop Depth' boxes allow the user to specify the calculation interval. If left
blank the whole well will be used.
Related Topics
User Formula
Section 13.5 Calculation and Correction : RW from SP
1653

Rw from SP
True Vertical Depth
Curve Integration
Section 13.5 Calculation and Correction : RW from SP
Senergy
Senergy
13.6
1654
True Vertical Depth Calculations
The 'True Vertical Depth' calculations module is used to create a continuous TVD curve from
an input deviation survey file. It is essential that the TVD curve is calculated over the whole well
interval. If the survey does not cover the whole well interval then a couple of assumptions are
made by the IP program in order to calculate the TVD curve over the whole well interval.
If the survey does not extend to the top of the well then a survey point at zero depth with zero
deviation is added so that the survey can be calculated. This will mean that if at the first
measured survey point the deviation is greater than zero then the deviation values from surface
to the first measured survey point will be incremented to the value of the deviation at the first
measured survey point.
If the survey does not extend to the bottom of the well then a survey point at the bottom of the
well is added with the same azimuth and deviation as the last measured survey point.
If these assumptions do not fit the users' particular circumstances then they should take action to
remedy their particular situation.
The module is accessed under the main menu 'Calculation'
'True Vertical Depth' option.
The module is organized on two 'tabbed' screens. These are :

'TVD Model' Tab
'File or Keyboard Input' Tab
Well deviation survey data can be loaded into the module in four different ways:
1. As curve data: The user should select 'Deviation' and 'Azimuth' curves that already exist in
the IP well and 'check' the 'Input data from well curves' check-box. NOTE: the input curves
must be continuous curves with data at every well depth step. No null values are permitted in
the input Deviation and Azimuth curves.
2. File or Keyboard Input: The user supplies the deviation survey file name and format and loads
the file using the 'File or Keyboard Input' tab.
3. Keyboard Entry of Deviation Data: The user manually enters the deviation data on the 'File or
Keyboard Input' tab.
4. Load Data from External Files: The user loads data in from an external file using the 'File or
Keyboard Input' tab.
Related Topics
User Formula
Section 13.6 Calculation and Correction : True Vertical Depth Calculations
1655
Senergy
Rw from SP
True Vertical Depth
Curve Integration
13.6.1 TVD Model

The 'TVD Model' tab allows the user to set up some of the parameters used in computing TVD /
TVDSS and XY coordinate curves, including the well datum depth, output curve names and
deviation computation algorithm to be used.
Senergy
1656
'Correct for magnetic deviation' - The 'Correct for magnetic deviation' box allows the user
to make adjustments to the input azimuth data, to correct it for magnetic declination changes
between true north and magnetic north. If used, then the result-listing Azimuth will be the
corrected Azimuth.
Calculation Method Panel

The 'Calculation Method' is set by selecting the required 'Method' radio button. Only one
method can be run at a time but, by saving the result listings to different curve names,
comparisons between the methods can be made.
The following are brief descriptions of the calculation methods.

'Average angle' : The direction between two stations is assumed to be the average of the
direction at each station.
'Triangular Tangential' : The hole is assumed to have a direction the same as the upper
station for half the interval between the stations and a direction the same as the lower station
for the lower half.
'Radius of Curvature' : A spherical arc is generated that passes through the two stations at
the measured station angles.
'Minimum Curvature' : A circular arc is generated between the stations with a minimum
curvature but still being tangential to the borehole at the two stations.
Calculation Reference Panel

The 'Calculation Reference' panel allows the user to specify the positional references for the
deviation survey calculations. These are the depth and X, Y position that the input survey uses
as a starting position. The user can specify a reference depth which is above, below or in the
middle of a deviation survey. For example, if the user wanted to match a known TVD MD pair in
a well they would enter these depths and the rest of the survey would be extrapolated up and
down from this depth.
If the user wanted the program to calculate 'departure' curves 'EDIST' and 'NDIST' containing the
1657
Senergy
rectangular coordinates of the well bore from surface to well TD, type in the Surface UTM coordinates for the well location into the 'East distance at reference' and 'North distance at
reference' boxes before running the module.
Output Curves Panel

The 'Output Curves' panel allows the user to select the names of the output curves to be
computed by IP. IP will compute both TVD and TVDSS curves, as well as XY positional curves, '
EDIST' and 'NDIST'.
NOTE: It is essential that the TVD ,TVDSS, EDIST and NDIST curves are created for all
wells in an IP database, if the user wishes to use either of the programs visualization
tools; 'Well Map' and/or '3D Parameter Viewer' effectively.
The 'Azimuth' (HAZI) and 'Deviation' (HDEVI) curves are optional outputs. If a name is
inserted into the output boxes, then the Azimuth and Deviation curves are generated at the Well
Step increment, from the input deviation survey data, using the user-selected calculation
method.
MD Elevation - The 'MD Elevation' box will automatically pick up the value in the 'Above
Permanent Datum' field in the 'Manage Well Header Info.' module, on the 'Default
Parameters' tab, if it has been filled in. Alternatively, the user can type in the well reference
depth value (usually height above Mean Sea Level) into the 'MD Elevation' box to allow the
program to compute TVD and TVDSS curves. Note: if the TVD calculation module is run and
the 'MD Elevation' value is subsequently changed in the 'Manage Well Header Info.' module,
then the user will have to manually type in the new 'MD Elevation' value and the TVD
calculation will have to be re-run for the well, before hitting the 'Run' button.
Make TVDSS depths negative - The 'Make TVDSS depths negative' 'check' box is used to
flag that the TVDSS depth curve, calculated by IP, should be written as negative values e.g 100, -200, -300 etc... below Mean Sea Level. The default setting, with the box 'un-checked', is
that TVDSS depths are written as positive values below Mean Sea Level.
Related Topics
Senergy
1658
TVD Model
File or Keyboard Input
Load Data from External Files
Keyboard Entry of Deviation Data
View the Calculation Results
13.6.2 File or Keyboard Input

The 'File or Keyboard Input' screen allows the user to view and confirm the input format of
deviation survey data which can either be loaded from an external ASCII file, pasted in from an
Excel or ASCII file or by manually typing data entries into the empty 'grid' at the top of the window.
When an ASCII file is loaded and the appropriate data column format is applied, the ASCII data is
copied into the Upper 'grid' window. Data points can be edited and added into this 'grid', if
necessary, before running the computation.
Related Topics
TVD Model
1659
Senergy
13.6.3 Load Data from External Files

To load data from an external ASCII text file the user should first determine the format of the
ASCII deviation data file:
Is the Deviation / inclination data presented in 'Degrees' or 'Degrees and minutes' ?
Is the Azimuth data presented in 'Degrees' or formatted as a 'Bearing' ?
Then:
Ensure the 'Load from file' check box is 'checked'.
If either 'Deviation in deg /minutes' or 'Azimuth as a Bearing' applies to the input file,
'tick' the appropriate check-box.
Enter the name of the ASCII survey file or select it using the 'Browse' button.
'Click' the 'Load' button to display the contents of the file in the lower panel of the
window. The program will try and determine the format of the input file and will display
the survey data in the grid at the top of the window if it can resolve the format. The user
must make sure the formatting is correct before proceeding to calculate the survey. If
the format is not correct, the user must manually set it. This is achieved in the 'Data
Format' panel by:
1. If the Deviation (inclination) input is in 'degrees and minutes' then 'tick' the check-box
'Deviation in deg / minutes' in the upper right corner of the window. The 'Deviation is
in column' number should point to the 'degrees' column of the Deviation / inclination
entry in the input file.
2. If the Azimuth input is in a 'Bearing' format (for example 'N 30 W' or 'S 20.4 E',
illustrated below) then 'tick' the 'Azimuth as a Bearing' check-box at the upper right
hand corner of the window. The 'Azimuth is in column' number should point to the
azimuth field on the Ascii file. The data should display in the upper, editing grid.
3. Set the line number for the first line of data in the 'Data starts at line' box.
4. Select the column numbers for the 'Depth', 'Deviation' and 'Azimuth' inputs.
5. Set the 'File Format Delimiter'. The options are 'Spaces', 'Tabs', 'Commas', '
Other' and 'Fixed'
Senergy
1660
The 'Fixed' format option allows the user to specify the format of the input data. This
should only be necessary if the data has been generated using a 'fortran' type
expression where one number can run into another. The user must enter the format of
the data. This is done by entering the width of each input column separated by a
comma. The following are valid format expressions:
8,8,10,12,12
This can be simplified by using brackets 2(8),10,2(12)
8,10,12,8,10,12 If an expression repeats you can leave out the repeat 8,10,12
10,10,10,10
This could be simplified as 4(10) or just 10
6. Click the 'Apply' button in the 'Data Format' panel of the window to apply the selected
format.
Once the data has been loaded into the 'grid' window at the top of the screen it can then be
edited or added to by manually changing the numbers. The order of depths in the list is not
important as the program sorts the data before making the calculations.
The following examples illustrate the acceptable data formats for files to load deviation data into
IP. NOTE: these deviation and Azimuth data could be included in much larger ASCII files, the
user would then need to specify the column numbers to load into the TVD module interface.
1. Deviation in Degrees and Azimuth in Degrees:
Dept h
M
100
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
Dev i at i on
Deg
0. 4000
0. 9600
4. 8000
7. 7800
12. 5600
16. 5700
21. 4000
30. 2100
Az i mut h
Deg
125. 03
98. 30
75. 32
65. 23
57. 92
56. 72
53. 20
53. 39
2. Deviation in Degrees / Minutes, Azimuth in Degrees:
1661
Dept h Dev i at i on
M
De g Mi n
100
0 56
500
0 27
1000
4 25
1500
7 36
2000
12 13
2500
16 29
3000
21 38
3500
30 06
Senergy
Az i mut h
Deg
125. 03
98. 30
75. 32
65. 23
57. 92
56. 72
53. 20
53. 39
3. Deviation in Degrees, Azimuth as a Bearing:

Dept h
Met er s
100
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
Dev i at i on
Degr ees
0. 4000
0. 9600
4. 8000
7. 7800
12. 5600
16. 5700
21. 4000
30. 2100
Az i mut h
Be a r i ng
N 12. 01
N 16. 44
N 18. 96
N 34. 08
N 39. 68
N 45. 40
N 56. 72
N 58. 21
W
E
E
E
W
W
W
W
4. Deviation in Degrees / Minutes, Azimuth as a Bearing:

Dept h Dev i at i on
M
De g Mi n
100
0 56
500
0 27
1000
4 25
1500
7 36
2000
12 13
2500
16 29
3000
21 38
3500
30 06
Az i mut h
Be a r i ng
N 12. 01
N 16. 44
N 18. 96
N 34. 08
N 39. 68
N 45. 40
N 56. 72
N 58. 21
W
E
E
E
W
W
W
W
Pasting in from an External File

TVD data can be pasted in from an Excel spreadsheet or from an ASCII text file. It is easiest if the
TVD data in the external file is in the same format as that in the module i.e. Depth, Deviation and
Azimuth columns. Then it is simply a matter of copying the data in the external file, clicking in the
first 'Depth' cell and then clicking the 'Paste' button.
However, even if the data isn't in the correct format it is possible to copy and paste data on a cellby-cell basis either using the 'Paste' button or by utilising the 'Cut', 'Copy', 'Paste' and 'Delete'
menu items which become available by highlighting the text within a cell and then right mouse
button clicking.
Senergy
'Run' : Click the 'Run' button to calculate the survey and output the results to the well as
continuous curves.
Related Topics
TVD Model
1662
1663
Senergy
13.6.4 Keyboard Entry of Deviation Data

Deviation Survey data can be typed manually into the input 'grid' at the top of the window. 'Check'
the boxes to the right hand side of the grid window to select the format ('Deviation in deg /
minutes' and / or 'Azimuth as a Bearing') if these are appropriate for your input data. The order
of depths in the list is not important since the program sorts the data, using the Depth column
entries, before making the calculations. Click the 'Add Line' button, located to the right hand side
of the input grid to add new lines to the grid table.
When manually entering data where 'Azimuth as a Bearing' is applicable, click in a cell in the '
Azi N/S' or 'Azi E/W' column to toggle between North/South or East/ West settings.
Related Topics
TVD Model
13.6.5 View the Calculation Results

The 'View Listing' button at the bottom of the window allows the user to list the calculated
survey that has been saved to disk. When 'clicked', the user will be asked for the name of a file to
save the survey to, and then the program will launch 'NotePad' with the survey file loaded.
The resulting survey file can be reloaded at a later date, using the 'Input from file' option, and the
calculation re-run.
Example of part of a survey listing:
TVD SURVEY CALCULATIONS
Well :
Date :
Test Well 1
07/02/2000 17:05:45
Senergy
Calculation Method
Well reference depth
TVD at Well reference depth
East distance at Well reference depth
North distance at Well reference depth
Correction made for magnetic deviation
:
:
:
:
:
:
1664
Minimum Curvature
0.
0.
0.
0.
10.
TVD output curve name

: TVD
East distance output curve name : EDIST
North Distance output curve name : NDIST
Measured TVD
East
North Input
Input
Leg
Curvature
Depth
Depth
Distance Distance Devi
Azimuth Distance
deg/100ft
0.00
0.00
0.0
0.0 Reference depth
0.00
0.00
0.0
0.0 0.000
10.000
0.000
0.000
1000.00
999.95
8.1
3.2 1.000
68.200 1000.000
0.100
1286.00 1285.78
17.3
5.8 2.820
76.200 286.000
0.642
1572.00 1571.16
35.6
8.7 4.640
84.200 286.000
0.660
1858.00 1855.81
63.2
9.2 6.460
92.200 286.000
0.690
2144.00 2139.45
99.5
5.0 8.280 100.200 286.000
0.729
2430.00 2421.78
143.6
-6.5 10.100 108.200 286.000
0.776
2716.00 2702.52
194.0
-27.4 11.920 116.200 286.000
0.829
Leg
Leg
TVD
East
Leg
North
0.000
0.000
0.000
999.949
8.102
3.241
285.829
9.150
2.605
285.384
18.343
2.847
284.652
27.588
0.551
283.633
36.349
-4.265
282.329
44.096
-11.481
280.741
50.332
-20.876
Related Topics
TVD Model
1665
13.7
Senergy
True Vertical / Stratigraphic Thickness
The 'TVT / TST' module is used to compute 'True Vertical Thickness' (TVT) and 'True
Stratigraphic Thickness' (TST) depth curves which can then be used to make TVT / TST depth
log plots and then these can be used as inputs to 'Cutoff & Summation' reports.
The module is accessed under the main menu 'Calculation
'True Vertical / True
Stratigraphic Thickness'.
Section 13.7 Calculation and Correction : True Vertical / Stratigraphic Thickness
Senergy
1666
Before running this module, the True Vertical Depth module must be run or the results of the
well deviation survey must have been loaded into IP. The borehole 'X', 'Y' and 'Z' ('NDist', 'EDist'
and 'TVD') direction curves must be entered.
The user must enter the 'Depth', 'Dip' and Dip 'Azimuth' of the formations to be calculated.
The program calculates continuous TVT and TST curve over the whole well. Formations
shallower than the 'top entered depth' will be assumed to have the same dip value as the
entered top depth formation dip. Similarly, formations deeper than the 'bottom entered depth'
will be assumed to have the same dip as that of the bottom entered depth.
The 'Add Line' button is used for adding more lines to the grid for data entry. The depth order
that the data is entered does not matter since it will be sorted into ascending depth order before
running the calculations.
Dip 'Azimuth' values can be entered as a bearing e.g. "N 12.01 W", by 'checking' the '
Azimuth in Bearing' box.
The 'Pole Depth' is the starting position for the TVT / TST calculations and it is entered as the
measured depth value from which the calculations are started. If a value is not entered, it is
1667
Senergy
assumed to be the top depth of the IP well. The resulting 'TVT' and 'TST' curves will be aligned
to the TVD depth at the Pole depth. Calculations for TVT and TST will be different, depending
on whether the formation thickness being calculated is above or below the Pole depth (See
diagram below).
'Click' the 'OK' button to first calculate the zonal TVT and TST thicknesses, which the program
outputs as a report (click 'View Results' after first 'clicking' 'Save results' otherwise a
message will appear informing the user that they have to re-run the calculations first). The
program will then calculate the continuous TVT and TST curves which can be used for making
TVT and TST log plots, or, in the 'Cut-off and Summation' module, for calculating TVT and
TST zonal Net Reservoir / Net Pay results.
The 'Save Results' button allows you to save the current result to disk (this has to be done
before 'clicking' the 'View Results' button, the first time the module is run).
The 'Load Results' button allows you to restore previously calculated results.
The TVT and TST thicknesses between two formation tops / markers are calculated as follows:
TST = H ( Cos(Hdev) Sin(HDev) * Tan(Fdev) * Cos(Hazi - Fazi) ) * Cos(Fdev)
TVT = H ( Cos(Hdev) Sin(HDev) * Tan(Fdev) * Cos(Hazi - Fazi) )
Where:
H
: Formation 'Measured Depth' thickness along the well bore
Hdev : Well bore deviation angle from the vertical

Hazi
: Well bore azimuth
Senergy
1668
Fdev : Formation dip angle from the horizontal

Fazi
: Formation dip - azimuth
Display the TVDSS Report

An example output listing follows:
TRUE VERTI CAL AND STRATI GRAPHI
Wel l :
Tes t Wel l 1
Dat e :
08/ 04/ 2006 09: 28: 04
TVD i nput c ur v e name
Nor t h i nput c ur v e name
:
Eas t i nput c ur v e name
:
Wel l Pol e dept h
:
TVT out put c ur v e name
TST out put c ur v e name
CAL CALCULATI ONS

: TVD
NDI ST
EDI ST
7614.
: TVT
: TST
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
Meas ur ed Dept h
|
TVD Dept h
| For mat i on
|
Hol e
|
Thi c k nes s
|
| Top
Bot t om
Di s t
| Top
Bot t om
Di s t
| Dev i
Az i
| Dev i
Az i
|
St r at
Ver t
|
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------7614. 00 7700. 00
86. 00 7376. 92 7454. 32
77. 40
12. 00
60. 00
25. 79
127. 82
72. 81
74. 43
7700. 00 7779. 00
79. 00 7454. 32 7522. 41
68. 09
15. 00
90. 00
30. 44
135. 41
58. 52
60. 58
7779. 00 8000. 00
221. 00 7522. 41 7702. 20
179. 79
5. 00
270. 00
35. 42
139. 82
186. 61
187. 33
8000. 00 8634. 00
634. 00 7702. 20 8149. 28
447. 08
2. 00
256. 00
45. 12
145. 99
452. 46
452. 73
8634. 00 8726. 00
92. 00 8149. 28 8216. 57
67. 29
10. 00
330. 00
43. 00
144. 81
77. 11
78. 30
8726. 00 8738. 00
12. 00 8216. 57 8225. 34
8. 78
10. 00
330. 00
43. 00
143. 32
10. 05
10. 21
NOTE: unrealistic TVT / TST thicknesses can be computed in situations where the borehole
deviation is high and formation deviation is high (>45 degrees), such that the well penetrates the
bottom of the formation first , before penetrating the Top of the formation / interval of interest.
Related Topics
User Formula
Rw from SP
True Vertical Depth
1669
Curve Integration
Senergy
Senergy
13.8
1670
Curves from Zones / Parameters
The 'Curve from Zones / Parameters' module is used to create a continuous curve from a
Zone / Tops set or from an interpretation module (Clay Volume, Porosity / Water Saturation,
Mineral Solver etc...) Parameter set, where each zones depth interval is represented by a
numerical 'Flag' value in the curve. The value applied in each zone can be set either to:
the value of a particular interpretation parameter; for example Rw, m, ND DenClay, or
the 'Zone Number', or
A 'default', or user-defined value, based on 'Zone Names'.
The module is accessed under the main menu 'Calculation'
' Curve from Zones /
Parameters'.
The user selects the 'Parameter Set' and the 'Result Curve' name. The zones for the selected '
Parameter Set' will be displayed in the right-hand panel. The user can edit the values to be set in
the result curve for each zone. The 'default' value is to use the zone number as the 'flag' value.
For example in the above example, if zone 'LS3' is from 7800'-8000' then the value '5' will be put
into the result curve over this depth interval.
If you have a multi-well Tops Set and you wish to assign flag curve values based on the Tops Set
zone names this can be set up very easily - either take the default values based on the Zone
Numbers (the numbers in brackets in the 'Zone Name' column) or change the 'value' entries to
your own requirements. Click the 'Save' button to save the settings to an external, .ztc, disk file.
You can then go to another well containing the same Tops Set, open this module and load the .
ztc file you created earlier. This allows you to create a consistent 'flag' curve, based on your
Tops Set zone names, for a multi-well dataset.
If you select an interpretation module parameter Set, the 'Output parameter values' check-box
Section 13.8 Calculation and Correction : Curves from Zones / Parameters
1671
Senergy
will become 'active'. If the box is 'checked' then a parameter associated with the user-selected
Parameter Set can be chosen from the drop-down list box to populate the values in the output
curve. The example, below, shows the 'Gamma Ray Clay' parameter (GR Clay) from the '
ClayVol' Parameter Set has been chosen. The number of Clay Volume interpretation zones in
this well is displayed, along with the associated parameter values, in the right hand panel of the
window.
The 'Save' and 'Load' buttons are used to save and re-load the parameters in the module. This
is particularly important if you want to use this module in Multi-Well batch mode. When run in
batch mode the actual parameter values that are saved into the saved parameter file are not
used. The module loads only the 'Parameter Set', the 'Result Curve' name, the 'Output
parameter values' option and the 'Output Parameter'. The number of zones and the zone
values will be the default ones for the well. This means that the same parameter file can be used
on multiple wells.
Related Topics
User Formula
Rw from SP
True Vertical Depth
Curve Integration
Senergy
1672
1673
13.9
Senergy
Curve Integration
The 'Curve Integration' module is used to integrate log curves. The module allows the
integration of borehole volume, sonic transit time or any other curve in the database. The module
is accessed under the main menu 'Calculation'
' Curve Integration'.
Borehole Integration
For borehole integration the user enters an X caliper and optionally a Y caliper curve. The input
and output units for the curves must be selected. The program will calculate a hole volume
assuming a circular hole, X caliper only entered, or elliptical hole, X and Y calipers entered.
The output curve will contain the integrated hole volume from the start depth to the stop depth. If
the start depth is greater than the stop depth then the integration will be done in an
upwards direction.
The 'Delete Curve before write' check box, if 'checked', will delete the Output curve, if it already
exists, before running the calculation. If the box is not 'checked', the output curve will be
overwritten only between the start and stop depths.
A 'Pip Curve' can be optionally output. This curve will contain a series of values of either 1 or 2,
depending on the 'Small Pip' or 'Large Pip' values. The curve starts with a large pip (value 2) at
the start depth. Each time the integrated curve reaches a multiple of the small pip value, a value
1 is stored in the curve. Each time it reaches an even multiple of the large pip value, a value 2 is
Section 13.9 Calculation and Correction : Curve Integration
Senergy
1674
stored in the curve. In between the values, null (-999) data is stored. Pip curves can be plotted
using the 'Pip' line style (example below).
Sonic Integration
The sonic integration allows input in sec/m or sec/ft. Output can either be in seconds or
milliseconds. The example below shows a pip curve displayed alongside the sonic log, giving the
transit time in 1 millisecond per small pip.
Normal Integration
The 'normal' curve integration operation will accumulate a curve from the 'Top Depth' to the '
Bottom Depth'. Each curve sample value will be divided by the well depth step between
samples before it is accumulated. The result curve is therefore the 'Cumulative Value Thickness'.
This is useful, for example, for calculating permeability footage (Md ft) across a reservoir interval.
1675
Senergy
The 'direction' of the integration can be reversed, so that the accumulation is made from the
bottom of the hole, upwards. This is done by putting the deepest well depth as the 'Top Depth'
and the shallowest depth as the 'Bottom Depth'.
Related Topics
User Formula
Rw from SP
True Vertical Depth
Curve Integration
Senergy
1676
13.10 Environmental Corrections

The 'Environmental Corrections' calculations incorporate the functionality of the logging
service company 'standard' chart book graphs and nomogram's.
To Display the required Environmental Correction Dialog:
From the Calculation Menu, Select Environmental Corrections, then the required Logging
Company to display the required Environmental Correction Dialog.
Environmental correction calculations are presented here for:

'Schlumberger'
'Anadrill'
'Baker Atlas'
'Halliburton'
'Baker Hughes INTEQ'
'Sperry Sun'
'Weatherford/Reeves'
'PathFinder'
An example of the environmental correction tabs are shown here for:
'Gamma Ray Logs'
'Density Logs'
'Neutron Logs'
Section 13.10 Calculation and Correction : Environmental Corrections
1677
Senergy
'Resistivity Logs'
The Baker Hughes INTEQ, Anadrill, Sperry Sun, Weatherford and PathFinder corrections
are presented for their respective Logging-While-Drilling (LWD) tools.
The Reference Chart Books are:
Schlumberger - Log Interpretation Charts (2000)
Halliburton - Log Interpretation Charts (1994)
Baker Atlas - Log Interpretation Charts (1984)
Baker Hughes Inteq 2002 Log Interpretation Charts (2002)
Sperry Sun - Log Interpretation Charts (1996)
Weatherford Log interpretation Charts Compact Tool Series (2007)
Weatherford Log interpretation Charts Standard Tool Series (2007)
Weatherford Log Interpretation Charts LWD Tool Series (2005)
PathFinder LWD Log Interpretation Charts (2007)
Log Interpretation Charts Links:
Schlumberger : http://www.slb.com/content/services/resources/books/log_charts/index.asp?
Baker Atlas : http://www.bakerhughesdirect.com (user login required)
Baker Hughes Inteq : http://www.bakerhughesdirect.com (user login required)
Halliburton : http://www.halliburton.com (user login required)
Pathfinder : http://www.pathfinderlwd.com/pdf/dnsc_Environmental.pdf
Sperry Sun : http://www.halliburton.com
NOTE: We cannot guarantee that these links now work due to mergers, acquisitions, and just
being downright awkward.
The Corrections calculations are arranged on 'tabs', each 'tab' representing a different 'tool type'.
The number of 'tabs' is determined by the tool-type corrections available from the Logging
Service company.
The following sections describe some of the controls and corrections available for each type of
service: (Note: this list is not exhaustive but meant to clarify the operation of the tabs to someone
already experienced with applying environmental corrections)
Gamma Ray
The available environmental correction options are specific to the tool being corrected. The
screen shot shown below is for the Gamma Ray log,
Senergy
1678
Here is a brief explanation of the options:
Input
'Gr input curve' - select the uncorrected gamma curve from the well data.
'Caliper input curve or Hole size (inch)' - allows the user to select a caliper curve or type in a
fixed hole size for the borehole correction.
'Top Depth and Bottom Depth' - allows an interval for which the corrections are to be
applied.
Outputs
'Gr output curve' - select or input the name of the output GR curve that will be
1679
Senergy
environmentally corrected.
'Filter curve' - The user is able to use the 'Filter curve' option, which applies a 'smoothing
function' to the input curve, without running the borehole corrections, by 'un-checking' the
'Borehole Correct' 'check' box. The number of 'levels' of filtering can be set in the box next to
the 'Filter curve' 'check' box - the levels must be a whole, odd number.
The results can be viewed by selecting the 'Plot Results' button. A simple log plot will be
launched showing the input curves and the GR output curve. The output curve name is
editable.
Environmental Correction Options

'Borehole Correct' - This 'check box' is selected before pressing the 'Run Tab' button to
ensure the following corrections are applied. The various 'Tool Position', 'Mud Type', 'Hole
Type', 'Mud Weight', 'Tool Diameter', 'Standoff' and 'Cased Hole' corrections are only applied
if 'Borehole Correct' is 'checked'.
'Tool Position [Eccentered/Centered]' - Selects the hardware configuration of the logging tool
that recorded the data.
'Mud Type [Non barite/Barite]' - Selects whether barite mud was used.
'Hole Type [Open Hole/cased Hole]' - Selects whether the GR tool was run in open hole or
through casing.
'Mud weight' - Allows the user to input the weight of mud that was used.
'Tool Diameter' - Allows the user to input the diameter of tool that was used to record the GR
curve.
'Standoff' - Allows for a value of standoff to be input (should be completed if 'Eccentered' tool
position was used.
'Cased Hole' - The user should complete these details if the GR should be corrected for
casing effects.
Density
The screen shot below is for the Density Log.
Senergy
1680
Here is a brief explanation of the options:
Input
'Density input curve' - select the uncorrected bulk density curve from the well data.
'PEF input curve' - select the Photoelectric factor curve from the well data.
applied. The number of 'levels' of filtering can be set in the box next to the 'Filter curve'
'check' box - the levels must be a whole, odd number.
1681
Senergy
Outputs
'Density output curve' - select or input the name of the output Density curve that will be
'Borehole Correct' 'check' box.
launched showing the input curves and the 'Density' output curve. The output curve name is
editable.

ensure the following corrections are applied. The various 'Mud weight' and 'Density Tool'
corrections are only applied if 'Borehole Correct' is 'checked'.
'Mud weight' - Allows the user to input the weight of mud that was used.
'Density Tool [FDC/LDT]' - Allows the environmental corrections for the correct tool that
recorded the data to be applied.
Compensated Neutron
The following screens show the appearance of the 'CNL' neutron log.
Senergy
1682
Input
'Neutron input curve' - select the neutron input curve curve from the well data. (Note: by
checking the 'Input Neutron hole size corrected' check box the user can indicate whether the
Neutron input curve has a caliper correction already applied. By checking the box the caliper
correction is 'backed out' and applied through the 'Holesize' check box.).
'Temperature curve or value' - select the temperature curve from the well data or input a
temperature value that will be used in the temperature correction. (Select the 'DegF' or
'DegC' radio button).
1683
Senergy
applied.
Outputs
'Neutron Corrected' - select or input the name of the output Neutron curve that will be
'Borehole Correct' 'check' box. The number of 'levels' of filtering can be set in the box next to
the 'Filter curve' 'check' box - the levels must be a whole, odd number.
launched showing the input curves and the 'Neutron corrected' output curve. The output
curve name is editable.

Borehole Correct - This 'check box' is selected before pressing the 'Run Tab' button to
ensure the following corrections are applied. The various 'Hole size', 'Mud weight', 'Borehole
salinity', 'Standoff', 'Matrix' and 'Pressure' corrections are only applied if 'Borehole Correct' is
'checked'.
'Neutron tool [CNT-A/CNT-C/D]' - Allows the environmental corrections for the correct tool
that recorded the data to be applied.
'Input Matrix/Output Matrix [Limestone/Sandstone/Dolomite]' - Allows the Input Neutron
Curve to be corrected for matrix. (If the user wishes simply to convert a Limestone matrix
Neutron curve to Sandstone or Dolomite matrix, 'un-check' the 'Hole size', 'Mudcake',
'Temperature' etc.. 'check' boxes, select the 'Output Matrix' radio button for the appropriate
matrix and press the 'Run Tab' button).
'Input Neutron hole size corrected' - (See Input).
'Holesize' - Allows for a correction to compensate for the hole size. The neutron tools
response is calibrated for a hole of a particular diameter. The caliper curve or a fixed value
can be selected in 'Caliper input curve or Hole size (inch)' as input to this correction.
'Mudcake' - This uses the 'Bit size' and then uses the 'Caliper or Hole Size' input to vary the
amount of mudcake and correct for it (i.e. if the mudcake is 0.5" and the bit size is 8.5",
enter the caliper as 8").
'Borehole Salinity' - Corrects for Kppm (NaCl eq) in the borehole.
'Mud Weight' - Corrects for the density of the mud input in the associated box. The 'Barite
Senergy
1684
Mud' check box selects whether the correction used is for Natural Mud or Barite Mud.
'Borehole Temperature' - Applies the Borehole temperature correction from the
'Temperature curve or value' in the Input.
'Pressure' - Corrects the neutron tool's response for Wellbore Pressure. A single pressure
value can be input into the associated box (the user should pick a value that best represents
the wellbore pressure at the zone of interest). In addition, the correction is different for Oil
Based Mud and this can be selected using the 'Oil Mud' check box and picking a value for
the 'Compressibility Multiplier'. The pressure value can also be obtained from a depth curve
selected from the 'Curve' drop-down box. To use this method the 'Calculate pressure from
depth' box should be 'checked' and the 'Pressure' box 'unchecked' or the value left blank.
This depth curve and the 'Mud Weight' are used to calculate the hydrostatic pressure which
is then used in the correction. (NOTE: For deviated wells the TVD curve should be used for
this correction).
'Formation Salinity' - Allows for a correction for Limestone formation salinity Kppm (NaCl
eq).
Resistivity
The following screens show the appearance of the 'DLL/MSFL/ MLL' resistivity corrections.
1685
Senergy
Input
'Deep Laterolog (ohmm)' - select the uncorrected Deep Laterolog curve from the well data.
'Shallow Laterolog (ohmm)' - select the uncorrected Shallow Laterolog curve from the well
data.
'Micro Resistivity (ohmm)' - select the uncorrected Micro Resistivity curve from the well
data.
'Temperature curve or value' - select the Temperature curve from the well data or input a
temperature value that will be used in the temperature correction. (Select the 'DegF' or
Senergy
1686
'DegC' radio button).

'Top Depth' and 'Bottom Depth' - allows an interval for which the corrections are to be
applied.
Outputs
'Deep Laterolog (ohmm)' - select or create the environmentally corrected Deep Laterolog
curve.
'Shallow Laterolog (ohmm)' - select or create the environmentally corrected Shallow
Laterolog curve.
'Micro Resistivity (ohmm)' - select or create the environmentally corrected Micro Resistivity
curve.
'Borehole Correct' 'check' box.
launched showing the input curves and the 'Resisitivity' output curves. The output curve
name is editable.

ensure the following corrections are applied. The various 'Mud Resistivity', 'Mudcake
Resistivity', 'Tool Type', 'Tool Position' corrections are only applied if 'Borehole Correct' is
'checked'.
'Mud Resistivity' - Correct for Resistivity of mud at reference temperature 'Mud Res Temp'.
'Mudcake Resistivity' - Correct for mudcake resistivity at reference temperature 'Mudcake
Res Temp'. The mud cake thickness is calculated using the 'Bit size' and then the 'Caliper
or Hole Size' input to vary the amount of mudcake and correct for it.
'Dual Laterolog Tool Type [DLT-B/DLT-D/E]' - Allows the user to chose the laterolog tool
used to record the data.
'Tool Position [Eccentered/Centered]' - Selects the hardware configuration of the logging tool
that recorded the data.
'Microresistivity Tool Type [MSFL(regular)/MSFL(Slim hole)/MLL]' -Selects the type of tool
that was used to record the micro-resistivity measurement.
Related Topics
1687
Senergy
Schlumberger Corrections
Baker Atlas Corrections
Halliburton Corrections
Anadrill Corrections
Baker Hughes Inteq Corrections
Sperry Sun Corrections
Weatherford Corrections
PathFinder
13.10.1 Schlumberger Corrections

The 'Schlumberger Corrections' environmental correction module uses the algorithms
distributed by Schlumberger in their 'Green Book' library. Tool types are organized on a series of
'tabs' with appropriate parameter selection options on each tab, depending on the tool type.
See Environmental Corrections for information on the operation of the tabs. The screen
shown below illustrates the parameters for the Gamma Ray tool.
Senergy
1688
The list below gives an indication of which chart(s) (Schlumberger Log Interpretation Charts
2000 Edition) each of the tabs relate to.
'Gamma Ray' tab
Gamma Ray correction charts GR1, GR2 and GR3
'Density' tab
Environmental Corrections to Formation Density Log

(FDC) and Litho-Density Log (LDT) chart Por-15a.
'CNL' tab
Compensated Neutron Log (CNL) Borehole correction

charts Por-14a, Por-14c and Por-14d.
'Neutron
Compensated Neutron Log (CNL) NPHI-TNPH conversion
Conversion' tab
chart Por-14e.
'SNP' tab
Sidewall Neutron Porosity Log (SNP) mudcake and matrix

correction charts Por-15a and Por-13a.
1689
Senergy
'DLL/MSFL/MLL' tab Dual Laterolog (DLT-D/E) Borehole correction charts

Rcor-2b and Rcor-2c.
Microlaterolog mudcake correction chart Rxo-2.
MicroSFL mudcake correction chart Rxo-3.
'Induction' tab
Induction Log Borehole correction chart Rcor-4a.

Spherically Focused Log (SFL) Borehole correction chart
Rcor-3.
Phasor Induction Borehole correction chart Rcor-4b and
Rcor-4c.
'HALS Laterolog' tab No information at present.

'EPT' tab
EPT-G mudcake correction charts EPTcor-3a through to

EPTcor-4b.
'DIL Invasion' tab
Dual Induction (DIL) - Spherically Focused Log (SFL)

Invasion correction charts Rint-2b and Rint-2c.
Deep Induction- Spherically Focused Log (SFL)-Rxo
device Invasion correction chart Rint-5.
Dual Induction (DIL)-Rxo device Invasion correction chart
Rint-10.
'DLL Invasion' tab
Dual Laterolog (DLT-D/E)-Rxo device Invasion correction

chart Rint-9b.
The 'Filter Curve' option allows the user to apply a filter to the result curve. This allows the user
to resolution-match log curves. The Caliper and temperature input boxes always allow the user to
enter a curve or a fixed value.
The 'Save' and 'Load' buttons allow the user to save and restore the parameters associated with
the environmental corrections to a disk file. The parameters are automatically stored in the well
database. However, the 'Save' and 'Load' options give the user more flexibility.
The
button has a similar function to those found in other modules.
Different 'environmental zones' can be created, selected and deleted, using the zone
navigation buttons and the 'Delete Zone' button found at the bottom of the window. For example,
if the number of zones is 1 and you click the 'right arrow' zone navigation button, you will be
asked if you want to create a new zone. Click 'yes' and you will then be asked if you want to
clear/reset the current parameters. Choose the appropriate button and a new environmental
zone will be created. By 'clicking' the 'left arrow' navigation button you can go back to a previous
environmental zone. NOTE: To update the current parameters you have to click 'Run Tab'.
Senergy
1690
The 'Run Tab' button only runs the corrections for the currently displayed tab page. The 'Plot
Results' button displays a log plot showing the effect of the correction. Each correction page has
its own plot format. An example of the Gamma Ray plot is shown below.
Related Topics
PathFinder
1691
Senergy
13.10.2 Baker Atlas Corrections

The 'Baker Atlas Corrections' environmental correction module uses the algorithms distributed
by Baker Atlas in their environmental library. Tool types are organized on a series of 'tabs' with
appropriate parameter selection options on each tab, depending on the tool type.
See Environmental Corrections for information on the operation of the tabs. The screen
shown below illustrates the parameters for the Gamma Ray tool.
Due to Senergy Ltd. receiving the Baker Atlas chartbook as a series of algorithms it has proved
difficult to assign charts numbers from the actual chartbook to the tabs within the 'Baker Atlas
Environmental Corrections' module. The list below is an indication of the different tools
corrected on each of the tabs.
'Gamma Ray' tab
Gamma Ray Borehole Size correction charts 4-1, 4-3, and

4-13.
Senergy
'Density' tab
1692
Pe Borehole Size correction for Compensated Z-Densilog

Series 2222 charts 6-7 and 6-8.
Bulk Density Borehole Size correction for Compensated ZDensilog Series 2222 chart 6-9.
Bulk Density Borehole Size correction for Compensated ZDensilog Se1ies 2227 chart 6-10.
'Neutron' tab
Compensated Neutron correction charts for Series 2418

CN Log charts 6-11, 6-29 plus charts 6-32 through to 6-35.
CN Log charts 6-12 through to 6-17, 6-26 and 6-30 plus
charts 6-32 through to 6-35 .
CN Log charts 6-18 through to 6-23, 6-27, 6-28, 6-31 plus
charts 6-32 through to 6-35 and 6-39.
CN Log charts.
Neutron 2446 - no information available.
'SWNeu' tab
Sidewall Neutron Mudcake and Matrix correction charts 624 and 6-36.
'Laterolog/Micro'
Dual Laterolog Borehole correction.
tab
'Induction' tab
Borehole size correction for Induction 809, 815, 818 charts

7-6, 7-7.
Borehole size correction for Induction 811 charts 7-2, 7-3.
Borehole size correction for Induction 814 charts 7-4, 7-5.
Borehole size correction for Dual Induction 1503, 1506
charts 7-8, 7-9.
'Spectral Gr' tab
Spectral Gamma Ray Borehole correction charts 4-5, 4-7,

4-9, 4-11, 4-15 and 4-17.
'DIL invasion' tab
Induction Invasion correction.
'DLL invasion' tab
Dual Laterolog Invasion correction.
1693
Senergy
The
its own plot format.
Related Topics
Senergy
1694
PathFinder
13.10.3 Halliburton Corrections

The 'Halliburton Corrections' environmental correction module uses the charts from the 1994
Halliburton Log Interpretation Charts book. Tool types are organized on a series of 'tabs' with
appropriate parameter selection options on each tab, depending on the tool type.
See Environmental Corrections help main page for information on the operation of the tabs.
The screen shown below illustrates the parameters for the Neutron tool.
1695
Senergy
List of 'Halliburton Environmental Correction' tabs with associated charts taken from the
1994 Halliburton Log Interpretation Charts book.
'Gamma Ray'
Gamma Ray Borehole corrections chart GR1
tab
'Density' tab
Spectral Density Log (SDL) chart POR-1

Spectral Litho Density (SLD) chart POR-2
Hostile Spectral Density (HSDL) Log chart POR-3.
'Neutron' tab
Dual Spaced Neutron (DSN-II) charts POR-4a, POR-4b and

POR-5a.
Dual Spaced Neutron (CNT-K) charts POR-6a, POR-6b and
POR-7a.
Hostile Dual Spaced Neutron (HDSN) charts POR-8a, POR-8b
and POR-9a.
'SNL' tab
Sidewall Neutron (SNL) POR-16.
Senergy
1696
'DLL/MSFL' tab Dual Laterolog (DLT-A) Deep Laterolog Borehole correction

charts DLTA-1a, DLTA-1b.
Dual Laterolog (DLT-F) Deep Laterolog Borehole correction
charts DLTF-1a, DLTF-1b.
Microspherically Focused Log (MSFL) Mudcake corrections
chart Rxo-1.
Microguard (MG) Mudcake corrections chart Rxo-2.
'Induction' tab
Dual Induction Laterolog 3 (DIL) Borehole correction charts

DIL-1, DIL-2.
Dual Induction Short Guard (DILTA) Borehole correction charts
DILTA-1, DILTA-2.
High Resolution Induction (HRI) Borehole correction charts
HRI-1, HRI-2.
Hostile Dual Induction (HDIL) Borehole correction charts HDIL1, HDIL-2.
'DIL Invasion'
Dual Induction Laterolog 3 (DIL) Invasion correction charts DIL-
tab
4a, DIL-4b.
Dual Induction-Rxo Invasion correction charts DIL-5a, DIL-5b.
Dual Induction-Short Guard Invasion correction charts DILTA4a, DILTA-4b.
High Resolution Induction Invasion correction charts HRI-4a,
HRI-4b.
Hostile Dual Induction (HDIL) Invasion correction charts HDIL4a through to HDIL-6b
'DLL Invasion'
Dual Laterolog (DLT-A) Deep Laterolog Invasion correction
tab
charts DLTA-3a, DLTA-3b

Dual Laterolog (DLT-F) Deep Laterolog Invasion correction
charts DLTF-3a, DLTF-3b
'Spectral Gr'
Spectral Gamma Ray (SGR) Borehole corrections chart GR2.
tab
1697
Senergy
The
button is similar to buttons found in other modules.
Related Topics
Senergy
1698
PathFinder
13.10.4 Anadrill Corrections

The 'AnaDrill Corrections' environmental correction module uses the charts from the 2000
Schlumberger Log Interpretation Charts book and the 2005 Schlumberger Log
Interpretation Charts book. Tool types are organized on a series of 'tabs' with appropriate
parameter selection options on each tab, depending on the tool type.
The screen shown below illustrates the parameters for the Compensated Dual Resistivity
(CDR) tool.
List of 'Schlumberger Environmental Correction' tabs with associated charts taken from the
1699
Senergy
2000 Schlumberger Log Interpretation Charts book and the 2005 Schlumberger Log
Interpretation Charts book.
'CDN' tab
6 1/2" Compensated Density Neutron (CDN) correction charts Por-19,

Por-20a, Por-20b, Por-20c and Por-20d
8" Compensated Density Neutron (CDN) correction charts Por-24c,
Por-24d, Por-24e
'ADN' tab
4 3/4" Azimuthal Density Neutron (adnVISION475) environmental

correction charts Neu-31, Neu-33
6 3/4" Azimuthal Density Neutron (adnVISION675) environmental
4 3/4" Azimuthal Density Neutron (adnVISION475 BIP) environmental
6 3/4" Azimuthal Density Neutron (adnVISION475 BIP) environmental
'CDR' tab
6 1/2" Compensated Dual Resistivity (CDR) Borehole correction chart

Rcor-11a.
8" Compensated Dual Resistivity (CDR) Borehole correction chart
Rcor-11b.
9 1/2" Compensated Dual Resistivity (CDR) Borehole correction chart
Rcor-11c.
The
button is similar to buttons found in other modules.
Senergy
1700
Related Topics
PathFinder
13.10.5 Baker Hughes Inteq Corrections

The 'Baker Hughes INTEQ Corrections' environmental corrections module uses the charts
from the 2002 publication 2002 Log Interpretation Charts book. Tool types are organized on a
1701
Senergy
number of 'tabs' with appropriate parameter selection options on each tab, depending on the tool
type.
The screen, shown below, illustrates the parameters for the MNP Neutron tool corrections.
List of 'Baker Hughes INTEQ Environmental Correction' tabs with associated charts taken
from the 2002 Log Interpretation Charts book.
'Resistivity' tab
3 1/8" MPR Resistivity Correction charts 1-2 through to 1-17

6 3/4" NaviGator Resistivity Correction charts 5-2 through to 5-13
8 1/4" NaviGator Resistivity Correction charts 6-2 through to 6-15
'Neutron' tab
6 3/4" Caliper-Corrected Neutron Correction charts 10-2 through to

10-5
Senergy
1702
8 1/4" Caliper-Corrected Neutron Correction charts 11-2 through to

11-4
The
Different 'environmental zones' can be created, selected and deleted, using the 'zone
navigation' buttons and the 'Delete Zone' button found at the bottom of the window. For example,
environmental zone.
NOTE: To update the current parameters you have to click 'Run Tab'. The 'Run Tab' button
only runs the corrections for the currently displayed tab page. The 'Plot Results' button displays
a log plot showing the effect of the correction. Each correction page has its own plot format.
1703
Senergy
Related Topics
PathFinder
13.10.6 Sperry Sun Corrections

The 'Sperry-Sun Corrections' environmental corrections module uses the charts from the 1998
'Sperry-Sun Log Interpretation Charts' book. Tool types are organized on a series of 'tabs'
with appropriate parameter selection options on each tab, depending on the tool type.
The screen shown below illustrates the correction parameters for the DGR and SOLAR 175
Gamma Ray tools.
Senergy
1704
List of 'Sperry-Sun Environmental Correction' tabs with associated charts taken from the 1998
'Sperry-Sun Log Interpretation Charts' book.
'Gamma Ray'
4 3/4" Gamma Ray (DGR) Borehole correction charts 2-1, 2-8, 2-9
tab
and 2-10.
and 2-13.
8" Gamma Ray (DGR) Borehole correction charts 2-3, 2-14, 2-15
and 2-16.
and 2-19.
8" Gamma Ray (High Flow DGR) Borehole correction charts 2-5, 220, 2-21 and 2-22.
4 3/4" Gamma Ray (SOLAR 175) Borehole correction charts 2-6, 223, 2-24 and 2-25.
1705
Senergy
6 1/2" Gamma Ray (SOLAR 175) Borehole correction charts 2-7, 226, 2-27 and 2-28.
'Resistivity'
4 3/4" EWR-Phase 4 Resistivity correction charts 3-1 through to 3-4
tab
and 3-14 through to 3-16.

6 3/4" EWR-Phase 4 Resistivity correction charts 3-5 through to 3-8
8" EWR-Phase 4 Resistivity correction charts 3-9 through to 3-12
'Neutron' tab
4 3/4" Compensated Neutron Porosity (CTN) environmental

correction charts 4-1, 4-2, and 4-7.
6 3/4" Compensated Neutron Porosity (CNF) environmental
correction charts 4-3, 4-4, and 4-8.
8" Compensated Neutron Porosity (CNF) environmental correction
charts 4-5, 4-6 and 4-8.
'Lithology' tab
4 3/4" Compensated Neutron Porosity (CTN) Lithology Effect

correction charts 4-9.
6 3/4" Compensated Neutron Porosity (CNF) Lithology Effect
correction charts 4-10.
8" Compensated Neutron Porosity (CNF) Lithology Effect correction
charts 4-11.
The 'Filter Curve' option allows the user to apply a filter to the result curve. This allows the user to
resolution-match log curves. The Caliper and temperature input boxes always allow the user to
The
Senergy
1706
The 'Run Tab' button only runs the corrections for the currently-displayed tab page. The 'Plot
Related Topics
PathFinder
13.10.7 Weatherford Corrections

The 'Weatherford Corrections' environmental correction module uses the algorithms
distributed by Weatherford including the old Reeves/Precision tools plus the Compact tool
series. Tool types are organized on a series of 'tabs' with appropriate parameter selection
1707
Senergy
options on each tab, depending on the tool type.

The screen shown below illustrates the parameters for the Gamma Ray tool.
List of 'Weatherford Environmental Correction' tabs with associated charts taken from the
Weatherford Log interpretation Charts Compact Tool Series (2007) and Precision Wireline
Services Log Interpretation Chart Book.
'Gamma Ray'
Compact Gamma Ray Borehole correction chart Gam-1,
tab
Gam-2 and Gam-3.

Reeves/Precision Gamma Ray Borehole correction chart 4-1.
'Neutron' tab
Compact Neutron Porosity (MDN) Environmental correction

charts Npor-5Npor-6a, Npor-8
Senergy
1708
Reeves/Precision Compensated Neutron correction charts 64 to 6-6, 6-11, 6-16, 6-18 to 6-22
'Laterolog/Micro' Compact Laterolog (MDL) Borehole correction charts Lat-4,
tab
Lat-5, Lat-10, Lat-11 and Micro-3.

Reeves/Precision Dual Laterolog (DLL) Borehole correction
chart 5-2, 5-12 and 5-13.
'Induction' tab
No details available.
'FE Borehole'
Compact Focused Electric Borehole correction chart SFE-2
tab
'DLL Invasion'
Compact Laterolog (MDL) Invasion correction charts Lat-6
tab
and Lat-12.
'Spectral Gr' tab Reeves/Precision Spectral Gamma Ray correction charts 4-3
and 4-5
The 'Filter Curve' check-box option allows the user to apply a filter to the result curve. This
allows the user to resolution-match log curves.
The
Results' button displays a log plot showing the effect of the correction. Each correction 'tab' has
1709
Senergy
Related Topics
PathFinder
13.10.8 PathFinder
The 'PathFinder Corrections' environmental correction module uses the uses the charts from
the 2007 PathFinder LWD Log Interpretation Charts. Tool types are organized on a series of
'tabs' with appropriate parameter selection options on each tab, depending on the tool type.
The screen shown below illustrates the parameters for the Gamma Ray tool.
Senergy
1710
List of 'PathFinder Environmental Correction' tabs with associated charts taken from the 2007
PathFinder LWD Log Interpretation Charts book.
'HDS1 Gamma
Gamma Ray Borehole correction charts POR-1a through to
Ray' tab
POR-1j.
'DNSC' tab
DNSC Neutron Environmental correction charts POR-2a through

to POR-2f.
'SDNSC' tab
SDNSC Neutron Environmental corrections charts POR-2g

through to POR-2j.
The 'Filter Curve' check-box option allows the user to apply a filter to the result curve. This
allows the user to resolution-match log curves.
The
1711
Senergy
Results' button displays a log plot showing the effect of the correction. Each correction 'tab' has
Related Topics
Senergy
PathFinder
1712
Section
14
Connecting to External Databases
Senergy
14
1714
This chapter has been written to give both UNIX and PC system managers / administrators
sufficient information to configure networked UNIX and PC systems to allow IP to communicate
with networked GEOLOG and OpenWorks databases.
Interactive Petrophysics (IP) provides connectivity to a number of external data repositories.
These are for Paradigm's GEOLOG6 , Landmark Graphics Corporation's (LGC) OpenWorks ,
PETCOM's Powerlog and Senergy's ODM3 databases.
The connections for the OpenWorks and GEOLOG links require UNIX system administration
expertise in order to install and set up the required software and network paths on the UNIX
system. The connections to these two databases comprise a 'generic' IP interface which
queries the external databases using one of two connection protocols. These are :
A web-type HTTP server (e.g. Apache)
A secure Shell (SSH) daemon (PuTTY freeware)
The following documentation gives instructions on configuring a UNIX server to support the
HTTP link through an APACHE server or through a Secure Shell (SSH) connection using
PuTTY software. It is recommended that a UNIX system administrator performs the
necessary installation and configuration on that end of the link. The PC (IP) configuration is
also explained.
NOTE: - the 'Read From / Write To DB' interfaces will only work if the Interactive
Petrophysics installation is on the WINDOWS 2000, NT or XP operating systems. Note
also that a GEOLOG6 licence is required in order for the link to this database type to
work.
NOTE: the number of wells and curves that can be loaded simultaneously is limited by
the amount of system memory available. If the user wishes to load a large number of wells
and/or a large volume of curve data into IP, there is potential for all the system memory to be
filled before the data loading is finished, which could result in application stability issues. In this
situation the user should consider loading the data in stages, saving and closing the loaded wells
at each stage, freeing up system memory for the next loading stage. Once all the data is loaded
then the user can re-open the wells. IP is able to use memory more efficiently if these steps are
followed.
Related Topics
Section 14.
Connecting to External Databases :
1715

Common Database Connection Tasks
Connection Protocols
PC Configuration
External Database Requirements
Section 14.
Connecting to External Databases :
Senergy
Senergy
14.1
1716
The Database Connection screens uses a generic user-interface (UI) for the GEOLOG,
OpenWorks, PETCOM and ODM3 connections and the 'Read/Write Via OpenSpirit' module.
The interface is organized on 2 tabbed screens. These are :
'Import into IP' tab, and
'Export' (not OpenWorks)
The 'Import into IP' screen comprises a left-hand 'Tree View' panel and 2 panels on the right
hand side ('Wells to Import' and 'Curves to Import'), which allow you to see the curve and tops
data that are to be loaded into IP. Once a connection to an external database has been
established, the UI can be used to perform the following common tasks :
Create new IP well from an external database well and load all curves into IP
Create a New IP well from an external database well and load selected curves into IP
Deselecting curves from the 'import' operation
Loading Well Tops from an external database well
Deselecting Tops from the 'import' operation
Editing Well Properties
Editing a new wells' 'well attributes' before loading into the current IP database
Updating well attributes in an existing IP well in the current IP database
Related Topics
PC Configuration
14.1.1 Create New Well and Load ALL External Curves

Create a New IP Well from an External Database Well and Load All Curves into IP :
EITHER drag/drop a well icon from the left-hand panel 'Tree View' into the 'Wells to Import'
panel, OR right-mouse button 'click' on a well icon and use the 'Add' option. This will move
all log curves and Tops for the selected well into the 'Curves to Import' panel. You will see
the following Confirmation message:
Section 14.1 Connecting to External Databases : Common Database Connection Tasks
1717
Senergy
Click 'OK' to confirm loading all the curves into the interface. Click 'Cancel' to abort the
operation.
Click the 'Load All' button to create the new IP database wells and load all the log curves
into them.
NOTE: You can import all external database wells and their log curves and formation tops at the
same time, by drag/dropping the 'external database' (
) icon into the 'Wells to Import' panel.
There may be many more wells and curves than you actually need in the external database so it
is good practice to at least expand the tree view, in the first instance, to see how many wells you
might be dealing with.
Related Topics
Create New Well and Load ALL External Curves
Create New Well and Load SELECTED External Curves
De-Select Curves during Import
Load Tops from an External Well
De-Select Tops during Import
Edit Well Properties
14.1.2 Create New Well and Load SELECTED External Curves

Create a New IP Well from an External Database Well and Load Selected curves into
IP :
'Expand' a well by clicking on the (+) in the left-hand panel to view all the curve Sets and
Tops in the external well.
Then, EITHER drag/drop the required Curve Set (
) icon into the 'Curves to Import' panel
- this loads all the curves held within that curve Set into the transfer cache. OR, expand the
Curve Set 'branch' and drag/drop individual curves into the 'Curves to Import' panel. Rightmouse-button clicking on a curve name in the left-hand panel and selecting 'Add' has the
Senergy
1718
same effect. Curves are tagged with an 'Import Type' of 'Log' as illustrated in the following
screen capture.
Click the 'Load All' button to create the new IP database wells and load the selected log
curves into them.
Related Topics
14.1.3 De-Select Curves during Import

To Deselect Curves from the 'Import' Operation:
If you find you have mistakenly included a curve or a Formation Top you do not want to
import to IP, you can deselect it by clicking in the curve 'row' in the 'Curves to Import'
panel. Use a right-mouse-button click and select the 'Remove' option from the drop-down
options list. Selecting the 'Remove All' option, or clicking the 'Remove All' button, will
remove all wells and their associated curves and Tops from the Import selection panels.
1719
Senergy
Related Topics
14.1.4 Load Tops from an External Well

To Load Tops from an External Database Well:
EITHER drag/drop a well icon from the left-hand panel into the 'Wells to Import' panel, OR
right-mouse button 'click' on a well icon and use the 'Add' option. This will move all log
curves and Tops for the selected well into the 'Curves to Import' panel.
Alternatively, expand a well by clicking on the (+) in the left-hand panel to view all the curve
Sets and Tops in the external well. Then, EITHER drag/drop the required Tops Set icon into
the 'Curves to Import' panel - this loads all the Tops held within that Tops Set into the
transfer cache. OR, expand the Tops Set 'branch' and drag/drop individual Formation Tops
into the 'Curves to Import' panel. Tops are tagged with an 'Import Type' of 'Tops' as
illustrated below:
Senergy
1720
Click the 'Load All' button to load all Tops data into a new IP database well.
Related Topics
14.1.5 De-Select Tops during Import

To Deselect Tops Entries from the 'Import' Operation:
Click on the Tops row that you wish to delete, in the 'Curves to Import' panel, right-mousebutton click and select the 'Remove' option from the drop-down options list. Selecting the '
Remove All' option, or clicking the 'Remove All' button, will remove all wells and their
associated curves and tops from the Import selection panels.
Related Topics
1721
Senergy
14.1.6 Edit Well Properties

IP allows you two well editing options. You can either create a new IP database well from an
external database well, or you can update an existing IP well with new data from an external
database well.
Adding a New Well to the Current IP Database :

If you select an external well and drop it into the 'Wells to Import' panel, you can check/edit
its well properties by right-mouse-button clicking on the well entry row and selecting the '
Properties' option. This will launch a new screen which lists the 'cultural' data retrieved
from the external database for that well. An example screen-shot is shown below:
You can manually type in entries into empty data fields. You can also change a wells Depth
reference type by toggling between 'Units'. NOTE: You must also then type in new Top,
Bottom and Step values, appropriate to the new depth Units.
Senergy
1722
If deviation survey curves are available for the new well they will automatically be loaded into
the IP well when 'Load All' is clicked.
Updating Well Attributes / Curves in an Existing IP Well in the Current IP Database :

If you have an external well with a corresponding IP database well and you wish to update
well attributes and add new curves for the existing IP well, you can set up the process
through the well 'Properties' screen.
'Drag/drop', or 'Add', the external well into the 'Wells to Import' panel and open the well '
Properties' by right-mouse-button clicking on the well entry row and selecting the '
Properties' option. This will launch a new screen which lists the 'cultural' data retrieved
from the external database for that well.
In the 'IP Well' column, select the IP well name, from the drop-down list box, that you wish to
update from the external data . The 'Update' check-boxes adjacent to the well attributes
boxes will become 'active'. You can then selectively 'tick' those well attributes you want to
update, or toggle on/off the 'Tick All / None' check-box at the top right hand corner of the
screen to update all / no attributes. Click the 'Apply' button to save any edited attributes.
NOTE: in this display, the 'Load into Set' drop-down list is accessible. This allows you to
load curves from the external well into a particular curve Set in the selected IP well.
Click 'OK' to exit the 'Properties' dialog window with changes saved or click 'Cancel' to
abort the editing of well attributes.
1723
Related Topics
Senergy
Senergy
14.2
1724
The following Connection Protocols are available from within Interactive Petrophysics.
Apache HTTP Server: When using the HTTP connection method, an Apache-type HTTP
server, version 1.3 or later, must be installed with the suExec module enabled. More
information about the Apache HTTP server, including downloads, may be obtained from
http://httpd.apache.org.
Secure Shell: Secure shell (SSH) is a protocol that provides a secure, remote connection to
any device with SSH support. SSH provides authentication, encryption and authorization
procedures. There are currently two versions of SSH available, SSH Version 1 and SSH
Version 2.
The PGLWdlink Package: The PGLWdblnk package, found in the IP program subdirectory
called 'OpenWorks & Geolog' should be installed on the UNIX system under the /opt
directory. The package includes the following files (grouped according to their use).
The OpenWorks Link: The OpenWorks link for IP relies on a binary executable, 'owlnk',
which is installed as part of the PGLWdblnk. This binary communicates with the
OpenWorks database.
The GEOLOG Link: If the connection between GEOLOG and IP is established via an
Apache HTTP server, a CGI script is installed for each user. Example CGI scripts are
included as part of the PGLWdblnk package.
Related Topics
PC Configuration
14.2.1 Apache HTTP Server

When using the HTTP connection method, an Apache-type HTTP server, version 1.3 or later,
must be installed with the suExec module enabled. More information about the Apache HTTP
server, including downloads, may be obtained from http://httpd.apache.org.
Several CGI scripts are installed in the public_html directory of each user. The Apache server
must be configured to execute the CGI programs as the 'user to which the request is being
directed'. Appropriate Apache authentication and access control should also be applied to
Section 14.2 Connecting to External Databases : Connection Protocols
1725
Senergy
prevent unauthorised users accessing the CGI program.

Documentation on compiling and enabling the suEXEC module within Apache 1.3 and Apache
2.0 may be found here:
http://httpd.apache.org/docs/suexec.html (suExec with Apache 1.3)
http://httpd.apache.org/docs-2.0/suexec.html (suExec with Apache 2.0).
Pre-compiled Apache binaries are available at the Solaris Freeware website, http://www.
sunfreeware.com.
NOTE: The Secure Shell (SSH) connection method is generally preferable to the HTTP option,
as it requires less administration and configuration and is also more secure.
Related Topics
Apache HTTP Server
Secure Shell
The PGLWdblink Package
The OpenWorks Link
The Geolog Link
14.2.2 Secure Shell

Secure shell (SSH) is a protocol that provides a secure, remote connection to any device with
SSH support. SSH provides authentication, encryption and authorization procedures. There are
currently two versions of SSH available, SSH Version 1 and SSH Version 2.
OpenSSH is an open source version of the SSH protocol suite of network connectivity tools.
More information is available at http://www.openssh.com. Installation packages for OpenSSH and
further information are available at the Solaris Freeware site, http://www.sunfreeware.com. A
suitable SSH client must also be installed on the PC where IP is loaded. The standard IP
installation is configured to work with the 'PuTTY' PLINK.EXE application. The executable is
found in the IP program installation directory.
'PuTTY' - the PuTTY application (PUTTY.EXE, located in the IP installation directory) is a free
(MIT-licensed) Win32 SSH client. The executable should be run in order to set up the correct
configuration for the connection to the UNIX system. See 'PC / IP Configuration Instructions' for
more details.
NOTE: The SSH transport method is generally preferable to the HTTP option, as it requires less
administration and configuration and is also more secure. (PuTTY is a free implementation of
telnet and SSH for Win32 platforms, and can be obtained from:
http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty).
Senergy
1726
Related Topics
Apache HTTP Server
Secure Shell
The OpenWorks Link
The Geolog Link
14.2.3 The PGLWdblink Package

The PGLWdblnk package, found in the IP program subdirectory called 'OpenWorks & Geolog'
should be installed on the UNIX system under the /opt directory. The package includes the
following files (grouped according to their use).
OpenWorks Link
/opt/PGLWdblnk/bin/owlnk
- Binary executable
/opt/PGLWdblnk/etc/owenv
- Environment settings
OpenWorks link (SSH option only)

/opt/PGLWdblnk/bin/owlnk.sh
- Example launch script
OpenWorks link (HTTP option only)

/opt/PGLWdblnk/bin/owlnk_import.cgi - CGI script
/opt/PGLWdblnk/bin/owlnk_export.cgi - CGI script
/opt/PGLWdblnk/public_html/owlnk.cgi - User's CGI script
GEOLOG Link
NOTE: you do not need to install the PGLWdblnk Package to set up a Secure Shell (SSH)
Connection to GEOLOG
/opt/PGLWdblnk/etc/glenv
- Environment settings
Geolog link (HTTP option only)
/opt/PGLWdblnk/bin/gllnk_import.cgi - CGI script
/opt/PGLWdblnk/bin/gllnk_export.cgi - CGI script
/opt/PGLWdblnk/public_html/gllnk.cgi - User's CGI script
Installing PGLWdblink
The 'PGLWdblnk package' should be installed under /opt.
1. Extract the package from its 'tar' file to a temporary directory.
1727
Senergy
2. Run pkgadd as root,

# pkgadd -d device PGLWdblnk
where device is the full or relative path to the directory holding the extracted PGLWdblnk
directory.
The package will install to /opt. If an alternative location is required, the package subdirectories may be copied from PGLWdblnk/reloc/PGLWdblnk/ directly to an install directory
of choice, without using the pkgadd utility.
If the install directory is not /opt/PGLWdblink, the full path to the new install directory must be
inserted at the beginning of each of the CGI files found in the /bin directory.
Related Topics
Apache HTTP Server
Secure Shell
The OpenWorks Link
The Geolog Link
14.2.4 The OpenWorks Link

Unix System requirements:
R2003 Sun Solaris
Certification OS 2.8
Oracle 8.1.6
C/C++ libraries - Forte Developer 6 or later
and, either:
SSH daemon
or
Apache HTTP server 1.3 or later with suEXEC module enabled (the Apache server must be
configured to execute the CGI program as the user to which the request is being directed).
The OpenWorks link for IP relies on a binary executable, 'owlnk', which is installed as part of
the PGLWdblnk. This binary communicates with the OpenWorks database.
If the connection to the PC application is established via an Apache HTTP server, a CGI
script is installed for each user and the Apache configuration file updated as required.
If an SSH connection is used, the owlnk binary will usually be launched from within a shell
script, which sets the local environment.
Senergy
1728
Secure Shell (SSH) Installation

1. Install the PGLWdblnk package (see Installing PGLWdblnk).
2. Configure the environment:
Edit the file /opt/PGLWdblnk/bin/owenv and insert appropriate values for the environment
values defined there.
If the PGLWdblnk package is not installed in /opt/PGLWdblnk then edit the files /bin/owlnk.
sh and set the variable INSTALLDIR to the correct location.
3. Test the operation of owlnk (see Testing).
HTTP (APACHE) Installation

2. Configure the environment.
Edit the file /opt/PGLWdblnk/etc/owenv and insert appropriate values for the environment
values defined there. If necessary, also set and export the variable LM_LICENSE_FILE
here.
3. If the PGLWdblnk package is not installed in /opt/PGLWdblnk then edit the 2 files
owlnk_import.cgi and owlnk_export.cgi and set the variable INSTALLDIR to the correct
location.
4. Create a ~/public_html directory for each OpenWorks user wanting access to the
OpenWorks link, and place a copy of owlnk.cgi in that directory. Change ownership and
permissions so that the file is owned by the user and only the user has execute permission (rwxr--r--).
5. Configure the Apache HTTP server to execute the CGI program as the user to which the
request is being directed.
Documentation on compiling and enabling the suEXEC module may be found at the Apache
HTTP server project web pages for the relevant version of Apache: http://httpd.apache.org/
docs/suexec.html / http://httpd.apache.org/docs-2.0/suexec.html.
6. Test the configuration of the Apache HTTP server (see Testing).
7. Apply Apache authentication / authorization / access control, if required, to prevent
unauthorized users accessing the CGI programs.
8. Test operation of the OpenWorks link (see Testing).
Testing
A. To test operation of owlnk :
1729
Senergy
1. Log on as registered OpenWorks user.

2. Run the command $ /opt/PGLWdblnk/bin/owlnk -P
If successful, a list of OpenWorks projects should be displayed.
If unsuccessful, check the LD_LIBRARY_PATH environment variable (see Troubleshooting
).
B.
To test operation of the owlnk.sh launch script (SSH option)

1. Log on as registered OpenWorks user.
2. Run the command $ /opt/PGLOWlnk/bin/owlnk.sh -P
If successful, a list of OpenWorks projects will be displayed.
C.
To test configuration of the Apache HTTP server

1. Open the Apache test page.
2. Enter http://<ServerName> (as defined in httpd.conf) into the address bar of Internet
Explorer or other browser.
If successful, you will see a message saying that the installation of the Apache web server
was successful.
3. Run the Apache test-cgi script.
4. Enter http://<ServerName>/cgi-bin/test-cgi into the address bar of Internet Explorer or
other browser. (It may be necessary to chmod +x /var/apache/cgi-bin/test-cgi)
If successful, the Apache environment variables will be displayed.
5. Check that suEXEC is enabled.
If Apache finds a properly configured suEXEC wrapper on start-up, it will print the following
message in the error log (/var/apache/logs/error-log):
"suEXEC mechanism enabled (wrapper: /usr/apache/bin/suexec)"
or something similar.
6. Test operation of suEXEC.
Copy /opt/PGLdblnk/public_html/whoami.cgi to a user's public_html directory.
Browse to http://<ServerName>/~<username>/whoami.cgi.
If successful, the username will be displayed (not the name of the Apache user).
D.
To test operation of the OW link - HTTP connection

1. Point a browser to http:<ServerName>/~<username>/owlnk.cgi.
If successful, a list of OpenWorks projects will be displayed.
Senergy
1730
Troubleshooting
Some things to check
1. Ensure that the LD_LIBRARY_PATH environment variable includes paths to /usr/lib:/usr/
openwin/lib:$OWHOME/lib:$ORACLE_HOME/lib.
2. The public_html directory in the user's home directory must belong to the user and must
have a group id that is the default group for that user.
3. The files in the public_html directory must have the same user and group settings as the
public_html directory itself.
4. The CGI files in the public_html directory must have permission settings -rwxr--r--. Files
that are group or world writeable will not be run by the suExec module.
5. Look at the bottom of the /var/apache/logs/error_log and /var/apache/logs/suexec_log
for information about why things might not be working.
"Internal Server Error"
When testing the operation of the OpenWorks link via an HTTP connection, you receive an "
Internal Server Error".
The Apache suexec_log contains the line,
crit: calling user mismatch (xxx instead of yyy)
The problem is caused by a mismatch between the suExec caller (defined when the suExec
module is compiled) and the userid with which the Apache server answers requests. The
suExec caller must be the same as userid of the process that calls suExec. To resolve this
mismatch,
Either (1) Change the suexec caller to "xxx" within the httpd.conf file.
The userid of each httpd child process is defined by the 'User' directive
within the httpd.conf file. For example, change
User yyy
to
User xxx
(you may also need to change the corresponding Group directive).
Or (2) Re-compile the suexec module, and define the suexec caller to be 'yyy'.
The suexec caller ID can be defined using the 'configure' script. For example,
% ./configure --with-layout=Solaris \
--enable-suexec \
--suexec-caller=yyy \
1731
Senergy
--suexec-gidmin=10
Related Topics
Apache HTTP Server
Secure Shell
The OpenWorks Link
The Geolog Link
14.2.5 The Geolog Link

Unix System requirements:
GEOLOG6 or later and a valid GEOLOG licence.
and either :
SSH daemon, or
Apache HTTP server 1.3 or later with suEXEC module enabled (the Apache server must be
configured to execute the CGI program as the user to which the request is being directed).
Secure Shell (SSH) Installation:

No files have to be installed on the UNIX side, in order to set up the SSH connection. The
'PuTTY' application must be run and the UNIX Server, to which the PC will connect, must be
authenticated.
If the connection between GEOLOG and IP is established via an Apache HTTP server, a CGI
script is installed for each user. Example CGI scripts are included as part of the PGLWdblnk
package.
HTTP (Apache) Installation:

2. Configure the environment :
Edit the file /opt/PGLWdblnk/etc/glenv and insert appropriate values for the environment
values defined there. If necessary, also set and export the variable
PRDM_GEO_LICENSE_FILE here.
3. If the PGLWdblnk package is not installed in /opt/PGLWdblnk then edit the 2 files
gllnk_import.cgi and gllnk_export.cgi and set the variable INSTALLDIR to the correct
location.
Senergy
1732
4. Create a ~/public_html directory for each GEOLOG user wanting access to the GEOLOG
link, and place a copy of gllnk.cgi in that directory. Change ownership and permissions so
that the file is owned by the user and only the user has execute permission (-rwxr--r--).
5. Configure the Apache HTTP server to execute the CGI program as the user to which the
request is being directed.
Documentation on compiling and enabling the suEXEC module may be found at the Apache
HTTP server project web pages for the
relevant version of Apache: http://httpd.apache.org/
docs/suexec.html / http://httpd.apache.org/docs-2.0/suexec.html.
6. Test the configuration of the Apache HTTP server (see Testing).
7. Apply Apache authentication / authorization / access control, if required, to prevent
unauthorized users accessing the CGI programs.
8. Create a ~/public_html directory for each GEOLOG user wanting to use the PC
application's GEOLOG link and place a copy of gllnk.cgi in that directory. Change ownership
and permissions so that the file is owned by the user and only the user has execute
permission.
9. Test operation of the GEOLOG link.
Testing.
A. To test the configuration of the Apache HTTP server:
1. Open the Apache test page.
Enter http://<ServerName> (as defined in httpd.conf) into the address bar of Internet Explorer
or other browser.
If successful, you will see a message saying that the installation of the Apache web server was
successful.
2. Run the Apache test-cgi script.
Enter http://<ServerName>/cgi-bin/test-cgi into the address bar of Internet Explorer or other
browser. (It may be necessary to chmod +x /var/apache/cgi-bin/test-cgi)
If successful, the Apache environment variables will be displayed.
3. Check that suEXEC is enabled.
If Apache finds a properly configured suEXEC wrapper on start-up, it will print the following
message in the error log (/var/apache/logs/error-log):
"suEXEC mechanism enabled (wrapper: /usr/apache/bin/suexec)" or something similar.
4. Test operation of suEXEC.
Copy /opt/PGLdblnk/public_html/whoami.cgi to a user's public_html directory.
1733
Browse to http://<ServerName>/~<username>/whoami.cgi.
If successful, the username will be displayed (not the name of the Apache user).
Related Topics
Apache HTTP Server
Secure Shell
The OpenWorks Link
The Geolog Link
Senergy
Senergy
14.3
1734
PC Configuration
The Personal Computer (PC) connections between IP and GEOLOG, OpenWorks and ODM3
are described in the following section. The HTTP and SSH versions of the connection dialogs
to GEOLOG and OpenWorks are illustrated for each external database. The database
interfaces are set up by selecting the appropriate 'check' boxes in the 'Tools'
'Options'
'
External Database Connections' window. The interfaces are then launched from the 'Input /
Output' main menu drop-down list. The interfaces for connections to GEOLOG, OpenWorks
and ODM3 are 'generic' and identical in appearance. The configuration settings required to
make the client connections to the external databases are described below. The discussion is
organized under the following headings:
PuTTY SSH client
GEOLOG Interface Connection
OpenWorks Interface Connection
ODM Interface Connection
Saving the Configuration Settings

The configuration details of the connection to the external database are saved to the IntPetro.
config file, located in the IP program directory, when the user 'clicks' the 'Apply' button on the '
Client Connection' dialog. The settings are saved and restored when the user subsequently
closes and re-opens IP.
Related Topics
PC Configuration
14.3.1 PuTTY SSH Client

PuTTY is a free (MIT-licensed) Win32 SSH client which allows IP users to log in to a multi-user
computer operating system, in this case UNIX, from another computer, over a network.
The PuTTY application, PUTTY.EXE, which can be located in the IP program installation
directory, should be run on the users PC in order to set up the Domain Name Server (DNS)
address. Running the PuTTY application launches the following dialog:
Section 14.3 Connecting to External Databases : PC Configuration
1735
Senergy
The user should:

Fill in the 'Host Name (or IP Address)' text box with the internet host name or IP address of
the UNIX machine that you want to connect to.
Select the login 'Protocol' to use - in this case choose 'SSH'.
When you use SSH to connect to a UNIX server for the first time, you will probably see the
following 'Alert' message displayed when you click the 'Open' button at the bottom of the 'PuTTY
Configuration' window:
This is a feature of the SSH protocol and is designed to protect you against a network attack
known as 'spoofing' (secretly re-directing your connection to a different computer). PuTTY
Senergy
1736
records the host key for each server you connect to, in the Windows registry. every time you
connect to a server, it checks that the host key presented by the server is the same host key as it
was the last time you connected. However, when you connect to a server for the first time,
PuTTY has no way of telling whether the host key is the right one or not. So it gives the warning
shown above and asks whether you want to trust this host key or not. If you are working on an
internal company network you would normally select 'Yes' to add the UNIX servers host Key to
PuTTY's cache and carry on with the connection. Once the host key is registered, when you
click the 'Open' button at the bottom of the 'PuTTY Configuration' window, a login screen to the
UNIX server is launched. If this test works and the login screen is launched, you can close the
login window / exit the PuTTY application.
14.3.2 Geolog Interface Connection

As described in the Apache HTTP Server and Secure Shell sections, above, the IP client
connection to the UNIX system may be made using either an HTTP or Secure Shell (SSH)
protocol. In IP the 'Client Connection' dialog is launched from the 'Connection' button on the '
Read / Write To GEOLOG' interface. The 'Client Connection' window , shown below, allows
the user to 'toggle' between the HTTP and SSH options using the radio buttons at the top of the
screen.
GEOLOG HTTP Connection

In order to connect to the external database using the HTTP protocol, the user will need to have
a UNIX user account set up. The UNIX system administrator will have to have installed and
configured the PGLWdblink package.
1737
Senergy
The PC client configuration settings are as follows:

'PNS File Location' - Paradigm Name Service (PNS) File location. The PNS file contains
the directory addresses of all GEOLOG databases on the UNIX system. The directory path
to this file is required to allow IP to locate the appropriate GEOLOG databases. This
directory path should be entered into the 'PNS File Location:' text entry box.
'Read URL' - this is the 'Universal Resource Locator' for the cgi script installed on the UNIX
'Apache' Web server. This locator is made up of the following syntax: 'Protocol' - 'Server
Domain Name' - 'User Name' - 'Cgi script'. For example: 'http://webpgl16.pgl/~pg58_r03/
gllnk.cgi'
'User Name' - This is the UNIX User account to which your UNIX system administrator has
installed the Cgi script.
'Password' - This is the UNIX password for the user account in the previous step.
GEOLOG SSH Connection

In order to connect to a GEOLOG database using the SSH protocol the user will need to have a
UNIX user account and password. The UNIX server will also have to be authenticated using the
PuTTY (plink.exe) application. See the PuTTY SSH Client section, above for details.
Senergy
1738
The PC client configuration settings are as follows.

'Geolog Directory' - the user will need to know the directory location of the GEOLOG6
binary files installation. For example: /raid5/mincom/geolog6/bin/
'Server Address' - This is the Domain Name of the UNIX file server (DNS name).
'User Name' - This is the UNIX user account name.
'Password' - This is the password for the UNIX user account. Please note, the password
should not contain either single quote (') or double quotation marks (").
'Optional Variables' - this text entry box can be used to call UNIX configuration variables.
For example, in an environment where there are multiple GEOLOG installations and hence
more than one PNS file, you will need to know the settings for the variable 'MINSITE'. Any
commands (for example, "SET MINSITE=") must be entered into the 'Optional variables'
text box, using the syntax of the shell the user will acquire when the UNIX login is complete.
Variables can be strung together using (;) semicolon separators.
MINSITE - is the variable that controls the GEOLOG environment. GEOLOG6 tries to
source the file MINSITE/bin.geolog6_env.tcl. This is a script file in which one can place
any customizations, for example, licence location, PNS Server etc...
GEOLOG Windows Connection

To connect to GEOLOG which is installed onto a PC using Windows TM then the directory where
the GEOLOG program resides has to be defined.
1739
Senergy
14.3.3 OpenWorks Interface Connection

The IP 'Connection' dialog is launched from the 'Connection' button at the top of the 'Read
From OpenWorks' interface. The connection dialog allows the user to 'toggle' between the
HTTP and SSH options.
OpenWorks HTTP
In order to connect to the external database using the HTTP protocol the user will need to have a
user account set up on the UNIX ('Apache'-type) Web server. The UNIX system administrator will
have installed and configured the PGLWdblink package. The PC client configuration settings
are as follows:
Senergy
1740
'Read URL' - this is the 'Universal Resource Locator' for the cgi script installed on the Unix
owlnk.cgi'
'User Name' - this is the UNIXUser account to which your Unix system administrator has
'Password' - is the UNIX password for the above user account.
OpenWorks SSH
In order to connect to the external database using the SSH protocol the user will need to have a
user account set up on the Unix file server. The Unix system administrator will have installed and
configured the PGLWdblink package.
1741
Senergy
The PC client configuration settings are as follows:

'OpenWorks Link' - the user will need to know the location of the UNIX Shell script that sets
up the environment variables and runs the OWLNK.exe. i.e . /opt/PGLWowlnk/bin/owlnk.
sh
'Server Address' - is the Domain Name of the UNIX file server (DNS name).
'User Name' - is the user account on the UNIX file server.
'Password' - is the password for the above user account.
14.3.4 ODM Interface Connection

ODM Interface Connection
The client connection may be made using an OLEDB connection string. This connection string
is constructed automatically when the user selects the ODM3 MS Access database '.mdb' file.
The IP user simply uses the browser dialog to locate the required ODM3 database (.mbd) file and
selects 'Open'. Close the 'Connection' dialog and select a Project from the drop-down 'Project'
list.
Senergy
14.4
1742
The following topics provide detailed instructions on how to Integrate Data from External
Databases into Interactive Petrophysics.
Read/ Write to PETCOM DB: The 'Read / Write to PETCOM DB' option allows users to load
well curve data from a PETCOM (Powerlog) database into IP and to export log curves from IP
into a PETCOM database.
GEOLOG6: The 'Read / Write to GEOLOG DB' interface has been updated to run either as
an HTTP web link, a Secure Shell (SSH) connection or through Windows. Full details of
the Unix and PC system set-up requirements are provided in the 'Connecting to External
Databases' introduction.
OpenWorks: The 'Read from OpenWorks DB' interface has been updated to run either as
an HTTP web link, or a Secure Shell (SSH) connection. Full details of the Unix and PC
system set-ups are provided in the 'Connecting to External Databases' introduction.
ODM: Oilfield Data Manager
(ODM) is a PC-based subsurface data management and
geoscience software package developed by Senergy. For more information on this application
follow the link to the ODM3 website http://www.odmweb.com.
Shell LOGIC Database Loader: This is a migration tool to copy Shell LOGIC database projects
into an IP project. This module only works with LOGIC version S2001.2. Other versions are
NOT supported.
Read / Write via OpenSpirit: The 'Read / Write via OpenSpirit' functionality allows the user to
load and save data between IP and other OpenSpirit -enabled databases such as
OpenWorks
and GeoFrame . The OpenSpirit
website can be found at http://www.
openspirit.com
Related Topics
PC Configuration
Section 14.4 Connecting to External Databases : External Database Requirements
1743
Senergy
14.4.1 Read/ Write to PETCOM DB

The 'Read / Write to PETCOM DB' option allows users to load well curve data from a PETCOM
(Powerlog) database into IP and to export log curves from IP into a PETCOM database.
The user must check that the 'Tools'
'Options'
'External Database Connections'
'
PETCOM Link', is 'checked' for this option to be visible under the 'Input / Output' main menu
item.
The 'Read / Write to PETCOM DB' interface will only work if the IP installation is on the
WINDOWS Vista, WINDOWS NT, XP or WINDOWS 2000 operating systems. NOTE: It will not
work under Windows 95 or Windows 98.
The interface is launched from the 'Input/Output' main menu list and comprises of 2 'tabbed'
screens. These are:
'Import into IP'
'Export to PETCOM'
'Import into IP' Interface

The 'Import into IP' Interface is shown below:
Senergy
1744
The user must select the PETCOM database to connect to, by using the 'Connection' button
which launches a 'browse' dialog' allowing you to search for the appropriate database folder.
Once a PETCOM database is selected, IP will list all the wells in the database in an expandable
'Tree' view in the left-hand panel of the interface. IP reads the curve Sets, log curves and
formation tops for all the wells in the external database. The list of wells can be filtered either by
using the drop-down list available from the 'Display Well:' box or by typing in the 'Filter By:' box
and 'clicking' the 'Filter' button.
To Import Wells - Drag/drop the 'Well', using the left-hand mouse button, from the right-hand
'Tree' view panel into the upper, 'Wells to Import' panel. Alternatively right-mouse-click on a well
name and click the 'Add' button that appears on-screen.
IP will read the external database entries and will show the status window illustrated below
while it is reading the external database well. The user has the option to terminate the
'import' operation at any time by clicking the 'Cancel' button. The 'import' operation will
populate the 'Wells to Import' panel with the external database well names. All the available
PETCOM curves will be listed in the 'Curves to Import' list. This can take some minutes,
depending upon how many curves exist in the selected external well.
1745
Senergy
To Load Sets / Curves - drag/drop the Curve Set name or an individual curve name from the
'Tree' view panel into the lower, 'Curves to Import' panel. Alternatively, right-mouse-button-click
on a Curve Set and click the 'Add' button that appears on-screen.
IP will read the external database entries and will populate the 'Curves to Import' screen
with the available curves.
Click the 'Load All' button to execute the import operation. The selected Wells / Sets /
Curves will be loaded into the current IP database. This can take some minutes, depending
upon how many curves exist in the selected PETCOM Sets.
External PETCOM wells can be imported to IP as new wells or they can be 'mapped' to existing
IP database wells.
In the 'Wells to Import' panel, right-mouse-button click on a well to be imported. This launches a
'Properties' dialog window, as illustrated below:
Senergy
1746
The user can choose to leave all the well details as they are, in which case a new IP database
well with the 'External Well' name will be created in the current IP database, or, if the PETCOM
well already has a corresponding IP well name entry, that well can be selected from the well
drop-down list at the top of the screen. In this case, imported log curves will be written to the IP
well, into the user-selected curve set.
Individual log curve properties can be viewed in the 'Curves to Import' panel by right-mousebutton clicking on a curve name. The following dialog will be launched:
1747
Senergy
If you wish to make changes to the curve properties, make them in this dialog and click 'OK'. The
'Curves to Import' panel entry will update to reflect the changes made.
The 'Operations' buttons:

'Load All' - the 'Load All' button will execute the import operation of wells / sets and curves
from the external source database into IP.
'Remove All' - the 'Remove All' button clears all the wells and log curves from the two
right-hand panels of the 'Import into IP' screen.

to manage the way Curve and Tops data are brought into IP from the external database:
'Overwrite Existing Curves'- if 'checked', when importing a curve or curves from the
PETCOM database into an existing IP well where the identical curve name(s) exist, the
PETCOM curves will overwrite the existing data in IP. If 'un-checked' the user will be warned
that an identical curve name already exists in the IP well.
IP well,the import operation will ignore the PETCOM curve Set names and will write the
window). If the box is left 'un-checked', the PETCOM curve Sets will be created in the IP
Senergy
1748

'Fill Data Gaps' - if 'checked', IP will automatically extrapolate across any small (up to 5
depth increments) data gaps existing in the imported curves during the import operation. If
the user wishes to copy Core analysis data (e.g.Core porosity, Core grain density.,
Permeability) then the 'Fill Gaps' option should be left 'un-checked'. Importing Continuous
log curves and discrete core analysis data from PETCOM to IP would therefore require a
two step import operation, with 'Fill Data Gaps' switched 'on' for continuous logs and 'off' for
core data.
'Link Zones' - if 'checked', IP will import PETCOM Tops information and link the entries to
make a continuous IP Zone Set where the base of one formation is automatically taken as
'Export to Petcom' Interface

The 'Export to Petcom' interface is shown below:
Select the IP well and the associated curves to write to the linked PETCOM database. Either,
drag/drop a well name from the 'Tree' view panel into the upper 'Wells to Export' panel or rightmouse-button click on a well name and click the 'Add' button. This transfers all the curves
associated with one well. If you only wish to export selected curves from an IP well, expand the
'Tree' view to see the curve Sets and expand the Set branch to see the curve names. Drag/drop
1749
Senergy
your required curves into the lower, 'Curves to Export', panel. Click the 'Export All' button to
transfer the IP wells/curves to the attached PETCOM database.
Click the 'Clear All' button to clear all entries from the 'Wells to Import' & 'Curves to Export'
panels without exporting them to the linked PETCOM databsse.
Curve set names are ignored when writing to a PETCOM database. PETCOM file names are
limited to a maximum of 8 characters. This means the user must be careful not to select the
same curve name from different sets or curves that have the first same 8 characters.
Related Topics
Read/ Write to PETCOM DB
GEOLOG6
OpenWorks
ODM
Shell LOGIC Database Loader
Read / Write via OpenSpirit
14.4.2 GEOLOG6
The 'Read / Write to GEOLOG DB' interface has been updated to run either as an HTTP web
link, a Secure Shell (SSH) connection or through Windows. Full details of the Unix and PC
system set-up requirements are provided in the 'Connecting to External Databases'
introduction.
Please note: the 'old' GEOLOG6 link (IP Version 3.1 and earlier) is no longer supported.
The user must have a valid GEOLOG6 licence to be able to read from / write to a
GEOLOG6 database.
The 'Read / Write to GEOLOG DB' interface includes a 'Tree View' browser, from which the
user can 'drag and drop' an entire well, curves Sets or separate curves to load into IP from a
connected GEOLOG6 database. This allows multiple well data to be selected for loading into IP,
either as new IP wells or replacing / appending curves & Sets in existing IP wells.
The 'Read / Write to GEOLOG DB' interface will only work if the Interactive Petrophysics
installation is on the WINDOWS NT, XP or WINDOWS 2000 operating systems. It will not work
under Windows 95 or Windows 98.
The user should ensure that the IP 'Tools' menu
'Options'
'External Database
Senergy
Connections'
1750
'Geolog Link' option is 'checked'.
The interface is viewed on 2 'tabbed' screens. These are:

'Import into IP', and
'Export to GEOLOG'
The 'Import into IP' Tab

The 'Import into IP' Tab provides the user with the interface to connect to & load data from a
GEOLOG6 database into IP.
The 'Connection' button on the 'Import into IP' screen launches a dialog window similar to that
shown below. The user must select one of the connection protocols - 'Web client' (HTTP),
Secure Shell (SSH) or Windows and fill in the required fields for each connection type.
For the HTTP Connection you need to fill in the following:

'PNS File Location' : The Paradigm Name Service File Location. The PNS File contains
1751
Senergy
the Unix addresses of all the GEOLOG databases on the system. The directory path to this
file is required to allow IP to display the available GEOLOG databases in the Project list.
'Read Url' : this is the 'Universal Resource Locator' for the cgi script installed on the Unix
gllnk.cgi'.
'User Name' - This is the Unix User account to which your Unix system administrator has
'Password' - This is the Unix password for the above user account.
For the SSH Connection you will need to fill in the following:
'Geolog Directory' - the user will need to know the directory location of the GEOLOG6
binary files installation. For example: /raid5/mincom/geolog6/bin/
'Server Address' - This is the Domain Name of the UNIX file server (DNS name).
'User Name' - This is the user account on the UNIX file server.
'Password' - This is the UNIX password for the above user account.
'Optional Variables' - The environment variable for GEOLOG - 'setenv
PRDM_GEO_LICENSE_FILE\myPath' where myPath points to the users GEOLOGlicence.
For the Windows Connection you will need to fill in the following:
'Geolog Directory' - enter the location of the GEOLOG program executable on the users
computer.
'Optional Variables' - The Windows TM environmental variable for GEOLOG - 'set
PRDM_GEO_LICENSE_FILE\myPath'. For multiple variables:
set variablename=value; set variablename2=value2 etc.
The configuration details are saved to the IntPetro.exe.config file, located in the IP program
directory, when the user 'clicks' the 'Apply' button on the 'Connection' dialog. The settings are
restored when the user subsequently closes and re-opens IP, so that the information does not
have to be repeatedly entered each time the user requires the IP to GEOLOG6 link.
Once the configuration has been set up and the connection established, the GEOLOG6
database wells will be displayed in the left-hand panel of the screen. The 'browser' is like a
typical WINDOWS 'Explorer' interface, allowing the user to expand the Well 'Tree' to view the
available Curve Sets and individual curves loaded for each GEOLOG6 well.
NOTE: The following convention is observed when loading curves into IP from GEOLOG
- GEOLOG6 curve names are displayed with a '_1', '_2', '_3' after their name. This is the
version number of that curve in GEOLOG6. When loading into IP, the '_1' will be removed, while
Senergy
1752
any '_2', '_3' will be left appended to the curve name to allow curves to be discriminated one
from another.
NOTE: IP will only allow one DEPTH curve to be stored for each well imported from
GEOLOG. IP interrogates the user-selected GEOLOG well to determine the selected
Set / curve with the smallest well step increment and uses this 'Depth' curve as the IP
'DEPTH' curve for the well. All other curves that are selected for loading into IP are
referenced to this 'Depth' curve. Discrete data, for example core plug data (porosity,
grain density, permeability etc..) would be loaded to the nearest IP well depth 'step',
rather than at their 'true' depth, if they were imported to IP in this way. An alternative data
flow route, exporting core plug data to LAS or ASCII files and then loading to IP as Array curves is
recommended if such data are required at their actual recorded plug depths. See 'Create
Curve / Array Curve' for more information.
Viewing GEOLOG6 Wells in the IP Interface

Once a connection to a GEOLOG6 database has been established, by selecting a 'Project', the
user can view the wells, curves and curve Sets in the GEOLOG6 database in the left-hand panel
of the window. IP interrogates the external database to read wells, curve Sets, log curves and
formation tops.
The list of wells can be filtered either by using the drop-down list available from the 'Display
Well:' box or by typing in the 'Filter By:' box and 'clicking' the 'Filter' button.
1753
Senergy
Senergy
1754
This 'Browser' view can be used to expand 'Wells' and 'Sets' to show the curves in them. Wells,
Curve Sets and curves are selected for import to IP by simple drag/drop operations:
To Load Wells - drag/drop the 'Well' into the upper, 'Wells to Import' panel. Alternatively rightmouse-click on a well name and click the 'Add' button that appears on-screen.
IP will read the external database entries and will show the status window illustrated
below while it is reading the external database well. The user has the option to terminate
the 'Read' operation at any time by clicking the 'Cancel' button. The 'Read' operation will
populate the 'Wells to Import' panel with the Well name. All available GEOLOG curves
will be listed in the 'Curves to Import' list. This can take some minutes, depending
upon how many curves exist in the selected GEOLOG well.
To Load Sets / Curves - drag/drop the Curve Set name or curve name into the lower, 'Curves
to Import' panel. Alternatively, right-mouse-click on a Curve Set and click the 'Add' button that
1755
Senergy
appears on-screen.
Click 'OK' to execute the operation. The selected Sets / Curves will be loaded into the
interface. This can take some minutes, depending upon how many curves exist in the
selected GEOLOG Sets.
To Load GEOLOG Formation Tops data:

GEOLOG Formation Tops data can be imported into IP. The user can 'click and drag' the Tops
Set into the 'Curves to Import' panel. The Tops data are flagged in the 'Curves to Import'
panel, in the 'Import Type' column as type 'Tops', to distinguish them from conventional 'Log'
data.

'Use existing IP Well' - if 'checked', the user-selected curve Sets and curves will be loaded
into an existing IP well with the same name as the GEOLOG well. If a well name match is
not found, the user will be prompted for an action, as illustrated below:
Senergy
1756
The user should click 'OK' to create a new IP well to load the curve data into, or 'Cancel' to
abort the 'import' operation for that well.
GEOLOG database into an IP well where the identical curve name(s) exist, the GEOLOG
curves will overwrite the existing data in IP. If 'un-checked' the user will be warned that an
identical curve name already exists in the IP well.
IP well,the import operation will ignore the GEOLOG curve Set names and will write the
window). If the box is left 'un-checked', the GEOLOG curve Sets will be created in the IP
'Fill Gaps' - if 'checked', IP will automatically extrapolate across any data gaps existing in
the imported curves during the import operation. If the user wishes to copy Core analysis
data (e.g.Core porosity, Core grain density., Permeability) then the 'Fill Gaps' option should
be left 'un-checked'. Importing Continuous log curves and discrete core analysis data from
GEOLOG to IP would therefore require a two step import operation, with 'Fill Gap' switched
'on' for continuous logs and 'off' for core data.
'Link Zones' - if 'checked', IP will import GEOLOG Tops information and link the entries to
make a continuous IP Zone Set where the base of one formation is automatically taken as
The 'Operations' Buttons

The 'Operations' buttons are arranged along the bottom of the user interface. They are
described below:
'Load All' - executes the 'import into IP' operation and loads all wells / curves listed in the
'Import' panels into the current IP database.
'Clear All' - clears all curve and well entries from the 'Wells to Import' and 'Curves to
Import' list windows.
'Close' - closes the external database interface.
1757
Senergy
Viewing GEOLOG Well Properties in the IP Interface

The user can view available 'cultural' data associated with a GEOLOG well by right-mouse
clicking on the well name in the 'Wells to Import' panel. This launches the following 'Well
Properties' dialog window:
The user can either accept the GEOLOG well name, which will become the 'IP Well Name',
or choose to load the curves into an existing IP well by selecting the appropriate IP well
name from the 'IP Well' drop-down list.
The user can choose the Curve Set to load the GEOLOG curves into, by selecting from the
Senergy
1758
available choices in the 'Load into Set' drop-down list.

If there are additional filled in data fields, for example 'Water Depth' or 'Kelly Bushing', stored
in GEOLOG, these data can be copied into the appropriate 'Manage Well Header Info.'
module entry boxes for the IP well, when the load operation is executed.
Viewing GEOLOG Curve Properties in the IP Interface

Curve details can be viewed for curves selected for import, by right-mouse button 'clicking' on a
curve in the 'Curves to Import' panel. A menu dialog is launched, as shown below. 'Clicking' the
'Properties' option opens the following 'Curve Properties' dialog:
The user can change the curve name, so that it loads to IP with the new curve name and can
choose the Curve Set to load the curve into. The 'Edit Set' button launches the 'Edit Global
Sets' module, allowing the user to create a new curve Set to use as the Load Set for this curve.
The 'Details' button launches the 'Well Properties' window, shown above.
If the user makes any changes to the curve name, Set or Units, clicking 'Apply' will save the
changes and close the 'Curve Properties' window.
1759
Senergy
Other Right-Mouse Button 'Click' Options

The following options are also available from the 'right-mouse-button click' action in the 'Curves
to Import' panel:
'Remove' - clears the selected curve from the 'Curves to Import' list.
'Remove All' - clears all curve names from the 'Curves to Import' list.
'Load' - loads the selected curve to IP using either a new IP well (the GEOLOG well name)
or an existing IP well.
'Load All' - loads all the curves in the 'Curves to Import' list either to a new IP well (the
GEOLOG well name) or an existing IP well.
The 'Export to GEOLOG' Tab

The 'Export to GEOLOG' tab allows the IP user to write log curves and Tops back to a
connected GEOLOG database.
The interface is identical to the 'Import into IP' screen in terms of layout. The 'Browser' panel
displays the current IP database and its associated wells. The functionality for selecting wells
and curves is also the same. Wells can be drag/dropped into the 'Wells to Export' panel, Curve
Sets and curves can be drag/dropped into the 'Curves to Export' panel. 'Right-mouse-button'
clicking launches the 'Add' button, which also adds wells /curves into the Export panels.
'Export IP Tops' - if the 'Export IP Tops' check-box is 'checked', IP will automatically write
all Zone / Tops Sets (of type 'TOPS') for the selected IP wells to the attached GEOLOG
database. The user can then edit/delete the Tops sets as required, from within GEOLOG.
'Load All' - clicking the 'Load All' button, loads all selected curves and tops sets into the
attached GEOLOG database.
'Clear All' : removes all entries from the 'Wells to Export' and 'Curves to Export' lists.
PLEASE NOTE: when the user connects to an external database and IP reads the external
wells, Sets and curves stored there, the information is stored in a data 'cache'. Essentially, IP
takes a snapshot of the external database. If the IP user exports wells back into the external
database and then goes back to the 'Import to IP' screen, the browser will not immediately be
updated with the new well(s)/ curves. The user should close and re-open the external database
link to refresh the data cache and hence the browsers well entries.
Related Topics
GEOLOG6
Senergy
1760
OpenWorks
ODM
14.4.3 OpenWorks
The 'Read from OpenWorks DB' interface has been updated to run either as an HTTP web
link, or a Secure Shell (SSH) connection. Full details of the Unix and PC system set-ups are
provided in the 'Connecting to External Databases' introduction.
The 'Read from OpenWorks DB' interface includes a 'Tree View' browser, from which the user
can 'drag and drop' an entire well, curves Sets or separate curves to load into IP from a
connected OpenWorks database. This allows multiple well data to be selected for loading into
IP, either as new IP wells or replacing / appending curves & Sets in existing IP wells.
The 'Read from OpenWorks DB' interface will only work if the Interactive Petrophysics
installation is on the WINDOWS NT, XP or WINDOWS 2000 operating systems. It will not work
under Windows 95 or Windows 98.
The user should ensure that the IP 'Tools' menu
Connections'
'Options'
'External Database
'OpenWorks Link' option is 'checked'.
The 'Import into IP' Interface

The 'Import' interface is viewed on the following 'Import into IP' screen. On clicking the 'Read
from OpenWorks DB' option, the following screen is launched, which allows the user to set up
the external database connection and to interrogate the available OpenWorks databases on the
networked Unix system. The Connection protocols and configuration settings are described in
detail in the 'Connecting to External Databases' chapter.
The 'Connection' button on the 'Import into IP' screen launches a dialog window similar to that
shown below. The user must select one of the connection protocols - 'Web client' (HTTP) or
Secure Shell (SSH) and fill in the required fields for each connection type.
1761
Senergy
For the HTTP Connection you need to fill in the following:

'Read URL' : this is the 'Universal Resource Locator' for the cgi script installed on the Unix
owlnk.cgi'
'User Name' - This is the Unix User account to which your Unix system administrator has
'Password' - This is the Unix password for the above user account.
For the SSH Connection you will need to fill in the following :
'OpenWorks Link' - the user will need to know the directory location of the OpenWorks
binary files installation. For example: /opt/PGLWowlnk/bin/owlnk.sh
'Server Address' - This is the Domain Name of the Unix file server (DNS name).
'User Name' - This is the user account on the Unix file server.
'Password' - This is the password for the above user account.
The configuration details are saved to the IntPetro.exe.config file, located in the IP program
directory, when the user 'clicks' the 'Apply' button on the 'Connection' dialog. The settings are
restored when the user subsequently closes and re-opens IP, so that the information does not
have to be repeatedly entered each time the user requires the IP to OpenWorks link.
Once the configuration has been set up and the connection established, the OpenWorks
database wells will be displayed in the left-hand panel of the screen. The 'browser' is like a
typical WINDOWS 'Explorer' interface, allowing the user to expand the Well 'Tree' to view the
available Curve Sets and individual curves loaded for each OpenWorks well.
Senergy
1762
The user must first ensure that the 'Connection' method (SSH / HTTP), links and Unix user
name and password are set up properly. See 'Connecting to External Databases'
chapter, 'PC Configuration Instructions' section.
The user can then select an OpenWorks project from the drop-down 'Project:' list.
The left hand panel of the screen is a 'Project browser'-type interface that allows the user to view
the wells, curve Sets and curves stored in the selected OpenWorks database. The browser
view for the OpenWorks Project and wells can be expanded by clicking on the '+' symbol
adjacent to the well icon, in order to view increasingly more detail on log curves.The 'Wells to
Import' and 'Curves to Import' panels will be populated with OpenWorks wells and log curves
when the user selects these data to load into IP.
The list of wells can be filtered either by using the drop-down list available from the 'Display
Well:' box or by typing in the 'Filter By:' box and 'clicking' the 'Filter' button.
Data are selected for loading to IP by dragging / dropping 'wells', 'curve Set' names or individual
'curves' into the appropriate 'Wells to Import' or 'Curves to Import' panel.
1763
Senergy
curve Sets and curves are selected for import to IP by simple drag/drop operations:
'Read' operation at any time by clicking the 'Cancel' button. The 'Read' operation will
populate the 'Wells to Import' panel with the Well name. All available OpenWorks curves
will be listed in the 'Curves to Import' list. This can take some minutes, depending upon
how many curves exist in the selected OpenWorks well.
To Load Sets / Curves - drag/drop the curve Set name or curve name into the lower, 'Curves
to Import' panel. Alternatively, right-mouse-click on a curve Set and click the 'Add' button that
appears on-screen.
Senergy
1764

selected GEOLOG Sets.
Click 'OK' to accept all the curve data in that Set.
To load individual curves:

'Click and drag' a 'Curve' icon into the 'Curves to Import' panel, or
right mouse button 'click' on a 'Curve' icon and click the 'Add' button which appears.
IP will read the external database entry and will populate the 'Curves to Import' screen with
the selected curve.
To Load OpenWorks Formation Tops data:

OpenWorks Formation Tops data can be imported into IP. The user can 'click and drag' the
Tops Set into the 'Curves to Import' panel. The Tops data are flagged in the 'Curves to Import'
panel, in the 'Import Type' column as type 'Tops', to distinguish them from conventional 'Log'
data.
1765
Senergy

The user should click 'OK' to create a new IP well to load the curve data into, or 'Cancel' to abort
the 'import' operation for that well.
OpenWorks database into an IP well where the identical curve name(s) exist, the
OpenWorks curves will overwrite the existing data in IP. If 'un-checked' the user will be
warned that an identical curve name already exists in the IP well.
IP well, the import operation write the imported curves into the user-selected IP curve Set
Senergy
1766
(set up in the Well 'Properties' window). If the box is left 'un-checked', the OpenWorks
curve Sets will be created in the IP database and curves will be loaded into them.
'Fill Data Gaps' - if 'checked', IP will automatically extrapolate across any data gaps existing
in the imported curves during the import operation. If the user wishes to copy Core analysis
data (e.g.Core porosity, Core grain density., Permeability) then the 'Fill Data Gaps' option
should be left 'un-checked'. Importing continuous log curves and discrete core analysis data
from OpenWorks to IP would therefore require a two step import operation, with 'Fill Data
Gaps' switched 'on' for continuous logs and 'off' for core data.
'Link Zones' - if 'checked', IP will import OpenWorks Tops information and link the entries
to make a continuous IP Zone Set where the base of one formation is automatically taken as

described below:
'Load All' Button - clicking this button will execute the import operation and will load all the
selected OpenWorks wells, curve Sets and curves into the current IP database.
'Remove All' Button - clicking this button will remove all curve and well entries from the '
Import into IP' interface.
Viewing OpenWorks Well Properties in the IP Interface

The user can view available 'cultural' data associated with a GEOLOG well by right-mouse
clicking on the well name in the 'Wells to Import' panel. This launches the following 'Well
Properties' dialog window:
1767
Senergy
The user can either accept the Openworks well name, which will become the 'IP Well
Name', or choose to load the curves into an existing IP well by selecting the appropriate IP
well name from the 'IP Well' drop-down list.
The user can choose the curve Set to load the Openworks curves into, by selecting from
the available choices in the 'Load into Set' drop-down list.
If there are additional filled in data fields, for example 'Water Depth' or 'Kelly Bushing', stored
in OpenWorks, these data can be copied into the appropriate 'Manage Well Header Info.'
module entry boxes for the IP well, when the load operation is executed.
Senergy
1768
Viewing OpenWorks Curve Properties in the IP Interface

Curve details can be viewed for curves selected for import, by right-mouse button 'clicking' on a
curve in the 'Curves to Import' panel. A menu dialog is launched, as shown below. 'Clicking' the
'Properties' option opens the following 'External DB Curve Properties' dialog:
The user can change the curve name, so that it loads to IP with the new curve name and can
choose the curve Set to load the curve into.
The 'Details' button launches the 'Well Properties' window, shown above.
If the user makes any changes to the curve name, Set or Units, clicking 'OK' will save the
changes and close the 'External DB Curve Properties' window.
Other Right-Mouse Button 'Click' Options

The following options are also available from the 'right-mouse-button click' action in the 'Curves
to Import' panel:
'Remove' : Clears the selected curve from the 'Curves to Import' list.
'Remove All' : Clears all curve names from the 'Curves to Import' list.
1769
Senergy
'Load' : loads the selected curve to IP using either a new IP well (the OpenWorks well
name) or an existing IP well.
'Load All' : loads all the curves in the 'Curves to Import' list either to a new IP well (the
OpenWorks well name) or an existing IP well.
Related Topics
GEOLOG6
OpenWorks
ODM
14.4.4 ODM
Oilfield Data Manager
(ODM) is a PC-based subsurface data management and geoscience
software package developed by Senergy. For more information on this application follow the link
to the ODM3 website http://www.odmweb.com.
The 'Read / Write to ODM DB' interface includes a 'Tree View' browser, from which the user
can 'drag and drop' an entire well, curves Sets or separate curves to load into IP from a
connected ODM database. This allows multiple well data to be selected for loading into IP, either
as new IP wells or replacing / appending curves & Sets in existing IP wells.
The 'Read / Write to ODM DB' interface is supported on Windows XP (SP2) installations or
above.
Connecting to an ODM database

The client connection is made using an OLEDB connection string. This connection string is
constructed automatically when the user selects the ODM MS Access database '.mdb' file.
'Click' the 'Connection' button.
Use the browser dialog that is launched to locate the required ODM database (.mbd) file.
Select 'Open'.
To access the ODM database, close the 'Connection' dialog and select a Project from the
drop-down 'Project' list.
The 'Read/Write to ODM DB' interface is organised on 2 'tabbed 'screens . These are :
'Import into IP', and
Senergy
1770
'Export to ODM'
The 'Import into IP' Tab

The 'Import into IP' Tab provides the user with the interface to connect to & load data from an
ODM database into IP.
Viewing ODM Wells in the IP Interface

Once a connection to an ODM database has been established, by selecting a 'Project', the user
can view the wells, curves and Sets in the ODM database in the left hand panel of the window. IP
interrogates the external database to read wells, curve Sets, log curves and formation tops. The
list of wells can be filtered either by using the drop-down list available from the 'Display Well:'
box or by typing in the 'Filter By:' box and 'clicking' the 'Filter' button.
Curve Sets and curves are selected for import to IP by simple drag/drop operations:
1771
Senergy
'Read' operation at any time by clicking the 'Cancel' button. The 'Read' operation will
populate the 'Wells to Import' panel with the Well name. All available ODM curves will be
listed in the 'Curves to Import' list. This can take some minutes, depending upon how
many curves exist in the selected ODM well.
To Load Sets / Curves - drag/drop the Curve Set name or curve name into the lower, 'Curves
to Import' panel. Alternatively, right-mouse-click on a Curve Set and click the 'Add' button that
appears on-screen.
IP will read the external database entries and will populate the 'Curves to Import' screen with
the available curves.
selected ODM Sets.
To Load ODM Formation Tops data:

ODM Formation Tops data can be imported into IP. The user can 'click and drag' the Tops Set
into the 'Curves to Import' panel. The Tops data are flagged in the 'Curves to Import' panel, in
the 'Import Type' column as type 'Tops', to distinguish them from conventional 'Log' data.
Senergy
1772
PLEASE NOTE : ODM tops often are stored in a way that preserves a stratigraphic hierarchy (e.
g. Group, Formation, Member). The IP user will have to check the imported tops and may have to
perform some editing, in the 'Edit Zones /Tops Sets' module, to get the ODM tops to display
correctly in IP.

'Use existing IP Well' - if 'checked', the user-selected curve Sets and curves will be loaded
into an existing IP well with the same name as the ODM well. If a well name match is not
found, the user will be prompted for an action, as illustrated below:
The user should click 'OK' to create a new IP well to load the curve data into, or 'Cancel' to
abort the 'import' operation for that well.
'Overwrite Existing Curves'- if 'checked', when importing a curve or curves from the ODM
database into an IP well where the identical curve name(s) exist, the ODM curves will
1773
Senergy
overwrite the existing data in IP. If 'un-checked' the user will be warned that an identical
curve name already exists in the IP well.
'Use "Load into Set' Option' - ODM does not support curve Sets. If this check-box is
'checked' and the curves are to be imported into an existing IP well curve Set (set from the
Well 'Properties' dialog) the import operation will write the ODM curves into the selected IP
well curve Set. if the box is left 'un-checked', the ODM curves will be loaded into the IP
database using an auto-created curve Set called CRVS.
'Fill Data Gaps' - if 'checked', IP will automatically extrapolate across any data gaps existing
in the imported curves during the import operation. If the user wishes to copy Core analysis
data (e.g.Core porosity, Core grain density., Permeability) then the 'Fill Data Gaps' option
should be left 'un-checked'. Importing Continuous log curves and discrete core analysis data
from ODM to IP would therefore require a two step import operation, with 'Fill Data Gaps'
switched 'on' for continuous logs and 'off' for core data.

described below:
'Load All' - executes the 'import into IP' operation and loads all wells / curves listed in the
'Import' panels into the current IP database.
'Clear All' - clears all curve and well entries from the 'Wells to Import' and 'Curves to
Import' list windows.
'Close' - Closes the external database interface.
The 'Export to ODM' Tab

The 'Export to ODM' tab allows the IP user to write log curves and Tops back to a connected
ODM database.
The interface is almost identical to the 'Import into IP' screen in terms of layout. The 'Browser'
panel displays the current IP database and its associated wells. The functionality for selecting
wells and curves is also the same. Wells can be drag/dropped into the 'Wells to Export' panel,
Curve Sets and curves can be drag/dropped into the 'Curves to Export' panel. 'Right-mousebutton' clicking launches the 'Add' button, which also adds wells /curves into the Export panels.
'Load All' - Clicking the 'Load All' button, loads all selected curves and tops sets into the
attached ODM database.
'Clear All' - removes all entries from the 'Wells to Export' and 'Curves to Export' lists.
Senergy
1774
NOTE: If Tops are Selected to be Exported to ODM, the following dialog will be displayed.
Select the required table for the Tops to be Exported to. NOTE: If Cancel is selected the
Export will proceed, however NO TOPS will be exported.
Related Topics
GEOLOG6
OpenWorks
ODM
14.4.5 Shell LOGIC Database Loader

This is a migration tool to copy Shell LOGIC database projects into an IP project. This module
only works with LOGIC version S2001.2. Other versions are NOT supported.
Well Attributes
To migrate the maximum amount of data from the LOGIC database into IP some preliminary
steps are needed to configure IP.
The following well attributes need to be created in IP.
1775
Senergy
1. 'Comment1'
2. 'Comment2'
3. 'XLoc'
4. 'YLoc'
These attributes will be used to load these fields from the LOGIC database well header.
'Tools'
'Options'
'Well Attributes'. Click the 'Add' button, fill in the attribute name in the
dialog box 'New Attribute Name' and click 'OK'. Fill in the 'Display Alias' for the attribute. The '
Display Alias' is what is shown on the well header form.
Curve System Defaults

If the user is planning to import a lot of curves which are not part of the standard IP set of curve
names then it would be worth adding these non standard IP curve names to the
CPARMDEF_USER.PAR file. By adding these non standard IP curve names to the
CPARMDEF_USER.PAR these defaults will then be picked up automatically when loading. The
CPARMDEF_USER.PAR can be accessed from the 'Tools'
'Defaults'
'Edit User Curve
System Defaults' menu.
Senergy
1776
Load Shell LOGIC Database

From 'Input/Output' select the 'Read from Shell LOGIC DB' option. Use the 'Browse' button to
select the LOGIC database to import. The folder to select will be the folder that contains all the
WELL001, WELL002 etc data folders.
Select the wells to load. The normal windows selection controls work. Ctrl click selects a
well, Shift click selects a range.
Select the 'IP Well database sample frequency'. This will be the IP database step. Curves
that are at a higher frequency than this in LOGIC will be loaded as an array curve. Curves
with a lower frequency will be loaded as sparsely loaded data (ie data with gaps in it).
The IP Load Set can be selected. Capillary pressure curves will be loaded into a set called
CapP. The Edit Sets button can be used to create an IP set that is not available in the drop
down menu.
Click the Load button to load the selected wells. The module loads the data well by well and
saves each well to the IP database as it progresses. There is no limit to the number of wells
that can be loaded at one time except the 9,999 well IP database limit. The IP database
number will be the same as the LOGIC database number if possible (i.e. there is no IP DB
number conflict).
1777
Senergy
Capillary Pressure
Capillary pressure data is all loaded into the CapP IP set. IP loads 5 curves for each LOGIC
capillary pressure curve. To the LOGIC curve name is appended the follow extensions
1. pc. This will be an array curve that contains the pressure data of the Pc plugs.
2. sw. This will be an array curve that contains the saturation data of the Pc plugs.
3. perm. This is a regular curve that contains the permeabilities of the Pc plugs.
4. phi. This is a regular curve that contains the porosities of the Pc plugs.
5. GD. This is a regular curve that contains the grain densities of the Pc plugs.
Image Data
Image data will be loaded as arrays and can be displayed in the normal way in IP.
Well Header Data

All LOGIC header data will be copied to the IP well.
Curve Header Data
Senergy
1778
The LOGIC header data will be copied to IP. This includes the module and the date curves
showing when they were created and last updated in LOGIC. Curve comments will also be
copied.
Journal File
The LOGIC journal.dat file is copied from the LOGIC database into the IP well folders.
Related Topics
GEOLOG6
OpenWorks
ODM
14.4.6 Read / Write via OpenSpirit

The 'Read / Write via OpenSpirit' functionality allows the user to load and save data between IP
and other OpenSpirit -enabled databases such as OpenWorks
OpenSpirit
and GeoFrame . The
website can be found at http://www.openspirit.com
The user must check that the 'Tools'
'Options'
'External Database Connections'
'
OpenSpirt Link' check-box, is 'checked' for this option to be visible under the IP 'Input / Output'
main menu item.
NOTE: The IP - OpenSpirit link will only work if OpenSpirit has been installed on the users
PC, along with the OpenSpirit .NET components. These components are only found in
1779
Senergy
OpenSpirit version 2.5 and more recent versions.

PLEASE NOTE: at time of writing (July 2006), the most recent version of OpenSpirit is
Ver 2.9.1 and requires Microsoft .Net 1.1 in order to work properly. Also, there are
additional required items in the OpenSpirit .NET install, so simply installing Microsoft's .
NET components will not enable the IP - OpenSpirit connection. When you install
OpenSpirit on your PC you will be prompted to specify the '.NET Installation options'.
'Check' all the options for the .NET Interface, Excel Adaptor and ArcView Extension, as
shown below and click the 'Next' button.
NOTE: for a new OpenSpirit install on a PC there is a User registration phase to be completed
before IP will communicate with OpenSpirit. A user 'Alias' must be set up using the 'OpenSpirit
Launcher'. Opening the OpenSpirit Launcher will launch the following dialog:
Senergy
1780
You will need to Alias a user, so 'click' the lower arrow and enter the appropriate Password for
your Unix account/UserId in the text box at the bottom of the window (as shown below).
The OpenSpirit Launcher (shown below) should now start and you will be able to connect to an
OpenSpirit 'Session'.
When the link is set up, IP will be able to communicate directly with any OpenSpirit-enabled
databases that the user has access to.
NOTE: 'PGL_IP' runtime licenses must be obtained from OpenSpirit in order for IP to
communicate with an installed OpenSpirit system.
Before IP can communicate with the OpenSpirit-linked database, the OpenSpirit 'User Server'
must be running. The User Server is started when you activate the 'OpenSpirit Launcher', if it
is not already running. You will be asked if you wish to shut it down when you exit the launcher,
1781
Senergy
as shown below. 'Check' the 'Do not shutdown any servers' Option and then 'Continue Exit'.
The OpenSpirit sessions are set up in the 'OpenSpirit Launcher' (installed when OpenSpirit is
installed on the PC). A session allows access to various external database resources. Sessions
must be set up before accessing OpenSpirit through IP. Help on setting up the OpenSpirit
sessions can be found in the OpenSpirit help documentation.
PLEASE NOTE
1. At time of writing (July 2006) OpenSpirit has a limited ability to translate curve measurement
'units' residing in IP, to external databases. OpenSpirit recognizes POSC unit acronyms only.
This means that many of the 'standard' curve units e.g. g/cc, v/v, dec., API , inches, will not be
copied to the attached external database. The user may have to manually update/correct the
curve units in the external database.
2. Co-ordinate Conversions - IP currently only recognizes external database well locations
(Latitude / Longitude) where the parent project co-ordinates are defined in Universal Transverse
Mercator (UTM) and WGS84 datum.
The 'Read / Write via OpenSpirit' Interface

The 'Read / Write Via OpenSpirit' interface is used to load log curves, well Tops and Well Path
(deviation) data into IP from an 'attached' external database, using an OpenSpirit connection.
Log curves and Tops data can also be exported to a number of external databases from IP. The
interface is organized on 2 'tabbed' screens. These are:
'Import into IP'
'Export to OpenSpirit'
The 'tabs' are described below:
'Import into IP' Tab

To Connect to an OpenSpirit Session:
Senergy
1782
Click' the 'Connection' button to select an 'OpenSpirit Session' and 'Project' from which to
retrieve well data. Click 'OK'.
Select a 'Well Bore List' from the drop-down list at the top of the screen. The left-hand panel of
the interface will be populated with available wells in a 'Tree' view presentation.
The following common tasks are described more fully in the 'Common Database Connection
Tasks' chapter.
1. Loading all the log curves for a new IP well from the external project
2. Selectively loading log curves for a new IP well from the external project
3. Deselecting curves from the 'import' operation
4. Loading Well Tops
5. Deselecting Tops from the 'import' operation
6. Editing Well Properties
Editing a new wells' 'well attributes' before loading into the current IP database
Updating well attributes in an existing IP well in the current IP database
Writing Data via OpenSpirit
1783
Senergy
Data are written to an OpenSpirit-connected external database from the 'Export to OpenSpirit'
Tab.
PLEASE NOTE
1. At time of writing (July 2006) OpenSpirit has a limited ability to translate curve measurement
'units', defined in IP, to external databases. OpenSpirit recognizes POSC unit acronyms only.
This means that many of the 'standard' curve units e.g. g/cc, v/v, dec., API , inches, will not be
copied to the attached external database. The user will have to manually update/correct the
curve units in the external database.
2. Co-ordinate Conversions - IP currently only recognizes external database well locations
where the parent project co-ordinates are defined in Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) and
WGS84 datum.
'Export to OpenSpirit' Tab

The following screen capture is typical of the 'Export to OpenSpirit' view seen when connected to
an external database via the OpenSpirit link.
To export data to an OpenSpirit-connected database the 'Export to OpenSpirit' tab must be

set up.
The 'generic', expandable 'Tree View' panel on the left-hand-side of the user interface will contain
the list of wells in the current IP database that are loaded into memory - and therefore available to
Senergy
1784
export data from.
To select Wells and curves for export:

Either 'click & drag' a 'Rig' icon into the 'Wells to export' panel. This will load all curve Sets
and log curves associated with the selected well, into the lower, 'Curves to export' panel.
Or, expand the 'Tree View' to see individual curve names, then 'click & drag' either the curve
Set name or individual curve names into the lower, 'Curves to export' panel. The selected
curves will appear in the panel.
Exporting an IP well to an 'External Database'

By default an IP well,and its curves, when it is exported, will create a new external database well
with the same well name as the IP well. Alternatively, to export the log curves to an existing
external database well you should:
right-mouse-button click on the 'Load Name' in the 'Wells to Export' panel. A dialog is
launched, as illustrated below:
select an external database well name from the drop-down list to export the curve data to.
Click 'OK'.
Click the 'Export All' button on the main 'Export to OpenSpirit' screen.
To confirm that the data have been exported to the correct external well, click on the 'Import into
IP' tab. The 'Import' Tab will refresh and you can click on the well that you exported data to, to
1785
Senergy
see whether curves are present.

The 'Export IP Tops' check-box, when 'checked', will export all the Zones / Tops Sets from the
selected well to the external database.
Related Topics
GEOLOG6
OpenWorks
ODM
Section
15
Tools
1787
15
Senergy
Tools
The 'Tools' menu provides the user with the ability to manage certain 'Defaults' property files
associated with IP. The editable files include:
Curve type and Curve system parameters
Mineral Solver System and Mineral Solver Equations parameters
Crossplot Overlay Lines
Monte Carlo Error Analysis Parameters
Log measurement unit conversions for Caliper, Density and Sonic logs
Neutron Tool-Type set-up parameters
Related Topics
Shading Types
Edit Global Sets
Edit Zone colours
Edit Dip Symbols
Edit Palettes
Edit Default Lithology
Edit Curve Aliasing
Set Default Units
Message Board
'IP Proprietary' Protection System
Options
Section 15.
Tools :
Tools
Senergy
15.1
1788
Shading Types
The 'Shading Types' tool allows the user to define colour and pattern fills for use in log plotting
and for creating a graphic Lithology fill (see 'Edit Default Lithology' tool). All the standard
palette colours are available. The user has considerable interactivity with the 'style' of the shading
that appears on plots. The 'Style' options are illustrated below and are selected from a dropdown menu on-screen.
The IP default shading scheme is stored in the IP program directory, in the file ShadeType.opt.
If the user edits the 'Shade Types' table and wishes to save the changes, 'check' the 'Save as
Project Default' box on the 'Define Shade Types' window. On clicking 'OK', a ShadeType.opt
file, containing the edited settings, is saved to the current IP 'project' directory. In effect, creating
a project-specific shading look-up file.
WARNING: If the user does not 'check' the 'Save as Project Default' box before clicking
'OK', the IP 'program' defaults file will be overwritten.
The Default button will restore the available shade settings to the IP 'program' version of the
ShadeType.opt file.
Bitmap images can be added into the 'Define Shade Types' window by clicking the 'Browse'
button in an empty row in the table and then navigating to the appropriate folder and bitmap
image. The bitmap file can be user-created or selected from the available bitmaps supplied with
the IP software. Bitmaps for lithology fill should be 16 x 16 pixels dimensions to be compatible
with Windows 98 installations. Larger bitmaps can be used with Windows NT, 2000 and XP
installations.
To delete an entry from the table the user simply deletes the 'Name' entry in the row -to-bedeleted and the row is removed.
Section 15.1 Tools : Shading Types
1789
Senergy
Lithology Curve Bitmaps

A set of bitmaps have been created to be used in the 'Create Edit Lithology' module. These
bitmaps are stored in the IP program directory in the 'Shading Bitmaps' sub-folder. The
lithology symbols are mapped to a 'Name', which the user should type in, in the left-hand column
of the 'Define Shade Types' table. These 'Names' are then used to set up the 'Edit Default
Lithology' module.
PLEASE NOTE:
Shade 'Names' must be less than 10 characters in length.
There is currently a maximum of 30 Lithology shadings allowed in the 'Edit Default
Lithology' table.
A user can add their own bitmap lithology shading to the 'Shading Types' table by setting the '
Style' cell in an empty row to 'Clear' and then using the 'Browse' button to locate the required
bitmap file. To help manage these bitmaps it is good practice to organise the bitmap 'Names' in
alphabetic order. New bitmaps can be selected and named. The user can 'click and drag' in the
left hand column of the grid and move rows up / down the table to the appropriate position. This
helps when setting up / changing the 'Edit Default Lithology' table.
NOTE: if you have any Log Plots active when you try to edit the 'Shading Types', a warning
message will appear advising that you cannot work on/save shading type edits. You must close
all Log Plot displays while working on 'Shading Types'.
If the user clicks 'OK' to the 'Warning', the 'Shading Types' window is activated. However, no
edits to the table can be saved until all log plots are closed down. If the user selects 'OK'
on the 'Shading Types' window while a plot is still active, the following 'Error message' is
displayed:
Tools
Senergy
1790
Click 'OK' to the Error message then close all log plot displays, then click 'OK' on the 'Shading
Types' to save your edits / additions.
The user can create new curve fill shadings by using Windows
Paint or other bitmap editing
software to create a 16 x 16 bitmap. Save the file and add the bitmap file path to your 'Shading
Types' list by using the 'Browse' button.
Related Topics
Shading Types
Edit Global Sets
Edit Zone colours
Edit Dip Symbols
Edit Palettes
Edit Curve Aliasing
Set Default Units
Message Board
Options
1791
15.2
Senergy
Edit Global Sets
The 'Edit Global Sets' dialog window allows the user to create new 'Set Names' that will be
copied to all 'in-memory' wells in an IP database. This provides a very quick method for
ensuring that consistent Set Names are added to wells in a multiple well database. In addition,
when the user moves between IP databases, the same 'Set Names' can automatically be
made available to every well in every database that the user accesses. For example, you
might want to add a 'Load' Set and a 'Calc' Set to every well in multiple databases. Type the
names and a descriptions into the window and the Sets are created.
This tool, when used in conjunction with the 'Manage Curve Sets' and 'Multi-Well Manage
Curve Sets', provides the means for creating, editing and managing Sets within an IP project.
The module launches from the 'Tools' Menu.
A blank 'Add Global Set Names' window is opened, which allows the user to type in a 'Short
Name' and a 'Full Name'.
The 'Short Name' is restricted to 8 characters in length.
The 'Full Name' can contain a longer text string description that provides more information
on the Sets contents, its' origin, or 'how the curves were calculated' etc....
'Step Regular' allows the user to make the created Set a regular step Set or an irregular
Step set.
When the 'OK' button is clicked, the Set name is propagated throughout the in-memory wells. If
additional wells are loaded into memory the Set names are also automatically created in these
Section 15.2 Tools : Edit Global Sets
Tools
Senergy
1792
wells.
As long as a Set name remains in the 'Add Global Set Names' window, any new wells that are
loaded into memory will have this Set name automatically created. If, however, the user deletes
a Set Name from the 'Add Global Set Names' window and additional wells are subsequently
loaded into memory, these wells will not have the 'global' Set name created for them.
To delete a 'global' Set - clear the Short Name entry box for the Set you wish to delete and click '
OK'.
The 'Save as Project Default' 'check' box has the following functionality :
If 'un-checked' (the default setting) the user-defined Set Names are available for any IP
database that the user connects to.
If 'checked' - the Set names that the user has defined are only applied in the currentlyactive IP database.
If the user saves the 'global' Sets configuration with the check box 'checked', a file,
ProjectFileDefaultsSets.OPT, will be created in the active database's 'Root' directory. If the
user subsequently edits the configuration, for example to add another 'global' Set name in the '
Add Global Set Names' dialog window and 'un-checks' the box, a warning message will
appear.
1793
Senergy
Clicking 'Yes' will overwrite the file ProjectFileDefaultsSets.OPT, found in the IP installation
directory. This file contains a list of all 'global' (default) Set names. The message advises the
user that any changes they have made will overwrite existing settings in this file. This means that
newly created Set names will be available to all databases that the user has access to, not only
the currently active database.
Clicking 'No' cancels the operations and returns to the 'Add Global Set Names' window.
Related Topics
Shading Types
Edit Global Sets
Edit Zone colours
Edit Dip Symbols
Edit Palettes
Edit Curve Aliasing
Set Default Units
Message Board
Options
Tools
Senergy
15.3
1794
Edit Zone Colors
'Edit Zone colours' allows the user to choose the colours that are used to display zones in log
plots, crossplots and histograms. The default colours shown below are used if no user-defined
colour set is used. The colours are defined in a file called Zonecolors.opt which is created in
each project.
To create a customized zone colour scheme the user 'clicks' on the colour box and selects from
the drop-down box. The default colour scheme uses 25 different colours for zones. However,
new zones with new colours can be added by 'clicking' the 'New Zone' button and selecting the
colour for this zone.
Zones can be deleted by selecting a zone and then 'clicking' the 'Delete Zone' button.
'Clicking' the 'Defaults' button returns all the colours to the system defaults.
Related Topics
Shading Types
Edit Global Sets
Edit Zone colours
Section 15.3 Tools : Edit Zone Colors
1795
Edit Dip Symbols

Edit Palettes
Edit Curve Aliasing
Set Default Units
Message Board
Options
Section 15.3 Tools : Edit Zone Colors
Senergy
Tools
Senergy
15.4
1796
Edit Dip Symbols
The tadpole symbol table is used in conjunction with the log plotting of tadpoles (see the
TADPOLES section of the log plotting module). The form allows the user to assign a colour,
shape and name of a tadpole to a certain value. This value can then be used along with a tadpole
symbol curve to set the colour and shape of each tadpole in a log plot. The name is used in the '
Interactive Dip Picking' module so that the type of dip can be selected using the name.
The defaults are used if no user-defined set is created. The tadpole symbol sets are defined in a
file called DipSymbols.opt which is created in each project.
The user can add new rows or re-define the current rows. The value assigned to each symbol is
completely flexible and does not have to be sequential.
Related Topics
Shading Types
Edit Global Sets
Edit Zone colours
Edit Dip Symbols
Edit Palettes
Edit Curve Aliasing
Set Default Units
Message Board
Section 15.4 Tools : Edit Dip Symbols
1797

Options
Section 15.4 Tools : Edit Dip Symbols
Senergy
Tools
Senergy
15.5
1798
Edit Palettes
There are two modes for editing or creating new palettes;

'Interactive' where ranges of colours can be set by 'clicking' on the two end-points, and
'Manual' where each colour in the palette can be changed individually.
The 'Palette' drop-down box allows the user to select a previously defined palette and edit it.
Interactive Mode
1. Highlight area in the palette result to change the colours. The 'All' button will highlight the
total palette.
Section 15.5 Tools : Edit Palettes
1799
Senergy
2. Select the 'From' button.

3. Select the colour by 'clicking' on the large colour box.
4. Select the brightness of the colour by clicking on the horizontal brightness bar. The selected
colour will be displayed in the highlighted 'From' box.
5. Select the 'To' button.
6. Select the 'To' colour and brightness. The palette changes will be displayed in the palette
bar.
Colours can also be set by changing the R (Red), G (Green) and B (Blue) slider bars. The
user can type in the actual R, G, B numbers.
Steps 1 though 6 can be repeated for different areas of the overall palette to build up the
total palette.
Tools
Senergy
1800
Manual Mode
The manual mode allows each value in the 256 colour palette to be individually changed.
Select box in the palette.

Adjust the R, G, B slider bars to give the required colour.
This must be repeated for each colour in the palette.
Buttons
'Spectrum' This will create the default 'Spectrum' palette. Useful in cases where this base
palette has been changed or deleted.
'Save'
This will save the palette under the current name, overwriting the file on disk.
'Save As'
This will allow a new palette to be created under a user-defined name.
1801
'Restore'
Senergy
This will re-load the current palette from the disk undoing any changes.
'Close' Closes the module.
Related Topics
Shading Types
Edit Global Sets
Edit Zone colours
Edit Dip Symbols
Edit Palettes
Edit Curve Aliasing
Set Default Units
Message Board
Options
Tools
Senergy
15.6
1802
The 'Edit Default Lithology' tool provides the user with a pre-defined set of lithology bitmap
shadings which are linked to lithology 'descriptions'. The 'descriptions' are used in the 'Create /
Edit Lithology Curve' module to populate the drop-down list of shadings that the user chooses
to build the Lithology Curve from. The 'Edit Default Lithology' tool permits the user to 'map'
selected bitmap (.bmp) pictures, set up in the 'Shading Types' table, to lithology types for
display in a log plot track. The default settings are saved in the Lithology.opt file in the IP
program directory. The user can either:
use the IP default bitmaps, or
create your own bitmap file(s) and replace an existing IP default bitmap with the new one, or,
edit the 'Default Lithologies' table to create your own, 'project specific' Lithology.opt file.
NOTE: there is currently an upper limit of 80 lithology shadings permitted in the 'Edit Default
Lithology' table.
NOTE: If you make any changes to the 'Default Lithology' table, you should 'check' the 'Save
as project default' check box BEFORE clicking the 'OK' button. This creates and writes a
project-specific Lithology.opt file into the IP Project directory and prevents the user from
overwriting the IP Program version of this file.
The IP Program Default Lithology Table.

The Default Lithology File (Lithology.opt), shipped with the IP program, contains 39 bitmap
shading files, linked to lithology descriptions. These descriptions are listed in ascending
Section 15.6 Tools : Edit Default Lithology
1803
Senergy
alphabetic order so that the 'Create / Edit Lithology Curve' module is easier to work with. The
user can choose to work with the IP Default Lithology bitmaps (stored in the IP Program
directory, in the '\Shading Bitmaps' sub-directory), or can edit the table to their own
specifications and include their own bitmap shadings. NOTE: bitmaps should have dimensions
of 16 x 16 pixels. The Microsoft 'Paint' tool was used to build the current IP defaults. Also, as
mentioned above, the table only allows a maximum 80 bitmaps to be used, so, if you wish to
include different bitmaps you may have to replace some of the existing entries.
Editing the Default Lithology Table

The user can edit the Default Lithology Table to their own specifications. You can:
Shorten the list of Lithology descriptions : if you wish to shorten the list of available
lithology bitmaps you should 'click' in a row that you want to remove from the IP Program
default list and click the 'Delete Row' button. The row will be removed from the table.
'Check' the 'Save as project default' check-box before clicking the 'Ok' button to save your
changes to a 'local', IP Project, Default Lithology file.
Change the bitmap shadings used : Each shading 'Name' is linked to an entry in the '
Shading Types' table. If the user wishes to keep the shading name, but wants a different
bitmap to be linked to it, the change should be made in the 'Shading Types' table, by
'browsing' to the new bitmap and selecting it. IMPORTANT: 'check' the 'Save as project
default' check-box on the 'Shading Types' dialog to save your changes to the current IP
project, otherwise you will overwrite the IP program shading defaults file.
Change the Lithology Curve 'Index' Numbers : The 'Index' numbers are used in the '
Create / Edit Lithology Curve' module. The numbers are used to 'map' a bitmap shading
to a curve value in the Lithology curve. The user can, for example, make a shorter Default
Lithology table by deleting rows from the IP Program default table, then edit the Index
numbers to their own scheme. Index numbers must be unique for each row of the Default
Lithology Table. If you try to save your table, using the 'Ok' button, IP will warn you if there
are rows with the same index value. You will then have to edit the index numbers to be
unique. Remember to 'check' the 'Save as project default' check-box to save your
changes to the current IP project, otherwise you will overwrite the IP program Lithology
defaults file.
Re-arrange the order in which the descriptions are listed : The order in which the rows
are listed can be re-arranged by 'clicking' in the left hand border of the window, adjacent to
the row you wish to move. Then, holding down the mouse button, drag the row up or down
Tools
Senergy
1804
the list to a new position. Release the mouse button to place the row.
Adding a new Lithology to the Default Lithology Table : Click in an empty cell in the '
Name' column (middle column) and then choose a bitmap name from the drop-down list.
The user should then type in a 'Description' (in the right-hand column) which will be used
as the display name for the Lithology shading in a Log Plot display. The 'Index' number
should be filled in and be a unique number in the table.
Deleting an entry from the 'Edit Default Lithology' table : the user 'clicks' in the row-tobe-deleted and the row is removed, when the 'Ok' button is clicked. NOTE: you should
'check' the 'Save as project default' check box if you make any changes to the default table
. See below.
NOTE: If you make changes and click 'Ok' to exit the 'Edit Default Lithology' module, then run
the 'Create /Edit Lithology Curve' module for a well, and subsequently go back into the 'Edit
Default Lithology' tool and change the bitmaps or index numbers or add new rows, the
Lithology curve shadings could lose their mappings to the Lithology curve values and the curve
will not display correctly in the log plot. If you add a 'Name' or 'Names' back into your IP Project
Default Lithology table, make sure that it has an index number that has not previously been used/
saved. Then, in the log plot display that you are using the 'Create / Edit Lithology Curve'
module in, drag the Lithology curve from the display (using 'SHIFT + Left-mouse-button 'click &
Drag'), then re-select the track to plot the Lithology curve in. The Lithology curve will refresh with
the new bitmap shadings correctly set. Alternatively, delete the IP Project Lithology.Opt file and
rebuild it with the same names , bitmaps and index numbers, including the 'additional' entries and
save again as the 'Project Default'.
'Save as project default' - The IP default Lithology shading scheme is stored in the IP program
directory, in the file Lithology.opt. If the user edits the Default Lithology table and wishes to save
the changes, 'check' the 'Save as project default' check box at the bottom of the window. On
clicking 'Ok', a Lithology.opt file, containing the edited settings, is saved to the current IP '
project' directory.
WARNING: If the user does not 'check' the 'Save as Project Default' box before clicking
'OK', the IP 'program' Lithology.opt file, located in the IP program directory, will be
overwritten.
'Print' - The 'Print' option allows the user to create a reference hardcopy of the 'Default Lithology'
settings, which includes the Index number, associated bitmaps pictures and 'Name' fields.
Related Topics
1805
Shading Types
Edit Global Sets
Edit Zone colours
Edit Dip Symbols
Edit Palettes
Edit Curve Aliasing
Set Default Units
Message Board
Options
Senergy
Tools
Senergy
15.7
1806
Edit Curve Aliasing
The 'Curve Aliasing' module can be accessed from 'Tools'

be opened from within 'Tools'
'Options'
'Edit Curve Aliasing'. Or it can
'Curve Aliasing'.
The 'Curve Aliasing' module allows the user to construct a grid which reflects the user's
preference for certain curve mnemonics. These curve mnemonics will be ranked according to
their position in the grid with the top curve given the highest priority. When looking for a curve, to
say fill in a default log plot, the module runs through the grid in order. The first curve of the 'Curve
Type' it is looking for that exists in the well will be used. The module also works through the '
Curve Sets' in order if it can't find the curve of the correct 'Curve Type' in the 'Default Set'.
The screenshot below shows the 'Curve Aliasing' module with default 'Curve Types' and curve
names. As the 'Alias Mode' is set to 'Off' all the cells in the 'Curve Selection Order' and 'Set
Selection Order' grids are grayed out.
Section 15.7 Tools : Edit Curve Aliasing
1807
Senergy
Curve Aliasing Modes

There are three modes for the 'Curve Aliasing' module
'Off' - if this is 'checked' then IP will work as it previously used to by just using 'Curve
Types' to select curves. For example, a density log can be selected in a module by typing
in '@Density'. The program will look for a curve of type Density in the well, if several
density curves are found it will select the most recent one.
'Manual' - in this mode the curve aliasing works in a similar manner to the 'Off' mode
unless the entered curve name has a '#' symbol in front of it. This informs the curve
aliasing that the user is asking for a specific curve to be aliased and if needs be it will
Tools
Senergy
1808
locate a curve of the same type as the one entered if that specific curve can't be found in
the well database.
For example, if the user wants to populate the 'Clay Volume Analysis' module with
gamma ray, density and neutron curves then they should enter '#GR', '#RHOB' and
'#NPHI' in the relevant cells within the module. NOTE: within the alias Gamma, Density
and Neutron 'Curve Type' column there
must be respectively, a GR curve, RHOB curve and an NPHI curve entered. When the
program is run, if a GR curve is found within the well database then it will use it. However,
if no GR curve is found the program will look down the Gamma 'Curve Type' column and
select the next available gamma ray curve in the list if it exists in the well. It will then do
the same for the RHOB curve and finally the NPHI curve.
1809
Senergy
The use of this method of curve aliasing provides for a very powerful tool when combined
with the 'Multi-well Parameter Distribution' module as the user can set the alias table
up with the curves that exist throughout the database in the order in which to be used and
then have the 'Parameter Sets' using the generic form of the curve name which will then
be applied across all the wells. NOTE: if curves exist within a database it is upto the user
Tools
Senergy
1810
to make sure that they have a 'Curve Type' associated with them. The curve aliasing
won't work if there are curves within a well but the curves don't have an associated '
Curve Type'.
'Automatic' - if a curve name is entered in a module but doesn't exist in the well then the
aliasing module will attempt to find a curve of the same 'Curve Type' in the grid as long
as there is a curve of similar name in the grid. It then uses the first available curve in the
well that matches the first available curve in the grid. If there are no curves of that type in
the well then the user will be informed.
For example, in the alias grid below there is a curve called 'timscurve' in the GammaRay '
Curve Type' column. This curve does not exist in any well. However, if this curve name
is entered into the 'Clay Volume Analysis' module as the Gamma Ray input curve and
the module is run, the module uses the first available gamma ray curve that it finds in the
well which matches the first available curve in the alias GammaRay 'Curve Type'
column, which is the GRAM curve.
1811
Senergy
The 'Curve Aliasing' module can be toggled between 'Off', 'Manual' and 'Automatic' from the
main IP toolbar as well as from within the module.
'Use Final Curve' - if there is a 'check' in the 'Use Final Curve' column for that 'Curve
Tools
Senergy
1812
Type' then the module will only look for 'Final Curves'. These are searched for using the
same rules as for 'normal' curves. If a 'Final Curve' can't be located from the ones in the
grid the module then goes through all the final curves in that well attempting to find one of
the same type.
User Interface
There are two main grids within the module;
1813
Senergy
'Curve Selection Order' grid - top grid. The top row of this grid is populated by 'Curve
Types' or by user defined names. See 'Manage Columns' for more information about
this.
'Set Selection Order' grid - lower grid. This grid is populated with all the Sets associated
with each particular 'Curve Type'. In the screenshot above most of the 'Curve Types'
have a 'Default' Set. With some, like the Core 'Curve Type', having a number of
associated Sets other than just the 'Default' Set.
When the program is first launched, the Curve Alias table is initially populated with a default table
(defined by the file DefaultAlias.cax). The default table doesn't have any set names in it so the '
Set Selection Order' grid (lower grid) will be empty. The cells of the curve and Set grids can be
typed into - NOTE: double click on the cell before typing - or the user can click the 'Auto
Populate' or 'Load Defaults' button and fill the grid in that way. Users can also paste in from
Excel.
Tools
Senergy
1814
1815
Senergy
To move around the 'Curve Selection Order' grid more quickly than just using the horizontal
scroll bar the user can 'click' on a cell and then type in a letter which corresponds to the first
letter of the 'Curve Type' that the user wishes to find. For example, if the user is looking at the
XDeepRes column but wants to quickly check what is in the DeepRes column then the user
should click on an empty cell and type in 'D' and they will be taken to the DeepRes column which
is the first 'Curve Type' starting with the letter 'D'.
'Auto Populate' - when this button is 'clicked' the module will run through all the loaded
wells in the entire database looking for curves. If the curve has an associated type the
module will add this curve to the grid along with its Set. The 'Curve Type' name will go
into the column header of the 'Curve Selection Order' grid and the curve will go into the
column under the 'Curve Type' header. If a curve doesn't have an associated 'Curve
Type' then it won't be selected. If a curve of the same 'Curve Type' exists in a number of
Sets then only one curve name is added to the column but the different Sets from which
the curves reside will be added to the 'Set Selection Order' grid. The order in which the
Sets are populated depends upon the order in which they appear in the well from which
they came. They can be re-ordered on the grid by 'dragging' and 'dropping'. Curves can
also be dragged and dropped to rearrange their column order. NOTE: the grid must be
saved first before curve or Set re-ordering can occur.
If the database has many different Sets then it isn't a good idea to use 'Auto Populate'
as the 'Curve Aliasing' table becomes very unwieldy.
'Load Defaults' - loads a default curve aliasing grid - DefaultAlias.cax file. The default
curve aliasing grid can be program specific - saved to the users C:\Documents and
Settings\<username>\Local Settings\Application Data\IntPetro35 folder or it can be
made project specific by using the 'Save as Project Defaults' check-box.
'Manage Columns' - this is used to edit the list of 'Curve Types' seen in the 'Curve
Selection Order' grid. The list is initially populated from the default curve alias file. '
Curve Types' can be deleted using the 'Delete Selected Columns' button or hidden by
using the 'Hide Selected Columns' button. NOTE: to see 'hidden' columns 'uncheck'
the box and click on the 'Hide Selected Columns' button again. If the box is not
'checked' then it gets shown.
Additional 'Curve Types' can be added by typing the name of the new 'Curve Type' into
the blank cell and clicking the "+" button.
Tools
Senergy
1816
'Paste' - if a user has a curve alias table already created in Excel then it can be pasted
into the grid using the 'Paste' button. Either the whole Excel sheet can be pasted or
individual columns.
'Export to Excel' - this exports the whole grid to Excel as a .csv file. The user can then
edit the curves, 'Curve Types' and Sets within Excel and re-import the grid back into the '
Curve Aliasing' module using the 'Paste' button.
'Clear' - this will clear all the curve names and Set names from the grid. NOTE: it won't
clear the 'Curve Type' names. To clear the 'Curve Type' names use the 'Manage
Columns' button and in the 'Column Selector' module 'Select All Columns' and use
the 'Delete Selected Columns' button.
For any changes made within the 'Curve Aliasing' module to take effect, the 'Save' button has
to be 'clicked'. If the same curve name appears in more than one 'Curve Type' column then error
messages will appear listing the conflicts when the 'Save' button is 'clicked'. The user will have to
resolve the conflicts before being able to 'Save' the table.
1817
Senergy
'Clicking' 'OK' on the 'Error adding curve' message takes the user back to the 'Curve Aliasing'
module and the conflicting curves are highlighted with a red box in the 'Curve Selection Order'
grid.
Related Topics
Shading Types
Edit Global Sets
Edit Zone colours
Edit Dip Symbols
Edit Palettes
Edit Curve Aliasing
Set Default Units
Message Board
Options
Tools
Senergy
15.8
1818
Set Default Units
'Set Default Units' instructs the IP program how to interpret curve values, specifically for Sonic,
Density and Caliper logs, when their input curve 'units' have not been set to a 'Recognized
Curve Unit'.
For example, a density curve loaded to IP with curve unit 'UNKNOWN', will be treated as having
density units 'gm/cc' if the input curve's 'Curve Type' is set to 'Density' and the 'Set Units' tab
setting, for 'Density Logs', are as shown below, on the left hand screen capture.
The recognized curve unit abbreviations are displayed on the 'Recognised Curve Units' tab
(see below, right). If a curve has recognized units corresponding to an entry in the appropriate
'Density', 'Sonic' or 'Caliper' list, then its' values will be automatically converted by the
interpretation modules in IP before being used. New unit abbreviations and their appropriate
conversion factors can be added to the system defaults by editing the ASCII file
UnitsConversion.par which can be found in the IP program directory. See 'Edit Unit
Conversions Defaults' under the 'Tools'
'System Defaults' menu.
IP also uses the 'default units' to determine how parameters are displayed in the interpretation
modules.
For example, if the 'default units' for Density are set to Kg/m3, then all density parameters will be
displayed in Kg/m3. Any interactive parameter line will also be displayed in the same units.
However, this means that, for the interactive display parameter to work, the input logs for sonic,
Section 15.8 Tools : Set Default Units
1819
Senergy
density and caliper must be in the appropriate 'default' units.

If 'mixed' units are used (for example - a sonic curve is loaded to IP with units of'uSec/m, but
sonic 'default units' is set to uSec/ft), the program will calculate the correct results, since IP
recognizes the unit uSec/m, but any interactive parameter picking for the sonic log curve will not
work.
The crossplot overlay files (see crossplot) will be automatically converted to the default units
when loading. The overlay disk files must be constructed using standard logging units (gm/
cc, uSec/ft and inches).
The 'Screen Display' units can be set to either 'inches' or 'centimeters'. These units are used
with the log plot to set various features, such as 'track width' and hardcopy length / width
dimensions.
Curve defaults lookup file

'Use Project Defaults' check box - In the 'Curve defaults lookup file' panel, the 'Use Project
Defaults' check box, if 'checked', will tell IP to look for a project level file called
CPARMDEF_USER.PAR in the current IP project folder, from which the program can get userdefined curve display parameters, which will be applied to newly-loaded curves. These userdefined parameters will be used in preference to those defined in the IP program level file,
CPARMDEF.PAR, when new curves are loaded into the IP project. When the box is 'checked' IP
will create the CPARMDEF_USER.PAR project level file if it does not already exist. The file will
initially be empty. The user should copy/paste/edit rows from the program level file,
CPARMDEF.PAR, into the CPARMDEF_USER.PAR file to make it work.
To reset a project to look up the IP program level Defaults CPARMDEF.PAR file, you must close
the IP project and delete the CPARMDEF_USER.PAR file from the IP Project folder. The 'Use
Project Defaults' check box will be 'un-checked' when you re-open the IP project.
'Use Metric File' - If the 'Use Metric file' check box is 'checked' then IP will look for the IP
program level CPARMDEF_METRIC.PAR file when loading and setting the display parameters
for imported curves. This file contains the metric-equivalent curve default display settings for
Sonic, Density and Caliper curves. If the 'Use Project Defaults' check box is also 'checked',
then IP will create a project level file called CPARMDEF_METRIC_User.PAR if it does not
already exist and the curve display settings in this file will take precedence over the IP program
level file CPARMDEF_METRIC.PAR, when new curves are loaded into the project.
NOTE: The file CPARMDEF_METRIC.PAR is designed mainly for use in Canada, where the
'standard' units are; for Sonic- uSec/m, for Density - KG/m3 and caliper - mm. Hence, a set of
Tools
Senergy
1820
different defaults for scales and units to those used elsewhere. Unless you work in these
units, do not use the metric option.
'Set as Project Default' - The 'Set as Project Default' check box, if 'checked' will save the
currently selected settings for Density/Sonic/Caliper logs /Screen display to a project level
defaults file called DefaultUnits.opt. This allows the user to save different combinations of
settings for different projects. When a project is opened where a DefaultUnits.opt file exists, the
box will be 'checked'. The program will first search for the project level defaults file rather than
defaulting to the IP program level file, ProgDefs.opt.
If you want to reset to the IP program ProgDefs.opt file, you need to close IP, delete the file
DefaultUnits.opt from the project folder and re-start IP. This will 'un-check' the check box.
Related Topics
Shading Types
Edit Global Sets
Edit Zone colours
Edit Dip Symbols
Edit Palettes
Edit Curve Aliasing
Set Default Units
Message Board
Options
1821
15.9
Senergy
Message Board
The 'Message Board' tool allows the user to activate a 'logging' window which displays
messages, for example, regarding log data input operations. The message board will normally
only appear if there has been an error during the execution of an IP process. The message board
can be launched from the 'Message Board' option on the 'Tools' menu.
The 'Stay on Top' check-box, if 'checked', means that the Message Board window will always
launch as the topmost window on your monitor. To put the 'Message Board' in the background,
'un-check' the box.
Clicking the 'Clear' button will clear all the text entries out of the Message Board.
Related Topics
Shading Types
Edit Global Sets
Edit Zone colours
Edit Dip Symbols
Edit Palettes
Edit Curve Aliasing
Set Default Units
Message Board
Options
Section 15.9 Tools : Message Board
Tools
Senergy
1822
15.10 System Defaults

IP 'System Defaults' settings are found in the 'Tools' Menu item. The purpose of the IP 'Default'
files is to provide the user with a mechanism to set up / edit / extend the functionality of some of
the modules in IP. The 'Defaults' files are ASCII text files which set up parameters, for example,
for the display characteristics for log curves when they are loaded into IP (CPARMDEF.PAR), or
for the Monte Carlo Error Analysis module, initializing parameters (MonteCarloDefaults.par).
A user may want to set up their own 'user' Defaults files or to add extra options into the existing
IP program Defaults files. The available operations are listed in the menu shown above. IP
Defaults files exist for the following:
Curve System Defaults (file - CPARMDEF.PAR). This file contains the IP program default
display characteristics (line colour, left and right curve display limits, Crossplot & Histogram
minimum and maximum scales) that are set for many common log curves when they are
loaded into an IP project/database. See the 'Edit Curve System Defaults' section.
Curve Type Defaults (file - CurveType.opt). This file contains the list of generic curve
'Types' that IP uses to auto-select curves for some IP modules.See the 'Edit Curve Types
Defaults' section.
Curve Alias Defaults (file - CurveAlias.txt) This file is used to set up alternative 'Load'
names for logs being imported into IP. This is useful if you want log curves, from a number
of data sources & with different curve mnemonics, to be loaded into IP with a common
name. See the 'Edit Curve Alias Defaults' section.
Section 15.10 Tools : System Defaults
1823
Senergy
Mineral Solver Mineral System Defaults (file - MINDEF.PAR). This file contains the
default minerals and their properties for the Mineral Solver module. The user can add extra
minerals and their matrix properties to the table, or edit the properties of existing minerals.
See the 'Edit Mineral Solver Mineral Defaults' section.
Mineral Solver Mineral Equation Defaults (file - MINEQDEF.PAR). This file contains the
mineral 'Equation' default settings for the Mineral Solver module. Any equation that is
selected in the 'Model' screen is set up according to the parameters in this file. New
equation types can be added to the list. See the 'Edit Mineral Solver Mineral Equations'
section.
Crossplot Overlays Setup File (file - Overlay_Files.ovl). This file contains the
descriptions and file names of all available Crossplot overlay line files. If the user creates a
new overlay file, the name must be added to this file in order for the new overlay lines to be
visible within IP, in the Overlay drop-down list in the Crossplot set-up screen. See the 'Edit
Crossplot Overlay Set-up File' section.
Monte Carlo Defaults (file - MonteCarloDefaults.par). This file contains the default
settings for the Monte Carlo Error Analysis module, including the parameters to be included,
the distribution types (Gaussian, Square , Triangular) and the high and low shift values for
each input curve or parameter. See the 'Edit Monte Carlo Defaults' section.
Unit Conversions Defaults (file - UnitConversion.par). This file contains the list of curve
unit abbreviations that IP recognizes for Density, Sonic and Caliper logs and the associated
conversion factors from the input unit to gm/cc for Density, to uSec/ft for Sonic and to
inches for Caliper. The user can add extra 'recognized units', together with their associated
conversion factors to this file. See the 'Edit Unit Conversion Defaults' section.
Neutron Tool Type Setup File (file - Neu_Parm_Files.neu). This file contains a list of the
logging service companies and the neutron tool look-up tables that are available in IP. See
the 'Edit neutron Tool Types Set-up File' section.
User-defined 'Default' files can be created and / or edited using the following options:
'Edit User Curve System Defaults'. This will create a file called CPARMDEF_USER.
PAR in the IP program directory if it does not already exist, or, if it does exist, it will open the
file for editing. The purpose of this file is to allow the user to set up alternative curve display
settings to those in the CPARMDEF.PAR file, without altering the CPARMDEF.PAR file
contents. For example, if the user wishes to change the default curve colour for each
possible Density curve (RHOB, ZDEN, RHOZ etc..) , you can create the
Tools
Senergy
1824
CPARMDEF_USER.PAR file, cut and paste the row entries for the three curves from the
CPARMDEF.PAR file into the '_USER.PAR' file and change the 'colour' setting for each row
there. Save the CPARMDEF_USER.PAR file. When you next open IP and attempt to load
one of the RHOB, RHOZ or ZDEN curves, IP will use the entries in the
CPARMDEF_USER.PAR file in preference to the CPARMDEF.PAR entries. See the 'Edit
Curve System Defaults' section.
'Edit User Curve Type Defaults'. This will create a file called UserCurveType.opt in the
IP program directory if it does not already exist, or, if it does exist, it will open the file for
editing. The user can add their own curve 'Types' into this file. See the 'Edit Curve Types
Defaults' section.
[Note: When Corporate Folders is enabled all the text files listed are searched for in each folder
in turn from the top down]
'Program Level' and 'Project Level' Defaults

All the Defaults files listed above can be found in the IP program directory. These are the '
Program Level' Defaults files. Editing any of these files will mean that any changes made to the
files will be seen in any IP database that is opened using the current IP executable, when the
appropriate interpretation module is launched.
'Project Level' Defaults files are files that are created / stored in an IP 'Project' directory and will
only be called upon by IP when the user opens that particular project. Project Level Defaults allow
the user to customize some parameters, without affecting the IP 'Program Level' settings. The
Project Level Defaults will be used in preference to the IP Program Level Defaults, where they
exist. The Lithology.opt, DefaultUnits.opt and ShadeTypes.opt files are examples of
'Defaults' files that can be saved at the Project level and allow the user to tailor colour tables,
Lithology shading and Density/Sonic/Caliper Curve settings on a project by project basis.
NOTE: if you have changed any Default files and you wish to keep your edited files when a new
version of IP is installed on your PC, remember to save the edited files in another folder/directory
before installing IP from the installation CD. Then copy your edited files back into the IP program
directory, overwriting the existing files.
Related Topics
System Defaults
Edit Curve System Defaults
Edit Curve Types Defaults
1825
Senergy
Edit Curve Alias Defaults

Edit Mineral Solver Mineral System Defaults
Edit Mineral Solver Mineral Equations Defaults
Edit Crossplot Overlay Set-up File
Edit Monte Carlo Defaults
Edit Unit Conversions Defaults
Edit Neutron Tool Types set-up File
15.10.1 Edit Curve System Defaults

The 'Edit Curve System Defaults' option allow the user to set the display properties of curves
when they are loaded to IP.
When a curve is loaded to the IP program, IP cross checks the loaded curve name against the
file 'CPARMDEF.PAR', which is found in the IP Program directory. If the curve name is found,
its display properties (left / right scales, line colour, Lin/log scaling, histogram and Crossplot
scaling) will be set, based on the properties in the CPARMDEF.PAR file. The user can add new
lines to this file or change the existing settings for a particular curve or curves.
If a user is continuously finding that they are loading curves to IP whose names are not in the
CPARMDEF.PAR file, then they should add them into the file. This will save having to change
the curve properties manually every time the curves are loaded.
The 'Edit User Curve System Defaults' option allows the user further flexibility in setting curve
Tools
Senergy
1826
display criteria. The user can copy text lines from the existing CPARMDEF.PAR file into this file (
CPARMDEF_USER.PAR) and set up line thickness, colour etc... for each curve. When IP is
next launched, the two files CPARMDEF.PAR and CPARMDEF_USER.PAR are merged, with
the curve display criteria from the _USER file taking precedence over the CPARMDEF.PAR file.
This allows the user to perform curve system edits, without physically editing the CPARMDEF.
PAR file.
Alternatively, when curves have been loaded into IP, the user can use the 'Manage Curve
Headers' module to pass new curve names and their display parameters to the
CPARMDEF_USER.PAR file. This is performed by 'right-mouse clicking' in the 'In Name'
column, in the appropriate row of the curve grid. Two options will be launched in a new window:
'Add Curve Type to file' will append the selected Curve Type details to the text file
UserCurveTypes.opt, which is created in the IP program directory the first time this option is
chosen. The new Curve Type is added to this file and subsequent additions are appended to the
file contents.
'Add Curve Properties to file' will append the selected curve row display properties to the
CPARMDEF_USER.PAR file.
The menu items are simply shortcuts to editing the files. The editing is performed using Windows
Notepad. If you are working on a single monitor PC or laptop and you wish to edit this file
using the WINDOWS Notepad, in Notepad select the 'Format' menu item and switch off
1827
Senergy
(un'check') the 'Word Wrap' feature to activate the horizontal scroll bar to be able to see all the
entries in the file.
Related Topics
System Defaults
15.10.2 Edit Curve Types Defaults

The 'Edit Curve Types Defaults' menu item provide a shortcut to the file CurveType.opt
located in the IP program directory.
Curve Types are used in IP to help with the auto-selection / 'aliasing' of curves used in some
Tools
Senergy
1828
interpretation modules. On loading curves, the user can choose to fill in the 'Curve Type' cell in
the load 'grid'. Alternatively, 'Curve Type' can be filled in later, in the Manage Curve Headers
display. For example, a curve RHOB would be loaded as type Density, a curve GR as type
GammaRay.
If the user loads curve data into a well and wishes to add a new 'Curve Type' for a particular
curve to IP, he can do so using the 'Edit / List Well Curve headers' module. The user types a '
Curve Type' name in the 'Curve Type' column. Then, by 'right clicking' in the 'In Name' column
of the appropriate row, two options are available:
The first time the 'Add Curve Type to file' is run, a blank text file UserCurveTypes.opt is
created in the IP program directory. The new 'Curve Type' is added to this file. Subsequent
additions are appended to this file.
Related Topics
System Defaults
1829
Senergy

15.10.3 Edit Curve Alias Defaults

The 'Edit Curve Alias Defaults' menu item allows the user to set up a default set of 'Curve
Alias' names, which will be interrogated every time the user selects a LAS, LIS or DLIS
formatted file to load into IP using the 'Load Data' modules. If an input curve has an 'alias'
defined in the CurveAlias.txt file, found in the IP program directory, that 'alias' name will appear
as the 'In Name' column entry in the 'Load Data' grid and the curve will be loaded to IP using the
'alias' name.
This 'Curve Alias' file is particularly useful if the user is loading curves from a number of different
service company data files and wishes curves in IP to be named consistently, regardless of data
source.
The 'Curve Alias' defaults file can also be used in the 'LAS Batch Load' module as a type of 'm
ask' file. The CurveAlias.txt file is used automatically by the IP program and does not have to
be manually selected for use. Input curves from the external LAS file will be loaded according to
any aliases that have been set up in the 'Curve Alias' file. Unlike a conventional 'mask' file
however, all other curves in the external LAS files will be loaded to IP using their default 'external'
name (a 'mask' file loads only those curves listed in it).
Selecting the 'Edit Curve Alias Defaults' option launches the WINDOWS 'Notepad' application
Tools
Senergy
1830
with the CurveAlias.txt file loaded into it. The file format is very simple and consists of pairs of
curve names that should be 'linked', one pair per line in the file. The following characters are
acceptable to separate the 'external file' name from the 'IP load' name: comma, space, tab and
semicolon. An example 'alias' file is given below.
$ 'Curve Alias Defaults' file
$ Curve name order is as shown with 'external curve name' first,
followed by 'IP Alias name'.
$ Curve name should be separated by a space, tab, comma or semicolon
character.
LLD2 <space> LLD
MSFL1 <tab> MSFLC
PHICORE2; PHICORE
RHOB1, RHOB
The 'Curve Alias file name' box within the 'LAS Batch Load' module must contain the valid
mask file name if the 'Use Mask to select curves' box has been 'checked'. The 'Edit Mask File'
button can be used to create or browse to the correct file name.
For information on the 'Curve Aliasing' module, which is a separate module to this and relates
with how curves are handled within modules rather than in the initial loading of curves, then follow
the link.
Related Topics
System Defaults
1831
Senergy
15.10.4 Edit Mineral Solver Mineral System Defaults

The 'Edit Mineral Solver Mineral System Defaults' option allows the user to set up the default
minerals for the 'Mineral Solver' probabilistic model.
The button is a shortcut key to a text editor that opens the MinDef.par file. This file contains the
default mineral parameters for the 'Mineral Solver' module.
If you are working on a single monitor PC or laptop and you wish to edit this file using the
WINDOWS Notepad, in Notepad select the 'Format' menu item and switch off (un'check') the
'Word Wrap' feature to activate the horizontal scroll bar.
Related Topics
System Defaults
Tools
Senergy
1832
15.10.5 Edit Mineral Solver Mineral Equations Defaults

The 'Edit Mineral Solver Mineral Equation Defaults' option allows the user to set up the
Mineral Equation defaults for the 'Mineral Solver' probabilistic model.
The button is a shortcut key to the WINDOWS 'Notepad' that opens the MinEqDef.par file. This
file contains the mineral equation parameters for the 'Mineral Solver' module. Parameters can
be added / changed by the user.
'Word Wrap' feature to activate the horizontal scroll bar this makes it easier to see the format of
the file.
Related Topics
System Defaults
1833
Senergy

15.10.6 Edit Crossplot Overlay Set-up File

The 'Edit Crossplot Overlays setup file' menu item provides a shortcut to the file
Overlay_Files.ovl. This file contains the names and descriptions of available crossplot overlay
lines. The user can edit this file to add new overlay line file names that can be used within IP.
See Creating Crossplot Overlay Files for more details
Related Topics
System Defaults
Edit Neutron Tool Types set-up File.
Tools
Senergy
1834
15.10.7 Edit Monte Carlo Defaults

The 'Edit Monte Carlo Defaults' menu item provides a shortcut to the file
MonteCarloDefaults.par. This file contains the defaults for the Monte Carlo Error Analysis
module.
'Word Wrap' feature to activate the horizontal scroll bar. This makes it easier to see the format of
the file.
Related Topics
System Defaults
1835
Senergy
15.10.8 Edit Unit Conversions Defaults

The IP program works with Density, Sonic and Caliper log curves defined in units of 'grams per
cubic centimetre', 'microseconds per foot' and 'inches', respectively.
The 'Edit Unit Conversions defaults' menu item provides a shortcut to the file
UnitsConversion.par which contains the list of 'units' that IP recognizes for Sonic, Density and
caliper curves and the conversion factors from the entered units to the 'defaults' described
above. The user can edit the file to add other units for these types of curves, if available.
Related Topics
System Defaults
Tools
Senergy
1836
15.10.9 Edit Neutron Tool Types set-up File

The 'Edit Neutron tool types setup file' menu item provides a shortcut to the file
Neu_Parm_Files.neu. This file contains a list of Logging companies and neutron tool types for
which neutron parameter 'look-up' tables are available. The user can write a new lookup
parameter file (xxx.neu) and add the name to this file to make it available in IP.
Related Topics
System Defaults
1837
Senergy
15.11 'IP Proprietary' Protection System

A single, 'IP Proprietary' (IP) licensing mechanism is used for IP Version 3.3 and later versions.
The original 'Copy Control' system by Microcosm is no longer supported. To view the licence
properties for your installation, to transfer the licence from one PC to another and to update the
specialist modules available in your installation go to the 'Tools'
'Program Protection 'IP''
options. The 'Program Protection' option, located on the 'Tools' menu sets up the program
copyright protection for the users IP installation. The protection system can be set up either on an
individual PC, or a working network protection system can be used.
IP Licence Information
A unique customer ID number is provided for the user which allows one copy of the licence to be
downloaded from the website and installed on a specific PC. Licences are tied to a physical PC
and cannot be moved to another PC unless they are uninstalled back to the licensing web server.
The network licensing system can be set up either by each user accessing the licence file
directly, or a network licence server program can be used. The network licence server allows
the licence to be totally isolated from the users and hence provides a higher level of security,
ensuring that the licence file will not become accidentally corrupted or deleted.
The protection system consists of a licence file 'IPSec.DAT'. This file must not be edited,
otherwise the licence will become invalid. The licence file must reside in a designated
directory on a designated PC. The directory and PC name are written into the file when the
original licence is created. If the file is moved to another location it will no longer work.
IMPORTANT: If you need to move the licence file; uninstall the protection (Check-out)
and then re-install it (Check-in) to the new location.
The properties of the licence can be viewed by listing the IPSec.DAT file. DO NOT edit this file.
The file contains the encrypted licence information plus some readable text. Each licence can
control the number of concurrent users for each module that is licenced. The expiry date for each
licence module can be uniquely set.
Example IPSec.DAT file :
131 130 136 131 141 139 134 136 143 181 182 171 168 174 177 184 119 162 144 182 189 154
176 192 191 189 127 129 132 131 134 136 131 135 138 138 135 140 137 115 114 116 117 124
118 119 117 121 128 120 129 143 123 130 137 126 148 149 129 154 141 136 144 137 147 141
113 114 118
$ This is an IP licence file.
$ Please do not edit any data in this file
$ Your licence is as follows
$ DrivePath
: c:\Program files\IntPetro
$ NetworkLicence : Yes
$ CanCheckOut
: Yes
$ Base
2 29/09/2003
Section 15.11 Tools : 'IP Proprietary' Protection System
Tools
Senergy
$
$
$
$
Statistical Prediction
Monte Carlo
Rock Physics
Pore Pressure Prediction
1
1
1
1
1838
29/09/2003
29/09/2003
29/09/2003
29/09/2003
The top of the file contains binary encoded data. The licence details follow. The number of
licences for each IP module are given, followed by its expiry date (day / month / year). NOTE: an
IP licence expires at 00h 00min 01ms, users' local time, on the expiry date.The example above
shows that two 'Base' modules can be used simultaneously while there is only one each of the
speciality modules available.
Upgrading Licences
Licences normally have a maximum version of IP with which they will work set at the time of their
creation. So if a user has purchased a licence at the same time as obtaining a copy of IP v3.5
then their IP licence max version will be v3.5. When they want to upgrade to IP v3.6 they will
also have to upgrade their licence max version. To do this, users should contact
IPSupport@Senergyworld.com. Further details are given in IP Version 3.6 release Notes.pdf
which are on the IP v3.6 CD.
Licence Checkout
When a user starts using IP, a 'Base' licence will be checked out from the main licence. For
each speciality module that the user runs, a licence will be checked out. The users who connect
to the licence can only check out the number of module licences that are available. An error
message will be displayed once the user-limit for a particular module is reached.
Every few minutes the licence file is checked to see if it is still available and valid. If there is a
break in the connection with the licence server then the user will be warned. If the connection is
not restored then after three warnings the program will shut down (the user normally has
between 10-15 minutes before this occurs). It is good practice to save all data after the first
warning and then investigate the cause of the connection break.
On the rare occasion that IP crashes, or if the program is terminated externally, then the
licences that were being used will be re-instated for use by other people. However, there
may be a delay of up to 6 minutes before the licence becomes available again. For a single
user, non-server based licence it is possible to reinstate the licence before the six minutes
elapses by deleting the file IPUser.dat found within the same folder as the main licence file.
However, DO NOT delete this file in a multi-user system or the other users may be closed out of
IP unexpectedly with all the accompanying negative issues. Also be very careful that the main
licence file, IPSec.dat, is not deleted by mistake.
1839
Senergy
Use Logging
Each time a user starts up or exits IP these events are logged to a text file 'IP_User_Log.txt'.
This file is stored where the protection system is installed and the same file will be used by all
network users. This allows system administrators to monitor the use of the program. An example
of part of one of these files is given below.
User
User
User
User
User
Logon
Logoff
Logon
Logoff
Logon
:
:
:
:
:
Frank
Frank
Frank
Frank
Frank
:
:
:
:
:
On
On
On
On
On
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
:
:
:
:
:
pglpc65(11.11.11.2) : 15/10/02 18:22:52

pglpc65(11.11.11.2) : 15/10/02 18:22:58
pglpc65 (11.11.11.2) : 15/10/02 18:41:07
pglpc65 (11.11.11.2) : 15/10/02 18:41:11
pglpc65 (11.11.11.2) : 17/10/02 16:06:27
Multi-user network licences allow the movement of single licences to a local PC for work off site
(see 'Uninstall or Transfer Protection'). This movement is logged to a file 'IP_offsite_Log.txt'.
This file is also stored where the network protection system is installed and all users will use the
same file. An example of part of one of these files is given below.
Protection moved to local PC : pglpc65 (135.135.135.165) : by user : frank : 23/10/02
12:16:23
Protection returned from local PC : pglpc65 (135.135.135.165) : by user : frank :
23/10/02 12:16:56
Related Topics
Install and Activate Protection
Update Protection Options
Uninstall or Transfer Protection
View Protection Option
15.11.1 Install and Activate Protection

The easiest way to Install and Activate Protection for IP is to select the Automatic Installation via
Internet option in the Install and Activate Protection Dialog. The user, however, must have direct
access to the Internet from the PC. If this is not possible then the 'Manual installation' option
needs to be run.
Tools
Senergy
1840
For Internet installation the user should :

1. From the Tools Menu, Select Program Protection, then Install and Activate Protection to
display the Install and Activate Protection dialog.
2. Select Automatic Installation via Internet (Must have Customer Number) and Click OK to
Automatically Install the IP license via the Internet.
3. Type the Customer ID and Select the directory into which the licence file is to be saved, the
'Protection Directory', and click 'Ok'.
4. Click OK to Complete the Automatic Installation via the Internet.
Note: IP will install the protection system and then dial out onto the Internet to obtain the
activation code. This can take a little time if the Internet connection is slow. The activated
license file IPSec.dat file will be generated and should not be deleted or moved from original
location.
Note: IP checks for a valid ethernet adaptor. If an adaptor is not found at the default IP
address, the user can manually enter the valid IP number. This problem will only occur on
network servers which have multiple network adaptors. The IP address that is needed is
1841
Senergy
that of the PC on which the licence file will be installed (i.e. the PC which has the '
Protection Directory').
5. The following Confirmation Dialog will confirm that the IP has now been activated on the
selected Drive. Click OK to Display the Protection System Installed Successfully
Information Dialog.
6. The following Information Dialog will be displayed once the Protection System has been
installed successfully. Click OK to Complete the Activation.
7. IP v3.6 will now prompt you to select an IP database and to set the default units before
proceeding as normal.
'Manual Installation'
If direct access to the Internet is not possible from the PC then a 'Manual Installation' can be
performed. The process is as follows:
1. From the Tools Menu, Select Program Protection, then Manual Installation to display the
Install and Activate Protection dialog.
2. Select Manual Installation to display the following Information dialog.
Tools
Senergy
1842
Note: The IPSec.dat file is located in C:\Documents and

Settings\username\Local\IntPetro36.
3. The licence file can then be sent by email the Senergy IP Support Team via email at
IPsupport@Senergyworld.com for activation.
The activated file is returned to the user by the Senergy IP Support Team. The user then
overwrites the original file with this activated IPSec.dat file.
'Connect to a Working Network Protection System'

This allows the user to connect the program to a previously-installed network licence.
1. From the Tools Menu, Select Program Protection, then Manual Installation to display the
Install and Activate Protection dialog.
2. Select Connect to a Working Protection System (Network or Local) to display the Connect
to a Network Protection DialoG
1843
Senergy
3. Select the Type of Connection Required.

The 'Type' is used to set the type of network licence being used.
If the user is connecting directly to the licence file, select the 'File Based' option.
If a licence server program is being used, select either 'Host Name' or 'IP Address'.
For the 'Host Name' option - enter the name of the PC that the IP licence server program is
running on, in the 'Server Name' box.
If the 'IP Address' option is 'checked' then the IP address of the PC that the IP licence
server program is running on should be entered.
4. Either Select the directory that contains the licence file.
5. Or Type the Server Name if connecting to a licence server.
6. Click OK to Activate the Connection.
Related Topics
View Protection Options
15.11.2 Update Protection Options

The 'Update Protection Options' menu item allows the user to change the licence parameters.
This option is used to change the expiry date for the licence or to change the number of currentlyallowed specialist interpretation modules. NOTE: this option will be shaded most of the time as
the licence won't require updating very often.
The 'Update automatically from Internet website' option is the only one available from the
menu system. The user must have direct access to the internet to use this option. Otherwise, to
update your licence you will need to obtain a new licence file from the Senergy IP Support Team
via email at IPsupport@Senergyworld.com. They will request a copy of the current licence file.
Tools
Senergy
1844
1. Update Automatically from Internet Website

The 'Customer ID' should already be entered. Click 'Ok' to update the licence file.
2. Manual Update
Licences can be updated manually by obtaining a new licence file from the Senergy IP Support
Team via email at IPsupport@Senergyworld.com.
Related Topics
15.11.3 Uninstall or Transfer Protection

The options available under this menu depend on the type of protection system installed. In the
case illustrated above the user is connected to a licence which is installed on the users hard
drive. The main reason for uninstalling a licence is to 'check-in' the licence on one computer so
that another user can then 'check-out' the same licence onto another computer.
Uninstall to Internet Website

1. From the Tools Menu, Select Program Protection the Uninstall or Transfer Protection to
Display the Uninstall / Transfer Protection Dialog.
1845
Senergy
2. Select Uninstall to Internet Website to display the Uninstall to Internet Website Dialog.
This will uninstall the protection system to the Internet website. Once the protection is
uninstalled it becomes available to reinstall on another PC. This is an easy way of moving
the protection system from one PC to another PC.
3. Type the Customer ID then Click OK to Uninstall the Protection System to the Internet
Website.
4. The following Confirm Dialog will Confirm that the Protection System has been Uninstalled.
Remove Protection
To remove the current protection system click 'OK'. The licence file (IPSec.dat) will be deleted.
Tools
Senergy
1846
Move Network User Licence to Local PC

This allows a user to temporarily transfer one of a set of Network licences to a local PC. This can
be useful if the user wants to work temporarily off the network (for example, away from the
office). This only works where there are at least two available network licences on the server.
The user selects the directory on the local PC where the protection system is to be installed.
This is normally the IP program directory - C:\Program Files\IntPetro35. The user 'checks
out' (tick) the IP specialist modules from the list of available modules. An IP 'Base' module is
automatically checked out during this process.
The user can now specify how long the licence is to be 'checked out' for. The minimum time is
1847
Senergy
'0' - (zero) days, up to a maximum of 30 days. '0' days means that the licence will be checked
out and activated up until midnight (24.00 hours) of the present day. '2' days means that the
licence will de-activate at 24.00 hours, 2 days from the present day. When the local offsite
licence expires, IP is deactivated on the PC. The available IP modules will automatically refresh
to their original number on the Office licence Server at the same time.
Another example: if someone is working offline, away from the office and does not have an IP
licence loaded locally, they can:
Create a licence file manually, See Manual Installation. The newly-created licence file,
IPSec.DAT, is non-active.
E-mail this file from the remote site to the office / Systems Administrator.
The Systems Administrator uses the 'Move Network user licence to local PC' option to
browse to the e-mailed licence file, 'checks out' the required licence features from the
Server licence and 'checks' the 'Activate a remotely created licence' option.
Click 'OK' to remove one licence from the server system and 'activate' the 'local' licence file.
E-mail the activated local licence file to the remote site. The remote user can now replace
their original licence file IPSec.DAT with the e-mailed, activated licence file and run IP.
Return Local licence back to Network
To return the licence, the user must first reconnect to the network server system and then start
the program.
Tools
Senergy
1848
The user enters the directory of the original network protection system and then clicks 'OK'. The
directory name will normally be already filled in. The protection system will be uninstalled from the
local PC and reinstalled onto the network licence.
Related Topics
15.11.4 View Protection Options

The 'View Protection Options' window provides the user with information about the currentlyinstalled protection system and shows which program functions are active. This is an
'information only' window. licence and Feature information is arranged on the following 'tabs'.
'Program Options' Tab

The 'Program Options' tab shows the available IP modules and their expiry dates. The licence '
numbers' show how many concurrent users there can be for each module.
The 'Total' column displays the number of available licences for each IP 'Feature'. The 'In Use'
column lists the number of licences being used at the time the 'View Protection Options' option
is opened, including those being used by the current application. This list does not include any '
Off Site' licences. The 'Off Site' column lists the number of licences that have been temporarily
1849
Senergy
transferred off site to a local PC.
'Checked Out' Tab

The 'Checked Out' tab, illustrated below, shows which modules are currently 'checked out' to
the user. The modules are only 'checked out' when they are being used. A user can only 'check
in' licences by exiting from the IP program.
Tools
Senergy
1850
'Current Users' Tab

The 'Current Users' tab displays the users who are currently logged into the licence. This can
be useful if a licence is not available and the user needs to find out who is using the current
licences. The user name and the PC name are displayed.
1851
Related Topics
Senergy
Tools
Senergy
1852
15.12 Options
The 'Tools' menu
'Options' entry launches the 'IP Configuration' module.
The 'IP Configuration' interface is designed around a 'Tree View' window. The 'Tree' contents
can be expanded / viewed in the left-hand panel of the display. Clicking on a Title within the 'Tree
View' will populate the right-hand panel of the window with the linked 'Attribute' table or '
Connection' dialog.
At the base of the 'IP Configuration' window the 'Working folder' directory structure is listed.
Double clicking on this line opens the 'Working folder'. All the files that are accessed via the 'IP
Configuration' window are stored in this 'Working folder'.
The Current IP Configuration options are:
External Database Options - manage IP connections to external databases.
Well Options - display well position as Latitude / Longitude or UTM coordinates.
Well Attributes - create / edit / delete IP well 'cultural' attributes.
Log Attributes - create / edit / delete IP well 'logging' attributes.
Well Attribute Mappings - link IP Well Attributes to File Loader 'cultural' parameters.
Section 15.12 Tools : Options
1853
Senergy
Log Attribute Mappings - link IP Log attributes to File loader 'logging' parameters.
File Loader - create / edit / delete external file (LAS / LIS / DLIS) 'cultural' and 'logging'
parameters.
Well Folder Structure - setup the directory structure for an IP database.
LAS 3 Configuration Miscellaneous Options - control error tracking messages in IP, set the Default Plots location,
enable Tabbed Workareas and fading Parameter windows, adjust Irregular Set depth
tolerance.
Custom Toolbars and Menus - arrange toolbar icons and IP menus.
Well Security - configure security options on 'in-memory' database wells.
Curve Aliasing - produce database specific curve ordering tables.
Corporate Search Paths - allows user greater control of IP file locations.
Related Topics
External Database Options
Well Options
File Loader
Well Folder Structure
LAS 3 Configuration
Internet Connection
Custom Toolbars and Menus
Well Security
Curve Aliasing
Corporate Search Folders
15.12.1 External Database Options

Clicking on the 'External Database Options' label launches a simple 'tick-box' dialog where the
user can switch 'on'/'off' the links to a number of external databases. If an option is 'checked'
then, under the 'Input / Output' menu, the corresponding 'External Database' connection icon
will be activated and visible in the menu, as illustrated below.
Tools
Senergy
1854
Some External Database links have their own configuration screens. These are listed in the Tree
view panel by expanding the 'External Database Options' branch. Set-up screens for the
connections to GEOLOG , OpenWorks , ODM
and PETCOM
are launched by clicking on
the appropriate 'Connection' label in the tree view.

The 'GEOLOG Connection' configuration screen is illustrated below. There are 3 possible
connection protocols (HTTP, SSH and Windows). One can select the preferred protocol from
the 'Use Protocol' drop-down list at the top of the screen. The connection details, including
Usernames and Passwords are shown for each connection protocol. Details of the external
database connection protocols and configuration of these links is provided under the '
Connecting to External Databases' chapter.
1855
Senergy
Related Topics
Well Options
File Loader
LAS 3 Configuration
Internet Connection
Well Security
Curve Aliasing
15.12.2 Well Options

Clicking on the 'Well Options' label allows the user to select the default 'well location display'
mode (UTM Coordinates or Latitude / Longitude) for wells in the current database. If you change
Tools
Senergy
1856
the 'Display position as' setting and save the configuration, when you next open the 'Manage
Well Header Info' module, on the 'Position' tab, the well co-ordinates, if they have been loaded
into IP, will be in your selected format.
Expanding the 'Well Options' 'tree' enables the user to view 'Well Attributes', 'Log Attributes',
'Well Attributes Mappings' and
'Log Attributes Mappings'.
'Well Attributes' and 'Log Attributes' are types of Dynamic Attributes and they provide the
user with the functionality to increase the number and types of data that can be loaded and
stored for a well in an IP database. The attributes provide the means to 'map' the diverse log
parameter and log header mnemonics found in LAS, LIS and DLIS files, to a consistent location
within an IP database.
The 'Reference' tables provide the place to store parameters within IP, 'File Loader' mnemonics
lists are used / extended to include new data types, then the mnemonics are 'mapped' to a single
IP Attribute. The principle is illustrated below:
1857
Senergy
Well Attributes
'Well Attributes' are 'cultural' well parameters such as 'Country', 'Location', 'Company', 'Field',
that can either be loaded from external data files or can be user-defined within IP to store some
data associated with a well. The 'Well Attributes' table is the 'reference' list of cultural
attributes / parameters for the IP program. You can use the IP well attributes list in its current
state or you can extend the list by adding new attribute names which will be created / activated in
the 'Manage Well Header Info.' module. The user can create new well attributes with textual '
Display Alias' descriptions, for example 'Drilling Rig Name', 'Drilling Company', 'Block Number'
and 'Quadrant Number'. These well attributes appear in IP as labelled text entry boxes that the
user can fill in for each in-memory well. The data entered for these attributes is stored into the IP
database. The user could also set up the attribute 'Display Alias' labels in a language other than
English.
Tools
Senergy
1858
Clicking on the 'Well Attributes' branch, as illustrated above, launches a 'grid' display in the right
hand side of the window. The grid contains four columns.
The left-hand 'Name' column contains an 'internal' IP Attribute 'Name'.
The second column contains a list of 'Display Alias' names. These 'Display Alias' names
are user-editable text entries that are used as labels for the Well 'cultural' attributes in the '
Manage Well Header Info.' module, on the 'General' tab, when the user opens that
module.
The 'LAS Output' column holds the well attribute mnemonics that will be exported with any
LAS file output from IP, if the attribute 'value' exists in the exported IP well.
The 'LIS Output' column holds the well attribute mnemonics that will be exported with any
LIS file output from IP, if the attribute 'value' exists in the exported IP well.
There are two kinds of 'Well Attributes' in IP. These are:
User-editable attributes - the user can add new attributes or delete existing attributes or
edit 'Alias' names for these attributes.
Fixed attributes - All the attributes prefixed with a double asterisk (**), as illustrated below,
are considered 'Fixed' attributes and correspond with those attributes that have, to date,
been stored in older versions of IP. The 'fixed' attributes are there to ensure compatibility
1859
Senergy
when updating older IP databases to IP V3.3 and later versions. 'Fixed' attributes can not be
deleted from the list, although their associated 'Alias' names can be edited.
The list of 'Well Attributes' can be extended using the 'Add' button. One can insert additional
entries to the list. For example, you might want to add the new attributes 'Interpretation By:'
and 'Interpretation Date:' to be able to record who has performed the interpretations on the
current database wells.
Click the 'Add' button at the bottom of the screen and type in a new 'Attribute' name into the
window that is launched.
Click the 'OK' button to create the new entry. The 'Name' list will be sorted alphabetically
with the newly-created attribute placed accordingly.
Scroll down the page to the new 'Name' entry in the list and type in an 'Alias' in the blank
'Alias' text box, as shown below:
The new 'Well Attribute' will be visible in the 'Manage Well Header Info.' module on the '
General' Tab, as illustrated below. New entries are appended to the bottom of the list.
When the user adds data entries into these new fields that information will subsequently be
saved to the binary IPDBWellXXXXX.dat file when IP is closed or the well is saved to the
database.
Tools
Senergy
1860
Any changes to the 'Well Attributes' can be exported to a file and distributed to other users
using the 'Export' button. By clicking the 'Export' button the user is prompted to save the
configuration to a file with the extension .configUpdate in the 'Working Folder'. This file can
then be copied into a different users 'Working Folder'. When the new user launches IP any *.
configUpdate files are read and merged into the main configuration file (Intpetro.CONFIG
which contains all configuration settings available under the 'Options' window) before it in turn is
used to configure IP.
Log Attributes
'Log Attributes' are those logging parameters, for example 'Mud Density', 'Mud Filtrate
Resistivity' and 'Bottom Hole Temperature' that are loaded into IP from external LAS/ LIS/ DLIS
files. In previous versions of IP the 'Log Attributes' were hard-wired into the program code and
IP would only load those attributes that it 'recognized'. The 'Options' functionality allows the user
to edit and expand the list of recognized attributes in order to capture new logging parameters.
The 'Log Attributes' table is the 'reference' list of logging attributes/parameters for the IP
program.
1861
Senergy
The 'Log Attributes' table illustrated in the right-hand panel, above, contains a reference list of
external 'Log Header' parameters that can be saved to the IP well / database. The table
comprises of an 'internal' IP Log Attribute 'Name' in the left-hand column and, in the right-hand
column, a list of 'Display Alias' names. Log Attribute 'Names' prefixed with a double asterisk (
**) are 'fixed' attributes and cannot be deleted from the reference table. These fixed attributes
enable users to upgrade Pre IP Version 3.3 databases and save the logging parameters stored in
them. The 'Display Alias' names are user-editable text entries that the user can modify, if they
wish, to their preferred language or naming convention. New attributes can be added, deleted and
the 'Display Alias' name changed, if required.
The 'Display Alias' list of names dynamically populates the parameter list on the 'Logging' tab'
of the 'Manage Well Header Info.' module. The 'Log Attributes' table provides the reference
list for a 'mapping' system which enables the user to associate different service company log
header mnemonics / parameters to a single internal IP 'Log Attribute' name, so that the
attributes can be recognized by the IP program and saved within the IP database.
The 'Log Attributes' names are listed in alphabetical order in the IP Configuration table, but they
are listed in the 'Manage Well Header Info.' module in the order seen in a typical API log header
hardcopy. New, user-created log attributes that are added to the IP Log Attributes list will appear
Tools
Senergy
1862
at the bottom of the list on the 'Logging' tab.
Well Attribute Mappings

The 'Well Attribute Mappings' table, shown below, allows the user to set up the connections
(mappings) between the IP 'Well Attributes' reference table and external file (LAS / LIS / DLIS)
'cultural' mnemonics held within the 'File Loader' table. The mappings are used to identify
external file header mnemonics at load time and to correctly load / store them into the 'Manage
Well Header Info.' module for the selected IP well.
The 'Well Attribute Mappings' table has three columns 'File Loader Mnemonic', 'Description'
and 'Well Attribute'. The first 2 columns correspond to the 'File Loader' table entries. The '
Well Attribute' column provides a drop-down list of the IP reference 'Well Attributes' that the
user 'maps' to the 'File Loader' attribute.
For example, if there is a well parameter in an external file with a mnemonic of LCNM (Logging
Company Name) which is not currently mapped in IP. Then you need to:
1. Add a new 'File Loader' entry: Open the 'File Loader' dialog. 'Click 'Add' to launch the '
New Attribute Name' dialog. Type in the new mnemonic LCNM, add a description and
click 'Save'.
2. Click on 'Well Attributes'. 'Add'. Type in 'ServiceComp' and in the 'Display Alias' column
add a descriptive name for the attribute. NOTE: this step is only required if the 'Well
1863
Senergy
Attribute' does not already exist.

3. Click on the 'Well Attribute Mappings' label to open that dialog.
4. Click the 'Add' button. This launches an 'Add Mapping' window.
5. Choose the 'File Loader Mnemonic' (LCNM) from the upper drop-down list box.
6. Choose the appropriate IP 'Well Attribute', for example -'ServiceComp' (Service
Company), from the 'Well Attribute' drop-down list in order to map the 'File Loader'
attribute to the IP Well attribute. The attribute may have to be created - see point 2.
7. Click 'OK'.
This ensures that any file that is loaded into IP, if it contains the log parameter LCNM mnemonic
and a value, that IP will load its' value into the 'General' tab of the 'Manage Well Header Info.'
module as the 'Service Company' parameter for that log file.
Log Attribute Mappings

The 'Log Attribute Mappings' table allows the user to set up the connections (mappings)
between the IP 'Log Attributes' reference table and external file (LAS / LIS/ DLIS) log header
mnemonics held within the 'File Loader' table. The mappings are used to identify external log
header mnemonics at load time and to correctly load / store them into the 'Manage Well Header
Info.' module ('Logging' tab) of the selected IP well.
For example, if there is a logging parameter in an external file with a mnemonic of RMTMP
(Temperature of Mud Resistivity Measurement) which is not mapped in IP. Then you need to:
Add a new 'File Loader' entry. Open the 'File Loader' dialog. 'Click 'Add' to launch the '
New Attribute Name' dialog. Type in the new mnemonic RMTMP and click 'OK'.
Scroll down the 'Name' list to the new RMTMP entry and type in its' description into the '
Tools
Senergy
1864
Description' text entry box.

Click the 'Save' button.
Click on the 'Log Attribute Mappings' label to open that dialog.
Click 'Add'. This launches an 'Add Mapping' window.
Choose the 'File Loader Mnemonic' (RMTMP) from the upper drop-down list box.
Choose the appropriate IP 'Log Attribute' -RMTemp (Mud Resistivity Measured
Temperature), from the 'Log Attribute' drop-down list to map the 'File Loader' attribute to
the IP Log attribute.
Click 'OK'.
This ensures that any file that is loaded into IP, if it contains the log parameter RMTMP
mnemonic and a value, that IP will load its' value into the 'Logging' tab of the 'Manage Well
Header Info.' module as the 'Mud Resistivity Temperature' value for that log file.
Related Topics
Well Options
File Loader
LAS 3 Configuration
Internet Connection
Well Security
1865
Senergy
Curve Aliasing
15.12.3 File Loader

The 'File Loader' window contains a list of 'external' mnemonic 'Names' together with a '
Description' in a second column for each mnemonic, as shown in the screen capture, below.
These are LIS Log Header mnemonics which were previously hard-coded into IP. When a LIS
file was loaded into IP, any mnemonic that was identified by the IP program at load time would be
saved into the selected IP well. The extendable 'File Loader' list now allows the user to add new
'external' mnemonics and an associated description for each new 'Name' which can then be
'mapped' to an IP 'Well Attribute' or 'Log Attribute'.
To add a new 'File Loader' entry:

Click the 'Add' button. This launches the 'New Attribute name' window.
Type in a new attribute name. Attribute names must be unique entries.
Click 'OK' to load the new 'Name' into the table. Scroll down to the new Attribute 'Name'
and type in a description
Tools
Senergy
1866
The IP Configuration File (Intpetro.config)

The Intpetro.config file (found in the IP program install directory - IntPetro35) contains all the
'default' settings and user-defined definitions and descriptions for a particular IP installation.
These settings include :
'External Database Options'
'Well Attributes'
'Log Attributes'
'Well Attribute Mapping'
'Log Attribute Mapping'
'File Loader'
'Miscellaneous'
This single HTML text file is organized into separate sections for each of these configuration
'elements'. If the user makes any changes in the 'Options' module user-interface, for example
to add, define and 'map' a new Log Attribute and then 'clicks' the 'Save' button, the change will be
stored directly into the Intpetro.config file. This means that the next time IP is launched, the
updated configuration file will be loaded and the new attribute will be available to load data into.
Also, if the user sets up connections to external databases through the 'Options' interface, these
settings will be saved to the Intpetro. config file, so that, on launching IP at a later date, the
connection settings will still be available.
Saving changes to a local Intpetro.config file
1867
Senergy
To save any changes made in the 'Options' interface directly to the configuration file, click the '
Save' button at the bottom of the 'IP Configuration' screen, after you have made your changes
to the tables.
Saving changes to individual Attribute Tables

Each 'Attribute' table in the 'Options' interface can be saved separately to an external .
configUpdate file. By default these files are saved into the IP installation directory. The Attribute
tables and their associated configuration files are listed below:
'Well Attributes' Table
WellAttributes.configUpdate
'Log Attributes' Table
LogAttributes.configUpdate
'Well Attribute Mapping' Table
Well AttributeMapping.configUpdate
'Log Attribute Mapping' Table
LogAttributeMapping.configUpdate
'File Loader' Table
FileLoaderAttributes.configUpdate
Why might you want to do this ?

For example, saving changes so that 'corporate' settings for a particular Attribute table can be
distributed throughout an organization or between multiple IP users. In a non-English speaking
company for instance, with multiple IP users, a corporate 'Log Attribute' naming convention
could be set up by one user. By saving the 'Log Attribute' table to an external file, using the '
Export' button, these changes could be written to a text file and e-mailed to all other IP users.
The other users could paste the file into their own IP installation directory and, the next time that
IP is launched, the text file is merged with the existing IntPetro.config file and updates
everyone's IP configuration.
Related Topics
Well Options
File Loader
LAS 3 Configuration
Internet Connection
Well Security
Curve Aliasing
Tools
Senergy
1868
15.12.4 Well Folder Structure

This enables the user to change the folder structure for any new wells created in an IP database.
The well folder structure is only created when a new well is saved to the database.
The user has to 'click' 'Save' on the 'IP Configuration' module for the 'Well Folder Structure'
changes to be applied. However, as noted above, the 'Well Folder Structure' will not appear in
the database browser until the newly created well is saved, using the 'File'
'Save All Wells to
Database'.
If the user wishes to add more folders to the 'Well Folder Structure' or to apply the 'Well Folder
Structure' to wells already saved in the database then 'clicking' on the 'Apply To...' button opens
the 'Select Database Wells' module. The user can then scroll down the well list and select the
wells to which to apply this new 'Well Folder Structure' to.
1869
Senergy
If the user removes folders from the 'Well Folder Structure' then it is only newly created Wells
that will have the reduced 'Well Folder Structure'. The reduced 'Well Folder Structure' will not
be applied to 'old' saved Wells within the database. This is to prevent users from inadvertently
deleting data that may reside in the removed folders. If the user really wants to remove folders
from old, saved Wells then the user will have to do it manually via Windows Explorer TM.
Related Topics
Well Options
File Loader
LAS 3 Configuration
Internet Connection
Tools
Senergy
Well Security
Curve Aliasing
15.12.5 LAS 3 Configuration
Related Topics
Well Options
File Loader
LAS 3 Configuration
Internet Connection
Well Security
1870
1871
Senergy
Curve Aliasing
15.12.6 Miscellaneous Options

The 'Miscellaneous Options' screen allows the user to set up eleven configuration options.
These are:
'Trace Level' - sets the level of IP process reporting that is sent to the IP Message Board.
'Warning on Bad Load of Parameter Sets' When checked this feature displays a Dialog
that notify's the user if a Parameter Set does not load properly or is not found and lists the
Parameter Sets that did not load properly.
'Show Database Browser' - 'ticking' the check-box means that whenever you open IP, the
program will always launch with the IP Database Browser display on-screen.
'Default Plots Location' - this parameter, previously stored in the ProgDefs.OPT file, sets
up where IP looks for the 'default' log plot format files . The default setting is to the
IntPetro35 installation directory, 'Default Plots' sub-directory, which is shipped with the
application. If you have another, network location for multiple users to access a common '
Default Plots' folder then this location should be set here.
Tools
Senergy
1872
'Use Tabbed Work areas' - 'check' if user wants multi-Work areas or 'uncheck' for just one
Work area. See 'User Interface and Data Entry' for more details on multi-Work areas.
'Hide close button on Work areas' - 'check' if user wants to hide the close button on any
Work area tab. This will prevent the user from inadvertently closing down Work areas.
'Enable fading Parameter windows' - if this is 'checked' then any Parameter window (for
example Clay Volume Parameters) will 'fade' - i.e. become semi-transparent if the
Parameter window is opened over an already opened window. This allows the user to see
through the stay-on-top Parameter window to the underlying window. Moving the mouse
cursor back over the faded Parameter window restores the Parameter window opacity.
'Show Histogram Statistics Table' - If this is 'checked' then the statistics table will be
shown along with the curve histogram in the Histogram module. If 'Show Histogram
Statistics Table' is 'un-checked' then the statistics table won't be shown with the curve
Histogram. However, the user can select to show the statistics table from the 'Type' menu
within the Histogram module by using the 'Show Statistics Table'.
'Irregular Set depth tolerance' - when loading data into an irregular step curve Set the
program has to decide whether the depth of the data being loaded corresponds to depth
already in the Set or whether a new depth in the Set has been created. The 'Irregular Set
depth tolerance' parameter is the allowable difference between the two depths in order to
count the depths as the same.
For example :
Current irregular Set depths:
8000.2
8010.6
8020.3
8040.1
Depths of data to be loaded:
8000.3
8020.6
8040.3
Using the default 'Irregular Set depth tolerance' of 0.2 ft then the irregular Set after
loading the data will be:
8000.2
8010.6
8020.3
8020.6
8040.1
The 8000.3 data will be loaded at 8000.2 and the 8040.3 data will be loaded at 8040.1. A
new 8020.6 depth will have to be created.
1873
Senergy
'CSV Delimiter' - this allows the user to select either 'Comma' or 'Semicolon' for delimiting
their output CSV files. This is especially useful for users of German language Excel.
'Enable Background' - if the 'sunburst' background which appears on Histograms and
Crossplots in IP v3.5 is not to the users taste then 'unchecking' this box will revert the
Crossplot and Histogram backgrounds to their standard Windows colour.
'Work area Background' - if the user wishes to replace the background colour of the Work
area from the Windows default then they have the option of 'checking' the 'Solid Colour'
option and changing the colour to whatever they wish.
Related Topics
Well Options
File Loader
LAS 3 Configuration
Internet Connection
Well Security
Curve Aliasing
Tools
Senergy
15.12.7 Internet Connection
Related Topics
Well Options
File Loader
LAS 3 Configuration
Internet Connection
Well Security
Curve Aliasing
1874
1875
Senergy
15.12.8 Custom Toolbars and Menus

This has the same functionality as accessing the Toolbars by using the 'View'
'Toolbars'
'
Your Toolbars and Menus'. Here it is possible to configure three user defined toolbars (User
Defined 1, User Defined 2 and User Defined 3) and user defined menus from the 'Toolbar' and '
Main Menu' tabs respectively.
Customisation of a menu is achieved in a similar fashion in the 'Menus' tab, with the user setting
the name of the menu and then selecting and ordering the menu items.
Tools
Senergy
1876
The Custom Menu will appear next to the IP standard menu items at the top of the IP window
once 'Save' has been 'clicked'. To activate the User Defined toolbars 'click' 'View'
and 'tick' on the 'User Defined x'
'Toolbars'
1877
Senergy
To delete a User Defined toolbar select the toolbar in the 'Destination Menu' on the 'Main Menu'
tab within 'Options'
'IP Configuration'
'Custom Toolbars and Menus' and then just
move all of the toolbar symbols out of the list using the left arrow button. This has the effect of
deleting the User Defined toolbar.
Related Topics
Well Options
File Loader
LAS 3 Configuration
Internet Connection
Well Security
Tools
Senergy
1878
Curve Aliasing
15.12.9 Database and Well Security

The purpose of this module is to allow the user to set access limits to wells in a shared IP
database. This could be to stop un-authorised users from viewing and modifying IP wells. Also to
control access to 'tight' (i.e. wells that have very limited authorised access) wells to one or two
specified users. Some wells may need 'Read' access by many users but only 'Write' access by
one user.
To access the database security menu go to 'Tools'
'Options'
'Well Security'
Each well in a database can have its own security settings. These are stored in an encrypted
format within the well's data file.
The security settings stored within each well include:
An optional password. If this is set then it must be re-entered on subsequent attempts to
change the wells' security settings.
A list of usernames and their access rights (none, read-only or full). The special user
1879
Senergy
called 'All Other Users' is used to define the access rights for all users that are not
specifically listed.
The last time the security was set and the username of who set the security.
In addition, each database can have a 'Project Default' security setting, which is used for newly
created wells, or wells which do not have their own security settings.
'Clicking' on the 'Well Security' option the following screen appears:
Well Selection
Within this area it is possible to select wells and then to view the security which has been applied
to the wells. NOTE: Wells have to be saved to database before they will appear in the database
lists - see 'Save All Wells to Database' for more information on saving wells.
These are the different well selection options available:
'From List' - If this is selected then the 'Select Wells' button becomes 'active'. 'Clicking'
the 'Select Wells' button brings up a screen very similar to the database loading screen
where it is possible to select wells on an individual basis.
Tools
Senergy
1880
Once the wells have been selected and 'OK' has been 'clicked' then in the 'Well Selection' area
the number of wells selected updates.
'Current Well' - Whatever is the current 'active' well is selected. If there is no current well
then this option will not be available.
'All Wells in memory' - This will apply security to the loaded wells only. If there are no
loaded wells then this option will not be available.
'All Wells in database' - This is the default option and selects all the wells in database
whether they are loaded or not.
The number of wells that security will be applied to is always shown in the top right of the module.
If no wells are selected then the 'View Security for Selected Wells' and 'Apply Security'
buttons will be 'greyed' out.
After the wells have been selected it is possible to view the security settings for the wells using
the 'View Security for Selected Wells' button.
1881
Senergy
Each well is listed in the 'Wells' pane and shows whether or not it has a password set and when
the security was last updated and by whom. Selecting a well shows the list of usernames and
their access rights in the 'Users' pane.
Password
A password can be set by the user to stop other users from changing the security settings on
any of the wells within an IP database.
'Click' on the 'Set New Password' and type in a 'New Password' in the text box. To activate the
password 'click' on the 'Apply Security' button.
Once this password has been set then it must be entered into the 'Password' text box before
any further changes can be applied to the security settings on the wells within the IP database or
if the user wants to change the current password.
The password can be removed from a well or wells by ticking 'Set New Password' but leaving
the 'New Password' box empty.
If the password is forgotten then clicking the 'Forgotten the password?' text brings up a
dialogue box like this:
Tools
Senergy
1882
Users can use the 'Copy to Clipboard' button and paste the 'Password Override Request
Key' into an email and send it to the Senergy IP Support Team via email at
IPsupport@Senergyworld.com.
Users
This area is used to determine which IP database users can have access to the IP database
selected wells. A user can be given 'Read' or 'Read' and 'Write' privileges. If no boxes are
'checked' then the user has no access rights.
When adding a user the 'Domain' defaults to the users current domain, but this can be changed
if required. Once added, a user's access rights can be changed by 'ticking' or 'un-ticking' their '
Read' or 'Write' boxes. The 'All Other Users' user cannot be removed. The same username
cannot be entered more than once.
The list of user names can be saved to a text file using the 'Save' button. This could then be
reloaded later using the 'Load' button instead of having to type them all in again.
To illustrate the security functionality, imagine the scenario where there are 4 users; Tim, Andy,
Martin and Derek. There are 10 wells in the IP database. All users can have 'Read' / 'Write'
access to Well # 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10. Well #3 is a 'tight' well and only Derek can access this.
This is how the security would be set up:
Select wells 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9,10 in 'Well Selection'
In 'Users' 'Add' Andy, Derek, Martin and Tim 'Usernames'.
1883
Senergy
Give all the users 'Read' / 'Write' access

Type in the password if one has been set.
'Click' 'Apply Security'
In 'Well Selection' select well #3
In 'Users' just leave Derek with 'Read' / 'Write' access.
'Click' 'Apply Security'.
'Click' on 'View Security for Selected Wells' and 'click' on the wells. In the 'Users' box
there is a list of 'Usernames' and their 'Access' rights. For well #3 it can be seen that
only Derek has full access rights and for the rest of the wells all users have full access
rights.
Tools
Senergy
1884
Project Defaults
If 'Project Defaults' are present then they will be loaded and displayed when this 'Well Security'
screen is first displayed.
The user can save the current setting as the 'Project Defaults' by 'ticking' the 'Save as Project
Defaults for new wells' before applying the security. This will create (or update) the security
settings file. If the current 'Project Defaults' have a password set then they will only be updated if
the supplied password matches.
'Project Defaults' can be reloaded at any time by clicking the 'Reload Project Defaults' button.
Applying Security
'Click' the 'Apply Security' button to apply the specified security to the selected wells. A
progress bar will be displayed while the security is applied, followed by the 'Well Security
Application Results' form. This includes a row for each well and whether or not the application
worked, and if not, it will explain why not (such as password mismatch). Failures are shown in
red. There is a tick box 'Only show failures'.
1885
Senergy
Implications of Security
When using IP the current user's access rights will manifest themselves in the following ways:
No Access
'Select Database Wells to Load' screen:
Well is shown in red with no details other than the name of the well. Well cannot be loaded
or deleted.
'Database Browser' screen:

By default 'No Access' wells are not shown in the 'Database Browser'. To show them,
Tools
Senergy
1886
right-click and select 'Show/Hide' and tick

'Show Wells I Can't Access'. Once the well is visible it is shown with a no-entry icon and
no further details.
Read-only Access
'Select Database Wells to Load' screen:
Well(s) is shown in grey and loading the well will always create a copy of the well (shown in
the 'Database Browser' with a different
icon and 'Copy of' in front of the well name).
'Database Browser' screen:

Well is shown with a read-only icon and loading it will always create a copy.
1887
Full access
IP operates as normal.
Related Topics
Well Options
File Loader
LAS 3 Configuration
Internet Connection
Well Security
Curve Aliasing
Senergy
Tools
Senergy
1888
15.12.10Curve Aliasing
By 'clicking' on the 'Click to Open in Own window' this will open the 'Curve Aliasing' module
in its own window which may be more convenient than having it open from the 'Options' module.
This module can also be accessed from 'Tools'
'Edit Curve Aliasing'.
Related Topics
Well Options
File Loader
LAS 3 Configuration
Internet Connection
Well Security
Curve Aliasing
1889
Senergy
15.12.11Corporate Search Folders

'Corporate Search folders' (CSF) are designed to allow for a folder(s) (normally a networked
shared folder) to be used as a common location allowing multiple users access to IP related
resources. Use of this feature is ideal when many users require shared access to such files as
Company Specific Log Plot Formats, User defined Overlay lines or User Programs, etc .
The following files are serviced by the 'Corporate Search folders':
Log Plot format files.
Crossplot and Histogram saved format files.
User Programs.
Crossplot Overlay line files.
All the default configuration files available from 'Tools'
'Defaults'.
When using Corporate folders the 'Load Format' pop-up menus (Crossplots/Histograms/User
Programs) mimic the folder structure as defined in 'Tools'
'Options'
'Corporate Search
folders'. If the 'Corporate Folders' is 'Disabled' then IP uses the default folder settings for
locating plot, crossplot and histogram formats; these are normally on the users hard drive.
However, if the 'Corporate Folders' is 'Enabled' then the user can specify the location of their
format files and map new folders to network drives as well as their hard drives.
[Note: the order in which the system searches through and displays the Corporate Folders is
from the top of the list down]
Tools
Senergy
1890
By 'clicking' on each of the 'Corporate search folders' their paths can be viewed in the 'Path'
box. New paths can be created by using the browse button
and locating the required folder,
be it on the users hard drive or network drive. The order in which the folders are displayed can be
changed using the 'Order' up/down arrows.
1891
Senergy
If incorrect paths for folders are typed into the fields then the path will be grayed out and show as
being offline. The user can use the browse for folder button to locate the correct path and use the
'Replace' button to update the 'Corporate search folders' list.
The 'Validate Folders' button can be used to quickly check that the path to the folders is valid, if
say, network drives are re-mapped.
Tools
Senergy
1892
If a user moves a folder which has been mapped within the 'Corporate search folders' and
hasn't updated the 'Corporate search folders' then when the user attempts to access formats
within the Log Plots, Crossplot or Histogram modules an error message will appear informing the
user that the path to the folder that has been moved is no longer valid. The user could disable the
'Corporate Folders', re-map the moved folder or or use the 'Delete Invalid Paths' button to
delete the path (NOTE: this only deletes the path within the 'Corporate search folders' and not
the actual folders).
NOTE: for User Programs a user cannot edit or delete programs that exist on a Network folder.
This is a safety feature. Also with User Programs the programs must be stored on a network
drive in a sub-folder called "UserPrograms" in order for IP to detect them.
Sub-folders can be created and as long as they are named xxx.hst (histogram), xxx.xpt
(crossplot) or xxx.plt (log plot) and a .hst, .xpt or a .plt file exist within the relevant sub-folder then
the sub-folder will appear within the relevant module. For example, the user creates a sub-folder
called Test.hst in his I:\IP Databases\IP Formats\Histogram Formats folder. Within this subfolder is a GR.hst file.
If the user now opens up the Histogram module and 'clicks' on the drop-down arrow adjacent to
the 'Load Format' button, the sub-folder 'Test' now exists within the 'My Histogram Formats
Histogram' folder and the GR.hst histogram format file can be selected.
1893
Senergy
Program Default Files

Many aspects of IP are configurable by editing various text files accessed from the 'Tools'
'
Defaults' menu. This feature along with Corporate folders can enable a group of IP users to work
from a common set of configuration files. The configuration files currently catered for under this
mechanism are as follows:
Curve System defaults (default and User defined).
Curve Type defaults (default and User defined).
Curve Alias configuration.
Mineral Solver (default and User defined).
Crossplot Overlay setup file.
Monte Carlo settings.
Unit Conversions.
Tools
Senergy
1894
Neutron Tool Types.

The configurable files (*.opt, *.ovl, *.par, *.neu) could be saved to a network drive folder and then
each user maps a path to this folder in Corporate Search Folders.
Related Topics
Well Options
File Loader
LAS 3 Configuration
Internet Connection
Well Security
Curve Aliasing
Section
16
User Programs
User Programs
Senergy
16
1896
User Programs
The 'User Programs' module allows the user to create their own analysis routines. The routines
can be very simple, one line routines or more sophisticated, long routines which loop through the
data multiple times. The routines are written by the user in either FORTRAN, PASCAL, C++, VB.
NET or C#.NET.
User program compiled code can be loaded and unloaded without exiting IP. A typical workflow
for creating a user program is to setup the parameters, write the code and then compile. Once
compiled without errors, the user will start testing. The testing and modifications of the code
should be all possible without exiting IP.
The FORTRAN and C++ compiler and Linker are from the Free Software Foundation (GNU) and
can be downloaded from the internet free of charge. http://gcc.gnu.org .
The IP CD contains a Windows Installer for the GNU compiler version 2.95 which can be run by
'clicking' on the 'Install GCC Compiler' button. This installer will install all necessary files and
setup all appropriate Environmental Variables.
Alternatively, if a manual install is preferred, there is a zipped file containing version 2.95 GNU
compiler in the GNU FORTRAN and C folder on the IP CD. Once this folder has been unzipped
and the files installed on the users C: drive then the users Environmental Variables path has to
be modified so that IP can locate the compiler.
To modify the users environmental variables go to Control Panel
System
Advanced
Environmental Variables, scroll down and locate 'Path' within the 'System variables' window.
Click on 'Edit' and then add the following ;C:\gcc-2.95.2\bin in front of the ;C\Program Files.
NOTE: on some users computers it maybe necessary to remove the '-' and '.' from the gcc2.95.2 directory so that it reads as gcc2952 and use this in the Path.
NOTE: it appears the GNU compiler does not like single Letter code names like 'A', 'B', 'C'.
Output curve names need to be renamed to at least a 2 character mnemonic e.g. 'AA', 'BB',
'CC'.
Section 16.
User Programs :
1897
Senergy
The PASCAL compiler needed is Borland's DELPHI version 4 or higher (older versions of
DELPHI may also work).
NOTE:
1. any existing user programs will need to be updated to take account of the new 'Trend curve'
functionality. Old programs prior to 3.1, coded in Pascal, will fail to run and will need to be
updated. Old Fortran programs should work, but it is in the users interest to update code as
described in the main 'Help' document.
2. If the User re-writes a user program and adds / re-orders parameters, the old program
'Zone Set' is no longer valid and the user should delete and recreate the Zone Set.
Related Topics
User Programs
User Program Options
User Program Code
FORTRAN Guide
Example User Programs
Section 16.
User Programs :
User Programs
Senergy
16.1
1898
The 'User Program' - 'Options' window allows the user to select the defaults for the 'Compiler
', 'Editor' (the program used to edit the program code) and the 'User Program Directory' into
which the programs are stored. It also allows the user to select a program for editing User
Program icons in the 'Icon Editor'.
On network systems, it is possible for users to share user programs by having the same 'User
Program Directory' set for each user. NOTE: a user cannot edit or delete user programs that
exist on a Network folder, they can only be run. This is a safety feature. Also with User Programs
the programs must be stored on a network drive in a sub-folder called "UserPrograms" in order
for IP to detect them. See 'Corporate Search Folders' for more information on sharing IP files.
Compiler
A VB.Net and a C#.Net compiler have been added to the User Programs for v3.5 and beyond.
Icon Editor
The 'Icon Editor' is only accessed from the 'Edit Program' menu item. Select a programme to
edit and the 'User Programming' module opens. 'Click' on the 'Edit Icon' button and the current
icon (UPImage.bmp) is opened in whatever editor the user had selected in the 'Icon Editor' box
in the 'User Program Options' window.
Section 16.1 User Programs : User Program Options
1899
Senergy
In this case the 'Icon Editor' is mspaint.exe so the UPImage.bmp is available for editing in
Microsoft PaintTM.
User Programs
Senergy
1900
After changes have been made to the icon, the icon file must be saved as UPImage.bmp. This
will enable the IP program to pick up the icon image and display it correctly. NOTE: all User
Programs are contained within their own folders within the IntPetro35\UserPrograms folder,
which means that files can have the same name.
Help Editor
The 'Help Editor' is accessed through the 'New Program' and 'Edit Program' modules when
the 'Create Help' button is 'clicked'. This functionality allows the user to write a help document
for the user program with a word-processing program of choice.
The 'Default Help File Ext.' should be used to determine the type of file to be used for the help
document. For example, if the default type extension is set to "doc" then the Help button for a
user program will be enabled if there is a valid UserProgram.doc file in the user program folder.
Related Topics
User Programs
User Program Code
FORTRAN Guide
1901
Senergy
User Programs
Senergy
16.2
1902
New User Program
The 'New User Program' option provides the user with the functionality to design and execute
custom-built programs in IP. The module is arranged on a set of 'tabbed' input / output screens.
These are:
'Input Curves'
'Output Curves'
'Input Parameters'
'Input Text Parameters'
'Input Logic Flags'
'Tabs set up'
'Plot Setup (Optional)'
The 'tabs' are described fully, below.
The 'Module Name' is the name of the user program that is inserted into the 'User programs'
menus. It is also the name of the subdirectory created to store all the information for the program.
The subdirectory is created in the 'Userprograms' folder, which is a subdirectory of the main IP
program directory, or is set in the User Programs 'Options' window.
The programming language is selected by 'checking' the appropriate box at the top of the main
window. The default programming language can be set in the User Program 'Options' window.
The 'Use Zones' box, if 'checked', allows the created user program to have zonable parameters.
'Input Curves' Tab

This 'tab' is used to define the 'Input Curves' to be used.
Section 16.2 User Programs : New User Program
1903
Senergy
'Code Name' - is the name that is used in the code to access the input curve.
'Window Label' - this is the label which will appear in the runtime module, alongside the box
where the input curve is selected.
'Default Type' - is the input curve default type. This can be used to try to auto-select the
correct input curve ( it is an 'optional' parameter).
NOTE: a maximum number of 70 input curves is allowed in each user program.
'Output Curves' Tab

This tab is used to define the 'Output Curves'. These are curves that will be created if they do
not already exist in a well.
NOTE: the difference between input curves and output curves is that the input curves must exist
in order to run the user program. However, it is allowed and possible for the user program to
write to the input curve.
'Code Name' - is the name that is used in the code to access the 'Output Curve'.
'Window Label' - is the label which will appear in the runtime module, alongside the box
where the output curve is selected.
'Default Name' - is the default name for the output curve (optional parameter).
'Curve Units' - are the units for the output curve, only used if the curve is being created by
the user program (optional parameter).
'Curve Type' - is the curve type for the output curve, only used if the curve is being created
by the user program (optional parameter).
'Plot Lft Scale' - is the plot default left scale for the curve, only used if the curve is being
created by the user program (optional parameter).
'Plot Rht Scale' - is the plot default right scale for the curve, only used if the curve is being
created by the user program (optional parameter).
'Plot Log/Lin' - is the plot default logarithmic or linear scale option for the curve, only used if
the curve is being created by the program (optional parameter).
'Plot Colour' - is the plot default colour for the curve, only used if the curve is being created
by the user program (optional parameter).
'Use Array' - check this value if the output curve is to be an array curve.
'# X Array' - if the output curve is an array enter the number of samples in the X dimension
in the array.
'# Z Array' - if the output curve is an array enter the number of samples in the Z or depth
User Programs
Senergy
1904
dimension in the array.
NOTE: Don't leave empty lines between lines of code as it can cause problems with the indexing
of the code instructions.
'Input Parameters' Tab

This 'tab' is used to define the 'Input Parameters' to be used.
'Code Name' - is the name that is used in the code to access the various input parameters.
'Window Label' - is the title label which will appear in the runtime module in the column
header, above where the input parameter is selected. On the user Runtime screen, the
column heading label will populate the two title cells, depending upon how the text string is
written in the program screen.
For example, the strings 'a'_value and 'm' value are translated to :
1905
Senergy
The syntax applied is such that :

words separated by an underscore '_' symbol will appear on the same line
words separated by a space in the text string will appear in separate title cells.
NOTE:
1. There is a maximum text string length of 15 characters allowed for the 'Window Label
'.
2. To make changes to the existing titles, the user must first delete the 'Parameter Set' for
the user program. See the 'Delete Parameter Set' module accessed from the 'Well'
Delete Parameter Set'
'Other Sets'
'
'UPxxx' where 'UPxxx' is the User Program
Parameter Set name.

'Default Value' - is the default value which will appear in the parameter box in the runtime
program (optional parameter).
'Min Value' - when the runtime module is run, the program checks that the input parameter
is greater than or equal to this parameter. An error message will appear if the input
parameter is less than this value (optional parameter).
'Max Value' - when the runtime module is run, the program checks that the input parameter
is less than or equal to this parameter. An error message will appear if the input parameter
is greater than this value (optional parameter).
'Display Tab Name' - this is a drop-down list of all the User Program 'Tabs' defined on the '
Tabs Set up' tab.
'Tab Disp Order' - is the order in which the defined parameters will appear on their
respective tabs.The user needs to do some planning beforehand in order to decide how the
User Programs
Senergy
1906
user program is to look in terms of; how many tabs? which parameters on which tab ? etc...
NOTE : A maximum of 70 parameters are allowed in total per user program. A maximum of
20 parameters are permitted per 'tab'.
'Input Text Parameters' Tab

Text parameters allow the user to select logic flow by choosing a text string from a drop down
menu. An example of this usage is in the PhiSw module where the type of Sw equation can be
selected from a drop down menu list.
'Code Name' - is the name that is used in the code to access the various input parameters.
1907
Senergy
header, above where the 'Parameter' is selected. On the user Runtime screen, the column
heading label will populate the two title cells, depending upon how the text string is written in
the program screen.
'Text Value' - contains sets of strings which will be used to make up the drop-down menu
in the runtime module.
'Default Value' - this is the default string to display when the user program is initialised.
'Display Tab Name' - is a drop-down list of all the User Program 'Tabs' defined on the '
Tabs Set up' tab.
respective tabs. The user needs to do some planning beforehand in order to decide how the
'Input Logic Flags' Tab

This tab is used to define 'Logic Flags'. Logic Flags can be used to change how the program
works without having to rebuild the user program.
'Code Name' - is the name that is used in the code to access the 'Logic Flag'.
header, above where the 'Logic Flag' is selected. On the user Runtime screen, the column
heading label will populate the two title cells, depending upon how the text string is written in
the program screen.
For example, the text string "m_? Shell" is translated to :
The syntax applied is such that :

words separated by an underscore '_' symbol will appear on the same line
words separated by a space in the text string will appear in separate title cells.
NOTE:
1. There is a maximum text string length of 15 characters allowed for the Window Label.
2. To make changes to the existing titles, the user must first delete the 'Parameter Set' for
the user program. See the 'Delete Parameter Set' module accessed from the 'Well'
'
User Programs
Senergy
Delete Parameter Set'
'Other Sets'
1908
'UPxxx' where 'UPxxx' is the User Program
Parameter Set name.

'Default Value' - is the default value for the Logic Flag (this is an optional parameter).
'Display Tab Name' - is a drop-down list of all the User Program 'Tabs' defined on the '
Tabs Set up' tab.
respective tabs. The user needs to do some planning beforehand in order to decide how the
'Tabs set up' Tab

The 'Tabs set up' tab allows the user to define the Tab 'titles' and the number of tabs that the
user program will occupy. The Tab names are then available to the user when setting up the '
Input Parameters' tab. A maximum of 14 Parameter tabs can be set up.
There is an option for placing parameters into a tab that can't be seen by the user of the User
Program. The tab is called 'Hide' and any parameters placed into this tab will be hidden from
view. This tab can be used to hold parameters that the user wants to keep as constants.
1909
Senergy
'Plot Setup' Tab

Plots can only be set up for user programs that use zoning ('Use Zones' check box).
The 'Plot Setup' tab only needs to be completed if a Log Plot is required with the user program.
The three sub-tabs 'Grid', 'Curves' and 'Shading' are very similar to the normal Log Plot
Format set-up. However, only 'Input' or 'Output Curves' that have been set up in the user
program can be added to the plot. If additional curves are required for the log plot display but are
not actually used in the user program, then they must be added to the 'Input Curves' tab listing.
If a cross plot is required with the user program then the 'Crossplot' tab is the place for doing
this.
The 'Grid' sub-tab is illustrated below:
User Programs
Senergy
1910
The 'Curves' sub-tab, illustrated below, has the option to add interactive lines. This is done by
selecting the Parameter which is to be 'made interactive' in the 'Parameter1' and/or '
Parameter2' columns. The colour for the interactive lines in the plot is then set up in the 'colour1
' and/or 'colour2' columns. The scaling for the Parameter will be the same as the scaling for the
curve set-up in the same line. All Parameters must have an associated Curve in order to
scale them. If an appropriate curve is not available, it is possible to generate one by adding
another curve into the 'Output curves' list. For example, if we had a Parameter 'm' and an
interactive line was needed for it, then create a curve called 'm' in the 'Output Curves' and add it
to the plot. The plot will be displayed with the curve 'm' but it will have no values. You can assign
this curve the value of the Parameter by adding a line of code into the user program to set the '
Output Curve' to the 'Parameter Value'.
1911
Senergy
The 'Shading' sub-tab, shown below, allows the user to define shading that will be used in the
Default Plot format.
The 'Crossplot' sub-tab allows the user to create interactive crossplots from the user program
default plot. Upto three interactive lines can be set-up per crossplot.
User Programs
Senergy
1912
'Trk' - specifies which track in the log plot the crossplot pop-up menu will appear in.
'X Curve' - this is the X axis curve name. By 'clicking' in this cell a drop-down of all the input
and output curves used in the user program will appear.
'Y Curve' - this is the Y axis curve name.
'Line 1 X Param Start' - this defines the X axis parameter used for the start position of the
line. The parameter is picked from a drop-down list. The parameters need to be entered in
the 'Input Parameters' tab for them to appear in the drop-down list.
'Line 1 Y Param Start' - this defines the Y axis parameter used for the start position of the
line.
'Line 1 X Param Stop' - this defines the X axis parameter used for the end position of the
line. If left blank then rather than plotting a line, a point is plotted.
'Line 1 Y Param Stop' - this defines the Y axis parameter used for the end position of the
line.
Lines 2 and 3 have the same functionality as Line 1. If their positions are left blank then no line is
drawn. Multiple crossplots can be defined per track. Interactive lines can use the same start and
end parameters so it is possible too define an interactive triangle.
The 'Create Default Plot' button will create a plot with one curve per track for all Input and
Output curves. This is a good way to start creating a default plot, since it sets up all the zoning
information.
'Create Help'
The 'Create Help' button, if clicked, will open up a file called 'UserHelp.xxx' (the file is created in
1913
Senergy
the user program's directory). The user help extension is defined in the 'User Program Options
'. Documentation about the created user program can then be written, which will be available to
anyone who runs the user program. The word processor program used to write the help
documentation can be defined in 'User Program Options'.
When the user runs the user program, the 'Help' button on the form will open up this file.
Methodology
To create a new user program the following steps should be followed :
1) Enter the Program Name. NOTE that user program names cannot end with a numeric
character.
2) Enter the input and output curves, parameters and logic flags.
3) Choose the appropriate programming language.
4) Click the 'Edit Code' button and enter the code using the code editor (Notepad).
5) Save the code back to disk from the editor, using the 'Save' button in the editor. Do not
rename the file for the code - it must be called 'UsersCode.pas' for Pascal or 'UsersCode.
f' for Fortran.
6) Click the 'Compile' button on the 'User Programming' window. The program will be
automatically compiled and linked to an executable DLL module. Any errors in the code that
are found by the compiler will be displayed in a 'DOS' window. The following is an example of
a successfully compiled program using Fortran:
The 'Warning' message given by the compiler can be ignored. However, all 'Error' messages
must be fixed. The following is a compilation failure due to an error in the users code:
User Programs
Senergy
7) Once the file is compiled and linked correctly, it is then ready to test. The program is
accessible from the 'Users programs' menu.
Related Topics
User Programs
User Program Code
FORTRAN Guide
1914
1915
16.3
Senergy
User Program Code
Curve / Parameter Values in code

Curve and parameters are handled exactly the same inside the code. Input and output curves are
also treated the same. It is possible for a program to update an input curve from code (but not
recommended). Output curves are checked that they all belong to the same compatible curve
Set (same top, bottom, step) however input curves can belong to different Sets. Therefore,
writing back into an input curve may not give the results expected if the input curve is not
compatible with the output curves.
Curve / Parameter values can be read from code and also updated from code. A reason for
changing a parameter from code could be to calculate an average value for a curve in a zone
(see user program example 1).
Input parameters for zoned user programs can be either curves or fixed values. For this reason
all access to parameters must include the current depth index to get the parameter. This is true
either for reading or writing a parameter.
Reading Curves / Parameters

If the Code Name of a curve / parameter is Rw then to read the curve / parameter value into the
variable Xrw use the following :
Xrw = Rw(index)
(FORTRAN, C, VB, Pascal and C#)
Writing Curves / Parameters

If writing a variable XphiA to a curve / parameter called PhiAvthen use the following :
Call Save_PhiAv(index, XphiA)
(FORTRAN)
Save_ PhiAv(index, XphiA);
(Pascal, C#, C and VB)
Where index is the depth index to write the curve / parameter.
For a parameter if a index is not intended to be used (i.e. always a fixed parameter) then index
can be set to any fixed number (eg -1). The index number for a parameter is ignored if a fixed
value parameter is used.
Processing Depth Indexes

The user program code is called once per zone being processed (or once for non-zoned
programs). In order to know the interval over which to process the data the Top and Bottom
depth indexes are available in the program to allow looping through the data. The user sets up a
loop to transverse the data level by level.
It is possible to loop through the data more than once and to work with data at more than one
Section 16.3 User Programs : User Program Code
User Programs
Senergy
1916
depth level at a time (see user program example 2). However, the user should access the data
only between the Top index and Bottom Index.
The following is an example of the loop statement to access all the data over the zone being
processed :
DO index = Index_Topdepth() , Index_BottomDepth()
(FORTRAN)
FOR index:= Topdepth to BottomDepth do BEGIN
(Pascal)
for ( index = TopDepth() ; index < BottomDepth() ; index++ ) { (C)
For index = TopDepth To BottomDepth
(VB)
for ( index = TopDepth ; index < BottomDepth ; index++ ) {
(C#)
NOTE: FORTRAN uses a different name for the Top and Bottom index.
Depth Curve
The Depth curve is always available to obtain values at an index. The following example shows
how the top and bottom depths of the interval being processed can be obtained and output.
write(55,*) 'Top = ',Depth(Index_Topdepth()), Bottom = ',Depth(Index_Bottomdepth())
(FORTRAN)
WriteLn(OutFile,'Top = ',Depth(Topdepth):8:3,' Bottom = ',Depth(Bottomdepth):8:3);
(Pascal)
writer.WriteLine(String.Format("Top = {0:00.0000}", Depth(TopDepth)))
(VB)
writer.WriteLine("Top = " + Depth(TopDepth) + " Bottom = " + Depth(BottomDepth));
(C#)
fprintf(Outfile, " Top = %f Bottom = %f\n", Depth(TopDepth()), Depth(BottomDepth()));
(C)
Never write back to the Depth curve. This could completely mess up the well if bad values were
posted back.
Zones
The user code is run once per zone to process. However, it is possible to control the zone being
processed from within the user program code. This can be used for example to write parameter
reports to a file which include the parameters from all zones. The demo user program
'Interp_Demo' does this.
Setting the Zone within the user code affects the results of calls to the zone depth indexes plus
all calls to get and set parameters.
To find the current zone being processed, use the ZoneNumber function which returns the
current zone number as an integer:
ZoneNumber()
(FORTRAN, C)
ZoneNumber
(Pascal, VB, C#)
To get the total number of zones in the parameter set use the TotalZones function which returns
the total number of zones as an integer:
TotalZones ()
(FORTRAN, C)
1917
Senergy
TotalZones
(Pascal, VB, C#)
To change the current zone being processed use the SetZone procedure:
Call SetZone(iZone)
(FORTRAN)
SetZone(iZone);
(Pascal, C, C#)
SetZone(iZone)
(VB)
Where iZone is the new zone number and must be of integer variable type.
To find out whether the zone being processed is the last zone the following code could be used :
IF (ZoneNumber() .EQ. TotalZones()) THEN
if ( ZoneNumber() == TotalZones() ) {
IF ZoneNumber = TotalZones THEN BEGIN
If (ZoneNumber = TotalZones) Then
if (ZoneNumber == TotalZones) {
(FORTRAN)
(C)
(Pascal)
(VB)
(C#)
Text Parameters in Code

This allows the user to select parameters from a user defined text selection list. (see user
program example 1).
Inside the code, the name of 'Code Label' is used to access what was selected. I.e. if the 'Code
Name' was called 'SwEq', then in code a function called 'SwEq' will be created that returns the
current value of the list when called i.e. it returns a string. Inside the code this can be used like
this;
IF (SwEq() .EQ. 'Dual Water') THEN
if (strcmp(SwEq (), "Dual Water) == 0) {
If SwEq() = Dual Water Then
If (SwEq = 'Dual Water') Then
If (SwEq == Dual Water) {
(FORTRAN)
(C)
(Pascal)
(VB)
(C#)
Logic Parameters in Code

Allows the user to select logic parameters (True / False) to direct the code flow. (see user
program example 1).
Inside the code, the name of 'Code Label' is used to access what was selected. I.e. if the 'Code
Name' was called 'ShellM', then in code a logic function can be used like this;
IF (ShellM()) Then
If (ShellM()) {
If ShellM() Then
If (ShellM) Then
If (ShellM) {
(FORTRAN)
(C)
(Pascal)
(VB)
(C#)
Curve Attributes in code

The following curve attributes are available from code : (see user program example 1).
For Each Curve
User Programs
Senergy
1918
XXX_Name()
Curve Name
XXX_Units()
Curve Units
XXX_Comments()
Curve Comments
Where XXX is the curve code name.
The following is an example of how the curve Rt name and units can be accessed from code :
write(55,*) 'Rt = ', Rt_Name(), '(', Rt_Units(), ')'
(FORTRAN)
WriteLn(OutFile, 'Rt = ', Rt_Name(), '(', Rt_Units(), ')');
(Pascal)
writer.WriteLine(String.Concat("Rt = ", Rt_Name, " (", Rt_Units, ")"))
(VB)
writer.WriteLine("Rt = " + Rt_Name + " (" + Rt_Units + ")");
(C#)
In the C code an extra parameter is passed (character pointer) which is the returned value. The
user must create the space for the string.
char *aString, *aUnits;
aString = InitString( MAX_STRING_1 );
aUnits = InitString( MAX_STRING_1 );
Rt_Name( aString );
(C)
Rt_Units( aUnits);
(C)
fprintf(Outfile, "\nRt = %s (%s)", aString, aUnits );
It is also possible to change the comments for a curve in the Curve Header. This is done by
using the following procedure/subroutine call.
Save_XXX_Comments( Text )
Where XXX is the curve code name and Text is a string value for the comment.
The following is an example of how the curve Sw comment field can be changed from code :
call Save_Sw_Comments('Curve written by Interp Demo user program') (FORTRAN)
Save_Sw_Comments('Curve written by Interp Demo user program');
(Pascal)
Save_Sw_Comments("Curve written by Interp Demo user program")
(VB)
Save_Sw_Comments("Curve written by Interp Demo user program");
(C#)
In the C code the comment must be converted into a Character pointer before passing it to the
routine.
char *aString, *aUnits;
sprintf(aString, "Curve written by Archie user program");
Save_Sw_Comments(aString);
(C)
Well Attributes in code

The following Well attributes are available directly : (see user program example 1).
For The Well
Code Function
Well_Name()
Well Name
Well_Field()
Field
Well_Company()
Company name
The following examples shows how they can be accessed from code :
write(55,*) ' Well : ', Well_Name()
WriteLn(OutFile,' Well : ', Well_Name);
(FORTRAN)
(Pascal)
1919
Senergy
writer.WriteLine(" Well : " & Well_Name)

(VB)
writer.WriteLine(" Well : " + Well_Name);
(C#)
In the C code an extra parameter is passed (character pointer) which is the returned value.
The user must create the space for the string.
char *aString;
Well_Name( aString );
(C)
fprintf(Outfile, " Well : %s\n" , aString );
For other Well attributes the following function can be used.
Read_Well_Attribute( AttributeName )
Where AttributeName will be the 'Name' in the IP configuration tables.
The following examples shows how the KB Elevation (name KBElev) could be accessed from
code :
write(55,*) ' KB Elevation: ', Read_Well_Attribute(KBElev)
WriteLn(OutFile, ' KB Elevation: ', Read_Well_Attribute(' KBElev '));
writer.WriteLine("KB Elevation: " & Read_Well_Attribute("KBElev "))
writer.WriteLine("KB Elevation: " + Read_Well_Attribute("KBElev "));
In the C code the procedure has two variables, both character pointers.
char *aString, * attribute;
attribute = InitString( MAX_STRING_1 );
sprintf(attribute, "KBElev");
Read_Well_Attribute(attribute, aString);
fprintf(Outfile, " KB Elev : %s\n", aString );
To write an attribute in to the well the following procedure is used :
(FORTRAN)
(Pascal)
(VB)
(C#)
User Programs
Senergy
1920
Write_Well_Attribute( AttributeName, AttributeValue)

The AttributeName will be the 'Name' in the IP configuration tables. The AttributeValue will be
the new value of the attribute.
The following examples shows how the Location could be updated from code :
Call Write_Well_Attribute('Location', North Sea Black 14/12)
Write_Well_Attribute('Location', North Sea Black 14/12);
Write_Well_Attribute("Location", " North Sea Black 14/12")
Write_Well_Attribute("Location", " North Sea Black 14/12");
Write_Well_Attribute("Location", " North Sea Black 14/12");
(FORTRAN)
(Pascal)
(VB)
(C#)
(C)
Log Run Attributes in code

To read Log Run attributes from the well the following function is used :
Read_Log_Attribute( AttributeName, LogRunNumber)
The AttributeName will be the 'Name' in the IP Log configuration tables. The LogRunNumber
will be the log number to look up the log attribute from. If a -1 is entered as the log number then
the program will return the first log attribute not blank in a run number. I.e. if looking for log
attribute Rmf and there is no value in Run 1 but there is a value in Run 2 then the program will
return the Run 2 value.
The following examples shows how the Rw log parameter for run 1 could be read from code :
RwString = Read_Log_Attribute('Rw', 1)
(FORTRAN)
RwString := Read_Log_Attribute('Rw', 1);
(Pascal)
RwString = Read_Log_Attribute("Rw", 1)
(VB)
string RwString = Read_Log_Attribute("Rw", 1);
(C#)
In the C code the procedure has one extra variables which is the passed back attribute value, this
needs to be a character pointer.
char *aString, * attribute;
Read_Log_Attribute("Rw", aString, 1);
(C)
NOTE: the results of this call always returns a character string. Hence if a numeric value is
needed this will have to be read from the string.
To write Log attributes to the well the following function is used :
Write_Log_Attribute( AttributeName, AttributeValue, LogRunNumber)
The AttributeName will be the 'Name' in the IP Log configuration tables. The AttributeValue will
be the new value of the attribute (string). The LogRunNumber will be the log number to write the
attribute to, if a -1 is entered then the value will be populated in the first blank value in the log
runs.
The following examples shows how the Rw log parameter for run 2 could be written from code :
Call Write_Log_Attribute('Rw', RwString, 2)
Write_Log_Attribute('Rw', RwString , 2);
Write_Log_Attribute("Rw", RwString, 2)
(FORTRAN)
(Pascal)
(VB)
1921
Senergy
Write_Log_Attribute("Rw", RwString, 2);

(C#)
Write_Log_Attribute("Rw", RwString, 2);
(C)
Where RwString is the new the Rw log parameter character value.
Curve Array Data

Array data curves can be accessed from within a user program and new array data curves
created. For array data curves, each database sample level can have multiple samples in both
the 'X' dimension and also the 'Z' or 'Y' depth dimension. In the user program code the depth
dimension is referred to as the 'Y' dimension.
Accessing array data from within a user program is similar to normal data except there are three
parameters to pass; 'sample index', 'X index' and 'Y index'.
To read an array curve the function is:
Array_XXX(Index, Xindex, Yindex)
Where
XXX is the curve code name
Index is the well depth sample index
XIndex is the index into the array in the X dimension
YIndex is the index into the array in the Y or depth dimension
To save data into an array curve the procedure or subroutine is:
Save_Array_XXX(Index, Xindex, Yindex,Value)
Where
XXX is the curve code name
Index is the well depth sample index
Xindex is the index into the array in the X dimension
Yindex is the index into the array in the Y or depth dimension
Value is the value to save at the index
To find out the dimensions of an array curve the following functions can be used:
Array_XXX_MaxX()
X dimension
Array_XXX_MaxY()
Y or depth dimension
The user program example 3 shows how these functions can be used.
Related Topics
User Programs
User Program Code
FORTRAN Guide
User Programs
Senergy
16.4
1922
FORTRAN Guide
The following is a brief summary of the most common expressions and statements used in
Fortran.
In Fortran Code layout on the page is important. The following basic rules apply:
Comment lines start with the letter 'C' in column 1.
Line label numbers must be placed in columns 1-5.
Code Statements must be placed in columns 7-72
Any letter or number placed in column 6 indicates that this line is a continuation of the
previous lines. Multiple continuation lines are possible.
In the following examples "a" and "b" are real variables "I" and "j" are integer variables.
Mathematical expressions
Symbol
=
+
*
/
**
INT(b)
ABS(b)
SQRT(b)
EXP(b)
LOG(b)
LOG10(b)
SIN(B)
COS(B)
TAN(B)
ASIN(B)
ACOS(B)
ATAN(B)
Definition
Equals
Plus
Minus
Multiply
Divide
Exponent
Take the integer of "b"
Take the absolute value of "b"
Take the square root of "b"
Take the exponential of "b"
Take the natural log of "b"
Take the Common log of "b"
Take the Sine of "b", "b" is in radians
Take the Cosine of "b", "b" is in radians
Take the Tangent of "b", "b" is in radians
Take the Arcsine of "b", "b" is in radians
Take the Arccosine of "b", "b" is in radians
Take the Arctangent of "b", "b" is in radians
Example
(a = b)
(a = b + 2.3)
(a = b 4.2)
(a = b * 3.2)
(a = b / 3.4)
(a = b ** 2) (a = b2 )
(I = INT(b))
(a = ABS(b))
(a = SQRT(b))
(a = EXP(b)) (a = eb)
(a = LOG(b))
(a = LOG10(b))
(a = SIN(b))
(a = COS(b))
(a = TAN(b))
(a = ASIN(b))
(a = ACOS(b))
(a = ATAN(b))
Logical expressions
Symbol
Definition
.EQ.
Equal
.NE.
Not Equal
.LT.
Less than
.LE.
Less than or equal to
.GT.
Greater than
.GE.
Greater than or equal to
.AND.
Logical and
Example
IF (A .EQ. B)
IF (A .NE. B)
IF (A .LT. B)
IF (A .LE. B)
IF (A .GT. B)
IF (A .GE. B)
IF (A .EQ. B .AND. I .EQ. J)
.OR.
IF (A .EQ. B .or. I .EQ. J)
Logical or
STATEMENTS
Section 16.4 User Programs : FORTRAN Guide
1923
Senergy
DO [Label] Index = Start, Stop [Step]

Where :
'Label' is the line reference number to end the 'DO' loop. This can be omitted and
an ENDDO statement used to end the DO loop.
'Index' is the variable that controls the loop.
'Start' is the initial value of the index.
'Stop' is the last value of the index.
'Step' is the step between each loop of the index. If left out the step defaults to 1.
Examples:
DO I = 1,3
a= I+ b
ENDDO
or
100
DO 100 I = 1,3
a= I+ b
CONTINUE
GOTO (Label)
Where :
'Label' is the line reference number that the program jumps to.
IF (Exp) Statement
Where :
'Exp' is a logical expression.
'Statement' is any executable statement.
Examples
IF (a .GT. b) res = 15.5
If a is greater than b, then set res to 15.5
IF (a .LT. b) GOTO 100
If a is less than b goto to line 100.
IF (a .EQ. b) THEN
Res = 15.5
ENDIF
If a equals b then execute the following lines until ENDIF is reached.
IF (Exp) THEN
Statements
ELSE
Statements
ENDIF
Where :
'Exp' is a logical expression.
'Statement' is any executable statement.
Example
User Programs
Senergy
IF (a .GT. b) THEN
res = 15.5
ELSE
Res = 20
ENDIF
If a is greater than b then res = 15.5 else res = 20
Related Topics
User Programs
User Program Code
FORTRAN Guide
1924
1925
16.5
Senergy
This Chapter provides four Example User Programs that can be utilised in Interactive
Petrophysics.
Example User Program 1: Interp-Demo: This example shows a user program created to
perform a complete petrophysical analysis from the determination of clay volume through to
pay and reservoir summations.
Example User Program 2: Differentiate: This example shows a user program created to find
the 'first-derivative' of a curve. This example shows how a curve can be accessed at multiple
levels at the same time. The non-zonable option is being used ('Use Zones' box not
'checked').
Example User Program 3: Normalize Array: This user program example takes an array input
curve and normalizes the values in it to lie between 0 and 1 and output the results to a new
array curve. The non-zonable option is being used. One input curve is created.
Example User Program 4: Manage Well Header Info: This example shows how to write a user
program that can fill in the 'Manage Well Header Info' fields.
Related Topics
User Programs
User Program Code
FORTRAN Guide
16.5.1 Example User Program 1: Interp-Demo

The following example shows a user program created to perform a complete petrophysical
analysis from the determination of clay volume through to pay and reservoir summations.
The program uses all of the new User program functionality including creating crossplots with
interactive lines from log plots and parameter drop-down boxes for example.
'Input Curves' define the code names for the deep resistivity, gamma ray, density and sonic
curves.
Section 16.5 User Programs : Example User Programs
User Programs
Senergy
1926
'Input Parameter' tab defines all of the input parameters. Default values and limits are set so that
the user cannot enter non-sensible values.
In the 'Input Text Parameters' tab there are two text parameters; a porosity equation with two
choices and a water saturation equation, again with two choices. More choices could be added to
the 'Text Value' box if required.
1927
Senergy
The 'Input Logic Flag' is set so that the user can switch on/off the use of the Shell formula for 'm'.
The 'Output Curves' will be called the 'Window Label' name in the code but the default
database curve name is the 'Default Name'. This output curve name can be changed by the
user at runtime. NOTE: the output Set has been defined with the 'Default Name'. The Set will
have to be created in the well in which this user program is run if it does not already exist.
User Programs
Senergy
1928
The plot was created using the 'Create Default Plot' button and then edited to put the 'Rwapp'
curve in the same track as the 'Rt' curve and the 'Rwapp' interactive line was added.
1929
Senergy
User Programs
Senergy
1930
The code is written for the different languages and is shown below
'GNU Fortran'
'Delphi Pascal'
'GNU C/C++'
'Microsoft VB .NET'
'Microsoft C# .NET'
The code for the program in GNU Fortran is as follows.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------c
c User Code for Fortran 77
c
SUBROUTINE UserCode()
IMPLICIT INTEGER (I-N)
INCLUDE 'InOutDef.INC'
CHARACTER*(40) RwString
c
c
All user defined input parameters and logic flags are treated as
functions.
c
As such they must be used with a () at the end of their name.
c
For example: Input parameter RW is used in an equation as RW(); AA = RW()
+ 2.
c
To use trend curves as input parameters the depth INDEX must also be
passed into the function.
c
RW(INDEX), AA = RW(INDEX) + 2.
c
c
Input curves are used in equations as functions.
c
Vclay = (GR(INDEX) - GRclean(INDEX)) / (GRclay(INDEX) - GRclean(INDEX))
c
INDEX is the integer index into the curve array. GRclay and GRclean are
defined
c
as input parameters. GR is the input curve. If GRclean is enterd by the
use as a fixed value
1931
Senergy
c
then the INDEX parameter in GRclean(INDEX) is ignored.
c
Input curve DEPTH is always available and does not have to be defined as
an input curve.
c
c
Data is saved by using the SAVE_***(INDEX, VALUE) procedure. Where *** is
the
c
output curve name. VALUE is the value to store at INDEX.
c
CALL SAVE_VCL(INDEX, 0.5)
saves value 0.5 into the output curve VCL.
c
c
c
calculate the Pickett plot end point parameters
Call CalculatePickett
c
c
Intitalize zonal averages
PayNet = 0.0
ResNet = 0.0
PhiPay = 0.0
PhiRes = 0.0
SwPay = 0.0
SwRes = 0.0
VclPay = 0.0
VclRes = 0.0
BVWPay = 0.0
BVWRes = 0.0
PayCount = 0.0
ResCount = 0.0
c
c Loop through the data one level at a time
c Index_Topdepth and Index_BottomDepth are the index equivalent depths entered
on the run window.
C
DO 100 INDEX = Index_Topdepth() , Index_BottomDepth()
c
c
c
Calculate porosity depending om method
IF (PorEq() .EQ. 'Sonic') THEN
S = Son(INDEX)
IF (S .GT. 0.0) THEN
Por = (S - SonMat(INDEX)) * SonCp(INDEX) /
>
(SonFluid(INDEX) - SonMat(INDEX))
ELSE
Por = -999.0
endif
c
Calculate clay porosity
PorClay = (SonClay(INDEX) - SonMat(INDEX)) * SonCp(INDEX) /
>
(SonFluid(INDEX) - SonMat(INDEX))
>
ELSE
D = Den(INDEX)
IF (D .GT. 0.0) THEN
Por = (D - DenMat(INDEX)) /
(DenFluid(INDEX) - DenMat(INDEX))
ELSE
Por = -999.0
ENDIF
User Programs
Senergy
c
>
>
c
c
c

PorClay = (DenClay(INDEX) - DenMat(INDEX)) /
(DenFluid(INDEX) - DenMat(INDEX))
ENDIF
Calculate Clay volume
G = GR(INDEX)
IF (G .NE. -999.0) THEN
VClay = (G - GRCLEAN(INDEX)) /
(GRCLAY(INDEX) - GRCLEAN(INDEX))
IF (Vclay .GT. 1.0) THEN
Vclay = 1.0
ELSEIF (Vclay .LT. 0.0) THEN
Vclay = 0.0
ENDIF
Correct Porosity for clay
Por = Por - Vclay * PorClay
IF (Por .LT. 0.0001) THEN
Por = 0.0001
ENDIF
ELSE
VClay = -999.0
Por = -999.0
ENDIF
Calculate Water Saturation

Res = Rt(Index)
IF ((Por .LE. 0.0) .OR. (Res .LE. 0.0)) THEN
WatSat = -999.0
Rwa = -999.0
BVW = -999.0
ELSE
Check for Shell m
IF (Shellm()) THEN
XX = 1.87 + 0.019 / Por
ELSE
set m to input parameter
XX = XM(INDEX)
ENDIF
Check for Archie equation
IF (SwEq() .EQ. 'Archie') THEN
calculate F
F = XA(INDEX) / Por**XX
calculate Sw
WatSat = (F * Rw(INDEX) / Res)**(1.0/XN(INDEX))
ELSE
calculate Sw Indonesian
WatSat = (Res**0.5 *
>
( VClay**(1.0-VClay/2.0) / Rclay(INDEX)**0.5 +
>
Por**(XX/2.0) / (XA(INDEX)*Rw(INDEX))**0.5 )
>
) ** (-2.0/XN(INDEX))
ENDIF
Limit Sw
IF (WatSat .GT. 1.2) THEN
1932
1933
C
c
WatSat = 1.2
ENDIF
calculate Rw apparent
Rwa = Res * Por**XX / XA(INDEX)
calculate BVW
IF (WatSat .LT. 1.0) THEN
BVW = WatSat * Por
ELSE
BVW = Por
ENDIF
ENDIF
c
c
calculate the Net pay and net reservoir

Limit Sw to 1.0
IF (WatSat .GT. 1.0) THEN
WS = 1.0
ELSE
WS = WatSat
ENDIF
IF ((Por .GE. PhiCut(INDEX)) .AND.
>
(VClay .LE. VclCut(INDEX))) THEN
ResFlg = 1.0
IF (WS .LE. SwCut(INDEX)) THEN
PayFlg = 1.0
ELSE
PayFlg = 0.0
ENDIF
ELSE
ResFlg = 0.0
PayFlg = 0.0
ENDIF
add results to zone averages

IF (ResFlg .EQ. 1.0) THEN
ResCount = ResCount + 1.0
PhiRes = PhiRes + Por
BVWRes = BVWRes + Por * WS
VclRes = VclRes + VClay
ENDIF
IF (PayFlg .EQ. 1.0) THEN
PayCount = PayCount + 1.0
PhiPay = PhiPay + Por
BVWPay = BVWPay + Por * WS
VclPay = VclPay + VClay
ENDIF
output the curve results

Call SAVE_Phi(INDEX,Por)
Call SAVE_Vcl(INDEX,VClay)
Call SAVE_Sw(INDEX,WatSat)
Call SAVE_Rwapp(INDEX,Rwa)
Call SAVE_BVW(INDEX,BVW)
Call SAVE_NetResFlg(INDEX,ResFlg)
Call SAVE_NetPayFlg(INDEX,PayFlg)
Senergy
User Programs
Senergy
100 CONTINUE
c
c
c
c
Calculate Well Step from first 2 depths

Step = Depth(Index_Topdepth()+1) - Depth(Index_Topdepth())
Calculate the zonal averages
ResNet = ResCount * Step
IF (ResCount .EQ. 0.0) THEN
PhiRes = 0.0
VclRes = 0.0
BVWRes = 0.0
SwRes = 0.0
ELSE
PhiRes = PhiRes / ResCount
VclRes = VclRes / ResCount
BVWRes = BVWRes / ResCount
SwRes = BVWRes / PhiRes
ENDIF
PayNet = PayCount * Step
IF (PayCount .EQ. 0.0) THEN
PhiPay = 0.0
VclPay = 0.0
BVWPay = 0.0
SwPay = 0.0
ELSE
PhiPay = PhiPay / PayCount
VclPay = VclPay / PayCount
BVWPay = BVWPay / PayCount
SwPay = BVWPay / PhiRes
ENDIF
c
c
Output results back to parameters
c
We loop through all the data because it is possible that the result
parameters are set as curves !
DO INDEX = Index_Topdepth() , Index_BottomDepth()
Call SAVE_NetRes(INDEX,ResNet)
Call SAVE_AvPhiRes(INDEX,PhiRes)
Call SAVE_AvVclRes(INDEX,VclRes)
Call SAVE_AvSwRes(INDEX,SwRes)
Call
Call
Call
Call
ENDDO
c
c
C
SAVE_NetPay(INDEX,PayNet)
SAVE_AvPhiPay(INDEX,PhiPay)
SAVE_AvVclPay(INDEX,VclPay)
SAVE_AvSwPay(INDEX,SwPay)
Create a report to a file if this zone is the last zone

IF (ZoneNumber() .EQ. TotalZones()) THEN
OPEN (UNIT=55,FILE='Interp Demo FORTRAN Report.TXT',
>
STATUS='UNKNOWN')
write(55,*) ' USER PROGRAM INTERP PARAMETERS'
write(55,*) ''
write(55,*) ' Well
: ', Well_Name()
1934
1935
c
c
c
c
c
Write well attributes using attribute name

write(55,*) ' Company : ', Read_Well_Attribute('Company')
write(55,*) ' Field
: ', Read_Well_Attribute('Field')
write(55,*) ' KB Elev : ', Read_Well_Attribute('KBElev')
write(55,*) ' Input Curves '
write(55,*) '
Rt
= ', Rt_Name(), '(', Rt_Units(), ')'
write(55,*) '
Gr
= ', Gr_Name(), '(', Gr_Units(), ')'
write(55,*) '
Den
= ', Den_Name(), '(', Den_Units(), ')'
write(55,*) '
Son
= ', Son_Name(), '(', Son_Units(), ')'
write(55,*) ' Output Curve '
write(55,*) '
Phi
= ', Phi_Name(), '(', Phi_Units(), ')'
write(55,*) '
Vcl
= ', Vcl_Name(), '(', Vcl_Units(),')'
write(55,*) '
Sw
= ', Sw_Name(), '(', Sw_Units(),')'
write(55,*) '
Rwapp = ', RwApp_Name(), '(', RwApp_Units(),
>
')'
write(55,*) '
BVW
= ', BVW_Name(), '(', BVW_Units(),')'
write(55,*) '
NetPay = ', NetPayFlg_Name()
write(55,*) '
NetRes = ', NetResFlg_Name()
Write the parameters by zone
DO I = 1, TotalZones()
Set the zone number so we can get the parameters for each zone
Call SetZone(I)
write(55,*) ''
write(55,*) ' Zone ', I, ' Input Parameters '
write(55,*) '
a
= ', Xa(1)
write(55,*) '
m
= ', XM(1)
write(55,*) '
n
= ', XN(1)
write(55,*) '
Rw
= ', Rw(1)
write(55,*) '
Sw Eq
= ', SwEq()
write(55,*) '
Son Matrix = ', SonMat(1)
write(55,*) '
Son Fluid = ', SonFluid(1)
write(55,*) '
Son CP
= ', SonCp(1)
write(55,*) '
Son Clay
= ', SonClay(1)
write(55,*) '
Den Matrix = ', DenMat(1)
write(55,*) '
Den Fluid = ', DenFluid(1)
write(55,*) '
Por Eq
= ', PorEq()
write(55,*) '
Den Clay
= ', DenClay(1)
write(55,*) '
Gr Clean
= ', GrClean(1)
write(55,*) '
Gr Clay
= ', GrClay(1)
write(55,*) ' Depth Interval'
write(55,*) '
Top = ',Depth(Index_Topdepth()),
>
'
Bottom = ',Depth(Index_Bottomdepth())
ENDDO
CLOSE (UNIT=55,STATUS='KEEP')
ENDIF
Write
call
>
call
>
call
>
call
>
to database who created these curves

Save_Sw_Comments(
'Curve written by Interp Demo user program')
Save_Rwapp_Comments(
Save_Phi_Comments(
Save_Vcl_Comments(
Senergy
User Programs
Senergy
1936
call Save_BVW_Comments(
call Save_NetResFlg_Comments(
>
call Save_NetPayFlg_Comments(
>
>
c
c
c
RETURN
c
END
c
c
c
c
Calculate the Pickett plot line end points

SUBROUTINE CalculatePickett()
c
c
c
Calculate m amd Rw from end point lines

Phi1 = PPphi1(-1)
Phi2 = PPphi2(-1)
Ro1 = PPres1(-1)
Ro2 = PPres2(-1)
IF (Phi1 .NE. Phi2) THEN
xmc = ( Log10(Max(Ro1,0.01)) - Log10(Max(Ro2,0.01)) ) /
>
( Log10(Max(Phi2,0.001)) - Log10(Max(Phi1,0.001)) )
ELSE
xmc = xm(-1)
ENDIF
Rwc = Ro1 * Phi1**xmc / XA(-1)
Rwc = Max(0.0001,Min(Rwc,100.0))
c
c
Check to see if the values calculated are the default values
c
If they are then assume that the pickett plot is not open and in use
c
and therefore assume that the values to use for m and Rw are the input
normal parameters
c
IF ( ( ABS(Rwc-RwPick(-1)) .LT. 0.001) .AND.
>
( ABS(xmc-MPick(-1)) .LT. 0.01) ) THEN
Rwc = Rw(-1)
Call SAVE_RwPick(-1,Rwc)
xmc = xm(-1)
Call SAVE_MPick(-1,xmc)
c
Recalculate the line using the parameter values of m and Rw and save
Ro1 = XA(-1) * Rwc * Phi1**(-xmc)
Ro2 = XA(-1) * Rwc * Phi2**(-xmc)
Call SAVE_PPres1(-1,Ro1)
Call SAVE_PPres2(-1,Ro2)
ELSE
c
New values of m and Rw save these and also the pickett defaults
Call SAVE_Rw(-1,Rwc)
Call SAVE_XM(-1,xmc)
1937
Senergy
Call SAVE_RwPick(-1,Rwc)
Call SAVE_MPick(-1,xmc)
ENDIF
c
END
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The code for the program in Delphi Pascal is as follows.

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------unit UsersCode;
interface
uses Functions, Math;
Procedure UserCode; stdcall;
// declare other procedures and function in this Unit
Procedure CalculatePickett;
implementation
{User Code}
// declare all variables
Var
index, I : Integer;
PayNet, ResNet, PhiPay, PhiRes, SwPay, SwRes, VclPay, VclRes, BVWPay, BVWRes,
PayCount, ResCount : Single;
D, S, G, Por, VClay, PorClay, Res, XX, WatSat, BVW, WS, Step, Rwa, F, ResFlg,
PayFlg : Single;
OutFile : TextFile;
RwString : String;
begin
// calculate the Pickett plot end point parameters
CalculatePickett;
// Intitalize zonal averages
PayNet := 0.0;
ResNet := 0.0;
PhiPay := 0.0;
PhiRes := 0.0;
SwPay := 0.0;
SwRes := 0.0;
VclPay := 0.0;
VclRes := 0.0;
BVWPay := 0.0;
BVWRes := 0.0;
PayCount := 0.0;
ResCount := 0.0;
//
// Loop through the data one level at a time
// Topdepth and BottomDepth are the index equivalent depths entered on the run
window.
//
User Programs
Senergy
1938
FOR index := Topdepth TO BottomDepth DO BEGIN

//
//
//

IF PorEq() = 'Sonic' THEN BEGIN
S := Son(INDEX);
IF (S > 0.0) THEN
Por := (S - SonMat(INDEX)) * SonCp(INDEX) / (SonFluid(INDEX) - SonMat
(INDEX))
ELSE
Por := -999.0;
//
PorClay := (SonClay(INDEX) - SonMat(INDEX)) * SonCp(INDEX) / (SonFluid
(INDEX) - SonMat(INDEX));
END
ELSE BEGIN
D := Den(INDEX);
IF (D > 0.0) THEN
Por := (D - DenMat(INDEX)) / (DenFluid(INDEX) - DenMat(INDEX))
ELSE
Por := -999.0;
//
PorClay := (DenClay(INDEX) - DenMat(INDEX)) / (DenFluid(INDEX) - DenMat
(INDEX));
END;
//
//
//
//

G := GR(INDEX);
IF G <> -999.0 THEN BEGIN
VClay := (G - GRCLEAN(INDEX)) / (GRCLAY(INDEX) - GRCLEAN(INDEX));
IF (Vclay > 1.0) THEN
Vclay := 1.0
ELSE IF (Vclay < 0.0) THEN
Vclay := 0.0;
Por := Por - Vclay * PorClay;
IF Por < 0.0001 THEN
Por := 0.0001;
END
ELSE BEGIN
VClay := -999.0;
Por := -999.0;
END;
Res := Rt(Index);
IF (Por <= 0.0) OR (Res <= 0.0) THEN BEGIN
WatSat := -999.0;
Rwa := -999.0;
BVW := -999.0;
END
ELSE BEGIN
Check for Shell m
IF Shellm() THEN
XX := 1.87 + 0.019 / Por
1939
Senergy
ELSE
XX := XM(INDEX);
//
IF SwEq() = 'Archie' THEN BEGIN
//
calculate F
F := XA(INDEX) / Power(Por,XX);
//
calculate Sw
WatSat := Power(F * Rw(INDEX) / Res, 1.0/XN(INDEX));
END
ELSE
//
WatSat := Power( Sqrt(Res) * ( Power(VClay, (1.0-VClay/2.0)) / Sqrt
(Rclay(INDEX)) +
Power(Por, (XX/2.0)) / Sqrt(XA(INDEX)*Rw(INDEX)) ), -2.0/XN
(INDEX));
//
Limit Sw
IF WatSat > 1.2 THEN
WatSat := 1.2;
//
Rwa := Res * Power(Por, XX) / XA(INDEX);
//
calculate BVW
IF WatSat < 1.0 THEN
BVW := WatSat * Por
ELSE
BVW := Por;
END;
//
//
//

Limit Sw to 1.0
IF WatSat > 1.0 THEN
WS := 1.0
ELSE
WS := WatSat;
IF (Por >= PhiCut(INDEX)) AND (VClay <= VclCut(INDEX)) THEN BEGIN
ResFlg := 1.0;
IF WS <= SwCut(INDEX) THEN
PayFlg := 1.0
ELSE
PayFlg := 0.0;
END
ELSE BEGIN
ResFlg := 0.0;
PayFlg := 0.0;
END;
//

IF ResFlg = 1.0 THEN BEGIN
ResCount := ResCount + 1.0;
PhiRes := PhiRes + Por;
BVWRes := BVWRes + Por * WS;
VclRes := VclRes + VClay;
END;
IF PayFlg = 1.0 THEN BEGIN
PayCount := PayCount + 1.0;
User Programs
Senergy
1940
PhiPay := PhiPay + Por;

BVWPay := BVWPay + Por * WS;
VclPay := VclPay + VClay;
END;
//

SAVE_Phi(INDEX,Por);
SAVE_Vcl(INDEX,VClay);
SAVE_Sw(INDEX,WatSat);
SAVE_Rwapp(INDEX,Rwa);
SAVE_BVW(INDEX,BVW);
SAVE_NetResFlg(INDEX,ResFlg);
SAVE_NetPayFlg(INDEX,PayFlg);
END;
//
//
//
//
// for index := Topdepth .....

Step := Depth(Topdepth+1) - Depth(Topdepth);
ResNet := ResCount * Step;
IF ResCount = 0.0 THEN BEGIN
PhiRes := 0.0;
VclRes := 0.0;
BVWRes := 0.0;
SwRes := 0.0;
END
ELSE BEGIN
PhiRes := PhiRes / ResCount;
VclRes := VclRes / ResCount;
BVWRes := BVWRes / ResCount;
SwRes := BVWRes / PhiRes;
END;
PayNet := PayCount * Step;
IF PayCount = 0.0 THEN BEGIN
PhiPay := 0.0;
VclPay := 0.0;
BVWPay := 0.0;
SwPay := 0.0;
END
ELSE BEGIN
PhiPay := PhiPay / PayCount;
VclPay := VclPay / PayCount;
BVWPay := BVWPay / PayCount;
SwPay := BVWPay / PhiRes;
END;
//
//
//
We loop through all the data because it is possible that the result parameters
are set as curves !
FOR INDEX := Topdepth to BottomDepth do BEGIN
SAVE_NetRes(INDEX,ResNet);
SAVE_AvPhiRes(INDEX,PhiRes);
SAVE_AvVclRes(INDEX,VclRes);
1941
Senergy
SAVE_AvSwRes(INDEX,SwRes);
SAVE_NetPay(INDEX,PayNet);
SAVE_AvPhiPay(INDEX,PhiPay);
SAVE_AvVclPay(INDEX,VclPay);
SAVE_AvSwPay(INDEX,SwPay);
END;
//
//
// Create a report to a file if this is the last zone
IF ZoneNumber = TotalZones THEN BEGIN
AssignFile(OutFile,'Interp Demo Pascal Report.TXT');
Rewrite(OutFile);
WriteLn(OutFile,' USER PROGRAM INTERP DEMO PARAMETERS');
WriteLn(OutFile);
WriteLn(OutFile,' Well
: ', Well_Name);
// Write well attributes using attribute name
WriteLn(OutFile, ' Company : ', Read_Well_Attribute('Company'));
WriteLn(OutFile, ' Field
: ', Read_Well_Attribute('Field'));
WriteLn(OutFile, ' KB Elev : ', Read_Well_Attribute('KBElev'));
WriteLn(OutFile, ' Input Curves ');
WriteLn(OutFile, '
Rt
= ', Rt_Name(), '(', Rt_Units(), ')');
WriteLn(OutFile, '
Gr
= ', Gr_Name(), '(', Gr_Units(), ')');
WriteLn(OutFile, '
Den
= ', Den_Name(), '(', Den_Units(), ')');
WriteLn(OutFile, '
Son
= ', Son_Name(), '(', Son_Units(), ')');
WriteLn(OutFile, ' Output Curve ');
WriteLn(OutFile, '
Phi
= ', Phi_Name(), '(', Phi_Units(), ')');
WriteLn(OutFile, '
Vcl
= ', Vcl_Name(), '(', Vcl_Units(),')');
WriteLn(OutFile, '
Sw
= ', Sw_Name(), '(', Sw_Units(),')');
WriteLn(OutFile, '
Rwapp = ', RwApp_Name(), '(', RwApp_Units(),')');
WriteLn(OutFile, '
BVW
= ', BVW_Name(), '(', BVW_Units(),')');
WriteLn(OutFile, '
NetPay = ', NetPayFlg_Name() );
WriteLn(OutFile, '
NetRes = ', NetResFlg_Name() );
//
//
Write the parameters by zone

FOR I := 1 TO TotalZones DO BEGIN
Set the zone number so we can get the parameters for each zone
SetZone(I);
WriteLn(OutFile);
WriteLn(OutFile, ' Zone ', I, ' Input Parameters ');
WriteLn(OutFile, '
a
= ', Xa(1):8:3);
WriteLn(OutFile, '
m
= ', XM(1):8:3);
WriteLn(OutFile, '
n
= ', XN(1):8:3);
WriteLn(OutFile, '
Rw
= ', Rw(1):8:3);
WriteLn(OutFile, '
Sw Eq
= ', SwEq());
WriteLn(OutFile, '
Son Matrix = ', SonMat(1):8:3);
WriteLn(OutFile, '
Son Fluid = ', SonFluid(1):8:3);
WriteLn(OutFile, '
Son CP
= ', SonCp(1):8:3);
WriteLn(OutFile, '
Son Clay
= ', SonClay(1):8:3);
WriteLn(OutFile, '
Den Matrix = ', DenMat(1):8:3 );
WriteLn(OutFile, '
Den Fluid = ', DenFluid(1):8:3);
WriteLn(OutFile, '
Por Eq
= ', PorEq() );
WriteLn(OutFile, '
Den Clay
= ', DenClay(1):8:3);
User Programs
Senergy
WriteLn(OutFile, '
Gr Clean
= ', GrClean(1):8:3);
WriteLn(OutFile, '
Gr Clay
= ', GrClay(1):8:3);
WriteLn(OutFile, '
Depth Interval');
WriteLn(OutFile, '
Top = ',Depth(Topdepth):8:3,'
Depth(Bottomdepth):8:3);
END;
CloseFile(OutFile);
END;
//
// Write to database who created these curves
Save_Sw_Comments('Curve written by Interp Demo user program');
Save_Rwapp_Comments('Curve written by Interp Demo user program');
Save_Phi_Comments('Curve written by Interp Demo user program');
Save_Vcl_Comments('Curve written by Interp Demo user program');
Save_BVW_Comments('Curve written by Interp Demo user program');
Save_NetResFlg_Comments('Curve written by Interp Demo user program');
Save_NetPayFlg_Comments('Curve written by Interp Demo user program');
1942
Bottom = ',
EXIT;
//
END;
//
//
//
//
//
Procedure CalculatePickett;
Var
Phi1, Phi2, Ro1, Ro2, xmc, Rwc : Single;
BEGIN
//
//
//
Phi1 := PPphi1(-1);
Phi2 := PPphi2(-1);
Ro1 := PPres1(-1);
Ro2 := PPres2(-1);
IF Phi1 <> Phi2 THEN
xmc := ( Log10(Max(Ro1,0.01)) - Log10(Max(Ro2,0.01)) ) /
( Log10(Max(Phi2,0.001)) - Log10(Max(Phi1,0.001)) )
ELSE
xmc := xm(-1);
Rwc := Ro1 * Power(Phi1, xmc) / XA(-1);
Rwc := Max(0.0001,Min(Rwc,100.0));
//
// Check to see if the values calculated are the default values
// If they are then assume that the pickett plot is not open and in use
// and therefore assume that the values to use for m and Rw are the input normal
parameters
//
IF ( ABS(Rwc-RwPick(-1)) < 0.001) AND ( ABS(xmc-MPick(-1)) < 0.01) THEN BEGIN
Rwc := Rw(-1);
SAVE_RwPick(-1,Rwc);
xmc := xm(-1);
SAVE_MPick(-1,xmc);
1943
Senergy
//
Ro1 := xa(-1) * Rwc * Power(Phi1, -xmc);
Ro2 := xa(-1) * Rwc * Power(Phi2, -xmc);
SAVE_PPres1(-1,Ro1);
SAVE_PPres2(-1,Ro2);
END
ELSE BEGIN
//
SAVE_Rw(-1,Rwc);
SAVE_xm(-1,xmc);
SAVE_Rwpick(-1,Rwc);
SAVE_Mpick(-1,xmc);
END;
//
END;
end.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The same routine in C++ follows.

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------#include
#include
#include
#include
#include
#include
void
<windows.h>
<stdio.h>
<stdlib.h>
"Functions.h"
<math.h>
<string.h>
CalculatePickett() ;
extern __declspec (dllexport)

{
void usercode_()
int index, i;
char *aString;
char *attribute;
char *aUnits;
FILE *Outfile;
float PayNet, ResNet, PhiPay, PhiRes, SwPay, SwRes, VclPay, VclRes, BVWPay,
BVWRes, PayCount, ResCount;
float D, S, G, Por, VClay, PorClay, Res, XX, WatSat, BVW, WS, Step, Rwa, F,
ResFlg, PayFlg;
attribute = InitString( MAX_STRING_1 );
aUnits = InitString( MAX_STRING_1 );
//

CalculatePickett();
User Programs
Senergy
//
//
1944

PayNet = 0.0;
ResNet = 0.0;
PhiPay = 0.0;
PhiRes = 0.0;
SwPay = 0.0;
SwRes = 0.0;
VclPay = 0.0;
VclRes = 0.0;
BVWPay = 0.0;
BVWRes = 0.0;
PayCount = 0.0;
ResCount = 0.0;
//
// TopDepth and BottomDepth are the index equivalent depths entered on the run
window.
//
for ( index = TopDepth() ; index < BottomDepth() ; index++ ) {
//
//
//
if (strcmp(PorEq(), "Sonic") == 0) {
S = Son(index);
if (S > 0.0) {
Por = (S - SonMat(index)) * SonCp(index) / (SonFluid(index) SonMat(index));
}
else {
Por = -999.0;
}
//
PorClay = (SonClay(index) - SonMat(index)) * SonCp(index) / (SonFluid
(index) - SonMat(index));
}
else {
D = Den(index);
if (D > 0.0) {
Por = (D - DenMat(index)) / (DenFluid(index) - DenMat(index));
}
else {
Por = -999.0;
}
//
PorClay = (DenClay(index) - DenMat(index)) / (DenFluid(index) DenMat(index));
}
//

G = Gr(index);
if (G != -999.0) {
VClay = (G - GrClean(index)) / (GrClay(index) - GrClean(index));
if (VClay > 1.0) {
1945
Senergy
VClay = 1.0;
//
}
else if (VClay < 0.0) {
VClay = 0.0;
}
Por = Por - VClay * PorClay;
if (Por < 0.0001) {
Por = 0.0001 ;
}
}
else {
VClay = -999.0;
Por = -999.0;
}
//
//
//

Res = Rt(index);
if ((Por < 0.0) | (Res <= 0.0)) {
WatSat = -999.0;
Rwa = -999.0;
BVW = -999.0;
}
else {
Check for Shell m
if (Shellm()) {
XX = 1.87 + 0.019 / Por;
}
else {
XX = xm(index);
}
//

if (strcmp(SwEq(), "Archie") == 0) {
//
calculate F
F = xa(index) / pow(Por,XX);
//
calculate Sw
WatSat = pow(F * Rw(index) / Res, 1.0/xn(index));
}
else {
//
WatSat = pow( pow(Res,0.5) * ( pow(VClay, (1.0-VClay/2.0)) / pow
(Rclay(index),0.5) +
pow(Por, (XX/2.0)) / pow(xa(index)*Rw(index),0.5) ), 2.0/xn(index));
}
// Limit Sw
if (WatSat > 1.2) {
WatSat = 1.2;
}
// calculate Rw apparent
Rwa = Res * pow(Por,XX) / xa(index);
// calculate BVW
User Programs
Senergy
if (WatSat < 1.0) {
BVW = WatSat * Por;
}
else {
BVW = Por;
}
}
//
//

Limit Sw to 1.0
if (WatSat > 1.0) {
WS = 1.0;
}
else {
WS = WatSat;
}
if ((Por >= PhiCut(index)) && (VClay <= VclCut(index))) {
ResFlg = 1.0;
if (WS <= SwCut(index)) {
PayFlg = 1.0;
}
else {
PayFlg = 0.0;
}
}
else {
ResFlg = 0.0;
PayFlg = 0.0;
}
//

if (ResFlg == 1.0) {
ResCount = ResCount + 1.0;
PhiRes = PhiRes + Por;
BVWRes = BVWRes + Por * WS;
VclRes = VclRes + VClay;
}
if (PayFlg == 1.0) {
PayCount = PayCount + 1.0;
PhiPay = PhiPay + Por;
BVWPay = BVWPay + Por * WS;
VclPay = VclPay + VClay;
}
// output the curve results

Save_Phi(index,Por);
Save_Vcl(index,VClay);
Save_Sw(index,WatSat);
Save_Rwapp(index,Rwa);
Save_BVW(index,BVW);
Save_NetResFlg(index,ResFlg);
Save_NetPayFlg(index,PayFlg);
}
1946
1947
//
//
//

Step = Depth(TopDepth()+1) - Depth(TopDepth());
// Calculate the zonal averages
ResNet = ResCount * Step;
if (ResCount == 0.0) {
PhiRes = 0.0;
VclRes = 0.0;
BVWRes = 0.0;
SwRes = 0.0;
}
else {
PhiRes = PhiRes / ResCount;
VclRes = VclRes / ResCount;
BVWRes = BVWRes / ResCount;
SwRes = BVWRes / PhiRes;
}
PayNet = PayCount * Step;
if (PayCount == 0.0) {
PhiPay = 0.0;
VclPay = 0.0;
BVWPay = 0.0;
SwPay = 0.0;
}
else {
PhiPay = PhiPay / PayCount;
VclPay = VclPay / PayCount;
BVWPay = BVWPay / PayCount;
SwPay = BVWPay / PhiRes;
}
//
// Output results back to parameters
// We loop through all the data because it is possible that the result
for ( index = TopDepth() ; index < BottomDepth() ; index++ ) {
Save_NetRes(index,ResNet);
Save_AvPhiRes(index,PhiRes);
Save_AvVclRes(index,VclRes);
Save_AvSwRes(index,SwRes);
Save_NetPay(index,PayNet);
Save_AvPhiPay(index,PhiPay);
Save_AvVclPay(index,VclPay);
Save_AvSwPay(index,SwPay);
}
//
//
if ( ZoneNumber() == TotalZones() ) {
Outfile = fopen("Interp Demo C Report.txt", "w+");
if(Outfile==NULL) {
}
else {
Senergy
User Programs
Senergy
fprintf(Outfile, " USER PROGRAM INTERP PARAMETERS \n");

fprintf(Outfile, "\n");
Well_Name( aString );
fprintf(Outfile, " Well
: %s\n" , aString );
sprintf(attribute, "Company");
fprintf(Outfile, " Company : %s\n", aString );
sprintf(attribute, "Field");
fprintf(Outfile, " Field
: %s\n", aString );
sprintf(attribute, "KBElev");
fprintf(Outfile, " KB Elev : %s\n", aString );
fprintf(Outfile, "\n Input Curves\n" );
Rt_Name( aString );
Rt_Units( aUnits);
fprintf(Outfile, "\n
Gr_Name( aString );
Gr_Units( aUnits);
Den_Name( aString );
Den_Units( aUnits);
Son_Name( aString );
Son_Units( aUnits);
Rt
= %s (%s)", aString, aUnits );
Gr
Den
Son
fprintf(Outfile, "\n Output Curves\n" );

Phi_Name( aString );
Phi_Units( aUnits);
Vcl_Name( aString );
Vcl_Units( aUnits);
Sw_Name( aString );
Sw_Units( aUnits);
Rwapp_Name( aString );
Rwapp_Units( aUnits);
BVW_Name( aString );
BVW_Units( aUnits);
Phi
Vcl
Sw
Rwapp
BVW
NetPay = %s ", aString );

NetRes = %s ", aString );
1948
1949
Senergy
// Write the parameters by zone

for ( i = 1 ; i <= TotalZones() ; i++ ) {
// Set the zone number so we can get the parameters for each
zone
SetZone(i);
fprintf(Outfile, "\n");
fprintf(Outfile, "\n Zone %i Input Parameters\n", i );
fprintf(Outfile,
"
a
fprintf(Outfile,
"
m
fprintf(Outfile,
"
n
fprintf(Outfile,
"
Rw
//
strcpy(aString, SwEq());
fprintf(Outfile,
"
Sw Eq
fprintf(Outfile,
"
Son Matrix
fprintf(Outfile,
"
Son Fluid
fprintf(Outfile,
"
Son CP
fprintf(Outfile,
"
Son Clay
fprintf(Outfile,
"
Den Matrix
fprintf(Outfile,
"
Den Fluid
//
strcpy(aString, PorEq());
fprintf(Outfile,
"
Por Eq
fprintf(Outfile,
"
Den Clay
fprintf(Outfile,
"
Gr Clean
fprintf(Outfile,
"
Gr Clay
=
=
=
=
%f
%f
%f
%f
\n",
\n",
\n",
\n",
xa(1));
xm(1));
xn(1));
Rw(1));
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
%s
%f
%f
%f
%f
%f
%f
\n",
\n",
\n",
\n",
\n",
\n",
\n",
SwEq());
SonMat(1));
SonFluid(1));
SonCp(1));
SonClay(1));
DenMat(1));
DenFluid(1));
=
=
=
=
%s
%f
%f
%f
\n",
\n",
\n",
\n",
PorEq());
DenClay(1));
GrClean(1));
GrClay(1));
//Show Depth Interval

fprintf(Outfile, "
Depth Interval\n");
fprintf(Outfile, "
Top = %f
Bottom = %f\n", Depth
(TopDepth()), Depth(BottomDepth()));
}
fclose(Outfile);
}
}
//
sprintf(aString, "Curve written by Archie user program1");
Save_Sw_Comments(aString);
Save_Rwapp_Comments(aString);
Save_Phi_Comments(aString);
Save_Vcl_Comments(aString);
Save_BVW_Comments(aString);
Save_NetResFlg_Comments(aString);
Save_NetPayFlg_Comments(aString);
//
//Write_Well_Attribute("Location", "IP Test Location");
//Read_Log_Attribute("Rw", aString, 1);
//Write_Log_Attribute("Rw", aString, 2);
free( aString );
free( attribute );
free( aUnits );
User Programs
Senergy
1950
}
//
//
// Calculate the Pickett plot line end points
//
void CalculatePickett()
{
//
float Phi1, Phi2, Ro1, Ro2, xmc, Rwc;
//
// Calculate m amd Rw from end point lines
Phi1 = PPphi1(-1);
Phi2 = PPphi2(-1);
Ro1 = PPres1(-1);
Ro2 = PPres2(-1);
if (Phi1 != Phi2) {
xmc = ( log10(max(Ro1,0.01)) - log10(max(Ro2,0.01)) ) /
( log10(max(Phi2,0.001)) - log10(max(Phi1,0.001)) );
}
else {
xmc = xm(-1);
}
Rwc = Ro1 * pow(Phi1,xmc) / xa(-1);
Rwc = max(0.0001,min(Rwc,100.0));
//
// and therefore assume that the values to use for m and Rw are the input
normal parameters
//
if ( ( fabs(Rwc-Rwpick(-1)) < 0.001) && ( fabs(xmc-Mpick(-1)) < 0.01) ) {
Rwc = Rw(-1);
Save_Rwpick(-1,Rwc);
xmc = xm(-1);
Save_Mpick(-1,xmc);
//
Ro1 = xa(-1) * Rwc * pow(Phi1,-xmc);
Ro2 = xa(-1) * Rwc * pow(Phi2,-xmc);
Save_PPres1(-1,Ro1);
}
else {
//
Save_Rw(-1,Rwc);
Save_xm(-1,xmc);
Save_Mpick(-1,xmc);
}
//
}
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1951
Senergy
The code for the program in VB .NET is as follows.

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Imports System.IO
Imports System.Windows.Forms
Partial Public Class IPLink
Public Sub UserCode()
Dim index, i as Integer
Dim writer As TextWriter = Nothing
Dim PayNet, ResNet, PhiPay, PhiRes, SwPay, SwRes, VclPay, VclRes,
BVWPay, BVWRes, PayCount, ResCount as Single
Dim D, S, G, Por, VClay, PorClay, Res, XX, WatSat, BVW, WS, IStep, Rwa,
F, ResFlg, PayFlg as Single
Dim RwString as String
'
Try
'
CalculatePickett()
'
'
PayNet = 0.0
ResNet = 0.0
PhiPay = 0.0
PhiRes = 0.0
SwPay = 0.0
SwRes = 0.0
VclPay = 0.0
VclRes = 0.0
BVWPay = 0.0
BVWRes = 0.0
PayCount = 0.0
ResCount = 0.0
'
'
Loop through the data one level at a time
'
TopDepth and BottomDepth are the index equivalent depths entered on the
run window.
'
'
'
'
If (PorEq = "Sonic") Then
S = Son(index)
IF (S > 0.0) Then
Por = (S - SonMat(index)) * SonCp(index) / _
(SonFluid(index) - SonMat(index))
Else
Por = -999.0
End If
'
User Programs
Senergy
1952
PorClay = (SonClay(index) - SonMat(index)) * SonCp(index) / _

(SonFluid(index) - SonMat(index))
Else
D = Den(index)
IF (D > 0.0) Then
Por = (D - DenMat(index)) / (DenFluid(index) - DenMat(index))
'
Else
Por = -999.0
End If
PorClay = (DenClay(index) - DenMat(index)) / (DenFluid(index) -
DenMat(index))
End If
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'

G = GR(index)
If (G <> -999.0) Then
VClay = (G - GrClean(index)) / (GrClay(index) - GrClean(index))
If (Vclay > 1.0) Then
Vclay = 1.0
Else IF (Vclay < 0.0) Then
Vclay = 0.0
End If
Por = Por - Vclay * PorClay
IF (Por < 0.0001) Then
Por = 0.0001
End If
Else
VClay = -999.0
Por = -999.0
End If
Res = Rt(Index)
If ((Por <= 0.0) OrElse (Res <= 0.0)) Then
WatSat = -999.0
Rwa = -999.0
BVW = -999.0
Else
Check for Shell m
If (Shellm) Then
XX = 1.87 + 0.019 / Por
Else
XX = XM(index)
End If
If (SwEq = "Archie") Then
calculate F
F = XA(index) / Math.Pow(Por,XX)
calculate Sw
WatSat = Math.Pow(F * Rw(index) / Res,(1.0/XN(index)))
Else
1953
Senergy
'
WatSat = Math.Pow( Math.Pow(Res,0.5) * ( Math.Pow(VClay,
(1.0-VClay/2.0)) / Math.Pow(Rclay(index),0.5) + _
Math.Pow(Por, (XX/2.0)) / Math.Pow(xa(index)*Rw
(index),0.5) ), -2.0/xn(index))
End If
'
Limit Sw
If (WatSat > 1.2) Then
WatSat = 1.2
End If
'
Rwa = Res * Math.Pow(Por,XX) / XA(index)
'
calculate BVW
If (WatSat < 1.0) Then
BVW = WatSat * Por
Else
BVW = Por
End If
End If
'
'

Limit Sw to 1.0
If (WatSat > 1.0) Then
WS = 1.0
Else
WS = WatSat
End If
If ((Por >= PhiCut(index)) and (VClay <= VclCut(index))) Then
ResFlg = 1.0
If (WS <= SwCut(index)) Then
PayFlg = 1.0
Else
PayFlg = 0.0
End If
Else
ResFlg = 0.0
PayFlg = 0.0
End If
'
'

IF (ResFlg = 1.0) Then
ResCount = ResCount + 1.0
PhiRes = PhiRes + Por
BVWRes = BVWRes + Por * WS
VclRes = VclRes + VClay
End If
If (PayFlg = 1.0) Then
PayCount = PayCount + 1.0
PhiPay = PhiPay + Por
BVWPay = BVWPay + Por * WS
VclPay = VclPay + VClay
End If
User Programs
Senergy
1954
SAVE_Phi(index,Por)
SAVE_Vcl(index,VClay)
SAVE_Sw(index,WatSat)
SAVE_Rwapp(index,Rwa)
SAVE_BVW(index,BVW)
SAVE_NetResFlg(index,ResFlg)
SAVE_NetPayFlg(index,PayFlg)
Next
'
'
'
'

IStep = Depth(TopDepth()+1) - Depth(TopDepth())
ResNet = ResCount * IStep
If (ResCount = 0.0) Then
PhiRes = 0.0
VclRes = 0.0
BVWRes = 0.0
SwRes = 0.0
Else
PhiRes = PhiRes / ResCount
VclRes = VclRes / ResCount
BVWRes = BVWRes / ResCount
SwRes = BVWRes / PhiRes
End If
PayNet = PayCount *
If (PayCount = 0.0)
PhiPay = 0.0
VclPay = 0.0
BVWPay = 0.0
SwPay = 0.0
Else
PhiPay = PhiPay
VclPay = VclPay
BVWPay = BVWPay
SwPay = BVWPay
End If
IStep
Then
/
/
/
/
PayCount
PayCount
PayCount
PhiRes
'
'
'
We loop through all the data because it is possible that the result
SAVE_NetRes(index,ResNet)
SAVE_AvPhiRes(index,PhiRes)
SAVE_AvVclRes(index,VclRes)
SAVE_AvSwRes(index,SwRes)
SAVE_NetPay(index,PayNet)
SAVE_AvPhiPay(index,PhiPay)
SAVE_AvVclPay(index,VclPay)
SAVE_AvSwPay(index,SwPay)
Next
'
1955
'
'
Senergy
Create a report to a file if this is the last zone

If (ZoneNumber = TotalZones) Then
writer = New StreamWriter("Interp Demo VB Report.TXT")
writer.WriteLine(" USER PROGRAM INTERP PARAMETERS")
writer.WriteLine()
writer.WriteLine(" Well
: " & Well_Name)
'
Write well attributes using attribute name
writer.WriteLine(" Company : " & Read_Well_Attribute("Company"))
writer.WriteLine(" Field
: " & Read_Well_Attribute("Field"))
writer.WriteLine(" KB Elev : " & Read_Well_Attribute("KBElev"))
writer.WriteLine()
writer.WriteLine(" Input Curves ")
writer.WriteLine(String.Concat("
Rt
= ", Rt_Name, " (",
Rt_Units, ")"))
Gr
= ", Gr_Name, " (",
Gr_Units, ")"))
Den
= ", Den_Name, " (",
Den_Units, ")"))
Son
= ", Son_Name, " (",
Son_Units, ")"))
writer.WriteLine(" Output Curves ")
Phi
= ", Phi_Name, " (",
Phi_Units, ")"))
Vcl
= ", Vcl_Name, " (",
Vcl_Units, ")"))
Sw
= ", Sw_Name, " (",
Sw_Units, ")"))
BVW
= ", BVW_Name, " (",
BVW_Units, ")"))
Rwapp
= ", Rwapp_Name,
" (", Rwapp_Units, ")"))
NetPay Flg = ",
NetPayFlg_Name))
NetRes Flg = ",
NetResFlg_Name))
For i = 1 To TotalZones
' Set the zone number so we can get the parameters for each
zone
SetZone(i)
writer.WriteLine()
writer.WriteLine(String.Concat(" Zone ", i, " Input Parameters
"))
writer.WriteLine(String.Format("
a
= {0:00.0000}",
XA(1)))
m
= {0:00.0000}",
XM(1)))
n
= {0:00.0000}",
XN(1)))
Rw
= {0:00.0000}",
Rw(1)))
Sw Eq
= {0:00.0000}",
SwEq))
Son Matrix = {0:00.0000}",
SonMat(1)))
User Programs
Senergy
1956
Son Fluid
= {0:00.0000}",
Son CP
= {0:00.0000}",
Son Clay
= {0:00.0000}",
Den Matrix = {0:00.0000}",
Den Fluid
= {0:00.0000}",
Por Eq
= {0:00.0000}",
Den Clay
= {0:00.0000}",
Gr Clean
= {0:00.0000}",
Gr Clay
= {0:00.0000}",
SonFluid(1)))
SonCp(1)))
SonClay(1)))
DenMat(1)))
DenFluid(1)))
PorEq))
DenClay(1)))
GrClean(1)))
GrClay(1)))
writer.WriteLine("
Depth Interval")
Top = {0:00.0000}", Depth
(TopDepth)))
Bottom = {0:00.0000}",
Depth(BottomDepth)))
Next
End If
'
'
Write to database who created these curves
Save_Sw_Comments("Curve written by Interp Demo user program")
Save_Rwapp_Comments("Curve written by Interp Demo user program")
Save_Phi_Comments("Curve written by Interp Demo user program")
Save_Vcl_Comments("Curve written by Interp Demo user program")
Save_BVW_Comments("Curve written by Interp Demo user program")
Save_NetResFlg_Comments("Curve written by Interp Demo user program")
Save_NetPayFlg_Comments("Curve written by Interp Demo user program")
'
'
'
Write_Well_Attribute("Location", "IP Test Location")

RwString = Read_Log_Attribute("Rw", 1)
Write_Log_Attribute("Rw", RwString, 2)
'
Catch exception As Exception
MessageBox.Show(("Error occurred: " & exception.ToString))
Finally
If (Not writer Is Nothing) Then
writer.Flush()
writer.Close()
End If
End Try
End Sub
'
'
'
'

Public Sub
CalculatePickett()
1957
Senergy
'
Dim Phi1, Phi2, Ro1, Ro2, xmc, Rwc as Single
'
'
'

Phi1 = PPphi1(-1)
Phi2 = PPphi2(-1)
Ro1 = PPres1(-1)
Ro2 = PPres2(-1)
If (Phi1 <> Phi2) Then
xmc = ( Math.Log10(Math.Max(Ro1,0.01)) - Math.Log10(Math.Max
(Ro2,0.01)) ) / _
( Math.Log10(Math.Max(Phi2,0.001)) - Math.Log10(Math.Max
(Phi1,0.001)) )
Else
xmc = xm(-1)
End If
Rwc = Ro1 * Math.Pow(Phi1, xmc) / XA(-1)
Rwc = Math.Max(0.0001,Math.Min(Rwc,100.0))
'
'
Check to see if the values calculated are the default values
'
If they are then assume that the pickett plot is not open and in use
'
and therefore assume that the values to use for m and Rw are the input
normal parameters
'
If ( ( Math.Abs(Rwc-RwPick(-1)) < 0.001) and ( Math.Abs(xmc-MPick(-1)) <
0.01) ) Then
Rwc = Rw(-1)
SAVE_RwPick(-1,Rwc)
xmc = xm(-1)
SAVE_MPick(-1,xmc)
'
Ro1 = XA(-1) * Rwc * Math.Pow(Phi1, -xmc)
Ro2 = XA(-1) * Rwc * Math.Pow(Phi2, -xmc)
SAVE_PPres1(-1,Ro1)
SAVE_PPres2(-1,Ro2)
Else
'
SAVE_Rw(-1,Rwc)
SAVE_XM(-1,xmc)
SAVE_RwPick(-1,Rwc)
SAVE_MPick(-1,xmc)
End If
'
End Sub
End Class
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The code for the program in C# .NET is as follows.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------using System;
User Programs
Senergy
1958
using System.IO;
using System.Windows.Forms;
public partial class IPLink

{
public void UserCode()
{
int index, i;
Single PayNet, ResNet, PhiPay, PhiRes, SwPay, SwRes, VclPay, VclRes,
BVWPay, BVWRes, PayCount, ResCount;
Single D, S, G, Por, VClay, PorClay, Res, XX, WatSat, BVW, WS, Step, Rwa,
F, ResFlg, PayFlg;
TextWriter writer = null;
try
{
//
CalculatePickett();
//
//
PayNet = 0.0f;
ResNet = 0.0f;
PhiPay = 0.0f;
PhiRes = 0.0f;
SwPay = 0.0f;
SwRes = 0.0f;
VclPay = 0.0f;
VclRes = 0.0f;
BVWPay = 0.0f;
BVWRes = 0.0f;
PayCount = 0.0f;
ResCount = 0.0f;
//
// TopDepth and BottomDepth are the index equivalent depths entered
on the run window.
//
for (index = TopDepth; index <= BottomDepth; index++)
{
//
//
//
if (PorEq == "Sonic")
{
S = Son(index);
if (S > 0.0f)
{
Por = (S - SonMat(index)) * SonCp(index) /
(SonFluid(index) - SonMat(index));
}
else
{
1959
Senergy
Por = -999.0f;
}
//
PorClay = (SonClay(index) - SonMat(index)) * SonCp
(index) / (SonFluid(index) - SonMat(index));
}
else
{
D = Den(index);
if (D > 0.0f)
{
Por = (D - DenMat(index)) / (DenFluid(index) DenMat(index));
}
else
{
Por = -999.0f;
}
//
PorClay = (DenClay(index) - DenMat(index)) / (DenFluid
(index) - DenMat(index));
}
//
G = Gr(index);
if (G != -999.0f)
{
VClay = (G - GrClean(index)) / (GrClay(index) - GrClean
(index));
if (VClay > 1.0f)
{
VClay = 1.0f;
}
else if (VClay < 0.0f)
{
VClay = 0.0f;
}
//
Por = Por - VClay * PorClay;
if (Por < 0.0001f)
{
Por = 0.0001f ;
}
}
else
{
VClay = -999.0f;
Por = -999.0f;
}
//
Res = Rt(index);
if ((Por < 0.0) | (Res <= 0.0))
User Programs
Senergy
1960
{
WatSat = -999.0f;
Rwa = -999.0f;
BVW = -999.0f;
}
else
{
//
Check for Shell m
if (Shellm)
{
XX = 1.87f + 0.019f / Por;
}
else
{
//
XX = xm(index);
}
//
if (SwEq == "Archie")
{
//
calculate F
F = xa(index) / (Single)Math.Pow(Por,XX);
//
calculate Sw
WatSat = (Single)Math.Pow(F * Rw(index) / Res,
1.0f/xn(index));
}
else
{
//
WatSat = (Single)Math.Pow( (Single)Math.Pow
(Res,0.5f) * ( (Single)Math.Pow(VClay, (1.0f-VClay/2.0f)) / (Single)Math.Pow
(Rclay(index),0.5f) +
(Single)Math.Pow(Por, (XX/2.0f)) /
(Single)Math.Pow(xa(index)*Rw(index),0.5) ), -2.0f/xn(index));
}
// Limit Sw
if (WatSat > 1.2f)
{
WatSat = 1.2f;
}
// calculate Rw apparent
Rwa = Res * (Single)Math.Pow(Por,XX) / xa(index);
// calculate BVW
if (WatSat < 1.0f)
{
BVW = WatSat * Por;
}
else
{
BVW = Por;
}
}
1961
Senergy
// calculate the Net pay and net reservoir

//
Limit Sw to 1.0
if (WatSat > 1.0f)
{
WS = 1.0f;
}
else
{
WS = WatSat;
}
if ((Por >= PhiCut(index)) && (VClay <= VclCut(index)))
{
ResFlg = 1.0f;
if (WS <= SwCut(index))
{
PayFlg = 1.0f;
}
else
{
PayFlg = 0.0f;
}
}
else
{
ResFlg = 0.0f;
PayFlg = 0.0f;
}
// add results to zone averages
if (ResFlg == 1.0f)
{
ResCount = ResCount + 1.0f;
PhiRes = PhiRes + Por;
BVWRes = BVWRes + Por * WS;
VclRes = VclRes + VClay;
}
if (PayFlg == 1.0)
{
PayCount = PayCount + 1.0f;
PhiPay = PhiPay + Por;
BVWPay = BVWPay + Por * WS;
VclPay = VclPay + VClay;
}
// output the curve results
Save_Phi(index,Por);
Save_Vcl(index,VClay);
Save_Sw(index,WatSat);
Save_Rwapp(index,Rwa);
Save_BVW(index,BVW);
Save_NetResFlg(index,ResFlg);
User Programs
Senergy
1962
Save_NetPayFlg(index,PayFlg);
}
//
//
// Calculate Well Step from first 2 depths
Step = Depth(TopDepth+1) - Depth(TopDepth);
// Calculate the zonal averages
ResNet = ResCount * Step;
if (ResCount == 0.0f)
{
PhiRes = 0.0f;
VclRes = 0.0f;
BVWRes = 0.0f;
SwRes = 0.0f;
}
else
{
PhiRes = PhiRes / ResCount;
VclRes = VclRes / ResCount;
BVWRes = BVWRes / ResCount;
SwRes = BVWRes / PhiRes;
}
PayNet = PayCount * Step;
if (PayCount == 0.0f)
{
PhiPay = 0.0f;
VclPay = 0.0f;
BVWPay = 0.0f;
SwPay = 0.0f;
}
else
{
PhiPay = PhiPay / PayCount;
VclPay = VclPay / PayCount;
BVWPay = BVWPay / PayCount;
SwPay = BVWPay / PhiRes;
}
//
// Output results back to parameters
// We loop through all the data because it is possible that the
result parameters are set as curves !
for ( index = TopDepth ; index < BottomDepth ; index++ )
{
Save_NetRes(index,ResNet);
Save_AvPhiRes(index,PhiRes);
Save_AvVclRes(index,VclRes);
Save_AvSwRes(index,SwRes);
Save_NetPay(index,PayNet);
Save_AvPhiPay(index,PhiPay);
1963
Senergy
Save_AvVclPay(index,VclPay);
Save_AvSwPay(index,SwPay);
}
//
//
if (ZoneNumber == TotalZones)
{
writer = new StreamWriter("Interp Demo c# Report.TXT");
writer.WriteLine(" USER PROGRAM INTERP PARAMETERS");
writer.WriteLine();
writer.WriteLine(" Well
: " + Well_Name);
writer.WriteLine(" Company : " + Read_Well_Attribute
("Company"));
writer.WriteLine(" Field
: " + Read_Well_Attribute("Field"));
writer.WriteLine(" KB Elev : " + Read_Well_Attribute
("KBElev"));
writer.WriteLine();
writer.WriteLine(" Input Curves ");
writer.WriteLine("
Rt
= " + Rt_Name + " (" + Rt_Units +
")");
writer.WriteLine("
Gr
= " + Gr_Name + " (" + Gr_Units +
")");
writer.WriteLine("
Den
= " + Den_Name + " (" + Den_Units
+ ")");
writer.WriteLine("
Son
= " + Son_Name + " (" + Son_Units
+ ")");
writer.WriteLine(" Output Curve ");
writer.WriteLine("
Phi
= " + Phi_Name + " (" + Phi_Units
+ ")");
writer.WriteLine("
Vcl
= " + Vcl_Name + " (" + Vcl_Units
+ ")");
writer.WriteLine("
Sw
= " + Sw_Name + " (" + Sw_Units +
")");
writer.WriteLine("
Rwapp = " + Rwapp_Name + " (" +
Rwapp_Units + ")");
writer.WriteLine("
BVW
= " + BVW_Name + " (" + BVW_Units
+ ")");
writer.WriteLine("
NetPay = " + NetPayFlg_Name);
writer.WriteLine("
NetRes = " + NetResFlg_Name);
for ( i = 1 ; i <= TotalZones ; i++ )
{
// Set the zone number so we can get the parameters for
each zone
SetZone(i);
writer.WriteLine();
writer.WriteLine(" Input Parameters ");
writer.WriteLine("
a
= " + xa(1));
writer.WriteLine("
m
= " + xm(1));
writer.WriteLine("
n
= " + xn(1));
writer.WriteLine("
Rw
= " + Rw(1));
writer.WriteLine("
Sw Eq
= " + SwEq);
writer.WriteLine("
Son Matrix = " + SonMat(1));
writer.WriteLine("
Son Fluid = " + SonFluid(1));
User Programs
Senergy
1964
writer.WriteLine("
Son CP
= " + SonCp(1));
writer.WriteLine("
Son Clay
= " + SonClay(1));
writer.WriteLine("
Den Matrix = " + DenMat(1));
writer.WriteLine("
Den Fluid = " + DenFluid(1));
writer.WriteLine("
Por Eq
= " + PorEq);
writer.WriteLine("
Den Clay
= " + DenClay(1));
writer.WriteLine("
Gr Clean
= " + GrClean(1));
writer.WriteLine("
Gr Clay
= " + GrClay(1));
writer.WriteLine("
Depth Interval");
writer.WriteLine("
Top = " + Depth(TopDepth) + "
Bottom = " + Depth(BottomDepth));
}
}
//
Save_Sw_Comments("Curve written by Interp Demo user program");
Save_Rwapp_Comments("Curve written by Interp Demo user program");
Save_Phi_Comments("Curve written by Interp Demo user program");
Save_Vcl_Comments("Curve written by Interp Demo user program");
Save_BVW_Comments("Curve written by Interp Demo user program");
Save_NetResFlg_Comments("Curve written by Interp Demo user
program");
Save_NetPayFlg_Comments("Curve written by Interp Demo user
program");
//Write_Well_Attribute("Location", "IP Test Location");
//string RwString = Read_Log_Attribute("Rw", 1);
//Write_Log_Attribute("Rw", RwString, 2);
}
// show any errors
catch (Exception e)
{
MessageBox.Show("Error occurred: " + e.ToString());
}
finally
{
// close the report file
if (writer != null)
{
writer.Flush();
writer.Close();
}
}
}
//
//
// Calculate the Pickett plot line end points
//
void CalculatePickett()
{
//
1965
Senergy
float Phi1, Phi2, Ro1, Ro2, xmc, Rwc;

//
// Calculate m amd Rw from end point lines
Phi1 = PPphi1(-1);
Phi2 = PPphi2(-1);
Ro1 = PPres1(-1);
Ro2 = PPres2(-1);
if (Phi1 != Phi2)
{
xmc = ( (Single)Math.Log10(Math.Max(Ro1,0.01f)) - (Single)Math.
Log10(Math.Max(Ro2,0.01f)) ) /
( (Single)Math.Log10(Math.Max(Phi2,0.001f)) - (Single)Math.
Log10(Math.Max(Phi1,0.001f)) );
}
else
{
xmc = xm(-1);
}
Rwc = Ro1 * (Single)Math.Pow(Phi1,xmc) / xa(-1);
Rwc = Math.Max(0.0001f,Math.Min(Rwc,100.0f));
//
// and therefore assume that the values to use for m and Rw are the
input normal parameters
//
if ( ( Math.Abs(Rwc-Rwpick(-1)) < 0.001f) && ( Math.Abs(xmc-Mpick(-1)) <
0.01f) )
{
Rwc = Rw(-1);
xmc = xm(-1);
Save_Mpick(-1,xmc);
//
Recalculate the line using the parameter values of m and Rw
and save
Ro1 = xa(-1) * Rwc * (Single)Math.Pow(Phi1,-xmc);
Ro2 = xa(-1) * Rwc * (Single)Math.Pow(Phi2,-xmc);
}
else
{
//
New values of m and Rw save these and also the pickett
defaults
Save_Rw(-1,Rwc);
Save_xm(-1,xmc);
Save_Mpick(-1,xmc);
}
//
}
//
User Programs
Senergy
1966
//
}
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The user 'Runtime Window' looks like the following:
The 'Load / Save Parameter Sets' button allows the user to manage the Parameter Sets. See
Parameter Set Management. The working Parameter Set for this user module will be : '
UsrProgInterp_Demo' and type 'UPInterp_Demo'. This can be seen in the Manage Zones /
Tops module.
1967
Senergy
The 'Zones' tab allows the user to create and edit the interpretation zones. This can also be done
on the interactive plot.
Clicking the 'New zone' button will display the following window.
To add a new zone, the user selects one of the old zones from the window. The user must click
on one of the three buttons 'Add Before', 'Add After', or 'Split Zone'. For the 'Split Zone' the
user must give the depth to split this zone. The 'Copy Zone #' box is used to select which zone
to copy the parameters from for the new zone to be created.
Once a new zone has been created, the user must select its depths in the parameter window in
User Programs
Senergy
1968
the 'Zone Depths' tab. Zones cannot overlap, but one can have a gap between zones.
The 'Delete Zone' button allows the deletion of one or more zones. Select the zones to delete,
and click OK.
The 'Parameters' tab allows the user to change any of the input parameters. Column edits are
possible by clicking in a column header. The header will turn green and then any changes to any
Clicking on the 'Print' button will display the following pop-up menu where the parameter listing
can be set to a text file or direct to a printer. If set to a text file the file name used will be the '
Parameter set name' with an extension of '.txt'.
An example of a listing is displayed below:

USER PROGRAM INTERP_DEMO PARAMETERS
Well :
Date :
B1
10/17/2008 11:35:02
Input Curves
Rt
: RDEEP
Gamma Ray
: GR
Density
: RHOB
Sonic
: DT
Output Curves
1969
Senergy
Porosity
: UPTest:Phi
Vclay
: UPTest:Vcl
Sw
: UPTest:Sw
Rw App
: UPTest:RwApp
BVW
: UPTest:BVW
Net Pay Flag
: UPTest:NetPay
Net Res Flag
: UPTest:NetRes
Zone number 1
Top : 2780.00
Zones Parameters
GR Clean
: 10.
Bottom :
3142.04
GR Clay
: 100.
Water Saturation Parameters

Sw Eq
: Archie
'a'
: 1.
'm'
: 1.28386
'n'
: 2.
Rw
: 0.2294
Res Clay
: 1.
m_? Shell
: Off
Porosity Parameters
Phi Eq
: Density
Son Matrix
: 55.7
Son Fluid
: 189.
Son CP
: 1.
Son Clay
: 100.
Den Fluid
: 1.
Den Clay
: 2.7
Den Mat
: 2.65
Cutoffs Parameters
Phi Cutoff
: 0.1
Sw Cutoff
: 0.5
Vcl Cuttoff
: 0.4
Summation Parameters
Net Pay
: 83.
Av_Phi Pay
: 0.1887
Av_Sw Pay
: 0.47377
Av_Vcl Pay
: 0.12999
Net Res
: 448.
Av_Phi Res
: 0.14777
Av_Sw Res
: 0.78591
Av_Vcl Res
: 0.1652
Hide Parameters
PickPlt Phi1
: 0.01
PickPlt Phi2
: 0.4
PickPlt Res1
: 84.78302
PickPlt Res2
: 0.74385
PickPlt m
: 1.28386
PickPlt Rw
: 0.2294
'Clicking' on the 'Make Plot' button will bring up the plot that has been set up with any interactive
lines. Right-mouse button 'clicking' in the tracks will display a sub-menu listing the options
User Programs
Senergy
available for the specific track such as displaying crossplots or histograms of curves.
1970
1971
Senergy
Every time the routine is run the text file created in the code will be output. The default directory
will be the actual user program directory. In this case the 'C:\Documents and
Settings\<username>\Local Settings\Application Data\IntPetro35
\UserPrograms\Interp_Demo' directory. The following is the result of this file:
From FORTRAN program

USER PROGRAM INTERP PARAMETERS
Well
: MinSolve Test
Company : PGL
Field
: Somewhere
KB Elev : 60ft
Input Curves
Rt
= ILDC
(OHMM
Gr
= SGR
(GAPI
Den
= RHOB
(G/C3
Son
= DTLN
(US/F
Output Curve
Phi
= UPTest:Phi(dec
Vcl
= UPTest:Vcl(dec
Sw
= UPTest:Sw (dec
Rwapp = UPTest:RwA(ohmm
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
User Programs
Senergy
BVW
= UPTest:BVW(dec
NetPay = UPTest:Net
NetRes = UPTest:Net
Input Parameters
a
=
1.
m
=
2.
n
=
2.
Rw
=
0.0885000005
Sw Eq
= Archie
Son Matrix =
55.7000008
Son Fluid =
189.
Son CP
=
1.
Son Clay
=
100.
Den Matrix =
2.6500001
Den Fluid =
1.
Por Eq
= Density
Den Clay
=
2.70000005
Gr Clean
=
10.
Gr Clay
=
100.
Depth Interval
Top =
7614.
Bottom =
8738.
From Pascal program

USER PROGRAM INTERP DEMO PARAMETERS
Well
: MinSolve Test
Company : PGL
Field
: Somewhere
KB Elev : 60ft
Input Curves
Rt
= ILDC(OHMM)
Gr
= SGR(GAPI)
Den
= RHOB(G/C3)
Son
= DTLN(US/F)
Output Curve
Phi
= UPTest:Phi(dec)
Vcl
= UPTest:Vcl(dec)
Sw
= UPTest:Sw(dec)
Rwapp = UPTest:RwApp(ohmm)
BVW
= UPTest:BVW(dec)
NetPay = UPTest:NetPay
NetRes = UPTest:NetRes
Input Parameters
a
=
1.000
m
=
1.284
n
=
2.000
Rw
=
0.229
Sw Eq
= Archie
Son Matrix =
55.700
Son Fluid = 189.000
Son CP
=
1.000
Son Clay
= 100.000
Den Matrix =
2.650
1972
1973
Den Fluid =
1.000
Por Eq
= Density
Den Clay
=
2.700
Gr Clean
=
10.000
Gr Clay
= 100.000
Depth Interval
Top = 7614.000
Bottom = 8738.000
From C++ program

Well
Company
Field
KB Elev
:
:
:
:
MinSolve Test
PGL
Somewhere
60ft
Input Curves
Rt
= ILDC (OHMM)
Gr
= SGR (GAPI)
Den
= RHOB (G/C3)
Son
= DTLN (US/F)
Output Curves
Phi
= UPTest:Phi (dec)
Vcl
= UPTest:Vcl (dec)
Sw
= UPTest:Sw (dec)
Rwapp = UPTest:RwApp (ohmm)
BVW
= UPTest:BVW (dec)
NetPay = UPTest:Phi
NetRes = UPTest:Phi
Input Parameters
a
= 1.000000
m
= 1.283862
n
= 2.000000
Rw
= 0.229396
Sw Eq
= Indonesian
Son Matrix = 55.700001
Son Fluid = 189.000000
Son CP
= 1.000000
Son Clay
= 100.000000
Den Matrix = 2.650000
Den Fluid = 1.000000
Por Eq
= Density
Den Clay
= 2.700000
Gr Clean
= 10.000000
Gr Clay
= 100.000000
Depth Interval
Top = 7773.500000
Bottom = 8738.000000
From VB .NET program
Senergy
User Programs
Senergy
Well
Company
Field
KB Elev
:
:
:
:
MinSolve Test
PGL
Somewhere
60ft
Input Curves
Rt
Gr
Den
Son
Output Curves
Phi
Vcl
Sw
BVW
Rwapp
NetPay Flg
NetRes Flg
=
=
=
=
ILDC (OHMM)
SGR (GAPI)
RHOB (G/C3)
DTLN (US/F)
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
UPTest:Phi (dec)
UPTest:Vcl (dec)
UPTest:Sw (dec)
UPTest:BVW (dec)
UPTest:RwApp (ohmm)
UPTest:NetPay
UPTest:NetRes
Input Parameters
a
= 01.0000
m
= 01.2839
n
= 02.0000
Rw
= 00.2294
Sw Eq
= Indonesian
Son Matrix = 55.7000
Son Fluid = 189.0000
Son CP
= 01.0000
Son Clay
= 100.0000
Den Matrix = 02.6500
Den Fluid = 01.0000
Por Eq
= Sonic
Den Clay
= 02.7000
Gr Clean
= 10.0000
Gr Clay
= 100.0000
Depth Interval
Top = 7614.0000
Bottom = 8738.0000
From C# .NET program

Well
Company
Field
KB Elev
:
:
:
:
MinSolve Test
PGL
Somewhere
60ft
Input Curves
Rt
= ILDC (OHMM)
Gr
= SGR (GAPI)
Den
= RHOB (G/C3)
1974
1975
Senergy
Son
= DTLN (US/F)
Output Curve
Phi
= UPTest:Phi (dec)
Vcl
= UPTest:Vcl (dec)
Sw
= UPTest:Sw (dec)
Rwapp = UPTest:RwApp (ohmm)
BVW
= UPTest:BVW (dec)
NetPay = UPTest:NetPay
NetRes = UPTest:NetRes
Input Parameters
a
= 1
m
= 2
n
= 2
Rw
= 0.0885
Sw Eq
= Archie
Son Matrix = 55.7
Son Fluid = 189
Son CP
= 1
Son Clay
= 100
Den Matrix = 2.65
Den Fluid = 1
Por Eq
= Density
Den Clay
= 2.7
Gr Clean
= 10
Gr Clay
= 100
Depth Interval
Top = 7780
Bottom = 8738
The differences between the listing is associated with how the languages handle strings.
Related Topics
User Programs
Example User Program 1: Interp-Demo
Example User Program 2: Differentiate
Example User Program 3: Normalize Array
Example User Program 4: Manage Well Header Info
16.5.2 Example User Program 2: Differentiate

The following example shows a user program created to find the 'first-derivative' of a curve. This
example shows how a curve can be accessed at multiple levels at the same time. The nonzonable option is being used ('Use Zones' box not 'checked').
User Programs
Senergy
1976
The input curve to differentiate is called 'Curve' in the code.

No 'Input Parameters' or 'Logic Flags' are used, so these tabs are left blank.
The 'Output Curve' is called 'Diff' in the code and no display defaults have been set for it.
The code for the program in Fortran is as follows. The code the user has to write is highlighted in
bold, blue colour.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------c
c
1977
Senergy
c
c
functions.
c
c
+ 2.
c
c
c
Vclay = (GR(INDEX) - GRclean()) / (GRclay() - GRclean())
c
c
defined
c
as input parameters. GR is the input curve.
c
an
c
input curve.
c
c
the
c
c
c
on
c the run window.
C
DO 100 INDEX = Index_Topdepth()+1 , Index_BottomDepth()
c
c write user code here
c
c Check for curve equal to zero
if (Curve(index-1) .eq. 0.0) then
Call Save_Diff(index,-999.0)
else
c Calculate the first derivative
Der = Curve(index) / Curve(index-1)
Call Save_Diff(index,Der);
endif
100 CONTINUE
c
RETURN
c
END
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The same code in Pascal.

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------unit UsersCode;
User Programs
Senergy
1978
interface
implementation
{User Code}
Var
index : Integer;
begin
for index := Topdepth+1 to BottomDepth do begin
{enter user code here}
{check for curve equal to zero}
if Curve(index-1) = 0.0 then
Save_Diff(index,-999)
else
{Calculate the first derivative}
Save_Diff(index,Curve(index)/Curve(index-1));
end;
end;
end.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The same code in C++

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------#include
#include
#include
#include
#include
<windows.h>
<stdio.h>
<stdlib.h>
"Functions.h"
<math.h>

{
void usercode_()
int index;
char *aString;
char *aUnits;
char aName[150];
FILE *Outfile;
for ( index = TopDepth() ; index < BottomDepth()-5 ; index++ ) {
//ENTER USER CODE HERE
//check for curve equal to zero
if ( Curve(index-1) == 0 ) {
1979

Save_Diff(index,-999); }
else {
//Calculate the first derivative
Save_Diff(index,Curve(index)/Curve(index-1));
Senergy
//END OF USER CODE

}
//Write to database who created these curves

sprintf(aString, "Curve written by User Program");
Save_Curve_Comments( aString );
Save_Diff_Comments( aString );
free( aString );
}
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The same code in VB

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Partial Public Class IPLink
Dim index As Integer
For index = Topdepth + 1 To BottomDepth
' Enter user code here
' Check for curve equal to zero
If Curve(index - 1) = 0.0 Then
Save_Diff(index, -999)
Else
' Calculate the first derivative
Save_Diff(index, Curve(index) / Curve(index - 1))
End If
Next
Save_Diff_Comments("Curve Written by User Program")
End Sub
End Class
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The same code for C#

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------using System;
User Programs
Senergy
1980

{
{
for (int index = Topdepth + 1; index <= BottomDepth; index++)
{
// Enter user code here
// Check for curve equal to zero
if (Curve(index - 1) = 0.0)
{
Save_Diff(index, -999);
}
else
{
// Calculate the first derivative
Save_Diff(index, Curve(index) / Curve(index - 1));
}
}
Save_Diff_Comments("Curve Written by User Program");
}
}
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The user runtime window looks like the following:
The 'Save Parameters' and 'Load Parameters' buttons allow the parameters and curve names to
be stored and reloaded at a later time.
Related Topics
User Programs
1981
Senergy
16.5.3 Example User Program 3: Normalize Array

This user program example takes an array input curve and normalizes the values in it to lie
between 0 and 1 and output the results to a new array curve. The non-zonable option is being
used. One input curve is created.
One 'Output Curve' is created and is set as an array curve of size 12 x 60 elements for each
normal depth sample. This output array is the same size as the input array that will be
normalized.
User Programs
Senergy
1982
bold, blue colour.

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------c
c
c
c
functions.
c
c
+ 2.
c
c
c
Vclay = (GR(INDEX) - GRclean()) / (GRclay() - GRclean())
c
defined
c
as input parameters. GR is the input curve.
c
an input curve.
c
c
the
c
c
c
on the run window.
C
c
c
find max and min values in array data
ValMax = -0.0000001
ValMin = 9999999999999.9
Do IX = 1, Array_InCrv_MaxX()
Do IY = 1, Array_InCrv_MaxY()
R = Array_InCrv(Index,Ix,Iy)
if (R .lt. ValMin .and. R .ne. -999.0)
c
ValMin = R
if (R .gt. ValMax .and. R .ne. -999.0)
c
ValMax = R
enddo
enddo
enddo
c
calculate the gain and shift to normalize
gain = 1.0 / (Valmax - Valmin)
shift = - gain * Valmin
c
output new array with normalized values
Do IX = 1, Array_InCrv_MaxX()
Do IY = 1, Array_InCrv_MaxY()
1983
Senergy
R = Array_InCrv(Index,Ix,Iy) * Gain + shift

call Save_array_OutCrv(Index,Ix,Iy,R)
enddo
enddo
enddo
c
Call Save_OutCrv_Comments('Updated by Fortran User Program Array');
RETURN
c
END
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The same routine, written in Pascal follows. Again, the bold, blue script is what the user enters.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------nit UsersCode;
interface
implementation
{User Code}
Var
index, Ix, IY : Integer;
gain, shift, R, valmin, valmax : Single;
begin
{enter user code here}
{find max and min values in array data}
ValMax := -0.0000001;
ValMin := 9999999999999.9;
for index := Topdepth to BottomDepth do begin
for IX := 1 to Array_InCrv_MaxX do begin
for IY := 1 to Array_InCrv_MaxY do begin
R := Array_InCrv(Index,Ix,Iy);
if (R < ValMin) and (R <> -999.0) then
ValMin := R;
if (R > ValMax) and (R <> -999.0) then
ValMax := R;
end;
end;
end;
{calculate the gain and shift to normalize}
gain := 1.0 / (Valmax - Valmin);
shift := - gain * Valmin;
{output new array with normalized values}
for index := Topdepth to BottomDepth do begin
for IX := 1 to Array_InCrv_MaxX do begin
for IY := 1 to Array_InCrv_MaxY do begin
User Programs
Senergy
R := Array_InCrv(Index,Ix,Iy) * Gain + shift;

Save_array_OutCrv(Index,Ix,Iy,R);
end;
end;
end;
Save_OutCrv_Comments('Updated by Normalize Array User Prog');
end;
end.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The same routine, written in C follows. Again the bold, blue code is what the user enters.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------#include
#include
#include
#include
#include
<windows.h>
<stdio.h>
<stdlib.h>
"Functions.h"
<math.h>

{
void usercode_()
int index, IX, IY;

float gain, shift, R, ValMin, ValMax;
char *aString;
char *aUnits;
//ENTER USER CODE HERE
//find
ValMax
ValMin
for
max and min values in array data

= -0.0000001;
= 9999999999999.9;
(index = TopDepth(); index < BottomDepth(); index++) {
for (IX = 1; IX < Array_InCrv_MaxX(); IX++) {
for (IY = 1; IX < Array_InCrv_MaxY(); IX++) {
R = Array_InCrv(index,IX,IY);
if ((R < ValMin) && (R != -999.0))
ValMin = R;
if ((R > ValMax) && (R != -999.0))
ValMax = R;
}
}
}
//Calculate the gain and shift to normalize
gain = 1.0 / (ValMax - ValMin);
shift = - gain * ValMin;
//output new array with normalized values
for (index = TopDepth(); index < BottomDepth(); index++) {
1984
1985

for (IX = 1; IX < Array_InCrv_MaxX(); IX++) {
for (IY = 1; IY < Array_InCrv_MaxY(); IY++) {
R = Array_InCrv(index,IX,IY) * gain + shift;
Save_Array_OutCrv(index,IX,IY,R);
}
}
}
//END OF USER CODE

//Write to database who created these curves
sprintf(aString, "Updated by Normalize Array User Prog C++");
Save_OutCrv_Comments( aString );
free( aString );
}
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The same routine, written in VB follows.

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Partial Public Class IPLink
Dim index, Ix, IY As Integer
Dim gain, shift, R, valMin, valMax As Single
' Enter user code here
' Find max and min values in array data
valMax = -0.0000001
valMin = 9999999999999.9
For index = Topdepth To BottomDepth
For IX = 1 To Array_InCrv_MaxX
For IY = 1 To Array_InCrv_MaxY
R = Array_InCrv(Index, Ix, Iy)
If (R < ValMin) And (R <> -999.0) Then
ValMin = R
End If
If (R > ValMax) And (R <> -999.0) Then
ValMax = R
End If
Next
Next
Next
' Calculate the gain and shift to normalize
gain = 1.0 / (Valmax - Valmin)
shift = -gain * Valmin
' Output new array with normalized values
Senergy
User Programs
Senergy
For index = Topdepth To BottomDepth

For IX = 1 To Array_InCrv_MaxX
For IY = 1 To Array_InCrv_MaxY
R = Array_InCrv(Index, Ix, Iy) * Gain + shift
Save_array_OutCrv(Index, Ix, Iy, R)
Next
Next
Next
Save_OutCrv_Comments("Updated by Normalize Array User Prog")
End Sub
End Class
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The same routine, written in C# follows.

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------using System;

{
{
int index, ix, iy;
Single gain, shift, R, valMin, valMax;
// Enter user code here
// Find max and min values in array data
valMax = -0.0000001f;
valMin = 9999999999999.9f;
{
for (ix = 1; ix <= Array_InCrv_MaxX; ix++)
{
for (iy = 1; iy <= Array_InCrv_MaxY; iy++)
{
R = Array_InCrv(index, ix, iy);
if ((R < valMin) && (R != -999.0))
{
valMin = R;
}
if ((R > valMax) && (R != -999.0))
{
valMax = R;
}
}
}
1986
1987
Senergy
}
// Calculate the gain and shift to normalize
gain = (Single)1.0 / (valMax - valMin);
shift = -gain * valMin;
// Output new array with normalized values
{
for (ix = 1; ix <= Array_InCrv_MaxX; ix++)
{
for (iy = 1; iy <= Array_InCrv_MaxY; iy++)
{
R = Array_InCrv(index, ix, iy) * gain + shift;
Save_Array_OutCrv(index, ix, iy, R);
}
}
}
Save_OutCrv_Comments("Updated by Normalize Array User Prog");
}
}
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The user runtime window looks like the following:
A curve listing of the input and output data shows that the input array has values between '-600'
and '1200'. The output 'normalized array' has values between '0' and '1'.
Related Topics
User Programs
User Programs
Senergy
1988
16.5.4 Example User Program 4: Manage Well Header Info

This example shows how to write a user program that can fill in the 'Manage Well Header Info'
fields.
Create a new user program - in this case it is called 'Testing'.
bold, blue colour.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------c
c
c
c
functions.
c
c
+ 2.
c
To use trend curves as input parameters the depth INDEX must also be
passed into the function.
c
RW(INDEX), AA = RW(INDEX) + 2.
c
c
c
Vclay = (GR(INDEX) - GRclean(INDEX)) / (GRclay(INDEX) - GRclean(INDEX))
c
defined
c
as input parameters. GR is the input curve. If GRclean is enterd by the
use as a fixed value
c
then the INDEX parameter in GRclean(INDEX) is ignored.
c
an input curve.
c
c
the
c
c
c
on the run window.
C
c
CHARACTER*(120)
CountryAttName
CHARACTER*(120)
StateAttName
CHARACTER*(120)
DrillDepAttName
1989
CHARACTER*(120)
LogDepAttName
CHARACTER*(120)
BitSizeAttName
CHARACTER*(120)
Value
Senergy
CountryAttName = 'Country' // CHAR(0)

StateAttName = 'State' // CHAR(0)
DrillDepAttName = 'DrillDep' // CHAR(0)
LogDepAttName = 'LogDep' // CHAR(0)
BitSizeAttName = 'BitSize' // CHAR(0)
Value = 'USA' // CHAR(0)
CALL
Write_Well_Attribute(CountryAttName , Value)
Value = 'TX' // CHAR(0)

CALL
Write_Well_Attribute(StateAttName, Value)
Value = '5640' // CHAR(0)

CALL Write_Log_Attribute(DrillDepAttName, Value, 3);
Value = '4500' // CHAR(0)
CALL Write_Log_Attribute(LogDepAttName, Value, FIRST_AVAILABLE_LOG_RUN);
Value = '6.7' // CHAR(0)
CALL Write_Log_Attribute(BitSizeAttName, Value, LAST_AVAILABLE_LOG_RUN);
100 CONTINUE
c
RETURN
c
END
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Once the program has been compiled run the 'Testing' user program and then open the 'Manage
Well Header Info' to check that the correct fields have been filled in. NOTE: the 'Bit Size' field
has been filled in for Run 25 as this is the last available log run. It hasn't been shown on the
screenshot below due to space constraints.
User Programs
Senergy
Related Topics
1990
1991
User Programs
Senergy
Index
Index
-33D Crossplots
632
3D Parameter Viewer - 3D Parameter Display
671
3D Parameter Viewer - 3D View Definition
669
3D Parameter Viewer - Parameter Selection
667
3D Parameter Viewer - Well Selection
666
3D Parameter Viewer Module
664
-AAcoustic Image
413
Acoustic Image Plotting
491
Alphanumeric Crossplot Display
633
Annotations - Adding To A Log Plot
501
Apache Server Installation
1714
Array Curve Data
11, 13
Array Image Data - Array Data to Curves
412
Array Image Data - Convert Curves to Array Data
410
Array image Data - Create Acoustic Image
413
Array image Data - Create Electrical Image
416
Array image Data - Merge Images
424
Array Image Data Processing
410
Array Image Plotting
491
ASCII File Input
207
ASCII File Load
207
ASCII Load - Creating Array Curves
214
ASCII Load Module
212
ASCII Write
293
ASCII Write Module
293
Auto Save Module
37
1020
Automatic Depth Shift
370
-BBaker Atlas Environmental Corrections

1691
Baker Hughes Inteq Environmental Corrections
1700
Barker and Wood Fracture Gradient Model
1313,
1354
Baseline Shift
349
1992
Basic Log Analysis

735
1628
Batch LAS Load
250
Block Shift Curves
356
Build a Montage
711
BVW Function of Height
1433
-CCalculate Permeabilities
1628
Calculation - Basic Log Functions
1628
Calculation - Curve from Zones / Parameters
1670
Calculation - Curve Integration
1673
Calculation - Eastern European Resistivity Corrections
1444
Calculation - Environmental Corrections
1676
Calculation - Multi-Well Batch Operations
1553
Calculation - Multi-Well Change Parameters
1536
Calculation - Multi-Well Parameter Distribution
1542
Calculation - RW From SP
1652
Calculation - Temperature Gradient
1650
Calculation - True Vertical / True Stratigraphic
Thickness
1665
Calculation - True Vertical Depth
1654
Calculation - User Formula
1608
1606
Capillary Pressure - Contact Angle
1363
Capillary Pressure - Correction Parameters
1363
Capillary Pressure - Corrections to Pc Curves
1363
Capillary Pressure - Curves Set-Up
1363
Capillary Pressure - Data View / Edit
1363
Capillary Pressure - Interfacial Tension
1363
Capillary Pressure - Reservoir and Laboratory Fluid
Properties
1363
Capillary Pressure - Reservoir and Laboratory Rock
Properties
1363
Capillary Pressure - Reservoir Property Defaults
1363
Capillary Pressure Data Loader
264
1362, 1392
Capillary Pressure Model
1392
Capillary Pressure Model Type
1392
Capillary Pressure QC
1362
Capillary Pressure Set-Up and Correction Module
1363
Cased Hole - TDT Stand Alone
996
Cased Hole - TDT Time Lapse
1015
Cased Hole Log Interpretation
995
Cdit Curve Headers
150
1993
Change Interpretation Parameters in Multiple Wells

1536
Change Plot Depth Range
106
Clay Volume
733, 749
Clay Volume - Clavier Method
772
772
Clay Volume - Larionov Method
772
Clay Volume - Parameters
754
Clay Volume - Stieber Method
772
767
Clay Volume Module
749
Clay Volume Parameters - Bad Hole Logic
754
Clay Volume Parameters - Double Clay Indicators
754
Clay Volume Parameters - Link Clay Parameters
754
Clay Volume Parameters - Single Clay Indicators
754
Close Well
84
Cluster Analysis
1201
1716
1714
Convert Array Data to Curves
410
Convert Arrays to Curves
412
Convert Curves to Array Data
410
Convert Curves to Arrays
411
Convert surface oil and gas to downhole conditions
1628, 1642
Copying any Set Type
161
Copying Top Sets
172
Core Depth Shift
356
Create / Edit Lithology Curve Module
334
Create / Edit Point Curve Module
341
410
Create Acoustic Image Module
413
Create Average Curve
395
Create Curve / Array Curve Module
330
Create Curves From Parameters
1670
Create Curves From Zones
1670
410
Create Electrical Image Module
416
Create Global Sets
1791
Create Integrated Hole Volume Curve
1673
Create Integrated Sonic Curve
1673
Create Integrated Sonic Pip Curve
1673
Create New Curve
190, 404
Create New Well
71
Create Point Curve
341
Creating TVD Sets

168
Creating Well Lists
69
Crossplot - 3D Crossplots
632
Crossplot - Color-Filled Cells
633
Crossplot - Creating Crossplot Areas
605
Crossplot - Creating Crossplot Overlay Lines
608
Crossplot - Creating Regression Lines
616
Crossplot - Crossplot Options Tab
593
Crossplot - Default Crossplot Formats
595
Crossplot - Expand Array Curves Option
589
Crossplot - Frequency Crossplot
589
Crossplot - Frequency Crossplot Module
633
Crossplot - MultiWell Crossplot
649
Crossplot - Plotting Pressures
637
Crossplot - Pressure Gradient Plots
637
Crossplot - User-Defined Line
624
Crossplot - Viewing Regression Line Equations
616
Crossplot Module
584
Crossplot Overlay Set Up
1822
Crossplot Overlay Set Up File
1833
Cumulative Curve Style
456
Curve Alias Defaults
1829
Curve Aliasing
1806
Curve and Set Names
132
Curve Average Module
395
Curve Edit
345
Curve Filter Module
393
Curve from Zones / Parameters Module
1670
Curve Headers
150
Curve Integration Module
1673
Curve List Filtering
132
Curve Listing / Curve Edit Module
137
Curve Management
115
Curve Management - Edit / List Multi-Well Sets
1521
Curve Management - Manage Curve Headers
150
Curve Management - Manage Curve Sets
116
Curve Management - Manage Zones / Tops
161
Curve Normalization in Histogram Module
574
Curve Rescale Module
392
Curve Sets - Database Interface
13
Curve Sets - Manage Curve Sets
116
Curve Statistics
145, 1562
Curve System Defaults
1822, 1825
Curve Type
153
Curve Type Defaults
1822, 1827
Curves Splice
384
Curves to Array Data Module
411
Index
Index
Cutoff and Summation
733
Cutoff and Summation Module
889
Cutoff and Summation Reports
895
Cutoff and Summations Equations and Methodology
925
Cutoff and Summations Interactive Plot
922
Cutoff and Summations Parameters
899
Cutoff Sensitivity
931
Cutoff Sensitivity Calculation
931
Cutoff Sensitivity Report
933
Cutoffs and Summation Multi-well
1589
-DDaines Fracture Gradient model

1326
Data Editing
327
Data Editing - Create / Edit Lithology Curve
334
Data Editing - Create / Edit Point Curve
341
Data Editing - Create Curve / Array Curve
330
Data Editing - Curve Average
395
Data Editing - Curve Filter
393
Data Editing - Curve Rescale
392
Data Editing - Fill Data Gaps
390
Data Editing - Interactive Baseline Shift
349
Data Editing - Interactive Block Depth Shift
375
Data Editing - Interactive Curve Edit
345
Data Editing - Interactive Curve Splice
379
Data Editing - Interactive Depth Shift
356
Data Editing - Interactive Trend / Square Curve
352
Data Editing - Splice Curves
384
Data Gaps
390
Data Listing
137
Data Loading
203
Data Loading - ASCII Load Module
207
Data Loading - DBase4 Load
248
Data Loading - DLIS Load
236
Data Loading - Interval Loader
257
Data Loading - LAS / LBS Load
218
Data Loading - LAS Batch Load
250
Data Loading - LIS Load
228
Data Loading - Load Well Attributes
271
Data Loading - Real Time Data Loader
279
Data Loading - Schlumberger Datalink2 Connector
279
Data Loading - WITSML Data Loader
279
Data Saving
291
Data Saving - ASCII Write
293
Data Saving - DBase4 Write
321
1994
Data Saving - LAS Write

300
Data Saving - LIS Write
307
Data Saving - Save Zone Tops
323
Data Viewing
428
Database Interface
11
DataLink2 Adapters
279
Date
42, 45, 48, 53, 56, 59, 61
Date Time Curves
42, 45, 48, 53, 56, 59, 61
Date Time Wells
42, 45, 48, 53, 56, 59, 61
DBase4 Load Module
248
DBase4 Write Module
321
Default Curve Units
1818
Default Log and Screen Units
1818
Default Units
1818
104
Delete Parameter Sets Module
730
Delete Well from Database
86
Deleting Areas on a crossplot
605
Deleting Zone Sets
176
Density Corrections
1679
Density Estimation
1232
Density Estimation Module
1237
Depth Index
473
Depth Sets
140
Depth Shift Curves
356
Depth Shift Wizard
363
Depth Ticks
473
Derivative
1473, 1476, 1478, 1479, 1480, 1481,
1482, 1484, 1485, 1487, 1489, 1490, 1493, 1495,
1496, 1500, 1505, 1507, 1509
Derivative Analyis
1473, 1476, 1478, 1479, 1480,
1481, 1482, 1484, 1485, 1487, 1489, 1490, 1493,
1495, 1496, 1500, 1505, 1507, 1509
Derivatives
1637
Dip Symbols
1796
DLIS File Load
236
DLIS Load Masks
236
Drawdown
1473, 1476, 1478, 1479, 1480, 1481,
1482, 1484, 1485, 1487, 1489, 1490, 1493, 1495,
1496, 1500, 1505, 1507, 1509
Drawdown Analysis
1473, 1476, 1478, 1479, 1480,
1481, 1482, 1484, 1485, 1487, 1489, 1490, 1493,
1495, 1496, 1500, 1505, 1507, 1509
-EEastern European Resisitivity Corrections

1445
Eastern European Resisitivity Corrections - Multiple
Lateral Curve Corrections
1449
1995
Eastern European Resisitivity Corrections - Normal

Curve Corrections
1446
Eastern European Resistivity Corrections Module
1444
Eastern European Resistivity Log Correction - Theory
1453
Eaton Fracture Gradient Model
1350
Eaton Pore Pressure Model
1318
Edit / Load Picture Curve Data Module
197, 398
Edit / Load Text Curve Data Module
190, 404
Edit Crossplot Overlay Set Up File
1833
Edit Curve
345
1829
Edit Curve Sets
116
Edit Default Lithology Module
1802
Edit Dip Symbols Module
1796
Edit Global Sets Module
1791
Edit Lithology Curve
334
1831
1834
Edit Multi-Well Sets
1521
Edit Multi-Well Well Header Information
1517
Edit Neutron Tool Types Set Up File
1836
Edit Palettes Module
1798
Edit Picture Curve Data
197, 398
Edit Picture Curve Headers Module
200, 401
Edit Point Curve
341
Edit Shading Types
1788
Edit Square Curve
352
Edit Text Curve Headers Module
190, 404
Edit Trend Curve
352
Edit Well Header Info
88
Edit Zone Colors Module
1794
Editing a Parameter Set
177
Editing Curve Properties
151
684, 1571
Editing Well Properties
89
Electrical Image
416
Electrical Image Plotting
491
1676, 1677, 1679, 1681,
1684
Environmental Corrections - Anadrill
1698
Environmental Corrections - Baker Atlas
1691
Environmental Corrections - Baker Hughes Inteq
1700
Environmental Corrections - Halliburton
1694
Environmental Corrections - Schlumberger
1687
Environmental Corrections - Sperry Sun
1703
Environmental Corrections - Weatherford

1706
29
Exponential Curve Fitting Function
1392
External Database Connections
1716
External Database Links
1714
-FFading Parameter Screens

1872
File - Auto Save
37
File - Delete Well from Database
86
File - Explore Database Folder
29
File - Load Wells from Database
67
File - New Database
20
File - Open Database
23
File - Printer Setup
39
File - Reset Current Well
87
File - Save All Wells to Database
35
File - Save Current Well to Database As
30, 78
File - Set Default File Location
27
File - Well Map
701
File Location
27
Fill Data Gaps Module
390
Filter Curve
393
Final Curves
155
Finding IP Version Number
5
Fitting An External Log Sw Versus Height Function
1442
Fluid Properties
1239
Fluid Substitution
1232
Fluid Substitution Equations and Methodology
1254
Fluid Substitution Module
1239
Formation Test Analysis
1473, 1476, 1478, 1479,
1480, 1481, 1482, 1484, 1485, 1487, 1489, 1490,
1493, 1495, 1496, 1500, 1505, 1507, 1509
Formation Testing
1473, 1476, 1478, 1479, 1480,
1481, 1482, 1484, 1485, 1487, 1489, 1490, 1493,
1495, 1496, 1500, 1505, 1507, 1509
FORTRAN Guide
1922
Fracture Gradient
1313
1350
Frequency Crossplot Menu
633
Fuzzy Logic Equations and Methodology
1171
Fuzzy Logic Module
1154
-GGamma Ray Corrections

1677
Gassmann Fluid and Matrix Properties
Index
1243
Index
Generate Pip Curve
1673
GEOLOG Database Interface
1749
-HHalliburton Environmental Corrections

1694
Histogram - Cumulative Curve Set
553
Histogram Discriminator Sets
555
Histogram Module
548
Histogram Options
556
Histogram Scales
549
Horizontal Log Plot
544
How to save wells from one project to another project
32
HTTP Connection
1714
Hyperbola Curve Fitting Function
1398
1996
IP Proprietary Security - Update Protection Options

1843
IP Proprietary Security - View Protection Options
1848
IP Proprietary Security System
1837
IP User Forum
5
Irregular Sets
116
-L-
Lambda Curve Fitting Function

1398
LAS / LBS Load Module
218
LAS Batch Load Module
250
LAS Load - Mask Files
253
LAS Write Module
300
LAS3 Load
224
Lateral Resistivity Log Corrections
1446
LBS File Load
218
Leverett J Function Porosity Modifier
1396
LIS Load Module
228
IDEAL Data Link
279
LIS Write Module
307
Image Logs
386, 491
List Curve Headers
150
Import from GEOLOG Database
1749
List
Curve
Sets
116
Importing Zones / Tops from External Spreadsheet
164
List Multi-Well Sets
1521
Increasing Point Size in Crossplots
589
Listing Core Analysis Array Data
144
Integrate Curve Values
1674
Lithology Curve
334
Integrate Hole Volume
1673
Lithology Legend File
340
Integrate Sonic Curve
1674
Load Core Analysis Data as Arrays
330
Interactive Baseline Shift Module
349
Load Picture Curve Data
197, 398
Interactive Block Depth Shift Module
375
Load Well Attributes
271
612
Load Well Cultural Data to IP
271
Interactive Curve Edit Module
345
67
Interactive Curve Splice Module
379
Loading ASCII Data to Array Curves
214
Interactive Depth Shift Module
356
Loading ASCII files
207
386
Loading Curves from External Database Well
1716
Interactive Trend / Square Curve Module
352
Loading Multiple LAS Files
250
Interpretation - Clay Volume
749
Loading survey data into TVD calculator module
1658
Interpretation - Cutoff and Summation
889
Interpretation - Porosity and Water Saturation
777 Loading Tops From An External Database Well
1719
Interval Loader
257
Locking Zones
759
Interval Loader - Creating Array Curves
257
Log Environmental Corrections
1676
Interval Loader - Loading into Array Curves
257
Log
Environmental
Corrections
Baker
Atlas
1691
Interval Loader Module
257
IP Proprietary Security - Install and Activate Protection Log Environmental Corrections - Baker Hughes INTEQ
1700
1839
Log
Environmental Corrections - Halliburton
1694
IP Proprietary Security - Transfer Protection
1844
1687
IP Proprietary Security - Uninstall Protection
1844 Log Environmental Corrections - Schlumberger
Log Environmental Corrections - Sperry Sun
1703
-I-
1997
Log Environmental Corrections - Weatherford/Reeves

1706
Log Plot - Annotations
501
Log Plot - Change Track Header Colour
453
Log Plot - Copy Depth Value to Clipboard
540
Log Plot - Copy Track
444
Log Plot - Cumulative Curve Style
456
Log Plot - Default Plot Depths
540
Log Plot - Delete Track
444
Log Plot - Depth Grid Datum Curve
452
Log Plot - Depth Grid Line and Number Spacing
452
Log Plot - Depth labels
430, 470, 473
Log Plot - Depth Number Spacing
452, 470
Log Plot - Depth Ticks
430, 473
Log Plot - Dip Image Plotting
499
Log Plot - Duplicate Track
443
Log Plot - Edit Plot Depths
540
Log Plot - Edit Track Header
453
Log Plot - Expand Track
443
Log Plot - Generic Plot Format
446
Log Plot - Hide Track
443
Log Plot - New Track
443
Log Plot - Numeric Curve Style
470
Log Plot - Paste Track
443
Log Plot - Pictures
489
Log Plot - Plot Formats
446
Log Plot - Plot Output
510
Log Plot - Plotting Images
491
Log Plot - Plotting NMR Waveforms
485
Log Plot - Show / Hide Curves
450
Log Plot - Show Track Headers
453
Log Plot - Track Border Width
453
Log Plot - Track Names
450
Log Plot - Track Numbers
450
Log Plot - Variable Shading Options
476
Log Plot - Waveform Plotting
485
Log Plot - Zones
464
Log Plot Output - CGM File Output
513
Log Plot Output - Customising Log Plot Header
524
Log Plot Output - Hide Track Scales
517
Log Plot Output - Plot Calibration
519
Log Plot Output - Plot Comment With Well Name
518
Log Plot Output - Plot Footer
530
Log Plot Output - Plot Header - Full
524
Log Plot Output - Plot Header - Minimum
524
Log Plot Output - Plot Header - None
523
Log Plot Output - Plot Header - Standard
523
Log Plot Output - Plot Header Options

523
Log Plot Output - Plot Output to File
512
Log Plot Output - Plot Output to Printer
511
Log Plot Output - Plot Scales at Bottom of Log
517
Log Plot Output - Plot Shading Description in Header
517
Log Plot Output - Plot Size
512
Log Plot Output - Plot Track Header Titles
516
Log Plot Output - Plotting Advanced Options
519
Log Plot Output - Setting Multiple Depth Ranges for
Plotting
515
Log Plot Output - Setting Plot Depth Range
516
Log Saturation Versus Height Relationships
1362
Log Sw As A Function of Height
1433
Log Sw Height Functions
1433
Log Sw Height Input Curves
1433
-MManage Curve Headers Module

150
Manage Curve Sets Module
116
Manage Well Header Information
88
Manage Zone / Tops - Creating TVD Sets
168
Manage Zone / Tops - Copying any Set type
179
Manage Zone / Tops - Copying Top Sets
172
Manage Zone / Tops - Creating a New Zone
162
Manage Zone / Tops - Deleting Zone / Tops
176
Manage Zone / Tops - Edit Zones / Tops
173
Manage Zone / Tops - Multi-Well Zone / Tops
1529
Manage Zones / Tops - Editing a Parameter Set
177
Manage Zones / Tops - Setting Zone Colors
187
Manage Zones / Tops Module
161
Managing Block Depth Shifts
378
Managing Interactive Depth Shifts
362
Matthews and Kelly Fracture Gradient Model
1319
Max Version
1838
Merge Images Module
424
Merging IP databases
30, 78
Mineral Solver
1023
Mineral Solver - Equations and Methodology
1080
Mineral Solver - Interactive Crossplots
1067
Mineral Solver - Invasion Factor
1080
Mineral Solver - Limit Equations
1080
Mineral Solver - Output Equations
1080
1074
Mineral Solver Combined Model Results
1069
Index
Index
Mineral Solver Dry Weight to Volume Percent
Conversion
1029
Mineral Solver Equations
1080
Mineral Solver Interactive Plot
1062
Mineral Solver Methodology
1080
Mineral Solver Mineral Equation Defaults
1832
Mineral Solver Mineral System Defaults
1831
Mineral Solver Mixings
1060
Mineral Solver Module
1026
Mineral Solver Parameters
1035
MinSolve Mineral Equation Defaults
1822
MinSolve Mineral System Defaults
1822
Modifying Image Log Palettes
386, 494
Montage Builder Application
711
Monte Carlo Batch Module
1146
Monte Carlo Defaults
1822, 1834
Monte Carlo Eror Analysis - Clay Volume Tab
1126
Monte Carlo Eror Analysis - Cutoff Tab
1126
Monte Carlo Eror Analysis - Dependencies Tab
1131
Monte Carlo Eror Analysis - Histo's Tab
1140
Monte Carlo Eror Analysis - Input Curves Tab
1129
Monte Carlo Eror Analysis - Mineral Solver Tab
1127
Monte Carlo Eror Analysis - Models Tab
1124
Monte Carlo Eror Analysis - Output Tab
1133
Monte Carlo Eror Analysis - Porosity Sw Tab
1126
Monte Carlo Eror Analysis - Tornado Plot Tab
1144
Monte Carlo Eror Analysis - Xplot's Tab
1142
Monte Carlo Error Analysis
1023
Monte Carlo Error Analysis Module
1116
Multiple Linear Regression Module
1175
Multi-Well Manage Well Headers
1517
Multi-Well Batch Operations
1553
Multi-Well Change Parameters Module
1536
Multi-Well Correlation View
679, 1566
Multi-Well Correlation Viewer Module
678
Multi-Well Curve Sets Module
1521
Multi-Well Curve Statistics Module
1562
Multi-Well Cutoffs and Summation
1589
Multi-Well Manage Multi-Well Headers
1517
1542
-NNeural Networks
1184
Neutron Corrections
1681
Neutron Tool Type Set Up
1836
1998
Neutron Tool Types Set Up / System Defaults

1822
New Database
20
New User Program
1902
New User Program - Input Curves Tab
1902
New User Program - Input Logic Flags Tab
1907
New User Program - Input Parameters Tab
1904
New User Program - Output Curves Tab
1903
New User Program - Plot Setup Tab
1909
New User Program - Tabs Set Up Tab
1908
NMR Interpretation
1023
NMR Interpretation - NMR Equations
982
NMR Interpretation Module
942
Normal and Lateral Log Corrections
1446
Normal Resisitvity Log Corrections
1449
Normalization
574
Numeric Curve Display Options
470
-OODM Database Interface

1769
Open Database
23
Open Database Folder
29
OpenSpirit Interface
1778
OpenWorks Database Interface
1760
Options - Irregular Set Depth Tolerances
1872
Options - Log Attribute Mappings
1863
Options - Log Attributes
1860
Options - Tabbed Workareas
1872
Options - Well Attributes
1857
Options - Well Attributes Mappings
1862
Output Device
39
Overburden Gradient Calculation Module
1309
Overburden Gradient Curves - Creating
1358
Overlays
608
-PPalettes Editing
1798
Parameter Set - Saving to External File
719
Parameter Set - Saving to IP Database
726
Parameter Set Distribution
1542
Parameter Sets
717
PathFinder Environmental Corrections
1709
PC Configuration for External Database Links
1714
PETCOM database
1743
PGLWDLink Package
1714
Pickett Plot
646
Picking Dips
386
1999
Picture Curve
197, 398
Picture Curve Headers
200, 401
Picture Curves
196, 397
Picture Viewer
493
Plot Footer
530
Plot Header - Full
524
Plot Header - Minimum
524
Plot Header - None
523
Plot Header - Standard
523
Plot Header Options
524
Plot Header Remarks
526
Plot Output to File
512
Plot Output to Printer
511
Plot Range Editor
106
Plot Size
512
Plotting a Lithology Legend
334
Plotting Waveforms
485
Plotting Zone Tracks
464
Point Curve
341
Pore and Fracture Gradient Calculations Module
1313
Pore Pressure - Editing Normal Compaction Trend
(NCT) Lines
1339
Pore Pressure - Editing Shale Intervals
1341
Pore Pressure - Overburden Gradient Calculation
Module
1309
1023, 1306
Pore Pressure Model Interactive Plot
1336
Pore Pressure Module - Fracture Gradient Models
1350
Pore Pressure Module - Fracture Gradient References
1359
Pore Pressure Module - Overburden Gradient Curves
1358
Pore Pressure Module - Pore Pressure References
1359
Pore Pressure Module - Viewing Results
1344
Porosity & Height Function 1
1392, 1433
793
Porosity and Sw Interactive Plot - Lithology Track
806
Porosity and Sw Interactive Plot - Matrix Track
803
Porosity and Sw Interactive Plot - Porosity Input Track
797
Porosity and Sw Interactive Plot - Porosity Track
805
Porosity and Sw Interactive Plot - Salininty Track
799
Porosity and Sw Interactive Plot - Water Saturation
Track
805
Porosity and Sw Interactive Plot - Zone Track

795
814
Porosity and Water Saturation - Coal and Salt Logic
863
Porosity and Water Saturation - Density Porosity
Model
863
Porosity and Water Saturation - Equations and
Methodology
863
Porosity and Water Saturation - Flushed Zone Sxo
Calculations
880
Porosity and Water Saturation - Hydrocarbon Apparent
Density
865
Porosity and Water Saturation - Hydrocarbon
Hydrogen Index
865
Porosity and Water Saturation - Neutron Density
Porosity Model
865
Porosity and Water Saturation - Neutron Porosity
Model
865
Porosity and Water Saturation - Neutron Sonic
Porosity Model
872
Porosity and Water Saturation - Neutron Tool Lookup
Tables
867
Porosity and Water Saturation - Pass Through
Porosity Model
872
Porosity and Water Saturation - PHIFLAG Logic
885
Porosity and Water Saturation - Porosity Limit Shaly
Zones and Bad Hole
874
Porosity and Water Saturation - Porosity Limits / Bad
Hole Logic
874
Porosity and Water Saturation - Sonic Porosity Model
870
Porosity and Water Saturation - Total Porosity and
Bound Water Saturation
874
Porosity and Water Saturation - TPL Water
Calculation
864
Porosity and Water Saturation - U - Multi-Mineral
Analysis
875
Porosity and Water Saturation - Variable Clay Volume
Logic
872
Porosity and Water Saturation - Variable Hydrocarbon
Density Logic
871
Porosity and Water Saturation - Variable 'm'
883
Porosity and Water Saturation - Variable Matrix
Density logic
871
Porosity and Water Saturation - Water Saturation
Equations
877
Porosity and Water Saturation Interpretation
733
Porosity and Water Saturation Module
777
Pressure Gradients
637
Principle Component Analysis
1223
Index
Index
Print Parameter Set Module
728
Printer Setup
39
Printing Cutoff Results
914
Printing Summation Results
914
Probabilistic Log Analysis
1026
Pulsed Neutron Interpretation
996
PuTTY Server Installation
1714
2000
Save DBase4 Data

321
Save LAS data
300
Save LIS data
307
Save Parameter Set to File Module
725
Save Parameter Sets to External Disk Files
725
Save Zone Tops Module
323
Saving Old Databases to New Versions IP
36
Schlumberger Environmental Corrections
1687
Secure Shell Protocol
1714
Select Current Well
73
Radial
1473, 1476, 1478, 1479, 1480, 1481, 1482, Select Text Curve
190, 404
1484, 1485, 1487, 1489, 1490, 1493, 1495, 1496,
Selecting Areas in Crossplots
605
1500, 1505, 1507, 1509
Sensitivity
931, 933
Radial Analysis
1473, 1476, 1478, 1479, 1480,
Sensitivity Analysis
931
1481, 1482, 1484, 1485, 1487, 1489, 1490, 1493,
27
1495, 1496, 1500, 1505, 1507, 1509
Set Default Units
1818
Random Functions
1608
Set
Dictionary
119
Read / Write Via OpenSpirit Module
1778
Setting Zone Colours
187
Read from / Write to GEOLOG DB
1749
Shading
Types
Module
1788
Read from ODM Database
1769
Shear Sonic QC
1232
Read From OpenWorks Database
1760
Shear
Sonic
QC
/
Create
Module
1233
Read/ Write to PETCOM Database Module
1743
Shift Baseline Operation
349
Real Time Data Link
279
Sigma Calculation
996, 1643
Regression Equations - Saturation Height Module
Simple
Log
Interpretation
735
1439
Special Interpretation
1023
Regression Lines - Log Plots
616
Special
Interpretation
Density
Estimation
1232,
Renaming Curves
151
1237
Rescale Curves
392
Special Interpretation - Fluid Substitution
1232,
Reset Current Well
87
1239
Resistivity Corrections
1684
Special Interpretation - Fuzzy Logic
1154
Resistivity Temperature Conversion
1642
Special Interpretation - Fuzzy Logic Equations and
Rock Physics
1023, 1232
Methodology
1171
Rock Physics - Density Estimation
1237
Special Interpretation - Mineral Solver
1026
Rock Physics - Fluid Substitution
1239
Special Interpretation - Monte Carlo Batch
1146
Rock Physics - Shear Sonic QC / Create
1233
Special Interpretation - Monte Carlo Error Analysis
Rock Quality Index Method - Saturation Height
1116
Functions
1438
Special Interpretation - Multiple Linear Regression
Running Interpretation Modules in Batch Mode
1553 1175
Running User Formulae in Batch Mode
1553
Special Interpretation - NMR Interpretation
942
Running User Programs in Batch Mode
1553
Special Interpretation - Overburden Gradient
Russian Resistivity Log Corrections
1444
Calculation
1309
RW From SP Module
1652
Special Interpretation - Pore and Fracture Gradient
Calculations
1313
Special Interpretation - Pore Pressure Calculations
1306
Special Interpretation - Rock Physics
1232
Saturation Modelling Tools
1362
Special Interpretation - Shear Sonic QC
1232, 1233
35
Sperry
Sun
Environmental
Corrections
1703
Save ASCII data
293
-R-
-S-
Save Current Well to Database As
30, 78
2001
Spherical
1473, 1476, 1478, 1479, 1480, 1481,
1482, 1484, 1485, 1487, 1489, 1490, 1493, 1495,
1496, 1500, 1505, 1507, 1509
Spherical Analysis
1473, 1476, 1478, 1479, 1480,
1481, 1482, 1484, 1485, 1487, 1489, 1490, 1493,
1495, 1496, 1500, 1505, 1507, 1509
Splice Curves Module
384
SSH Connection
1714
Statistical Curve Prediction
1023, 1154
Summation
889
System Defaults
1822
-TTabbed Workareas
1872
Tadpole Symbols on Log Plots
484
Take Notes
112
TDT Stand Alone Module
996
TDT Time Lapse Module
1015
Temperature Gradient Module
1650
Text Curves
189, 403
Text Editor
112
Time
42, 45, 48, 53, 56, 59, 61
Time Curves
42, 45, 48, 53, 56, 59, 61
Time Lapse
1015
Time of Day
42, 45, 48, 53, 56, 59, 61
Tools
1787
Tools - Curve Type Defaults
1827
Tools - Edit Crossplot Overlay Set Up File
1833
Tools - Edit Curve Alias Defaults
1829
Tools - Edit Curve System Defaults
1825
Tools - Edit Default Lithology
1802
Tools - Edit Dip Symbols
1796
Tools - Edit Global Sets
1791
Tools - Edit Monte Carlo Defaults
1834
Tools - Edit Neutron Tool Types Set Up File
1836
Tools - Edit Palettes
1798
Tools - Edit Unit Conversions Defaults
1835
Tools - Edit Zone Colors
1794
Tools - Mineral Solver Mineral Equation Defaults
1832
Tools - Set Default Units
1818
Tools - Shading Types
1788
Tools - System Defaults
1822
Tools- Edit Mineral Solver Mineral System Defaults
1831
Tops Sets
161
True Stratigraphic Thickness Calculation
1665
True Vertical / True Stratigraphic Thickness Module

1665
True Vertical Depth Module
1654
True Vertical Thickness Calculation
1665
TVD Calculations
1654
-UUndo / Redo
558, 613, 770, 924
Unit Conversion Defaults
1822
Unit Conversions Defaults
1835
Unix System Configuration
1714
Upgrading Licences
1838
User Define Log Plot Header
524, 711
User Formula Module
1608
User Forum
5
User Program Code
1915
User Program Module - New User Program
1902
User Programs Module
1896
User Programs Module - FORTRAN Guide
1922
User Programs Options
1898
User-Defined Formula
1608
User-Defined Line in Crossplot Module
624
-VVariable Density Log Plotting

481
VDL Shading
481
View - 3D Parameter Viewer
664
View - Crossplots
584
View - Curve and Set Names
132
View - Curve Listing / Curve Edit
137
View - Curve Statistics
145
View - Histogram
548
View - Log Plot
430
View - Multi-Well Correlation Viewer
678
View - Multi-Well Curve Statistics
1562
View Core Photographs
196, 397
View Graphics Files
196, 397
-WWeatherford Environmental Corrections

Web Client Connection
1714
Well Depths Editor
129
Well Header Information
88
Well Lists
69
Well Management
41
Index
1706
Index
Well Management - Close Well
84
Well Management - Create New Well
71
Well Management - Delete Parameter Sets
104
Well Management - Manage Well Header Information
88
Well Management - Plot Range Editor
106
Well Management - Select Well to Display
73
Well Management - Take Notes
112
Well Map
701, 1654
WITSML Data Link
279
Write to GEOLOG Database
1749
Write to ODM Database
1769
Write to PETCOM Database
1743
Write Via OpenSpirit
1778
-ZZone Colors
1794
Zone Track Display Options
Zones Sets
161
464
2002

IP Help Manual PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

IP Help Manual PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Interactive

Interactive Petrophysics 2010 Senergy Ltd

Senergy Software Ltd.

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Interactive Petrophysics 2010 Senergy Ltd

DISCLAIMER REGARDING THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE

Section 1 Getting Help for Interactive

Section 2 Database Management

Section 3 Well Management

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Section 4 Curve Management

Section 5 Load Data from an External

Section 6 Save Data to an External File

Section 7 Working with Curve Data

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Section 8 View Well and Curve Data

Section 9 Parameter Set Management

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Section 11 Advanced Interpretation

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Section 12 Working with Multiple Wells

Section 13 Calculation and Correction

Section 14 Connecting to External

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Section 16 User Programs

Getting Help for Interactive Petrophysics v3.6

Getting Help for Interactive Petrophysics v3.6

About Interactive Petrophysics

Getting Help for Interactive Petrophysics v3.6 :

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Click Close the Close the About Interactive Petrophysics Dialog.

Getting Help for Interactive Petrophysics v3.6 :

Getting Help for Interactive Petrophysics v3.6

Using the Online Help

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Getting Help for Interactive Petrophysics v3.6

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Getting Program Updates

Download an Update from the Senergy Website

Use the Automatically Check for Updates Feature

Getting Help for Interactive Petrophysics v3.6

2. Click Get Updates to download the latest Program Update (IP_Update.exe).

Click Yes to download the latest Program Update

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Frequently Asked Questions

........................... add FAQ's

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

The Interactive Petrophysics (IP) 'Database' is a way of organizing multiple wells as an

IP Users and Database Files

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

each event, date, time, user, module and type.

Array Curve Data

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Starting Interactive Petrophysics

Section 2.1 Database Management : Starting Interactive Petrophysics

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Section 2.1 Database Management : Starting Interactive Petrophysics

Section 2.1 Database Management : Starting Interactive Petrophysics

Interactive Petrophysics V3.6 Online Help

Save All Wells to Database

Section 2.1 Database Management : Starting Interactive Petrophysics

Create a New Database